language-pack-gnome-sl-base/0000755000000000000000000000000012321560613013071 5ustar language-pack-gnome-sl-base/COPYING0000644000000000000000000004310312321560613014125 0ustar GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/0000755000000000000000000000000012321560613014002 5ustar language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/static.tar0000644000000000000000002515400012321556574016023 0ustar usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/effects-apply.page0000644000373100047300000000373212265343462024351 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Dodajanje zabavnih učinkov vašim fotografijam in videom kot je obarvanost zeleno ali popačenje slike kot v zrcalu iz zabaviščnega parka. Uveljavitev učinkov na fotografije in videoposnetke

Za svoje fotografije lahko uveljavite zabavne, zanimive učinke:

Kliknite Učinki.

Izberite učinek, ki ga želite uporabiti s klikom na eno od možnosti.

Če želite, lahko izberete več učinkov. Če na primer izberete Hulk in Kung-Fu, bo video spremenjen tako da bo imel zeleno senco in bo pokazal ponovljeno sliko.

Kliknite Učinki za skritje menija učinkov in vrnitev na običajni pogled.

Cheese ponuja 34 učinkov od katerih jih je na prvi strani prikazanih le 9. Za ogled drugih strani kliknite na Naslednji učinki in Predhodni učinki.

Nekateri od učinkov od leve proti desni: Bulge, Rob in Zrcalo

Za odstranitev izbire vseh učinkov kliknite Učinki in izberite Brez učinka.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/index.page0000644000373100047300000000223512265343462022713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Cheese lets you take photos and videos using your webcam. You can even add special effects! <media xmlns:its="http://www.w3.org/2005/11/its" type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/cheese.png" height="40" its:translate="no"/> Cheese Webcam Application
Glavne zmožnosti
Možnosti
Pogoste težave in vprašanja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/video-record.page0000644000373100047300000000457512265343462024177 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Uporaba spletne kamere za snemanje kratkih filmov za deljenje s prijatelji. Snemanje videa

Za snemanje videa s spletno kamero:

Make sure that you are in Video mode. If you are, the button in the middle of the window will say Record a Video.

You can switch to Video mode by clicking the button in the main window or by selecting CheeseVideo.

Click Record a Video, or press the Space key. Cheese will start recording a video using your webcam.

Za zaustavitev snemanja kliknite Zaustavi snemanje ali pritisnite Esc.

Videi so shranjeni v vrsti Ogg Theora (.ogv).

After you have stopped recording, the video will automatically appear in the photo stream at the bottom of the Cheese window. From there, you can play back the video, upload it to a social network, post it on your blog or YouTube channel, or share it with friends by email.

Če imate težave z deljenjem videa z ljudmi, ki imajo druge operacijske sisteme (kot sta Windows ali Mac OS), ga boste morda morali pretvoriti v drugo vrsto.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/burst-mode.page0000644000373100047300000000560612265343462023672 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2011, 2013 Capture several photos with one button press. Change your pose in between each shot! Take photos in quick succession using <gui>Burst</gui> mode

Use Burst mode to automatically take several photos in a row. It is particularly fun if you change your pose in between photos! To use Burst mode:

Select Cheese Burst.

Press Take Multiple Photos or press the Space key.

By default, four photos will be taken, with a one second delay and a countdown between photos.

Kadarkoli lahko pritisnete Esc, če želite, daCheese neha z zajemanjem fotografij.

Change <gui>Burst</gui> preferences

Število zajetih fotografij v načinu zaporednega zajemanja in razmik med njimi lahko spremenite:

Select CheesePreferencesCapture.

Edit the preference settings:

Countdown

Countdown from three before the photo is taken.

 Fire flash

Your screen will flash when a photo is taken.

 Number of photos

The number of photos that will be taken in a single burst.

 Delay between photos (seconds)

The delay between the last photo and the start of the next countdown. If Countdown is disabled, this is the delay between photos.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/photo-take.page0000644000373100047300000000423712265343462023663 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Uporaba spletne kamere za zajem fotografij namesto videov. Take photos using a webcam

Webcams can be used to take still photos as well as videos. To take a photo:

Make sure that the mode Photo is selected in the Cheese menu.

Click Take a Photo. Alternatively, you can press the capture button on the webcam or the Space key.

There will be a short countdown, followed by a flash, and the photo will appear in the photo stream.

The photos in the photo stream are automatically saved in the /Pictures/Webcam folder in your home folder. They are saved using the JPEG (.jpg) format.

Za preklic zajemanja fotografije po kliku na Zajemi fotografijo pritisnite Esc preden se odštevanje konča.

To take multiple photos in rapid succession, use burst mode.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/photo-view.page0000644000373100047300000000245412265343462023710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Fotografije in videi se bodo samodejno pojavili v pretoku fotografij. Ogled zajete fotografije ali videa

Po zajemu fotografije ali snemanju videa, se bodo pojavile v pretoku fotografij na dnu okna.

Če želite videti večjo različico fotografije ali predvajati video, dvokliknite nanj. To bo odprlo privzeti pregledovalnik fotografij ali predvajalnik videa.

Vse fotografije in videi v pretoku fotografij so shranjeni v mapah SlikeSpletna kamera in VideoSpletna kamera v vaši domači mapi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/pref-fullscreen.page0000644000373100047300000000167212265343462024704 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Enable and disable fullscreen mode Fullscreen

To enable the fullscreen mode:

Select CheeseFullscreen

To disable the fullscreen mode:

Select Leave Fullscreen

You can also enable and disable fullscreen mode by pressing F11

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000323512265343462024326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Introduction to the Cheese webcam application. Uvod

Cheese is a webcam application that lets you take photos and record videos using your webcam. You can take multiple photos in quick succession using the Burst mode and apply special Effects to add a personal touch to them.

By default, Cheese starts in Photo mode, ready to take a photo. You need to switch to Video mode to record a video.

Cheese works with most webcams, but some older webcams may not be supported.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050712265343462022554 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/pref-image-properties.page0000644000373100047300000000522712265343462026016 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Prilagodite nasičenost, kontrast, svetlost in odtenek in naredite fotografije in videoposnetke videti bolje. Moje fotografije in videi so videti narobe

Če so vaše fotografije ali videi videti pretemni ali pa so barve videti narobe, poskusite prilagoditi njihovo nasičenje, kontrast, svetlost in odtenek:

Select CheesePreferencesImage.

Move the sliders to find the best settings for your webcam.

Kliknite Zapri in preverite ali so fotografije in videi videti bolje.
Različne možnosti pod <gui>Lastnosti slike</gui> (od leve proti desni): sprememba svetosti, kontrasta, odteka in nasičenja
Svetlost

Povečanje svetlosti bo naredilo fotografije in videoposnetke svetlejše. Če ste v temni sobi, bo povečanje svetlosti morda povzročilo več šuma na sliki.

 Kontrast

Nastavitev višjega kontrasta bo povečala razliko med temnejšimi in svetlejšimi barvami. Če je slika videti izprano, poskusite s povečanjem kontrasta.

 Odtenek

Sprememba odtenka slike, ji bo dodala barvo. Če je slika videti napačne barve (na primer preveč rumena), poskusite s spremembo odtenka.

 Nasičenost

Zmanjšanje nasičenost naredi sliko manj barvito. Če so barve preveč izrazite, zmanjšajte nasičenost.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/pref-resolution.page0000644000373100047300000000345112265343462024742 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Ločljivost fotografije ali videa določi, koliko podrobnosti lahko vidite v njem. Njena sprememba bo vplivala na velikost datoteke. Sprememba ločljivosti zajemanja spletne kamere

Viška ločljivost običajno pomeni bolj kakovostne slike, vendar pa fotografije in videi z višjo ločljivostjo zavzemajo več prostora na trdem disku. Veliko prostora zavzamejo predvsem videoposnetki, zajeti z visoko ločljivostjo.

Če želite, da vaše slike zavzemajo manj prostora na disku, zmanjšajte ločljivost svoje spletne kamere. Če želite bolj kakovostne slike, ločljivost zvišajte. Za spremembo ločljivosti spletne kamere:

Select CheesePreferencesWebcam.

Izberite drugo ločljivost s spustnega seznama. Nekatere spletne kamere podpirajo le eno ločljivost, zato morda nimate izbrie.

Press Close.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/pref-flash.page0000644000373100047300000000232512265343462023633 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Zaustavitev belega mežika ob zajemanju fotografije Onemogočite bliskavko

Ko s Cheese zajamete fotografijo, se zaslon za kratek čas obarva belo. To zagotavlja dodatno svetlobo.

To disable this feature, select CheesePreferencesCapture and uncheck Fire Flash.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/photo-save.page0000644000373100047300000000301712265343462023670 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Shranjevanje fotografije ali videa v drugi mapi. Shranjevanje fotografije ali videa

Privzeto Cheese shrani fotografije in videoposnetke v mapah SlikeSpletna kamera in VideoSpletna kamera v vaši domači mapi.

Za shranitev slike na drugo mesto desno kliknite nanjo v pretoku fotografij in kliknite Shrani kot. Nato izberite kje želite shraniti sliko.

Namesto tega lahko odprete mapo kamor želite shraniti slike v upravljalniku datotek in nato sliko povlečete iz pretoka fotografij v to mapo.

Nova kopija slike bo bila shranjena na novo mesto. Stara različica bo ostala v mapi SlikeSpletna kamera ali VideoSpletna kamera

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/photo-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000334512265343462024200 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Odstranitev fotografij in videov, ki jih ne želite več obdržati. Izbris fotografije ali videa

Če fotografije ali videa ne želite več, ga lahko trajno izbrišete:

Najdite fotografijo ali video, ki ga želite izbrisati v pretoku fotografij na dnu okna Cheese.

Desno kliknite nanj in izberite Izbriši. Namesto tega ga lahko tudi kliknete in pritisnite na tipko Delete.

Vprašani boste ali želite fotografijo trajno izbrisati. To potrdite s klikom na Izbriši. Fotografije ne boste mogli obnoviti.

Če niste prepričani, da želite fotografijo ali video trajno izbrisati, jo lahko desno kliknete in izberete Premakni v smeti. To jo bo premaknilo v računalnikovo mapo Smeti.

Cheese nima lastne mape Smeti in iz njega ne morete dostopati do računalnikove mape Smeti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/cheese/pref-countdown.page0000644000373100047300000000236112265343462024556 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Odstranitev odštevanja, da so fotografije zajete takoj Onemogočitev <gui>odštevanja</gui> preden so fotografije zajete.

By default, Cheese counts down from three before taking a photo. You can disable this feature by selecting CheesePreferencesCapture and unchecking Countdown.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/clock.page0000644000373100047300000000124412157071002023461 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev datuma in časa, časovni pas, koledar in sestanki ... Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Datum in čas usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sharing-media.page0000644000373100047300000000450012157071002025074 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Share media on your local network using Rygel. Share your music, photos and videos

You can browse, search and play the media on your computer using a UPnP or DLNA enabled device such as a phone, TV or game console. Configure Media Sharing to allow these devices to access the folders containing your music, photos and videos.

You must have the Rygel package installed for Media Sharing to be visible.

Install Rygel

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Open Sharing.

If Sharing is OFF, switch it to ON.

Select Media Sharing.

Switch Share Media On This Network to ON.

Click + to open the Choose a folder window. Navigate into the desired folder, Music in your Home directory for example, and click Open. Repeat for the other folders you wish to share, for example Pictures and Videos.

Click Close. You will now be able to browse or play media in the folders you selected using the external device.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-notifications.page0000644000373100047300000000331612157071002026355 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lahko ste obveščeni, če je vaš barvni profil star ali nenatančen. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Ali sem lahko obveščen/a, ko je moj bravni profil nenatančen?

Žal brez ponovnega umerjanja ni mogoče povedati ali je barvni profil natančen. Za določitev ali je potrebno ponovno umerjanje je zato uporabljen čas od zadnjega umerjanja.

Nekatera podjetja imajo zelo določena pravila zakasnitve profilov, saj lahko nenatančen barvni profil naredi veliko razliko pri končnemu izdelku.

Če nastavite pravila zakasnitve in je profil starejši kot določa pravilo, bo v pogovornem oknu v NastavitveBarve poleg profila prikazan rdeč trikotnik. Opozorila bodo prikazana tudi ob vsaki prijavi.

Za nastavitev pravila za zaslone in tiskalnike določite največjo starost profila v dneh:

[rupert@gnome] gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color recalibrate-printer-threshold 180 [rupert@gnome] gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color recalibrate-display-threshold 180 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-workspaces-movewindow.page0000644000373100047300000000550412157071002030053 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Pojdite v pregled Dejavnosti in povlecite okno na drugo delovno površino. Premakne trenutno okno na drugo delovno površino Uporaba miške:

Open the Activities overview.

Open the Activities Overview from the Applications menu at the top left of the screen.

Kliknite in povlecite okno na desni del zaslona.

The workspace selector will appear.

Drop the window onto an empty workspace. This workspace now contains the window you have dropped, and a new empty workspace appears at the bottom of the workspace selector.

Drop the window onto an empty workspace. This workspace now contains the window you have dropped.

 Uporaba tipkovnice:

Select the window that you want to move (for example, using the SuperTab window switcher).

Press SuperShiftPage Up to move the window to a workspace which is above the current workspace on the workspace selector.

Press SuperShiftPage Down to move the window to a workspace which is below the current workspace on the workspace selector.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-add.page0000644000373100047300000001062612157071002024076 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajaje novih uporabnikov da se lahko na računalnik prijavijo tudi drugi ljudje. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dodajanje novega uporabniškga računa shaunm

We need a note in here about password hints. Share content with user-changepassword

 shaunm

Let's add a "Disable account" page. Click the account, click the dots next to "Password", select "Disable this account" from "Type".

 shaunm

Much of the password dialog simply does not work:

Choose a password at next login does nothing

Log in without a password does nothing

Enable this account does nothing (and it's not even clear to me what it should do): 665914

Hint does nothing: 647912, 643445

Na svoj računalnik lahko dodate več uporabniških računov. Vsaki osebi v svojem gospodinjstvu ali podjetju dajte en račun. Vsak uporabnik ima svojo domačo mapo, dokumente in nastavitve.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Uporabniki.

Za dodajanje računov so zahtevana skrbniška dovoljenja. Kliknite Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kout in ob pozivu vnesite svoje ali skrbniško geslo.

In the list of accounts on the left, click the + button to add a new user account.

Če želite, da ima nov uporabnik skrbniški dostop do računalnika, za vrsto računa izberite Skrbnik. Skrbniki lahko dodajajo ali brišejo uporabnike, nameščajo programe in gonilnike ter spremenijo datum in čas.

Vnesite polno ime uporabnika. Uporabniško ime bo samodejno izpolnjeno glede na polno ime. Privzeto je najverjetneje v redu, ampak ga lahko po želji tudi spremenite.

Kliknite Dodaj.

The account is initially disabled until you choose what to do about the user's password. Select the new account from the list. Under Login Options click Account disabled next to Password. Select Set a password now from the Action drop-down list, and have the user type their password in the New password and Confirm password fields. See .

Da izberete naključno ustvarjeno varno geslo, lahko kliknete na gumb poleg polja Novo geslo. Ta gesla so težka in jih drugi ne morejo uganiti, si jih boste pa tudi težko zapomnili, zato bodite previdni.

Kliknite Spremeni.

V oknu Uporabniški računi lahko kliknete na sliko poleg uporabnikovega imena na desni za nastavitev slike računa. Slika bo bila prikazana v prijavnem oknu. GNOME zagotavlja nekaj fotografij, ki jih lahko uporabite ali pa lahko izberete svojo lastno sliko ali jo zajamete s svojo spletno kamero.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-notspecifiededid.page0000644000373100047300000000242112157071002027002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Privzeti profili zaslona nimajo datuma umerjanja. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj privzetim profilom zaslona umeritev ne poteče?

Privzeti barvni profil za vsak zaslon je samodejno ustvarjen na osnovi EDID zaslona, ki je shranjen v čipu pomnilnika v zaslonu. EDID poda le posnetek razpoložljivih barv, ki jih je zaslon lahko prikazal ob času proizvodnje in ne vsebuje veliko drugih podatkov o popravilu barv.

EDID ni mogoče posodobiti zato nikoli ne poteče.

Pridobitev profila od proizvajalca zaslona ali ustvaritev lastnega profila pomaga pri natančnejšemu popravljanju barve.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-slow.page0000644000373100047300000000632712157071002024145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Morda se prejemajo druge stvari, morda imate slabo povezavo ali pa je zaposlen čas dneva. Internet je počasen

V primeru da uporabljate internet in se zdi počasen, obstajajo številne stvari, ki bi lahko povzročile upočasnitev.

Nekaj hitrih popravkov, ki jih lahko poskusite, so zaprtje in ponovno odprtje spletnega brskalnika in prekinitev in ponovna vzpostavitev povezave z internetom. (To ponastavi veliko stvari, ki lahko upočasnijo delovanje interneta.)

Zaposleni čas dneva

Ponudniki internetnih storitev internetne povezave pogosto nastavijo tako, da si jih deli več gospodinjstev. Čeprav se povežete ločeno s svojo telefonsko ali kabelsko povezavo, si morda povezavo do preostanka interneta delite z drugimi. Če je to res in hkrati z vami internet uporablja več sosedov, lahko opazite upočasnitev. To upočasnitev lahko opazite, ko so sosedje na internetu (na primer zvečer).

Prejemanje več stvari hkrati

V primeru da vi ali nekdo drug, ki uporablja vašo internetno povezavo, prejema več datotek hkrati, ali gleda videoposnetke, internetna povezava morda ni dovolj hitra za zahteve. V tem primeru bo videti počasnejša.

Nezanesljiva povezava

Nekatere internetne povezave so nezanesljive, še posebno začasne na področjih z velikimi zahtevami. V primeru da ste v zasedeni kavarni ali konferenčnem centru, je morda internetna povezava prezaposlena ali enostavno nezanesljiva.

Šibek signal brezžične povezave

V primeru da ste povezani z internetom preko brezžične povezave (wifi), kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in preverite, če imate dober brezžični signal. Če ga nimate, je internet morda počasen, ker nimate močnega signala.

Uporaba počasne mobilne internetne povezave

V primeru da imate mobilno internetno povezavo in opazite, da je počasna, ste se morda premaknili na področje, kjer je sprejem signala šibek. Ko se to zgodi, bo internetna povezava samodejno preklopila s hitre "mobilne širokopasovne" povezave kot je 3G na zanesljivejšo, toda počasnejšo povezavo kot je GPRS.

Spletni brskalnik ima težavo

Včasih spletni brskalniki naletijo na težave, ki jih upočasnijo. To se lahko zgodi zaradi različnih vzrokov - lahko ste obiskali spletišče, ki ga brskalnik ni mogel naložiti, ali pa ste imeli brskalnik odprt dolg čas. Poskusite zapreti vsa okna brskalnika in znova odprite brskalnik in preverite, če to naredi razliko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-windows.page0000644000373100047300000000516112157071002025167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Premikajte in organizirajte svoja okna. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Okna in delovne površine

Like other desktops, GNOME uses windows to display your running applications. Using both the Activities overview and the dash, you can launch new applications and control active windows.

You can also group your applications together within workspaces. Visit the window and workspace help topics below to better learn how to use these features.

Briefly explain the different window states that exist and how you can use and recognize those states. Discuss interesting ways of arranging windows (i.e. if there is a "Tile" option or something like that). Mention, in passing, how you can move and resize windows in multiple ways.

Very brief overview of what you can do with windows. Link to relevant topics.
Okna Delo z okni
Delovne površine Delo z delovnimi površinami
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-views.page0000644000373100047300000001305412157071002025367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavite privzeti pogled, vrstni red razvrščanja in ravni za upravljalnik datotek. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Views preferences in <app>Files</app>

You can change the default view for new folders, how files and folders are sorted by default, the zoom level for the icon and compact views, and whether files are displayed in the tree sidebar. Select Files Preferences in the top bar while Files is open and select the Views tab.

Privzet prikaz <gui>Za ogled novih map uporabi</gui>

By default, new folders are shown in icon view. If you prefer the list view, you can set it here as the default. Alternatively, you can select a different view for each folder as you browse by clicking the View items as a list or View items as a grid of icons button in the toolbar.

 <gui>Uredi predmete</gui>

You can change the default sort order that is used in folders using the Arrange items drop-down list in the preferences to sort by name, file size, file type, when they were last modified, when they were last accessed or when they were trashed.

You can change how files are sorted in an individual folder by clicking the View options button in the toolbar and choosing By Name, By Size, By Type or By Modification Date, or by clicking the list column headers in list view. This menu only affects the current folder.

 <gui>Razvrsti mape pred datotekami</gui>

By default, the file manager no longer shows all folders before files. To see all folders listed before files, enable this option.

 <gui>Pokaži skrite datoteke in varnostne kopije</gui>

The file manager does not display hidden files and folders by default. You can always show hidden files by selecting this option.

You can also show hidden files in an individual window by selecting Show Hidden Files, from the View options menu in the toolbar.
Privzete lastnosti ikonskega prikaza <gui>Privzeta raven približanja</gui>

You can make the icons and text larger or smaller by default in icon view using this option. You can also change this setting in an individual folder by clicking the View options button in the toolbar and selecting Zoom In, Zoom Out or Normal Size. If you frequently use a larger or smaller zoom level, you can set the default with this option.

In icon view, more or fewer captions are shown based on your zoom level.
Privzete lastnosti seznamskega prikaza <gui>Privzeta raven približanja</gui>

You can make the icons and text larger or smaller in list view using this option. You can also do this in an individual folder by clicking the View options button in the toolbar and selecting Zoom In, Zoom Out or Normal Size.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-security.page0000644000373100047300000000115312157071002025020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Protivirusni programi, osnovni požarni zidovi … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Varnost na internetu usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-previews.page0000644000373100047300000000303012157071002026224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Vidite lahko le predogled datotek, ki so shranjene krajevno. Zakaj za nekatere datoteke predogledi ne obstajajo? Julita Inca

This topic is going to explain why there aren't thumbnails for documents stored remotely

Ko odprete Dokumente, je za krajevno shranjene dokumenta prikazana sličica predogleda. Dokumenti shranjeni na oddaljenem strežniku kot je Google Docs ali SkyDrive bodo prikazane kot manjkajoče /ali prazne) sličice predogleda.

Če dokument Google Docs ali SkyDrive prejmete v krajevno shrambo, bo bila ustvarjena sličica.

Krajevna kopija dokumenta prejeta z Google Docs ali SkyDrive se ne bo več posodabljala na spletu. Če jo želite še naprej urejati na spletu, je ne prejmite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-admin-change.page0000644000373100047300000000434612157071002025663 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabnike, ki lahko spreminjajo sistem, lahko dodate tako, da jim dodate skrbniška dovoljenja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Sprememba kdo ima skrbniška dovoljenja

Skrbniška dovoljenja so način za odločanje kdo lahko naredi spremembe pomembnih delov sistema. Spremenite lahko uporabnike, ki imajo ali nimajo skrbniških dovoljenj. To je dober način za ohranjanje vašega sistema varnega in preprečevanje morebitnih škodljivih neoverjenih sprememb.

Click your name on the top bar, then click the picture next to your name to open the Users window.

Da odklenete nastavitve računa, kliknite Odkleni in vnesite svoje geslo. (Da nekomu dodelite skrbniške pravice, morate imeti tudi sami skrbniške pravice.)

Izberite uporabnika katerega dovoljenja želite spremeniti.

Kliknite na oznako Običajen poleg Vrsta računa in nato izberite Skrbnik.

Zaprite okno Uporabniški računi. Dovoljenja uporabnikov bodo spremenjena ob njihovi naslednji prijavi.

Prvi uporabniški račun na sistemu ima običajno skrbniška dovoljenja. To je račun, ki je bil ustvarjen ob prvi namestitvi sistema.

Na sistemu ni dobro imeti preveč uporabnikov s pravico Skrbnik.

 GNOME Documentation Project

Explain how admin privileges can be given to other people, or removed. Warn the reader about how it's unwise to have too many admins on a system.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents.page0000644000373100047300000000326712157071002024376 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Organizirajte vse dokumente, shranjene na računalniku in vse dokumente, ki ste jih ustvarili na spletu. Dokumenti Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to use Google Docs. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to organize all your documents in one application. This document is about: - Overview of GNOME Documents, and what it does - Explain that it's not really the same as a file browser - Explain that it can connect to remote documents

Dokumeti je program GNOME, ki vam omogoča prikaz, organizacijo in tiskanje dokumentov na vašem računalniku in tistih, ki so bili ustvarjeni oddaljeno z Google Docs ali SkyDrive.

Oglejte, razvrstite in iščite
Izberite, organizirajte, tiskajte
Vprašanja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-batteryslow.page0000644000373100047300000000167012157071002026102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekateri prenosniki se namenoma upočasnijo, ko tečejo na bateriji. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Zakaj je moj prenosnik počasen, ko uporablja napetost baterije?

Nekateri prenosniki se med delovanjem na bateriji namenoma upočasnijo za varčevanje z energijo. Procesor prenosnika preklopi na nižjo hitrost in zato porabi manj energije. Baterija zato traja dlje.

Ta zmožnost se imenuje spreminjanje frekvence CPE.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth-send-file.page0000644000373100047300000001130612157071002026237 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Souporaba datotek z napravami z omogočenim Bluetooth, kot je telefon. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Pošiljanje datoteke na drugo napravo Bluetooth

Datoteke lahko pošiljate povezanim napravam Bluetooth, kot so mobilni telefoni ter drugi računalniki. Nekatere naprave ne dovolijo prenosa datotek oz. določenih vrst datotek. Datoteke lahko pošiljate na tri načine: uporabite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici, iz okna nastavitev Bluetootha ali neposredno iz upravljalnika datotek.

You can send files to connected Bluetooth devices, such as some mobile phones or other computers. Some types of devices don't allow the transfer of files, or specific types of files. You can send files using the Bluetooth icon on the top bar, or from the Bluetooth settings window.

 mdhill

The functionality in the following line was temporarily removed in 3.8

To send files directly from the file manager, see .

Preden začnete, se prepričajte, da je Bluetooth na vašem računalniku omogočen. Oglejte si .

 Pošljanje datotek z ikono Bluetooth

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Pošlji datoteke napravi.

Kliknite na ikono Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Pošlji datoteke na napravo.

Izberite datoteko, ki jo želite poslati, in kliknite Izberi.

Za pošiljanje več kot ene datoteke v mapi med izbiranjem datotek držite tipko Ctrl.

S seznama izberite napravo na katero želite poslati datoteke in nato kliknite Pošlji.

Seznam naprav bo prikazal tako naprave s katerimi ste že povezani in vidne naprave v dosegu. Če se z izbrano napravo še niste povezali, boste pozvani k spoznavanju z napravo po pritisku na Pošlji. To bo verjetno zahtevalo potrditev na drugi napravi.

Če imate veliko naprav, lahko seznam omejite le na določene vrste naprav s pomočjo spustnega seznama Vrsta naprave.

Lastnik prejemajoče naprave mora za sprejem datoteke običajno pritisniti gumb. Ko lastnik datoteke sprejme ali zavrne, se bo rezultat prenosa datotek prikazal na vašem zaslonu.

 Pošiljanje datotek iz nastavitev Bluetooth

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

Kliknite na ikono BLuetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

Izberite napravo na katero želite poslati datoteke s seznama na levi. Seznam prikazuje le naprave s katerimi ste že povezani. Oglejte si .

V podatki o napravi na desni kliknite Pošlji datoteke.

Izberite datoteko, ki jo želite poslati, in kliknite Izberi.

Za pošiljanje več kot ene datoteke v mapi med izbiranjem datotek držite tipko Ctrl.

Lastnik prejemajoče naprave mora za sprejem datoteke običajno pritisniti gumb. Ko lastnik datoteke sprejme ali zavrne, se bo rezultat prenosa datotek prikazal na vašem zaslonu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-lockscreen.page0000644000373100047300000000302012157071002025615 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 The decorative and functional lock screen conveys useful information. Zakleni zaslon

The lock screen means that you can see what is happening while your computer is locked, and it allows you to get a summary of what has been happening while you have been away. The lock screen curtain shows an attractive image on the screen while your computer is locked, and provides useful information:

the name of the logged-in user

date and time, and certain notifications

battery and network status

the ability to control media playback - change the volume, skip a track or pause your music without having to enter a password

To unlock your computer, raise the lock screen curtain by dragging it upward with the cursor, or by pressing Esc or Enter. This will reveal the login screen, where you can enter your password to unlock. You can also switch users if your computer is configured for more than one.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/music-player-notrecognized.page0000644000373100047300000000454312157071002027655 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dodajte datoteko .is_audio_player, ki bo vašemu računalniku povedala, da je to predvajalnik zvoka. Zakaj moj predvajalnik zvoka ob vklopu ni prepoznan?

V primeru da vaš predvajalnik zvoka (predvajalnik MP3 in podobno) vklopite v računalnik, vendar ga v programu za organizacijo ne morete videti, potem morda ni bil pravilno prepoznan kot predvajalnik zvoka.

Predvajalnik odklopite in ga ponovno priklopite. V primeru da to ne pomaga, odprite Upravljalnik datotek. Predvajalnik bi moral biti izpisan v stranski vrstici pod Naprave. Kliknite nanj za odprtje mape predvajalnika zvoka. Sedaj kliknite DatotekaNov dokumentPrazen dokument, vpišite .is_audio_player in pritisnite Enter (pika in podčrtaja sta pomembna. Vse črke naj bodo male). Ta datoteka vašemu računalniku pove, da naj napravo prepozna kot predvajalnik zvoka.

Sedaj v stranski vrstici upravljalnika datotek najdite predvajalnik zvoka in ga izvrzite (desno kliknite nanj in kliknite Izvrzi). Odklopite ga in ga nato priklopite nazaj. Tokrat bi ga moral organizator glasbe prepoznati kot predvajalnik zvoka. V primeru da se to ne zgodi, organizator glasbe zaprite in ga ponovno odprite.

Ta navodila ne bodo delovala za iPode in nekatere druge predvajalnike zvoka. To bi moralo delovati, če je vaš predvajalnik naprava obsežne shrambe USB. To bi moralo pisati v priročniku naprave.

Ko znova gledate vsebino mape predvajalnika zvoka, datoteke .is_audio_player ne boste videli. To se zgodi, ker pika v imenu datoteke upravljalniku datotek pove, naj datoteko skrije. Da je datoteka še vedno tam lahko preverite s klikom na PogledPokaži skrite datoteke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-browse.page0000644000373100047300000000660312157071002024773 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Upravljanje in organizacija datotek z upravljalnikom datotek Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Brskanje med datotekami in mapami

This page is a feature overview. There should be a greater visual separation between features. Small illustrative figures should be used to display these features where appropriate, and video demonstrations of some of the features might be useful too. Explain how you can add things to the sidebar (link to a topic or explain it here).

Za brskanje in organizacijo datotek v svoji domači mapi, na zunanjih napravah, na datotečnih strežnikih in na datotečnem sistemu računalnika uporabite program Datoteke.

Za odprtje upravljalnika datotek odprite Datoteke v pregledu Dejavnosti. Med datotekami in mapami lahko iščete skozi pregled na enak način kot bi iskali programe.

Raziskovanje vsebin map

V upravljalniku datotek dvokliknite na katerokoli mapo za ogled njene vsebine in dvokliknite na katerokoli datoteko za odprtje s privzetim programom zanjo. Na mapo lahko tudi desno kliknete za odprtje v novem zavihku ali oknu.

Ko iščete datoteke v mapi lahko hitro vidite predogled datotek s pritiskom na preslednico. Tako se lahko prepričate, da boste odprli, kopirali ali izbrisali pravo datoteko.

Vrstica poti nad seznamom datotek in map vam pokaže katere mape si ogledujete vključno z nadrejenimi mapami do vaše domače mape. Kliknite na nadrejeno mapo v vrstici poti za vstop vanjo. Desno kliknete na mapo v vrstici poti za njeno odprtje v novem zavihku ali oknu, kopiranje, premik ali dostop do njenih lastnosti.

Če želite hitro preskočiti datoteko v mapo, ki jo gledate, začnite tipkati njeno ime. Na dnu okna se bo pojavilo iskalno okno in prva datoteka, ki se ujema z vašim iskanjem, bo poudarjena. Pritisnite puščico navzdol ali drsajte z miško za skok na naslednjo datoteko, ki se ujema z vašim iskanjem.

You can quickly access common places from the sidebar. If you do not see the sidebar, click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Sidebar. You can add bookmarks to folders that you use often and they will appear in the sidebar. Use the Bookmarks menu to do this, or simply drag a folder into the sidebar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000201612157071002025476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Popolna odstranitev spletnega računa. Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Odstranitev računa

Odprite nastavitve Spletni računi iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite račun, ki ga želite odstraniti.

Kliknite na gumb - v spodnjem levem delu okna.

Kliknite na gumb Odstrani.

Namesto popolnega izbrisa računa lahko omejite storitve do katerih lahko dostopa vaš računalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/hardware-auth.page0000644000373100047300000000116512157071002025124 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Bralniki prstnih odtisov, pametne kartice ... Pametne kartice in bralniki prstnih odtisov shaunm

Change the desc when we have a smart card page

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000122612157071002024204 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Dostopajte do svojih stikov. Stiki

Uporabite Stike za shranjevanje, dostop ali urejanje podatkov o vaših stikih, ki so krajevno ali v vaših Spletnih računih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-proxy.page0000644000373100047300000000523212157071003024335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Posredniški strežniki filtrirajo spletišča, ki jih gledate. Običajen vzrok je nadzor ali varnostni nameni. Določitev nastavitvev posredniškega strežnika
Kaj je posredniški strežnik?

Spletni posredniški strežnik filtrira spletišča, ki jih gledate. Na podlagi pravil se odloči katera od zahtevanih spletnih strani in njihov delov vam bo prikazana. Običajno se uporabljajo v podjetjih in javnih brezžičnih dostopnih točkah za nadzor do spletišč, ki jih lahko gledate, preprečevanje dostopa do interneta brez prijave ali za preverjanje varnosti spletišč.

Sprememba posredniškega strežnika Baptiste Mille-Mathias

We should develop the proxy methods, and how they work.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in s seznama na levi strani okna izberite Omrežni posredniški strežnik.

Med naslednjimi načini izberite kateri posredniški strežnik želite uporabiti.

Brez

Programi bodo za pridobivanje vsebine s spleta uporabili neposredno povezavo.

 Ročno

Za vsak protokol protokol preko posredniškega strežnika določi posredniški strežnik in vrata za protokol. Protokoli so HTTP, HTTPS, FTP in SOCKS.

 Samodejno

Url kaže na vir, ki vsebuje ustrezno nastavitev za vaš sistem.

Nastavitve posredniškega strežnika bodo uveljavljene za programe, ki za uporabo izbranih nastavitev uporabijo omrežno povezavo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-icon.page0000644000373100047300000000266412157071003024077 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Meni splošnega dostopa je ikona v vrhnji vrstici, ki je videti kot oseba. Najdite meni splošnega dostopa

V meniju splošnega dostopa lahko vklopite različne nastavitve dostopnosti. Ta meni lahko najdete s klikom na ikono v zgornji vrstici, ki je videti kot obkrožen človek.

Meni splošnega dostopa lahko najdete v zgornji vrstici.

Za dostop do tega menija s tipkovnico namesto z miško CtrlAltTab za premik žarišča tipkovnice v vrhnjo vrstico. Pod gumbom Dejavnosti se bo pojavila bela črta. Ta vam pove kateri predmet v vrhnji vrstici je izbran. Uporabite smerne tipke na tipkovnici za premik bele črte pod ikono menija splošnega dostopa in nato pritisnite Enter. Za izbiro predmetov v meniju lahko uporabite tipki navzgor in navzdol. Pritisnite Enter za preklop izbranega predmeta.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-autologin.page0000644000373100047300000000367212157071003025353 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2013 Set up automatic login for when you switch on your computer. Log in automatically

You can change your settings so that you are automatically logged in to your account when you start up your computer:

Open Settings from the Activities overview.

Open the Users panel from Settings.

Select the user account that you want to log in to automatically at startup.

Press Unlock and enter your password.

Toggle the Automatic Login switch to On.

When you next start up your computer, you will be logged in automatically. If you have this option enabled, you will not need to type in your password to log in to your account which means that if someone else starts up your computer, they will be able to access your account and your personal data including your files and browser history.

If your account type is Standard, you cannot change this setting. Contact your system administrator who can change this setting for you.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-wakeup.page0000644000373100047300000000225712157071003025016 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V primeru da morate miško stresti ali klikniti preden se odzove. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Mouse reacts with delay before it starts working

Wireless and optical mice, as well as touchpads on laptops, may need to "wake up" before they start working. They automatically go to sleep when not in use to save battery power. To wake up your mouse or touchpad, you can click on a mouse button or wiggle the mouse.

Laptop touchpads sometimes react with delay after you stop typing before they start working. This is to prevent you from accidentally touching the touchpad with your palm while typing. See for details.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-alert.page0000644000373100047300000000332212157071003024623 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izberite zvok za predvajanje ob novih sporočilih, nastavite glasnost opozoril ali onemogočite opozorilne zvoke. Izbira ali onemogočitev opozorilnega zvoka

Vaš računalnik bo predvajal enostaven opozorilni zvok za določene vrste sporočil in dogodkov. Za alarme lahko izberete drugačne zvoke, neodvisno od sistemske glasnosti nastavite glasnost opozorila ali popolnoma onemogočite opozorilne zvoke.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Zvok.

V zavihku Učinki zvoka izberite opozorilni zvok. Zvoki se bodo ob kliku na njih predvajali zato lahko slišite, kakšni so.

Uporabite drsnik glasnosti v zavihku Zvočni učinki za nastavitev glasnosti opozorilnega zvoka. To ne bo vplivalo na glasnost vaše glasbe, filmov in drugih zvočnih datotek.

Za popolno onemogočenje opozorilnih zvokov v zavihku Zvočni učinki pod Glasnost opozorila preklopite Vklopljeno/izklopljeno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-booklet-singlesided.page0000644000373100047300000000554112157071003030152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Tisk knjižice na enostranskem tiskalniku

Ta navodila so za tiskanje knjižnice iz dokumenta PDF.

V primeru da želite knjižico natisniti iz dokumenta LibreOffice, ga boste morali najprej izvoziti v PDF z izbiro DatotekaIzvozi kot PDF .... Število strani v vašem dokumentu mora biti večkratnik števila 4 (4, 8, 12, 16, ...). Morda boste morali dodati do 3 prazne strani.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vtipkajte števila strani v tem vrstnem redu (n je število celotnih strani in je večkratnik števila 4):

n, 1, 2, n-1, n-2, 3, 4, n-3, n-4, 5, 6, n-5, n-6, 7, 8, n-7, n-8, 9, 10, n-9, n-10, 11, 12, n-11…

... dokler niste vnesli vseh strani.

Primeri:

4 stranska knjižica: vtipkajte 4,1,2,3

8 stranska knjižnica: vtipkajte 8,1,2,7,6,3,4,5

12 stranska knjižica: vtipkajte 12,1,2,11,10,3,4,9,8,5,6,7

16 stranska knjižica: vtipkajte 16,1,2,15,14,3,4,13,12,5,6,11,10,7,8,9

20 stranska knjižica: vtipkajte 20,1,2,19,18,3,4,17,16,5,6,15,14,7,8,13,12,9,10,11

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-othercountry.page0000644000373100047300000000400712157071003026266 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vaš računalnik bo deloval, vendar morda potrebuje drugačen kabel ali pretvornik napetosti. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ali bo moj računalnik deloval s polnilcem iz druge države?

Različne države uporabljajo polnilce z različnimi napetostmi (običajno 110V ali 220-240V) in frekvencami (običajno 50 Hz ali 60 Hz). Vaš računalnik bi moral delovati z napajalniki iz različnih držav dokler imate ustrezen vmesnik. Morda boste morali obrniti stikalo.

V primeru da imate prenosnik, je vse, kar morate storiti, najti pravi vtič za svoj napajalnik. Večina prenosnikov ima več kot en vtič za svoj napajalnik, zato morda že imate pravega. Če ga nimate, bo vklop obstoječega vtiča v običajni potovalni vmesnik zadostoval.

V primeru da imate namizni računalnik, lahko dobite tudi kabel z drugačnim vtičem ali uporabite potovalni vmesnik. V tem primeru boste morda morali spremeniti stikalo napetosti na napajalniku računalnika, če obstaja. Večina računalnikov takšnega stikala nima in bo delovalo z obema napetostma. Oglejte si zadnjo stran računalnika in najdite priključek za vklop kabla z električnega omrežja. Nekje blizu je lahko majhno stikalo označeno s "110V" ali "230V". Preklopite ga, če je to potrebno.

Pri spreminjanju kablov električnega omrežja ali uporabi potovalnih prilagodilnikov bodite previdni. Izklopite vse, kar lahko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-lowpower.page0000644000373100047300000000367412157071003025410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev popolne izpraznitve baterije je zanjo slaba. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Zakaj se je moj računalnik izklopil/je prešel v stanje pripravljenosti/mirovanje, ko je vrednost baterije dosegla 10%?

Ko se raven polnosti baterije preveč zniža, bo vaš računalnik samodejno prešel v mirovanje. To povzroči, da se baterija ne izprazni popolnoma, saj je to slabo za baterijo. Poleg tega v primeru da bi baterije nenadoma zmanjkalo, računalnik ne bi imel časa za pravilen izklop.

Kaj se zgodi, ko raven baterije postane prenizka, lahko spremenite s klikom na svoje ime na vrhu zaslona, izbiro Nastavitve sistema in odpiranjem nastavitev Poraba. Oglejte si nastavite Ko je napolnjenost baterije kritično nizka. Izberete lahko, da računalnik preide v stanje pripravljenosti ali pa se izklopi. V primeru da izberete izklop, vaši programi in dokumenti pred izklopom računalnika ne bodo shranjeni.

Nekateri računalniki imajo s prehodom v mirovanje težave in morda ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika ne bodo mogli obnoviti odprtih programov in dokumentov. V tem primeru lahko izgubite nekaj svojega dela, če ga ob prehodu v mirovanje niste shranili. Morda boste lahko težave z mirovanjem popravili.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/wacom-left-handed.page0000644000373100047300000000221512157071003025645 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Preklopite tablico Wacom na Levo ročna usmerjenost. Uporaba tablice z levico

Nekatere tablice imajo na eni strani gumbe. Tablico lahko zavrtite za 180 stopinj, da so gumbi na položajih, ki ustrezajo levičarjem. Za spremembo usmerjenosti na levo ročno.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Spremenite Uporaba z levico na VKLOPLJENO.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-problem-notmoving.page0000644000373100047300000001207712157071003027201 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako preveriti, če miška ne deluje. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Miškin kazalec se ne premika
Preverite, da je miška vklopljena

V primeru da imate miško s kablom, preverite, da je trdno priklopljena na vaš računalnik.

V primeru da imate miško USB (s pravokotnim povezovalnikom), jo poskusite priklopiti na druga vrata USB. V primeru da imate miško PS/2 (z majhnim, okroglim povezovalnikom s šestimi nožicami) se prepričajte, da je vklopljena v zelena vrata in ne v vijolična vrata tipkovnica. Morda boste morali računalnik znova zagnati, če miška ni bila priklopljena.

Preverite, da je računalnik prepoznal vašo miško

Odprite program Terminal iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

V okno terminala vpišite xsetpointer -l | grep Pointer natanko tako kot je videti tukaj in pritisnite Enter.

Pojavil se bo kratek seznam miškinih gonilnikov. Preverite, da je poleg vsaj enega od predmetov [XExtensionPointer] in da je levo od vsaj enega predmeta [XExtensionPointer] ime miške.

V primeru da ni vnosa, ki vsebuje ime miške, ki mu sledi [XExtensionPointer], potem računalnik miške ni prepoznal. V primeru da vnos obstaja, je računalnik miško prepoznal. V tem primeru bi morali preveriti, da je miška priklopljena in da je v delujočem stanju.

 shaunm

If we decide to bless a device manager, investigate using that instead of xsetpointer in these steps.

V primeru da ima vaša miška zaporedni (RS-232) povezovalnik, boste morda morali za njeno delovanje izvesti nekaj več korakov. Ti koraki so morda odvisni od proizvajalca ali modela vaše miške.

Težave s prepoznavanjem miške je včasih težko popraviti. Vprašajte za podporo pri svoji distribuciji ali proizvajalcu, če mislite, da vaša miška ni bila pravilno zaznana.

Phil Bull

Should provide some useful advice rather than just saying "you might need to perform extra steps".
Preverite, če miška deluje

Priklopite miško na drug računalnik in preverite, če dela.

V primeru da imate optično ali lasersko miško, bi morala iz dna miške sijati svetloba. V primeru da svetlobe ni, preverite, da je vklopljena. V primeru da je miška vklopljena in ni svetlobe, je miška morda pokvarjena.

Preverjanje brezžične miške

Prepričajte se, da je miška vklopljena. Običajno je na dnu miške stikalo za popoln izklop miške, da jo lahko premikate brez stalnega zbujanja.

Če uporabljate Bluetooth, se prepričajte, da ste dejansko seznanili miško s svojim računalnikom. Oglejte si .

Kliknite na gumb in si oglejte, če se miškin kazalec zdaj premakne. Nekatere brezžične miške gredo za varčevanje z energijo v pripravljenost, zato se morda ne bodo odzvale, dokler ne kliknete na gumb. Oglejte si .

Preverite, če je miškina baterija napolnjena.

Prepričajte se, da je sprejemnik trdno vklopljen v računalnik.

V primeru da lahko vaša miška in sprejemnik delata na različnih radio kanalih, se prepričajte, da delata na istem kanalu.

Morda boste morali pritisniti gumb na miški, sprejemniku ali obeh za vzpostavitev povezave. Priročnik vaše miške bi moral vsebovati več podrobnosti.

Večina RF (radijskih) brezžičnih mišk bi morala ob vklopu v računalnik samodejno delovati. V primeru da imate Bluetooth ali IR (infrardečo) brezžično miško, boste morda morali izvesti dodatno pogoje za njeno delovanje. Koraki so morda odvisni od proizvajalca ali modela vaše miške.

Phil Bull

Should provide some useful advice rather than just saying "you might need to perform extra steps".
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-windows-maximize.page0000644000373100047300000000351712157071003027014 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dvokliknite na nazivno vrstico za razpenjanje ali obnovitev okna. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Razpenjanje in pomanjšanje okna

Okno lahko razpnete, da zavzame ves prostor na vašem namizju in ga pomanjšate za obnovitev na običajno velikost. Okna lahko razpnete tudi navpično ob levi in desni strani zaslona, da si lahko enostavno ogledate dve okni hkrati. Za podrobnosti si oglejte .

To maximize a window, grab the titlebar and drag it to the top of the screen, or just double-click the titlebar. To maximize a window using the keyboard, hold down the Super key and press ↑, or press AltF10.

You can also maximize a window by clicking the maximize button in the titlebar.

Za obnovitev okna v njegovo nerazpeteo stanje ga povlecite stran z robov zaslona. Če je okno polno razpeto, lahko za njegovo obnovitev dvokliknete na nazivno vrstico. Uporabite lahko tudi enake tipkovne bližnjice kot ste jih uporabili za razpenjanje okna.

Držite tipko Alt in vlecite kjerkoli v oknu za njegov premik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-device-drivers.page0000644000373100047300000000765012157071003033155 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Nekateri gonilniki naprav ne delujejo dobro z določenimi brezžičnimi karticami, zato boste morda morali najti boljšega. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji Prepričajte se, da so nameščeni delujoči gonilniki naprave

Pri tem koraku lahko preverite, če lahko gonilnike naprav za brezžično kartico spravite k delovanju. Gonilnik naprave je program, ki računalniku pove kako spraviti napravo strojne opreme k delovanju. Tudi če računalnik prepozna brezžično kartico, morda nima gonilnikov, ki delujejo zelo dobro. Morda boste lahko našli druge gonilnike za brezžično kartico, ki delujejo. Poskusite nekaj od možnosti spodaj:

Preverite, če je vaša brezžična kartica na seznamu podprtih naprav

Večina distribucij Linux ima seznam brezžičnih naprav, ki jih podpirajo. Včasih ti seznami zagotavljajo dodatne podatke kako zagotoviti, da gonilniki za določene brezžične kartice delujejo pravilno. Pojdite na seznam za svojo distribucijo (na primer Ubuntu, Fedora ali openSuSE) in si oglejte, če je proizvajalec in model brezžičnega gonilnika izpisan. Morda boste morali uporabiti te podatke, da bi brezžične spravili gonilnike k delovanju.

Iskanje omejenih (binarnih) gonilnikov

Veliko distribucij Linux vsebuje le gonilnike, ki so prosti in odprtokodni. To se zgodi, ker ne morejo distribuirati gonilnikov, ki so lastniški ali zaprtokodni. Če je pravi gonilnik za vašo brezžično kartico na voljo le v neprosti ali "le-binarni" različici, morda privzeto ne bo nameščen. V tem primeru si oglejte spletišče proizvajalca brezžične kartice in preverite, če imajo gonilnike Linux.

Nekatere distribucije Linux imajo orodje, ki lahko za vas prejme omejene gonilnike. Če vaša distribucija vsebuje to orodje, ga uporabite. Morda lahko za vas najde brezžične kartice.

Uporaba gonilnikov Windows za vašo kartico

V splošnem gonilnika zasnovanega za določen operacijski sistem (kot je na primer Windows) ne morete uporabiti na drugem operacijskem sistemu (kot je na primer Linux). To se zgodi zato, ker imajo različen način upravljanja naprav. Za brezžične kartice lahko namestite plast združljivosti NDISwrapper, ki vam omogoča uporabo nekaterih gonilnikov Windows na Linuxu. To je uporabno, ker imajo brezžične kartice skoraj vedno na voljo gonilnike Windows, gonilniki Linux pa včasih niso na voljo. Več o tem kako uporabiti NDISwrapper lahko izveste tukaj. Vedite, da z NDISwrapper ne morete uporabiti vseh brezžičnih gonilnikov.

Če nobena od teh možnosti ne deluje, boste morda želeli preizkusiti drugo brezžično kartico za ogled, če jo lahko spravite k delovanju. Brezžične kartice USB so precej poceni in jih lahko vklopite v katerikoli računalnik. Preden brezžično kartico kupite, preverite da je združljiva z vašo distribucijo Linux.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000327612157071003024373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako in kje pomagati pri prevodih teh tem pomoči. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Sodelujte in izboljšajte prevode

Pomoč GNOME prevaja skupina prostovoljcev po svetu. Vabljeni ste k sodelovanju.

Obstaja veliko jezikov za katere prevodi še vedno manjkajo.

Za začetek prevajanja boste morali ustvariti račun in se pridružitiprevajalski ekipi za svoj jezik. S tem boste pridobili zmožnost pošiljanja novih prevodov.

S prevajalci GNOME se lahko pogovarjate s pomočjo omrežjairc. Ljudje na kanalu prihajajo s celega sveta zato zaradi časovne razlike odziva ne boste dobili nemudoma.

Namesto tega lahko stopite v stik s prevajalsko ekipo preko njihovega dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-goodpassword.page0000644000373100047300000000676012157071003026066 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabite daljša, bolj zapletena gesla. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izbor varnega gesla

Naredite gesla dovolj enostavna, da si jih lahko zapomnite, vendar zelo težka za ugibanje (tudi za računalniške programe).

Izbira dobrega gesla vam bo pomagala obdržati vaš računalnik varen. V primeru da je vaše geslo enostavno uganiti, ga lahko nekdo ugotovi in pridobi dostop do vaših osebnih podatkov.

Ljudje lahko za sistematično ugibanje gesel uporabijo računalniške programe. Zato je lahko geslo, ki bi ga človek težko uganil, za računalnik izjemno enostavno. Tukaj je nekaj namigov za izbiro dobrega gesla:

V geslu uporabite mešanico velikih in malih črk, števil, simbolov in presledkov. To naredi ugibanje težavnejše. Na voljo za izbiranje je več simbolov, zato mora napadalec pri ugibanju vašega gesla preveriti več možnih gesel.

Dober način za izbiro gesla je ta, da vzamete prvo črko vsake besede v frazi, ki si jo lahko zapomnite. Fraza je lahko ime filma, knjige, pesmi ali albuma. Na primer "Flatland: A Romance of Many Dimensions" bi postal F:ARoMD ali faromd ali f: aromd.

Naredite svoja gesla kolikor je mogoče dolga. Več črk kot vsebujejo, dlje časa bo oseba ali računalnik porabila za njihovo ugibanje.

Ne uporabite besed, ki je pojavijo v slovarju v kateremukoli jeziku. Programi za zlom gesel najprej preizkusijo slovarje. Najbolj pogosto geslo je "geslo" - ljudje lahko takšna gesla zelo hitro uganejo!

Ne uporabljajte osebnih podatkov kot so datum, število na registrski tablici ali ime družinskega člana.

Ne uporabljajte samostalnikov.

Izberite geslo, ki ga je mogoče hitro vtipkati in s tem zmanjšajte možnost, da lahko nekdo, ki stoji za vami in vas gleda, ugotovi kaj ste vtipkali.

Nikoli si ne zapišite gesel. Enostavno jih je mogoče najti!

Uporabite različna gesla za različne stvari.

Uporabite različna gesla za različne račune.

V primeru da za vse račune uporabljate isto geslo, bo tisti, ki ga ugane, lahko nemudoma dostopal do vseh vaših računov.

Veliko gesel si je lahko težko zapomniti. Čeprav to ni tako varno, si lahko zapomnite isto geslo za stvari, ki niso pomembne (na primer spletišče) in druga gesla za pomembne stvari (kot na primer račun spletnega bančništva in vaša e-pošta).

Redno spreminjajte svoje geslo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrationtargets.page0000644000373100047300000000232712157071003027367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjevalni cilji so potrebni za do profiliranje kamere in optičnega bralnika. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Katere vrste ciljev so podprte?

Podprte so naslednje vrste ciljev:

CMP DigitalTarget

ColorChecker 24

ColorChecker DC

ColorChecker SG

i1 RGB Scan 14

LaserSoft DC Pro

QPcard 201

IT8.7/2

Cilje lahko kupite od dobro znanih ponudnikov kot so KODAK, X-Rite in LaserSoft v različnih spletnih trgovinah.

Cilje lahko kupite tudi od podjetja Wolf Faust za zelo spodobno ceno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-visualalert.page0000644000373100047300000000353312157071003025476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Omogočite vidna opozoril za blisk zaslona ali okna, ko se predvaja zvok alarma. Blisk zaslona za zvoke alarma

Vaš računalnik bo za določene vrste sporočil in dogodkov predvajal enostaven zvok alarma. V primeru, da te zvoke težko slišite, lahko nastavite, da vaš celoten zaslon ali vaše trenutno okno zabliska, ko se predvaja zvok alarma.

To je lahko uporabno tudi, če ste v okolju, kjer mora biti vaš računalnik tih, kot je na primer knjižnica. Oglejte si za podatke o tem kako narediti zvok alarma nem in nato omogočite vidna opozorila.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Slišanje.

Vklopite Vidne alarme. Izberite ali želite, da zabliska celoten zaslon ali samo naslov trenutnega okna.

Vidne alarme lahko hitro spremenite s klikom na ikono splošnega dostopa v vrhnji vrstici in izbiro Vidni alarmi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/clock-timezone.page0000644000373100047300000000261012157071003025310 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje drugih časovnih pasov in ogled časa v drugih mestih. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba časovnega pasu

Click on the clock in the middle of the top bar.

Izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa.

Morda boste morali klikniti Odkleni in vpisati skrbniško geslo.

Kliknite na svoje mesto na zemljevidu in nato izberite svoej trenutno mesto s spustnega seznama.

Čas prikazan v zgornji vrstici se bo samodejno posodobil, ko izberete drugo mesto. Čas v okno bo bil posodobljen, ko naslednjič dostopate do okna Nastavitve datuma in časa. Morda boste želeli uro nastaviti ročno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-list.page0000644000373100047300000000655012157071003025211 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirajte kateri podatki so prikazani v stolpcih v seznamskem pogledu. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Možnosti seznama stolpcev v upravljalniku datotek

V seznamskem pogledu upravljalnika datotek lahko prikažete devet stolpcev s podatki. Kliknite Datoteke v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Možnosti in izberite zavihek Izpiši stolpce za izbiro vidnih stolpcev.

Za izbiro vrstnega reda v katerem se pojavijo izbrani stolpci uporabite gumba Premakni navzgor in Premakni navzdol.

 <gui>Ime</gui>

Ime map in datotek v mapi za ogled.

 <gui>Velikost</gui>

Velikost mape je podana kot število predmetov, ki so v mapi. Velikost datoteke je podana kot bajti, KB ali MB.

 <gui>Vrsta</gui>

Prikazano kot mapa ali datoteka vrste kot je dokument PDF, slika JPEG, zvok MP3 in več.

 <gui>Spremenjeno</gui>

Poda datum in čas zadnje spremembe datoteke.

 <gui>Lastnik</gui>

Ime uporabnika, ki je lastnik datoteke ali mape.

 <gui>Skupina</gui>

Skupina, ki je lastnik datoteke. Na domačih računalnikih je vsak uporabnik v svoji lastni skupini. Skupine se včasih uporabljajo v poslovnih okoljih, kjer so uporabniki morda v skupinah glede na oddelek ali projekt.

 <gui>Dovoljenja</gui>

Prikaže dovoljenja za dostop do datoteke na primer drwxrw-r--

Prvi znak - je vrsta datoteke. - pomeni običajna datoteka in d pomeni mapa.

Naslednji trije znaki rwx določijo dovoljenja uporabnika, ki je lastnik datoteke.

Naslednji trije znaki rw- določajo dovoljenja vseh članov skupine, ki je lastnik datoteke.

Zadnji trije znaki v stolpcu r-- določajo dovoljenja za vse uporabnike na sistemu.

Vsak znak ima naslednje pomene:

r : dovoljenje za branje.

w : dovoljenje za branje.

x : dovoljenje za izvajanje.

-: brez dovoljenja.

 <gui>Vrsta MIME</gui>

Prikaže predmetovo vrsto MIME.

 <gui>Mesto</gui>

Pot do mesta datoteke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-booklet.page0000644000373100047300000000335212157071003025660 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako natisniti prepognjeno, večstransko knjižico z uporabo papirja A4 ali papirja velikosti pisma. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Tiskanje knjižice

Knjižico lahko natisnete iz datoteke PDF.

V primeru da želite knjižico natisniti iz dokumenta LibreOffice, ga boste morali najprej izvoziti v PDF z izbiro DatotekaIzvozi kot PDF .... Število strani v vašem dokumentu mora biti večkratnik števila 4 (4, 8, 12, 16, ...). Morda boste morali dodati do 3 prazne strani.

V primeru, da število strani v vašem dokumentu PDF ni večkratnik števila 4, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani (1, 2, 3), da bo število strani v dokumentu večkratnik števila 4. Za to lahko:a

Ustvarite dokument LibreOffice z zahtevanim številom (1-3) praznih strani.

Prazne strani izvozite v PDF z izbiro DatotekaIzvozi kot PDF ….

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler ali PDF Mod in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Izberite vrsto tiskalnika, ki jo boste uporabili za tiskanje s seznama spodaj:

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-disabletouchpad.page0000644000373100047300000000267012157071003026654 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Med tipkanjem izklopite drsno ploščico za preprečitev nenamernih klikov. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Onemogočitev sledilne ploščice med tipkanjem

Drsniki na prenosnikih so pogosto na mestih, kamor med tipkanjem položite svoje zapestje. To lahko včasih med tipkanjem povzroči neželene klike. Drsno ploščico lahko med tipkanjem izklopite. Delovati bo začela kratek čas po vašem zadnjem pritisku na tipko.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

In the Touchpad section, check Disable while typing.

The Touchpad section only appears if your system has a touchpad.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrate-printer.page0000644000373100047300000000304512157071003027113 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje vašega tiskalnika je pomembno za tiskanje natančnih barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kako umeriti tiskalnik?

Obstajata dva načina za profiliranje tiskalnika:

Uporaba fotospektrometrične naprave kot je Pantone ColorMunki

Prejemanje in tiskanje referenčne datoteke iz barvnega podjetja

Uporaba barvnega podjetja za ustvarjanje profila tiskalnika je običajno najcenejša možnost, če imate na voljo le eno ali dve različni vrsti papirja. S spletišča podjetja prejemite referenčne grafe, jih natisnite in v ovojnici pošljite podjetju, kjer bodo papir optično prebrali, ustvarili profil in vam poslali natančen profil ICC preko e-pošte.

Uporaba dragih naprav kot je ColorMunki je smiselna le, če profilirate večje število vrst črnila ali papirja.

Če zamenjate ponudnika črnila, ponovno umerite tiskalnik!

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/help-irc.page0000644000373100047300000000304712157071003024075 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dobite podporo v živo na IRC-u. Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org IRC

IRC pomeni Internet Relay Chat. To je realnočasovni sistem sporočanja za več uporabnikov. Na GNOME strežniku IRC lahko dobite pomoč in nasvete razvijalcev in drugih uporabnikov GNOME.

Za povezavo s strežnikom IRC GNOME s programom empathy ali xchat ali z uporabo spletnega vmesnika kot je mibbit.

Za ustvaritev računa IRC v Empathy si oglejte dokumentacijo Empathy.

Strežnik IRC GNOME je irc.gnome.org. Morda ga boste videli tudi kot "omrežje GIMP". Če je vaš računalnik pravilno nastavljen, lahko za dostop do kanala gnome kliknete na povezavo .

While IRC being a real-time discussion, people tend to not reply immediately, so be patient.

Med klepetom na IRCU veljajo pravila vedenja GNOME.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-order.page0000644000373100047300000000360412157071003025334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zbiranje strani in obratni vrstni red tiskanja. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Tiskanje strani v drugem vrstnem redu
Obrnjeno

Tiskalniki običajno najprej natisnejo prvo stran in nazadnje zadnjo stran, zato so strani v obratnem vrstnem redu, ko jih obrnete. Če želite, lahko vrstni red tiskanja obrnete.

Za obratni vrstni red:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V zavihku Splošno okna tiskanja pod Kopije izberite Obratno. Najprej bo natisnjena zadnja stran in tako naprej.
Zbiranje

V primeru da tiskate več kot eno kopijo dokumenta, bodo izpisi privzeto združeni po številki strani (naprej bodo natisnjene vse kopije prve strani, nato vse kopije druge strani in tako naprej). Zbiranje bo izpise združilo po kopijah z vsemi stranmi.

Za zbiranje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V zavihku Splošno okna tiskanja pod Kopije izberite Zberi.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/wacom-multi-monitor.page0000644000373100047300000000270312157071003026313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Preslikava tablice Wacom na določen zaslon. Izberite zaslon Michael Hill

In a multi-monitor setup, the user is able to select which monitor is mapped by the graphics tablet.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Kliknite Preslikaj na zaslon ....

Izberite Preslikaj na en zaslon.

Poleg Izhoda izberite zaslon, do katerega želite prejeti vhod iz grafične tablice.

Izbrali boste lahko samo nastavljene zaslone.

Kliknite Zapri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-where.page0000644000373100047300000000457712157071004024761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nasvet kje shraniti varnostne kopije in katero vrsto naprave shrambe uporabiti. c Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Kam shraniti varnostne kopije

Varnostne kopije svojih datoteke shranjujte ločeno od računalnika - na primer na zunanjem trdem disku. Na ta način bo varnostna kopija v primeru okvare računalnika ostala nedotaknjena. Za največjo varnost varnostne kopije ne imejte v isti zgradbi kot računalnik. V primeru požara ali kraje sta lahko v primeru, da ju shranjujete na istem mestu, obe kopiji podatkov izgubljeni.

Pomembno je tudi, da izberete primeren medij varnostne kopije. Varnostne kopije morate shraniti na napravo, ki ima dovolj prostora na disku za varnostno kopijo vseh datotek.

Možnosti krajevne in oddaljene shrambe

Pomnilniški ključ USB (nizka velikost)

Notranji diskovni pogon (visoka velikost)

Zunanji trdi disk (običajno visoka velikost)

Pogon priključen na omrežje (visoka velikost)

Datotečni strežnik/Strežnik za varnostne kopije (visoka velikost)

Zapisljivi CD-ji ali DVD-ji (nizka/srednja velikost)

Storitev varnostnih kopij na spletu kot Amazon S3 ali Ubuntu One (shrani vaše podatke, razpoložljiv prostor je odvisen od cene)

Nekatere izmed teh možnosti imajo dovoljšnjo velikost, da lahko shranite vsako datoteko vašega sistema. To je poznano tudi kot popolna varnostna kopija sistema

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-workspaces-switch.page0000644000373100047300000000405512157071004027160 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Use the workspace selector. Preklop med delovnimi površinami Uporaba miške:

Open the Activities overview.

At the top left of the screen, click the Applications menu and choose Activities Overview.

Click on a workspace in the workspace selector on the right side of the screen to view the open windows on that workspace.

Click on any window thumbnail to activate the workspace.

Alternatively, you can switch between workspaces by clicking the workspace identifier at the right-hand side of the window list on the bottom bar and selecting the workspace you want to use from the menu.

Uporaba tipkovnice:

Press SuperPage Up to move to a workspace which is above the current workspace in the workspace selector.

Press SuperPage Down to move to a workspace which is below the current workspace in the workspace selector.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-disconnecting.page0000644000373100047300000000643012157071004027640 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Morda imate šibek signal ali pa vam omrežje ne dopušča primerne povezave. Zakaj se povezava z mojim brezžičnim omrežjem kar naprej prekinja?

Morda boste ugotovili, da se povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem prekine, čeprav ste želeli ostati povezani. Vaš računalnik se bo običajno poskusil ponovno povezati takoj, ko se to zgodi (omrežja ikona v vrhnji vrstici se bo vrtela, če se računalnik poskusa ponovno povezati), vendar je to lahko moteče, še posebno če ste ob tem času uporabljali internet.

Šibek brezžični signal

Pogost vzrok za prekinitev povezave z brezžičnim omrežjem je šibek signal. Brezžične povezave imajo omejen doseg zato v primeru, da ste predaleč od osnovne brezžične postaje, morda ne boste imeli dovolj močnega signala za vzdrževanje povezave. Zidovi in drugi predmeti med vami in postajo lahko naredijo signal šibkejši.

Omrežna ikona v vrhnji vrstici prikaže kako močan je vaš brezžičen signal. V primeru da je signal šibek, se poskusite premakniti bližje brezžični postaji.

Omrežna povezava ni bila ustrezno vzpostavljena

Včasih je ob poskusu povezave z brezžičnim omrežjem morda najprej videti, da ste se uspešno povezali, vendar bo nato povezava prekinjena. To se običajno zgodi, ker je bil vaš računalnik le delno uspešen pri povezovanju z omrežjem. Računalnik je uspel vzpostaviti povezavo, vendar povezave ni mogel zaključiti in je zato povezavo prekinil.

Mogoč vzrok za to je, da ste vnesli napačno šifrirno frazo ali pa da vaš računalnik ni dovoljen na omrežju (ker omrežje za prijavo zahteva uporabniško ime).

Nezanesljiva brezžična strojna oprema/gonilniki

Nekatera strojna oprema brezžičnih omrežij je lahko nezanesljiva. Brezžična omrežja so zapletena, zato imajo brezžične kartice in osnovne postaje občasno manjše težave in lahko prekinejo povezave. To je moteče, vendar se z veliko napravami pogosto dogaja. V primeru da se vaše omrežne povezave občasno prekinjajo, je to lahko vzrok. V primeru da se to dogaja zelo pogosto, preizkusite drugo strojno opremo.

Zaposlena brezžična omrežja

Z brezžičnimi povezavami na zaposlenih mestih (na primer na univerzah in v kavarnah) se pogosto poskuša povezati več računalnikov hkrati. Včasih so ta omrežja prezaposlena in ne morejo upravljati vseh računalnikov, ki se poskušajo povezati, zato povezavo z nekaterimi od njih prekinejo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-whyimportant.page0000644000373100047300000000611412157071004026252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Upravljanje barv je pomembno za razvijalce, fotografe in umetnike. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj je upravljanje z barvami pomembno?

Upravljanje barv je opravilo zajemanja barv na vhodni naprav, njihov prikaz na zaslonu in tisk medtem ko so natančne barve in obseg upravljane na vsakem mediju.

Potrebo po barvnem upravljanju je najbrž najlažje razložiti s fotografijo ptice na leden zimski dan.

Ptič na zmrznjenem zidu kot jo vidi fotoaparat

Običajno prikaže preveč nasičen moder kanal, ki povzroči, da je slika videti mrzlo.

To uporabnik vidi na zaslonu običajnega poslovnega prenosnika.

Opazite kako bela ni popolnoma bela in da je črno oko sedaj blatno rjavo.

To vidi uporabnik, ko sliko natisne na običajnem brizgalnem tiskalniku.

Osnovna težava je, da vsaka naprava lahko upravlja različen obseg barv. Zato boste morda lahko zajeli fotografijo električno modre barve, vendar je večina tiskalnikov ne bo mogla natisniti.

Večina slikovnih naprav zajema v RGB (rdeča, zelena, modra) in morajo za tiskanje pretvoriti v CMYK (sinja, magenta, rumena in črna). Druga težava je, da ne morate imeti bele barve, zato je lahko belina le tako dobra kot papir.

Druga težava so enote. Brez merila barv ni mogoče vedeti, če je 100% rdeča blizu infrardeče barve ali najtemnejša rdeča barva na tiskalniku. 50% rdeča na enem zaslonu je verjetno 62% rdeča na drugem zaslonu. To je enako kot da bi nekomu povedali, da ste prevozili 7 enot, ne bi pa povedali, ali je to 7 metrov ali kilometrov.

V barvah so enote gamut. Gamut je obseg barv, ki jih je mogoče prikazati. Naprava kot je DSLR fotoaparat ima lahko zelo velik gamut in lahko zajame vse barve v sončnem zahodu, projektor pa ima majhen gamut, zato bodo vse barve videti "izprano".

V nekaterih primerih je mogoče izhod naprave popraviti s spreminjanjem poslanih podatkov, v primerih, ko to ni mogoče (električno modre ni mogoče natisniti), pa je treba uporabniku pokazati, kakšen bi bil rezultat.

Za fotografe je smiselno uporabiti polen tonski obseg barvne naprave, ki lahko naredi spremembe barve gladkejše. Za drugo grafiko boste morda želeli barvo ujemati natančno, kar je pomembno, če želite natisniti kozarec z logotipom Red Hat, ki mora biti natanko Red Hat rdeča.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-initial-check.page0000644000373100047300000000575312157071004032751 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Prepričajte se, da so nastavitve omrežja pravilne in se pripravite za naslednjih nekaj korakov odpravljanja težav. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji Preverite svojo internetno povezavo.

V naslednjem koraku boste preverili nekaj osnovnih podatkov o svoji brezžični povezavi. S tem boste preverili, da vaše težave ne povzroča relativno enostavna težava kot je izklopljena brezžična povezava in se pripravili na naslednjih nekaj korakov za odpravljanje težav.

Prepričajte se, da vaš prenosnik ni povezan z žično internetno povezavo.

V primeru da imate zunanjo brezžično kartico (kot je brezžična kartica USB ali kartica PCMICA), se prepričajte, da je vstavljena v ustrezen prostor na računalniku.

V primeru da je brezžična kartica znotraj računalnika, se prepričajte, da je stikalo brezžičnega prilagodilnika vklopljeno.

Kliknite na ikono omrežja in se prepričajte, da je Brezžično omrežje VKLOPLJENO. Preverite tudi, da letalski način ni vklopljen.

Odprite Terminal, vtipkajte nm-tool in pritisnite Enter.

Program bo prikazal podrobnosti o vaši brezžični strojni opremi in stanju povezave. Poglejte po seznamu podatkov in si oglejte, če obstaja odsek povezan z vašo brezžično kartico. Podatki za omrežno napravo so ločeni z vrstico črtic. V primeru da najdete vrstico z besedilom Stanje: povezano, vaša brezžična kartica deluje in je povezana z brezžičnim usmerjevalnikom.

V primeru da ste povezani s svojim brezžičnim usmerjevalnikom in še vedno ne morete dostopati do interneta, morda vaš usmerjevalnik ni nastavljen pravilno ali pa ima vaš ponudnik internetnih storitev tehnične težave. Preglejte svoj usmerjevalnik in vodiče za nastavitev svojega ponudnika internetnih storitev ali stopite v stik s podporo svojega ponudnika internetnih storitev.

V primeru da izhod nm-toll ne nakazuje, da ste bili povezani z omrežjem, kliknite Naprej za nadaljevanje z naslednjim delom vodnika za odpravljanje težav.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-how.page0000644000373100047300000000464612157071004024441 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba Déjà Dup (ali katerega drugega programa za izdelavo varnostnih kopij) za izdelavo kopij vrednih datotek in storitev za zaščito pred izgubo podatkov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako ustvariti varnostno kopijo

Najlažji način ustvarjanja varnostne kopije datotek in nastavitev je, da programu varnostnih kopij pustite upravljanje opravil varnostnih kopij. Na voljo so številni programi varnostnih kopij, na primer Déjà Dup.

Pomoč za vaš izbrani program vas bo vodila skozi nastavljanje možnosti varnostne kopije in tudi skozi obnovitev podatkov, če pride do težav.

Druga možnost je enostavno kopiranje vaših datotek na varno mesto kot je zunanji trdi disk, drug računalnik na omrežju ali pogon USB. Vaše osebne datoteke in nastavitve so ponavadi v vaši domači mapi, zato jih lahko kopirate od tam.

Količina podatkov katerih varnostno kopijo lahko ustvarite je omejena z velikostjo naprave shrambe. V primeru da imate na svoji napravi varnostne kopije prostor, je najboljše narediti varnostno kopijo cele domače mape z naslednjimi izjemami:

Datoteke, ki že imajo varnostne kopije drugje, kot na primer na CD-ju, DVD-ju ali drugih odstranljivih medijih.

Datoteke, ki jih lahko enostavno ponovno ustvarite. Če ste na primer programer, vam ni treba ustvariti varnostne kopije datotek, ki so proizvedene, ko kodno prevajate svoje programe. Namesto tega se prepričajte, da ustvarite varnostno kopijo izvirnih izvornih datotek.

Vaše datoteke smeti, ki jih lahko najdete v ~/.local/share/Trash (mapa smeti).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-repeat-keys.page0000644000373100047300000000374112157071004026423 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavite tipkovnico tako, da ne ponavlja črk medtem ko držite tipko ali spremenite zakasnitev in hitrost ponavljanja tipk. Izklop ponavljajočih se pritiskov tipk

Privzeto se, ko pritisnete tipko na tipkovnici, črka ali simbol ponavlja dokler tipke ne izpustite. V primeru da imate težave z dovolj hitrim dvigom prsta, lahko to možnost onemogočite ali spremenite kako dolgo traja preden se pritiski tipk začnejo ponavljati.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Tipkovnica in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Izklopite Pritiski tipk se ponovijo, ko je tipka pritisnjena za popolno onemogočitev ponavljajočih tipk.

Namesto tega lahko tudi prilagodite drsnik Zakasnitev za spremembo kako dolgo morate držati tipko preden se začne ponavljati in prilagodite drsnik Hitrost za prilagoditev hitrosti ponavljanja pritiskov tipk.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-howtoimport.page0000644000373100047300000000214512157071004026100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barvne profile je najlažje uvoziti z njihovim odpiranjem. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako lahko uvozim barvne profile?

Profil lahko uvozite z dvoklikom na datoteko .ICC ali :ICM v brskalniku datotek.

Namesto tega lahko izberete Uvozi profil ... v NastavitveBarva, ko izbirate profil za napravo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-crackle.page0000644000373100047300000000433112157071004025122 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite svoje zvočne kable in gonilnike zvočne kartice. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Slišim praskanje ali brenčanje med predvajanjem zvokov

V primeru da med predvajanjem zvoka na svojem računalniku slišite praskanje ali brenčanje, imate morda težavo z zvočnimi kabli ali povezovalniki ali pa imate težavo z gonilnikom za zvočno kartico.

Preverite, da so zvočniki pravilno vklopljeni.

V primeru, da zvočniki niso polno priklopljeni ali če so vklopljeni v napačen vtič, lahko slišite brenčeč zvok.

Prepričajte se, da kabel zvočnikov/slušalk ni poškodovan.

Zvočni kabli in povezovalniki se lahko z uporabo postopoma obrabijo. Poskusite priklopiti kabel ali slušalke v drugo zvočno napravo (kot je MP3 ali CD predvajalnik) in preverite ali tudi tam slišite prasketajoč zvok. Če je zvok praskajoč, boste morda morali zamenjati kabel ali slušalke.

Preverite ali so zvočni gonilniki dobri.

Nekatere zvočne kartice na Linuxu ne delujejo zelo dobro, ker nimajo zelo dobrih gonilnikov. To težavo je težje določiti. Poskusite najti proizvajalca in model svoje zvočne kartice na internetu skupaj z iskalnim nizom "Linux" in preverite, če imajo drugi enako težavo kot vi.

Za več podrobnosti o svoji zvočni kartici lahko uporabite ukaz lspci.

 shaunm

Are we shipping any sort of device manager? If we do (or even if we recommend one, but people need to install it), and if you can get all the information you need about the sound card from that, we should link to that for getting info on your sound card.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-prefs.page0000644000373100047300000000107212157071004025350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Možnosti upravljalnika datotek usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sharing-bluetooth.page0000644000373100047300000000672612157071004026040 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Set which folders and devices are able to share over Bluetooth. Control sharing over Bluetooth

You can allow access to your Public and Downloads folders for Bluetooth file sharing, and also restrict that access to only trusted devices. Configure Bluetooth Sharing to control access to the shared folders on your computer.

A Bluetooth device is trusted if you have paired, or connected your computer to it. See .

 Share your <file>Public</file> folder over Bluetooth

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Open Sharing.

If Sharing is OFF, switch it to ON.

Select Bluetooth Sharing.

Switch Share Public Folder to ON.

If you only want to allow trusted devices to access your Public folder, switch Only share with Trusted Devices to ON.

This option is disabled by default. You should enable it if you want to prevent access to your shared files by anyone with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone or similar device nearby.

Click Close. Bluetooth-enabled devices will now be able to access files in your Public folder.

 Allow files to be shared into your <file>Downloads</file> folder

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Open Sharing.

If Sharing is OFF, switch it to ON.

Select Bluetooth Sharing.

Switch Save Received Files to Downloads Folder to ON.

If you only want to allow trusted devices to access your Downloads folder, switch Only Receive From Trusted Devices to ON.

This option is disabled by default. You should enable it if you want to prevent access to your shared files by anyone with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone or similar device nearby.

Click Close. Bluetooth-enabled devices will now be able to send files to your Downloads folder.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-paperjam.page0000644000373100047300000000236412157071004026023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako popraviti zastoj papirja je odvisno od proizvajalca in modela vašega tiskalnika. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Odstranjevanje zataknjenega papirja

Včasih tiskalnik nepravilno poda liste papirja, ki se zato zataknejo.

Priročnik za vaš tiskalnik bo ponavadi zagotovil podrobna navodila kako odpraviti zastoje papirja. Običajno morate odpreti eno od tiskalnikovih stranic, kar vam omogoča dostop do zastoja znotraj in nato trdno (a previdno!) potegniti zataknjen papir ven iz tiskalnikovega mehanizma podajanja.

Ko ste zastoj počistili, boste morda morali za nadaljevanje tiskanja pritisniti na gumb Nadaljuj. Za nekatere modele tiskalnikov boste morda za ponoven začetek posla tiskanja tiskalnik izklopiti in ponovno vklopiti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000160312157071004024206 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Create a new account, Add an existing account, Remove an account… Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Spletni računi

V oknu Spletni računi lahko vnesete podrobnosti prijave za nekatere spletne storitve (kot sta Google in Facebook). Tako boste brez težav dostopali do svojega koledarja, e-pošte, računov za klepet in podobnega brez ponovnega vnašanja podrobnosti računa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless.page0000644000373100047300000000171512157071004025014 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem, Skrita omrežja, Urejanje nastavitev povezave, Prekinitev povezave … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Brezžične povezave shaunm

Could use some organization

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/about-this-guide.page0000644000373100047300000000345312157071004025546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekaj namigov o uporabi namizne pomoči. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org O tem vodiču

Ta vodnik je bil zasnovan z namenom, da vas vodi skozi zmožnosti namizja, odgovori na vprašanja povezana z računalniki in da vam da nasvete kako čimbolj učinkovito uporabljati vaš računalnik. Vodnik smo poskušali napraviti kolikor je mogoče enostaven za uporabo:

Ta vodnik je razdeljen v majhne na naloge usmerjene teme, ne poglavja. To pomeni, da vam za iskanje odgovorov na vprašanja ni treba prebrati celotnega vodnika.

Sorodni predmeti so povezani. Povezave na dnu nekateri strani, poimenovane "Nadaljnje branje" vas bodo usmerile na sorodne teme. To vam bo poenostavilo iskanje za sorodnimi temami, ki bi vam morda pomagali opraviti določeno opravilo.

Vsebuje vgrajeno iskanje. Vrstica na vrhu brskalnika pomoči je iskalna vrstica. Rezultati iskanja se bodo začeli pojavljati takoj, ko začnete tipkati.

Ta vodnik se stalno posodablja. Čeprav poskušamo zagotoviti izčrpno zbirko podatkov, vemo, da tukaj ne bomo odgovorili na vsa vaša vprašanja. Vseeno bomo stalno dodajali več stvari, da vam bo vodič v večjo pomoč.

Hvala, ker ste si vzeli čas za branje pomoči namizja. Iskreno upamo, da vam je nikoli ne bo treba uporabiti.

-- dokumentacijska ekipa GNOME

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-removedrive.page0000644000373100047300000000557012157071004026025 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Izvrzite ali odklopite USB ključek, CD, DVD ali drugo napravo. Varna odstranitev zunanjega pogona

Ko uporabljate naprave zunanje shrambe kot so USB ključki, jih pred odklopom varno odstranite. V primeru da napravo izklopite brez varne odstranitve, tvegate odklop naprave medtem ko jo program še vedno uporablja. To lahko povzroči izgubo ali poškodbo nekaterih datotek. Iste korake lahko uporabite za izvrzitev optičnega diska kot je CD ali DVD.

Za izvrzitev odstranljive naprave:

V pregledu Dejavnosti odprite Datoteke.

Najdite napravo v stranski vrstici. Poleg imena naj bi imela majhno ikono imenovano izvrzi. Za varno odstranjevanje naprave kliknite nanjo.

Namesto tega lahko desno kliknite na napravo v stranski vrstici in izberite Izvrzi.
Varna odstranitev naprave, ki je v uporabi

If any of the files on the device are open and in use by an application, you will not be able to safely remove the device. You will be prompted with a window telling you Volume is busy. To safely remove the device:

Kliknite Prekliči.

Zaprite vse datoteke na napravi.

Kliknite ikono za odklop, da varno odstranite oz. odklopite napravo.

Namesto tega lahko desno kliknite na napravo v stranski vrstici in izberite Izvrzi.

Izberete lahko tudi Vseeno odklopi za odstranitev naprave brez zapiranja datotek. To lahko povzroči napake v programih, v katerih so te datoteke odprte.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-middleclick.page0000644000373100047300000000667312157071004025775 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabite srednji miškin gumb za odpiranje programov, lepljenje besedila, odpiranje zavihkov in več. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Srednji klik

Veliko mišk in nekatere drsne ploščice imajo srednji miškin gumb. Na miškah z drsnim koleščkom lahko običajno za srednji klik pritisnete drsni kolešček. V primeru da nimate srednjega miškinega gumba, lahko za srednji klik hkrati pritisnete levi in desni miškin gumb.

Na drsnih ploščicah, ki podpirajo udarce z več prsti, lahko za srednji klik enkrat udarite s tremi prsti. Da bo to delovalo, morate v nastavitvah omogočiti klikanje z udarjanjem.

Veliko programov uporablja srednji klik za napredne bližnjice klikanja.

Ena od pogostih bližnjic je lepljenje izbranega besedila (to se včasih imenuje lepljenje osnovne izbire). Izberite besedilo, ki ga želite prilepiti, nato pojdite na mesto lepljenja in srednje kliknite. Besedilo bo prilepljeno na položaj miške.

Lepljenje besedila s srednjim miškinim gumbom je popolnoma ločeno od običajnega odložišča. Izbira besedila ne kopira na odložišče. Ta hiter način lepljenja deluje le s srednjim miškinim gumbom.

Na drsnikih običajen klik v prazen prostor premakne za določeno količino (kot je ena stran) v kliknjeni smeri. Lahko tudi srednje kliknete v prazen prostor za premik natanko na mesto klika.

In the Activities overview, you can quickly open a new window for an application in its own new workspace with middle-click. Simply middle-click on the application's icon, either in the dash on the left, or in the applications overview. The applications overview is diplayed using the grid button in the dash.

Večina spletnih brskalnikov vam dovoli hitro odpiranje povezav v zavihkih s srednjim miškinim klikom. Kliknite na povezavo s srednjim miškinim gumbom in odprla se bo v novem zavihku. Pri kliku na povezavo v spletnem brskalniku Firefox bodite pozorni. V brskalniku Firefox bo srednji klik drugje kot na povezavi poskusil naložiti izbrano besedilo URL, kot če bi s srednjim klikom prilepili besedilo v naslovno vrstico in pritisnili Enter.

V upravljalniku datotek srednji klik služi dvema vlogama. V primeru, da srednje kliknete na mapo, se bo odprla v novem zavihku. To posnema obnašanje priljubljenih spletnih brskalnikov. V primeru, da srednje kliknete datoteko, jo bo odprl, kot če bi jo dvokliknili.

Nekateri posebni programi vam omogočajo uporabo srednjega miškinega klika za druge zmožnosti. V pomoči za program iščite srednji klik ali srednji miškin gumb.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-othersconnect.page0000644000373100047300000000453612157071004026041 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavitve (kot je geslo) za omrežno povezavo lahko shranite, da se lahko z njo povežejo vsi uporabniki računalnika. Drugi uporabniki se ne morejo povezati z internetom shaunm

Language cleanup, admin -> administrative/administrator. We need some standard language. grep for similar.

V primeru da ste nastavili omrežno povezavo, vendar se drugi uporabniki ne morejo povezati z njo, verjetno ob poskusu povezave ne vnašajo pravilnega gesla. Na primer, če imate brezžično povezavo, morda ne vnašate pravega brezžičnega gesla.

Povezavo lahko nastavite tako, da lahko vsi uporabljajo povezavo za omrežno povezavo. To pomeni, da morate povezavo nastaviti le enkrat in vsi ostali na računalniku se bodo lahko z njo povezali, ne da bi jim bilo treba odgovarjati na vprašanja. Za to:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite Žično ali Brezžično s seznama na levi (odvisno od tega katero omrežno povezavo želite spremeniti).

S spustnega seznama Ime omrežja izberite povezavo, za katero želite, da jo lahko uporabijo vsi, in kliknite Nastavi.

Izberite Na voljo vsem uporabnikom in kliknite Shrani. Za shranitev sprememb boste morali vnesti skrbniško geslo. To lahko storijo le skrbniki.

Drugi uporabniki računalnika bodo lahko to povezavo uporabljali brez vnašanja dodatnih podrobnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-streaks.page0000644000373100047300000000366712157071004025707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V primeru da so izpisi progasti, bledi ali pa jim manjkajo barve, preverite ravni črnila ali očistite glavo tiskalnika. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Zakaj so na mojih izpisih proge, črte ali napačne barve? shaunm

This had a seealso and two inline links to printing-inklevel. I removed printing-inklevel for 3.0. If it gets written, add the links back.

V primeru da so vaši izpisi črtasti, bledi, imajo vrstice, ki tam ne bi smele biti, ali so slabe kakovosti, je to morda zaradi težave s tiskalnikom ali nizke ravni črnila/tonerja.

Pojemajoče besedilo ali slike

Morda vam zmanjkuje črnila ali tonerja. Preverite svojo zalogo črnila/tonerja in kupite novo kartušo, če je to potrebno.

Proge in črte

V primeru da imate brizgalni tiskalnik, je glava tiskalnika morda umazana ali delno blokirana. Poskusite očistiti glavo tiskalnika (oglejte si priročnik tiskalnika).

Napačne barve

Tiskalniku je morda zmanjkalo ene barve črnila ali tonerja. Preverite svojo zalogo črnila/tonerja in kupite novo kartušo, če je to potrebno.

Nazobčene ali neravne črte

V primeru da so črte, ki bi morale biti ravne nazobčene, morate morda poravnati glavo tiskalnika. Za podrobnosti o tem si oglejte priročnik tiskalnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-viewgrid.page0000644000373100047300000000317712157071004026216 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Sprememba načina na katerega so predstavljeni dokumenti. Oglejte datotek na seznamu ali mrežu Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to open Documents. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to change between list and grid format.

Privzeto so zbirke in dokumenti predstavljene v obliki Mreže. Za ogled v obliki Seznama:

Pojdite v zgornjo vrstico in kliknite na Dokumenti za prikaz menija programa.

Kliknite Seznam iz odseka Ogled kot.

Seznamski pogled vsebuje stolpce, ki priakzujejo vrsto dokumenta in datum spremembe in ali je dokument shranjen krajevno ali v Google Docs ali SkyDrive.

Kliknite na Mrežo v meniju programa, da se vrnete nazaj na privzeto obliko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-hibernate.page0000644000373100047300000000653512157071004025473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Mirovanje je privzeto onemogočeno, ker ni dobro podprto. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Kako dam računalnik v mirovanje?

Ko je računalnik v mirovanju, se vsi vaši programi ter dokumenti shranijo in računalnik se popolnoma ugasne, tako da ne uporablja energije. Programi in dokumenti bodo še vedno odprti, ko znova vklopite računalnik.

Na žalost mirovanje v veliko primerih ne deluje, kar lahko povzroči izgubo podatkov, če pričakujete, da se bodo vaši dokumenti in programi ponovno odprli, ko računalnik ponovno vklopite. Zato je mirovanje privzeto onemogočeno.

Preizkus, če mirovanje deluje Pred prehodom v stanje mirovanje vedno shranite svoje delo

Pred prehodom v mirovanje ali stanje pripravljenosti svoje delo shranite za vsak slučaj, če bi šlo kaj narobe in odprtih programov in dokumentov ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika ne bi bilo mogoče obnoviti.

Za preizkus, če mirovanje deluje na vašem računalniku, lahko uporabite ukazno vrstico.

Odprite Terminal s prtiiskom Ctrl Altt ali iskanjem terminal v pregledni plošči.

Odprite Terminal z iskanjem terminal v Pregledu dejavnosti.

Kot skrbnik v terminal vnesite pm-hibernate in pritisnite Enter.

Ob pozivu vnesite svoje geslo.

Ko se računalnik izklopi, ga ponovno vklopite. Ali so se vaši programi ponovno odprli?

Če mirovanje ne deluje, preverite, če je velikost vašega izmenjevalnega razdelka vsaj tako velika kot je velikost vašega razpoložljivega pomnilnika (RAM-a).
Omogočitev mirovanja

Če preizkus mirovanja deluje, lahko za mirovanje še naprej uporabljate ukaz pm-hibernate.

Možnost mirovanja lahko tudi omogočite v menijih. Z urejevalnikom besedila ustvarite /etc/polkit-1/localauthority/50-local.d/org.gnome.enable-hibernate.pkla. V datoteko dodajte naslednje vrstice in jo shranite:

[Re-enable hibernate by default] Identity=unix-user:* Action=org.freedesktop.upower.hibernate ResultActive=yes
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-envelopes.page0000644000373100047300000000417112157071004026222 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prepričajte se, da je ovojnica/oznaka obrnjena v pravo smer in da ste izbrali pravilno velikost papirja. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Tiskanje ovojnic in oznak

Večina tiskalnikov vam bo omogočala tiskanje neposredno na ovojnico ali papir oznak. To je še posebno uporabno, če morate poslati veliko pisem.

Tiskanje na ovojnice

Pri tiskanju na ovojnice obstajata dve stvari, ki jih morate vedeti. Prva je, da tiskalnik ve, kakšne velikosti je ovojnica. Potem ko kliknete Natisni in se pojavi okno Tiskanje, pojdite v zavihek Nastavitev strani in izberite vrsto papirja kot "ovojnico", če jo lahko. V primeru da tega ne morete storiti, si oglejte, če lahko spremenite velikost papirja na velikost ovojnice (na primer "C5"). Na paketu ovojnic piše, kakšne velikosti so. Večina ovojnic je standardnih velikosti.

Prepričati se morate, da so ovojnice v podajalnik tiskalnika naložene s pravo stranjo navzgor. Za to preverite priročnik tiskalnika ali poskusite natisniti eno ovojnico in preverite katera stran mora biti obrnjena navzgor.

Nekateri tiskalniki niso zasnovani za tiskanje ovojnic, še posebno nekateri laserski tiskalniki. Preverite priročnik svojega tiskalnika za ogled, če sprejema ovojnice. V nasprotnem primeru lahko tiskalnik z vstavljanjem ovojnic poškodujete.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-setup.page0000644000373100047300000000576112157071004025370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavite tiskalnik, ki je povezan z vašim računalnikom. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavitev krajevnega tiskalnika

Vaš sistem lahko prepozna veliko vrsti tiskalnikov samodejno. Večina tiskalnikov je povezana preko USB kabla, ki se pripne na vaš računalnik.

You do not need to select whether you want to install network or local printer now. They are listed in one window.

 shaunm

Do we have anything on what to do when your printer isn't found? 3.0.1?

Prepričajte se, da je tiskalnik vklopljen.

Povežite tiskalnik s svojim sistemom preko ustreznega kabla. Morda boste na zaslonu videli dejavnost medtem ko sistem išče gonilnike in morda se boste morali za njihovo namestitev overiti.

A message will appear when the system is finished installing the printer. Select Print Test Page to print a test page, or Options to make additional changes in the printer setup.

V primeru da vaš tiskalnik ni bil samodejno nameščen, ga lahko dodate v nastavitvah tiskalnika.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Kliknite gumb Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo.

Kliknite gumb +.

In the pop-up window, select your new printer. Click Add.

V primeru da se vaš tiskalnik ne pojavi v pojavnem oknu Dodaj tiskalnik, boste morda morali namestiti gonilnike za tiskalnik.

Add link to above when page is ready. xref="printing-setup-drivers" install print drivers.

Ko končate z nameščanjem tiskalnika, boste morda želeli spremeniti svoj privzeti tiskalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/prefs-display.page0000644000373100047300000000130612157071004025151 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Background, size and rotation, brightness… Zaslon usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-changepicture.page0000644000373100047300000000366512157071005026177 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje fotografije prijavnemu in uporabniškim zaslonom. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Spremenite svojo fotografijo v prijavnem zaslonu.

Ko se prijavite ali preklopite uporabnike, boste videli seznam uporabnikov z njihovimi prijavnimi fotografijami. Fotografijo lahko spremenite na eno od priloženih ali pa na svojo sliko. S spletno kamero lahko zajamete novo prijavno fotografijo.

Click your name on the top bar, then click the picture next to your name to open the Users window.

Kliknite na sliko poleg vašega imena. Prikazana bo spustna galerija z nekaj privzetimi prijavnimi fotografijami. Če vam je kakšna všeč, nanjo kliknite, da jo uporabite zase.

V primeru da želite uporabiti sliko, ki jo že imate na svojem računalniku, kliknite Brskaj za več slik.

V primeru da imate spletno kamero, lahko novo prijavno fotografijo zajamete zdaj s klikom na Zajemi fotografijo. Zajemite svojo sliko in nato spremenite velikost in premaknite kvadratni obris za obrez delov, ki jih ne želite. V primeru da vam slika ni všeč, kliknite Zavrzi fotografijo ali pa kliknite Prekliči, če želite zajem slike preklicati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-apps-favorites.page0000644000373100047300000000426512157071005026447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje (ali odstranitev) ikon pogosto uporabljenih programov na pregledno ploščo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Pripnite svoje priljubljene programe na pregledno ploščo

Za dodajanje programa v pregledno ploščo za enostaven dostop:

Open the Activities overview by clicking Activities at the top left of the screen

Click the Applications menu at the top left of the screen and choose the Activities Overview item from the menu.

Click the grid button in the dash and find the application you want to add.

Right-click the application icon and select Add to Favorites.

Alternatively, you can click-and-drag the icon into the dash.

To remove an application icon from the dash, right-click the application icon and select Remove from Favorites.

Favorite applications also appear in the Favorites section of the Applications menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-batterywindows.page0000644000373100047300000000354112157071005026612 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vzrok te težave so lahko prilagoditve proizvajalca in različne ocene trajanja baterije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Zakaj moja baterija traja manj časa kot na Windows/Mac OS?

Nekateri računalniki kažejo, da imajo pri delovanju na Linuxu krajše trajanje baterije kot pri poganjanju na Windows ali Mac OS. En vzrok za to je, da nekateri ponudniki na Windows/Mac OS namestijo posebne programe, ki optimizirajo različne nastavitve strojne opreme/programov za dan model računalnika. Te prilagoditve so običajno visoko specifične in morda niso dokumentirane, zato jih je v Linux težko vključiti.

Na žalost ne obstaja enostaven način za uveljavitev teh prilagoditev brez znanja kaj natančno so. Morda boste ugotovili, da uporaba nekaterih načinov varčevanja z energijo pomaga. V primeru da ima vaš računalnik procesor s spremenljivo hitrostjo, je lahko sprememba te nastavitve uporabna.

Drug možen vzrok je različen način ocenjevanja trajanja baterije na Windows/Mac OS in na Linuxu. Dejansko trajanje baterije bi lahko bilo popolnoma enako, vendar različni načini dajejo različne ocene.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/privacy-name-visibility.page0000644000373100047300000000270412157071005027153 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display a symbol rather than your name in the top bar Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Skrijte svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici

Your name is displayed in the top bar by default, but you can hide your name to protect your privacy.

To hide your name in the <gui>top bar</gui>:

Click your name in the top bar.

Select SettingsPrivacy Name & Visibility.

Set Stealth Mode to On, or set Display Full Name in Top Bar to Off.

Setting Stealth Mode to On will also hide your full name when your screen is locked.

Many help topics in the GNOME Help instruct you to "Click your name in the top bar." If you hide your name in the top bar, you will need to click the small notification icon in the top bar instead.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrationdevices.page0000644000373100047300000000405312157071005027340 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podpiramo veliko število naprav za umerjanje. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kateri instrumenti za merjenje barv so podprti?

Za podporo barvnih inštrumentov se GNOME zanaša na projekt Argyll. Podprti so naslednji inštrumenti za merjenje zaslona:

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Pro (spektrometer)

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Monitor (spektrometer)

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Display 1, 2 or LT (kolorimeter)

X-Rite i1 Display Pro (kolorimeter)

X-Rite ColorMunki Design or Photo (spektrometer)

X-Rite ColorMunki Create (kolorimeter)

X-Rite ColorMunki Display (kolorimeter)

Pantone Huey (kolorimeter)

MonacoOPTIX (kolorimeter)

ColorVision Spyder 2 and 3 (kolorimeter)

Colorimètre HCFR (kolorimeter)

Pantone Huey je trenutno najcenejša in najbolje podprta strojna oprema v Linuxu.

Po zaslugi Argyll so na podprti tudi številni odbojni spektrometri, ki vam pomagajo pri umerjanju in karakterizaciji vaših tiskalnikov:

X-Rite DTP20 "Pulse" ("swipe" vrsta odbojnega spektrometra)

X-Rite DTP22 Digital Swatchbook (točkovni odbojni spektrometer)

X-Rite DTP41 (točkovni in pasovni odbojni sprektometer)

X-Rite DTP41T (točkovni in pasovni odbojni sprektometer)

X-Rite DTP51 (točkovni odbojni spektrometer)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-create.page0000644000373100047300000000436312157071005025456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ustvarite nov račun s Spletnimi računi. Ustvarite spletni račun

Nekateri računi spletnih storitev vam omogočajo ustvarjanje računa medtem ko ga dodajate Spletnim računom. To vam omogoča upravljanje vseh vaših spletnih računov z enega programa.

Odprite nastavitve Spletni računi iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Kliknite +.

Izberite Vrsto računa iz spustnega menija. Nekatere vrste računov morda ne bodo na voljo.

Za nadaljevanje kliknite Dodaj ....

Poiščite in kliknite na Vpiši se gumb ali na povezavo na strani, ki se prikaže.

Vsi spletni računi pri tem koraku ne zagotavljajo izbire ustvarjanja računa. Če je to tako pri storitvi, ki jo želite registrirati, boste morali račun ustvariti na drug način.

Izpolnite obrazec za registracijo. Verjetno boste morali vnesti osebne podrobnosti, kot sta uporabniško ime in geslo.

GNOME boste morali za uporabo s Spletnimi računi dodeliti dostop do svojega novega računa.

Vse storitve, ki jih ponuja ponudnika računa, bodo privzeto omogočene. Če želite posamezne storitve onemogočiti, jih izklopite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-display.page0000644000373100047300000000471312157071005025704 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadziranje sličice ikon, ki se uporabljajo v upravljalniku datotek. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Možnosti prikaza upravljalnika datotek

Nadzirate lahko kako upravljalnik datotek prikaže napise pod ikonami. Kliknite Datoteke v vrhnji vrstici, izberite Možnosti in izberite zavihek Prikaz.

Naslovi ikon

Ikone upravljalnika datotek z napisi

Ko uporabite ikonski pogled, lahko izberete prikaz dodatnih podrobnosti o datotekah in mapah v slikici pod vsako ikono. To je na primer uporabno, če morate pogosto videti kdo je lastnik datoteke ali kdaj je bila zadnjič spremenjena.

You can zoom in a folder by clicking the down button in the toolbar and choosing one of the Zoom options. As you zoom in, the file manager will display more and more information in captions. You can choose up to three things to show in captions. The first will be displayed at most zoom levels. The last will only be shown at very large sizes.

Podatki, ki jih lahko pokažete v sličicah ikon so enaki kot stolpci, ki jih lahko uporabite v seznamskem pogledu. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

V primeru da je okno upravljalnika datotek odprto, boste morda morali za učinek sprememb ponovno naložiti sličice ikon. Kliknite na PogledPonovno naloži ali pritisnite CtrlR.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y.page0000644000373100047300000000420412157071005023143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Videnje, poslušanje, gibčnost, braillova pisava, povečevalo zaslona ... Splošni dostop

Namizje GNOME vključuje pomožne tehnologije, ki podpirajo uporabnike z različnimi invalidnostmi in posebnimi potrebami in se sporazumevajo s pogostimi pomožnimi napravami. Do veliko zmožnosti dostopnosti je mogoče dostop iz menija dostopnosti v vrhnji vrstici.

Težave z vidom Slepota Slabovidnost Barva slepota Druge teme
Težave s sluhom
Težave z gibanjem Premikanje miške Klikanje in vlečenje Uporaba tipkovnice Druge teme
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts-setup.page0000644000373100047300000000267112157071005025352 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Shranite svoje stike v krajevnem imeniku ali na spletnem računu. Prvo začenjanje stikov Michael Hill

This assumes the reader knows how to…. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to….

Ko prvič zaženete Stike, se odpre okno Nastavitev stikov.

Če imate nastavljene spletne stike, bodo izpisani iz Krajevnega imenika. Izberite predmet s seznama in kliknite Izberi.

Kliknite Nastavitve spletnih računov za urejanje nastavitev obstoječega računa.

Če spletnih računov nimate nastavljenih, kliknite Spletni računi za začetek nastavitve. Če spletnih računov trenutno ne želite nastaviti, kliknite Krajevni imenik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-install-moonlight.page0000644000373100047300000000354712157071005026631 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Nekatera spletišča za prikaz spletnih strani uporabljajo Silverlight. Vstavek Moonlight vam omogoča ogled teh strani. Nameščanje vstavka Silverlight shaunm

Would be nice to (soft?) link to a page on the software installer

Silverlight je vstavek za vaš spletni brskalnik, ki vam omogoča ogled videov in uporabo vzajemnih spletnih strani na nekaterih spletiščih. Nekatera spletišča brez Silverlighta ne bodo delovala.

V primeru da gledate spletišče, ki zahteva Silverlight a ga nimate nameščenega, boste verjetno videli sporočilo, ki vas bo o tem obvestilo. Sporočilo bi moralo imeti navodila kako dobiti vstavek, vendar ta navodila morda ne bodo primerna za vaš spletni brskalnik ali različico Linuxa.

V primeru da želite videti spletišča, ki zahtevajo Silverlight, namestite vstavek Moonlight. To je prosta, odprtokodna različica Silverlight, ki deluje na Linuxu.

Nekatere distribucije Linux imajo kopijo Moonlight, ki jo lahko namestite z uporabo njihovega namestilnika programov. Odprite namestilnik in iščite Silverlight ali Moonlight.

V primeru da vaša distribucija programskega paketa Moonlight nima, si za več podobnosti oglejte spletišče Moonlight .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/music-player-newipod.page0000644000373100047300000000230512157071005026445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Nove iPode morate pred uporabo nastaviti z uporabo programa iTunes. Moj novi iPod ne deluje

V primeru da imate nov iPod, ki še nikoli ni bil povezan z računalnikom, ob povezavi z računalnikom Linux ne bo pravilno prepoznan. To se zgodi, ker je treba nove iPode nastaviti in posodobiti s programom iTunes, ki deluje le na Windows ali Mac OS.

Za nastavitev iPoda, namestite iTunes na računalnik Windows ali Mac in ga vklopite. Vodeni boste skozi nastavitvene korake. Ko boste vprašani za Obliko nosilca, izberite MS-DOS (FAT), Windows ali podobno. Druga oblika (HFS/Mac) z Linuxom ne deluje dobro.

Ko ste nastavitev končali, bi moral iPod ob vklopu v računalnik Linux delovati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrate-scanner.page0000644000373100047300000000254412157071005027066 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje optičnega bralnika je pomembno pri natančnemu zajemu barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako umeriti optični bralnik?

Svojo ciljno datoteko lahko optično preberete in jo shranite kot nestisnjeno sliko TIFF. Nato lahko kliknete Umeri ... prek NastavitveBarva za ustvarjanje profila za napravo.

Optični bralniki so časovno in temperaturno zelo stabilne naprave in jih običajno ni treba ponovno umerjati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-windows-states.page0000644000373100047300000000421412157071005026471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razporeditev okna na delovni površini za bolj učinkovito delo. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Premikajte in organizirajte svoja okna.

You can move and resize windows to help you work more efficiently. In addition to the dragging behavior you might expect, GNOME features shortcuts and modifiers to help you arrange windows quickly.

Premaknite okno z vlečenjem nazivne vrstice ali držanjem tipke Alt in vlečenjem kjerkoli v oknu. Za pripenjanje okna robovom zaslona in drugih oken med premikanjem držite tipko Shift.

Spremenite velikost okna z vlečenjem robov ali kota okna. Za pripenjanje okna robovom zaslona in drugih oken medtem ko spreminjate velikost držite tipko Shift.

You can also resize a maximized window by clicking the maximize button in the titlebar.

Premaknite ali spremenite velikost okna s tipkovnico. PritisniteAltF7 za premik okna ali AltF8 za spremembo velikosti okna. Uporabite smerne tipke za premik ali spremembo velikosti in nato pritisnite Enter za končanje spreminjanja velikosti okna ali Esc za njegovo vrnitev na izvirno velikost.

Razpnite okno z vlečenjem na vrh zaslona. Okno povlecite na drugo stran zaslona za njegovo razpenjanje na stran, kar vam omogoča razporeditev okna enega ob drugem.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-firewall-ports.page0000644000373100047300000000477512157071005026143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za omogočitev/onemogočitev dostopa do omrežja za program s požarnim zidom morate navesti prava omrežna vrata. Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Pogosto uporabljena vrata omrežja

To je seznam omrežnih vrat, ki jih običajno uporabljajo programi, ki zagotavljajo omrežne storitve kot sta izmenjava datotek ali ogled oddaljenega namizja. Svoj sistemski požarni zid lahko spremenite, da blokira ali omogoči dostop do teh programov. V uporabi je na tisoče vrat, zato ta preglednica ni popolna.

Vrata

Ime

Opis

5353/udp

mDNS, Avahi

Omogoča sistemom, da lahko najdejo drug drugega in opišejo, katero storitev ponujajo ne da bi vam bilo treba ročno navesti podrobnosti.

631/udp

Tiskanje

Omogoča pošiljanje tiskalniških poslov na tiskalnik preko omrežja.

631/tcp

Tiskanje

Omogoča souporabo tiskalnika z drugimi osebami preko omrežja.

5298/tcp

Prisotnost

Omogoča vam oglaševanje vašega stanja hipnega sporočanja z drugimi ljudmi v omrežju kot so "na voljo" ali "zaposleno".

5900/tcp

Oddaljeno namizje

Omogoča vam, da delite svoje namizje, tako da si ga lahko drugi ljudje ogledajo ali pomagajo na daljavo.

3689/tcp

Souporaba glasbe (DAAP)

Omogoča vam, da delite svojo glasbeno knjižnico z drugimi v omrežju.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/clock-set.page0000644000373100047300000000341412157071005024256 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite na uro v vrhnji vrstici in za spremembo datuma/časa izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba datuma in časa

Če sta datum in čas prikazana v vrhnji vrstici nepravilna ali v napačni obliki, ju lahko spremenite:

Kliknite na uro v sredini zgornje vrstice in izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa.

Morda boste morali klikniti Odkleni in vpisati skrbniško geslo.

Adjust the date and time by clicking on the arrows to choose the hour and minute. You can choose the year, month and day from the drop-down lists.

Če želite, se lahko ura samodejno posodablja, če vklopite Omrežni čas.

Ko je Omrežni čas vklopljen, bo računalnik svojo uro občasno uskladil z zelo natančno uro na internetu, zato vam tega ni treba početi ročno. To bo delovalo samo, če ste povezani na internet.

You can also change how the hour is displayed by selecting 24-hour or AM/PM format.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/video-dvd.page0000644000373100047300000000502712157071005024255 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Morda nimate nameščenih pravih kodekov ali pa je DVD iz napačne regije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Zakaj ne morem predvajati DVD-jev?

V primeru da v svoj računalnik vstavite DVD in se ne predvaja, morda nimate nameščenih pravih DVD kodekov ali pa je DVD iz druge regije.

Nameščanje pravih kodekov za predvajanje DVD

Za predvajanje DVD-jev morate imeti nameščene prave kodeke. Kodek je program, ki drugim programom omogoča branje vrste videa ali zvoka. V primeru da poskusite predvajati DVD in nimate nameščenih pravih kodekov, bi vam moral predvajalnik to sporočiti in vam ponuditi njihovo namestitev. Če se to ne zgodi, jih boste morali namestiti ročno. Vprašajte za pomoč kako to storiti na primer na podpornih forumih svoje distribucije Linux. Verjetno boste morali namestiti paketa gstreamer0.10-plugins-ugly in libdvd0.

DVD-ji so zaščiteni pred kopiranjem s sistemom CSS. To vam prepreči kopiranje DVD-jev, vendar vam prepreči tudi njihovo predvajanje, če nimate nameščenih dodatnih programov, ki upravljajo z zaščito pred kopiranjem. Kupite lahko komercialni odkodirnik DVD Fluendo, ki lahko upravlja zaščito pred kopiranjem. Deluje z Linuxom in ga lahko legalno uporabljate v vseh državah.

Preverjanje področja DVD-ja

DVD-ji imajo kodo regije, ki vam pove, v katerem področju sveta lahko predvajate DVD. Predvajalniki DVD lahko predvajajo le DVD-je iz iste regije. Na primer, če imate predvajalnik DVD regije 1, boste lahko predvajali le DVD-je iz Severne Amerike.

Pogosto lahko regijo svojega predvajalnika DVD spremenite, vendar lahko to storite le nekajkrat preden se trajno zaklene na eno regijo. Za spremembo regije DVD predvajalnika DVD na svojem računalniku uporabite regionset.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files.page0000644000373100047300000000317412157071005023477 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Datoteke Iskanje, izbris datotek, varnostne kopije, odstranljivi pogoni … Datoteke, mape in iskanje

Upravljalnik datotek Nautilus

 Pogoste naloge Več tem
Dokumenti
Odstranljivi pogoni in zunanji diski
Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij
Triki in vprašanja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-broken.page0000644000373100047300000000170212157071005024776 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpravljanje težav kot je računalnik brez zvoka ali s slabo kakovostjo zvoka. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Težave z zvokom shaunm

Consider making this a section of sound.page

Obstaja več načinov, kako se lahko pokvari predvajanje zvoka na vašem računalniku. Katera od tem spodaj najbolje opiše težavo, ki jo imate?

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-batteryestimate.page0000644000373100047300000000442412157071005026734 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Trajanje baterije, ki je prikazano, ko kliknete na ikono baterije, je le ocena. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Ocenjeno trajanje baterije je napačno

Ko preverite preostalo trajanje baterije, lahko ugotovite da preostali čas ni nujno enak dejanskemu trajanju baterije. To je zato, ker je količino preostalega časa baterije mogoče le oceniti. Vendar pa bi se ocene morale s časom izboljšati.

Za oceno preostalega časa baterije je treba v račun vključiti veliko dejavnikov. En od njih je trenutna poraba. Poraba je odvisna od števila odprtih programov, vklopljenih naprav in ali izvajate intenzivne naloge (kot sta na primer ogled DVD-jev ali pretvarjanje glasbenih datotek). Poraba se stalno spreminja in jo je težko predvideti.

Drug dejavnik je kako se baterija prazni. Nekatere baterije se praznijo hitreje, ko so bolj prazne. Brez natančnega znanja kako se baterije praznijo, je mogoče narediti le grobo oceno preostalega življenja baterije.

Ko se baterija prazni, bo Upravljalnik porabe ugotovil njene lastnosti praznjenja in se naučil kako boljše oceniti trajanje baterije. Vendar pa ocene nikoli ne bodo popolnoma natančne.

V primeru da dobite popolnoma smešno oceno trajanja baterije (na primer stotine dni!), Upravljalniku porabe verjetno manjkajo nekateri podatki, ki jih potrebuje za smiselno oceno.

Če napajanje odklopite in nekaj časa prenosnik poganjate na bateriji, ga nato priklopite in ga pustite polniti, bi Upravljalnik porabe moral dobiti podatke, ki jih potrebuje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-notifications.page0000644000373100047300000001022412157071005026345 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sporočila se pojavijo na dnu zaslona in vam povejo kdaj se zgodijo določeni dogodki. Marina Zhurakhinskaya marinaz@redhat.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Obvestila in vrstica sporočanja
Kaj je obvestilo?

V primeru da program ali sestavni del sistema želi vašo pozornost, se bo obvestilo pokazalo na dnu zaslona.

Na primer, če dobite novo sporočilo klepeta, priklopite zunanjo napravo (kot je ključek USB), so za vaš računalnik na voljo nove posodobitve ali je baterija vašega računalnika skoraj prazna, boste dobili obvestilo o tem.

Da bi bilo kar najmanj moteče, se bo obvestilo najprej pojavilo kot ena vrstica. Če želite videti polno vsebino, lahko nad njega premaknete miško.

Other notifications have selectable option buttons. To close one of these notifications without selecting one of its options, click the close button.

Clicking the close button on some notifications dismisses them. Others, like Rhythmbox or your chat application, will stay hidden in the message tray.

Vrstica sporočanja

The message tray gives you a way to get back to your notifications when it is convenient for you. It appears when you move your mouse to the bottom-right corner of the screen, or press SuperM. The message tray contains all the notifications that you have not acted upon or that permanently reside in it.

The message tray gives you a way to get back to your notifications when it is convenient for you. It appears when you move your mouse to the bottom-right corner of the screen, or press SuperM. You can also show the message tray by clicking the blue number icon at the right-hand side of the window list. The message tray contains all the notifications that you have not acted upon or that permanently reside in it.

Obvestila lahko vidite s klikom na predmete vrstice sporočanja. Predmeti v vrstici sporočanja so običajno programi, ki vam pošljejo obvestila. Obvestila o klepetu so obravnavana posebej in predstavljajo stike, ki so vam poslali sporočila klepeta.

You can close the message tray by pressing SuperM again or Esc.

Če je zaslonska tipkovnica odprta, boste morali klikniti na gumb vrstice za prikaz vrstice sporočil.
Skritje obvestil

If you're working on something and do not want to be bothered, you can switch off notifications. Just click your name on the top bar and change the Notifications toggle to OFF.

When switched off, most notifications will not pop up at the bottom of the screen. Very important notifications, such as when your battery is critically low, will still pop up. Notifications will still be available in the messaging tray when you display it (by moving your mouse to the bottom right corner, or pressing SuperM), and they will redisplay when you switch the toggle to ON again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-apps-open.page0000644000373100047300000000750612157071005025407 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zaganjanje programov iz pregleda dejavnosti. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Zaganjanje programov shaunm

If an app is running, it's focused. You can create a new window by dragging to the windows overview or onto a workspace thumbnail. (Also mention dragging to overview in list item below, not just workspace thumbnail.) Right-click icon to choose a window to focus or get new window. Mention middle-click?

Move your mouse pointer to the Activities corner at the top left of the screen to show the activities overview. This is where you can find all of your applications. You can also open the overview by pressing the Super key.

You can start applications from the Applications menu at the top left of the screen, or you can use the activities overview by pressing the Super key.

There are several ways of opening an application once you're in the activities overview:

Start typing the name of an application - searching begins instantly. (If this doesn't happen, click the search bar at the top of the screen and start typing.) Click the application's icon to start it.

Some applications have icons in the dash, the vertical strip of icons on the left-hand side of the activities overview. Click one of these to start the corresponding application.

V primeru da nekatere programe zelo pogosto poganjate, jih lahko dodate v pregledno ploščo.

Click the grid button at the bottom of the dash. You will see the frequently used applications if the Frequent view is enabled. If you want to run a new application, press the All button at the bottom to view all the applications. Press on the application to start it.

Program lahko zaženete na ločeni delovni površini s klikom na njeno ikono iz pregledne plošče (ali s seznama programov) in njenim spustom na eno delovnih površin na desni strani zaslona. Program se bo odprl na izbrani delovni površini.

Program lahko zaženete na novi delovni površini s srednjim klikom na ikono v pregledni plošči ali seznamu programov.

 Hitro izvajanje ukaza

Another way of launching an application is to press AltF2, enter its command name, and then press the Enter key.

Na primer, za zagon Rhythmbox pritisnite AltF2 in vtipkajte 'rhythmbox' (brez znakov '). Ime programa je ukaz za zagon programa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-preview.page0000644000373100047300000000500112157071005025707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirajte kdaj se za datoteke uporabljajo sličice in predogledi. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Možnosti predogleda upravljalnika datotek

Upravljalnik datotek ustvari sličice predogleda slikovnih, video datotek in besedilnih datotek. Predogledi so lahko za velike datoteke preko omrežja počasni, zato lahko nadzirate, kdaj so predogledi ustvarjeni. Kliknite Datoteke v zgornji vrstici, izberite Možnosti in izberite zavihek Predogled.

<gui>Datoteke</gui>

Privzeto so vsi predogledi narejeni za krajevne datoteke na vašem računalniku ali povezanih zunanjih pogonih. To zmožnost lahko nastavite na Vedno ali Nikoli. Upravljalnik datotek lahko brska po datotekah na drugih računalnikih preko krajevnega omrežja ali interneta. V primeru da pogosto brskate po datotekah preko krajevnega omrežja in ima omrežje visoko pasovno širino, boste morda želeli nekatere ali vse možnosti predogleda nastaviti na Vedno.

Za omejitev velikosti datotek s predogledom lahko uporabite nastavitev Le za datoteke manjše kot.

 <gui>Mape</gui>

V primeru da imate velikosti datotek prikazane v stolpcu seznama pogledov ali sličicah ikone, bodo mape prikazane s številom datotek in map, ki jih vsebujejo. Štetje predmetov v mapi je lahko počasno, še posebno za zelo velike mape ali preko omrežja. To zmožnost lahko vklopite, izklopite ali pa jo vklopite samo za datoteke na svojem računalniku in krajevnih zunanjih diskih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-suspend.page0000644000373100047300000000377012157071005025212 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prehod v stanje pripravljenosti pošlje vaš računalnik v stanje pripravljenosti, da porabi manj energije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Kaj se zgodi, ko pošljem računalnik v pripravljenost? Ekaterina Gerasimova

Should be merged into shell-exit.page

Ko svoj računalnik pošljete v pripravljenost, vsi vaši programi in dokumenti ostanejo odprti, vendar se zaslon in drugi deli računalnika izklopijo za varčevanje z energijo. Računalnik je še vedno vklopljen in porablja majhno količino energije. Iz stanja pripravljenosti ga lahko povrnete s pritiskom na tipko ali klikom na miško. V primeru da to ne deluje, poskusite s pritiskom na gumb za vklop.

Nekateri računalniki imajo težavo s podporo strojne opreme. To pomeni, da morda ne bodo mogli ustrezno preiti v stanje pripravljenosti ali mirovanje. Delovanje stanja pripravljenosti/mirovanja je dobro preizkusiti preden ga začnete uporabljati.

Pred prehodom v stanje pripravljenosti/mirovanje vedno shranite svoje delo

Pred prehodom v mirovanje ali stanje pripravljenosti svoje delo shranite za vsak slučaj, če bi šlo kaj narobe in odprtih programov in dokumentov ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika ne bi bilo mogoče obnoviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-exit.page0000644000373100047300000001117512157071006024454 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Naučite se kako se odjavite, preklapljate med uporabniki in še več. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Alexandre Franke afranke@gnome.org Odjava, izklop, preklop uporabnikov shaunm

More links would be good, especially in #logout. Could go final as-is. Incomplete for now

Ko ste končali z uporabo računalnika, ga lahko izklopite, pošljete v stanje pripravljenosti (za zmanjšanje porabe) ali ga pustite vklopljenega in se odjavite.

Odjava ali preklop uporabnika

Da lahko vaš računalnik uporabljajo tudi drugi uporabniki se lahko odjavite ali ostanete prijavljeni in enostavno preklopite uporabnike. V primeru da enostavno preklopite uporabnike, se bodo vsi vaši programi še naprej izvajali in bo ob ponovni prijavi vse ostalo, kjer je bilo.

Za Odjavo ali Preklop uporabnika kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite ustrezno možnost.

Ukaza Odjavi ali Preklopi uporabnika se v meniju pojavita le, če ima sistem več uporabniških računov.

The Switch User entry only appears in the menu if you have more than one user account on your system.
Zaklepanje zaslona

Če za kratek čas zapuščate računalnik, zaklenite zaslon in s tem drugim ljudem preprečite dostop do svojih datotek in izvajajočih se programov. Ko se vrnete, dvignite zaveso zaklepa zaslona in vnesite svoje geslo za ponovno prijavo. Če svojega zaslona ne zaklenete, se bo po določenem času samodejno zaklenil.

Za zaklep svojega zaslona kliknite svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Zakleni.

When your screen is locked, other users can log in to their own accounts by clicking Log in as another user on the password screen. You can switch back to your desktop when they are finished.

V pripravljenost

To save power, suspend your computer when you are not using it. If you use a laptop, GNOME suspends your computer automatically when you close the lid. This saves your state to your computer's memory and powers off most of the computer's functions. A very small amount of power is still used during suspend.

V primeru da morate računalnik ročno dati v mirovanje kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in nato držite Alt. Možnost Izklop se bo spremenila v V pripravljenost. Izberite jo.

Izklop ali ponoven zagon

V primeru da hočete računalnik popolnoma izklopiti ali izvesti polen ponoven zagon, se naprej odjavite s klikom svojega imena v vrhnji vrstici in izbiro Izklop. V pogovornem oknu izberite Ponovni zagon ali Izklop.

V primeru da so prijavljeni tudi drugi uporabniki, računalnika morda ne boste mogli izklopiti ali ponovno zagnati, ker bo to končalo njihove seje. V primeru da ste skrbnik, boste morali za odjavo vnesti svoje geslo.

You may want to power off your computer if you wish to move it and do not have a battery, if your battery is low or does not hold charge well. A powered off computer also uses less energy than one which is suspended.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/disk-partitions.page0000644000373100047300000000576212157071006025527 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Naučite se kaj so nosilci in diski in uporabiti diskovna orodja za njihovo upravljanje. Upravljanje nosilcev in razdelkov

Beseda nosilec se uporablja za napravo shrambe kot je trdi disk. Lahko je tudi del naprave shrambe, ker lahko shrambo razdelite na več kosov. Računalnik naredi shrambo na voljo preko vašega datotečnega sistema preko opravila, ki se imenuje priklapljanje. Priklopljeni nosilci so lahko trdi diski, pogoni USB, DVD-RW-ji, kartice SD in drugi mediji. V primeru da je nosilec trenutno priklopljen, lahko z njega berete (in morda tudi zapisujete) datoteke.

Pogosto se priklopljen nosilec imenuje razdelek, čeprav nista nujno ista stvar. "Razdelek" se nanaša na fizično področje shrambe na enem trdem disku. Ko je razdelek priklopljen, ga lahko kličete nosilec, saj lahko dostopate do datotek na njem. O nosilcih lahko razmišljajte kot označenih "izložbah" do "trgovine" razdelkov in pogonov.

Ogled in upravljanje nosilcev in razdelkov z diskovnimi orodji

Nosilce shrambe računalnika lahko preverite in spreminjate z diskovnimi orodji.

Odprite pregled Dejavnosti in začnite program Diskovna orodja.

V pladnju Naprave shrambe boste našli trde diske, pogone CD/DVD in druge fizične naprave. Kliknite na napravo, ki jo želite preučiti.

V desnem pladnju področje Nosilci zagotavlja viden pregled nosilcev in razdelkov na izbrani napravi. Vsebuje tudi različna orodja za upravljanje teh nosilcev.

Bodite previdni: s temi pripomočki lahko popolnoma izbrišete podatke na disku.

Vaš računalnik ima najverjetneje vsaj en primarni razdelek in en izmenjalni razdelek. Izmenjalni razdelek operacijski sistem uporablja za upravljanje pomnilnika in je le redko priklopljen. Primarni razdelek vsebuje vaš operacijski sistem, programe, nastavitve in osebne datoteke. Te datoteke lahko razdelite na več razdelkov zaradi varnosti ali priročnosti.

En primerni razdelek mora vsebovati podatke, ki jih vaš računalnik uporablja za zagon. Zato se imenuje zagonski razdelek ali nosilec. Za določitev ali je mogoče iz nosilca zagnati sistem, si oglejte Zastavice razdelkov v diskovnih orodjih. Zagonljiv razdelek lahko vsebujejo tudi zunanji mediji kot so pogoni USB in CD-ji.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-frequency.page0000644000373100047300000000376112157071006025644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Naučite se kako pogosto bi morali ustvariti varnostno kopijo pomembnih datotek, da so varne. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Pogostost varnostnih kopij

Kako pogosto ustvariti varnostne kopije je odvisno od vrste podatkov katerih varnostna kopija bo ustvarjena. Če na primer poganjate okolje omrežja, kjer so na vašem omrežju shranjeni kritični podatki, potem morda celo vsakodnevne varnostne kopije ne bodo dovolj.

V primeru da ustvarjate varnostne kopije podatkov na svojem domačem računalniku, so varnostne kopije vsako uro verjetno odveč. Morda vam bo v pomoč, če pri načrtovanu razporeda ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij upoštevate nekaj stvari:

Količina časa, ki jo preživite za računalnikom.

Kako pogosto in za koliko se podatki na računalniku spremenijo.

V primeru da imate samo nekaj glasbe, e-pošte in družinskih fotografij, bodo tedenske morda celo mesečne varnostne kopije zadostovale. V primeru da ste sredi urejanja davkov, boste morda morali varnostne kopije izdelati pogosteje.

Splošno pravilo je, da čas med varnostnimi kopijami ne bi smel biti daljši od časa, ki ga lahko porabite za ponovno delanje izgubljenega dela. Na primer, če je en teden za ponovno pisanje izgubljenih dokumentov za vas preveč, ustvarjajte varnostne kopije vsaj enkrat tedensko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-changepassword.page0000644000373100047300000001044312157071006026357 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obdržite svoj račun varen s pogostim spreminjanem gesla v nastavitvah računa. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Spreminjanje gesla shaunm

We need a note in here about password hints. Share content with user-add

Turns out that you get a dialog to change the keyring password when you log in after changing your password. Mention that in a blurb above the steps above #changepass below. "When you next log in, you will be asked to…. If you prefer to change the keyring password immediately, do this:

 shaunm

We need pages on the keyring. Link to them from the section below on changing your keyring password. This page can still go final for 3.0.x without that, but leave this comment in for 3.2.

 mdhill

Not prompted to change keyring password on next login in 3.2, wording changed. Keyring pages still need adding. Bug 643445 indicates password hints not implemented yet in GDM.

Občasno spreminjanje gesla je dobra ideja, še posebno, če mislite, da nekdo drug pozna vaše geslo.

Click your name on the top bar, then click the picture next to your name to open the Users window.

Kliknite na oznako poleg Geslo.

Oznaka bi morala biti prikazana kot vrsta pik ali škatel, če že imate nastavljeno geslo.

Vnesite svoje trenutno geslo in nato novo geslo. Ponovno vnesite svoje geslo v polje Potrditev gesla.

Da izberete naključno ustvarjeno varno geslo, lahko kliknete na gumb poleg polja Novo geslo. Ta gesla so težka in jih drugi ne morejo uganiti, si jih boste pa tudi težko zapomnili, zato bodite previdni.

Kliknite Spremeni.

Prepričajte se, da ste izbrali dobro geslo. To vam bo pomagalo obdržati vaš račun varen.

Sprememba gesla zbirke ključev

V primeru da svoje prijavno geslo spremenite, lahko postane neusklajeno z geslom zbirke ključev. Zbirka ključev vam omogoča, da si zapomnite veliko različnih gesel le z enim glavnim geslom, ki omogoča dostop do vseh gesel. V primeru da spremenite svoje uporabniško geslo (glejte zgoraj), bo geslo vaše zbirke ključev ostalo enako kot vaše stare geslo. Za spremembo gesla zbirke ključev (da se bo ujemalo z vašim prijavnim geslom):

Odprite program Gesla in šifrirni ključi iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

In the View menu, ensure By keyring is checked, and select Show any.

V stranski vrstici pod Gesla desno kliknite na Zbirka prijavnih ključev. Izberite Spremeni geslo.

Vnesite svoje trenutno geslo in kliknite na gumb Nadaljuj. Nato vnesite novo geslo in ga Ponovno vnesite za potrditev pravilnosti.

Kliknite Nadaljuj.

Za uporabo Gesla in šifrirni ključi morate imeti nameščen paket seahorse.

Namesti seahorse
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-differentsize.page0000644000373100047300000000332012157071006027060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje dokumenta na papirju drugačne velikosti, oblike ali usmeritve. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Spreminjanje velikosti papirja za tiskanje

V primeru, da želite spremeniti velikost papirja svojega dokumenta (na primer, tiskanje PDF velikosti pisma ZDA na papirju A4), lahko spremenite obliko dokumenta.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V stolpcu Papir izberite svojo Velikost papirja s spustnega seznama.

Kliknite Natisni in vaš dokument bi se moral začeti tiskati.

Za izbiro drugačne usmeritve lahko uporabite tudi meni Usmeritev:

Pokončno

Ležeče

Obrnjeno pokončno

Obrnjeno ležeče

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-canshareprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000272512157071006027043 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deljenje barvnih profilov ni priporočeno, ker se strojna oprema spreminja skozi čas. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Ali lahko svoj barvni profil delim z drugimi?

Barvni profili, ki ste jih sami ustvarili, so določeni za strojno opremo in pogoje osvetlitve, za katero ste jih umerili. Zaslon ki je bil prižgan nekaj sto ur, bo imel zelo drugačen barvni profil kot podoben zaslon, ki je bil prižgan na tisoče ur.

To pomeni, da boste v primeru da svoj barvni profil delite z nekom, morda spravili bližje umerjanju, vendar je zavajujoče reči, da je njihov zaslon umerjen.

Podobno deljenje profila, ki ste ga ustvarili za svoje svetlobne pogoje nima smisla, če nimate v prostoru za urejanje slik vsi popolnoma enake osvetlitve (brez sončne svetlobe z oken, črnih zidov, dnevnih žarnic).

Previdno preverite pogoje razširjanja za profile, ki ste jih prejeli s spletišč proizvajalca ali pa jih je za vas nekdo ustvaril.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/hardware-cardreader.page0000644000373100047300000000515512157071006026266 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpravljanje težav čitalcev kartic Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Težave z bralnikom večpredstavnosnih kartic

Številni računalniki imajo bralnike za SD (Secure Digital), MMC (MultiMediaCard), SmartMedia, Memory Stick, CompactFlash in druge pomnilniške kartice. Morale bi biti samodejno priklopljene. Tukaj je nekaj nasvetov za odpravljanje težav, če se to ne zgodi:

Poskrbite, da je kartica pravilno vstavljena. Veliko kartic je, ko so pravilno vstavljene, videti kot da so narobe obrnjene. Prepričajte se, da je kartica trdno vstavljena v režo. Nekatere kartice, še posebno CompactFlash za pravilno vstavitev zahtevajo nekaj sile. (Bodite previdni, da ne pritisnete premočno).

Odprite Datoteke z uporabo menija Dejavnosti. Ali se vstavljena kartica pojavi na seznamu Naprave v levi stranski vrstici? Včasih se kartica pojavi na tem seznamu, vendar ni priklopljena. Kliknite nanjo za priklop (v primeru da stranska vrstica ni vidna, pritisnite F9 ali kliknite na Pogled Stranska vrstice Pokaži stransko vrstico.).

V primeru da se vaša kartica ne pojavi v stranski vrstici, kliknite PojdiRačunalnik. V primeru da je vaš bralnik kartic pravilno nastavljen, bi se bralnik moral pojaviti kot pogon, ko kartica in na voljo in kot kartica, ko je kartica priklopljena (oglejte si sliko spodaj).

V primeru da vidite bralnik kartic, a ne kartice, je težava lahko v kartici. Poskusite drugo kartico ali preverite kartico na drugem bralniku, če je to mogoče.

V primeru da v mapi Računalnik ni kartic ali pogonov, morda vaš bralnik kartic na deluje na Linuxu zaradi težav z gonilniki. V primeru da je bralnik kartic notranji (znotraj računalnika), je to verjetnejše. Najboljša rešitev je neposreden priklop vaše naprave (fotoaparat, telefon) na vrata USB na računalniku. Na voljo so tudi zunanji bralniki kartic USB, ki so na Linuxu precej bolje podprti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/settings-sharing.page0000644000373100047300000000161012157071006025660 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bluetooth sharing, Screen sharing, Media sharing… Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2013 Sharing Settings

The Sharing Settings in GNOME help you control what is shared over the local network, or through other technologies such as Bluetooth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-mag.page0000644000373100047300000000540712157071006023714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Povečajte svoj zaslon, da lažje vidite stvari. Povečanje področij na zaslonu

Povečanje zaslona je drugačno kot povečanje velikosti besedila. Ta zmožnost je kot povečevalno steklo, ki vam omogoča premikanje in približanje delov zaslona.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Izrisovanje.

VklopitePovečavo.

The Zoom section lists the current settings for the shortcut keys, which can be set in the Universal Access section of the Shortcuts tab on the Keyboard panel.

Sedaj se lahko premikate po področju zaslona. S premikom svoje miške na rob zaslona boste povečano področje premaknili v različne smeri, kar vam omogoča ogled področja po izbiri.

Povečavo lahko hitro vklopite in izklopite s klikom na ikono splošnega dostopa v vrhnji vrstici in izbiro Povečava.

You can change the magnification factor, the mouse tracking, and the position of the magnified view on the screen. To adjust these, click the Options button and pick the Magnifier tab.

You can activate crosshairs to help you find the mouse or touchpad pointer. To switch them on and adjust their length, color, and thickness, click the Options button and pick the Crosshairs tab.

You can switch to inverse video or White on black, and adjust brightness, contrast and greyscale options for the magnifier. The combination of these options is useful for people with low-vision, any degree of photophobia, or just for using the computer under adverse lighting conditions. Click the Options button and pick the Color Effects tab.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-email-virus.page0000644000373100047300000000345012157071006025414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Virusi zelo verjetno ne bodo okužili vašega računalnika, vendar lahko okužijo druge ljudi, ki jim pošiljate e-pošto. Ali moram svojo e-pošto preiskati za viruse?

Virusi so programi, ki na vašem računalniku povzročajo težave. Pogosto se prenesejo na računalnik preko sporočil e-pošte.

Virusi, ki učinkujejo na računalnike na katerih teče Linux so precej redki, zato je malo verjetno, da bi se okužili z virusom preko e-pošte ali kako drugače. Če prejmete e-pošto s skritim virusom, verjetno na vaš računalnik ne bo imel vpliva. Zato vam svoje e-pošte ni treba preiskati za prisotnost virusov.

Vendar morda želite preiskati svojo e-pošto za viruse, da ne bi vursa posredovali od ene k drugi osebi. Na primer, če ima en od vaših prijateljev računalnik Windows z virusov in vam pošlje e-pošto okuženo z virusom, ki jo nato posredujete drugemu prijatelju z računalnikom Windows, potem lahko virus dobi tudi drugi prijatelj. Da bi se temi izognili lahko namestite protivirusni progam za preiskovanje svoje e-pošte, vendar je verjetnost takšnega dogodka zelo majhna in večina ljudi z Windows ali Mac OS ima nameščen svoj protivirusni program.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-macaddress.page0000644000373100047300000000405512157071006025267 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Edinstveno določilo, ki je dodeljeno strojni opremi omrežja. Kaj je naslov MAC?

Naslov MAC je edinstvena koda, ki jo je proizvajalec dodelil omrežni strojni opremi (kot je brezžična kartica ali kartica eternet). MAC pomeni Nadzor do dostopa večpredstavnosti in vsaka koda je edinstvena za določeno napravo.

Naslovi MAC so sestavljeni iz šestih nizov dveh znakov, ki so ločeni z dvopičjem. Primer naslova MAC je 00:1B:44:11:3A:B7.

Za določitev naslova MAC svoje omrežne strojne opreme:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite Žično ali Brezžično s seznama na levi (odvisno od tega katero napravo želite preveriti).

Vaš naslov MAC bo bil prikazan kot Naslov strojne opreme.

Lahko se zgodi, da boste morali spremeniti ali "lažno predstavljati" naslov MAC. Nekateri ponudniki internetnih storitev na primer zahtevajo, da do njihove storitve dostopa določen naslov MAC. Če omrežna kartica preneha delovati in jo zamenjate, storitev ne bo več delovala. V takšnih primerih morate lažno predstavljati naslov MAC.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-windows-tiled.page0000644000373100047300000000252512157071006026273 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razpenjanje dveh oken enega ob drugem. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Razpostavitev oken

Okno lahko razpete le na levi ali desni strani zaslona kar vam omogoča postavitev dveh oken en bo drugo za hiter preklop med njima.

To maximize a window along a side of the screen, grab the titlebar and drag it to the left or right side until half of the screen is highlighted. Using the keyboard, hold down the Super key and press the Left or Right key.

Za obnovitev okna na izvirno velikost ga povlecite iz strani zaslona ali uporabite isto tipkovno bližnjico, ki ste jo uporabiti za razpenjanje.

Držite tipko Alt in vlecite kjerkoli v oknu za njegov premik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-right-click.page0000644000373100047300000000477412157071006025356 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Pritisnite in držite levi miškin gumba za desni klik. Simulacija desnega klika miške

Desno lahko kliknete tako, da za kratek čas držite levi miškin gumb. To je uporabno, če težko premikate posamezne prste na roki, ali pa imate miško z le enim gumbom.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Kazanje in klikanje.

Vklopite Simulirani drugotni klik.

Spremenite lahko kako dolgo morate držati levi miškin gumb preden je zaznan kot desni klik. V zavihku Kazanje in klikanje spremenite Zakasnitev sprejema pod Simulirani drugotni klik.

Za desni klik s simuliranim drugotnim klikom držite levi miškin gumb, kjer želite desno klikniti, in ga nato izpustite. Medtem ko držite levi miškin gumb se kazalec polni z modro barvo. Ko je popolnoma moder, izpustite miškin gumb za desni klik.

Nekateri posebni kazalci, na primer kazalci za spreminjanje velikosti, barv ne spreminjajo. Simuliran drugotni klik lahko še vedno uporabljate, tudi če od kazalca ne dobite vidnega odziva.

Če uporabljajte Miškine tipke, vam to omogoča desni klik tudi z držanjem tipke 5 na številčni tipkovnici.

V pregledu Dejavnosti lahko vedno dolgo pritisnete za desni klik tudi če je ta zmožnost onemogočena. Dolgi pritiski v pregledu delujejo rahlo drugače: za desni klik vam ni treba izpustiti gumba.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-default-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000321012157071006026256 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Change the default web browser by going to Details in Settings. Spremenite spletni brskalnik v katerem so odprta spletišča

Ko kliknete na povezavo na spletno stran v kateremukoli programu, bo spletni brskalnik samodejno odprl to stran. V primeru da imate nameščen več kot en brskalnik, se stran morda ne bo odprla v želenem brskalniku. To lahko popravite s spremembo privzetega spletnega brskalnika:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Podrobnosti in s seznama na levi strani okna izberite Privzeti programi.

Spremenite možnost Splet, da izberete brskalnik za odpiranje povezav.

Ko odprete drug spletni brskalnik, vam bo morda sporočil, da ni več privzeti brskalnik. Če se to zgodi, kliknite gumb Prekliči ali podoben, zato da se brskalnik ne bo ponovno poskusil nastaviti kot privzeti brskalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-willnotturnon.page0000644000373100047300000000556012157071006026467 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Možna vzroka sta razrahljani kabli in težave s strojno opremo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Moj računalnik se ne prižge

Obstaja veliko razlogov zakaj se računalnik ne prižge. Ta tema na kratko opiše nekaj mogočih vzrokov.

GNOME Documentation Project

This is a complicated topic. Give troubleshooting steps/reasons for why the computer won't turn on. Some of the reasons may be down to hardware failure.

This was marked incomplete as of 2011-04-04. I marked it final for 3.0. If there is more to add, revisit for 3.2.
Računalnik ni vklopljen, prazna baterija ali razrahljan kabel

Prepričajte se, da so električni kabli računalnika trdno vklopljeni in da so razdelilniki vklopljeni. Prepričajte se, da je zaslon priklopljen in prižgan. V primeru da imate prenosnik, povežite kabel za polnjenje (za primer, da je baterija prazna). Preverite tudi, če je baterija pravilno vstavljena v prenosnik.

Težave s strojno opremo računalnika

Sestavni del vašega računalnika je lahko pokvarjen. V tem primeru morate svoj računalnik popraviti. Pogoste napake so pokvarjen napajalnik, nepravilno vstavljeni sestavni deli (kot je na primer RAM) in pokvarjena matična plošča.

Računalnik zapiska in se izklopi.

V primeru da računalnik ob vklopu večkrat zapiska in se nato izklopi (ali se noče vklopiti), to morda nakazuje, da je zaznal težavo. Ti piski se imenujejo tudi kode piska in vzorci piskov vam povejo kaj je narobe z računalnikom. Različni proizvajalci uporabljajo različne kode piskanja zato si oglejte priročnik za svojo matično ploščo ali ga odnesite na popravilo.

Ventilatorji se vrtijo, vendar ni ničesar na zaslonu

Prva stvar, ki jo preverite, je ta, da je zaslon priklopljen in prižgan.

Vaša težava bi lahko bila napaka strojne opreme. Ventilatorji se morda ob pritisku na gumb za vklop zavrtijo, vendar se drugi nujni deli računalnika morda ne vklopijo. V tem primeru svoj računalnik odpeljite na popravilo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-2sided.page0000644000373100047300000000313212157071006025372 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje na obeh straneh papirja ali več strani na list. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Dvostransko tiskanje in tiskanje več strani na stran.

Natisnete lahko obe strani lista papirja:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Pojdite na zavihek Nastavitev strani okna tiskanja in s spustnega seznama izberite možnost Dvostransko. V primeru da je možnost onemogočena, dvostransko tiskanje za vaš tiskalnik ni na voljo.

Tiskalniki dvostransko tiskanje upravljajo na različne načine. Priporočamo vam preizkus svojega tiskalnika, da vidite, kako deluje.

Natisnete lahko več kot eno stran dokumenta na vsako stran papirja. Za to uporabite možnost Strani na stran.

Razpoložljivost teh možnosti je morda odvisna od vrste tiskalnika, ki jo imate kot tudi programa, ki ga uporabljate. Ta možnost morda ne bo vedno na voljo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-closelid.page0000644000373100047300000000613612157071006025327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prenosniki gredo ob zaprtju pokrova v stanje pripravljenosti za varčevanje z energijo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Zakaj se moj računalnik ob zaprtju pokrova izklopi?

Ko pokrov svojega prenosnika zaprete, bo vaš računalnik prešel v pripravljenost za varčevanje z energijo. To pomeni, da vaš računalnik ni izklopljen, je le prešel v stanje pripravljenosti. Iz stanja pripravljenosti ga lahko povrnete z odprtjem pokrova. V primeru da se računalnik ne povrne, poskusite s klikom na miško ali s pritiskom na tipko. Če to še vedno ne deluje, pritisnite na gumb za vklop.

Nekateri računalniki ne morejo preiti v stanje pripravljenosti. Običajno se to zgodi, ker njihove strojne opreme operacijski sistem ne podpira popolnoma (na primer gonilniki Linux so nepopolni). V tem primeru boste morda ugotovili, da svojega računalnika po zaprtju pokrova ne morete povrniti iz stanja pripravljenosti. Poskusite lahko popraviti težavo s stanjem pripravljenosti ali pa računalniku preprečite poizkus prehoda v stanje pripravljenosti ob zaprtju pokrova.

Preprečitev prehoda v stanje pripravljenosti ob zaprtju pokrova

V primeru da ne želite, da gre računalnik ob zaprtju pokrova v stanje pripravljenosti, lahko spremenite nastavitve obnašanja ob zaprtju pokrova. Za nastavitev računalnika za spraznitev zaslona namesto prehoda v stanje pripravljenosti, ko je pokrov zaprt:

Pri spreminjanju te nastavitve bodite previdni. Nekateri prenosniki se lahko pregrejejo, če delujejo z zaprtim pokrovom, še posebno, če so v omejenem prostoru kot je nahrbtnik.

Odprite program Terminal iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Za spremembo nastavitev pri poganjanju na baterijski napetosti, vnesite ta ukaz in pritisnite Enter:

gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power lid-close-battery-action blank

Za spremembo nastavitev pri poganjanju na omrežni napetosti, vnesite ta ukaz in pritisnite Enter:

gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power lid-close-ac-action blank
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-preview.page0000644000373100047300000000267312157071006025162 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Hiter prikaz in skrivanje predogledov za dokumente, slike, videoposnetke in več. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Predogled datotek in map

Predogled datotek lahko vidite brez odpiranja v namenskem programu. Izberite katerokoli datoteko in pritisnite preslednico. Datoteka se bo odprla v oknu predogleda. Za zaprtje predogleda ponovno pritisnite preslednico.

Vgrajeni predogled podpira večino vrst datotek za dokumente, slike, video in zvok. V predogledu lahko drsate med dokumenti ali iščete po videu ali zvoku.

Za celozaslonski predogled kliknite na gumb celozaslonski način blizu dnu ali pritisnite f. Za končanje celozaslonskega načina ponovno pritisnite gumb celozaslonski način ali tipko f. Za popolno končanje predogleda pritisnite preslednico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-view.page0000644000373100047300000000322712157071006025346 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Celozaslonski ogled dokumentov. Prikaz dokumentov, ki so shranjeni krajevno ali na spletu Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to work with Google Docs. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to: - View remote/Google documents in Documents - Add an account in Online Accounts (link to those topics)

Ko odprete Dokumente, bodo vsi vaši dokumenti, tako tisti shranjeni krajevno kot tisti na spletu prikazani kot sličice.

Da se dokumenti Google Docs ali SkyDrive pojavijo, morate nastaviti Google oz Windows Live kot spletni račun.

Za ogled vsebine dokumenta:

Kliknite sličico. Dokument je s polno širino prikazan v oknu Dokumenti (ali v celozaslonskem načinu, če je razpet).

Za zaprtje dokumenta kliknite na gumb puščice nazaj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-batteryoptimal.page0000644000373100047300000000361312157071006026566 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namigi kot so "Ne pustite, da se baterija preveč izprazni" Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Kako dobiti največ iz baterije prenosnika

Ko se baterije prenosnika starajo, se njihova zmožnost shranjevanja slabša in zmogljivost počasi zmanjšuje. Z določenimi tehnikami lahko njihovo življenje podaljšate, vendar ne pričakujte velike razlike.

Baterije ne izpraznite popolnoma. Vedno znova napolnite baterijo preden postane skoraj prazna, čeprav ima večina baterij varovala, ki preprečijo prenizko napolnjenost baterije. Polnjenje delno izpraznjene baterije je učinkovitejše, polnjenje skoraj polne baterije pa je za baterijo slabše.

Toplota ima škodljiv učinek na učinkovitost polnjenja. Ne pustite, da se baterija segreje bolj kot bi bilo treba.

Baterije se starajo tudi, če jih pustite v shrambi. Kupovanje nadomestne baterije ob nakupu nove ni smiselno. Baterije vedno kupite, ko jih potrebujete.

Ta nasvet velja za Litij ionske (Li-ion) baterije, ki so najpogostejša vrsta baterij. Druge vrste baterij se morda obnašajo drugače.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000126512157071006024644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sprememba privzetega brskalnika, namestitev Flasha, podpora Moonlight ... Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Spletni brskalniki usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sharing.page0000644000373100047300000000120512157071006024022 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Desktop sharing, Share files by email, Media sharing… Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Souporaba usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-workspaces.page0000644000373100047300000000601512157071006025661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Delovne površine so način za združevanje oken na vašem namizju. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Kaj je delovna površina in kako mi bo pomagala?

Izbirnik delovnih površin

Workspaces refer to the grouping of windows on your desktop. You can create multiple workspaces, which act like virtual desktops. Workspaces are meant to reduce clutter and make the desktop easier to navigate.

Workspaces refer to the grouping of windows on your desktop. You can use multiple workspaces, which act like virtual desktops. Workspaces are meant to reduce clutter and make the desktop easier to navigate.

Za organizacijo svojega dela lahko uporabite delovne površine. Tako imate lahko na primer vse okna sporočanja kot sta e-pošta in vaš program klepetanja na eni delovni površini in delate na drugi delovni površini. Vaš upravljalnik glasbe bi lahko bil na tretji delovni površini.

Uporaba delovnih površin:

In the Activities overview, move your cursor to the right-most side of the screen.

Press the Super key to open the Activities overview and then move your cursor to the right-most side of the screen.

A vertical panel will appear showing workspaces in use, plus an empty workspace. This is the workspace selector.

A vertical panel will appear showing available workspaces. This is the workspace selector.

To add a workspace, drag and drop a window from an existing workspace onto the empty workspace in the workspace selector. This workspace now contains the window you have dropped, and a new empty workspace will appear below it.

To remove a workspace, simply close all of its windows or move them to other workspaces.

Vedno obstaja vsaj ena delovna površina.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-braille.page0000644000373100047300000000217312157071006024557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporabite bralnik zaslona Orka z osvežujočim se Braillovim zaslonom. Preberite zaslon v Braillovi pisavi

GNOME za prikaz uporabniškega vmesnika na osvežujočem se Braillovem zaslonu uporablja bralnik zaslona Orka. Glede na to kako ste namestili GNOME, Orke morda nimate nameščene. Nametite Orko in si nato oglejte Pomoč Orka za več podrobnosti.

shaunm

I'd like this page to have more on how to start Orca, then pass off to the Orca help for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-bookmarks-edit.page0000644000373100047300000000405212157071007027150 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje, brisanje in preimenovanje zaznamkov v upravljalniku datotek. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uredi zaznamke mape

Your bookmarks are listed in the sidebar of the file manager.

Dodaj zaznamek:

Odprite mapo (ali mesto) katerega zaznamek želite ustvariti.

Click the gear button in the toolbar and pick Bookmark this Location.

 Izbris zaznamka:

Click on Files in the top bar and pick Bookmarks from the app menu.

In the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you wish to delete and click the - button.

 Preimenujte zaznamek:

Click on Files in the top bar and pick Bookmarks from the app menu.

In the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you wish to rename.

V besedilnem polju Ime vpišite novo ime zaznamka.

Preimenovanje zaznamka mape ne preimenuje. V primeru da imate zaznamke do dveh različnih map na dveh različnih mestih, ki imata enako ime, bosta zaznamka imela enako ime in ju ne boste mogli ločiti. V tem primeru je zaznamku uporabno dati ime, ki se razlikuje od imena mape do katere kaže.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-screen-reader.page0000644000373100047300000000204412157071007025662 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporaba bralnika zaslona Orca za izgovorjavo uporabniškega vmesnika. Naglas preberi vsebino zaslona

GNOME vsebuje zaslonski bralnik Orka za izgovorjavo uporabniškega vmesnik. Glede na to kako ste GNOME namestili, morda Orke nimate nameščene. Namestite Orko ter si nato za več podrobnosti oglejte Pomoč Orka.

shaunm

I'd like this page to have more on how to start Orca, then pass off to the Orca help for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-thinkabout.page0000644000373100047300000000611312157071007026006 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Seznam map kjer lahko najdete dokumente, datoteke in nastavitve katerih varnostno kopijo boste morda želeli ustvariti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kje lahko najdem datoteke katerih varnostno kopijo želim ustvariti?

Odločitev varnostno kopijo katerih datotek želite narediti in njihovo iskanje je najtežji korak pri poskušanju ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij. Spodaj je seznam map, kjer bi morala biti večina vaših pomembnih datotek.

Osebne datoteke (dokumenti, glasba, fotografije in videoposnetki)

Te datoteke so običajno shranjene v vaši domači mapi (/home/vaše_ime). Lahko so v podmapah kot so Namizje, Dokumenti, Slike, Glasba, Video.

Če je na vašem mediju varnostne kopije dovolj prostora (na primer če je to zunanji trdi disk), razmislite o ustvarjanju varnostne kopije celotne Domače mape. Koliko prostora zavzema Domača mapa lahko ugotovite z orodjem Preučevalnik porabe diska.

Skrite datoteke

Katerokoli ime datoteke ali mape, ki se začne s piko (.), je privzeto skrito. Za ogled skritih datotek kliknite PogledPokaži skrite datoteke ali pritisnite CtrlH.

Osebne nastavitve (možnosti namizja, teme in nastavitve programov)

Večina programov shrani svoje nastavitve v skrite mape v vaši Domači mapi (glejte zgoraj za podrobnosti o skritih datotekah).

Večina vaših nastavitev programov je shranjena v skritih mapah .config, .gconf, .gnome2 in .local v vaši Domači mapi.

Sistemske nastavitve

Nastavitve pomembnih delov sistema niso shranjene v Domači mapi. Obstajajo številna mesta, kjer so lahko shranjena, vendar jih je večina shranjena v mapi /etc. V splošnem vam varnostne kopije teh datotek na domačem računalniku ni treba ustvariti. Če imate strežnik, je pametno ustvariti varnostno kopijo datotek za storitve, ki jih strežnik poganja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-adhoc.page0000644000373100047300000000435512157071007026076 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporaba ad-hoc omrežja za omogočanje povezave z vami in vašimi omrežnimi povezavami drugim napravam. Ustvaritev brezžične dostopne točke

Svoj računalnik lahko uporabite kot brezžično dostopno točno. To drugim napravam omogoča povezavo z vami brez ločenega omrežja in vam omogoča souporabo internetne povezave z drugim vmesnikom kot je žično omrežje ali preko mobilnega omrežja.

shaunm

Things I'm not sure about: Is this actually ad-hoc? It seems to use the same icon. What happens if you have multiple wireless adapters? Ought to be able to share wireless to wireless, I think, but I don't know what the UI looks like. Also, does any of this work? I couldn't successfully test.

Also, looks like there's no page to set the device name. Make one, then link below where it says the name of the network is your device name.

Kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve omrežja.

Izberite Brezžično na levi.

Desno kliknite na gumb Uporabi kot dostopno točko.

Če ste že povezani z brezžičnim omrežjem, boste vprašani, če želite prekiniti povezavo z omrežjem. Ena brezžična kartica se lahko sočasno poveže samo z enim omrežjem. Kliknite Ustvari dostopno točko za potrditev.

Ime omrežja (SSID) in varnostni ključ sta samodejno ustvarjena. Ime omrežja bo osnovano na imenu računalnika. Druge naprave te podatke potrebujejo za povezavo z dostopno točko, ki ste jo pravkar ustvarili.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-vpn-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000651412157071007025416 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org VPN-ji vam omogočajo povezavo s krajevnim omrežjem preko interneta. Naučite se kako nastaviti povezavo VPN. Povezava z VPN

VPN (ali Navidezno zasebno omrežje) je način povezovanja s krajevnim omrežjem preko interneta. Vzemimo primer, ko se želite povezati s krajevnim omrežjem v svoji službi medtem ko ste na poslovnem izletu. Nekje najdite internetno povezavo (na primer v hotelu) in se nato povežite z VPN-jem svojega delovnega mesta. Vse bo delovalo tako kot da ste se povezali na omrežje v službi, vendar bo dejanska omrežna povezava potekala skozi internetno povezavo hotela. Povezave VPN so običajno šifrirane, da ljudem preprečijo dostop do krajevnega omrežja, s katerim se povezujete, brez prijave.

Obstajajo številne različne vrste VPN. Morda morate namestiti dodatne programe glede na vrsto VPN-ja, ki jo imate. Ugotovite podrobnosti povezave od osebe, ki je odgovorna za VPN, in si oglejte katero vrsto odjemalca VPN morate uporabiti. Nato pojdite v namestilnik programov in iščite paket Upravljalnika omrežij, ki deluje z vašim VPN-jem (če obstaja), in ga namestite.

V primeru da za vašo vrsto VPN ne obstaja paket Upravljalnika omrežij, boste verjetno morali prejeti in namestiti program odjemalca podjetja, ki zagotavlja programe VPN. Verjetno boste morali za vzpostavitev delovanja slediti drugačnim navodilom.

Ko je to narejeno, lahko nastavite povezavo VPN:

Kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve omrežja.

Na seznamu na levi kliknite na gumb + za dodajanje nove povezave.

Na sezanmu vmesnikov izberite VPN in kliknite Ustvari ....

Kliknite Dodaj in izberite vrsto povezave VPN, ki jo imate.

Kliknite Ustvari, sledite navodilom na zaslonu in vnesite podrobnosti kot sta uporabniško ime ali geslo.

Ko ste končali z nastavljanjem VPN, kliknite na ikono omrežja v zgornji vrstici, pojdite v Povezave VPN in kliknite na povezavo, ki ste jo pravkar ustvarili. Računalnik bo poskusil vzpostaviti povezavo VPN - ikona omrežja se bo spremenila, medtem ko se računalnik poskuša povezati.

Verjetno se boste uspešno povezali z VPN-jem. Morda boste morali dvakrat preveriti nastavitve VPN, ki ste jih vnesli. To lahko storite s klikom na ikono omrežja, klikom na Uredi povezave in klikom zavihka VPN.

Za prekinitev povezave VPN kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in kliknite Prekini povezavo pod imenom svoje povezave VPN.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts-edit-details.page0000644000373100047300000000344512157071007026564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Uredite podrobnosti vsakega stika. Urejanje podrobnosti stika

Urejanje podrobnosti stika vam pomaga obdržati podatke v imeniku posodobljene in celovite.

Select the contact from your contact list.

Press Edit in the top-rigth corner of Contacts.

Edit the contact details.

To add a detail such as a new phone number or email address, press Add Detail and select the field that you want to add.

Press Done to finish editing the contact.

V primeru povezanih stikov lahko profil uredite s klikom na podobo profila.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-nav.page0000644000373100047300000002232312157071007024756 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Uporaba programov in namizja brez miške. Krmarjenje s tipkami Shaun McCance

Do NOT use ui:expanded on this page. I know it's tempting, but the target audience for this page is people who cannot use a mouse, and having to expand sections when you're just figuring out how to drive things with the keyboard is a burden.

Ta stran opisuje krmarjenje s tipkovnico za ljudi, ki ne morejo uporabiti miške ali druge kazalne naprave ali za tiste, ki želijo tipkovnico uporabljati kolikor je le mogoče. Za tipkovne bližnjice, ki so uporabne za vse uporabnike, si oglejte .

V primeru da imate težave z uporabo miške ali druge kazalne naprave, lahko miškin kazalec nadzirate s številsko tipkovnico. Za podrobnosti si oglejte .

 Krmarjenje po uporabniškem vmesniku

Tab in CtrlTab

Premika žarišče tipkovnice med različnimi nadzorniki. Ctrl Tab se premika med skupinami nadzornikov kot iz stranske vrstice v glavno vsebino. S CtrlTab se lahko premaknete tudi izven področij, ki uporabljajo Tab kot je področje besedila.

Držite tipkoShift za premik žarišča v obratnem vrstnem redu.

Smerne tipke

Premika izbiro med predmeti v enem nadzorniku ali med zbirko pvoezanih nadzornikov. Uporabite smerne tipke za osredotočenje na gumbe v orodni vrstici, izbiro predmetov v seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu ali izbiro izbrinega gumba iz skupine.

V drevesnem pogledu izberite tipki leve in desne puščice za zlaganje in razširitev predmetov s podrejenimi predmeti.

CtrlSmerne tipke

V seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu premaknite žarišče tipkovnice na drug predmet ne da bi spremenili kateri predmet je izbran.

ShiftSmerne tipke

V seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu izberite vse predmete iz trenutno izbranega predmeta na predmet, ki je na novo v žarišču.

Preslednica

Omogoči predmet v žarišču kot je gumb, izbiro polje ali predmet seznama.

CtrlPreslednica

V seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu lahko izberite ali odstranite izbiro predmeta v žarišču ne da bi odstranili izbiro drugih predmetov.

Alt

Držite tipkoAlt za prikazpospeševalnikov : podčrtanih črk na predmetih menija, gumbih in drugih nadzornikih. Pritisnite Alt in podčrtano črko za omogočitev nadzornika kot če bi nanj kliknili.

Esc

Konča meni, pojavno okno, preklopnik ali pogovorno okno.

F10

Odpre prvi meni v menijski vrstici okna. Uporabite smerne tipke za krmarjenje po menijih.

Super F10

Odprite meni programi v vrhnji vrstici.

ShiftF10 or Menu

Prikaže vsebinski meni za trenutno izbiro kot če bi desno kliknili.

CtrlF10

V upravljalniku datotek odpre vsebinski meni za trenutno mapo kot če bi desno kliknili na ozadje in ne na enega od predmetov.

CtrlPageUp in CtrlPageDown

V vmesniku z zavihki preklopi na zavihek na levi ali desni.
Krmarjenje po namizju

AltF6

Kroži med okni istega programa. Držite tipko Alt in pritisnite F6 dokler ni želeno okno poudarjeno. Nato izpustite Alt. To je podobno zmožnosti Alt`.

AltEsc

Kroži med vsemi odprtimi okni na delovni površini.

SuperM

Odprite pladenj s sporočili. Pritisnite ubežnico, da ga zaprete.
Krmarjenje po oknih

AltF4

Zapre trenutno okno.

AltF5 or Super↓

Obnovite razpeto okno na njegovo izvirno velikost. Za razpenjanje uporabite Alt F10. AltF10 tako razpne in skrči okna.

AltF7

Premakne trenutno okno. Pritisnite AltF7 in nato uporabite smerne tipke za premik okna. Pritisnite Enter za končanje premikanja okna ali Esc za njegovo vrnitev na njegovo izvirno mesto.

AltF8

Spremeni velikost trenutnega okna. PritisniteAltF8 in nato uporabite smerne tipke za spremembo velikosti okna. Pritisnite Enter za končanje spreminjanja velikosti okna ali Esc za njegovo vrnitev na izvirno velikost.

AltF10 or Super↑

Maximize a window. Press AltF10 or Super↓ to restore a maximized window to its original size.

SuperH

Skrči okno.

Super←

Maximize a window vertically along the left side of the screen. Press again to restore the window to its previous size. Press Super→ to switch sides.

Super→

Maximize a window vertically along the right side of the screen. Press again to restore the window to its previous size. Press Super← to switch sides.

AltPreslednica

Prikaže meni okna kot če bi desno kliknili v nazivni vrstici.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-file-properties-basic.page0000644000373100047300000001131412157071007030424 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ogled osnovnih podatkov, nastavitev dovoljenj in izbira privzetih programov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Lastnosti datoteke

Za ogled podatkov o datoteki ali mapi desno kliknite in izberite Lastnosti. Namesto tega lahko tudi izberete datoteko in pritisnite AltEnter.

Okno lastnosti datoteke prikazuje podrobnosti kot so vrsta datoteke, velikost datoteke in kdaj ste jo nazadnje spremenili. Če te podatke potrebujete pogosto, jih lahko imate prikazane v pogledu seznama stolpcev ali ikon.

Podatki v zavihku Osnovno so razloženi spodaj. Na voljo so tudi zavihka Dovoljenja in Odpri z. Za določene vrste datoteke kot so slike in videi bo na voljo dodaten zavihek, ki vsebuje podatke o merah, trajanju in kodeku.

Osnovne lastnosti <gui>Ime</gui>

Datoteko lahko preimenujete s spremembo tega polja. Datoteko lahko preimenujete tudi izven okna lastnosti. Oglejte .

 <gui>Vrsta</gui>

To vam pomaga določiti vrste datotek kot so dokument PDF, besedilo OpenDocument ali slika JPEG. Vrsta datoteke med drugim določa kateri programi lahko odprejo datoteko. Slike na primer ne morete odpreti s predvajalnikom glasbe. Za več podrobnosti o tem si oglejte .

Vrsta MIME je datoteka prikazana v oklepaju; vrsta MIME je standardni način, ki ga računalniki uporabljajo za sklicevanje na vrsto datoteke.

 Vsebina

To polje se prikaže, če gledate lastnosti mape ne datoteke. Pomaga vam videti število predetov v mapi. Če mapa vsebuje druge mape, se posamezne notranje mape štejejo kot ena predmet, tudi če vsebujejo več predmetov. Vsaka datoteka se prav tako šteje kot en predmet. Če je mapa prazna, bo vsebina prikazala ničesar.

 Velikost

To polje se prikaže, če gledate datotekao (ne mapo). Velikost datoteke vam pove, koliko prostora na disku zaseda. To je tudi pokazatelj, kako dolgo bo trajalo, da prenesete datoteko ali jo pošljete preko e-pošte (velike datoteke za pošiljanje/prejemanje zahtevajo več časa).

Velikosti so lahko v bajtih, KB, MB, or GB; v primeru zadnjih treh bo velikost v bajtih podana tudi v oklepaju. 1 KB je 1024 bajtov, 1 MB je 1024 KB in tako dalje.

 Mesto

Mesto vsake datoteke na računalniku je podano z absolutno potjo. To je edinstven "naslov" datoteke na računalniku, sestavljen iz seznama map, ki je potreben za najdbo datoteke. Na primer, če ima Jure datoteko z imenom Naloga.pdf v svoji domači mapi, bo njeno mesto /home/jure/Naloga.pdf.

 Glasnost

Datotečni sistem ali naprava na katerem je datoteka shranjena. To vam pokaže, kje je datoteka fizično shranjena, na primer, če je na trdem disku ali na CD-ju, ali omrežni souporabi ali datotečnem strežniku. Trde diske lahko razdelite na več razdelkov. Razdelek bo prikazan tudi pod odsekom Nosilec.

 Nezaseden prostor

To je prikazano samo za mape. Podaja količino prostora, ki je na voljo na disku, na katerem je mapa. To je uporabno za preverjanje, če je trdi disk poln.

 Dostopano

Datum in čas, ko je bila datoteka zadnjič odprta.

 Spremenjeno

Datum in čas zadnje spremembe in shranjevanja datoteke.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-windows-switching.page0000644000373100047300000000553612157071007027177 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Press SuperTab. Preklop med okni shaunm

More prose, talk about Alt+`. Maybe a screenshot. 3.0.1

Vključitev vseh programov v preklopnika oken naredi preklop med nalogami enostopenjsko opravilo in zagotavlja polno sliko izvajajočih se programov.

Iz delovne površine:

Press SuperTab to bring up the window switcher.

Release Super to select the next (highlighted) window in the switcher.

Otherwise, still holding down the Super key, press Tab to cycle through the list of open windows, or ShiftTab to cycle backwards.

You can also use the window list on the bottom bar to access all your open windows and switch between them.

Windows in the window switcher are grouped by application. Previews of applications with multiple windows pop down as you click through. Hold down Super and press ` (or the key above Tab) to step through the list.

V preklopniku oken so programu z različnih delovnih površin ločeni z navpičnimi ločilniki.

Med ikonami programov se lahko v preklopniku oken premikate s tipkama → ali ← ali jo izberete z miškinim klikom.

Predoglede programov z enim okno lahko prikažete s tipko ↓.

Iz pregleda Dejavnosti:

Klkinite na okno za preklop nanj in zapustitev pregleda. V primeru da imate odprtih več delovnih površin, lahko kliknete na vsako delovno površino za ogled odprtih oken na vsaki delovni površini.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrationcharacterization.page0000644000373100047300000000422512157071007031253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje in karakterizacija sta dve popolnoma različni stvari. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kakšna je razlika med umerjanjem in karakterizacijo?

Veliko ljudi je na začetku zmedenih o razliki med umerjanjem in karakterizacijo. Umerjanje je opravilo spreminjanja obnašanja barve naprave. To je običajno narejeno z dvema mehanizmoma:

Spreminjanje nadzornikov ali njihovih notranjih nastavitev

Uveljavljenje krivulj v barvne kanale.

Cilj umerjanja je nastaviti napravo v določeno stanje glede na njen barvni odziv. Pogosto se to uporablja kot način za zagotavljanje ponovljivega obnašanja. Običajno je umerjanje shranjeno na napravi ali za sistem določenih vrstah datotek, ki posname nastavitve naprave ali umeritvene krivulje za kanal.

Karakterizacija (ali profiliranje) je snemanje načina na katerega naprava proizvede ali se odzove na barvo. Običajno je rezultat shranjen v profilu ICC naprave. Takšen profil ne spremeni barve na noben način. Sistemu kot je CMM (modul za upravljanje barv) ali programu, ki se zaveda barv, omogoča spreminjanje barv, ko je združen z drugim profilom naprave.

Karakterizacija (profil) za napravo bo veljavna le dokler je v istem stanju umerjanja kot je bila ob karakterizaciji.

V primeru zaslonskih profilov obstaja dodatna zmeda, ker so zaradi priročnosti podatki o umerjanju pogosto shranjeni v profilu. Po dogovoru je shranjen v oznaki vcgt. Čeprav je shranjen v profilu, se ga običajni programi osnovani na ICC ne zavedajo in ne počenjajo nič z njim. Podobno se ga ne bodo zavedala in z njim upravljala običajna orodja in programi za umerjanje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-templates.page0000644000373100047300000000364412157071007025477 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Hitro ustvarite nove dokumente iz predlog datotek po meri. Anita Reitere nitalynx@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Predloge za pogosto uporabljane vrste dokumentov

Če pogosto ustvarjate dokumente osnovane na isti vsebini, lahko uporabite predloge datotek. Predloga datoteke je lahko dokument, katerega oblikovanje bi želeli ponovno uporabiti. Naredite lahko na primer predlogo glave pisma.

Ustvarjanje nove predloge

Ustvarite dokument, ki bi ga radi uporabljali kot predlogo. V urejevalniku dokumentov lahko naredite glavo pisma.

Shranite datoteko z vsebino predloge v mapo Predloge v mapi Domača mapa. Če mapa Predloge ne obstaja, jo boste najprej morali ustvarili.

 Uporaba predloge za ustvarjanje dokumenta.

Odprite mapo kamor želite shraniti nov dokument.

Right-click anywhere in the empty space in the folder, then choose New Document. The names of available templates will be listed in the submenu.

Izberite želeno predlogo s seznama.

Vnesite ime za novo ustvarjeni dokument.

Dvokliknite datoteko, da jo odprete in začnete urejati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-cancel-job.page0000644000373100047300000000565012157071007026225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preklic čakajočega posla tiskanja in njegova odstranitev iz vrste. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Cancel, pause or release a print job

You can cancel a pending print job and remove it from the queue in the printer settings.

Preklic posla tiskanja

If you accidentally started printing a document, you can cancel the print so that you do not need to waste any ink or paper.

How to cancel a print job:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Click the Show Jobs button on the right-hand side of the Printers dialog.

Cancel the print job by clicking the stop button on the pay-pause-stop symbols.

If this does not cancel the print job like you expected, try holding down the Cancel button on your printer.

Kot zadnjo možnost, še posebno, če imate velik posel tiskanja z veliko stranmi, ki ne bodo preklicane, odstranite papir iz pladnja tiskalnika. Tiskalnik bo opazil, da ni papirja in bo prenehal tiskati. Nato lahko poskusite s preklicem posla tiskanja ali izklopom in ponovnim vklopom tiskalnika.

Bodite previdni, da tiskalnika med odstranjevanjem papirja ne poškodujete. Če morate za odstranitev papirja močno vleči, ga je morda bolje pustiti, kjer je.
Pause and release a print job

If you want to pause or release a print job, you can do so by going to the jobs dialog in the printer settings and click the appropriate button.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Click the Show Jobs button on the right-hand side of the Printers dialog and either pause or release the print job based on your needs.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000275112157071007025172 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabniki Dodajanje uporabnika ali gostujoči uporabnik, spreminjanje gesla, skrbniki ... Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Uporabniški računi

Vsaka oseba, ki uporablja računalnik, bi morala imeti drug uporabniški račun. To jim omogoča izbiro svojih lastnih nastavitev in ločeno shranjevanje svojih datotek. To je tudi varnejše. Do drugega uporabniškega računa lahko dostopate le, če poznate geslo.

Računi Upravljanje uporabniških računov
Gesla
Dovoljenja Uporabniška dovoljenja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-email.page0000644000373100047300000000111412157071007024242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Privzeti programi e-pošte Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Projekt dokumentacije GNOME E-pošta, programi e-pošte usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/session-screenlocks.page0000644000373100047300000000337112157071007026372 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change how long to wait before locking the screen in the Privacy settings. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zaslon se prehitro zaklene

V primeru da računalnik za nekaj minut zapustite, se bo zaslon samodejno zaklenil, zato morate za začetek ponovne uporabe računalnika vnesti geslo. To je narejeno zaradi varnostnih vzrokov (zato da nihče ne more upravljati z računalnikom, če ga pustite nenadzorovanega), vendar je lahko moteče, če se zaslon prehitro zaklene.

Za daljše čakanje pred samodejnim zaklepom zaslona:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Zasebnost.

Click Screen Lock.

If Automatic Screen Lock is on, you can change the value in the Lock Screen After Blank For drop-down list.

If you don't ever want the screen to lock itself automatically, switch Automatic Screen Lock off.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-disc-write.page0000644000373100047300000000606712157071007025555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zapis datotek in dokumentov na prazen CD ali DVD z uporabo zapisovalca CD-jev/DVD-jev. Zapis datotek na CD ali DVD

Datoteke lahko zapišete na prazen disk z Ustvarjalnikom CD-jev/DVD-jev. Možnost ustvarjanja CD-ja ali DVD-ja se bo v upravljalniku datotek pojavila takoj, ko vstavite CD v zapisovalnik CD/DVD. Upravljalnik datotek vam omogoča enostaven prenos datotek na druge računalnike ali ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij s kopiranjem datotek na prazen disk. Za zapisovanje datotek na CD ali DVD:

Prazen disk vstavite v zapisljivi pogon CD/DVD.

V oknu Prazen disk CD/DVD-R, ki se pojavi, izberite Odpri z ustvarjalnikom CD-jev/DVD-jev. Odprlo se bo okno Ustvarjalnik CD-jev/DVD-jev.

(Lahko tudi kliknete na Prazen disk CD/DVD-R pod Naprave v stranski vrstici upravljalnika datotek.)

V polje Ime diska vpišite ime diska.

Povlecite ali kopirajte želene datoteke v okno.

Kliknite Zapiši na disk.

V Izbor diska za zapisovanje izberite prazen disk.

(Namesto tega izberite Datoteka odtisa. To bo iz datotek ustvarilo odtis diska, ki bo shranjen na vaš računalnik. Odtis diska lahko kasneje zapišete na prazen disk.)

V primeru da želite prilagoditi hitrost zapisovanja, mesto začasnih datotek in druge možnosti, kliknite Lasnosti. Privzete možnosti bi morale biti v redu.

Za začetek zapisovanja kliknite na gumb Zapiši.

V primeru da ste izbrali Zapiši več kopij, boste pozvani k vstavitvi dodatnih diskov.

Ko je zapisovanje diska končano, bo samodejno izvržen. Za končanje izberite Naredi več kopij ali Zapri.
Če disk ni bil pravilno zapisan

Včasih računalnik podatkov ne zapiše pravilno, zato ne boste mogli videti datotek, ko disk vstavite v računalnik.

V tem primeru poskusite disk znova zapisati pri manjši hitrosti zapisovanja, na primer 12x namesto 48x. Zapisovanje pri nižjih hitrostih je bolj zanesljivo. Hitrost zapisovanja lahko izberete s klikom na gumb Lastnosti v oknu Ustvarjalnik CD-jev/DVD-jev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000202212157071007026040 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhill@src.gnome.org 2012 Program Dokumenti prikaže številne priljubljene vrste dokumentov. Podprti zapisi Michael Hill

This assumes the reader knows how to.... By the end of this page, the reader will be able to....

Documents prikaže PDF, DVI, XPS, PostScript in vrste dokumentov, ki jih podpirajo Pregledovalnik dokumentov (Evince), Microsoft Office, LibreOffice in Google Docs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-hardware-info.page0000644000373100047300000000465112157071007032772 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Morda boste potrebovali podrobnosti kot je številka modela vaše brezžične kartice v naslednjih korakih odpravljanja težav. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji Zberite podatke o omrežni strojni opremi:

V tem koraku boste zbrali podatke o svoji napravi brezžičnega omrežja. Način odpravljanja brezžičnih povezav je odvisen od proizvajalca in številke modela brezžične kartice, zato si te podatke shranite. Morda vam bodo prav prišli predmeti kot so diski za namestitev gonilnikov. Najdite naslednje predmete, če jih še imate:

Pakiranje in navodila za vašo brezžično napravo (še posebno uporabniški vodnik za usmerjevalnik)

Disk, ki vsebuje gonilnike za brezžično kartico (tudi če vsebuje le gonilnike Windows)

Proizvajalci in številke modela vašega računalnika, brezžične kartice in usmerjevalnika. Te podatke lahko običajno najdete na zadnji/spodnji strani naprave.

Morebitne številke različic, ki so natisnjene na napravah ali njihovem pakiranju. To vam lahko še posebno pomaga, zato pozorno poglejte.

Karkoli na disku z gonilniki, ki določa napravo, njeno različico "strojne programske opreme" ali sestavne dele, ki jih uporablja.

Če je mogoče, poskusite dobiti dostop do druge internetne povezave, da lahko prejmete programe in gonilnike, če je to potrebno. (priklop računalnika neposredno v usmerjevalnik z Ethernet omrežnim kablom je eden od načinov za to, vendar ga priklopite le, ko ga potrebujete.)

Ko imate kolikor je mogoče od teh predmetov, kliknite Naprej.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-edit-connection.page0000644000373100047300000002242712157071007030102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Izvedite kaj pomenijo možnosti na zaslonu urejanja brezžičnih povezav. Urejanje brezžične povezave

This topic needs significant revision to be comprehensive. A number of settings remain undocumented.

Ta tema opisuje vse možnosti, ki so na voljo, ko urejate brezžično omrežno povezavo. Za urejanje povezave jo izberite v nastavitvah Omrežje in nato kliknite Možnosti.

Večina omrežij bo delovala povsem dobro, če te nastavitve pustite na privzetih vrednostih, zato vam jih verjetno ni treba spremeniti. Veliko možnosti tukaj vam zagotavlja večji nadzor nad naprednejšimi omrežji.
Na voljo vsem uporabnikom / samodejna povezava <gui>Samodejna povezava</gui>

To možnost izberite, če želite, da se računalnik poskuša povezati s tem brezžičnim omrežjem kadar je v njegovem obsegu.

V primeru da ste na dosegu več omrežij, ki so nastavljena za samodejno povezovanje, se bo računalnik povezal z omrežjem, ki je prvo prikazano v zavihku Brezžično v oknu Omrežne povezave. Računalnik za povezavo z drugim omrežjem v doseg katerega je pravkar prišel ne bo prekinil povezave z obstoječim omrežjem.

 <gui>Na voljo vsem uporabnikom</gui>

Izberite to možnost, če želite, da imajo vsi uporabniki računalnika dostop do tega brezžičnega omrežja. V primeru da ima omrežje geslo WEP/WPA, boste geslo morali vnesti le enkrat. Vsi drugi uporabniki na vašem računalniku se bodo lahko z omrežjem povezali, ne da bi jim bilo treba vedeti geslo.

V primeru da je ta možnost izbrana, morate biti za spreminjanje možnosti tega omrežja skrbnik. Morda boste morali vnesti svoje skrbniško geslo.
Brezžično <gui>SSID</gui>

To je ime brezžičnega omrežja s katerim se povezujete, znano tudi pod kratico SSID. Tega ne spreminjajte, če niste spremenili imena brezžičnega omrežja (na primer s spremembo nastavitev svojega brezžičnega usmerjevalnika ali osnovne postaje).

 <gui>Način</gui>

To uporabite za navedbo ali se povezujete z Infrastrukturnim omrežjem (tistim, kjer se računalniki povežejo z osrednjo postajo ali usmerjevalnikom) ali omrežjem Ad-hoc (kjer ni osnovne postaje in se računalniki povežejo eden z drugim. Večina omrežij je infrastrukturnih, vendar pa lahko vzpostavite svoje omrežje ad-hoc.

V primeru da izberete Ad-hoc, boste videli dve drugi možnosti, Pas in Kanal. Ti možnosti določita v katerem frekvenčnem pasu bo ad-hoc brezžično omrežje delovalo. Nekateri računalniki lahko delujejo le na nekaterih pasovih (na primer le A ali le B), zato boste morda želeli izbrati pas, ki ga lahko uporabijo vsi računalniki na ad-hoc omrežju. Na zaposlenih mestih je morda na istem kanalu na voljo več omrežij. To lahko vašo povezavo upočasni, zato lahko spremenite tudi kanal, ki ga uporabljate.

 <gui>BSSID</gui>

To je Osnovno določilo zbirke storitev. SSID (glejte zgoraj) je ime omrežja, ki naj bi ga brali ljudje. BSSID je ime, ki ga razume računalnik (to je niz črk in števil, ki je za določeno brezžično omrežje edinstven). Če je omrežje skrito, ne bo imelo SSID, vendar bo imelo BSSID.

 <gui>MAC naslov naprave</gui>

Naslov MAC je koda, ki določi kos omrežne strojne opreme (na primer brezžično kartico, omrežno kartico Eternet ali usmerjevalnik). Vsaka naprava, ki jo povežete z omrežjem, ima edinstven naslov MAC, ki ji je bil dodeljen v tovarni.

To možnost lahko uporabite za spremembo naslova MAC svoje omrežne kartice.

 <gui>Kloniran naslov MAC</gui>

Vaša omrežna strojna oprema (brezžična kartica) se lahko pretvarja, da ima drugačen naslov MAC. To je uporabno, če imate napravo ali storitev, ki se bo sporazumevala le z določenimi naslovi MAC (na primer širokopasovni kabelski modem). V primeru da naslov MAC vnesete v polje kloniran naslov MAC, bo naprava/storitev mislila, da ima vaš računalnik kloniran naslov MAC in ne pravi naslov MAC.

 <gui>MTU</gui>

Ta nastavitev spremeni Največjo enoto prenosa, ki je največji kos podatkov, ki ga je mogoče poslati preko omrežja. Ko so datoteke poslane preko omrežja, so podatki razdeljeni v majhne koščke (znane pod imenom paketi). Optimalni MTU za vaše omrežje je odvisen od tega kako verjetno je, da se bodo paketi izgubili (zaradi šuma v povezavi) in kako hitra je povezava. Ponavadi vam te nastavitve ni treba spreminjati.
Brezžična varnost <gui>Varnost</gui>

To določi katero vrsto šifriranja uporablja vaše brezžično omrežje. Šifrirana omrežja pomagajo pri zaščiti vaše brezžične povezave pred prestrezanjem, zato drugi ljudje ne morejo "prisluškovati" in videti katera spletišča obiskujete in tako naprej.

Nekatere vrste šifriranja so močnejše kot druge, vendar jih morda starejša oprema brezžičnega omrežja ne podpira. Običajno boste morali za povezavo vnesti geslo. Bolj izpopolnjene vrste varnosti morda zahtevajo tudi uporabniško ime in digitalno potrdilo. Za več podrobnosti o priljubljenih vrstah brezžičnega šifriranja si oglejte .
Nastavitve IPv4 shaunm

There's also Shared to other computers

Then there's addresses and dns servers and ipv4 addressing routes.

All current info correct, but incomplete

Uporabite ta zavihek za določitev podrobnosti kot sta naslov IP vašega računalnika in strežniki DNS, ki naj jih uporabi. Spremenite Način za ogled različnih načinov dobivanja/nastavljanja teh podrobnosti.

Na voljo so naslednji načini:

<gui>Samodejno (DHCP)</gui>

Dobite podatke kot sta naslov IP in strežnik DNS od strežnika DHCP. Strežnik DHCP je računalnik (ali druga naprava kot je usmernik), ki je povezan na omrežje in se odloči katere omrežne nastavitve naj ima računalnik. Ko se prvič povežete na omrežje, vam bodo pravilne nastavitve samodejno dodeljene. Večina omrežij uporablja DHCP.

 <gui>Le samodejni (DHCP) naslovi</gui>

V primeru da izberete to nastavitev, bo vaš računalnik svoj naslov IP dobil od strežnika DHCP, vendar boste morali druge podrobnosti določiti ročno (kot je strežnik DNS, ki ga želite uporabiti).

 <gui>Ročno</gui>

Izberite to možnost, če želite sami določiti vse nastavitve omrežja, vključno z naslovom IP.

 <gui>Poveži le krajevno</gui>

Poveži krajevno je način povezave računalnikov na omrežju brez zahteve po strežniku DHCP ali ročnemu določevanju naslovov IP in drugih podatkov. V primeru da se povežete na omrežje Poveži krajevno, se bodo računalniki na omrežju med sabo odločili katere naslove IP bodo uporabili in tako naprej. To je uporabno, če želite nekaj računalnikov začasno povezati, da se lahko sporazumevajo med sabo.

 <gui>Onemogočeno</gui>

Ta možnost bo onemogočila omrežno povezavo in vam preprečila povezovanje z njo. IPv4 in IPv6 se obravnavata kot ločeni povezavi, čeprav veljata za isto omrežno kartico. V primeru da imate eno omogočeno, boste morda želeli drugo onemogočiti.
Nastavitve IPv6 shaunm

The list of methods is a bit different

To je podobno zavihku IPv4, vendar upravlja z novejšim standardom IPv6. Zelo moderna omrežja uporabljajo IPv6, vendar je trenutno IPv4 še vedno bolj priljubljen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/disk.page0000644000373100047300000000130012157071007023316 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Prostor na disku, primerjava zmogljivosti, težave, nosilci in razdelki … Diski in shramba usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-collections.page0000644000373100047300000000461112157071007026711 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Združevanje povezanih dokumentov v zbirko. Ustvarjanje zbirk dokumentov Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to explore and find documents. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to make collections. This topic is about: - Overview of how collections work. - How are collections searched? How can you only search inside a collection? - Can you put collections inside collections?

Program Dokumenti vam omogoča dajanje dokumentov različnih vrst na eno mesto z imenom zbirka. Če imate povezane dokumente, jih lahko združite, da bo iskanje lažje. Če imate na primer poslovni izlet in ste tam izvedli predstavitev, lahko združite dokumente kot so letalska rezervacija (to je datoteka PDF), preglednico s proračunom in druge hibridne dokumente PDF/ODF v eni zbirki.

Za ustvarjanje ali dodajanje k zbirki:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

V načinu izbire izberite dokumente za biranje

Kliknite gumb + v vrstici gumbov.

Na seznamu zbirk kliknite Dodaj in vnesite novo ime zbirke ali izberite obstoječo zbirko. Izbrani dokumenti bodo dodani k zbirki.

Zbirke se ne obnašajo kot mape in njihova hierarhija: trenutno zbirk ne morete postaviti v obstoječe zbirke.

Za izbris zbirke:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

V načinu zbirke izberite zbirko za izbris.

Kliknite na gumb Smeti v vrstici gumbov. Zbirka bo bila izbrisana, izvirni dokumenti pa bodo ostali.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/screen-shot-record.page0000644000373100047300000000757312157071007026114 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zajemite sliko ali posnemite videoposnetek dogajanja na svojem namizju. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zaslonske slike in posnetki

Zajamete lahko sliko svojega zaslona (zaslonsko sliko) ali posnamete videoposnetek dogajanja na zaslonu (zaslonski posnetek). To je uporabno, če želite nekomu drugemu pokazati, kako nekaj narediti z računalnikom. Zaslonske slike in posnetki so običajne slikovne/video datoteke, zato jih lahko pošljete preko e-pošte in delite preko spleta.

Zajeme zaslonske slike

V pregledu Dejavnosti odprite Zaslonska slika.

In the Take Screenshot window, select whether to grab the whole screen, the current window, or an area of the screen. Set a delay if you need to select a window or otherwise set up your desktop for the screenshot. Then choose any effects you want.

Kliknite Zajemi zaslonsko sliko.

V primeru da ste izbrali Izbor področja za zajem, se bo kazalec spremenil v križec. Kliknite in vlecite področje, ki ga želite na zaslonski sliki.

V oknu Shrani zaslonsko sliko izberite ime datoteke in mapo ter kliknite Shrani.

Namesto tega lahko zaslonski posnetek uvozite neposredno v program za urejanje slik brez predhodnega shranjevanja. Kliknite Kopiraj na odložišče in nato prilepite sliko v drug program ali povlecite sličico zaslonske slike v ta program.

 Tipkovne bližnjice

Hitro zajemite sliko namizja, okna ali področja z uporabo naslednjih tipkovnih bližnjic:

Prt Scrn za zajem slike namizja.

AltPrt Scrn za zajem slike okna.

ShiftPrt Scrn za zajem slike izbranega področja.

Ko uporabite tipkovno bližnjico, je slika samodejno shranjena v vašo mapo Slike z imenom, ki se začne s "Zaslonska slika" in vključuje datum in čas zajema slike.

Lahko tudi držite Ctrl s katerokoli od zgornjih bližnjic za kopiranje slike zaslona na odložišče namesto shranjevanja.
Ustvarjanje zaslonskega posnetka

Posnamete lahko tudi videoposnetek dogajanja na zaslonu:

Pritisnite CtrlAltShiftR za začetek snemanja vsebine na zaslonu.

Medtem ko snemanje poteka, je v spodnjem desnem kotu zaslona prikazan rdeč krog. Rdeči kot ni prikazan na videoposnetku.

Ko ste končali, pritisnite CtrlAltShiftR za zaustavitev snemanja.

Ta video je samodejno shranjen v vaši mapi Video z imenom datoteke, ki se začne s "Screencast" in vsebuje datum in čas zajema.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-copy.page0000644000373100047300000000764312157071007024456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kopiranje ali premik predmetov v novo mapo. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kopiranje ali premik datotek ali map

Mapo ali datoteko lahko kopirate ali premaknete na novo mesto z vlečenjem in spuščanjem z miško, z uporabo ukazov kopiraj in prilepi ali z uporabo tipkovnih bližnjic.

Morda boste na primer želeli predstavitev kopirati na usb ključek zato, da ga lahko vzamete s seboj na delo. Ali pa lahko naredite varnostno kopijo dokumenta preden ga spremenite (in nato uporabite staro kopijo, če vam spremembe niso všeč.)

Ta navodila veljajo tako za datoteke in mape. Datoteke in mape lahko kopirate na popolnoma enak način.

Kopiranje in lepljenje datotek

Z enojnim klikom izberite datoteko, ki jo želite kopirati.

Desno kliknite in izberite Kopiraj ali pritisnite CtrlC.

Krmarite do druge mape kamor želite kopirati datoteko.

Za končanje kopiranja datoteke kliknite na ikono zobnika in izberite Prilepi ali pritisnite CtrlV. Sedaj bo kopija datoteke v izvirni mapi in v drugi mapi.

 Izrez in lepljenje datotek za njihov premik

Z enojnim klikom izberite datoteko, ki jo želite premakniti.

Desno kliknite iz izberite Izreži ali pritisnite CtrlX.

Krmarite v drugo mapo kamor želite premakniti datoteko.

Za končanje premikanja datoteke kliknite ikono zobnika v orodni vrstici in izberite Prilepi ali pritisnite krmilkaV. Datoteka bo iz izvirne mape premaknjena v drugo mapo.

 Vleka datotek za kopiranje ali premik

Odprite upravljalnik datotek in pojdite v mapo, ki vsebuje datoteko, ki jo želite kopirati.

Za odprtje novega okna kliknite Datoteke v zgornji vrstici, izberite Novo okno (ali pritisnite CtrlN). V novem oknu krmarite do mape kamor želite kopirati datoteko.

Kliknite in povlecite datoteko iz enega okna v drugo. Privzeto bo vlečenje predmeta predmet premaknilo, če je cilj na isti napravi in kopiralo, če je cilj na drugi napravi.

Če na primer datoteko povlečete na USB ključek iz svoje domače mape, bo datoteka kopirana, ker datoteko vlečete z ene naprave na drugo.

Za prisiljenje kopiranja datoteke med vlečenjem pritisnite in držite tipko Ctrl, za prisiljenje premikanja med vlečenjem pritisnite in držite tipko Shift.

Datoteke ne morete kopirati ali premakniti v mapo, ki je na voljo le za branje. Nekatere mape so le za branje zato, da vam preprečijo spremembe vsebine. Mape lahko iz dostopnosti le za branje spremenite s spremembo dovoljenj datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth-remove-connection.page0000644000373100047300000000327312157071007030034 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranitev naprave s seznama naprav Bluetooth. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Odstranitev povezave med napravami Bluetooth

Če ne želite biti več povezani z napravo Bluetooth, lahko povezavo odstranite. To je uporabno, če ne želite več uporabiti naprave kot sta miška ali slušalke ali če ne želite več prenesti datotek z ali na napravo.

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

Kliknite na ikono BLuetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

V levem pladnju izberite napravo s katero želite prekiniti povezavo in kliknite na - pod seznamom.

Kliknite Odstrani v potrditvenem oknu.

Napravo Bluetooth lahko kasneje ponovno povežete, če želite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/disk-format.page0000644000373100047300000000473012157071010024610 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Odstranite vse datoteke in mape iz zunanjega trdega diska ali USB ključka s formatiranjem. Odstranitev vsega z odstranljivega diska

V primeru da imate odstranljiv disk kot je ključek USB ali zunanji trdi disk, boste morda želeli popolnoma odstraniti vse njegove datoteke in mape. To lahko storite s formatiranjem diska - to izbriše vse datoteke na disku in ga pusti praznega.

Formatiranje odstranljivega diska

Odprite program Diskovna orodja iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite disk, ki ga želite izbrisati, s seznama Naprave shrambe.

Prepričajte se, da ste izbrali pravi disk! V primeru da izberete napačen disk, bodo vse datoteke na drugem disku izbrisane!

V odseku Nosilcu kliknite Odklopi nosilec. Nato kliknice Formatiraj nosilce.

V oknu, ki se pojavi, izberite Vrsto datotečnega sistema za disk.

V primeru da disk uporabljate tudi na sistemih Windows in Mac OS, izberite FAT. Če ga uporabljate le na Windows, je NTFS boljša možnost. Kratek opis vrste datotečnega sistema bo bil predstavljen kot oznaka.

Disk poimenujte in za začetek izbrisa podatkov kliknite Formatiraj.

Ko se je formatiranje končalo, disk varno odstranite. Sedaj bi moral biti prazen in pripravljen za ponovno uporabo.

 Formatiranje diska vaših datotek ne izbriše varno

Formatiranje diska ni popolnoma varen način izbrisa podatkov. Formatiran disk bo videti kot da na njem ni datotek, vendar je mogoče s posebnimi obnovitvenimi programi datoteke obnoviti. V primeru da želite datoteke varno izbrisati, uporabite pripomoček kot je shred.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-security-tips.page0000644000373100047300000000534412157071010026002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Splošni namigi za uporabo interneta Steven Richards steven.richardspc@gmail.com Varnost na internetu

Eden od vzrokov za uporabo Linuxa je robustna varnost po kateri je znan. En vzrok zakaj je Linux relativno varen pred zlonamerno programsko opremo in virusi je zaradi števila ljudi, ki ga uporabljajo. Virusi napadajo priljubljene operacijske sisteme kot je Windows, ki imajo ogromno število uporabnikov. Linux je zelo varen tudi zaradi njegove odprtokodne narave, ki strokovnjakom omogoča spreminjanje in izboljševanje varnostnih zmožnosti, ki so vključene v vsako distribucijo.

Kljub vsem ukrepom, da bi bila vaša namestitev Linuxa varna, ranljivosti vedno obstajajo. Kot običajen uporabnik na internetu ste še vedno izpostavljeni:

Lažnemu predstavljanju (spletišča, ki s prevaro poskušajo pridobiti občutljive podatke)

Posredovanje zlonamerne e-pošte

Programom z zlonamernimi nameni (virusi)

Nepooblaščenim oddaljenim/krajevnim omrežnim dostopom

Da bi ostali na spletui varni, se držite naslednjih namigov:

Ne odpirajte e-pošte, prilog ali povezav, ki so vam jih poslali neznanci.

V primeru da je ponudba spletišča predobra, da bi bila res, ali vpraša za občutljive podatke, ki se zdijo nepotrebni, dvakrat premislite kaj pošiljate in morebitne posledice, če te podatke dobijo tatovi identitete in drugi kriminalci.

Bodite previdni pri zagotavljanju skrbniških dovoljenj programom, še posebno tistim, ki jih še niste uporabljali ali programom, ki niso dobro znani. Dodeljevanje skrbniških pravic komurkoli/čemurkoli vaš računalnik postavi v visoko tvegan položaj.

Prepričajte se, da poganjate le nujne storitve oddaljenega dostopa. Poganjanje SSH ali VNC je lahko uporabno, vendar vaš računalnik pusti izpostavljen vlomu, če ni pravilno zavarovan. Razmislite o uporabi požarnega zidu za pomoč pri zaščiti vašega računalnika pred vlomom.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-select.page0000644000373100047300000000366612157071010025655 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Uporabite način izbire za izbiro več kot enega dokumenta ali zbirke. Izbira dokumentov Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to sort their documents. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to explain how selection mode works

Iz načina izbire Dokumenti lahko odprete, natisnete, si ogledate ali naredite zbirke svojih dokumentov. Za uporabo načina izbire:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

Izberite enega ali več dokumentov ali zbirk. Pojavi se vrstica gumbov z dejanji, ki so na voljo za vašo izbiro.
Dejanja načina izbire

Po izbiri enega ali več dokumentov lahko:

Odpri s pregledovalnikom dokumentov (ikona mape).

Tiskaj (ikona tiskalnika): tiskanje dokumenta (na voljo le, ko je izbran posamezen dokument).

Organizirate (ikona plus): ustvarite zbirko dokumentov

Lastnosti (ikona ključa): prikaže lastnosti dokumenta (na voljo le, ko je izbran posamezen dokument).

Izbriši (ikona smeti): izbris ene ali več zbirk.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000001504412157071010027331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba namizja s tipkovnico. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Uporabne tipkovne bližnjice

Ta stran zagotavlja pregled tipkovnih bližnjic, ki vam lahko pomagajo pri bolj učinkoviti uporabiti namizja in programov. Če miške ali kazalne naprave ne morete uporabiti, si za več podrobnosti o krmarjenju po vmesniku s tipkovnico oglejte .

Spoznavanje namizja

AltF1 or the Super key

Preklopi med pregledom Dejavnosti in namizjem. V pregledu začnite tipkati za hipno iskanje po programih, stikih in dokumentih.

AltF2

Pojavno ukazno okno (za hitro izvajanje ukazov)

SuperTab

Quickly switch between windows. Hold down Shift for reverse order.

Super`

Switch between windows from the same application, or from the selected application after SuperTab.

This shortcut uses ` on US keyboards, where the ` key is above Tab. On all other keyboards, the shortcut is Super plus the key above Tab.

CtrlAltTab

Dajte žarišče tipkovnice na vrhnjo vrstico. V pregledu Dejavnosti preklopite žarišče tipkovnice med vrhnjo vrstico, pregledno ploščo, pregledom oken, seznamom programov in iskalnim poljem. Za krmarjenje uporabite tipke s puščicami.

It is not currently possible to use the arrow keys to navigate the windows overview. To switch windows, exit the overview and use SuperTab and Super`.

SuperA

Show the list of applications.

SuperPage Up and SuperPage Down

Switch between workspaces.

SuperShiftPage Up and SuperShiftPage Down

Move the current window to a different workspace.

CtrlAltDelete

Log out.

CtrlAltL

Zakleni zaslon.

SuperM

Open the message tray. Press SuperM again or Esc to close.
Pogoste bližnjice urejanje

CtrlA

Izbere vse besedilo ali predmete na seznamu.

CtrlX

Izreže (odstrani) izbrano besedilo ali predmete in jih postavi na odložišče.

CtrlC

Kopira izbrano besedilo ali predmete na odložišče.

CtrlV

Prilepi vsebino odložišča.

CtrlZ

Razveljavi zadnje dejanje.
Zajame zaslon

Prnt Scrn

Zajem zaslonske slike.

AltPrnt Scrn

Zajem zaslonske slike okna.

ShiftPrnt Scrn

Zajem zaslonske slike področja na zaslonu. Kazalec se spremeni v merilec. Kliknite in povlecite za izbiro področja.

CtrlAltShiftR

Začetek in konec snemanja zaslonskih posnetkov.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-add.page0000644000373100047300000000411012157071010024725 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Poveži spletni račun. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dodaj račun

Dodajanje računa bo pomagalo povezati vaše spletne račune z vašim namizjem GNOME. Tako bodo vaš program e-pošte, klepeta in drugi povezani programi že nastavljeni za vas.

Kliknite na gumb + v spodnjem levem delu okna.

Kliknite na meni Vrsta računa in izberite vrsto.

Če imate več kot eno vrsto računov, lahko druge račune dodate kasneje.

Kliknite Dodaj ....

Odprlo se bo malo okno s spletno stranjo, kamor lahko vnesete poverila vašega računa. Na primer: če nastavljate za račun pri Google-u, vnesite Google-ovo uporabniško ime in geslo.

Če ste poverila vnesli pravilno, boste pozvani k omogočitvi dostopa GNOME do vašega spletnega računa. Za nadaljevanje izberite Dovoli dostop.

Izberite programe, ki jih želite povezati s svojim spletnim računom. Če želite spletni račun uporabiti za klepet, vendar spletnega računa ne želite uporabiti za koledar, možnost koledar izklopite.

Ko ste dodali račune, bo vsak od izrabnih programov ob zagonu samodejno uporabil vnesena poverila.

Zaradi varnostnih vzrokov GNOME vaših gesel ne shrani na računalniku. Namesto tega shrani žeton, ki ga zagotavlja spletna storitev. Če želite popolnoma preklicati povezavo med svojim namizjem in spletno storitvijo, ga odstranite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/privacy.page0000644000373100047300000000173112157071010024043 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Screen lock, Name & visibility, Usage history, Purge trash & temporary files… Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com 2013 Nastavitve zasebnosti

The Privacy Settings in GNOME help you control whether or not certain parts of your desktop are visible to others. You can also use these settings to clear your computer usage history and clean-out unecessary files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing.page0000644000373100047300000000255612157071010024226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Krajevna nastavitev, vrstni red in izbiranje, dvostransko in več strani ... Tiskanje Jim C

Needs info about network printing - 2011-06-08
Namestavitev Nastavitev tiskalnika
Velikosti in razporeditve Različne velikosti in razporeditve papirja.
Nezaznani tiskalniki, zastal papir, izpiski, ki so videti napačno ... Težave s tiskalnikom
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-recover.page0000644000373100047300000000337612157071010025142 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izbrisane datoteke so običajno poslane v Smeti. Datoteke lahko iz Smeti dobite nazaj. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Obnovitev datoteke iz Smeti

Če datoteko izbrišete z upravljalnikom datotek, je datoteka običajno premaknjena v Smeti, zato jo lahko obnovite.

Za obnovitev datoteke iz smeti:

Odprite program Datoteke iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

V stranski vrstici kliknite Smeti.

V primeru da ste datoteko izbrisali tam, desno kliknite nanjo in izberite Obnovi. Obnovljena bo v mapo iz katere je bila izbrisana.

V primeru da ste datoteko izbrisali s ShiftDelete ali iz ukazne vrstice, datoteke na ta način ni mogočne obnoviti, ker je bila trajno izbrisana. Datotek, ki so bile trajno izbrisane, ni mogoče obnoviti iz Smeti.

Na voljo so številna obnovitvena orodja, ki lahko včasih obnovijo datoteke, ki so bile trajno izbrisane. Običajno jih ni enostavno uporabiti. V primeru da ste datoteko trajno izbrisali, za nasvet vprašajte na podpornem forumu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000610312157071010024726 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranite datoteke ali mape, ki jih ne potrebujete več. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izbris datotek in map

Če datoteke ali mape ne želite več, jo lahko izbrišete. Ko predmet izbrišete, je premaknjen v mapo Smeti, kjer je shranjen, dokler smeti ne izpraznite. Predmete, ki so shranjeni v mapi Smeti, lahko obnovite na njihovo izvirno mesto, če se odločite, da jih potrebujte ali pa ste jih izbrisali po nesreči.

Za pošiljanje datoteke v smeti:

Izberite predmet, ki ga želite izbrisati, tako da nanj enkrat kliknete.

Pritisnite CtrlDelete na tipkovnici. Namesto tega lahko predmet povlečete v Smeti v stranski vrstici.

Za trajen izbris datotek in sprostitev prostora na računalniku morate izprazniti smeti. Za izpraznitev smeti desno kliknite na Smeti v stranski vrstici in izberite Izprazni smeti.

Trajno izbriši datoteko

Datoteko lahko takoj trajno izbrišete brez pošiljanja v smeti.

Za trajen izbris datoteke:

Izberite predmet, ki ga želite izbrisati.

Pritisnite in držite tipko Shift in nato pritisnite tipko Delete.

Ker tega ne morete razveljaviti boste morali potrditi, da želite datoteko ali mapo izbrisati.

V primeru da morate datoteke pogosto izbrisati brez prehoda v smeti (na primer, če pogosto delate z občutljivimi podatki), lahko v meni desnega klika za datoteke in mape dodate vnos Izbriši. Kliknite Datoteke v zgonji vrstici, izberite Možnosti in izberite zavihek Obnašanje. Izberite Vključi ukaz Izbriši, ki obide Smeti.

Izbrisane datoteke na odstranljivih napravah morda na drugih operacijskih sistemih kot sta Windows ali Mac OS ne bodo vidne. Datoteke so še vedno tam in bodo na voljo, ko napravo priklopite nazaj v svoj računalnik.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts-link-unlink.page0000644000373100047300000000505512157071010026440 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Združite podatke za stik iz več virov. Link and unlink contacts usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/tips-specialchars.page0000644000373100047300000001312712157071010026006 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Vnos znakov, ki jih na svoji tipkovnici ne najdete, vključno s tujimi abecedami, matematičnimi simboli in okrasnimi znaki. Vnos posebnih znakov

Vnesete in ogledate si lahko tisoče znakov iz večine svetovnih sistemov pisanja, tudi tiste, ki jih na vaši tipkovnici ni mogoče najti. Ta stran našteva nekaj različnih načinov s katerimi lahko vnesete posebne znake.

Načini za vnos znakov
Preglednica znakov

GNOME vsebuje program preglednice znakov, ki vam omogoča brskanje po vseh znakih v tabeli Unicode. Uporabite ga za iskanje znaka, ki ga potrebujete, in ga nato kopirajte in prilepite kamor ga potrebujete.

Preglednico znakov lahko najdete v pregledu Dejavnosti. Za več podrobnosti o preglednici znakov si oglejte priročnik Preglednice znakov.

Sestavna tipka

Tipka sestavi je posebna tipka, ki vam omogoča pritisk več tipk hkrati za pridobivanje posebnega znaka. Na primer za vnos črke é lahko pritisnete sestavi nato ' nato e.

Tipkovnice nimajo določenih tipk sestavi. Namesto tega lahko kot tipko sestavi določite eno od obstoječih tipk na svoji tipkovnici.

Določi sestavno tipko

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tipkovnica.

Select the Shortcuts tab and click Typing.

Click on Compose Key in the right pane.

Click on Disabled and select the key you would like to behave as a compose key from the drop-down menu. You can choose either of the Ctrl keys, the right Alt key, the right Win or Super key if you have one, the Menu key or Caps Lock. Any key you select will then only work as a compose key, and will no longer work for its original purpose.

S tipko sestavi lahko vnesete veliko pogostih znakov, na primer:

Pritisnite sestavi, nato pritisnite ' in zatem pritisnite črko nad katero želite postaviti ostrivec, tako kot v é.

Pritisnite sestavi, nato pritisnite ` (krativec) in zatem pritisnite črko nad katero želite postaviti naglas, kot je è.

Pritisnite sestavi, nato pritisnite " in zatem pritisnite črko nad katero želite postaviti preglas, kot je ë.

Pritisnite sestavi, nato pritisnite - in zatem pritisnite črko nad katero želite postaviti črto, kot je ē.

Za več zaporedij tipke sestavi si oglejte stran tipke sestavi na Wikipediji.

Točke kode

Katerikoli znak Unicode lahko s svojo vašo tipkovnico vnesete s številsko kodo znaka. Vsak znak je določen s kodo sestavljeno iz štirih števil. Za iskanje kode za znak najdite znak v programu preglednice znakov in poglejte v vrstico stanja na zavihku Podrobnosti znaka. Koda so štirje znaki za U+.

Za vnos znaka s pomočjo njegove kode pritisnite Ctrl in Shift, vtipkajte u in štiri številčno kodo in nato izpustite Ctrl in Shift. V primeru da te znake pogosto uporabljate in do njih z drugimi načini ne morete enostavno dostopati, si vam bo morda lažje zapomniti kodo za hiter vnos znakov.

Razporeditve tipkovnice

Vaša tipkovnica se lahko obnaša kot tipkovnica za drug jezik neodvisno od črk, ki so natisnjene na tipkah. Med različnimi razporeditvami tipkovnice lahko enostavno preklapljate z uporabo ikone v vrhnji vrstici. Za več podrobnosti o tem si oglejte .

Načini vnosa

Način vnosa razširi prejšnje načine z omogočanjem vnosa ne le s tipkovnico ampak tudi z vhodnimi napravami. Znake lahko vnesete na primer z miško ali načinom kretenj ali pa vnesete japonske znake s tipkovnico z latinico.

Za izbiro načina vnosa desno kliknite nad gradnikom besedila in v meniju Način vnosa izberite način vnosa, ki ga želite uporabiti. Privzeti način vnosa ni zagotovljen zato si oglejte dokumentacijo o načinih vnosa za ogled kako jih uporabiti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth.page0000644000373100047300000000370412157071010024375 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Povezava, pošiljanje datotek, vklop in izklop … Bluetooth

Bluetooth je brezžični protokol, ki vam omogoča povezavo z veliko različnimi vrstami naprav. Bluetooth se pogosto uporablja za naglavne slušalke in vhodne naprave kot so miške in tipkovnice. Bluetooth lahko uporabite tudi za pošiljanje datotek med napravami kot je z računalnika na vaš mobilni telefon.

shaunm

Things to improve: The BT settings has a "Browse Files" button for devices. We only cover push file transfers. Might also be worth mentioning something on receiving files when doing push from another device.

We don't have explicit pages for input devices. Might be worth a topic like "Connect a BT mouse or keyboard", linked under Mouse, Keyboard, and BT.

We have nothing for BT printers. Topic under both Printing and BT. Consider other device classes, topics linked under both BT and the appropriate device-specific guide (e.g. headset under Audio).

A topic on Bluetooth security would be good. Might want to also create a new top-level guide for security, and link the topic there too.
Težave z Bluetooth Težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-rename.page0000644000373100047300000001002112157071010024725 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sprememba imena datoteke ali mape. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Preimenovanje datoteke ali mape

Tako kot druge upravljalnike datotek lahko tudi upravljalnik datotek GNOME uporabite za spremembo imena datoteke ali mape.

Za preimenovanje datoteke ali mape:

Desno kliknite na predmet in izberite Preimenuj ali izberite datoteko in pritisnite F2.

Vpišite novo ime in pritisnite Enter.

Datoteko lahko preimenujete tudi iz okna lastnosti.

Ko datoteko preimenujete, je izbran le prvi del datoteke in ne pripona (del za "."). Pripona običajno pove, kakšne vrste je datoteka (na primer datoteka.PDF je dokument PDF). Tega običajno ne želite spremeniti. V primeru da morate spremeniti tudi pripono, izberite celotno ime datoteke.

Če ste preimenovali napačno datoteko ali pa ste datoteko nepravilno preimenovali, lahko preimenovanje razveljavite. Za povrnitev dejanja nemudoma kliknite na gumb kolo v orodni vrstici in izberite Razveljavi in s tem obnovite prejšnje ime.
Veljavni znaki za imena datotek

V imenih datotek lahko uporabite katerikoli znak razen / (desna poševnica). Nekatere naprave uporabljajo datotečni sistem, ki ima več omejitev glede imen. Zato se je v imenih datotek pametno izogibati naslednjim znakom: |, \, ?, *, <, ", :, >, /.

V primeru da je prvi znak imena datoteke ., bo bila datoteka ob poskusu ogleda v upravljalniku datotek skrita.
Pogoste težave Ime datoteke je že v uporabi

V isti mapi ne morete imeti dveh datotek ali map z istim imenom. V primeru da boste datoteko poskusili preimenovati v ime, ki v trenutni mapi že obstaja, vam upravljalnik datotek tega ne bo dovolil.

Imena in mape so občutljive na velikost črk. Tako sta Datoteka.txt in DATOTEKA.txt različni imeni. To je dovoljeno, vendar ni vedno pametno.

 Ime datoteke je predolgo

Na nekaterih datotečnih sistemih imena datotek ne morejo biti daljša od 255 znakov. Omejitev 255 znakov vključuje tako ime datoteke kot pot do nje (na primer /home/brigita/Dokumenti/delo/delovni-načrti/ ...), zato se, kjer je mogoče izognite dolgim imenom datotek in map.

 Možnost za preimenovanje je osivela

V primeru da je Preimenuj osivel, nimate dovoljenj za preimenovanje datoteke. V splošnem datotek do katerih nimate ustreznih dovoljenj za preimenovanje ni pametno preimenovati. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-hotcomputer.page0000644000373100047300000000521712157071010026074 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Računalniki se običajno segrejejo, vendar se lahko tudi pregrejejo, kar lahko povzroči poškodbe. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Moj računalnik postane zelo vroč

Večina računalnikov se po nekaj časa segreje in nekateri lahko postanejo precej vroči. To je običajno in je del načina hlajenja računalnika. Vendar pa je zelo topel računalnik lahko znak pregrevanja, ki lahko povzroči škodo.

Večina prenosnikov se po uporabi segreje. Običajno vam zaradi tega ni treba skrbeti. Računalniki proizvedejo veliko toplote. Ker so prenosniki majhni, morajo svojo toploto hitro odstraniti, zato se zunanji del ohišja segreje. Nekateri prenosniki postanejo prevroči in so neudobni za uporabo. To je ponavadi posledica slabo zasnovanega sistema hlajenja. Včasih lahko dobite dodatne pripomočke hlajenja, ki se prilegajo na dno prenosnika in zagotavljajo učinkovito hlajenje.

V primeru da imate namizni računalnik, ki je prevroč za dotikanje, ima morda nezadostno hlajenje. V primeru da vas to skrbi, lahko kupite dodatne ventilatorje ali preverite, da v ventilatorjih ni prahu ali drugih blokad. Morda želite razmisliti o postavitvi računalnika v bolj prezračeno področje. V omejenih prostorih (na primer v omari) morda računalniški sistem hlajenja ne bo mogel odstraniti toplote in zagotoviti dovolj hitrega kroženja hladnega zraka.

Ekaterina Gerasimova

TODO: add that some laptops come with warnings to not use them on laps

Nekatere ljudi skrbi zdravstveno tveganje pri uporabi vročih prenosnikov. Nekateri trdijo, da lahko dolga uporaba vročega prenosnika v vašem naročju morda zmanjša (moško) plodnost, obstajajo pa tudi poročila o rahlih opeklinah (v ekstremnih primerih). V primeru da vas to skrbi, se posvetujte s svojim zdravnikom ali pa prenosnika ne dajajte v naročje.

Večina novejših računalnikov se v primeru da postanejo prevroči ugasne in s tem prepreči pojav škode. V primeru da se vaš računalnik ugaša, je to lahko vzrok. V primeru da se vaš računalnik pregreva, ga boste verjetno morali popraviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrate-camera.page0000644000373100047300000000270412157071010026657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje vašega fotoaparata je pomembno za zajem natančnih barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kako umeriti fotoaparat?

Fotoaparat lahko umerite z zajemom fotografije tarče pod želenimi svetlobnimi pogoji. S pretvorbo datoteke RAW v datoteko TIFF ga lahko uporabite za umerjanje fotoaparata v nadzorni plošči barve.

Datoteko TIFF boste morali obrezati, da bo vidna le tarča. Prepričajte se, da so beli ali črni robovi še vedno vidni. Kalibracija ne bo delovala, če je slika obrnjena narobe ali če je močno popačena.

Nastali profil je veljaven le pod svetlobnimi pogoji pod katerimi ste zajeli izvirno sliko. To pomeni, da boste morda morali profilirati večkrat za studijske, sončne in oblačne svetlobne pogoje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-sensitivity.page0000644000373100047300000000432212157071010026105 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spremenite kako hitro se premika miškin kazalnik, ko uporabite miško ali drsno ploščico. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prilagoditev hitrosti miške in drsne ploščice

If your pointer moves too fast or slow when you move your mouse or use your touchpad, you can adjust the pointer speed for these devices.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

Adjust the Pointer Speed slider until the pointer motion is comfortable for you.

Občutljivost in pospeševanje lahko za miško in drsno ploščico nastavite različno. Včasih najboljše nastavitve za eno vrsto naprav niso primerne za drugo vrsto naprav. Nastavite drsnika tako na zavihku Miška kot Drsna ploščica.

The Touchpad section only appears if your system has a touchpad.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sharing-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000001073212157071010025471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Pustite drugim ljudem ogled in delo z vašim namizjem z uporabo VNC. Dajte svoje namizje v souporabo

You can let other people view and control your desktop from another computer with a desktop viewing application. Configure Screen Sharing to allow others to access your desktop and set the security preferences.

You must have the Vino package installed for Screen Sharing to be visible.

Install Vino

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Open Sharing.

If Sharing is OFF, switch it to ON.

Select Screen Sharing.

To let others view your desktop, switch Remote View to ON. This means that other people will be able to attempt to connect to your computer and view what's on your screen.

To let others interact with your desktop, switch Remote Control to ON. This may allow the other person to move your mouse, run applications, and browse files on your computer, depending on the security settings which you are currently using.

This option is enabled by default when Remote View is ON.
Varnost

Pomembno je, da dobro premislite, kaj vsaka možnost varnosti pomeni, preden jo spremenite.

Approve All Connections

If you want to be able to choose whether to allow someone to access your desktop, switch Approve All Connections to ON. If you disable this option, you will not be asked whether you want to allow someone to connect to your computer.

Ta možnost je privzeto omogočena

 Require Password

To require other people to use a password when connecting to your desktop, switch Require Password to ON. If you do not use this option, anyone can attempt to view your desktop.

Ta možnost je privzeto onemogočena, vendar je pametno, da jo omogočite in nastavite varno geslo.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-which-application.page0000644000373100047300000000542412157071010027611 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012-2013 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Seznam programov, ki lahko uporabijo račune ustvarjene v Spletni računi in storitve, ki jih lahko uporabijo. Kateri programi uporabljajo podatke spletnih računov?

Spletne račune lahko zunanji programi uporabijo za samodejno nastavitev.

Z računom Google

Evolution, program pošte. Vaš račun e-pošte bo bil samodejno dodan v Evolution, prejeli boste pošto, dostopali boste lahko do svojih stikov in koledar vam bo predstavil predmete iz koledarja Google.

Empathy, the instant messaging application. Your online account will be added and you will be able to communicate with your friends.

Stiki omogočajo ogled in urejanje vaših stikov.

Dokumenti lahko dostopajo in prikažejo vaše spletne dokumente.
Z računomi Windows Live, Facebook ali Twitter

Empathy lahko uporabi te račune za povezavo, ko ste na spletu in klepeta z vašimi stiki, prijatelji in sledilci.

With a SkyDrive account

Dokumenti lahko dostopajo in prikažejo vaše spletne dokumente v Microsoft SkyDrive.

With a Exchange account

Once you have created an Exchange account, Evolution will start retrieving mails from this account.

With a ownCloud account

When an ownCloud account is set up, Evolution is able to access and edit contacts and calendar appointments.

Files and other applications will be able to list and access your online files stored in the ownCloud installation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-share.page0000644000373100047300000000417112157071010024571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Easily transfer files to your email contacts from the file manager. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Share files by email jim

If we get gnome-user-share integrated eventually, we should discuss or link that here.

 mdhill

All functionality except email removed for 3.8 per Bug 680983.

You can easily share files with your contacts by email directly from the file manager.

Before you begin, make sure Evolution is installed on your computer, and your email account is configured.

 To share a file by email:

Odprite program Datoteke iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Najdite datoteko, ki jo želite prenesti.

Right-click the file and select Send To. The Compose Message window will appear with the file attached.

Click To to choose a contact, or enter an email address where you want to send the file. Fill in the Subject and the body of the message as required and click Send.

You can send multiple files at once. Select multiple files by holding down Ctrl, then right-click any selected file.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-what.page0000644000373100047300000000457612157071010024606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ustvarite varnostno kopijo vsega, česar nočete izgubiti, če gre kaj narobe. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iz česa naj bo ustvarjena varnostna kopija

Prednostno ustvarite varnostne kopije najpomembnejših datotek in tistih, ki jih je težko ustvariti. Primer datotek od najpomembnejših do najmanj pomembnih:

Vaše osebne datoteke

To vključuje dokumente, preglednice, e-pošto, sestanke koledarja, finančne podatke, družinske fotografije, vse kar ste ustvarili in vam je pomembno. To so najpomembnejše stvari saj jih morda ne morete zamenjati.

 Vaše osebne nastavitve

To vključuje morebitne spremembe barv, ozadij, ločljivosti zaslona in nastavitev miške na svojem namizju. To vključuje tudi možnosti programov kot so nastavitve za LibreOffice, predvajalnik glasbe in vaš program e-pošte. Te lahko zamenjate, vendar lahko to traja nekaj časa.

 Sistemske nastavitve

Večina ljudi nikoli ne spremeni nastavitev, ki so ustvarjene med namestitvijo. V primeru da svoj sistem prilagajate, boste morda želeli ustvariti varnostno kopijo teh nastavitev.

 Nameščeni programi

Take programe lahko običajno hitro obnovite s ponovno namestitvijo.

V splošnem boste morda želeli ustvariti varnostno kopijo datotek, ki jih ni mogoče zamenjati ali zahtevajo za ponovno ustvarjanje veliko časa. V primeru da lahko stvari enostavno zamenjate, morda ne boste želeli porabljati prostora na disku za njihove varnostne kopije.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-constantfan.page0000644000373100047300000000346312157071010026042 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Manjka program za nadzor ventilatorjev ali pa se vaš prenosnik pregreva. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ventilator prenosnika se vedno vrti

V primeru da se ventilator vedno vrti, to lahko pomeni, da stojna oprema, ki nadzora hladilni sistem v prenosniku, na Linuxu ni dobro podprta. Nekateri prenosniki za učinkovit nadzor svojih ventilatorjev potrebujejo dodatne programe, vendar morda ta program ni nameščen (ali pa sploh ni na voljo za Linux), zato se ventilatorji ves čas vrtijo s polno hitrostjo.

V tem primeru boste morda lahko spremenili nekatere nastavitve ali namestili dodatne programe, ki omogočajo poln nadzor ventilatorja. Za nekatere prenosnike Sony VAIO lahko na primer namestite vaiofand. Nameščanje takšnih programov je tehnično opravilo, ki je močno odvisno od proizvajalca vašega prenosnika, zato najdite navodila, kako to storiti na svojem računalniku.

Mogoče je tudi, da vaš prenosnik proizvaja veliko toplote. To ne pomeni nujno, da se pregreva. Morda mora zato, da ostane dovolj hladen stalno poganjati ventilator s polno hitrostjo. V tem primeru nimate druge možnosti kot da pustite ventilator delovati s polno hitrostjo ves čas. Včasih lahko za svoj prenosnik kupite dodatne hladilne pripomočke, ki vam lahko pomagajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-admin-problems.page0000644000373100047300000000243312157071010026253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatere stvari kot na primer nameščanje programov lahko izvedete le, če imate skrbniška dovoljenja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Težave, ki jih povzročijo skrbniške omejitve

V primeru da nimate skrbniških dovoljenj, imate lahko nekaj težav. Nekatere stvari za delovanje od vas zahtevajo skrbniška dovoljenja:

Povezava z omrežij/brezžičnimi omrežji

Ogled vsebine odstranljivega diska priklopljenega na računalnik ali vsebine drugega razdelka na disku (na primer, če imate razdelek Windows)

Nameščanje novih programov

Lahko spremenite osebo, ki ima skrbniška dovoljenja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-connect.page0000644000373100047300000001601112157071010025656 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ogled in urejanje datotek na drugem računalniku preko FTP, SSH, souporab Windows ali WebDAV. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Brskanje datotek na strežniku ali omrežni souporabi

Če se povežete s strežnikom ali omrežno souporabo za brskanje, si lahko datoteke ogledate natanko tako, kot če bi bili na svojem računalniku. To je priročen način za prejem ali pošiljanje datotek na internetu ali za izmenjavo datotek z drugimi v vašem krajevnem omrežju.

To browse files over the network, open the Files application from the Activities overview, and click Browse Network in the sidebar. The file manager will find any computers on your local area network that advertise their ability to serve files. If you want to connect to a server on the internet, or if you do not see the computer you're looking for, you can manually connect to a server by typing in its internet/network address.

Povezava z datotečnim strežnikom

In the file manager, click Files in the top bar and pick Connect to Server from the app menu.

Enter the address of the server, in the form of a URL. Details on supported URLs are listed below.

If you have connected to the server before, you can click on it in the Recent Servers list.

Click Connect. A new window will open showing you the files on the server. You can browse the files just as you would for those on your own computer. The server will also be added to the sidebar so you can access it quickly in the future
Pisanje URL-jev

A URL, or uniform resource locator, is a form of address that refers to a location or file on a network. The address is formatted like this:

scheme://imestrežnika.primer.si/mapa

The scheme specifies the protocol or type of server. The example.com portion of the address is called the domain name. If a username is required, it is inserted before the server name:

scheme://uporabniškoime@imestrežnika.primer.si/mapa

Nekatere sheme zahtevajo vnos številke vrat. Vstavite jo po imenu domene:

scheme://imestrežnika.primer.si:vrata/mapa

Sledi nekaj tipičnih primerov za različne podprte vrste strežnikov.

Vrste strežnikov

You can connect to different types of servers. Some servers are public, and allow anybody to connect. Other servers require you to log in with a username and password.

Morda ne boste imeli dovoljenj za izvajanje določenih dejanj na strežniku. Na javnih strežnikih FTP na primer ne boste mogli brisati datotek.

URL, ki ga vnesete, je odvisen od protokola, ki ga strežnik uporablja za izvoz svojih datotek v skupni rabi.

SSH

If you have a secure shell account on a server, you can connect using this method. Many web hosts provide SSH accounts to members so they can securely upload files. SSH servers always require you to log in.

Običajno je URL za SSH naslednje oblike:

ssh://uporabniškoime@imestrežnika.primer.si/mapa

 shaunm

We should have a topics on encryption keys, possibly rolling the seahorse help into gnome-help. Then link from here.

Pri uporabi SSH bodo vsi poslani podatki (vključno z vašim geslom) šifrirani zato, da jih drugi uporabniki na omrežju ne morejo videti.

 FTP (s prijavo)

FTP je priljubljen način za izmenjavo datotek na Internetu. Ker podatki preko FTP niso šifrirani, veliko strežnikov sedaj zagotavlja dostop preko SSH. Nekateri strežniki še vedno omogočajo ali zahtevajo uporabo FTP za pošiljanje ali prejem datotek. Spletišča FTP s prijavami običajno dovoljujejo brisanje in pošiljanje datotek.

Običajno je URL za FTP naslednje oblike:

ftp://uporabniškoime@ftp.primer.si/pot/

 Javni FTP

Sites that allow you to download files will sometimes provide public or anonymous FTP access. These servers do not require a username and password, and will usually not allow you to delete or upload files.

Običajno je URL za brezimni FTP naslednje oblike:

ftp://ftp.primer.si/pot/

Some anonymous FTP sites require you to log in with a public username and password, or with a public username using your email address as the password. For these servers, use the FTP (with login) method, and use the credentials specified by the FTP site.

 Souporaba s sistemom Windows

Računalniki Windows za souporabo datotek preko krajevnega omrežja uporabljalo lastniški protokol. Računalniki na omrežju Windows so včasih združeni v domene za organizacijo in za boljši nadzor dostopa. V primeru da imate na oddaljenemu računalniku prava dovoljenja, se lahko do souporabe Windows povežete iz upravljalnika datotek.

Običajno je URL za Windows Share naslednje oblike:

smb://imestrežnika/Share

 WebDAV in Varen WebDAV

WebDAV je osnovan na protokolu HTTP in se včasih uporablja za deljenje datotek preko krajevnega omrežja in za shranjevanje datotek na internetu. V primeru da strežnik na katerega se povezujete podpira varne povezave, izberite to možnost. Varni WebDAV uporablja močno šifriranje SSL zato, da drugi uporabniki ne morejo videti vašega gesla.

Običajno je URL za WebDAV naslednje oblike:

http://primer.imegostitelja.si/pot

 shaunm

Also used by gnome-user-share, but we're not talking about that in gnome-help for 3.0. Hopefully it will be better integrated in 3.2, and we can discuss it better in the help. If that happens, link from here.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-sort.page0000644000373100047300000000714712157071011024465 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Urejanje datotek po imenu, velikosti, vrsti ali času sprememb. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Razvrščanje datotek in map

May benefit from figures illustrating the different views.

You can sort files in different ways in a folder, for example by sorting them in order of date or file size. See below for a list of common ways to sort files. See for information on how to change the default sort order.

The way that you can sort files depends on the folder view that you are using. You can change the current view using the list or icon buttons in the toolbar.

Ikonski pogled

To sort files in a different order, click the down button in the toolbar and choose By Name, By Size, By Type or By Modification Date.

As an example, if you select By Name, the files will be sorted by their names, in alphabetical order. See for other options.

You can sort in the reverse order by selecting Reversed Order from the pull-down menu.

Seznamski pogled

Za razvrstitev datotek v drugačnem vrstnem redu kliknite na eno od glav v upravljalniku datotek. Za razvrstitev po vrsti datotek kliknite na glavo stolpca Vrsta. Za obratni vrstni red ponovno kliknite glavo stolpca.

In list view, you can show columns with more attributes and sort on those columns. Click the down button in the toolbar, pick Visible Columns and select the columns that you want to be visible. You will then be able to sort by those columns. See for descriptions of available columns.

Načini razvrščanja datotek Po imenu

V abecednem vrstnem redu razvrsti po imenu datoteke.

 Po velikosti

Razvrsti po velikosti datoteke (koliko prostora na disku zavzame). Privzeto so razvrščene od najmanjše do največje.

 Po vrsti

Abecedno razvrsti po vrsti datoteke. Datoteke iste vrste so združene skupaj in nato razvrščene po imenu.

 Po datumu spremembe

Razvrsti po datumu in času spremembe datoteke. Privzeto razvrsti od najstarejše do najnovejše.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-fixed-ip-address.page0000644000373100047300000000444612157071011026311 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Uporaba statičnih naslovov IP vam lahko olajša zagotavljanje nekaterih omrežnih storitev z vašega računalnika. Ustvarite povezavo s stalnim naslovom IP

Večina omrežij bo samodejno dodelila naslov IP in druge podatke računalniku, ko se povežete v omrežje. Ti podatki se lahko občasno spremenijo, vendar boste morda želeli imeti določen naslov IP računalnika, tako da boste vedno vedeli, kakšen je njegov naslov (na primer, če je datotečni strežnik).

Da vašemu računalniku stalni (statični) naslov IP:

Kliknite na ikono omrežje v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve omrežja.

Izberite omrežno povezavo s seznama (Žično ali Brezžično) in kliknite Nastavi.

Kliknite na zavihek Nastavitve IPv4 in spremenite Način v Ročno.

V primeru da na seznamu Naslovi ni podatkov o povezavi ali če želite vzpostaviti novo povezavo, kliknite Dodaj.

Vnesite Naslove IP, Omrežno masko in podatke Prehoda v ustrezna polja. Izbira teh nastavitev je odvisna od nastavitev vašega omrežja. Obstajajo določena pravila, ki določajo kateri naslovi IP in omrežne maske so veljavne za dano omrežje.

Če je to potrebno, vnesite naslov Strežnik imen domen v polje Strežniki DNS. To je naslov IP strežnika, ki poišče imena domen. Večina podjetij in ponudnikov interneta ima namenske strežnike DNS.

Kliknite Shrani. Omrežna povezava bi sedaj morala imeti stalni naslov IP.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wired.page0000644000373100047300000000115112157071011024261 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Žične internetne povezave, Stalni naslovi IP … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Žične povezave usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/index.page0000644000373100047300000000147612157071011023504 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vodnik za uporabnike namizja GNOME 3 Pomoč GNOME Pomoč GNOME <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/gnome.png">Pomoč</media> <media type="image" src="figures/yelp-icon-big.png">Logotip Yelp</media> Pomoč GNOME usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-select.page0000644000373100047300000000232112157071011025472 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisnite le določene strani ali le obseg strani. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiskanje le določenih strani

Za tiskanje le določenih strani v dokumentu:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

V zavihku Splošno okna Tiskanje v odseku Obseg izberite Strani.

V besedilno polje vpišite številke strani, ki jih želite natisniti, ločene z vejicami. Za oznako obsega strani uporabite pomišljaj.

Na primer, če v besedilno polje Strani vnesete "1,3,5-7,9" , bodo natisnjene strani 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 in 9.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/wacom-mode.page0000644000373100047300000000277712157071011024432 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Preklopite tablico med načinom tablice in miške. Izberite način sledenja tablice Wacom

Način sledenja določi kako je kazalec preslikan na zaslon.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Poleg Načina sledenja izberite Tablica (absolutno) ali Drsna ploščica (relativno).

V absolutnem načinu se vsaka točka na tablici preslika na točko na zaslonu. Zgornji levi kot zaslona vedno ustreza isti točki na tablici.

V relativnem načinu se, v primeru da kazalnik vzdignete s tablice in ga postavite na drugo mesto, kazalec na zaslonu ne premakne. Na ta način deluje miška. To vam omogoča premik preko večje razdalje z manj premikanja roke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-font-size.page0000644000373100047300000000313312157071011025054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporaba večjih pisav, da je besedilo mogoče lažje brati. Sprememba velikosti besedila na zaslonu

Če imate težave z branjem besedila na zaslonu, lahko spremenite velikost pisave.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Izrisovanje.

Spremenite Veliko besedilo na VKLOPLJENO.

Velikost besedila lahko hitro spremenite s klikom na ikono splošnega dostopa v vrhnji vrstici in izbiro Veliko besedilo.

V veliko programih lahko velikost besedila povečate s pritiskom na Ctrl+. Velikost besedila lahko zmanjšate s pritiskom na Ctrl-.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-filter.page0000644000373100047300000000227712157071011025661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Izberite kateri dokumenti naj bodo prikazani. Filtriranje dokumentov

Kliknite na puščico navzdol poleg vrstice iskanje za omejitev obsega iskanja v teh kategorijah:

Viri: Krajevno, Google, SkyDrive, ali Vse.

Vir: Zbirke, Dokumenti PDF, Predstavitve, Preglednice, Besedilni dokumenti ali Vse.

Naslov, avtor ali vse.

Da se Google ali SkyDrive pojavita na seznamu filtra, morate Google ali Windows Live nastaviti kot spletni račun.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/tips.page0000644000373100047300000000107512157071011023347 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Posebni znaki, bližnjice s srednjim klikom ... Namigi in triki usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-name-location.page0000644000373100047300000000373512157071011026753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change the name or location of a printer in the printer settings. Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Change the name or location of a printer

You can change the name or location of a printer in the printer settings.

You need administrative privileges on the system to change the name or location of a printer.
Change printer name

If you want to change the name of a printer, take the following steps:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Kliknite gumb Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo.

By clicking on the name, start editing the name of the printer.

Press Enter to save the changes.
Change printer location

To change the location of your printer:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Kliknite gumb Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo.

By clicking on the location, start editing the location.

Press Enter to save the changes.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/display-dual-monitors-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000000366512157071011030306 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev dveh zaslonov na namiznem računalniku. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2013 Povezava dodatnega zaslona

Za nastavitev zunanjega zaslona s prenosnikom povežite zaslon s prenosnikom. Če ga vaš sistem ne prepozna nemudoma ali bi želeli prilagoditi nastavitve:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Zasloni.

Kliknite na sliko zaslona, ki jo želite omogočiti ali onemogočiti in ga nato VKLOPITE/IZKLOPITE.

Zaslon z vrhnjo vrstico je glavni zaslon. Za spremembo kateri zaslon je "glavni" kliknite na vrhnjo vrstico in jo povlecite na zaslon, ki ga želite uporabiti kot "glavni" zaslon.

Za spremembo "položaja" zaslona kliknite nanj in ga povlecite na želeni položaj.

Če želite, da oba zaslona prikažeta isto vsebino, izberite polje Zrcali zaslona.

Ko ste z nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Uveljavi in nato kliknite Obdrži te nastavitve.

Za zaprtje Nastavitev zaslona kliknite na x v zgornjem kotu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/hardware.page0000644000373100047300000000223212157071011024161 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Strojna oprema Težave s strojno opremo, tiskalniki, nastavitve porabe, upravljanje barv, Bluetooth, diski … Strojna oprema in gonilniki Več tem
Težave Težave s strojno opremo Pogoste težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-default-email.page0000644000373100047300000000271612157071011025670 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Privzeti odjemalec e-pošte določite oz. spremenite v Podrobnostih v Nastavitvah. Spremenite poštni program s katerim boste pisali e-pošto.

Ko kliknete na gumb ali povezavo za pošiljanje nove e-pošte (na primer v urejevalniku besedila), se bo odprl vaš privzet program e-pošte s praznim sporočilom. V primeru da imate nameščen več kot en program e-pošte, se bo morda odprl napačen program. To lahko popravite s spremembo privzetega programa e-pošte:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Podrobnosti in s seznama na levi strani okna izberite Privzeti programi.

Privzeti poštni odjemalec lahko izberete s spremembo možnosti Pošta.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-hardware-check.page0000644000373100047300000001526012157071011033105 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Čeprav je brezžična kartica priključena na računalnik, je računalnik morda ne prepozna kot omrežno napravo. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi povezavami Preverite, da je bila brezžična kartica prepoznana

Čeprav je brezžična kartica priključena na računalnik, je računalnik morda ne prepozna kot omrežno napravo. V tem koraku boste preverili ali je bila naprava pravilno prepoznana.

Odprite okno Terminala, vnesite lshw -C network in pritisnite Enter. Če vam da to sporočilo o napaki, boste morali morda na svoj računalnik namestiti program lshw.

Preberite izhod tega ukaza in preverite odsek Brezžični vmesnik. V primeru da je vaša brezžična kartica zaznana, bi moral izhod videti podoben temu:

*-network description: Wireless interface product: PRO/Wireless 3945ABG [Golan] Network Connection vendor: Intel Corporation

V primeru da je brezžična naprava izpisana, nadaljujte na stran z gonilniki naprav.

Če brezžična naprava mi na seznamu, bodo naslednji koraki odvisni od vrste naprave, ki jo uporabljate. Oglejte si odsek, ki je pomemben za vrsto brezžične kartice, ki jo uporabljate: PCI(notranja), USB ali PCMCIA.
Preverjanje za PCI (notranjo) brezžično napravo

Najbolj pogoste so notranje kartice PCI, ki jih je mogoče najti na prenosnikih, ki so bili narejeni v zadnjih nekaj letih.

Odprite Terminal, vtipkajte lscpi in pritisnite Enter.

Oglejte si prikazan seznam naprav in najdite vrstice z Network controller ali Ethernet controller. Na ta način je lahko označenih več naprav. Tista, ki ustreza vaši brezžični kartici lahko vključuje besede kot so wireless, WLAN, wifi ali 802.11. Tukaj je primer kako je vnos morda videti:

Network controller: Intel Corporation PRO/Wireless 3945ABG [Golan] Network Connection

V primeru da je prejšnji ukaz prepoznal vašo napravo, čestitamo. Nadaljujte na strani Gonilniki naprav. V primeru da zgornji ukaz ne pokaže izpisa povezanega z vašim brezžičnim gonilnikom, si oglejte navodila spodaj.
USB brezžična kartica

Brezžične kartice, ki jih vklopite v vrata USB, so manj pogoste. Vklopite jih lahko neposredno v vrata USB ali pa jih povežete preko kabla USB. Kartice 3G/mobilnega širokopasovnega interneta so videti precej podobno kot brezžične (wifi) kartice, zato dvakrat preverite, da nimate 3G kartice. Za preverjanje ali je bila USB brezžična kartica prepoznana:

Odprite Terminal, vtipkajte lsusb in pritisnite Enter.

Oglejte si prikazan seznam naprav in poskusite najti karkoli, kar se nanaša na brezžično ali omrežno napravo. Vrstica, ki se nanaša na brezžično kartico, morda vključuje besede kot so wireless, WLAN, wifi ali 802.11. Tukaj je primer kako so lahko videti:

Bus 005 Device 009: ID 12d1:140b Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. EC1260 Wireless Data Modem HSD USB Card

V primeru da je prejšnji ukaz prepoznal vašo napravo, čestitamo. Nadaljujte na strani Gonilniki naprav. V primeru da zgornji ukaz ne pokaže izpisa povezanega z vašim brezžičnim gonilnikom, si oglejte navodila spodaj.
Preverjanje za napravo PCMCIA

Brezžične kartice PCMCIA so običajno pravokotne kartice, ki ustrezajo reži na strani vašega prenosnika. Pogosto jih lahko najdete v starejših računalnikih. Za preverjanje, če je bila kartica PCMCIA prepoznana:

Zaženite svoj računalnik brez vklopljenega brezžičnega prilagodilnika.

Odprite Terminal in vpišite naslednje in pritisnite Enter.

tail -f /var/log/messages

To bo prikazalo seznam sporočil, povezanih s strojno opremo vašega računalnika, ki se bo samodejno posodobil, če se kaj na vaši strojni opremi spremeni.

Vstavite svojo brezžično kartico v režo PCMCIA in preverite kaj se spremeni v oknu Terminala. Spremembe bi morale vsebovati podatke o vaši brezžični kartici. Oglejte si jih in preverite, če lahko določite, katero brezžično kartico imate.

Za zaustavitev poganjanja ukaza iz Terminala pritisnite CtrlC. Ko ste to storili, lahko Terminal zaprete.

V primeru da je prejšnji ukaz prepoznal vašo napravo, čestitamo. Nadaljujte na strani Gonilniki naprav. V primeru da zgornji ukaz ne pokaže izpisa povezanega z vašim brezžičnim gonilnikom, si oglejte navodila na dnu te strani.
Brezžična kartica ni bila prepoznana

Če vaša brezžična kartica ni bila prepoznana, morda ne bo pravilno delovala ali morda zanjo niso bili nameščeni pravi gonilniki. Kako lahko preverite, če obstajajo gonilniki, ki jih lahko namestite na svojo distribucijo Linux (kot je Ubuntu, Fedora ali openSuSE).

Za podrobnejšo pomoč si oglejte možnosti podpore na spletišču svoje distribucije. Te morda vključujejo dopisne seznama in spletne klepete kjer lahko na primer vprašate o svoji brezžični kartici.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-usespeakers.page0000644000373100047300000000510512157071011026046 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Povežite zvočnike ali slušalke in izberite privzeto izhodno zvočno napravo. Uporaba drugih zvočnikov ali slušalk

Na svojem računalniku lahko uporabljate zunanje zvočnike ali slušalke. Zvočniki se običajno priklopijo preko okroglega priključka TRS (konica, obroč, rokav) ali preko USB-ja.

V primeru da imajo vaši zvočniki ali slušalke vtič TRS, ga vklopite v ustrezen vtič na računalniku. Večina računalnikov ima dva vtiča: enega za mikrofone in enega za zvočnike. Najdite sliko mikrofona poleg vtiča. Zvočniki ali slušalke vklopljene v vtič TRS bodo običajno privzeto uporabljene. V primeru da niso, si oglejte navodila za izbiro privzete naprave.

Some computers support multi-channel output for surround sound. This usually uses multiple TRS jacks, which are often color-coded. If you are unsure which plugs go in which sockets, you can test the sound output in the sound settings. Click your name on the top bar and select Settings, then click Sound. On the Output tab, select your speakers in the list of devices, then click Test Speakers. In the pop-up window, click the button for each speaker. Each button will speak its position only to the channel corresponding to that speaker.

V primeru, da imate zvočnike ali slušalke USB ali analogne slušalke vklopljene v zvočno kartico USB, jih vklopite v katerakoli vrata USB. Zvočniki USB se obnašajo kot ločene zvočne naprave, zato boste morda morali navesti, katere zvočnike želite privzeto uporabiti.

Izberite privzeto zvočno vhodno napravo

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Zvok in izberite zavihek Izhod.

Odstranitev naprave s seznama naprav.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-missingvcgt.page0000644000373100047300000000211712157071011026037 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Celozaslonski barvni popravek spremeni barve v vseh oknih. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Ali vam manjkajo podatki za celozaslonski popravek barve?

Na žalost veliko profilov ICC, ki jih zagotavljajo ponudniki, ne vključuje podatkov, ki so zahtevani za celozaslonski popravek barv. Ti profili so lahko še vedno uporabni za programe, ki izvajajo nadomestilo barv, vendar se ne bodo spremenile vse barve na zaslonu.

Za ustvarjanje profila zaslona, ki vključuje tako podatke umerjanja in karakterizacije, boste potrebovali posebna inštrumenta za merjenje barv, ki se imenujeta kolorimeter ali spektrometer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-tilde.page0000644000373100047300000000307012157071011024566 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 To so datoteke varnostnih kopij. Privzeto so skrite. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kaj je datoteka s "~" na koncu imena?

Datoteke s "~" na koncu svojega imena (na primer primer.txt~) so samodejno ustvarjene varnostne kopije dokumentov urejenih v urejevalniku besedil gedit ali drugih programih. Lahko jih brez skrbi izbrišete, vendar nič ne škodi, če jih pustite na računalniku.

Te datoteke so privzeto skrite. Če jih vidite, je to zato, ker ste izbrali Pokaži skrite datoteke (v spustnem meniju orodne vrstice Datoteke) ali pritisnili krmilkaH. S ponovitvijo enega od teh korakov jih lahko ponovno skrijete.

Te datoteke se obravnavajo na enak način kot običajne skrite datoteke. Za nasvet o upravljanju s skritimi datotekami si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-print.page0000644000373100047300000000261012157071011025517 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Tiskanje dokumentov, ki so shranjeni krajevno ali na spletu. Tiskanje dokumenta Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to select the document or documents that is need it. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to print a document (can you even print them yet?).

Za tiskanje dokumenta:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

V načinu izbire izberite dokument za tiskanje

Kliknite na gumb Tiskanje v vrstici gumbov. Odpre se pogovorno okno Tiskanje.

Tiskanje ni na voljo, ko je izbran več kot en dokument ali ko je izbrana zbirka.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/hardware-problems-graphics.page0000644000373100047300000000123112157071011027576 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Odpravljanje težav z zaslonom in grafiko. Težave z zaslonom

Večino težav z zaslonov povzročajo težave z grafičnimi gonilniki ali nastavitve. Katero izmed poglavij najbolje opiše vašo težavo?

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-nosound.page0000644000373100047300000001256412157071011025210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite, da zvok ni utišan, da so kabli pravilno vklopljeni in da je bila zvočna kartica zaznana. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ne slišim nobenih zvokov

V primeru da na svojem računalniku ne morete slišati zvoka, na primer, če poskusite predvajati glasbo, poskusite naslednje korake za odpravljanje težav.

Prepričajte se, da zvok ni utišan

Kliknite na zvočno ikono v vrhnji vrstici (videti je kot zvočnik) in se prepričajte, da zvok ni utišan ali da glasnost ni nastavljena na zelo nizko.

Nekateri prenosniki imajo stikala ali tipke za utišanje. Poskusite pritisniti to tipko in preverite, če to povrne glasnost zvoka.

Preverite tudi, da program, ki ga uporabljate za predvajanje zvoka, (na primer vaš predvajalnik glasbe ali filmov) ni utišan. Program ima morda v svojem oknu gumb za utišanje ali glasnost. Kliknite tudi na zvočno ikono na vrhnjem pultu in izberite Nastavitve zvoka. Ko se pojavi okno Zvok, pojdite na zavihek Programi in se prepričajte, da vaš program tam ni utišan.

Preverite ali so zvočniki vklopljeni in pravilno povezani

V primeru, da ima računalnik zunanje zvočnike, se prepričajte, da so vklopljeni in da je glasnost povečana. Prepričajte se, da je kabel zvočnikov varno vklopljen v "izhodni" zvočni vtič na zadnjem delu računalnika. Ta vtič je običajno zelene barve.

Nekatere zvočne kartice lahko preklapljajo med vtiči, ki jih uporabljajo za izhod (do zvočnikov) in vhod (na primer iz mikrofona). Vtič izhoda je lahko pri delovanju na Linuxu drugačen kot pri delovanju na Windows ali Mac OS. Kabel zvočnikov poskusite povezati z različnimi vtiči zvoka na računalniku in preverite, če delujejo.

Zadnja stvar, ki jo preverite je, da je kabel varno vklopljen v zadnji del zvočnikov. Nekateri zvočniki imajo več kot en vhod.

Preverite, da je izbrana prava zvočna naprava

Nekateri računalniki imajo nameščenih več "zvočnih gonilnikov". Nekateri od njih so zmožni izhoda zvoka, drugi pa ne. Zato preverite, da imate izbranega pravega. To lahko vključuje nekaj poskusov in napak preden najdete pravega.

Kliknite na ikono zvok v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve zvoka.

V oknu Zvok pojdite na zavihek Izhod. Zapomnite si, katera naprava in kateri profil sta izbrana (zato da se lahko vrnete na prejšnje nastavitve, če njihovo spreminjanje ne deluje).

Za izbrano napravo poskusite spremeniti profil - po spremembi profila predvajajte zvok in poslušajte, če deluje. Morda boste morali iti skozi seznam in preizkusiti vse profile.

V primeru, da to ne deluje, poskusite storiti isto za vse druge naprave, ki so na seznamu.

Poskusite tudi s spreminjanjem možnosti Povezovalnik v zavihku Izhod.
Preverite, da je bila zvočna kartica pravilno zaznana

Vaša zvočna kartica morda ni bila pravilno zaznana. V primeru da se to zgodi, bo vaš računalnik mislil, da ne more predvajati zvoka. Mogoč razlog za nepravilno zaznavanje kartice so nenameščeni gonilniki za kartico.

Pojdite v pregled Dejavnosti in odprite Terminal.

Vtipkajte aplay -l in pritisnite Enter.

Izpisal se bo seznam naprav. V primeru da ni naprav strojne opreme predvajanja, vaša zvočna kartica ni bila zaznana.

V kolikor vaša zvočna kartica ni zaznana, boste zanjo morali ročno namestiti gonilnike. Kako to storiti je odvisno od kartice, ki jo imate.

Kakšno zvočno kartico imate lahko vidite z uporabo ukaza lspci v Terminalu. Morda boste morali pognati lspci kot super uporabnik. Vtipkajte sudo lspci in vtipkajte svoje geslo ali vtipkajte su, vnesite skrbniško geslo in nato vtipkajte lspci. Poglejte si, če je nadzornik zvoka ali zvočna naprava na seznamu - vsebovati bi moral proizvajalca zvočne kartice in številko modela. lspci -v bo pokazal seznam s podrobnostmi.

Morda boste lahko za svojo kartico našli in namestili gonilnike. Za navodila je najboljše vprašati na podpornih forumih (ali drugih virih pomoči) vaše distribucije Linux.

V primeru da ne morete dobiti gonilnikov za svojo zvočno kartico, boste morda želeli kupiti novo zvočno kartico. Dobite lahko zvočne kartice, ki jih namestite v računalnik in zunanje zvočne kartice USB.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-to-file.page0000644000373100047300000000376412157071011025566 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2013 Save a document as a PDF, Postscript or SVG file instead of sending it a printer. Print to file

You can chose to print a document to a file instead of sending it to print from a printer. Printing to file will create a PDF, a Postscript or a SVG file that contains the document. This can be useful if you want to transfer the document to another machine or to share it with someone.

Print to file

Open the print dialog. This can normally be done through Print in the menu or using the CtrlP keyboard shortcut.

Select Print to File under Printer in the General tab.

To change the default filename and where the file is saved to, click the filename below the printer selection. Click Select once you have finished choosing.

PDF is the default file type for the document. If you want to use a different Output format, select either Postscript or SVG.

Chose your other page preferences.

Press Print to save the file.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-whydim.page0000644000373100047300000000305512157071011025023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ko vaš prenosnik deluje na bateriji, se bo zaslon zatemnil medtem ko je računalnik nedejaven za varčevanje z energijo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakaj se moj zaslon po določenem času zatemni? shaunm

We have a few disparate pages on this. We should consider consolidating or rethinking how we cross-link them.

Ko vaš prenosnik uporablja napetost baterije, se bo zaslon medtem ko je računalnik nedejaven, zatemnil za varčevanje z energijo. Ko začnete računalnik ponovno uporabljati, se bo zaslon osvetlil.

Zatemnjevanje zaslona lahko preprečite:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Svetlost in zaklep in odstranite oznako Zatemni zaslon za varčevanje z energijo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-noconnection.page0000644000373100047300000000567412157071011027514 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Dvakrat preverite geslo. Namesto gesla poskusite uporabiti šifrirni ključ, izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico ... Vnes-el/la sem pravilno geslo, vendar se še vedno ne morem povezati

V primeru da ste prepričani, da ste vnesli pravilno brezžično geslo, a se še vedno ne morete uspešno povezati z brezžičnim omrežje, poskusite nekaj od naslednjega:

Dvakrat preverite, da imate pravo geslo

Gesla so občutljiva na velikost črk (pomembno je če so črke velike ali majhne). Zato preverite, da niste napisali znakov napačne velikosti

Poskusite šestnajstiški ali ASCII ključ

Geslo je lahko predstavljeno tudi na drugačen način - kot niz znakov v šestnajstiškem sistemu (števila od 0-9 in črke od a-f), ki se imenuje šifrirni ključ. V primeru da imate geslo do šifrirnega ključa in geslo/šifrirno frazo, poskusite s tipkanjem šifrirnega ključa. Prepričajte se, da izberete pravilno možnost brezžična varnost (če na primer vnašate 40 znakovni šifrirni ključ za z WEP šifrirano povezavo, izberite WEP 40/128-biten ključ).

Izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico

Včasih brezžične kartice obtičijo ali imajo manjšo težavo, ki pomeni, da se ne bodo povezale. Kartico poskusite izklopiti in ponovno vklopiti za njeno ponastavitev. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Preverite, da uporabljate pravo vrsto brezžične varnosti

Ko ste pozvani za geslo svoje brezžične varnosti, lahko izberete katero vrsto brezžične varnosti želite uporabiti. Prepričajte se, da ste izbrali tiso, ki jo uporablja usmerjevalnik ali brezžična postaja. Privzeto bi morala biti izbrana prava možnost, vendar včasih ni. Če ne veste katera možnost je prava, poskusite vse.

Preverite, če je vaša brezžična kartica pravilno podprta

Nekatere brezžične kartice niso zelo dobro podprte. Pokažejo brezžična povezava, vendar se z njimi ne morejo povezati, ker gonilnikom manjka ta zmožnost. Oglejte si, če lahko dobite drug brezžični gonilnik ali če morate izvesti nekaj dodatne nastavitve (kot je namestitev drugačne strojne programske opreme). Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/look-display-fuzzy.page0000644000373100047300000000524512157071011026167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Morda je ločljivost zaslona nepravilno nastavljena. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakaj je moj zaslon videti meglen/točkast?

To se lahko zgodi, ker nastavljena ločljivost zaslona ni prava za vaš zaslon.

To solve this, click your name on the top bar and go to Settings. In the Hardware section, choose Displays. Try some of the Resolution options and set the one that makes the screen look better.

shaunm

Would like a little more explanation on native resolution, which is generally only applicable on LCDs. There's a stub for using two monitors. Link from section below when it's added.
Ko je priklopljenih več zaslonov

V primeru da imate z računalnikom povezana dva zaslona (na primer običajen zaslon in projektor), bosta morda zaslona imela različni ločljivosti. Grafična kartica računalnika lahko hkrati prikaže zaslon le pri eni ločljivosti, zato bo vsaj eden od zaslonov morda videti megleno.

Dva zaslona imata lahko različni ločljivosti, vendar potem iste stvari ne boste mogli prikazati na obeh zaslonih hkrati. Hkrati boste imeli povezana dva različna zaslona. Okna lahko premikate z enega zaslona na drug zaslon, vendar hkrati za oba zaslona ne morete pokazati enakega okna.

Za nastavitev zaslonov tako da bo imel vsak svojo ločljivost:

Kliknite svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in kliknite Nastavitve. Odprite Zasloni.

Odstranite izbiro Zrcalna zaslona.

Izberite zaslon iz sivega polja na vrhu okna Zasloni. Spreminjajte Ločljivost, dokler ni videti prav.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-dwellclick.page0000644000373100047300000000514112157071012025255 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zmožnost lebdečega klika vam omogoča klik z držanjem miške pri miru. Simulacija klika s prehodom

Lahko kliknete ali vlečete z lebdenjem kazalca vaše miške nad nadzornikom ali predmetom na zaslonu. To je uporabno, če težko hkrati premikate miško in kliknete. Ta zmožnost se imenuje klik z lebdenjem ali zadržani klik.

Ko je klik z lebdenjem omogočen, lahko miškin kazalec premaknete nad nadzornik, spustite miško in nato počakajte nekaj časa preden bo gumb kliknjen.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Kazanje in klikanje.

Vklopite Zadržani klik.

Odprlo se bo okno Zadržani klik, ki bo ostalo nad vašimi drugimi okni. To lahko uporabite za izbiro vrste klika, ki se naj zgodi pri lebdenju nad gumbom. V primeru da izberete Drugotni klik, bo miška po nekaj sekundah nad gumbom desno kliknila. Po dvokliku, desnem kliku ali vlečenju, se bo možnost samodejno spremenila nazaj na klikanje.

Ko miško držite nad gumbom in je ne premikate, bo postopa spreminjala barov. Ko je barva popolnoma spremenjena, bo bil gumb kliknjen.

Prilagodite nastavitev Zamik za spremembo kako dolgo morate držati miškin kazalec pred klikom.

Pri prehodu gumba vam za njegov klik miške ni treba držati popolnoma pri miru. Kazalec se lahko malo premika in sistem bo čez nekaj časa še vedno zaznal klik. V primeru da se premakne preveč, se klik ne bo zgodil.

Prilagodite nastavitev Prag premikanja za spremembo koliko se lahko kazalec premakne, da bo še vedno mišljen kot lebdeč.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-calibrate-screen.page0000644000373100047300000000337212157071012026712 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje zaslona je pomembno za natančen prikaz barv na zaslonu. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako umeriti zaslon?

Umerjanje zaslona je zelo enostavno opravilo in bi moralo biti biti storjeno, če se ukvarjate z računalniškim načrtovanjem ali grafičnimi podobami.

Z uporabo kolorimetrične naprave lahko natančno izmerite različne barve, ki jih lahko vaš zaslon prikaže. S poganjanjem NastavitveBarve lahko enostavno ustvarite profil in čarovnik vam bo prikazal, kako priklopiti napravo kolorimetra in katere nastavitve prilagoditi.

Zasloni se spreminjajo skozi čas - svetlost osvetlitve v TFT zaslonu se bo razpolovila v približno 18 mesecih in bo s staranjem postala rumenkasta. To pomeni, da morate ponovno umeriti zaslon, ko se v nadzorni plošči pojavi ikona klicaj [!].

Zasloni LED se tudi spreminjajo skozi čas, toda veliko počasneje kot zasloni TFT.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-search.page0000644000373100047300000000705312157071012024740 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Najdite datoteke na osnovi njihovega imena in vrste. Shranite svoje rezultate za kasnejšo uporabo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iskanje datotek

Datoteke lahko iščete na osnovi njihovega imena ali vrste neposredno iz upravljalnika datotek. Pogosta iskanja lahko shranite in pojavila se bodo kot posebne mape v vaši domači mapi.

Drugi programi za iskanje Iskanje

Odprite program Datoteke iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

V primeru da veste, da so datoteke, ki jih želite, v določeni mapi, pojdite v to mapo.

V orodni vrstici kliknite povečevalno steklo ali pritisnite krmilkaF.

Type a word or words that you know appear in the file name. For example, if you name all your invoices with the word "Invoice", type invoice. Press Enter. Words are matched regardless of case.

Svoje rezultate lahko zožite glede na mesto in vrsto datoteke.

Click Home to restrict the search results to your Home folder, or All Files to search everywhere.

Kliknite na gumb + za nastavitev več iskalnih kriterijev in izberite Vrsta datoteke iz spustnega seznama za omejitev rezultatov iskanja glede na vrsto datoteke. Kliknite gumb x, da odstranite to možnost in razširite obseg zadetkov.

Svoje datoteke lahko iz rezultatov iskanja odpirate, kopirate, izbrišete in delate kot bi iz katerekoli mape v upravljalniku datotek.

V orodni vrstici znova kliknite povečevalno steklo za končanje iskanja in vrnitev v mapo.

V primeru da določena iskanja pogosto izvajate, jih lahko shranite za hiter dostop.

Shranitev iskanja

Začnite iskanje kot je prikazano zgoraj.

When you're happy with the search parameters, click the gear button and select Save Search As.

Iskanju dajte ime in kliknite Shrani. Če želite, lahko za shranjevanje iskanja izberete drugo mapo. Ko si to mapo ogledate, boste svoje shranjeno iskanje videli kot oranžno ikono mape s povečevalnim steklom na njej.

Za odstranitev iskanja datoteke enostavno izbrišite iskanje kot bi izbrisali katerokoli drugo datoteko. Ko izbrišete shranjeno iskanje, datoteke, ki se ujemajo z iskanjem, niso izbrisane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-whyadd.page0000644000373100047300000000216512157071012025467 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Susanna Huhtanen ihmis.suski@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakaj dodati račune e-pošte ali družabnih medijev na namizje? Zakaj naj dodam račun?

Dodajanje računov prinese številne storitve, kot so koledar, klepet in e-pošta naravnost na namizje in naredi podatke o storitvah brezhiben del vaše uporabniške izkušnje. Z dodajanjem računov lahko enostavno ostanete v stiku s storitvami različnih računov, kot so klepetalnice. Svoj račun ustvarite samo enkrat in vsakič, ko zaženete svoj računalnik, bodo vsi računi in storitve, ki ste jih dodali, pripravljeni za vas.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-select.page0000644000373100047300000000356212157071012024753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Pritisnite CtrlS za izbiro več datotek s podobnimi imeni. Izbor datotek z vzorcem

Datoteke v mapi lahko izberete z vzorcem imena datotek. Pritisnite CtrlS za priklic okna Izbor ujemanja predmetov. Vpišite vzorec z uporabo skupnih delov imen datotek in nadomestnih znakov. Na voljo sta dva nadomestna znaka:

* se ujema s katerikoli številom znakov tudi z nič znaki.

? se ujema natanko z enim znakom.

Na primer:

V primeru da imate datoteko OpenDocument Text, datoteko PDF in sliko, ki imajo enako osnovno ime Račun, vse tri izberite z vzorcem

Račun.*

V primeru da imate fotografije z imeni Počitnice-001.jpg, Počitnice-002.jpg, Počitnice-003.jpg, lahko vse izberete z vzorcem

Počitnice-???.jpg

V primeru da imate fotografije kot prej, vendar ste nekatere od njih uredili in ste na konec imena dodali -urejeno, lahko urejene fotografije izberete z

Počitnice-???-urejeno.jpg

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-admin-explain.page0000644000373100047300000000712412157071012026074 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za spremembo pomembnih delov svojega sistema potrebujete skrbniška dovoljenja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Kako delujejo skrbniška dovoljenja?

Vaš računalnik poleg datotek, ki jih ustvarite vi, vsebuje tudi številne datoteke, ki jih sistem potrebuje za pravilno delovanje. V primeru napačnih sprememb teh pomembnih sistemskih datotek, se lahko različne stvari pokvarijo, zato so privzeto zaščitene pred spremembami. Tudi določeni programi spremenijo pomembne dele sistema in so zato zaščiteni.

Zaščita spremembo datotek ali uporabo programov omogoča le uporabnikom s skrbniškimi dovoljenji. Pri vsakodnevni uporabi vam sistemskih datotek ne bo treba spreminjati ali uporabljati teh programov. Zato privzeto skrbniških dovoljenj nimate.

Včasih morate te programe uporabiti, zato lahko začasno dobite skrbniške pravice, ki vam omogočajo opravljanje sprememb. V primeru da program potrebuje skrbniške pravice, vas bo vprašal za vaše geslo. Na primer, če želite namestiti novo programsko opremo, vas bo namestilnik paketov (upravljalnik paketov) vprašal za skrbniško geslo, ki mu dovoljuje nameščanje novega programa na sistem. Ko program konča, vam bodo skrbniška dovoljenja ponovno odvzeta.

Skrbniška dovoljenja so povezana z uporabniškim računom. Nekateri uporabniki lahko imajo skrbniška dovoljenja, drugi pa ne. V primeru da nimate skrbniških dovoljenj, na primer ne boste morali namestiti programov. Nekateri uporabniški računi (na primer račun "root") imajo trajna skrbniška dovoljenja. Skrbniških dovoljenj ne uporabljajte ves čas, saj lahko po nesreči spremenite pomembnega (na primer zahtevano sistemsko datoteko) in kaj pokvarite .

Na kratko povedano vam skrbniška dovoljenja omogočajo spreminjanje pomembnih delov sistema, ko to potrebujete, ter vam preprečijo, da bi to storili po nesreči.

Kaj pomeni "super uporabnik"?

Drugo ime za uporabnika s skrbniškimi dovoljenji je super uporabnik. To ime obstaja, ker ima super uporabnik več dovoljenj kot običajni uporabniki. Morda boste videli ljudi, ki razpravljajo o stvareh kot so su in sudo. Ti programi vam začasno dajo pravice "super uporabnika" (skrbnika).
Zakaj so skrbniška dovoljenja uporabna?

Zahtevanje skrbniških dovoljenj od uporabnikov pred pomembnimi sistemskimi spremembami je uporabno, ker pomaga pri preprečevanju namerne ali nenamerne okvare vašega sistema.

V primeru da bi imeli skrbniška dovoljenja ves čas, bi morda po nesreči spremenili pomembno datoteko ali pognali program, ki po nesreči spremeni nekaj pomembnega. Začasno pridobivanje skrbniških dovoljenj, ko jih potrebujete, zmanjša tveganje teh napak.

Samo določeni, zaupanja vredni uporabniki bi morali imeti skrbniška dovoljenja.To uporabnikom prepreči odstranjevanje programov, ki jih potrebujete, nameščanje programov, ki jih ne potrebujete ali spreminjanje pomembnih datotek. To je uporabno z vidika varnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/status-icons.page0000644000373100047300000002545612157071012025036 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Monica Kochofar monicakochofar@gmail.com 2012 Razloži pomen ikon v desnem delu vrhnje vrstice. Kaj pomenijo ikone v vrhnji vrstici?

This section explains the meaning of icons located on the top right corner of the screen. More specifically, the different variations of the icons provided by the GNOME interface are described.

Vrhnja vrstica lupine GNOME

Vrhnja vrstica lupine GNOME
Ikone menija splošnega dostopa

Vodi v meni, ki vklopi posamezne možnosti dostopnosti.
Ikone nadzornika glasnosti

Glasnost je nastavljena na visoko.

Glasnost je nastavljena na srednjo.

Glasnost je nastavljena na nizko.

Glasnost je utišana.
Ikone upravljalnika Bluetooth

Bluetooth je omogočen.

Bluetooth je onemogočen.
Ikone upravljalnika omrežja

Mobilna povezava

Povezano z omrežjem 3G.

Povezano z omrežjem 4G.

Povezano z omrežjem EDGE.

Povezano z omrežjem GPRS.

Povezano z omrežjem UMTS.

Povezano z mobilnim omrežjem.

Pridobivanje mobilne omrežne povezave.

Zelo visoka moč signala.

Visoka moč signala

Srednja moč signala.

Nizka moč signala.

Izjemno nizka moč signala.

Povezava krajevnega omrežja (LAN)

Prišlo je do napake pri iskanju omrežja.

Omrežje je nedejavno.

Za omrežje ni bilo mogoče najti poti.

Omrežje je nepovezano.

Omrežje prejema podatke.

Omrežje pošilja in prejema podatke.

Omrežje prenaša podatke.

Virtual Private Network (VPN) Connection

Pridobivanje omrežne povezave.

Povezani z omrežjem VPN.

Žična povezava

Pridobivanje omrežne povezave.

Disconnected from the network.

Povezani z brezžičnim omrežjem

Brezžična povezava

Pridobivanje brezžične povezave.

Brezžićčno omrežje je šifrirano.

Povezani z brezžičnim omrežjem.

Zelo visoka moč signala.

Visoka moč signala

Srednja moč signala.

Nizka moč signala.

Zelo nizka moč signala.
Ikone upravljalika porabe

Baterija je polna

Baterija je delno izpraznjena

Napetost baterije je nizka

Opozorilo: Baterija je skoraj izpraznjena.

Baterija je skoraj izpraznjena.

The battery has been unplugged.

Baterija je povsem polna.

Baterija je polna in se polni.

Baterija je delno polna in se polni.

Baterija je delno prazna in se polni.

Baterija je skoraj prazna in se polni.

Baterija je prazna in se polni.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-volume.page0000644000373100047300000000427212157071012025030 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Nastavitev glasnosti za računalnik in nadziranje glasnosti vsakega programa. Spreminjanje glasnosti zvoka

Za spremembo glasnosti kliknite na meni zvoka na vrhnjem pultu in premaknite drsnik glasnosti levo ali desno. Zvok lahko popolnoma izklopite z vlečenjem drsnika skrajno levo.

Nekatere tipkovnice imajo tipke, ki vam omogočajo nadzor glasnosti. Običajno so videti kot zvočniki z valovi, ki prihajajo iz njih. Običajno so blizu tipk "F" (na primer F7).

Seveda lahko, če imate zunanje zvočnike, glasnost spremenite tudi z nadzorom glasnosti na zvočnikih. Tudi nekatere slušalke vsebujejo nadzor glasnosti.

Spreminjanje glasnosti za posamezne programe

Spremenite lahko glasnost za en program ter pustite glasnost nespremenjeno za druge. To je uporabno, kadar poslušate glasbo in na primer brskate po spletu. Morda želite utišati glasnost v spletnem brskalniku, tako da zvoki iz spletnih strani ne motijo vaše glasbe.

Nekateri programi imajo lasten nadzor glasnosti znotraj glavnega okna. Če vaš program ima tak nadzor, potem spremenite glasnost znotraj programa. Če takega nadzora nima, kliknite meni zvoka na vrhnjem pultu in nato Nastavitve zvoka. Pojdite na zavihek Programi in tam spremenite glasnost programa.

Prikazani bodo le programi, ki predvajajo zvoke. V primeru da program predvaja zvoke a ni na seznamu, morda ne podpira nadzora glasnosti na ta način. V tem primeru njegove glasnosti ne morete spremeniti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-virtualdevice.page0000644000373100047300000000276012157071012026355 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Navidezna naprava je barvno upravljana naprava, ki ni povezana z računalnikom. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kaj je navidezno barvno upravljana naprava?

Navidezna naprava je barvno upravljana naprava, ki ni povezana z računalnikom. Primeri tega so:

Spletna tiskarska trgovina, kamor pošljete fotografije, ki so nato natisnjene in poslane k vam

Slike z digitalnega fotoaparata shranjene na spominski kartici.

Za ustvarjanje navideznega profila za digitalni fotoaparat samo povlecite in spustite datoteke slike na pogovorno okno Nastavitve Barva. Nato mu lahko dodelite profile tako kot vsaki drugi napravi ali pa ga celo umerite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/get-involved.page0000644000373100047300000000471512157071012025000 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako in kje poročati težave s temi temami pomoči. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Sodelujte pri izboljšavi tega vodnika
Poročanje poročila o hrošču ali predloga za izboljšavo

Ta sistem pomoči ustvarja skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabljeni ste k sodelovanju. Če opazite težavo s temi stranmi pomoči (kot so tipkarske napake, nepravilna navodila ali teme, ki bi morale biti obravnavane, a niso), lahko pošljete poročilo o hrošču. Za izpolnitev poročila o hrošču pojdite na bugzilla.gnome.org.

Ustvariti morate račun, da lahko prijavite hrošč in prejemate posodobitve o njegovem stanju preko e-pošte. V primeru da računa še nimate, kliknite na povezavo New za njegovo ustvarjanje.

Ko imate račun, se prijavite, kliknite na File a BugCoregnome-user-docs. Pred poročanjem hrošča preberite smernice poročanja hroščev in brskajte med hrošči in poglejte, če kaj podobnega že obstaja.

Za poročanje hrošča izberite sestavni del v meniju Component.

V primeru da zahtevate pomoč o temi, ki ni obravnavana, v meniju Severity izberite enhancement. Izpolnite odseka Summary (povzetek) in Description (opis) in kliknite Commit.

Vaše poročilo bo dobilo številko ID in njegovo stanje bo posodobljeno, medtem ko se obdeluje. Hvala, ker pomagate izboljševati pomoč GNOME!

Stopite v stik z nami

Če se želite naučiti več o tem kako se pridružiti dokumentacijskih ekipi, pošljite e-poštno sporočilo na dopisni seznam dokumentacije GNOME.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-whatisspace.page0000644000373100047300000000620712157071012026022 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barvni prostor je definiran razpon barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kaj je barvni prostor?

Barvni prostor je definiran razpon barv. Dobro znani barvni prostori so sRGB, AdobeRGB in ProPhotoRGB.

Človeški vidni sistem ni enostaven senzor RGB, vendar lahko ocenimo kako se oko odzove z diagramom kromatičnosti CIE 1931, ki prikazuje človeški vidni odziv v obliki konjske podkve. Vidite lahko, da človeški vid zazna več sence zelene kot modre ali rdeče. S trikromatskim barvnim prostorom kot je RGB predstavimo barve na računalniku s tremi vrednostmi, kar omeji kodiranje na trikotnik barv.

Uporaba modelov kot je diagram kromatičnosti CIE 1931 je ogromna poenostavitev človeškega vidnega sistema in pravi gamuti so izraženi kot 3D trup namesto 2D projekcije. 2D projekcija 3D oblike je lahko včasih zavajajoča, zato za ogled 3D oblike uporabite program gcm-viewer.
sRGB, AdobeRGB in ProPhotoRGB predstavljeni z belimi trikotniki

Barvi prostor sRGB je najmanjši prostor, ki lahko kodira najmanj barv. Je ocena 10 let starega zaslona CRT, zato lahko večina modernih zaslonov z lahko prikaže več barv. sRGB je najmanjši skupni standard, ki se uporablja v veliko primerih (vključno z Internetom).

AbodeRGB se pogosto uporablja kot urejevalni prostor. Kodira lahko več barv kot sRGB. To pomeni, da lahko barve na fotografiji prilagodite brez skrbi o odstranitvi najbolj živih barv ali črnine.

ProPhoto je največji razpoložljivi prostor, ki se pogosto uporablja za arhiviranje dokumentov. Kodira lahko skoraj celoten obseg barv, ki jih lahko zazna človeško oko in tudi barve, ki jih človeško oko ne more zaznati.

Zakaj se ProPhoto ne uporablja za povsod, če je najboljši? Odgovor je kvantizacija. Če imate samo 8 bitov (256 stopenj) za kodiranje vsakega kanala, potem ima večji obseg večje korake med posameznimi vrednostmi.

Večji koraki pomenijo večjo napako med zajeto in shranjeno barvo, kar je za nekatere barve velika težava. Za nekatere ključne barve kot so kožne barve bodo že majhne napake opazne.

Uporaba 16 bitne slike bo zagotovila več korakov in veliko manjšo napako zaradi kvantizacije slike, vendar to podvoji velikost vsake slikovne datoteke. Večina današnje vsebine vsebuje 8 bitov za točko.

Upravljenje barv je opravilo pretvarjanja iz enega barvnega prostora v drugega, kjer je barvni prostor lahko splošno določen kot je sRGB ali osebni profil kot je profil vašega zaslona ali tiskalnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-airplane.page0000644000373100047300000000242212157071012026600 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Odprite nastavitve omrežja in vklopite način letala. Izklopite brezžično omrežje (letalski način)

V primeru da imate svoj računalnik na letalu (ali kje drugje, kjer brezžične povezave niso dovoljene), bi morali svojo brezžično povezavo izklopiti. Morda boste brezžično povezavo želeli izklopiti tudi zaradi varčevanja z baterijo.

Kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve omrežja.

Vklopite Letalski način. To bo vašo brezžično povezavo onemogočilo, dokler letalskega načina ne izklopite.

Uporaba Načina letala bo popolnoma izklopila tako brezžične povezave kot povezave Bluetooth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-inklevel.page0000644000373100047300000000314712157071012026034 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite količino preostalega črnila ali tonerja v kartušah tiskalnika. Anita Reitere nitalynx@gmail.com Kako preverim nivo črnila/tonerja v tiskalniku?

Kako preverite nivo preostalega črnila ali tonerja v tiskalniku je odvisno od modela in proizvajalca tiskalnika in gonilnikov ter programov nameščenih na računalniku.

Nekateri tiskalniki imajo vgrajen prikazovalnik nivoja črnila in drugih podatkov.

Gonilnike in orodja stanja za večino tiskalnikov HP zagotavlja projekt HP Linux slike in tiskanje (HPLIP). Drugi proizvajalci morda zagotavljajo lastniške gonilnike s podobnimi zmožnostmi.

Namesto tega lahko namestite program za preverjanje ali nadziranje količine črnila. Inkblot pokaže stanje črnila za veliko tiskalnikov HP, Epson in Canon. Oglejte si, če je vaš tiskalnik na seznamu podprtih modelov. Drug program količine črnila za Epson in nekatere druge tiskalnike je mktink.

Nekateri tiskalniki na Linuxu še niso dobro podprti, drugi pa niso zasnovani za poročanje o količini črnila.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-disable-service.page0000644000373100047300000000340412157071012027245 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatere spletne račune lahko uporabite za dostop do več storitev (kot sta koledar in e-pošta). Nadzirate lahko katere od teh storitev lahko uporabljajo programi. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Nadzor do katerih spletnih staritev lahko dostopa račun

Nekatere vrste spletnih računov vam omogočajo dostop do več storitev z enim uporabniškim računom. Računi Google na primer zagotavljajo dostop to koledarja, e-pošte, stikov in klepeta. Morda želite svoj račun uporabiti za nekatere storitve, a ne za druge. Morda na primer želite uporabiti račun Google za e-pošto, a ne za klepet, ker želite za klepet uporabiti drug spletni račun.

Nekatere od storitev, ki jih zagotavljajo spleti računi, lahko onemogočite:

Odprite nastavitve Spletni računi iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite račun, ki ga želite izbrisati s seznama na levi.

Seznam storitev, ki so na voljo s tem računom, bodo prikazane pod Uporabi ta račun za.

Izklopite morebitne storitve, ki jih ne želite uporabiti.

Ko je storitev za račun onemogočena, programi na vašem računalniku računa ne bodo mogli uporabiti za povezavo s to storitvijo.

Za vklop izklopljene storitve pojdite nazaj v okno Spletni računi in jo omogočite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/privacy-purge.page0000644000373100047300000000417612157071012025173 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Set how often your trash and temporary files will be cleared from your computer. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Purge trash & temporary files

Clearing out your trash and temporary files removes unwanted and unneeded files from your computer, and also frees up more space on your hard drive. You can manually empty your trash and clear your temporary files, but you can also set your computer to automatically do this for you.

Automatically empty your trash and clear your temporary files after a set period of time:

Click your name on the top bar.

Select Settings and click the Privacy icon.

Select Purge Trash & Temporary Files.

Set the Automatically Purge Trash or Automatically Purge Temporary Files sliders to On.

Set how often you would like your Trash and Temporary Files to be purged by changing the Purge After value.

Kliknite Zapri.

Use the Purge After: Immediately setting with caution. Setting your trash to be purged immediately will cause any files you delete to skip your trash and be permanently deleted. Files that are deleted are much more difficult to recover than files that are in your trash.

Unless you have a specific need to immediately delete files from your trash, it is probably safer to set a longer Purge After value.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-behavior.page0000644000373100047300000001052012157071012026025 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite za odprtje datotek, poganjanje ali ogled izvedljivih besedilnih datotek in navedite obnašanje smeti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Možnosti obnašanja upravljalnika datotek

Nadzirate lahko se datoteke odpira z enim klikom ali dvoklikom, upravljanje izvedljivih besedilnih datotek in obnašanje smeti. V zgornji vrstici kliknite Datoteke, izberite Možnosti in izberite zavihek Obnašanje.

Obnašanje <gui>Enojni klik za odpiranje predmetov</gui> <gui>Dvojni klik za odpiranje predmetov</gui>

Privzeto enojni klik izbere datoteke, dvojni klik pa jo odpre. Namesto tega lahko datoteke in mape odprete z enojnim klikom. Ko uporabite način enega klika, lahko med klikanjem držite Ctrl za izbiro ene ali več datotek.
Izvedljive besedilne datoteke

An executable text file is a file that contains a program that you can run (execute). The file permissions must also allow for the file to run as a program. The most common are Shell, Python and Perl scripts. These have extensions .sh, .py and .pl, respectively.

When you open an executable text file, you can select from:

Run executable text files when they are opened

View executable text files when they are opened

Ask each time

If Ask each time is selected, a dialog will pop up asking if you wish to run or view the selected text file.

Executable text files are also called scripts. All scripts in ~/.local/share/nautilus/scripts folder will appear in the context menu for a file under the Scripts submenu. When a script is executed from a local folder, all selected files will be pasted to the script as parameters. To execute a script on a file:

Navigate to the desired folder.

Select the desired file.

Right click on the file to open the context menu and select the desired script to execute from the Scripts menu.

A script will not be passed any parameters when executed from a remote folder such as a folder showing web or ftp content.
Možnosti smeti upravljalnika datotek Smeti <gui>Vprašaj pred praznjenjem Smeti ali brisanjem datotek</gui>

Ta možnost je privzeto izbrana. Ko smeti izpraznite, bo prikazano sporočilo, ki bo potrdilo, da želite datoteke poslati v smeti ali izbrisati.

 <gui>Vključi ukaz izbriši, ki obide Smeti</gui>

Izbira te možnosti bo v meni, ki se pojavi, ko desno kliknete na predmet v programu Datoteke, dodala možnost Izbriši.

Izbris predmeta z uporabo možnosti Izbriši obide smeti. Predmet je popolnoma odstranjen s sistema in ga ni več mogoče obnoviti.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/hardware-driver.page0000644000373100047300000000314412157071012025456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gonilnik za strojno opremo/napravo omogoča računalniku, da uporabi naprave, ki so nanj priklopljene Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Kaj je gonilnik?

Naprave so fizični "deli" računalnika. Lahko so zunanje kot tiskalniki in monitor ali notranje kot grafične in zvočne kartice.

Da bi vaš računalnik lahko te naprave uporabljal, mora vedeti, kako se z njimi sporazumevati. To stori program, ki se imenuje gonilnik naprav.

Ko napravo priklopite na računalnik, morate za njeno pravilno delovanje imeti nameščen pravi gonilnik. Če na primer vklopite tiskalnik, a pravilni gonilnik ni na voljo, tiskalnika ne boste mogli uporabiti. Običajno vsak model naprave uporablja gonilnik, ki ni združljiv s katerimkoli drugim modelom.

Na Linuxu so gonilniki za večino naprav že privzeto nameščeni, zato bi moralo vse delovati, ko napravo priklopite. Obstaja pa tudi možnost, da boste morali gonilnik namestiti ročno ali pa da sploh ni na voljo.

Nekateri obstoječi gonilniki so nedokončani ali le delno delujoči. Lahko se na primer zgodi, da tiskalnik ne more izvesti dvostranskega tiskanja, a sicer popolnoma deluje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth-connect-device.page0000644000373100047300000000720512157071012027263 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Parjenje naprav Bluetooth. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Povezava računalnika z napravo Bluetooth.

Preden lahko prenašate datoteke med napravami z omogočenim Bluetoothom, jih morate povezati. To se imenuje tudi spoznavanje naprav Bluetooth.

Preden začnete, se prepričajte, da je Bluetooth na vašem računalniku omogočen. Oglejte si .

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavi novo napravo.

Izberite ikono Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavi novo napravo.

Naredite drugo napravo Bluetooth vidno in jo postavite manj kot 10 metrov stran od računalnika. Nato izberite Naprej. Vaš računalnik bo začel z iskanjem naprav.

V primeru da je izpisanih preveč naprav, uporabite spustno vrstico Vrsta naprave za prikaz le ene vrste naprav na seznamu.

Izberite Možnosti PIN za nastavitev dostavljanja PIN na drugo napravo.

Samodejna nastavitev PIN bo uporabila številčno kodo iz šestih znakov. Naprava brez vnosnih tipk ali zaslona kot je miška ali slušalke morda zahteva določen PIN kot je 0000 ali nobenega PIN-a sploh. Za pravilno nastavitev preverite priročnik svoje naprave.

Izberite primerno nastavitev PIN za svojo napravo in nato izberite Zapri.

Kliknite Naprej za nadaljevanje. V primeru da niste izbrali prenastavljenega PIN, se bo prikazal na zaslonu.

Če je to zahtevano, potrdite PIN na drugi napravi. Naprava bi vam morala pokazati PIN, ki ga vidite na računalniškem zaslonu ali vas lahko pozove k vnosu PIN-a. Potrdite PIN na napravi in nato kliknite Ujemanja.

Na večini naprav morate vnašanje končati v približno 20 sekundah ali pa se povezava ne bo dokončala. V primeru da se to zgodi, se vrnite na seznam naprav in začnite znova.

Ko se povezava uspešno dokonča, se pojavi sporočilo. Kliknite Zapri.

Če želite, lahko kasneje povezavo Bluetooth odstranite.

To control access to your shared files, refer to the Bluetooth Sharing settings. See .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting.page0000644000373100047300000000422712157071012030241 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Določitev in popravilo težav z brezžičnimi povezavami Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji

To je vodnik odpravljanja težav korak za korakom, ki vam bo pomagal določiti in popraviti težave z brezžičnimi povezavami. Če se z brezžičnim omrežjem ne morete povezati, poskusite z navodili tukaj.

Za povezavo računalnika z internetom izvedite naslednje korake:

Izvajanje začetnega preverjanja

Zbiranje podrobnosti o strojni opremi

Preverjanje strojne opreme

Poskušanje ustvarjanja povezave z brezžičnim usmerjevalnikom

Preverite svoj modem in usmerjevalnik

Za začetek kliknite na Naprej v zgornjem desnem delu strani. Ta povezava in druge na naslednjih straneh vas bodo peljale skozi vse korake v vodniku.

Uporaba ukazne vrstice

Nekatera od navodil v tem vodniku vas bodo vprašala po vnosu ukazov v ukazno vrstico (Terminal). Program Terminal lahko najdete v pregledu Dejavnosti.

Če vam uporaba ukazne vrstice ni znana ne skrbite - ta vodnik vas bo vodil ob vsakem koraku. Vse, kar si morate zapomniti, je, da so ukazi občutljivi na velikost črk (zato jih morate vnesti natanko kot so videti tukaj) in da morate za zagon ukaza po njegovem vnosu pritisniti Enter.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/disk-benchmark.page0000644000373100047300000000474512157071012025262 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Poženete lahko preizkuse trdega diska in preverite kako hiter je. Izberite hitrost delovanja svojega trdega diska

Za izmeritev hitrosti delovanja svojega trdega diska:

Odprite program Diskovna orodja pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite disk s seznama Diskovni pogoni.

Click the gear button and select Benchmark Drive.

Click Start Benchmark and adjust the Transfer Rate and Access Time parameters as desired.

Click Start Benchmarking to test how fast data can be read from the disk. Administrative privileges may be required. Enter your password, or the password for the requested administrator account.

If Also perform write-benchmark is checked, the benchmark will test how fast data can be read from and written to the disk. This will take longer to complete.

Ko se preizkus konča, bodo rezultati prikazani na grafu. Zelene točke in povezovalne črte nakazujejo na odvzete vzorce; te ustrezajo desni osi in prikazujejo dostopni čas. Spodnja osi pa prikazuje odstotek pretečenega časa. Modra črta predstavlja vrednost branja medtem ko rdeča črta predstavlja vrednost pisanja. Te so prikazane kot vrednosti dostopa do podatkov na levi osi, narisane v odstotkih prepotovane poti diska, od zunaj do vretena pa po spodnji osi.

Pod grafom so prikazane vrednosti za najmanjšo, največjo ter povprečno vrednost branja in pisanja, povprečen dostopni čas ter pretekel čas od zadnjega primerjalnega preizkusa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-shortcuts-set.page0000644000373100047300000003533712157071012027026 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Juanjo Marín juanj.marin@juntadeandalucia.es Tipkovne bližnjice lahko določite ali spremenite v nastavitvah Tipkovnica. Nastavitev tipkovnih bližnjic Shaun McCance

Define shortcuts, using Shortcuts tab in Keyboard settings. Provide reference for what everything is (can group for conciseness). Explain custom shortcuts.

Important: the window says "To edit a shortcut, click the row and hold down the new keys or press Backspace to clear." This is actually wrong. You have to click the row, then click again on the shortcut within the row. File bug against control-center about the faulty message (or better, about the confusing interaction), but make sure to explain correctly in the help regardless.

Za spremembo tipke ali tipk, ki jih je treba pritisniti za tipkovno bližnjico:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Tipkovnica in izberite zavihek Bližnjice.

Select a category in the left pane, and the row for the desired action on the right. The current shortcut definition will change to New accelerator...

Držite pritisnjeno želeno kombinacijo tipk ali pritisnite vračalko za izbris.
Predhodno določene bližnjice

Obstajajo številne prednstavljene bližnjice, ki jih je mogoče spremeniti, združene v te kategorije:

Zaganjalniki

Zaženi brskalnik pomoči

Onemogočeno

Zaženi računalo

Računalo

Zaženi odjemalec e-pošte

Pošta

Zaženi spletni brskalnik

WWW

Domača mapa

Raziskovalnik

Iskanje

Iskanje
Krmarjenje

Premakni okno na delovno površino 1

Onemogočeno

aPremakni okno na delovno površino 2

Onemogočeno

Premakni okno na delovno površino 3

Onemogočeno

Premakni okno na delovno površino 4

Onemogočeno

Premakni okno eno delovno površino levo

ShiftCtrlAlt←

Premakni okno eno delovno površino desno

ShiftCtrlAlt→

Premakni okno eno delovno površino navzgor

ShiftSuper Page Up

Premakni okno eno delovno površino navzdol

ShiftSuperPage Down

Preklopi programe

SuperTab

Preklop med okni

Onemogočeno

Preklopi okna programa

Onemogočeno

Preklopi nadzornike sistema

CtrlAltTab

Preklopi okna neposredno

AltEsc

Preklopi okna programa neposredno

AltF6

Neposredno preklopi nadzornike sistema

CtrlAltEsc

Skrij vsa običajna okna

Onemogočeno

Preklopi na delovno površino 1

Onemogočeno

Preklopi na delovno površino 2

Onemogočeno

Preklopi na delovno površino 3

Onemogočeno

Preklopi na delovno površino 4

Onemogočeno

Premakni na levo delovno površino

CtrlAlt←

Premakni na desno delovno površino

CtrlAlt→

Premakni na zgornjo delovno površino

SuperPage Up

Premakni na spodnjo delovno površino

SuperPage Down
Zaslonske slike

Zajeme zaslonske slike

Print

Zajemi zaslonsko sliko okna

AltPrint.

Zajemi zaslonsko sliko področja

ShiftPrint

Kopiraj zaslonsko sliko na odložišče

CtrlPrint

Kopiraj zaslonsko sliko okna na odložišče

CtrlAltPrint

Kopiraj zaslonsko sliko področja na odložišče

ShiftCtrlPrint

Record a screencast

ShiftCtrlAltR

Zvok in predstavnost

Utišan zvok

Utišaj zvok

Zmanjšaj glasnost

Znižaj glasnost zvoka

Povečaj glasnost

Zvišanje glasnosti zvoka

Zagon predvajalnika predstavnosti

Zvočni medij

Predvajanje (ali predvajanje/premor)

Predvajaj zvok

Premor predvajanja

Premor zvoka

Zaustavi predvajanje

Zaustavitev zvoka

Predhodna skladba

Zvok nazaj

Naslednja skladba

Zvok naprej

Izvrzi

Izvrzi
Sistem

Pokaži poziv zagona ukazne vrstice

AltF2

Pokaži okno pregleda dejavnosti

AltF1

Odjava

CtrlAltDelete

Zakleni zaslon

CtrlAltL

Show the message tray

SuperM

Focus the active notification

SuperN

Pokaži vse programe

SuperA

Open the application menu

SuperF10
Typing

Switch to next input source

SuperSpace

Switch to previous input source

Onemogočeno

Modifiers-only switch to next source

Onemogočeno

Compose Key

Onemogočeno

Alternative Characters Key

Onemogočeno
Splošni dostop

Omogoči ali onemogoči približanje

AltSuper8

Približaj

AltSuper=

Oddalji

AltSuper-

Omogoči ali onemogoči zaslonski bralnik

Onemogočeno

Vklopi ali izklopi zaslonsko tipkovnico

Onemogočeno

Povečaj velikost pisave

Onemogočeno

Zmanjšaj velikost pisave

Onemogočeno

Omogoči ali onemogoči visok kontrast slike

Onemogočeno
Okna

Omogoči meni okna

AltPreslednica

Preklopi celozaslonski način

Onemogočeno

Preklopi stanje razpetosti

AltF10

Razpne okno

Super↑

Obnovi okno

Super↓

Preklopi stanje senčenja

Onemogočeno

Zapri okno

AltF4

Skrij okno

SuperH

Premakni okno

AltF7

Spremeni velikost okna

AltF8

Preklopi okno na vse delovne površine oziroma le na eno

Onemogočeno

Dvigni okno, če ga prekriva drugo okno, sicer ga spusti

Onemogočeno

Dvigni okno nad druga okna

Onemogočeno

Spusti okno pod druga okna

Onemogočeno

Razpne okno navpično

Onemogočeno

Razpne okno vodoravno

Onemogočeno

Poglej razdelek na levi

Super←

Poglej razdelek na desni

Super→
Change keyboard shortcuts

This section shows how to change keyboard shortcuts for an application.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the gsettings set org.gnome.desktop.interface can-change-accels true command.

Start the application for which you want to change the keyboard shortcut.

Find the menu item for which you want to change the keyboard shortcut.

Type the shortcut that you want on the keyboard.

Note that this setting is desktop-wide. You can disable it after you make changes by running the gsettings set org.gnome.desktop.interface can-change-accels false command. You can also use the dconf-editor utility to do this.
Bližnjice po meri

Za ustvarjanje svoje tipkovne bližnjice:

Select Custom Shortcuts in the left pane, and click the + button (or click the + button in any category). The Custom Shortcut window will appear.

Type a Name to identify the shortcut, and a Command to run an application, then click Apply. For example, if you wanted the shortcut to open Rhythmbox, you could name it Music and use the rhythmbox command.

Click Disabled in the row that was just added. When it changes to New accelerator..., hold down the desired shortcut key combination.

The command name that you type should be a valid system command. You can check that the command works by opening a Terminal and typing it in there. The command that opens an application cannot have the same name as the application itself.

Če želite spremeniti ukaz, ki je povezan s tipkovno bližnjico po meri, dvokliknite na ime bližnjice. Pojavilo se bo okno Bližnjica po meri in lahko boste uredili ukaz.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-restore.page0000644000373100047300000000261012157071012025313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obnovite svoje datoteke iz varnostne kopije. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Obnovitev varnostne kopije

Če ste izgubili ali izbrisali nekatere od svojih datotek, vendar imate njihovo varnostno kopijo, jih lahko obnovite iz varnostne kopije:

V primeru da ste svoje datoteke enostavno kopirali na varno mesto kot je zunanji trdi disk, drug računalnik na omrežju ali pogonu USB, jih lahko kopirate nazaj na svoj računalnik.

Če ste varnostno kopijo ustvarili s programom kot je Déjà Dup, vam priporočamo, da za obnovitev varnostne kopije uporabite isti program. Oglejte si pomoč za program s katerim ste ustvarili varnostno kopijo. Vsebovala bo natančna navodila za obnovitev datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/more-help.page0000644000373100047300000000152012157071012024254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Nasveti za uporabo tega vodnika, pomoč pri izboljšanju tega vodnika, Dopisni seznam, IRC Dobite več pomoči

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts-search.page0000644000373100047300000000310112157071012025442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Iskanje stika Iskanje stika

Spletne stike lahko iščete na enega od dveh načinov:

V pregledu Dejavnosti začnite vnašati ime stika.

The contact will appear in the overview instead of the usual list of applications.

Press Enter to select the contact at the top of the list or click the contact that you want to select if they are not at the top.

To search from inside Contacts:

Click inside the search field.

Začnite tipkati ime stika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-testing.page0000644000373100047300000000334512157071013025165 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preizkušanje upravljanja barv ni težko, na voljo vam je tudi nekaj preizkusnih profilov. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kako lahko preizkusim ali upravljanje barv deluje pravilno?

Učinki barvnega profila so včasih majhni zato je težko videti, če se je kaj spremenilo.

V GNOME je vključenih več profilov, ki zelo jasno pokažejo kateri profili so uveljavljeni:

Modrikast preizkus: spremeni zaslon v modrega in preizkusi, če so umeritvene krivulje pravilno poslane zaslonu

ADOBEGAMMA-test: spremeni zaslon v roza barvo in preizkusi različne zmožnosti barvnega profila

FakeBRG: To ne bo spremenilo zaslona, vendar kanale RGB spermeni v BGR. Barvni prelivi bodo videti večinoma pravilno in na zaslonu ne bo velike razlike, vendar pa bodo slike v programih, ki podpirajo upravljanje barv videti obučtno drugače.

Svojemu zaslonu lahko enega od profilov dodate z uporabo možnosti NastavitveBarva.

S temi profili lahko jasno vidite kdaj program podpira upravljanje barv.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power.page0000644000373100047300000000223312157071013023523 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natalia Ruz nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Suspend, power off, screen dimming… Napajanje in baterija shaunm

Could use some organization work
Nastavitve baterije
Težave z napajanjem Odpravite težave z napajanjem in baterijo Težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-osk.page0000644000373100047300000000357712157071013024775 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporaba zaslonske tipkovnice za vnos besedila s klikom na gumbe z miško. Uporaba zaslonske tipkovnice

Če nimate tipkovnice ali je ne želite uporabljati, lahko za vnos besedila vklopite zaslonsko tipkovnico.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Switch on On Screen Keyboard to show the screen keyboard.

Kliknite na gumb 123 za vnos števil in simbolov. Če kliknite na gumb {#*, vam bo na voljo več simbolov. Za vrnitev na abecedno tipkovnico kliknite na gumb Abc.

If the screen keyboard gets in your way, click the button that looks like a keyboard (next to the tray button) to hide the keyboard. To make the keyboard show again, open the messaging tray (by moving your mouse to the bottom right of the screen), and click the keyboard tray item.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/display-dual-monitors.page0000644000373100047300000000714112157071013026632 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev dveh zaslonov na prenosniku. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Povezava zunanjega zaslona s prenosnikom
Preizkusni video

Preizkus

Za odprtje nastavitev Zaslonov v pregled Dejavnosti vnesite zasloni. Kliknite na sliko zaslona, ki jo želite omogočiti ali onemogočiti in ga nato VKLOPITE/IZKLOPITE. Zaslon z glavno vrstico je glavni zaslon. Za sprememno "glavnega" zaslona kliknite na vrhnjo vrstico in ga povlecite na zaslon, ki ga želite uporabiti kot "glavi" zaslon. Za spremembo "položaja" zaslona kliknite nanj in ga povlecite na želeni položaj. Če želite, da oba zaslona prikažeta isto vsebino, izberite polje Zrcali zaslona. Ko ste z nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Uveljavi in nato kliknite Obdrži te nastavitve. Za zaprtje Nastavitev zaslona kliknite na x v zgornjem kotu.
Nastavitev zunanjega zaslona

Za nastavitev zunanjega zaslona s prenosnikom povežite zaslon s prenosnikom. Če ga vaš sistem ne prepozna nemudoma ali bi želeli prilagoditi nastavitve:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Zasloni.

Kliknite na sliko zaslona, ki jo želite omogočiti ali onemogočiti in ga nato VKLOPITE/IZKLOPITE.

Zaslon z vrhnjo vrstico je glavni zaslon. Za spremembo kateri zaslon je "glavni" kliknite na vrhnjo vrstico in jo povlecite na zaslon, ki ga želite uporabiti kot "glavni" zaslon.

Za spremembo "položaja" zaslona kliknite nanj in ga povlecite na želeni položaj.

Če želite, da oba zaslona prikažeta isto vsebino, izberite polje Zrcali zaslona.

Ko ste z nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Uveljavi in nato kliknite Obdrži te nastavitve.

Za zaprtje Nastavitev zaslona kliknite na x v zgornjem kotu.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-doubleclick.page0000644000373100047300000000416312157071013026001 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirajte kako hitro morate drugič pritisniti miškin gumb za dvoklik. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prilagoditev hitrosti dvojnega klika

Dvoklik se zgodi, ko dovolj hitro dvakrat pritisnete na miškin gumb. V primeru da je drugi pritisk predolgo za prvim, boste dobili dva ločena klika in ne dvoklika. V primeru da imate težave s hitrim pritiskom na miškin gumb, povečajte zakasnitev.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

Under General, adjust the Double-click slider to a value you find comfortable.

Click the Test Your Settings button to test. A single click in the window will highlight the outer circle. A double-click will highlight the inside circle.

V primeru da vaša miška dvoklikne, ko ste želeli izvesti enojni klik, čeprav ste povečali zakasnitev dvojnega klika, je vaša miška morda pokvarjena. V računalnik poskusite priklopiti drugo miško in preverite, če pravilno deluje. Namesto tega lahko miško priklopite v drug računalnik in preverite, če imate še vedno isto težavo.

Ta nastavitev bo vplivala tako na vašo miško in drsno ploščico kot tudi na katerokoli drugo napravo kazanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-firewall-on-off.page0000644000373100047300000000454612157071013026153 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirate lahko do katerih programov je mogoče dostopati preko omrežja. To pomaga obdržati vaš računalnik varen. Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Omogočanje in blokiranje dostopa do požarnega zidu shaunm

Continue to revisit this page until we can provide real instructions. As it is, we're stuck in "whatever distros do" territory.

Vaš sistem bi moral biti opremljen s požarnim zidom, ki omogoča blokado dostopa do programov z interneta ali krajevnega omrežja. To pomaga obdržati vaš računalnik varen.

Veliko programov lahko zagotavlja omrežne storitve. Na primer lahko souporabljate datoteke ali pustite nekomu, da si oddaljeno ogleda vaše namizje. Glede na to kako je vaš računalnik nastavljen, boste morda prilagoditi požarni zid, da bo tem storitvam omogočal delovanje.

Vsak program, ki zagotavlja storitve, uporablja določena omrežna vrata. Za omogočitev dostopa do storitev tega programa boste morda morali dovoliti dostop do njegovih dodeljenih vrat na požarnem zidu. Za omogočitev povezav na vratih 53 v terminal vnesite sudo ufw allow 53. Za blokiranje vrat 53 vnesite sudo ufw block 53.

Pojdite na Dejavnosti v zgornjem levem kotu zaslona in zaženite svoj program požarnega zidu. Morda boste morali namestiti upravljalnik požarnega zidu, če ga ne morete najdi (na primer Firestarter ali GUFW).

Odprite ali onemogočite vrata za svojo omrežno storitev glede na to ali želite, da ljudje lahko do nje dostopajo ali ne. Vrata, ki jih želite spremeniti, so odvisne od storitve.

Shranite ali uveljavite spremembe in sledite morebitnim dodatnim navodilom orodja požarnega zidu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-gettingprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000260512157071013026713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barve profile zagotavljajo ponudniki, lahko pa jih ustvarite tudi sami. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kje lahko dobim barvne profile?

Najboljši način za pridobivanje profilov je, da jih ustvarite sami, čeprav to zahteva nekaj predhodnega znanja.

Večina proizvajalcev poskuša zagotavljati barvne profile za naprave, vendar so včasih oviti v pakete gonilnikov, ki jih morate prejeti, razširiti in nato v njih najti barvne profile.

Nekateri proizvajalci ne zagotavljajo natančnih profilov za strojno opremo. V primeru da je datum ustvarjanja profila več kot leto pred datumom nakupa naprave, so v njem verjetno preizkusni podatki, ki so neuporabni.

Oglejte si za podrobnosti zakaj so barvni profili proizvajalcev pogosto popolnoma neuporabni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-stickykeys.page0000644000373100047300000000674012157071013025351 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Vtipkajte tipkovne bližnjice po eno tipko na enkrat namesto pritiska vseh tipk hkrati. Vklop lepljivih tipk

Sticky keys allows you to type keyboard shortcuts one key at a time rather than having to hold down all of the keys at once. For example, the SuperTab shortcut switches between windows. Without sticky keys turned on, you would have to hold down both keys at the same time; with sticky keys turned on, you would press Super and then Tab to do the same.

Morda boste želeli lepljive tipke vklopiti, če težko pritisnete več tipk hkrati.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Vklopite Lepljive tipke.

 Hiter vklop in izklop lepljivih tipk

Under Enable by Keyboard, select Turn on accessibility features from the keyboard to turn sticky keys on and off from the keyboard. When this option is selected, you can press Shift five times in a row to enable or disable sticky keys.

You can also turn sticky keys on and off by clicking the accessibility icon on the top bar and selecting Sticky Keys. The accessibility icon is visible when one or more settings have been enabled from the Universal Access panel.

V primeru da pritisnete dve tipki hkrati, lahko lepljive tipke začasno izklopite, kar vam omogoča vnos tipkovne bližnjice na običajen način.

For example, if you have sticky keys turned on but press Super and Tab simultaneously, sticky keys would not wait for you to press another key if you had this option turned on. It would wait if you only pressed one key, however. This is useful if you are able to press some keyboard shortcuts simultaneously (for example, keys that are close together), but not others.

Za omogočitev tega izberite Onemogoči, če sta dve tipki pritisnjeni skupaj.

Računalnik lahko proizvede zvok piska, ko začnete vnašati tipkovno bližnjico z vklopljenimi lepljivimi tipkami. To je uporabno, če želite vedeti ali lepljive tipke pričakujejo vnos tipkovne bližnjice in bodo naslednji pritiski tipk obravnavani kot del bližnjice. Za omogočitev tega izberite Zapiskaj, ko je pritisnjena spremenilna tipka.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/disk-capacity.page0000644000373100047300000000570012157071013025116 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com S Preučevalnikom porabe diska ali Nadzornikom sistema lahko preverite razpoložljiv prostor in zmogljivost. Preverjanje koliko prostora na disku je ostalo

Količino prostega prostora na disku lahko preverite s pomočjo programov Preučevalnik porabe diska ali Nadzornik sistema.

Preveri s Preučevalnikom porabe diska

Da s programom Preučevalnik porabe diska preverite prazen prostor in velikost diska:

Odprite program Diskovna orodja iz pregleda Dejavnosti. Okno programa bo prikazalo Celotno zmogljivost datotečnega sistema in Celotno porabo datotečnega sistema.

Kliknite na enega od gumbov orodne vrstice za izbiro Pregleda domače mape, Pregleda datotečnega sistema, Pregleda mape ali Pregelda oddaljene mape.

Podatki so prikazani glede na Mapo, Uporabo, Velikost in Vsebino. Več podrobnosti lahko vidite v Preučevalniku uporabe diska.

Preveri s programom Nadzornik sistema

Da bi preverili količino prostora na disku, ki je na voljo in velikost diska s programom Nadzornik sistema:

Odprite program Nadzornik sistema iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite zavihek Datotečni sistemi za ogled razdelkov sistema in porabo diska. Podatki so prikazani v Skupaj, Razpoložljivo, Na voljo in Uporabljeno.
Kaj storiti, če je disk prepoln?

V primeru da je disk prepoln:

Izbrišite datoteke, ki niso pomembne ali jih ne boste več uporabljali.

Naredite varnostne kopije pomembnih datotek, ki jih nekaj časa ne boste potrebovali, ter jih izbrišite s trdega diska.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-key-super.page0000644000373100047300000000401412157071013026110 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com The Super key opens the activities overview. You can usually find it next to the Alt key on your keyboard. What is the <key>Super</key> key?

When you press the Super key, the activities overview is displayed. This key can usually be found on the bottom-left of your keyboard, next to the Alt key, and usually has a Windows logo on it. It is sometimes called the Windows key or system key.

If you have an Apple keyboard, you will have a ⌘ (Command) key instead of the Windows key.

Need to add info on changing the keybinding using the new preferences windows.

Za spremembo tipke, ki se uporablja za prikaz pregleda dejavnosti:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tipkovnica.

Kliknite na zavihek Bližnjice.

Izberite Sistem na levi strani okna in Pokaži pregled dejavnosti na desni.

Kliknite na definicijo trenutne bližnjice skrajno desno.

Držite želeno kombinacijo tipk.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/prefs.page0000644000373100047300000000255412157071013023514 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitve Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Tipkovnica, miška, zaslon, jeziki, uporabniški računi … Uporabniške in sistemske nastavitve shaunm

Add an "Applications" guide, with links to net-default-browser, net-default-email, files-autorun, and files-open#default. Add pages for "Calendar", "Music", "Video", and "Photos". Explain how these are different than options in files-autorun. Link between pages. Add notes to files-open-#default about how you can use these options to quick set for a group of content types.

Note Removable Media was moved into System Info for 3.4. This might have involved a reorg of the options. Double-check everything before writing for 3.4.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-overview.page0000644000373100047300000000200712157071013025341 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namizje Uvod, tipkovne bližnjice, koledar, obvestila ... Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Namizje, programi in okna
Namizje
Programi in okna
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net.page0000644000373100047300000000213512157071013023156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Brezžično, žično, težave s povezavo, spletno brskanje, računi e-pošte ... Omreženje, splet, pošta in klepet usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-windows-lost.page0000644000373100047300000000426312157071013026152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite pregled dejavnosti ali druge delovne površine. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iskanje izgubljenega okna

Okno na drugi delovni površini ali okno skrito za drugim okno lahko enostavno najdete s pregledom dejavnosti:

Open the activities overview. If the missing window is on the current workspace, it will be shown here in thumbnail. Simply click the thumbnail to redisplay the window, or

Click different workspaces in the workspace selector at the right-hand side of the screen to try to find your window, or

Right-click the application in the dash and its open windows will be listed. Click the window in the list to switch to it.

Uporaba preklopnika oken:

Press SuperTab to display the window switcher. Continue to hold down the Super key and press Tab to cycle through the open windows, or ShiftTab to cycle backwards.

If an application has multiple open windows, hold down Super and press ` (or the key above Tab) to step through them.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/wacom.page0000644000373100047300000000120312157071013023471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Map a monitor, Configure the stylus, Use the tablet left handed… Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Grafična tablica Wacom usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/help-mailing-list.page0000644000373100047300000000246212157071013025712 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zahtevajte podporo preko e-pošte. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptiste.millemathias@gmail.com Dopisni seznam

Dopisni seznami so razprave osnovane na e-pošti. Na dopisnih seznamih GNOME lahko vprašate za podporo. Skoraj vsak program GNOME ima svoj dopisni seznam. Celoten seznam dopisnih seznamov je na .

Morda se morate na dopisnem seznamu registrirati preden lahko pošljete e-pošto nanj.

Privzeti jezik na dopisnih seznamih je angleščina. Za druge jezike obstajajo uporabniški dopisni seznami. Na primer gnome-de za nemško govoreče uporabnike ali gnome-cl-list za vse stvari povezane s Čilem.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/media.page0000644000373100047300000000304212157071013023445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Digitalni fotoaparati, iPodi, urejanje fotografij, predvajanje videov … Zvok, video in slike
Zvok Zvok Zvok Glasnost, zvočniki in slušalke, mikrofoni … Osnovni zvok
Glasba in predvajalniki Glasba in prenosni predvajalniki zvoka
Fotografije Fotografije in digitalni fotoaparati
Video posnetki Videoposnetki in video kamere
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/disk-check.page0000644000373100047300000000530212157071013024374 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Svoj disk lahko preizkusite za težave in se prepričate, da je zdrav. Preverjanje trdega diska za težave.
Preverjanje trdega diska

Trdi diski imajo vgrajeno orodje za preverjanje zdrava SMART, ki stalno preverja za morebitne težave diska. SMART vas tudi opozori, če je disk pred odpovedjo in vam pomaga pri izogibanju izgube pomembnih podatkov.

Čeprav se SMART izvaja samodejno, lahko zdravje diska preverite tudi s programom Diski:

Preverite zdravje diska s programom Diski

Odprite program Diskovna orodja iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite disk, ki ga želite preveriti, s seznama Naprave shrambe. Podatki in stanje diska se bosta pojavila pod Pogon.

Stanje SMART bi moralo reči "Disk deluje brezhibno".

Kliknite na gumb Podatki SMART za ogled več podatkov o pogonu ali za izvajanje preizkusov.
Kaj storiti, če disk ne deluje brezhibno?

Tudi če Stanje SMART nakazuje, da disk ni zdrav, vam morda ni treba skrbeti. Vseeno je boljše biti pripravljen z varnostno kopijo za preprečitev izgube podatkov.

V primeru da stanje pravi "Pre-fail" je disk v razumno dobrem stanju, vendar so bili zaznani znaki obrabe, kar pomeni, da se bo lahko kmalu pokvaril. V primeru da je vaš trdi disk (ali računalnik) star nekaj let, boste to sporočilo verjetno videli vsaj na nekaj preverjanjih stanja. Redno ustvarjajte varnostne kopije pomembnih datotek in občasno preverite ali se stanje diska slabša.

V primeru da se stanje poslabša, odpeljite računalnik/trdi disk k profesionalcu za nadaljnjo diagnozo in popravilo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/look-resolution.page0000644000373100047300000000636012157071013025541 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sprememba ločljivosti zaslona in njegove usmerjenosti (vrtenje). Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba velikosti ali vrtenja zaslona

S spremembo ločljivosti zaslona lahko spremenite kako velike (ali kako podrobno) so videti stvari na zaslonu. V katero smer je zaslon usmerjen (na primer, če imate vrteči se zaslon) lahko spremenite s spremembo vrtenja.

shaunm

Link display-2monitors in step 3 when non-stub.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Zasloni.

If you have multiple displays and they are not mirrored, you can have different settings on each display. Select a display in the preview area.

Izberite svoje želeno ločljivost in vrtenje.

Kliknite Uveljavi. Nova nastavitev bo pred povrnitvijo nazaj uporabljena 30 sekund. Na ta način bodo v primeru da z novi nastavitvami nič ne vidite, stare nastavitve samodejno obnovljene. Če ste z novimi nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Obdrži to nastavitev.

Ko uporabljate drug zaslon, kot je na primer projektor, bi moral biti samodejno zaznan, zato lahko spremenite njegove nastavitve na enak način kot za običajen zaslon. V primeru da se to ne zgodi, kliknite na gumb Zaznava zaslonov.
Ločljivost

Ločljivost je število točk (pik na zaslonu) v vsaki smeri, ki jih je mogoče prikazati. Vsaka ločljivost ima razmerje velikosti, razmerje med širino in višino. Široki zaslonu uporabljajo razmerje velikosti 16:9, običajni zasloni pa uporabljajo 4:3. Če uporabite ločljivost, ki se ne ujema z razmerjem velikosti vašega zaslona, se bodo na zaslonu pojavile črne proge za izognitev popačenju.

Želeno ločljivost lahko izberete iz možnosti v spustnem meniju Ločljivosti. V primeru da izberete napačno ločljivost za svoj zaslon, je lahko videti meglen ali točkast.

Vrtenje

On some laptops, you can physically rotate the screen in many directions. It is useful to be able to change the display rotation. You can choose the rotation you want for your display from the Rotation drop-down list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-info.page0000644000373100047300000000436112157071013025325 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Oglejte si ime, mest, datum spremembe ali vrsto dokumenta. Iskanje podatkov o dokumentih Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to sort and search documents and collections. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to: - Explain how you can view metadata, and what metadata is typically stored. - Mention that this metadata is searched.

Ko je dokument ustvarjen, vsebuje metapodatke. Dokumenti za vsak dokument prikažejo naslednje metapodatke:

Naslov: ime dokumenta, ki ga je mogoče urejati,

Vir: pot mape, ki vsebuje dokument

datum spremembe,

Vnesite: vrsto datoteke dokumenta.

Za ogled lastnosti dokumenta:

Kliknite na gumb Izbor za preklop na način izbire.

Izberite dokument.

Kliknite gumb Lastnosti na desni strani vrstice gumbov.

Nekatere vrste dokumentov (na primer datoteke PDF) je mogoče zaščiti z geslom. Do metapodatkov ali vsebine teh datotek ne boste mogli dostopati.

Dokumenti trenutno ne ponujajo mehanizma dodajanja zasebnosti dokumentom. To lahko običajno naredite s programom s katerim ste ustvarili vsebino (na primer LibreOffice ali Adobe Acrobat).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-assignprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000330112157071013026530 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za spremembo te možnosti si oglejte NastavitveBarva. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako določiti profile napravam?

Odprite NastavitveBarva in kliknite napravo, kateri želite dodati profil.

S klikom na Dodaj profil lahko izberete obstoječi profil ali uvozite novo datoteko.

Za vsako napravo lahko določite več profilov, vendar lahko le en profil nastavite kot privzeti profil. Privzeti profil se uporablja, ko ni na voljo dodatnih podatkov, ki omogočajo samodejen izbor profila. Primer te samodejne izbire je, če je bil en profil ustvarjen za bleščeč in drug za običajen papir.

Profil lahko naredite privzet tako da ga izberete z izbirnim gumbom.

Če je povezana strojna oprema umerjanja, bo gumb Umeri ... ustvaril nov profil.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-terminology.page0000644000373100047300000001160612157071013026050 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pregled izrazov, ki se uporabljajo za opis različnih delov namizja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dejavnosti, pregledna plošča, vrhnja vrstica ... Kaj so? Pregled dejavnosti

The activities overview is the screen that is displayed when you click Activities at the top left of the screen.

The activities overview is the screen that is displayed when you select Activities Overview in the Applications menu at the top left of the screen.

 Applications menu

You can find the Applications menu at the at the top left of the screen. It gives you access to applications organized into categories. The activities overview is available by selecting the Activities Overview item from the menu.

 Super-Tab window switcher

When you hold down the Super key and then press Tab, a window switcher appears. This shows the icons of the applications you have currently open.

 Pregledna plošča

Pregledna plošča je seznam vaših priljubljenih programov, ki je prikazan na levi strani pregleda dejavnosti. Programi, ki se trenutno izvajajo, so tudi prikazani tukaj . Pregledna plošča se včasih imenuje sidrišče.

 Vroči kot

Vroči kot je kot v zgornjem delu zaslona. Ko kazalec premaknete v ta kot, se odpre pregled dejavnosti.

 Zakleni zaslon

The lock screen displays an image on the screen while your computer is locked. It provides useful information about what has been happening while you have been away, and allows you to control media playback without having to unlock.

 Obvestila

Notifications are messages that pop up at the bottom of the screen, telling you that something just happened. For example, when someone chatting with you sends a message, a notification will pop up to tell you. If you don't want to deal with a message right now, it is hidden in your message tray. Move your mouse to the bottom-right corner (or press SuperM) to see your message tray.

 Places menu

The places menu is opened when you click Places on the top bar. It gives you quick access to important folders, for example Downloads or Pictures.

 Nastavitve

V nastavitvah lahko spremenite različne možnosti. Podobne so Nadzorni plošči v sistemu Windows ali orodju System Preferences v Mac OS. Za dostop do njih kliknite svoje ime desno zgoraj v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

 Vrhnja vrstica

Vrhnja vrstica je vrstica, ki je na skrajnem vrhu zaslona. Na enem koncu vrhnje vrstice je gumb Dejavnosti, na drugem koncu pa je vaše ime.

The top bar is the bar that runs along the very top of the screen. The Applications menu is on one end of the top bar and your username is on the other.

 Delovna površina

Okna lahko postavite na različne delovne površine. So priročen način združevanja in ločevanja oken.

 Izbirnik delovnih površin

Izbrnik delovnih površin je seznam delovnih površin, ki je prikazan na desni strani pogleda Okna v pregledu dejavnosti.

 Window list

The window list is the bar at the very bottom of the screen, which shows buttons for all your open windows.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-hidden.page0000644000373100047300000000400112157071013026234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Odprite Nastavitve omrežja in se povežite z brezžičnim omrežjem Drugo. Povezava s skritim brezžičnim omrežjem

Brezžično omrežje je mogoče nastaviti tako da je "skrito". To pomeni, da ne bo prikazano na seznamu omrežij, ki je prikazano, ko kliknete na meni omrežja na vrhnji vrstici (ali na seznamu brezžičnih omrežij na kateremukoli drugem računalniku). Za povezavo s skritim brezžičnim omrežjem:

Kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve omrežja.

Izberite Brezžično s seznama na levi.

Izberite Drugo iz spustnega seznama Ime omrežja.

V oknu, ki se pojavi, vnesite ime omrežja, izberite vrsto brezžične varnosti in kliknite Poveži se.

Morda boste morali preveriti nastavitve brezžične postaje/usmerjevalnika za preverjanje imena omrežja. Včasih se imenuje BSSID in je videti približno takole: 02:00:01:02:03:04.

Preverite tudi varnostne nastavitve brezžične postaje. Iščite izraze kot sta WEP in WPA.

Morda mislite, da bo skritje vašega brezžičnega omrežja izboljšalo varnost, saj bo ljudem, ki zanj ne vedo, preprečilo povezovanje. To ni res, saj je vaše omrežje težje najti, vendar ga je še vedno mogoče zaznati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-othersedit.page0000644000373100047300000000477012157071013025335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com V možnostih omrežne povezave morate odstraniti oznako Na voljo vsem uporabnikom. Drugi uporabniki ne morejo urejati omrežnih povezav shaunm

I know there were polkit policy changes. Not sure if this is 100% on the money for 3.2. Double-check when possible

V primeru da urejate omrežno povezavo, drugi uporabniki na računalniku pa ne morejo nastaviti povezave, da je na voljo za vse uporabnike. To pomeni, da se lahko vsi na računalniku povežejo s to povezavo, nastavitve pa lahko spremenijo le uporabniki s skrbniškimi pravicami.

Vzrok za to je, da nastavitve vplivajo na vse uporabnike, zato jih lahko spreminjajo le skrbniki.

V primeru da si drugi uporabniki želijo spremeniti povezavo, jo nastavite tako, da ni na voljo za vse na računalniku. Na ta način bodo lahko vsi upravljali svoje nastavitve povezave namesto da bi se zanašali na skupne, sistemske nastavitve povezave.

Prepričajte se, da si povezave ne delite več

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite Žično ali Brezžično s seznama na levi, odvisno od povezave, ki jo želite spremeniti.

Iz spustnega seznama Ime omrežja izberite povezavo, za katero želite, da jo lahko urejajo vsi. Nato kliknite Možnosti.

Za spremembo povezave boste morali vnesti skrbniško geslo, saj lahko to storijo le skrbniki.

Izberite Na voljo vsem uporabnikom in kliknite Shrani. Sedaj bodo lahko drugi uporabniki upravljali povezavo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/clock-calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000502512157071014025234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prikaz sestankov v koledarju na vrhu zaslona. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sestanki v koledarju

To zahteva namestitev programa Evolution.

Večina distribucij vsebuje Evolution privzeto nameščen. Če vaša tega nima, ga boste morda morali namestiti z upravljalnikom paketov svoje distribucije.

Za ogled sestankov:

Click on the clock on the top bar.

Kliknite na datum za katerega želite videti svoej sestanke na Koledarju.

Obstoječi sestanki bodo bili prikazani na desni. Ko boste sestanke dodali v Evolution, se bodo pojavili v urinem seznamu sestankov.

Ura, koledar in sestanki

Ura, koledar in sestanki

Za hiter dostop do polnega koledarja Evolution kliknite na uro in kliknite na Odpri koledar.

To bo delovalo le, če imate obstoječ račun Evolution. V nasprotnem primeru se bo pojavilo okno s koraki za dodajanje vašega prvega računa.

 Natalia Ruz

Should have some information or link to "how to add a mail account to Evolution", and possibly an image (but maybe a screenshot is too big).

 mdhill

Link to app-evolution-setup.page.stub.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-why.page0000644000373100047300000000234512157071014024446 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kaj, zakaj, kje in kako varnostnih kopij. Varnostne kopije Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ustvarjanje varnostne kopije pomembnih datotek

Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij vaših datotek pomeni ustvarjanje kopije vaših datotek. To je narejeno za primer, če izvirne datoteke postanejo neuporabne zaradi izgube ali okvare. Te kopije lahko uporabite za obnovitev izvirnih podatkov v primeru izgube. Kopije shranite na drugo napravo kot izvorne datoteke. Uporabite lahko na primer pogon USB, zunanji trdi disk, CD/DVD ali oddaljen strežnik.

Najboljši način ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij je redno, oddaljeno shranjeno in (če je le mogoče) šifrirano.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/privacy-history-recent-off.page0000644000373100047300000000262212157071014027574 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Stop your computer from tracking your recently-used files. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Turn off file history tracking

Tracking recently-used files and folders can make it easier to find items that you have been working on, but you may wish to keep these items private. To turn off the file history tracking features of your desktop:

Kliknite svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici.

Select SettingsPrivacy Usage & History.

Set the Recently Used slider to Off.

To re-enable this feature, set the Recently Used slider to On.

This setting will not affect how your web browser stores information about the web sites you visit.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-layouts.page0000644000373100047300000001130212157071014025663 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Juanjo Marín juanj.marin@juntadeandalucia.es Add keyboard layouts and switch between them. Use alternative keyboard layouts

Keyboards come in hundreds of different layouts for different languages. Even for a single language, there are often multiple keyboard layouts, such as the Dvorak layout for English. You can make your keyboard behave like a keyboard with a different layout, regardless of the letters and symbols printed on the keys. This is useful if you often switch between multiple languages.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Področje in jezik.

Kliknite gumb +, izberite razporeditev in kliknite Dodaj.

You can preview an image of any layout by selecting it in the list and clicking preview

Certain languages offer some extra configuration options. You can identify those languages because they have an icon preview depicted. If you want to access these extra parameters, select the language from the Input Source list and a new preview button will give you access to the extra settings.

When you use multiple layouts, you can choose to have all windows use the same layout or to set a different layout for each window. Using a different layout for each window is useful, for example, if you're writing an article in another language in a word processor window. Your keyboard selection will be remembered for each window as you switch between windows. Press the Options button to select how you want to manage multiple layouts.

The top bar will display a short identifier for the current layout, such as en for the standard English layout. Click the layout indicator and select the layout you want to use from the menu. If the selected language has any extra settings, they will be shown below the list of available layouts. This gives you a quick overview of your settings. You can also open an image with the current keyboard layout for reference.

The fastest way to change to another layout is by using the Input Source Keyboard Shortcuts. These shortcuts open the Input Source chooser where you can move forward and backward. By default, you can switch to the next input source with SuperSpace and to the previous one with ShiftSuper Space. You can change these shortcuts in the Keyboard settings.

shaunm

We're totally copping out on the custom options. That dialog is a monster, and needs a reference. Note that the options in there are dynamic from the X server. We might not get a definitive reference of everything ever, but let's do our best. Make a separate page. Don't clutter this page with that crap.

Also, we should identify common uses of those options and create task pages for them.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-bouncekeys.page0000644000373100047300000000427012157071014025313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prezri hitro ponavljajoče se pritiske na isto tipko. Vklop odskočnih tipk

Vklopite odskočne tipke za prezrtje pritiskov tipke, ki se hitro ponavljajo. Možnost je koristna za uporabnike, ki imajo težave s tresavico rok, zaradi katere je posamezna tipka pogosto pritisnjena večkrat zaporedno.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Vklopite Odskočne tipke

 Hiter vklop in izklop odskočnih tipk

You can turn bounce keys on and off by clicking the accessibility icon on the top bar and selecting Bounce Keys. The accessibility icon is visible when one or more settings have been enabled from the Universal Access panel.

Uporabite drsnik Zamik sprejema za spremembo kako dolgo odskočne tipke čakajo preden zaznajo naslednji pritisk tipke potem, ko ste tipko enkrat že pritisnili. Izberite Zapiskaj, ko je tipka zavrnjena, če želite, da računalnik predvaja zvok vsakič, ko prezre pritisk tipke, ker se je zgodil prehitro ali prepozno po predhodnem pritisku tipke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/privacy-screen-lock.page0000644000373100047300000000427712157071014026262 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prevent other people from using your desktop when you go away from your computer. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com 2013 Automatically lock your screen

When you leave your computer, you should lock the screen to prevent other people from using your desktop and accessing your files. If you sometimes forget to lock your screen, you may wish to have your computer's screen lock automatically after a set period of time. This will help to secure your computer when you aren't using it.

When your screen is locked, your applications and system processes will continue to run, but you will need to enter your password to begin using them again.

 To set the length of time before your screen locks automatically:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Select PrivacyScreen Lock.

Make sure Automatic Screen Lock is switched on, then select a length of time from the drop-down list.

When your screen is locked, and you want to unlock it, press Esc, or swipe up from the bottom of your screen with your mouse. Then enter your password, and press Enter or click Unlock.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-nowireless.page0000644000373100047300000000402512157071014025715 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatere brezžične naprave imajo težave z upravljanjem, ko je vaš računalnik poslan v stanje pripravljenosti in se ne povrne pravilno. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ko računalnik povrnem iz stanja pripravljenosti, nimam brezžičnega omrežja

V primeru da ste svoj računalnik poslali v stanje pripravljenosti ali mirovanje, se lahko zgodi, da ob povrnitvi brezžična internetna povezava ne deluje. To se zgodi, ko gonilniki brezžične naprave določenih zmožnosti varčevanja z energijo ne podpirajo popolnoma. Posledično se običajno brezžična povezava po zbujanju računalnika ne vklopi.

Izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico:

Kliknite svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite zavihek Brezžično.

Izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico

Če brezžično omrežje še vedno ne deluje vklopit in izklopite Letalski način

V primeru da to ne deluje, bi moral ponoven zagon vašega računalnika brezžično omrežje ponovno spraviti v delovanje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/shell-introduction.page0000644000373100047300000002531312157071014026222 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Viden uvod v vašo namizje, vrhnjo vrstico in pregled dejavnosti. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uvod v GNOME

GNOME 3 vsebuje popolnoma nov uporabniški vmesnik, ki je zasnovan, da vam ni v napoto, zmanjša motnje in vam pomaga narediti stvari. Ko se prvič prijavite, boste videli prazno namizje in vrhnjo vrstico.

Vrhnja vrstica lupine GNOME

Vrhnja vrstica lupine GNOME

Vrhnja vrstica zagotavlja dostop do oken in programov, koledarja in sestankov in lastnosti sistema kot so zvok, omrežje in napajanje. Pod svojim imenom v vrhnji vrstici lahko nastavite svojo razpoložljivost, spremenite svoj profil ali nastavitve, se odjavite ali preklopite uporabnike ali izklopite računalnik.

Pregled dejavnosti

Gumb dejavnosti

Gumb dejavnosti

To access your windows and applications, click the Activities button, or just move your mouse pointer to the top-left hot corner. You can also press the Super key on your keyboard. You can see your windows and applications in the overview. You can also just start typing to search your applications, files, and folders.

To access your windows and applications, click the Applications menu at the top left of the screen and select the Activities Overview item. You can also press the Super key to see your windows and applications in the Activities overview. Just start typing to search your applications, files, and folders.

Pregledna plošča

Na levi strani pregleda boste našli pregledno ploščo. Pregeldna plošča vam prikaže vaše priljubljene in izvajajoče se programe. Kliknite na katerokoli ikono v pregledni plošči za odprtje tega programa. V primeru da se program že izvaja, bo klik na ikono priklical najbolj nedavno uporabljen program. Ikono lahko tudi povlečete v pregled ali katerokoli delovno površino na desni.

Desen klik na ikono prikaže meni, ki vam omogoča izbiro kateregakoi okna v izvajajočem se programu ali odprtje novega okna. Za odprtje novega okna lahko tudi kliknete na ikono medtem ko držite tipko Ctrl.

Ko vstopite v pregled, boste na začetku na pregledu dejavnosti. To vam pokaže žive sličice vseh oken na trenutni delovni površini. Kliknite na katerokoli okno za osredotočitev na to okno in končanje pregleda. Za približanje katerekoli sličice okna lahko uporabite drsni kolešček na miški.

Click the grid button at the bottom of the dash to display the applications overview. This shows you all the applications installed on your computer. Click any application to run it, or drag an application to the overview or onto a workspace thumbnail. You can also drag an application onto the dash to make it a favorite. Your favorite applications stay in the dash even when they're not running, so you can access them quickly.

Learn more about starting applications.

Learn more about windows and workspaces.

Ura, koledar in sestanki

Ura, koledar in sestanki

Ura, koledar in sestanki

Click the clock on the top bar to see the current date, a month-by-month calendar, and a list of your upcoming appointments. You can also access the date and time settings and open your full Evolution calendar directly from the menu.

Naučite se več o koledarju in sestankih.
Vi in vaš računalnik

Uporabniški meni

Uporabniški meni

Za upravljanje svojega profila in računalnika kliknite na svoje ime v zgornjem desnem kotu.

Svojo razpoložljivost lahko nastavite neposredno iz menija. Ko uporabljate program hipnega sporočanja kot je Empathy, bo to nastavilo stanje, ki ga bodo lahko videli vaši stiki.

shaunm

These are separate now. Write another blurb about "Notifications". I'm also dropping shell-session-status UNTIL the docs for this get cleared up. It was orphaned and incorrect.

Meni vam tudi omogoča urejanje svojih osebnih podatkov in spreminjanje nastavitev sistema.

Ko svoj računalnik zapustite, lahko zaklenete svoj zaslon in s tem drugim ljudem preprečite njihovo uporabo. Uporabnike lahko hitro preklopite brez popolne odjave in omogočite dostop do računalnika nekomu drugemu. Iz menija lahko računalnik tudi izklopite ali date v stanje pripravljenosti.

Naučite se več o preklapljanju uporabnikov, odjavi in izklopu računalnika.
Zakleni zaslon

Zakleni zaslon

When you lock your screen, or it locks automatically, the lock screen is displayed. In addition to protecting your desktop while you're away from your computer, the lock screen displays the date, time, and your name as the logged-in user. It also shows information about your battery and network status, and allows you to control media playback.

Izvejte več o zaklepanju zaslona.
Vrstica sporočanja

Message tray

The message tray can be brought into view by pushing your mouse pointer against the bottom of the screen or by pressing SuperM. This is where your notifications are stored until you are ready to view them.

Naučite se več o obvestilih in vrstici sporočanja.
Window List

GNOME features a different approach to switching windows than a permanently visible window list found in other desktop environments. This lets you focus on the task at hand without distractions.

Learn more about switching windows.

Window List

The window list at the bottom of the screen provides access to all your open windows and applications and lets you quickly minimize and restore them.

At the right-hand side of the window list, GNOME displays a short identifier for the current worskpace, such as 1 for the first (top) workspace. In addition, the identifier also displays the total number of available workspaces. To switch to a different workspace, you can click the identifier and select the workspace you want to use from the menu.

If an application or a system component wants to get your attention, it will display a blue icon at the right-hand side of the window list. Clicking the blue icon shows the message tray.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/video-sending.page0000644000373100047300000000517712157071014025135 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverijo, da imajo nameščene prave kodeke. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Drugi ljudje ne morejo predvajati mojih videoposnetkov

V primeru, da ste naredili video na svojem računalniku z Linuxom in ga poslali nekomu, ki uporablja Windows ali Mac OS, bo morda imel težave z njegovim predvajanjem.

Da bi lahko predvajala vaš videoposnetek, mora imeti oseba, ki ste ji poslali videoposnetek, nameščene prave kodeke. Kodek je majhen program, ki ve, kako video prikazati na zaslonu. Obstaja veliko različnih vrst videa in vsaka za predvajanje zahteva svoj kodek.

Odprite program Datoteke iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Desno kliknite na video datoteko in izberite Lastnosti.

Pojdite v zavihek Zvok/Video in preverite kateri kodek je naveden pod Video.

Osebo s težavami s predvajanjem vprašajte, če ima nameščen pravi kodek. Morda jim bo pomagalo iskanje po spletu z imenom kodeka in njihovega video programa. Na primer, če vaš video uporablja vrsto Theora in imate prijatelja, ki uporablja Windows Media Player in si ga želite ogledati, iščite "theora windows media player". Pogosto boste lahko pravi kodek prejeli brezplačno, če še ni nameščen.

Če ne morete najti pravega kodeka, poskusite predvajalnik VLC. Deluje na Windows, Mac OS in Linuxu in podpira veliko različnih vrst videa. Če tudi to ne deluje, poskusite svoj videoposnetek pretvoriti v drugo vrsto. To lahko stori večina urejevalnikov videa, na voljo pa so tudi namenski programi za pretvarjanje videa. Preverite namestilnik programov za ogled kaj je na voljo.

Obstaja še nekaj drugih težav, ki lahko nekomu preprečijo predvajanje vašega videoposnetka. Video je lahko bil ob pošiljanju poškodovan (včasih velike datoteke niso pravilno kopirane), lahko imajo težave s svojim programom za predvajanje videa ali pa video ni bil pravilno ustvarjen (ob shranjevanju videoposnetka je morda prišlo do nekaj napak).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-mousekeys.page0000644000373100047300000000645212157071014025551 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev miškinih tipk za nadzor miške s tipkovnico. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Klik in premikanje miškinega kazalca s številsko tipkovnico

V primeru da imate težave z uporabo miške ali druge kazalne naprave, lahko miškin kazalec nadzirate s številsko tipkovnico. Ta zmožnost se imenuje miškine tipke.

Pritisnite CtrlAltTab za dajanje žarišča vrhnji vrstici.

S tipkama levih in desnih puščic izberitemeni splošnega dostopa in pritisnite Enter.

Uporabite smerni tipki navzgor in navzdol za izbiro Miškine tipke in pritisnite Enter.

Prepričajte se, da je Num Lock izklopljen. Sedaj boste lahko miškin kazalec premikali s številsko tipkovnico.

Ta navodila zagotavljajo najkrajši način za omogočanje miškinih tipk s tipkovnico. Izberite Nastavitve splošnega dostopa za ogled več možnosti dostopnosti.

Številska tipkovnica je zbirka številskih gumbov na tipkovnici, ki so običajno urejene v kvadratno mrežo. V primeru da imate tipkovnico brez številske tipkovnice (kot je na primer tipkovnica prenosnika), boste morda morali držati funkcijsko tipko (Fn) in kot številsko tipkovnico uporabiti določene druge tipke na svoji tipkovnici. V primeru da to možnost uporabljate na prenosniku, lahko kupite zunanje USB številčne tipkovnice.

Vsako število na številski tipkovnici ustreza določeni smeri. Pritisk na 8 bo kazalec premaknil navzgor in pritisk na 2 ga bo premaknil navzdol. Pritisnite 5 za klik z miško ali jo hitro pritisnite dvakrat za dvoklik.

Most keyboards have a special key which allows you to right-click, sometimes called the Menu key. Note, however, that this key responds to where your keyboard focus is, not where your mouse pointer is. See for information on how to right-click by holding down 5 or the left mouse button.

V primeru da želite številsko tipkovnico uporabiti za vnašanje medtem ko so miškine tipke omogočene, Num Lock vklopite. Ko je Num Lock vklopljen, miške ne morete nadzirati.

Običajne številske tipke v vrsti na vrhu tipkovnice miškinega kazalca ne bodo nadzorovale. Uporabite lahko samo tipke številske tipkovnice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-cursor-blink.page0000644000373100047300000000310112157071014026573 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev utripanja vstavitvene točke in nadzor hitrosti utripanja. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ali naj vrivnik tipkovnice utripa

Če kazalko tipkovnice težko vidite v besedilnem polju, lahko nastavite, da utripa, kar izboljša njeno vidljivost.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Tipkovnica in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Izberite Vrivnik utripa v besedilnih poljih.

Uporabite drsnik Hitrost za prilagoditev hitrosti utripanja vrivnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000554412157071014026450 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Povežite se na internet - brezžično. Povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem

V primeru da imate računalnik z omogočenim brezžičnim internetom, se lahko povežete z brezžičnim omrežjem v dometu za dostop do interneta, ogled souporabljenih datotek na internetu in tako naprej.

Kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in kliknite na ime omrežja s katerim se želite povezati.

Če ime vašega brezžičnega omrežja ni na seznamu, kliknite Več za ogled, če je omrežje dlje spodaj na seznamu. V primeru da omrežja še vedno ne vidite, ste morda izven dometa omrežja ali pa je omrežje skrito.

V primeru da je omrežje zaščiteno z geslom (šifrirni ključ), ob pozivu vnesite geslo in kliknite Poveži se.

Ključ je morda napisan pod brezžičnim usmernikom ali osnovno postajo, v navodilih za uporabo ali pa morate vprašati osebo, ki skrbi za brezžično omrežje.

Videz ikone omrežja se bo spremenil medtem ko se računalnik poskuša povezati z omrežjem.

V primeru uspešne povezave, se bo ikona spremenila v piko z loki nad njo. Več lokov nakazuje na močnejšo povezavo z omrežjem. Majhno število lokov nakazuje na šibko in morda ne preveč zanesljivo povezavo.

Če je povezava neuspešna, boste morda ponovno vprašani za geslo ali obveščeni, da je bila povezava prekinjena. To lahko povzroči več vzrokov - morda ste vnesli napačno geslo, brezžični signal je lahko prešibek ali pa ima morda vaša brezžična kartica težavo. Za več pomoči si oglejte .

Močnejša povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem ne pomeni nujno hitrejše internetne povezave ali višjih hitrosti prejemanja. Brezžična povezava vaš računalnik poveže z napravo, ki zagotavlja brezžično povezavo (kot je usmernik ali modem), vendar sta dve povezavi dejansko različni in bosta delovali pri različnih hitrostih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth-problem-connecting.page0000644000373100047300000000514712157071014030167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vmesnik je lahko izklopljen ali pa morda nimate gonilnikov ali pa je Bluetooth onemogočen ali blokiran. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ne morem se povezati s svojo napravo Bluetooth

Obstajajo številni vzroki zakaj svoje naprave Bluetooth (kot je telefon ali slušalke) ne morete povezati.

Povezava je blokirana ali ni zaupanja vredna

Nekatere naprave povezave Bluetooth privzeto blokirajo ali pa od vas zahtevajo spremembo nastavitve, ki omogoči vzpostavitev povezav. Prepričajte se, da je vaša povezava nastavljena za omogočanje povezav.

 Strojna oprema Bluetooth ni prepoznana

Vaše kartice Bluetooth morda računalnik ni prepoznal. To se lahko zgodi, ker gonilniki za kartico niso nameščeni. Nekatere kartice Bluetooth na Linuxu niso podprte, zato morda ne morete dobiti pravih gonilnikov za njih. V tem primeru boste verjetno morali dobiti drugo kartico Bluetooth.

 Vmesnik ni vklopljen

Prepričajte se, da je vaš vmesnik Bluetooth vklopljen. Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in preverite, da ni onemogočena.

Prepričajte se, da je vaša kartica Bluetooth vklopljena. Kliknite na ikono Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici in preverite, da ni onemogočen.

 Povezava naprave Bluetooth je izklopljena

Preverite, da je Bluetooth na napravi, s katero se poskušate povezati, vklopljen. Če se na primer poskušate povezati s telefonom, se prepričajte, da ni v letalskem načinu.

 Na vašem računalniku ni vmesnika Bluetooth

Večina računalnikov nima prilagodilnikov Bluetooth. V primeru da želite Bluetooth uporabiti lahko prilagodilnik kupite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard-key-menu.page0000644000373100047300000000460312157071014025723 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Juanjo Marin juanj.marin@juntadeandalucia.es Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com The Menu key launches a context menu with the keyboard rather than with a right-click.

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 What is the <key>Menu</key> key?

The Menu key, also known as the Application key, is a key found on some Windows-oriented keyboards. This key is usually on the bottom-right of the keyboard, next to the Ctrl key, but it can be placed in a different location by keyboard manufacturers. Its is usually depicted as a cursor hovering above a menu: Menu key icon.

Juanjo Marin

Clipart under public domain downloaded from http://www.clker.com/clipart-15445.html

The primary function of this key is to launch a context menu with the keyboard rather than by clicking the right mouse button: this is useful if mouse or a similar device is not available, or when the right mouse button is not present.

The Menu key is sometimes omitted in the interest of space, particularly on portable and laptop keyboards. In this case, some keyboards include a Menu function key that can be activated in combination with the Function (Fn) key.

The context menu is a menu that pops up when you right-click. The menu that you see, if any, is dependent on the context and function of the area that you right-clicked. When you use the Menu key, the context menu is shown for the area of the screen that your cursor is over at the point when the key is pressed.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-lost.page0000644000373100047300000000412012157071014024446 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sledit tem namigom, če ne morete najti datoteke, ki ste jo ustvarili ali prejeli. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iskanje izgubljene datoteke

V primeru da ste ustvarili ali prejeli datoteko, vendar je ne morete najti, sledite tem namigom.

V primeru da se ne spomnite, kam ste datoteko shranili. Če veste, kako ste jo preimenovali, lahko iščete po njenem imenu. Iskati se lahko naučite na .

V primeru da ste datoteko pravkar prejeli, jo je vaš spletni brskalnik morda samodejno shranil v skupno mapo. Preverite mapi Namizje in Prejeto v svoji domači mapi.

Morda ste datoteko izbrisali po nesreči. Ko datoteko izbrišete, se premakne v smeti, kjer ostane dokler smeti ročno ne izpraznite. Za navodila kako obnoviti izbrisano datoteko si oglejte .

Morda ste datoteko preimenovali na način, da je postala skrita. Datoteke, ki se začnejo z . ali končajo z ~, so v upravljalniku datotek skrite. V upravljalniku datotek kliknite gumb down v orodni vrstici upravljalnika datotek in izberite Pokaži skrite datoteke, da jih prikažete. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse.page0000644000373100047300000000243612157071014023525 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba miške z levico, hitrost in občutljivost, klikanje in drsanje po drsni ploščici … Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Miška shaunm

Maybe some topic grouping work.

Pogoste težave z miško Pogoste težave Pogoste težave
Namigi miške Namigi Namigi
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-find.page0000644000373100047300000000414112157071014025727 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Brezžično omrežje je lahko izklopljeno ali pokvarjeno ali pa je blizu preveč brezžičnih omrežij ali pa ste izven obsega. Svojega brezžičnega omrežja ne morem videti na seznamu

Obstajajo številni vzroki zakaj morda svojega brezžičnega omrežja ne boste videli na seznamu omrežij, ki se pojavi, ko kliknete na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici.

V primeru da na seznamu ni prikazano nobeno brezžično omrežje, je vaša brezžična morda izklopljena ali pa ne deluje pravilno. Prepričajte se, da je vklopljena.

V primeru da je v bližin veliko brezžičnih omrežij, omrežje, ki ga iščete, morda ne bo na prvi strani na seznamu. V tem primeru poglejte na dno seznama za puščico, ki kaže proti desni in naredite nad njo prehod z miško za prikaz preostalih brezžičnih omrežij.

Lahko ste izven obsega omrežja. Poskusite se premakniti bližje brezžični postaji/usmerjevalniku in si oglejte, če se omrežje čez nekaj časa pojavi na seznamu.

Posodabljanje seznama brezžičnih omrežij traja nekaj časa. V primeru da ste svoj računalnik pravkar vklopili ali ga premaknili na drugo mesto, počakajte trenutek in preverite, če se omrežje pojavi na seznamu.

Omrežje je lahko skrito. V tem primeru se morate povezati na drugačen način.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/backup-check.page0000644000373100047300000000316012157071014024710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite, da je bila vaša varnostna kopija uspešna. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Preverjanje varnostnih kopij

Potem ko ste ustvarili varnostne kopije svojih datotek, se prepričajte, da je bilo opravilo uspešno zaključeno. V nasprotnem primeru lahko izgubite pomembne podatke, saj lahko nekatere datoteke v varnostni kopiji manjkajo.

Ko uporabite upravljalnik datotek za premik ali kopiranje datotek, računalnik preveri, da so bili vsi podatki pravilno preneseni. Če prenašate podatke, ki so za vas zelo pomembni, je pametno dodatno preveriti, da so bili podatki pravilno preneseni.

Dodatno preverjanje lahko izvedete z ogledom kopiranih datotek in map na ciljnem mediju. S preverjanjem, da so prenesene datoteke in mape dejansko v varnostni kopiji, imate lahko dodatno zaupanje, da je opravilo uspelo.

V primeru da delate redne varnostne kopije velikih količin podatkov, boste morda ugotovili, da je lažje uporabiti namenski program za varnostne kopije kot je Déjà Dup. Takšen program je bolj zmogljiv in zanesljivejši kot kopiranje in lepljenje datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/accounts-provider-not-available.page0000644000373100047300000000232712157071014030557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kaj storiti, če ponudnik spletne storitve ni na seznamu? Zakaj moja vrsta zvoka ni na seznamu?

Podporo vaše priljubljene storitve mora nekdo razviti. Trenutno je podprtih je le nekaj vrst spletnih računov:

Google

Windows Live

Facebook

Twitter

Podpora za Yahoo bo dodana v bližnji prihodnosti.

Če vas zanima dodajanje podpore za druge storitve, stopite v stik z razvijalci preko sledilnika hroščev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-open.page0000644000373100047300000000604612157071014024437 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odprite datoteke s programom, ki ni privzet program za to vrsto datotek. Spremenite lahko tudi privzet program za odpiranje datotek. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Odpiranje datotek z drugimi programi

Ko v upravljalniku datotek dvokliknete na datoteko, bo odprta s privzetim programom za to vrsto datotek. Odprete jo lahko z drugim programom, na spletu poiščete programe ali nastavite privzeti program za vse datoteke iste vrste.

Za odprtje datoteke z ne-privzetim programom desno kliknite na datoteko in izberite program z vrha menija. Če želenega programa ne vidite, kliknite Odpri z drugim programom. Privzeto bo upravljalnik datotek prikazal le programe za katere ve, da lahko upravljajo z datoteko. Za iskanje med vsemi programi na računalniku kliknite Pokaži druge programe.

V primeru da še vedno ne morete najti želenega programa, lahko več programov najdete s klikom na Najdi več programov na spletu. Upravljalnik datotek bo na spletu poiskal pakete, ki vsebujejo programe, ki znajo upravljati datoteke te vrste.

Sprememba privzetega programa

Spremenite lahko privzet program, ki se uporablja za odpiranje datotek dane vrste. To vam dovoli odpiranje želenega programa, ko dvokliknete za odpiranje datotek. Morda želite, da se ob kliku na priljubljeno datoteko MP3 odpre vaš najljubši predvajalnik glasbe.

Izberite datoteko vrste, katere privzeti program želite spremeniti. Za spremembo programa, ki ga želite uporabiti za odprtje datotek MP3, izberite datoteko .mp3.

Desno kliknite na datoteko in izberite Lastnosti.

Izberite zavihek Odpri z.

Izberite program in kliknite Nastavi kot privzet. Privzeto upravljalnik datotek prikaže le programe, za katere ve, da lahko upravljajo z datoteko. Za ogled vseh programov na računalniku kliknite na Pokaži druge programe.

V primeru da Drugi programi vsebuje program, ki ga včasih želite uporabiti, vendar nočete, da je privzet, izberite program in kliknite Dodaj. To ga bo dodalo med Priporočene programe. Nato boste lahko program uporabili z desnim klikom na datoteko in izbiro s seznama.

To spremeni privzeti program ne le za izbrano datoteko ampak za vse datoteke iste vrste.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/prefs-language.page0000644000373100047300000000143612157071014025274 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Jezik, regija in oblike, razporeditve tipkovnice … Področje in jezik usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-hidden.page0000644000373100047300000000630412157071014024726 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Naredite datoteko nevidno, tako da je v upravljalniku datotek ni mogoče videti. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Skritje datoteke

Upravljalnik datotek GNOME vam daje zmožnost skritja ali odkritja datotek po svojih željah. Skrite datoteke so privzeto nevidne, saj v upravljalniku datotek niso prikazane. Vendar pa se še vedno nahajajo v mapi.

Za skritje datoteke jo preimenujte s . na začetku imena. Za skritje datoteke primer.txt jo preimenujte v .primer.txt.

Mape lahko skrijete na enak način kot datoteke. Mapo preimenujte in na začetek njenega imena dodajte ..
Prikaz vseh skritih datotek

Če želite videti vse skrite datoteke v mapi, pojdite v mapo in kliknite gumb navzdol v orodni vrstici in izberite Pokaži skrite datoteke ali pa pritisnite krmilkaH. Vse skrite datoteke bodo prikazane skupaj z datotekami, ki niso skrite.

To hide these files again, either click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files, or press CtrlH again.

Prikaz datoteke

To unhide a file, go to the folder containing the hidden file and click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files. Then, find the hidden file and rename it so that it doesn't have a . in front of its name. For example, to unhide a file called .example.txt, you should rename it to example.txt.

Once you have renamed the file, you can either click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files, or press CtrlH to hide any other hidden files again.

Privzeto bodo skrite datoteke prikazane le v trenutnem oknu dokler upravljalnika datotek ne zaprete. Za spremembo te nastavitve, da bodo skrite datoteke vedno prikazane v upravljalniku datotek, si oglejte .

Večina skritih datotek ima na začetku svojega imena .. Druge skrite datoteke imajo na koncu svojega imena ~. Te datoetke so datoteke varnostnih kopij. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-tracker.page0000644000373100047300000000304412157071014026023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Krajevni ali oddaljeni dokumenti se ne pojavijo. Mojih dokumentih ne morem videti Julita Inca

This assumes the reader knows how to packages. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to see local and remotely documents in case online account had been configured before.

 Michael Hill

Add links to Tracker docs, XDG paths.

Če se dokumenti ne prikažejo v Dokumentih, se morda Tracker ne izvaja ali ni pravilno nastavljen. Prepričajte se, da se program Tracker izvaja v vaši seji, privzeta nastavitev bi morala biti nastavljena na datoteke kazala v vaši domači mapi (ne-rekurzivno) in mape XDG (rekurzivno). Prepričajte se, da so datoteke, ki ste jih ustvarili za ta preizkus, v eni od teh poti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-booklet-duplex.page0000644000373100047300000000467212157071014027167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje prepognjenih knjižic (kot knjiga ali pamfletov) z uporabo običajnega papirja A4/velikosti pisma. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Tiskanje prepognjenih knjižic

Prepognjene knjižice (kot je majhna knjiga ali pamphlet) lahko ustvarite s tiskanjem strani dokumenta v posebnem vrstnem redu in spreminjanjem nekaj možnosti tiskanja.

Ta navodila so za tiskanje knjižnice iz dokumenta PDF.

V primeru da želite knjižico natisniti iz dokumenta LibreOffice, ga boste morali najprej izvoziti v PDF z izbiro DatotekaIzvozi kot PDF .... Število strani v vašem dokumentu mora biti večkratnik števila 4 (4, 8, 12, 16, ...). Morda boste morali dodati do 3 prazne strani.

Za tiskanje knjižice:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Pojdite v zavihek Splošno. V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vtipkajte števila strani v tem vrstnem redu (n je število celotnih strani in je večkratnik števila 4):

n, 1, 2, n-1, n-2, 3, 4, n-3, n-4, 5, 6, n-5, n-6, 7, 8, n-7, n-8, 9, 10, n-9, n-10, 11, 12, n-11…

Primeri:

4 stranska knjižica: vtipkajte 4,1,2,3

8 stranska knjižnica: vtipkajte 8,1,2,7,6,3,4,5

20 stranska knjižica: vtipkajte 20,1,2,19,18,3,4,17,16,5,6,15,14,7,8,13,12,9,10,11

Sedaj pojdite v zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

Pri možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-findip.page0000644000373100047300000000372112157071015024431 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Poznavanje vašega naslova IP vam lahko pomaga pri odpravljanju težav z omrežjem. Najdite svoj naslov IP

Poznavanje vašega naslova IP vam lahko pomaga pri odpravljanju težav z vašo internetno povezavo. Vaš računalnik ima dva naslova IP: naslov IP vašega računalnika na notranjem omrežju in naslov IP vašega računalnika na internetu.

Najdite svoj notranji (omrežni) naslov IP

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite Žično ali Brezžično s seznama na levi, odvisno od tega za katero omrežno povezavo želite najti naslov IP.

Vaš notranji naslov IP bo prikazan na seznamu podatkov.

 Najdite svoj zunanji, internetni naslov IP:

Obiščite whatismyipaddress.com.

Spletišče vam bo za vas prikazalo vaš zunanji naslov IP.

Odvisno od tega kako se vaš računalnik poveže z internetom, so lahko naslovi enaki.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/session-fingerprint.page0000644000373100047300000000734212157071015026407 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V sistem se lahko prijavite s podprtim bralnikom prstnih odtisov. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Prijava s prstnim odtisom

V primeru da ima vaš sistem podprt bralnik prstnih odtisov, lahko posnamete svoj prstni odtis in ga uporabite za prijavo. Za izvajanje teh korakov potrebujete skrbniške pravice.

Najprej posnemite prstni odtis, ki ga sistem lahko uporabi za vašo identifikacijo.

V primeru da je vaš prst presuh, boste morda imeli težave z zaznavanjem svojega prstnega odtisa. V primeru da se to zgodi ga rahlo navlažite, posušite s suho, nevlaknasto krpo in poskusite znova.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in kliknite na sliko poleg svojega imena in odprite okno Uporabniški računi.

Odklenite svoj račun z uporabo gumba Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu orodja Uporabniški računi.

Vnesite svoje geslo v prijavni poziv.

Izberite možnost Onemogočeno poleg Prijava s prstnim odtisom.

Izberite možnost za prstni odtis, ki ga želite registrirati. Izberete lahko desni kazalec, levi kazalec ali drug prst. Nato izberite Naprej.

Trikrat podrsajte z izbranim prstom z zmerno hitrostjo preko bralnika prstnih odtisov. Vsakič, ko bralnik prstnih odtisov pravilno prepozna vaš prstni odtis, se bo ustrezna slika roke spremenila v prstni odtis s kljukico. Po tretjem drsanju boste videli sporočilo Končano!.

Izberite Naprej. Videli boste potrditveno sporočilo, da je bil vaš prstni odtis uspešno shranjen. Izberite Zapri za končanje.

Sedaj preverite da vaša nova prijava s prstnim odtisom deluje. Tudi če imate registriran prstni odtis, se lahko še vedno prijavite s svojim geslom.

Save any open work, and then log out. Select your name in the upper right-hand corner and then select Log Out.

Pojavilo se bo potrditveno sporočilo. Izberite Odjavi za potrditev. Pojavi se prijavni zaslon.

At the login screen, select your name from the list. The password entry form will appear.

V 30 sekundah izberite gumb prstnega odtisa zgoraj in desno od svojega imena.

Gumb prstnih odtisov je označen s sliko roke. Če časomer poteče, bo gumb izginil in prijavili se boste lahko le z geslom. Če želite poskusiti ponovno, izberite gumb Prekliči in se vrnite ne predhodni korak.

Podrsajte z vpisanim prstom z zmerno hitrostjo preko čitalnika prstnih odtisov. Prijavljeni boste.

V primeru da ste v predhodnosti ustvarili prijavno zbirko ključev je zavarovana z vašim geslom. Za njen odklep vnesite svoje geslo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000054212157071015023342 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

To delo je objavljeno z dovoljenjem Priznanje avtorstva s Creative Commons in deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0 neprenosljivo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/documents-search.page0000644000373100047300000000303012157071015025631 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Najdite svoje dokumente po naslov ali, avtorju. Iskanje datotek Julita Inca

By the end of this page, the reader will be able to find their documents. This topic is about: - How search works - How you can manipulate search filters - Shortcut keys for searching

Za začetek iskanja v Dokumentih:

Pritisnite CtrlF.

Kliknite na ikono povečevalnega stekla.

Začnite s tipkanjem. Dokumenti se bodo ujemali z naslovom ali avtorji.

Rezultate iskanja je mogoče omejiti ali filtrirati s klikom na gumb navzdol in z izbiro različnih filtrov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/look-background.page0000644000373100047300000000523312157071015025455 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako nastaviti sliko, barvo ali preliv kot ozadje namizja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba ozadja namizja

Spremenite lahko sliko, ki se uporablja kot ozadje vašega namizja ali pa ga nastavite kot barvo ali preliv.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Ozadje.

Kliknite na sliko trenutnega ozadja namizja v središču.

Na vrhu so prikazane tri izbire:

Izberite Ozadja za uporabo enega od profesionalnih ozadij, ki je del GNOME. Nekatera ozadja so delno prozorna zato se skozi njih vidi barva ozadja. Za ta ozadja bo v spodnjem desnem kotu gumb izbirnika barv.

Select Pictures to use one of your own photos from your Pictures folder. Most photo management applications store photos there. If you would like to use an image that is not in your Pictures folder, either use Files by right-clicking on the image file and selecting Set as Wallpaper, or Image Viewer by opening the image file and selecting ImageSet as Desktop Background.

Izberite Barve za uporabo barve ali linearnega preliva.

Nastavitve so uveljavljene nemudoma.

Izberite sliko ali barvo. Nastavitve so takoj uveljavljene. Preklopite na prazno delovno površino za ogled celotnega namizja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/keyboard.page0000644000373100047300000000235312157071015024174 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razporeditve tipkovnice, utripanje vrivnka, dostopnost tipkovnice ... Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Tipkovnica Področje in jezik Splošni dostop Druge teme usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/music-player-ipodtransfer.page0000644000373100047300000000364612157071015027512 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Za kopiranje glasbe in varno odstranjevanje iPoda uporabite večpredstavnostni predvajalnik. Ko skladbe kopiram na svoj iPod, se tam ne pojavijo

Ko iPod vklopite na računalnik, se bo pojavil v vašemu predvajalniku glasbe in tudi v upravljalniku datotek (program Datoteke v pregledu Dejavnosti). Skladbe morate na iPod kopirati s predvajalnikom glasbe - če jih kopirate z upravljalnikom datotek, ne bo deloval, ker skladbe ne bodo na pravem mestu. iPodu imajo posebno mesto za shranjevanje datotek do katerih lahko predvajalnik glasbe dostopa, upravljalnik datotek pa ne.

Pred odklopom iPoda počakajte, da se kopiranje skladb konča. Pred odklopom iPoda se prepričajte, da izberete njegovo varno odstranitev. To bo zagotovilo, da so bile vse datoteke pravilno kopirane.

Eden od razlogov zakaj se skladbe morda na vašem iPodu ne pojavijo je, da glasbeni predvajalnik, ki ga uporabljate, ne podpira pretvarjanja skladb iz ene vrste zvoka v drugo. V primeru da kopirate skladbo, ki je shranjena v vrsto zvoka, ki je vaš iPod ne podpira (na primer datoteka Ogg Vorbis (.oga)), jo bo predvajalnik glasbe poskusil pretvoriti v vrsto, ki jo iPodi razumejo (kot je MP3). V primeru da ustrezen program za pretvarjanje (znan pod imenom kodek ali kodirnik) ni nameščen, predvajalnik glasbe ne bo mogel izvesti pretvorbe in zato glasbe ne bo kopiral. Ustrezen kodek poiščite v namestilniku programov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-whatisprofile.page0000644000373100047300000000226312157071015026370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barvni profil je enostavna datoteka, ki izrazi barvni prostor ali odziv naprave. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kaj je barvni profil?

Barvni profil je zbirka podatkov, ki karakterizira napravo kot je projektor ali barvni prostor kot je sRGB.

Večina barvnih profilov je v obliki ICC, majhni datoteki s pripono datoteke .ICC ali .ICM.

Barvne profile lahko vstavite v slike za določitev obsega game v podatke. To zagotovi, da uporabnik vidi isto barvo na različnih napravah.

Vsaka naprava, ki obdeluje barvo, bi morala imeti svoj profil ICC in ko je to doseženo ima sistem barvno upravljano delo od enega do drugega konca. V tem primeru ste lahko prepričani, da se barve ne izgubljajo ali spreminjajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-touchpad-click.page0000644000373100047300000001004512157071015026411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite, povlecite ali drsajte z uporabo udarjanja ali kretenj na drsni ploščici. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kliknice, povlecite ali drsajte z drsno ploščico

Z drsno ploščico lahko klikate, dvoklikate, vlečete in drsite brez posebnih gumbov strojne opreme.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

In the Touchpad section, check Tap to click.

The Touchpad section only appears if your system has a touchpad.

Za klik udarite po drsni ploščici

Za dvoklik udarite dvakrat

Za vlečenje predmeta dvakrat udarite, vendar po drugem udarcu svojega prsta na dvignite. Povlecite predmet, kamor ga žalite in nato dvignite svoj prst za spust.

V primeru da vaša drsna ploščica podpira udarce z več prsti, desno kliknite z udarjanjem z dvema prstoma hkrati. Sicer boste morali za desni klik uporabiti strojne gumbe. Oglejte si za način desnega klika brez desnega miškinega gumba.

V primeru da vaša drsna ploščica podpira udarce z več prsti, srednje kliknite z udarjanjem s tremi prsti hkrati.

Ko udarjate ali vlečete z več prsti, se prepričajte, da so prsti dovolj narazen. Če so prsti preveč blizu, bo vaš računalnik morda mislil, da je en prst.
Dvoprstno drsenje

Drsate lahko z drsno ploščico z uporabo dveh prstov.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

In the Touchpad section, check Two finger scroll.

When this is selected, tapping and dragging with one finger will work as normal, but if you drag two fingers across any part of the touchpad, it will scroll instead. If you also select Enable horizontal scrolling, you can move your fingers left and right to scroll horizontally. Be careful to space your fingers a bit apart. If your fingers are too close together, they just look like one big finger to your touchpad.

Drsenje z dvema prstoma morda ne bo delovalo na vseh drsnih ploščicah.
Vsebina se drži prstov

You can drag content as if sliding a physical piece of paper using the touchpad.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

In the Touchpad section, check Content sticks to fingers.

This feature is also known as Natural Scrolling or Reverse Scrolling.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000410112157071015024603 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranitev uporabnikov, ki ne uporabljajo več vašega računalnika. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izbris uporabniškega računa

Na svoj računalnik lahko dodate več uporabniških računov. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte . V primeru da nekdo vašega računalnika ne uporablja več, lahko račun tega uporabnika izbrišete.

Click your name on the top bar, then click the picture next to your name to open the Users window.

Kliknite Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo, da uveljavite spremembe. Da lahko izbrišete uporabniške račune, morate biti skrbnik.

Izberite uporabnika, ki ga želite izbrisati, in nato kliknite gumb -.

Vsak uporabnik ima svojo domačo mapo za svoje datoteke in nastavitve. Domačo mapo uporabnika lahko obdržite ali izbrišete. Kliknite Izbriši datoteke, če ste prepričani, da jih ne boste več potrebovali in če morate izprazniti prostor na disku. Te datoteke so trajno izbrisane. Ni jih mogoče obnoviti. Morda boste želeli pred izbrisom datotek ustvariti varnostno kopijo na zunanjem pogonu ali CD-ju.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wired-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000310412157071015025714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Za nastavitev večine žičnih omrežnih povezav morate le vklopiti omrežni kabel. Povezava z žičnim (Eternet) omrežjem

Za nastavitev večine omrežnih povezav morate le vklopiti omrežni kabel. Omrežna ikona v vrhnji vrstici bi se morala nekaj časa vrteti in se bo, ko ste povezani, spremenila v ikono "vtiča".

V primeru da se to ne zgodi, se najprej prepričajte, da je vaš omrežni kabel vklopljen. En konec kabla bi moral biti vklopljen v pravokotna vrata Ethernet (omrežje) na vašem računalniku, drugi konec bi moral biti vklopljen v stikalo, usmerjevalnik, vtič zidu ali podobno (odvisno od omrežne nastavitve, ki jo imate).

Računalnika ne morete vklopiti neposredno v drugega z omrežnim kablom (vsaj ne brez dodatnih nastavitev). Za povezavo dveh računalnikov oba vklopite v omrežni razdelilnik, usmerjevalnik ali stikalo.

V primeru da še vedno niste povezani, vaše omrežje morda ne podpira samodejne nastavitve (DHCP). V tem primeru ga boste morali nastaviti ročno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000275012157071015025642 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2013 Pošljite e-pošto, klepetajte ali pokličite stik. Povežite se z svojim stikom Michael Hill

This assumes the reader knows how to…. By the end of this page, the reader will be able to….

To email, chat with or phone someone in Contacts:

Select the contact from your contact list.

Press on the Detail that you want to use. For example, to email your contact, press the email address.

Zagnal se bo ustrezen program, ki bo uporabljal podrobnosti stika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-suspendfail.page0000644000373100047300000001031112157071015026034 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatera strojna oprema računalnikov povzroči težave s stanjem pripravljenosti ali mirovanjem. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Zakaj se moj računalnik ne vklopi nazaj potem ko ga pošljem v stanje pripravljenosti?

V primeru da svoj računalnik pošljete v stanje pripravljenosti ali v mirovanje in ga nato vklopite nazaj se lahko zgodi, da ne deluje kot pričakujete. To se lahko zgodi, ker vaša strojna oprema stanja pripravljenosti/mirovanja ne podpira.

Moj računalnik je v stanju pripravljenosti in se ne prižge

V primeru da ste svoj računalnik poslali v stanje pripravljenosti in nato pritisnili tipko ali kliknili na miško, bi se moral iz stanja pripravljenosti povrniti in prikazati zaslon, ki vas bo vprašal za vaše geslo. V primeru da se to ne zgodi, poskusite s pritiskom na gumb za vklop (ne držite ga, pritisnite ga le enkrat).

V primeru da tudi to ne pomaga, se prepričajte, da je zaslon vašega računalnika vklopljen in ponovno pritisnite tipko na tipkovnici.

Kot zadnjo možnost poskusite izklopiti računalnik s pritiskom na gumb za vklop za 5-10 sekund. S tem boste izgubili vse neshranjeno delo, vendar boste lahko računalnik ponovno prižgali.

V primeru da se to zgodi vsakič, ko računalnik pošljete v stanje pripravljenosti, zmožnost stanja pripravljenosti morda z vašo strojno opremo ne deluje.

Če vaš računalnik izgubi napetost in nima nadomestnega vira napetosti (kot je delujoča baterija), se bo izklopil.
Moji programi/dokumenti ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika niso odprti

V primeru da ste računalnik dali v stanje pripravljenosti in ga ponovno vklopili, vendar noben od vaših dokumentov ali programov ni odprt, je verjetno prehod v mirovanje spodletel. Včasih se to zgodi zaradi manjše težave in bo vaš računalnik lahko naslednjič pravilno prešel v mirovanje. Morda se je to zgodilo, ker ste namestili programsko posodobitev, ki je zahtevala ponoven zagon računalnika. V tem primeru se bo računalnik namesto prehoda v mirovanje ponovno zagnal.

Možno je tudi, da računalnik ne more preiti v mirovanje, ker ga strojna oprema ne podpira pravilno. To se lahko na primer zgodi zaradi težav z gonilniki Linux za vašo strojno opremo. To lahko preizkusite s ponovnim prehodom v mirovanje in ogledom, če to deluje drugič. V primeru da ne, je to verjetno težava z gonilniki vašega računalnika.

Moja brezžična povezava (ali druga strojna oprema) ne deluje, ko računalnik povrnem iz stanja pripravljenosti ali mirovanja

V primeru da računalnik pošljete v stanje pripravljenosti ali mirovanje in ga nato povrnete, se lahko zgodi, da vaša internetna povezava, miška ali kakšna druga naprava ne deluje pravilno. To se lahko zgodi, ker gonilnik naprave prehoda v stanje pripravljenosti/mirovanje ne podpira pravilno. To je težava z gonilnikom, ne s strojno opremo.

V primeru da ima naprava stikalo za vklop, ga poskusite izklopiti in nato ponovno vklopiti. V večini primerov bo naprava začela ponovno delovati. V primeru da se naprava poveže preko kabla USB ali podobno, napravo odklopite in jo ponovno priklopite.

V primeru da naprave ne morete izklopiti ali to ne deluje, boste morda morali za delovanje naprave znova zagnati računalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color.page0000644000373100047300000000163212157071015023511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj je to pomembno, Barvni profili, Kako umeriti napravo … Upravljanje barv
Barvni profili
Umerjanje
Težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/privacy-hide-notifications.page0000644000373100047300000000243412157071015027627 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Don't show pop-up notifications when the screen is locked Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com 2013 Skrij obvestila

By default, your computer will display message notifications even when your screen is locked. For example, if someone sends you an instant message while you are away from your computer, a notification will pop-up on your screen. The text of that person's message will appear even though your screen is locked.

You may wish to turn this feature off to keep your messages more private.

To turn off notifications when your screen is locked:

Click your name in the top bar.

Select Settings PrivacyScreen Lock.

Set the Show Notifications slider to Off.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/nautilus-file-properties-permissions.page0000644000373100047300000001025312157071015031716 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzira kdo si lahko ogleda in uredi vaše datoteke in mape. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavitev dovoljenja datotek

Za nadzor kdo lahko vidi in ureja datoteke katerih lastnik ste lahko uporabite dovoljenja datotek. Za ogled in nastavitev dovoljenj datoteke, desno kliknite nanjo in izberite Lastnosti in nato izberite zavihek Dovoljenja.

Oglejte si and spodaj za podrobnosti o vrstah dovoljenj, ki jih lahko nastavite.

Datoteke

Nastavite lahko dovoljenja za lastnika datotek, skupine lastnika in vse druge uporabnike na sistemu. Za svoje datoteke ste lastnik vi in lahko sebi dodelite pravice le za branje ali za branje in pisanje. Nastavite datoteko na le za branje, če je ne želite po nesreči spremeniti.

Vsak uporabnik na vašem računalniku spada v skupino. Na domačih računalnikih ima vsak uporabnik pogosto svojo lastno skupino, zato se skupinska dovoljenja redko uporabljajo. Vsaka datoteka pripada tako lastniku kot skupini. Nastavite lahko skupino datoteke in s tem nastavite dovoljenja za vse uporabnike v tej skupini. Skupino datoteke lahko nastavite le na skupino, kateri pripadate.

Nastavite lahko tudi dovoljenja za uporabnike, ki niso lastniki in za tiste, ki so v skupini datoteke.

V primeru da je datoteka program kot je skript, morate za njeno poganjanje izbrati Dovoli izvajanje datoteke kot programa. Tudi če je ta možnost izbrana, bo morda upravljalnik datotek še vedno odprl datoteko v programu in vas vprašal kaj želite narediti. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Mape

Dovoljenja map lahko nastavite za lastnika, skupino in druge uporabnike. Oglejte si podrobnosti dovoljenj datotek zgoraj za razlago o skrbnikih, skupinah in drugih uporabnikih.

Dovoljenja, ki jih nastavite za mapo, so drugačna od dovoljenj za datoteko.

<gui>Brez</gui>

Uporabnik ne bo mogel niti videti katere datoteke so v mapi.

 <gui>Le izpiši datoteke</gui>

Uporabnik bo lahko videl katere datoteke so v mapi, vendar datotek ne bo mogel odpreti, ustvariti ali izbrisati.

 <gui>Dostop do datotek</gui>

Uporabnik bo lahko odprl datoteke v mapi (pod pogojem, da ima za to dovoljenje do določene datoteke), vendar ne bodo mogli brisati datotek ali ustvariti novih datotek.

 <gui>Ustvarjanje in brisanje datotek</gui>

Uporabnik bo imel poln dostop do mape ključno z odpiranjem, ustvarjanjem in brisanjem datotek.

You can also quickly set the file permissions for all the files in the folder by clicking Change Permissions for Enclosed Files. Use the drop-down lists to adjust the permissions of contained files or folders, and click Change. Permissions are applied to files and folders in subfolders as well, to any depth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/sound-usemic.page0000644000373100047300000000373112157071015025010 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporabite analogni ali USB mikrofon in izberite privzeto vhodno napravo. Uporaba drugega mikrofona

Zunanji mikrofon lahko uporabite za zvočne konference, snemanja zvoka ali za uporabo predstavnostnih programov. Tudi če ima vaš računalnik vgrajen mikrofon ali spletno kamero z mikrofonom, ločen mikrofon običajno zagotavlja boljšo kakovost zvoka.

V primeru da ima vaš mikrofon okrogel priključek, ga vklopite v ustrezen vtič na svojem računalniku. Večina računalnikov ima dva vtiča: enega za mikrofone in enega za zvočnike. Najdite sliko mikrofona poleg vtiča. Mikrofoni vklopljeni v ustrezen vtič bodo ponavadi privzeto uporabljeni. V kolikor se to ne zgodi, si spodaj oglejte navodila za izbiro privzete vhodne naprave.

V primeru da imate mikrofon USB, ga vklopite v katerakoli vrata USB na svojem računalniku. Mikrofoni USB se obnašajo kot ločene zvočne naprave zato morate navesti kateri mikrofon želite privzeto uporabljati.

Izberite privzeto zvočno vhodno napravo

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Zvok in izberite zavihek Vhod.

V zavihku Vhod izberite napravo s seznama naprav. Ko govorite, bi se moral kazalnik odzvati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-wireless-wepwpa.page0000644000373100047300000000256112157071015026317 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org WEP in WPA sta načina za šifriranje podatkov na brezžičnih omrežjih. Kaj WEP in WPA pomenita?

WEP in WPA (skupaj z WPA2) sta imeni za različna orodja šifriranja, ki se uporabijo za zavarovanje vaše brezžične povezave. Šifriranje omrežno povezavo "premeša" tako, da ji ne more nihče "prisluškovati" in videti katere spletne strani si ogledujete. WEP pomeni zasebnost enaka žični povezavi in WPA pomeni zaščiten brezžični dostop. WPA2 je druga različica standarda WPA.

Uporaba nekaj šifriranja je vedno boljša kot nič šifriranja, vendar je WEP najmanj varen od teh standardov, zato se ga izognite, če se ga lahko. WPA2 je najbolj varen od teh treh. V primeru da tako vaša brezžična kartica in usmerjevalnik podpirata WPA2, ga uporabite pri nastavljanju svojega brezžičnega omrežja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/printing-setup-default-printer.page0000644000373100047300000000427212157071015030471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izberite tiskalnik, ki ga najpogosteje uporabljate. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Nastavitev privzetega tiskalnika

V primeru da imate na voljo več kot en tiskalnik, lahko izberete svoj privzeti tiskalnik. Morda želite izbrati tiskalnik, ki ga najbolj pogosto uporabljate.

Za nastavitev privzetega tiskalnika potrebujete skrbniške pravice.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

S seznama razpoložljivih tiskalnikov izberite svoj želeni privzeti tiskalnik.

Kliknite gumb Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo.

Izberite možnost Privzeto.

When choosing from the list of available printers, you can filter the printer search results by specifying a name or location of the printer (for example, 1st floor or entrance).

The search results filtering is available only in the dialog for addition of new printers.

Ko tiskate v programu, je privzeti tiskalnik samodejno uporabljen, razen če za določen izhod izberete drug tiskalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-manual.page0000644000373100047300000000465612157071015024445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Če omrežne nastavitve niso samodejno dodeljene, jih boste morda mogli vnesti sami. Ročno nastavi omrežne nastavitve

V primeru da vaše omrežje vašemu računalniku nastavitev omrežja ne dodeli samodejno, jih boste morali vnesti ročno. Ta tema predpostavlja, da že veste, katere nastavitve morate vnesti. Če to ni res, vprašajte skrbnika omrežja ali poglejte nastavitve svojega usmerjevalnika ali stikala.

Za ročno nastavitev svojih omrežnih povezav:

Kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve omrežja.

Izberite omrežno povezavo, ki jo želite ročno nastaviti in kliknite Nastavi. Na primer, če se na omrežje priklopite s kablom, si oglejte zavihek Žično.

Prepričajte se, da je vaša brezžična kartica vklopljena ali da je omrežni kabel vklopljen. V nasprotnem primeru ne boste mogli klikniti Nastavi.

Pojdite v zavihek Nastavitve IPv4 in spremenite možnost Način na Ročno.

Kliknite Dodaj in vpišite naslov IP, masko omrežja in naslov IP privzetega prehoda v ustrezne stolpce na seznamu Naslovi. Pritisnite Enter ali Tabulator po vnosu vsakega naslova.

Ti trije naslovi morajo biti naslovi IP, to je, morajo biti štiri števila ločena s pikami (na primer 123.45.6.78).

Vpišite naslove IP strežnikov DNS, ki jih želite uporabiti v ustrezno polje, ločene z vejicami.

Kliknite Shrani. V primeru da niste povezani z omrežjem pojdite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in se povežite z njo. Nastavitve omrežja lahko preizkusite z obiskom spletišča ali ogledom souporabljenih datotek na omrežju.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-general.page0000644000373100047300000000146112157071015024574 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Najdite svoj naslov IP, varnost WEP in WPA, naslovi MAC, posredniški strežniki … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Projekt dokumentacije GNOME Izrazi in namigi omrežja usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/color-why-calibrate.page0000644000373100047300000000223212157071015026237 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje je pomembno, če vam ni vseeno kakšne barve prikazujete ali natisnete. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj moram sam izvesti umerjanje?

Splošni profili so ponavadi slabi. Ko proizvajalec ustvari nov model, vzamejo nekaj predmetov iz proizvodnega traku in ustvarijo njihovo povprečje:

Povprečeni profili

Zasloni so precej različni od enote do enote in se s starostjo občutno spreminjajo. To je še težje za tiskalnike, saj lahko že druga vrsta papirja naredi profil nenatančen.

Najboljši način kako se lahko prepričate, da je vaš profil natančen, je, da umerjanje izvedete sami, ali da to za vas stori zunanje podjetje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/power-batterylife.page0000644000373100047300000001012012157071015026027 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namigi za zmanjšanje porabe vašega računalnika. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Poraba manjše količine energije in podaljšanje trajanja baterije

Računalniki lahko porabijo veliko energije. Z uporabo nekaterih enostavnih strategij za varčevanje z energijo lahko zmanjšate stroške za električno energijo in pomagate okolju.

Splošni namigi

Računalnik pošljite v pripravljenost, ko ga ne uporabljate. To občutno zmanjša količino porabljene energije in omogoča zelo hitro povrnitev računalnika.

Turn off the computer when you will not be using it for longer periods. Some people worry that turning off a computer regularly may cause it to wear out faster, but this is not the case.

Use the Power preferences in Settings to change your power settings. There are a number of options that will help to save power: you can automatically dim the display after a certain time; reduce the display brightness (for laptops); and have the computer automatically suspend if you have not used it for a certain period of time.

Izklopite zunanje naprave (kot so tiskalniki in optični bralniki), ko jih ne uporabljate.
Prenosniki, mini prenosniki in druge naprave z baterijami

Reduce the screen brightness; powering the screen accounts for a significant fraction of a laptop power consumption.

Večina prenosnikov ima na tipkonici gumb (ali tipkovno bližnjico), ki ga lahko uporabite za zmanjšanje svetlosti.

V primeru da nekaj časa internetne povezave ne potrebujete, izklopite brezžično/Bluetooth kartico. Te naprave delujejo z oddajanjem radijskih valov, ki porablja kar nekaj energije.

Nekateri računalniki imajo fizično stikalo, ki ga lahko uporabite za izklop, drugi pa imajo za to tipkovno bližnjico. Ko brezžično povezavo spet potrebujete, jo lahko ponovno vklopite.
Naprednejši namigi

Zmanjšajte število opravil, ki se izvajajo v ozadju. Računalniki porabijo več energije, če delajo.

Večina vaših programov dela zelo malo, če jih ne uporabljate dejavno. Programi, ki pogosto pridobijo podatke z interneta, predvajajo glasbo ali filme ali poganjajo distribuirane izračune, lahko vplivajo na vašo porabo energije.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-problem.page0000644000373100047300000000123412157071015024615 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi povezavami, iskanje brezžične povezave … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Težave z omrežjem usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/gnome-classic.page0000644000373100047300000001052212157071016025116 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Consider switching to GNOME Classic if you prefer a more traditional desktop experience. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Petr Kovar pknbe@volny.cz What is GNOME Classic?

GNOME Classic is a feature for users who prefer a more traditional desktop experience. While GNOME Classic is based on GNOME 3 technologies, it provides a number of changes to the user interface, such as the Applications and Places menus on the top bar, and a window list at the bottom of the screen.

You can use the Applications menu on the top bar to launch applications. The activities overview is available by selecting the Activities Overview item from the menu.

To access the activities overview, you can also press the Super key.

Window list

The window list at the bottom of the screen provides access to all your open windows and applications and lets you quickly minimize and restore them.

At the right-hand side of the window list, GNOME displays a short identifier for the current worskpace, such as 1 for the first (top) workspace. In addition, the identifier also displays the total number of available workspaces. To switch to a different workspace, you can click the identifier and select the workspace you want to use from the menu.

If an application or a system component wants to get your attention, it will display a blue icon at the right-hand side of the window list. Clicking the blue icon shows the message tray, which lets you access all your notifications.

Switch to and from GNOME Classic

GNOME Classic is only available on systems with certain GNOME Shell extensions installed. Some Linux distributions may not have these extensions available or installed by default.

 To switch from <em>GNOME</em> to <em>GNOME Classic</em>:

Save any open work, and then log out. Select your name in the upper right-hand corner and then select Log Out.

Pojavilo se bo potrditveno sporočilo. Izberite Odjavi za potrditev. Pojavi se prijavni zaslon.

At the login screen, select your name from the list.

Enter your password in the password entry box.

Click Session below the password entry box and choose GNOME Classic.

Click Sign In.

 To switch from <em>GNOME Classic</em> to <em>GNOME</em>:

Save any open work, and then log out. Select your name in the upper right-hand corner and then select Log Out.

Pojavilo se bo potrditveno sporočilo. Izberite Odjavi za potrditev. Pojavi se prijavni zaslon.

At the login screen, select your name from the list.

Enter your password in the password entry box.

Click Session below the password entry box and choose GNOME.

Click Sign In.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-slowkeys.page0000644000373100047300000000473712157071016025036 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakasnitev med pritiskom tipke in njeno pojavitvijo na zaslonu. Vklop počasnih tipk

Vklopite počasne tipke, če želite, da je med pritiskom tipke in njenim prikazom na zaslonu zakasnitev. To pomeni, da morate vsako tipko preden se pojavi nekaj časa držati. Počasne tipke uporabite, če med tipkanjem po nesreči pritisnete več tipk ali prvič težko pritisnete pravo tipko na tipkovnici.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Vklopite Počasne tipke.

 Hiter vklop in izklop počasnih tipk

Under Enable by Keyboard, select Turn on accessibility features from the keyboard to turn slow keys on and off from the keyboard. When this option is selected, you can press and hold Shift for eight seconds to enable or disable slow keys.

You can also turn slow keys on and off by clicking the accessibility icon on the top bar and selecting Slow Keys. The accessibility icon is visible when one or more settings have been enabled from the Universal Access panel.

Uporabite drsnik Zamik sprejema za nadzor kako dolgo morate pritiskati tipko preden je zaznana.

Vaš računalnik lahko ob pritisku tipke, ko je tipka pritisnjena ali ko je pritisk tipke zavrnjen, ker je niste pritisnili dovolj dolgo, proizvede zvok.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/files-autorun.page0000644000373100047300000001162312157071016025172 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Samodejno poganjanje programov za CD-je in DVD-je, fotoaparate, predvajalnike zvoka in druge naprave in medije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Odpiranje programov za naprave ali diske

Programe lahko nastavite na samodejni zagon, ko priklopite napravo. Morda boste želeli da se ob priklopu digitalnega fotoaparata zažene vaš organizator fotografij. To zmožnost lahko tudi izklopite, kar pomeni, da se ob priklopu naprave ne zgodi nič.

Za odločitev kateri programi naj se zaženejo, ko priklopite različne naprave:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Izberite PodrobnostiOdstranljivi mediji.

Izberite program ali dejanje za želeno napravo ali vrsto medija. Glejte spodaj za opis različnih vrst naprav in medijev.

Namesto zaganjanja programa lahko nastavite, da je naprava prikazana v upravljalniku datotek. Ko se to zgodi, boste vprašani, kaj želite storiti ali pa se samodejno ne bo zgodilo nič.

Če naprave ali vrste medija, ki jo želite spremeniti, na seznamu (kot na primer Blu-ray diski ali E-bralniki knjig) ne vidite, kliknite Drugi mediji za ogled podrobnejšega seznama naprav. Izberite vrsto naprave ali medija iz spustnega menija Vrsta in program ali dejanje iz spustnega menija Dejanje.

V primeru da nobenih programov ne želite odpreti samodejno ne glede na to kaj priklopite, izberite Nikoli ne pozovi k zagoni programov ob vstavitvi medija na dnu okna Mediji.
Vrste naprav in medijev Zvočni diski

Za upravljanje zvočnih CD-jev izberite svoj najljubši glasbeni program ali program za izvleko glasbe. Če uporabljate zvočne DVD-je (DVD-A), ravnanje z njimi določite pod Drugi mediji. Če odprete zvočni disk z upravljalnikom datoetk, se bodo skladbe pojavile kot datoteke WAV, ki jih lahko predvajate v kateremukoli programu predvajalnika zvoka.

 Video diski

Izberite svoj priljubljeni video program za upravljanje video DVD-jev. Za nastavitev programa za Blu-ray-je, HD DVD-je, video CD-je (VCD) in super video CD-je (SVCD) uporabite gumb Drugi mediji. Če DVD-ji ali drugi video diski ob vstavitvi ne delujejo pravilno, si oglejte .

 Prazni diski

Uporabite gumb Drugi mediji za izbiro programa za zapisovanje praznih CD-jev, praznih DVD-jev, praznih diskov Blu-ray in praznih HD DVD-jev.

 Fotografije in digitalni fotoaparati

Uporabite spustni seznam Fotografije za izbiro programa upravljanja fotografij za zagon ob priklopu digitalnega fotoaparata ali ko vstavitev medijsko kartico s fotoaparata kot je kartica CF, SD, MCC ali MS. Med fotografijami lahko tudi brskate z upravljalnikom datotek.

Pod Drugi mediji lahko izberete program za odpiranej slikovnih CD-jev Kodak. To so običajni podatkovni CD-ji s slikami JPEG v mapi PICTURES.

 Predvajalniki glasbe

Izberite program za upravljanje glasbene knjižnice na prenosnem predvajalniku ali pa datoteke upravljajte sami z upravljlanikom datotek.

 Bralniki e-knjig

Uporabite gumb Drugi mediji za izbiro programa za upravljanje knjig na bralniku e-knjig ali pa datoetke upravljajte sami z upravljalnikom datotek.

 Programi

Nekateri diski in odstranljivi mediji vsebujejo programe, ki naj bi se ob vstavitvi medija samodejno zagnali. Uporabite možnost Programi za nadzor kaj naj se zgodi, ko je vstavljen medij s samodejno zagonljivimi programi. Pred zagonom programa boste vedno vprašani za potrditev.

Nikoli ne poženite programov z medija, ki mu ne zaupate
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-antivirus.page0000644000373100047300000000334512157071016025207 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za Linux obstaja zelo malo virusov, zato verjetno protivirusnega programa ne potrebujete. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ali potrebujem protivirusni program?

Če ste navajeni uporabljati Windows ali Mac OS, ste verjetno navajeni, da protivirusni se program izvaja ves čas. Protivirusni program se izvaja v ozadju ter nenehno preverja za obstoj računalniških virusov, ki bi lahko našli svojo pot na vaš računalnik in povzročili težave.

Za Linux obstajajo protivirusni programi, vendar pa vam jih verjetno ni treba uporabljati. Virusi, ki vplivajo na Linux, so še vedno zelo redki. Nekateri trdijo, da je to zato, ker je Linux ni tako razširjen kot drugi operacijski sistemi, zato zanj nihče ne piše virusov. Drugi trdijo, da je Linux bolj varen in da so varnostni problemi, ki bi jih lahko virusi zlorabili, popravljeni zelo hitro.

Ne glede na razlog, so virusi za Linux tako redki, da vam trenutno glede njih ni treba skrbeti.

V primeru da želite biti dodatno varni ali želite preveriti za obstoj virusov v datotekah, ki jih pošiljate ljudem, ki uporabljajo Windows in Mac OS, lahko še vedno namestite protivirusni program. Preverite namestilnik programov ali iščite na spletu - na voljo so številni programi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/user-addguest.page0000644000373100047300000000542512157071016025154 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gostom dovolite začasen dostop do vašega računalnika brez dodeljevanja gesla. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dodajanje računa gosta

Za goste, ljudi, ki bodo računalnik uporabljali le malo in občasno, lahko ustvarite uporabniški račun. Uporabniški račun gosta bo lahko uporabljal programe na vašem računalniku, vendar ne bo mogel dostopati do vaših datotek, spreminjati vaših nastavitev ali nameščati programov.

Ustvaritev račun gosta:

Click your name on the top bar, then click the picture next to your name to open the Users window.

Da boste lahko uveljavljali spremembe, kliknite Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite vaše geslo. Da dodate uporabniške račune, morate biti skrbnik.

In the list of accounts on the left, click the + button to add a new user account.

Select Standard for the account type. You don't want to give the guest account administrative access. Then give the account a name like Guest, or any other name you like. The username will be filled in automatically based on the full name. The default is probably OK, but you can change it if you like. Click Add when you're done.

Izbran bo nov uporabniški račun gosta. V Možnostih prijave kliknite na oznako Račun je onemogočen poleg Gesla. Prikazalo se vam bo okno z možnostmi gesla. Iz spustnega seznama Dejanje izberite Prijava brez gesla.

V oknu Uporabniški računi lahko kliknete na sliko poleg uporabnikovega imena na desni za nastavitev slike računa. Slika bo bila prikazana v prijavnem oknu. GNOME zagotavlja nekaj fotografij, ki jih lahko uporabite ali pa lahko izberete svojo lastno sliko ali jo posnamete s svojo spletno kamero.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/session-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000535012157071016025531 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izberite regijo, ki naj se uporablja za datum in čas, števila, valuto in merske enote. Sprememba datuma in oblik merjenja

Nadzirate lahko oblike, ki se uporabljajo za datume, čase, števila, valuto in merske enote, ki se ujemajo s krajevnimi običaji vaše regije.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Open Region & Language and click Formats.

Select the region that most closely matches the formats you'd like to use. By default, the list only shows regions that use the language set on the Language tab. Click the ... button to select from all available regions.

Respond to the prompt, Your session needs to be restarted for these changes to take effect by clicking Restart Now, or click X to restart later.

Ko ste izbrali regijo, bo področje desno od seznama prikazalo različne primere prikaza datumov in drugih vrednosti. Čeprav to ni prikazano v primerih, vaša regija vpliva tudi na začetni dan tedna v koledarjih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-install-flash.page0000644000373100047300000000641312157071016025723 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Morda boste morali za ogled spletišč kot je YouTube in vzajemne spletne strani namestiti Flash. Nameščanje vstavka Flash

Flash je vstavek za vaš spletni brskalnik, ki vam omogoča ogled videov in uporabo vzajemnih spletnih strani na nekaterih spletiščih. Nekatera spletišča brez Flasha ne bodo delovala.

shaunm

Would be nice to (soft?) link to a page on the software installer

V primeru da Flasha nimate nameščenega, boste verjetno videli sporočilo, ki vas bo obvestilo, da ga spletišče potrebuje. Flash je na voljo kot brezplačen (toda ne odprtokoden) prejem za večino spletnih brskalnikov. Večina distribucij Linux vsebuje tudi različico Flash, ki jo lahko namestite z njihovim namestilnikom programov (upravljalnikom paketov).

V primeru da je Flash na voljo iz namestilnika programov:

Odprite namestilnik programov in iščite flash.

Poiščite the Vstavk Adobe Flash, Predvajalnik Adobe Flash ali podobno in kliknite za njegovo namestitev.

V primeru da imate odprta okna spletnega brskalnika jih zaprite in ponovno odprite. Spletni brskalnik bi se moral ob ponovnem odprtju zavedati, da je Flash nameščen in sedaj si boste lahko ogledati spletišča, ki uporabljajo Flash.

 V primeru da Flash <em>ni</em> na voljo iz namestilnika programov:

Pojdite naspletišče prejema predvajalnika Flash Player. Vaš brskalnik in operacijski sistem bi morala biti samodejno zaznana.

Kliknite na Izbor različice za prejem in izberite vrsto namestilnika, ki deluje za vašo distribucijo Linux. V primeru da ne veste katero možnost izbrati, izberite možnost .tar.gz.

Oglejte si navodila za namestitev Flash za več podrobnosti o namestitvi za vaš spletni brskalnik.
Odprtokodni nadomestki za Flash

Na voljo je več prostih, odprtokodnih nadomestkov Flash. Ti na nekaterih področjih delujejo boljše kot vstavek Flash (na primer boljše upravljanje predvajanja zvoka), na drugih pa slabše (na primer na morejo prikazati nekaterih zapletenejših spletnih strani Flash).

Morda bi želeli enega od njih preizkusiti, če s predvajalnikom Flash niste zadovoljni ali pa želite imeti na svojem računalniku toliko odprtokodnih programov kot je le mogoče. Tukaj je nekaj možnosti:

LightSpark

Gnash
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/net-what-is-ip-address.page0000644000373100047300000000315112157071016026563 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com IP naslov je kot telefonska številka vašega računalnika. Kaj je naslov IP?

"Naslov IP" pomeni Naslov internetnega protokola. Vsaka naprava, ki je povezana z omrežjem (kot je na primer Internet), jo ima.

IP naslov je podoben vaši telefonski številki. Vaša telefonska številka je edinstveno zaporedje števil, ki vaš telefon določi tako, da vas drugi ljudje lahko pokličejo. Podobno je IP naslov edinstveno zaporedje števil, ki določi vaš računalnik tako, da lahko pošlje in prejme podatke z drugih računalnikov.

Trenutno je večina naslovov IP sestavljena iz štirih zaporedij števil, ki so ločena s piko. Primer naslova IP je 192.168.1.42.

Vsak naslov IP je lahko dinamičen ali statičen. Dinamični naslovi IP so začasno dodeljeni vsakič, ko vaš računalnik dostopa do omrežja. Statični naslovi IP se ne spreminjajo. Dinamični naslovi IP so bolj pogosti kot statični naslovi - statični naslovi IP se uporabljajo le, ko obstajajo posebne zahteve kot je na primer skrbništvo strežnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth-turn-on-off.page0000644000373100047300000000517312157071016026555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev ali onemogočitev naprave Bluetooth na vašem računalniku. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Vklop ali izklop Bluetooth

Ikona Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici

Bluetooth lahko vklopite, za uporabo naprav Bluetooth ter za pošiljanje in prejemanje datotek in ga izklopite za varčevanje z energijo. Za vklop Bluetootha kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in kliknite Vklopi Bluetooth.

Bluetooth vklopite za uporabo napravo Bluetooth in za pošiljanje in prejemanje datotek. Kadar ga ne uporabljate, ga izklopite in varčujte z energijo. Za vklop Bluetooth kliknite na ikono Bluetooth v zgornji vrstici in Bluetooth vklopite.

Več prenosnih računalnikov ima tipko oz. kombinacijo tipk za vklop/izklop naprave Bluetooth. Če je strojna oprema Bluetooth izklopljena, ikone Bluetooth v menijski vrstici me boste videli. Poiščite stikalo na svojem računalniku oz. tipko na svoji tipkovnici. Tipka je pogosto dostopna s pomočjo tipkeFn.

Veliko prenosnikov ima strojno stikalo ali kombinacijo tipk za vklop ali izklop Bluetootha. V primeru da je strojna oprema Bluetooth izklopljena, ikone Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici ne boste videli. Najdite stikalo na računalniku ali tipko na tipkovnici. Do tipke na tipkovnici je pogosto mogoče dostopati s tipko Fn.

Za izklop Bluetootha kliknite na ikono Bluetooth in kliknite Izklopi Bluetooth.

Za izklop Bluetooth kliknite na ikono Bluetooth in Bluetooth izklopite.

Vidnost vklopite le, če bi se radi na računalnik povezali z druge naprave. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/a11y-contrast.page0000644000373100047300000000310212157071016024774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Naredi okna in gumbe na zaslonu bolj (ali manj) živa, da jih je lažje videti. Prilagoditev kontrasta

You can adjust the contrast of windows and buttons so that they're easier to see. This is not the same as changing the brightness of the whole screen; only parts of the user interface will change.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Izrisovanje.

Spremenite Visok kontrast na VKLOPLJENO.

accessibility icon on the top bar and selecting High Contrast.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/mouse-lefthanded.page0000644000373100047300000000255312157071016025623 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obrnite levi in desni miškin gumb v nastavitvah miške. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporaba miške z levico

Obnašanje levega in desnega miškinega gumba na miški ali drsni ploščici lahko zamenjate in s tem olajšate uporabo z levico.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

In the General section, switch Primary button to Right.

Ta nastavitev bo vplivala tako na vašo miško in drsno ploščico kot tudi na katerokoli drugo napravo kazanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/contacts-add-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000336112157071016026234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lucie Hankey ldhankey@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Dodajte ali odstranite stik iz krajevnega imenika. Dodajanje ali odstranitev stika

Za dodajanje stika:

Press New.

In the New contact window, enter the contact name and the desired information. Click on the menu next to each field to choose Work, Home or Other.

Press Create Contact.

Za odstranitev stika:

Select the contact from your contact list.

Press Edit in the top-rigth corner of Contacts.

Press Remove Contact.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/wacom-stylus.page0000644000373100047300000000427412157071016025050 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Določitev funkcij gumbov in občutek pritiska zaslonskega pisala Wacom. Nadzor pisala Michael Hill

Describe the config options for the stylus and how to configure more than one stylus.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Nižji del pulta vsebuje podrobnosti in nastavitve, določene za vašo zaslonsko pisalo z imenom naprave (razred pisala) in diagramom na levi. Te nastavitve je mogoče prilagoditi.

Občutek pritiska radirke: uporabite drsnik za prilagoditev "občutka" (kako je fizični pritisk preveden v digitalne vrednosti) med Mehkim in Trdim.

Nastavitve Gumba/Drsnega koleščka (te spremembe se odražajo pri pisalu). Kliknite na meni poleg vsake oznake za izbiro ene od teh funkcij: brez dejanja, levi miškin klik, srednji miškin klik, desni miškin klik, drsenje navzgor, drsenje navzdol, drsenje levo, drsenje desno, nazaj, naprej.

Občutek pritiska konice: uporabite drsnik za prilagoditev "občutka" med Mehkim in Trdim.

Če imate več kot eno zaslonsko pisalo, ko se dodatno pisalo približa tablici, se bo poleg imena naprave prikazal pozivnik. Uporabite pozivnik za izbiro, katero pisalo želite nastaviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/bluetooth-visibility.page0000644000373100047300000000241312157071016026564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ali lahko druge naprave odkrijejo vaš računalnik. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Kaj je vidnost Bluetooth?

Vidnost Bluetooth pomeni ali lahko druge naprave najdejo vaš računalnik, ko iščejo naprave Bluetooth. Ko je vidnost Bluetooth vklopljena, se bo vaš računalnik pokazal vsem napravam v bližini in jim dovolil poskus povezave z vami.

Vašemu računalniku ni treba biti viden za iskanje drugih naprav, vendar morajo te naprave biti vidne vašemu računalniku, da jih lahko odkrije.

Ko ste se povezali z napravo za sporazumevanje ni zahtevana ne vidnost računalnika in ne naprave.

Vidnost pustite izklopljeno, razen če se morate vi ali nekdo drug povezati z računalnikom z druge naprave .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/session-language.page0000644000373100047300000000747312157071016025651 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preklopite na drug jezik za uporabniški vmesnik in besedilo pomoči. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izbira jezika, ki ga uporabljate shaunm

Explain how to install support for other languages. Requires us to document software installation.

Svoje namizje in programe lahko uporabite v številnih jezikih, če imate na svojem računalniku nameščene ustrezne jezikovne pakete.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Regija in Jezik in izberite zavihek Jezik.

Select your desired language. The initial list only shows a small subset of the supported languages. If your language is not listed, click . Some translations may be incomplete, and certain applications may not support your language at all. Any untranslated text will appear in the language in which the software was originally developed, usually American English.

Respond to the prompt, Your session needs to be restarted for these changes to take effect by clicking Restart Now, or click X to restart later.

V vaši domači mapi so posebne mape v katere programi shranjujejo glasbo, dokumente in slike. Te mape uporabljajo standardna imena glede na vaš jezik. Ko se ponovno prijavite, boste vprašani, če želite te mape preimenovati v standardna imena za svoj izbrani jezik. V primeru da nov jezik nameravate vedno uporabljati, je imena map pametno posodobiti.

Sprememba sistemskega jezika

Ko svoj jezik spremenite, ga lahko spremenite za svoj račun potem ko se prijavite. Spremenite lahko tudi sistemski jezik, ki se uporablja na mestih kot je prijavni zaslon.

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve.

Odprite Regija in Jezik in izberite zavihek Jezik.

Select the Login Screen button.

Zahtevana so skrbniška dovoljenja. Vnesite svoje geslo ali geslo za zahteveni skrbniški račun.

Select your desired language. The initial list only shows a small subset of the supported languages. If your language is not listed, click . Some translations may be incomplete, and certain applications may not support your language at all. Any untranslated text will appear in the language in which the software was originally developed, usually American English.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-help/music-cantplay-drm.page0000644000373100047300000000373612157071016026114 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Podpora za vrsto datoteke morda ni nameščena ali pa so skladbe "zaščitene pred kopiranjem". Skladb, kupljenih v spletni glasbeni trgovini, ne morem predvajati

V primeru da ste glasbo prejeli s spletne trgovine, se morda ne bo predvajala na vašem računalniku, še posebej, če ste jo kupili na računalniku Windows ali Mac OS in jo prekopirali.

To se lahko zgodi, ker je glasba v obliki, ki je računalnik ne prepozna. Za predvajanje skladbe morate imeti nameščeno podporo za prave vrste zvoka - na primer, če želite predvajati datoteke MP3, morate imeti nameščeno podporo MP3. V primeru da nimate podpore za dano vrsto zvoka, boste morda ob poskusu predvajanja zvoka videli sporočilo, ki vas bo o tem opozorilo. Sporočilo bi moralo tudi zagotavljati navodila kako namestiti podporo za predvajanje te vrste.

V primeru da imate nameščeno podporo za predvajanje vrste zvoka skladbe, a je še vedno ne morete predvajati, je skladba morda zaščitena pred kopiranjem (znana tudi kot omejitev DRM). DRM je način omejevanja kdo lahko predvaja skladbo in na katerih napravah jo lahko predvaja. Skladbo nadzira podjetje, ki vam jo je prodalo, ne vi. V primeru da ima glasbena datoteka omejitve DRM, je verjetno ne boste mogli predvajati. V splošnem za predvajanje datotek omejenih z DRM potrebujete poseben program ponudnika, vendar je le nekaj od teh podprtih na Linuxu.

Več o DRM se lahko naučite na Electronic Frontier Foundation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/totem/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000017126712316541441023321 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
<application>Totem Movie Player</application> Manual 2003 Chee Bin HOH 2009 Philip Withnall Totem Movie Player is a media player for GNOME that runs on GStreamer by default, but can also be run on xine. It has support for most audio and video codecs including DVDs among many others. Features include TV-out, fullscreen, subtitles, and more. GNOME Documentation Project Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Chee Bin HOH GNOME Documentation Project cbhoh@gnome.org Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation project Update documentation baptiste.millemathias@gmail.org Philip Withnall Update documentation philip@tecnocode.co.uk Totem Movie Player Manual V2.0 August 2006 Chee Bin HOH cbhoh@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project Totem Movie Player Manual V3.0 February 2009 Philip Withnall philip@tecnocode.co.uk GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 2.26 of Totem Movie Player. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Totem Movie Player application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. Totem Movie Player totem Introduction The Totem Movie Player application is a movie player for the GNOME desktop based on the GStreamer framework and xine library, and enables you to play movies or songs. Totem Movie Player provides the following features: Support for a variety of video and audio files. A variety of zoom levels and aspect ratios, and a fullscreen view. Seek and volume controls. A playlist. Subtitle support. Complete keyboard navigation. Comprehensive set of plugins, including a subtitle downloader, YouTube browser, and disc burner. Totem Movie Player also comes with additional functionality such as: Video thumbnailer for GNOME. Audio preview application for GNOME. Nautilus properties tab. Getting Started To Start <application>Totem Movie Player</application> You can start Totem Movie Player in the following ways: Applications menu Choose Sound & Video Movie Player . Command line To start Totem Movie Player from a command line, type the following command, then press Return: totem To view other command line options that are available, type totem --help, then press Return. When You Start <application>Totem Movie Player</application> When you start Totem Movie Player, the following window is displayed.
<application>Totem Movie Player</application> Start Up Window Shows Totem Movie Player main window with sidebar opened on playlist. Contains menubar, display area, sidebar, elapsed time slider, seek control buttons, volume slider and statusbar.
The Totem Movie Player window contains the following elements: Menubar. The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands you need to use in Totem Movie Player. Display area. The display area displays the movie or a visualization of the current song. Sidebar. The sidebar displays properties of the file played and acts as playlist. It can also be used by various plugins, such as the MythTV, YouTube and Video Search plugins. They can be selected by clicking on the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar. Elapsed time slider. The elapsed time slider displays the elapsed time of the movie or song that is playing. It also enables you to skip forward or backward in a movie or song by dragging the slider's handle along the bar, or by clicking on a point on the bar. Seek control buttons. The seek control buttons enable you to move to the next or previous track, and to pause or play a movie or song. Volume button. The volume button enables you to adjust the volume. Statusbar. The statusbar displays status information about the movie or song that is playing. Usage To Open a File To open a video or an audio file, choose CtrlO Movie Open . The Select Movies or Playlists dialog is displayed. Select the file or files you want to open, then click OK. You can drag a file from another application such as a file manager to the Totem Movie Player window. If you drag the file to the display area, the file will replace the current playlist and will start playing immediately. If you drag the file to the playlist in the sidebar, the file will be appended to the current playlist. The Totem Movie Player application will open the file and play the movie or song. Totem Movie Player displays the title of the movie or song in the titlebar of the window and in the playlist in the sidebar. If you try to open a file format that Totem Movie Player does not recognize, the application displays an error message. This error is most often encountered if you do not have the correct codecs installed. Information on getting codecs working can be found on the Totem Movie Player website. You can double-click on a video or an audio file in the Nautilus file manager to open it in the Totem Movie Player window. To Open a Location To open a file by URI (location), choose CtrlL Movie Open Location . The Open Location dialog is displayed. Use the drop-down combination box to specify the URI you would like to open (it lists URIs which have previously been opened) – or type one in directly – then click on the Open button. If you have a URI in the clipboard already, it will automatically be pasted into the combination box. To Play a Movie (DVD or VCD) Insert the disc in the optical device of your computer, then choose MoviePlay Disc . To eject a DVD or VCD, choose CtrlE Movie Eject . To Pause a Movie or Song To pause a movie or song that is playing, click on the Shows pause button. button, or choose CtrlSpace Movie Play / Pause . You may also use the P key to pause or play a movie. To resume playing a movie or song, click on the Shows play button. button again, or choose CtrlSpace Movie Play / Pause . To View Properties of a Movie or Song To view the properties of a movie or song, choose View Sidebar to make the sidebar appear, and choose Properties in the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar. To Seek Through Movies or Songs To seek through movies or songs, you can use the following methods: To skip forward To skip forward through a movie or song, choose Right Go Skip Forward . To skip backward To skip backwards through a movie or song, choose Left Go Skip Backwards . To skip to a time To skip to a specific elapsed time in the movie or song, choose CtrlK Go Skip to . The Skip to dialog is displayed. Use the spin box to specify the elapsed time (in seconds) to skip to, then click OK. The spin box also allows more natural language to be used. You can enter a time in the formats "hh:mm:ss", "mm:ss" or "ss"; where "hh" is the hour, "mm" is the minute and "ss" is the second to skip to. To move to the next movie or song To move to the next movie or song, choose AltRight Go Next Chapter/Movie or click on the Shows a seek next button button. To move to the previous movie or song To move to the previous movie or song, choose AltLeft Go Previous Chapter/Movie or click on the Shows a seek previous button button. To Change the Zoom Factor To Change the Video Size To change the zoom factor of the display area, you can use the following methods: To zoom to fullscreen mode, choose F11 ViewFullscreen. You can also use the F key to toggle fullscreen mode. To exit fullscreen mode, click on the Leave Fullscreen button or press Esc, F11 or F. To change the size of the original movie or visualization, choose Ctrl0 ViewFit Window to Movie and choose a scale ratio. To Change the Video Aspect Ratio To switch between different aspect ratios, choose A View Aspect Ratio . To Adjust the Volume To increase the volume, choose Up Sound Volume Up . To decrease the volume, choose Down Sound Volume Down . You can also use the volume button: click on the volume button and choose the volume level with the slider. To Make the Window Always on Top To make the Totem Movie Player window always on top of other application windows, choose Edit Plugins . Select the Always on Top plugin to enable it. The Totem Movie Player window will now stay on top of all other windows while a movie is playing, but not while audio or visualizations are playing. To stop the window from always being on top, disable the Always on Top plugin again. See for more information. To Show or Hide Controls To show or hide the Totem Movie Player window controls, choose CtrlH View Show Controls , or press the H key. You can also right-click on the Totem Movie Player window, then choose CtrlH Show Controls from the popup menu. If the Show Controls option is selected, Totem Movie Player will show the menubar, elapsed time slider, seek control buttons, volume slider and statusbar on the window. If the Show Controls option is unselected, the application will hide these controls and show only the display area. To Manage the Playlist To Show or Hide the Playlist To show or hide the playlist, choose ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button, and choose Playlist on the top of the sidebar. Manage a Playlist You can use the Playlist dialog to do the following: To add a track or movie To add a track or movie to the playlist, click on the Add button. The Select Movies or Playlists dialog is displayed. Select the file that you want to add to the playlist, then click Add. To remove a track or movie To remove a track or movie from the playlist, select the item or items to remove from the playlist, then click on the Remove button. To save the playlist to a file To save the playlist to a file, click on the Save Playlist button. The Save Playlist dialog is displayed; specify the filename as which you want to save the playlist, and click Save. To move a track or movie up the playlist To move a track or movie up the playlist, select the item from the playlist, then click on the Move Up button. To move a track or movie down the playlist To move a track or movie down the playlist, select the item from the playlist, then click on the Move Down button. To Select or Unselect Repeat Mode To enable or disable repeat mode, choose EditRepeat Mode. To Select or Unselect Shuffle Mode To enable or disable shuffle mode, choose EditShuffle Mode. To Choose Subtitles To choose the language of the subtitles, select ViewSubtitles and choose the subtitle language you want to display. To disable the display of subtitles, select ViewSubtitlesNone. By default, Totem Movie Player will choose the same language for the subtitles as the one you normally use on your computer. Totem Movie Player will automatically load and display subtitles for a video if it finds a subtitle file with the same name as the video being played, and the extension asc, txt, sub, srt, smi, ssa or ass. If the file containing the subtitles has a different name from the video being played, you can right-click on the video in the playlist and choose Select Text Subtitles from the popup menu to load the correct subtitle file. You may also choose subtitles by choosing ViewSelect Text Subtitles. Using the Subtitle Downloader plugin, you can also download subtitles from the OpenSubtitles service. See for more information. To Take a Screenshot To take a screenshot of the movie or visualization that is playing, choose Edit Take Screenshot . The Save Screenshot dialog is displayed. Choose a location and insert the filename as which you want to save the screenshot, then click on the Save button to save the screenshot. Totem Movie Player will display a preview of the screenshot which is to be saved on the left-hand side of the Save Screenshot dialog. To Create a Screenshot Gallery To create a gallery of screenshots of the movie or visualization that is playing, choose Edit Create Screenshot Gallery . The Save Gallery dialog is displayed. Choose a location and insert the filename as which you want to save the gallery image, then click on the Save button to save the screenshot. You may specify the width of the individual screenshots in the gallery using the Screenshot width entry. The default width is 128 pixels. You may also specify the number of screenshots to be put in the gallery. By default, this is calculated based on the length of the movie; however, this may be overridden by deselecting the Calculate the number of screenshots checkbox and entering the new number in the Number of screenshots spin box. Plugins Totem Movie Player has many features which are present in the form of plugins — pieces of the software which are only loaded if necessary. To Enable a Plugin To view the list of installed plugins, choose EditPlugins. The Configure Plugins dialog is displayed. On the left is a list of all the plugins you have installed, while on the right is a description of the currently selected plugin. Plugins which have options which can be changed will have a sensitive Configure button on the right. To enable a plugin, simply select the checkbox to the left of its name in the plugin list, and the plugin will be loaded immediately. If there is any error loading the plugin, an error dialog will also be displayed immediately. To disable a plugin again, deselect its checkbox. Plugins will remain enabled or disabled as set even when Totem Movie Player is closed. Always on Top When enabled, the Always on Top plugin will force the main Totem Movie Player window to be on top of all other windows while a movie is playing, but not while audio or visualizations are playing. To stop the window being on top, disable the plugin again. Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client The Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client plugin allows Totem Movie Player to play multimedia content from UPnP media servers (such as Coherence servers) on the local network. With the Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client sidebar. The tree view in the sidebar will list the available media servers. Clicking on one will expand it to show the types of media it can serve, and clicking on a media folder will expand it to list the media files available. Double-clicking on a media file will add it to Totem Movie Player's playlist and play it. You may alternatively right-click on a file and choose Play or Enqueue to play the file immediately or add it to the playlist, respectively. If the media server allows it, choosing Delete from a file's context menu allows you to delete that file from the media server. Gromit Annotations The Gromit Annotations plugin allows you to draw on top of movies as they are played using Gromit. You must have Gromit installed before you can enable the plugin — consult your operating system documentation for information on how to do this. With the plugin enabled, press CtrlD to toggle Gromit on or off. When Gromit is enabled, your pointer will change to a crosshair. To draw on the screen, hold down your mouse button and drag your pointer around, before releasing your mouse button. Press CtrlD again to toggle Gromit off. To clear the screen of annotations, press CtrlE, or close Totem Movie Player. Jamendo The Jamendo plugin allows you to listen to the collection of Creative Commons-licensed music on the Jamendo service. To Configure the Plugin The Jamendo plugin can be configured. Click on the Configure button when enabling the plugin, and the Jamendo Plugin Configuration dialog will be displayed. Here, you can choose whether to download songs in Ogg or MP3 format (Ogg is preferred due to its open-source nature); and the number of albums to retrieve when doing a search (choose more albums if you have a faster Internet connection). Once you're done, click OK. To Display the Jamendo Sidebar With the Jamendo plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select Jamendo from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the Jamendo sidebar. To Search for Music Enter your search terms in the search entry at the top of the Jamendo sidebar. You can search by either artist or by tags. Click on the search button to start your search. Search results will be displayed in the tree view in the Search Results page of the sidebar, and can be browsed through using the arrow buttons at the bottom of the sidebar. Albums are listed, and if you click on an album, its tracks will be listed below it. Click again to hide the album's tracks. With an artist selected, you can click on the Jamendo Album Page button to open that album's page on the Jamendo website. Double-clicking an album, or choosing Add to Playlist from the album's context menu, will replace your playlist with all the tracks on that album and begin streaming the first track from Jamendo's website. Double-clicking an individual track will replace your playlist with just that track. Popular Albums and Latest Releases Viewing the Popular page in the Jamendo sidebar will load a list of the most popular albums on Jamendo at the moment, which can be played as with search results. Viewing the Latest Releases page will likewise load a list of the latest albums released on Jamendo. Local Search The Local Search plugin allows you to search for playable movies and audio files on your computer from within Totem Movie Player. With the plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select Local Search from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the Local Search sidebar. To perform a search, enter your search terms in the search entry at the top of the sidebar and click Find. Your search terms may include wildcards such as *, which will match any character. For example, the search *.mpg will find all movies with the .mpg file extension. Search results may be browsed using the Back and Forward buttons at the bottom of the sidebar, and you may jump to a specific results page by entering its number in the spin box. Publish Playlist The Publish Playlist plugin allows you to publish playlists on your local network to allow other computers to access and play them. To Configure the Plugin The Publish Playlist plugin can be configured. Click on the Configure button when enabling the plugin, and the configuration dialog will be displayed. Here, you can change the name which will appear for your playlist share. The following strings will be replaced when playlists are published: %a Replaced with the program's name: Totem Movie Player. %h Replaced with your computer's host name. %u Replaced with your username. %U Replaced with your real name. %% Replaced with a literal percent sign. You can also select the Use encrypted transport protocol checkbox if you wish to encrypt the shared playlists when they're transmitted over the network. Once you're done, click Close. To Publish Playlists With the plugin enabled, you do not need to explicitly publish playlists; they are automatically made available on the network as a Zeroconf website. To Browse your Neighborhood To view the shared playlists of others on your network, select Neighborhood from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar. If any playlists have been published on the network, they will be listed here. Double-click on a playlist to load and play it on your computer. Subtitle Downloader The Subtitle Downloader plugin allows you to find and download subtitle files from the OpenSubtitles service. Subtitles can only be downloaded for local movies; not audio files, DVDs, DVB streams, VCDs or HTTP streams. To search for subtitles for the currently playing movie, choose ViewDownload Movie Subtitles, which will display the Download Movie Subtitles dialog. Select the language in which you wish to have your subtitles from the drop-down list at the top of the dialog, then click on the Find button to search for subtitles for the current movie. Subtitles are found on the basis of the movie's content, rather than its filename or tags. Search results are listed in the tree view in the middle of the dialog. Currently, subtitles can only be used with a movie by reloading the movie with the subtitles, so after selecting the subtitle file you wish to download, click on the Play with Subtitle button to download the subtitles and reload the movie. Downloaded subtitle files are cached (in ~/.cache/totem/subtitles, by default) so that they do not need to be downloaded again when playing the movie again. When downloading new subtitles for a movie, any previously downloaded subtitles for that movie are deleted. Thumbnail The Thumbnail plugin sets Totem Movie Player's main window icon to a thumbnail of the current movie, and updates the icon when new movies are loaded. If a thumbnail doesn't exist for the current movie (or if you're playing an audio file), the main window icon will be reset to the Totem Movie Player logo. Video Disc Recorder The Video Disc Recorder plugin allows you to burn the current playlist to a DVD or VCD using Brasero. To burn the current playlist, choose MovieCreate Video Disc. A Brasero dialog will be displayed, giving options for converting the movies to the appropriate format and burning them to disc. For more information, see the Brasero documentation. YouTube Browser The YouTube Browser plugin allows you to search and browse YouTube, and play YouTube videos directly in Totem Movie Player. With the plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select YouTube from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the YouTube sidebar. To search for a YouTube video, enter your search terms in the entry at the top of the sidebar, then click Find. The search results will be listed in the tree view below. More results will be loaded automatically as you scroll down the list. To play a video, double-click it in the results list, or choose Add to Playlist from its context menu. When a video is played, a list of related videos will automatically be loaded in the Related Videos page of the YouTube sidebar. YouTube videos can be opened in a web browser by choosing Open in Web Browser from their context menu. This will open the video in its original location on the YouTube website. D-Bus Service The D-Bus Service plugin broadcasts notifications of which track is playing in Totem Movie Player on the D-Bus session bus. Applications such as Gajim can listen for such notifications and respond accordingly by, for example, updating your instant messaging status message to display the video currently being played in Totem Movie Player. Preferences To modify the preferences of Totem Movie Player, choose Edit Preferences . General Networking Select network connection speed from the Connection speed drop-down list. Text Subtitles Automatically load subtitle files: select this option to automatically load any subtitle files with the same filename as a movie when the movie is loaded. Font: select this option to change the font used to display subtitles. Encoding: select this option to change the encoding used to display subtitles. Display Display Select the resize option if you want Totem Movie Player to automatically resize the window to the size of the video when a new video is loaded. Select the screensaver option if you want to allow the screensaver to activate when playing audio files. Some monitors with integrated speakers may stop playing music when the screensaver is activated. Visual Effects Visual: select this option to show visual effects while an audio file is playing. Type of visualization: select type of visualization from the drop-down list. Visualization size: select visualization size from the drop-down list. Color balance Brightness: use the slider to specify the level of brightness. Contrast: use the slider to specify the level of contrast. Saturation: use the slider to specify the level of saturation. Hue: use the slider to specify the level of hue. You may use the Reset to Defaults button to reset the color balance controls to their default positions. Audio Audio Output Select audio output type from the Audio output type drop-down list. About <application>Totem Movie Player</application> Totem Movie Player is written by Bastien Nocera (hadess@hadess.net), Julien Moutte (julien@moutte.net) for the GStreamer backend, and Guenter Bartsch (guenter@users.sourceforge.net). To find more information about Totem Movie Player, please visit the Totem Movie Player website. To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Totem Movie Player application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this link, or in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/totem/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012316541441022445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/log-close.page0000644000373100047300000000163512300453753025440 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranitev dnevnik, ki ga trenutno gledate, iz stranskega pladnja. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zapiranje dnevnika

Zaprite dnevnik, ki ga trenutno gledate s CtrlW ali s klikom na DatotekaZapri. To ga odstrani iz stranskega pladnja dokler ponovno ne odprete dnevnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/log-view.page0000644000373100047300000000225412300453753025303 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpiranje in ogled dnevnikom. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Odpiranje dnevnika

Odprite dnevnik s klikom na DatotekaOdpri. Vaši odprti dnevniki bodo prikazani v stranskem pladnju, levo od glavnega področja. Dnevnik si lahko ogledate v stranskem pladnju tako, da kliknete nanj.

Nekatere dnevnike lahko razširite. To vam bo prikazalo seznam datumov. S klikom na enega od datumov si lahko ogledate le vrstice dnevnika iz tega datuma namesto celotnega dnevnika.

Dnevniki, ki jih imate odprte ob končanju, bodo odprti ob ponovnem zagonu programa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000301512300453753026267 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvod v Sistemski dnevnik GNOME. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod

Pregledovalnik dnevniških datotek je grafični pregledovalnik z meniji, ki ga lahko uporabite za ogled in nadziranje sistemskih dnevnikov. Pregledovalnik dnevniških datotek vsebuje zmožnosti, ki vam lahko pomagajo pri upravljanju dnevnikov, vključno z nadzornikom dnevnikov in prikazom statistike dnevnika.

Pregledovalnik dnevniških datotek je uporaben, če ste novi pri skrbništvu sistema, ker zagotavlja enostavnejši, uporabniku bolj prijazen prikaz vaših dnevniških datotek. Uporaben je tudi za izkušene skrbnike, saj vsebuje nadzornik za stalno nadziranje ključnih dnevnikov.

Pregledovalnik dnevniških datotek je uporaben le za tiste, ki imajo dostop do datotek sistemskega dnevnika, kar običajno zahteva skrbniški dostop.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/index.page0000644000373100047300000000046712300453753024665 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pomoč za pregledovalnik dnevnikov
Delo s <app>Pregledovalnikom dnevniških datotek</app>
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/log-search.page0000644000373100047300000000331112300453753025571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Iščite besedilo v dnevniku, ki si ga trenutno ogledujete. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Iskanje po dnevniku

Za iskanje po dnevniku, ki si ga trenutno ogledujete.

Vrstico Iskanje lahko odprete s pritiskom na CtrlF ali s klikom na PogledNajdi. Vrstica bo bila prikazana pod dnevnikom.

Vnesite iskalni izraz v polje in pritisnite Enter za ogled prvega rezultata.

Iskanje je občutljivo na velikost črk

Za brskanje med rezultati uporabite Najdi predhodno in Najdi naslednje.

Če rezultata ne vidite poudarjenega poskusite z brskanjem proti levi.

Pritisnite Esc za skritje iskalne vrstice, ko končate z iskanjem.

Iskalno vrstico lahko skrijete le, če ste trenutno osredotočeni na iskalno polje. Vrstica se bo skrila, če si ogledate drug dnevnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/pref-font-size.page0000644000373100047300000000253312300453753026422 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Poveča ali zmanjša velikost besedila Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Sprememba velikost pisave

Velikost pisave v kateri je prikazana dnevniška datoteka lahko povečate, pomanjšate ali ponastavite:

Poveča velikost pisave

Kliknite PogledPribližaj ali pritisnite Ctrl+

 Zmanjša velikost pisave

Kliknite PogledOddalji ali pritisnite Ctrl-

 Ponastavi na privzeto velikost

Kliknite PogledObičajna velikost ali pritisnite Ctrl0

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/log-copy.page0000644000373100047300000000176612300453753025312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kopiranje besedila iz dnevnika Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Kopiranje dnevnika

S kazalcem označite odsek dnevnika, ki ga želite kopirati, in pritisnite CtrlC ali kliknite UrediKopiraj.

Pritisnite CtrlA ali kliknite UrediIzberi vse, za izbiro vsega besedila v dneveniku, ki si ga trenutno ogledujete.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-log/log-filter.page0000644000373100047300000000643012300453753025616 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vključitev ali izključitev prikaznih vrstic s pomočjo logičnih izrazov. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Filtriranje dnevnika

Pregledovalnik dnevnikov vam omogoča filtriranje vsebine na osnovi logičnih izrazov. Za nastavitev ali upravljanje novega filtra:

Open the filter manager dialog by clicking Filters: Manage Filters.

Kliknite Dodaj za dodajane novega filtra ali izbiro obstoječega filtra in kliknite Lastnosti za njegovo urejanje.

Izpolnite obrazec ali uredite polja, ki jih želite spremeniti:

Ime:

Novo določilo za filter

Logični izraz:

Kaj naj filter filtrira

 Poudarek:

Ta možnost poudari vrstico, ki vsebuje logični izraz

Ozadje:

To je barva pisave

Privzeta barva pisave je črna, ki ne poudarja besedila.

 Ospredje:

To je barva poudarjanja

Privzeta barva poudarjanja je črna, ki kot rezultat prikaže neprekinjene črne črne, zato bi jo bilo pametno spremeniti.

 Skrij:

Ta možnost iz prikazanega dnevnika skrije vrstice, ki vsebujejo logične izraze

Kliknite Uveljavi za shranitev novega filtra ali shranitev sprememb obstoječega

V pogovornem oknu upravljalnika filtrov kliknite Zapri za uveljavitev sprememb.

Izberite polje poleg imena filtra, ki ga želite omogočiti v Filtri:. Če želite videti le filtre, ki imajo omogočeno Poudarjanje in so izbrani, izberite Filteri:Pokaži le ujemanja.

Če obstaja spor med filtrom skrivanja in poudarjanja, bo vrstica morda prikazana kot prazna vrstica.

Če odstranite izbiro filtra medtem ko si ogledujete le ujemanja, bo dnevnik prikazal vrstice brez oblikovanja ne glede na to ali so bile prej skrite ali poudarjene. Filter bi moral biti ponastavljen, ko izberete poudarjen filter.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-4pages.page0000644000373100047300000000255412307647153024310 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4-stranska knjižica Natisne 4 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 4 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite število strani v tem vrstnem redu: 4, 1, 2, 3

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/reload.page0000644000373100047300000000203112307647153023062 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vaš dokument bo bil samodejno znova naložen, če ga drug program spreminja, medtem ko ga gledate. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zakaj se dokument ponovno nalaga?

V primeru, da Pregledovalnik dokumentov zazna, da se je odprti dokument spremenil (morda zato, ker ga je spremenil drug program), bo samodejno znova naložil dokument in vam prikazal najnovejšo različico.

V primeru, da je bil dokument med vašim pregledovanjem izbrisan, bo v pregledovalniku dokumentov ostal odprt.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/annotations-save.page0000644000373100047300000000245012307647153025112 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako shraniti svoje zabeležke. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Shranjevanje kopije datoteke PDF z zabeležkami

Za shranjevanje kopije vašega PDF-ja z zabeležkami za poznejši ogled s pregledovalnikom dokumentom ali drugim pregledovalnikom dokumenta, ki podpira zabeležke:

DatotekaShrani kopijo

Izberite ime in mapo za shranjevanje datoteke in nato kliknite Natisni. PDF bo shranjen v mapi po vaši izbiri.

Zabeležke so dodane v skladu z določilom PDF. Zato bi jih morala prebrati večina bralnikov PDF. Pregledovalnik dokumentov Okular jih ne podpira. Znano je, da jih podpira Adobe Reader.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/singlesided-9-12pages.page0000644000373100047300000000446612307647153025532 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 9-stranska ali 12-stranska knjižica Natisni 9, 10, 11 ali 12 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 9 stranska do 12 stranska knjižica

V primeru da imate 9, 10 ali 11 stranski dokument PDF, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani, da bo dokument imel 12 strani. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite število strani v tem redu: 12, 1, 2, 11, 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/synctex-beamer.page0000644000373100047300000000361712307647153024555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba SyncTex z LateX razredom Beamer. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Beamer s SyncTex

Beamer je razred LaTeX za ustvarjanje prosojnic za predstavitve.

Iskanje naprej in nazaj lahko izvajate v predstavitvi Beamer-LaTeX na podoben način kot iskanje skozi druge datoteke TeX, ki so bile prevedene s SyncTex. Vendar vas iskanje pripelje na ustrezen okvir (prosojnico) in ne nujno na povezano vrstico besedila. Ta razlika je podrobno razložena spodaj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-13pages.page0000644000373100047300000000677512307647153024401 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisne 13 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 13 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Pod Osbeg izberite Strani in vtipkajte: 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko se je stran natisnila, vzemite papir in ga dajte nazaj v tiskalnik. Pri tem pazite, da jo pravilno obrnete (stran 2 bo natisnjena na drugi strani).

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Zaprite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani in vnesite 2.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani in v meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Za tiskanje strani 3 znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V zavihku Splošno okna v izbirni meni Strani vnesite 3.

V zavihku Nastavitev strani spremenite Ureditev stani na Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko se je stran 3 natisnila, postavite papir nazaj v tiskalnik pri čemer se prepričajte, da ste ga pravilno obrnili. Na drugo stran bosta natisnjeni strani 4 in 13.

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V izbirni meni Strani v zavihku Splošno vnesite 4, 13.

V zavihku Nastavitev strani nastavite Ureditev strani na Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V meni izbire Strani vnesite strani 8, 9, 10, 7, 6, 11, 12, 5 in nastavite Urejanje strani na Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 16 stransko knjižico. Morda želite dodati svojemu dokumentu dodati 3 prazne strani, da bo imel 16 strani. Za to lahko:

Z uporabo LibreOffice Writer ustvarite 3 strani dolg prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 16 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000472612307647153023273 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pokažite, skrijte ali uredite orodno vrstico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Orodna vrstica
Pokaži ali skrij orodno vrstico

Kliknite PogledOrodna vrstica.

Privzeto orodna vrstica vsebuje le osnovna orodja:

Predhodna in Naslednja za premikanje od strani do strani.

Orodje za prilagoditev ravni približanja.

Orodje 'izbira strani'.

Orodno vrstico lahko spremenite, če so vam ljubša druga orodja.

Dodajanje, odstranjevanje in preurejanje orodij v orodni vrstici.

Prikaz orodno vrstico.

Kliknite UrediOrodna vrstica.

Urejevalnik orodje vrstice vsebuje predmete, ki niso v orodni vrstici in predmet ločnika.

Za dodajanje novih predmetov v orodno vrstico:

jih povlecite iz urejevalnika orodne vrstice v orodno vrstico.

 Za odstranitev predmetov iz orodne vrstice:

povlecite jih iz orodne vrstice v urejevalnik orodne vrstice.

 Za preurejanje predmetov v orodni vrstici:

povlecite jih na nov položaj v orodni vrstici.

Ko ste končali z urejanjem orodne vrstice, kliknite gumb Zapri v oknu urejevalnika orodne vrstice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-6pages.page0000644000373100047300000000500012307647153024277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 6-stranska knjižica Natisne 6 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 6 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite števila strani v tem vrstnem redu: 6, 3, 4, 5, 2

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so se vse strani natisnile vzemite papir na katerem je stran 2 in ga postavite nazaj v tiskalnik. Bodite pozorni, da ste jo pravilno obrnili (stran 1 bo natisnjena na drugi strani).

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Pod Obseg izberite možnost Strani in vtipkajte: 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 8 stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati 2 prazni strani, da bo 8 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z uporabo LibreOffice Writer ustvarite 2 strani dolg prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 8 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/singlesided-13-16pages.page0000644000373100047300000000441512307647153025603 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisni 13, 14, 15 ali 16 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 13 stranska do 16 stranska knijžica

V primeru da imate 13, 14 ali 15 stranski dokument PDF, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani, da bo dokument imel 16 strani. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite številke strani v tem redu:

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/presentations.page0000644000373100047300000000366712307647153024532 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako predvajati predstavitve. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Predstavitve
Začenjanje predstavitve

Za začetek predstavitve:

Odpri datoteko

Kliknite PogledPredstavitev (ali pritisnite F5).

Predstavitev bo prikazana na celozaslonski način.
Premikanje skozi predstavitev

Za premik na naslednjo prosojnico uporabite preslednico, →, ↓ ali levi miškin klik.

Za premik na predhodno prosojnico uporabite ←, ↑ ali desni miškin klik.

Za premikanje nazaj in naprej po predstavitvi lahko uporabite drsni kolešček.

Uporabite ubežno tipko za končanje predstavitve.

Podprte vrste datotek predstavitev

Za predstavitve lahko uporabite naslednje vrste datotek:

Ahriv Comic Book (.cbr in .cbz)

Od naprave neodvisna oblika datoteke (.dvi)

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

Predstavitev OpenOffice (.odp)

Prenosljiva vrsta dokumenta (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-12pages.page0000644000373100047300000000247512307647153024371 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisne 12 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 12 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite število strani v tem redu: 12, 1, 2, 11, 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/print-select.page0000644000373100047300000000240012307647154024226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisnite le določene strani ali le obseg strani. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tiskanje le določenih strani

Za tiskanje le določenih strani v dokumentu:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

V zavihku Splošno okna Tiskanje v odseku Obseg izberite Strani.

V besedilno polje vpišite števila strani, ki jih želite natisniti, ločena z vejicami. Uporabite pomišljaj za tiskanje obsega več strani.

Na primer, če v besedilno polje Strani vnesete "1, 3, 5-7, 9" , bodo natisnjene strani 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 in 9.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/synctex-support.page0000644000373100047300000000207412307647154025033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako dodati podporo za SyncTex. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Nastavitev SyncTex

Za podporo SyncTex morajo biti nameščeni naslednji paketi:

texlive-extra-utils

gedit-plugins

V Gedit omogočite vstavek SyncTex:

Kliknite na zavihek UrediMožnostiVstavki.

Izberite SyncTex.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/singlesided-3-4pages.page0000644000373100047300000000435612307647154025444 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3 ali 4-stranska knjižica Natisne 3 ali 4 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 3 stranska ali 4 stranska knjižica

V primeru, da imate 3 stranski dokument PDF, dodajte prazno stran, da bo dokument imel 4 strani. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazno stran.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite število strani v tem vrstnem redu: 4, 1, 2, 3

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/default-settings.page0000644000373100047300000000244512307647154025110 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Save current settings as default for new documents. Sindhu S sindhus@live.in

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Change default settings

When a document is opened for the first time, default settings, such as zoom and page view preferences, are applied. Any changes you make to these settings are saved for the document.

You can save the settings which you are currently using as default for all new documents by selecting Edit Save Current Settings as Default or press CtrlT.

The new default settings do not override settings of previously opened documents, they are applied only to documents opened for the first time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/singlesided-17-20pages.page0000644000373100047300000000441112307647154025577 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisni 17, 18, 19 ali 20 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 17 stranska do 20 stranska knijžica

V primeru da imate 17, 18 ali 19 stranski dokument PDF, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani, da bo dokument imel 20 strani. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite številke strani v tem redu:

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-8pages.page0000644000373100047300000000255112307647154024312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 8-stranska knjižica Natisne 8 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 8 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite število strani v tem vrstnem redu: 8, 1, 2, 7, 6, 3, 4, 5

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/commandline.page0000644000373100047300000000453112307647154024112 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ukazna vrstica Ukaz evince lahko odpre poljubno število datotek na določenih straneh in v različnih načinih. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazna vrstica

Za začenjanje Pregledovalnika dokumentov iz ukazne vrstice, vpišite evince. Določeno datoteko lahko odprete z vnašanjem imena datoteke po ukazu evince:

evince datoteka.pdf

Več datotek lahko odprete s tipkanjem imen datotek po ukazu evince, pri čemer ločujte imena datotek s presledkom:

evince datoteka1.pdf datoteka2.pdf

Pregledovalnik dokumentov podpira tudi upravljanje datotek na spletu. Na primer, po ukazu evince lahko podatke mesto datoteke na spletu:

evince http://www.claymath.org/millennium/P_vs_NP/pvsnp.pdf
Odpiranje dokumenta na določeni strani

Uporabite lahko stikalo --page-label za odprtje dokumenta na določeni strani. Na primer, za odprtje dokumenta na strani 3 vpišite:

evince --page-label=3 datoteka.pdf

Oznaka strani bi morala biti v enaki obliki kot številka strani prikazana v orodni vrstici Pregledovalnika dokumentov.

Odpiranje dokumenta v celozaslonskem načinu evince -- celozaslonska datoteka.pdf
Odpiranje dokumenta v načinu predstavitve evine -- predstavitevena datoteka.pdf
Odpiranje dokumenta v načinu predogleda evince - predogled datoteke.pdf
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/openerror.page0000644000373100047300000000165512307647154023643 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Napaka med odpiranjem datoteke. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zakaj ne morem odpreti datoteke?

V primeru da pokusite odpreti vrsto dokumenta, ki ga pregledovalnik dokumentov ne prepozna, boste prejeli sporočilo o napaki "Ni mogoče odpreti dokumenta". Kliknite Zapri za vrnitev v okno Pregledovalnika dokumentov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/annotations-disabled.page0000644000373100047300000000153212307647154025724 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zabeležke lahko dodate le datotekam PDF. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ne morete dodati zabeležk?

Zabeležke lahko dodate le datotekam PDF. V primeru, da je vaša datoteka v vrsti, ki ni PDF, bo bila možnost za dodajanje zabeležk siva (onemogočeno).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/textselection.page0000644000373100047300000000277512307647154024526 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ko kopirate besedilo, je prilepljeno besedilo lahko drugačno kot izbrano. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zakaj se izbrano besedilo ni pravilno kopiralo?

V primeru da s pregledovalnikom besedila poudarite in kopirate besedilo in ga nato prilepite v drug program, se lahko oblikovanje spremeni. Vsebuje lahko tudi drugačne črke kot izvirni izbor. To se pogosto zgodi pri kopiranju besedila iz dokumenta PDF z več stolpci.

Ta težava se zgodi zaradi načina kako nekatere vrste dokumentov upravljajo z besedilom. Dejansko besedilo v dokumentu je shranjeno na drugačen način kot je prikazano. To lahko povzroči, da kopija ni videti kot pričakovano.

Na žalost ne obstaja pravi način za popravilo te težave. Kopiranje manj besedila hkrati ali kopiranje besedila v urejevalnik besedila lahko to težavo zmanjša. Urejevalnik besedila lahko zaženete s klikom DejavnostiProgramiPripomočkiGedit.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/opening.page0000644000373100047300000000335412307647154023265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako odpreti dokument. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Odpiranje dokumenta

Dokument lahko odprete na enega od naslednjih načinov:

Dvokliknite na ikono datoteke v Upravljalniku datotek.

Dvojni klik v Pregledovalniku dokumentov privzeto odpre datoteke PDF, PostScript, .djvu, .dvi in arhiva Comic Book.

Desno kliknite na ikono na namizju ali v Upravljalniku datotek in kliknite Odpri zPregledovalnik dokumentov.

V primeru, da je okno ogleda dokumenta že odprto, lahko:

povlečete ikono datoteke v okno iz namizja ali Upravljalnika datotek. Nova datoteka se bo odprla v novem oknu (pod pogojem, da Pregledovalnik dokumentov podpira vrsto datotek).

V menijski vrstici izberite DatotekaOdpri. V pogovornem oknu Odpri dokument izberite datoteko, ki jo želite odpreti in kliknite Odpri. Datoteka se bo odprla v novem oknu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/singlesided-5-8pages.page0000644000373100047300000000443412307647154025447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 5 stranska ali 4-stranska knjižica Natisne 5, 6, 7 ali 8 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 5 do 8 stranska knjižica

V primeru da imate 5, 6 ali 7 stranski dokument PDF, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani, da bo dokument imel 8 strani. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite število strani v tem vrstnem redu: 8, 1, 2, 7, 6, 3, 4, 5

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/license.page0000644000373100047300000000271712307647154023252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pravni podatki Dovoljenje

To delo se razširja pod licenco CreativeCommons Attribution-Deljenje priznanje avtorstva 3.0 neprenosljivo.

Lahko:

<em>Delite</em>

Kopirate, distribirate in priobčujete delo javnosti.

 <em>Predelate</em>

Prilagodite delo.

Pod naslednjimi pogoji:

<em>Priznanje avtorstva</em>

Delo morate priznati na način, kot ga je navedel avtor ali lastnik licence (toda ne na način, ki predlaga, da podirajo vas ali vašo uporabo dela).

 <em>Deljenje pod enakimi pogoji</em>

Če spremenite, prilagodite ali gradite na tem delu, lahko nastalo delo distribuirate le pod enako, podobno ali združljivo licenco.

Za polno besedilo licence si oglejte spletišče CreativeCommons ali si preberite polno zavezo Commons.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000426512307647154023653 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako in kje poročati težave. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Poročanje hrošča v <app>pregledovalniku dokumentov</app>.

Pregledovalnik dokumentov vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabljeni ste k sodelovanju. Če opazite težavo, lahko prijavite poročilo o hrošču. Za prijavo hrošča pojdite na .

To je sistem sledenja hroščev, kjer uporabniki in razvijalci lahko prijavijo podrobnosti o hroščih, sesutjih in zahtevajo izboljšave.

Za sodelovanje potrebujete račun, ki vam bo dal zmožnost dostopa, poročanja hroščev in delanja opomb. Vpisati se morate tudi zato, da lahko preko e-pošte prejemate posodobitve o stanju vašega hrošča. Če računa še nimate, kliknite Nov račun za njegovo ustvarjanje.

Ko imate račun, se prijavite, kliknite na Poročaj hroščaJedroevince. Pred poročanjem hrošča preberite smernice o poročanju hroščev in prebrskajte in preverite, če hrošč že obstaja.

Za poročanje hrošča v meniju Sestavni del izberite sestavni del. Če niste prepričani, v katerem sestavnem delu je hrošč, izberite splošno.

V primeru da zahtevate izboljšavo izberite v meniju Resnost, izberite izboljšava Izpolnite odseka povzetek in opis in kliknite Commit.

Vašemu poročilu bo dano število ID in njegovo stanje bo med upravljanjem posodobljeno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/bookmarks.page0000644000373100047300000000142012307647154023606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kot zaznamke lahko uporabite zabeležke. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zaznamki

Pregledovalnik dokumentov nima sistema zaznamkov. Vendar pa lahko kot zaznamke uporabite zabeležke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/editing.page0000644000373100047300000000213212307647154023242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za urejanje datotek pregledovalnika dokumentov ne morete uporabiti. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ali lahko v pregledovalniku dokumentov urejam dokumente?

Pregledovalnika dokumentov ni mogoče uporabiti za spreminjanje dokumentov. Uporabiti morate ustrezen program za urejanje vrst datotek, ki jih želite spremeniti.

Datoteke PDF in PostScript (.ps) naj običajno ne bi bile urejanje, toda na voljo so programi za urejanje datotek PDF. Poskusite na primer pdfedit.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/print-2sided.page0000644000373100047300000000217712307647154024134 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dvostransko tiskanje in tiskanje več strani na stran. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dvostransko tiskanje in tiskanje več stranmi na stran

Natisnete lahko obe strani vsakega lista papirja:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Pojdite v zavihek Nastavitev strani okna tiskanja in s spustnega seznama izberite možnost Dvostransko.

Natisnete lahko več kot eno stran dokumenta na vsako stran papirja. Za to uporabite možnost Strani na stran.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/forms.page0000644000373100047300000000245612307647154022756 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Delo z izpolnjivimi obrazci. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Obrazci

Po izpolnitvi vzajemnega obrazca lahko krmarite od polja do polja s klikom s svojo miško. Ko ste končali z izpolnjevanjem besedilnega polja, pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Izbiro v drsljivem seznamskem polju lahko naredite s klikanjem na polje seznama in drsenjem do svoje izbire.

Nekatere dele obrazca boste morali morda izpolniti ročno po njihovem tiskanju. Na primer, morda morate določene stvari obkrožiti ali obrazec na enem ali več mestih podpisati. V primeru, da želite to storiti elektronsko, boste morda želeli poskusiti Xournal.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-7pages.page0000644000373100047300000000441512307647154024312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 7-stranska knjižica Natisne 7 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 7 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite števila strani v tem vrstnem redu: 7, 2, 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Vnesite števila strani v tem vrstnem redu: 6, 3, 4, 5

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Urejanje strani spremenite izbiro na Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 8 stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati prazno stran, da bo 8 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF z uporabo PDF-Shuffler in postavite prazno stran na konec.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 8 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/finding.page0000644000373100047300000000332612307647154023243 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Poišči besedo ali reklo v dokumentu. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Iskanje besedila v dokumentu

Za prikaz iskalnega polja kliknite UrediIšči ali pritisnite CtrlF ali /.

Vpišite besedo, ki jo želite najti. Iskanje se bo začelo samodejno.

Gumba Najdi predhodno in Najdi naslednje vam omogočata preskakovanje iz enega rezultata iskanja do drugega.

Za skritje iskalne vrstice kliknite kjerkoli v dokumentu.

V primeru, da se beseda ali fraza, ki jo iščete v celotnemu dokumentu ne pojavi, bo pregledovalnik dokumentov javil Ni najdeno V primeru, da se v dokumentu besedilo ali fraza pojavi vsaj enkrat, vas bo Evince obvestil kolikokrat se iskana beseda pojavi na vsaki strani. To je vidno, če skočite z enega rezultata na drug kot je opisano zgoraj ali drsite skozi dokument.

Iskati je mogoče le po dokumentih PDF. V nekaterih dokumentih PDF ni mogoče iskati, ker je njihovo besedilo v dokumentu kodirano kot slika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/singlesided-npages.page0000644000373100047300000000500612307647154025367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisni knjižico z več kot 20 stranmi. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 n stranska knjižica

n je večkratnik števila 4.

V primeru, da število strani v vašem dokumentu PDF ni večkratnik števila 4, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani (1, 2, 3), da bo število strani v dokumentu večkratnik števila 4. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Za tiskanje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite števila strani v tem redu: n, 1, 2, n-1, n-2, 3, 4, n-3, n-4, 5, 6, n-5, n-6, 7, 8, n-7, n-8, 9, 10, n-9, n-10, 11, 12, n-11 ...... dokler niste vnesti n-število strani.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev pod Dvo stransko izberite eno stransko.

V meniju Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Lihe strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so vse strani natisnjene, jih obrnite okoli in postavite nazaj v tiskalnik.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Le natisni izberite Sode strani.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/print-order.page0000644000373100047300000000336012307647154024070 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za tiskanje v želenem vrstnem redu uporabite možnosti Zberi in Obratno. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tiskanje kopij v pravilnem vrstnem redu
Obratno

Tiskalniki običajno najprej natisnejo prvo stran in nazadnje zadnjo stran zato bodo strani v obratnem vrstnem redu, ko jih poberete s tiskalnika.

Za obratni vrstni red:

DatotekaNatisni

V zavihku Splošno okna tiskanja pod Kopije izberite Obratno. Najprej bo natisnjena zadnja stran in tako naprej.
Zbiranje

V primeru da tiskate več kot eno kopijo dokumenta, bodo kopije privzeto združene po števili strani (najprej pridejo ven kopije strani eni, nato kopije strani dva, itd.). Zbiranje bo natisnilo vsako kopijo naenkrat v celoti.

Za zbiranje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

V zavihku Splošno okna tiskanje pod Kopije izberite Zberi.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-16pages.page0000644000373100047300000000254512307647154024374 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje 16 stranske knjižice. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 16 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite številke strani v tem redu:

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-15pages.page0000644000373100047300000000220112307647154024360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisne 15 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 15 stranska knjižica

Lažje je natisniti 16 stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati prazno stran, da bo 16 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazno stran.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 16 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000137612307647154024351 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvod v Evince pregledovalnik dokumentov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod

Evince je pregledovalnik dokumentov. Oglejte si za seznam vrst datotek, ki si jih lahko ogledate.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-3pages.page0000644000373100047300000000354112307647154024305 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3-stranska knjižica Natisne 3 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 3 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani. Vnesite števila strani v tem vrstnem redu: 3, 2, 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 4 stransko knjižico Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati prazno stran, da bo 4 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazno stran.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 4 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/synctex.page0000644000373100047300000000217012307647154023316 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podpora SyncTeX je na voljo Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Kaj je SyncTex?

SyncTeX je način, ki omogoča usklajevanje med izvorno datoteko TeX in nastalim izhodom PDF.

Prikaz videa Za uskladitev pritisnite Ctrl.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/movingaround.page0000644000373100047300000001352712307647154024341 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Krmarjenje, drsenje in približevanje. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Premikanje po dokumentu

Po vsaki strani dokumenta se lahko premikate s katerimkoli od naslednjih načinov:

Drsenje navzgor in navzdol z miškinim kolescem. Za premik naokoli po strani le s premikom miške:

Desno kliknite na stran in izberite Samodejno drsenje.

Za drsenje navzdol premaknite miškin kazalec proti dnu strani. Hitrost drsenja je odvisna od tega kako globoko navzdol po oknu greste.

Za zaustavitev samodejnega drsenja kliknite kjerkoli v dokumentu.

Uporabite drsnik v oknu dokumenta.

Uporabite tipki navzgor in navzdol na svoji tipkovnici.

Z vlečenjem strani okoli z vašo miško kot da jo držite. Za to:

Premaknite miškin kazalnik nad stranjo, držite srednji miškin gumb in ga vlecite naokoli.

V primeru da nimate srednjega miškinega gumba, hkrati držite levi in desni miškin gumb in nato vlecite.
Brskanje med stranmi

Med strani v dokumentu se lahko premikate na enega od naslednjih načinov:

Kliknite gumb Predhodna ali Naslednja na orodni vrstici.

Uporabite meni Pojdi:

PojdiNaslednja stran

PojdiPredhodna stran

Pritisnite tipki CtrlStran navzgor ali CtrlStran navzdol na svoji tipkovnici.

Za ogled določene strani:

V orodje 'izbira strani' v orodni vrstici vnesite številko strani in pritisnite Enter.

Če želite iti na začetek dokumenta:

Kliknite PojdiPrva stran. Lahko tudi pritisnete CtrlDomov na svoji tipkovnici.

Kliknite PojdiZadnja stran ali pritisnite CtrlKonec na svoji tipkovnici.

Za premik deset strani hkrati pritisnite ShiftStran navzgor ali ShiftStran navzdol.

Privzeto se lahko premaknete za eno stran naenkrat. V primeru da se želite med stranmi premikati z drsenjem ali vlečenjem, kliknite PogledNeprekinjeno.
Približevanje in oddaljevanje

Za približevanje kliknite PogledPribližaj ali uporabite tipkovno bližnjico Ctrl+.

Za oddaljevanje kliknite PogledOddalji ali uporabite tipkovno bližnjico Ctrl-.

Dodatno lahko storite nekaj od naslednjega:

Držite Ctrl in uporabite drsni kolešček miške za približanje.

izberite želen odstotek približanja iz spustnega menija nad oknom.

Možnost Najboljše prileganje bo strani dokumenta prilagodilo celotno višino okna.

Možnosti Prilagodi širini strani bo s stranjo dokumenta zapolnila celotno širino okna.

V primeru, da želite videti dve strani hkrati eno ob drugi, kot v knjigi, kliknite PogledDvojno.

Za ogled dokumenta lahko uporabite svoj celoten zaslon:

Kliknite PogledCelozaslonski način ali pritisnite F11.

Za izhod iz celozaslonskega načina:

Pritisnite F11 ali Ubežno tipko

ali kliknite gumb Zapusti celozaslonski način na vrhu zaslona.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000224512307647154023262 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izboljšajte Pregledovalnik dokumentov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte pri razvoju

Pregledovalnik dokumentov razvija in vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Če želite pomagati pri razvoju Pregledovalnika dokumentov, lahko stopite v stik z razvijalci preko kanala irc ali preko našega dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/password.page0000644000373100047300000000215612307647154023467 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Upravljanje s PDF-ji zaščitenimi z geslom. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Z geslom zaščiteni dokumenti

V primeru, da poskusite odpreti dokument PDF, ki je zaščiten z geslom, se bo pojavilo okno, ki vas bo vprašalo za vnos gesla dokumenta. Vnesite geslo in kliknite Odpri dokument.

Obstajata dve vrsti gesel:

Za ogled dokumenta je zahtevano uporabniško geslo.

Za ogled in tiskanje dokumenta je zahtevano glavno geslo.

Ta gesla nastavi oseba, ki je ustvarila dokument.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000332712307647154023623 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prevedote Pregledovalnik dokumentov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte prevesti

Pregledovalnik dokumentov in njegovo dokumentacijo prevaja skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Obstaja veliko jezikov za katere prevodi še vedno manjkajo.

Za začetek prevajanja boste morali ustvariti račun in se pridružitiprevajalski ekipi za svoj jezik. S tem boste pridobili zmožnost pošiljanja novih prevodov.

S prevajalci GNOME se lahko pogovarjate s pomočjo omrežjairc. Ljudje na kanalu prihajajo s celega sveta zato zaradi časovne razlike odziva morda ne boste dobili nemudoma.

Namesto tega lahko stopite v stik s prevajalsko ekipo preko njihovega dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-14pages.page0000644000373100047300000000477212307647154024376 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisne 14 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 14 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vtipkajte števila strani v tem vrstnem redu 14, 3, 4, 13, 12, 5, 6, 11, 10, 7, 8, 9, 2

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so se vse strani natisnile vzemite papir na katerem je stran 2 in ga postavite nazaj v tiskalnik. Bodite pozorni, da ste jo pravilno obrnili (stran 1 bo natisnjena na drugi strani).

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Pod Obseg izberite možnost Strani in vtipkajte: 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 16 stransko knjižico. Morda želite dodati svojemu dokumentu dodati 2 prazni strani, da bo imel 16 strani. Za to lahko:

Z uporabo LibreOffice Writer ustvarite 2 strani dolg prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 16 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/noprint.page0000644000373100047300000000520412307647154023313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Avtor je morda omejil tiskanje dokumenta. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ne morem natisniti dokumenta
Mogoči vzroki za spodletelo tiskanje

Dokument se morda ne bo natisnil zaradi:

Težave s tiskalnikom ali

omejitve tiskanja datotek PDF.
Težave s tiskalnikom

Obstaja veliko razlogov zakaj tiskalnik morda ne deluje. Na primer, lahko mu zmanjka papirja ali črnila ali pa je odklopljen ali pokvarjen.

Preverite, če vaš tiskalnik pravilno tiska:

Kliknite na svoje ime v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Dvokliknite na tiskalnik na seznamu.

Kliknite na Natisni preizkusno stran. Stran bi morala biti poslana vašemu tiskalniku.

V primeru da to spodleti, si oglejte Pomoč tiskanja. Oglejte si tudi priročnik tiskalnika in poglejte, če lahko storite še kaj.
Omejitve tiskanja datotek PDF.

Nekateri dokumenti PDF imajo nastavitev, ki vam prepreči njihovo tiskanje. Avtorji lahko omejitev tiskanja omogočijo med pisanjem dokumenta. Pregledovalnik dokumentov to omejitev privzeto prezre, vendar morda želite preveriti, da ni bila onemogočena:

Pritisnite AltF2 za odprtje okna Poženi program.

V besedilno polje vpišite dconf-editor in kliknite Zaženi. Odprl se bo Urejevalnik nastavitev.

Brskajte do /org/gnome/evince s pomočjo stranskega pladnja.

Prepričajte se, da je možnost Prezri omejitve omogočena.

Pojdite nazaj v Pregledovalniku dokumentov in znova poskusite natisniti dokument.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/convertpdf.page0000644000373100047300000000350512307647154023776 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokument lahko pretvorite v PDF s "tiskanjem" v datoteko. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pretvarjanje dokumenta v PDF

Dokumente naslednjih vrsti lahko pretvorite v vrsto PDF:

Od naprave neodvisna oblika datoteke (.dvi)

PostScript (.ps)

To deluje z odpiranjem datoteke v Pregledovalniku dokumentov in "tiskanjem" dokumenta kot datoteko PDF.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni in pojdite v zavihek Splošno.

Izberite Natisni v datoteko v Izhodni vrsti izberite PDF.

Izberite ime in mapo za shranjevanje datotek in nato kliknite Natisni. PDF bo shranjen v mapi po vaši izbiri.

Besedila v datotekah PostScript ali .dvi običajno ne morete izbrati, to pa lahko storite v datotekah PDF. Pretvarjanje datotek .dvi ali PostScript v PDF besedila ne bo naredilo izberljivega. To je zato, ker besedilo ni shranjeno v datoteki (je le slika besedila), zato jih ni mogoče obnoviti in pretvoriti v datoteko PDF. Če želite, lahko za izločitev besedila iz datotek lahko uporabite programe za Optično prepoznavanje znakov (OCR).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/formats.page0000644000373100047300000000327112307647154023277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podprti so PDF, PostScript in več drugih vrst datotek. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podprte vrste datotek

Pregledovalnik dokumentov podpira naslednje vrste datotek:

Ahriv Comic Book (.cbr in .cbz)

Od naprave neodvisna oblika datoteke (.dvi)

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

Predstavitev OpenOffice (.odp)

Prenosljiva vrsta dokumenta (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)

Raztegljiva vektorska grafika (.svg)

Označena vrsta slikovne datoteke (.tiff, .tif)

Druge slikovne datoteke (.gif, .jpeg, .png)

V nekaterih Linux distribucijah vse vrste datotek privzeto niso podprte, zato morda ne boste mogli videti vseh vrst zgoraj.

Podpora za vrsto datotek se imenuje zaledje. V primeru, da dobite napako "Ni mogoče odpreti dokumenta", boste morda želeli preveriti ali je paket zaledja za to vrsto datotek nameščen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/synctex-compile.page0000644000373100047300000000176312307647154024753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako prevesti dokumente Tex s SyncTex Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Prevajanje TeX s SyncTex

Dodajanje vrstice \synctex=1 v uvod vaše datoteke TeX bo sprožilo usklajevanje s SyncTeX.

\documentclass{article} \synctex=1 \usepackage{fullpage} \begin{document} ... \end{document}

Nadomesto lahko zaženete ukaz pdflatex z možnostjo -synctex=1

pdflatex -synctex=1 vašaDatoteka.tex usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/convertPostScript.page0000644000373100047300000000273012307647154025336 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokument lahko pretvorite v PostScript. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pretvarjanje dokumenta v PostScript

V datoteke PostScript lahko pretvorite dokumente naslednjih vrst:

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

Prenosljiva vrsta dokumenta (.pdf)

Označena vrsta slikovne datoteke (.tiff, .tif)

To deluje z odpiranjem datoteke v Pregledovalniku dokumentov in "tiskanjem" dokumenta kot datoteko PostScript.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni in pojdite v zavihek Splošno.

Izberite Natisni v datoteko in kot Izhodno vrsto datotek izberite PostScript.

Izberite ima in mapo za shranjevanje datoteke in nato kliknite Natisni. Datoteka PostScript bo bila shranjena v izbrani mapi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/printing.page0000644000373100047300000000251112307647154023452 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako tiskati in pogosta vprašanja o tiskanju Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tiskanje dokumenta

Za tiskanje dokumenta:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

Izberite svoj tiskalnik s seznama

Kliknite Natisni.

Tiskanje je omogočeno za naslednje vrste datotek:

Od naprave neodvisna oblika datoteke (.dvi)

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

Prenosljiva vrsta dokumenta (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)

Označena vrsta slikovne datoteke (.tiff, .tif)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-11pages.page0000644000373100047300000000435512307647154024370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisne 11 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 11 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vtipkajte števila strani v tem vrstnem redu 11, 2, 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Vtipkajte števila strani v tem vrstnem redu 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7, 2

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 12-stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati prazno stran, da bo 12 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF z uporabo PDF-Shuffler in postavite prazno stran na konec.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 12 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/synctex-search.page0000644000373100047300000000472712307647154024573 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preklapljanje med pregledovlanikom dokumentov in Gedit. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Iskanje s SyncTex

Ko svojo datoteko TeX prevedete s SyncTex, boste lahko iskali. SyncTex zagotavlja celo podporo iskanja naprej in nazaj iz vključene datoteke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/print-differentsize.page0000644000373100047300000000275512307647154025625 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje dokumenta na papirju drugačne velikosti, oblike ali usmeritve. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Spreminjanje velikosti papirja za tiskanje

V primeru, da želite spremeniti velikost papirja svojega dokumenta (na primer, tiskanje PDF velikosti pisma ZDA na papirju A4), lahko spremenit obliko tiskanja dokumenta.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V stolpcu Papir izberite svojo velikost Papirja s spustnega seznama.

Kliknite Natisni in vaš dokument bi se moral začeti tiskati.

Za izbiro drugačne usmeritve lahko uporabite tudi meni Usmeritev:

Pokončno

Ležeče

Obrnjeno pokončno

Obrnjeno ležeče

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000001514512307647154023665 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Oglejte si seznam vseh tipkovnih bližnjic in se naučite kako ustvariti bližnjice po meri. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tipkovne bližnjice
Privzete bližnjice
Odpiranje, zapiranje, shranjevanje in tiskanje

Odpre dokument.

CtrlO

Odpre kopijo trenutnega dokumenta

CtrlN

Shrani kopijo trenutnega dokumenta z drugim imenom datoteke.

CtrlS

Natisne trenutni dokument.

CtrlP

Zapre okno trenutnega dokumenta.

CtrlA

Znova naloži dokument (zapre in znova odpre dokument).

CtrlR
Premikanje po dokumentu.

Premakne stran navzgor/navzdol.

Smerne tipke

Premakne se navzgor/navzdol več strani hkrati.

Page Up / Page Down

Gre na predhodno/naslednjo stran.

CtrlPage Up / CtrlPage Down

Pojdite na začetek strani (začetek dokumenta, če je izbran PogledNeprekinjen).

Home

Pojdite na konec strani (konec dokumenta, če je izbran PogledNeprekinjen).

End

Gre na začetek dokumenta.

CtrlHome

Gre na konec dokumenta.

CtrlEnd
Izbiranje in kopiranje besedila

Kopiraj poudarjeno besedilo.

CtrlC

Izbere vse besedilo v dokumentu.

CtrlA
Iskanje besedila

Pokaže orodno vrstico, ki vam omogoča iskanje besed v dokumentu. Iskalno polje je ob pritisku samodejno poudarjeno. Iskanje se začne takoj, ko vpišete nekaj besedila.

CtrlA

Gre na naslednji rezultat iskanja.

CtrlA

Gre na predhodni rezultat iskanja.

CtrlShiftG
Vrtenje in približevanje

Zavrti strani 90 stopinj v nasprotni smeri urinega kazalca.

CtrlPuščica levo

Zavrti strani 90 stopinj v smeri urinega kazalca.

CtrlPuščica desno

Približaj.

Ctrl+

Oddalji.

Ctrl-
Ustvarite svoje lastne bližnjice po meri

Omogočite zastavico /desktop/gnome/interface/can_change_accels v gconf:

PritisniteAltF2. Odprlo se bo pogovorno okno Zaženi program.

V besedilno polje vpišite 'gconf-editor'-

V urejevalniku nastavitev izberite namizjegnomevmesnik.

Izberite vrednost polja za can_change_accels na desni strani okna.

Bližnjico lahko dodate/spremenite kot sledi:

Odprite pregledovalnik dokumentov.

Pojdite s kazalcem nad predmetom menija, katerega bližnjico želite spremeniti/ustvariti.

Vnesite bližnjico, ki jo želite na tipkovnici, na primer CtrlShiftT.

Zaprite pregledovalnik dokumentov.

Ponovite korake 1-3.

Odstrani vrednostno polje za can_change_accels na desni strani okna.

Naslednjič, ko se pregledovalnik dokumentov zažene, bodo vaše tipkovne bližnjice po meri ohranjene.

To deluje tudi za druge programe Gnome.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/annotation-properties.page0000644000373100047300000000322512307647154026167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako prilagoditi avtorja, barvo, slog ali ikono zabeležke. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Prilagoditev zabeležk

Desno kliknite na ikono zabeležke v dokumentu.

Izberite Lastnosti zabeležk.

V oknu Lastnosti zabeležk lahko spremenite avtorja, barvo, slog in ikono svojega sporočilca.

Lastnosti zabeležk bodo bile uveljavljene le za opombe, ki ste jih spremenili. Vsaka opomba ima lahko drug niz lastnosti.
Ali lahko trajno spremenim privzete lastnosti zabeležk?

Lastnosti privzete zabeležke (avtor, barva, slog in ikona) je mogoče spremeniti le na določeni opombi kot je navedeno zgoraj>. Zato boste morali v primeru da želite, da so vsa vaša sporočilca rdeča namesto rumena, boste morali spremeniti privzeto barvo iz rumene v rdečo za vsako sporočilce posebej. Trenutno še ni mogoče shraniti različnih privzetih nastavitev za lastnosti zabeležk.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-10pages.page0000644000373100047300000000474712307647154024374 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisne 10 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 10 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vtipkajte števila strani v tem vrstnem redu 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7, 2

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko so se vse strani natisnile vzemite papir na katerem je stran 2 in ga postavite nazaj v tiskalnik. Bodite pozorni, da ste jo pravilno obrnili (stran 1 bo natisnjena na drugi strani).

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Pod Obseg izberite možnost Strani in vtipkajte: 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 12-stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati 2 prazni strani, da bo 12 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z uporabo LibreOffice Writer ustvarite 2 strani dolg prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 12 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/forms-saving.page0000644000373100047300000000347612307647154024246 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prepričajte se, da ste shranili obrazec, sicer bodo vsi vneseni podatki izgubljeni. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Shranjevanje obrazca

Morda želite po izpolnitvi obrazec shraniti na enega od dveh načinov:

Za shranjevanje kopije, ki jo je mogoče v prihodnosti urejati (obrazec ostane vzajemen):

DatotekaShrani kopijo

Izberite ime in mapo za shranjevanje datotek in nato kliknite Shrani. PDF bo shranjen v mapi po vaši izbiri.

Za shranjevanje kopije, ki je ni več mogoče urejati (na primer za pošiljanje obrazca preko e-pošte ali spleta):

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni in pojdite v zavihek Splošno.

Izberite Natisni v datoteko v Izhodni vrsti izberite PDF.

Izberite ime in mapo za shranjevanje datotek in nato kliknite Natisni. PDF bo shranjen v mapi po vaši izbiri.

Kopij šifriranih datotek ni mogoče shraniti ali natisniti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-npages.page0000644000373100047300000000401712307647154024377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje knjižice z več kot 16 stranmi. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 n stranska knjižica

n je večkratnik števila 4.

V primeru, da število strani v vašem dokumentu PDF ni večkratnik števila 4, dodajte ustrezno število praznih strani (1, 2, 3), da bo število strani v dokumentu večkratnik števila 4. Za to lahko:

Z LibreOffice Writer ustvarite prazen PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani.

Vnesite števila strani v tem redu: n, 1, 2, n-1, n-2, 3, 4, n-3, n-4, 5, 6, n-5, n-6, 7, 8, n-7, n-8, 9, 10, n-9, n-10, 11, 12, n-11 ...... dokler niste vnesti n-število strani.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/print-booklet.page0000644000373100047300000000212712307647154024414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako natisniti knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tiskanje knjižice

V primeru, da tiskate knjižico (ki bo morda bila zvezana ali prepognjena na sredini vsake strani), izberite vrsto tiskalnika, ki ga boste uporabljali s seznama spodaj. Nato izberite število natiskanih strani, ki jih bo vaša knjižica imela.

Tiskalnik omogoča enostransko tiskanje
Tiskalnik omogoča dvostransko tiskanje
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/annotations-navigate.page0000644000373100047300000000237412307647154025760 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako krmariti po zabeležkah. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Krmarjenje po zabeležkah

V primeru, da ste v svojem dokumentu ustvarili zabeležko, lahko uporabite zavihek Seznam za prikaz seznama vseh zabeležk v dokumentu. Seznam nakazuje vrsto, številko strani, avtorja in datum zabeležke.

Za hitro krmarjenje na mesto določene zabeležke kliknite na puščico levo od številke strani. Videli boste seznam zabeležk na tej strani. Kliknite na zabeležko, ki vas zanima in pregledovalnik dokumentovbo krmaril na mesto zabeležke v dokumentu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/annotations-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000134312307647154025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zabeležk ne morete odstraniti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Odstranjevanje zabeležk

Trenutno v pregledovalniku dokumentov ne morete odstraniti zabeležk.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/convertSVG.page0000644000373100047300000000251512307647154023664 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokument lahko pretvorite v SVG s "tiskanjem" v datoteko. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pretvarjanje dokumenta v SVG

V datoteke SVG lahko pretvorite dokumente naslednjih vrst:

Prenosljiva vrsta dokumenta (.pdf)

To deluje z odpiranjem datoteke v Pregledovalniku dokumentov in "tiskanju" dokumenta kot datoteko SVG.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni in pojdite v zavihek Splošno.

Izberite Natisni v datoteko in kot Izhodno vrsto datoteke izberite SVG.

Izberite ime in mapo za shranjevanje datoteke in nato kliknite Natisni. Datoteka SVG bo shranjena v izbrani mapi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/index.page0000644000373100047300000000356312307647154022737 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/evince-trail.png"/> Pregledovalnik dokumentov Evince Pregledovalnik dokumentov Evince Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/evincelogo.png">Logotip Evince</media> Evince pregledovalnik dokumentov
Branje dokumentov
Predstavitve in druge podprte vrste datotek
Tiskanje
Zaznamki in zabeležke
Vzajemni obrazci
Pogosto zastavljena vprašanja
Napredno
Triki in namigi
SyncTeX
Pridružite se
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000103312307647154022566 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

To delo je licencirano pod Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0.

Kot posebno izjemo vam dajejo lastniki avtorskih pravic dovoljenje za kopiranje, spreminjanje in distribuiranje kode primerov, ki jo vsebuje ta dokument pod vašimi pogoji, brez omejitev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/invert-colors.page0000644000373100047300000000161112307647154024426 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obračanje barv lahko olajša branje nekaterega besedila. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Obrni barve na strani

Za zamenjavo bele s črno, črne z belo in tako naprej kliknite PogledObrnjene barve.

To lahko olajša branje besedila, posebno v primeru za določene vrste težav z vidom.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/synctex-editors.page0000644000373100047300000000346412307647154024774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kateri urejevalnik lahko uporabite za urejanje svojih datotek TEX? Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podprti urejevalniki
<app>gedit</app>

Podprta sta tako Iskanje naprej (iz Gedit v pregledovalnik dokumentov) in Iskanje (iz pregledovalnika dokumentov v Gedit).

Vim-latex

Vstavek Gedit vsebuje skript python (evince_dbus.py), ki ga lahko uporabite, da začne Synctex delovati z Vim. Da lahko vim-latex uporabite skupaj s pregledovalnikom dokumentov, boste morali izvesti naslednje korake:

Kopirajte evince_dbus.py v mapo na vaši poti in ji dajte dovoljenja +x.

Spremenite svojo datoteko ~/.vimrc in dodajte naslednje vrstice.

let g:Tex_ViewRule_pdf = 'evince_dbus.py' let g:Tex_DefaultTargetFormat = 'pdf' let g:Tex_CompileRule_pdf = 'pdflatex --synctex=1 -interaction=nonstopmode $*'

Sedaj lahko uporabljate iskanje naprej iz vim-latex s tipkanjem \ls. Iskanje nazaj še ni podprto.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/annotations.page0000644000373100047300000000427212307647154024163 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako ustvariti in prilagoditi zabeležke. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dodajanje zabeležk

Zabeležka je sporočilce ali opomba dodana dokumentu PDF. Zabeležke lahko dodate s pregledovalnikom dokumentov.

Ko odprete datoteko, bi morali imeti stranski pladenj na levi strani okna. Če stranski pladenj ni viden, kliknite PogledStranski pladenj ali pritisnite F9.

Na vrhu tega stranskega pladnja je spustni meni z možnostmi kot so Sličice, Kazalo in Zabeležke (nekatere od njih so morda za nekatere dokumente zatemnjene):

Za ustvarjanje zabeležke:

V spustnem meniju izberite Zabeležke.

Sedaj bi morali v spustnem meniju videti zavihka Seznam in Dodaj.

Izberite zavihek Dodaj.

Kliknite na ikono za dodajanje zabeležke besedila.

Kliknite na mesto v dokumentu, ki mu želite dodati zabeležko. Odprlo se bo vaše okno zabeležke.

Vpišite svoje besedilo v okno zabeležka.

Velikost sporočilca lahko spremenite s klikom in držanjem levega miškinega gumba na enem od spodnjih kotov sporočilca in njegovim premikanjem naokoli.

Zaprite opombo s klikom na x v zgornjem kotu opombe.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000231212307647154024470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Stopite v stik z dokumentacijsko skupino Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte pisati dokumentacijo

Dokumentacijo Pregledovalnika dokumentov vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Za prispevanje k projektu dokumentacije stopite v stik z nami preko irc-a ali preko našega dopisnega seznama.

Naša stran wiki vsebuje uporabne podatke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-9pages.page0000644000373100047300000000675612307647154024326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 9-stranska knjižica Natisne 9 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 9 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Pod Osbeg izberite Strani in vtipkajte: 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko se je stran natisnila, vzemite papir in ga dajte nazaj v tiskalnik. Pri tem pazite, da jo pravilno obrnete (stran 2 bo natisnjena na drugi strani).

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni in pojdite v zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani in vnesite 2.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani in v meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V odseku Strani v zavihku Splošno izberite 3.

V zavihku Nastavitev strani spremenite Ureditev stani na Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko se je stran 3 natisnila, vzemite papir in ga dajte nazaj v tiskalnik. Pri tem pazite, da jo pravilno obrnete (strani 4 in 9 bosta natisnjeni na drugi strani).

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V izbirni meni Strani v zavihku Splošno vnesite 4, 9.

V zavihku Nastavitev strani nastavite Ureditev strani na Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V meni izbire Strani vnesite strani 8, 5, 6, 7 in nastavite Ureditev strani v Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 12 stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati 3 prazne strani, da bo 12 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z uporabo LibreOffice Writer ustvarite 3 strani dolg prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 12 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evince/duplex-5pages.page0000644000373100047300000000645512307647154024316 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 5-stranska knjižica Natisne 5 stransko knjižico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - priznanje avtorstva - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 5 stranska knjižica

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno.

Pod Osbeg izberite Strani in vtipkajte: 1

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Razporeditev v možnosti Dvostransko izberite Kratek rob (zrcali).

V možnosti Strani na stran izberite 2.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko se je stran natisnila, vzemite papir in ga dajte nazaj v tiskalnik. Pri tem pazite, da jo pravilno obrnete (stran 2 bo natisnjena na drugi strani).

Znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Zaprite zavihek Splošno.

V Obseg izberite Strani in vnesite 2.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V meniju Ureditev strani izberite Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Za tiskanje strani 3 znova kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V izbirni meni Strani v zavihku Splošno vnesite števila strani.

V zavihku Nastavitev strani spremenite Ureditev stani na Od desne proti levi.

Kliknite Natisni.

Ko se je stran 3 natisnila, vzemite papir in ga dajte nazaj v tiskalnik. Pri tem pazite, da jo pravilno obrnete (strani 4 in 9 bosta natisnjeni na drugi strani).

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V izbirni meni Strani v zavihku Splošno vnesite 4, 9.

V zavihku Nastavitev strani nastavite Ureditev strani na Od leve proti desni.

Kliknite Natisni.

Lažje je natisniti 8 stransko knjižico. Morda bi bilo dobro vašemu dokumentu PDF dodati 3 prazne strani, da bo 8 stranski. Za to lahko:

Z uporabo LibreOffice Writer ustvarite 3 strani dolg prazen dokument PDF.

Združite prazen PDF s svojim dokumentom PDF s programom PDF-Shuffler in na konec postavite prazne strani.

Sledite korakom za tiskanje 8 stranske knjižice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-monitor/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000013663612300454133026300 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
System Monitor Manual V2.2 2009 Paul Cutler 2004 Sun Microsystems 2001 2002 2004 Bill Day GNOME Documentation Project Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Bill Day
billday@bellatlantic.net
 Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project
pcutler@foresightlinux.org
 System Monitor Manual V2.2 March 2009 Paul Cutler pcutler@foresightlinux.org GNOME Documentation Project System Monitor Manual V2.1 February 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project System Monitor Manual V2.0 November 2002 Bill Day billday@bellatlantic.net GNOME Documentation Project Procman Manual V0.11 January 2002 Bill Day billday@bellatlantic.net GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 2.24.4 of System Monitor. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the System Monitor application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. System Monitor gives users a graphical user interface for monitoring CPU, network, and memory activities as well as a way for viewing and stopping system processes. System Monitor gnome-system-monitor procman Introduction The System Monitor application enables you to monitor system processes, usage of system resources, and file systems. You can also use System Monitor to modify the behavior of your system. The System Monitor window contains three tabbed sections: Processes Shows active processes, and how processes are related to each other. Provides detailed information about individual processes, and enables you to control active processes. Resources Displays the current usage of the following system resources: CPU (central processing unit) time Memory and swap space Network usage File Systems Lists all mounted file systems along with basic information about each. Getting Started To Start System Monitor You can start System Monitor in the following ways: System menu Choose Administration System Monitor. Command line Execute the following command: gnome-system-monitor When You Start System Monitor When you start System Monitor, the following window is displayed:
System Monitor Window Shows System Monitor main window.
The System Monitor window contains the following elements: Menubar The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands that you need to work with System Monitor. Display area The display area contains the system monitor information. The display area contains the following tabbed sections: Processes Contains a list of processes organized as a table, a list of load averages over the past few minutes, and an End Process button. Resources Contains a CPU History graph, a Memory and Swap History graph, and a Network History graph. File Systems Contains a table of currently mounted file systems. Usage To Display the Process List To display the process list, select the Processes tab. In the Processes tab, the processes are organized as a table. The rows of the table display information about the processes. The columns represent information fields for the processes, such as the name of the user who owns the process, the amount of memory currently being used by the process, and so on. From left to right, the Processes tab displays the following columns by default: Process Name Status %CPU Nice ID Memory For information about how to change the columns displayed in the process list, see . Parent Processes and Child Processes A parent process is a process that spawns another process. The spawned process is a child process of the original parent process. By default, System Monitor does not show process dependencies. For information about how to change the default display behavior, see . Process Priority and Nice Values Processes run in order of priority: high-priority processes run before low-priority processes. Child processes generally inherit their priority from their parent process. The priority of a process is set by the nice value of the process, as follows: A nice value of 0 means that the process has normal priority. The higher the nice value, the lower the priority. The lower the nice value, the higher the priority. For information about how to change the priority of a process, see . To Sort the Process List To sort the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. By default, the processes are listed by name, in alphabetical order. To list the processes in reverse alphabetical order, click on the Process Name column header. Click on any column header to sort the processes by the information in that column, in alphabetical or numerical order. Click again on the column header to sort the data in reverse alphabetical or reverse numerical order. To Modify the Contents of the Process List You can modify the contents of the process list in several ways. To Show All Processes To show all processes in the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose View All Processes . To Show Only Processes Owned by the Current User To show only the processes that are owned by the current user, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose View My Processes . To Show Only Active Processes To show only the active processes in the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose View Active Processes . To Show Dependencies To show process dependencies in the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose ViewDependencies. If the Dependencies menu item is selected, the processes are listed as follows: Parent processes are indicated by a triangle symbol to the left of the process name. Click on the triangle symbol to show or hide the associated child processes. Child processes are indented, and listed with their parent process. If the Dependencies menu item is not selected: Parent processes and child processes are not distinguishable. All processes are listed in alphabetical order. To Display Memory Maps for a Process To display memory maps for a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process in the process list. Choose ViewMemory Maps. The Memory Maps dialog displays the information in tabular format. The name of the process is displayed above the memory-map table. From left to right, the Memory Maps dialog displays the following columns: Filename The location of a shared library that is currently used by the process. If this field is blank, the memory information in this row describes memory that is owned by the process whose name is displayed above the memory-map table. VM Start The address at which the memory segment begins. VM End The address at which the memory segment ends. VM Size The size of the memory segment. Flags The following flags describe the different types of memory-segment access that the process can have: p The memory segment is private to the process, and is not accessible to other processes. r The process has permission to read from the memory segment. s The memory segment is shared with other processes. w The process has permission to write into the memory segment. x The process has permission to execute instructions that are contained within the memory segment. VM Offset The virtual memory offset of the memory segment. Device The major and minor device numbers of the device on which the shared library filename is located. Inode The inode on the device from which the shared library location is loaded into memory. Click on any column header to sort the data by the information in that column, in alphabetical or numerical order. Click again on the column header to sort the data in reverse alphabetical or reverse numerical order. Click Close to close the Memory Maps dialog. To Change the Priority of a Process To change the priority of a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process for which you want to change the priority. Choose EditChange Priority. The Change Priority dialog is displayed. Use the slider to set the nice value of the process. The nice value sets the priority of the process: the lower the nice value, the higher the priority. To specify a nice value lower than zero, non-root users must enter the root password. Click on the Change Priority button. To End a Process To end a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process that you want to end. Choose EditEnd Process, or click on the End Process button. By default, a confirmation alert is displayed. For information about how to display or hide the confirmation alert, see . Click on the End Process button to confirm that you want to end the process. System Monitor forces the process to finish normally. This is the preferred way to stop a process. To Terminate a Process To terminate a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process that you want to terminate. Choose EditKill Process. By default, a confirmation alert is displayed. For information about how to display or hide the confirmation alert, see . Click on the Kill Process button to confirm that you want to terminate the process. System Monitor forces the process to finish immediately. You usually terminate a process only if you cannot end the process normally as described in . To Monitor CPU Usage To monitor CPU usage, select the Resources tab. System Monitor displays the CPU usage history in graphical format. Underneath the graph, System Monitor also displays the current CPU usage, as a percentage. To Monitor Memory and Swap Usage To monitor memory and swap usage, select the Resources tab. System Monitor displays the memory usage history and the swap usage history in graphical format. Underneath the graph, System Monitor also displays the following numerical values: Used memory out of total memory Used swap out of total swap To Monitor Network Activity To monitor network activity, select the Resources tab. System Monitor displays the network history in graphical format. Underneath the graph, System Monitor also displays the following numerical values: Received data per second and total Sent data per second and total To Monitor File Systems To monitor file systems, select the File Systems tab. System Monitor displays mounted file systems in tabular format. From left to right, the table displays the following columns: Device Location of block file Directory Mount point (directory to access) of device Type File system type Total Total capacity Free Amount of space not in use Available Amount of space which can be used Used Amount of space which is used (and percentage of Total) Preferences To configure System Monitor, choose EditPreferences. The Preferences dialog contains the following tabbed sections: Opravila Behavior Update interval in seconds Use this spin box to specify the interval at which you want to update the process list. Enable smooth refresh Select this option to refresh smoothly. Alert before ending or killing processes Select this option to display a confirmation alert when you end a process or terminate a process. Divide CPU usage by CPU count Select this to divide each process' CPU% in the Processes table by the number of CPUs. Information Fields Use the following options to select which fields are displayed in the process list: Process Name Select this option to display the name of the process. This column may also contain an icon to indicate the application that is associated with the process. User Select this option to display the name of the user who owns the process. Status Select this option to display the current status of the process: sleeping or running. Virtual Memory Select this option to display the amount of virtual memory that is allocated to the process. Resident Memory Select this option to display the amount of physical memory that is allocated to the process. Writable Memory Select this option to display the amount of memory that can be written by the process. Shared Memory Select this option to display the amount of shared memory that is allocated to the process. Shared memory is memory that can be accessed by another process. X Server Memory Select this option to display the amount of X server memory that is used by the process. % CPU Select this option to display the percentage of CPU time currently being used by the process. CPU Time Select this option to display the amount of CPU time that has been used by the process. Started Select this option to display when the process began running. Nice Select this option to display the nice value of the process. The nice value sets the priority of the process: the lower the nice value, the higher the priority. ID Select this option to display the process identifier, also known as the pid. The pid is a number that uniquely identifies the process. You can use the pid to manipulate the process on the command line. Memory Select this option to display the amount of system memory that is currently being used by the process. Security Context Select this option to display the security context in which the process is running. Command Line Select this option to display the command line that was used to start the process, including arguments. Viri Graphs Update interval in seconds Use this spin box to specify how often you want to update the System Monitor graphs. Show network speed in bits Select this option to use bits instead of bytes for displaying network speed in the System Monitor graphs. File Systems Behavior Update interval in seconds Use this spin box to specify how often you want to update the File Systems table. Show all file systems Select this option to show all file systems, including temporary and system ones.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-system-monitor/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012300454133025423 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/commandline.page0000644000373100047300000000336612270236022025246 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Commandline

To view commandline options for gnome-sudoku: gnome-sudoku --help

To view the version number of your gnome-sudoku: gnome-sudoku --version

Print debug information

This command may be useful when your are filing a bug and need to post debug information: gnome-sudoku -v

Profile information

This command is useful if you are filing a bug about slow performance. It will show the perfomance of different functions that run, and possibly reveal which specific function(s) may be responsible for poor performance. This information attached to a bug could make it easier to fix the problem, but this command is used mostly by programmers.

gnome-sudoku -p

When you exit the application, the terminal will show you performance statistics.

Step through <app>GNOME Sudoku</app>

This command is mostly used by programmers to step through the code: gnome-sudoku -w

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/notes.page0000644000373100047300000000346712270236022024112 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thomas Hinkle tmhinkle@gmail.com 2011 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Notes

Notes, or pencilmarks, can be added to any cell. They allow you to mark possible values for a cell, or store other data that might help you. Notes will store all characters in order, but will remove repetitions of characters.

To add notes to a cell:

Select the cell

Click on the part of a cell that is above the line that appears when you hover over it. Alternatively, type N.

Type your notes

Press Enter or click outside of the text box.

You can also take notes in the bottom of the cell by clicking in the bottom of the cell or by typing M. However, this area is used when you click Show All Possible Numbers. If you plan to use this area, you should not use Show All Possible Numbers.

You can add a number to the notes at the top of the square by typing Ctrl1 through Ctrl9

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/strategy.page0000644000373100047300000000715112270236022024616 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Radoslav Asparuhov rasparuhov@gmail.com 2011 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Strategy

There is only one possibility for each cell in a Sudoku puzzle. The following strategies will help you systematically discover the solution for every cell.

Strategy 1:

Choose the row with the most numbers in it.

You should choose the row or column with the most numbers. For simplicity, these instructions are written as if a row had the most numbers in it.

Determine which numbers in the row are missing.

Choose one of the empty cells in this row. Determine which of the missing numbers are in that column or in that 3x3 box.

Using notes, enter the missing numbers which are not in that column or 3x3 box, into the the upper field. These numbers are candidate solutions for that cell.

Go to the next empty cell of the chosen row and repeat the above method. Repeat this for every row and column, starting at those with the most numbers and continuing through to the least. Always look carefully for the numbers and don't forget the 3x3 boxes.

This strategy will help reveal the cells which have only one possible choice. When revealed, you can fill those cells in with that choice, and repeat the strategy again until the entire puzzle is solved.
Example use of strategy 1.
Strategy 2:

Find the number which appears most often.

Now look at the left vertical alignment of the 3x3 boxes and locate the column(s) in which this number appears.

In this alignment, go to a 3x3 box which does not contain this number in any of its cells. Using notes, enter this number in every empty cell of the column in which this number does not appear. If the number appears in the row of one of these cells, do not enter it in that cell's notes.

Repeat the last two steps for the center and right vertical alignments.

Find the next number which appears most, and repeat until you have done this for all 9 numbers.

This strategy will help reveal the cells which have only one possible choice. When revealed, you can fill those cells in with that choice, and repeat the strategy again until the entire puzzle is solved.
Example use of strategy2.

If neither of the above strategies solves the puzzle on its own, you can alternate strategies. You can also combine the strategies.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000163112270236022024413 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Toolbar

To show or hide the toolbar, click SettingsShow Toolbar.

The toolbar, located under the menu bar, lets you perform common actions with your mouse. To use a toolbar item, just click on it. The buttons, from left to right, are New Game, Undo, Redo, Hint, and Track Additions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/index.page0000644000373100047300000000307112270236022024060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/logo.png"/> GNOME Sudoku GNOME Sudoku Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png">GNOME Sudoku logo</media> GNOME Sudoku

Gnome Sudoku is based on the popular number-based logic puzzle in which one must fill a 9 X 9 square with the correct digits. The unique puzzles can be played on screen or printed to take along. All games persist across sessions and you can resume any old game at any time, as well as replay any game you've already won.

Game Play
Useful tips
Printing
Advanced
Get Involved
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000554612270236022026616 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com 2011 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Keyboard shortcuts

This is a list of the keyboard shortcuts you can use in Sudoku.

Starting and exiting

Is there a word that encapsulates both starting AND restarting? Didn't include restarting here for the sake of brevity - Chris

New game

CtrlN

Reset game

CtrlB

Close the sudoku window

CtrlW
Hints and Notes

Hint

CtrlH

Track Additions

CtrlT

Clear notes from the top of a cell

CtrlJ

Clear notes from the bottom of a cell

CtrlK

Add a number to the top notes of a cell

Ctrl#

Remove a number to the top notes of a cell

Alt#
Other

Print displayed puzzle

CtrlP

Undo

CtrlZ

Redo

CtrlShiftZ

Open Help

F1

Switch to fullscreen mode

F11
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/highlighting.page0000644000373100047300000000176512270236022025426 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Highlighting

You can turn on highlighting to automatically highlight the current row, column and box in different colors. This can make it easier to see which values cannot go into a current square. To toggle highlighting, click SettingsHighlighter.

Sudoku with highlighting.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/print-inprogress-game.page0000644000373100047300000000220212270236022027200 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Print your game

You can print the sudoku are playing to a file or to a printer.

To print the sudoku you are currently playing:

Click GamePrint.

Select your printer.

Click Print.

If you don't have a printer in the list, see Set up a local printer.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/print-blank-puzzles.page0000644000373100047300000000302612270236022026704 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2011 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Print blank sudokus

To print one or more blank puzzles:

Click GamePrint multiple sudokus.

Select the total number of sudokus to print from the drop down menu.

Select the number of sudokus per page from the next drop down menu.

Select difficult level of the games you would like to print.

Games that have already been played are not printed by default. If you don't care about repeating games, select Include games you've already played in list of games to print in the Details category.

Games that are printed are not marked as played by default. You can choose to Mark games as played once you've printed them. under the Details category.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000214712270236022025625 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help write documentation

The GNOME Games documentation is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, feel free to get in touch with us using irc, or via our mailing list.

Our wiki page contains useful information.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000207212270236022024407 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help develop

The GNOME Games are developed and maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

If you would like to help develop GNOME Games, you can get in touch with the developers using irc, or via our mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/rules.page0000644000373100047300000000207712270236022024110 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thomas Hinkle tmhinkle@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Game rules

In order to complete the puzzle, you must fill each cell with a number between 1 and 9, inclusive, such that no number is repeated in any row, column or 3x3 box.

In a solved sudoku, each row, column, and 3x3 box contains all the numbers 1 through 9.

Each puzzle has only one solution.

Outline of a row, a column and a 3x3 box using highlighting option.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/basics.page0000644000373100047300000000423012270236022024213 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Basics

Sudoku can be played using the keyboard, the mouse, or any combination of the two.

Using the keyboard

To select a cell, use the arrow keys to move the blue outline onto it.

To put a number in a cell, select the cell, and then press the number.

To remove a number from a cell, select the cell, and then press the Delete key, the Backspace, or the 0 key.
Using the mouse

To select a cell, move your mouse over it and click.

To put a number in a selected cell, click on the center of the cell, and then click on the number you wish to input.

To remove a number from a selected cell, click in the center of the cell and then click Clear.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/statistics.page0000644000373100047300000000341112270236022025141 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Statistics

To view the statistics about the current puzzle, click GamePuzzle Statistics.

Very hard puzzle statistics box example

GNOME Sudoku ranks puzzles based on the number of cells that can be rapidly filled.

The puzzle statistics box shows:

the overall difficulty

the number of cells which can be filled by elimination, starting from the blank grid (i.e. only a 2 can go in this box, so it must be a 2)

the number of cells that can be filled by the process of filling, starting from the blank grid (i.e. only one cell in this row can be a 2, so it must be a 2)

the number of times in solving the puzzle that the program used the trial-and-error algorithm to solve the puzzle

All sudoku puzzles can be solved without ever having to guess. When the statistics box says that Sudoku used trial-and-error X number of times, it does not mean that a human would have to use trial-and-error to solve the puzzle.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/license.page0000644000373100047300000000356112270236022024377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Legal information. License

This work is distributed under a CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

You are free:

<em>To share</em>

To copy, distribute and transmit the work.

 <em>To remix</em>

To adapt the work.

Under the following conditions:

<em>Attribution</em>

You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

<em>Share Alike</em>

If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same, similar or a compatible license.

For the full text of the license, see the CreativeCommons website, or read the full Commons Deed.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050312270236022023716 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/trackers.page0000644000373100047300000000667612270236022024605 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Track trial-and-error solutions

Trackers can be used to keep track of trial-and-error solutions. Tracked moves are entered in a different color to help make the moves visually distinct from moves made earlier in the game. This feature is particularly useful when solving difficult games.

Using the tracker:

You can toggle the tracker interface in one of the following ways:

Click ToolsTrack Additions.

Click Track Additions in the toolbar. If the toolbar is not visible, click SettingsShow Toolbar.

You can make untracked moves if no tracker is selected.

To create a new tracker click Add. From this point on, any number you enter will be part of the selected tracker.

You can create as many trackers as you want by clicking Add.

You can apply a set of tracked additions by selecting the tracker and clicking Apply.

You can clear a tracker by selecting it and clicking Clear.

Some sudoku players believe you should never use trial-and-error to solve a puzzle. These players should not use this feature.
Video Demonstration Click ToolsTrack Additions. You can make untracked moves if no tracker is selected. To create a new tracker click Add. From this point on, any number you enter will be part of the selected tracker. You can create as many trackers as you want by clicking Add. You can apply a set of tracked additions by selecting the tracker and clicking Apply. You can clear a tracker by selecting it and clicking Clear.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000401312270236022024771 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Report a Problem

GNOME Sudoku is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs, crashes and request enhancements.

To participate you need an account which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, and make comments. Also, you need to register so you can receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugApplicationsgnome-sudoku. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

If you are requesting a new feature, choose enhancement in the Severity menu. Fill in the Summary and Description sections and click Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/save-resume.page0000644000373100047300000000271012270236022025204 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thomas Hinkle tmhinkle@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Save and resume
Saving your game

Your games are saved automatically every few minutes and whenever you change games or close the application.

Resuming your game

Whenever you start Sudoku or click New, your saved games will be listed in the puzzle selection screen. You will see a miniature image of the saved puzzle, the date you last played it, and how long you have played it. To open the puzzle, just double click on it.

If you'd like to stop playing one game and begin another, just select New and begin your new game.

Resuming previous games.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/hints.page0000644000373100047300000000351612270236022024102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Hints

To show possible values for all cells click:

SettingsShow Possible Numbers.

To ask Sudoku to show a cell that is easy to fill:

Click ToolsHint, or Hint in the toolbar.

These features work based on the logical possibilities given the current board and not work by looking at the solution. This means that if you made an error in an earlier move, these features may show incorrect possible values.

A cell which usually has only one possible solution based on the current state of the board is outlined with flashing red. In the case of a puzzle that has no cells that have only one possible solution, a cell with two possible solutions or the least amount of possible solutions will be highlighted. Clicking Hint multiple times may not always point you to the same cell.

You can edit the possible numbers by clicking in the bottom of the cell.

These features can make easy puzzles too easy, so you should use this mode sparingly.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-sudoku/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000323612270236022024751 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help translate

The GNOME games user interface and documentation is being translated by a world-wide volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

To start translating you will need to create an account and join the translation team for your language. This will give you the ability to upload new translations.

You can chat with GNOME translators using irc. People on the channel are located worldwide, so you may not get an immediate response as a result of timezone differences.

Alternatively, you can contact the Internationalization Team using their mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/list.page0000644000373100047300000000526512320470033022636 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --list option. List Dialog

Use the --list option to create a list dialog. Zenity returns the entries in the first column of text of selected rows to standard output.

Data for the dialog must specified column by column, row by row. Data can be provided to the dialog through standard input. Each entry must be separated by a newline character.

If you use the --checklist or --radiolist options, each row must start with either 'TRUE' or 'FALSE'.

The list dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--column</cmd>=<var>column</var>

Specifies the column headers that are displayed in the list dialog. You must specify a --column option for each column that you want to display in the dialog.

<cmd>--checklist</cmd>

Specifies that the first column in the list dialog contains check boxes.

<cmd>--radiolist</cmd>

Specifies that the first column in the list dialog contains radio boxes.

<cmd>--editable</cmd>

Allows the displayed items to be edited.

<cmd>--separator</cmd>=<var>separator</var>

Specifies what string is used when the list dialog returns the selected entries.

<cmd>--print-column</cmd>=<var>column</var>

Specifies what column should be printed out upon selection. The default column is '1'. 'ALL' can be used to print out all columns in the list.

The following example script shows how to create a list dialog:

#!/bin/sh zenity --list \ --title="Choose the Bugs You Wish to View" \ --column="Bug Number" --column="Severity" --column="Description" \ 992383 Normal "GtkTreeView crashes on multiple selections" \ 293823 High "GNOME Dictionary does not handle proxy" \ 393823 Critical "Menu editing does not work in GNOME 2.0"
List Dialog Example Zenity list dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/warning.page0000644000373100047300000000150512320470033023321 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --warning option. Warning Dialog

Use the --warning option to create a warning dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a warning dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --warning \ --text="Disconnect the power cable to avoid electrical shock."
Warning Dialog Example Zenity warning dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/file-selection.page0000644000373100047300000000405612320470033024562 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --file-selection option. File Selection Dialog

Use the --file-selection option to create a file selection dialog. Zenity returns the selected files or directories to standard output. The default mode of the file selection dialog is open.

The file selection dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--filename</cmd>=<var>filename</var>

Specifies the file or directory that is selected in the file selection dialog when the dialog is first shown.

 <cmd>--multiple</cmd>

Allows the selection of multiple filenames in the file selection dialog.

 <cmd>--directory</cmd>

Allows only selection of directories in the file selection dialog.

 <cmd>--save</cmd>

Set the file selection dialog into save mode.

 <cmd>--separator</cmd>=<var>separator</var>

Specifies the string that is used to divide the returned list of filenames.

The following example script shows how to create a file selection dialog:

#!/bin/sh FILE=`zenity --file-selection --title="Select a File"` case $? in 0) echo "\"$FILE\" selected.";; 1) echo "No file selected.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
File Selection Dialog Example Zenity file selection dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/color-selection.page0000644000373100047300000000252612320470033024761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --color-selection option. Color Selection Dialog

Use the --color-selection option to create a color selection dialog.

The color selection dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--color</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set the initial color.(ex: #FF0000)

 <cmd>--show-palette</cmd>

Show the palette.

The following example script shows how to create a color selection dialog:

#!/bin/sh COLOR=`zenity --color-selection --show-palette` case $? in 0) echo "You selected $COLOR.";; 1) echo "No color selected.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
Color Selection Dialog Example Zenity color selection dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/entry.page0000644000373100047300000000303712320470033023017 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --entry option. Text Entry Dialog

Use the --entry option to create a text entry dialog. Zenity returns the contents of the text entry to standard output.

The text entry dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the text entry dialog.

 <cmd>--entry-text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the entry field of the text entry dialog.

 <cmd>--hide-text</cmd>

Hides the text in the entry field of the text entry dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a text entry dialog:

#!/bin/sh if zenity --entry \ --title="Add new profile" \ --text="Enter name of new profile:" \ --entry-text "NewProfile" then echo $? else echo "No name entered" fi
Text Entry Dialog Example Zenity text entry dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/forms.page0000644000373100047300000000423512320470033023005 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --forms option. Forms Dialog

Use the --forms option to create a forms dialog.

The forms dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--add-entry</cmd>=<var>FieldName</var>

Add a new Entry in forms dialog.

 --add-password<cmd/>=<var>FieldName</var>

Add a new Password Entry in forms dialog. (Hide text)

 <cmd>--add-calendar</cmd>=<var>FieldName</var>

Add a new Calendar in forms dialog.

 <cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>TEXT</var>

Set the dialog text.

 <cmd>--separator</cmd>=<var>SEPARATOR</var>

Set output separator character. (Default: | )

 <cmd>--forms-date-format</cmd>=<var>PATTERN</var>

Set the format for the returned date. The default format depends on your locale. format must be a Format that is acceptable to the strftime function, for example %A %d/%m/%y.

The following example script shows how to create a forms dialog:

#!/bin/sh zenity --forms --title="Add Friend" \ --text="Enter information about your friend." \ --separator="," \ --add-entry="First Name" \ --add-entry="Family Name" \ --add-entry="Email" \ --add-calendar="Birthday" >> addr.csv case $? in 0) echo "Friend added.";; 1) echo "No friend added." ;; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred." ;; esac
Forms Dialog Example Zenity forms dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/text.page0000644000373100047300000000421512320470033022641 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --text-info option. Text Information Dialog

Use the --text-info option to create a text information dialog.

The text information dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--filename</cmd>=<var>filename</var>

Specifies a file that is loaded in the text information dialog.

 <cmd>--editable</cmd>

Allows the displayed text to be edited. The edited text is returned to standard output when the dialog is closed.

 <cmd>--font</cmd>=<var>FONT</var>

Specifies the text font.

 <cmd>--checkbox</cmd>=<var>TEXT</var>

Enable a checkbox for use like a 'I read and accept the terms.'

 <cmd>--html</cmd>

Enable html support.

 <cmd>--url</cmd>=<var>URL</var>

Sets an url instead of a file. Only works if you use --html option.

The following example script shows how to create a text information dialog:

#!/bin/sh # You must place file "COPYING" in same folder of this script. FILE=`dirname $0`/COPYING zenity --text-info \ --title="License" \ --filename=$FILE \ --checkbox="I read and accept the terms." case $? in 0) echo "Start installation!" # next step ;; 1) echo "Stop installation!" ;; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred." ;; esac
Text Information Dialog Example Zenity text information dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/password.page0000644000373100047300000000234412320470033023520 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --password option. Password Dialog

Use the --password option to create a password entry dialog.

The password entry dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--username</cmd>

Display the username field.

The following example script shows how to create a password entry dialog:

#!/bin/sh ENTRY=`zenity --password --username` case $? in 0) echo "User Name: `echo $ENTRY | cut -d'|' -f1`" echo "Password : `echo $ENTRY | cut -d'|' -f2`" ;; 1) echo "Stop login.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
Password Entry Dialog Example Zenity password entry dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/intro.page0000644000373100047300000000200412320470033023002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zenity enables you to create the various types of simple dialog. Introduction

Zenity enables you to create the following types of simple dialog:

Koledar

File selection

Forms

Seznam

Notification icon

Sporočilo

Napaka

Podrobnosti

Vprašanje

Opozorilo

Password entry

Napredek

Vnos besedila

Text information

Scale

Color selection

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/error.page0000644000373100047300000000144412320470033023007 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --error option. Error Dialog

Use the --error option to create an error dialog.

The following example script shows how to create an error dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --error \ --text="Could not find /var/log/syslog."
Error Dialog Example Zenity error dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/info.page0000644000373100047300000000151012320470033022603 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --info option. Info Dialog

Use the --info option to create an information dialog.

The following example script shows how to create an information dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --info \ --text="Merge complete. Updated 3 of 10 files."
Information Dialog Example Zenity information dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012320470033022630 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000424612320470033023432 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --calendar option. Calendar Dialog

Use the --calendar option to create a calendar dialog. Zenity returns the selected date to standard output. If no date is specified on the command line, the dialog uses the current date.

The calendar dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the calendar dialog.

 <cmd>--day</cmd>=<var>day</var>

Specifies the day that is selected in the calendar dialog. day must be a number between 1 and 31 inclusive.

 <cmd>--month</cmd>=<var>month</var>

Specifies the month that is selected in the calendar dialog. month must be a number between 1 and 12 inclusive.

 <cmd>--year</cmd>=<var>year</var>

Specifies the year that is selected in the calendar dialog.

 <cmd>--date-format</cmd>=<var>format</var>

Specifies the format that is returned from the calendar dialog after date selection. The default format depends on your locale. Format must be a format that is acceptable to the strftime function, for example %A %d/%m/%y.

The following example script shows how to create a calendar dialog:

#!/bin/sh if zenity --calendar \ --title="Select a Date" \ --text="Click on a date to select that date." \ --day=10 --month=8 --year=2004 then echo $? else echo "No date selected" fi
Calendar Dialog Example Zenity calendar dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/usage.page0000644000373100047300000002021012320470033022752 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can use Zenity to create simple dialogs that interact graphically with the user. Uporaba

When you write scripts, you can use Zenity to create simple dialogs that interact graphically with the user, as follows:

You can create a dialog to obtain information from the user. For example, you can prompt the user to select a date from a calendar dialog, or to select a file from a file selection dialog.

You can create a dialog to provide the user with information. For example, you can use a progress dialog to indicate the current status of an operation, or use a warning message dialog to alert the user.

When the user closes the dialog, Zenity prints the text produced by the dialog to standard output.

When you write Zenity commands, ensure that you place quotation marks around each argument.

For example, use:

zenity --calendar --title="Holiday Planner"

Do not use:

zenity --calendar --title=Holiday Planner

If you do not use quotation marks, you might get unexpected results.

Access Keys

An access key is a key that enables you to perform an action from the keyboard rather than use the mouse to choose a command from a menu or dialog. Each access key is identified by an underlined letter on a menu or dialog option.

Some Zenity dialogs support the use of access keys. To specify the character to use as the access key, place an underscore before that character in the text of the dialog. The following example shows how to specify the letter 'C' as the access key:

"_Choose a name".
Exit Codes

Zenity returns the following exit codes:

Exit Code

Description

0

The user has pressed either OK or Close.

1

The user has either pressed Cancel, or used the window functions to close the dialog.

-1

An unexpected error has occurred.

5

The dialog has been closed because the timeout has been reached.
General Options

All Zenity dialogs support the following general options:

<cmd>--title</cmd>=<var>title</var>

Specifies the title of a dialog.

 <cmd>--window-icon</cmd>=<var>icon_path</var>

Specifies the icon that is displayed in the window frame of the dialog. There are 4 stock icons also available by providing the following keywords - 'info', 'warning', 'question' and 'error'.

<cmd>--width</cmd>=<var>width</var>

Specifies the width of the dialog.

 <cmd>--height</cmd>=<var>height</var>

Specifies the height of the dialog.

 <cmd>--timeout</cmd>=<var>timeout</var>

Specifies the timeout in seconds after which the dialog is closed.
Help Options

Zenity provides the following help options:

<cmd>--help</cmd>

Displays shortened help text.

 <cmd>--help-all</cmd>

Displays full help text for all dialogs.

 <cmd>--help-general</cmd>

Displays help text for general dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-calendar</cmd>

Displays help text for calendar dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-entry</cmd>

Displays help text for text entry dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-error</cmd>

Displays help text for error dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-info</cmd>

Displays help text for information dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-file-selection</cmd>

Displays help text for file selection dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-list</cmd>

Displays help text for list dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-notification</cmd>

Displays help text for notification icon options.

 <cmd>--help-progress</cmd>

Displays help text for progress dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-question</cmd>

Displays help text for question dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-warning</cmd>

Displays help text for warning dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-text-info</cmd>

Displays help for text information dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-misc</cmd>

Displays help for miscellaneous options.

 <cmd>--help-gtk</cmd>

Displays help for GTK+ options.
Miscellaneous Options

Zenity also provides the following miscellaneous options:

<cmd>--about</cmd>

Displays the About Zenity dialog, which contains Zenity version information, copyright information, and developer information.

 <cmd>--version</cmd>

Displays the version number of Zenity.
GTK+ Options

Zenity supports the standard GTK+ options. For more information about the GTK+ options, execute the zenity --help-gtk command.

Environment Variables

Normally, Zenity detects the terminal window from which it was launched and keeps itself above that window. This behavior can be disabled by unsetting the WINDOWID environment variable.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/scale.page0000644000373100047300000000374412320470033022752 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --scale option. Scale Dialog

Use the --scale option to create a scale dialog.

The scale dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>TEXT</var>

Set the dialog text. (Default: Adjust the scale value)

 <cmd>--value</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set initial value. (Default: 0) You must specify value between minimum value to maximum value.

 <cmd>--min-value</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set minimum value. (Default: 0)

 <cmd>--max-value</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set maximum value. (Default: 100)

 <cmd>--step</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set step size. (Default: 1)

 <cmd>--print-partial</cmd>

Print value to standard output, whenever a value is changed.

<cmd>--hide-value</cmd>

Hide value on dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a scale dialog:

#!/bin/sh VALUE=`zenity --scale --text="Select window transparency." --value=50` case $? in 0) echo "You selected $VALUE%.";; 1) echo "No value selected.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
Scale Dialog Example Zenity scale dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/message.page0000644000373100047300000000111212320470033023272 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Error, Info, Question, Warning Message Dialog

For each type, use the --text option to specify the text that is displayed in the dialog.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/notification.page0000644000373100047300000000203712320470033024343 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --notification option. Notification Icon

Use the --notification option to create a notification icon.

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the notification area.

The following example script shows how to create a notification icon:

#!/bin/sh zenity --notification\ --window-icon="info" \ --text="There are system updates necessary!"
Notification Icon Example Zenity notification icon example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/question.page0000644000373100047300000000147412320470033023530 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --question option. Question Dialog

Use the --question option to create a question dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a question dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --question \ --text="Are you sure you wish to proceed?"
Question Dialog Example Zenity question dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/index.page0000644000373100047300000000144212320470033022763 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sun Java Desktop System Documentation Team Glynn Foster Nicholas Curran Yasumichi Akahoshi yasumichi@vinelinux.org

GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL)

 Zenity Manual
Dialogs
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/zenity/progress.page0000644000373100047300000000421712320470033023523 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --progress option. Progress Dialog

Use the --progress option to create a progress dialog.

Zenity reads data from standard input line by line. If a line is prefixed with #, the text is updated with the text on that line. If a line contains only a number, the percentage is updated with that number.

The progress dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the progress dialog.

 <cmd>--percentage</cmd>=<var>percentage</var>

Specifies the initial percentage that is set in the progress dialog.

 <cmd>--auto-close</cmd>

Closes the progress dialog when 100% has been reached.

 <cmd>--pulsate</cmd>

Specifies that the progress bar pulsates until an EOF character is read from standard input.

The following example script shows how to create a progress dialog:

#!/bin/sh ( echo "10" ; sleep 1 echo "# Updating mail logs" ; sleep 1 echo "20" ; sleep 1 echo "# Resetting cron jobs" ; sleep 1 echo "50" ; sleep 1 echo "This line will just be ignored" ; sleep 1 echo "75" ; sleep 1 echo "# Rebooting system" ; sleep 1 echo "100" ; sleep 1 ) | zenity --progress \ --title="Update System Logs" \ --text="Scanning mail logs..." \ --percentage=0 if [ "$?" = -1 ] ; then zenity --error \ --text="Update canceled." fi
Progress Dialog Example Zenity progress dialog example
usr/share/gnome/help-langpack/xchat-gnome/sl/xchat-gnome.xml0000644000373100047300000011201012270536237025756 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
<application>XChat-GNOME</application> Manual 2005-2006 Brian Pepple 2006 Joachim Noreiko Brian Pepple Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Brian Pepple Projekt Fedora
bpepple@fedoraproject.org
Joachim Noreiko Projekt dokumentacije GNOME
jnoreiko@yahoo.com
XChat-GNOME Manual 2.1 December 2006 Joachim Noreiko jnoreiko@yahoo.com Projekt dokumentacije GNOME XChat-GNOME Manual V2.0 November 2005 Brian Pepple bpepple@fedoraproject.org Projekt dokumentacije GNOME This manual describes version 0.16 of XChat-GNOME. Odziv To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the XChat-GNOME application or this manual, follow the directions in the Feedback section of the GNOME User Guide. A user manual which describes the use of the XChat-GNOME IRC client. XChat-GNOME xchat-gnome Uvod The XChat-GNOME application is an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) program for the GNOME desktop. XChat-GNOME provides the following features: Notification Area Icon Plugin Direct Client-To-Client (DCC) Transfers Direct Client-To-Client (DCC) Chats Adherence to GNOME Human Interface Guidelines (HIG) Getting Started Starting <application>XChat-GNOME</application> You can start XChat-GNOME in the following ways: Applications menu Choose Internet XChat-GNOME IRC Chat . Command line To start XChat-GNOME from a command line, type xchat-gnome, then press Return: To view other command line options that are available, type xchat-gnome --help, then press Return When You Start <application>XChat-GNOME</application> When you start XChat-GNOME, the following window is displayed.
<application>XChat-GNOME</application> Main Window Shows XChat-GNOME main window. Contains titlebar, menubar, display area, and scrollbars. Menubar contains IRC, Edit, Network, Discussion, Go, and Help menus.
The XChat-GNOME window contains the following elements: Menubar The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands you need to use in XChat-GNOME. Server Pane The Server Pane shows the Servers and Channels currently connected. User Button The User Button shows the number of users present in the selected Channel. Click the User Button to show a list of users. User's in the list marked as away are "Grayed out". Discussion Area The Discussion Area presents the discussion occurring in the selected Channel. Type into the message input line at the bottom of the discussion area to chat in the selected Channel. Usage Connecting to an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) Server To connect to an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) Server, choose IRC Connect . The Connect dialog is displayed. Select the Server that you wish to connect to, then click Connect. Viewing Direct Client-To-Client (DCC) File Transfers Information To view Direct Client-To-Client (DCC) file transfer information, choose IRC File Transfers . Editing Text You can edit text in the following ways: To delete the selected text from the file and move the selected text to a buffer, choose Edit Cut . To copy the selected text to a buffer, choose Edit Copy . To insert the contents of the buffer at the cursor position, choose Edit Paste . You must cut or copy text before you can paste text into the file. To clear all text from the Discussion Area for the currently selected Channel, choose Edit Clear. Reconnecting to a Server To reconnect XChat-GNOME to an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server, choose Network Reconnect . Disconnecting from a Server To disconnect XChat-GNOME from an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server, choose Network Disconnect . Saving a Channel Transcript To save a transcript of a Channel, choose Ctrl S Discussion Save Transcript . Leaving a Channel When you leave a channel, you are removed from the participants and can no longer chat in it, but the discussion up to that point remains in the Server Pane. To leave a Channel, choose Ctrl Q Discussion Leave . Closing a Channel When you close a channel, the channel is removed from the list in the Server Pane. To close a Channel, choose Ctrl W Discussion Close . Navigating through Channels To view previous channel, choose Alt Up Go Previous Discussion To view next channel, choose Alt Down Go Next Discussion Navigating Through Servers To view previous server, choose Ctrl Up Go Previous Network To view next server, choose Ctrl Down Go Next Network Quitting XChat-GNOME To quit XChat-GNOME, choose Ctrl Q IRC Quit . Preferences To modify the preferences of XChat-GNOME, choose Edit Preferences . The Preferences dialog contains the following sections: IRC Preferences General Enter the Nickname you wish to use in the Internet Relay Chat (IRC) channel. Enter your Real Name, which is displayed on /whois requests. Enter the Quit Message you wish to be shown to other users when you leave an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) network. Enter the Part Message you wish to be shown to other users when you leave an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) channel but remain connected to that channel's network. Enter the Away Message you wish to be shown to people who try to contact you when you are away. Highlighting Specify words or phrases that should be highlighted in a different text colour when another chat user says them. This is in addition to your nickname, which is always highlighted. Use Interface Select the Use System Terminal Font option to use the same fonts as your system terminal. Select the Use this font option to open the Font Selection dialog box. Select the Show colors option to enable color nicknames in discussion area. Select the Show timestamps option to show timestamps of discussion. Colors Text Colors Use the Built-in schemes drop-down box to specify how XChat-GNOME should display the text and backgroud color. Select one of the following options: Use the Black on White option to provide black text on a white background. Use the White on Black option to provide white text on a black background. Use the Custom option to create a custom color scheme. The following options are only able to be changed if Built-in schemes is set to Custom. Click on the Foreground color button to display the color selector dialog. Select a foreground color for the XChat-GNOME discussion area. Click on the Background color button to display the color selector dialog. Select the background color for the XChat-GNOME discussion area. Click on the Foreground mark button to display the color selector dialog. Select the forground mark color for the XChat-GNOME discussion area. Click on the Background mark button to display the color selector dialog. Select the background mark color for the XChat-GNOME discussion area. mIRC Colors Select the buttons of the colors that you wish to change, to display the color selector dialog. The colors are only able to be changed if Built-in schemes is set to Custom. Extra Colors Selct the buttons of the colors that you wish to change, to display the color selector dialog. The colors are only able to be changed if Built-in schemes is set to Custom. File Transfers & DCC File Transfers Use the Download file to button to select the folder where you wish to download file. Use the Move completed files to button to select the folder where you wish for completed downloads to be moved. Select Convert spaces to underscore in filenames if you wish to have spaces converted to underscores in the filename. Select Save senders nickname in filenames to add the senders nickname to the downloaded file name. DCC Settings Select the Auto-accept DCC Chat option to automatically accept Direct Client-to-Client (DCC) chats. Select the Auto-accept DCC File Transfers option to automatically accept Direct Client-to-Client (DCC) file transfers. Select the Get IP Address From Server option to use your providers DNS to resolve an IP address. Select the Use This IP Address option and enter your IP address, to use a static IP address. Throttling Use the Individual send KB/s spin box to set your individual maximum upload speed. Use the Global send KB/s spin box to set your global maximum upload speed. Use the Individual receive KB/s spin box to set your individual maximum download speed. Use the Global receive KB/s spin box to set your global maximum download speed. Networks Internet Relay Chat (IRC) Servers To add an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server, click the Add button to open the Network Properties dialog. To edit an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server, click the Edit button to open the Network Properties dialog. To remove an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server, click the Remove button. Scripts and Plugins Script and Plugins To enable or disable a plugin or script, select the Enable option next to the appropriate item. To add a new plugin or script, click the Open button to open the file open dialog. To remove a plugin or script, select the appropriate item and click on the Remove buton . Network monitor Use the Network Manager to control connection state. Auto Away Mark yourself as away when screensaver is active. Sound notification Raise an audio notification when a word is highlighted (including your nick) or when you receive a private message. Notification Add an icon in the notification area informing you of events in xchat-gnome. This allows one to minimize to notification area if Always display notification icon is selected from Notification preferences. On-screen display Display a notification box when a word is highlighted (including your nick) or when you receive a private message. URL scrapper Display all the urls from your conversation in a ugly box. Network Properties The Network Properties dialog for XChat-GNOME, allows you to set the properties for an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server, and contains the following tabs: Network Settings General Enter the Name for the Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server. Select the Automatically connect to network option to connect to a network when starting XChat-GNOME. Select the Use secure connection (SSL) option to connect with Secure Socket Layer (SSL). Select the Cycle until connected option to continue attempts to connect to network, until successful. Use the Character encoding drop-down box to specify which character encoding XChat-GNOME should use. Enter the Server Password, if the Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server requires it. Users and Channels Users Info Select the Use global user settings option to use the global settings used in the General section of . Select the Use the user settings option to set the Nick name and Real Name specific to this Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server. Automatically Join Channels Click the Add button to add a new channel. Click the Edit button to edit the selected channel. Click the Remove button to remove the selected channel. The channel name should begin with a pound sign (#). Servers Servers Click the Add button to add a new Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server. Click the Edit button to edit the selected Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server. Click the Remove button to remove the selected Internet Relay Chat (IRC) server. To specify custom port use (/) as seperator, as "host/port" About <application>XChat-GNOME</application> To find more information about XChat-GNOME, please visit the XChat-GNOME Web page. To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or this manual, see the Feedback section of the GNOME User Guide. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this link, or in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/omf-langpack/xchat-gnome/xchat-gnome-sl.omf0000644000373100047300000000153412270536237024471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 (Brian Pepple) (Joachim Noreiko) (Brian Pepple) XChat-GNOME Manual November 2005 A user manual which describes the use of the XChat-GNOME IRC client. user's guide usr/share/help-langpack/sl/rhythmbox/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000021775512317327147024226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe 2002 Mark Finlay 2002 2002 Mark Humphreys 2005 2006 Baptiste Mille-Mathias 2006 Victor Osadci 2008 Dean Sas Projekt dokumentacije GNOME Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. Ta priročnik je del zbirke priročnikov GNOME distribuiran pod GFDL. V primeru da želite ta priročnik distribuirati ločeno od zbirke, lahko to storite z dodatkom kopije licence priročnika, kot je opisano v odseku 6 licence. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Mark Finlay GNOME Documentation Project
sisob@eircom.net
 Mark Humphreys GNOME Documentation Project
marquee@users.sourceforge.net
 Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation Project
baptiste.millemathias@gmail.com
 Victor Osadci GNOME Documentation Project
Victor.Osadci.GNOME@xhtml.md
 Dean Sas Ubuntu Documentation Project
dean@deansas.org
 Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V0.0.2 October 2002 Mark Finlay GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V0.0.3 August 2003 Mark Humphreys GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V0.0.4 October 2005 Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V2.0.2 April 2006 Luca Ferretti GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V2.0.3 May 2008 Dean Sas GNOME Documentation Project Ta priročnik opisuje različico 0.11.5 Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe. Odziv Za poročilo o hrošču ali predlog glede programa Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe ali tega priročnika sledite navodilom na GNOME strani odziva. Rhythmbox je predvajalnik glasbe z veliko zmožnostmi za namizje GNOME. Rhythmbox rhythmbox Music Player Uvod Rhythmbox Music Player is a music player and library for tagged files that supports various music formats. Trenutne zmožnosti Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe vključujejo: Predvajanje različnih vrst glasbenih datotek iz vaše z oznakami organizirane knjižnice. Prikaz podatkov o skladbah s pomočjo branja metapodatkov. Prikaz skladb v organiziranem pogledu. Ustvarjanje statičnih seznamov predvajanja z vleko in spustom iz pogleda knjižnice. Ustvarjanje samodejnih seznamov predvajanja iz kriterijev. Iskanje skladb v seznamu virov kot sta knjižnica ali seznami predvajanja. Poslušanje medmrežnih radijskih postaj. Branje zvočnih CD-jev in pridobivanje podatkov kot je naslov skladbe z medmrežja. Zapis zvočnih CD-jev iz seznamov predvajanja. Prenos glasbe na iPod, MTP in predvajalnike glasbe obsežnega hranjenja. Prvi koraki Zagon <application>Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe</application> You can launch the Rhythmbox Music Player in the following ways: Applications menu Choose Sound & Video Rhythmbox Music Player. Command Line Type rhythmbox, then press Return. Uporaba pomočnika Ob prvem zagonu Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe vam bo pomočnik pomagal uvoziti vašo glasbo. Na drugem pultu pomočnika pritisnite Prebrskaj in izberite mapo, kjer je shranjena vaša glasba. Okno predvajalnika glasbe Rhythmbox Pregled Okno Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe vam omogoča brskanje in predvajanje vaše najljubše glasbe. prikazuje vmesnik Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe z glavnimi sestavnimi deli.
Okno <application>Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe</application> Show the Rhythmbox Music Player window showing the different parts on the Rhythmbox Music Player interface. Callouts: Menubar, Player area, Browser, Side pane, Statusbar.
Razpredelnica 1 opisuje sestavne dele okna Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe. Enote okna <application>Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe</application> Številka Enota Opis 1 Menijska vrstica Contains menus that you use to perform tasks in Rhythmbox Music Player window. 2 Orodna vrstica Zagotavlja dostop do zmožnosti predvajalnika in podrobnosti o trenutno predvajani skladbi. 3 Časovni drsnik Prikazuje položaj branja skladbe; omogoča skok na drug del skladbe. 4 Stranski pladenj Prikazuje seznam razpoložljivih virov. 5 Brskalnik Omogoča brskanje in filtriranje skladb knjižnice po imenu zvrsti, albuma ali izvajalca. Brskalnik zagotavlja tudi funkcijo iskanja za prikaz le skladb, ki se skladajo z vašimi kriteriji. 6 Seznam skladb Našteje skladbe, ki pripadajo izbranemu viru. 7 Vrstica stanja Prikazuje podatke o izbranem viru v stranskem pladnju.
Stranski pladenj The side pane is where you can access your music library, internet radio, your playlists and audio CDs. The side pane can contain the following sources: The Rhythmbox Music Player library, where all of the imported tracks will appear. The iRadio source, with all internet radio stations. Podcasts. All playlists (normal and smart). Audio CD's inserted into the computer's CD drives. Portable players like iPod plugged to your computer. The DAAP Music shares discovered on the local network. Music stores like Jamendo and Magnatune. The display of the side pane can be toggled on or off by selecting ViewSide Pane . Orodna vrstica predvajalnika Področje orodne vrstice zagotavlja dostop do podrobnosti o trenutno predvajani skladbi. Ko ni predvajana nobena skladba, to področje ne prikazuje podrobnosti. Ko se skladba predvaja, je prikazano ime skladbe in pod imenom ime izvajalca in albuma. Prikazan je tudi sledilec, ki prikazuje napredek predvajane skladbe. Ko je sledilec v žarišču, je mogoče uporabiti tipke s puščicami za hitro predvajanje ali previjanje predvajane skladbe. Shows player area V primeru da uporabljate miško z drsnim koleščkom, lahko prilagodite glasnost z drsanjem navzgor ali navzdol medtem ko je miškin kazalec nad gumbom glasnosti. Vrstica stanja The statusbar contains additional information about the number of songs and the duration of the source selected. The display of the statusbar can be toggled on or off by selecting ViewStatusbar. Shows statusbar Pomanjšano okno <application>Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe</application> Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe vsebuje pomanjšan način. Ta način omogoča dostop le do menijske vrstice in zmožnosti predvajalnika Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe. To switch to the small display, select View Small Display. Shows the Rhythmbox Music Player in small display mode Uporaba predvajalnika glasbe Rhythmbox Predvajanje glasbe To play a track, choose Control Play, or select the track and press the Play button on the toolbar, or simply double-click on the track to start playing. Ko se skladba konča, Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe skoči na predvajanje naslednje skladbe na seznamu prikazanem v pladnju ogleda. V knjižnici lahko predvajate vse skladbe izvajalca ali posamezen album z izbiro vnosa Album ali Izvajalec v brskalniku knjižnice. Naslednja/Predvajaj/Predhodna The Next and Previous buttons can be used to skip between tracks while playing. If a track is currently playing, the previous button will restart the track. Pressing the Play button will start playing the current track. Shows buttons Previous, Play and Next in toolbar. Ponovi Možnost Ponovi določi da Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe ponovno začne predvajati skladbe od začetka seznama, ko doseže zadnjo skladbo. To activate repeat, choose Control Repeat, or press the button Repeat on the toolbar. Shows repeat button in the statusbar. Premešaj Možnost Premešaj določi da Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe predvaja skladbe v naključnem redu. To activate shuffle, choose Control Shuffle, or press the button Shuffle on the toolbar. Shows shuffle button in the statusbar. Nadzor glasnosti The volume control is located in the right hand of the toolbar. Pressing the loudspeaker icon will show the volume slider. Sliding this up and down will increase and decrease the volume. The loudspeaker icon will change to reflect the relative volume. Shows volume slider in toolbar. Glasnost lahko prilagodite z uporabo drsnega miškinega koleščka nad ikono zvočnika. Vir knjižnica Knjižnica je glaven razpoložljiv vir v Rhythmbox predvajalniku glasbe; je podatkovna zbirka, ki vsebuje vse glasbene datoteke uvožene v Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe. (Knjižnica shranjuje pot za dostop do vaših glasbenih datotek, ne samih datotek). The Library can not only contains music files which are physically on your computer (in your HOME Directory for instance), but it can also contains music files available over remote network services. Some examples of supported network services are : Public FTP Authenticated FTP NFS Windows Share The files imported in the Library are displayed in the track list with the information (like the Artist name or the Album name) stored in the tags embedded on the tracks. Rhythmbox Music Player uses these tags to display the tracks in an organized manner. Tags can be modified by choosing MusicProperties and filling in the details on the window that appears. Dodajanje skladb v knjižnico To add tracks to the Library, you can follow these different methods: To import only one track, choose MusicImport File from the menu, then select the file in the file selector and press the Open button. If you want to import several music files located in a folder, choose MusicImport Folder from the menu, then select the folder in the file selector and press the Open button. All the music files located in the folder and its sub-folders will be imported. Drag and drop files from the file manager (like Nautilus) over the Rhythmbox window. V primeru da ste omogočili zmožnost opazovanja map (oglejte si ), bodo vse glasbene datoteke shranjene v izbrani mapi dodane v knjižnico. Dodane bodo tudi kasneje dodane datoteke . Odstranjevanje skladb iz knjižnice Za odstranitev skladbe iz knjižnice, toda ne z diska izberite UrediOdstrani. Skladba in njene lastnosti (kot sta ocena in število predvajanj) bodo odstranjene iz podatkovne zbirke Rhythmbox. Za izbris skladbe iz knjižnice in z diska izberite UrediPremakni v smeti. Skladba bo odstranjena na enak način kot predhodna, toda datoteka bo premaknjena v smeti upravljalnika datotek. Iskanje skladb z uporabo iskanja Rhythmbox vsebuje zmožnost iskanja, ki vam omogoča iskanje in filtriranje skladb z uporabo izraza iskanja. V iskalno polje vnesite nekaj besedila in medtem ko tipkate bodo prikazane le skladbe, ki se skladajo z vnesenim besedilom. Zmožnost iskanja išče po vseh oznakah skladb shranjenih v knjižnici. Za izvedbo bolj natančnega iskanja lahko iščete le v določenih oznakah Izvajalci, Albumi ali Naslovi. Iskanje skladb z uporabo brskalnika Brskalnik je še en priročen način za iskanje skladb. Brskalnik je pogled dveh ali treh pladnjev, ki vam omogoča krmarjenje med glasbenimi zvrstmi, izvajalci in albumi ter prikaz skladb, ki se ujemajo z izbranimi kriteriji. First, to display the Browser, select View Browser. Select artist, album and genre, and as you choose, only the tracks that match your choice will be displayed in the track list. The criteria on the columns apply from the left to the right. Izberete lahko več kriterijev iste kategorije z uporabo tipke Ctrl. Iz izbrane skladbe v seznamu skladb lahko najdete vse skladbe z enako zvrstjo, izvajalcem ali imenom albuma. Izberite skladbo v seznamu skladb, desno kliknite nanjo in izberite Prebrskaj to zvrst/izvajalca/album. Nato bo brskalnik filtriral skladbe z izbranimi kriteriji. Vir radio Sprejemnik medmrežnega radia je mogoče uporabiti za poslušanje pretočnih datotek preko omrežja, krajevnega ali medmrežja.
Medmrežni radio v <application>Rhythmbox predvajalniku glasbe</application>
Dodajanje postaje To add a new station to the Internet Radio tuner, choose Music New Internet Radio Station, then enter the URL of the Internet radio, then press the button Add. Ogledovanje in spreminjanje lastnosti postaje Lastnosti medmrežne radijske postaje si lahko ogledate in spremenite z uporabo menija GlasbaLastnosti. Lastnosti postaje lahko spremenite tudi z izbiro postaje ter desnim klikom in izbiro Lastnosti. Ob dostopu do lastnosti radijskega pretoka lahko spremenite njegov naslov, zvrst in mesto pretoka ter ga ocenite. Odstranjevanje postaje To remove a radio station from the radio stations list, choose Edit Remove; you can also right-click on the station and select Remove. Vir podcasti Podcasting je nov način vsesmernega oddajanja zvočnih vsebin preko mreže; ko avtor objavi epizodo, so naročniki podcasta obveščeni preko XML vira. Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe vam omogoča naročanje na vire podcastov, da boste ob razpoložljivosti nove epizode obveščeni, lahko jo boste prejeli in predvajali. Več podrobnosti o podcastih in podcastanju lahko najdete z obiskom definicije Podcast na strani Wikipedia.
Vmesnik podcastov The Podcast interface with some registered podcasts
Upravljanje s podcasti Dodajanje podcasta Za vpis podcasta izberite GlasbaNov vir podcasta. Nato v novo okno vnesite URL vira podcasta. Rhythmbox bo pridobil seznam epizod in zadnja epizoda bo prejeta na vaš trdi disk. Za dodajanje novega vira podcastov lahko tudi desno kliknete na vir Podcasti in izberete Nov vir podcasta. Izbris podcasta Za izbris podcasta v brskalniku desno kliknite na ime vira podcasta in izberite Izbriši vir podcasta. Nato izberite Izbriši le vir, če želite obdržati epizode podcasta ali pa izberite Izbriši vir in predmet, če želite izbrisati vir in vse njegove povezane epizode. Posodobitev virov Za podatke ali so bile za podcast objavljene nove epizode v brskalniku desno kliknite na ime podcasta in izberite Posodobi vir podcasta. V primeru da so bile objavljene nove epizode, se bodo pojavile na seznamu epizod. Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe redno samodejno preverja seznam virov podcastov za posodobitve. Preverite lahko tudi vse podcaste z desnim klikom nad virom Podcasti in izbiro Posodobi vse vire. Dostop do lastnosti vira podcasta To access to the Feed properties, right-click on the Feed name, and choose Properties. On the Basic tab you can view the podcast Title, Author , the Last Updated date and the Description. On the Details tab you can view the feed Source, Language and the Copyright properties. You can view the properties, and also edit the rating. Upravljanje epizod Prejem epizode podcasta Za prejem epizode na vaš disk desno kliknite na epizodo in izberite Prejmi epizodo. Rhythmbox bo začel prejem epizode na mesto določeno v možnostih. Napredek prejema epizode lahko vidite v stolpcu Stanje. Privzeto so podcasti prejeti v mapo Podcasti/ v vaši domači mapi. Za spremembo mesta si oglejte . Predvajanje epizode podcasta Za predvajanje epizode podcasta izberite epizodo, ki jo želite brati in izberite NadzorPredvajanje; lahko tudi pritisnite gumb Predvajanje. Pred branjem mora biti epizoda prejeta. Za podatke kako prejeti epizodo podcasta si oglejte . Izbris epizode podcasta Za izbris epizode iz podcasta desno kliknite na epizodo in izberite Izbriši. V primeru da želite epizodo obdržati na disku izberite Izbriši le epizodo, če želite izbrisati epizodo s seznama in izbrisati datoteko z diska pa izberite Izbriši epizodo in datoteko. Po izbrisu epizoda ne bo več na voljo v seznamu epizod, tudi če podcast posodobite. Prikaz lastnosti epizode podcasta To access to the episode properties, right-click on the episode, and choose Properties. On the Basic tab you can view the podcast Title, Feed, the publication Data and the Description. On the Details tab you can view the podcast Source, Duration, the Bitrate, the Last Played Date, the Play count and the Rating. Vir vrsta predvajanja Vrsta predvajanja je vir narejen za začasno shrambo skladb, ki jih želite predvajati naslednje. Ko dodate skladbo v vrsto predvajanja, bo Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe po koncu predvajanja skladbe samodejno zamenjal na ta vir. Ko je bila skladba predvajanja, bo samodejno odstranjena iz vira vrste predvajanja. Ko je vrsta predvajanja prazna, bo Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe predvajal prehodno predvajan vir. Dodajanje skladbe v vrsto predvajanja To add a track: Select the track you want to play, in any source. Choose EditAdd to playqueue. Odstranijevanje skladbe iz vrste predvajanja To remove a track stored in Play Queue: Select the track you want to remove in Play Queue source. Choose EditDelete . Vir seznami predvajanja Seznami predvajanja so viri, ki so ustvarjeni iz sklad dostopnih v viru knjižnica. Omogočajo vam zbiranje skladb, ki sledijo določeni 'zvrsti', določeni skupini izvajalcev ali celo skladbam ki so določene 'volje', ali čemurkoli želite. Rhythmbox Music Player has 2 kinds of playlists: Static Playlists Smart Playlists Rhytmbox vam omogoča zapis skladb vaših seznamov predvajanja na zvočni CD. Statični seznami predvajanja Statični seznami predvajanja so seznami predvajanja izgrajeni iz skladb, spuščenih iz knjižnice. Ustvarjanje statičnega seznama predvajanja Za ustvarjanje novega seznama predvajanja izberite GlasbaSeznam predvajanjaNov seznam predvajanja. V stranskem pladnju se bo pojavil prazen seznam predvajanja brez imena. Vnesite ime za seznam predvajanja in pritisnite Vnosno tipko. Dodajanje skladb na seznam predvajanja Za dodajanje skladb na seznam predvajanja izberite skladbe iz seznama skladb v knjižnici, ter svojo izbiro povlecite in spustite nad ikono seznama predvajanja v stranskem pladnju. Na seznam predvajanja lahko spustite zvrst, izvajalca ali ime albuma iz brskalnika. Vse skladbe, ki pripadajo izbrani kategoriji, bodo dodane na seznam predvajanja. Seznam predvajanja s skladbami lahko ustvarite v enem koraku. Izberite skladbe s seznama skladb, eno ali več kategorij iz brskalnika (Zvrst, Izvajalec ali Album) ali spustite izbor nad stranskim pladnjem. Imenovan seznam predvajanja bo samodejno ustvarjen. Odstranjevanje skladb iz seznama predvajanja To remove tracks from a playlist, first select the tracks to remove, and then you have two methods: Choose EditDelete. Right-click over the selection and choose Delete. This operation deletes the track only from playlist and not from the Library. Izbris statičnega seznam predvajanja To delete a static playlist, select the playlist to delete, then you have two ways to delete it: Choose EditDelete. Right-click over the playlist and choose Delete. This operation deletes only the playlist and not the tracks stored in the playlist deleted. Pametni seznami predvajanja Pametni seznami predvajanja so izgrajeni iz kriterijev, zato so skladbe na njih dodane dinamično; vse skladbe, ki se skladajo s kriteriji, bodo dodane na seznam predvajanja. Ustvarjanje novega pametnega seznama predvajanja To create a new playlist: Choose MusicPlaylistNew Automatic Playlist. Edit the playlist criteria through the query editor. Once your criteria have been chosen, click New to create the query. Urejanje pametnega seznama predvajanja Urejanje pametnega seznama predvajanja vam omogoča spremembo kriterijev nastavljenih za ta seznam predvajanja. Za urejanje pametnega seznama predvajanja izberite GlasbaSeznam predvajanjaUredi in uredite kriterije. Ko ste končali, izberite Zapri. Izbris pametnega seznama predvajanja To delete a smart playlist, select the playlist to delete, then you have two ways to delete it: Choose EditDelete. Right-click over the playlist and choose Delete. Uporaba urejevalnika poizvedbe Izberite kriterije za uveljavitev novega pravila. V primeru da potrebujete več kot en kriterij kliknite na gumb Dodaj. Pojavi se nova vrstica kjer lahko nastavite nov kriterij. V primeru da želite omejiti število skladb v seznamu predvajanja, izberite Omeji na: in izberite način omejitve. Omejite lahko po skladbah, po skupni velikosti (v MB ali GB) ali po trajanju (izraženo v Minutah). Ko končate nastavljanje kriterijev za seznam predvajanja, izberite Nov; okno urejevalnika poizvedb seznama predvajanja se bo zaprlo in seznam predvajanj bo prikazal skladbe, ki se skladajo z vašimi kriteriji. Vir zvočni CD Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe lahko upravlja z zvočnimi CD-ji. Lahko predvaja CD-je in vam omogoča zapis vaših lastnih. Predvajanje Ko je vstavljen zvočni CD, se bo pojavil v stranskem pladnju. Skladbe v njem so lahko prikazane v glavnem oknu Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe. V primeru da ste povezani na medmrežje bodo pridobljene in prikazane podrobnosti CD-ja. Za predvajanje in premor predvajanja ali za skok naprej ali nazaj uporabite enake tipke kot so uporabljene za predvajanje iz knjižnice. Uvažanje zvočnega CD-ja V primeru da želite obdržati skladbe svojih zvočnih CD-jev na svojem računalniku, jih lahko uvozite. To import Audio CD tracks, choose Music Import Audio CD, it will start Sound-Juicer, an application dedicated to importing Audio CDs. To know more about Sound-Juicer, you can read the Sound-Juicer manual. Za samodejno dodajanje skladb iz Sound-Juicer v knjižnico Rhythmbox boste morali nastaviti Sound-Juicer tako, da bo pretvoril skladbe na mesto vaše knjižnice Rhythmbox in omogočiti Rhythmboxovo zmožnost opazovanje knjižnice. Oglejte si možnosti Sound-Juicer in možnosti knjižnice Rhythmbox. Ustvarjanje zvočnega CD-ja Rhythmbox vam omogoča ustvarjanje vaših lastnih zvočnih CD-jev z glasbo shranjeno v knjižnici Rhythmbox. To create an Audio CD: Create a playlist, static or smart (see ) and add tracks. Choose MusicPlaylistCreate Audio CD Insert a blank CD. Click the button Create, the burning process starts. Vir prenosni zvočni predvajalniki Rhythmbox lahko zazna kdaj je prenosni predvajalnik zvoka priklopljen na vaš računalnik in je zmožen prebrati shranjene skladbe. Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe bi moral znati upravljati z večino prenosnih predvajalnikov zvoka, vključno z Apple iPod, MTP predvajalniki in predvajalniki obsežnega hranjenja. Ko priklopite prenosni predvajalnik zvoka, je na stranski pladenj dodana ikona prenosnega zvočnega predvajalnika. Ta vir deluje na enak način kot vir knjižnica. V primeru da Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe ne zazna vaše naprave kot prenosni predvajalnik zvoka, ustvarite prazno datoteko z imenom .is_audio_player v vrhnji ravni datotečnega sistema na vašem predvajalniku. Vir souporaba DAAP DAAP je omrežni protokol, ki vam omogoča souporabo glasbe shranjene v Rhythmbox. DAAP pomeni Protokol digitalnega zvočnega dostopa. Ker je DAAP standarden protokol za souporabo glasbe, lahko poslušate in souporabljate glasbo ne le z uporabniki Rhythmbox, marveč z vsemi uporabniki, ki uporabljajo programsko opremo združljivo z DAAP kot je iTunes, . Ob zagonu bo Rhythmbox poiskal vse DAAP souporabe, ki so jih na vašem krajevnem omrežju (vaš dom ali vaša pisarna, ne celotno medmrežje) objavili drugi uporabniki in jih prikazal v stranskem pladnju. V primeru da je souporaba omogočena, bo Rhythmbox istočasno objavil vašo knjižnico in vaše sezname predvajanja. Na ta način lahko poslušate glasbo shranjeno na prijateljevemu računalniku in on lahko posluša vašo. Za onemogočenje Rhythmbox DAAP souporabe si oglejte v možnostih. Obvestilno področje Pregled Obvestilno področje je zmožnost GNOME, ki med delovanjem programa na pladenj doda majhno ikono. Ta vam omogoča nadzor Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe iz vaše vrstice in prejemanje podatkov, ko vmesnik Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe ni viden.
<application>Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe</application> v obvestilnem področju
Pridobivanje podrobnosti Namigi podrobnosti Ko premaknete miškin kazalec nad ikono Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe, lahko vidite izvajalca glasbe, ime skladbe in položaj časa. Obvestilno okno Vsakič ko se je skladba spremenila, ali je bila epizoda podcasta prejeta vas lahko Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe obvesti. Na namizju prikaže obvestilno okno, ki vsebuje podatke.
Obvestilno okno <application>Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe</application>
Okno obvestil je mogoče onemogočiti z odstranitvijo izbire možnosti Pokaži obvestila iz vsebinskega menija ikone v obvestilnem področju. Nadzor Rhythmbox Z uporabo ikone Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe v obvestilnem področju je mogoče programu poslati naslednje ukaze:
Obvestilno področje (prikazujoči meni)
Play — If selected, plays the currently selected song. Previous — Skip to previous song in the selected source. Next — Skip to next song in the selected source. Show Window Player — Choose whether or not the Rhythmbox Music Player window is visible or not on the desktop. Show Notifications — Choose whether or not the Rhythmbox Music Player will notify you about track changes and various information. Quit — Quit the Rhythmbox Music Player. V primeru da uporabljate miško z drsnim koleščkom, lahko z drsenjem navzgor ali navzdol medtem ko je miškin kazalec nad apletom pladnja prilagodite glasnost. Predvajanje/premor lahko hitro preklopite s pritiskom na srednji miškin gumb. Prilagajanje predvajalnika glasbe Rhythmbox Ta odsek opisuje kako lahko Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe prilagodite, da ustreza vašim zahtevam in željam. Nastavljanje vaših možnosti. Z uporabo pogovornega okna Možnosti lahko prilagodite izgled in obnašanje Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe. Za prikaz pogovornega okna Možnosti izberite UrediMožnosti. Splošno Izberite način prikaza Pogleda brskalnika. Izberete lahko tri ali dva pladnja in kateri pulti naj bodo prikazani. Choose the Visible Columns you want to display in Rhythmbox Music Player. This option affects the following sources: Library Audio CD Portable Players Playlists DAAP Music shares Glasba Mesto knjižnice je mapa, ki jo bo Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe nadziral za iskanje novih skladb. Ko z brskalnikom datotek (kot je Nautilus) dodate nove zvočne datoteke, jih bo Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe zaznal in bodo samodejno dodane v knjižnico. Izognite se nastavitvi vaše mape Doma kot mesto knjižnice, ker ta zmožnost zahteva veliko CPE. Za onemogočenje zmožnosti opazovanja odstranite izbiro Opazovanje knjižnice za nove datoteke. V primeru da želite dodati več kot eno mapo za ogled uporabite gconf-editor in mapo dodajte na seznam /app/rhythmbox/library_locations Podcasti Mesto prejemov podcastov je privzeto mapa Podcasti/ v vaši domači mapi. V primeru da to mesto ne ustreza vašim potrebam izberite drugo mapo v spustnem seznamu ali izberite Drugo za pojav izbirnika datotek. Izberite frekvenco, ki jo naj Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe preveri za nove epizoda podcastov. Souporaba Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe lahko souporabi vsebino vaše knjižnice preko krajevnega omrežja z drugimi uporabniki Rhythmbox predvajalnika glasbe in Apple iTunes. Izberite Souporabi mojo glasbo za omogočitev ogleda in branja vaših skladb uporabnikom vašega omrežja. Vnesite ime, ki naj se pojavi na omrežju, v polje Ime souporabe glasbe. Profil last.fm The Last.fm profile plugin collects information about the songs you listen to and sends it to the Last.fm website, building up a profile of your listening habits. With this profile, you can: consult statistics, such as most played songs or most played artists. receive recommendations about artists that you might like. Za uporabo vstavka profila Last.fm morate imeti profil Last.fm. V primeru da ga še nimate za ustvarjanje novega uporabite Vpisno stran Last.fm . V polji Uporabniško ime in Geslo v oknu nastavitev vstavka profila Last.fm vnesite podrobnosti računa. Nastavitveno okno vstavka profila Last.fm prikazuje tudi podrobnosti stanja. V primeru da vaša stran profila Last.fm pokaže, da se vaš profil ne posodablja, vam lahko podatki tukaj pomagajo diagnosticirati težavo. Bližnjice Tipkovne bližnjice Bližnjice predvajalnika Bližnjice Dejanja Ctrl p Predvajajanje / Premor Ctrl Left Skok na predhodno skladbo ali nazaj na začetek skladbe Ctrl Right Skok na naslednjo skladbo Ctrl Up Increase playback volume Ctrl Down Decrease playback volume Ctrl R Omogoči ali onemogoči ponavljajoče predvajanje Ctrl U Omogoči ali onemogoči premešano predvajanje
Splošne bližnjice Bližnjice Dejanja Ctrl A Izberi vse Shift Ctrl A Odstrani izbor vsega Ctrl J Skoči na predvajano pesem Alt S Jump to search field Alt Return Prikaže lastnosti skladbe
Bližnjice oken Bližnjice Dejanja Ctrl Q Konča Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe Ctrl B Pokaže ali skrije brskalnik F9 Pokaže ali skrije stranski pladenj Ctrl K Pokaže ali skrije stransko vrstico vrste F11 Preklopi celozaslonski način
Večpredstavnostne tipke Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe podpira tipke na večpredstavnostnih tipkovnicah, če so nastavljene v vašem namiznem okolju. Bližnjice oken Bližnjice Dejanja Stop Zaustavi Pause / Play Predvajanje / Premor Prev Predhodno predvajana skladba Next Naslednja skladba
Linux Infrardeči daljinski upravljalec Rhythmbox predvajalnik glasbe vključuje vstavek za Linux infrardeči daljinski predvajalnik (LIRC). Podprti so naslednji nizi ukaza z uporabo imena programa 'rhythmbox': Bližnjice oken Niz ukaza Dejanje play Začetek predvajanja pause Premor predvajanja playpause Preklop med predvajanjem in premorom shuffle Preklop premešanega predvajanja repeat Preklop ponavljajočega predvajanja next Preskoči na naslednjo skladbo previous Preskoči na predhodno skladbo seek_forward Skoči 10 sekund naprej v predvajani skladno seek_backward Skoči 10 sekund nazaj v predvajani skladbi volume_up Poveča glasnost predvajanja za 10% volume_down Zmanjša glasnost predvajanja za 10% mute Nemo predvajanje
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/rhythmbox/fdl-appendix.xml0000644000373100047300000006472512317327147024647 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Version 1.1, March 2000 2000Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. GNU Free Documentation License 0. PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. This License is a kind of copyleft, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The Document, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as you. A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language. A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only. The Title Page means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. 2. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies. 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. 4. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: A Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. B List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). C State on the Title Page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices. F Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. H Include an unaltered copy of this License. I Preserve the section entitled History, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section entitled History in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. J Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the History section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. K In any section entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. M Delete any section entitled Endorsements. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version. N Do not retitle any existing section as Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. You may add a section entitled Endorsements, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard. You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version . 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled History in the various original documents, forming one section entitled History; likewise combine any sections entitled Acknowledgements, and any sections entitled Dedications. You must delete all sections entitled Endorsements. 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an aggregate, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. 8. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail. 9. TERMINATION You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. Addendum To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.
If you have no Invariant Sections, write with no Invariant Sections instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write no Front-Cover Texts instead of Front-Cover Texts being LIST; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/rhythmbox/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000706312317327147023350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. Ta priročnik je del zbirke priročnikov GNOME distribuiran pod GFDL. V primeru da želite ta priročnik distribuirati ločeno od zbirke, lahko to storite z dodatkom kopije licence priročnika, kot je opisano v odseku 6 licence. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000336212300405421025224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help translate

The GNOME Games user interface and documentation is being translated by a world-wide volunteer community: you are welcome to participate.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

To start translating you will need to create an account and join the translation team for your language. This will give you the ability to upload new translations.

You can chat with GNOME translators using irc: join the #i18n chanel on the irc.gnome.org server. People on the channel are located worldwide, so you may not get an immediate response as a result of timezone differences.

Alternatively, you can contact the Internationalization Team using their mailing list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/license.page0000644000373100047300000000356112300405421024652 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Legal information. License

This work is distributed under a CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

You are free:

<em>To share</em>

To copy, distribute and transmit the work.

 <em>To remix</em>

To adapt the work.

Under the following conditions:

<em>Attribution</em>

You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

<em>Share Alike</em>

If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same, similar or a compatible license.

For the full text of the license, see the CreativeCommons website, or read the full Commons Deed.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/strategy.page0000644000373100047300000000335712300405421025075 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Strategy

Since each tile layout requires a different approach, there is no one universal strategy. However, there are some strategy tips to keep in mind while you play:

The general strategy is to keep removing matching tiles in such a way that each removed tile will expose further tiles. A good strategy would be to expose new tiles with every set of tiles you match and eliminate.

Choosing easily accessible tiles, such as those from the top levels, is not beneficial. This strategy leaves essential tiles under cover, increasing your chances of losing the game.

Since you are scored by how quickly you finish the game, time is the most important factor in the game. It is therefore important to be fast.

Using the hint option adds a 30-second penalty to your time.

Shuffling tiles adds a 60-second penalty to your time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/gameplay.page0000644000373100047300000000316212300405421025024 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Basic gameplay

Mahjongg is played by matching two identical tiles per turn. A tile is eligible for matching if no part of another tile is lying directly on it, and it has a free long edge on either the left or the right. You win by removing all tiles, and you are scored by the amount of time it takes you to do so.

There are many different tile layouts to choose from.

To match two tiles:

Click on the a tile you want to match. If it is an eligible tile, it will be highlighted.

Click on a matching tile. If it is a truly a matching tile, both tiles will vanish.
Video demonstration

Video of gameplay
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000401312300405421025244 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Report a Problem

Mahjongg is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs, crashes and request enhancements.

To participate you need an account which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, and make comments. Also, you need to register so you can receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugApplicationsgnome-mahjongg. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

If you are requesting a new feature, choose enhancement in the Severity menu. Fill in the Summary and Description sections and click Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050312300405421024171 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000207212300405421024662 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help develop

The GNOME Games are developed and maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

If you would like to help develop GNOME Games, you can get in touch with the developers using irc, or via our mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/choosing.page0000644000373100047300000000112012300405421025026 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Select a board

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/map.page0000644000373100047300000000510012300405421023774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Change tile layout

There are 9 different layouts. To select a different tile layout:

Click MahjonggPreferences.

Under Maps select a layout from the drop-down menu.

Click Close

Your new tile layout will take effect immediately unless you have already started a game and chose for the effect to take place after you are finished.

Easy

The Ziggurat

Four Bridges

Cloud

Tic-tac-toe

Red Dragon

Pyramid's Walls

Confounding Cross

Difficult
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000347012300405421025265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Keyboard shortcuts

Fullscreen

F11

Help

F1

Hint

CtrlH

New game

CtrlN

Pause

Pause

Use the toolbar Pause button if your keyboard does not have a Pause key.

Quit

CtrlQ

Redo

ShiftCtrlZ

Undo

CtrlZ
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/rules.page0000644000373100047300000000260212300405421024355 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Rules

Tiles must be identical to be removed.

Fully and partially covered tiles cannot be matched.

Tiles must have a free long edge in order to be eligible for matching.

You can undo a move without penalty.

Using the hint option adds a 30-second penalty to your time.

If the arrangement does not allow further tiles to be matched, you will be given the option to shuffle the tiles in order to keep playing.

Shuffling tiles adds a 60-second penalty to your time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/scoring.page0000644000373100047300000000201112300405421024661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Scoring

In Mahjongg, you are scored by how quickly you can complete a board.

To view the highscore board:

Select MahjonggScores

The scores are stored on a per map basis. You can view the highscores for a particular map by selecting it from the drop-down menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/index.page0000644000373100047300000000223012300405421024327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/logo.png"/> Mahjongg Mahjongg GNOME Mahjongg help. Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png">Mahjongg logo</media> Mahjongg

Mahjongg is a simple pattern recognition game. You score points by matching identical tiles.

Playing Mahjongg
Useful tips
Advanced
Get involved
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000214712300405421026100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help write documentation

The GNOME Games documentation is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, feel free to get in touch with us using irc, or via our mailing list.

Our wiki page contains useful information.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/pause.page0000644000373100047300000000224012300405421024336 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Pausing your game

You can pause your current game using one of the following methods:

The Pause button in the toolbar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000220012300405421024657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Show/hide the toolbar

To show or hide the toolbar, click MahjonggToolbar.

The toolbar, located under the menu bar, lets you perform common actions with your mouse. To use a toolbar item, just click on it. The buttons, from left to right, are New Game, Undo Move, Redo Move, Hint and Pause.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/moves.page0000644000373100047300000000173412300405421024361 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Moves left

The Moves Left counter is located on the toolbar. It displays the number of different moves that can be made. It can help you see how far you are from running out of moves, and whether you've seen all possible moves.

Mahjongg counters

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mahjongg/hints.page0000644000373100047300000000417712300405421024361 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Hints

Hint highlights two tiles that can be matched. If you have already selected one tile, it will show a match for that piece if one exists.

Hint can be accessed by clicking MahjonggHint. Alternatively, use the Hint button in the toolbar, or press CtrlH.

Hint can make Mahjongg too easy, and should be used sparingly.

There is a 30-second penalty for each use of the "hint" option.
Video demonstration You can use Hints to help you find identical tiles. Press CtrlH. There is a 30 s penalty for each use of this option.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/neighbor.xml0000644000373100047300000000371312307311664024022 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Neighbor Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Dealt to the Tableau in the manner described below. Tableau Five by five grid, each capable of holding one card. One card dealt to each space at the beginning of game. Empty spaces automatically filled by moving cards from the right to the left, from the leftmost card of the row below to the rightmost space, and from the Stock to all otherwise empty spaces. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Click on Kings to remove them. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to thirteen as long as the two cards are touching horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. Options None Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Remove cards higher up on the table first as this creates more movement within the grid. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/plait.xml0000644000373100047300000000522312307311664023334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Plait Written by W. Borgert Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Third row from the right side in the middle. Two redeals are allowed. Waste Fourth row from the right in the middle, directly left of the stock. Foundation Right eight piles. One card is already there at start. This is the base card. All fields have to be started with this card. Plait The group of cards in the middle of the table. Starts with 20 cards. Only the one top level card can be moved. Edges The four fields at the top and bottom, left and right of the plait. These are automatically refilled from the plait. Tableau The eight fields left and right of the plait, between the edge fields. Only one card per pile is possible. Goal Move all cards to Foundations. Rules All eight Foundations have to be started with the same card value. At the beginning you can choose whether to build up or down. You can take cards from the plait in the middle of the tableau, from the eight free fields left and right of the plait, from the four edges around the plait, and from the waste. The game is lost if no available cards can be moved on to the Foundation piles and the Stock is empty. Scoring No scoring. You either win or lose. Strategy Pick the cards from the plait as soon as possible as they are hard to free. Then pick the cards from the tableau as it will give you empty slots to temporarily store some cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/labyrinth.xml0000644000373100047300000000453312307311664024222 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Labyrinth Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Foundation Four piles top right. Aces are placed in their respective Foundation pile prior to shuffling the deck. Tableau One card is dealt face up in each Tableau pile at the start of the game. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Build any cards from the Tableau in suit and sequence on to the Foundation. Spaces are automatically filled from the Stock. Once the eight cards in the Tableau piles cannot be played, click on the Stock to deal a card to each pile. Empty slots in the Tableau are no longer filled automatically. Cards at the top and bottom of each Tableau pile is available for play on to the Foundation piles. There is no building on the Tableau. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Get plenty of sleep the night before so that you are bright and alert when you play this game. Move any card you possibly can on to the Foundation piles. Have fun! usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/clock.xml0000644000373100047300000000551412307311664023321 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Clock Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Deal cards in a clock shape, for a total of twelve piles with four cards each. Stock Place last four cards in the Stock pile (middle of the Tableau) Flip over top card. Goal To reveal all the cards. Rules Move the top card in the middle to the appropriate pile. The Tableau is in the shape of a clock, and so the numbered cards go where they would on an analog clock. Aces go where the ones go, and the Jacks and Queens go where the elevens and twelves go respectively. For all the people who have never had an analog watch/clock, this is the pattern: Clock Layout. Kings are kept in the middle pile. When a card is moved to a new pile (or made to stay in the same pile, as the case is with the King), the bottom card in the new pile is taken and placed on top of the middle pile face up. This new card is ready for play. To move a card to the appropriate pile, either drag the card over or double click on the appropriate receptor pile. Game is over when there are four kings in the middle. At this point, you've won if goal is achieved. Note that if a card in a pile is in the right place it is okay even if it is faced down. Scoring Each card in the appropriate pile of the clock (not counting Kings, as there are no Kings on real clocks) scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Find a way to automate this game. There are no decisions ever to be made. If you lose it's not your fault. (Contrariwise, if you win, it's just luck!) usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/forty_thieves.xml0000644000373100047300000000552012307311664025115 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Forty Thieves Written by Ed Sirett Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt singly to the waste, The top card of the waste is available for play. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Ten piles. Deal four rows face up to start. Tableau can be built down in suit. Cards are moved singly. Empty piles can be filled with any card. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau are built down in the same suit. Cards can only be moved singly. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card. As a short cut you can move more than one if there are enough empty spaces. Cards can also be moved in groups to the Foundation piles. Cards are played singly from the Stock to the waste pile, whose top card is available for play. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Double clicking on a foundation will autoplay cards. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau or waste will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible, or to the tableau if possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation scores 5 points. When a Foundation pile is complete (from Ace to King), 60 more points are scored. Maximum possible score: 1000 Strategy Refrain from bringing cards to the tableau in order to obtain an empty space as soon as possible. Then balance the requirements to maintain empty spaces against the need to save low cards from being buried in the waste. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/aunt_mary.xml0000644000373100047300000000617412307311664024230 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Aunt Mary Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Six piles, deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on the first two piles then one card face down on all covered piles. Place three cards face up and the rest face down and so on. Repeat gradually revealing more cards each time until there are six rows with six cards. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Aunt Mary is extremely difficult and rarely solvable. The real challenge is not finishing but seeing how far you can get. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/streets_and_alleys.xml0000644000373100047300000000410412307311664026104 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Streets and Alleys Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle column. To be built from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight slots (four to the left and four to the right of Foundations.) Deal all cards face up and extended on to these eight piles so that there are seven cards in each pile on the left flank and six cards in each pile on the right flank and all cards are showing. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Only one card can be moved at a time. Empty piles can be filled with any single card. Foundations are built up in suit. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Build evenly on to Foundations if possible. Try and get an empty Tableau slot. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/giant.xml0000644000373100047300000000654612307311664023336 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Giant Written by Ed Sirett Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here after dealing on the Tableau. Cards are dealt a row at a time onto the tableau piles. No redeals. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight piles. Deal one card face up to all eight piles. Reserve To the right of the Tableau. Initially empty. May contain any single card. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating-colors. Cards are moved singly or in groups. An empty slot in the Tableau can be filled with any card. There is an option to restrict the movement to only cards of the same suit. See below. Cards are dealt from the Stock to the Tableau in complete rows. The reserve may be empty or occupied as you wish. Foundations are built up from suit from Ace to King. Top cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Double clicking on a Foundation will automatically move as many cards as possible to the Foundations. Options There are two ways to play. The difference between them is in how the cards may be built in the tableau. Same suit Cards must be of the same suit to be moved as a group and must be placed on a card of the same suit. Alternating colors To be moved as a gorup cards must be in a sequence of alternaing colors. The top card must be placed on a card of the opposite color. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy Avoid leaving small cards buried in the tableau. Use the Reserve wisely. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/athena.xml0000644000373100047300000000704612307311664023470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Athena Written by Alan Horkan, based on work by Jonathan Blandford Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Four rows, the first row is face down, the second row is face up, the third row is face down, and the fourth and final row is face up. Essentially Athena is the same as Klondike only the opening layout is different. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Don't give up the ship! Try brute force methods when the game seems over. Sometimes a combination of using cards already in the Foundation and rearranging sequences will free up some needed cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/thirteen.xml0000644000373100047300000000451512307311664024050 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thirteen Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. The top card is available for play. Tableau Deal face down seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Flip bottom row. Goal Remove all cards. Rules All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Kings can be removed singly. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to thirteen with Aces equal to 1, Jacks equal to 11, and Queens equal to 12. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. The top card is available for play either with the available cards in the pyramid or with the card below. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Every pyramid needs a strong foundation. Get rid of the lower cards first, with an eye out to try to expose as many cards as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/monte_carlo.xml0000644000373100047300000000461612307311664024532 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Monte Carlo Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt after concatenating the Tableau onto the empty slots. Tableau Five by five grid, each capable of holding one card. One card dealt to each space at the beginning of game. Empty spaces can be filled by moving cards from the right to the left, from the leftmost card of the row below to the rightmost space, and from the Stock to all otherwise empty spaces by clicking on the Stock. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Cards can be removed in pairs that have the same value as long as the two cards are touching horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. At any point that there are empty piles in the Tableau, dealing from the Stock moves all the cards already in the Tableau from the right to left and moving them up a row to the far right if necessary making all the empty slots at the end. The Stock is then dealt on to these empty slots. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Keep an eye out as to how the Tableau will shrink when you deal. Sometimes leaving pairs in will allow more pairs to become available after a deal. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/canfield.xml0000644000373100047300000000655612307311664024002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Canfield Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned over three at a time to Waste. Unlimited redeals. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Reserve On left under stock. Deal thirteen cards here with top card face up. Top card available for play to Foundations or Tableau. Tableau Four piles below Foundations. Deal one card face up on to each pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. Foundation Four piles top right. Deal one card face up on first Foundation pile. This card is now the base card. Built up by suit. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by any card or group of cards in sequence. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste by three. If the last flip has less than three cards, that many cards are flipped for that move only. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card (first card dealt to first Foundation) New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as the first card placed during the dealing period are placed on empty Foundation piles. Aces are placed on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. This game used to be played in casinos. You would break even if your score is 10. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy A bird in hand is worth two in the bush. This game is hard to win. Most people play with the betting rules in mind and try to get as many points as possible. To this end, always move cards into the Foundations as soon as they are available. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/whitehead.xml0000644000373100047300000000526112307311664024167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Whitehead Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Deal all cards face up such that there is one card in the first pile, two in the second pile, ending with seven in the seventh pile. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by same color. Builds of cards that are the same suit and in sequence can be moved as a unit. Empty Tableau slots can be filled with any card or build of cards. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Empty Tableau slots are a prized commodity in this game. Sometimes keeping them around until you need them is a very good idea. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/jamestown.xml0000644000373100047300000000316012307311664024230 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jamestown Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here at beginning of play. Tableau Nine piles in a 3x3 formation. Each Tableau pile is dealt one card face up. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Remove pairs of cards with the same rank. Empty piles are automatically filled from the Stock. Scoring Removing each pair of cards scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Remove pairs of cards as fast as possible. That is the only challenge. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/cover.xml0000644000373100047300000000353112307311664023341 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Cover Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All remaining cards are placed here after dealing. Tableau Four piles. One card is dealt in each slot at the beginning of the game. Empty slots are immediately filled from the Stock. Goal Empty the Stock. Rules Any two cards in the Tableau can be removed if they belong to the same suit. Spaces are immediately filled by cards in the Stock. The game is over when each suit is represented by one card in the Tableau. Scoring Each pair removed from the game scores two points. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy A quick short game with not much thought involved, cover is best played with minimal thought and quick reflexes. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/osmosis.xml0000644000373100047300000000543212307311664023721 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Osmosis Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves Four spread piles on left. Deal three cards face down and one card face up in each Reserve pile. No building allowed. Foundation Four piles on right. Deal one card on to first Foundation. Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Any card of the suit in the first Foundation can be played on to this Foundation pile at any time. Each ensuing Foundation can only be started with a card of the same rank as this first card. Once started, these latter foundations can be built on in suit as long as a card of the same rank already exists in the Foundation directly above it. Play cards from Reserves whenever possible following these rules. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Options Three card deals: Deal three cards at a time from Stock to Waste and enable unlimited redeals. Scoring One point for every card placed on Foundation. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy It's no coincidence that solitaire games are also known as "patience games". Do not automatically put first available card on the second (and third) foundation piles. Sometimes it is worth using a different suit so as to free up more cards in the Reserves. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/freecell.xml0000644000373100047300000000502612307311664024005 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Freecell Written by Changwoo Ryu Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves Four left piles on top row. Each Reserve pile can only hold one card. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Tableau Eight piles. Deal all cards face up on to these eight piles, ending up with seven cards in each of the first four piles and six cards in the last four piles. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Cards can only be moved singly, but as a shortcut, if there are enough Reserve piles free to allow it, cards in sequence can be moved together. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved if there are enough Reserve piles free to allow the move if the cards were moved singly. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card or group of cards. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are not in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Cards in Reserve piles can be played back on to Tableau or on to the Foundation. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Space is a valuable commodity. Keep as many of the Reserve piles free as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/escalator.xml0000644000373100047300000000420712307311664024201 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Escalator Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals Waste To be taken from Stock. Tableau Deal face up seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Rules All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Build on to the Waste from these available cards whenever possible by playing a card with a rank immediately above or immediately below the rack of the top card in the Waste. Aces are both above Kings and below Deuces. Cards are flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed from the Tableau scores one point. Maximum possible score: 28 Strategy Try to plan ahead so that you can make runs in the future. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/carpet.xml0000644000373100047300000000472712307311664023511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Carpet Written by Vincent Povirk Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Aces are removed before dealing and placed on the foundations. Tableau The "Carpet". Four rows of five cards dealt face up. Cards on the tableau are available for play. There is no building. Empty spaces are automatically filled from the waste if possible or the stock. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards on the tableau are in play. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card places in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Just put anything you can on the foundation. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/first_law.xml0000644000373100047300000000442612307311664024221 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 First Law Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here in beginning. When emptied, cards are brought back from Tableau and put back in the Stock. Tableau Four piles on the right. Each deal from Stock will deal one card to each Tableau pile. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Clicking on the Stock will deal one card to each of the Tableau piles. If any of the cards showing in the Tableau are of the same rank, move the others on to the leftmost of the like cards. Empty piles can only be filled by an ensuing deal from Stock. If at any point, all four cards showing are the same rank, they are removed. When Stock is empty, the Tableau piles are gathered, right pile on left, and placed back into stock. The first card dealt will always be the first card dealt until it is removed. There are unlimited redeals. Scoring Each set of four cards removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 13 Strategy Don't forget to use the brakes! This game might never end unless you decide carefully whether or not to make a move. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/helsinki.xml0000644000373100047300000000341012307311664024025 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Helsinki Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are automatically placed on to the Tableau whenever a space opens up. Tableau Ten piles. Deal a card face up in every pile. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Remove cards in pairs that add up to thirteen with Aces being one, Jacks being eleven, and Queens being twelve. Kings are removed singly. Empty Tableau piles are automatically filled from the Stock. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Go as fast as you can. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/fortress.xml0000644000373100047300000000405312307311664024072 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fortress Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Tableau Five piles one each side of the Foundation. Deal five cards face up on to each of these piles and one more on the top two piles. The top card in any Tableau pile is available for play. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau piles can be built up or down in suit. Only the top card in every pile is available for play. Empty slots can be filled with any available card. The Foundations are built up from Ace to King in suit. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Safeguard any empty Tableau slots you may create. They are the key to a successful game. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/scorpion.xml0000644000373100047300000000435212307311664024061 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Scorpion Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The last three cards are placed here after the deal. Tableau Seven piles to the right of Stock. * Deal one cards face down on each of the first four rows. Deal one card face up on the last three rows. Repeat from * two more times, dealing a total of three rows. Deal one card face up on each pile for four more rows. Goal Create four piles of thirteen cards each, each pile consisting of one suit and in rank order. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by suit. Groups of cards can be moved regardless of sequence. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. At any point, clicking on the Stock will deal the last three cards, one each on the first three piles. Scoring For every sequence in suit, points given is (length of sequence - 1). Each time a sequence of thirteen is created and is in its own slot, four extra points are awarded. Reaching a card that was face down gives three points. Maximum possible score: 100 Strategy Unknotting knots is not often easy. Avoid tangling yourself up with no way out. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/easthaven.xml0000644000373100047300000000476212307311664024210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Easthaven Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Seven piles on the bottom. Deal two cards face down and one card face up for every pile. Goal Remove all cards. Rules The Tableau is built down by alternate color. Builds of cards in sequence and alternating color can be moved as a unit. Empty Tableau piles can be filled by Kings or builds starting with a King. Any empty Tableau slots must be filled if possible before dealing more cards. Clicking on the Stock deals one card face up on to each Tableau pile. The last deal places one card face up on the first three piles. There are no redeals. The Foundation is built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in the Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Each card placed on to a Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move cards up to the Foundation when you can because the next deal may block it. However since cards in the Foundation are no longer in play, you may get stuck later needing that card. Hopefully this conundrum will be the most difficult one facing you today. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/spider.xml0000644000373100047300000000775712307311664023527 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spider Written by Jonathan Blandford Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. Deck placed here after dealing onto Tableau. Clicking deals one card face up to every pile. Foundation Top eight piles. Only used to hold sequences of cards going down from King down to Ace once completed. Tableau Ten piles. Four piles (piles 1, 4, 7, and 10) get dealt 5 cards down and one card up while rest of the piles get dealt 4 cards down and one card up. Cards can be built down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or movable unit. Goal To have eight sequences of cards going down from King down to Ace in the foundation. If you want an extremely difficult challenge, do not move completed sequences of cards to a foundation. You can also win by leaving the same eight sequences in the tableau. This is harder because there are fewer empty piles available. In fact, it is nearly impossible. Rules Build down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or legal sequence. Clicking on the Stock pile at any time deals a card face up to every pile. However, all piles must be non-empty. If an empty pile exists, an error message will appear. A sequence of cards going down from King down to Ace can be moved to a foundation pile. Once there, these cards are no longer in play. Options There are three possible types of deck. Each deck has 104 cards. One Suit The deck is an octuple deck of Spades only. This is the simplest of the spider decks and a good way to learn the basics. Two Suits The deck is a quadruple deck of Hearts and Spades only. There are four complete sequences of cards for each suit. This is not quite as diabolical as the standard four suit spider deck. Four Suits The deck is a standard double deck. There are two complete sequences of cards for each suit. This is the standard Spider deck. It is also the most difficult. Many traditional implementations of Spider do not use a foundation and simply remove completed sequences of cards. This has no impact upon game play. Scoring For every sequence in suit, points given is (length of sequence - 1). Maximum possible score: 96 Strategy If at first you don't succeed, don't become addicted. Build in suit whenever possible, but expose as many cards as you can. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/backbone.xml0000644000373100047300000000614112307311664023767 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Backbone Written by Vincent Povirk Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Single pile below the foundations on the left. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau and Reserve. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste Single pile to the right of the Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Reserve Two stacks of 9 cards each, with a single above both stacks. Cards that are not obscured are available for play to anywhere except empty tableau spaces. Tableau Eight piles, four on each side of the reserve. A card is dealt to each tableau pile when the game starts. Build down in suit. Empty spaces can be filled with any card. Only one card can be moved at a time. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by suit. Only one card can be moved at a time. Empty slots can be filled with any card except from the reserve. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck twice. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in the Foundations are no longer in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy You can use empty spaces in the Tableau to move multiple cards. Be careful with Kings in the Reserve: the only way to remove them is by playing them to a Foundation on top of a Queen. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/scuffle.xml0000644000373100047300000000477012307311664023660 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Scuffle Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards except the Aces are placed here at the start of play. Clicking on the Stock will deal one card to each of the four Reserve piles. Two redeals allowed. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Stock. Place an Ace on each Foundation to begin the game. The Foundation piles are to be built up regardless of suit. Reserves Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Each time Stock is clicked, one card will be placed on each Reserve pile. Top card is available for play. Reserve cards can only be moved on to Foundations. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Play begins by dealing four cards face up on to the Reserve. If possible, play cards on to the Foundation from the Reserve. Continue this process until no cards are left in stock and no more moves on to the Foundation can be made. Take all cards left over on the Reserve and reshuffle. Place these cards back to the stock for redealing. There are two redeals. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Try to keep in mind what is underneath the Reserve piles. When given a choice, it is this knowledge which should help you decide which card to play. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/sir_tommy.xml0000644000373100047300000000462512307311664024252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sir Tommy Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here at beginning of play. Cards are dealt singly to Waste. Waste To the right of the Stock. Can only hold one card. Card must immediately be placed on either a Foundation pile or on to the Reserve pile of your choice. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Waste. To be built in sequence from Ace to King regardless of suit. Reserves Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Cards in Reserve can only be played on to Foundation piles. Goal Move all cards to the Foundations Rules Build on to Foundations in sequence from Ace to King regardless of suit. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Cards are dealt singly in to the Waste from the Stock. However, as the Waste pile can only hold one card, this card must immediately be played on to a Foundation pile or on to any of the four Reserve piles. Cards in the Reserve piles cannot be rearranged. Scoring Each card moved to Foundations scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try not to place cards of higher rank on to cards of lower rank in the Reserve. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/thumb_and_pouch.xml0000644000373100047300000000570012307311664025362 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thumb and Pouch Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in any suit but own. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can be filled by any legal sequence of cards. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by any suit but own. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a any legal sequence of cards. Cards are flipped from the stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Brute force may not always work, but in this case it probably will. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/block_ten.xml0000644000373100047300000000335312307311664024165 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Block Ten Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here at beginning of play. Tableau Nine piles in a 3x3 formation. Each Tableau pile is dealt one card face up. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Remove cards in pairs that add up to ten. Jacks, Queens and Kings are removed in pairs. Tens cannot be removed. All empty slots are automatically filled by the Stock. Scoring Removing each pair of cards scores two points. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy This is a pure luck game. Therefore, any strategy involved would have to do with increasing your luck. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/gay_gordons.xml0000644000373100047300000000332412307311664024536 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gay Gordons Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserve Top left pile. Deal two cards face up here. The top card is in play. Cannot be refilled or built on. Tableau Ten piles. Deal five cards face up in each pile. The top card in each pile is in play. Empty piles cannot be filled. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Remove cards in pairs that add up to eleven. Kings are paired off with Queens. Jacks are paired off with other Jacks. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to uncover cards that are buried under their pair-mate. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/klondike.xml0000644000373100047300000001132512307311664024023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Klondike Written by Jonathan Blandford Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Double clicking on a foundation card will move all the cards that can be moved to the foundation to the foundation. This is useful for cleaning up at the end of the game. Options There are three possible ways to play. The difference between them is in how the cards are dealt from the stock. Three card deals Cards are dealt from the stock three at a time. There is no limit to how many times you can redeal the stock. Single card deals Cards are dealt from the stock one at a time. However you can only turn the stock over and redeal twice. No redeals Cards are dealt one at a time from the stock. There is no redeal. Play this way if you want a challenge (and some frustration). Unlimited redeals Cards are dealt one at a time from the stock. There is no limit to how many times you can redeal the stock. Most likely you will consider one of the first two methods traditional - depending on where you live and who taught you. The no redeals option is the one normally found in older sets of rules, but the game is rarely played that way. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Don't give up the ship! Try brute force methods when the game seems over. Sometimes a combination of using cards already in the Foundation and rearranging sequences will free up some needed cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/yield.xml0000644000373100047300000000460512307311664023334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Yield Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card and bottom card available for play. Tableau Deal cards face up in seven overlapping rows starting with seven cards on the first row, decreasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve an inverted pyramid. Goal Remove all cards. Rules All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Kings can be removed singly. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to treize with Aces equal to 1, Jacks equal to 11, and Queens equal to 12. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top and bottom cards are available for play either by themselves or with the available cards in the pyramid. The top card of the Waste can also be played with the second card on the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Removing the bottom of the inverted pyramid is the hard part. Once that is achieved, it is sometimes better to remove cards from the Waste than the inverted pyramid, as there are more cards in play there. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/hopscotch.xml0000644000373100047300000000555712307311664024227 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Hopscotch Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards except the Ace to four of clubs are placed here at beginning of play. Cards are dealt singly to Waste. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. Can only hold one card at a time. Card must immediately be placed on either a Foundation pile or on to the Reserve pile of your choice. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Stock. Place an Ace on the first pile, a two on the second pile, a three on the third pile, and a four on the fourth pile. The first Foundation pile is built up by one, the second is built up by two, the third by three, and the fourth by four, all of which wrap around to Ace when it reaches past thirteen. cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Suits do not matter. Reserve Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Cards in Reserve can only be played on to Foundation piles. Cards moved from Waste can be placed on any of the Reserve piles. Goal Move all cards on to Foundations. Rules Build on to Foundations by ones, twos, threes, and fours for piles one, two, three, and four respectively. Cards are dealt singly in to the Waste from the Stock. However, as the Waste pile can only hold one card, this card must immediately be played on to a Foundation pile or on to any of the four Reserve piles. Cards in the Reserve piles cannot be rearranged. Scoring Each card moved to Foundations scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Hone your skills for this game. Luck will not get you very far here. Try not to cover cards you might need sooner. Consider saving a column just for kings (as they are the last card to be played on each Foundation). usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/peek.xml0000644000373100047300000000507712307311664023156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Peek Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves Four spread piles on left. Deal four cards face up in each Reserve pile. No building allowed. Foundation Four piles on right. Deal one card on to first Foundation. Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Any card of the suit in the first Foundation can be played on to this Foundation pile at any time. Each ensuing Foundation can only be started with a card of the same rank as this first card. Once started, these latter foundations can be built on in suit as long as a card of the same rank already exists in the Foundation directly above it. Play cards from Reserves whenever possible following these rules. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Options Three card deals: Deal three cards at a time from Stock to Waste and enable unlimited redeals. Scoring One point for every card placed on Foundation. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy The Reserves are open for you to see. Choose your suit order wisely. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/eagle-wing.xml0000644000373100047300000000747512307311664024255 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Eagle Wing Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. One card is dealt in the first Fondation at the start of the game, this is the base card. Other Fondations must be started with a card of the same rank as the base card. To be built up in suit from the base card. Reserve Middle (and lowest) slot. Deal thirteen cards face down here. Flip card to fill any spaces in the Tableau. When only one card is left in the Reserve, it will flip up and can be played on Foundation or a Tableau pile. Tableau Eight slots (four to the left and four to the right of Reserve.) Deal one card face up per slot. Tableau can be built down by suit. Cards can be moved singly to other slots on the Tableau, or in a group on to the Foundation. Each Tableau slot can hold a maximum of three cards. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the tableau are built down by suit. Cards can only be moved singly to another Tableau pile. However, to ease monotony, groups of cards can be moved to Foundation. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by a card from the Waste or from another Tableau pile. The Reserve exists mainly to deal cards into empty slots of the Tableau. However, when there is only one card left in the Reserve, it will become visible and is in play. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste singly. When the Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card (first card dealt to first Foundation). New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as the first card placed during the dealing period are placed on empty Foundation piles. Aces are placed on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are not in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy A little planning goes a long way. Check before piling cards in a Tableau. Remember the three card in a slot rule. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/gaps.xml0000644000373100047300000000465012307311664023160 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gaps Written by Zach Keene Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock All cards are dealt into four rows of 13 cards each; the aces are then discarded to leave four gaps. Two redeals are allowed. Goal To place all cards in sequence from 2 to king, in suit. Rules Gaps in the leftmost column may be filled by moving a 2 of any suit there. A gap to the right of any non-King card may be filled by placing the card with the same suit but one rank higher into the gap. Gaps following Kings or other gaps may not be filled. Once a card is placed in a sequence starting with a 2 in the leftmost slot, it can no longer be moved. If no moves are possible (i.e., all gaps follow Kings), double-clicking any card will cause a redeal. Any cards not in sequence will be removed, shuffled, and redealt. Only two redeals are allowed. Options Randomly Placed Gaps on Redeal: Check this to have randomly placed gaps after a redeal. If unchecked, the gaps will always be placed directly to the right of any cards already in sequence after redealing. Scoring Each card placed in sequence, starting with a two in the leftmost slot, is worth one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Put off making any move that will add a gap after a king for as long as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/fortunes.xml0000644000373100047300000000357612307311664024101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fortunes Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Deals a card to each Tableau pile when clicked. Tableau Four piles on right. Groups of cards can be moved on to empty piles. Goal To remove all cards except the four Aces. Rules Aces are high cards. When two cards of the same suit are available, the one with the lower rank can be removed. When an empty slot appears, it can be filled with an group of cards. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy There is no reason to have an empty slot when dealing another batch of cards. However, when you have an empty slot, try to keep it empty as long as possible, as this is a great way to get rid of buried cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/diamond_mine.xml0000644000373100047300000000462412307311664024652 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Diamond Mine Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation One pile at top. Build in sequence for diamonds starting from any diamond of your choice. Tableau Thirteen piles. Deal three cards face down and one card face up on every pile. Goal Remove all diamonds to the foundation and have all the other cards in suit and sequence with Aces being low in the Tableau. Rules Cards (other than diamonds) can be built down in sequence regardless of suit. Builds of cards can be moved as a unit. Empty slots can be filled by any card (except for diamonds) or build of cards. Diamonds cannot be moved except to be place on to the Foundation. The diamond Foundation must be built up in sequence but can start from any number you want. Scoring Each diamond placed on to the Foundation scores the face value of the card, with Ace as one point, Jacks as eleven points, Queens as twelve points, and Kings as thirteen points. Each Ace through King in sequence and in suit on the Tableau pile scores three points. Maximum possible score: 100 Strategy Mining for diamonds is hard work. Keep in mind that not all diamonds are worth the same. Don't forget to clean up after yourself and put the other suits in order. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000736112307311664023314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/westhaven.xml0000644000373100047300000000446312307311664024234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Westhaven Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles on top row. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Ten piles of three cards each, with the last row of cards face up. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau are built down by alternate color. The top card or the complete face up portion of each pile is available for play. Empty piles can be filled with any available card or group of cards. Foundation piles are to be built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation are no longer in play. Cards are flipped singly from Stock to Waste. Top card of Waste pile is always available for play. There are no redeals. Scoring Each card moved to Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Caution is for those who actually have money at stake. Live dangerously. Make any moves you can, as chance is on your side. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/spiderette.xml0000644000373100047300000000475312307311665024403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spiderette Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Deals a card to each Tableau pile when clicked. Foundation Four piles top right. Tableau Seven piles on the bottom. Deal one card face down on all seven piles, then one on the last six piles, followed by one on the last five piles. Continue in this manner until you have seven cards in the last pile. Flip up the top card on every pile. Goal Create four piles of thirteen cards each built down in suit and sequence. Rules Cards in Tableau can be built down regardless of suit. Builds of cards in sequence and in the same suit can by moved as a unit. Empty Tableau piles can be filled with any card or build of cards. Each Tableau pile must be filled before any deal. Clicking on the Stock will deal a card on to every Tableau pile except for the last deal which places one card on each of the first three piles. A build of all thirteen cards in a suit may be moved on to a Foundation pile. Cards in the Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Every pair of cards in suit and sequence scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Try to keep a Tableau pile empty whenever possible to create a swap space for moving around cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/accordion.xml0000644000373100047300000000436612307311665024174 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Accordion Written by Ed Sirett Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Fifty-four spaces in five rows of nine and a last row of seven. Deal cards face up one per space. The spaces should be considered as one continuous line, the rows simply arrange the tableau so all of it can be seen at once. Thus the rightmost space of a row is to be considered to the left of the leftmost space of the row below. Goal To remove all cards except one. Rules Cards are moved singly. Any card can be moved over another card of the same suit or rank that is in the space immediately to its left or three spaces to its left. The card that is covered is removed from play. All the cards (if any) in spaces to the right of the resulting gap are moved to the left one space so as to close the gap. Double-clicking causes the card to move three spaces, if possible, or failing that one space to the left. Scoring Each card removed scores 1 point. Maximum possible score: 51 Strategy This is a diffcult game. Try to find two or three cards of the same rank at or near the last row. Try not to remove any card of this rank. At the end you can move these cards onto each other to win. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/eliminator.xml0000644000373100047300000000344112307311665024367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Eliminator Written by Wa (logicplace.com) Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Four piles. Deal 13 cards to each. (This is all of the cards.) Foundation Four to six empty slots that you build in either direction. Goal Move all cards to Foundation. Rules Any card can be placed as the first card in the Foundation. Foundation piles can be built up or down from the top card's value, disregarding suit. Kings can be placed on Aces and vice versa. Scoring Every card moved from the Tableau on top of a card in the Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 51 Strategy Make sure to look at all the cards coming up, and be sure you're not going to lock any cards that are necessary to move the one on top. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/kings_audience.xml0000644000373100047300000000573112307311665025200 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 King's Audience Written by Zach Keene Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves (Antechamber) The outer rectangle of sixteen cards. Cards in the reserve are available to play, and are replenished from the Waste (or the Stock if no cards are currently in the Waste.) Stock Left slot in the center row. Cards are dealt one at a time to the Waste. There is no redeal. Waste Slot to the right of the Stock. The top card of the Waste is available to play. "Thrones" Top four slots in the "audience chamber" (the area inside the surrounding sixteen cards.) Whenever a King and Queen of the same suit are available, they can be move to one of these slots. Foundations Bottom four slots in the audience chamber. Whenever a Jack and an Ace of the same suit are available, they can be moved to an empty Foundation slot, with the Jack on top. The foundation then may be built down in suit. Goal Move all cards to the foundation piles or thrones. Rules Deal cards one at a time from Stock to Waste. Whenever a King and Queen of the same suit are available, they can be moved into a throne slot by either by dragging the King onto the Queen (or vice versa) or double clicking either card. Whenever a Jack and Ace of the same suit are available, they can be moved into a foundation slot in the same manner. Scoring Each card placed in the audience chamber receives one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy None; King's Audience is pretty much entirely based on luck. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/will_o_the_wisp.xml0000644000373100047300000000463312307311665025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Will o' the Wisp Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. When clicked, deal a card on to every Tableau pile except for the last deal which places one card on each of the first three piles. Foundation Four piles top right. Tableau Seven piles on the bottom. Deal two cards face down and one card face up on every pile. Goal Create four piles of thirteen cards each built down in suit and sequence. Rules Tableau piles can be built down regardless of suit. Builds of cards in sequence and in the same suit can by moved as a unit. Empty Tableau piles can be filled with any card or build of cards. Each Tableau pile must be filled before any deal. Clicking on the Stock will deal a card on to every Tableau pile except for the last deal which places one card on each of the first three piles. A build of all thirteen cards in a suit may be moved on to a Foundation pile. Cards in the Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Every pair of cards in suit and sequence scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Try to keep a Tableau pile empty whenever possible to create a swap space for moving around cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/bakers_dozen.xml0000644000373100047300000000417112307311665024673 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bakers Dozen Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles at top. To be built in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Thirteen piles. Four cards are dealt face up on each pile. Kings are moved to the bottom of their respective piles. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules The top card on each Tableau can be moved to another Tableau pile if it has a value of one lower than the top card on the second pile. Suit is not relevant. Empty Tableau piles cannot be filled. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card moved to the Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Be careful not to bury low cards. Try to keep Tableau piles from emptying. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/ten_across.xml0000644000373100047300000000505512307311665024367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ten Across Written by James LewisMoss Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Temporary Spots Locations to place one card out of play. The spots begin the game filled. One version of the game does not allow you to put new cards into these spots once they are empty. Tableau Ten piles across the bottom. To deal place 10 cards across going from left to right with the first and last cards face up. Continuing you place ten cards across the piles from right to left (reversed) with the first two and last two cards placed face up. Continue this pattern (reversed and one more card each pass) until 50 cards have been placed. Place the last two cards in the temporary spots at the top. Goal Form four piles in the tableau all of the same suit running from King to Ace. Rules Only a King may be moved to a blank tableau spot. Cards may be moved only onto other cards if the suit matches and the moved card is one less than the moved to. This includes moving a pile of cards of different suits as long as the top card of the moved pile matches the bottom card of the location moved to. Options Allow temporary spots use: If checked the temporary spots may be reused. Scoring You win or lose. There is no scoring. Strategy This game is hard to win (being very influenced by how the cards are placed to begin with). Don't forget you have the temporary spots. Try to clear them quickly because they are very useful when you get stuck. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/bear_river.xml0000644000373100047300000000642312307311665024347 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bear River Written by Bruce and Joel Levin Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles at top. One card is dealt face up in the first Foundation pile. Tableau There are 18 Tableau piles arranged in three rows of six piles each. All cards are dealt face up and fanned, such that all cards are visible. The first five piles of each row start with three cards each. The sixth pile of each row starts with two cards each. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules One random card has already been dealt to a Foundation pile. The rank of that card becomes the Base Card. The other three cards with the same rank can be moved to an empty Foundation. Foundations are built up in ascending order, matching suit. Cards can "wrap-around" from Queen to King to Ace to Two. Cards on the Foundations may not be moved back onto Tableau piles. None of the Tableau piles can have more than three cards. The top card of each Tableau pile can be moved to any other Tableau pile if it matches suit and has a face value of one higher or one lower than the top card of the pile it is being moved to. Cards can "wrap-around" between King and Ace. There are two types of Tableau piles: "Standard" piles, and "Hole" piles. The first five piles of each row (the ones with three cards) are the Standard piles. An empty standard pile CANNOT have a new card placed on it. The last pile of each row (the ones with two cards) are the Hole piles. An empty Hole pile CAN have a new card placed on it. Scoring Each card moved to the Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to free up one or more Hole piles early. There is never a disadvantage in moving cards to the Foundations. Move as many as possible, as soon as possible. Cards that have a rank one lower than the Base Card can be very difficult to move. Be careful where you place them. Bear River can be won about one third of the time. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/lady_jane.xml0000644000373100047300000000675612307311665024166 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lady Jane Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned on to the Reserve one on each pile per deal. When there are only two cards left in Stock, they are dealt such that both cards are available for play. Foundation Four piles on top right. Deal one card on to first Foundation pile after dealing on to Tableau and Reserve. This card is now the base card. Built up by suit. Reserve Seven piles on the right. Top card of each pile is available for play on to either the Tableau or the Foundation. Empty spaces are not filled except by a deal from Stock. Tableau Seven piles below Stock and Foundation. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by the card whose rank is one lower than the base card or group of cards starting with a card of this rank. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a card whose rank is one lower than the base card or with a group of cards starting with a card with this rank. Cards are dealt from the Stock to the Reserve. Each deal places one card on each pile of the Reserve. The top card of each Reserve pile is always available for play on to either the Tableau or the Foundation. There is no building on the Reserve piles. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card. New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as the base card is placed on empty Foundation piles. Aces are placed on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy The deeper something is, the harder it is to get to. Try and move cards out of the Reserve whenever possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/maze.xml0000644000373100047300000000536612307311665023170 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Maze Written by Matthew Wilcox Setup Type of Deck 48 cards: Standard Deck without the kings Tableau Fifty-four spaces in six rows of nine each. Deal cards into spaces one to eight. Leave space nine blank. Deal cards into spaces ten to seventeen. Leave space eighteen blank. Deal the remaining cards similarly. Then remove all the kings (which play no further part in the game), so that six empty spaces remain in total. Any card can be moved into a space to the left of another card of the same suit and face value one higher. Any card can be moved into a space to the right of another card of the same suit and face value one lower. An ace may be moved to the right of a queen or in the top left space. A queen may be moved to the left of an ace or in the bottom right space. Goal Put each suit of cards into ascending order, with an ace in the top left corner, to create a run of cards: Ace to Queen of one suit, Ace to Queen of another, Ace to Queen of the third, Ace to Queen of the fourth. Rules Cards are moved singly. Any card can be moved into a space to the left of another card of face value one higher in the same suit. Any card can be moved into a space to the right of another card of face value one lower in the same suit. An ace may be moved to the right of a queen or in the top left space. A queen may be moved to the left of an ace or in the bottom right space. Scoring Each card placed next to another card of the same suit in the correct order scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Multiple adjacent spaces enable you to generate long sequences of cards. Beware of getting trapped into a situation where you move one card endlessly between two points. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/elevator.xml0000644000373100047300000000425112307311665024045 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Elevator Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Tableau Deal face down seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Flip bottom row. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Rules All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Build on to the Waste from these available cards whenever possible by playing a card with a rank immediately above or immediately below the rank of the top card in the Waste. Aces are both above Kings and below Deuces. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed from the pyramid scores one point. Maximum possible score: 28 Strategy Every pyramid needs a strong foundation. Get rid of the lower cards first, with an eye out to try to expose as many cards as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/treize.xml0000644000373100047300000000443412307311665023531 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Treize Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card and bottom card available for play. Tableau Deal cards face up in seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Goal Remove all cards. Rules All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Kings can be removed singly. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to treize with Aces equal to 1, Jacks equal to 11, and Queens equal to 12. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top and bottom cards are available for play either by themselves or with the available cards in the pyramid. The top card of the Waste can also be played with the second card on the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy This game is easier to win than Thirteen. This is because you can plan ahead and avoid blocks by strategic play. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/definitions.xml0000644000373100047300000001657712307311665024555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Glossary Author's note: These definitions are meant as a guideline only. See individual game rules as any game has the right to redefine or modify the rules to make it fun. Base card The first card dealt into a foundation pile. Other foundations usually have to start with a card of this rank. See: Foundation Build by alternate color Building by placing a card on to another card of the opposite color is permitted. Example: Placing a Diamond on a Spade is good, but placing a Diamond on a Heart is not. Build by any suit but own Building by placing a card on to another card of any suit but the suit of the original card is permitted. Example: Placing a Diamond on a Heart is good, but placing a Heart on a Heart is not. Build by color Building by placing a card on to another card of the same color is permitted. Example: Placing a Diamond on a Heart is good, but Placing a Diamond on a Club is not. Build regardless of suit It's all good. Build by suit Building by placing a card on to another card of the same suit is permitted. Example: Placing a Spade on a Spade is good, but placing a Spade on a Club is not. Build down Building by placing a card of a lower rank on to a card of a higher rank is permitted. Usually implies a difference of only one ranking between the two cards. Example: Placing a 10 on a Jack is good, but placing a 10 on a 9 is not. Build down by * Building by placing a card of a lower rank on to a card of a higher rank by * is permitted. Example: If * is 2, placing a 10 on a Queen is good, but placing a 10 on a Jack is not. Build up Building by placing a card of a higher rank on to a card of a lower rank is permitted. Usually implies a difference of only one ranking between the two cards. Example: Placing a Queen on a Jack is good, but placing a Queen on a King is not. Build up by * Building by placing a card of a higher rank on to a card of a lower rank by * is permitted. Example: If * is 2, placing a 10 on an 8 is good, but placing a 10 on a 9 is not. Build up or down Building by placing a card on to a card of one higher or one lower rank is permitted. Example: Placing a Jack on a Queen or a 10 is good, but placing a 10 on a Queen is not. Building The ability to place a card (or group of cards) on another card. In regards to rank, you can build up, build down, or build up/down by *. In regards to suit/color, you can build by suit, build by color, build by alternate color, build by any suit but own, or build regardless of suit. Note that all games that build will follow two of these rules, one from each list. Deck The set of cards used. Most games use a Standard deck, but games that use a Double deck, a Joker deck, or a Stripped deck are not uncommon. Double deck A deck of cards consisting of two Standard decks making a total of 104 cards. Foundation If a game has a foundation, the game is usually won by placing all the cards in the foundation pile(s). Joker deck A deck of cards consisting of a Standard deck and two jokers making a total of 54 cards. Pile A designated area where cards can exist. Rank The value of the card. Numbered cards usually have the rank of the associated number. Aces can either be high or low. If high, aces are ranked 14. If low, aces are ranked as 1. J, Q, and K are usually ranked 11, 12, and 13 respectively. However, some games may rank these cards as 10. In such a case, a high ace might be ranked as 11. Reserve Cards in the reserve are usually available to play anywhere. Usually cannot be built on. Slot See Pile. Standard deck A 52 card poker deck. There are four suits of thirteen cards each. Each suit contains an Ace, 2 through 10, Jack, Queen, and King. These suits are usually Clubs, Spades, Hearts and Diamonds. These suits can be grouped into two colors, usually black and red. The Clubs and the Spaces are black while the Hearts and the Diamonds are red. AisleRiot allows the possibility of using different decks. In this case, the new colors and/or suits are substituted into this paradigm. Stock The remainder of the deck after all the original cards have been dealt and are usually kept faced down. Suit Four different kinds in a Standard deck. Usually Clubs, Spades, Hearts, and Diamonds. Tableau The playing field, where the main action occurs. Usually allows building. Waste A stack of cards face up, usually next to the Stock. Top card usually in play. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/fourteen.xml0000644000373100047300000000334112307311665024052 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fourteen Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Deal all cards face up evenly on to twelve piles. The first four piles will each have five cards while the other piles will all have four cards. The exposed card in each pile is in play. Empty piles cannot be filled. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Cards can be removed in pairs that add up to fourteen. Aces are worth one and Jacks, Queens, and Kings are worth 11, 12, and 13 respectively. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Watch your step! Try to move cards that are resting on matching pairs as otherwise you might get stuck. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/chessboard.xml0000644000373100047300000000423512307311665024343 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chessboard Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle. To be built up in suit from base card of your choice, wrapping from King to Ace if necessary. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Tableau Five piles one each side of the Foundation. Deal five cards face up on to each of these piles and one more on the top two piles. The top card in any Tableau pile is available for play. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau piles can be built up or down in suit. Only the top card in every pile is available for play. Empty slots can be filled with any available card. The Foundations are built up from the base card of your choice, wrapping from King to Ace if necessary. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Choose your base card wisely. The obvious choice may lead to nought but a dead end. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/royal_east.xml0000644000373100047300000000536712307311665024377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Royal East Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four corner piles of three by three grid. Deal one card on to first Foundation pile. This card is now the base card. Build up in suit, playing Aces on Kings as necessary. Tableau Deal one card face up on each of the five Tableau piles. These piles are the ones forming a cross in the three by three grid. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Kings can be placed on Aces. Cards can only be moved singly. Any available card can be played on an empty Tableau pile. Each Foundation pile must be started with a card the same rank as the base card. Foundation piles are to be built up in suit from base card, playing Aces on top of Kings if necessary. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Cards are flipped singly from Stock to Waste. Top card of Waste pile is always available for play. There are no redeals. Scoring Each card in Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Hidden treasures are wonderful things, but only if you know they are there. Keep track of what cards are in which piles as this information will probably come in handy. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/quatorze.xml0000644000373100047300000000463212307311665024101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Quatorze Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Empty spaces in the Tableau are immediately filled in with cards from the Stock. Tableau Five-by-five grid, each capable of holding one card. One card dealt to each space at the beginning of the game. Empty spaces are filled in from the Stock. Once Stock is exhausted, spaces are filled by moving cards from the right to the left, from the leftmost card of the row below to the the rightmost space, leaving all empty spaces at the end. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Cards can be removed in pairs if they add up to fourteen (with Jacks being 11, Queens 12, and Kings 13) and are in the same row or column. Empty slots are automatically filled from the Stock. Once the Stock is exhausted, cards to the right of empty piles are automatically moved over to fill the space, with empty piles in the right column filled in by the cards of the leftmost column in the row below. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Oftentimes in the middle of this game, there is only one move. Make it. Once the Stock is exhausted, there is much more movement in the Tableau. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/gold_mine.xml0000644000373100047300000000532012307311665024157 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gold Mine Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over three at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles, all empty to start. Gold Mine is a variation of Klondike. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can be filled with any card. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste three at a time. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, game over. Only one chance to get it right and establish your gold mine. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Be careful how you fill the empty foundation piles. With skill it is possible to win Gold Mine most of the time. If at first you do not succeed restart and try again. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/bakers_game.xml0000644000373100047300000000511012307311665024457 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bakers Game Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles top right. Built from Ace to King in suit. Reserves Four piles at top left. Each reserve can only hold one card. Tableau Eight piles underneath the Foundation and Reserves. The cards are dealt face up on to the Tableau, with seven cards each in the first four slots and six cards each in the last four slots. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules The Tableau is built down by suit. Only the top card or build of cards can be moved. A build of cards can only be moved if the number of cards in the build is equal or less than one more than the number of Reserve slots free. Empty spaces in the Tableau can only be filled with a King or a build starting with a King. Foundations are built up by suit from Ace to King. Although cards in the Foundations are technically still in play, there really is no need as playing these cards are not in any way helpful. Any top card in the Tableau can be placed in an empty Reserve slot. These cards are available for play back into the Tableau or on to a Foundation pile. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move any card you can on to the Foundations as soon as possible. Leaving them around can only hinder your movement. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/saratoga.xml0000644000373100047300000000757512307311665024041 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Saratoga Written by Alan Horkan, based on work by Jonathan Blandford Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Place one card face up on all piles. Next row skip the first pile and place cards on all the other piles. Continue this process skipping one place to the right each row until there are seven rows with seven cards in the last pile. Essentially Saratoga is the same as Klondike only the all cards are face up to begin with. Being able to see all cards reduces the element of risk and makes Saratoga slightly easier than Klondike. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Don't give up the ship! Try brute force methods when the game seems over. Sometimes a combination of using cards already in the Foundation and rearranging sequences will free up some needed cards. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/king_albert.xml0000644000373100047300000000463212307311665024510 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 King Albert Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on the top. Foundations are built up in both suit and sequence from Ace to King. Reserve Seven piles on the right. One card is dealt face up on each Reserve pile at the start. There is no building on the Reserves. Empty Reserve piles can not be filled. Tableau Nine piles of cards, with nine cards in the first pile, eight in the second, and so on to the one card in the last pile. These cards are dealt face down. The top card in every pile is then flipped up. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Empty Tableau slots can be filled by any card or build of cards. Cards in the Reserve can be played on to the Tableau or the Foundation. Empty Reserve piles cannot be filled. Foundation piles are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation are still in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Remember that any card can be placed on an empty Tableau slot. Exposing new cards is the top priority in this game. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/valentine.xml0000644000373100047300000000517712307311665024221 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Valentine Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All remaining cards are placed here after dealing. Waste Top right pile. Can only hold one card. Tableau Four piles. One card is dealt in each slot at the beginning of the game. Redealing from the stock moves all cards currently in the Tableau to the bottom of the Stock slot. Goal Have all the cards in the Tableau, each slot containing Ace to King of one suit. Avoid going crazy achieving this. Rules If any two cards dealt on to the Tableau are the same suit and in sequence, place the lower card on to the higher. Aces are low, Kings are high and sequence does not wrap. Click on the Stock to fill in the empty slots that are made. When no plays can be made in the Tableau, click on the Stock to deal a card on to the Waste. If this card can be played on to any of the Tableau piles, do so. Repeat this process until there are no more moves in the Tableau or from the Waste. At this point, clicking on the Foundation again moves all the cards in the Tableau back to the bottom of the Stock. The card in the Waste is put in the first Tableau pile and the rest of the Tableau is filled with one card to each pile from the Stock. Scoring There is no scoring in this game. Strategy A great game for killing time, Valentine really has no strategy, unless the strategy is to play it instead of doing other, more important things, like going to bed. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/pileon.xml0000644000373100047300000000460312307311665023513 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pileon Written by Nick Lamb Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Fifteen piles, arranged in rows of four. Deal cards four at a time, face up onto the first thirteen piles. Leave the last two spaces empty. A pile can hold as many as four cards, and as few as none. Goal Rearrange the cards so that each pile contains all four cards from a single value. This should leave two piles empty, but it doesn't matter whether they are the same piles which were empty at the start. Rules Cards can be moved on top of any other card or cards of the same value so long as no pile grows to have more than four cards. Groups of cards can be moved if they are of the same value, but it doesn't gain you anything. An empty slot can be filled with any card or group of cards with the same value. Once a pile contains all four cards of the same value it is frozen, and the top card is flipped to indicate that you need do nothing further to those cards. They are no longer in play, but it would be useless to move them anyway. Scoring When a pile of four cards is frozen you score 4 points, one for each card. There is no other way to score points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Keep one of the piles clear as much as possible. Don't allow a pile of three cards to build up on top of a single card, especially if the final card from the set is not a bottom card in another pile. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/agnes.xml0000644000373100047300000000534612307311665023327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Agnes Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt in batches of seven, one on every Tableau pile. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built in suit and sequence, wrapping from King to Ace when necessary. One card is dealt on to the first Foundation pile. The other Foundation piles must be started with cards of the same rank. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all the covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in same colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by the next deal from the Stock. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by same color. Groups of cards in sequence and same color can be moved as a unit. Each deal flips one card from the Stock to each pile of the Tableau. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit in sequence, wrapping from King to Ace when necessary. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to build down in suit whenever possible. Try to score as many points as you can as this game is very hard to win. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/isabel.xml0000644000373100047300000000320212307311665023456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Isabel Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Thirteen piles. Deal three cards face down and one card face up on every pile. Goal Remove all cards. Rules Remove cards in pairs of equal rank. Every time a card is removed, the card underneath is flipped face up and becomes playable. Empty slots are not filled. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Each pile starts with four cards. The trick is to remember how many cards each slot has left at any given time so that you can try to remove cards evenly. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/golf.xml0000644000373100047300000000376312307311665023162 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Golf Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Tableau Seven piles. Deal five cards face up on every pile. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Rules The Waste can be built up or down from the available cards on the Tableau. Only Deuces can be placed on Aces and nothing can be played on to a King. Cards are dealt singly from Stock to Waste. There are no redeals. Scoring Every card moved from Tableau to Waste scores one point. Maximum possible score: 35 Strategy Remember that nothing can be played on to a King. Try to generate sequences where many cards can be removed without a new card from Stock. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/gypsy.xml0000644000373100047300000000527712307311665023410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gypsy Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt in batches of eight, one on every Tableau. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight piles. Deal two rows face down and one row face up to start. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can be filled with any card or build. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card or build of cards. Each deal flips one card from the Stock to each pile of the Tableau. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation scores 5 points. When a Foundation pile is complete (from Ace to King), 60 more points are scored. Each card pair on the Tableau in alternating order scores 2 points. Maximum possible score: 1000 Strategy Try and expose new cards in the Tableau whenever possible. Remember you can always bring cards from the Foundation back into play. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/eight_off.xml0000644000373100047300000000511512307311665024156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Eight Off Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on the left. Built from Ace to King in suit. Reserves Eight piles at top. Each reserve can only hold one card. The first four Reserve piles are each dealt one card at the beginning of the game. Tableau Eight piles underneath the Reserves. The cards are dealt face up on to the Tableau, with six cards in each of the slots. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules The Tableau is built down by suit. Only the top card or build of cards can be moved. A build of cards can only be moved if the number of cards in the build is equal or less than one more than the number of Reserve slots free. Empty spaces in the Tableau can only be filled with a King or a build starting with a King. Foundations are built up by suit from Ace to King. Although cards in the Foundations are technically still in play, there really is no need as playing these cards are not in any way helpful. Any top card in the Tableau can be placed in an empty Reserve slot. These cards are available for play back into the Tableau or on to a Foundation pile. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move any card you can on to the Foundations as soon as possible. Leaving them around can only hinder your movement. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/odessa.xml0000644000373100047300000000451212307311665023502 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odessa Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on left. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Seven piles. Deal three rows face down followed by three rows face up. Then deal two more rows face up in the middle five piles. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by suit. Groups of cards can be moved regardless of sequence. Groups of cards in sequence can be moved into an appropriate and receptive Foundation pile. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Options None Scoring When game is dealt, any sequence of cards going down in suit is awarded one point per card. Every move within the Tableau will award a point for every card in the newly created sequence. A point is also rewarded for every card placed on to the Foundation. Maximum possible score: 412 Strategy The more you can hold on to, the more you will have. Try to keep cards out of Foundations as long as possible. The larger the sequences, the more points are made. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/jumbo.xml0000644000373100047300000000536012307311665023342 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jumbo Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here after dealing on the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste Directly to the right of the Stock. Cards to be dealt from the Stock during play one at a time. Top card available for play. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Nine piles. Deal one card face down to all nine piles, then one card to first eight piles, followed by one card to first seven piles, etc. until there are nine cards in the first pile. Flip the last card dealt on each pile. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. There is one redeal. Foundations are built up from suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/zebra.xml0000644000373100047300000000570612307311665023335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zebra Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Eight piles on top right. Place the eight Aces on to these piles to begin the Foundations. The Foundations are to be built up in alternate color up to Kings. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Tableau Eight piles below Foundations. Deal a card to each Tableau pile to start. Tableau piles are to be built down by alternate color. Only the top card of each pile is available for play. Empty spaces are immediately filled from the Waste, or if the Waste is empty, from the Stock. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau are built down by alternate color. Only the top card of each pile is in play. However, to facilitate play, a whole pile can be moved to an appropriate Foundation with one drag. Double clicking on a pile will move the top card to an appropriate Foundation pile if possible. Spaces in Tableau are automatically filled from the Waste, or if Waste is empty, from the Stock. Stock is dealt on to Waste singly. Top card of Waste is available for play. There is one redeal. Foundations are built up by alternate color from Aces to Kings. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 96 Strategy There are very few second chances in the real world, so use them when you find them. Chances are you will need to use the second deal to win this game. Remember where the key cards are and you'll be glad you did. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/union_square.xml0000644000373100047300000000522012307311665024731 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Union Square Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Tableau Deal face up a four by four grid for the Tableau, making sixteen piles. Top card of each pile available for play. Foundation Four piles on the right. Foundation piles are built by suit from Ace to King, then King back to Ace. Goal Move all cards to Foundations. Rules Cards in Tableau can be built either up or down in suit. However, each pile must follow only one of these rules. For example, if a Tableau pile has a three of clubs over a two of clubs, one can only play a four of clubs on this pile. Any available card can be played on to an empty Tableau pile. Foundation piles are to be built in suit from Ace to King, followed by another King, then back down to Ace, giving 26 cards per pile when game is won. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top card of Waste is available for play. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card moved to Foundations scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy A string of beads can be added to from both ends, and so should your piles. Make good use of any empty slots to append cards. With a little perseverance, this game can be a lot of fun! usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/spider_three_decks.xml0000644000373100047300000000522012307311665026047 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spider Three Decks written by Jonathan Blandford, Daniel Werner Setup Type of Deck Triple Deck Stock Top left pile. Deck placed here after dealing onto Tableau. Clicking deals one card face up to every pile. Foundation Top twelve piles. Not part of "official rules". Tableau Twelve piles. The first six piles get dealt 4 cards down and one card up while rest of the piles get dealt 3 cards down and one card up. Cards can be built down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or movable unit. Goal To have twelve sequences of cards (three for each suit) going down from King down to Ace in the foundation. If you want an extremely difficult challenge, you can also win by forming the same twelve sequences in the tableau. This is harder because there are fewer empty piles available. In fact, it is nearly impossible. Rules Build down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or legal sequence. Clicking on the Stock pile at any time deals a card face up to every pile. Unlike in other Spider variants, empty piles are allowed at redeals. A sequence of thirteen cards can be moved to a foundation pile. Once there, these cards are no longer in play. Scoring For every sequence in suit, points given is (length of sequence - 1). Maximum possible score: 144 Strategy If at first you don't succeed, don't become addicted. Build in suit whenever possible, but expose as many cards as you can. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000002457712307311665024170 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 AisleRiot"> ]> <application>AisleRiot</application> Manual AisleRiot is a collection of over 80 card games programmed in GNOME's scripting language, Scheme. 2001 Rosanna Yuen GNOME Documentation Project Rosanna Yuen GNOME Documentation Project
zana@webwynk.net
Telsa Gwynne
hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk
 AisleRiot Manual V3.2 September 2011 Rosanna Yuen zana@webwynk.net GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 3.2 of AisleRiot. Odziv To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the AisleRiot application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. Introduction AisleRiot AisleRiot (also known as Solitaire or sol) is a collection of card games which are easy to play with the aid of a mouse. The rules for the games have been coded for your pleasure in the GNOME scripting language (Scheme). Playing <application>AisleRiot</application> Use the mouse to move cards. Click a card and drag it somewhere. Release the mouse button to deposit the card. Alternatively, you can move a card by clicking once to pick it up and clicking again to place it. To enable this way of moving cards, choose ControlClick to move. This can be faster than dragging and will be easier on your hand since you don't have to hold the mouse down. However, it may take a while to get used to. If a card can be moved to the foundation(s), you do not need to drag it. You can double-click on it and it will move. If a sequence of cards can be moved to the foundations, you can generally move the sequence as one move. Double clicking a card will send it to a foundation, if that is possible. This is useful for cleaning up large numbers of cards at the end of a successful game. In games which have a stock pile you can redeal it by clicking on the empty space where it was. Be warned that some games only let you do this a limited number of time. Watch for the Redeals Left message at the bottom of the window. A useful tip to know is that right-clicking on a face-up card which is partially obscured by a card laid over it will raise it so that you can see what it is. Some games have options to change the way the game is played. For example Klondike can be played with either single card deals or three-card deals. In these games there is a separate menu with the game's name. You can only change the rules of the game at the beginning of the game - the menu will be inactive during the game. Statistics on how well you have done at a particular game are available by selecting Statistics from the Game menu. Only games where you actually start moving cards are counted. The statistics are here for your own enjoyment, there are numerous ways to cheat and it is unwise to make comparisons. The Games usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/auld_lang_syne.xml0000644000373100047300000000457412307311665025220 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Auld Lang Syne Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards except the Aces are placed here at the start of play. Clicking on the Stock will deal one card to each of the four Reserve piles. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Stock. Place an Ace on each Foundation to begin the game. The Foundation piles are to be built up regardless of suit. Reserve Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Each time Stock is clicked, one card will be placed on each Reserve pile. Top card is available for play. Reserve cards can only be moved on to Foundations. Goal Move all cards on to Foundations. Rules Play begins by dealing four cards to the Reserve. If possible, play cards on to the Foundation from the Reserve. Continue this process until no cards are left in stock and no more moves on to Foundation can be made. A similar game that is a bit easier is Scuffle. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Do you believe in Luck? Although this game takes more skill to play than Clock, the skill involved entails paying attention. A great game for brainless play. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/camelot.xml0000644000373100047300000000741212307311665023652 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Camelot Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock All the cards are placed in the Stock at the beginning of the game. Cards are turned over one at a time to waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Can only hold one card which must immediately be played on to Tableau. Tableau Four by four grid, each capable of holding one card. Kings can only be placed in a corner space. Queens can only be placed in the middle two spaces of first and last row. Jacks can only be placed in the middle two spaces of first and last column. Goal Remove all cards but picture cards (Jacks, Queens, and Kings). You have won if your Tableau looks like this -- The Winning Tableau. -- and your Stock and Waste are empty. The suits do not matter. Rules There are two phases to this game. Alternate between the two phases until game is lost or won. Start with Phase One until Tableau is completely filled. At that point, move to Phase Two. Please note that you cannot begin Phase Two unless the Tableau is completely filled. At any point, you can return to Phase One, but remember that you cannot go back to Phase Two unless the tableau is once again filled. An exception to this rule is if the stock and waste are empty. Phase One -- Click on the Stock to move a card into the empty Waste pile. If card is a: King: Place in one of the empty four corner spaces. Queen: Place in one of the empty middle two spaces of the top or bottom row. Jack: Place in any of the empty middle two spaces of the leftmost or rightmost column. Any other card: Place in any empty space. Phase Two -- Remove 10's singly by clicking on them. Remove pairs that add up to 10 by dragging one card on top of its pair. Game is lost if a picture card cannot be put in an appropriate spot or if all the spaces are filled and no cards can be removed. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 40 Strategy It is always safest in the middle. During Phase One of play, deal in the middle before going to the edges. If you see a possible pair, place that card on the edge so as to free more edge spaces during Phase Two of play. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/glenwood.xml0000644000373100047300000000631712307311665024047 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Glenwood Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau and Reserves. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. First Foundation pile is started by player selecting a card from the Reserves. Built up by suit, wrapping from King to Ace when necessary. Reserves Four piles of three cards each on the left hand side dealt face up. The top card in each Reserve is available for play. No cards can be put in empty Reserve piles. Tableau Four piles below Foundations. Deal one card face up on to each pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating color. Top card can be played on to Foundation. Whole piles can be played on to another Tableau. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules The first item of play is to select an available card for the first Foundation. Once selected, all other Foundations must also start with this value. Foundations are built up by suit, wrapping from King to Ace where necessary. Once a card is placed on a Foundation pile, it is out of play. Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Whole piles of cards can be moved on to another Tableau pile. Empty slots in the Tableau can be filled by any available card in the Reserves or, if all the Reserves are empty, from the Waste. Cards are flipped singly from Stock to Waste. There is one redeal. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Be careful when selecting your first Foundation pile. Try to get the cards out of the Reserves as early as possible. Sometimes keeping cards in play is more important than moving them to the Foundation. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/cruel.xml0000644000373100047300000000541112307311665023335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Cruel Written by Zach Keene Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left slot. Since all remaining cards are always dealt to the tableau, it will always be empty. Redeals are unlimited. Foundations Rightmost piles in the top row; the aces are placed here upon the start of the game. Build up in suit from ace to king. Tableau Up to thirteen piles, dealt four cards at a time until the stock is exhausted. Tableau piles can be built down in suit. Goal Move all cards to the foundation piles. Rules Build foundations up in suit and tableau piles down in suit. If no moves are available (or you just feel like it), click on the empty top left slot for a redeal. Redeals are accomplished by placing the tableau piles on top of each other in order, starting from the last pile. Then the deck is simply turned over and redealt, four cards at a time, back to the tableau. If no moves are made, redealing will not alter the arrangement of the cards. Therefore, the game is lost if no move is possible immediately after a redeal. Note: a degenerate case occurs whenever, after a redeal, the last tableau pile contains only one card and the only move possible is from the final tableau pile one before it. Making this move and redealing only results in the original card arrangement. AisleRiot will end the game if this situation is detected. Scoring Each card placed in the foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy If more than one pile on the tableau can be built upon, choose to build upon the one with the highest rank first. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/yukon.xml0000644000373100047300000000423512307311665023373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Yukon Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on left. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Deal the rest of the cards face up on the second to seventh piles. To be built down in opposite color. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in Tableau are built down in opposite color. Groups of cards can be moved regardless of sequence. A faced-down card is flipped when it is unburied. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try and uncover as many cards as early on as possible. Doing so will greatly aid your quest to conquer yukon. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/thieves.xml0000644000373100047300000000524312307311665023675 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thieves Written by Robert Brady Setup Type of Deck Joker Deck Tableau Seven piles of five cards each, face up. Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Rules The Waste can be built up or down from the available cards on the Tableau. Jokers are wild and can be played on any rank as well as be played upon by a card of any rank. At any point, a card can be dealt from the Stock to the Waste. Scoring The following table shows the points you receive for each type of card. No points are scored for jokers. Card Points Ace 8 2, 3 6 4, 5 4 6, 7, 8 2 9, 10 4 Queen 6 King 8 Strategy Since you can see all the cards on the Tableau, try to engineer `runs', to try and get rid of as many cards up there as possible, as you only have a finite supply of cards in Stock. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/napoleons_tomb.xml0000644000373100047300000000475512307311665025254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Napoleon's Tomb Written by Kimmo Karlsson Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Waste Next to Stock. Tableau Three by three grid, all face up. Foundations Center pile of the grid is to be built down, corners to be built up. Suit doesn't count. Reserves Four piles on the grid that are not foundations. Each reserve can hold only one card at a time. Goal Move all cards of 6 or smaller to the center pile, 7 or greater to corner piles. Rules Click on the stock to flip over cards. Move one card at the time to the tableau. Once placed on a foundation pile, a card cannot be moved. Each corner pile is built up from 7 to king. Center pile is built down from 6 to ace. After ace comes another 6, etc. Suit doesn't count. Options Deal Three Cards: If you deal three cards at a time from the stock, you get to go through the deck three times. Autoplay: If autoplay is activated, cards are automatically placed to foundation piles as soon as possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to keep reserve. It's not easy to get Napoleon to his tomb, but keep trying. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/kansas.xml0000644000373100047300000000635312307311665023511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kansas Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles on top right. Deal one card on first Foundation pile to start. Other Foundation piles are to be started with the other three cards with the same rank as this base card. All four piles are to be built up, with the ranks continuous. Reserve Pile under Stock. Deal twelve cards here to begin. Top card available for play on to Tableau or Foundation piles. Tableau Three piles bottom right. Deal one card on each pile to start. Piles can be built down regardless of suit. Spaces are automatically filled from Reserve. Once Reserve is empty, Tableau spaces can be filled from the Waste at your leisure. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by the top card of the Waste at your leisure. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top card is available for play. There is no redeal. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card (first card dealt to first Foundation). New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as this base card is placed on an empty Foundation pile. Aces are built on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy You can't go digging through junkyards. Once a card is buried in the waste, it is hard to get back. Try and move as many cards from the Waste to the Tableau as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/terrace.xml0000644000373100047300000001456112307311665023656 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Terrace Written by David Rogers Setup Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Reserve and on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Stock cannot be turned. Waste To be taken from the Stock. Top card available for play. Reserve Eleven cards dealt face up in a pile. All cards are visible but only top card is in play. Foundation Eight piles in the middle. To be built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. Tableau Nine cards dealt face up from the deck once based card is selected. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down in sequence by alternating colours building round the corner. Groups of cards can't be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau must be filled by the top card in Waste or the next card from the Stock. Top cards can be moved to the Foundation or other Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. Empty Foundations must be filled with the base card that is selected by the user from four random cards as the first move. Cards in Foundations are out of play. Top card of the Reserve is in play and can only be moved to Foundations. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually as many times as you like unless there is a space in the tableau. If there is a space in the tableau then only one card may be flipped from the stock to the waste until the tableau is filled or the top card of the waste is moved to the foundation or tableau. While the stock is locked you can still move cards around on the tableau, from the reserve and to the foundation. If the Waste is empty a card from the Stock is automatically dealt. Top card in Waste is in play. Stock cannot be turned. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Options There are seven ways to play. The difference between them is in number of Reserve cards, Tableau piles or choice of Base Card. Terrace Reserve of 11 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. User selection of the base card from a choice of four at the start of the game and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. General Patience Reserve of 13 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by suit from the base card. User selection of the base card from a choice of four at the start of the game and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock can be turned once but the game is lost if you cannot play each new card after its turned. Falling Stars Reserve of 11 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. Signora Reserve of 11 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Spaces in the Tableau are automatically filled from the Waste or Stock if the Waste is empty. Stock cannot be turned. Redheads Reserve of 21 cards, 8 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Spaces in the Tableau are automatically filled from the Reserve or any card if the Reserve is empty. Stock cannot be turned. Blondes and Brunettes Reserve of 10 cards, 8 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. Wood Reserve of 10 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Strategy When the game starts examine the Reserve carefully before choosing your base card, avoid base cards that have several buried in the Reserve. Watch for reversed sequences in the Stock, Reserve a Foundation to remove each reversed sequence. Try to start Tableau piles from the last card needed to complete a Foundation. Remember that you can continue to flip cards from the stock while it is locked without filling the tableau by using the top card of the waste. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/seahaven.xml0000644000373100047300000000544112307311665024020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Seahaven Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles -- two top left, two top right. Built from Ace to King in suit. Reserves Four piles at top in the center. Each reserve can only hold one card. Two of the reserves are each dealt one card to start. Tableau Ten piles underneath the Foundation and Reserves. The other fifty cards are dealt face up here with five in each slot. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules The Tableau is built down by suit. Only the top card or build of cards can be moved. A build of cards can only be moved if the number of cards in the build is equal or less than one more than the number of Reserve slots free. Empty spaces in the Tableau can only be filled with a King or a build starting with a King. Foundations are built up by suit from Ace to King. Although cards in the Foundations are technically still in play, there really is no need as playing these cards are not in any way helpful. Any top card in the Tableau can be placed in an empty Reserve slot. These cards are available for play back into the Tableau or on to a Foundation pile. As a convenience, sequences of the same suit can be moved onto the matching Foundation pile rather than being moved individually. This is especially useful at the end of the game. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move any card you can on to the Foundations as soon as possible. Leaving them around can only hinder your movement. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/poker.xml0000644000373100047300000000715212307311665023347 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Poker Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Waste Next to Stock. The Waste can only hold one card. Tableau Five by five grid. Each slot can only hold one card. Goal Score as many points as possible using poker hands. There are twelve hands in the board -- 5 rows, 5 columns, and 2 diagonals. Scoring 75 points or higher is considered a win. Rules Click on the Stock to flip over cards one at a time. The card must be placed somewhere on to the Tableau before the next card can be flipped. Once placed, a card cannot be moved. Options Shuffle mode: If selected, you can move the cards after they have been placed. You need at least 120 points to win this way. Scoring Poker hands are scored using the British point system, which is as follows Hand Description Score Straight flush Cards are all in sequence and are the same suit 30 Four of a kind Contains four cards have the same rank 16 Straight Cards are all in sequence 12 Full House Three of one rank and two of another 10 Three of a kind Contains three cards have the same rank 6 Flush All five cards are the same suit 5 Two pair Contains two sets of two cards of the same rank 3 One pair Contains two cards of the same rank 1 Maximum possible score: 276 Strategy Remember you are going to see almost half the deck and plan accordingly. Trying to bluff the computer is not recommended. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/straight_up.xml0000644000373100047300000000543312307311665024560 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Straight Up Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles on top right. Deal one two on each Foundation pile to start. To be built up in suit to Ace. Reserve Pile under Stock. Deal thirteen cards here to begin. Top card available for play on to Tableau or Foundation piles. Tableau Four piles bottom right. Deal one card on each pile to start. Piles can be built in suit. Spaces are automatically filled from Reserve. Once Reserve is empty, Tableau spaces can be filled from the Waste at your leisure. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down in suit. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by the top card of the Waste at your leisure. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top card is available for play. There are two redeals Foundations are built up in suit from twos to aces. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card moved to Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy No point lagging behind! Move cards to Foundation piles whenever possible. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/triple_peaks.xml0000644000373100047300000000621512307311665024710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Triple Peaks Written by Richard Hoelscher Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste All play is on the Waste pile. Cards faced down are not part of the current scoring run. Tableau Deal 18 cards face down in the form of three triangles, with three rows in each triangle, increasing with one card in the first row to three in the last. Connect the triangles by dealing another 10 cards face up in the bottom row. End cards of each row should overlap the end cards of the row above, and interior cards should overlap two adjacent cards of that row. Goal Remove all cards from the Tableau. Rules Exposed cards in the Tableau are available for play. Build on the top card of Waste with cards ranked immediately above or below it from the Tableau, regardless of suit. Aces are ranked both above Kings and below Deuces. Tableau cards are made available when not covered by other cards. Cards can be flipped singly from Stock to the top of Waste. Options Multiplier Scoring: Points double for every card played in a run. A run of five cards will score 1, 2, 4, 16, and 32 points, for a total of 55 points. Bonuses are worth 25 points. No points are deducted for playing a card from the stock to the waste. Progressive Rounds: After all cards have been cleared from the tableu, a new round begins. The score from the last round carries over into the new round. Scoring The score for each card played is equal to the number of cards your have played since the last card flipped from the Stock to the Waste. The longer the run, the higher your score. 5 points are deducted when you flip a card from Stock to Waste. Each triangle peak cleared will give a 15 point bonus, and an additional 15 points are awarded when all the cards have been cleared from the Tableau. Maximum possible score for a single round: 466 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/doublets.xml0000644000373100047300000000601212307311665024042 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Doublets Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Reserve Seven piles, forming an arch shape (upside down U) to the right. Deal one card face up on each pile. During this deal, if a King is dealt, remove the King and place it on the bottom of the deck. Deal another card into this pile. Each Reserve pile can only hold one card. When a Reserve pile is empty, it is automatically filled by the Waste, or, if the Waste is empty, from the Stock. Once original deal is over, when a King is placed in a pile of the Reserve, this pile is frozen as Kings cannot be moved. Foundation One pile, the center pile on the bottom row of the Reserve slots. To be built on from original card by doubling, regardless of suit or color. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation pile. Rules Cards can be put in the Foundation pile if they are twice the value of the card currently on top of the Foundation. Jacks and Queens are eleven and twelve, respectively. If the doubled number exceeds thirteen, subtract thirteen to find next needed card. The series goes: A, 2, 4, 8, 3, 6, Q, J, 9, 5, 10, 7, repeat... Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste by one. When the Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Scoring Each card in the Foundation pile scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Without a King, you can't have regicide. Avoid them. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/bristol.xml0000644000373100047300000000507712307311665023711 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bristol Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. There are no redeals. Reserve Three piles to the right of Stock. One card is dealt into each of the Reserves every time the Stock is clicked. Foundation Four piles on the top right. Foundations are built up in sequence regardless of suit. Tableau Deal face up eight piles of three cards each. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Cards can only be moved singly. An empty pile in the Tableau can not be filled. Cards are flipped from the Stock on to the three Reserve piles, one card each per deal. Top card of each Reserve pile is available for play. Empty Reserve piles cannot be filled except with the next deal from Stock. Foundation piles are built up regardless of suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Never look backwards. Cards that are locked in backwards order are to be dealt with as soon as possible. Move as many cards from the Reserve on to the Tableau as you can, for Kings are hard to move. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/aisleriot/beleaguered_castle.xml0000644000373100047300000000414512307311665026025 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Beleaguered Castle Written by Rosanna Yuen Setup Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle column. Four aces are placed here, one in each pile, before the shuffle. To be built from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight slots (four to the left and four to the right of Foundations.) Deal all cards face up and extended on to these eight piles so that there are six cards in each pile and all cards are showing. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Rules Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Only one card can be moved at a time. Empty piles can be filled with any single card. Foundations are built up in suit. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles other than the original Aces scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Build evenly on to Foundations if possible. Try and get an empty slot. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-bluetooth/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000752412303136005024420 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-bluetooth/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000004706612303136005025270 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 gnome-bluetooth"> ]>
gnome-bluetooth Manual 2009 Baptiste Mille-Mathias Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation Project
baptiste.millemathias@gmail.com
1.0 March 2009 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptiste.millemathias@gmail.com This manual describes version 2.28 of gnome-bluetooth. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the gnome-bluetooth application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page . gnome-bluetooth is an application to manage Bluetooth devices in the GNOME desktop. gnome-bluetooth Bluetooth Communication Introduction gnome-bluetooth is an application that let you manage Bluetooth in the GNOME destkop. gnome-bluetooth permits to send files to your Bluetooth devices, or browse their content. Connect to your devices, like headset or audio gateway. You can add or delete Bluetooth devices, or manage their permissions. Bluetooth Applet The applet is the resident application you can find in the notification applet, that let you quickly access to the features, like sending files, or managing your devices.
Bluetooth Applet icon in notification tray
Starting Bluetooth Applet The gnome-bluetooth applet is started automatically when you log into your session, and you can find its icon in the notification zone. To launch manually the applet, open menu ApplicationsAccessoriesTerminal and type bluetooth-applet. To prevent launching of the applet in your desktop, open menu SystemPreferencesSession and disable Bluetooth Manager. Turning off your Bluetooth adapter Disabling your Bluetooth adapter will stop current and all future communications from and to your Bluetooth adapter. Disabling your Bluetooth adapter permits to save power of your laptop's battery, so it'll increase the autonomy, this is a good idea to disable your Bluetooth device when you don't use it. Click on the icon of the applet, and choose Turn Off Bluetooth, the notification icon will become grey. Sending files to Bluetooth device Choose this menu to send a file to a device; a file chooser will appear to pick up the file to send and you'll have to select the device to send the file to. Browsing Bluetooth device Choose this menu to browse the device filesystem directly in your file manager. Last used devices This section displays your paired devices you can connect to. To connect to the device, click on its name, which will become bolded to inform you're connect to it. Adding a new device To add a new device (which consist of pairing your adapter with your device), click on the applet icon, and choose Setup new device.... An graphical assistant will help you in the process of setting up your device. Don't forget to set your remote device in discoverable mode before starting the process, else the wizard won't be able to find it. The wizard will present the discoverable devices it has found all around. You can filter out the list of devices by choosing the type of devices you're looking for.
Device search in wizard
If your device has a harcoded passkey, choose Passkey Options..., in the new dialog, choose the passkey to use. Choose Forward for the pairing step; if you defined a fixed passkey in the previous step the pairing will occur automatically, else you'll be presented a passkey to enter in your device, type it on your device, once done the devices and your adapter will be paired. Preferences Click on the icon of the applet, and choose Preferences , the preferences dialog will appear. For more information about preferences, see section Preferences The gnome-bluetooth preference dialog allows you to manage your various Bluetooth devices or change properties of your Bluetooth adapter(s).
Preferences dialog
Discoverable When your adapter is set to Discoverable any Bluetooth device around will be able to see it, and therefore will able to ask pairing. Bluetooth as other network types implies security risks, so setting your adapter undiscoverable to other devices is a good thing to do to limit the possibility of cracking. This is only useful to set your device discoverable if you plan to pair it with another device, once it is done, you can untick Discoverable. When your device is undiscoverable, communication with already paired Bluetooth devices is possible. Adapter friendly name The friendly name is an alias for the address used to identified each Bluetooth device much easier to remind. By default the adapter friendly name is HOSTNAME-0 (where HOSTNAME is the name of your computer), to change it, edit the text entry and set the name you want. the change will be immediatly effective. Known Devices Known devices lists the Bluetooth devices you paired and let you manage them, like deleting them, connect to them or adding new one. Setup new device, as described in Connect / Disconnect to a device. Device Deletion. Deletion will suppress pairing between the adapter and the device, and no communication will be allowed. You need to pair them together again if you want transfer files for instance. Show Bluetooth icon You can show or hide Bluetooth icon in the panel. See for the applet features. If you disable the icon in the panel, only limited set of actions will remain available. Receive Files Click on the Receive Files button and the Personal File Sharing Preferences dialog will appear. You can configure Bluetooth file reception and sharing there. This feature is not provided by gnome-bluetooth. gnome-user-share must be installed to use this feature. Read more in the Personal File Sharing Manual: receiving and sharing. Frequently Asked Questions I don't see how to receive files over Bluetooth on my computer in gnome-bluetooth, am I blind? File reception is not implemented in gnome-bluetooth, but in gnome-user-share, so you have to install this application to be able to receive files over Bluetooth. Button explained in the is just a launcher of its configuration dialog. I found a bug in gnome-bluetooth what I can do? You should submit a bug report to .
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/license.page0000644000373100047300000000163512317333256023464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spoznajte svoje pravice Dovoljenje

Ta program je brezplačna programska oprema. Lahko ga razširjate ali spreminjate pod pogoji GNU General Public License, kot jo je objavila ustanova Free Software foundation; bodisi kot različico 3 ali katerokoli poznejše različice.

Ta program se razširja v upanju, da bo uporaben, vendar BREZ KAKRŠNEKOLI GARANCIJE, tudi brez posrednega jamstva CENOVNE VREDNOSTI ali PRIMERNOSTI ZA DOLOČEN NAMEN. Oglejte si GNU General Public License za podrobnosti.

Morali bi imeti kopijo GNU General Public License skupaj s tem programom. Če je nimate, si oglejte http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/restore-worst-case.page0000644000373100047300000002443112317333256025611 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kaj storiti, če datotek ne morete obnoviti Ko gre vse narobe

Déjà Dup lahko ne spodleti. Lahko se zruši in vam javi napako, ko poskuša izvesti obnovitev. Ko resnično želite svoje podatke nazaj, je zadnja stvar, ki bi si jo želeli, hrošč. Izpolnite poročilo o hrošču. V vmesnemu času so tukaj nekateri napotki, kaj storiti v primeru napake v Déjà Dup in kako pridobiti nazaj podatke.

To bo postalo tehnično. Če nič od tega ni smiselno, naj vas ne bo strah prositi za pomoč.

Odprite Terminal s pritiskom na CtrlAltT.

Ustvarite mapo v katero boste postavili obnovljene datoteke. Ta vodnik bo uporabil /tmp/restore:

mkdir -p /tmp/restore
Obnavljanje z Duplicity

Ob predpostavki, da Déjà Dup trenutno za vas de deluje, lahko uporabite orodje ukazne vrstice duplicity, ki ga Déjà Dup uporablja za ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij in obnovitev datotek.

Če želite več podrobnosti o duplicity kot je navedeno tukaj, zaženite ukaz man duplicity.

Prvo možnost, ki jo bomo poskusili, je enostavno obnavljanje vseh vaših podatkov. Predpostavljamo, da so vse datoteke na vašem zunanjem mediju naložene kot /media/backup in želite šifrirati varnostno kopijo poskusite naslednje:

duplicity --gio file:///media/backup /tmp/restore

Če varnostne kopije niste šifrirali ukazu dodajte --no-encryption.

Druga mesta varnostne kopije

Če ste ustvarili varnostno kopijo oddaljenega strežnika ali oblaka, bo skladnja, ki ste jo uporabili z duplicity drugačna kot na izvornem mediju. Spodaj poglejte kako se povezati na izbrano mesto varnostne kopije.

Ne pozabite dodati --no-encryption kateremukoli primeru ukaza, če vaša varnostna kopija ni šifrirana.

Če ima duplicity težave s povezovanjem s strežnikom, poskusite prejeti vse datoteke duplicity v krajevno mapo in sledite enostavnemu primeru zgoraj.

Amazon S3

Poglejte svoj dostopni ključAmazon S3 in skrivno dostopno geslo in ga zamenjajte z vrednostjo ID in SECRET v primeru spodaj z vrednostmi.

Morda ste podali mapo v katero želite shranjevati datoteke varnostnih kopij. V primeru spodaj zamenjajte vsak primerek MAPA s to potjo.

export AWS_ACCESS_KEY_ID=ID export AWS_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY=SKRIVNOST duplicity s3+http://deja-dup-auto-MALEČRKE_ID/MAPA /tmp/restore Datoteke v oblaku Rackspace

Poglejte za svoje uporabniško Rackspace ime in ključ API in z njima zamenjajte primerke UPORABNIŠKO IME in KLJUČ v primeru spodaj.

Lahko ste podali zabojnik v katerega želite odložiti varnostne kopije. V primeru spodaj zamenjajte vsako različico ZABOJNIK s tem imenom.

export CLOUDFILES_USERNAME=UPORABNIŠKO IME export CLOUDFILES_APIKEY=KLJUČ duplicity cf+http://ZABOJNIK /tmp/restore FTP

Poglejte za vas naslov strežnika, vrata, uporabniško ime in geslo in ga zamenjajte z različico STREŽNIK, VRATA, UPORABNIŠKO IME in GESLO, kot je prikazano v primeru spodaj.

Morda ste podali mapo v katero želite shranjevati datoteke varnostnih kopij. V primeru spodaj zamenjajte vsak primerek MAPA s to potjo.

Če se ne želite prijaviti z uporabniškim imenom, uporabite anonymous kot svoje UPORABNIŠKO IME spodaj.

gvfs-mount ftp://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK:VRATA/MAPA duplicity --gio ftp://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK:VRATA/MAPA /tmp/restore SSH

Poglejte za vas naslov strežnika, vrata, uporabniško ime in geslo in ga zamenjajte z različico STREŽNIK, VRATA, UPORABNIŠKO IME in GESLO, kot je prikazano v primeru spodaj.

Morda ste podali mapo v katero želite shranjevati datoteke varnostnih kopij. V primeru spodaj zamenjajte vsak primerek MAPA s to potjo.

gvfs-mount ssh://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK:VRATA/MAPA duplicity --gio ssh://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK:VRATA/MAPA /tmp/restore WebDAV

Poglejte za vas naslov strežnika, vrata, uporabniško ime in geslo in ga zamenjajte z različico STREŽNIK, VRATA, UPORABNIŠKO IME in GESLO, kot je prikazano v primeru spodaj.

Morda ste podali mapo v katero želite shranjevati datoteke varnostnih kopij. V primeru spodaj zamenjajte vsak primerek MAPA s to potjo.

Če izberete uporabo varne povezave (HTTPS), ko ustvarjate varnostne kopije uporabite davs:// namesto dav:// v primeru spodaj.

gvfs-mount dav://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK:VRATA/MAPA duplicity --gio dav://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK:VRATA/MAPA /tmp/restore Souporaba s sistemom Windows

Poglejte za vaš naslov strežnika, uporabniško ime in geslo, ter ga zamenjajte s STREŽNIK, UPORABNIŠKO IME in GESLO v primeru spodaj kot vrednost.

Morda ste podali mapo v katero želite shranjevati datoteke varnostnih kopij. V primeru spodaj zamenjajte vsak primerek MAPA s to potjo.

Če ste podali domeno za svoj strežnik Windows, ga dodajte na začetek UPORABNIŠKO IME s podpičjem med njima. Na primer domena;uporabniško_ime.

gvfs-mount smb://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK/MAPA duplicity --gio smb://UPORABNIŠKO IME@STREŽNIK/MAPA /tmp/restore
Ročno obnavljanje

Če duplicity ne deluje, še vedno obstaja upanje. Oblika varnostne kopije je zapletena in težka za urejanje. Vendar če ste vztrajni, je vredno poskusiti.

Če ste uporabili oddaljen strežnik ali oblak za shranjevanje vaših varnostnih kopij, najprej prejmite vse datoteke duplicity in jih shranite v mapo na svojem računalniku. Nato pojdite v to mapo v terminalu.

Duplicity shranjuje vaše podatke v majhnih delčkih imenovanih nosilci. Nekateri prostori pripadajo občasnih 'polnim' ali svežim varnostnim kopijam in ostale v 'inc' ali koračni varnostni kopiji. Obnoviti boste morali vsako datoteko posebej pri čemer začnite s polnimi varnostnimi kopijami pri nosilcu 1.

Če ste šifrirali svojo zbirko podatkov, jo morate prvo odšifrirati v nosilcu z gpg. Recimo, da imate duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar.gpg:

gpg --output duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar --decrypt duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar.gpg

Ali da izdelate vse na enkrat (zagotovite da imate dovolj prostora!):

gpg --multifile --decrypt duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.*.difftar.gpg

Sedaj imate nosilec .difftar ali .difftar.gz (odvisno od tega ali ste ga odšifrirali ali ne). Uporabite tar na enemu od njih za razširitev posameznih popravkov:

tar xf duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar

Ali še enkrat, storite vse na enkrat:

for t in duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.*.difftar; do tar xf $t; done

Popravek bo v mapi multivolume_snapshot and snapshot. Vsaka datoteka, ki deli nosilce bo v multivolume_snapshot. Recimo, da ste izdelali varnostno kopijo /home/jane/essay.txt:

cd multivolume_snapshot/home/jane/essay.txt cat * > essay.txt

Za obnovitev podatkov iz koračne varnostne kopije uporabite za združitev datotek skupaj. Oglejte si rdiff za uporabo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/support.page0000644000373100047300000000136212317333256023553 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dobite več pomoči Podpora

Če imate težavo ali vprašanja, na katerega nimate odgovora ali težavo, ki jo ne razumete nas vprašajte o njem.

Imejte v mislih, da so ljudje, ki odgovarjajo na vaša vprašanja prostovoljci. Cilj je, da bi Déjà Dup deloval dobro, vendar prihaja brez garancije. Zato vas prosimo, da ste vljudni in potrpežljivi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/credits.page0000644000373100047300000000371012317333256023473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spoznajte skupino Zasluge
Razvoj

Andrew Fister

Michael Terry

Michael Vogt

Urban Skudnik

Canonical Ltd
Dokumentacija

Michael Terry

Canonical Ltd
Umetnost

Andreas Nilsson

Jakub Steiner

Lapo Calamandrei

Michael Terry
Prevod Launchpad Contributions: Andrej Znidarsic https://launchpad.net/~andrej.znidarsic Matej Urbančič https://launchpad.net/~mateju Michael Terry https://launchpad.net/~mterry Miha Gašperšič https://launchpad.net/~miha.gaspersic
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/backup-auto.page0000644000373100047300000000201212317333256024243 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podarite si brezskrbnost Samodejne varnostne kopije

V kolikor ustvarjate varnostne kopije le takrat, ko na to pomislite, jih ne ustvarjate dovolj pogosto. Na srečo je namestitev samodejnega ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij enostavno.

Open your Backups settings.

Preglejte nastavitve ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij in potrdite, da so take kot želite.

Omogočite možnost ustvarjanja Samodejnih varnostnih kopij na strani Pregleda.

Varnostne kopije shranjujte določeno časa z uporabo možnosti Obdrži varnostne kopije na strani Urnik. V nasprotnem prostoru lahko porabijo veliko prostora, če niste pozorni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/backup-first.page0000644000373100047300000000147512317333256024436 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Začnite takoj. Izdelava prve varnostne kopije

Open your Backups settings.

Preglejte nastavitve ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij in potrdite, da so take kot želite.

Click on the Back Up Now… button on the Overview page.

Za izdelavo varnostne kopije je potrebno veliko časa, še posebno, če varnostno kopijo shranjujete na oddaljene strežnik. Opravilo se lahko izvaja v ozadju medtem ko opravljate drugo delo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/restore-revert.page0000644000373100047300000000237512317333256025034 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obnovi predhodno različico datoteke Povrnitev datoteke

Preiščite mapo, ki vsebuje datoteko, ki jo želite povrniti.

S klikom izberite datoteko, ki jo želite povrniti.

Kliknite UrediObnovi na predhodno različico ….

Ko se prikaže pogovorno okno Obnovitev, izberite datum iz katerega želite obnoviti.

Kliknite gumb Naprej.

Svoje izbire preglejte in kliknite Obnovi. Možnost bo prepisala trenutno različico datoteke.

Pred povrnitvijo lahko izberete več datotek.

Datoteke lahko obnovite v ukazni vrstici:

deja-dup --restore DATOTEKA1 DATOTEKA2 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/restore-lost.page0000644000373100047300000000224012317333256024475 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obnovitev datoteke, ki ni več prisotna Obnovitev izgubljene datoteke

Preiščite mapo, ki vsebuje izgubljeno datoteko.

Kliknite DatotekaObnovi izgubljene datoteke ....

Ko se prikaže pogovorno okno Obnovitev, bo preiskalo datoteke, ki so v varnostni kopiji in niso več v mapi.

Ko se datoteka, ki jo želite obnoviti, pojavi, jo izberite in kliknite Naprej.

Preglejte izbor iz kliknite na gumb Obnovi.

Datoteke lahko obnovite v ukazni vrstici, če se spomnite imen datotek:

deja-dup --restore DATOTEKA1 DATOTEKA2 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/prefs.page0000644000373100047300000001075512317333256023164 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prilagoditev nastavitev varnostnih kopij Nastavitve <gui>Automatic backup</gui>

Turn this option on to have Déjà Dup automatically back up for you. This is recommended so that you don’t forget to do it yourself. Backups are more useful the more recent they are, so it is important to back up regularly.

 <gui>Folders to save</gui>

Choose a list of folders to save in your backup. Press the Add or Remove buttons to modify the list. If you are only interested in backing up your own data, the default of Home is sufficient.

 <gui>Prezrte mape</gui>

Choose a list of folders to not save in your backup. Press the Add or Remove buttons to modify the list.

Določeni podatki so lahko veliki ali nepomembni za vas. V tem primeru si lahko prihranite čas in prostor, tako da jih ne shranjujete.

Nekatera mesta so vedno privzeto prezrta:

~/.adobe/Flash_Player/AssetCache

~/.cache

~/.gvfs

~/.Private

~/.recent-applications.xbel

~/.recently-used.xbel

~/.steam/root (privzeto je prezrta tudi datoteka ~/.local/share/Steam)

~/.thumbnails

~/.xsession-errors

/proc

/run

/sys

/tmp

 <gui>Storage location</gui>

Use these options to specify the storage location that Déjà Dup will use when backing up or restoring:

Storitve v oblaku

The first few storage locations are cloud storage services provided by various companies. For a small fee, they hold your data for you. A cloud service like this is recommended because it is an easy way to keep your data offsite (meaning out of your home: in case of disaster or theft, your data will still be safe).

These services cost money. Read their rates carefully before using them.

 Oddaljeni strežniki

Izberite vrsto oddaljenega strežnika s katerim se želite povezati. Nato lahko vnesete podatke o strežniku. Če poznate url naslov svojega strežnika, uporabite mesto po meri in ga vnesite.

 Odstranljivi nosilci

Prenosljive medije boste morda videli prikazane kot trde diske.

 Krajevna mapa

You may also want to choose a local folder as a storage location. Note that backups can be quite large, so make sure you have enough free disk space.

To ni priporočljivo, če vam odpove trdi disk, saj boste izgubili tako izvirne podatke kot varnostne kopije.

 <gui>Keep</gui>

Izberite najmanjši čas hranjenja varnostnih kopij. Če ugotovite, da so vam varnostne kopije zavzemajo preveč prostora, lahko zmanjšate čas hranjenja varnostnih kopij. Zaradi podrobnosti izvedbe brisanja so lahko datoteke hranjene nekaj časa več kot je določeno. Vendar nobena datoteka ne bo izbrisana pred določenim časom.

Backups are kept forever by default, but still may be deleted earlier if the storage location begins to run out of space.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/contribute.page0000644000373100047300000000407312317333256024217 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pomagajte izboljšati program Déjà Dup. Sodelovanje pri projektu

Torej si želite dodatno izboljšati program Déjà Dup? Odlično! Podajamo nekaj predlogov, kako lahko to storite.

Poročanje težav

Ali ste opazili pomanjkljivost? Imate zamisel za novo funkcijo? Preprosto prijavite jo kot hrošče. Bodite potrpežljivi pri čakanju na odgovor.

Poročila o hroščih morajo biti napisana v angleškem jeziku.

Stopite v stik z nami

Ne grizemo. Pošljite elektronsko sporočilo na dopisni seznam.

Prijavite se na dopisni seznem.

Vedite, da je jezik na dopisnem seznamu le angleščina.

PRevajanje

Govorite tako angleško kot drug jezik? Odlično! Pomagate lahko prevajati Déjà Dup preko spletnega vmesnika. Prevajanje je zelo enostavno in cenjeno.

Podpora

Ali radi pomagate ljudem? Odgovarjajte na vprašanja in podpirajte prošnje.

To je odličen način kako lahko uporabniki, ki ne govorijo angleško, prispevajo, saj lahko odgovorite na vprašanja, ki so podana v vašem jeziku.

Programiranje

Vedno so prisotni hrošči, ki jih je potrebno odpraviti. Če želite izvedeti več o tem delu nam pišite na dopisni seznam opisan spodaj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/index.page0000644000373100047300000000206112317333256023143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Backup Help Backup Help Michael Terry mike@mterry.name 2010,2011

Licenca Creative Commons Priznanje avtorstva, deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0 neprenosljivo

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/deja-dup-icon.png"/> Backup Help
Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij
Obnavljanje datotek
O orodju za ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij <app>Déjà Dup</app>
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/deja-dup/restore-full.page0000644000373100047300000000507012317333256024462 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obnovitev po popolni odpovedi sistema Popolna obnova sistema
Nastavitve

Postavi vaš sistem v stanje sveže namestitve. To uporabite v primeru, sveže namestitve ali novega računa na obstoječem računalniku. Počakajte z nastavljanjem nastavitev dokler sistem ne naloži prejšnjih nastavitev, saj so lahko obstoječe nastavitve prepisane, če so bile shranjene v varnostni kopiji.

Nato namestite Déjà Dup. V obliki paketa ga morda ponuja ponudnik distribucije. Vedno pa ga lahko prejmete z medmrežja in namestite.
Obnovi

Open your Backups settings.

Kliknite na gumb Obnovi … na strani Pregled.

Pogovorno okno Obnovitev vas bo vprašalo kje imate shranjene varnostne kopije (vaše Mesto varnostne kopije).

Kliknite Naprej in počakajte na Déjà Dup, da preišče mesto varnostne kopije.

Izberite datum iz katerega želite obnoviti podatke. Ponavadi lahko možnost pusitte, saj program privzeto uporabi najbolj nedavno varnostno kopijo.

Kliknite gumb Naprej.

Izberite mesto kamor želite obnoviti podatke. Ker je to varnostna kopija celotnega sistema lahko pustite privzeto možnost (ker obnovi podatke čez vašo trenutno nameščeno različico).

Kliknite gumb Naprej.

Preglejte izbor iz kliknite na gumb Obnovi.

Počakajte. Preden se obnovitev konča lahko mine veliko časa.

Na kocncu ponovno namestite programe, katere ste radi uporabljali v prejšnji namestitvi.

Če imate kakršen koli razlog, da imate težave po obnovitvi z možnostjo Obnovi datoteke na izvirna mesta , poskusite datoteke obnoviti v začasno mapo in jih nato premakniti kamor sodijo.

Če to še vedno ne deluje, imate na voljo bolj drastične stvari, ki jih lahko poskusite.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-terminal/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000017303312253427713025105 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
GNOME Terminal Manual The Terminal gives users the power to communicate with their system using text-based commands through a shell such as Bash. 2002 2003 2004 Sun Microsystems 2000 Miguel de Icaza 2000 Michael Zucchi 2000 Alexander Kirillov 2008 Christian Persch 2009 2010 Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Miguel de Icaza GNOME Documentation Project Michael Zucchi GNOME Documentation Project Alexander Kirillov GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.9 January 2010 Paul Cutler pcutler@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.8 March 2009 Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.7 November 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.6 September 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.5 May 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.4 January 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.3 August 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.2 August 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.1 August 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.0 April 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal User's Guide May 2000 Miguel de Icaza, Michael Zucchi, Alexander Kirollov docs@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 2.30 of GNOME Terminal. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the GNOME Terminal application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. GNOME Terminal terminal application Introduction GNOME Terminal is a terminal emulation application that you can use to perform the following tasks: Access a UNIX shell in the GNOME environment A shell is a program that interprets and executes the commands that you type at a command line prompt. When you start GNOME Terminal, the application starts the default shell that is specified in your system account. You can switch to a different shell at any time. Run any application that is designed to run on VT102, VT220, and xterm terminals GNOME Terminal emulates the xterm application developed by the X Consortium. In turn, the xterm application emulates the DEC VT102 terminal and also supports the DEC VT220 escape sequences. An escape sequence is a series of characters that starts with the Esc character. GNOME Terminal accepts all of the escape sequences that the VT102 and VT220 terminals use for functions such as to position the cursor and to clear the screen. Getting Started The following sections describe how to start GNOME Terminal. Starting GNOME Terminal You can start GNOME Terminal in the following ways: Applications menu Choose AccessoriesTerminal. Command line Execute the following command: gnome-terminal You can use command line options to modify the way in which you run GNOME Terminal. To view the command line options, execute the following command: gnome-terminal --help When You First Start GNOME Terminal When you start GNOME Terminal for the first time, the application opens a terminal window with a group of default settings. The group of default settings is called the Default profile. The profile name appears in the titlebar of the GNOME Terminal window.
Example of a Default GNOME Terminal Window GNOME Terminal default window GNOME Terminal default window
The terminal window displays a command prompt where you can type UNIX commands. The command prompt can be a %, #, >, $, or any other special character. The cursor is positioned at the command prompt. When you type a UNIX command and press Return, the computer executes the command. By default, GNOME Terminal uses the default shell specified for the user who starts the application. GNOME Terminal also sets the following environment variables: TERM Set to xterm by default. COLORTERM Set to gnome-terminal by default. WINDOWID Set to the X11 window identifier by default. Terminal Profiles You can create a new profile, and apply the new profile to the terminal to modify characteristics such as font, color and effects, scroll behavior, window title, and compatibility. You can also specify a command that runs automatically when you start GNOME Terminal in the profile. You define each terminal profile in the Profiles dialog, which you access from the Edit menu. You can define as many different profiles as you require. When you start a terminal, you can choose the profile that you want to use for the terminal. Alternatively, you can change the terminal profile while you use the terminal. To specify an initial profile for a terminal when you start the application from a command line, use the following command: gnome-terminal --window-with-profile=profilename The name of the current profile appears in the titlebar of the GNOME Terminal, unless you specify a different titlebar name in the Editing Profile dialog. See for information about how to define and use a new terminal profile. Working With Multiple Terminals GNOME Terminal provides a tab feature that enables you to open several terminals in a single window. Each terminal opens in a separate tab. Click on the appropriate tab to display the terminal in the window. Each tabbed terminal in a window is a separate subprocess, so you can use each terminal for different tasks. You can apply a different profile to each tabbed terminal in the window. The titlebar of the terminal window shows either the name of the current profile, or the name specified by the current profile. shows a GNOME Terminal window with four tabs. In this case, each of the four tabs has a different profile. The name of the profile in the active tab, Profile 1, appears in the titlebar.
Example of a Terminal Window With Tabs GNOME Terminal default window GNOME Terminal default window
See for information about how to open a new tabbed terminal. Usage Opening and Closing Terminals To open a new terminal window: Choose FileOpen Terminal. The new terminal inherits the application settings and default shell from the parent terminal. To close a terminal window: Choose FileClose Window. This action closes the terminal and any subprocesses that you opened from the terminal. If you close the last terminal window, the GNOME Terminal application exits. To add a new tabbed terminal to a window: Choose FileOpen TabDefault or just FileOpen Tab if there is no submenu. To display a tabbed terminal: Click on the tab of the tabbed terminal that you want to display, or select a tab title from the Tabs menu. Alternatively, choose TabsNext Tab or TabsPrevious Tab to navigate between tabs. To close a tabbed terminal: Display the tabbed terminal that you want to close. Choose FileClose Tab. Managing Profiles To add a new profile: Choose FileNew Profile to display the New Profile dialog. Type the new profile name in the Profile name text box. Use the Base on drop-down list to select the profile on which you want to base the new profile. Click Create to display the Editing Profile dialog. Click Close. GNOME Terminal adds the profile to the TerminalChange Profile submenu. To change the profile of a tabbed terminal: Click on the tab of the tabbed terminal for which you want to change the profile. Choose TerminalChange Profileprofilename. To edit a profile: You edit profiles in the Editing Profile dialog. You can access the Editing Profile dialog in the following ways: Choose EditCurrent Profile. Right-click in the terminal window, then choose Profiles Profile Preferences from the popup menu. Choose EditProfiles, select the profile you want to edit, then click Edit. For information on the options you can set for profiles, see . To delete a profile: Choose EditProfiles. Select the name of the profile that you want to delete in the Profiles list, then click Delete. The Delete Profile dialog is displayed. Click Delete to confirm the deletion. Click Close to close the Edit Profiles dialog. Modifying a Terminal Window To hide the menubar: Choose ViewShow Menubar. To show a hidden menubar: Right-click on the terminal window, then choose Show Menubar from the popup menu. To display the GNOME Terminal window in full-screen mode: Choose ViewFull Screen. Full-screen mode displays the text in a window that fills the full screen. The window does not contain a window frame or titlebar. To exit from this mode, choose ViewFull Screen again. To change the appearance of the terminal window: See for information about the options that you can choose in the Editing Profile dialog to change the appearance of the terminal window. For example, you can change the background color, or the location of the scrollbar. Working with the Contents of Terminal Windows To scroll through previous commands and output: Perform one of the following actions: Use the scrollbar, which is usually displayed on the right of the terminal window. Press the ShiftPage Up, ShiftPage Down, ShiftHome, or ShiftEnd keys. The number of lines that you can scroll back to in the terminal window is determined by the Scrollback setting in the Scrolling tabbed section of the Editing Profile dialog. You can also scroll up or down one line at a time by pressing ControlShiftUp or ControlShiftDown. To select and copy text: You can select text in any of the following ways: To select a character at a time, click on the first character that you want to select and drag the mouse to the last character that you want to select. To select a word at a time, double-click on the first word that you want to select and drag the mouse to the last word that you want to select. Symbols are selected individually. To select a line at a time, triple-click on the first line that you want to select and drag the mouse to the last line that you want to select. These actions select all text between the first and last items. For all text selections, GNOME Terminal copies the selected text into the clipboard when you release the mouse button. To explicitly copy the selected text, choose EditCopy. To paste text into a terminal: If you previously copied text to the clipboard, you can paste the text into a terminal by performing one of the following actions: To paste text that you copied by selection only, middle-click at the command prompt. If you do not have a middle mouse button, refer to the X Server documentation for information about how to emulate the middle mouse button. To paste text that you explicitly copied, choose EditPaste. To drag a file name into a terminal window: You can drag a file name to a terminal from another application such as a file manager. The terminal displays the path and the full name of the file. To access a link: To access a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) that is displayed in a terminal, perform the following steps: Move the mouse over the URL until the URL is underlined. Right-click on the URL to open a popup menu. Choose Open Link to start a link application and display the file located at the URL. Viewing the Keyboard Shortcut Settings To view the keyboard shortcut settings that are defined for GNOME Terminal, choose EditKeyboard Shortcuts. The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog contains the following items: Disable all menu access keys (such as Alt+f to open File menu) Deselect this option to disable the access keys that are defined to enable you to use the keyboard instead of the mouse to select a menu item. Each access key is identified by an underlined letter on a menu or dialog option. In some cases, you must press the Alt key in combination with the access key to perform the action. Disable menu shortcut key (F10 by default) Deselect this option to disable the shortcut key that is defined to enable you to access the GNOME Terminal menus. The default shortcut key to access the menus is F10. Shortcut Keys The Shortcut Keys section of the dialog lists the shortcut keys that are defined for each menu item. Not all keys can be used as shortcut keys, such as Tab. Text Size You can use the following methods to resize the text in the GNOME Terminal window: To increase the size of the text, choose ViewZoom In. To decrease the size of the text, choose ViewZoom Out. To view the text at actual size, choose ViewNormal Size. To Change the Terminal Title To change the title of the currently displayed terminal, perform the following steps: Choose TerminalSet Title. Type the new title in the Title text box. GNOME Terminal applies the change immediately. Click Close to close the Set Title dialog. To Change the Character Encoding To change the character encoding, choose TerminalSet Character Encoding, then select the appropriate encoding. To Change the List of Character Encodings To change the list of character encodings displayed in the Set Character Encoding menu, perform the following steps: Choose TerminalSet Character EncodingAdd or Remove. To add an encoding to the Set Character Encoding menu, select the encoding in the Available encodings list box, then click the right arrow button. To remove an encoding from the Set Character Encoding menu, select the encoding in the Encodings shown in menu list box, then click the left arrow button. Click Close to close the Add or Remove Terminal Encodings dialog. To Recover Your Terminal This section provides some advice if you have problems with terminals. To reset the state of the terminal: Choose TerminalReset. To reset the terminal and clear the screen: Choose TerminalReset and Clear. Preferences To configure GNOME Terminal, choose EditCurrent Profile. To configure another profile that you set up choose EditProfiles, select the profile you want to edit, then click Edit. The Editing Profile dialog contains the following tabbed sections that you can use to configure GNOME Terminal: General Profile name Use this text box to specify the name of the current profile. Use the system fixed width font Select this option to use the standard fixed width font that is specified in the Font tab of the Appearance preference tool. Font Click on this button to select a font type and font size for the terminal. This button is only enabled if the Use the system terminal font option is unselected. Allow bold text Select this option to enable the terminal to display bold text. Show menubar by default in new terminals Select this option to show the menubar on new terminal windows. Terminal bell Select this option to enable the terminal bell. Cursor shape Use this drop down-list to specify the shape of the cursor. Select-by-word characters Use this text box to specify characters or groups of characters that GNOME Terminal considers to be words when you select text by word. See for more information about how to select text by word. Title and Command Initial title Use this text box to specify the initial title of terminals that use the profile. New terminals that are started from the current terminal have the new initial title. When terminal commands set their own titles Use this drop-down list to specify how to handle dynamically-set titles, that is, terminal titles set by commands that run in the terminal. Run command as a login shell Select this option to force the command that currently runs inside the terminal to run as a login shell. If the command is not a shell, the setting has no effect. Update login records when command is launched Select this option to insert a new entry in the login records when a new shell is opened. Run a custom command instead of my shell Select this option to run a specified command, other than the normal shell, in the terminal. Specify the custom command in the Custom command text box. When command exits Use this drop-down list to specify what action to perform when the command exits. Colours Foreground and Background Select the Use colours from system theme option to use the colors that are specified in the GNOME Desktop theme that is selected in the Theme tab of the Appearance preference tool. Use the Built-in schemes drop-down list to specify the foreground and background colors for the terminal. GNOME Terminal supports the following foreground and background color combinations: Black on light yellow Black on white Gray on black Green on black White on black Custom This option enables you to select colors that are not in the selected color scheme. The actual display of the foreground and background colors can vary depending on the color scheme that you choose. For example, if you choose White on black and the Linux console color scheme, the application displays the foreground and background colors as light gray on black. The Built-in schemes drop-down list is only enabled if the Use colours from system theme option is unselected. Click on the Text colour button to display the Choose terminal text colour dialog. Use the color wheel or the spin boxes to customize the color that you want to use as the text color, then click OK. The Text colour button is only enabled if the Use colours from system theme option is unselected. Click on the Background colour button to display the Choose terminal background colour dialog. Use the color wheel or the spin boxes to customize the color that you want to use as the background color, then click OK. The Background colour button is only enabled if the Use colours from system theme option is unselected. Palette The terminal emulation can only use 16 colors at a time to draw text. The color palette specifies these 16 colors. Applications that run in the terminal use an index number to specify a color from this palette. Use the Built-in schemes drop-down list to choose a preset color schemes. The color palette below and the contents of the terminal window both update to show the scheme. Use the Colour palette to customize the 16 default colors in the custom color palette. To customize a color, click on the color to display the Palette entry dialog. Use the color wheel or the spin boxes to customize the color, then click OK. Background Background Select a background for the terminal window. The options are as follows: Solid color Select this option to use the background color that is specified in the Colors tabbed section as the background color for the terminal. Background image Select this option to use an image file as the background for the terminal. Use the Image file drop-down combination box to specify the location and name of the image file. Alternatively, click Browse to search for and select the image file. Select the Background image scrolls option to enable the background image to scroll with the text when you scroll through the terminal. If you do not select this option, the background image remains fixed on the terminal background and only the text scrolls. This option is only enabled if you select the Background image option. Transparent background Select this option to use a transparent background for the terminal. Shade transparent or image background Use this slider to shade or dim the background of the terminal. This option is only enabled if you select the Background image or Transparent background options. Scrolling Scrollbar is Use this drop-down list to specify the position of the scrollbar on the terminal window. Scrollback ... lines Use this spin box to specify the number of lines that you can scroll back using the scrollbar. For example, if you specify 100 you can scroll back the last 100 lines displayed in the terminal. Select the Unlimited option to remove the limit on the number of lines you can scroll back using the scrollbar. Scroll on output Select this option to enable you to scroll the output on the terminal while the terminal continues to display more output from a command. Scroll on keystroke Select this option to enable you to press any key on the keyboard to scroll down the terminal window to the command prompt. This action only applies if you scrolled up the terminal window and you want to return to the command prompt. Compatibility Backspace key generates Use the drop-down list to select the function that you want the Backspace key to perform. Delete key generates Use the drop-down list to select the function that you want the Delete key to perform. Reset compatibility options to defaults Click on this button to reset the options on the Compatibility tabbed section to the default settings.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-terminal/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000773112253427713024243 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/gnome/help-langpack/gparted/sl/gparted.xml0000644000373100047300000026466312305603340024421 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
GParted Manual GParted Project GParted is the Gnome Partition Editor for creating, reorganizing, and deleting disk partitions. GParted enables you to change the partition organization while preserving the partition contents. 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 Curtis Gedak Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or at or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. Curtis Gedak GParted Project
gedakc@users.sf.net
GParted Manual V1.7 February 2014 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.18.0 of GParted GParted Manual V1.6 December 2013 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.17.0 of GParted GParted Manual V1.5 September 2013 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.16.2 of GParted GParted Manual V1.4 February 2012 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.12.0 of GParted GParted Manual V1.3 January 2011 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.8.0 of GParted GParted Manual V1.2 June 2010 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.6.0 of GParted GParted Manual V1.1 July 2009 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.4.6 of GParted GParted Manual V1.0 January 2009 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.4.2 of GParted GParted Manual V0.3.9 September 2008 Curtis Gedak GParted Project Describes version 0.3.9 of GParted This manual describes version 0.18.0 of GParted Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the gparted application or this manual, follow the directions at . Introduction The gparted application is the GNOME partition editor for creating, reorganizing, and deleting disk partitions. A disk device can be subdivided into one or more partitions. The gparted application enables you to change the partition organization on a disk device while preserving the contents of the partition. With gparted you can accomplish the following tasks: Create a partition table on a disk device. Enable and disable partition flags such as boot and hidden. Perform actions with partitions such as create, delete, resize, move, check, label, copy, and paste. Editing partitions has the potential to cause LOSS of DATA. The gparted application is designed to enable you to edit partitions while reducing the risk of data loss. The application is carefully tested and is used by the GParted project team. However, loss of data might occur due to software bugs, hardware problems, or power failure. You can help to reduce the risk of data loss by not mounting or unmounting partitions outside of the gparted application while gparted is running. You are advised to BACKUP your DATA before using the gparted application. Getting Started Starting gparted You can start gparted in the following ways: Applications menu Choose System ToolsGParted Partition Editor. Command line Execute the following command: gparted On startup, gparted will scan your computer for disk devices. The gparted Window When you start gparted, the following window is displayed:
gparted Window Shows gparted main window.
The gparted window contains the following elements: Menijska vrstica The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands you need to work with disk devices and partitions in gparted. Orodna vrstica The toolbar contains a subset of the commands that you can access from the menubar. Graphic Display Area The graphic display area contains the visual representation of the partitions on the selected disk device. Text Display Area The text display area contains the text list of the partitions on the selected disk device. Vrstica stanja The statusbar displays information about current gparted activity or the number of operations pending. Device Information Pane The device information pane displays details about the selected disk device. By default the device information pane is not shown. To show the device information pane, choose ViewDevice Information. Pending Operations Pane The pending operations pane displays the current list of partition operations in the queue. By default the pending operations pane is not shown when there are 0 pending operations. To show the pending operations pane, choose ViewPending Operations. When you left-click in either display area, you select a partition to use for partition editing actions. When you right-click in either display area, the application displays a popup menu. The popup menu contains the most common partition editing actions. Like other GNOME applications, actions in gparted can be performed in several ways: with the menu, with the toolbar, or with shortcut keys. Running gparted from a Command Line You can run gparted from a command line and specify one or more disk devices. To work with multiple disk devices from a command line, type the following command, then press Enter: $ gparted /path-to-your-device1 /path-to-your-device2 Viewing File System Support To view the actions supported on file systems, choose: ViewFile System Support. The application displays the File System Support dialog. If you have installed software while gparted is running, click Rescan For Supported Actions to refresh the chart. The application refreshes the display of the chart. To close the File System Support dialog, click Close. Working with Devices Selecting a Device To select a disk device, choose: GPartedDevices and select a device from the list. The application displays the device partition layout in the gparted window. Viewing Device Information To view information about a disk device: Select a disk device. See . Select: ViewDevice Information. The application opens a side pane in the gparted window and displays information about the device. To close the Device Information side pane, deselect: ViewDevice Information. Refreshing All Devices To refresh all disk devices, choose: GPartedRefresh Devices. The application rescans all the disk devices and refreshes the device partition layout in the gparted window. Creating a New Partition Table To create a new partition table on a disk device: Select a disk device. See . Choose: DeviceCreate Partition Table. The application displays a Create partition table on /path-to-device dialog. Optionally select a different partition table type from the list. The default partition table type is msdos for disks smaller than 2 Tebibytes in size (assuming a 512 byte sector size) and gpt for disks 2 Tebibytes and larger. See for msdos partition table limitations. Click Apply to create the new partition table. The application writes the new partition table to the disk device. The application refreshes the device partition layout in the gparted window. WARNING: This will ERASE ALL DATA on the ENTIRE DISK DEVICE. If you accidentally overwrite your partition table, see . Attempting Data Rescue To attempt data rescue from a disk device: Select a disk device. See . Choose: DeviceAttempt Data Rescue. The application displays a Search for file systems on /path-to-device dialog. Click OK to start the full disk scan. Large disk devices can take a very long time to scan. If you do not have the time to wait for a full disk scan then click Cancel. A maximum of 4 partitions with file systems might be discovered. If you want to discover more than 4 partitions and restore the partition table, see . When the full disk scan completes one of two possible dialogs is displayed: No file systems found on /path-to-device If no file systems are found, you have other options to try to rescue your data. The photorec application is designed to help recover many different types of lost files. For more information about photorec, see . Click OK to close the dialog box, and end this attempt to rescue data. File systems found on /path-to-device If file systems are found, each file system is displayed in a list along with a View button. The dialog will indicate if there are data inconsistencies. Inconsistencies in the data might prevent you from viewing the data. To rescue data, use the following steps for each file system: Click View to mount and display the file system. Your default file manager is opened and displays a read-only view of the file system. If the dialog Unable to open the default file manager is displayed, then you will need to open a file manager and navigate to the mount point for the file system. The mount point is shown in the dialog, for example "/tmp/gparted-roview-XXXXXX". Click OK to close the Unable to open the default file manager dialog. Use the file manager to copy your data to other storage media. When you are finished copying your data, close the file manager. When you are finished rescuing data, click Close to end this attempt to rescue data. The application umounts any file systems that were mounted for viewing. Then the application rescans all the disk devices and refreshes the device partition layout in the gparted window. Working with Partitions Basic Partition Actions These actions will not alter partitions on your disk device. Selecting a Partition To select a partition, use one of the following: Click on a partition in the graphic display area. Click on a partition in the text display area. The application highlights the partition in both the graphic display area and the text display area in the gparted window. Partition operations such as delete, move, copy, format, check, label, and often resize require the partition to be unmounted. See . Selecting Unallocated Space To select unallocated space, use one of the following: Click on unallocated in the graphic display area. Click on unallocated in the text display area. The application highlights the unallocated space in both the graphic display area and the text display area in the gparted window. If you do not have any disk devices with unallocated space, you might try the following: Add a new disk device to your computer. Shrink a partition that contains unused space. See . Viewing Partition Information To view information about a partition: Select a partition. See . Choose: PartitionInformation. The application opens an Information about /path-to-partition dialog. To close the Information about /path-to-partition dialog, click Close. Mounting a Partition To mount a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionMount and select a mount point from the list. The application mounts the partition on the mount point and refreshes the device partition layout in the gparted window. If PartitionMount is not visible, then gparted does not know where the partition should be mounted. Unmounting a Partition To unmount a partition: Select a mounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionUnmount. The application unmounts the partition from the mount point and refreshes the device partition layout in the gparted window. If PartitionUnmount does not succeed, then the partition is probably in use. To have all partitions unmounted and available for partition editing actions, boot from a Live CD and use gparted. See Intermediate Partition Actions These actions will alter partitions on your disk device. These actions will not modify the start or end boundaries of your existing partitions. Creating a New Partition To create a new partition: Select an unallocated space on the disk device. See . Choose: PartitionNew. The application displays the Create new Partition dialog. Specify the size and the location for the partition. See . Specify the alignment for the partition. See . Specify the type of partition. See . Specify the type of file system for the partition. See . Specify the label for the partition. See . Click Add to add the create partition operation to the operation queue. The application displays the create partition operation in the Pending Operations pane in the gparted window. Deleting a Partition To delete a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionDelete. The application displays the delete partition operation in the Pending Operations pane. If you delete a logical partition, then all existing logical partitions after the deleted logical partition will experience changes in device names. For example, an extended partition contains four logical partitions A, B, C, and D. These logical partitions are accessed by the operating system as follows: Partition A as /dev/sda5. Partition B as /dev/sda6. Partition C as /dev/sda7. Partition D as /dev/sda8. If partition B is deleted, then the remaining logical partitions will be accessed by the operating system as follows: Partition A as /dev/sda5. Partition C as /dev/sda6. Note the change in device name. Partition D as /dev/sda7. Note the change in device name. Changes in a device name can cause problems if a partition is mounted using a device name. You can avoid the problem by using the label or the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) of the partition when mounting the partition. Changes in a device name might adversely affect the following files: /etc/fstab - Contains a list of file systems to mount. /boot/grub/menu.lst - Contains operating system boot instructions for the grub boot loader. Formatting a Partition To format a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionFormat to, and select a type of file system from the list. The application displays the format partition operation in the Operations Pending pane. See for the meaning of the cleared file system type. Setting a Partition Label To set a label or a volume name for a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionLabel. The application opens a Set partition label on /path-to-partition dialog. Type a label name in the Label text box. Click OK. The application displays the set partition label operation in the Operations Pending pane. Changing a Partition UUID To change the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) of a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: Partition New UUID. The application displays the set a new random UUID operation in the Operations Pending pane. Changing the UUID might invalidate the Windows Product Activation key (WPA). On FAT and NTFS file systems, the Volume Serial Number is used as UUID. Changing the Volume Serial Number on the Windows system partition, normally C:, might invalidate the WPA key. An invalid WPA key will prevent login until you reactivate Windows. In an attempt to avoid invalidating the WPA key, on NTFS file systems only half of the UUID is set to a new random value. On FAT file systems, such a precaution is not possible. The WPA key should not be affected by changing the UUID of data partitions or removable media partitions. In rare cases, a partition that is present at boot time might be an exception to this rule. Changing the UUID when there is no need to do so might cause a GNU/Linux system to fail to boot, or to fail to mount a file system. Changing the UUID is only required after copying a partition. The UUID change is needed to prevent duplicate UUIDs when both the source and the copy of the partition are used on the same computer. If boot or mount problems occur you might need to edit configuration files, such as /etc/fstab, and regenerate the grub menu to ensure that the correct UUID is specified. Specifying Partition Details Specifying partition details is useful when performing actions such as create, resize, and move. Specifying Partition Size and Location To specify the size and the location of the partition, use one or a combination of the following: Click-and-hold the arrow at either end of the graphic area. Drag the arrow left or right within the display range. Click-and-hold the middle of the partition in the graphic area. Drag the partition left or right within the display range. Click the spin button arrows, or type numeric values to adjust the following fields: Free Space Preceding New Size Free Space Following The application refreshes both the graphic area and the numbers beside the three field labels. Specifying Partition Alignment To specify the alignment of the partition, click the Align to arrow button, and select from the list. Use MiB alignment for modern operating systems. This setting aligns partitions to start and end on precise mebibyte (1,048,576 byte) boundaries. MiB alignment provides enhanced performance when used with RAID systems and with Solid State Drives, such as USB flash drives. Use Cylinder alignment to maintain compatibility with operating systems released before the year 2000, such as DOS. This setting aligns partitions to start and end on disk cylinder boundaries. The Cylinder/Head/Sector values reported by modern disk devices no longer have a direct physical relationship to the data stored on the disk device. Hence it is no longer valid to use this alignment setting to achieve enhanced performance. Use None only if you have an in-depth knowledge of disk structure, partition tables, and boot records. This setting places partition boundaries relative to the end of any immediately preceding partition on the disk device. This setting is not guaranteed to reserve or respect space required for boot records. Specifying Partition Type To specify the partition type, click the Create as arrow button, and select from the list. The msdos partition table limits partitions as follows: Maximum of 4 primary partitions. Maximum of 3 primary partitions, and 1 extended partition. The extended partition can contain multiple logical partitions. Some GNU/Linux distributions support accessing at most 15 partitions on a disk device. Maximum size of a partition is 2 Tebibytes using a sector size of 512 bytes. The partition must also start within the first 2 Tebibytes of the disk device. Primary partitions provide better data recoverability because the partition boundaries are stored at known locations on the disk device. Specifying Partition File System To specify the type of file system for the partition, click the File System arrow button, and select from the list. Examples of uses for some file systems are as follows: ext2, ext3 and ext4 file systems can be used for installing GNU/Linux, and for data. linux-swap can be used with GNU/Linux to increase the virtual memory of your computer. fat16 and fat32 file systems can be used to share data between free and commercial operating systems. cleared can be used to clear any existing file system signatures and ensure that the partition is recognised as empty. unformatted can be used to just create a partition without writing a file system. Specifying Partition Label To specify the partition label, also known as a volume label, type a label name in the Label text box. Labels can be used to help you remember what is stored in the partition. Unique labels can be used to mount file systems with the GNU/Linux operating system. Advanced Partition Actions These actions will alter partitions on your disk device. These actions might modify the start or end boundaries of your existing partitions. These actions might cause operating systems to fail to boot. Resizing a Partition Resizing and moving a partition can be performed by a single gparted operation. To resize a partition: Select a partition. See . Unmounted or inactive partitions enable the most resize options. Support is available for online resize of some mounted or otherwise active partitions. However this support is often limited to grow only. Choose: PartitionResize/Move. The application displays the Resize/Move /path-to-partition dialog. Adjust the size of the partition. See . If you do not want the start of an existing partition to move, then do not change the free space preceding value. If the partition is mounted or otherwise active, then you will not be able to change the free space preceding value. Specify the alignment of the partition. See . Click Resize/Move. The application displays the resize/move partition operation in the Pending Operations pane. Examine the operation that was added to the Pending Operations pane. If the operation involves a move step, then consider the following: A move step might take a long time to complete. If the partition is an operating system boot partition, then a move step might cause the operating system to fail to boot. If you are not prepared to wait or to fix potential operating system boot problems, then you might want to undo the operation. See . To grow or move a partition, unallocated space must be available adjacent to the partition. If you are growing a logical partition, then the unallocated space must be within the extended partition. If you are growing a primary partition, then the unallocated space must not be within the extended partition. You can move unallocated space to be inside or outside of the extended partition by resizing the extended partition boundaries. To improve the ability to shrink NTFS partitions, you might consider one or more of the following: Defragment the file system. Booting into Safe Mode with the commercial operating system that uses NTFS can improve the ability to defragment the file system. To enter Safe Mode press F8 while your computer is booting the operating system. Check the partition for errors with the following command: C:> chkdsk /f /r Remember to reboot back into the commercial operating system that uses NTFS to allow the chkdsk command to execute. Temporarily disable the paging file. The paging file occupies a fixed location in the partition that the defragmentation process is unable to move. Temporarily move large files to another partition or disk device. Large files are defined as greater than a few hundred Megabytes (MB). Ensure a proper shut down of the commercial operating system that uses NTFS before you resize the NTFS partition Leave at least 10 percent unused space in the NTFS partition. If you shrink the partition too much, then the commercial operating system might have difficulty functioning properly. Reboot twice into the commercial operating system that uses NTFS after shrinking the NTFS partition. Moving a Partition Moving and resizing a partition can be performed by a single gparted operation. To move a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionResize/Move. The application displays the Resize/Move /path-to-partition dialog. Adjust the location of the partition. See . Specify the alignment of the partition. See . Click Resize/Move. The application displays the resize/move partition operation in the Pending Operations pane. If the partition is an operating system boot partition, then the operating system might not boot after the move operation is applied. If the operating system fails to boot, see . Copying and Pasting a Partition To copy a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionCopy. The application marks the partition as the source partition. To Paste a partition: Select an unallocated space on a disk device. See . Choose: PartitionPaste. The application displays the Paste /path-to-partition dialog. If you want you can adjust the size and location of the partition. See . If you want you can specify the alignment of partition. See . Click Paste. The application displays the copy partition operation in the Pending Operations pane. The copy of the partition has the same label and the same Universally Unique Identifier (UUID) as the source partition. This can cause a problem when booting, or when mount actions use the partition label or the UUID to identify the partition. The problem is that the operating system will randomly select to mount either the source, or the copy of the partition. For example, on the first mount action the source partition might be mounted. On the next mount action the copy of the partition might be mounted. Over time this random nature of partition mounting might make files seem to mysteriously appear or disappear depending upon which partition is mounted. Random mounting of the source or the copy of the partition might also cause severe data corruption or loss. To avoid the problem you are advised to do one of the following: After you have applied the copy operation: Change the UUID of either the source, or the copy of the partition. See . If the partition label is not blank then change the label of either the source, or the copy of the partition. See . After you have applied the copy operation, delete or reformat the source partition. Use some other method to ensure that the source partition and the copy of the partition are not used on the same computer at the same time. For example, if the copy of the partition is on a separate drive then remove the drive from the computer. Managing Partition Flags To manage partition flags: Select a partition. See . Choose: PartitionManage Flags. The application opens a Manage flags on /path-to-partition dialog. To enable a flag, select the check box beside the flag. The application writes the enabled flag to the partition and refreshes the Manage flags on /path-to-partition dialog. To disable a flag, deselect the check box beside the flag. The application writes the disabled flag to the partition and refreshes the Manage flags on /path-to-partition dialog. To close the Manage flags on /path-to-partition dialog, click Close. A description of flags in an msdos partition table follows: Boot is used by some commercial operating system boot loaders. The boot flag indicates the partition is active or bootable. Only one partition on a disk device can be active. Diag is used to indicate the partition is used for diagnostics / recovery. Hidden is used by some commercial operating systems. The hidden flag makes the partition invisible to the operating system. LBA is used by some commercial operating system boot loaders. The LBA flag indicates the partition should be accessed using Logical Block Addressing (LBA), instead of Cylinder-Head-Sector (CHS) addressing. LVM is used to indicate the partition is used by a Logical Volume Manager (LVM). Palo is used by the Precision Architecture - Reduced Instruction Set Computing (PA-RISC) boot loader, palo. Prep is used to indicate the boot partition on Power Performance Computing (PowerPC) hardware. RAID is used to indicate the partition is used in a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID). A description of flags in a gpt partition table follows: Atvrecv is used to indicate an Apple TV Recovery partition. BIOS_GRUB indicates a BIOS boot partition often used by the GRUB 2 boot loader. Boot is used by some commercial operating system boot loaders. The boot flag indicates the partition is active or bootable. Only one partition on a disk device can be active. Diag indicates the partition is used for diagnostics or recovery. Hidden is used by some commercial operating systems. The hidden flag makes the partition invisible to the operating system. HP-service is used to indicate a Hewlett Packard service partition. Legacy_boot is used by some special purpose software to indicate the partition might be bootable. LVM indicates the partition is used by a Logical Volume Manager (LVM). Msftres is used to indicate a Microsoft Reserved partition. RAID indicates the partition is used in a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID). Checking a Partition Checking a partition will attempt to find and fix problems in the file system. Checking a partition will attempt to grow the file system to fill the partition. To check a partition: Select an unmounted partition. See . Choose: PartitionCheck. The application displays the check partition operation in the Pending Operations pane. Working with the Operation Queue Undoing Last Operation To undo the last operation in the operation queue, choose: EditUndo Last Operation. The application removes the last operation from the queue displayed in the Pending Operations pane. If there are no operations remaining in the queue, the application closes the Pending Operations pane. Clearing All Operations To clear all operations in the operation queue, choose: EditClear All Operations. The application removes all operations from the queue and closes the Pending Operations pane. Applying All Operations To apply all operations: Choose: EditApply All Operations. The application displays an Apply operations to device dialog. Editing partitions has the potential to cause LOSS of DATA. You are advised to backup your data before applying your partition editing operations. Click Apply. The application displays an Applying pending operations dialog. The application applies each pending operation in the order you created the operations. The application displays a status update when each operation is completed. To view more information, click Details. The application displays more details about operations. To view more information about the steps in each operation, click the arrow button beside each step. To stop the operations while they are executing, click Cancel. The application displays a disabled Force Cancel (5) button and counts down for 5 seconds. Cancel instructs the application to stop or roll back operations as necessary to ensure data integrity. If operations have not halted after 5 seconds the application enables the Force Cancel button. To force the operations to stop, click Force Cancel. The application displays a warning dialog. Click Continue Operation to allow the roll back operations to complete, or click Cancel Operation to cancel the roll back operations. Cancel Operation terminates the safe roll back of operations and might cause SEVERE file system damage and data loss. You are advised to click Continue Operation to allow the roll back to complete. When the application finishes performing operations, the application displays the Save Details button and the Close button. If you want to save the details from applying all operations, then click Save Details. The application displays a Save Details dialog. If you want to change the default file name, then type a file name in the Name text box. If you want to save the file in a folder different than /root, Click Browse for other folders. The application displays a file system navigator. Use the file system navigator to select a folder. Click Save to save the file. The application saves the details file. If you use gparted from a Live CD, then the root file system exists in RAM memory. All files saved to the Live CD root file system will be lost when you shut down the computer. If you saved the gparted details to the Live CD root file system, then you need to copy the file to more permanent storage. Examples of more permanent storage are a hard disk drive or a USB flash memory drive. Click Close. The application closes the Applying pending operations dialog. The application rescans all the disk devices and refreshes the device partition layout in the gparted window. Acquiring GParted on Live CD A Live CD is a Compact Disc that contains a bootable operating system. A Live CD enables you to boot your computer from the CD. Using gparted from a Live CD has the following advantages: You can edit all of your partitions because the partitions are not mounted. You can edit partitions on computers that do not have a bootable operating system. The gparted application is available on many Live CD distributions. You can download a Live CD image containing gparted from the following web sites: GParted Live CD System Rescue CD To avoid wasting a blank CD when burning a CD image file, use the following tips: Ensure the checksum of the downloaded file matches the checksum posted on the download page. Be sure to burn the .iso file as an image to the blank CD. If you burn the .iso file as data to a blank CD then the CD will not boot in your computer. Fixing Operating System Boot Problems Your computer might fail to boot an operating system when you perform one of the following actions: Delete a partition. Move a partition. Install another operating system and overwrite the Master Boot Record (MBR). You are advised to consult documentation for your boot loader to learn how to fix the problem. You might consult the GParted FAQ, or the GParted forum. You might also use Internet search engines to learn how other people have solved similar problems. Fixing GRUB boot problem The Grand Unified Boot loader (GRUB) might fail to boot an operating system if you do one of the following: Move the partition containing the GRUB stage2 file. Install a new operating system that overwrites the Master Boot Record (MBR). To fix these problems, you will need to reinstall the GRUB boot record using the following steps: Start the grub application from the command line. $ grub Find where grub stage1 is located by using one of the following: If the /boot folder is stored in the / partition, use the command: grub> find /boot/grub/stage1 If the /boot folder is stored in a partition different than the / partition, use the command: grub> find /grub/stage1 The output from the find command might look like the following: (hd0,0) If more than one line is listed in the command output, you will need to decide which device you use for grub. Set the grub root device by specifying the device returned by the find command. grub> root (hd0,0) Reinstall grub by specifying the device returned by the find command. grub> setup (hd0,0) Exit grub. grub> quit Reboot your computer. The grub application is included on each Live CD listed in Recovering Partition Tables If you accidentally overwrite your partition table, there is a chance that you might be able to recover it. The testdisk application is designed to help recover lost partitions. For more information about testdisk, see . The testdisk application is included on each Live CD listed in
usr/share/omf-langpack/gparted/gparted-sl.omf0000644000373100047300000000170212305603341023104 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 (Curtis Gedak) (Curtis Gedak) GParted Manual September 2008 GParted is the Gnome Partition Editor for creating, reorganizing, and deleting disk partitions. GParted enables you to change the partition organization while preserving the partition contents. manual usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000321112300405722024542 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte prevajati

Uporabniški vmesnik Iger GNOME in njihovo dokumentacijo prevaja skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

Za začetek prevajanja boste morali ustvariti račun in se pridružitiprevajalski ekipi za svoj jezik. S tem boste pridobili zmožnost pošiljanja novih prevodov.

S prevajalci GNOME se lahko pogovarjate s pomočjo omrežjairc. Ljudje na kanalu prihajajo s celega sveta zato zaradi časovne razlike odziva ne boste dobili nemudoma.

Namesto tega lahko stopite v stik s prevajalsko ekipo preko njihovega dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/license.page0000644000373100047300000000273512300405722024201 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pravni podatki. Dovoljenje

To delo se razširja pod licenco CreativeCommons Attribution-Deljenje priznanje avtorstva 3.0 neprenosljivo.

Lahko:

<em>Delite</em>

Kopirate, distribuirate in priobčujete delo javnosti.

 <em>Predelate</em>

Prilagodite delo.

Pod naslednjimi pogoji:

<em>Priznanje avtorstva</em>

Delo morate priznati na način, kot ga je navedel avtor ali lastnik licence (toda ne na način, ki predlaga, da podirajo vas ali vašo uporabo dela).

 <em>Deljenje pod enakimi pogoji</em>

Če spremenite, prilagodite ali gradite na tem delu, lahko nastalo delo distribuirate le pod enako, podobno ali združljivo licenco.

Za polno besedilo licence si oglejte spletišče CreativeCommons website, ali si preberite polno zavezo Commons.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/get-help.page0000644000373100047300000000227112300405722024257 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Hints and warnings

You can use hints to reveal safe tiles, and flag warnings to help you keep track of flags.

Click Hint in the toolbar to reveal a hidden tile that is safe. You will be penalized for using hints: ten seconds will be added to your total time.

To enable warnings, edit the preferences by selecting MinesPreferences and ticking the checkbox next to Warn if too many flags have been placed. This will warn you when you try to place too many flags next to an open tile.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000414612300405722024600 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com 2011

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Help make <app>Mines</app> better
Pošiljanje poročila o hrošču ali predlog izboljšave

Mines is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs and crashes, or request enhancements.

To participate you need an account, which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, make comments, and receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugApplicationsgnome-mines. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

V primeru da zahtevate novo zmožnost v meniju Severity izberite enhancement. Izpolnite odseka Summary in Description in kliknite Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with. Thanks for helping make Mines better!

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/new-game.page0000644000373100047300000000260512300405722024253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Aruna Sankaranarayanan aruna.evam@gmail.com Začni novo igro

To start a new game:

Click the New button or select Mines New Game from the application menu.

Select your preferred board size.

If you are already playing a game, Mines will ask if you want to Start New Game or Keep Current Game. If you choose the former, your current game will be lost.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000204712300405722024211 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte pri razvoju

Igre GNOME vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Če želite pomagati pri razvoju Iger GNOME, lahko stopite v stik z razvijalci preko irc-a ali preko dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000252012300405722024605 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com 2012 Tipkovne bližnjice

Nova igra

CtrlN

Celozaslonski način

F11

Namig

CtrlH

Premor

Pause

Uporabite bližnjico orodne vrstice, če vaša tipkovnica nima tipke Pause.

Pomoč

F1

Končaj

CtrlQ
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/rules.page0000644000373100047300000000335612300405722023711 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Pravila igre

The aim of Mines is to clear the minefield without detonating any of the mines.

Start by chosing one of the three default board sizes, or by selecting a custom board.

The game begins with the board covered in tiles. Click on any tile to uncover it. You will reveal:

A colored number, which represent the number of mines in the adjacent tiles. This will help you deduce where the mines are so that you can mark them with flags.

A blank tile, which means there are no mines under any of the adjacent tiles.

A mine, which will detonate and end the game.

Repeat the previous step until you have uncovered all the tiles which do not have mines underneath them.

If you complete the game quickly enough, you will be added to the high scores list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/index.page0000644000373100047300000000270312300405722023661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/logo.png"/> GNOME Mine GNOME Mine Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png">GNOME Mines logo</media> GNOME Mines

Mines is a clone of the game Minesweeper. The aim is to locate all the mines that are hidden under tiles on a rectangular board. You will need to use a combination of logic and luck to find all the mines without triggering an explosion.

Igranje
Uporabni namigi
Napredno
Sodelujte
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000307512300405722025426 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Aruna Sankaranarayanan aruna.evam@gmail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte pisati dokumentacijo

The GNOME Games user help is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, get in touch with us on the #docs channel on irc.gnome.org or via our mailing list .

Naša stran wiki vsebuje uporabne podatke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/board-size.page0000644000373100047300000000235512300405722024614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 How to change the game board size

You can select a field size at the start of a new game.

Click New or Mines New Game.

Select one of the grid sizes:

a 8 × 8 board with 10 mines

a 16 × 16 board with 40 mines

a 30 × 16 board with 99 mines

a custom board, where you chose the size and the number of mines

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/high-scores.page0000644000373100047300000000211712300405722024764 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 High scores

The high scores list the ten fastest times in which each type of mine field has been cleared.

To view the high scores, select MinesScores. The dialog will display the Small field size by default; to view other sizes, select them in the drop down menu at the top of the dialog.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/faces.page0000644000373100047300000000266212300405722023637 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Aruna Sankaranarayanan aruna.evam@gmail.com Pomen oznak

This is a new game and you have not clicked on any tile yet.

You are currently clicking on a tile.

You have uncovered a mine. You lose.

The tile you just clicked on is safe. You can continue.

You have found all the mines. You win!
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000142312300405722024212 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Orodna vrstica

The toolbar, located under the menu bar, lets you perform common actions with your mouse. To use a toolbar item, just click on it. The buttons, from left to right, are New Game, Hint, Pause and Fullscreen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-mines/flags.page0000644000373100047300000000545312300405722023653 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 How to use flags

Flags are used to mark tiles which you suspect may hide a mine. Putting a flag on a tile prevents you from clicking on it and possibly causing an explosion, which would end the game.
Kako postaviti zastavico na polje

Red flags are those that cannot be clicked. To place a red flag on a tile:

right click on a blank tile.

To make the number of available flags equal to the number of remaining mines, enable Warn if too many flags placed and Use "I'm not sure" flags preference options, then restart the application.
Use of the <em>I'm not sure</em> flag

If you are not sure whether a tile hides a mine, you can use the blue I'm not sure flag.

Za postavitev zastavice Nisem prepričan na polje:

Right-click twice on a blank tile or once on a red flag.

To enable these flags, click MinesPreferences, and select Use "I'm not sure" flags.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-user-share/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000002433712300454034025337 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Personal File Sharing Manual 2009 Red Hat, Inc. Matthias Clasen 1.0 2009 Matthias Clasen mclasen@redhat.com This manual describes version 2.26 of gnome-user-share. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the gnome-user-share application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. gnome-user-share is a session service that enables easy sharing of files between several computers. gnome-user-share file sharing sharing Introduction gnome-user-share is a session service that exports the contents of the Public folder in your home directory, so that they can easily be accessed from other computers on the same local network. On the other computers, the shared folder will appear with a name like 'user's shared files' in the nautilus Network window, where user will be replaced by your user name. gnome-user-share uses a WebDAV server to share the Public folder, and advertises the share on the local network using mDNS. Additionally, gnome-user-share can make the shared files available via ObexFTP over Bluetooth, and receive files that are sent to your computer via Bluetooth via ObexPush. Getting started Starting gnome-user-share The gnome-user-share service is normally started by gnome-session when you log in. You can change this by opening PreferencesStartup Applications in the System menu, and modifying the 'User Sharing' entry in the list of startup programs. To configure various aspects of file sharing, use the File Sharing Preferences, which can be found in the System menu under PreferencesPersonal File Sharing.
File Sharing Preferences
Enabling file sharing over the network Open the File Sharing Preferences using PreferencesPersonal File Sharing in the System menu.
Share Files over the Network
To enable file sharing via WebDAV, use the Share public files on network checkbox. When file sharing it enabled, the controls for password protection allow to set a password that needs to be specified before a user on another computer is granted access to the shared files. Some firewall configurations on the local machine might cause problems with the advertisment, as well as the access to the shared files. Consult your system administrator for more details. Select Never to allow everybody to freely read or write files in the shared folder. Select Always to require the password to read or write files in the shared folder. Select When writing files to allow everybody to freely read files in the shared folder, but require the password when writing files. When you set a password, you have to give the password to all users that you want to have access to the shared files. Therefore, you should use a password that is different from other passwords you use. Enabling file sharing over Bluetooth Open the File Sharing Preferences using PreferencesPersonal File Sharing in the System menu.
Share Files over Bluetooth
To enable file sharing via Bluetooth, use the Share public files over Bluetooth checkbox. To allow remote Bluetooth devices to delete files in your shared folder, use the Allow remote devices to delete files checkbox. To allow remote Bluetooth devices to access your shared files even when they are not bonded with your computer, use the Require remote devices to pair with this computer checkbox. When you allow unbonded remote devices to access your shared files, anybody with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone in the vicinity of your computer can access and perhaps even modify your shared files. Receiving Files over Bluetooth Open the File Sharing Preferences using PreferencesPersonal File Sharing in the System menu.
Receive Files over Bluetooth
To let remote Bluetooth devices send files to your computer, use the Receive files in Downloads folder over Bluetooth checkbox. Received files will be stored in the Downloads folder in your home directory. When receiving files is enabled, the Accept files selection allows you to determine which remote devices are allowed to send files. Select Always to allow any remote device to send files. Select Only for Bonded devices to accept files only from bonded devices. Bonded devices are the ones that were connected to your computer, and had to enter a PIN code to connect to or from. Select Only for Bonded and Trusted devices to accept files only from bonded devices. Devices can be marked as trusted in the bluetooth-properties's Known devices section. Use the Notify about received files checkbox to select whether you want to be notified whenever a file is received via Bluetooth.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-user-share/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000752412300454034024473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_text_setup.page0000644000373100047300000001354112316542070024713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zmožnost, ki vam omogoča izvajanje osnovnih nastavitev Orke tudi če grafično namizje ne teče. Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Uporaba nastavitev besedila

Orka ima zmožnost nastavitev besedila, ki vam omogoča izvajanje osnovne nastavitve Orke tudi če grafično namizje ne teče.

Zaganjanje <app>Orkinih</app> nastavitev vodenih le z besedilom

Odprite pogovorno okno Zaženi. Za večino distribucij lahko to dosežete s pritiskom AltF2. Nadomestno lahko uporabite okno terminala ali konzolo sistemskega besedila.

Vtipkajte orca --text-setup ali orca -t in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Vprašani boste nekaj vprašanj:

Izberite želeni sistem govora

Izbire, ki sledijo, bodo odvisne od sistemov zvoka, ki so nameščeni na vašem sistemu. Vnesite število povezano s svojim želenim sistemom zvoka in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Izberite priljubljen strežnik govora.

Izbire, ki sledijo, bodo odvisne od sistemov zvoka, ki so nameščeni na vašem sistemu. Vnesite število povezano s svojim želenim sistemom zvoka in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Izberite priljubljen glas

"Zvoki" ustrezajo razpoložljivim jezikom. V primeru speech-dispatcher je na voljo približno 60 jezikov in narečij pri čemer se redno dodajajo nova. Vnesite številko svoje izbire jezika (na primer 7 za ameriško angleščino) in pritisnite Vnosno tipko. Ni vam treba čakati na izgovorjavo celotnega seznama. Poleg tega Orka poskuša narediti vaš privzet jezik vašo prvi izbiro, zato lahko v večini primerov enostavno vnesete 1 in pritisnete Vnosno tipko brez poslušanja celotnega seznama zvokov.

Ali želite omogočiti odmev po besedi?

Ta možnost povzroči, da Orka izgovori besede, ko končate z njihovim tipkanjem. Pritisnite y ali n in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Ali želite omogočiti odmev tipk?

Ta možnost povzroči, da Orka izgovori vse tipke ob njihovem pritisku. Vpišite y ali n in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Če nakažete, da želite omogočiti odmev tipk, vas bo nastavitev vprašala o vrstah odmeva tipk, ki jih lahko omogočite ali onemogočite. Za vsako vpišite y za omogočitev in n za onemogočitev in pritisnite Vnosno tipko. Vrste so:

črkovno-številčne tipke in tipke ločil

Ta možnost nadzira ali tipke kot so a, b, c, ;, ? in tako naprej izgovorjene ob pritisku.

pomožne tipke

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Dvigalka, Ctrl, Alt in Meta izgovorjene ob pritisku.

tipke za zaklep

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Caps Lock, Scroll Lock in Num Lock izgovorjene ob pritisku.

funkcijske tipke

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke od F1 do F12 izgovorjene ob pritisku.

tipke dejanj

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Vračalka, Izbriši, Vnosna tipka, Ubežna tipka, Tabulator, Stran navzgor, Stran navzdol, Domov in Konec izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Izberite želen razpored tipkovnice.

Orka ima dve razporeditvi tipkovnice: namizni računalnik in prenosnik. Izbrana razporeditev vpliva na to katera tipka je uporabljena kot spremenilna tipka Orka.

V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev prenosnika, bo privzeta spremenilna tipka Orka CapsLock

V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev namiznega računalnika, bo spremenilna tipka Orka tako Vstavi kot Vstavi številčne tipkovnice. Slednja je enaka tipki Številčna tipkovnica 0.

Razporeditev določi tudi kateri pritiski tipk so povezani s številnimi Orkinimi ukazi, še posebno na področjih ploskega pregleda, Kje sem in Reci vse.

Vpišite 1 za razporeditev namiznega računalnika ali 2 za razporeditev prenosnika in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Omogoči Braillovo pisavo

Ta zmožnost predpostavlja, da imate na voljo z BrlTTY združljivo napravo. Vpišite y ali n in pritisnite Vnosno tipko. Običajno lahko tukaj vnesete y. Orka bo sejo elegantno obnovila in delovala tudi, če ne more najti BrlTTY.

That's it. Orca is now ready for use and will be launched if you are in a graphical desktop environment where accessibility is enabled.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_general.page0000644000373100047300000001031312316542070025257 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Splošno Splošno Nastavljanje Orkinega osnovnega obnašanja Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Splošne možnosti
Možnost za izbiro razporeditve tipkovnice, ki jo bo uporabljala Orka. Na voljo sta razporeditvi namiznega računalnika in prenosnika. Razporeditev tipkovnice

Izbirni gumb razporeditev tipkovnice vam omogoča navedbo, če boste delali s tipkovnico namiznega računalnika (s številčno tipkovnico) ali prenosnika. Razporeditev, ki jo izberete, bo določila tako Spremenilno tipko Orka kot tudi številne tipkovne bližnjice za izvajanje ukazov Orka.

Privzeta vrednost: Namizni računalnik

Možnost za omogočitev predstavitve orodnih namigov, ki se pojavijo kot posledica miškinega prehoda. Prisotni orodni namigi

Ko je ta možnost izbrana, nastavi Orko, da predstavi podrobnosti o orodnih namigih, ko se pojavijo zaradi prehoda miške. Določena dejanja, kot je npr. pritisk krmilkaF1, ko ima predmet pozornost, povzročijo pojavljanje orodnih namigov ne glede na to nastavitev.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Možnost za omogočitev predstavitve predmeta pod miškinim kazalnikom. Izgovorite predmet pod miško

Izbrana možnost določi, da Orka predstavi podatke o predmetu pod miškinim kazalnikom medtem ko ga premikate po zaslonu z Orkino zmožnostjo Pregleda miške.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Možnosti za prilagajanje prikaza datuma in časa, ki ju uporablja Orka. Prikaz časa in prikaz datuma

Spustni polji Prikaz časa in Prikaz datuma vam omogočata navedbo ali Orka izgovori in v Braillovi pisavi prikaže čas in datum.

Privzeta vrednost: uporabi prikaz sistemskega jezikovnega določila

Možnosti za upravljanje profilov nastavitev. Profili

Skupina nadzornikov Profili, ki se pojavi na dnu strani Splošno, vam omogoča vzdrževanje in uporabo več nastavitev.

Spustno polje Dejaven profil prikazuje trenutni profil in vam omogoča izbiro drugega profila za nalaganje.

Gumb Naloži povzroči, da Orka naloži profil nakazan v spustnem polju Dejaven profil.

Gumb Shrani kot vam omogoča shranjevanje trenutnega niza možnosti v profil.

Spustno polje Zagonski profila vam omogoča izbiro profila, ki bo bil samodejno naložen, vsakič ko zaženete Orko.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_whereami.page0000644000373100047300000000626612316542070024316 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. KjeSem Kako izvedeti kje ste Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 KjeSemJaz

Poleg podrobnih ukazov za branje naslovne vrstice in vrstice stanja Orka zagotavlja dva na vsebino občutljiva ukaza Kje sem: osnovni Kje sem in podrobni Kje sem. Osnovni Kje sem je podprt za vse predmete. Podroben Kje sem je podprt je podprt le za predmete, kjer obstaja občutna količina podatkov, ki jih morda želite vedeti, vendar jih ne želite vedeti ves čas.

Najboljši način za spoznavanje ukazov Kje sem je preizkušanje. Da bi imeli boljšo idejo o na vsebino občutljivi naravi Orkine zmožnosti Kje sem vzemite v znanje naslednje:

Za večino gradnikov vam bo povedana oznaka in/ali ime, vrsto ali vlogo gradnika in mnemotehnika in/ali pospeševalna tipka, če obstajati. Poleg tega:

V primeru da je gradnik besedilo in izvedete osnovno iskanje Kje sem vam bo povedana trenutna vrstica, če ni izbrano nobeno besedilo. V primeru da je besedilo izbrano vam bo osnovni ukaz Kje sem povedal katero besedilo je izbrano. Podroben ukaz Kje sem bo vključil tudi atribute besedila.

V primeru da lahko gradnik izberete kot na primer v izbirnih poljih in izbirnih gumbih bo vključeno stanje izbranosti.

V primeru da je gradnik seznam ali seznamu podoben predmet kot je spustno polje, skupina izbirnih gumbov ali seznam zavihkov strani, bo vključen položaj trenutnega predmeta.

V primeru da je gradnik hierarhičen kot je drevo in ste na razširljivem vozlišču, vam bo sporočeno, če je vozlišče razširjeno ali ne. Če je vozlišče razširjeno, vam bo sporočeno koliko podrejenih predmetov vsebuje. Zagotovljena bo tudi raven gnezdenja.

V primeru da je gradnik vrstica napredka ali drsnik vam bo povedan trenutni odstotek.

V primeru da je gradnik ikona v skupini ikon, bo osnovni ukaz Kje sem vključil tudi predmet v katerem ste, predmet na katerem ste in število izbranih predmetov. Podroben ukaz Kje sem bo povedal tudi kateri predmeti so bili izbrani.

V primeru da ste na povezavi bo vključena vrsta (enaka stran, druga stran, FTP povezava) povezave.

V primeru da ste v celici razpredelnice, bodo vključene glave in koordinate te celice.

In tako naprej. Cilj Orkinega Kje sem je zagotavljanje podatkov, ki vas najverjetneje zanimajo o predmetu kjer trenutno ste. Za preizkus Kje sem si oglejte seznam ukazov Kje sem.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_profiles.page0000644000373100047300000000671112316542070024333 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 9. Profili Vzdrževanje več nastavitev Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Profili

Orkini profili vam omogočajo shranjevanje in nalaganje več nastavitev zato, da lahko hitro dostopate do nastavitev, ki jih potrebujete.

Vzdrževanje več nastavitev Te možnosti se pojavijo na dnu strani Splošno Orkinega pogovornega okna možnosti.
Shranjevanje novega profila

Pojdite v pogovorno polje Možnosti Orka

Spremenite, kar želite

Na strani Splošno pritisnite gumb Shrani kot.

Vnesite novo ime profila v pogovorno okno Shrani profil kot.

V pogovornem oknu Shrani profil kot pritisnite gumb V redu.

 Nalaganje obstoječega profila

Pojdite v pogovorno polje Možnosti Orka

Na strani Splošno izberite profil za nalaganje iz spustnega polja Dejaven profil.

Pritisnite gumb Naloži.

Vprašani boste za potrditev. Pritisnite gumb Da.

Pritisnite gumb V redu.

 Spreminjanje obstoječega profila

Sledite korakom opisanim zgoraj za nalaganje profila, ki ga želite spremeniti.

Sledite korakom opisanim zgoraj za shranjevanje novega profila.

Ko boste pozvani za novo ime profila, vnesite enako ime kot trenuten profil. Po pritisku na gumb V redu boste obveščeni o sporu imen.

Pritisnite gumb Da za potrditev, da želite obstoječi profil prepisati z novimi nastavitvami.

 Spreminjanje <gui>Zagonskega profila</gui>

Pojdite v pogovorno polje Možnosti Orka

Na strani Splošno v spustnem polju Zagonski profil izberite profil za nalaganje.

Pritisnite gumb V redu. Ob naslednjem zagonu Orke bo uporabljen novo izbrani profil.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_keyboard_layout.page0000644000373100047300000000366312316542070025710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 6. Razporeditev tipk Izbiranje razporeditve namiznega računalnika ali prenosnika Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Razporeditev tipkovnice

Orka ima dve razporeditvi tipkovnice: namizni računalnik (s številčno tipkovnico) in prenosnik. Izbrana razporeditev vpliva na to, katera tipka je uporabljena kot spremenilna tipka Orka.

V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev prenosnika, bo privzeta spremenilna tipka Orka CapsLock

V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev namiznega računalnika, bo spremenilna tipka Orka tako Vstavi kot Vstavi številčne tipkovnice. Slednja je enaka tipki Številčna tipkovnica 0.

Razporeditev določi tudi kateri pritiski tipk so povezani s številnimi Orkinimi ukazi, še posebno na področjih ploskega pregleda, Kje sem in Reci vse.

Zaznavanje razporeda tipkovnice

Pojdite v pogovorno okno Možnosti Orka s pritiskom na Spremenilna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Premaknite se na skupino izbirnih gumbov Razporeditev tipkovnice.

Puščica na želeno razporeditev.

Nato pritisnite gumb Uveljavi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000001055312316542070024010 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Dobrodošli v Orki Uvod v bralnik zaslona Orka Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Dobrodošli v Orki

Orka je prost, odprto-koden, prilagodljiv in razširljiv bralnik zaslona, ki zagotavlja dostop do grafičnega namizja preko prilagodljivih kombinacij govora, Braillove pisave in/ali povečave.

Orca works with applications and toolkits that support the Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface (AT-SPI), which is the primary assistive technology infrastructure for Linux and Solaris. Applications and toolkits supporting the AT-SPI include the GNOME Gtk+ toolkit, the Java platform's Swing toolkit, LibreOffice, Gecko, and WebKitGtk. AT-SPI support for the KDE Qt toolkit is being pursued.

Zaganjanje <app>Orke</app>

Za zagon Orke:

The method for configuring Orca to be launched automatically as your preferred screen reader will depend upon which desktop environment you use. For instance, in GNOME 3.x this option can be found in the Universal Access Control Center panel on the Seeing page.

To toggle Orca on and off in GNOME, press SuperAltS.

Vpišite orka skupaj z morebitnimi izbirnimi parametri v okno terminala ali v pogovorno okno Zaženi in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.
Možnosti časa nalaganja

The following options can be specified when launching Orca in a terminal window or within the Run dialog:

-h, --help: Pokaže sporočilo pomoči

-v, --version: pokaži različico Orke

-t, --text-setup: nastavi možnosti uporabnika (besedilna različica)

-u, --user-prefs-dir=imemape: Uporabi imemape kot nadomestno mapo za možnosti uporabnika

-e, --enable=možnost: prisili uporabo možnosti, kjer je možnost lahko nekaj od naslednjega:

govor

brajica

braillov-monitor

-d, --disable=možnosti: prepreči uporabo možnosti, kjer je možnost lahko eno od naslednjega:

govor

brajica

braillov-monitor

-i, --import-file=imedatoteke: uvozi profil iz dane datoteke profila Orka

--replace: zamenja trenutno delujočo Orko

-l, --list-apps: izpiše znane programe v teku

--debug: pošlji izhod razhroščevanja na debug-YYYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS.out

--debug-file=imedatoteke: pošlji izhod razhroščevanja v navedeno datoteko
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_flat_review.page0000644000373100047300000000374712316542070025025 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Ploski pregled Prostorsko preučevanje okna Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ploski pregled

Orkina zmožnost ploskega pregleda vam omogoča prostorski pregled vsebina tako besedila in gradnikov dejavnega okna. V tem načinu Orka obravnava okno kot da bi bilo dvodimenzionalen list besedila in ne upošteva hierarhije gradnikov ali drugih logičnih združevanj v oknu.

Po "ploski" vsebini, poznani tudi kot vsebini ploskega pregleda lahko krmarite po vrstici, po besedi, po znaku in po predmetu. Poleg tega lahko izvedete levi ali desni klin na pregledovani predmet. Uporabite lahko Orkino iskanje, zmožnost ploskega pregleda za iskanje vsebine dejavnih oken.

Ker je vsebina ploskega pregleda prostorska predstavitev vsebine dejavnega okna, je ustvarjena, ko prvič vstopite v ploski pregled in vsebuje le vidne predmete. Zato ploskega pregleda ne boste mogli uporabiti za dostop do predmetov, ki so v oknu, vendar trenutno niso na zaslonu. Poleg tega se v primeru spremembe vsebine okna vsebina ploskega pregleda ne bo samodejno posodobila. Novo vsebino lahko izgradite z izklopom in vklopom ploskega pregleda.

Ploskega pregleda ni mogoče uporabiti hkrati z Orkinim sledenjem žarišča. Zato boste v primeru da ste v ploskem pregledu in nato za premik miške ali za dajanje žarišča drugemu predmetu uporabite ukaze krmarjenja programa, samodejno zapustili ploski prelged.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_bookmarks.page0000644000373100047300000000331612316542070025137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4. Zaznamki Zaznamki Ukazi za ustvarjanje zaznamkov in pridobivanje predmetov Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi zaznamkov

Shrani zaznamek na oštevilčeno mesto: Pomožna tipka OrkaIzmenjalka1-6

Shrani določene zaznamke za program ali stranPomožna tipka OrkaAltB

Pojdi na določen, oštevilčen zaznamek: Pomožna tipka Orka1-6

Pojdi na predhodni zaznamek za program ali stran: Pomožna tipka OrkaDvigalkaB

Pojdite na naslednji/predhodni zaznamek za program ali stran: Pomožna tipka OrkaB

Podatki "Kje sem" za ta zaznamek relativno na trenutni položaj kazalnika: IzmenjalkaDvigalka1-6

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_table.page0000644000373100047300000000332212316542070024233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Krmarjenje po razpredelnici Krmarjenje po razpredelnici Ukazi za dostop do tabelaričnih podatkov Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi krmarjenja po razpredelnicah

Orkina podpora za krmarjenje po celicah razpredelnice je del njenih ukazov strukturnega krmarjenja. Poleg tega lahko:

Nastavite dinamične glave vrstic za trenuten stolpec: Spremenilna tipka OrkaC

Nastavite dinamične vrstice stolpcev za trenutno vrstico: Spremenilna tipka OrkaR

Počistite dinamične glave vrstci: Spremenilna tipka OrkaC (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Počistite dinamične glave stolpcev: Spremenilna tipka OrkaR (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Preklopite med branjem celice in vrstice v razpredelnici: Spremenilna tipka OrkaF11

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000377712316542070026403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 0 Uvod v možnosti <app>Orke</app> Uvod v možnosti <app>Orke</app>. Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod v možnosti <app>Orke</app>.
Možnosti Orke

Možnosti Orke vam omogočajo prilagajanje zmožnosti v Orki, ki so uveljavljene za vse programe. Primer možnosti Orke je odmev tipk, ker je odmev tipk uveljavljen za vse programe.

Možnosti Orke lahko prilagodite za posamezen program. Tako lahko na primer nastavitev privzeti odmev tipk na besede in nato nastavite odmev tipk za Pidgin na brez. V tem primeru bo Orka odmevala vse napisane besede razen besed napisanih v Pidginu.

Tipkovne bližnjice za vstop v pogovorno okno možnosti

Pomožna tipka OrkaPreslednica: možnosti Orke

KrmilkaPomožna tipka OrkaPreslednica: možnosti Orkeza trenuten program
Edinstvene možnosti programa

Te možnosti so edinstvene za določen program. Omogočajo vam prilagajanje zmožnosti Orke, ki so uveljavljene le v določenih okoljih, kot so spletne strani ali programi klepeta. Te možnosti boste našli le v pogovornih oknih možnosti le pri tistih programih, za katere te možnosti veljajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_chat.page0000644000373100047300000000463312316542070024571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Klepet Klepet Nastavljanje Orkine podpore za HS in IRC Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti klepeta

Naslednje možnosti vam omogočajo prilagoditev Orkinegaa obnašanja pri zagotavljanju dostopa do odjemalcev hipnega sporočanja in IRC-a.

Izgovori ime klepetalnice

V primeru da je ta možnost izbrana, bo Orka pred dohodna sporočila dodala predpono z imenom sobe ali prijatelja od kjer izvirajo, razen če so prišla iz pogovora, ki je trenutno v žarišču.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Oznani, kadar vaši prijatelji tipkajo

V primeru da je to izbirno polje izbrano in ima Orka dovolj podatkov, ki določajo da vaš prijatelj tipka, bo Orka oznanila spremembe v stanju tipkanja.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Zagotovi zgodovine za klepetalnico določenih sporočil

V primeru da je to izbirno polje izbrano, bodo Orkini ukazi za pregledovanje nedavnih sporočil uveljavljeni le na pogovor, ki je trenutno v žarišču. V nasprotnem primeru bo zgodovina vsebovala najbolj nedavna sporočila ne glede na to iz katerega pogovora izvirajo.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Izgovori sporočila od

Ta skupina izbirnih gumbov vam omogoča nadzor v katerih okoliščinah vam bo Orka predstavila dohodno sporočilo. Vaše izbire so:

Vsi kanali

Samo kanal, katerega okno je dejavno

Vsi kanali, ko je poljubno klepetalno okno dejavno

Privzeta vrednost: vsi kanali

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_bookmarks.page0000644000373100047300000000400312316542070024470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 6. Zaznamki Shranjevanje in pridobivanje predmetov Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Zaznamki

Orkina podpora zaznamkov vam omogoča označbo zanimive predmete. Vključuje naslednje zmožnosti:

Niste omejeni na posamezen predmet. Nastavite lahko do šest zaznamkov na okolje. Zaznamke lahko tudi shranite tako da se ohranijo med Orkinimi sejami.

Ko ste zaznamek nastavili, lahko do njega kasneje krmarite in to storite ne glede na to ali ste zaznamke povezane s svojim trenutnim okoljem trajno shranili. Krmarjenje je lahko osnovano na številki zaznamka, če želite skočiti neposredno na določen predmet. Nadomestno lahko krmarite na naslednji ali predhodni zaznamek tako kot na predmet Strukturnega krmarjenja

Narediti je mogoče zaznamke gradnikov v programu ali predmetov na spletni strani, ki jo berete. Okolje v katerem ste določi kaj se zgodi, ko krmarite med zaznamki: v primeru, da ste v spletni vsebini bo kazalka premaknjena na zaznamek tako da lahko nadaljujete z branjem. V nasprotnem primeru bo omogočen ploski pregled. Zaznamek bo postal trenuten predmet pregleda.

Podatki Kje sem za zaznamke vam povedo kje je določen zaznamek relativno glede na vaše trenutno mesto.

Določene tipkovne bližnjice povezane z vsako od zgornjih nalog lahko najdete v Ukazih zaznamkov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_flat_review.page0000644000373100047300000001755112316542070025464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Ploski pregled Ploski pregled Ukazi za prostorsko pregledovanje oken Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi ploskega pregleda

Okrini ukazi Ploskega pregleda so zasnovani za prostorsko pregledovanje predmetov, ki so prikazani na zaslonu. Zagotavljajo tudi način za branje trenutne vrstice, besede in znaka med krmarjenjem v besedilu dokumenta.

Ukazi za pregledovanja po vrstici

Prva vrstica (Položaj "domov"):

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP 7

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaCtrlU

Predhodna vrstica:

Namizje: KP 7

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaU

Trenutna vrstica:

Namizje: KP 8

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaI

Črkujte trenutno vrstico:

Namizni računalnik: KP 8 (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaI (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Fonetično črkuje trenutno vrstico:

Namizni računalnik: KP 8 (trikrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaI (trikrat klikljeno)

Naslednja vrstica:

Namizje: KP 9

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaO

Zadnja vrstica (Položaj "konec"):

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP 9

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaCtrlO
Ukazi za pregledovanje po besedi

Beseda zgoraj:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP 4

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaCtrlJ

Predhodna beseda:

Namizje: KP 4

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaJ

Trenutna beseda:

Namizje: KP 5

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaK

Črkujte trenutno besedo:

Namizni računalnik: KP 5 (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaK (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Fonetično črkujte trenutno besedo:

Namizni računalnik: KP 5 (trikrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaK (trikrat kliknjeno)

Naslednja beseda:

Namizje: KP 6

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaL

Beseda spodaj:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP 6

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaCtrlL
Ukazi za pregledovanje po znakih

Predhodni znak:

Namizje: KP 1

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaM

Trenutni znak:

Namizje: KP 2

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVejica

Fonetično izgovorite trenutni znak:

Namizje: KP 2 (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVejica (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Izgovori vrednost unicode trenutnega znaka:

Namizni računalnik: KP 2 (trikrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVejica (trikrat kliknjeno)

Naslednji znak:

Namizje: KP 3

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaPika

Zadnji znak v trenutni vrstici:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP 1

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaCtrlM
Dodatni ukazi

Preklopi ploski pregled (osveži vsebino ploskega pregleda):

Namizje: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP Odštej

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaP

Pregled trenutnega predmeta/gradnika:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP 5

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaCtrlK
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_text_attributes.page0000644000373100047300000000516012316542071025740 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Atributi besedila Preučevanje oblikovanja besedila Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Atributi besedila

Izraz "atributi besedila" se sklicuje na vso pisavo, slog, poravnavo in drugo oblikovanje povezano z danim znakom ali zaporedjem znakov.

Pridobivanje podatkov o oblikovanju

Ko pritisnete Spremenilna tipka OrkaF, bo Orka izgovorila znane podatke atributov besedila o predmetu. Poleg tega bo Orka izbirno nakazala atribute besedila v brajici z njihovim "podčrtovanjem", medtem ko krmarite po dokumentu.

Ker je atributov besedila veliko in vseh vsi atributi ne zanimajo, vam Stran atributov besedila v pogovornem oknu možnosti omogoča katere atribute besedila bo Orka izgovorila, vrstni red njihove predstavitve in kateri bodo prikazani v Braillovi pisavi.

Ker je stran atributov besedila tudi del programsko določenih nastavitev, lahko predstavitev atributov besedila prilagodite po svojih željah za vsak program, ki ga uporabljate.

Določanje napačno črkovanih besed

Večina programov in zbirk orodij napačno črkovano besedo nakažejo tako, da jo podčrtajo z valovito rdečo črto. Prisotnost te črte je tehnologijam dostopnosti ponavadi predstavljena kot atribut besedila. Zato boste med atributi, ki jih lahko izberete, našli tudi napake črkovanja. Privzeto je atribut napak črkovanja omogočen tako za govor kot Braillovo pisavo, zato bo predstavljen skupaj z drugimi atributi, ki ste jih omogočili.

Poleg dostopa do napak črkovanja kot do atributov besedila bo Orka v primeru, da imate omogočen odmev po tipki in/ali odmev po besedi ter se pojavi napaka črkovanja, oznanila "napačno črkovano". Tako boste lahko šli nemudoma nazaj in popravili napako.

Ko krmarite po dokumentu in se kazalka premakne na napačno črkovano besedo, bo Orka oznanila prisotnost napake črkovanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences.page0000644000373100047300000000137412316542071023572 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitve Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Pogovorna okna možnosti <app>Orke</app>
Možnosti Orke
Edinstvene možnosti programa
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_text_attributes.page0000644000373100047300000001163612316542071027106 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 8. Atributi besedila Atributi besedila Nastavljanje katero oblikovanje je predstavljeno Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti atributov besedila

Naziv "atributi besedila" se sklicuje na pisavo, slog, poravnavo in drugo oblikovanje povezano z danim znakom ali njihovim zaporedjem. Orkina stran Atributi besedila vam omogoča prilagajanje atributov besedila, ki jih bo Orka predstavila z govorom, določanje vrstnega reda predstavitve in katere bo Orka nakazala v Braillovi pisavi.

Razpredelnica atributov besedila

V razpredelnici atributov besedila navedete pod katerimi pogoji atributi bodo ali ne bodo prisotni. Vsaka vrstica je sestavljena iz štirih stolpcev.

Ime atributa: ime atributa besedila.

Govor: Izberite to izbirno polje, če želite da Orka izgovori ta atribut, ko pritisnete OrkaF.

Označi v Braillovi pisavi: Izberite to izbirno polje, če želite, da Orka "podčrta" ta artibut na vašem braillovem prikazu.

Predstavi razen: V tem uredljivem polju lahko navedete, kdaj vas omogočen atribut ne zanima.

Atribut besedila "podčrtano" ima na primer privzeto vrednost "brez". Zato vas Orka obvesti o podčrtanem besedilu le, če je dejansko podčrtano. V primeru da želite, da je ta atribut vedno izgovorjen, ne glede na to ali je besedilo podčrtano, izberite atribut in počistite vrednosti Prisotno razen. Prepričajte se tudi, da je stolpec Izgovori za podčrtaj omogočen.
Razveljavljanje sprememb

Pod seznamom atributov besedila je gumb Ponastavi (AltR), ki bo obnovil vrednosti razpredelnice na vrednosti ob prvem prikazu pogovornega okna.

Preureditev vrstnega reda predstavitve
Možnosti za nadziranje vrstnega reda v katerem so atributi predstavljeni Ko boste prvič prikazali stran atributov besedila, bodo vsi vaši izbrani atributi postavljeni na vrh razpredelnice v vrstnem redu izgovorjave. Na voljo so štirje gumbi s katerimi lahko preuredite vrstni red predstavitve:

Premakni na vrh (AltT): premakne izbran atribut na vrh seznama.

Premakni eno navzgor (AltU): premakne izbran atribut eno vrstico navzgor.

Premakni eno navzdol (AltD): premakne izbran atribut eno vrstico navzdol.

Premakni na dno (AltB): premakne izbran atribut na dno seznama.
Braille kazalnik
Možnosti za nadziranje Braillovega "podčrtovanja" za oblikovanje Pod potisnimi gumbi je skupina izbirnih gumbov Braille kazalnik. Tukaj lahko izberete celico ali celice, ki nakazujejo besedilo, ki ima vsaj enega od določenih atributov.

Brez: Ne podčrtaj atributov besedila v Braillovi pisavi (privzeto)

Pika 7: Podčrtaj atribute besedila le s Piko 7

Pika 8: Podčrtaj atribute besedila le s Piko 8

Piki 7 in 8: Podčrtaj atribute besedila tako s Pikama 7 in 8

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_forms.page0000644000373100047300000000637612316542071023646 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 5. Izpolnjevanje obrazcev Dostop do gradnikov vstavljenih v dokumente Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Izpolnjevanje obrazcev

When interacting with web pages and other documents using Orca, you are interacting with the document itself; not a buffered copy of that document. Thus there is no special mode to get into or out of when you wish to fill out a form. Instead, simply navigate to each field whose contents you wish to change, and interact with the widget as if it were in a dialog box.

Krmarjenje po poljih obrazca

Za krmarjenje med polji obrazca imate več možnosti:

Uporabite Tabulator in DvigalkaTabulator za krmarjenje med predmete, ki omogočajo pozornost, ne glede na njihovo vrsto.

Uporabite Orkine ukaze strukturnega krmarjenja.

Depending on the form, you may also be able to use Orca's caret navigation commands, in other words, the arrow keys when Orca is controlling the caret.

Izhod iz polj obrazca

Because there is no special mode in Orca for interacting with forms, the most frequently-asked question is how to exit a focused form field. For this, too, you have several options:

Use Tab/ShiftTab if you wish to leave the currenty-focused form field and move to the next/previous focusable object, regardless of what that object happens to be.

Use Orca's structural navigation to move to the next/previous form field: Orca ModifierTab/ Orca ModifierShiftTab.

Uporabite Orkina ukaza za pomik na naslednji oz. predhodni predmet ali del besedila: Spremenilna tipka OrkaDesno in Spremenilna tipka OrkaLevo

If you are not in a list or combo box, you can use caret navigation commands to arrow out of the form field, as long as Orca is controlling the caret.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_reading.page0000644000373100047300000001333412316542071024562 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Branje Branje Ukazi za dostop do besedila dokumenta Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Branje ukazov

Poleg ukazov krmarjenja kazalke, ki so del GNOME, Orka zagotavlja številne ukaze, ki jih lahko uporabite za branje dokumenta.

V seznamih spodaj boste videli več sklicev na "KP". Vse tipke "KP" so na številčni tipkovnici. Opazili boste tudi, da so na voljo različni pritiski tipk glede na to ali uporabljate namizni računalnik ali prenosnik - oziroma bolj natančno ali uporabljate Orkino namizno razporeditev tipkovnice ali razporeditev tipkovnice prenosnika. Za dodatne podrobnosti si oglejte temo Razporeditev tipkovnice.
Branje vašega trenutnega mesta

Za branje svojega trenutnega mesta lahko uporabite naslednje Orkine ukaze ploskega pregleda:

Preberi trenutno vrstico:

Namizje: KP 8

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaI

Preberi trenutno besedo:

Namizje: KP 5

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaK

Črkujte trenutno besedo:

Namizni računalnik: KP 5 (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaK (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Fonetično črkujte trenutno besedo:

Namizni računalnik: KP 5 (trikrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaK (trikrat kliknjeno)

Preberite trenutni znak:

Namizje: KP 2

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVejica

Fonetično izgovorite trenutni znak:

Namizje: KP 2 (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVejica (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Izgovori unicode vrednost trenutnega znaka:

Namizni računalnik: KP 2 (trikrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVejica (trikrat kliknjeno)
Reci vse

Orkin ukaz Reci vse določi, da Orka izgovori celoten dokument od vašega trenutnega mesta naprej.

Namizni računalnik: KP plus

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaPodpičje
Atributi besedila in izbranega besedila

Orka ima namenski ukaz za pridobivanje atributov besedila na mestu kazalke. Poleg tega lahko v predmetu besedila v katerem je bilo izbrano besedilo uporabite Orkine ukaze Kje sem. Orka bo oznanila izbrano besedilo.

Predstavi atribute besedila: Spremenilna tipka OrkaF

Izvedi enostavno opravilo kje sem:

Namizje: Vnos KP

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipkaVnosna tipka

Izvedi podrobno opravilo kje sem:

Namizni računalnik: KP Vnosna tipka (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVnosna tipka (double-clicked)
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_speech.page0000644000373100047300000002566112316542071025126 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Govor Govor Nastavljanje glasu in kaj se izgovori Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti govora
Omogoči govor

Izbirno polje Omogoči govor nadzira ali bo Orka uporabila sintetizator govora ali ne. Uporabniki, ki uporabljajo le povečavo ali Braillovo pisavo, bodo to verjetno to želeli onemogočiti.

Možnosti besedilo-v-govor
Sistem govora

To spustno polje vam omogoča izbiro prednostnega med nameščenimi sistemi govora. Primera vključujeta Speech Dispatcher in GNOME Speech.

Sintetizator govora

To spustno polje vam omogoča izbiro sintetizatorja govora, ki bo bil uporabljen z izbranim sistemom govora.

Nastavitve glasu

To spustno polje vam omogoča uporabo različnih glasov zato, da lahko lažje ločite velike črke in povezano besedilo od ostalega besedila in besedilo na zaslonu od besedila, ki ga je dodala Orka.

Nastavljanje več glasov

Za vsak glas, ki ga želite dodati, v spustnem polju Nastavitve glasu najprej izberite glas. Nato nastavite osebno, hitrost, višino in glasnost tega zvoka.
Oseba

To spustno polje vam omogoča izbiro "osebe" ali "govorca" za uporabo z izbranim glasom. Na primer, morda želite da privzeto govori David, vse hiperpovezave pa izgovori Alica. Vsebina spustnega polja Oseba je odvisna od nameščenih sintetizatorjev zvoka.

Hitrost, višina in glasnost

Ti levo-desni drsniki vam omogočajo nadaljnje prilagajanje zvoka pravkar izbrane osebe.

Raven ločil

Skupino izbirnih gumbov Raven ločil lahko uporabite za prilagajanje količine ločil, ki jih izgovori sintetizator. Razpoložljive ravni so Brez, Nekaj, Večina in Vsa.

Brez

Izbira ravni ločil Brez določi, da ni izgovorjeno nobeno ločilo. Vendar so na ti ravni še vedno izgovorjeni posebni simboli kot so podpisana in nadpisana števila, ulomki unicode in seznamske točke.

Nekatera

Izbira ravni ločil Nekaj določi izgovorjavo vseh predhodno omenjenih simbolov. Poleg tega Orka izgovori znane matematične simbole, simbole enot in "^", "@", "/", "&", "#".

Večina

Izbira ravni loči Večina izgovori vse predhodno omenjene simbole. Poleg tega bo Orka izgovorila vse druge simbole ločil razen "!", "'", ",", ".", "?".

Vsa

Izbira ravni ločil Vse določi, da Orka izgovori vse znane simbole ločil.

Privzeta vrednost: Večina

Razločnost

Nastavitev Razločnost določi količino podatkov, ki je izgovorjena v določenih situacijah. Na primer, če je nastavljeno na podrobno, bo Orka izgovorila tipkovne bližnjice za predmete v menijih. Ko je nastavljena na kratko, tipkovne bližnjice niso oznanjene.

Privzeta vrednost: Podrobno

Vrstice razpredelnice

Skupina izbirnih gumbov Vrstice razpredelnice določi, kaj bo izgovorjeno ob krmarjenju v vrsticah v razpredelnici. Razpoložljive možnosti so govori vrstico in govori celico.

Razmislite o opravilu preučevanja seznama sporočil vašem dohodnem predalu. Da lahko Orka oznani pošiljatelja, zadevo, datum in prisotnost prilog, bi morali izgovoriti vrstico. Po drugi strani pa pri krmarjenju med vrsticami, poslušanje celotne vrstice ni želeno. V tem primeru izberite izgovori celico.

Privzeta vrednost: Izgovori vrstico

Posodobitve kazalnika napredka
Omogočeno

V primeru, da je izbirno polje Omogočeno izbrano, bo Orka občasno oznanila stanje vrstic napredka.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Frekvenca (sek):

To vrtilno polje določi pogostost oznanjevanja.

Privzeta vrednost: 10

Omeji na

To spustno polje vam omogoča nadzor katere vrstice napredka naj bodo predstavljene, če je bilo predstavljanje posodobitev vrstic napredka omogočeno. Izbire so Vse, Program in Okno.

Izbira Vse določi, da Orka predstavi posodobitve za vse vrstice napredka ne glede na to kje so.

Izbira Program določi, da Orka predstavi posodobitve iz vrstic napredka v dejavnem programu, tudi če niso v dejavnem oknu.

Izbira Okno določi, da Orka predstavi le posodobitve vrstic napredka v dejavnem oknu.

Privzeta vrednost: Program

Izgovori le prikazano besedilo

Izbira izbirnega polja določi, da Orka izgovori le besedilo prikazano na zaslonu. Ta možnost je namenjena predvsem za slabovidne uporabnike in uporabnike z nezmožnostjo učenja vida.

Izgovori nize z več nizi kot besede

V nekaterih besedilih in posebno pri delu s kodo lahko najdete "besedo", ki je sestavljena iz več besed s spreminjajočimi velikostmi kot je "VečBesedniNiz". Sintetizatorji zvoka takšnih nizov ne izgovorijo vedno pravilno. Izbira izbirnega polja Izgovori nize z več besedami kot besede določi, da Orka besede kot je "VečBesedniNiz" pred posredovanjem sintetizatorju zvoka razdeli v ločene besede ("Več," "Besedni" in "Niz").

Razdeli govor na zloge med premori

Glede na omogočene nastavitve govora lahko Orka o določenih predmetih pove kar precej kot na primer njegovo ime, njegovo vlogo, njegovo stanje, njegovo mnemotehniko in tako naprej. Izbirno polje Razdeli govor na zloge med premori, ki določi, da Orka med vsakega od teh podatkov vstavki kratek premor.

Reči vse od

Spustno polje Reci vse po vam omogoča navedbo ali Orka med "Izgovori vse"naenkrat izgovori stavek ali vrstico.

Podrobnosti o sistemu

Naslednji predmeti nadzirajo predstavitev dodatnih, "sistemskih" podatkov o predmetu z žariščem. Ker se povezano besedilo ne pojavi na zaslonu, so ti podatki predstavljeni v Orkinem sistemskem zvoku.

Nastavitev podrobnosti sistema

Naslednji predmeti ne bodo na voljo za nastavitev, če je izbirno polje Izgovori le prikazano besedilo izbrano.
Izgovorite prazne vrstice

V primeru, da je izbirno polje Izgovori prazne vrstice, bo Orka rekla "prazno" vsakič, ko pridete do prazne vrstice. Če polje ni izbrano, orka ob premiku na prazno vrstico ne bo rekla ničesar.

Izgovarite zamik in poravnavo

Pri delu s kodo ali urejanju dokumentov je pogosto dobro vedeti, kje so poravnave in zamiki. Izbira izbirnega polja Izgovarjanje zamikov in poravnav bo povzročila, da bo Orka oznanila ta podatke.

Izgovorite mnemotehniko predmeta

V primeru da je izbirno polje Izgovori mnemotehniko predmeta izbrano, bo Orka oznanila mnemotehniko, povezano s predmetom s pozornostjo (kot je IzmenjalkaO za gumb V redu).

Izgovorite položaj podrejenega predmeta

Izbira izbirnega polja Izgovori položaj podrejenega predmeta določi, da Orka oznani položaj predmeta v žarišču v menijih, seznamih in drevesih (na primer "9 od 16").

Izgovorite sporočila vodnika

V primeru, da je izbirno polje Izgovori sporočila vodnika izbrano, bo Orka med pomikanjem med predmeti po vmesniku zagotovila dodatne podrobnosti kot sta kako se sporazumevati s predmetom, ki je trenutno v žarišču.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_orca_find.page0000644000373100047300000000635612316542071024442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Iskanje z Orko Iskanje predmetov v oknu Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Orkino iskanje

Orkina zmožnost iskanja je na ploskem pregledu zasnovano iskanje, ki vam pomaga hitro najti predmete, ki so vidni na zaslonu v trenutnem oknu.

Omogočanje Okrinega iskanja

Za odprtje Orkinega pogovornega okna Iskanja uporabite naslednji ukaz osnovan na vaši izbrani razporeditvi tipkovnice:

Namizni računalnik: NT Izbriši

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaLevi uklepaj

Za seznam dodatnih nalog, ki jih lahko izvedete, si oglejte Orkine ukaze iskanja

Ko omogočite Orkino iskanje, boste bili postavljeni v pogovorno polje.

<app>Orkino</app> pogovorno okno iskanja

Tukaj lahko navedete naslednje predmete:

Besedilo za iskanje

Mesto za začetek iskanja, ki je lahko trenutno mesto ali vrh okna

Privzeta vrednost Začni od: Trenutno mesto

Ali naj bodo pri iskanju zadetkov upoštevane velike črke

Privzeta vrednost Upoštevaj velike črke: neizbrano

Ali naj se zadetki omejijo na tiste, ki se ujemajo s celotno besedo ali frazo

Privzeta vrednost Ujemaj le celo besedo: neizbrano

Ali naj Iskanje za naslednji zadetek išče navzdol in/ali na desno ali navzgor in/ali na levo.

Privzeta vrednost Iskanja nazaj: ni izbrno

Ali naj iskanje oblije okoli vrha/dna okna, če ni ujemanja od začetnega mesta v smeri iskanja.

Privzeta vrednost Oblivanja okoli: izbrano

Ko boste izvedli iskanje, lahko hitro iščete naslednje ali predhodno ujemanje brez vračanja nazaj v pogovorno polje iskanja Orke.

Ker je to zmožnost ploskega pregleda, bo ob ujemanju ploski pregled samodejno omogočen in ujemajoč predmet besedila bo postal trenuten predmet pregleda. Vedite da žarišče v programu ne bo spremenjeno. Prav tako se kazalka ne bo premaknila. Če želite doseči karkoli od tega si oglejte Orkini ukazi miške/kazalnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_structural_navigation.page0000644000373100047300000001016612316542071027137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Strukturno krmarjenje Premikanje po glavah in drugih elementih Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Strukturno krmarjenje

Orkina zmožnost strukturnega krmarjenja vam omogoča krmarjenje med predmeti v dokumentu. Vrste predmetov po katerih lahko krmarite vključujejo:

Glave in druge bloke besedila

Nadzorniki obrazcev

Povezave

Seznami in predmeti seznamov

Oznake mest, ločnice in sidra

Razpredelnice in celice razpredelnic

Poln seznam posameznih predmetov in njihovih tipkovnih bližnjic lahko najdete v ukazih strukturnega krmarjenja.

Podprti programi

Trenutno je strukturno krmarjenje polno podprto za spletno vsebino vključno z vsebino pomoči, ki jo berete sedaj. Orkina podpora strukturnega krmarjenja za celice razpredelnic je podprta tudi v programih OpenOffice Writer in LibreOffice Writer. Podpora preostankov predmetov strukturnega krmarjenja v teh pisarniških zbirkah zahteva spremembe s strani razvijalcev pisarniških zbirk. Podpora zmožnosti strukturnega krmarjenja v Evince bo zahtevala podobno delo s strani njegovih razvijalcev.

Ne pozabite vklopiti strukturnega krmarjenja!

Odvisno od tega kje ste boste morda morali pred uporabo strukturno krmarjenje eksplicitno preklopiti.
Kdaj je preklop strukturnega krmarjenja zahtevan

Na spletnih straneh je ekspliciten preklop strukturnega krmarjenja v splošnem nezaželen, ker je vaše sporazumevanje z dokumentom večinoma sestavljeno iz branja njegove vsebine. Zato ni dvomov ali je bil 'H' pritisnjen z namenom pisanja ali kot ukaz strukturnega krmarjenja.

Na drugi strani pa v uredljivih dokumentih kot so tisti v OpenOffice in LibreOffice Orki veliko težje natančno napovedati kaj pričakujete kot posledico pritiska tipke 'H'. Zato morate pred uporabo kateregakoli ukaza strukturnega krmarjenja v uredljivem dokumentu struktruno krmarjenje najprej vklopiti s pritiskom na spremenilno tipko OrkaZ. Ko ste končali s krmarjenjem in se pripravljeni na nadaljevanje pisanja, znova pritisnite spremenilno tipko OrkaZ za izklop strukturnega krmarjenja.

Razpoložljive nastavitve

Poleg predhodno omenjenih ukazov ima Orka številne nastavljive možnosti na voljo posebej za programe, kjer ni podpore strukturnega krmarjenja.

Nastavljanje strukturnega krmarjenja

Da žarišče programu za katerega ima Orka podporo strukturnega krmarjenja.

Možnosti Orka za trenuten program lahko odprete s pritiskom: KrmilkaPomožna tipka OrcaPreslednica

Krmarite na zadnjo stran pogovornega polja, ki bi morala biti poimenovana ustrezno z imenom vašega trenutnega programa.

Preučujte in spremenite nastavitve kot se vam zdi primerno.

Pritisnite gumb V redu.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_pronunciation.page0000644000373100047300000000476012316542071026544 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 7. Izgovorjava Izgovorjava Določevanje kako so določene besede izgovorjene Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti izgovorjave

Včasih vaš sintetizator govora ne reče prave stvari za dani niz. Morda bi rajši slišali "lep pozdrav" namesto "Lp". Morda obstaja ime ali tehnični izraz, ki ga sintetizetor napačno izgovori.

Stran Izgovorjava možnosti Orke vam omogoča dodajanje, urejanje in izbris vnosov v Orkinem slovarju izgovorjave.

Ker je stran Izgovorjava tudi del nastavitev določenih za program, lahko svoje vnose prilagodite na osnovi želja za vsak program, ki ga potrebujete.

Dodajanje novega vnosa slovarja

Pritisnite gumb Nov vnos (AltN)

Vnesite besedilo novega vnosa in pritisnite Vnosno tipko za končanje urejanja dejanskega niza.

Premaknite se na stolpec Niz zamenjave in pritisnite Vnosno tipko za začetek urejanja.

Vnesite besedilo, ki naj bo izgovorjeno, in pritisnite Vnosno tipko za končanje urejanja niza zamenjave.

 Urejanje obstoječega vnosa slovarja

Premaknite celico, ki jo želite urediti, in pritisnite Vnosno tipko za začetek urejanja.

Naredite svoje spremembe in nato pritisnite Vnosno tipko za končanje urejanja.

 Brisanje obstoječega vnosa slovarja

Premaknite vnos, ki ga želite izbrisati.

Pritisnite gumb Izbriši ali AltD.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_documents.page0000644000373100047300000000476612316542071024522 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Dokumenti Branje vsebine Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Dokumenti

Za branje vsebine poljubnega dokumenta uporabite vgrajen način krmarjenja programa. Ko krmarite po besedilu dokumenta, vam bo Orka predstavila vaše novo mesto. Zato verjetno že veste, kako brati dokument z Orko. V primeru, da želite pregledati ukaze GNOME za krmarjenja kazalke, si oglejte "Način krmarjenja kazalke" v Vodniku po dostopnosti namizja GNOME.

Uporabite tipki Levo in Desno za pomikanje in branje znaka za znakom.

Premikanje in branje besede za besedo: KrmilkaLevo in KrmilkaDesno

Pritisnite Navzgor ali Navzdol za premikanje in branje vrstice za vrstico.

Use Shift in combination with the above commands to select and unselect text.

If you are not yet familiar with the caret navigation commands provided by the applications you wish to use, you are encouraged to read that documentation first.

In addition to reading a document by caret navigation, you may find it helpful to read, spell, and obtain the Unicode value for the current text. You can do these things through Orca's Flat Review feature.

Finally, in order to have Orca speak the entire document from your present location, use the SayAll command. It, along with a more complete listing of Orca's commands for accessing document text, can be found in the Reading Commands guide.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_learn_modes.page0000644000373100047300000000366312316542071025004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 5. "Learn" Mode Odkrivanje Orkinih ukazov Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 "Learn" Mode

In Learn Mode, Orca will announce each keystroke you pressed along with any associated Orca command that keystroke is bound to. In this mode, you can also get a list of shortcuts containing all the Orca commands you can use.

Uporaba učnega načina

V način učenja vstopite s pritiskom spremenilne tipke OrkaH.

Pritisnite tipko ali kombinacijo tipk. Orka bo oznanila tipke in morebiten povezan ukaz.

Za izhod iz učenega načina pritisnite Ubežno tipko.

 Getting a List of Shortcuts

V način učenja vstopite s pritiskom spremenilne tipke OrkaH.

Pritisnite 1, če želite seznam bližnjic, ki veljajo za celotno Orko in 2, če želite seznam bližnjic, ki so določene za programe z žariščem.

Pritisnite Navzgor ali Navzdol za preučevanje vsebine seznama.

Press Esc to exit the list.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_chat.page0000644000373100047300000000275712316542071024077 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Klepet Klepet Ukazi za uporabo z odjemalci HS in IRC Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi klepeta

Naslednje ukaze lahko uporabite za dostop do podatkov v odjemalcih hipnega sporočanja in IRC-a, ki jih Orka podpira. Opazili boste, da večina teh ukazov "ni določenih". Za podrobnosti kako ustvariti tipkovne bližnjice si oglejte Spreminjanje tipkovnih bližnjic.

Prisotna predhodna sporočila klepetalnice: Pomožna tipka OrkaF1 do F9

Omogoči/onemogoči oznanjanje imena sobe s sporočili: (Nedoločeno)

Omogoči/onemoči oznanjanje stanja tipkanja prijateljev: (Nedoločeno)

Omogoči/onemogoči za sobo določene zgodovine: (Nedoločeno)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/index.page0000644000373100047300000000234112316542071022373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bralnik zaslona Orca Uvod v Bralnik zaslona <app>Orka</app> Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/orca-logo.png"><app>Orkin</app> logotip </media>Bralnik zaslona <app>Orka</app> Preden začnete

Če ne poznate ukazov za krmarjenje po svojem namizju, je najbolje, da najprej preberete dokumentacijo o namizju.
Kako začeti
Branje dokumentov in spletnih strani
Pregledovanje in sporazumevanje z vsebino zaslona
Hitri priročnik
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_the_orca_modifier.page0000644000373100047300000000462512316542071026155 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. The Orca Modifier Ključ deluje kot Dvigalka, Ctrl in Alt Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomožne tipke Orka

Orka ima posebno spremenilno tipko, ki deluje kot Dvigalka, Ctrl in Alt. Zasnovana je posebej za izvajanje ukazov Orke brez uvajanja sporov z ukazi programov do katerih dostopate.

Katera tipka je privzeto "Spremenila tipka Orka" je odvisno od tega ali uporabljate Orkino razporeditev tipkovnice prenosnika ali namiznega računalnika:

V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev prenosnika, bo privzeta spremenilna tipka Orka CapsLock

V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev namiznega računalnika, bo spremenilna tipka Orka tako Vstavi kot Vstavi številčne tipkovnice. Slednja je enaka tipki Številčna tipkovnica 0.

V primeru da želite obdržati svojo trenutno razporeditev tipkovnice, a izbrati drugo spremenilno tipko, uporabite naslednje korake:

Spreminjanje pomožnih tipk Orka

Pojdite v pogovorno okno Možnosti Orka s pritiskom na Spremenilna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Premaknite se na stran Tipkovne bližnjice.

Premaknite se na spustno polje spremenilne tipke Orka.

S puščico se premaknite do želene spremenilne tipke. Razpoložljive možnosti so:

Vstavi, KP_Vstavi

KP_Vstavi

Vstavi

Caps_Lock

Nato pritisnite gumb Uveljavi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_mouse.page0000644000373100047300000000567112316542071024306 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Povezano z miško/kazalnikom Povezano z miško/kazalnikom Ukazi za upravljanje s kazalnikom Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi povezani z miško/kazalnikom

Orka zagotavlja več ukazov, ki jih je mogoče uporabiti za upravljanje miškinega kazalnika in upravljanje vsebine pod njim. Vsi ukazi so "vezani" na pritiske tipk z eno izjemo: preklapljanje načina pregleda miške. Za podrobnosti kako temu ukazu dodati tipkovno bližnjico si oglejte Spreminjanje tipkovnih bližnjic.

Na naslednjem seznamu boste videli več sklicev na "KP". Vse tipke "KP" so na številčni tipkovnici. Opazili boste tudi, da so na voljo različni pritiski tipk glede na to ali uporabljate namizni računalnik ali prenosnik - oziroma bolj natančno ali uporabljate Orkino namizno razporeditev tipkovnice ali razporeditev tipkovnice prenosnika. Za dodatne podrobnosti si oglejte temo Razporeditev tipkovnice.

Levi klik na trenutni predmet:

Namizje: NT Deli

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka Orka7

Desni klik na trenutni predmet:

Namizje: NT Množi

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka Orka8

Premakni kazalnik na trenutni predmet:

Namizje: Spremenilna tipka OrkaNT Deli

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka Orka9

Premakni žarišče v ali stran od trenutne miške preko (le splet):

Namizje: Spremenilna tipka OrkaNT Množi

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka Orka0

Omogoči/onemogoči način pregleda miške: (Nedoločeno)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_key_bindings.page0000644000373100047300000000623112316542071026314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 6. Tipkovne bližnjice Tipkovne bližnjice Nastavljanje Orkinih tipkovnih bližnjic Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti tipkovne bližnjice
Orca pomožne tipke¸

Spustno polje pomožne tipke Orka vam omogoča izbiro katera tipka ali tipke bodo služile kot pomožne tipke Orka. Razpoložljive možnosti so:

KP_Vstavi (enaka tipka kot 0 vendar na številčni tipkovnici)

Vstavi

Vstavi, NT_Vstavi

Caps_Lock
Razpredelnica tipkovnih bližnjic

Razpredelnica tipkovnih bližnjic zagotavlja seznam operacij Orke in tipk, ki so vezane na njih.

Stolpec Zmožnost je opis operacije Orke, ki bo izvedena.

Tipkovna bližnjica je osnovni način za priklic zmožnosti tipkovnice. Tipkovna bližnjica lahko vključuje besedo "Orka". To nakazuje, da morate skupaj z drugimi tipkami pritisniti tudi pomožno tipki Orka.Vrednost tega stolpca lahko spremenite s pritiskom na Vnosno tipko, pritiskom tipk za novo tipkovno bližnjico in ponovnim pritiskom na Vnosno tipko.

Stolpec Druga izbira vam omogoča navedbo dodatnih tipkovnih bližnjic za to zmožnost. Vrednost tega stolpca lahko spremenite s pritiskom na Vnosno tipko, pritiskom tipk za novo tipkovno bližnjico in ponovnim pritiskom na Vnosno tipko.

Stolpec Spremenjeno služi tako kot kazalnik kaj je bilo spremenjeno in kot način za obnovitev privzetih tipkovnih bližnjic, ki so povezane s to zmožnostjo.

Pod seznamom Orkinih tipkovnih bližnjic boste našli skupino "nedoločenih" ukazov. To so ukazi, ki bodo zelo uporabniki za nekatere uporabnike, vendar jih večina uporabnikov ne bo potrebovala. Namesto da bi "uporabili" pritisk tipke za takšen ukaz smo jih privzeto pustili nedodeljene. Na koncu seznama so vezave Braillove pisave za uporabo z osvežljivim Braillovim zaslonom.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_mouse_review.page0000644000373100047300000000447212316542071025224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4. Pregled miške Uporaba kazalnika za preučevanje zaslona Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Pregled miške

Orkina zmožnost pregleda miške Orki omogoča predstavitev vsebine pod miškinim kazalnikom. V nasprotju z Orkino zmožnostjo Ploskega pregleda pregled miške ni omejen na dejavno okno. namesto tega bo Orka poskušala določiti kateri dostopni predmet je vidno pod kazalnikom medtem ko premikate miško. V primeru,da ste kazalnik premaknili preko dostopnega predmeta, ki vsebuje podatke za predstavitev, vam bo Orka predstavila predmet in njegove podatke.

Ker omogočanje pregleda miške povzroči, da Orka pričakuje in nato obdelav vse spremembe položaja miške, je ta zmožnost privzeto onemogočena. V kolikor želite, da je vedno omogočena, izberite izbirno polje Izgovori predmet pod miško, ki ga lahko najdete na strani Splošno Orkinegapogovornega okna možnosti. Poleg tega boste v istem pogovornem oknu na strani tipkovnih bližnjic našli nedoločen ukaz z imenom Preklopi način pregleda miške. Ko boste temu ukazu določili tipkovno bližnjico kot je opisano v Uvodu v tipkovne bližnjice, lahko pregled miške po potrebi omogočate in onemogočate.

Privzete nastavitve in tipkovne bližnjice so medsebojno neodvisne

Pregled miške imate lahko vedno omogočen ali onemogočen in ga še vedno preklapljate s tipkovno bližnjico in ukazom Preklopi način pregleda miške. Omogočitev pregleda za preklapljanje ni zahtevana, ker so nastavitve in tipkovne bližnjice medsebojno neodvisne,

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_table_navigation.page0000644000373100047300000000423112316542071027153 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Krmarjenje po razpredelnici Krmarjenje po razpredelnici Nastavljanje krmarjenja Orke po razpredelnicah Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti krmarjenja razpredelnice

Naslednja možnost vam omogoča prilagajanje kako se Orka obnaša pri krmarjenju v razpredelnici v programih z omočenim strukturnim krmarjenjem.

Izgovori koordinate celic

V primeru, da je to izbirno polje izbrano, bo Orka oznanila koordinate vsake celice do katere krmarite.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Izgovori širino več celic

V primeru, da je to izbirno polje izbrano, bo Orka oznanila koliko vrstic in stolpcev sega celica, kader sega dlje kot čez enega.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Oznani glavo celice

V primeru, da je izbrano to izbirno polje, bo Orka oznanila spremembe v glavi, če je mogoče določiti glave za trenutno celico.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Preskoči prazne celice

V primeru, da je to izbirno polje izbrano, bo Orka preskočila prazne celice kadar za dostop do razpredelnice uporabljate Orkine ukaze strukturnega krmarjenja.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_where_am_i.page0000644000373100047300000000536212316542071025252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Kje sem Kje sem Ukazi za učenje o vašem trenutnem mestu Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi opravila kje sem

Orkina zmožnost Kje sem, vam da na vsebino občutljive podrobnosti o vašem trenutnem mestu. Na primer v razpredelnicah vam Kje sem da podrobnosti o celici razpredelnice v kateri ste. V besedilu pa vam predstavi trenutno vrstico in morebitno trenutno izbrano besedilo. Poln seznam stvari, ki vam jih bo Orka predstavila, lahko najdete v Uvod v Kje sem jaz.

Orca zagotavlja naslednje ukaze Kje sem:

Izvedi enostavno opravilo kje sem:

Namizje: Vnos KP

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipkaVnosna tipka

Izvedi podrobno opravilo kje sem:

Namizni računalnik: KP Vnosna tipka (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaVnosna tipka (double-clicked)

Poleg nameskih ukazov Kje sem ima Orka dva dodatna ukaza povezana s pridobivanjem vašega trenutnega mesta:

Predstavi naslovno vrstico:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaNT Vnašalka

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaPoševnica

Pokaži vrstico stanja:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaNT Vnašalka (dvakrat kliknjeno)

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaPoševnica (dvakrat kliknjeno)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_toggling_caps_lock.page0000644000373100047300000000267312316542071026344 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 7. CapsLock in Laptop Layout Preklapljanje ko je Spremenilna tipka Orka Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 CapsLock v razporeditvi prenosnika.

Orka ima dve razporeditvi tipkovnice: Namizni računalnik in prenosnik. Izbrana razporeditev vpliva na to katera tipka je spremenilna tipka Orka. V primeru da uporabljate razporeditev prenosnika, bo privzeta spremenilna tipka Orka CapsLock V primeru da uporabljate Orkino razporeditev tipkovnice, lahko CapsLock zaklenete ali odklenete z izvedbo naslednjih korakov:

Preklapljanje CapsLock v razporeditvi prenosnika.

Pritisnite ukaz Obidi, Spremenilna tipka OrkaVračalka, ki bo Orki sporočil, da naj bo naslednji ukaz prezrt.

Pritisnite CapsLock za preklop njegovega zaklenjenega stanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_key_echo.page0000644000373100047300000001176112316542071025441 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odmev tipk 4. Odmev tipk Nastavljanje kaj je izgovorjeno medtem ko tipkate Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti odmeva tipk
Omogoči odmev tipk

Nadzorniki Okrinega odmeva tipk nastavijo kaj se zgodi, ko pritisnete tipko. Za omogočenje odmeva tipka izberite izbirno polje "Omogoči odmev tipk". To povzroči, da so na voljo dodatna izbirna polja v katerih lahko izberete katere tipke naj odmevajo ali ne, da najboljše ustrezajo vašim potrebam:

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Omogoči črkovno-številčne tipke in tipke ločil

Ta možnost nadzira ali tipke kot so a, b, c, ;, ? in tako naprej izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Omogoči pomožne tipke

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Dvigalka, Ctrl, Alt in Meta izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Omogoči tipke za zaklep

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Caps Lock, Scroll Lock in Num Lock izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Omogoči funkcijske tipke

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke od F1 do F12 izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Omogoči tipke dejanj

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Vračalka, Izbriši, Vnosna tipka, Ubežna tipka, Tabulator, Stran navzgor, Stran navzdol, Domov in Konec izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Omogoči tipke krmarjenja

Ta možnost nadzira ali so tipke Levo, Desno, Navzgor in Navzdol izgovorjene ob pritisku. Ta možnost je uveljavljena za katerokoli kombinacijo tipk pri kateri je pritisnjena Pomožna tipka Orka na primer pri uporabi ploskega pregleda.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Omogoči ne-presledne razločevalne tipke

Ta možnost nadzira ali so "mrtve tipke" uporabljene za ustvarjanje naglašenih črk izgovorjene ob pritisku.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Omogoči odmev po znakih

Omogočena možnost določi, da Orka odmeva znak, ki ste ga pravkar vnesli.

Odmev po znakih se zdi precej podoben odmevu po črkovnoštevilčnih znakih in ločilih, vendar obstajajo pomembne razlike, še posebno pri naglašenih črkah in drugih simboli za katere ni namenske tipke:

Odmev tipk povzroči, da Orka oznani kar ste ravnokar pritisnili.

Odmev znakov povzroči, da Orka oznani kaj je bilo pravkar vstavljeno.

Za izgovorjavo naglašenih znakov medtem ko jih tipkate omogočite odmev znakov.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Omogočanje tako odmeva tipk kot odmeva znakov

V primeru, da vam je všeč odmev tipk in pogosto pišete naglašene znake, lahko omogočite oboje. Orkina logika odmeva znakov, poskuša filtrirati znake, ki so bili izgovorjeni kot posledica odmeva tipke in s tem zmanjša možnost "dvojnega govora" medtem, ko tipkate.
Omogoči odmev po besedah in odmev po stavku

Izbira izbirnega polja Omogoči odmev besed določi, da Orka odmeva besedo, ki ste jo pravkar vnesli. Podobno izbira izbirnega polja Omogoči odmev stavka določi, da Orka odmeva vstavek, ki ste ga pravkar vnesli.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_speech_settings.page0000644000373100047300000000354512316542071026343 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Nastavitve govora Govor Ukazi za prilagajanje Orkinega izhoda Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi nastavitev govora

Naslednje ukaze lahko uporabite za prilagajanje izhoda Orkinega govora. Opazili boste, da so številni ukazi "nedoločeni". Za podrobnosti kako tem ukazom dodati tipkovne bližnjice si oglejte Spreminjanje tipkovnih bližnjic.

Omogoči/onemogoči govor: Spremenilna tipka OrkaS

Preklopite med branjem celice in vrstice v razpredelnici: Spremenilna tipka OrkaF11

Omogoči/onemogoči izgovarjanje zamika in poravnave: (Nedoločeno)

Kroži na naslednjo raven izgovorjenih ločil: (Nedoločeno)

Kroži na naslednjo raven odmeva: (Nedoločeno)

Zmanjšaj hitrost: (nedoločeno)

Povečaj hitrost: (nedoločeno)

Zmanjšaj višino govora: (nedoločeno)

Povečaj višino govora: (nedoločeno)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_find.page0000644000373100047300000000410312316542071024063 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Iskanje z Orko Iskanje z Orko Ukazi za iskanje vsebine okna Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Orkini ukazi iskanja

Orkina's zmožnost iskanja vam omogoča iskanje vsebinePloskega pregleda za predmete, ki se nahajajo v trenutnem oknu.

Odprita pogovorno okno iskanja Orka:

Namizni računalnik: NT Izbriši

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaLevi uklepaj

Premakni ploski pregled na naslednji primerek niza:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKP Izbriši

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaDesni zaklepaj

Premakni ploski pregled na predhodni primerek niza:

Namizni računalnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaDvigalkaNT Izbriši

Prenosnik: Spremenilna tipka OrkaKrmilkaDesni zaklepaj

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_structural_navigation.page0000644000373100047300000001545012316542071027601 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Strukturno krmarjenje Strukturno krmarjenje Ukazi za krmarjenje po predmetih Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi strukturnega krmarjenja

Naslednje ukaze lahko uporabite za krmarjenje po glavah, povezavah in drugih predmetih za katere Orka zagotavlja podporo strukturnega krmarjenja.

Onomogoči/onemogoči tipke strukturnega krmarjenja: Spremenilna tipka OrkaZ
Glave

Naslednja in predhodna glava: H in DvigalkaH

Naslednja in predhodna glava na ravni 1: 1 in Dvigalka1

Naslednja in predhodna glava na ravni 2: 2 in Dvigalka2

Naslednja in predhodna glava na ravni 3: 3 in Dvigalka3

Naslednja in predhodna glava na ravni 4: 4 in Dvigalka4

Naslednja in predhodna glava na ravni 5: 5 in Dvigalka5

Naslednja in predhodna glava na ravni 6: 6 in Dvigalka6
Obrazci

Naslednje in predhodno polje obrazca: Spremenilna tipka OrkaTabulator in Spremenilna tipka OrkaDvigalkaTabulator

Naslednji in predhodni gumb: B in DvigalkaB

Naslednje in predhodno spustno polje: C and DvigalkaC

Naslednji in predhodni vnos: E in DvigalkaE

Naslednji in predhodni izbirni gumb: R in DvigalkaR

Naslednje in predhodno izbirno polje: X in DvigalkaX

Naslednji in predhodni predmet (za izhod iz polja): Spremenilna tipka OrkaDesno in Spremenilna tipka OrkaLevo
Seznami

Naslednji in predhodni seznam: L in DvigalkaL

Naslednji in predhodni predmet seznama: I in DvigalkaI
Razpredelnice

Naslednja in predhodna razpredelnica: T in DvigalkaT

Celica na levi: AltDvigalkaLevo

Celica na desni: AltDvigalkaDesno

Celica zgoraj: AltDvigalkaNavzgor

Celica spodaj: AltDvigalkaNavzdol

Prva celica v razpredelnici: AltDvigalkaDomov

Zadnja celica v razpredelnici: AltDvigalkaKonec
Bloki besedila

Naslednji in predhodni odstavek: P in DvigalkaP

Naslednje in predhodno bločno besedilo: Q in DvigalkaQ

Naslednji in predhoden "velik predmet": O in DvigalkaO
Drugi predmeti

Naslednja in predhodna oznaka mesta: M in DvigalkaM

Naslednja in predhodna ločnica : S in DvigalkaS

Naslednje in predhodno sidrko: A in DvigalkaA
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_controlling_orca.page0000644000373100047300000000467012316542071026512 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Nadziranje in učenje uporabe Orke Nadziranje in učenje uporabe Orke Ukazi za sporazumevanje z Orko Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Nadziranje in učenje uporabe Orke
Ukazi za nadziranje <app>Orke</app>

The following commands can be used to get into Orca's Preferences dialogs, toggle Orca on and off, and bypass Orca commands to avoid shortcut conflicts within the application being accessed.

Toggle Orca on and off in GNOME: SuperAltS.

Pogovorno okno Možnosti Orke: Pomožna tipka Orka Preslednica.

Pogovorno okno možnosti Okre za program v žarišču: CtrlPomožna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Podajanje naslednjega ukaza trenutnemu programu: Pomožna tipka OrkaVračalka
Ukazi za učenje uporabe <app>Orke</app>

In Learn Mode, Orca will announce each keystroke you pressed along with any associated Orca command that keystroke is bound to. In this mode, you can also get a list of shortcuts containing all the Orca commands you can use.

Vstop v način učenja: Orca ModifierH

Exit learn mode: Esc

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_debugging.page0000644000373100047300000000336712316542071025111 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Razhroščevanje Razhroščevanje Ukazi za razreševanje težav Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi razhroščevanja

Poročanje podrobnosti o trenutno dejavnem skriptu: KrmilkaIzmenjalkaPomožna tipka OrkaDomov

Da boste lahko uporabljali naslednje tri ukaze, morate Orko zagnati iz navidezne konzole ali preko gnome-terminal. Izhod je poslan le v konzolo (ni poslan v govor ali Braillovo pisavo).

Tisk podrobnosti razhroščevanja o vseh znanih programih v konzolo, v kateri teče Orca: KrmilkaIzmenjalkaPomožna tipka OrkaKonec

Tisk podrobnosti razhroščevanja o nadrejenih predmetih predmeta s pozornostjo: KrmilkaIzmenjalkaPomožna tipka OrkaPrejšnja stran

Tisk podrobnosti razhroščevanja o hierarhiji programa s pozornostjo: KrmilkaIzmenjalkaPomožna tipka OrkaNaslednja stran

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_gecko.page0000644000373100047300000001111212316542071024731 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Krmarjenje Gecka Krmarjenje Gecka Nastavljanje Orkine podpore za Firefox in Thunderbird. Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti krmarjenja Gecko
Krmarjenje po strani

Skupni nadzornikov Krmarjenje strani vam omogoča prilagajanje Orkinega prikaza in možnosti sporazumevanja z besedilom in drugo vsebino.

Uporabi krmarjenje kazalke Orka

To izbirno polje vklopi in izklopi Okrino krmarjenje kazalke. Ko je krmarjenje vklopljeno, Orka prevzame nadzor nad kazalko medtem ko se premikate po strani. Ko je krmarjenje izklopljeno je dejavna Geckovo lastno krmarjenje kazalke.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

To nastavitev lahko preklapljate sproti

Za sproten preklop te nastavitve brez shranjevanja uporabite Pomožna tipka OrkaF12
Uporabi strukturno krmarjenje Orka

To izbirno polje vklopi in izklopi Orkino's Strukturno krmarjenje. Structural Navigation allows you to navigate by elements such as headings, links, and form fields.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

To nastavitev lahko preklapljate sproti

Za sproten preklop te nastavitve brez shranjevanja uporabite Pomožna tipka OrkaZ
Prevzemi žarišče predmeta med krmarjenjem

Če je to izbirno polje izbrano, bo Orka izvedla eksplicitno zgrabitev žarišča, ko krmarite s kazalko pod nadzorom Orke. To je bilo zahtevno v starejših različicah Firefoxa in Thunderbirda.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Postavi kazalko na začetek vrstice ob krmarjenju navpično

V primeru, da je to izbirno polje izbrano, bo Orka v primeru, ko nadzira kazalko, le-to vedno premaknila kazalko na začetek vrstice. Predhodno in naslednjo vrstico lahko preberete s pritiskom na tipko Puščica navzgor ali Puščica navzdol. V primeru, da to izbirno polje ni izbrano, bo Orka poskusila kazalko obdržati na enakem vodoravnem položaju medtem ko krmarite navzgor ali navzdol.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Možnosti iskanja

Skupina nadzornikom Možnosti iksanja vam omogočajo prilagajanje Orkine predstavitve rezultatov iskanja z uporabo programove vgrajene zmožnosti iskanja.

Izgovori rezultate med iskanjem

V primeru, da je izbrano to izbirno polje, bo Orka prebrala vrstico, ki se ujema z vašo poizvedbo iskanja.

Privzeta vrednost: izbrano

Izgovori le spremenjene vrstice med iskanjem

V primeru da je to izbiro polje izbrano, Orka ne bo predstavila ujemajoče vrstice, če je enaka vrstica kot predhodni zadetek. Ta možnost je zasnovana za preprečevanje "klepetavosti" v vrstici z več primeri niza, ki ga iščete.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Najmanjša dolžina ujemajočega se besedila

V tem uredljivem vrtilnem gumbu lahko navedete število znakov, ki se morajo ujemati preden Orka oznani ujemajočo vrstico. Ta možnost je zasnovana za preprečevanje "klepetavosti" v vrstici z več primeri niza, ki ga iščete.

Privzeta vrednost: 4

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands.page0000644000373100047300000000237712316542071023076 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4. Ukazi <app>Orke</app> Ukazi Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi <app>Orke</app>
Kako začeti
Govor in brajica
Branje spletnih strani in drugih dokumentov
Pregledovanje in sporazumevanje z vsebino zaslona
Dostopanje do dinamičnih podrobnosti
Odpravljanje težav
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_live_regions.page0000644000373100047300000000445012316542071025174 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 6. Live Regions Sporazumevanje z dinamično spletno vsebino Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Samodejno posodobljeni predeli

Samodejno posodobljen predel je dinamično posodabljajoč se del spletne strani kot je razpredelnica ali športna statistika, seznam trenutnih cen delnic, dnevnik klepeta ali alarm prikazan na strani, ki jo berete. Čeprav se samodejno posodoblejni predeli pojavljajo pogosto so spletne strani s samodejno posodabljajočimi predeli manj pogoste. Težavo dejavno rešuje več organizacij.

Ravni prijaznosti samodejno posodobljenih predelov

Samodejno posodobljena področja imajo povezano raven "prijaznosti", ki jo je določil avtor in sporoča pomembnost podatkov in predlaga kdaj naj tehnologija dostopnosti uporabnika obvesti o posodobitvah v tem področju. Samodejno posodobljena področja so lahko "nedejavna", "vljudna", "agresiva" in "nesramna".

<app>Orkina</app> podpora za samodejno posodobljene predele.

Ker se morda ne strinjate z ravno prijatnosti, ki jo je navedel avtor strani, vam Orka zagotavlja številne ukaze ukaze samodejno posodobljenih področij, ki vam omogočajo spreminjanje ravni kateregakoli ali vseh področij na strani. Poleg tega lahko:

Podporo samodejno posodobljenih vklopite ali izklopite

Prostorsko skočite na naslednje in predhodno samodejno posodobljeno področje

Skočite na samodejno posodobljeno področje, ki je zadnje predstavilo podatke

Pregledati zadnjih devet predstavljenih sporočil samodejno posodabljajočih področij
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_key_bindings.page0000644000373100047300000001053112316542071025151 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 8. Tipke za bližnjice Ustvarjanje, spreminjanje in odstranjevanje tipkovnih bližnjic ukazov Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Tipkovne bližnjice

Orka ima veliko ukazov. Nekateri od njih imajo tipkovne bližnjice, drugi ne. Za dodajanje, spreminjanje in odstranjevanje tipkovnih bližnjic Orke sledite korakom spodaj.

Vezava nedoločnega ukaza

Pojdite v pogovorno okno Možnosti Orka s pritiskom na Spremenilna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Premaknite se na stran Tipkovne bližnjice.

S puščicami se premaknite do celice, ki vsebuje ukaz, ki mu želite dodeliti pritisk tipke.

Enkrat pritisnite puščico desno. To bo žarišče premaknilo na stolpec Tipkovna bližnjica. Pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Pritisnite želeno kombinacijo tipk.

Pritisnite Vnosno tipko za potrditev nove kombinacije. Nova kombinacija bo bila shranjena in izbirno polje v zadnjem stolpcu (stolpec Spremenjeno) bo nakazalo, da je bila tipkovna bližnjica spremenjena.

Nato pritisnite gumb Uveljavi.

 Spreminjanje obstoječih tipkovnih bližnjic

Pojdite v pogovorno okno Možnosti Orka s pritiskom na Spremenilna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Premaknite se na stran Tipkovne bližnjice.

S puščicami se premaknite do celice, ki vsebuje tipkovno bližnjico, ki jo želite spremeniti in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Pritisnite želeno kombinacijo tipk.

Pritisnite Vnosno tipko za potrditev nove kombinacije. Nova kombinacija bo bila shranjena in izbirno polje v zadnjem stolpcu (stolpec Spremenjeno) bo nakazalo, da je bila tipkovna bližnjica spremenjena.

Nato pritisnite gumb Uveljavi.

 Obnavljanje izvornih tipkovnih bližnjic

Pojdite v pogovorno okno Možnosti Orka s pritiskom na Spremenilna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Premaknite se na stran Tipkovne bližnjice.

S puščicami se premaknite do stolpca spremenjeno, ki je povezan s tipkovno bližnjico

Odstranite izbiro polje s pritiskom na Preslednico.

Nato pritisnite gumb Uveljavi.

 Odstranitev vezave uporabljenih ukazov

Pojdite v pogovorno okno Možnosti Orka s pritiskom na Spremenilna tipka OrkaPreslednica.

Premaknite se na stran Tipkovne bližnjice.

S puščicami se premaknite do celice, ki vsebuje tipkovno bližnjico, ki jo želite izbrisati in pritisnite Vnosno tipko.

Ko boste pozvani za novo tipkovno bližnjico, pritisnite Izbriši ali Vračalko. Orka vam bo povedala, da je bila tipkovna bližnjica odstranjena.

Pritisnite Vnosno tipko za potrditev.

Nato pritisnite gumb Uveljavi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/preferences_braille.page0000644000373100047300000001047612316542071025267 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3. Brajica Brajica Nastavljanje Orkine podpore Braillovega zaslona Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti Braillove pisave
Omogoči podporo Braillovi pisavi

Izbirno polje preklopi ali bo Orka uporabljala Braillov zaslon. V primeru, da BrlTTY ne teče, bo Orka elegantno obnovila in se ne bo sporazumevala z Braillovim zaslonom.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

V primeru, da BrlTTY nastavite kasneje, boste morali za to, da Orca uporablja Braillovo pisavo znova zagnati.
Omogoči skrčen zapis braillove pisave

Orka podpira skrajšano Braillovo pisavo preko projekta liblouis. Ker veliko distribucij vključuje liblouis, boste verjetno v Orki samodejno imeli podporo za skrčeno Braillovo pisavo.

Za omogočitev skrčene Braillove pisave na sistemu, kjer je bil nameščen liblouis, se prepričajte, da je izbirno polje Omogoči skrčeno Braillovo pisavo izbrano. Nato v spustnem polju Razpredelnica skrčenja izberite želeno razpredelnico prevoda.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Okrajšana imena vlog

To izbirno polje določi način v katerih so prikazana imena vlog in ga je mogoče uporabiti za ohranjevanje prostora na Braillovem zaslonu. Na primer, če ima žarišče drsnik, bo v primeru, da skrčena imena vlog niso omogočena prikazana beseda "drsnik", če pa so skrčena imena vlog omogočena, bo prikazana beseda "drsn".

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Onemogoči simbol za konec vrstice

Izbrano izbirno polje določi, da Orka ne predstavi niza "$l" na koncu vrstice besedila.

Prikazana vrednost: ni izbrano

Razločnost

Ta skupina izbirnih gumbov določi količino podatkov, ki bo prikazana v Braillovi pisavi v določenih situacijah. Na primer, če je nastavljena na podrobno, bodo prikazani podatki o tipkovnih bližnjicah in imenih vlog. Ti podatki niso prikazani v kratkem načinu.

Privzeta vrednost: Podrobno

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_braille.page0000644000373100047300000000324712316542071024565 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2. Brajica Brajica Ukazi, ki so izvedljivi na Braillovih zaslonih Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi Braillove pisave

Naslednji ukazi vam omogočajo nadzor Orke iz vašega osvežljivega Braillovega zaslona namesto iz vaše tipkovnice:

Postavi Braillov zaslon na levo: vrstica levo

Postavi Braillov zaslon na desno: vrstica desno

Preklopi način ploskega pregleda: zmrzni

Pregled besede zgoraj: vrstica navzgor

Pregled besede spodaj: vrstica navzdol

Pregled zgoraj desno: spodaj desno

Pregled položaja domov: zgoraj levo

Skrčena Braillova pisava: šest pik

Označi začetek izbora besedila: začetek izbire kopiranja

Označi konec izbora beesedila: konec izbire kopiranja

Obdela ključ rutine kazalke: premikanje kazalke

Vrne se na predmet z žariščem tipkovnice: položaj kazalke

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_time_date_notifications.page0000644000373100047300000000374612316542071030043 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4. Čas, datum in obvestila Čas, datum in obvestila Ukazi za pridobivanje časa, datuma in obvestilnih sporočil Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi časa, datuma in obvestil

Naslednje ukaze lahko uporabite za pridobivanje trenutnega časa in datuma in za pregled predhodno prikazanih obvestilnih sporočil:

Pridobivanje datuma in časa

Predstavi čas: Spremenilna tipka OrkaT

Predstavi datum: Spremenilna tipka OrkaT (dvakrat kliknjeno)
Pregled sporočil obvestil

Orka ima tri nedoločene ukaze za dostop do predhodno prikazanih obvestilnih sporočil. Za podrobnosti kako tem ukazom dodati tipkovne bližnjice si oglejte Spreminjanje tipkovnih bližnjic.

Predstavi zadnje (najbolj nedavno) obvestilno sporočilo: (nedoločeno)

Predstavi predhodno obvestilno sporočilo: (nedoločeno)

Predstavi seznam vseh obvestilnih sporočil: (nedoločeno)
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_tables.page0000644000373100047300000001275012316542071023763 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4. Razpredelnice Krmarjenje in nastavljanje dinamičnih glav Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Razpredelnice

Orka zagotavlja več zmožnosti, ki so zasnovane posebno za izboljšanje dostopa do razpredelnic v spletnih straneh in drugih dokumentih: nastavljivo branje celic ali vrstic, Strukturno krmarjenje in dinamične glave.

Branje celic ali vrstic

Razmislite o opravilu preučevanja sporočil v vašem dohodnem predalu. Da Orka oznani pošiljatelja, zadevo, datum in prisotnost prilog, boste potrebovali Orko, ki bo izgovorila vrstico. Po drugi strani je pri krmarjenju med vrsticami v besedilu poslušanje celotne vrstice nezaželeno, če ne zaradi drugega, zaradi števila celic v vsaki vrstici. Zato boste v tem primeru želeli, da Orka izgovori samo celice v žarišču. Podobni primeri se zgodijo v razpredelnicah dokumenta.

Orca allows you to customize whether only the cell should be read, or if the full row should be. You can set this preference Orca wide as well as on an application-by-application basis. How to do each is described in the guide on Orca's preferences dialogs. The setting can be found in the Table Rows radio button group on the Speech page.

Poleg tega obstaja ukaz Orka, ki vam omogoča sprotno nastavljanje preklopa: Spremenilna tipka OrkaF11.

Strukturno krmarjenje

Orkini's ukazi strukturnega krmarjenja vam omogočajo hitro iskanje razpredelnic, takojšen skok na prvo ali zadnjo celico razpredelnice in premik na naslednjo celico v katerikoli smeri.

Ko med razpredelnicami krmarite s strukturnim krmarjenjem, bo Orka oznanila dodatne podrobnosti, ki vam bodo pomagale razumeti vaš položaj kot so mere razpredelnice, ki ste jih pravkar vnesli in dejstvo, da ste v smeri premikanja dosegli rob razpredelnice.

Poleg tega Orka zagotavlja nastavljive možnosti predstavitve, ki delujejo skupaj s strukturnim krmarjenjem in vam omogočajo nastavljanje ali so predstavljene koordinate celic, ali je nakazana širina več celic in ali so glave celic oznanjene.

Ne pozabite vklopiti strukturnega krmarjenja!

Glede na to kje ste boste morda morali pred uporabo strukturno krmarjenje eksplicitno vklopiti. Za več podrobnosti si preberite kdaj je preklapljanje strukturnega krmarjenja zahtevano.
Dinamične glave

Veliko razpredelnic ima celice, ki služijo kot glava za vrstico ali stolpec. Ali je ustvarjalec te razpredelnice označil kot glave je teko reči. V veliko primerih je besedilo bilo oblikovano kot večje in/ali krepko. Tudi če je razpredelnica pravilno označena, ni nujno, da program ali zbirka orodij dostopnim tehnologijam besedilo izpostavi kot podatke glave. Orkina podpora dinamičnih glav vam pomaga rešiti te težave.

Nastavljanje glav stolpcev

Premaknite se na vrstico, ki vsebuje vse glave stolpcev.

Pritisnite spremenilno tipko OrkaR. To Orki pove, da trenutna vrstica vsebuje glave.

 Nastavi glave vrstic

Premaknite se na stolpec, ki vsebuje vse glave vrstic.

Pritisnite spremenilno tipko OrkaC. To Orki pove, da trenutni stolpec vsebuje glave.

Ko boste nastavili glave stolpcev ali vrstic, vam bo med krmarjenjem med celicami Orka predstavila vsako spremenjeno glavo. Drugače rečeno Orkane bo znova in znova predstavljala glav stolpcev medtem ko se pomikate navzgor ali navzdol po trenutnem stolpcu. Prav tako ne bo znova in znova predstavljala vrstic medtem ko se premikate levo ali desno v trenutni vrstici. Vendar pa bo ob spremembi vrstice predstavljana glava povezana z novo vrstico. Prav tako bo ob spremembi stolpca predstavljen stolpec povezan z novo vrstico.

Za čiščenje glav enostavno dvokliknite ukaz, ki ste ga uporabili za njihovo nastavljanje. Dvoklik spremenilne tipke OrkaR pove Orki, da ni glav vrstic. Dvoklik spremenilne tipke OrkaC Orki pove, da ni glav stolpcev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_setting_up_orca.page0000644000373100047300000000253712316542071025700 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 4. Orca Configuration Prilagoditev Setting up Orca Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Nastavitev Orka

If you want to configure Orca, you can do one of the following:

Get into the Preferences dialog by pressing Orca ModifierSpace from within any accessible application.

Orki podajte možnost --text-setup za ponoven zagon Orkinih na besedilu osnovanih nastavitev.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/howto_notifications.page0000644000373100047300000000516212316542071025361 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 5. Obvestila Branje predhodno prejetih sporočil Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Obvestila

Namizje GNOME vsebuje "obvestilno področje", ki ga lahko programi uporabijo za predstavljanje podatkov uporabniku. Primeri obvestil vključujejo dohodna sporočila klepeta, podrobnosti povezane s skladbo, ki jo je vaš predvajalnik glasbe pravkar začel prevajati in opozorila, da je vaša baterija prazna.

Ker so obvestila namenjena predstavljanju podatkov uporabnikov brez prekinjanja njihovega dela, se ta sporočila hitro pojavijo in izginejo in ne morejo biti v žarišču. Čeprav vam bo Orka ta sporočila predstavila ob njihovem prihodu, je Orkino oznanjevanje preveč enostavno po nesreči prekiniti s tipkanjem ali spremembo žarišča. Zato ima Orka tri ukaze, ki jih lahko uporabite za dostop do predhodno prikazanih obvestilnih sporočil:

Predstavi zadnje (najbolj nedavno) obvestilno sporočilo

Predstavi predhodno obvestilo sporočila

Predstavi seznam vseh obvestil sporočil

Prva dva ukaza sta zasnovana predvsem za hiter dostop do sporočila, ki ste ga pravkar prejeli. Zadnji ukaz je najzmogljivejši, saj shrani vaš zgodovino obvestilnih sporočil.

Ko vnesete seznam obvestilni sporočil, vam bo sporočena velikost seznama. Na voljo boste imeli naslednje izbire:

Pritisnite H za pomoč.

Uporaba navzgor, navzdol, domov in konec za krmarjenje po seznamu.

Pritisnite ubežno tipko za končanje.

Pritisk preslednice za ponovno branje zadnjega prebranega sporočila.

Pritisk ene številke za branje določenega sporočila.

Najbolj nedavno prejeto sporočilo je na vrhu seznama.

Vsak ukaz Orkinega pregleda obvestil privzeto ni določen. Za katerikoli ali za vse ukaze lahko ustvarite tipkovne bližnjice. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte Uvod v tipkovne bližnjice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/orca/commands_live_regions.page0000644000373100047300000000327612316542071025642 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 1. Live Region Live Regions Ukazi za dostop do samodejno posodobljenih področij spleta Joanmarie Diggs joanied@gnome.org

Creative Commons deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazi samodejno posodobljenega predela

Nadziraj samodejno posodobljena področja: Spremenilna tipka OrkaDvigalkaLeva poševnica

Naprej v nastavitvah vljudnosti samodejno posodobljenega področja: Leva poševnica

Nastavi privzeto raven vljudnosti na brez: DvigalkaLeva poševnica

Pojdi na naslednje/predhodno samodejno posodobljeno področje: D/DvigalkaD

Pojdi na zadnjo samodejno posodobljeno področje, ki je zadnje opravilo oznanitev: Y

Pregled oznanitev samodejno posodobljenih področij: Spremenilna tipka OrkaF1 do F9

 usr/share/gnome/help-langpack/gtkmm-tutorial/sl/gtkmm-tutorial.xml0000644000373100047300000260733112156577164027322 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 gtkmm"> ]> Programming with <application>gtkmm</application> 3 Murray Cumming Bernhard Rieder Chapter on "Timeouts". Jonathon Jongsma Chapter on "Drawing with Cairo". Chapter on "Working with gtkmm's Source Code". Chapter on "Recent Files". Ole Laursen Parts of chapter on "Internationalization". Marko Anastasov Chapter on "Printing". Parts of chapter on "Internationalization". Daniel Elstner Section "Build Structure" of chapter on "Wrapping C Libraries with gmmproc". Chris Vine Chapter on "Multi-threaded programs". David King Section on Gtk::Grid. Pedro Ferreira Chapter on Keyboard Events. Kjell Ahlstedt Parts of the update from gtkmm 2 to gtkmm 3. This book explains key concepts of the gtkmm C++ API for creating user interfaces. It also introduces the main user interface elements ("widgets"). 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Murray Cumming Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You may obtain a copy of the GNU Free Documentation License from the Free Software Foundation by visiting their Web site or by writing to: Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Uvod This book This book explains key concepts of the gtkmm C++ API for creating user interfaces. It also introduces the main user interface elements ("widgets"). Although it mentions classes, constructors, and methods, it does not go into great detail. Therefore, for full API information you should follow the links into the reference documentation. This book assumes a good understanding of C++, and how to create C++ programs. We would very much like to hear of any problems you have learning gtkmm with this document, and would appreciate input regarding improvements. Please see the Contributing section for further information. gtkmm gtkmm is a C++ wrapper for GTK+, a library used to create graphical user interfaces. It is licensed using the LGPL license, so you can develop open software, free software, or even commercial non-free software using gtkmm without purchasing licenses. gtkmm was originally named gtk-- because GTK+ already has a + in the name. However, as -- is not easily indexed by search engines the package generally went by the name gtkmm, and that's what we stuck with. Why use <application>gtkmm</application> instead of GTK+? gtkmm allows you to write code using normal C++ techniques such as encapsulation, derivation, and polymorphism. As a C++ programmer you probably already realise that this leads to clearer and better organized code. gtkmm is more type-safe, so the compiler can detect errors that would only be detected at run time when using C. This use of specific types also makes the API clearer because you can see what types should be used just by looking at a method's declaration. Inheritance can be used to derive new widgets. The derivation of new widgets in GTK+ C code is so complicated and error prone that almost no C coders do it. As a C++ developer you know that derivation is an essential Object Orientated technique. Member instances can be used, simplifying memory management. All GTK+ C widgets are dealt with by use of pointers. As a C++ coder you know that pointers should be avoided where possible. gtkmm involves less code compared to GTK+, which uses prefixed function names and lots of cast macros. <application>gtkmm</application> compared to Qt Trolltech's Qt is the closest competition to gtkmm, so it deserves discussion. gtkmm developers tend to prefer gtkmm to Qt because gtkmm does things in a more C++ way. Qt originates from a time when C++ and the standard library were not standardised or well supported by compilers. It therefore duplicates a lot of stuff that is now in the standard library, such as containers and type information. Most significantly, Trolltech modified the C++ language to provide signals, so that Qt classes cannot be used easily with non-Qt classes. gtkmm was able to use standard C++ to provide signals without changing the C++ language. See the FAQ for more detailed differences. <application>gtkmm</application> is a wrapper gtkmm is not a native C++ toolkit, but a C++ wrapper of a C toolkit. This separation of interface and implementation has advantages. The gtkmm developers spend most of their time talking about how gtkmm can present the clearest API, without awkward compromises due to obscure technical details. We contribute a little to the underlying GTK+ code base, but so do the C coders, and the Perl coders and the Python coders, etc. Therefore GTK+ benefits from a broader user base than language-specific toolkits - there are more implementers, more developers, more testers, and more users. Namestitev Odvisnosti Before attempting to install gtkmm 3.0, you might first need to install these other packages. libsigc++ 2.0 GTK+ 3.0 cairomm pangomm atkmm These dependencies have their own dependencies, including the following applications and libraries: pkg-config glib ATK Pango cairo gdk-pixbuf Unix and Linux Prebuilt Packages Recent versions of gtkmm are packaged by nearly every major Linux distribution these days. So, if you use Linux, you can probably get started with gtkmm by installing the package from the official repository for your distribution. Distributions that include gtkmm in their repositories include Debian, Ubuntu, Red Hat, Fedora, Mandriva, Suse, and many others. The names of the gtkmm packages vary from distribution to distribution (e.g. libgtkmm3.0-dev on Debian and Ubuntu or gtkmm30-devel on Red Hat Fedora), so check with your distribution's package management program for the correct package name and install it like you would any other package. The package names will not change when new API/ABI-compatible versions of gtkmm are released. Otherwise they would not be API/ABI-compatible. So don't be surprised, for instance, to find gtkmm 3.2 supplied by Debian's libgtkmm3.0-dev package. Installing From Source If your distribution does not provide a pre-built gtkmm package, or if you want to install a different version than the one provided by your distribution, you can also install gtkmm from source. The source code for gtkmm can be downloaded from . After you've installed all of the dependencies, download the gtkmm source code, unpack it, and change to the newly created directory. gtkmm can be built and installed with the following sequence of commands: # ./configure # make # make install Remember that on a Unix or Linux operating system, you will probably need to be root to install software. The su command will allow you to enter the root password and have root status temporarily. The configure script will check to make sure all of the required dependencies are already installed. If you are missing any dependencies, it will exit and display an error. By default, gtkmm will be installed under the /usr/local directory. On some systems you may need to install to a different location. For instance, on Red Hat Linux systems you might use the --prefix option with configure, like so: # ./configure --prefix=/usr You should be very careful when installing to standard system prefixes such as /usr. Linux distributions install software packages to /usr, so installing a source package to this prefix could corrupt or conflict with software installed using your distribution's package-management system. Ideally, you should use a separate prefix for all software you install from source. If you want to help develop gtkmm or experiment with new features, you can also install gtkmm from git. Most users will never need to do this, but if you're interested in helping with gtkmm development, see the Working with gtkmm's Source Code appendix. Microsoft Windows GTK+ and gtkmm were designed to work well with Microsoft Windows, and the developers encourage its use on the win32 platform. However, Windows has no standard installation system for development libraries. Please see the Windows Installation page for Windows-specific installation instructions and notes. Osnove This chapter will introduce some of the most important aspects of gtkmm coding. These will be demonstrated with simple working example code. However, this is just a taster, so you need to look at the other chapters for more substantial information. Your existing knowledge of C++ will help you with gtkmm as it would with any library. Unless we state otherwise, you can expect gtkmm classes to behave like any other C++ class, and you can expect to use your existing C++ techniques with gtkmm classes. Simple Example To begin our introduction to gtkmm, we'll start with the simplest program possible. This program will create an empty 200 x 200 pixel window. Source Code File: base.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <gtkmm.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.examples.base"); Gtk::Window window; window.set_default_size(200, 200); return app->run(window); } We will now explain each line of the example #include <gtkmm.h> All gtkmm programs must include certain gtkmm headers; gtkmm.h includes the entire gtkmm kit. This is usually not a good idea, because it includes a megabyte or so of headers, but for simple programs, it suffices. The next statement: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.examples.base"); creates a Gtk::Application object, stored in a RefPtr smartpointer. This is needed in all gtkmm applications. The create() method for this object initializes gtkmm, and checks the arguments passed to your application on the command line, looking for standard options such as --display. It takes these from the argument list, leaving anything it does not recognize for your application to parse or ignore. This ensures that all gtkmm applications accept the same set of standard arguments. The next two lines of code create a window and set its default (initial) size: Gtk::Window window; window.set_default_size(200, 200); The last line shows the window and enters the gtkmm main processing loop, which will finish when the window is closed. Your main() function will then return with an appropriate success or error code. return app->run(window); After putting the source code in simple.cc you can compile the above program with gcc using: g++ simple.cc -o simple `pkg-config gtkmm-3.0 --cflags --libs` Note that you must surround the pkg-config invocation with backquotes. Backquotes cause the shell to execute the command inside them, and to use the command's output as part of the command line. Note also that simple.cc must come before the pkg-config invocation on the command line. Headers and Linking Although we have shown the compilation command for the simple example, you really should use the automake and autoconf tools, as described in "Autoconf, Automake, Libtool", by G. V. Vaughan et al. The examples used in this book are included in the gtkmm package, with appropriate build files, so we won't show the build commands in future. You'll just need to find the appropriate directory and type make. To simplify compilation, we use pkg-config, which is present in all (properly installed) gtkmm installations. This program 'knows' what compiler switches are needed to compile programs that use gtkmm. The --cflags option causes pkg-config to output a list of include directories for the compiler to look in; the --libs option requests the list of libraries for the compiler to link with and the directories to find them in. Try running it from your shell-prompt to see the results on your system. However, this is even simpler when using the PKG_CHECK_MODULES() macro in a standard configure.ac file with autoconf and automake. For instance: PKG_CHECK_MODULES([MYAPP], [gtkmm-3.0 >= 3.0.0]) This checks for the presence of gtkmm and defines MYAPP_LIBS and MYAPP_CFLAGS for use in your Makefile.am files. gtkmm-3.0 is the name of the current stable API. There was an older API called gtkmm-2-4 which installs in parallel when it is available. There were several versions of gtkmm-2.4, such as gtkmm 2.10 and there will be several versions of the gtkmm-3.0 API. Note that the API name does not change for every version because that would be an incompatible API and ABI break. Theoretically, there might be a future gtkmm-4.0 API which would install in parallel with gtkmm-3.0 without affecting existing applications. Note that if you mention extra modules in addition to gtkmm-3.0, they should be separated by spaces, not commas. Openismus has more basic help with automake and autoconf. Widgets gtkmm applications consist of windows containing widgets, such as buttons and text boxes. In some other systems, widgets are called "controls". For each widget in your application's windows, there is a C++ object in your application's code. So you just need to call a method of the widget's class to affect the visible widget. Widgets are arranged inside container widgets such as frames and notebooks, in a hierarchy of widgets within widgets. Some of these container widgets, such as Gtk::Grid, are not visible - they exist only to arrange other widgets. Here is some example code that adds 2 Gtk::Button widgets to a Gtk::Box container widget: m_box.pack_start(m_Button1); m_box.pack_start(m_Button2); and here is how to add the Gtk::Box, containing those buttons, to a Gtk::Frame, which has a visible frame and title: m_frame.add(m_box); Most of the chapters in this book deal with specific widgets. See the Container Widgets section for more details about adding widgets to container widgets. Although you can specify the layout and appearance of windows and widgets with C++ code, you will probably find it more convenient to design your user interfaces with Glade and load them at runtime with Gtk::Builder. See the Glade and Gtk::Builder chapter. Although gtkmm widget instances have lifetimes and scopes just like those of other C++ classes, gtkmm has an optional time-saving feature that you will see in some of the examples. Gtk::manage() allows you to say that a child widget is owned by the container into which you place it. This allows you to new the widget, add it to the container and forget about deleting it. You can learn more about gtkmm memory management techniques in the Memory Management chapter. Signals gtkmm, like most GUI toolkits, is event-driven. When an event occurs, such as the press of a mouse button, the appropriate signal will be emitted by the Widget that was pressed. Each Widget has a different set of signals that it can emit. To make a button click result in an action, we set up a signal handler to catch the button's "clicked" signal. gtkmm uses the libsigc++ library to implement signals. Here is an example line of code that connects a Gtk::Button's "clicked" signal with a signal handler called "on_button_clicked": m_button1.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &HelloWorld::on_button_clicked) ); For more detailed information about signals, see the appendix. For information about implementing your own signals rather than just connecting to the existing gtkmm signals, see the appendix. Glib::ustring You might be surprised to learn that gtkmm doesn't use std::string in it its interfaces. Instead it uses Glib::ustring, which is so similar and unobtrusive that you could actually pretend that each Glib::ustring is a std::string and ignore the rest of this section. But read on if you want to use languages other than English in your application. std::string uses 8 bit per character, but 8 bits aren't enough to encode languages such as Arabic, Chinese, and Japanese. Although the encodings for these languages have now been specified by the Unicode Consortium, the C and C++ languages do not yet provide any standardised Unicode support. GTK+ and GNOME chose to implement Unicode using UTF-8, and that's what is wrapped by Glib::ustring. It provides almost exactly the same interface as std::string, along with automatic conversions to and from std::string. One of the benefits of UTF-8 is that you don't need to use it unless you want to, so you don't need to retrofit all of your code at once. std::string will still work for 7-bit ASCII strings. But when you try to localize your application for languages like Chinese, for instance, you will start to see strange errors, and possible crashes. Then all you need to do is start using Glib::ustring instead. Note that UTF-8 isn't compatible with 8-bit encodings like ISO-8859-1. For instance, German umlauts are not in the ASCII range and need more than 1 byte in the UTF-8 encoding. If your code contains 8-bit string literals, you have to convert them to UTF-8 (e.g. the Bavarian greeting "Grüß Gott" would be "Gr\xC3\xBC\xC3\x9F Gott"). You should avoid C-style pointer arithmetic, and functions such as strlen(). In UTF-8, each character might need anywhere from 1 to 6 bytes, so it's not possible to assume that the next byte is another character. Glib::ustring worries about the details of this for you so you can use methods such as Glib::ustring::substr() while still thinking in terms of characters instead of bytes. Unlike the Windows UCS-2 Unicode solution, this does not require any special compiler options to process string literals, and it does not result in Unicode executables and libraries which are incompatible with ASCII ones. Reference See the Internationalization section for information about providing the UTF-8 string literals. Intermediate types Some API related to gtkmm uses intermediate data containers, such as Glib::StringArrayHandle, instead of a specific Standard C++ container such as std::vector or std::list, though gtkmm itself now uses just std::vector since gtkmm 3.0. You should not declare these types yourself. You should instead use whatever Standard C++ container you prefer. glibmm will do the conversion for you. Here are some of these intermediate types: Glib::StringArrayHandle or Glib::ArrayHandle<Glib::ustring>: Use std::vector<Glib::ustring>, std::list<Glib::ustring>, const char*[], etc. Glib::ListHandle<Gtk::Widget*>: Use std::vector<Gtk::Widget*>, std::list<Gtk::Widget*>, etc. Glib::SListHandle<Gtk::Widget*>: Use std::vector<Gtk::Widget*>, std::list<Gtk::Widget*>, etc. Mixing C and C++ APIs You can use C APIs which do not yet have convenient C++ interfaces. It is generally not a problem to use C APIs from C++, and gtkmm helps by providing access to the underlying C object, and providing an easy way to create a C++ wrapper object from a C object, provided that the C API is also based on the GObject system. To use a gtkmm instance with a C function that requires a C GObject instance, use the gobj() function to obtain a pointer to the underlying GObject instance. For instance Gtk::Button* button = new Gtk::Button("example"); gtk_button_do_something_new(button->gobj()); To obtain a gtkmm instance from a C GObject instance, use the Glib::wrap() function. For instance GtkButton* cbutton = get_a_button(); Gtk::Button* button = Glib::wrap(cbutton); Hello World in <application>gtkmm</application> We've now learned enough to look at a real example. In accordance with an ancient tradition of computer science, we now introduce Hello World, a la gtkmm: Source Code File: helloworld.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_HELLOWORLD_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_HELLOWORLD_H #include <gtkmm/button.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> class HelloWorld : public Gtk::Window { public: HelloWorld(); virtual ~HelloWorld(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); //Member widgets: Gtk::Button m_button; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_HELLOWORLD_H File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "helloworld.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); HelloWorld helloworld; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(helloworld); } File: helloworld.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "helloworld.h" #include <iostream> HelloWorld::HelloWorld() : m_button("Hello World") // creates a new button with label "Hello World". { // Sets the border width of the window. set_border_width(10); // When the button receives the "clicked" signal, it will call the // on_button_clicked() method defined below. m_button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &HelloWorld::on_button_clicked)); // This packs the button into the Window (a container). add(m_button); // The final step is to display this newly created widget... m_button.show(); } HelloWorld::~HelloWorld() { } void HelloWorld::on_button_clicked() { std::cout << "Hello World" << std::endl; } Try to compile and run it before going on. You should see something like this:
Hello World
Pretty thrilling, eh? Let's examine the code. First, the HelloWorld class: class HelloWorld : public Gtk::Window { public: HelloWorld(); virtual ~HelloWorld(); protected: //Signal handlers: virtual void on_button_clicked(); //Member widgets: Gtk::Button m_button; }; This class implements the "Hello World" window. It's derived from Gtk::Window, and has a single Gtk::Button as a member. We've chosen to use the constructor to do all of the initialisation work for the window, including setting up the signals. Here it is, with the comments omitted: HelloWorld::HelloWorld() : m_button ("Hello World") { set_border_width(10); m_button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &HelloWorld::on_button_clicked)); add(m_button);. m_button.show(); } Notice that we've used an initialiser statement to give the m_button object the label "Hello World". Next we call the Window's set_border_width() method. This sets the amount of space between the sides of the window and the widget it contains. We then hook up a signal handler to m_button's clicked signal. This prints our friendly greeting to stdout. Next, we use the Window's add() method to put m_button in the Window. (add() comes from Gtk::Container, which is described in the chapter on container widgets.) The add() method places the Widget in the Window, but it doesn't display the widget. gtkmm widgets are always invisible when you create them - to display them, you must call their show() method, which is what we do in the next line. Now let's look at our program's main() function. Here it is, without comments: int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); HelloWorld helloworld; return app->run(helloworld); } First we instantiate an object stored in a RefPtr smartpointer called app. This is of type Gtk::Application. Every gtkmm program must have one of these. We pass our command-line arguments to its create() method. It takes the arguments it wants, and leaves you the rest, as we described earlier. Next we make an object of our HelloWorld class, whose constructor takes no arguments, but it isn't visible yet. When we callGtk::Application::run(), giving it the helloworld Window, it shows the Window and starts the gtkmm event loop. During the event loop gtkmm idles, waiting for actions from the user, and responding appropriately. When the user closes the Window, run() will return, causing the final line of our main() function be to executed. The application will then finish. Changes in <application>gtkmm</application> 3 gtkmm-3.0 is a new version of the gtkmm API that installs in parallel with the older gtkmm-2.4 API. The last version of the gtkmm-2.4 API was gtkmm 2.24. gtkmm 3 has no major fundamental differences to gtkmm 2 but does make several small changes that were not possible while maintaining binary compatibility. If you never used the gtkmm-2.4 API then you can safely ignore this chapter. gtkmm 3's library is called libgtkmm-3.0 rather than libgtkmm-2.4 and installs its headers in a similarly-versioned directory, so your pkg-config check should ask for gtkmm-3.0 rather than gtkmm-2.4. gtkmm 3 added some new classes: Gtk::AppChooser, Gtk::AppChooserButton, Gtk::AppChooserDialog allow the user to select an installed application to open a particular type of content. Gtk::Grid is a new container widget that will eventually replace Gtk::Box. It arranges its children according to properties of those children rather than its own layout details. Gtk::Switch displays On/Off states more explictly than Gtk::CheckBox. It may be useful, for instance, when allowing users to activate hardware. gtkmm 3 also made several small changes to the API, which you will probably encounter when porting code that used gtkmm-2.4. Here is a short list: Gtk::CellLayout, used by Gtk::IconView, Gtk::TreeView::Column and Gtk::ComboBox, now has a Gtk::CellArea which can be used to specify more details of how the CellRenderers are arranged and aligned. Gtk::ComboBox now derives from CellLayout, allowing easier layout and alignment of its Gtk::CellRenderers. Gtk::Adjustment and IconSet and Gdk::Cursor are now used via Glib::RefPtr. Gtk::Box, Gtk::ButtonBox, Gtk::IconView, Gtk::Paned, Gtk::ProgressBar, Gtk::ScaleButton, Gtk::Scrollbar and Gtk::Separator now derive from Gtk::Orientable, allowing their orientation (vertical or horizontal) to be specified without requiring the use of a derived class such as Gtk::HBox. Gtk::IconView, Gtk::TextView, Gtk::TreeView and other widgets derive from Scrollable instead of having their own methods such as get_vadjustment() and instead of having their own set_scroll_adjustments signal. Gtk::Style and Gtk::Rc were removed, replaced by Gtk::StyleContext, and Gtk::StyleProviders, such as Gtk::CssProvider. Widget::on_expose_event() was replaced by Widget::on_draw(), which assumes that cairomm is used for drawing, via the provided Cairo::Context and does not require you to call Cairo::Context::clip(). Gdk::RGBA replaces Color, adding an alpha component for opacity. Colormap was removed, along with its awkward use to allocate colors. Gdk::Pixmap and Gdk::Bitmap were removed in favour of Gdk::Pixbuf. Gdk::Drawable was removed, with its methods moving into Gdk::Window. We now use std::vector in several methods instead of the intermediate *Handle types to make the API clearer. All deprecated API was removed in gtkmm 3.0, though there will be new deprecations in future versions. As a first step to porting your source code to gtkmm-3.0; you should probably ensure that your application builds with the deprecated gtkmm-2.4; API disabled, by defining macro such as GTK_DISABLE_DEPRECATED. There are some autotools macros that can help with this by defining them optionally at build time. See the gtkmm 3 porting wiki page for more details. Buttons gtkmm provides four basic types of buttons: Push-Buttons Gtk::Button. Standard buttons, usually marked with a label or picture. Pushing one triggers an action. See the Button section. Toggle buttons Gtk::ToggleButton. Unlike a normal Button, which springs back up, a ToggleButton stays down until you press it again. It might be useful as an on/off switch. See the ToggleButton section. Checkboxes Gtk::CheckButton. These act like ToggleButtons, but show their state in small squares, with their label at the side. They should be used in most situations which require an on/off setting. See the CheckBox section. Radio buttons Gtk::RadioButton. Named after the station selectors on old car radios, these buttons are used in groups for options which are mutually exclusive. Pressing one causes all the others in its group to turn off. They are similar to CheckBoxes (a small widget with a label at the side), but usually look different. See the RadioButton section. Note that, due to GTK+'s theming system, the appearance of these widgets will vary. In the case of checkboxes and radio buttons, they may vary considerably. Button Constructors There are two ways to create a Button. You can specify a label string in the Gtk::Button constructor, or set it later with set_label(). To define an accelerator key for keyboard navigation, place an underscore before one of the label's characters and specify true for the optional mnemonic parameter. For instance: Gtk::Button* pButton = new Gtk::Button("_Something", true); Wherever possible you should use Stock items, to ensure consistency with other applications, and to improve the appearance of your applications by using icons. For instance, Gtk::Button* pButton = new Gtk::Button(Gtk::Stock::OK); This will use standard text, in all languages, with standard keyboard accelerators, with a standard icon. Gtk::Button is also a container so you could put any other widget, such as a Gtk::Image into it. Reference Example This example creates a button with a picture and a label.
buttons example
Source Code File: buttons.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONS_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONS_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/button.h> class Buttons : public Gtk::Window { public: Buttons(); virtual ~Buttons(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Button m_button; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONS_H File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "buttons.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Buttons buttons; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(buttons); } File: buttons.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "buttons.h" #include <iostream> Buttons::Buttons() { m_button.add_pixlabel("info.xpm", "cool button"); set_title("Pixmap'd buttons!"); set_border_width(10); m_button.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &Buttons::on_button_clicked) ); add(m_button); show_all_children(); } Buttons::~Buttons() { } void Buttons::on_button_clicked() { std::cout << "The Button was clicked." << std::endl; } Signals The Gtk::Button widget has the following signals, but most of the time you will just handle the clicked signal: pressed Emitted when the button is pressed. released Emitted when the button is released. clicked Emitted when the button is pressed and released. enter Emitted when the mouse pointer moves over the button's window. leave Emitted when the mouse pointer leaves the button's window. ToggleButton ToggleButtons are like normal Buttons, but when clicked they remain activated, or pressed, until clicked again. To retrieve the state of the ToggleButton, you can use the get_active() method. This returns true if the button is "down". You can also set the toggle button's state, with set_active(). Note that, if you do this, and the state actually changes, it causes the "clicked" signal to be emitted. This is usually what you want. You can use the toggled() method to toggle the button, rather than forcing it to be up or down: This switches the button's state, and causes the toggled signal to be emitted. Gtk::ToggleButton is most useful as a base class for the Gtk::CheckButton and Gtk::RadioButton classes. Reference CheckButton Gtk::CheckButton inherits from Gtk::ToggleButton. The only real difference between the two is Gtk::CheckButton's appearance. You can check, set, and toggle a checkbox using the same member methods as for Gtk::ToggleButton. Reference Example
CheckButton
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONS_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONS_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/checkbutton.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::CheckButton m_button; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONS_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_button("something") { set_title("checkbutton example"); set_border_width(10); m_button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked) ); add(m_button); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked() { std::cout << "The Button was clicked: state=" << (m_button.get_active() ? "true" : "false") << std::endl; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } RadioButton Like checkboxes, radio buttons also inherit from Gtk::ToggleButton, but these work in groups, and only one RadioButton in a group can be selected at any one time. Groups There are two ways to set up a group of radio buttons. The first way is to create the buttons, and set up their groups afterwards. Only the first two constructors are used. In the following example, we make a new window class called RadioButtons, and then put three radio buttons in it: class RadioButtons : public Gtk::Window { public: RadioButtons(); protected: Gtk::RadioButton m_rb1, m_rb2, m_rb3; }; RadioButtons::RadioButtons() : m_rb1("button1"), m_rb2("button2"), m_rb3("button3") { Gtk::RadioButton::Group group = m_rb1.get_group(); m_rb2.set_group(group); m_rb3.set_group(group); } We told gtkmm to put all three RadioButtons in the same group by obtaining the group with get_group() and using set_group() to tell the other RadioButtons to share that group. Note that you can't just do m_rb2.set_group(m_rb1.get_group()); //doesn't work because the group is modified by set_group() and therefore non-const. The second way to set up radio buttons is to make a group first, and then add radio buttons to it. Here's an example: class RadioButtons : public Gtk::Window { public: RadioButtons(); }; RadioButtons::RadioButtons() { Gtk::RadioButton::Group group; Gtk::RadioButton *m_rb1 = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::RadioButton(group,"button1")); Gtk::RadioButton *m_rb2 = manage( new Gtk::RadioButton(group,"button2")); Gtk::RadioButton *m_rb3 = manage( new Gtk::RadioButton(group,"button3")); } We made a new group by simply declaring a variable, group, of type Gtk::RadioButton::Group. Then we made three radio buttons, using a constructor to make each of them part of group. Methods RadioButtons are "off" when created; this means that when you first make a group of them, they will all be off. Don't forget to turn one of them on using set_active(): Reference Example The following example demonstrates the use of RadioButtons:
RadioButton
Source Code File: radiobuttons.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_RADIOBUTTONS_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_RADIOBUTTONS_H #include <gtkmm/box.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/radiobutton.h> #include <gtkmm/separator.h> class RadioButtons : public Gtk::Window { public: RadioButtons(); virtual ~RadioButtons(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_Box_Top, m_Box1, m_Box2; Gtk::RadioButton m_RadioButton1, m_RadioButton2, m_RadioButton3; Gtk::Separator m_Separator; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_RADIOBUTTONS_H File: radiobuttons.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "radiobuttons.h" RadioButtons::RadioButtons() : m_Box_Top(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Box1(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 10), m_Box2(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 10), m_RadioButton1("button1"), m_RadioButton2("button2"), m_RadioButton3("button3"), m_Button_Close("close") { // Set title and border of the window set_title("radio buttons"); set_border_width(0); // Put radio buttons 2 and 3 in the same group as 1: Gtk::RadioButton::Group group = m_RadioButton1.get_group(); m_RadioButton2.set_group(group); m_RadioButton3.set_group(group); // Add outer box to the window (because the window // can only contain a single widget) add(m_Box_Top); //Put the inner boxes and the separator in the outer box: m_Box_Top.pack_start(m_Box1); m_Box_Top.pack_start(m_Separator); m_Box_Top.pack_start(m_Box2); // Set the inner boxes' borders m_Box2.set_border_width(10); m_Box1.set_border_width(10); // Put the radio buttons in Box1: m_Box1.pack_start(m_RadioButton1); m_Box1.pack_start(m_RadioButton2); m_Box1.pack_start(m_RadioButton3); // Set the second button active m_RadioButton2.set_active(); // Put Close button in Box2: m_Box2.pack_start(m_Button_Close); // Make the button the default widget m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); m_Button_Close.grab_default(); // Connect the clicked signal of the button to // RadioButtons::on_button_clicked() m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &RadioButtons::on_button_clicked) ); // Show all children of the window show_all_children(); } RadioButtons::~RadioButtons() { } void RadioButtons::on_button_clicked() { hide(); //to close the application. } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "radiobuttons.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); RadioButtons buttons; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(buttons); } Range Widgets Gtk::Scale and Gtk::Scrollbar both inherit from Gtk::Range and share much functionality. They contain a "trough" and a "slider" (sometimes called a "thumbwheel" in other GUI environments). Dragging the slider with the pointer moves it within the trough, while clicking in the trough advances the slider towards the location of the click, either completely, or by a designated amount, depending on which mouse button is used. This should be familiar scrollbar behaviour. As will be explained in the Adjustment section, all Range widgets are associated with a Adjustment object. To change the lower, upper, and current values used by the widget you need to use the methods of its Adjustment, which you can get with the get_adjustment() method. The Range widgets' default constructors create an Adjustment automatically, or you can specify an existing Adjustment, maybe to share it with another widget. See the Adjustments section for further details. Reference Scrollbar Widgets These are standard scrollbars. They should be used only to scroll another widget, such as, a Gtk::Entry, or a Gtk::Viewport, though it's usually easier to use the Gtk::ScrolledWindow widget in most cases. The orientation of a Gtk::Scrollbar can be either horizontal or vertical. Reference Scale Widgets Gtk::Scale widgets (or "sliders") allow the user to visually select and manipulate a value within a specific range. You might use one, for instance, to adjust the magnification level on a zoomed preview of a picture, or to control the brightness of a colour, or to specify the number of minutes of inactivity before a screensaver takes over the screen. As with Scrollbars, the orientation can be either horizontal or vertical. The default constructor creates an Adjustment with all of its values set to 0.0. This isn't useful so you will need to set some Adjustment details to get meaningful behaviour. Useful methods Scale widgets can display their current value as a number next to the trough. By default they show the value, but you can change this with the set_draw_value() method. The value displayed by a scale widget is rounded to one decimal point by default, as is the value field in its Gtk::Adjustment. You can change this with the set_digits() method. Also, the value can be drawn in different positions relative to the trough, specified by the set_value_pos() method. Reference Update Policies The update policy of a Range widget defines at what points during user interaction it will change the value field of its Gtk::Adjustment and emit the value_changed signal. The update policies, set with the set_update_policy() method, are: Gtk::UPDATE_CONTINUOUS - This is the default. The value_changed signal is emitted continuously, i.e. whenever the slider is moved by even the tiniest amount. Gtk::UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS - The value_changed signal is only emitted once the slider has stopped moving and the user has released the mouse button. Gtk::UPDATE_DELAYED - The value_changed signal is emitted when the user releases the mouse button, or if the slider stops moving for a short period of time. Example This example displays a window with three range widgets all connected to the same adjustment, along with a couple of controls for adjusting some of the parameters mentioned above and in the section on adjustments, so you can see how they affect the way these widgets work for the user.
Range Widgets
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_RANGEWIDGETS_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_RANGEWIDGETS_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_checkbutton_toggled(); void on_combo_position(); void on_adjustment1_value_changed(); void on_adjustment2_value_changed(); void on_button_quit(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox_Top, m_VBox2, m_VBox_HScale; Gtk::Box m_HBox_Scales, m_HBox_Combo, m_HBox_Digits, m_HBox_PageSize; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Adjustment> m_adjustment, m_adjustment_digits, m_adjustment_pagesize; Gtk::Scale m_VScale; Gtk::Scale m_HScale, m_Scale_Digits, m_Scale_PageSize; Gtk::Separator m_Separator; Gtk::CheckButton m_CheckButton; Gtk::Scrollbar m_Scrollbar; //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_position_type); add(m_col_title); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Gtk::PositionType> m_col_position_type; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_title; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //Child widgets: Gtk::ComboBox m_ComboBox_Position; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModel; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_RANGEWIDGETS_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox_Top(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 0), m_VBox2(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 20), m_VBox_HScale(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 10), m_HBox_Scales(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 10), m_HBox_Combo(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 10), m_HBox_Digits(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 10), m_HBox_PageSize(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 10), // Value, lower, upper, step_increment, page_increment, page_size: // Note that the page_size value only makes a difference for // scrollbar widgets, and the highest value you'll get is actually // (upper - page_size). m_adjustment( Gtk::Adjustment::create(0.0, 0.0, 101.0, 0.1, 1.0, 1.0) ), m_adjustment_digits( Gtk::Adjustment::create(1.0, 0.0, 5.0, 1.0, 2.0) ), m_adjustment_pagesize( Gtk::Adjustment::create(1.0, 1.0, 101.0) ), m_VScale(m_adjustment, Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_HScale(m_adjustment, Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL), m_Scale_Digits(m_adjustment_digits), m_Scale_PageSize(m_adjustment_pagesize), // A checkbutton to control whether the value is displayed or not: m_CheckButton("Display value on scale widgets", 0), // Reuse the same adjustment again. // Notice how this causes the scales to always be updated // continuously when the scrollbar is moved. m_Scrollbar(m_adjustment), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("range controls"); set_default_size(300, 350); //VScale: m_VScale.set_digits(1); m_VScale.set_value_pos(Gtk::POS_TOP); m_VScale.set_draw_value(); m_VScale.set_inverted(); // highest value at top //HScale: m_HScale.set_digits(1); m_HScale.set_value_pos(Gtk::POS_TOP); m_HScale.set_draw_value(); add(m_VBox_Top); m_VBox_Top.pack_start(m_VBox2); m_VBox2.set_border_width(10); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_HBox_Scales); //Put VScale and HScale (above scrollbar) side-by-side. m_HBox_Scales.pack_start(m_VScale); m_HBox_Scales.pack_start(m_VBox_HScale); m_VBox_HScale.pack_start(m_HScale); //Scrollbar: m_VBox_HScale.pack_start(m_Scrollbar); //CheckButton: m_CheckButton.set_active(); m_CheckButton.signal_toggled().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_toggled) ); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_CheckButton, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Position ComboBox: //Create the Tree model: m_refTreeModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); m_ComboBox_Position.set_model(m_refTreeModel); m_ComboBox_Position.pack_start(m_Columns.m_col_title); //Fill the ComboBox's Tree Model: Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_position_type] = Gtk::POS_TOP; row[m_Columns.m_col_title] = "Top"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_position_type] = Gtk::POS_BOTTOM; row[m_Columns.m_col_title] = "Bottom"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_position_type] = Gtk::POS_LEFT; row[m_Columns.m_col_title] = "Left"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_position_type] = Gtk::POS_RIGHT; row[m_Columns.m_col_title] = "Right"; m_VBox2.pack_start(m_HBox_Combo, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_HBox_Combo.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("Scale Value Position:", 0)), Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_HBox_Combo.pack_start(m_ComboBox_Position); m_ComboBox_Position.signal_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_position) ); m_ComboBox_Position.set_active(0); // Top //Digits: m_HBox_Digits.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("Scale Digits:", 0)), Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Scale_Digits.set_digits(0); m_adjustment_digits->signal_value_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_adjustment1_value_changed)); m_HBox_Digits.pack_start(m_Scale_Digits); //Page Size: m_HBox_PageSize.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("Scrollbar Page Size:", 0)), Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Scale_PageSize.set_digits(0); m_adjustment_pagesize->signal_value_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_adjustment2_value_changed)); m_HBox_PageSize.pack_start(m_Scale_PageSize); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_HBox_Digits, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_HBox_PageSize, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox_Top.pack_start(m_Separator, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox_Top.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Quit.set_can_default(); m_Button_Quit.grab_default(); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit)); m_Button_Quit.set_border_width(10); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_toggled() { m_VScale.set_draw_value(m_CheckButton.get_active()); m_HScale.set_draw_value(m_CheckButton.get_active()); } void ExampleWindow::on_combo_position() { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_ComboBox_Position.get_active(); if(!iter) return; Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; if(!row) return; const Gtk::PositionType postype = row[m_Columns.m_col_position_type]; m_VScale.set_value_pos(postype); m_HScale.set_value_pos(postype); } void ExampleWindow::on_adjustment1_value_changed() { const double val = m_adjustment_digits->get_value(); m_VScale.set_digits((int)val); m_HScale.set_digits((int)val); } void ExampleWindow::on_adjustment2_value_changed() { const double val = m_adjustment_pagesize->get_value(); m_adjustment->set_page_size(val); m_adjustment->set_page_increment(val); // Note that we don't have to emit the "changed" signal // because gtkmm does this for us. } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Miscellaneous Widgets Label Labels are the main method of placing non-editable text in windows, for instance to place a title next to a Entry widget. You can specify the text in the constructor, or later with the set_text() or set_markup() methods. The width of the label will be adjusted automatically. You can produce multi-line labels by putting line breaks ("\n") in the label string. The label text can be justified using the set_justify() method. The widget is also capable of word-wrapping, which can be activated with set_line_wrap(). Gtk::Label support some simple formatting, for instance allowing you to make some text bold, colored, or larger. You can do this by providing a string to set_markup(), using the Pango Markup syntax. For instance, <b>bold text</b> and <s>strikethrough text</s> . Reference Example Below is a short example to illustrate these functions. This example makes use of the Frame widget to better demonstrate the label styles. (The Frame widget is explained in the Frame section.)
Label
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_HBox; Gtk::Box m_VBox, m_VBox2; Gtk::Frame m_Frame_Normal, m_Frame_Multi, m_Frame_Left, m_Frame_Right, m_Frame_LineWrapped, m_Frame_FilledWrapped, m_Frame_Underlined; Gtk::Label m_Label_Normal, m_Label_Multi, m_Label_Left, m_Label_Right, m_Label_LineWrapped, m_Label_FilledWrapped, m_Label_Underlined; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_HBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 5), m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 5), m_VBox2(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 5), m_Frame_Normal("Normal Label"), m_Frame_Multi("Multi-line Label"), m_Frame_Left("Left Justified Label"), m_Frame_Right("Right Justified Label"), m_Frame_LineWrapped("Line wrapped label"), m_Frame_FilledWrapped("Filled, wrapped label"), m_Frame_Underlined("Underlined label"), m_Label_Normal("_This is a Normal label", true), m_Label_Multi("This is a Multi-line label.\nSecond line\nThird line"), m_Label_Left("This is a Left-Justified\nMulti-line label.\nThird line"), m_Label_Right("This is a Right-Justified\nMulti-line label.\nThird line"), m_Label_Underlined("This label is underlined!\n" "This one is underlined in quite a funky fashion") { set_title("Label"); set_border_width(5); add(m_HBox); m_HBox.pack_start(m_VBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Frame_Normal.add(m_Label_Normal); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Frame_Normal, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Frame_Multi.add(m_Label_Multi); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Frame_Multi, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Label_Left.set_justify(Gtk::JUSTIFY_LEFT); m_Frame_Left.add(m_Label_Left); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Frame_Left, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Label_Right.set_justify(Gtk::JUSTIFY_RIGHT); m_Frame_Right.add(m_Label_Right); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Frame_Right, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_HBox.pack_start(m_VBox2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Label_LineWrapped.set_text( "This is an example of a line-wrapped label. It " /* add a big space to the next line to test spacing */ "should not be taking up the entire " "width allocated to it, but automatically " "wraps the words to fit. " "The time has come, for all good men, to come to " "the aid of their party. " "The sixth sheik's six sheep's sick.\n" " It supports multiple paragraphs correctly, " "and correctly adds " "many extra spaces. "); m_Label_LineWrapped.set_line_wrap(); m_Frame_LineWrapped.add(m_Label_LineWrapped); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_Frame_LineWrapped, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Label_FilledWrapped.set_text( "This is an example of a line-wrapped, filled label. " "It should be taking " "up the entire width allocated to it. " "Here is a sentence to prove " "my point. Here is another sentence. " "Here comes the sun, do de do de do.\n" " This is a new paragraph.\n" " This is another newer, longer, better " "paragraph. It is coming to an end, " "unfortunately."); m_Label_FilledWrapped.set_justify(Gtk::JUSTIFY_FILL); m_Label_FilledWrapped.set_line_wrap(); m_Frame_FilledWrapped.add(m_Label_FilledWrapped); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_Frame_FilledWrapped, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Label_Underlined.set_justify(Gtk::JUSTIFY_LEFT); m_Label_Underlined.set_pattern ( "_________________________ _ _________ _ ______" " __ _______ ___"); m_Frame_Underlined.add(m_Label_Underlined); m_VBox2.pack_start(m_Frame_Underlined, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Entry Simple Use Entry widgets allow the user to enter text. You can change the contents with the set_text() method, and read the current contents with the get_text() method. Occasionally you might want to make an Entry widget read-only. This can be done by passing false to the set_editable() method. For the input of passwords, passphrases and other information you don't want echoed on the screen, calling set_visibility() with false will cause the text to be hidden. You might want to be notified whenever the user types in a text entry widget. Gtk::Entry provides two signals, activate and changed, for this purpose. activate is emitted when the user presses the Enter key in a text-entry widget; changed is emitted when the text in the widget changes. You can use these, for instance, to validate or filter the text the user types. Moving the keyboard focus to another widget may also signal that the user has finished entering text. The focus_out_event signal that Gtk::Entry inherits from Gtk::Widget can notify you when that happens. The ComboBox with an Entry section contains example programs that use these signals. If you pass true to the set_activates_default() method, pressing Enter in the Gtk::Entry will activate the default widget for the window containing the Gtk::Entry. This is especially useful in dialog boxes. The default widget is usually one of the dialog buttons, which e.g. will close the dialog box. To set a widget as the default widget, use Gtk::Widget::set_can_default() and Gtk::Widget::grab_default(). Reference Simple Entry Example This example uses Gtk::Entry. It also has two CheckButtons, with which you can toggle the editable and visible flags.
Entry
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_checkbox_editable_toggled(); void on_checkbox_visibility_toggled(); void on_button_close(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_HBox; Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Entry m_Entry; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; Gtk::CheckButton m_CheckButton_Editable, m_CheckButton_Visible; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Close("Close"), m_CheckButton_Editable("Editable"), m_CheckButton_Visible("Visible") { set_size_request(200, 100); set_title("Gtk::Entry"); add(m_VBox); m_Entry.set_max_length(50); m_Entry.set_text("hello"); m_Entry.set_text(m_Entry.get_text() + " world"); m_Entry.select_region(0, m_Entry.get_text_length()); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Entry); // Note that add() can also be used instead of pack_xxx() m_VBox.add(m_HBox); m_HBox.pack_start(m_CheckButton_Editable); m_CheckButton_Editable.signal_toggled().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbox_editable_toggled) ); m_CheckButton_Editable.set_active(true); m_HBox.pack_start(m_CheckButton_Visible); m_CheckButton_Visible.signal_toggled().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbox_visibility_toggled) ); m_CheckButton_Visible.set_active(true); m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close) ); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Button_Close); m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); m_Button_Close.grab_default(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbox_editable_toggled() { m_Entry.set_editable(m_CheckButton_Editable.get_active()); } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbox_visibility_toggled() { m_Entry.set_visibility(m_CheckButton_Visible.get_active()); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Entry Completion A Entry widget can offer a drop-down list of pre-existing choices based on the first few characters typed by the user. For instance, a search dialog could suggest text from previous searches. To enable this functionality, you must create a EntryCompletion object, and provide it to the Entry widget via the set_completion() method. The EntryCompletion may use a TreeModel containing possible entries, specified with set_model(). You should then call set_text_column() to specify which of your model columns should be used to match possible text entries. Alternatively, if a complete list of possible entries would be too large or too inconvenient to generate, a callback slot may instead be specified with set_match_func(). This is also useful if you wish to match on a part of the string other than the start. Reference Entry Completion Example This example creates a Gtk::EntryCompletion and associates it with a Gtk::Entry widget. The completion uses a Gtk::TreeModel of possible entries, and some additional actions.
Entry Completion
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_close(); void on_completion_action_activated(int index); //See the comment in the implementation: //bool on_completion_match(const Glib::ustring& key, const Gtk::TreeModel::const_iterator& iter); //Tree model columns, for the EntryCompletion's filter model: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<unsigned int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; typedef std::map<int, Glib::ustring> type_actions_map; type_actions_map m_CompletionActions; //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_HBox; Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Entry m_Entry; Gtk::Label m_Label; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label("Press a or b to see a list of possible completions and actions."), m_Button_Close("Close") { //set_size_request(200, 100); set_title("Gtk::EntryCompletion"); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Entry, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Label, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET); m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close) ); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Button_Close, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); m_Button_Close.grab_default(); //Add an EntryCompletion: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::EntryCompletion> completion = Gtk::EntryCompletion::create(); m_Entry.set_completion(completion); //Create and fill the completion's filter model Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> refCompletionModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); completion->set_model(refCompletionModel); // For more complex comparisons, use a filter match callback, like this. // See the comment below for more details: //completion->set_match_func( sigc::mem_fun(*this, //&ExampleWindow::on_completion_match) ); //Fill the TreeView's model Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(refCompletionModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Alan Zebedee"; row = *(refCompletionModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Adrian Boo"; row = *(refCompletionModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Bob McRoberts"; row = *(refCompletionModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 4; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Bob McBob"; //Tell the completion what model column to use to //- look for a match (when we use the default matching, instead of // set_match_func(). //- display text in the entry when a match is found. completion->set_text_column(m_Columns.m_col_name); //Add actions to the completion: //These are just extra items shown at the bottom of the list of possible //completions. //Remember them for later. m_CompletionActions[0] = "Use Wizard"; m_CompletionActions[1] = "Browse for Filename"; for(type_actions_map::iterator iter = m_CompletionActions.begin(); iter != m_CompletionActions.end(); ++iter) { int position = iter->first; Glib::ustring title = iter->second; completion->insert_action_text(title, position); } completion->signal_action_activated().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_completion_action_activated) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } /* You can do more complex matching with a handler like this. * For instance, you could check for substrings inside the string instead of the start, * or you could look for the key in extra model columns as well as the model column that will be displayed. * The code here is not actually more complex - it's a reimplementation of the default behaviour. * bool ExampleWindow::on_completion_match(const Glib::ustring& key, const Gtk::TreeModel::const_iterator& iter) { if(iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; Glib::ustring::size_type key_length = key.size(); Glib::ustring filter_string = row[m_Columns.m_col_name]; Glib::ustring filter_string_start = filter_string.substr(0, key_length); //The key is lower-case, even if the user input is not. filter_string_start = filter_string_start.lowercase(); if(key == filter_string_start) return true; //A match was found. } return false; //No match. } */ void ExampleWindow::on_completion_action_activated(int index) { type_actions_map::iterator iter = m_CompletionActions.find(index); if(iter != m_CompletionActions.end()) //If it's in the map { Glib::ustring title = iter->second; std::cout << "Action selected: " << title << std::endl; } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Entry Icons An Entry widget can show an icon at the start or end of the text area. The icon can be specifed by methods such as set_icon_from_pixbuf() or set_icon_from_stock(). An application can respond to the user pressing the icon by handling the signal_icon_press signal. Entry Icon Example This example shows a Gtk::Entry widget with a stock search icon, and prints text to the terminal when the icon is pressed.
Entry with Icon
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_icon_pressed(Gtk::EntryIconPosition icon_pos, const GdkEventButton* event); void on_button_close(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Entry m_Entry; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Close("Close") { set_title("Gtk::Entry"); add(m_VBox); m_Entry.set_max_length(50); m_Entry.set_text("Hello world"); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Entry, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Entry.set_icon_from_stock(Gtk::Stock::FIND); m_Entry.signal_icon_press().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_icon_pressed) ); m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close) ); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Button_Close, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); m_Button_Close.grab_default(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_icon_pressed(Gtk::EntryIconPosition /* icon_pos */, const GdkEventButton* /* event */) { std::cout << "Icon pressed." << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Entry Progress An Entry widget can show a progress bar inside the text area, under the entered text. The progress bar will be shown if the set_progress_fraction() or set_progress_pulse_step() methods are called. Entry Progress Example This example shows a Gtk::Entry widget with a progress bar.
Entry with Progress Bar
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: bool on_timeout(); void on_button_close(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Entry m_Entry; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Close("Close") { set_title("Gtk::Entry"); add(m_VBox); m_Entry.set_max_length(50); m_Entry.set_text("Hello world"); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Entry, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Change the progress fraction every 0.1 second: Glib::signal_timeout().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_timeout), 100 ); m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close) ); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Button_Close, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); m_Button_Close.grab_default(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } bool ExampleWindow::on_timeout() { static double fraction = 0; m_Entry.set_progress_fraction(fraction); fraction += 0.01; if(fraction > 1) fraction = 0; return true; } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } SpinButton A SpinButton allows the user to select a value from a range of numeric values. It has an Entry widget with up and down arrow buttons at the side. Clicking the buttons causes the value to 'spin' up and down across the range of possible values. The Entry widget may also be used to enter a value directly. The value can have an adjustable number of decimal places, and the step size is configurable. SpinButtons have an 'auto-repeat' feature as well: holding down one of the arrows can optionally cause the value to change more quickly the longer the arrow is held down. SpinButtons use an Adjustment object to hold information about the range of values. These Adjustment attributes are used by the Spin Button like so: value: value for the Spin Button lower: lower range value upper: upper range value step_increment: value to increment/decrement when pressing mouse button 1 on a button page_increment: value to increment/decrement when pressing mouse button 2 on a button page_size: unused Additionally, mouse button 3 can be used to jump directly to the upper or lower values. The SpinButton can create a default Adjustment, which you can access via the get_adjustment() method, or you can specify an existing Adjustment in the constructor. Methods The number of decimal places can be altered using the set_digits() method. You can set the spinbutton's value using the set_value() method, and retrieve it with get_value(). The spin() method 'spins' the SpinButton, as if one of its arrows had been clicked. You need to specify a Gtk::SpinType to specify the direction or new position. To prevent the user from typing non-numeric characters into the entry box, pass true to the set_numeric() method. To make the SpinButton 'wrap' between its upper and lower bounds, use the set_wrap() method. To force it to snap to the nearest step_increment, use set_snap_to_ticks(). You can modify the update policy using the set_update_policy() method, specifying either Gtk::UPDATE_ALWAYS or Gtk::UPDATE_IF_VALID. Gtk::UPDATE_ALWAYS causes the SpinButton to ignore errors encountered while converting the text in the entry box to a numeric value. This setting also therefore allows the SpinButton to accept non-numeric values. You can force an immediate update using the update() method. Reference Example Here's an example of a SpinButton in action:
SpinButton
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_checkbutton_snap(); void on_checkbutton_numeric(); void on_spinbutton_digits_changed(); void on_button_close(); enum enumValueFormats { VALUE_FORMAT_INT, VALUE_FORMAT_FLOAT }; void on_button_getvalue(enumValueFormats display); //Child widgets: Gtk::Frame m_Frame_NotAccelerated, m_Frame_Accelerated; Gtk::Box m_HBox_NotAccelerated, m_HBox_Accelerated, m_HBox_Buttons; Gtk::Box m_VBox_Main, m_VBox, m_VBox_Day, m_VBox_Month, m_VBox_Year, m_VBox_Accelerated, m_VBox_Value, m_VBox_Digits; Gtk::Label m_Label_Day, m_Label_Month, m_Label_Year, m_Label_Value, m_Label_Digits, m_Label_ShowValue; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Adjustment> m_adjustment_day, m_adjustment_month, m_adjustment_year, m_adjustment_value, m_adjustment_digits; Gtk::SpinButton m_SpinButton_Day, m_SpinButton_Month, m_SpinButton_Year, m_SpinButton_Value, m_SpinButton_Digits; Gtk::CheckButton m_CheckButton_Snap, m_CheckButton_Numeric; Gtk::Button m_Button_Int, m_Button_Float, m_Button_Close; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> #include <cstdio> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Frame_NotAccelerated("Not accelerated"), m_Frame_Accelerated("Accelerated"), m_VBox_Main(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 5), m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox_Day(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox_Month(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox_Year(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox_Accelerated(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox_Value(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox_Digits(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label_Day("Day: "), m_Label_Month("Month: "), m_Label_Year("Year: "), m_Label_Value("Value: "), m_Label_Digits("Digits: "), m_adjustment_day( Gtk::Adjustment::create(1.0, 1.0, 31.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0) ), m_adjustment_month( Gtk::Adjustment::create(1.0, 1.0, 12.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0) ), m_adjustment_year( Gtk::Adjustment::create(2012.0, 1.0, 2200.0, 1.0, 100.0, 0.0) ), m_adjustment_value( Gtk::Adjustment::create(0.0, -10000.0, 10000.0, 0.5, 100.0, 0.0) ), m_adjustment_digits( Gtk::Adjustment::create(2.0, 1.0, 5.0, 1.0, 1.0, 0.0) ), m_SpinButton_Day(m_adjustment_day), m_SpinButton_Month(m_adjustment_month), m_SpinButton_Year(m_adjustment_year), m_SpinButton_Value(m_adjustment_value, 1.0, 2), m_SpinButton_Digits(m_adjustment_digits), m_CheckButton_Snap("Snap to 0.5-ticks"), m_CheckButton_Numeric("Numeric only input mode"), m_Button_Int("Value as Int"), m_Button_Float("Value as Float"), m_Button_Close("Close") { set_title("SpinButton"); m_VBox_Main.set_border_width(10); add(m_VBox_Main); m_VBox_Main.pack_start(m_Frame_NotAccelerated); m_VBox.set_border_width(5); m_Frame_NotAccelerated.add(m_VBox); /* Day, month, year spinners */ m_VBox.pack_start(m_HBox_NotAccelerated, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_Label_Day.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_VBox_Day.pack_start(m_Label_Day); m_SpinButton_Day.set_wrap(); m_VBox_Day.pack_start(m_SpinButton_Day); m_HBox_NotAccelerated.pack_start(m_VBox_Day, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_Label_Month.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_VBox_Month.pack_start(m_Label_Month); m_SpinButton_Month.set_wrap(); m_VBox_Month.pack_start(m_SpinButton_Month); m_HBox_NotAccelerated.pack_start(m_VBox_Month, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_Label_Year.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_VBox_Year.pack_start(m_Label_Year); m_SpinButton_Year.set_wrap(); m_SpinButton_Year.set_size_request(55, -1); m_VBox_Year.pack_start(m_SpinButton_Year); m_HBox_NotAccelerated.pack_start(m_VBox_Year, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); //Accelerated: m_VBox_Main.pack_start(m_Frame_Accelerated); m_VBox_Accelerated.set_border_width(5); m_Frame_Accelerated.add(m_VBox_Accelerated); m_VBox_Accelerated.pack_start(m_HBox_Accelerated, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_HBox_Accelerated.pack_start(m_VBox_Value, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_Label_Value.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_VBox_Value.pack_start(m_Label_Value); m_SpinButton_Value.set_wrap(); m_SpinButton_Value.set_size_request(100, -1); m_VBox_Value.pack_start(m_SpinButton_Value); m_HBox_Accelerated.pack_start(m_VBox_Digits, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_Label_Digits.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_VBox_Digits.pack_start(m_Label_Digits); m_SpinButton_Digits.set_wrap(); m_adjustment_digits->signal_value_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_spinbutton_digits_changed) ); m_VBox_Digits.pack_start(m_SpinButton_Digits); //CheckButtons: m_VBox_Accelerated.pack_start(m_CheckButton_Snap); m_CheckButton_Snap.set_active(); m_CheckButton_Snap.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_snap) ); m_VBox_Accelerated.pack_start(m_CheckButton_Numeric); m_CheckButton_Numeric.set_active(); m_CheckButton_Numeric.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_numeric) ); //Buttons: m_VBox_Accelerated.pack_start (m_HBox_Buttons, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); m_Button_Int.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::bind( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_getvalue), VALUE_FORMAT_INT) ); m_HBox_Buttons.pack_start(m_Button_Int, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_Button_Float.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::bind( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_getvalue), VALUE_FORMAT_FLOAT) ); m_HBox_Buttons.pack_start(m_Button_Float, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_VBox_Accelerated.pack_start(m_Label_ShowValue); m_Label_ShowValue.set_text("0"); //Close button: m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close) ); m_VBox_Main.pack_start(m_Button_Close, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_snap() { m_SpinButton_Value.set_snap_to_ticks( m_CheckButton_Snap.get_active() ); } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_numeric() { m_SpinButton_Value.set_numeric( m_CheckButton_Numeric.get_active() ); } void ExampleWindow::on_spinbutton_digits_changed() { m_SpinButton_Value.set_digits( m_SpinButton_Digits.get_value_as_int() ); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_getvalue(enumValueFormats display) { gchar buf[32]; if (display == VALUE_FORMAT_INT) sprintf (buf, "%d", m_SpinButton_Value.get_value_as_int()); else sprintf (buf, "%0.*f", m_SpinButton_Value.get_digits(), m_SpinButton_Value.get_value()); m_Label_ShowValue.set_text(buf); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } ProgressBar Progress bars are used to show the status of an ongoing operation. For instance, a ProgressBar can show how much of a task has been completed. To change the value shown, use the set_fraction() method, passing a double between 0 and 1 to provide the new percentage. where percentage is a number, from 0 to 1, indicating what fraction of the bar should be filled. A ProgressBaris horizontal and left-to-right by default, but you can change it to a vertical progress bar by using the set_orientation() method. Reference Activity Mode Besides indicating the amount of progress that has occured, the progress bar can also be used to indicate that there is some activity; this is done by placing the progress bar in activity mode. In this mode, the progress bar displays a small rectangle which moves back and forth. Activity mode is useful in situations where the progress of an operation cannot be calculated as a value range (e.g., receiving a file of unknown length). To do this, you need to call the pulse() method at regular intervals. You can also choose the step size, with the set_pulse_step() method. When in continuous mode, the progress bar can also display a configurable text string within its trough, using the set_text() method. Example
ProgressBar
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_checkbutton_text(); void on_checkbutton_activity(); void on_checkbutton_inverted(); virtual bool on_timeout(); void on_button_close(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Alignment m_Alignment; Gtk::Grid m_Grid; Gtk::ProgressBar m_ProgressBar; Gtk::Separator m_Separator; Gtk::CheckButton m_CheckButton_Text, m_CheckButton_Activity, m_CheckButton_Inverted; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; int m_connection_id_timeout; bool m_bActivityMode; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 5), m_Alignment(0.5, 0.5, 0, 0), m_CheckButton_Text("Show text"), m_CheckButton_Activity("Activity mode"), m_CheckButton_Inverted("Right to Left"), m_Button_Close("Close"), m_bActivityMode(false) { set_resizable(); set_title("Gtk::ProgressBar"); m_VBox.set_border_width(10); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Alignment, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); m_Alignment.add(m_ProgressBar); m_ProgressBar.set_text("some text"); m_ProgressBar.set_show_text(false); //Add a timer callback to update the value of the progress bar: m_connection_id_timeout = Glib::signal_timeout().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_timeout), 50 ); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Separator, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Grid); m_Grid.set_row_homogeneous(true); //Add a check button to select displaying of the trough text: m_Grid.attach(m_CheckButton_Text, 0, 0, 1, 1); m_CheckButton_Text.property_margin() = 5; m_CheckButton_Text.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_text) ); //Add a check button to toggle activity mode: m_Grid.attach(m_CheckButton_Activity, 0, 1, 1, 1); m_CheckButton_Activity.property_margin() = 5; m_CheckButton_Activity.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_activity) ); //Add a check button to select growth from left to right or from right to left: m_Grid.attach(m_CheckButton_Inverted, 0, 2, 1, 1); m_CheckButton_Inverted.property_margin() = 5; m_CheckButton_Inverted.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_inverted) ); //Add a button to exit the program. m_VBox.pack_start(m_Button_Close, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close) ); m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); m_Button_Close.grab_default(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_text() { const bool show_text = m_CheckButton_Text.get_active(); m_ProgressBar.set_show_text(show_text); } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_activity() { m_bActivityMode = m_CheckButton_Activity.get_active(); if(m_bActivityMode) m_ProgressBar.pulse(); else m_ProgressBar.set_fraction(0.0); } void ExampleWindow::on_checkbutton_inverted() { const bool inverted = m_CheckButton_Inverted.get_active(); m_ProgressBar.set_inverted(inverted); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } /* Update the value of the progress bar so that we get * some movement */ bool ExampleWindow::on_timeout() { if(m_bActivityMode) m_ProgressBar.pulse(); else { double new_val = m_ProgressBar.get_fraction() + 0.01; if(new_val > 1.0) new_val = 0.0; //Set the new value: m_ProgressBar.set_fraction(new_val); } //As this is a timeout function, return true so that it //continues to get called return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } InfoBar An InfoBar may show small items of information or ask brief questions. Unlike a Dialog, it appears at the top of the current window instead of opening a new window. Its API is very similar to the Gtk::Dialog API. Reference Example
InfoBar
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_infobar_response(int response); void on_button_quit(); void on_button_clear(); void on_textbuffer_changed(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TextView m_TextView; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer> m_refTextBuffer; Gtk::InfoBar m_InfoBar; Gtk::Label m_Message_Label; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit, m_Button_Clear; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 6), m_Button_Quit(Gtk::Stock::QUIT), m_Button_Clear("Clear") { set_title("Gtk::InfoBar example"); set_border_width(6); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); // Add the message label to the InfoBar: Gtk::Container* infoBarContainer = dynamic_cast<Gtk::Container*>(m_InfoBar.get_content_area()); if (infoBarContainer) infoBarContainer->add(m_Message_Label); // Add an ok button to the InfoBar: m_InfoBar.add_button(Gtk::Stock::OK, 0); // Add the InfoBar to the vbox: m_VBox.pack_start(m_InfoBar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // Create the buffer and set it for the TextView: m_refTextBuffer = Gtk::TextBuffer::create(); m_TextView.set_buffer(m_refTextBuffer); // Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TextView); // Show the scrollbars only when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); // Add button box: m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Clear, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_spacing(6); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); // Connect signals: m_InfoBar.signal_response().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_infobar_response) ); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); m_Button_Clear.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_clear) ); m_refTextBuffer->signal_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_textbuffer_changed) ); show_all_children(); // Keep the InfoBar hidden until a message needs to be shown: m_InfoBar.hide(); // Make the clear button insensitive until text is typed in the buffer. When // the button is sensitive and it is pressed, the InfoBar is displayed with a // message. m_Button_Clear.set_sensitive(false); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_infobar_response(int) { // Clear the message and hide the info bar: m_Message_Label.set_text(""); m_InfoBar.hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_clear() { m_refTextBuffer->set_text(""); m_Message_Label.set_text("Cleared the text."); m_InfoBar.set_message_type(Gtk::MESSAGE_INFO); m_InfoBar.show(); } void ExampleWindow::on_textbuffer_changed() { m_Button_Clear.set_sensitive(m_refTextBuffer->size() > 0); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Tooltips Tooltips are the little information windows that pop up when you leave your pointer over a widget for a few seconds. Use set_tooltip_text() to set a text string as a tooltip on any Widget. Gtk::ToolItems are not Widgets, but have the same method for convenience. Gtk::Tooltip is used for more advanced tooltip usage, such as showing an image as well as text. Widget Reference Tooltip Reference Example
Tooltip
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Methods: void prepare_textview(); void connect_signals(); //Signal handlers: void on_markup_checkbutton_click(); bool on_textview_query_tooltip(int x, int y, bool keyboard_tooltip, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Tooltip>& tooltip); bool on_button_query_tooltip(int x, int y, bool keyboard_tooltip, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Tooltip>& tooltip); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_vbox; Gtk::CheckButton m_checkbutton; Gtk::Label m_label; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_scrolled_window; Gtk::TextView m_text_view; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer> m_ref_text_buffer; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextTag> m_ref_bold_tag; Gtk::Button m_button; Gtk::Window m_button_tooltip_window; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <vector> const Glib::ustring app_title = "gtkmm tooltips example"; const Glib::ustring non_markedup_tip = "A tooltip without markup."; const Glib::ustring markedup_tip = "<i>Markup</i> in a tooltip."; ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_vbox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 3), m_checkbutton("Click to alternate markup in tooltip"), m_label("A label"), m_button("Custom widget in tooltip window"), m_button_tooltip_window(Gtk::WINDOW_POPUP) { //Set up window and the top-level container: set_title(app_title); set_border_width(10); add(m_vbox); //Check button with markup in tooltip: m_checkbutton.set_tooltip_text(non_markedup_tip); m_vbox.pack_start(m_checkbutton, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Label: m_label.set_tooltip_text("Another tooltip"); m_vbox.pack_start(m_label, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Textview: prepare_textview(); //Button: // set_tooltip_window(), like set_tooltip_text(), // will call set_has_tooltip() for us. m_button.set_tooltip_window(m_button_tooltip_window); m_vbox.pack_start(m_button, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Button's custom tooltip window: m_button_tooltip_window.set_default_size(250, 30); Gtk::Label* label = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("A label in a custom tooltip window")); label->show(); m_button_tooltip_window.add(*label); connect_signals(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::prepare_textview() { Gtk::TextIter iter; std::vector< Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextTag> > tags; //Set up a scrolled window: m_scrolled_window.add(m_text_view); m_scrolled_window.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_vbox.pack_start(m_scrolled_window); //Create a text buffer with some text: m_ref_text_buffer = Gtk::TextBuffer::create(); iter = m_ref_text_buffer->end(); m_ref_text_buffer->insert(iter, "Hover over the text "); //Insert some text with a tag. //In the tooltip signal handler below, we will show a tooltip //when mouse pointer is above this tagged text. m_ref_bold_tag = m_ref_text_buffer->create_tag("bold"); m_ref_bold_tag->set_property("weight", Pango::WEIGHT_BOLD); tags.push_back(m_ref_bold_tag); iter = m_ref_text_buffer->end(); m_ref_text_buffer->insert_with_tags(iter, "in bold", tags); iter = m_ref_text_buffer->end(); m_ref_text_buffer->insert(iter, " to see its' tooltip"); m_text_view.set_buffer(m_ref_text_buffer); m_text_view.set_size_request(320, 50); //When only connecting to the query-tooltip signal, and not using any //of set_tooltip_text(), set_tooltip_markup() or set_tooltip_window(), //we need to explicitly tell GTK+ that the widget has a tooltip which //we'll show. m_text_view.set_has_tooltip(); } void ExampleWindow::connect_signals() { m_checkbutton.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_markup_checkbutton_click)); m_text_view.signal_query_tooltip().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_textview_query_tooltip)); m_button.signal_query_tooltip().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_query_tooltip)); } void ExampleWindow::on_markup_checkbutton_click() { if (m_checkbutton.get_active() == true) { m_checkbutton.set_tooltip_markup(markedup_tip); } else { m_checkbutton.set_tooltip_markup(non_markedup_tip); } } bool ExampleWindow::on_textview_query_tooltip(int x, int y, bool keyboard_tooltip, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Tooltip>& tooltip) { Gtk::TextIter iter; if (keyboard_tooltip) { int offset = m_ref_text_buffer->property_cursor_position().get_value(); iter = m_ref_text_buffer->get_iter_at_offset(offset); } else { int mouse_x, mouse_y, trailing; m_text_view.window_to_buffer_coords(Gtk::TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, x, y, mouse_x, mouse_y); m_text_view.get_iter_at_position(iter, trailing, mouse_x, mouse_y); } //Show a tooltip if the cursor or mouse pointer is over the text //with the specific tag: if (iter.has_tag(m_ref_bold_tag)) { tooltip->set_markup("<b>Information</b> attached to a text tag"); tooltip->set_icon_from_stock (Gtk::Stock::INFO, Gtk::ICON_SIZE_MENU); } else { return false; } return true; } bool ExampleWindow::on_button_query_tooltip(int, int, bool, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Tooltip>&) { //We already have a custom window ready, just return true to show it: return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Container Widgets All container widgets derive from Gtk::Container, not always directly. Some container widgets, such as Gtk::Grid can hold many child widgets, so these typically have more complex interfaces. Others, such as Gtk::Frame contain only one child widget. Single-item Containers The single-item container widgets derive from Gtk::Bin, which provides the add() and remove() methods for the child widget. Note that Gtk::Button and Gtk::Window are technically single-item containers, but we have discussed them already elsewhere. We also discuss the Gtk::Paned widget, which allows you to divide a window into two separate "panes". This widget actually contains two child widgets, but the number is fixed so it seems appropriate. Frame Frames can enclose one or a group of widgets within a box, optionally with a title. For instance, you might place a group of RadioButtons or CheckButtons in a Frame. Reference Example
Frame
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Child widgets: Gtk::Frame m_Frame; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() { /* Set some window properties */ set_title("Frame Example"); set_size_request(300, 300); /* Sets the border width of the window. */ set_border_width(10); add(m_Frame); /* Set the frames label */ m_Frame.set_label("Gtk::Frame Widget"); /* Align the label at the right of the frame */ //m_Frame.set_label_align(Gtk::ALIGN_END, Gtk::ALIGN_START); /* Set the style of the frame */ m_Frame.set_shadow_type(Gtk::SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Paned Panes divide a widget into two halves, separated by a moveable divider. The two halves (panes) can be oriented either horizontally (side by side) or vertically (one above the other). Unlike the other widgets in this section, pane widgets contain not one but two child widgets, one in each pane. Therefore, you should use add1() and add2() instead of the add() method. You can adjust the position of the divider using the set_position() method, and you will probably need to do so. Reference Example
Paned
Source Code File: messageslist.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MESSAGESLIST_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MESSAGESLIST_H #include <gtkmm.h> class MessagesList: public Gtk::ScrolledWindow { public: MessagesList(); virtual ~MessagesList(); class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_text); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_text; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; protected: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refListStore; //The Tree Model. Gtk::TreeView m_TreeView; //The Tree View. }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MESSAGESLIST_H File: messagetext.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MESSAGETEXT_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MESSAGETEXT_H #include <gtkmm.h> class MessageText : public Gtk::ScrolledWindow { public: MessageText(); virtual ~MessageText(); void insert_text(); protected: Gtk::TextView m_TextView; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MESSAGETEXT_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include "messageslist.h" #include "messagetext.h" #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Child widgets: Gtk::Paned m_VPaned; MessagesList m_MessagesList; MessageText m_MessageText; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: messagetext.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "messagetext.h" MessageText::MessageText() { set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); add(m_TextView); insert_text(); show_all_children(); } MessageText::~MessageText() { } void MessageText::insert_text() { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer> refTextBuffer = m_TextView.get_buffer(); Gtk::TextBuffer::iterator iter = refTextBuffer->get_iter_at_offset(0); refTextBuffer->insert(iter, "From: pathfinder@nasa.gov\n" "To: mom@nasa.gov\n" "Subject: Made it!\n" "\n" "We just got in this morning. The weather has been\n" "great - clear but cold, and there are lots of fun sights.\n" "Sojourner says hi. See you soon.\n" " -Path\n"); } File: messageslist.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "messageslist.h" #include <sstream> MessagesList::MessagesList() { /* Create a new scrolled window, with scrollbars only if needed */ set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); add(m_TreeView); /* create list store */ m_refListStore = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); m_TreeView.set_model(m_refListStore); /* Add some messages to the window */ for(int i = 0; i < 10; ++i) { std::ostringstream text; text << "message #" << i; Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refListStore->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_text] = text.str(); } //Add the Model's column to the View's columns: m_TreeView.append_column("Messages", m_Columns.m_col_text); show_all_children(); } MessagesList::~MessagesList() { } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VPaned(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL) { set_title ("Paned Windows"); set_border_width(10); set_default_size(450, 400); /* Add a vpaned widget to our toplevel window */ add(m_VPaned); /* Now add the contents of the two halves of the window */ m_VPaned.add1(m_MessagesList); m_VPaned.add2(m_MessageText); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } ScrolledWindow ScrolledWindow widgets create a scrollable area. You can insert any type of widget into a ScrolledWindow window, and it will be accessible regardless of its size by using the scrollbars. Note that ScrolledWindow is not a Gtk::Window despite the slightly misleading name. Scrolled windows have scrollbar policies which determine whether the Scrollbars will be displayed. The policies can be set with the set_policy() method. The policy may be one of Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC or Gtk::POLICY_ALWAYS. Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC will cause the scrolled window to display the scrollbar only if the contained widget is larger than the visible area. Gtk::POLICY_ALWAYS will cause the scrollbar to be displayed always. Reference Example Here is a simple example that packs 100 toggle buttons into a ScrolledWindow. Try resizing the window to see the scrollbars react.
ScrolledWindow
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Dialog { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_close(); //Child widgets: Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::Grid m_Grid; Gtk::Button m_Button_Close; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <cstdio> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Button_Close("Close") { set_title("Gtk::ScrolledWindow example"); set_border_width(0); set_size_request(300, 300); m_ScrolledWindow.set_border_width(10); /* the policy is one of Gtk::POLICY AUTOMATIC, or Gtk::POLICY_ALWAYS. * Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC will automatically decide whether you need * scrollbars, whereas Gtk::POLICY_ALWAYS will always leave the scrollbars * there. The first one is the horizontal scrollbar, the second, * the vertical. */ m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_ALWAYS); get_content_area()->pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); /* set the spacing to 10 on x and 10 on y */ m_Grid.set_row_spacing(10); m_Grid.set_column_spacing(10); /* pack the grid into the scrolled window */ m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_Grid); /* this simply creates a grid of toggle buttons * to demonstrate the scrolled window. */ for(int i = 0; i < 10; i++) { for(int j = 0; j < 10; j++) { char buffer[32]; sprintf(buffer, "button (%d,%d)\n", i, j); Gtk::Button* pButton = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToggleButton(buffer)); m_Grid.attach(*pButton, i, j, 1, 1); } } /* Add a "close" button to the bottom of the dialog */ m_Button_Close.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_close)); /* this makes it so the button is the default. */ m_Button_Close.set_can_default(); Gtk::Box* pBox = get_action_area(); if(pBox) pBox->pack_start(m_Button_Close); /* This grabs this button to be the default button. Simply hitting * the "Enter" key will cause this button to activate. */ m_Button_Close.grab_default(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_close() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } AspectFrame The AspectFrame widget looks like a Frame widget, but it also enforces the aspect ratio (the ratio of the width to the height) of the child widget, adding extra space if necessary. For instance, this would allow you to display a photograph without allowing the user to distort it horizontally or vertically while resizing. Reference Example The following program uses a Gtk::AspectFrame to present a drawing area whose aspect ratio will always be 2:1, no matter how the user resizes the top-level window.
AspectFrame
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Child widgets: Gtk::AspectFrame m_AspectFrame; Gtk::DrawingArea m_DrawingArea; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_AspectFrame("2x1", /* label */ Gtk::ALIGN_CENTER, /* center x */ Gtk::ALIGN_CENTER, /* center y */ 2.0, /* xsize/ysize = 2 */ false /* ignore child's aspect */) { set_title("Aspect Frame"); set_border_width(10); // Add a child widget to the aspect frame */ // Ask for a 200x200 window, but the AspectFrame will give us a 200x100 // window since we are forcing a 2x1 aspect ratio */ m_DrawingArea.set_size_request(200, 200); m_AspectFrame.add(m_DrawingArea); // Add the aspect frame to our toplevel window: add(m_AspectFrame); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Alignment The Alignment widget allows you to place a widget at a position and size relative to the size of the Alignment widget itself. For instance, it might be used to center a widget. You need to specify the Alignment's characteristics to the constructor, or to the set() method. In particular, you won't notice much effect unless you specify a number other than 1.0 for the xscale and yscale parameters, because 1.0 simply means that the child widget will expand to fill all available space. Reference Example This example right-aligns a button in a window by using an Alignment widget.
Alignment
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Alignment m_Alignment; Gtk::Button m_Button; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_END, Gtk::ALIGN_CENTER, 0.0, 0.0), m_Button("Close") { set_title("Gtk::Alignement"); set_border_width(10); set_default_size(200, 50); add(m_Alignment); m_Alignment.add(m_Button); m_Button.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } See the ProgressBar section for another example that uses an Alignment. Multiple-item widgets Multiple-item widgets inherit from Gtk::Container; just as with Gtk::Bin, you use the add() and remove() methods to add and remove contained widgets. Unlike Gtk::Bin::remove(), however, the remove() method for Gtk::Container takes an argument, specifiying which widget to remove. Packing You've probably noticed that gtkmm windows seem "elastic" - they can usually be stretched in many different ways. This is due to the widget packing system. Many GUI toolkits require you to precisely place widgets in a window, using absolute positioning, often using a visual editor. This leads to several problems: The widgets don't rearrange themselves when the window is resized. Some widgets are hidden when the window is made smaller, and lots of useless space appears when the window is made larger. It's impossible to predict the amount of space necessary for text after it has been translated to other languages, or displayed in a different font. On Unix it is also impossible to anticipate the effects of every theme and window manager. Changing the layout of a window "on the fly", to make some extra widgets appear, for instance, is complex. It requires tedious recalculation of every widget's position. gtkmm uses the packing system to solve these problems. Rather than specifying the position and size of each widget in the window, you can arrange your widgets in rows, columns, and/or tables. gtkmm can size your window automatically, based on the sizes of the widgets it contains. And the sizes of the widgets are, in turn, determined by the amount of text they contain, or the minimum and maximum sizes that you specify, and/or how you have requested that the available space should be shared between sets of widgets. You can perfect your layout by specifying padding distance and centering values for each of your widgets. gtkmm then uses all this information to resize and reposition everything sensibly and smoothly when the user manipulates the window. gtkmm arranges widgets hierarchically, using containers. A Container widget contains other widgets. Most gtkmm widgets are containers. Windows, Notebook tabs, and Buttons are all container widgets. There are two flavours of containers: single-child containers, which are all descendants of Gtk::Bin, and multiple-child containers, which are descendants of Gtk::Container. Most widgets in gtkmm are descendants of Gtk::Bin, including Gtk::Window. Yes, that's correct: a Window can contain at most one widget. How, then, can we use a window for anything useful? By placing a multiple-child container in the window. The most useful container widgets are Gtk::Grid and Gtk::Box. Gtk::Grid arranges its child widgets in rows and columns. Use attach(), attach_next_to() and add() to insert child widgets. Gtk::Box arranges its child widgets vertically or horizontally. Use pack_start() and pack_end() to insert child widgets. There are several other containers, which we will also discuss. If you've never used a packing toolkit before, it can take some getting used to. You'll probably find, however, that you don't need to rely on visual form editors quite as much as you might with other toolkits. An improved Hello World Let's take a look at a slightly improved helloworld, showing what we've learnt.
Hello World 2
Source Code File: helloworld.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_HELLOWORLD_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_HELLOWORLD_H #include <gtkmm/box.h> #include <gtkmm/button.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> class HelloWorld : public Gtk::Window { public: HelloWorld(); virtual ~HelloWorld(); protected: // Signal handlers: // Our new improved on_button_clicked(). (see below) void on_button_clicked(Glib::ustring data); // Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_box1; Gtk::Button m_button1, m_button2; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_HELLOWORLD_H File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "helloworld.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); HelloWorld helloworld; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(helloworld); } File: helloworld.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "helloworld.h" #include <iostream> HelloWorld::HelloWorld() : m_button1("Button 1"), m_button2("Button 2") { // This just sets the title of our new window. set_title("Hello Buttons!"); // sets the border width of the window. set_border_width(10); // put the box into the main window. add(m_box1); // Now when the button is clicked, we call the "on_button_clicked" function // with a pointer to "button 1" as it's argument m_button1.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::bind<Glib::ustring>( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &HelloWorld::on_button_clicked), "button 1")); // instead of gtk_container_add, we pack this button into the invisible // box, which has been packed into the window. // note that the pack_start default arguments are Gtk::EXPAND | Gtk::FILL, 0 m_box1.pack_start(m_button1); // always remember this step, this tells GTK that our preparation // for this button is complete, and it can be displayed now. m_button1.show(); // call the same signal handler with a different argument, // passing a pointer to "button 2" instead. m_button2.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::bind<-1, Glib::ustring>( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &HelloWorld::on_button_clicked), "button 2")); m_box1.pack_start(m_button2); // Show the widgets. // They will not really be shown until this Window is shown. m_button2.show(); m_box1.show(); } HelloWorld::~HelloWorld() { } // Our new improved signal handler. The data passed to this method is // printed to stdout. void HelloWorld::on_button_clicked(Glib::ustring data) { std::cout << "Hello World - " << data << " was pressed" << std::endl; } After building and running this program, try resizing the window to see the behaviour. Also, try playing with the options to pack_start() while reading the Boxes section. Boxes Most packing uses boxes as in the above example. These are invisible containers into which we can pack our widgets. When packing widgets into a horizontal box, the objects are inserted horizontally from left to right or right to left depending on whether pack_start() or pack_end() is used. In a vertical box, widgets are packed from top to bottom or vice versa. You may use any combination of boxes inside or beside other boxes to create the desired effect. Adding widgets Per-child packing options The pack_start() and pack_end() methods place widgets inside these containers. The pack_start() method will start at the top and work its way down in a Box with vertical orientation, or pack left to right in a Box with horizontal orientation. pack_end() will do the opposite, packing from bottom to top or from right to left. Using these methods allows us to right justify or left justify our widgets. We will use pack_start() in most of our examples. There are several options governing how widgets are to be packed, and this can be confusing at first. If you have difficulties then it is sometimes a good idea to play with the glade GUI designer to see what is possible. You might even decide to use the Gtk::Builder API to load your GUI at runtime. There are basically five different styles, as shown in this picture:
Box Packing 1
Each line contains one horizontal Box with several buttons. Each of the buttons on a line is packed into the Box with the same arguments to the pack_start() method. This is the declaration of the pack_start() method: void pack_start(Gtk::Widget& child, Gtk::PackOptions options = Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, guint padding = 0); The first argument is the widget you're packing. In our example these are all Buttons. The options argument can take one of these three options: Gtk::PACK_SHRINK: Space is contracted to the child widget size. The widget will take up just-enough space and never expand. Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING: Extra space is filled with padding. The widgets will be spaced out evenly, but their sizes won't change - there will be empty space between the widgets instead. Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET: Extra space is taken up by increasing the child widget size, without changing the amount of space between widgets. The padding argument specifies the width of an extra border area to leave around the packed widget. Reference Per-container packing options Here's the constructor for the Box widget, and methods that set per-container packing options: Gtk::Box(Gtk::Orientation orientation = Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, int spacing = 0); void set_spacing(int spacing); void set_homogeneous(bool homogeneous = true); Passing true to set_homogeneous() will cause all of the contained widgets to be the same size. spacing is a (minimum) number of pixels to leave between each widget. What's the difference between spacing (set when the box is created) and padding (set when elements are packed)? Spacing is added between objects, and padding is added on either side of a widget. The following figure should make it clearer:
Box Packing 2
Gtk::Application and command-line options The following example program requires a command-line option. The source code shows two ways of handling command-line options in combination with Gtk::Application. Handle the options in main() and hide them from Gtk::Application by setting argc = 1 in the call to Gtk::Application::create(). Give all command-line options to Gtk::Application::create() and add the flag Gio::APPLICATION_HANDLES_COMMAND_LINE. Connect a signal handler to the command_line signal, and handle the command-line options in the signal handler. You must set the optional parameter after = false in the call to signal_command_line().connect(), because your signal handler must be called before the default signal handler. You must also call Gio::Application::activate() in the signal handler, unless you want your application to exit without showing its main window. (Gio::Application is a base class of Gtk::Application.) Example Here is the source code for the example that produced the screenshots above. When you run this example, provide a number between 1 and 3 as a command-line option, to see different packing options in use. Source Code File: packbox.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_PACKBOX_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_PACKBOX_H #include <gtkmm.h> class PackBox : public Gtk::Box { public: PackBox(bool homogeneous, int spacing, Gtk::PackOptions options, int padding = 0); virtual ~PackBox(); protected: Gtk::Button m_button1, m_button2, m_button3; Gtk::Button* m_pbutton4; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_PACKBOX_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(int which); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Button m_button; Gtk::Box m_box1; Gtk::Box m_boxQuit; Gtk::Button m_buttonQuit; Gtk::Label m_Label1, m_Label2; Gtk::Separator m_separator1, m_separator2; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" #include "packbox.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow(int which) : m_box1(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_buttonQuit("Quit") { set_title("Gtk::Box example"); PackBox *pPackBox1, *pPackBox2, *pPackBox3, *pPackBox4, *pPackBox5; switch(which) { case 1: { m_Label1.set_text("Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 0); set_homogeneous(false);"); // Align the label to the left side. We'll discuss this function and // others in the section on Widget Attributes. m_Label1.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START, Gtk::ALIGN_START); // Pack the label into the vertical box (vbox box1). Remember that // widgets added to a vbox will be packed one on top of the other in // order. m_box1.pack_start(m_Label1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // Create a PackBox - homogeneous = false, spacing = 0, // options = Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, padding = 0 pPackBox1 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 0, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // Create a PackBox - homogeneous = false, spacing = 0, // options = Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING, padding = 0 pPackBox2 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 0, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // Create a PackBox - homogeneous = false, spacing = 0, // options = Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, padding = 0 pPackBox3 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 0, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox3, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // pack the separator into the vbox. Remember each of these // widgets are being packed into a vbox, so they'll be stacked // vertically. m_box1.pack_start(m_separator1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); // create another new label, and show it. m_Label2.set_text("Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 0); set_homogeneous(true);"); m_Label2.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START, Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_box1.pack_start(m_Label2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // Args are: homogeneous, spacing, options, padding pPackBox4 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(true, 0, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox4, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // Args are: homogeneous, spacing, options, padding pPackBox5 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(true, 0, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox5, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_box1.pack_start(m_separator2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); break; } case 2: { m_Label1.set_text("Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 10); set_homogeneous(false);"); m_Label1.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START, Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_box1.pack_start(m_Label1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); pPackBox1 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 10, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); pPackBox2 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 10, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_box1.pack_start(m_separator1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); m_Label2.set_text("Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 0); set_homogeneous(false);"); m_Label2.set_alignment(Gtk::ALIGN_START, Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_box1.pack_start(m_Label2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); pPackBox3 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 0, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 10)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox3, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); pPackBox4 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 0, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 10)); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox4, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_box1.pack_start(m_separator2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); break; } case 3: { // This demonstrates the ability to use Gtk::Box::pack_end() to // right justify widgets. First, we create a new box as before. pPackBox1 = Gtk::manage(new PackBox(false, 0, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK)); // create the label that will be put at the end. m_Label1.set_text("end"); // pack it using pack_end(), so it is put on the right side // of the PackBox. pPackBox1->pack_end(m_Label1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_box1.pack_start(*pPackBox1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // this explicitly sets the separator to 500 pixels wide by 5 pixels // high. This is so the hbox we created will also be 500 pixels wide, // and the "end" label will be separated from the other labels in the // hbox. Otherwise, all the widgets in the hbox would be packed as // close together as possible. m_separator1.set_size_request(500, 5); // pack the separator into the vbox. m_box1.pack_start(m_separator1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK, 5); break; } default: { std::cerr << "Unexpected command-line option." << std::endl; break; } } // Connect the signal to hide the window: m_buttonQuit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit_clicked) ); // pack the button into the quitbox. // The last 2 arguments to Box::pack_start are: options, padding. m_boxQuit.pack_start(m_buttonQuit, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING); m_box1.pack_start(m_boxQuit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); // pack the vbox (box1) which now contains all our widgets, into the // main window. add(m_box1); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit_clicked() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <iostream> #include <cstdlib> #define GTK_APPLICATION_RECEIVES_COMMAND_LINE_ARGUMENTS 0 #if GTK_APPLICATION_RECEIVES_COMMAND_LINE_ARGUMENTS namespace { int on_command_line(const Glib::RefPtr<Gio::ApplicationCommandLine>& command_line, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application>& app) { int argc = 0; char** argv = command_line->get_arguments(argc); for (int i = 0; i < argc; ++i) std::cout << "argv[" << i << "] = " << argv[i] << std::endl; app->activate(); // Without activate() the window won't be shown. return EXIT_SUCCESS; } } // anonymous namespace #endif int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { if (argc != 2) { std::cerr << "Usage: example <num>, where <num> is 1, 2, or 3." << std::endl; return EXIT_FAILURE; } #if GTK_APPLICATION_RECEIVES_COMMAND_LINE_ARGUMENTS // The command line arguments must be checked before Gtk::Application::run() // is called. The Gio::APPLICATION_HANDLES_COMMAND_LINE flag and the // on_command_line() signal handler are not necessary. This program is simpler // without them, and with argc = 1 in the call to Gtk::Application::create(). // They are included to show a program with Gio::APPLICATION_HANDLES_COMMAND_LINE. // Gio::APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE makes it possible to run several instances of // this application simultaneously. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example", Gio::APPLICATION_HANDLES_COMMAND_LINE | Gio::APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE); // Note after = false. // Only one signal handler is invoked. This signal handler must run before // the default signal handler, or else it won't run at all. app->signal_command_line().connect(sigc::bind(sigc::ptr_fun(&on_command_line), app), false); #else // Gio::APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE makes it possible to run several instances of // this application simultaneously. int argc1 = 1; // Don't give the command line arguments to Gtk::Application. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc1, argv, "org.gtkmm.example", Gio::APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE); #endif ExampleWindow window(std::atoi(argv[1])); return app->run(window); //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. } File: packbox.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "packbox.h" PackBox::PackBox(bool homogeneous, int spacing, Gtk::PackOptions options, int padding) : Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, spacing), m_button1("box.pack_start("), m_button2("button,"), m_button3((options == Gtk::PACK_SHRINK) ? "Gtk::PACK_SHRINK" : ((options == Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING) ? "Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING" : "Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET")) { set_homogeneous(homogeneous); pack_start(m_button1, options, padding); pack_start(m_button2, options, padding); pack_start(m_button3, options, padding); m_pbutton4 = new Gtk::Button(Glib::ustring::format(padding) + ");"); pack_start(*m_pbutton4, options, padding); } PackBox::~PackBox() { delete m_pbutton4; } ButtonBoxes Button boxes are a convenient way to quickly arrange a group of buttons. Their orientation can be either horizontal or vertical. ButtonBoxes help to make applications appear consistent because they use standard settings, such as inter-button spacing and packing. Buttons are added to a ButtonBox with the add() method. Button boxes support several layout styles. The style can be retrieved and changed using get_layout() and set_layout(). Reference Example
ButtonBox
Source Code File: examplebuttonbox.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONBOX_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONBOX_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleButtonBox : public Gtk::Frame { public: ExampleButtonBox(bool horizontal, const Glib::ustring& title, gint spacing, Gtk::ButtonBoxStyle layout); protected: Gtk::Button m_Button_OK, m_Button_Cancel, m_Button_Help; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_BUTTONBOX_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox_Main, m_VBox; Gtk::Box m_HBox; Gtk::Frame m_Frame_Horizontal, m_Frame_Vertical; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplebuttonbox.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplebuttonbox.h" ExampleButtonBox::ExampleButtonBox(bool horizontal, const Glib::ustring& title, gint spacing, Gtk::ButtonBoxStyle layout) : Gtk::Frame(title), m_Button_OK("OK"), m_Button_Cancel("Cancel"), m_Button_Help("Help") { Gtk::ButtonBox* bbox = 0; if(horizontal) bbox = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::ButtonBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) ); else bbox = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::ButtonBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL) ); bbox->set_border_width(5); add(*bbox); /* Set the appearance of the Button Box */ bbox->set_layout(layout); bbox->set_spacing(spacing); bbox->add(m_Button_OK); bbox->add(m_Button_Cancel); bbox->add(m_Button_Help); } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include "examplebuttonbox.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox_Main(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Frame_Horizontal("Horizontal Button Boxes"), m_Frame_Vertical("Vertical Button Boxes") { set_title("Gtk::ButtonBox"); add(m_VBox_Main); m_VBox_Main.pack_start(m_Frame_Horizontal, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 10); //The horizontal ButtonBoxes: m_VBox.set_border_width(10); m_Frame_Horizontal.add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(true, "Spread (spacing 40)", 40, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_SPREAD)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 0); m_VBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(true, "Edge (spacing 30)", 30, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_EDGE)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_VBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(true, "Start (spacing 20)", 20, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_START)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_VBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(true, "end (spacing 10)", 10, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); //The vertical ButtonBoxes: m_VBox_Main.pack_start(m_Frame_Vertical, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 10); m_HBox.set_border_width(10); m_Frame_Vertical.add(m_HBox); m_HBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(false, "Spread (spacing 5)", 5, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_SPREAD)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 0); m_HBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(false, "Edge (spacing 30)", 30, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_EDGE)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_HBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage( new ExampleButtonBox(false, "Start (spacing 20)", 20, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_START)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); m_HBox.pack_start(*Gtk::manage(new ExampleButtonBox(false, "End (spacing 10)", 10, Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END)), Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET, 5); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Grid A Grid dynamically lays out child widgets in rows and columns. The dimensions of the grid do not need to be specified in the constructor. Child widgets can span multiple rows or columns, using attach(), or added next to an existing widget inside the grid with attach_next_to(). Individual rows and columns of the grid can be set to have uniform height or width with set_row_homogeneous() and set_column_homogeneous(). You can set the margin and expand properties of the child Widgets to control their spacing and their behaviour when the Grid is resized. Reference Example This example creates a window with three buttons in a grid. The first two buttons are in the upper row, from left to right. A third button is attached underneath the first button, in a new lower row, spanning two columns.
Grid
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); private: // Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); void on_button_numbered(const Glib::ustring& data); // Child widgets: Gtk::Grid m_grid; Gtk::Button m_button_1, m_button_2, m_button_quit; }; #endif /* GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H */ File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_button_1("button 1"), m_button_2("button 2"), m_button_quit("Quit") { set_title("Gtk::Grid"); set_border_width(12); add(m_grid); m_grid.add(m_button_1); m_grid.add(m_button_2); m_grid.attach_next_to(m_button_quit, m_button_1, Gtk::POS_BOTTOM, 2, 1); m_button_1.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::bind<Glib::ustring>( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_numbered), "button 1") ); m_button_2.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::bind<Glib::ustring>( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_numbered), "button 2") ); m_button_quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_numbered(const Glib::ustring& data) { std::cout << data << " was pressed" << std::endl; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; // Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Table Gtk::Table allows us to place widgets in a grid, similar to Gtk::Grid. Gtk::Table is deprecated from gtkmm version 3.4 and should not be used in newly-written code. Use Gtk::Grid instead. Notebook A Notebook has a set of stacked pages, each of which contains widgets. Labelled tabs allow the user to select the pages. Notebooks allow several sets of widgets to be placed in a small space, by only showing one page at a time. For instance, they are often used in preferences dialogs. Use the append_page(), prepend_page() and insert_page() methods to add tabbed pages to the Notebook, supplying the child widget and the name for the tab. To discover the currently visible page, use the get_current_page() method. This returns the page number, and then calling get_nth_page() with that number will give you a pointer to the actual child widget. To programmatically change the selected page, use the set_current_page() method. Reference Example
Notebook
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); void on_notebook_switch_page(Gtk::Widget* page, guint page_num); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Notebook m_Notebook; Gtk::Label m_Label1, m_Label2; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label1("Contents of tab 1"), m_Label2("Contents of tab 2"), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("Gtk::Notebook example"); set_border_width(10); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the Notebook, with the button underneath: m_Notebook.set_border_width(10); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Notebook); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); //Add the Notebook pages: m_Notebook.append_page(m_Label1, "First"); m_Notebook.append_page(m_Label2, "Second"); m_Notebook.signal_switch_page().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_notebook_switch_page) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_notebook_switch_page(Gtk::Widget* /* page */, guint page_num) { std::cout << "Switched to tab with index " << page_num << std::endl; //You can also use m_Notebook.get_current_page() to get this index. } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Assistant An Assistant splits a complex operation into steps. Each step is a page, containing a header, a child widget and an action area. The Assistant's action area has navigation buttons which update automatically depending on the type of the page, set with set_page_type(). Use the append_page(), prepend_page and insert_page() methods to add pages to the Assistant, supplying the child widget for each page. To determine the currently-visible page, use the get_current_page() method, and pass the result to get_nth_page(), which returns a pointer to the actual widget. To programmatically change the current page, use the set_current_page() method. To set the title of a page, use the set_page_title() method. The header and side images of a page can be set with the set_page_header_image() and set_page_side_image() methods. To add widgets to the action area, use the add_action_widget() method. They will be packed alongside the default buttons. Use the remove_action_widget() method to remove widgets. Reference Example
Assistant
Source Code File: exampleassistant.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEASSISTANT_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEASSISTANT_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleAssistant : public Gtk::Assistant { public: ExampleAssistant(); virtual ~ExampleAssistant(); void get_result(bool& check_state, Glib::ustring& entry_text); private: // Signal handlers: void on_assistant_apply(); void on_assistant_cancel(); void on_assistant_close(); void on_assistant_prepare(Gtk::Widget* widget); void on_entry_changed(); // Member functions: void print_status(); // Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_box; Gtk::Label m_label1, m_label2; Gtk::CheckButton m_check; Gtk::Entry m_entry; }; #endif /* GTKMM_EXAMPLEASSISTANT_H */ File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include "exampleassistant.h" #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); private: // Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); void on_assistant_apply(); // Child widgets: Gtk::Grid m_grid; Gtk::Button m_button; Gtk::Label m_label1, m_label2; Gtk::CheckButton m_check; Gtk::Entry m_entry; ExampleAssistant m_assistant; }; #endif /* GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H */ File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include "exampleassistant.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_button("Show the assistant"), m_label1("State of assistant checkbutton:"), m_label2("Contents of assistant entry:") { set_title("Gtk::Assistant example"); set_border_width(12); m_grid.set_row_homogeneous(true); m_grid.attach(m_button, 0, 0, 2, 1); m_button.set_hexpand(true); m_button.set_valign(Gtk::ALIGN_CENTER); m_grid.attach(m_label1, 0, 1, 1, 1); m_label1.set_alignment(0.0, 0.5); m_grid.attach(m_label2, 0, 2, 1, 1); m_label2.set_alignment(0.0, 0.5); m_grid.attach(m_check, 1, 1, 1, 1); m_check.set_halign(Gtk::ALIGN_START); m_grid.attach(m_entry, 1, 2, 1, 1); m_entry.set_hexpand(true); add(m_grid); m_button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked)); m_assistant.signal_apply().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_assistant_apply)); m_check.set_sensitive(false); m_entry.set_sensitive(false); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_assistant_apply() { bool check_state; Glib::ustring entry_text; m_assistant.get_result(check_state, entry_text); m_check.set_active(check_state); m_entry.set_text(entry_text); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked() { m_assistant.show(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; // Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } File: exampleassistant.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "exampleassistant.h" ExampleAssistant::ExampleAssistant() : m_box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 12), m_label1("Type text to allow the assistant to continue:"), m_label2("Confirmation page"), m_check("Optional extra information") { set_title("Gtk::Assistant example"); set_border_width(12); set_default_size(400, 300); m_box.pack_start(m_label1); m_box.pack_start(m_entry); append_page(m_box); append_page(m_check); append_page(m_label2); set_page_title(*get_nth_page(0), "Page 1"); set_page_title(*get_nth_page(1), "Page 2"); set_page_title(*get_nth_page(2), "Confirmation"); set_page_complete(m_check, true); set_page_complete(m_label2, true); set_page_type(m_box, Gtk::ASSISTANT_PAGE_INTRO); set_page_type(m_label2, Gtk::ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM); signal_apply().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_apply)); signal_cancel().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_cancel)); signal_close().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_close)); signal_prepare().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_prepare)); m_entry.signal_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleAssistant::on_entry_changed)); show_all_children(); } ExampleAssistant::~ExampleAssistant() { } void ExampleAssistant::get_result(bool& check_state, Glib::ustring& entry_text) { check_state = m_check.get_active(); entry_text = m_entry.get_text(); } void ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_apply() { std::cout << "Apply was clicked"; print_status(); } void ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_cancel() { std::cout << "Cancel was clicked"; print_status(); hide(); } void ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_close() { std::cout << "Assistant was closed"; print_status(); hide(); } void ExampleAssistant::on_assistant_prepare(Gtk::Widget* /* widget */) { set_title(Glib::ustring::compose("Gtk::Assistant example (Page %1 of %2)", get_current_page() + 1, get_n_pages())); } void ExampleAssistant::on_entry_changed() { // The page is only complete if the entry contains text. if(m_entry.get_text_length()) set_page_complete(m_box, true); else set_page_complete(m_box, false); } void ExampleAssistant::print_status() { std::cout << ", entry contents: \"" << m_entry.get_text() << "\", checkbutton status: " << m_check.get_active() << std::endl; } The TreeView widget The Gtk::TreeView widget can contain lists or trees of data, in columns. The Model Each Gtk::TreeView has an associated Gtk::TreeModel, which contains the data displayed by the TreeView. Each Gtk::TreeModel can be used by more than one Gtk::TreeView. For instance, this allows the same underlying data to be displayed and edited in 2 different ways at the same time. Or the 2 Views might display different columns from the same Model data, in the same way that 2 SQL queries (or "views") might show different fields from the same database table. Although you can theoretically implement your own Model, you will normally use either the ListStore or TreeStore model classes. Reference ListStore, for rows The ListStore contains simple rows of data, and each row has no children.
TreeView - ListStore
Reference TreeStore, for a hierarchy The TreeStore contains rows of data, and each row may have child rows.
TreeView - TreeStore
Reference Model Columns The TreeModelColumnRecord class is used to keep track of the columns and their data types. You add TreeModelColumn instances to the ColumnRecord and then use those TreeModelColumns when getting and setting the data in model rows. You will probably find it convenient to derive a new TreeModelColumnRecord which has your TreeModelColumn instances as member data. class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModelColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_text); add(m_col_number); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_text; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_number; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; You specify the ColumnRecord when creating the Model, like so: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> refListStore = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); Note that the instance (such as m_Columns here) should usually not be static, because it often needs to be instantiated after glibmm has been instantiated. Adding Rows Add rows to the model with the append(), prepend(), or insert() methods. Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_refListStore->append(); You can dereference the iterator to get the Row: Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; Adding child rows Gtk::TreeStore models can have child items. Add them with the append(), prepend(), or insert() methods, like so: Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter_child = m_refListStore->append(row.children()); Setting values You can use the operator[] override to set the data for a particular column in the row, specifying the TreeModelColumn used to create the model. row[m_Columns.m_col_text] = "sometext"; Getting values You can use the operator[] override to get the data in a particular column in a row, specifiying the TreeModelColumn used to create the model. Glib::ustring strText = row[m_Columns.m_col_text]; int number = row[m_Columns.m_col_number]; The compiler will complain if you use an inappropriate type. For instance, this would generate a compiler error: //compiler error - no conversion from ustring to int. int number = row[m_Columns.m_col_text]; "Hidden" Columns You might want to associate extra data with each row. If so, just add it as a Model column, but don't add it to the View. The View The View is the actual widget (Gtk::TreeView) that displays the model (Gtk::TreeModel) data and allows the user to interact with it. The View can show all of the model's columns, or just some, and it can show them in various ways. Reference Using a Model You can specify a Gtk::TreeModel when constructing the Gtk::TreeView, or you can use the set_model() method, like so: m_TreeView.set_model(m_refListStore); Adding View Columns You can use the append_column() method to tell the View that it should display certain Model columns, in a certain order, with a certain column title. m_TreeView.append_column("Messages", m_Columns.m_col_text); When using this simple append_column() override, the TreeView will display the model data with an appropriate CellRenderer. For instance, strings and numbers are shown in a simple Gtk::Entry widget, and booleans are shown in a Gtk::CheckButton. This is usually what you need. For other column types you must either connect a callback that converts your type into a string representation, with TreeViewColumn::set_cell_data_func(), or derive a custom CellRenderer. Note that (unsigned) short is not supported by default - You could use (unsigned) int or (unsigned) long as the column type instead. More than one Model Column per View Column To render more than one model column in a view column, you need to create the TreeView::Column widget manually, and use pack_start() to add the model columns to it. Then use append_column() to add the view Column to the View. Notice that Gtk::View::append_column() is overridden to accept either a prebuilt Gtk::View::Column widget, or just the TreeModelColumn from which it generates an appropriate Gtk::View::Column widget. Here is some example code from demos/gtk-demo/example_stockbrowser.cc, which has a pixbuf icon and a text name in the same column: Gtk::TreeView::Column* pColumn = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::TreeView::Column("Symbol") ); // m_columns.icon and m_columns.symbol are columns in the model. // pColumn is the column in the TreeView: pColumn->pack_start(m_columns.icon, false); //false = don't expand. pColumn->pack_start(m_columns.symbol); m_TreeView.append_column(*pColumn); Specifying CellRenderer details The default CellRenderers and their default behaviour will normally suffice, but you might occasionally need finer control. For instance, this example code from demos/gtk-demo/example_treestore.cc, manually constructs a Gtk::CellRenderer widget and instructs it to render the data from various model columns through various aspects of its appearance. Gtk::CellRendererToggle* pRenderer = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::CellRendererToggle() ); int cols_count = m_TreeView.append_column("Alex", *pRenderer); Gtk::TreeViewColumn* pColumn = m_TreeView.get_column(cols_count-1); if(pColumn) { pColumn->add_attribute(pRenderer->property_active(), m_columns.alex); pColumn->add_attribute(pRenderer->property_visible(), m_columns.visible); pColumn->add_attribute(pRenderer->property_activatable(), m_columns.world); You can also connect to CellRenderer signals to detect user actions. For instance: Gtk::CellRendererToggle* pRenderer = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::CellRendererToggle() ); pRenderer->signal_toggled().connect( sigc::bind( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &Example_TreeView_TreeStore::on_cell_toggled), m_columns.dave) ); Editable Cells Automatically-stored editable cells. Cells in a TreeView can be edited in-place by the user. To allow this, use the Gtk::TreeView insert_column_editable() and append_column_editable() methods instead of insert_column() and append_column(). When these cells are edited the new values will be stored immediately in the Model. Note that these methods are templates which can only be instantiated for simple column types such as Glib::ustring, int, and long. Implementing custom logic for editable cells. However, you might not want the new values to be stored immediately. For instance, maybe you want to restrict the input to certain characters or ranges of values. To achieve this, you should use the normal Gtk::TreeView insert_column() and append_column() methods, then use get_column_cell_renderer() to get the Gtk::CellRenderer used by that column. You should then cast that Gtk::CellRenderer* to the specific CellRenderer that you expect, so you can use specific API. For instance, for a CellRendererText, you would set the cell's editable property to true, like so: cell.property_editable() = true; For a CellRendererToggle, you would set the activatable property instead. You can then connect to the appropriate "edited" signal. For instance, connect to Gtk::CellRendererText::signal_edited(), or Gtk::CellRendererToggle::signal_toggled(). If the column contains more than one CellRenderer then you will need to use Gtk::TreeView::get_column() and then call get_cell_renderers() on that view Column. In your signal handler, you should examine the new value and then store it in the Model if that is appropriate for your application. Iterating over Model Rows Gtk::TreeModel provides a C++ Standard Library-style container of its children, via the children() method. You can use the familiar begin() and end() methods iterator incrementing, like so: typedef Gtk::TreeModel::Children type_children; //minimise code length. type_children children = refModel->children(); for(type_children::iterator iter = children.begin(); iter != children.end(); ++iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; //Do something with the row - see above for set/get. } Row children When using a Gtk::TreeStore, the rows can have child rows, which can have their own children in turn. Use Gtk::TreeModel::Row::children() to get the container of child Rows: Gtk::TreeModel::Children children = row.children(); The Selection To find out what rows the user has selected, get the Gtk::TreeView::Selection object from the TreeView, like so: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeSelection> refTreeSelection = m_TreeView.get_selection(); Single or multiple selection By default, only single rows can be selected, but you can allow multiple selection by setting the mode, like so: refTreeSelection->set_mode(Gtk::SELECTION_MULTIPLE); The selected rows For single-selection, you can just call get_selected(), like so: TreeModel::iterator iter = refTreeSelection->get_selected(); if(iter) //If anything is selected { TreeModel::Row row = *iter; //Do something with the row. } For multiple-selection, you need to define a callback, and give it to selected_foreach(), selected_foreach_path(), or selected_foreach_iter(), like so: refTreeSelection->selected_foreach_iter( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TheClass::selected_row_callback) ); void TheClass::selected_row_callback( const Gtk::TreeModel::iterator& iter) { TreeModel::Row row = *iter; //Do something with the row. } The "changed" signal To respond to the user clicking on a row or range of rows, connect to the signal like so: refTreeSelection->signal_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &Example_StockBrowser::on_selection_changed) ); Preventing row selection Maybe the user should not be able to select every item in your list or tree. For instance, in the gtk-demo, you can select a demo to see the source code, but it doesn't make any sense to select a demo category. To control which rows can be selected, use the set_select_function() method, providing a sigc::slot callback. For instance: m_refTreeSelection->set_select_function( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &DemoWindow::select_function) ); and then bool DemoWindow::select_function( const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModel>& model, const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& path, bool) { const Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = model->get_iter(path); return iter->children().empty(); // only allow leaf nodes to be selected } Changing the selection To change the selection, specify a Gtk::TreeModel::iterator or Gtk::TreeModel::Row, like so: Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = m_refModel->children()[5]; //The fifth row. if(row) refTreeSelection->select(row); or Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_refModel->children().begin() if(iter) refTreeSelection->select(iter); Sorting The standard tree models (TreeStore and ListStore) derive from TreeSortable, so they offer sorting functionality. For instance, call set_sort_column(), to sort the model by the specified column. Or supply a callback function to set_sort_func() to implement a more complicated sorting algorithm. TreeSortable Reference Sorting by clicking on columns So that a user can click on a TreeView's column header to sort the TreeView's contents, call Gtk::TreeViewModel::set_sort_column(), supplying the model column on which model should be sorted when the header is clicked. For instance: Gtk::TreeView::Column* pColumn = treeview.get_column(0); if(pColumn) pColumn->set_sort_column(m_columns.m_col_id); Independently sorted views of the same model The TreeView already allows you to show the same TreeModel in two TreeView widgets. If you need one of these TreeViews to sort the model differently than the other then you should use a TreeModelSort instead of just, for instance, Gtk::TreeViewModel::set_sort_column(). TreeModelSort is a model that contains another model, presenting a sorted version of that model. For instance, you might add a sorted version of a model to a TreeView like so: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModelSort> sorted_model = Gtk::TreeModelSort::create(model); sorted_model->set_sort_column(columns.m_col_name, Gtk::SORT_ASCENDING); treeview.set_model(sorted_model); Note, however, that the TreeView will provide iterators to the sorted model. You must convert them to iterators to the underlying child model in order to perform actions on that model. For instance: void ExampleWindow::on_button_delete() { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeSelection> refTreeSelection = m_treeview.get_selection(); if(refTreeSelection) { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator sorted_iter = m_refTreeSelection->get_selected(); if(sorted_iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_refModelSort->convert_iter_to_child_iter(sorted_iter); m_refModel->erase(iter); } } } TreeModelSort Reference Drag and Drop Gtk::TreeView already implments simple drag-and-drop when used with the Gtk::ListStore or Gtk::TreeStore models. If necessary, it also allows you to implement more complex behaviour when items are dragged and dropped, using the normal Drag and Drop API. Reorderable rows If you call Gtk::TreeView::set_reorderable() then your TreeView's items can be moved within the treeview itself. This is demonstrated in the TreeStore example. However, this does not allow you any control of which items can be dragged, and where they can be dropped. If you need that extra control then you might create a derived Gtk::TreeModel from Gtk::TreeStore or Gtk::ListStore and override the Gtk::TreeDragSource::row_draggable() and Gdk::TreeDragDest::row_drop_possible() virtual methods. You can examine the Gtk::TreeModel::Paths provided and allow or disallow dragging or dropping by returning true or false. This is demonstrated in the drag_and_drop example. Popup Context Menu Lots of people need to implement right-click context menus for TreeView's so we will explain how to do that here to save you some time. Apart from one or two points, it's much the same as a normal context menu, as described in the menus chapter. Handling <literal>button_press_event</literal> To detect a click of the right mouse button, you need to handle the button_press_event signal, and check exactly which button was pressed. Because the TreeView normally handles this signal completely, you need to either override the default signal handler in a derived TreeView class, or use connect_nofify() instead of connect(). You probably also want to call the default handler before doing anything else, so that the right-click will cause the row to be selected first. This is demonstrated in the Popup Custom Menu example. Examples ListStore This example has a Gtk::TreeView widget, with a Gtk::ListStore model.
TreeView - ListStore
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); add(m_col_number); add(m_col_percentage);} Gtk::TreeModelColumn<unsigned int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<short> m_col_number; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_percentage; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TreeView m_TreeView; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModel; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("Gtk::TreeView (ListStore) example"); set_border_width(5); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow, with the button underneath: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TreeView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(5); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); //Create the Tree model: m_refTreeModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); m_TreeView.set_model(m_refTreeModel); //Fill the TreeView's model Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob"; row[m_Columns.m_col_number] = 10; row[m_Columns.m_col_percentage] = 15; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Joey Jojo"; row[m_Columns.m_col_number] = 20; row[m_Columns.m_col_percentage] = 40; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Rob McRoberts"; row[m_Columns.m_col_number] = 30; row[m_Columns.m_col_percentage] = 70; //Add the TreeView's view columns: //This number will be shown with the default numeric formatting. m_TreeView.append_column("ID", m_Columns.m_col_id); m_TreeView.append_column("Name", m_Columns.m_col_name); m_TreeView.append_column_numeric("Formatted number", m_Columns.m_col_number, "%010d" /* 10 digits, using leading zeroes. */); //Display a progress bar instead of a decimal number: Gtk::CellRendererProgress* cell = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::CellRendererProgress); int cols_count = m_TreeView.append_column("Some percentage", *cell); Gtk::TreeViewColumn* pColumn = m_TreeView.get_column(cols_count - 1); if(pColumn) { pColumn->add_attribute(cell->property_value(), m_Columns.m_col_percentage); } //Make all the columns reorderable: //This is not necessary, but it's nice to show the feature. //You can use TreeView::set_column_drag_function() to more //finely control column drag and drop. for(guint i = 0; i < 2; i++) { Gtk::TreeView::Column* pColumn = m_TreeView.get_column(i); pColumn->set_reorderable(); } show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } TreeStore This example is very similar to the ListStore example, but uses a Gtk::TreeStore model instead, and adds children to the rows.
TreeView - TreeStore
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); void on_treeview_row_activated(const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& path, Gtk::TreeViewColumn* column); //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TreeView m_TreeView; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeStore> m_refTreeModel; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("Gtk::TreeView (TreeStore) example"); set_border_width(5); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow, with the button underneath: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TreeView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(5); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); //Create the Tree model: m_refTreeModel = Gtk::TreeStore::create(m_Columns); m_TreeView.set_model(m_refTreeModel); //All the items to be reordered with drag-and-drop: m_TreeView.set_reorderable(); //Fill the TreeView's model Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob"; Gtk::TreeModel::Row childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 11; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob Junior"; childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 12; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Sue Bob"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Joey Jojo"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Rob McRoberts"; childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 31; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Xavier McRoberts"; //Add the TreeView's view columns: m_TreeView.append_column("ID", m_Columns.m_col_id); m_TreeView.append_column("Name", m_Columns.m_col_name); //Connect signal: m_TreeView.signal_row_activated().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_treeview_row_activated) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_treeview_row_activated(const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& path, Gtk::TreeViewColumn* /* column */) { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_refTreeModel->get_iter(path); if(iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; std::cout << "Row activated: ID=" << row[m_Columns.m_col_id] << ", Name=" << row[m_Columns.m_col_name] << std::endl; } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Editable Cells This example is identical to the ListStore example, but it uses TreeView::append_column_editable() instead of TreeView::append_column().
TreeView - Editable Cells
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); void treeviewcolumn_validated_on_cell_data(Gtk::CellRenderer* renderer, const Gtk::TreeModel::iterator& iter); void cellrenderer_validated_on_editing_started(Gtk::CellEditable* cell_editable, const Glib::ustring& path); void cellrenderer_validated_on_edited(const Glib::ustring& path_string, const Glib::ustring& new_text); //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); add(m_col_foo); add(m_col_number); add(m_col_number_validated); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<unsigned int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<bool> m_col_foo; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_number; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_number_validated; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TreeView m_TreeView; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModel; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; //For the validated column: //You could also use a CellRendererSpin or a CellRendererProgress: Gtk::CellRendererText m_cellrenderer_validated; Gtk::TreeView::Column m_treeviewcolumn_validated; bool m_validate_retry; Glib::ustring m_invalid_text_for_retry; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include <cstdio> #include <cstdlib> #include "examplewindow.h" using std::sprintf; using std::strtol; ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit("Quit"), m_validate_retry(false) { set_title("Gtk::TreeView Editable Cells example"); set_border_width(5); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow, with the button underneath: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TreeView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(5); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); //Create the Tree model: m_refTreeModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); m_TreeView.set_model(m_refTreeModel); //Fill the TreeView's model Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob"; row[m_Columns.m_col_foo] = true; row[m_Columns.m_col_number] = 10; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Joey Jojo"; row[m_Columns.m_col_foo] = true; row[m_Columns.m_col_number] = 20; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Rob McRoberts"; row[m_Columns.m_col_foo] = false; row[m_Columns.m_col_number] = 30; //Add the TreeView's view columns: //We use the *_editable convenience methods for most of these, //because the default functionality is enough: m_TreeView.append_column_editable("ID", m_Columns.m_col_id); m_TreeView.append_column_editable("Name", m_Columns.m_col_name); m_TreeView.append_column_editable("foo", m_Columns.m_col_foo); m_TreeView.append_column_numeric_editable("foo", m_Columns.m_col_number, "%010d"); //For this column, we create the CellRenderer ourselves, and connect our own //signal handlers, so that we can validate the data that the user enters, and //control how it is displayed. m_treeviewcolumn_validated.set_title("validated (<10)"); m_treeviewcolumn_validated.pack_start(m_cellrenderer_validated); m_TreeView.append_column(m_treeviewcolumn_validated); //Tell the view column how to render the model values: m_treeviewcolumn_validated.set_cell_data_func(m_cellrenderer_validated, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::treeviewcolumn_validated_on_cell_data) ); //Make the CellRenderer editable, and handle its editing signals: m_cellrenderer_validated.property_editable() = true; m_cellrenderer_validated.signal_editing_started().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::cellrenderer_validated_on_editing_started) ); m_cellrenderer_validated.signal_edited().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::cellrenderer_validated_on_edited) ); //If this was a CellRendererSpin then you would have to set the adjustment: //m_cellrenderer_validated.property_adjustment() = m_spin_adjustment; show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::treeviewcolumn_validated_on_cell_data( Gtk::CellRenderer* /* renderer */, const Gtk::TreeModel::iterator& iter) { //Get the value from the model and show it appropriately in the view: if(iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; int model_value = row[m_Columns.m_col_number_validated]; //This is just an example. //In this case, it would be easier to use append_column_editable() or //append_column_numeric_editable() char buffer[32]; sprintf(buffer, "%d", model_value); Glib::ustring view_text = buffer; m_cellrenderer_validated.property_text() = view_text; } } void ExampleWindow::cellrenderer_validated_on_editing_started( Gtk::CellEditable* cell_editable, const Glib::ustring& /* path */) { //Start editing with previously-entered (but invalid) text, //if we are allowing the user to correct some invalid data. if(m_validate_retry) { //This is the CellEditable inside the CellRenderer. Gtk::CellEditable* celleditable_validated = cell_editable; //It's usually an Entry, at least for a CellRendererText: Gtk::Entry* pEntry = dynamic_cast<Gtk::Entry*>(celleditable_validated); if(pEntry) { pEntry->set_text(m_invalid_text_for_retry); m_validate_retry = false; m_invalid_text_for_retry.clear(); } } } void ExampleWindow::cellrenderer_validated_on_edited( const Glib::ustring& path_string, const Glib::ustring& new_text) { Gtk::TreePath path(path_string); //Convert the inputed text to an integer, as needed by our model column: char* pchEnd = 0; int new_value = strtol(new_text.c_str(), &pchEnd, 10); if(new_value > 10) { //Prevent entry of numbers higher than 10. //Tell the user: Gtk::MessageDialog dialog(*this, "The number must be less than 10. Please try again.", false, Gtk::MESSAGE_ERROR); dialog.run(); //Start editing again, with the bad text, so that the user can correct it. //A real application should probably allow the user to revert to the //previous text. //Set the text to be used in the start_editing signal handler: m_invalid_text_for_retry = new_text; m_validate_retry = true; //Start editing again: m_TreeView.set_cursor(path, m_treeviewcolumn_validated, m_cellrenderer_validated, true /* start_editing */); } else { //Get the row from the path: Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_refTreeModel->get_iter(path); if(iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; //Put the new value in the model: row[m_Columns.m_col_number_validated] = new_value; } } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Drag and Drop This example is much like the TreeStore example, but has 2 extra columns to indicate whether the row can be dragged, and whether it can receive drag-and-dropped rows. It uses a derived Gtk::TreeStore which overrides the virtual functions as described in the TreeView Drag and Drop section.
TreeView - Drag And Drop
Source Code File: treemodel_dnd.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TREEMODEL_DND_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TREEMODEL_DND_H #include <gtkmm.h> class TreeModel_Dnd : public Gtk::TreeStore { protected: TreeModel_Dnd(); public: //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); add(m_col_draggable); add(m_col_receivesdrags); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<bool> m_col_draggable; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<bool> m_col_receivesdrags; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; static Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel_Dnd> create(); protected: //Overridden virtual functions: virtual bool row_draggable_vfunc(const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& path) const; virtual bool row_drop_possible_vfunc(const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& dest, const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data) const; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TREEMODEL_DND_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include "treemodel_dnd.h" class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TreeView m_TreeView; Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel_Dnd> m_refTreeModel; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: treemodel_dnd.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "treemodel_dnd.h" #include <iostream> TreeModel_Dnd::TreeModel_Dnd() { //We can't just call Gtk::TreeModel(m_Columns) in the initializer list //because m_Columns does not exist when the base class constructor runs. //And we can't have a static m_Columns instance, because that would be //instantiated before the gtkmm type system. //So, we use this method, which should only be used just after creation: set_column_types(m_Columns); } Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel_Dnd> TreeModel_Dnd::create() { return Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel_Dnd>( new TreeModel_Dnd() ); } bool TreeModel_Dnd::row_draggable_vfunc(const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& path) const { // Make the value of the "draggable" column determine whether this row can // be dragged: //TODO: Add a const version of get_iter to TreeModel: TreeModel_Dnd* unconstThis = const_cast<TreeModel_Dnd*>(this); const_iterator iter = unconstThis->get_iter(path); //const_iterator iter = get_iter(path); if(iter) { Row row = *iter; bool is_draggable = row[m_Columns.m_col_draggable]; return is_draggable; } return Gtk::TreeStore::row_draggable_vfunc(path); } bool TreeModel_Dnd::row_drop_possible_vfunc(const Gtk::TreeModel::Path& dest, const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data) const { //Make the value of the "receives drags" column determine whether a row can be //dragged into it: //dest is the path that the row would have after it has been dropped: //But in this case we are more interested in the parent row: Gtk::TreeModel::Path dest_parent = dest; bool dest_is_not_top_level = dest_parent.up(); if(!dest_is_not_top_level || dest_parent.empty()) { //The user wants to move something to the top-level. //Let's always allow that. } else { //Get an iterator for the row at this path: //We must unconst this. This should not be necessary with a future version //of gtkmm. //TODO: Add a const version of get_iter to TreeModel: TreeModel_Dnd* unconstThis = const_cast<TreeModel_Dnd*>(this); const_iterator iter_dest_parent = unconstThis->get_iter(dest_parent); //const_iterator iter_dest_parent = get_iter(dest); if(iter_dest_parent) { Row row = *iter_dest_parent; bool receives_drags = row[m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags]; return receives_drags; } } //You could also examine the row being dragged (via selection_data) //if you must look at both rows to see whether a drop should be allowed. //You could use //TODO: Add const version of get_from_selection_data(): Glib::RefPtr<const //Gtk::TreeModel> refThis = Glib::RefPtr<const Gtk::TreeModel>(this); // //Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModel> refThis = //Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModel>(const_cast<TreeModel_Dnd*>(this)); //refThis->reference(); //, true /* take_copy */) //Gtk::TreeModel::Path path_dragged_row; //Gtk::TreeModel::Path::get_from_selection_data(selection_data, refThis, //path_dragged_row); return Gtk::TreeStore::row_drop_possible_vfunc(dest, selection_data); } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit(Gtk::Stock::QUIT) { set_title("Gtk::TreeView (Drag and Drop) example"); set_border_width(5); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow, with the button underneath: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TreeView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(5); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); //Create the Tree model: //Use our derived model, which overrides some Gtk::TreeDragDest and //Gtk::TreeDragSource virtual functions: //The columns are declared in the overridden TreeModel. m_refTreeModel = TreeModel_Dnd::create(); m_TreeView.set_model(m_refTreeModel); //Enable Drag-and-Drop of TreeView rows: //See also the derived TreeModel's *_vfunc overrides. m_TreeView.enable_model_drag_source(); m_TreeView.enable_model_drag_dest(); //Fill the TreeView's model Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob"; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable] = true; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags] = true; Gtk::TreeModel::Row childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id] = 11; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob Junior"; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable] = true; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags] = true; childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id] = 12; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Sue Bob"; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable] = true; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags] = true; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Joey Jojo"; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable] = true; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags] = true; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Rob McRoberts"; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable] = true; row[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags] = true; childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id] = 31; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Xavier McRoberts"; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable] = true; childrow[m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags] = true; //Add the TreeView's view columns: m_TreeView.append_column("ID", m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_id); m_TreeView.append_column("Name", m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_name); m_TreeView.append_column_editable("Draggable", m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_draggable); m_TreeView.append_column_editable("Receives Drags", m_refTreeModel->m_Columns.m_col_receivesdrags); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Popup Context Menu This example is much like the ListStore example, but derives a custom TreeView in order to override the button_press_event, and also to encapsulate the tree model code in our derived class. See the TreeView Popup Context Menu section.
TreeView - Popup Context Menu
Source Code File: treeview_withpopup.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TREEVIEW_WITHPOPUP_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TREEVIEW_WITHPOPUP_H #include <gtkmm.h> class TreeView_WithPopup : public Gtk::TreeView { public: TreeView_WithPopup(); virtual ~TreeView_WithPopup(); protected: // Override Signal handler: // Alternatively, use signal_button_press_event().connect_notify() virtual bool on_button_press_event(GdkEventButton *ev); //Signal handler for popup menu items: void on_menu_file_popup_generic(); //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<unsigned int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //The Tree model: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModel; Gtk::Menu m_Menu_Popup; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TREEVIEW_WITHPOPUP_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include "treeview_withpopup.h" class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; TreeView_WithPopup m_TreeView; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: treeview_withpopup.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "treeview_withpopup.h" #include <iostream> TreeView_WithPopup::TreeView_WithPopup() { //Create the Tree model: m_refTreeModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); set_model(m_refTreeModel); //Fill the TreeView's model Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "right-click on this"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "or this"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "or this, for a popup context menu"; //Add the TreeView's view columns: append_column("ID", m_Columns.m_col_id); append_column("Name", m_Columns.m_col_name); //Fill popup menu: Gtk::MenuItem* item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::MenuItem("_Edit", true)); item->signal_activate().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TreeView_WithPopup::on_menu_file_popup_generic) ); m_Menu_Popup.append(*item); item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::MenuItem("_Process", true)); item->signal_activate().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TreeView_WithPopup::on_menu_file_popup_generic) ); m_Menu_Popup.append(*item); item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::MenuItem("_Remove", true)); item->signal_activate().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TreeView_WithPopup::on_menu_file_popup_generic) ); m_Menu_Popup.append(*item); m_Menu_Popup.accelerate(*this); m_Menu_Popup.show_all(); //Show all menu items when the menu pops up #ifndef GLIBMM_DEFAULT_SIGNAL_HANDLERS_ENABLED signal_button_press_event() .connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TreeView_WithPopup::on_button_press_event), false); #endif } TreeView_WithPopup::~TreeView_WithPopup() { } bool TreeView_WithPopup::on_button_press_event(GdkEventButton* event) { bool return_value = false; //Call base class, to allow normal handling, //such as allowing the row to be selected by the right-click: return_value = TreeView::on_button_press_event(event); //Then do our custom stuff: if( (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) && (event->button == 3) ) { m_Menu_Popup.popup(event->button, event->time); } return return_value; } void TreeView_WithPopup::on_menu_file_popup_generic() { std::cout << "A popup menu item was selected." << std::endl; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeView::Selection> refSelection = get_selection(); if(refSelection) { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = refSelection->get_selected(); if(iter) { int id = (*iter)[m_Columns.m_col_id]; std::cout << " Selected ID=" << id << std::endl; } } } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("Gtk::TreeView (ListStore) example"); set_border_width(5); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow, with the button underneath: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TreeView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(5); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Combo Boxes The ComboBox widget offers a list (or tree) of choices in a dropdown menu. If appropriate, it can show extra information about each item, such as text, a picture, a checkbox, or a progress bar. The ComboBox widget usually restricts the user to the available choices, but it can optionally have an Entry, allowing the user to enter arbitrary text if none of the available choices are suitable. The list is provided via a TreeModel, and columns from this model are added to the ComboBox's view with the ComboBox::pack_start() method. This provides flexibility and compile-time type-safety, but the ComboBoxText class provides a simpler text-based specialization in case that flexibility is not required. Reference The model The model for a ComboBox can be defined and filled exactly as for a TreeView. For instance, you might derive a ComboBox class with one integer and one text column, like so: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumns m_columns; After appending rows to this model, you should provide the model to the ComboBox with the set_model() method. Then use the pack_start() or pack_end() methods to specify what columns will be displayed in the ComboBox. As with the TreeView you may either use the default cell renderer by passing the TreeModelColumn to the pack methods, or you may instantiate a specific CellRenderer and specify a particular mapping with either add_attribute() or set_cell_data_func(). Note that these methods are in the CellLayout base class. The chosen item To discover what item, if any, the user has chosen from the ComboBox, call ComboBox::get_active(). This returns a TreeModel::iterator that you can dereference to a Row in order to read the values in your columns. For instance, you might read an integer ID value from the model, even though you have chosen only to show the human-readable description in the Combo. For instance: Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_Combo.get_active(); if(iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; //Get the data for the selected row, using our knowledge //of the tree model: int id = row[m_Columns.m_col_id]; set_something_id_chosen(id); //Your own function. } else set_nothing_chosen(); //Your own function. Responding to changes You might need to react to every change of selection in the ComboBox, for instance to update other widgets. To do so, you should handle the changed signal. For instance: m_combo.signal_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed) ); Full Example
ComboBox
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/comboboxtext.h> #include <gtkmm/liststore.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_combo_changed(); //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_id; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //Child widgets: Gtk::ComboBox m_Combo; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModel; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() { set_title("ComboBox example"); //Create the Tree model: //m_refTreeModel = Gtk::TreeStore::create(m_Columns); m_refTreeModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); m_Combo.set_model(m_refTreeModel); //Fill the ComboBox's Tree Model: Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 1; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob"; m_Combo.set_active(row); /* Gtk::TreeModel::Row childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 11; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob Junior"; childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 12; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Sue Bob"; */ row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 2; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Joey Jojo"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 3; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Rob McRoberts"; /* childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 31; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Xavier McRoberts"; */ //Add the model columns to the Combo (which is a kind of view), //rendering them in the default way: m_Combo.pack_start(m_Columns.m_col_id); m_Combo.pack_start(m_Columns.m_col_name); //Add the ComboBox to the window. add(m_Combo); //Connect signal handler: m_Combo.signal_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed() { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_Combo.get_active(); if(iter) { Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; if(row) { //Get the data for the selected row, using our knowledge of the tree //model: int id = row[m_Columns.m_col_id]; Glib::ustring name = row[m_Columns.m_col_name]; std::cout << " ID=" << id << ", name=" << name << std::endl; } } else std::cout << "invalid iter" << std::endl; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Simple Text Example
ComboBoxText
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/comboboxtext.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_combo_changed(); //Child widgets: Gtk::ComboBoxText m_Combo; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() { set_title("ComboBoxText example"); //Fill the combo: m_Combo.append("something"); m_Combo.append("something else"); m_Combo.append("something or other"); m_Combo.set_active(1); add(m_Combo); //Connect signal handler: m_Combo.signal_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed() { Glib::ustring text = m_Combo.get_active_text(); if(!(text.empty())) std::cout << "Combo changed: " << text << std::endl; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } ComboBox with an Entry A ComboBox may contain an Entry widget for entering of arbitrary text, by specifying true for the constructor's has_entry parameter. The text column So that the Entry can interact with the drop-down list of choices, you must specify which of your model columns is the text column, with set_entry_text_column(). For instance: m_combo.set_entry_text_column(m_columns.m_col_name); When you select a choice from the drop-down menu, the value from this column will be placed in the Entry. The entry Because the user may enter arbitrary text, an active model row isn't enough to tell us what text the user has entered. Therefore, you should retrieve the Entry widget with the ComboBox::get_entry() method and call get_text() on that. Responding to changes When the user enters arbitrary text, it may not be enough to connect to the changed signal, which is emitted for every typed character. It is not emitted when the user presses the Enter key. Pressing the Enter key or moving the keyboard focus to another widget may signal that the user has finished entering text. To be notified of these events, connect to the Entry's activate and focus_out_event signals, like so Gtk::Entry* entry = m_Combo.get_entry(); if (entry) { // The Entry shall receive focus-out events. entry->add_events(Gdk::FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK); // Alternatively you can connect to m_Combo.signal_changed(). entry->signal_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_changed) ); entry->signal_activate().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_activate) ); entry->signal_focus_out_event().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_focus_out_event) ); } The changed signals of ComboBox and Entry are both emitted for every change. It doesn't matter which one you connect to. But only Entry's focus_out_event signal is useful here. X events are described in more detail in the X Event signals section in the appendix. Full Example
ComboBox with Entry
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/combobox.h> #include <gtkmm/liststore.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_entry_changed(); void on_entry_activate(); bool on_entry_focus_out_event(GdkEventFocus* event); //Signal connection: sigc::connection m_ConnectionFocusOut; //Tree model columns: class ModelColumns : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumns() { add(m_col_id); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_id; //The data to choose - this must be text. Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumns m_Columns; //Child widgets: Gtk::ComboBox m_Combo; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModel; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Combo(true /* has_entry */) { set_title("ComboBox example"); //Create the Tree model: //m_refTreeModel = Gtk::TreeStore::create(m_Columns); m_refTreeModel = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_Columns); m_Combo.set_model(m_refTreeModel); //Fill the ComboBox's Tree Model: Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = "1"; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob"; /* Gtk::TreeModel::Row childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 11; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Billy Bob Junior"; childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 12; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Sue Bob"; */ row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = "2"; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Joey Jojo"; row = *(m_refTreeModel->append()); row[m_Columns.m_col_id] = "3"; row[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Rob McRoberts"; /* childrow = *(m_refTreeModel->append(row.children())); childrow[m_Columns.m_col_id] = 31; childrow[m_Columns.m_col_name] = "Xavier McRoberts"; */ //Add the model columns to the Combo (which is a kind of view), //rendering them in the default way: //This is automatically rendered when we use set_entry_text_column(). //m_Combo.pack_start(m_Columns.m_col_id); m_Combo.pack_start(m_Columns.m_col_name); m_Combo.set_entry_text_column(m_Columns.m_col_id); m_Combo.set_active(1); //Add the ComboBox to the window. add(m_Combo); //Connect signal handlers: Gtk::Entry* entry = m_Combo.get_entry(); if (entry) { // The Entry shall receive focus-out events. entry->add_events(Gdk::FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK); // Alternatively you can connect to m_Combo.signal_changed(). entry->signal_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_changed) ); entry->signal_activate().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_activate) ); m_ConnectionFocusOut = entry->signal_focus_out_event(). connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_focus_out_event) ); } else std::cout << "No Entry ???" << std::endl; show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { // The focus_out signal may be emitted while m_Combo is being destructed. // The signal handler can generate critical messages, if it's called when // m_Combo has been partly destructed. m_ConnectionFocusOut.disconnect(); } void ExampleWindow::on_entry_changed() { Gtk::Entry* entry = m_Combo.get_entry(); if (entry) { std::cout << "on_entry_changed(): Row=" << m_Combo.get_active_row_number() << ", ID=" << entry->get_text() << std::endl; } } void ExampleWindow::on_entry_activate() { Gtk::Entry* entry = m_Combo.get_entry(); if (entry) { std::cout << "on_entry_activate(): Row=" << m_Combo.get_active_row_number() << ", ID=" << entry->get_text() << std::endl; } } bool ExampleWindow::on_entry_focus_out_event(GdkEventFocus* /* event */) { Gtk::Entry* entry = m_Combo.get_entry(); if (entry) { std::cout << "on_entry_focus_out_event(): Row=" << m_Combo.get_active_row_number() << ", ID=" << entry->get_text() << std::endl; return true; } return false; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Simple Text Example
ComboBoxText with Entry
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/comboboxtext.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_combo_changed(); void on_entry_activate(); bool on_entry_focus_out_event(GdkEventFocus* event); //Signal connection: sigc::connection m_ConnectionFocusOut; //Child widgets: Gtk::ComboBoxText m_Combo; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Combo(true /* has_entry */) { set_title("ComboBoxText example"); //Fill the combo: m_Combo.append("something"); m_Combo.append("something else"); m_Combo.append("something or other"); m_Combo.set_active(0); add(m_Combo); //Connect signal handlers: Gtk::Entry* entry = m_Combo.get_entry(); // Alternatively you can connect to entry->signal_changed(). m_Combo.signal_changed().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed) ); if (entry) { // The Entry shall receive focus-out events. entry->add_events(Gdk::FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK); entry->signal_activate().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_activate) ); m_ConnectionFocusOut = entry->signal_focus_out_event(). connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_entry_focus_out_event) ); } else std::cout << "No Entry ???" << std::endl; m_Combo.property_has_frame() = false; show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { // The focus_out signal may be emitted while m_Combo is being destructed. // The signal handler can generate critical messages, if it's called when // m_Combo has been partly destructed. m_ConnectionFocusOut.disconnect(); } void ExampleWindow::on_combo_changed() { std::cout << "on_combo_changed(): Row=" << m_Combo.get_active_row_number() << ", Text=" << m_Combo.get_active_text() << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_entry_activate() { std::cout << "on_entry_activate(): Row=" << m_Combo.get_active_row_number() << ", Text=" << m_Combo.get_active_text() << std::endl; } bool ExampleWindow::on_entry_focus_out_event(GdkEventFocus* /* event */) { std::cout << "on_entry_focus_out_event(): Row=" << m_Combo.get_active_row_number() << ", Text=" << m_Combo.get_active_text() << std::endl; return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } TextView The TextView widget can be used to display and edit large amounts of formatted text. Like the TreeView, it has a model/view design. In this case the TextBuffer is the model. The Buffer Gtk::TextBuffer is a model containing the data for the Gtk::TextView, like the Gtk::TreeModel used by Gtk::TreeView. This allows two or more Gtk::TextViews to share the same TextBuffer, and allows those TextBuffers to be displayed slightly differently. Or you could maintain several Gtk::TextBuffers and choose to display each one at different times in the same Gtk::TextView widget. The TextView creates its own default TextBuffer, which you can access via the get_buffer() method. Reference Iterators Tags and Formatting Tags To specify that some text in the buffer should have specific formatting, you must define a tag to hold that formatting information, and then apply that tag to the region of text. For instance, to define the tag and its properties: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer::Tag> refTagMatch = Gtk::TextBuffer::Tag::create(); refTagMatch->property_background() = "orange"; You can specify a name for the Tag when using the create() method, but it is not necessary. The Tag class has many other properties. Reference TagTable Each Gtk::TextBuffer uses a Gtk::TextBuffer::TagTable, which contains the Tags for that buffer. 2 or more TextBuffers may share the same TagTable. When you create Tags you should add them to the TagTable. For instance: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer::TagTable> refTagTable = Gtk::TextBuffer::TagTable::create(); refTagTable->add(refTagMatch); //Hopefully a future version of gtkmm will have a set_tag_table() method, //for use after creation of the buffer. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer> refBuffer = Gtk::TextBuffer::create(refTagTable); You can also use get_tag_table() to get, and maybe modify, the TextBuffer's default TagTable instead of creating one explicitly. Reference Applying Tags If you have created a Tag and added it to the TagTable, you may apply that tag to part of the TextBuffer so that some of the text is displayed with that formatting. You define the start and end of the range of text by specifying Gtk::TextBuffer::iterators. For instance: refBuffer->apply_tag(refTagMatch, iterRangeStart, iterRangeStop); Or you could specify the tag when first inserting the text: refBuffer->insert_with_tag(iter, "Some text", refTagMatch); You can apply more than one Tag to the same text, by using apply_tag() more than once, or by using insert_with_tags(). The Tags might specify different values for the same properties, but you can resolve these conflicts by using Tag::set_priority(). Marks TextBuffer iterators are generally invalidated when the text changes, but you can use a Gtk::TextBuffer::Mark to remember a position in these situations. For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer::Mark> refMark = refBuffer->create_mark(iter); You can then use the get_iter() method later to create an iterator for the Mark's new position. There are two built-in Marks - insert and select_bound, which you can access with TextBuffer's get_insert() and get_selection_bound() methods. Reference The View As mentioned above, each TextView has a TextBuffer, and one or more TextView can share the same TextBuffer. Like the TreeView, you should probably put your TextView inside a ScrolledWindow to allow the user to see and move around the whole text area with scrollbars. Reference Default formatting TextView has various methods which allow you to change the presentation of the buffer for this particular view. Some of these may be overridden by the Gtk::TextTags in the buffer, if they specify the same things. For instance, set_left_margin(), set_right_margin(), set_indent(), etc. Scrolling Gtk::TextView has various scroll_to_*() methods. These allow you to ensure that a particular part of the text buffer is visible. For instance, your application's Find feature might use Gtk::TextView::scroll_to_iter() to show the found text. Widgets and ChildAnchors You can embed widgets, such as Gtk::Buttons, in the text. Each such child widget needs a ChildAnchor. ChildAnchors are associated with iterators. For instance, to create a child anchor at a particular position, use Gtk::TextBuffer::create_child_anchor(): Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextChildAnchor> refAnchor = refBuffer->create_child_anchor(iter); Then, to add a widget at that position, use Gtk::TextView::add_child_at_anchor(): m_TextView.add_child_at_anchor(m_Button, refAnchor); Reference Examples Simple Example
TextView
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: void fill_buffers(); //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); void on_button_buffer1(); void on_button_buffer2(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TextView m_TextView; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer> m_refTextBuffer1, m_refTextBuffer2; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit, m_Button_Buffer1, m_Button_Buffer2; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit(Gtk::Stock::QUIT), m_Button_Buffer1("Use buffer 1"), m_Button_Buffer2("Use buffer 2") { set_title("Gtk::TextView example"); set_border_width(5); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the TreeView, inside a ScrolledWindow, with the button underneath: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TextView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindow); //Add buttons: m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Buffer1, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Buffer2, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(5); m_ButtonBox.set_spacing(5); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); //Connect signals: m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); m_Button_Buffer1.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_buffer1) ); m_Button_Buffer2.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_buffer2) ); fill_buffers(); on_button_buffer1(); show_all_children(); } void ExampleWindow::fill_buffers() { m_refTextBuffer1 = Gtk::TextBuffer::create(); m_refTextBuffer1->set_text("This is the text from TextBuffer #1."); m_refTextBuffer2 = Gtk::TextBuffer::create(); m_refTextBuffer2->set_text( "This is some alternative text, from TextBuffer #2."); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_buffer1() { m_TextView.set_buffer(m_refTextBuffer1); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_buffer2() { m_TextView.set_buffer(m_refTextBuffer2); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Menus and Toolbars There are specific APIs for Menus and toolbars, but you should usually deal with them together, using the UIManager to define Actions which you can then arrange in menus and toolbars. In this way you can handle activation of the action instead of responding to the menu and toolbar items separately. And you can enable or disable both the menu and toolbar item via the action. This involves the use of the Gtk::ActionGroup, Gtk::Action, and UIManager classes, all of which should be instantiated via their create() methods, which return RefPtrs. Actions First create the Actions and add them to an ActionGroup, with ActionGroup::add(). The arguments to Action::create() specify the action's name and how it will appear in menus and toolbars. Use stock items where possible so that you don't need to specify the label, accelerator, icon, and tooltips, and so you can use pre-existing translations. You can also specify a signal handler when calling ActionGroup::add(). This signal handler will be called when the action is activated via either a menu item or a toolbar button. Note that you must specify actions for sub menus as well as menu items. For instance: m_refActionGroup = Gtk::ActionGroup::create(); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("MenuFile", "_File") ); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("New", Gtk::Stock::NEW), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_action_file_new) ); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("ExportData", "Export Data"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_action_file_open) ); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("Quit", Gtk::Stock::QUIT), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_action_file_quit) ); Note that this is where we specify the names of the actions as they will be seen by users in menus and toolbars. Therefore, this is where you should make strings translatable, by putting them inside the _() macro. When we use the Gtk::Stock items, of course, translations are automatically available. UIManager Next you should create a UIManager and add the ActionGroup to the UIManager with insert_action_group() At this point is also a good idea to tell the parent window to respond to the specified keyboard shortcuts, by using add_accel_group(). For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::UIManager> m_refUIManager = Gtk::UIManager::create(); m_refUIManager->insert_action_group(m_refActionGroup); add_accel_group(m_refUIManager->get_accel_group()); Then, you can define the actual visible layout of the menus and toolbars, and add the UI layout to the UIManager. This "ui string" uses an XML format, in which you should mention the names of the actions that you have already created. For instance: Glib::ustring ui_info = "<ui>" " <menubar name='MenuBar'>" " <menu action='MenuFile'>" " <menuitem action='New'/>" " <menuitem action='Open'/>" " <separator/>" " <menuitem action='Quit'/>" " </menu>" " <menu action='MenuEdit'>" " <menuitem action='Cut'/>" " <menuitem action='Copy'/>" " <menuitem action='Paste'/>" " </menu>" " </menubar>" " <toolbar name='ToolBar'>" " <toolitem action='Open'/>" " <toolitem action='Quit'/>" " </toolbar>" "</ui>"; m_refUIManager->add_ui_from_string(ui_info); Remember that these names are just the identifiers that we used when creating the actions. They are not the text that the user will see in the menus and toolbars. We provided those human-readable names when we created the actions. To instantiate a Gtk::MenuBar or Gtk::Toolbar which you can actually show, you should use the UIManager::get_widget() method, and then add the widget to a container. For instance: Gtk::Widget* pMenubar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/MenuBar"); pBox->add(*pMenuBar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); Popup Menus Menus are normally just added to a window, but they can also be displayed temporarily as the result of a mouse button click. For instance, a context menu might be displayed when the user clicks their right mouse button. The UI layout for a popup menu should use the popup node. For instance: Glib::ustring ui_info = "<ui>" " <popup name='PopupMenu'>" " <menuitem action='ContextEdit'/>" " <menuitem action='ContextProcess'/>" " <menuitem action='ContextRemove'/>" " </popup>" "</ui>"; m_refUIManager->add_ui_from_string(ui_info); To show the popup menu, use Gtk::Menu's popup() method, providing the button identifier and the time of activation, as provided by the button_press_event signal, which you will need to handle anyway. For instance: bool ExampleWindow::on_button_press_event(GdkEventButton* event) { if( (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) && (event->button == 3) ) { m_Menu_Popup->popup(event->button, event->time); return true; //It has been handled. } else return false; } Examples Main Menu example
Main Menu
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_menu_file_new_generic(); void on_menu_file_quit(); void on_menu_others(); void on_menu_choices_one(); void on_menu_choices_two(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_Box; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::UIManager> m_refUIManager; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ActionGroup> m_refActionGroup; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::RadioAction> m_refChoiceOne, m_refChoiceTwo; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL) { set_title("main menu example"); set_default_size(200, 200); add(m_Box); // put a MenuBar at the top of the box and other stuff below it. //Create actions for menus and toolbars: m_refActionGroup = Gtk::ActionGroup::create(); //File|New sub menu: m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("FileNewStandard", Gtk::Stock::NEW, "_New", "Create a new file"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new_generic)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("FileNewFoo", Gtk::Stock::NEW, "New Foo", "Create a new foo"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new_generic)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("FileNewGoo", Gtk::Stock::NEW, "_New Goo", "Create a new goo"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new_generic)); //File menu: m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("FileMenu", "File")); //Sub-menu. m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("FileNew", Gtk::Stock::NEW)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("FileQuit", Gtk::Stock::QUIT), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_quit)); //Edit menu: m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("EditMenu", "Edit")); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("EditCopy", Gtk::Stock::COPY), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_others)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("EditPaste", Gtk::Stock::PASTE), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_others)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("EditSomething", "Something"), Gtk::AccelKey("<control><alt>S"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_others)); //Choices menu, to demonstrate Radio items m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("ChoicesMenu", "Choices") ); Gtk::RadioAction::Group group_userlevel; m_refChoiceOne = Gtk::RadioAction::create(group_userlevel, "ChoiceOne", "One"); m_refActionGroup->add(m_refChoiceOne, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_choices_one) ); m_refChoiceTwo = Gtk::RadioAction::create(group_userlevel, "ChoiceTwo", "Two"); m_refActionGroup->add(m_refChoiceTwo, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_choices_two) ); //Help menu: m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("HelpMenu", "Help") ); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("HelpAbout", Gtk::Stock::HELP), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_others) ); m_refUIManager = Gtk::UIManager::create(); m_refUIManager->insert_action_group(m_refActionGroup); add_accel_group(m_refUIManager->get_accel_group()); //Layout the actions in a menubar and toolbar: Glib::ustring ui_info = "<ui>" " <menubar name='MenuBar'>" " <menu action='FileMenu'>" " <menu action='FileNew'>" " <menuitem action='FileNewStandard'/>" " <menuitem action='FileNewFoo'/>" " <menuitem action='FileNewGoo'/>" " </menu>" " <separator/>" " <menuitem action='FileQuit'/>" " </menu>" " <menu action='EditMenu'>" " <menuitem action='EditCopy'/>" " <menuitem action='EditPaste'/>" " <menuitem action='EditSomething'/>" " </menu>" " <menu action='ChoicesMenu'>" " <menuitem action='ChoiceOne'/>" " <menuitem action='ChoiceTwo'/>" " </menu>" " <menu action='HelpMenu'>" " <menuitem action='HelpAbout'/>" " </menu>" " </menubar>" " <toolbar name='ToolBar'>" " <toolitem action='FileNewStandard'/>" " <toolitem action='FileQuit'/>" " </toolbar>" "</ui>"; try { m_refUIManager->add_ui_from_string(ui_info); } catch(const Glib::Error& ex) { std::cerr << "building menus failed: " << ex.what(); } //Get the menubar and toolbar widgets, and add them to a container widget: Gtk::Widget* pMenubar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/MenuBar"); if(pMenubar) m_Box.pack_start(*pMenubar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); Gtk::Widget* pToolbar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/ToolBar") ; if(pToolbar) m_Box.pack_start(*pToolbar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_quit() { hide(); //Closes the main window to stop the app->run(). } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new_generic() { std::cout << "A File|New menu item was selected." << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_others() { std::cout << "A menu item was selected." << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_choices_one() { Glib::ustring message; if(m_refChoiceOne->get_active()) message = "Choice 1 was selected."; else message = "Choice 1 was deselected"; std::cout << message << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_choices_two() { Glib::ustring message; if(m_refChoiceTwo->get_active()) message = "Choice 2 was selected."; else message = "Choice 2 was deselected"; std::cout << message << std::endl; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Popup Menu example
Popup Menu
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: virtual bool on_button_press_event(GdkEventButton* event); void on_menu_file_popup_generic(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_Box; Gtk::EventBox m_EventBox; Gtk::Label m_Label; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::UIManager> m_refUIManager; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ActionGroup> m_refActionGroup; Gtk::Menu* m_pMenuPopup; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label("Right-click to see the popup menu."), m_pMenuPopup(0) /* m_Image(Gtk::Stock::DIALOG_QUESTION, Gtk::ICON_SIZE_MENU) */ { set_title("popup example"); set_default_size(200, 200); add(m_Box); //Add an event box that can catch button_press events: m_Box.pack_start(m_EventBox); m_EventBox.signal_button_press_event().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_press_event) ); m_EventBox.add(m_Label); //Create actions: //Fill menu: m_refActionGroup = Gtk::ActionGroup::create(); //File|New sub menu: //These menu actions would normally already exist for a main menu, because a //context menu should not normally contain menu items that are only available //via a context menu. m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("ContextMenu", "Context Menu")); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("ContextEdit", "Edit"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_popup_generic)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("ContextProcess", "Process"), Gtk::AccelKey("<control>P"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_popup_generic)); m_refActionGroup->add(Gtk::Action::create("ContextRemove", "Remove"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_popup_generic)); //TODO: /* //Add a ImageMenuElem: menulist.push_back( Gtk::Menu_Helpers::ImageMenuElem("_Something", m_Image, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_popup_generic) ) ) ; */ m_refUIManager = Gtk::UIManager::create(); m_refUIManager->insert_action_group(m_refActionGroup); add_accel_group(m_refUIManager->get_accel_group()); //Layout the actions in a menubar and toolbar: Glib::ustring ui_info = "<ui>" " <popup name='PopupMenu'>" " <menuitem action='ContextEdit'/>" " <menuitem action='ContextProcess'/>" " <menuitem action='ContextRemove'/>" " </popup>" "</ui>"; try { m_refUIManager->add_ui_from_string(ui_info); } catch(const Glib::Error& ex) { std::cerr << "building menus failed: " << ex.what(); } //Get the menu: m_pMenuPopup = dynamic_cast<Gtk::Menu*>( m_refUIManager->get_widget("/PopupMenu")); if(!m_pMenuPopup) g_warning("menu not found"); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_popup_generic() { std::cout << "A popup menu item was selected." << std::endl; } bool ExampleWindow::on_button_press_event(GdkEventButton* event) { if( (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) && (event->button == 3) ) { if(m_pMenuPopup) m_pMenuPopup->popup(event->button, event->time); return true; //It has been handled. } else return false; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } ToolPalette A ToolPalette is similar to a Toolbar but can contain a grid of items, categorized into groups. The user may hide or expand each group. As in a toolbar, the items may be displayed as only icons, as only text, or as icons with text. The ToolPalette's items might be dragged or simply activated. For instance, the user might drag objects to a canvas to create new items there. Or the user might click an item to activate a certain brush size in a drawing application. ToolItemGroups should be added to the tool pallete via the base class's Gtk::Container::add() method, for instance like so: Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group_brushes = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup("Brushes")); m_ToolPalette.add(*group_brushes); Gtk::ToolItems can then be added to the group. For instance, like so: Gtk::ToolButton* button = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolButton(icon, "Big")); button->set_tooltip_text("Big Brush); group_brushes->insert(*button); You might then handle the ToolButton's clicked signal. Alternatively, you could allow the item to be dragged to another widget, by calling Gtk::ToolPalette::add_drag_dest() and then using Gtk::ToolPalette::get_drag_item() in the other widget's drag_data_received signal handler. ToolPalette Reference ToolItemGroup Reference ToolItem Reference Drag and Drop Call add_drag_dest() to allow items or groups to be dragged from the tool palette to a particular destination widget. You can then use get_drag_item() to discover which ToolItem or ToolItemGroup is being dragged. You can use dynamic_cast to discover whether is it an item or a group. For instance, you might use this in your drag_data_received signal handler, to add a dropped item, or to show a suitable icon while dragging. See the Drag and Drop chapter for general advice about Drag and Drop with gtkmm. ToolPalette Example This example adds a ToolPalette and a DrawingArea to a window and allows the user to drag icons from the tool palette to the drawing area. The tool palette contains several groups of items. The combo boxes allow the user to change the style and orientation of the tool palette.
ToolPalette
Source Code File: canvas.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CANVAS_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CANVAS_H #include <gtkmm.h> // This little canvas class is only here // because gtkmm does not have a canvas class yet. // Applications should probably use GooCanvas::Canvas (goocanvasmm) instead. class Canvas : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: Canvas(); virtual ~Canvas(); private: class CanvasItem { public: CanvasItem(Gtk::Widget* canvas, Gtk::ToolButton* button, double x, double y) { const Gtk::StockID stock_id(button->get_stock_id()); this->pixbuf = canvas->render_icon_pixbuf(stock_id, Gtk::ICON_SIZE_DIALOG); this->x = x; this->y = y; } Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> pixbuf; double x, y; }; void item_draw(const CanvasItem *item, const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr, bool preview); virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); virtual void on_drag_data_received(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint info, guint time); virtual bool on_drag_motion(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, guint time); virtual bool on_drag_drop(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, guint time); virtual void on_drag_leave(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, guint time); bool m_drag_data_requested_for_drop; //So we know what to do in on_drag_data_received(). CanvasItem* m_drop_item; typedef std::vector<CanvasItem*> type_vec_items; type_vec_items m_canvas_items; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CANVAS_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include "canvas.h" class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); private: void load_stock_items(); void load_toggle_items(); void load_special_items(); //Signal handlers: void on_combo_orientation_changed(); void on_combo_style_changed(); //Tree model columns: class ModelColumnsOrientation : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumnsOrientation() { add(m_col_value); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Gtk::Orientation> m_col_value; Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumnsOrientation m_ColumnsOrientation; //Tree model columns: class ModelColumnsStyle : public Gtk::TreeModel::ColumnRecord { public: ModelColumnsStyle() { add(m_col_value); add(m_col_name); } Gtk::TreeModelColumn<int> m_col_value; //We use int to also allow -1 Gtk::TreeModelColumn<Glib::ustring> m_col_name; }; ModelColumnsStyle m_ColumnsStyle; //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Box m_HBox; Gtk::ComboBox m_ComboOrientation; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModelOrientation; Gtk::ComboBox m_ComboStyle; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ListStore> m_refTreeModelStyle; Gtk::ToolPalette m_ToolPalette; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindowPalette; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindowCanvas; Canvas m_Canvas; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" static bool sort_predicate(const Gtk::StockID& a, const Gtk::StockID& b) { return a.get_string() < b.get_string(); } void ExampleWindow::load_stock_items() { Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group_af = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup("Stock Icons (A-F)")); m_ToolPalette.add(*group_af); Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group_gn = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup("Stock Icons (G-N)")); m_ToolPalette.add(*group_gn); Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group_or = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup("Stock Icons (O-R)")); m_ToolPalette.add(*group_or); Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group_sz = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup("Stock Icons (S-Z)")); m_ToolPalette.add(*group_sz); // Obtain the IDs of all stock items: typedef std::vector<Gtk::StockID> type_vecIDs; type_vecIDs vecIDs = Gtk::Stock::get_ids(); std::sort(vecIDs.begin(), vecIDs.end(), &sort_predicate); Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group = 0; // Iterate through them, populating the ListStore as appropriate: for(type_vecIDs::const_iterator iterIDs = vecIDs.begin(); iterIDs != vecIDs.end(); ++iterIDs) { const Gtk::StockID& stockid = *iterIDs; const Glib::ustring str = stockid.get_string(); if(str.size() < 4) continue; switch(str[4]) { case 'a': group = group_af; break; case 'g': group = group_gn; break; case 'o': group = group_or; break; case 's': group = group_sz; break; default: //Use the previous group //(They are sorted.) break; } if(!group) continue; Gtk::ToolButton* button = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolButton(stockid)); button->set_tooltip_text(str); button->set_is_important(); group->insert(*button); Gtk::StockItem stockitem; if(!Gtk::StockItem::lookup(stockid, stockitem) || stockitem.get_label().empty()) button->set_label(str); } } void ExampleWindow::load_toggle_items() { Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup("Radio Item")); m_ToolPalette.add(*group); Gtk::RadioToolButton::Group radio_group; for(int i = 1; i <= 10; ++i) { const Glib::ustring label = Glib::ustring::compose("#%1", i); Gtk::RadioToolButton* button = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::RadioToolButton()); button->set_group(radio_group); button->set_label(label); group->insert(*button); } } static Gtk::ToolItem* create_entry_item(const Glib::ustring& text) { Gtk::Entry* entry = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Entry()); entry->set_text(text); entry->set_width_chars(5); Gtk::ToolItem* item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItem()); item->add(*entry); return item; } void ExampleWindow::load_special_items() { Gtk::ToolItemGroup* group = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolItemGroup()); Gtk::Button *label_button = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Button("Advanced Features")); label_button->show(); group->set_label_widget(*label_button); m_ToolPalette.add(*group); Gtk::ToolItem* item = create_entry_item ("homogeneous=false"); group->insert(*item); //TODO: Add Gtk::Container::set_child_property(). gtk_container_child_set (GTK_CONTAINER (group->gobj()), GTK_WIDGET (item->gobj()), "homogeneous", FALSE, NULL); item = create_entry_item ("homogeneous=FALSE, expand=TRUE"); group->insert(*item); gtk_container_child_set (GTK_CONTAINER (group->gobj()), GTK_WIDGET (item->gobj()), "homogeneous", FALSE, "expand", TRUE, NULL); item = create_entry_item ("homogeneous=FALSE, expand=TRUE, fill=FALSE"); group->insert(*item); gtk_container_child_set (GTK_CONTAINER (group->gobj()), GTK_WIDGET (item->gobj()), "homogeneous", FALSE, "expand", TRUE, "fill", FALSE, NULL); item = create_entry_item ("homogeneous=FALSE, expand=TRUE, new-row=TRUE"); group->insert(*item); gtk_container_child_set (GTK_CONTAINER (group->gobj()), GTK_WIDGET (item->gobj()), "homogeneous", FALSE, "expand", TRUE, "new-row", TRUE, NULL); item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolButton(Gtk::Stock::GO_UP)); item->set_tooltip_text("Show on vertical palettes only"); group->insert(*item); item->set_visible_horizontal(false); item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolButton(Gtk::Stock::GO_FORWARD)); item->set_tooltip_text("Show on horizontal palettes only"); group->insert(*item); item->set_visible_vertical(false); item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolButton(Gtk::Stock::FULLSCREEN)); item->set_tooltip_text("Expanded this item"); group->insert(*item); gtk_container_child_set (GTK_CONTAINER (group->gobj()), GTK_WIDGET (item->gobj()), "homogeneous", FALSE, "expand", TRUE, NULL); item = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::ToolButton(Gtk::Stock::HELP)); item->set_tooltip_text("A regular item"); group->insert(*item); } ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 6), m_HBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 6) { set_title("Gtk::ToolPalette example"); set_size_request(600, 600); set_border_width(6); add(m_VBox); //The Orientation ComboBox: m_refTreeModelOrientation = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_ColumnsOrientation); Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *(m_refTreeModelOrientation->append()); row[m_ColumnsOrientation.m_col_value] = Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL; row[m_ColumnsOrientation.m_col_name] = "Horizontal";\ row = *(m_refTreeModelOrientation->append()); row[m_ColumnsOrientation.m_col_value] = Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL; row[m_ColumnsOrientation.m_col_name] = "Vertical"; m_ComboOrientation.set_model(m_refTreeModelOrientation); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ComboOrientation, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ComboOrientation.pack_start(m_ColumnsOrientation.m_col_name); m_ComboOrientation.signal_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_orientation_changed) ); m_ComboOrientation.set_active(row); //The Style ComboBox: m_refTreeModelStyle = Gtk::ListStore::create(m_ColumnsStyle); row = *(m_refTreeModelStyle->append()); row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_value] = Gtk::TOOLBAR_TEXT; row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_name] = "Text";\ row = *(m_refTreeModelStyle->append()); row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_value] = Gtk::TOOLBAR_BOTH; row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_name] = "Both"; row = *(m_refTreeModelStyle->append()); row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_value] = Gtk::TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ; row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_name] = "Both: Horizontal"; row = *(m_refTreeModelStyle->append()); row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_value] = Gtk::TOOLBAR_ICONS; row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_name] = "Icons"; row = *(m_refTreeModelStyle->append()); row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_value] = -1; // A custom meaning for this demo. row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_name] = "Default"; m_ComboStyle.set_model(m_refTreeModelStyle); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ComboStyle, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ComboStyle.pack_start(m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_name); m_ComboStyle.signal_changed().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_combo_style_changed) ); m_ComboStyle.set_active(row); //Add and fill the ToolPalette: load_stock_items(); load_toggle_items(); load_special_items(); m_VBox.pack_start(m_HBox, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET); m_ScrolledWindowPalette.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_NEVER, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_ScrolledWindowPalette.set_border_width(6); m_ScrolledWindowPalette.add(m_ToolPalette); m_HBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindowPalette); on_combo_orientation_changed(); m_ScrolledWindowCanvas.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_ALWAYS); m_ScrolledWindowCanvas.set_border_width(6); m_ScrolledWindowCanvas.add(m_Canvas); m_ScrolledWindowCanvas.set_size_request(200, -1); m_HBox.pack_start(m_ScrolledWindowCanvas); m_ToolPalette.add_drag_dest(m_Canvas, Gtk::DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT, Gtk::TOOL_PALETTE_DRAG_ITEMS, Gdk::ACTION_COPY); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_combo_orientation_changed() { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_ComboOrientation.get_active(); if(!iter) return; Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; const Gtk::Orientation value = row[m_ColumnsOrientation.m_col_value]; m_ToolPalette.set_orientation(value); if(value == Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) m_ScrolledWindowPalette.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_NEVER); else m_ScrolledWindowPalette.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_NEVER, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); } void ExampleWindow::on_combo_style_changed() { Gtk::TreeModel::iterator iter = m_ComboStyle.get_active(); if(!iter) return; Gtk::TreeModel::Row row = *iter; const int value = row[m_ColumnsStyle.m_col_value]; if(value == -1) m_ToolPalette.unset_style(); else m_ToolPalette.set_style((Gtk::ToolbarStyle)value); } File: canvas.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "canvas.h" #include <iostream> Canvas::Canvas() : m_drag_data_requested_for_drop(false), m_drop_item() { set_app_paintable(); } Canvas::~Canvas() { while(!m_canvas_items.empty()) { type_vec_items::iterator iter = m_canvas_items.begin(); CanvasItem* item = *iter; delete item; m_canvas_items.erase(iter); } if(m_drop_item) delete m_drop_item; } void Canvas::item_draw(const CanvasItem *item, const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr, bool preview) { if(!item || !item->pixbuf) return; const double cx = item->pixbuf->get_width(); const double cy = item->pixbuf->get_height(); Gdk::Cairo::set_source_pixbuf(cr, item->pixbuf, item->x - cx * 0.5, item->y - cy * 0.5); if(preview) cr->paint_with_alpha(0.6); else cr->paint(); } bool Canvas::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { cr->set_source_rgb(1.0, 1.0, 1.0); const Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); cr->rectangle(0, 0, allocation.get_width(), allocation.get_height()); cr->fill(); for(type_vec_items::iterator iter = m_canvas_items.begin(); iter != m_canvas_items.end(); ++iter ) { item_draw(*iter, cr, false); } if(m_drop_item) item_draw (m_drop_item, cr, true); return true; } bool Canvas::on_drag_motion(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, guint time) { m_drag_data_requested_for_drop = false; //It's for drag-motion instead. if(m_drop_item) { // We already have a drop indicator so just update its position. m_drop_item->x = x; m_drop_item->y = y; queue_draw(); context->drag_status(Gdk::ACTION_COPY, time); } else { // Request DnD data for creating a drop indicator. // This will cause on_drag_data_received() to be called. const Glib::ustring target = drag_dest_find_target(context); if (target.empty()) return false; drag_get_data(context, target, time); } Gtk::DrawingArea::on_drag_motion(context, x, y, time); return true; } void Canvas::on_drag_data_received(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint info, guint time) { // Find the tool button which is the source of this DnD operation. Gtk::Widget* widget = drag_get_source_widget(context); Gtk::ToolPalette* drag_palette = dynamic_cast<Gtk::ToolPalette*>(widget); while(widget && !drag_palette) { widget = widget->get_parent(); drag_palette = dynamic_cast<Gtk::ToolPalette*>(widget); } Gtk::ToolItem* drag_item = 0; if(drag_palette) drag_item = drag_palette->get_drag_item(selection_data); // Create a drop indicator when a tool button was found: Gtk::ToolButton* button = dynamic_cast<Gtk::ToolButton*>(drag_item); if(!button) return; if(m_drop_item) { delete m_drop_item; m_drop_item = 0; } CanvasItem* item = new CanvasItem(this, button, x, y); if(m_drag_data_requested_for_drop) { m_canvas_items.push_back(item); // Signal that the item was accepted and then redraw. context->drag_finish(true /* success */, false /* del */, time); } else { m_drop_item = item; // We are getting this data due to a request in drag_motion, // rather than due to a request in drag_drop, so we are just // supposed to call gdk_drag_status (), not actually paste in // the data. context->drag_status(Gdk::ACTION_COPY, time); } queue_draw(); Gtk::DrawingArea::on_drag_data_received(context, x, y, selection_data, info, time); } bool Canvas::on_drag_drop(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int /* x */, int /* y */, guint time) { // Request DnD data for creating a dopped item. // This will cause on_drag_data_received() to be called. const Glib::ustring target = drag_dest_find_target(context); if (target.empty()) return false; m_drag_data_requested_for_drop = true; drag_get_data(context, target, time); return true; } void Canvas::on_drag_leave(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, guint time) { //This signal is emitted to clean up the item used for drag-motion, //either when the cursor moves out of the widget or when we drop. if(!m_drop_item) return; delete m_drop_item; m_drop_item = 0; queue_draw(); Gtk::DrawingArea::on_drag_leave(context, time); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Adjustments gtkmm has various widgets that can be visually adjusted using the mouse or the keyboard, such as the Range widgets (described in the Range Widgets section). There are also a few widgets that display some adjustable part of a larger area, such as the Viewport widget. These widgets have Gtk::Adjustment objects that express this common part of their API. So that applications can react to changes, for instance when a user moves a scrollbar, Gtk::Adjustment has a changed signal. You can then use the get_changed() method to discover the new value. Creating an Adjustment The Gtk::Adjustment constructor is as follows: Gtk::Adjustment(float value, float lower, float upper, float step_increment = 1, float page_increment = 10, float page_size = 0); The value argument is the initial value of the adjustment, usually corresponding to the topmost or leftmost position of an adjustable widget. The lower and upper arguments specifies the possible range of values which the adjustment can hold. The step_increment argument specifies the smaller of the two increments by which the user can change the value, while the page_increment is the larger one. The page_size argument usually corresponds somehow to the visible area of a panning widget. The upper argument is used to represent the bottom most or right most coordinate in a panning widget's child. Using Adjustments the Easy Way The adjustable widgets can be roughly divided into those which use and require specific units for these values, and those which treat them as arbitrary numbers. The group which treats the values as arbitrary numbers includes the Range widgets (Scrollbar and Scale), the ScaleButton widget, and the SpinButton widget. These widgets are typically "adjusted" directly by the user with the mouse or keyboard. They will treat the lower and upper values of an adjustment as a range within which the user can manipulate the adjustment's value. By default, they will only modify the value of an adjustment. The other group includes the Viewport widget and the ScrolledWindow widget. All of these widgets use pixel values for their adjustments. These are also typically adjusted indirectly using scrollbars. While all widgets which use adjustments can either create their own adjustments or use ones you supply, you'll generally want to let this particular category of widgets create its own adjustments. If you share an adjustment object between a Scrollbar and a TextView widget, manipulating the scrollbar will automagically adjust the TextView widget. You can set it up like this: // creates its own adjustments Gtk::TextView textview; // uses the newly-created adjustment for the scrollbar as well Gtk::Scrollbar vscrollbar (textview.get_vadjustment(), Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); Adjustment Internals OK, you say, that's nice, but what if I want to create my own handlers to respond when the user adjusts a Range widget or a SpinButton. To access the value of a Gtk::Adjustment, you can use the get_value() and set_value() methods: As mentioned earlier, Gtk::Adjustment can emit signals. This is, of course, how updates happen automatically when you share an Adjustment object between a Scrollbar and another adjustable widget; all adjustable widgets connect signal handlers to their adjustment's value_changed signal, as can your program. So, for example, if you have a Scale widget, and you want to change the rotation of a picture whenever its value changes, you would create a signal handler like this: void cb_rotate_picture (Gtk::Widget *picture) { picture->set_rotation (adj->value); ... and connect it to the scale widget's adjustment like this: adj.value_changed.connect(sigc::bind<Widget*>(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &cb_rotate_picture), picture)); What if a widget reconfigures the upper or lower fields of its Adjustment, such as when a user adds more text to a text widget? In this case, it emits the changed signal. Range widgets typically connect a handler to this signal, which changes their appearance to reflect the change - for example, the size of the slider in a scrollbar will grow or shrink in inverse proportion to the difference between the lower and upper values of its Adjustment. You probably won't ever need to attach a handler to this signal, unless you're writing a new type of range widget. adjustment->changed(); Widgets Without X-Windows Some Widgets do not have an associated X-Window, so they therefore do not receive X events. This means that the signals described in the X event signals section will not be emitted. If you want to capture events for these widgets you can use a special container called Gtk::EventBox, which is described in the EventBox section. Here is a list of some of these Widgets: Gtk::Alignment Gtk::Arrow Gtk::AspectFrame Gtk::Bin Gtk::Box Gtk::Button Gtk::CheckButton Gtk::Fixed Gtk::Frame Gtk::Grid Gtk::Image Gtk::Label Gtk::MenuItem Gtk::Notebook Gtk::Paned Gtk::RadioButton Gtk::Range Gtk::ScrolledWindow Gtk::Separator Gtk::Table (deprecated from gtkmm version 3.4) Gtk::Toolbar These widgets are mainly used for decoration or layout, so you won't often need to capture events on them. They are intended to have no X-Window in order to improve performance. EventBox Some gtkmm widgets don't have associated X windows; they draw on their parents' windows. Because of this, they cannot receive events. Also, if they are incorrectly sized, they don't clip, so you can get messy overwriting etc. To receive events on one of these widgets, you can place it inside an EventBox widget and then call Gtk::Widget::set_events() on the EventBox before showing it. Although the name EventBox emphasises the event-handling method, the widget can also be used for clipping (and more; see the example below). The constructor for Gtk::EventBox is: Gtk::EventBox(); A child widget can be added to the EventBox using: event_box.add(child_widget); Reference Example The following example demonstrates both uses of an EventBox - a label is created that is clipped to a small box, and set up so that a mouse-click on the label causes the program to exit. Resizing the window reveals varying amounts of the label.
EventBox
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: virtual bool on_eventbox_button_press(GdkEventButton* event); //Child widgets: Gtk::EventBox m_EventBox; Gtk::Label m_Label; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Label("Click here to quit, quit, quit, quit, quit") { set_title ("EventBox"); set_border_width(10); add(m_EventBox); m_EventBox.add(m_Label); //Clip the label short: m_Label.set_size_request(110, 20); //And bind an action to it: m_EventBox.set_events(Gdk::BUTTON_PRESS_MASK); m_EventBox.signal_button_press_event().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_eventbox_button_press) ); m_EventBox.set_tooltip_text("Click me!"); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } bool ExampleWindow::on_eventbox_button_press(GdkEventButton*) { hide(); return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Dialogs Dialogs are used as secondary windows, to provide specific information or to ask questions. Gtk::Dialog windows contain a few pre-packed widgets to ensure consistency, and a run() method which blocks until the user dismisses the dialog. There are several derived Dialog classes which you might find useful. Gtk::MessageDialog is used for most simple notifications. But at other times you might need to derive your own dialog class to provide more complex functionality. To pack widgets into a custom dialog, you should pack them into the Gtk::Box, available via get_content_area(). To just add a Button to the bottom of the Dialog, you could use the add_button() method. The run() method returns an int. This may be a value from the Gtk::ResponseType if the user closed the dialog by clicking a standard button, or it could be the custom response value that you specified when using add_button(). Reference MessageDialog MessageDialog is a convenience class, used to create simple, standard message dialogs, with a message, an icon, and buttons for user response. You can specify the type of message and the text in the constructor, as well as specifying standard buttons via the Gtk::ButtonsType enum. Reference Example
MessageDialog
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_info_clicked(); void on_button_question_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Info, m_Button_Question; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/messagedialog.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_ButtonBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Info("Show Info MessageDialog"), m_Button_Question("Show Question MessageDialog") { set_title("Gtk::MessageDialog example"); add(m_ButtonBox); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Info); m_Button_Info.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_info_clicked) ); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Question); m_Button_Question.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_question_clicked) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_info_clicked() { Gtk::MessageDialog dialog(*this, "This is an INFO MessageDialog"); dialog.set_secondary_text( "And this is the secondary text that explains things."); dialog.run(); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_question_clicked() { Gtk::MessageDialog dialog(*this, "This is a QUESTION MessageDialog", false /* use_markup */, Gtk::MESSAGE_QUESTION, Gtk::BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL); dialog.set_secondary_text( "And this is the secondary text that explains things."); int result = dialog.run(); //Handle the response: switch(result) { case(Gtk::RESPONSE_OK): { std::cout << "OK clicked." << std::endl; break; } case(Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL): { std::cout << "Cancel clicked." << std::endl; break; } default: { std::cout << "Unexpected button clicked." << std::endl; break; } } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } FileChooserDialog The FileChooserDialog is suitable for use with "Open" or "Save" menu items. Most of the useful member methods for this class are actually in the Gtk::FileChooser base class. Reference Example
FileChooser
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_file_clicked(); void on_button_folder_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_File, m_Button_Folder; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_ButtonBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_File("Choose File"), m_Button_Folder("Choose Folder") { set_title("Gtk::FileSelection example"); add(m_ButtonBox); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_File); m_Button_File.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_file_clicked) ); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Folder); m_Button_Folder.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_folder_clicked) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_folder_clicked() { Gtk::FileChooserDialog dialog("Please choose a folder", Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER); dialog.set_transient_for(*this); //Add response buttons the the dialog: dialog.add_button(Gtk::Stock::CANCEL, Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL); dialog.add_button("Select", Gtk::RESPONSE_OK); int result = dialog.run(); //Handle the response: switch(result) { case(Gtk::RESPONSE_OK): { std::cout << "Select clicked." << std::endl; std::cout << "Folder selected: " << dialog.get_filename() << std::endl; break; } case(Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL): { std::cout << "Cancel clicked." << std::endl; break; } default: { std::cout << "Unexpected button clicked." << std::endl; break; } } } void ExampleWindow::on_button_file_clicked() { Gtk::FileChooserDialog dialog("Please choose a file", Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN); dialog.set_transient_for(*this); //Add response buttons the the dialog: dialog.add_button(Gtk::Stock::CANCEL, Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL); dialog.add_button(Gtk::Stock::OPEN, Gtk::RESPONSE_OK); //Add filters, so that only certain file types can be selected: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::FileFilter> filter_text = Gtk::FileFilter::create(); filter_text->set_name("Text files"); filter_text->add_mime_type("text/plain"); dialog.add_filter(filter_text); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::FileFilter> filter_cpp = Gtk::FileFilter::create(); filter_cpp->set_name("C/C++ files"); filter_cpp->add_mime_type("text/x-c"); filter_cpp->add_mime_type("text/x-c++"); filter_cpp->add_mime_type("text/x-c-header"); dialog.add_filter(filter_cpp); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::FileFilter> filter_any = Gtk::FileFilter::create(); filter_any->set_name("Any files"); filter_any->add_pattern("*"); dialog.add_filter(filter_any); //Show the dialog and wait for a user response: int result = dialog.run(); //Handle the response: switch(result) { case(Gtk::RESPONSE_OK): { std::cout << "Open clicked." << std::endl; //Notice that this is a std::string, not a Glib::ustring. std::string filename = dialog.get_filename(); std::cout << "File selected: " << filename << std::endl; break; } case(Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL): { std::cout << "Cancel clicked." << std::endl; break; } default: { std::cout << "Unexpected button clicked." << std::endl; break; } } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } ColorChooserDialog The ColorChooserDialog allows the user to choose a color. The ColorButton opens a color selection dialog when it is clicked. Reference Example
ColorChooserDialog
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_color_button_color_set(); void on_button_dialog_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::ColorButton m_ColorButton; Gtk::Button m_Button_Dialog; Gtk::DrawingArea m_DrawingArea; //To show the color. Gdk::RGBA m_Color; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 5), m_Button_Dialog("Choose Color") { set_title("Gtk::ColorChooserDialog example"); set_default_size(200, 200); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ColorButton, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ColorButton.signal_color_set().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_color_button_color_set) ); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Button_Dialog, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Dialog.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_dialog_clicked) ); //Set start color: m_Color.set_red(0.0); m_Color.set_green(0.0); m_Color.set_blue(1.0); m_Color.set_alpha(1.0); //opaque m_ColorButton.set_rgba(m_Color); m_DrawingArea.override_background_color(m_Color); m_VBox.pack_start(m_DrawingArea); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_color_button_color_set() { //Store the chosen color, and show it: m_Color = m_ColorButton.get_rgba(); m_DrawingArea.override_background_color(m_Color); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_dialog_clicked() { Gtk::ColorChooserDialog dialog("Please choose a color"); dialog.set_transient_for(*this); //Get the previously selected color: dialog.set_rgba(m_Color); const int result = dialog.run(); //Handle the response: switch(result) { case Gtk::RESPONSE_OK: { //Store the chosen color, and show it: m_Color = dialog.get_rgba(); m_ColorButton.set_rgba(m_Color); m_DrawingArea.override_background_color(m_Color); break; } case Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL: { std::cout << "Cancel clicked." << std::endl; break; } default: { std::cout << "Unexpected button clicked: " << result << std::endl; break; } } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } FontChooserDialog The FontChooserDialog allows the user to choose a font. The FontButton opens a font chooser dialog when it is clicked. Reference Example
FontChooserDialog
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_font_button_font_set(); void on_button_dialog_clicked(); //Child widgets: Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::FontButton m_FontButton; Gtk::Button m_Button_Dialog; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_ButtonBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_FontButton("Sans 10"), m_Button_Dialog("Choose Font") { set_title("Gtk::FontChooserDialog example"); add(m_ButtonBox); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_FontButton); m_FontButton.set_use_font(true); m_FontButton.set_use_size(true); m_FontButton.signal_font_set().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_font_button_font_set) ); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Dialog); m_Button_Dialog.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_dialog_clicked) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_font_button_font_set() { Glib::ustring font_name = m_FontButton.get_font_name(); std::cout << "Font chosen: " << font_name << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_button_dialog_clicked() { Gtk::FontChooserDialog dialog("Please choose a font", *this); //Get the previously selected font name from the FontButton: dialog.set_font(m_FontButton.get_font_name()); int result = dialog.run(); //Handle the response: switch(result) { case Gtk::RESPONSE_OK: { Glib::ustring font_name = dialog.get_font(); std::cout << "Font chosen: " << font_name << std::endl; m_FontButton.set_font_name(font_name); break; } case Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL: { std::cout << "Cancel clicked." << std::endl; break; } default: { std::cout << "Unexpected button clicked: " << result << std::endl; break; } } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Non-modal AboutDialog The AboutDialog offers a simple way to display information about a program, like its logo, name, copyright, website and license. Most dialogs in this chapter are modal, that is, they freeze the rest of the application while they are shown. It's also possible to create a non-modal dialog, which does not freeze other windows in the application. The following example shows a non-modal AboutDialog. This is perhaps not the kind of dialog you would normally make non-modal, but non-modal dialogs can be useful in other cases. E.g. gedit's search-and-replace dialog is non-modal. Reference Example
AboutDialog
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_clicked(); void on_about_dialog_response(int response_id); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Label m_Label; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button; Gtk::AboutDialog m_Dialog; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label("The AboutDialog is non-modal. " "You can select parts of this text while the AboutDialog is shown."), m_ButtonBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button("Show AboutDialog") { set_title("Gtk::AboutDialog example"); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Label); m_Label.set_line_wrap(true); m_Label.set_selectable(true); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button); m_Button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked) ); m_Dialog.set_transient_for(*this); m_Dialog.set_program_name("Example application"); m_Dialog.set_version("1.0.0"); m_Dialog.set_copyright("Murray Cumming"); m_Dialog.set_comments("This is just an example application."); m_Dialog.set_license("LGPL"); m_Dialog.set_website("http://www.gtkmm.org"); m_Dialog.set_website_label("gtkmm website"); std::vector<Glib::ustring> list_authors; list_authors.push_back("Murray Cumming"); list_authors.push_back("Somebody Else"); list_authors.push_back("AN Other"); m_Dialog.set_authors(list_authors); m_Dialog.signal_response().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_about_dialog_response) ); show_all_children(); // The widget must be realized and mapped before grab_focus() is called. // That's why it's called after show_all_children(). m_Button.grab_focus(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_about_dialog_response(int response_id) { std::cout << response_id << ", close=" << Gtk::RESPONSE_CLOSE << ", cancel=" << Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL << ", delete_event=" << Gtk::RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT << std::endl; if((response_id == Gtk::RESPONSE_CLOSE) || (response_id == Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL) ) { m_Dialog.hide(); } } void ExampleWindow::on_button_clicked() { m_Dialog.show(); //Bring it to the front, in case it was already shown: m_Dialog.present(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } The Drawing Area Widget The DrawingArea widget is a blank window that gives you the freedom to create any graphic you desire. Along with that freedom comes the responsibility to handle draw signals on the widget. When a widget is first shown, or when it is covered and then uncovered again it needs to redraw itself. Most widgets have code to do this, but the DrawingArea does not, allowing you to write your own draw signal handler to determine how the contents of the widget will be drawn. This is most often done by overriding the virtual on_draw() member function. GTK+ uses the Cairo drawing API. With gtkmm, you may use the cairomm C++ API for cairo. You can draw very sophisticated shapes using Cairo, but the methods to do so are quite basic. Cairo provides methods for drawing straight lines, curved lines, and arcs (including circles). These basic shapes can be combined to create more complex shapes and paths which can be filled with solid colors, gradients, patterns, and other things. In addition, Cairo can perform complex transformations, do compositing of images, and render antialiased text. Cairo and Pango Although Cairo can render text, it's not meant to be a replacement for Pango. Pango is a better choice if you need to perform more advanced text rendering such as wrapping or ellipsizing text. Drawing text with Cairo should only be done if the text is part of a graphic. In this section of the tutorial, we'll cover the basic Cairo drawing model, describe each of the basic drawing elements in some detail (with examples), and then present a simple application that uses Cairo to draw a custom clock widget. The Cairo Drawing Model The basic concept of drawing in Cairo involves defining 'invisible' paths and then stroking or filling them to make them visible. To do any drawing in gtkmm with Cairo, you must first create a Cairo::Context object. This class holds all of the graphics state parameters that describe how drawing is to be done. This includes information such as line width, color, the surface to draw to, and many other things. This allows the actual drawing functions to take fewer arguments to simplify the interface. In gtkmm, a Cairo::Context is created by calling the Gdk::Window::create_cairo_context() function. Since Cairo contexts are reference-counted objects, this function returns a Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context> object. The following example shows how to set up a Cairo context with a foreground color of red and a width of 2. Any drawing functions that use this context will use these settings. Gtk::DrawingArea myArea; Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context> myContext = myArea.get_window()->create_cairo_context(); myContext->set_source_rgb(1.0, 0.0, 0.0); myContext->set_line_width(2.0); Each Cairo::Context is associated with a particular Gdk::Window, so the first line of the above example creates a Gtk::DrawingArea widget and the second line uses its associated Gdk::Window to create a Cairo::Context object. The final two lines change the graphics state of the context. There are a number of graphics state variables that can be set for a Cairo context. The most common context attributes are color (using set_source_rgb() or set_source_rgba() for translucent colors), line width (using set_line_width()), line dash pattern (using set_dash()), line cap style (using set_line_cap()), and line join style (using set_line_join()), and font styles (using set_font_size(), set_font_face() and others). There are many other settings as well, such as transformation matrices, fill rules, whether to perform antialiasing, and others. For further information, see the cairomm API documentation. The current state of a Cairo::Context can be saved to an internal stack of saved states and later be restored to the state it was in when you saved it. To do this, use the save() method and the restore() method. This can be useful if you need to temporarily change the line width and color (or any other graphics setting) in order to draw something and then return to the previous settings. In this situation, you could call Cairo::Context::save(), change the graphics settings, draw the lines, and then call Cairo::Context::restore() to restore the original graphics state. Multiple calls to save() and restore() can be nested; each call to restore() restores the state from the matching paired save(). It is good practice to put all modifications to the graphics state between save()/restore() function calls. For example, if you have a function that takes a Cairo::Context reference as an argument, you might implement it as follows: void doSomething(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& context, int x) { context->save(); // change graphics state // perform drawing operations context->restore(); } The virtual on_draw() method provides a Cairo context that you shall use for drawing in the Gtk::DrawingArea widget. It is not necessary to save and restore this Cairo context in on_draw(). Drawing Straight Lines Now that we understand the basics of the Cairo graphics library, we're almost ready to start drawing. We'll start with the simplest of drawing elements: the straight line. But first you need to know a little bit about Cairo's coordinate system. The origin of the Cairo coordinate system is located in the upper-left corner of the window with positive x values to the right and positive y values going down. Since the Cairo graphics library was written with support for multiple output targets (the X window system, PNG images, OpenGL, etc), there is a distinction between user-space and device-space coordinates. The mapping between these two coordinate systems defaults to one-to-one so that integer values map roughly to pixels on the screen, but this setting can be adjusted if desired. Sometimes it may be useful to scale the coordinates so that the full width and height of a window both range from 0 to 1 (the 'unit square') or some other mapping that works for your application. This can be done with the Cairo::Context::scale() function. Example In this example, we'll construct a small but fully functional gtkmm program and draw some lines into the window. The lines are drawn by creating a path and then stroking it. A path is created using the functions Cairo::Context::move_to() and Cairo::Context::line_to(). The function move_to() is similar to the act of lifting your pen off of the paper and placing it somewhere else -- no line is drawn between the point you were at and the point you moved to. To draw a line between two points, use the line_to() function. After you've finished creating your path, you still haven't drawn anything visible yet. To make the path visible, you must use the function stroke() which will stroke the current path with the line width and style specified in your Cairo::Context object. After stroking, the current path will be cleared so that you can start on your next path. Many Cairo drawing functions have a _preserve() variant. Normally drawing functions such as clip(), fill(), or stroke() will clear the current path. If you use the _preserve() variant, the current path will be retained so that you can use the same path with the next drawing function.
Drawing Area - Lines
Source Code File: myarea.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> class MyArea : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: MyArea(); virtual ~MyArea(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H File: myarea.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <cairomm/context.h> MyArea::MyArea() { } MyArea::~MyArea() { } bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); // coordinates for the center of the window int xc, yc; xc = width / 2; yc = height / 2; cr->set_line_width(10.0); // draw red lines out from the center of the window cr->set_source_rgb(0.8, 0.0, 0.0); cr->move_to(0, 0); cr->line_to(xc, yc); cr->line_to(0, height); cr->move_to(xc, yc); cr->line_to(width, yc); cr->stroke(); return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Gtk::Window win; win.set_title("DrawingArea"); MyArea area; win.add(area); area.show(); return app->run(win); } This program contains a single class, MyArea, which is a subclass of Gtk::DrawingArea and contains an on_draw() member function. This function is called whenever the image in the drawing area needs to be redrawn. It is passed a Cairo::RefPtr pointer to a Cairo::Context that we use for the drawing. The actual drawing code sets the color we want to use for drawing by using set_source_rgb() which takes arguments defining the Red, Green, and Blue components of the desired color (valid values are between 0 and 1). After setting the color, we created a new path using the functions move_to() and line_to(), and then stroked this path with stroke(). Drawing with relative coordinates In the example above we drew everything using absolute coordinates. You can also draw using relative coordinates. For a straight line, this is done with the function Cairo::Context::rel_line_to(). Line styles In addition to drawing basic straight lines, there are a number of things that you can customize about a line. You've already seen examples of setting a line's color and width, but there are others as well. If you've drawn a series of lines that form a path, you may want them to join together in a certain way. Cairo offers three different ways to join lines together: Miter, Bevel, and Round. These are show below:
Different join types in Cairo
The line join style is set using the function Cairo::Context::set_line_join(). Line ends can have different styles as well. The default style is for the line to start and stop exactly at the destination points of the line. This is called a Butt cap. The other options are Round (uses a round ending, with the center of the circle at the end point) or Square (uses a squared ending, with the center of the square at the end point). This setting is set using the function Cairo::Context::set_line_cap(). There are other things you can customize as well, including creating dashed lines and other things. For more information, see the Cairo API documentation. Drawing thin lines If you try to draw one pixel wide lines, you may notice that the line sometimes comes up blurred and wider than it ought to be. This happens because Cairo will try to draw from the selected position, to both sides (half to each), so if you're positioned right on the intersection of the pixels, and want a one pixel wide line, Cairo will try to use half of each adjacent pixel, which isn't possible (a pixel is the smallest unit possible). This happens when the width of the line is an odd number of pixels (not just one pixel). The trick is to position in the middle of the pixel where you want the line to be drawn, and thus guaranteeing you get the desired results. See Cairo FAQ.
Drawing Area - Thin Lines
Source Code File: myarea.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> class MyArea : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: MyArea(); virtual ~MyArea(); void fix_lines(bool fix = true); void force_redraw(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); private: double m_fix; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/grid.h> #include <gtkmm/checkbutton.h> #include "myarea.h" class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_toggled(); private: Gtk::Grid m_Container; MyArea m_Area_Lines; Gtk::CheckButton m_Button_FixLines; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: myarea.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" MyArea::MyArea() : m_fix (0) { set_size_request (200, 100); } MyArea::~MyArea() { } bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); cr->set_line_width(1.0); // draw one line, every two pixels // without the 'fix', you won't notice any space between the lines, // since each one will occupy two pixels (width) for (int i = 0; i < width; i += 2) { cr->move_to(i + m_fix, 0); cr->line_to(i + m_fix, height); } cr->stroke(); return true; } // Toogle between both values (0 or 0.5) void MyArea::fix_lines(bool fix) { // to get the width right, we have to draw in the middle of the pixel m_fix = fix ? 0.5 : 0.0; force_redraw(); } // force the redraw of the image void MyArea::force_redraw() { Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> win = get_window(); if (win) { Gdk::Rectangle r(0, 0, get_allocation().get_width(), get_allocation().get_height()); win->invalidate_rect(r, false); } } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Button_FixLines("Fix lines") { set_title("Thin lines example"); m_Container.set_orientation(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); m_Container.add(m_Area_Lines); m_Container.add(m_Button_FixLines); add(m_Container); m_Button_FixLines.signal_toggled().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_toggled)); // Synchonize the drawing in m_Area_Lines with the state of the toggle button. on_button_toggled(); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_toggled() { m_Area_Lines.fix_lines(m_Button_FixLines.get_active()); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char* argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Drawing Curved Lines In addition to drawing straight lines Cairo allows you to easily draw curved lines (technically a cubic Bézier spline) using the Cairo::Context::curve_to() and Cairo::Context::rel_curve_to() functions. These functions take coordinates for a destination point as well as coordinates for two 'control' points. This is best explained using an example, so let's dive in. Example This simple application draws a curve with Cairo and displays the control points for each end of the curve.
Drawing Area - Lines
Source Code File: myarea.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> class MyArea : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: MyArea(); virtual ~MyArea(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H File: myarea.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <cairomm/context.h> MyArea::MyArea() { } MyArea::~MyArea() { } bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); double x0=0.1, y0=0.5, // start point x1=0.4, y1=0.9, // control point #1 x2=0.6, y2=0.1, // control point #2 x3=0.9, y3=0.5; // end point // scale to unit square (0 to 1 width and height) cr->scale(width, height); cr->set_line_width(0.05); // draw curve cr->move_to(x0, y0); cr->curve_to(x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3); cr->stroke(); // show control points cr->set_source_rgba(1, 0.2, 0.2, 0.6); cr->move_to(x0, y0); cr->line_to (x1, y1); cr->move_to(x2, y2); cr->line_to (x3, y3); cr->stroke(); return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Gtk::Window win; win.set_title("DrawingArea"); MyArea area; win.add(area); area.show(); return app->run(win); } The only difference between this example and the straight line example is in the on_draw() function, but there are a few new concepts and functions introduced here, so let's examine them briefly. We make a call to Cairo::Context::scale(), passing in the width and height of the drawing area. This scales the user-space coordinate system such that the width and height of the widget are both equal to 1.0 'units'. There's no particular reason to scale the coordinate system in this case, but sometimes it can make drawing operations easier. The call to Cairo::Context::curve_to() should be fairly self-explanatory. The first pair of coordinates define the control point for the beginning of the curve. The second set of coordinates define the control point for the end of the curve, and the last set of coordinates define the destination point. To make the concept of control points a bit easier to visualize, a line has been draw from each control point to the end-point on the curve that it is associated with. Note that these control point lines are both translucent. This is achieved with a variant of set_source_rgb() called set_source_rgba(). This function takes a fourth argument specifying the alpha value of the color (valid values are between 0 and 1). Drawing Arcs and Circles With Cairo, the same function is used to draw arcs, circles, or ellipses: Cairo::Context::arc(). This function takes five arguments. The first two are the coordinates of the center point of the arc, the third argument is the radius of the arc, and the final two arguments define the start and end angle of the arc. All angles are defined in radians, so drawing a circle is the same as drawing an arc from 0 to 2 * M_PI radians. An angle of 0 is in the direction of the positive X axis (in user-space). An angle of M_PI/2 radians (90 degrees) is in the direction of the positive Y axis (in user-space). Angles increase in the direction from the positive X axis toward the positive Y axis. So with the default transformation matrix, angles increase in a clockwise direction. (Remember that the positive Y axis points downwards.) To draw an ellipse, you can scale the current transformation matrix by different amounts in the X and Y directions. For example, to draw an ellipse with center at x, y and size width, height: context->save(); context->translate(x, y); context->scale(width / 2.0, height / 2.0); context->arc(0.0, 0.0, 1.0, 0.0, 2 * M_PI); context->restore(); Example Here's an example of a simple program that draws an arc, a circle and an ellipse into a drawing area.
Drawing Area - Arcs
Source Code File: myarea.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> class MyArea : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: MyArea(); virtual ~MyArea(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H File: myarea.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <cairomm/context.h> #include <cmath> MyArea::MyArea() { } MyArea::~MyArea() { } bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { // This is where we draw on the window Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); const int lesser = MIN(width, height); // coordinates for the center of the window int xc, yc; xc = width / 2; yc = height / 2; cr->set_line_width(lesser * 0.02); // outline thickness changes // with window size // first draw a simple unclosed arc cr->save(); cr->arc(width / 3.0, height / 4.0, lesser / 4.0, -(M_PI / 5.0), M_PI); cr->close_path(); // line back to start point cr->set_source_rgb(0.0, 0.8, 0.0); cr->fill_preserve(); cr->restore(); // back to opaque black cr->stroke(); // outline it // now draw a circle cr->save(); cr->arc(xc, yc, lesser / 4.0, 0.0, 2.0 * M_PI); // full circle cr->set_source_rgba(0.0, 0.0, 0.8, 0.6); // partially translucent cr->fill_preserve(); cr->restore(); // back to opaque black cr->stroke(); // and finally an ellipse double ex, ey, ew, eh; // center of ellipse ex = xc; ey = 3.0 * height / 4.0; // ellipse dimensions ew = 3.0 * width / 4.0; eh = height / 3.0; cr->save(); cr->translate(ex, ey); // make (ex, ey) == (0, 0) cr->scale(ew / 2.0, eh / 2.0); // for width: ew / 2.0 == 1.0 // for height: eh / 2.0 == 1.0 cr->arc(0.0, 0.0, 1.0, 0.0, 2 * M_PI); // 'circle' centered at (0, 0) // with 'radius' of 1.0 cr->set_source_rgba(0.8, 0.0, 0.0, 0.7); cr->fill_preserve(); cr->restore(); // back to opaque black cr->stroke(); return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Gtk::Window win; win.set_title("DrawingArea"); MyArea area; win.add(area); area.show(); return app->run(win); } There are a couple of things to note about this example code. Again, the only real difference between this example and the previous ones is the on_draw() function, so we'll limit our focus to that function. In addition, the first part of the function is nearly identical to the previous examples, so we'll skip that portion. Note that in this case, we've expressed nearly everything in terms of the height and width of the window, including the width of the lines. Because of this, when you resize the window, everything scales with the window. Also note that there are three drawing sections in the function and each is wrapped with a save()/restore() pair so that we're back at a known state after each drawing. The section for drawing an arc introduces one new function, close_path(). This function will in effect draw a straight line from the current point back to the first point in the path. There is a significant difference between calling close_path() and manually drawing a line back to the starting point, however. If you use close_path(), the lines will be nicely joined together. If you use line_to() instead, the lines will end at the same point, but Cairo won't do any special joining. Drawing counter-clockwise The function Cairo::Context::arc_negative() is exactly the same as Cairo::Context::arc() but the angles go the opposite direction. Drawing Text Drawing Text with Pango Text is drawn via Pango Layouts. The easiest way to create a Pango::Layout is to use Gtk::Widget::create_pango_layout(). Once created, the layout can be manipulated in various ways, including changing the text, font, etc. Finally, the layout can be rendered using the Pango::Layout::show_in_cairo_context() method. Example Here is an example of a program that draws some text, some of it upside-down. The Printing chapter contains another example of drawing text.
Drawing Area - Text
Source Code File: myarea.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> class MyArea : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: MyArea(); virtual ~MyArea(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); private: void draw_rectangle(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr, int width, int height); void draw_text(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr, int rectangle_width, int rectangle_height); }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H File: myarea.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" MyArea::MyArea() { } MyArea::~MyArea() { } bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); const int rectangle_width = width; const int rectangle_height = height / 2; // Draw a black rectangle cr->set_source_rgb(0.0, 0.0, 0.0); draw_rectangle(cr, rectangle_width, rectangle_height); // and some white text cr->set_source_rgb(1.0, 1.0, 1.0); draw_text(cr, rectangle_width, rectangle_height); // flip the image vertically // see http://www.cairographics.org/documentation/cairomm/reference/classCairo_1_1Matrix.html // the -1 corresponds to the yy part (the flipping part) // the height part is a translation (we could have just called cr->translate(0, height) instead) // it's height and not height / 2, since we want this to be on the second part of our drawing // (otherwise, it would draw over the previous part) Cairo::Matrix matrix(1.0, 0.0, 0.0, -1.0, 0.0, height); // apply the matrix cr->transform(matrix); // white rectangle cr->set_source_rgb(1.0, 1.0, 1.0); draw_rectangle(cr, rectangle_width, rectangle_height); // black text cr->set_source_rgb(0.0, 0.0, 0.0); draw_text(cr, rectangle_width, rectangle_height); return true; } void MyArea::draw_rectangle(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr, int width, int height) { cr->rectangle(0, 0, width, height); cr->fill(); } void MyArea::draw_text(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr, int rectangle_width, int rectangle_height) { // http://developer.gnome.org/pangomm/unstable/classPango_1_1FontDescription.html Pango::FontDescription font; font.set_family("Monospace"); font.set_weight(Pango::WEIGHT_BOLD); // http://developer.gnome.org/pangomm/unstable/classPango_1_1Layout.html Glib::RefPtr<Pango::Layout> layout = create_pango_layout("Hi there!"); layout->set_font_description(font); int text_width; int text_height; //get the text dimensions (it updates the variables -- by reference) layout->get_pixel_size(text_width, text_height); // Position the text in the middle cr->move_to((rectangle_width-text_width)/2, (rectangle_height-text_height)/2); layout->show_in_cairo_context(cr); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> int main(int argc, char* argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Gtk::Window window; window.set_title("Drawing text example"); MyArea area; window.add(area); area.show(); return app->run(window); } Drawing Images There is a method for drawing from a Gdk::Pixbuf to a Cairo::Context. A Gdk::Pixbuf buffer is a useful wrapper around a collection of pixels, which can be read from files, and manipulated in various ways. Probably the most common way of creating Gdk::Pixbufs is to use Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file(), which can read an image file, such as a png file into a pixbuf ready for rendering. The Gdk::Pixbuf can be rendered by setting it as the source pattern of the Cairo context with Gdk::Cairo::set_source_pixbuf(). Then draw the image with either Cairo::Context::paint() (to draw the whole image), or Cairo::Context::rectangle() and Cairo::Context::fill() (to fill the specified rectangle). set_source_pixbuf() is not a member of Cairo::Context. It takes a Cairo::Context as its first parameter. Here is a small bit of code to tie it all together: (Note that usually you wouldn't load the image every time in the draw signal handler! It's just shown here to keep it all together.) bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> image = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file("myimage.png"); // Draw the image at 110, 90, except for the outermost 10 pixels. Gdk::Cairo::set_source_pixbuf(cr, image, 100, 80); cr->rectangle(110, 90, image->get_width()-20, image->get_height()-20); cr->fill(); return true; } Example Here is an example of a simple program that draws an image.
Drawing Area - Image
Source Code File: myarea.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> #include <gdkmm/pixbuf.h> class MyArea : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: MyArea(); virtual ~MyArea(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> m_image; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_MYAREA_H File: myarea.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <cairomm/context.h> #include <gdkmm/general.h> // set_source_pixbuf() #include <glibmm/fileutils.h> #include <iostream> MyArea::MyArea() { try { // The fractal image has been created by the XaoS program. // http://xaos.sourceforge.net m_image = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file("fractal_image.png"); } catch(const Glib::FileError& ex) { std::cerr << "FileError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; } catch(const Gdk::PixbufError& ex) { std::cerr << "PixbufError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; } // Show at least a quarter of the image. if (m_image) set_size_request(m_image->get_width()/2, m_image->get_height()/2); } MyArea::~MyArea() { } bool MyArea::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { if (!m_image) return false; Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); // Draw the image in the middle of the drawing area, or (if the image is // larger than the drawing area) draw the middle part of the image. Gdk::Cairo::set_source_pixbuf(cr, m_image, (width - m_image->get_width())/2, (height - m_image->get_height())/2); cr->paint(); return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "myarea.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Gtk::Window win; win.set_title("DrawingArea"); win.set_default_size(300, 200); MyArea area; win.add(area); area.show(); return app->run(win); } Example Application: Creating a Clock with Cairo Now that we've covered the basics of drawing with Cairo, let's try to put it all together and create a simple application that actually does something. The following example uses Cairo to create a custom Clock widget. The clock has a second hand, a minute hand, and an hour hand, and updates itself every second. Source Code File: clock.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CLOCK_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CLOCK_H #include <gtkmm/drawingarea.h> class Clock : public Gtk::DrawingArea { public: Clock(); virtual ~Clock(); protected: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); bool on_timeout(); double m_radius; double m_line_width; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CLOCK_H File: clock.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <ctime> #include <cmath> #include <cairomm/context.h> #include <glibmm/main.h> #include "clock.h" Clock::Clock() : m_radius(0.42), m_line_width(0.05) { Glib::signal_timeout().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &Clock::on_timeout), 1000 ); #ifndef GLIBMM_DEFAULT_SIGNAL_HANDLERS_ENABLED //Connect the signal handler if it isn't already a virtual method override: signal_draw().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &Clock::on_draw), false); #endif //GLIBMM_DEFAULT_SIGNAL_HANDLERS_ENABLED } Clock::~Clock() { } bool Clock::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); const int width = allocation.get_width(); const int height = allocation.get_height(); // scale to unit square and translate (0, 0) to be (0.5, 0.5), i.e. // the center of the window cr->scale(width, height); cr->translate(0.5, 0.5); cr->set_line_width(m_line_width); cr->save(); cr->set_source_rgba(0.337, 0.612, 0.117, 0.9); // green cr->paint(); cr->restore(); cr->arc(0, 0, m_radius, 0, 2 * M_PI); cr->save(); cr->set_source_rgba(1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 0.8); cr->fill_preserve(); cr->restore(); cr->stroke_preserve(); cr->clip(); //clock ticks for (int i = 0; i < 12; i++) { double inset = 0.05; cr->save(); cr->set_line_cap(Cairo::LINE_CAP_ROUND); if(i % 3 != 0) { inset *= 0.8; cr->set_line_width(0.03); } cr->move_to( (m_radius - inset) * cos (i * M_PI / 6), (m_radius - inset) * sin (i * M_PI / 6)); cr->line_to ( m_radius * cos (i * M_PI / 6), m_radius * sin (i * M_PI / 6)); cr->stroke(); cr->restore(); /* stack-pen-size */ } // store the current time time_t rawtime; time(&rawtime); struct tm * timeinfo = localtime (&rawtime); // compute the angles of the indicators of our clock double minutes = timeinfo->tm_min * M_PI / 30; double hours = timeinfo->tm_hour * M_PI / 6; double seconds= timeinfo->tm_sec * M_PI / 30; cr->save(); cr->set_line_cap(Cairo::LINE_CAP_ROUND); // draw the seconds hand cr->save(); cr->set_line_width(m_line_width / 3); cr->set_source_rgba(0.7, 0.7, 0.7, 0.8); // gray cr->move_to(0, 0); cr->line_to(sin(seconds) * (m_radius * 0.9), -cos(seconds) * (m_radius * 0.9)); cr->stroke(); cr->restore(); // draw the minutes hand cr->set_source_rgba(0.117, 0.337, 0.612, 0.9); // blue cr->move_to(0, 0); cr->line_to(sin(minutes + seconds / 60) * (m_radius * 0.8), -cos(minutes + seconds / 60) * (m_radius * 0.8)); cr->stroke(); // draw the hours hand cr->set_source_rgba(0.337, 0.612, 0.117, 0.9); // green cr->move_to(0, 0); cr->line_to(sin(hours + minutes / 12.0) * (m_radius * 0.5), -cos(hours + minutes / 12.0) * (m_radius * 0.5)); cr->stroke(); cr->restore(); // draw a little dot in the middle cr->arc(0, 0, m_line_width / 3.0, 0, 2 * M_PI); cr->fill(); return true; } bool Clock::on_timeout() { // force our program to redraw the entire clock. Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> win = get_window(); if (win) { Gdk::Rectangle r(0, 0, get_allocation().get_width(), get_allocation().get_height()); win->invalidate_rect(r, false); } return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "clock.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); Gtk::Window win; win.set_title("Cairomm Clock"); Clock c; win.add(c); c.show(); return app->run(win); } As before, almost all of the interesting stuff is done in the draw signal handler on_draw(). Before we dig into the draw signal handler, notice that the constructor for the Clock widget connects a handler function on_timeout() to a timer with a timeout period of 1000 milliseconds (1 second). This means that on_timeout() will get called once per second. The sole responsibility of this function is to invalidate the window so that gtkmm will be forced to redraw it. Now let's take a look at the code that performs the actual drawing. The first section of on_draw() should be pretty familiar by now. This example again scales the coordinate system to be a unit square so that it's easier to draw the clock as a percentage of window size so that it will automatically scale when the window size is adjusted. Furthermore, the coordinate system is scaled over and down so that the (0, 0) coordinate is in the very center of the window. The function Cairo::Context::paint() is used here to set the background color of the window. This function takes no arguments and fills the current surface (or the clipped portion of the surface) with the source color currently active. After setting the background color of the window, we draw a circle for the clock outline, fill it with white, and then stroke the outline in black. Notice that both of these actions use the _preserve variant to preserve the current path, and then this same path is clipped to make sure than our next lines don't go outside the outline of the clock. After drawing the outline, we go around the clock and draw ticks for every hour, with a larger tick at 12, 3, 6, and 9. Now we're finally ready to implement the time-keeping functionality of the clock, which simply involves getting the current values for hours, minutes and seconds, and drawing the hands at the correct angles. Drag and Drop Gtk::Widget has several methods and signals which are prefixed with "drag_". These are used for Drag and Drop. Sources and Destinations Things are dragged from sources to be dropped on destinations. Each source and destination has infomation about the data formats that it can send or receive, provided by Gtk::TargetEntry items. A drop destination will only accept a dragged item if they both share a compatible Gtk::TargetEntry item. Appropriate signals will then be emitted, telling the signal handlers which Gtk::TargetEntry was used. Gtk::TargetEntry objects contain this information: target: A name, such as "STRING" info: An identifier which will be sent to your signals to tell you which TargetEntry was used. flags: Used only for drag and drop, this specifies whether the data may be dragged to other widgets and applications, or only to the same ones. Methods Widgets can be identified as sources or destinations using these Gtk::Widget methods: void drag_source_set(const ArrayHandle_TargetEntry& targets, GdkModifierType start_button_mask, GdkDragAction actions); targets is a container of Gtk::TargetEntry (std::list<Gtk::TargetEntry> or std::vector<Gtk::TargetEntry>, for instance) elements. start_button_mask is an ORed combination of values, which specify which modifier key or mouse button must be pressed to start the drag. actions is an ORed combination of values, which specified which Drag and Drop operations will be possible from this source - for instance, copy, move, or link. The user can choose between the actions by using modifier keys, such as Shift to change from copy to move, and this will be shown by a different cursor. void drag_dest_set(const ArrayHandle_TargetEntry& targets, GtkDestDefaults flags, GdkDragAction actions); flags is an ORed combination of values which indicates how the widget will respond visually to Drag and Drop items. actions indicates the Drag and Drop actions which this destination can receive - see the description above. Signals When a drop destination has accepted a dragged item, certain signals will be emitted, depending on what action has been selected. For instance, the user might have held down the Shift key to specify a move rather than a copy. Remember that the user can only select the actions which you have specified in your calls to drag_dest_set() and drag_source_set(). Copy The source widget will emit these signals, in this order: drag_begin: Provides DragContext. drag_motion: Provides DragContext and coordinates. You can call the drag_status() method of the DragContext to indicate which target will be accepted. drag_get: Provides info about the dragged data format, and a GtkSelectionData structure, in which you should put the requested data. drag_drop: Provides DragContext and coordinates. drag_end: Provides DragContext. The destination widget will emit this signal, after the source destination has emitted the drag_get signal: drag_data_received: Provides info about the dragged data format, and a GtkSelectionData structure which contains the dropped data. You should call the drag_finish() method of the DragContext to indicate whether the operation was successful. Move During a move, the source widget will also emit this signal: drag_delete: Gives the source the opportunity to delete the original data if that's appropriate. DragContext The drag and drop signals provide a DragContext, which contains some information about the drag and drop operation and can be used to influence the process. For instance, you can discover the source widget, or change the drag and drop icon, by using the set_icon() methods. More importantly, you should call the drag_finish() method from your drag_data_received signal handler to indicate whether the drop was successful. Example Here is a very simple example, demonstrating a drag and drop Copy operation:
Drag and Drop
Source Code File: dndwindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_DNDWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_DNDWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm/box.h> #include <gtkmm/label.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> #include <gtkmm/button.h> class DnDWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: DnDWindow(); virtual ~DnDWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_drag_data_get( const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint info, guint time); void on_label_drop_drag_data_received( const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint info, guint time); //Member widgets: Gtk::Box m_HBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Drag; Gtk::Label m_Label_Drop; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_DNDWINDOW_H File: dndwindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "dndwindow.h" #include <iostream> DnDWindow::DnDWindow() : m_Button_Drag("Drag Here\n"), m_Label_Drop("Drop here\n") { set_title("DnD example"); add(m_HBox); //Targets: std::vector<Gtk::TargetEntry> listTargets; listTargets.push_back( Gtk::TargetEntry("STRING") ); listTargets.push_back( Gtk::TargetEntry("text/plain") ); //Drag site: //Make m_Button_Drag a DnD drag source: m_Button_Drag.drag_source_set(listTargets); //Connect signals: m_Button_Drag.signal_drag_data_get().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &DnDWindow::on_button_drag_data_get)); m_HBox.pack_start(m_Button_Drag); //Drop site: //Make m_Label_Drop a DnD drop destination: m_Label_Drop.drag_dest_set(listTargets); //Connect signals: m_Label_Drop.signal_drag_data_received().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &DnDWindow::on_label_drop_drag_data_received) ); m_HBox.pack_start(m_Label_Drop); show_all(); } DnDWindow::~DnDWindow() { } void DnDWindow::on_button_drag_data_get( const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>&, Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint, guint) { selection_data.set(selection_data.get_target(), 8 /* 8 bits format */, (const guchar*)"I'm Data!", 9 /* the length of I'm Data! in bytes */); } void DnDWindow::on_label_drop_drag_data_received( const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int, int, const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint, guint time) { const int length = selection_data.get_length(); if((length >= 0) && (selection_data.get_format() == 8)) { std::cout << "Received \"" << selection_data.get_data_as_string() << "\" in label " << std::endl; } context->drag_finish(false, false, time); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "dndwindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); DnDWindow dndWindow; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(dndWindow); } There is a more complex example in examples/others/dnd. The Clipboard Simple text copy-paste functionality is provided for free by widgets such as Gtk::Entry and Gtk::TextView, but you might need special code to deal with your own data formats. For instance, a drawing program would need special code to allow copy and paste within a view, or between documents. You can usually pretend that Gtk::Clipboard is a singleton. You can get the default clipboard instance with Gtk::Clipboard::get(). This is probably the only clipboard you will ever need. Your application doesn't need to wait for clipboard operations, particularly between the time when the user chooses Copy and then later chooses Paste. Most Gtk::Clipboard methods take sigc::slots which specify callback methods. When Gtk::Clipboard is ready, it will call these methods, either providing the requested data, or asking for data. Reference Targets Different applications contain different types of data, and they might make that data available in a variety of formats. gtkmm calls these data types targets. For instance, gedit can supply and receive the "UTF8_STRING" target, so you can paste data into gedit from any application that supplies that target. Or two different image editing applications might supply and receive a variety of image formats as targets. As long as one application can receive one of the targets that the other supplies then you will be able to copy data from one to the other. A target can be in a variety of binary formats. This chapter, and the examples, assume that the data is 8-bit text. This would allow us to use an XML format for the clipboard data. However this would probably not be appropriate for binary data such as images. Gtk::Clipboard provides overloads that allow you to specify the format in more detail if necessary. The Drag and Drop API uses the same mechanism. You should probably use the same data targets and formats for both Clipboard and Drag and Drop operations. Copy When the user asks to copy some data, you should tell the Clipboard what targets are available, and provide the callback methods that it can use to get the data. At this point you should store a copy of the data, to be provided when the clipboard calls your callback method in response to a paste. For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Clipboard> refClipboard = Gtk::Clipboard::get(); //Targets: std::vector<Gtk::TargetEntry> targets; targets.push_back( Gtk::TargetEntry("example_custom_target") ); targets.push_back( Gtk::TargetEntry("UTF8_STRING") ); refClipboard->set( targets, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_get), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_clear) ); Your callback will then provide the stored data when the user chooses to paste the data. For instance: void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_get( Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint /* info */) { const std::string target = selection_data.get_target(); if(target == "example_custom_target") selection_data.set("example_custom_target", m_ClipboardStore); } The ideal example below can supply more than one clipboard target. The clear callback allows you to free the memory used by your stored data when the clipboard replaces its data with something else. Paste When the user asks to paste data from the Clipboard, you should request a specific format and provide a callback method which will be called with the actual data. For instance: refClipboard->request_contents("example_custom_target", sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received) ); Here is an example callback method: void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received( const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data) { Glib::ustring clipboard_data = selection_data.get_data_as_string(); //Do something with the pasted data. } Discovering the available targets To find out what targets are currently available on the Clipboard for pasting, call the request_targets() method, specifying a method to be called with the information. For instance: refClipboard->request_targets( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received_targets) ); In your callback, compare the vector of available targets with those that your application supports for pasting. You could enable or disable a Paste menu item, depending on whether pasting is currently possible. For instance: void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received_targets( const std::vector<Glib::ustring>& targets) { const bool bPasteIsPossible = std::find(targets.begin(), targets.end(), example_target_custom) != targets.end(); // Enable/Disable the Paste button appropriately: m_Button_Paste.set_sensitive(bPasteIsPossible); } Examples Simple This example allows copy and pasting of application-specific data, using the standard text target. Although this is simple, it's not ideal because it does not identify the Clipboard data as being of a particular type.
Clipboard - Simple
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_copy(); void on_button_paste(); void on_clipboard_text_received(const Glib::ustring& text); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Label m_Label; Gtk::Grid m_Grid; Gtk::ToggleButton m_ButtonA1, m_ButtonA2, m_ButtonB1, m_ButtonB2; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Copy, m_Button_Paste; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label("Select cells in the grid, click Copy, then open a second " "instance of this example to try pasting the copied data."), m_ButtonA1("A1"), m_ButtonA2("A2"), m_ButtonB1("B1"), m_ButtonB2("B2"), m_Button_Copy(Gtk::Stock::COPY), m_Button_Paste(Gtk::Stock::PASTE) { set_title("Gtk::Clipboard example"); set_border_width(12); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Label, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Fill Grid: m_VBox.pack_start(m_Grid); m_Grid.set_row_homogeneous(true); m_Grid.set_column_homogeneous(true); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonA1, 0, 0, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonA2, 1, 0, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonB1, 0, 1, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonB2, 1, 1, 1, 1); //Add ButtonBox to bottom: m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox.set_spacing(6); //Fill ButtonBox: m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Copy, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Copy.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_copy) ); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Paste, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Paste.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_paste) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_copy() { //Build a string representation of the stuff to be copied: //Ideally you would use XML, with an XML parser here: Glib::ustring strData; strData += m_ButtonA1.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; strData += m_ButtonA2.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; strData += m_ButtonB1.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; strData += m_ButtonB2.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Clipboard> refClipboard = Gtk::Clipboard::get(); refClipboard->set_text(strData); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_paste() { //Tell the clipboard to call our method when it is ready: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Clipboard> refClipboard = Gtk::Clipboard::get(); refClipboard->request_text(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_text_received) ); } void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_text_received(const Glib::ustring& text) { //See comment in on_button_copy() about this silly clipboard format. if(text.size() >= 4) { m_ButtonA1.set_active( text[0] == '1' ); m_ButtonA2.set_active( text[1] == '1' ); m_ButtonB1.set_active( text[2] == '1' ); m_ButtonB2.set_active( text[3] == '1' ); } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { //APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE because it shall be possible to run several //instances of this application simultaneously. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create( argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example", Gio::APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Ideal This is like the simple example, but it Defines a custom clipboard target, though the format of that target is still text. It supports pasting of 2 targets - both the custom one and a text one that creates an arbitrary text representation of the custom data. It uses request_targets() and the owner_change signal and disables the Paste button if it can't use anything on the clipboard.
Clipboard - Ideal
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_copy(); void on_button_paste(); void on_clipboard_owner_change(GdkEventOwnerChange* event); void on_clipboard_get(Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint info); void on_clipboard_clear(); void on_clipboard_received(const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data); void on_clipboard_received_targets(const std::vector<Glib::ustring>& targets); virtual void update_paste_status(); //Disable the paste button if there is nothing to paste. //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Label m_Label; Gtk::Grid m_Grid; Gtk::ToggleButton m_ButtonA1, m_ButtonA2, m_ButtonB1, m_ButtonB2; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Copy, m_Button_Paste; Glib::ustring m_ClipboardStore; //Keep copied stuff here, until it is pasted. This could be a big complex data structure. }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <algorithm> namespace { //These should usually be MIME types. const char example_target_custom[] = "gtkmmclipboardexample"; const char example_target_text[] = "UTF8_STRING"; } // anonymous namespace ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Label("Select cells in the grid, click Copy, then open a second instance " "of this example to try pasting the copied data.\nOr try pasting the " "text representation into gedit."), m_ButtonA1("A1"), m_ButtonA2("A2"), m_ButtonB1("B1"), m_ButtonB2("B2"), m_Button_Copy(Gtk::Stock::COPY), m_Button_Paste(Gtk::Stock::PASTE) { set_title("Gtk::Clipboard example"); set_border_width(12); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Label, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); //Fill Grid: m_VBox.pack_start(m_Grid); m_Grid.set_row_homogeneous(true); m_Grid.set_column_homogeneous(true); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonA1, 0, 0, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonA2, 1, 0, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonB1, 0, 1, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ButtonB2, 1, 1, 1, 1); //Add ButtonBox to bottom: m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_VBox.set_spacing(6); //Fill ButtonBox: m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Copy, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Copy.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_copy) ); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Paste, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_Button_Paste.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_paste) ); //Connect a signal handler that will be called when the contents of //the clipboard change. Gtk::Clipboard::get()->signal_owner_change().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_owner_change) ); show_all_children(); update_paste_status(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_copy() { //Build a string representation of the stuff to be copied: //Ideally you would use XML, with an XML parser here: Glib::ustring strData; strData += m_ButtonA1.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; strData += m_ButtonA2.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; strData += m_ButtonB1.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; strData += m_ButtonB2.get_active() ? "1" : "0"; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Clipboard> refClipboard = Gtk::Clipboard::get(); //Targets: std::vector<Gtk::TargetEntry> targets; targets.push_back( Gtk::TargetEntry(example_target_custom) ); targets.push_back( Gtk::TargetEntry(example_target_text) ); refClipboard->set(targets, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_get), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_clear) ); //Store the copied data until it is pasted: //(Must be done after the call to refClipboard->set(), because that call //may trigger a call to on_clipboard_clear.) m_ClipboardStore = strData; update_paste_status(); } void ExampleWindow::on_button_paste() { //Tell the clipboard to call our method when it is ready: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Clipboard> refClipboard = Gtk::Clipboard::get(); refClipboard->request_contents(example_target_custom, sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received) ); update_paste_status(); } void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_owner_change(GdkEventOwnerChange*) { update_paste_status(); } void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_get(Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data, guint /* info */) { // info corresponds to the optional info parameter in Gtk::TargetEntry's // constructor. We don't use that, so we use selection_data's target instead. const std::string target = selection_data.get_target(); if(target == example_target_custom) { // This set() override uses an 8-bit text format for the data. selection_data.set(example_target_custom, m_ClipboardStore); } else if(target == example_target_text) { //Build some arbitrary text representation of the data, //so that people see something when they paste into a text editor: Glib::ustring text_representation; text_representation += m_ButtonA1.get_active() ? "A1, " : ""; text_representation += m_ButtonA2.get_active() ? "A2, " : ""; text_representation += m_ButtonB1.get_active() ? "B1, " : ""; text_representation += m_ButtonB2.get_active() ? "B2, " : ""; selection_data.set_text(text_representation); } else { g_warning("ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_get(): " "Unexpected clipboard target format."); } } void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_clear() { //This isn't really necessary. I guess it might save memory. m_ClipboardStore.clear(); } void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received( const Gtk::SelectionData& selection_data) { const std::string target = selection_data.get_target(); //It should always be this, because that's what we asked for when calling //request_contents(). if(target == example_target_custom) { Glib::ustring clipboard_data = selection_data.get_data_as_string(); //See comment in on_button_copy() about this silly clipboard format. if(clipboard_data.size() >= 4) { m_ButtonA1.set_active( clipboard_data[0] == '1' ); m_ButtonA2.set_active( clipboard_data[1] == '1' ); m_ButtonB1.set_active( clipboard_data[2] == '1' ); m_ButtonB2.set_active( clipboard_data[3] == '1' ); } } } void ExampleWindow::update_paste_status() { //Disable the paste button if there is nothing to paste. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Clipboard> refClipboard = Gtk::Clipboard::get(); //Discover what targets are available: refClipboard->request_targets(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received_targets) ); } void ExampleWindow::on_clipboard_received_targets( const std::vector<Glib::ustring>& targets) { const bool bPasteIsPossible = std::find(targets.begin(), targets.end(), example_target_custom) != targets.end(); // Enable/Disable the Paste button appropriately: m_Button_Paste.set_sensitive(bPasteIsPossible); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { //APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE because it shall be possible to run several //instances of this application simultaneously. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create( argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example", Gio::APPLICATION_NON_UNIQUE); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Printing At the application development level, gtkmm's printing API provides dialogs that are consistent across applications and allows us of Cairo's common drawing API, with Pango-driven text rendering. In the implementation of this common API, platform-specific backends and printer-specific drivers are used. PrintOperation The primary object is Gtk::PrintOperation, allocated for each print operation. To handle page drawing connect to its signals, or inherit from it and override the default virtual signal handlers. PrintOperation automatically handles all the settings affecting the print loop. Signals The PrintOperation::run() method starts the print loop, during which various signals are emitted: begin_print: You must handle this signal, because this is where you create and set up a Pango::Layout using the provided Gtk::PrintContext, and break up your printing output into pages. paginate: Pagination is potentially slow so if you need to monitor it you can call the PrintOperation::set_show_progress() method and handle this signal. For each page that needs to be rendered, the following signals are emitted: request_page_setup: Provides a PrintContext, page number and Gtk::PageSetup. Handle this signal if you need to modify page setup on a per-page basis. draw_page: You must handle this signal, which provides a PrintContext and a page number. The PrintContext should be used to create a Cairo::Context into which the provided page should be drawn. To render text, iterate over the Pango::Layout you created in the begin_print handler. end_print: A handler for it is a safe place to free any resources related to a PrintOperation. If you have your custom class that inherits from PrintOperation, it is naturally simpler to do it in the destructor. done: This signal is emitted when printing is finished, meaning when the print data is spooled. Note that the provided Gtk::PrintOperationResult may indicate that an error occurred. In any case you probably want to notify the user about the final status. status_changed: Emitted whenever a print job's status changes, until it is finished. Call the PrintOperation::set_track_print_status() method to monitor the job status after spooling. To see the status, use get_status() or get_status_string(). Reference Page setup The PrintOperation class has a method called set_default_page_setup() which selects the default paper size, orientation and margins. To show a page setup dialog from your application, use the Gtk::run_page_setup_dialog() method, which returns a Gtk::PageSetup object with the chosen settings. Use this object to update a PrintOperation and to access the selected Gtk::PaperSize, Gtk::PageOrientation and printer-specific margins. You should save the chosen Gtk::PageSetup so you can use it again if the page setup dialog is shown again. For instance, //Within a class that inherits from Gtk::Window and keeps m_refPageSetup and m_refSettings as members... Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PageSetup> new_page_setup = Gtk::run_page_setup_dialog(*this, m_refPageSetup, m_refSettings); m_refPageSetup = new_page_setup; Reference The Cairo coordinate system, in the draw_page handler, is automatically rotated to the current page orientation. It is normally within the printer margins, but you can change that via the PrintOperation::set_use_full_page() method. The default measurement unit is device pixels. To select other units, use the PrintOperation::set_unit() method. Rendering text Text rendering is done using Pango. The Pango::Layout object for printing should be created by calling the PrintContext::create_pango_layout() method. The PrintContext object also provides the page metrics, via get_width() and get_height(). The number of pages can be set with PrintOperation::set_n_pages(). To actually render the Pango text in on_draw_page, get a Cairo::Context with PrintContext::get_cairo_context() and show the Pango::LayoutLines that appear within the requested page number. See an example of exactly how this can be done. Asynchronous operations By default, PrintOperation::run() returns when a print operation is completed. If you need to run a non-blocking print operation, call PrintOperation::set_allow_async(). Note that set_allow_async() is not supported on all platforms, however the done signal will still be emitted. run() may return PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS. To track status and handle the result or error you need to implement signal handlers for the done and status_changed signals: For instance, // in class ExampleWindow's method... Glib::RefPtr<PrintOperation> op = PrintOperation::create(); // ...set up op... op->signal_done().connect(sigc::bind(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_done), op)); // run the op Second, check for an error and connect to the status_changed signal. For instance: void ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_done(Gtk::PrintOperationResult result, const Glib::RefPtr<PrintOperation>& op) { if (result == Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR) //notify user else if (result == Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY) //Update PrintSettings with the ones used in this PrintOperation if (! op->is_finished()) op->signal_status_changed().connect(sigc::bind(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_status_changed), op)); } Finally, check the status. For instance, void ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_status_changed(const Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation>& op) { if (op->is_finished()) //the print job is finished else //get the status with get_status() or get_status_string() //update UI } Export to PDF The 'Print to file' option is available in the print dialog, without the need for extra implementation. However, it is sometimes useful to generate a pdf file directly from code. For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PrintOperation> op = Gtk::PrintOperation::create(); // ...set up op... op->set_export_filename("test.pdf"); Gtk::PrintOperationResult res = op->run(Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_EXPORT); Extending the print dialog You may add a custom tab to the print dialog: Set the title of the tab via PrintOperation::set_custom_tab_label(), create a new widget and return it from the create_custom_widget signal handler. You'll probably want this to be a container widget, packed with some others. Get the data from the widgets in the custom_widget_apply signal handler. Although the custom_widget_apply signal provides the widget you previously created, to simplify things you can keep the widgets you expect to contain some user input as class members. For example, let's say you have a Gtk::Entry called m_Entry as a member of your CustomPrintOperation class: Gtk::Widget* CustomPrintOperation::on_create_custom_widget() { set_custom_tab_label("My custom tab"); Gtk::Box* hbox = new Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 8); hbox->set_border_width(6); Gtk::Label* label = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("Enter some text: ")); hbox->pack_start(*label, false, false); label->show(); hbox->pack_start(m_Entry, false, false); m_Entry.show(); return hbox; } void CustomPrintOperation::on_custom_widget_apply(Gtk::Widget* /* widget */) { Glib::ustring user_input = m_Entry.get_text(); //... } The example in examples/book/printing/advanced demonstrates this. Preview The native GTK+ print dialog has a preview button, but you may also start a preview directly from an application: // in a class that inherits from Gtk::Window... Glib::RefPtr<PrintOperation> op = PrintOperation::create(); // ...set up op... op->run(Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PREVIEW, *this); On Unix, the default preview handler uses an external viewer program. On Windows, the native preview dialog will be shown. If necessary you may override this behaviour and provide a custom preview dialog. See the example located in /examples/book/printing/advanced. Example Simple The following example demonstrates how to print some input from a user interface. It shows how to implement on_begin_print and on_draw_page, as well as how to track print status and update the print settings.
Printing - Simple
Source Code File: printformoperation.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_PRINT_FORM_OPERATION_H #define GTKMM_PRINT_FORM_OPERATION_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include <pangomm.h> #include <vector> //We derive our own class from PrintOperation, //so we can put the actual print implementation here. class PrintFormOperation : public Gtk::PrintOperation { public: static Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation> create(); virtual ~PrintFormOperation(); void set_name(const Glib::ustring& name) { m_Name = name; } void set_comments(const Glib::ustring& comments) { m_Comments = comments; } protected: PrintFormOperation(); //PrintOperation default signal handler overrides: virtual void on_begin_print(const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PrintContext>& context); virtual void on_draw_page(const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PrintContext>& context, int page_nr); Glib::ustring m_Name; Glib::ustring m_Comments; Glib::RefPtr<Pango::Layout> m_refLayout; std::vector<int> m_PageBreaks; // line numbers where a page break occurs }; #endif // GTKMM_PRINT_FORM_OPERATION_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class PrintFormOperation; class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: void build_main_menu(); void print_or_preview(Gtk::PrintOperationAction print_action); //PrintOperation signal handlers. //We handle these so can get necessary information to update the UI or print settings. //Our derived PrintOperation class also overrides some default signal handlers. void on_printoperation_status_changed(const Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation>& operation); void on_printoperation_done(Gtk::PrintOperationResult result, const Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation>& operation); //Action signal handlers: void on_menu_file_new(); void on_menu_file_page_setup(); void on_menu_file_print_preview(); void on_menu_file_print(); void on_menu_file_quit(); //Printing-related objects: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PageSetup> m_refPageSetup; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PrintSettings> m_refSettings; //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; Gtk::Grid m_Grid; Gtk::Label m_NameLabel; Gtk::Entry m_NameEntry; Gtk::Label m_SurnameLabel; Gtk::Entry m_SurnameEntry; Gtk::Label m_CommentsLabel; Gtk::ScrolledWindow m_ScrolledWindow; Gtk::TextView m_TextView; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TextBuffer> m_refTextBuffer; unsigned m_ContextId; Gtk::Statusbar m_Statusbar; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::UIManager> m_refUIManager; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ActionGroup> m_refActionGroup; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: printformoperation.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "printformoperation.h" PrintFormOperation::PrintFormOperation() { } PrintFormOperation::~PrintFormOperation() { } Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation> PrintFormOperation::create() { return Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation>(new PrintFormOperation()); } void PrintFormOperation::on_begin_print( const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PrintContext>& print_context) { //Create and set up a Pango layout for PrintData based on the passed //PrintContext: We then use this to calculate the number of pages needed, and //the lines that are on each page. m_refLayout = print_context->create_pango_layout(); Pango::FontDescription font_desc("sans 12"); m_refLayout->set_font_description(font_desc); const double width = print_context->get_width(); const double height = print_context->get_height(); m_refLayout->set_width(static_cast<int>(width * Pango::SCALE)); //Set and mark up the text to print: Glib::ustring marked_up_form_text; marked_up_form_text += "<b>Name</b>: " + m_Name + "\n\n"; marked_up_form_text += "<b>Comments</b>: " + m_Comments; m_refLayout->set_markup(marked_up_form_text); //Set the number of pages to print by determining the line numbers //where page breaks occur: const int line_count = m_refLayout->get_line_count(); Glib::RefPtr<Pango::LayoutLine> layout_line; double page_height = 0; for (int line = 0; line < line_count; ++line) { Pango::Rectangle ink_rect, logical_rect; layout_line = m_refLayout->get_line(line); layout_line->get_extents(ink_rect, logical_rect); const double line_height = logical_rect.get_height() / 1024.0; if (page_height + line_height > height) { m_PageBreaks.push_back(line); page_height = 0; } page_height += line_height; } set_n_pages(m_PageBreaks.size() + 1); } void PrintFormOperation::on_draw_page( const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PrintContext>& print_context, int page_nr) { //Decide which lines we need to print in order to print the specified page: int start_page_line = 0; int end_page_line = 0; if(page_nr == 0) { start_page_line = 0; } else { start_page_line = m_PageBreaks[page_nr - 1]; } if(page_nr < static_cast<int>(m_PageBreaks.size())) { end_page_line = m_PageBreaks[page_nr]; } else { end_page_line = m_refLayout->get_line_count(); } //Get a Cairo Context, which is used as a drawing board: Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context> cairo_ctx = print_context->get_cairo_context(); //We'll use black letters: cairo_ctx->set_source_rgb(0, 0, 0); //Render Pango LayoutLines over the Cairo context: Pango::LayoutIter iter = m_refLayout->get_iter(); double start_pos = 0; int line_index = 0; do { if(line_index >= start_page_line) { Glib::RefPtr<Pango::LayoutLine> layout_line = iter.get_line(); Pango::Rectangle logical_rect = iter.get_line_logical_extents(); int baseline = iter.get_baseline(); if (line_index == start_page_line) { start_pos = logical_rect.get_y() / 1024.0; } cairo_ctx->move_to(logical_rect.get_x() / 1024.0, baseline / 1024.0 - start_pos); layout_line->show_in_cairo_context(cairo_ctx); } line_index++; } while(line_index < end_page_line && iter.next_line()); } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include "printformoperation.h" #include <iostream> #include <pangomm.h> const Glib::ustring app_title = "gtkmm Printing Example"; ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_NameLabel("Name"), m_SurnameLabel("Surname"), m_CommentsLabel("Comments") { m_refPageSetup = Gtk::PageSetup::create(); m_refSettings = Gtk::PrintSettings::create(); m_ContextId = m_Statusbar.get_context_id(app_title); set_title(app_title); set_default_size(400, 300); add(m_VBox); build_main_menu(); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Grid); //Arrange the widgets inside the grid: m_Grid.set_row_spacing(5); m_Grid.set_column_spacing(5); m_Grid.attach(m_NameLabel, 0, 0, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_NameEntry, 1, 0, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_SurnameLabel, 0, 1, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_SurnameEntry, 1, 1, 1, 1); //Add the TextView, inside a ScrolledWindow: m_ScrolledWindow.add(m_TextView); //Only show the scrollbars when they are necessary: m_ScrolledWindow.set_policy(Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC, Gtk::POLICY_AUTOMATIC); m_Grid.attach(m_CommentsLabel, 0, 2, 1, 1); m_Grid.attach(m_ScrolledWindow, 1, 2, 1, 1); m_ScrolledWindow.set_hexpand(true); m_ScrolledWindow.set_vexpand(true); m_refTextBuffer = Gtk::TextBuffer::create(); m_TextView.set_buffer(m_refTextBuffer); m_VBox.pack_start(m_Statusbar); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::build_main_menu() { //Create actions for menus and toolbars: m_refActionGroup = Gtk::ActionGroup::create(); //File menu: m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("FileMenu", "_File")); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("New", Gtk::Stock::NEW), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new)); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("PageSetup", "Page _Setup"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_page_setup)); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("PrintPreview", "Print Preview"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_print_preview)); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("Print", Gtk::Stock::PRINT), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_print)); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("Quit", Gtk::Stock::QUIT), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_quit)); m_refUIManager = Gtk::UIManager::create(); m_refUIManager->insert_action_group(m_refActionGroup); add_accel_group(m_refUIManager->get_accel_group()); //Layout the actions in a menubar and toolbar: Glib::ustring ui_info = "<ui>" " <menubar name='MenuBar'>" " <menu action='FileMenu'>" " <menuitem action='New'/>" " <menuitem action='PageSetup'/>" " <menuitem action='PrintPreview'/>" " <menuitem action='Print'/>" " <separator/>" " <menuitem action='Quit'/>" " </menu>" " </menubar>" " <toolbar name='ToolBar'>" " <toolitem action='New'/>" " <toolitem action='Print'/>" " <separator/>" " <toolitem action='Quit'/>" " </toolbar>" "</ui>"; try { m_refUIManager->add_ui_from_string(ui_info); } catch(const Glib::Error& ex) { std::cerr << "building menus failed: " << ex.what(); } //Get the menubar and toolbar widgets, and add them to a container widget: Gtk::Widget* pMenubar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/MenuBar"); if(pMenubar) m_VBox.pack_start(*pMenubar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); Gtk::Widget* pToolbar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/ToolBar") ; if(pToolbar) m_VBox.pack_start(*pToolbar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); } void ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_status_changed( const Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation>& operation) { Glib::ustring status_msg; if (operation->is_finished()) { status_msg = "Print job completed."; } else { //You could also use get_status(). status_msg = operation->get_status_string(); } m_Statusbar.push(status_msg, m_ContextId); } void ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_done(Gtk::PrintOperationResult result, const Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation>& operation) { //Printing is "done" when the print data is spooled. if (result == Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR) { Gtk::MessageDialog err_dialog(*this, "Error printing form", false, Gtk::MESSAGE_ERROR, Gtk::BUTTONS_OK, true); err_dialog.run(); } else if (result == Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY) { //Update PrintSettings with the ones used in this PrintOperation: m_refSettings = operation->get_print_settings(); } if (! operation->is_finished()) { //We will connect to the status-changed signal to track status //and update a status bar. In addition, you can, for example, //keep a list of active print operations, or provide a progress dialog. operation->signal_status_changed().connect(sigc::bind(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_status_changed), operation)); } } void ExampleWindow::print_or_preview(Gtk::PrintOperationAction print_action) { //Create a new PrintOperation with our PageSetup and PrintSettings: //(We use our derived PrintOperation class) Glib::RefPtr<PrintFormOperation> print = PrintFormOperation::create(); print->set_name(m_NameEntry.get_text() + " " + m_SurnameEntry.get_text()); print->set_comments(m_refTextBuffer->get_text(false /*Don't include hidden*/)); print->set_track_print_status(); print->set_default_page_setup(m_refPageSetup); print->set_print_settings(m_refSettings); print->signal_done().connect(sigc::bind(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_printoperation_done), print)); try { print->run(print_action /* print or preview */, *this); } catch (const Gtk::PrintError& ex) { //See documentation for exact Gtk::PrintError error codes. std::cerr << "An error occurred while trying to run a print operation:" << ex.what() << std::endl; } } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new() { //Clear entries and textview: m_NameEntry.set_text(""); m_SurnameEntry.set_text(""); m_refTextBuffer->set_text(""); m_TextView.set_buffer(m_refTextBuffer); } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_page_setup() { //Show the page setup dialog, asking it to start with the existing settings: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::PageSetup> new_page_setup = Gtk::run_page_setup_dialog(*this, m_refPageSetup, m_refSettings); //Save the chosen page setup dialog for use when printing, previewing, or //showing the page setup dialog again: m_refPageSetup = new_page_setup; } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_print_preview() { print_or_preview(Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PREVIEW); } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_print() { print_or_preview(Gtk::PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG); } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Recently Used Documents gtkmm provides an easy way to manage recently used documents. The classes involved in implementing this functionality are RecentManager, RecentChooserDialog, RecentChooserMenu, RecentChooserWidget, RecentAction, and RecentFilter. Each item in the list of recently used files is identified by its URI, and can have associated metadata. The metadata can be used to specify how the file should be displayed, a description of the file, its mime type, which application registered it, whether it's private to the registering application, and several other things. RecentManager RecentManager acts as a database of recently used files. You use this class to register new files, remove files from the list, or look up recently used files. There is one list of recently used files per user. You can create a new RecentManager, but you'll most likely just want to use the default one. You can get a reference to the default RecentManager with get_default(). RecentManager is the model of a model-view pattern, where the view is a class that implements the RecentChooser interface. Adding Items to the List of Recent Files To add a new file to the list of recent documents, in the simplest case, you only need to provide the URI. For example: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::RecentManager> recent_manager = Gtk::RecentManager::get_default(); recent_manager->add_item(uri); If you want to register a file with metadata, you can pass a RecentManager::Data parameter to add_item(). The metadata that can be set on a particular file item is as follows: app_exec: The command line to be used to launch this resource. This string may contain the "f" and "u" escape characters which will be expanded to the resource file path and URI respectively app_name: The name of the application that registered the resource description: A short description of the resource as a UTF-8 encoded string display_name: The name of the resource to be used for display as a UTF-8 encoded string groups: A list of groups associated with this item. Groups are essentially arbitrary strings associated with a particular resource. They can be thought of as 'categories' (such as "email", "graphics", etc) or tags for the resource. is_private: Whether this resource should be visible only to applications that have registered it or not mime_type: The MIME type of the resource In addition to adding items to the list, you can also look up items from the list and modify or remove items. Looking up Items in the List of Recent Files To look up recently used files, RecentManager provides several functions. To look up a specific item by its URI, you can use the lookup_item() function, which will return a RecentInfo class. If the specified URI did not exist in the list of recent files, lookup_item() throws a RecentManagerError exception. For example: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::RecentInfo> info; try { info = recent_manager->lookup_item(uri); } catch(const Gtk::RecentManagerError& ex) { std::cerr << "RecentManagerError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; } if (info) { // item was found } A RecentInfo object is essentially an object containing all of the metadata about a single recently-used file. You can use this object to look up any of the properties listed above. If you don't want to look for a specific URI, but instead want to get a list of all recently used items, RecentManager provides the get_items() function. The return value of this function is a std::vector of all recently used files. The following code demonstrates how you might get a list of recently used files: std::vector< Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::RecentInfo> > info_list = recent_manager->get_items(); The maximum age of items in the recently used files list can be set with Gtk::Settings::property_gtk_recent_files_max_age(). Default value: 30 days. Modifying the List of Recent Files There may be times when you need to modify the list of recent files. For instance, if a file is moved or renamed, you may need to update the file's location in the recent files list so that it doesn't point to an incorrect location. You can update an item's location by using move_item(). In addition to changing a file's URI, you can also remove items from the list, either one at a time or by clearing them all at once. The former is accomplished with remove_item(), the latter with purge_items(). The functions move_item(), remove_item() and purge_items() have no effect on the actual files that are referred to by the URIs, they only modify the list of recent files. RecentChooser RecentChooser is an interface that can be implemented by widgets displaying the list of recently used files. gtkmm provides four built-in implementations for choosing recent files: RecentChooserWidget, RecentChooserDialog, RecentChooserMenu, and RecentAction. RecentChooserWidget is a simple widget for displaying a list of recently used files. RecentChooserWidget is the basic building block for RecentChooserDialog, but you can embed it into your user interface if you want to. RecentChooserMenu and RecentAction allow you to list recently used files as a menu. Simple RecentChooserDialog example Shown below is a simple example of how to use the RecentChooserDialog and the RecentAction classes in a program. This simple program has a menubar with a Recent Files Dialog menu item. When you select this menu item, a dialog pops up showing the list of recently used files. If this is the first time you're using a program that uses the Recent Files framework, the dialog may be empty at first. Otherwise it should show the list of recently used documents registered by other applications. After selecting the Recent Files Dialog menu item, you should see something similar to the following window. Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_menu_file_recent_files_item(); void on_menu_file_recent_files_dialog(); void on_menu_file_quit(); void on_menu_file_new(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_Box; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::UIManager> m_refUIManager; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::ActionGroup> m_refActionGroup; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::RecentAction> m_refRecentAction; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::RecentManager> m_refRecentManager; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/stock.h> #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_refRecentManager(Gtk::RecentManager::get_default()) { set_title("recent files example"); set_default_size(200, 200); //We can put a MenuBar at the top of the box and other stuff below it. add(m_Box); //Create actions for menus and toolbars: m_refActionGroup = Gtk::ActionGroup::create(); //File menu: m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("FileMenu", "_File") ); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("FileNew", Gtk::Stock::NEW), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new)); //A recent-files submenu: m_refRecentAction = Gtk::RecentAction::create("FileRecentFiles", "_Recent Files"); m_refActionGroup->add(m_refRecentAction); //Connect to RecentChooser's item_activated signal //instead of Action's activate signal: m_refRecentAction->signal_item_activated().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_recent_files_item) ); //A menu item to open the recent-files dialog: m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("FileRecentDialog", "Recent Files _Dialog"), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_recent_files_dialog) ); m_refActionGroup->add( Gtk::Action::create("FileQuit", Gtk::Stock::QUIT), sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_quit) ); m_refUIManager = Gtk::UIManager::create(); m_refUIManager->insert_action_group(m_refActionGroup); add_accel_group(m_refUIManager->get_accel_group()); //Layout the actions in a menubar and toolbar: Glib::ustring ui_info = "<ui>" " <menubar name='MenuBar'>" " <menu action='FileMenu'>" " <menuitem action='FileNew'/>" " <menuitem action='FileRecentFiles'/>" " <menuitem action='FileRecentDialog'/>" " <separator/>" " <menuitem action='FileQuit'/>" " </menu>" " </menubar>" " <toolbar name='ToolBar'>" " <toolitem action='FileNew'/>" " <toolitem action='FileQuit'/>" " </toolbar>" "</ui>"; try { m_refUIManager->add_ui_from_string(ui_info); } catch(const Glib::Error& ex) { std::cerr << "building menus failed: " << ex.what(); } //Get the menubar and toolbar widgets, and add them to a container widget: Gtk::Widget* pMenubar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/MenuBar"); if(pMenubar) m_Box.pack_start(*pMenubar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); Gtk::Widget* pToolbar = m_refUIManager->get_widget("/ToolBar"); if(pToolbar) m_Box.pack_start(*pToolbar, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_new() { std::cout << " New File" << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_quit() { hide(); //Closes the main window to stop the app->run(). } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_recent_files_item() { std::cout << "URI selected = " << m_refRecentAction->get_current_uri() << std::endl; } void ExampleWindow::on_menu_file_recent_files_dialog() { Gtk::RecentChooserDialog dialog(*this, "Recent Files", m_refRecentManager); dialog.add_button("Select File", Gtk::RESPONSE_OK); dialog.add_button(Gtk::Stock::CANCEL, Gtk::RESPONSE_CANCEL); const int response = dialog.run(); dialog.hide(); if(response == Gtk::RESPONSE_OK) { std::cout << "URI selected = " << dialog.get_current_uri() << std::endl; } } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } The constructor for ExampleWindow creates the menu using UIManager (see for more information). It then adds the menu and the toolbar to the window. Filtering Recent Files For any of the RecentChooser classes, if you don't wish to display all of the items in the list of recent files, you can filter the list to show only those that you want. You can filter the list with the help of the RecentFilter class. This class allows you to filter recent files by their name (add_pattern()), their mime type (add_mime_type()), the application that registered them (add_application()), or by a custom filter function (add_custom()). It also provides the ability to filter based on how long ago the file was modified and which groups it belongs to. After you've created and set up the filter to match only the items you want, you can apply a filter to a chooser widget with the RecentChooser::add_filter() function. Vstavki in vtiči Pregled From time to time, it may be useful to be able to embed a widget from another application within your application. gtkmm allows you to do this with the Gtk::Socket and Gtk::Plug classes. It is not anticipated that very many applications will need this functionality, but in the rare case that you need to display a widget that is running in a completely different process, these classes can be very helpful. The communication between a Socket and a Plug follows the XEmbed protocol. This protocol has also been implemented in other toolkits (e.g. Qt), which allows the same level of integration when embedding a Qt widget in GTK+ or vice versa. The way that Sockets and Plugs work together is through their window ids. Both a Socket and a Plug have IDs that can be retrieved with their get_id() member functions. The use of these IDs will be explained below in . Vtiči A Socket is a special kind of container widget that provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a way that is transparent to the user. Vstavki A Plug is a special kind of Window that can be plugged into a Socket. Besides the normal properties and methods of Gtk::Window, a Plug provides a constructor that takes the ID of a Socket, which will automatically embed the Plug into the Socket that matches that ID. Since a Plug is just a special type of Gtk::Window class, you can add containers or widgets to it like you would to any other window. Connecting Plugs and Sockets After a Socket or Plug object is realized, you can obtain its ID with its get_id() function. This ID can then be shared with other processes so that other processes know how to connect to each other. There are two basic strategies that can be used: Create a Socket object in one process and pass the ID of that Socket to another process so that it can create a Plug object by specifying the given Socket ID in its constructor. There is no way to assign a Plug to a particular Socket after creation, so you must pass the Socket ID to the Plug's constructor. Create a Plug independantly from any particular Socket and pass the ID of the Plug to other processes that need to use it. The ID of the Plug can be associated with a particular Socket object using the Socket::add_id() function. This is the approach used in the example below. Plugs and Sockets Example The following is a simple example of using sockets and plugs. The method of communication between processes is deliberately kept very simple: The Plug writes its ID out to a text file named plug.id and the process with the socket reads the ID from this file. In a real program, you may want to use a more sophisticated method of inter-process communication. Source Code File: socket.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include <fstream> #include <gtkmm.h> #include <gtkmm/socket.h> using namespace std; const char* id_filename = "plug.id"; void plug_added() { cout << "A plug was added" << endl; } bool plug_removed() { cout << "A Plug was removed" << endl; return true; } class MySocketWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: MySocketWindow() { ifstream infile(id_filename); if (infile) { Gtk::Socket* socket = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Socket()); add(*socket); socket->signal_plug_added().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(plug_added)); socket->signal_plug_removed().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(plug_removed)); ::Window plug_id = 0; infile >> plug_id; infile.close(); socket->add_id(plug_id); } else { Gtk::Label* label = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::Label( "Plug id file not found.\n Make sure plug is running.")); add(*label); set_size_request(150, 50); } show_all(); } }; int main(int argc, char** argv) { // The plug and the socket have different application ids, so they can run // simultaneously. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example.socket"); MySocketWindow win; app->run(win); return 0; } File: plug.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include <fstream> #include <gtkmm.h> #include <gtkmm/plug.h> #include <glib/gstdio.h> using namespace std; const char* id_filename = "plug.id"; void on_embed() { cout << "I've been embedded." << endl; } class MyPlug : public Gtk::Plug { public: MyPlug() : m_label("I am the plug") { set_size_request(150, 100); add(m_label); signal_embedded().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(on_embed)); show_all_children(); } private: Gtk::Label m_label; }; int main(int argc, char** argv) { // The plug and the socket have different application ids, so they can run // simultaneously. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example.plug"); MyPlug plug; plug.show(); ofstream out(id_filename); out << plug.get_id(); out.close(); cout << "The window ID is: " << plug.get_id() << endl; app->run(plug); // remove the ID file when the program exits g_remove(id_filename); return 0; } This example creates two executable programs: socket and plug. The idea is that socket has an application window that will embed a widget from the plug program. The way this example is designed, plug must be running first before starting socket. To see the example in action, execute the following commands in order from within the example directory: Start the plug program and send it to the background (or just use a different terminal). $ ./plug & After which you should see something like the following: The window ID is: 69206019 Then start the socket program: $ ./socket After starting socket, you should see the following output in the terminal: I've been embedded. A plug was added The first line of output is from plug, after it has been notified that it has been embedded inside of a Socket. The second line was emitted by socket in response to its plug_added signal. If everything was done as described above, the socket window should look roughly like the following: If for some reason the Socket couldn't attach the Plug, the window would look something like this: Keyboard Events X events differ in some ways from other signals. These differences are described in the X Event signals section in the appendix. Here we will use keyboard events to show how X events can be used in a program. Pregled Whenever you press or release a key, an event is emitted. You can connect a signal handler to handle such events. To receive the keyboard events, you must first call the Gtk::Widget::add_events() function with a bit mask of the events you're interested in. The event signal handler will receive an argument that depends on the type of event. For keyboard events it's a GdkEventKey*. As discribed in the appendix, the event signal handler returns a bool value, to indicate that the signal is fully handled (true) or allow event propagation (false). To determine which key was pressed or released, you read the value of GdkEventKey::keyval and compare it with a constant in the <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h> header file. The states of modifier keys (shift, ctrl, etc.) are available as bit-flags in GdkEventKey::state. Here's a simple example: bool on_key_press_or_release_event(GdkEventKey* event) { if (event->type == GDK_KEY_PRESS && event->keyval == GDK_KEY_1 && (event->state & (GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)) == GDK_MOD1_MASK) { handle_alt_1_press(); // GDK_MOD1_MASK is normally the Alt key return true; } return false; } Gtk::Entry m_entry; // in a class definition // in the class constructor m_entry.signal_key_press_event().connect( sigc::ptr_fun(&on_key_press_or_release_event) ); m_entry.signal_key_release_event().connect( sigc::ptr_fun(&on_key_press_or_release_event) ); m_entry.add_events(Gdk::KEY_PRESS_MASK | Gdk::KEY_RELEASE_MASK); Example In this example there are three keyboard shortcuts: Alt+1 selects the first radio button, Alt+2 selects the second one, and the Esc key hides (closes) the window. The default event signal handler is overridden, as described in the Overriding default signal handlers section in the appendix.
Keyboard Events - Simple
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); private: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_key_press_event(GdkEventKey* event); Gtk::Grid m_container; Gtk::RadioButton m_first; Gtk::RadioButton m_second; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() { set_title("Keyboard Events"); set_border_width(10); add(m_container); // Radio buttons: m_first.set_label("First"); m_second.set_label("Second"); Gtk::RadioButton::Group group = m_first.get_group(); m_second.set_group(group); m_first.set_active(); // Main Container: m_container.add(m_first); m_container.add(m_second); // Events. // We override the default event signal handler. add_events(Gdk::KEY_PRESS_MASK); show_all_children(); } bool ExampleWindow::on_key_press_event(GdkEventKey* event) { //GDK_MOD1_MASK -> the 'alt' key(mask) //GDK_KEY_1 -> the '1' key //GDK_KEY_2 -> the '2' key //select the first radio button, when we press alt + 1 if((event->keyval == GDK_KEY_1) && (event->state &(GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)) == GDK_MOD1_MASK) { m_first.set_active(); //returning true, cancels the propagation of the event return true; } else if((event->keyval == GDK_KEY_2) && (event->state & (GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK)) == GDK_MOD1_MASK) { //and the second radio button, when we press alt + 2 m_second.set_active(); return true; } else if(event->keyval == GDK_KEY_Escape) { //close the window, when the 'esc' key is pressed hide(); return true; } //if the event has not been handled, call the base class return Gtk::Window::on_key_press_event(event); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Event Propagation Event propagation means that, when an event is emitted on a particular widget, it can be passed to its parent widget (and that widget can pass it to its parent, and so on) and, if the parent has an event handler, that handler will be called. Contrary to other events, keyboard events are first sent to the toplevel window (Gtk::Window), where it will be checked for any keyboard shortcuts that may be set (accelerator keys and mnemonics, used for selecting menu items from the keyboard). After this (and assuming the event wasn't handled), it is sent to the widget which has focus, and the propagation begins from there. The event will propagate until it reaches the top-level widget, or until you stop the propagation by returning true from an event handler. Notice, that after canceling an event, no other function will be called (even if it is from the same widget). Example In this example there are three event handlers that are called after Gtk::Window's default event handler, one in the Gtk::Entry, one in the Gtk::Grid and one in the Gtk::Window. In the Gtk::Window, we have also the default handler overridden (on_key_release_event()), and another handler being called before the default handler (windowKeyReleaseBefore()). The purpose of this example is to show the steps the event takes when it is emitted. When you write in the entry, a key release event will be emitted, which will go first to the toplevel window (Gtk::Window), since we have one event handler set to be called before, that's what is called first (windowKeyReleaseBefore()). Then the default handler is called (which we have overridden), and after that the event is sent to the widget that has focus, the Entry in our example and, depending on whether we let it propagate, it can reach the Grid's and the Window's event handlers. If it propagates, the text you're writing will appear in the Label above the Entry.
Keyboard Events - Event Propagation
Source Code File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EVENT_PROPAGATION_H #define GTKMM_EVENT_PROPAGATION_H #include <gtkmm.h> class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); private: //Override default signal handler: virtual bool on_key_release_event(GdkEventKey* event); bool entryKeyRelease(GdkEventKey* event); bool gridKeyRelease(GdkEventKey* event); bool windowKeyReleaseBefore(GdkEventKey* event); bool windowKeyRelease(GdkEventKey* event); Gtk::Grid m_container; Gtk::Label m_label; Gtk::Entry m_entry; Gtk::CheckButton m_checkbutton_can_propagate; }; #endif //GTKMM_EVENT_PROPAGATION_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <iostream> ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() { add(m_container); set_title("Event Propagation"); set_border_width(10); m_label.set_label("A label"); m_checkbutton_can_propagate.set_label("Can Propagate"); m_checkbutton_can_propagate.set_active(); // Main Container m_container.set_orientation(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); m_container.add(m_label); m_container.add(m_entry); m_container.add(m_checkbutton_can_propagate); // Events add_events(Gdk::KEY_RELEASE_MASK); m_entry.signal_key_release_event().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::entryKeyRelease)); m_container.signal_key_release_event().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::gridKeyRelease)); // Called before the default event signal handler. signal_key_release_event().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::windowKeyReleaseBefore), false); // Called after the default event signal handler. signal_key_release_event().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::windowKeyRelease)); show_all_children(); } //By changing the return value we allow, or don't allow, the event to propagate to other elements. bool ExampleWindow::entryKeyRelease(GdkEventKey* /* event */ ) { std::cout << "Entry" << std::endl; if(m_checkbutton_can_propagate.get_active()) { return false; } return true; } bool ExampleWindow::gridKeyRelease(GdkEventKey* /* event */ ) { std::cout << "Grid" << std::endl; //Let it propagate: return false; } bool ExampleWindow::windowKeyReleaseBefore(GdkEventKey* /* event */ ) { std::cout << "Window before" << std::endl; return false; } bool ExampleWindow::on_key_release_event(GdkEventKey* event) { std::cout << "Window overridden" << std::endl; // call base class function (to get the normal behaviour) return Gtk::Window::on_key_release_event(event); } // This will set the entry's text in the label, every time a key is pressed. bool ExampleWindow::windowKeyRelease(GdkEventKey* /* event */ ) { std::cout << "Window after"; //checking if the entry is on focus, otherwise the label would get changed by pressing keys //on the window (when the entry is not on focus), even if m_checkbutton_can_propagate wasn't active if(m_entry.has_focus()) { m_label.set_text(m_entry.get_text()); std::cout << ", " << m_entry.get_text(); } std::cout << std::endl; return true; } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Timeouts, I/O and Idle Functions Timeouts You may be wondering how to make gtkmm do useful work while it's idling along. Happily, you have several options. Using the following methods you can create a timeout method that will be called every few milliseconds. sigc::connection Glib::SignalTimeout::connect(const sigc::slot<bool>& slot, unsigned int interval, int priority = Glib::PRIORITY_DEFAULT); The first argument is a slot you wish to have called when the timeout occurs. The second argument is the number of milliseconds between calls to that method. You receive a sigc::connection object that can be used to deactivate the connection using its disconnect() method: my_connection.disconnect(); Another way of destroying the connection is your signal handler. It has to be of the type sigc::slot<bool>. As you see from the definition your signal handler has to return a value of the type bool. A definition of a sample method might look like this: bool MyCallback() { std::cout << "Hello World!\n" << std::endl; return true; } You can stop the timeout method by returning false from your signal handler. Therefore, if you want your method to be called repeatedly, it should return true. Here's an example of this technique: Source Code File: timerexample.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TIMEREXAMPLE_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TIMEREXAMPLE_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include <iostream> #include <map> class TimerExample : public Gtk::Window { public: TimerExample(); protected: // signal handlers void on_button_add_timer(); void on_button_delete_timer(); void on_button_quit(); // This is the callback function the timeout will call bool on_timeout(int timer_number); // Member data: Gtk::Box m_Box; Gtk::Button m_ButtonAddTimer, m_ButtonDeleteTimer, m_ButtonQuit; // Keep track of the timers being added: int m_timer_number; // These two constants are initialized in the constructor's member initializer: const int count_value; const int timeout_value; // STL map for storing our connections std::map<int, sigc::connection> m_timers; // STL map for storing our timer values. // Each timer counts back from COUNT_VALUE to 0 and is removed when it reaches 0 std::map<int, int> m_counters; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_TIMEREXAMPLE_H File: timerexample.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "timerexample.h" TimerExample::TimerExample() : m_Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 10), // use Gtk::Stock wherever possible for buttons, etc. m_ButtonAddTimer(Gtk::Stock::ADD), m_ButtonDeleteTimer(Gtk::Stock::REMOVE), m_ButtonQuit(Gtk::Stock::QUIT), m_timer_number(0), // start numbering the timers at 0 count_value(5), // each timer will count down 5 times before disconnecting timeout_value(1500) // 1500 ms = 1.5 seconds { set_border_width(10); add(m_Box); m_Box.pack_start(m_ButtonAddTimer); m_Box.pack_start(m_ButtonDeleteTimer); m_Box.pack_start(m_ButtonQuit); // Connect the three buttons: m_ButtonQuit.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TimerExample::on_button_quit)); m_ButtonAddTimer.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TimerExample::on_button_add_timer)); m_ButtonDeleteTimer.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TimerExample::on_button_delete_timer)); show_all_children(); } void TimerExample::on_button_quit() { hide(); } void TimerExample::on_button_add_timer() { // Creation of a new object prevents long lines and shows us a little // how slots work. We have 0 parameters and bool as a return value // after calling sigc::bind. sigc::slot<bool> my_slot = sigc::bind(sigc::mem_fun(*this, &TimerExample::on_timeout), m_timer_number); // This is where we connect the slot to the Glib::signal_timeout() sigc::connection conn = Glib::signal_timeout().connect(my_slot, timeout_value); // Remember the connection: m_timers[m_timer_number] = conn; // Initialize timer count: m_counters[m_timer_number] = count_value + 1; // Print some info to the console for the user: std::cout << "added timeout " << m_timer_number++ << std::endl; } void TimerExample::on_button_delete_timer() { // any timers? if(m_timers.empty()) { // no timers left std::cout << "Sorry, there are no timers left." << std::endl; } else { // get the number of the first timer int timer_number = m_timers.begin()->first; // Give some info to the user: std::cout << "manually disconnecting timer " << timer_number << std::endl; // Remove the entry in the counter values m_counters.erase(timer_number); // Diconnect the signal handler: m_timers[timer_number].disconnect(); // Forget the connection: m_timers.erase(timer_number); } } bool TimerExample::on_timeout(int timer_number) { // Print the timer: std::cout << "This is timer " << timer_number; // decrement and check counter value if (--m_counters[timer_number] == 0) { std::cout << " being disconnected" << std::endl; // delete the counter entry in the STL MAP m_counters.erase(timer_number); // delete the connection entry in the STL MAP m_timers.erase(timer_number); // Note that we do not have to explicitly call disconnect() on the // connection since Gtk::Main does this for us when we return false. return false; } // Print the timer value std::cout << " - " << m_counters[timer_number] << "/" << count_value << std::endl; // Keep going (do not disconnect yet): return true; } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "timerexample.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); TimerExample example; return app->run(example); } Monitoring I/O A nifty feature of Glib (one of the libraries underlying gtkmm) is the ability to have it check for data on a file descriptor for you. This is especially useful for networking applications. The following method is used to do this: sigc::connection Glib::SignalInput::connect(const sigc::slot<bool,Glib::IOCondition>& slot, int fd, Glib::IOCondition condition, int priority = Glib::PRIORITY_DEFAULT); The first argument is a slot you wish to have called when then the specified event (see argument 3) occurs on the file descriptor you specify using argument two. Argument three may be one or more (using |) of: Glib::IO_IN - Call your method when there is data ready for reading on your file descriptor. Glib::IO_OUT - Call your method when the file descriptor is ready for writing. Glib::IO_PRI - Call your method when the file descriptor has urgent data to be read. Glib::IO_ERR - Call your method when an error has occurred on the file descriptor. Glib::IO_HUP - Call your method when hung up (the connection has been broken usually for pipes and sockets). The return value is a sigc::connection that may be used to stop monitoring this file descriptor using its disconnect() method. The slot signal handler should be declared as follows: bool input_callback(Glib::IOCondition condition); where condition is as specified above. As usual the slot is created with sigc::mem_fun() (for a member method of an object.), or sigc::ptr_fun() (for a function). A little example follows. To use the example just execute it from a terminal; it doesn't create a window. It will create a pipe named testfifo in the current directory. Then start another shell and execute echo "Hello" > testfifo. The example will print each line you enter until you execute echo "Q" > testfifo. Source Code File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <build/config.h> #include <gtkmm/application.h> #include <glibmm/main.h> #include <glibmm/iochannel.h> #include <fcntl.h> #include <iostream> #include <unistd.h> //The SUN Forte compiler puts F_OK here. //The SUN Forte compiler needs these for mkfifo: #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/stat.h> Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app; int read_fd; Glib::RefPtr<Glib::IOChannel> iochannel; /* send to the fifo with: echo "Hello" > testfifo quit the program with: echo "Q" > testfifo */ // this will be our signal handler for read operations // it will print out the message sent to the fifo // and quit the program if the message was 'Q'. bool MyCallback(Glib::IOCondition io_condition) { if ((io_condition & Glib::IO_IN) == 0) { std::cerr << "Invalid fifo response" << std::endl; } else { Glib::ustring buf; iochannel->read_line(buf); std::cout << buf; if (buf == "Q\n") app->quit(); } return true; } int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); if (access("testfifo", F_OK) == -1) { // fifo doesn't exit - create it #ifdef HAVE_MKFIFO if (mkfifo("testfifo", 0666) != 0) { std::cerr << "error creating fifo" << std::endl; return -1; } #else std::cerr << "error creating fifo: This platform does not have mkfifo()" << std::endl; #endif //HAVE_MKFIFO } read_fd = open("testfifo", O_RDONLY); if (read_fd == -1) { std::cerr << "error opening fifo" << std::endl; return -1; } // connect the signal handler Glib::signal_io().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(MyCallback), read_fd, Glib::IO_IN); // Creates a iochannel from the file descriptor iochannel = Glib::IOChannel::create_from_fd(read_fd); // and last but not least - run the application main loop app->run(); // now remove the temporary fifo if(unlink("testfifo")) std::cerr << "error removing fifo" << std::endl; return 0; } Idle Functions If you want to specify a method that gets called when nothing else is happening, use the following: sigc::connection Glib::SignalIdle::connect(const sigc::slot<bool>& slot, int priority = Glib::PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE); This causes gtkmm to call the specified method whenever nothing else is happening. You can add a priority (lower numbers are higher priorities). There are two ways to remove the signal handler: calling disconnect() on the sigc::connection object, or returning false in the signal handler, which should be declared as follows: bool idleFunc(); Since this is very similar to the methods above this explanation should be sufficient to understand what's going on. However, here's a little example: Source Code File: idleexample.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_IDLEEXAMPLE_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_IDLEEXAMPLE_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include <iostream> class IdleExample : public Gtk::Window { public: IdleExample(); protected: // Signal Handlers: bool on_timer(); bool on_idle(); void on_button_clicked(); // Member data: Gtk::Box m_Box; Gtk::Button m_ButtonQuit; Gtk::ProgressBar m_ProgressBar_c; Gtk::ProgressBar m_ProgressBar_d; }; #endif // GTKMM_EXAMPLE_IDLEEXAMPLE_H File: idleexample.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "idleexample.h" IdleExample::IdleExample() : m_Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 5), m_ButtonQuit(Gtk::Stock::QUIT) { set_border_width(5); // Put buttons into container // Adding a few widgets: add(m_Box); m_Box.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("Formatting Windows drive C:"))); m_Box.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("100 MB")) ); m_Box.pack_start(m_ProgressBar_c); m_Box.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("")) ); m_Box.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("Formatting Windows drive D:"))); m_Box.pack_start( *Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Label("5000 MB")) ); m_Box.pack_start(m_ProgressBar_d); Gtk::Box* hbox = Gtk::manage( new Gtk::Box(Gtk::ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL,10)); m_Box.pack_start(*hbox); hbox->pack_start(m_ButtonQuit, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_PADDING); // Connect the signal handlers: m_ButtonQuit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &IdleExample::on_button_clicked) ); // formatting drive c in timeout signal handler - called once every 50ms Glib::signal_timeout().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &IdleExample::on_timer), 50 ); // formatting drive d in idle signal handler - called as quickly as possible Glib::signal_idle().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &IdleExample::on_idle) ); show_all_children(); } void IdleExample::on_button_clicked() { hide(); } // this timer callback function is executed once every 50ms (set in connection // above). Use timeouts when speed is not critical. (ie periodically updating // something). bool IdleExample::on_timer() { double value = m_ProgressBar_c.get_fraction(); // Update progressbar 1/500th each time: m_ProgressBar_c.set_fraction(value + 0.002); return value < 0.99; // return false when done } // This idle callback function is executed as often as possible, hence it is // ideal for processing intensive tasks. bool IdleExample::on_idle() { double value = m_ProgressBar_d.get_fraction(); // Update progressbar 1/5000th each time: m_ProgressBar_d.set_fraction(value + 0.0002); return value < 0.99; // return false when done } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "idleexample.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); IdleExample example; return app->run(example); } This example points out the difference of idle and timeout methods a little. If you need methods that are called periodically, and speed is not very important, then you want timeout methods. If you want methods that are called as often as possible (like calculating a fractal in background), then use idle methods. Try executing the example and increasing the system load. The upper progress bar will increase steadily; the lower one will slow down. Memory management Widgets Normal C++ memory management gtkmm allows the programmer to control the lifetime (that is, the construction and destruction) of any widget in the same manner as any other C++ object. This flexibility allows you to use new and delete to create and destroy objects dynamically or to use regular class members (that are destroyed automatically when the class is destroyed) or to use local instances (that are destroyed when the instance goes out of scope). This flexibility is not present in some C++ GUI toolkits, which restrict the programmer to only a subset of C++'s memory management features. Here are some examples of normal C++ memory management: Class Scope widgets If a programmer does not need dynamic memory allocation, automatic widgets in class scope may be used. One advantage of automatic widgets in class scope is that memory management is grouped in one place. The programmer does not risk memory leaks from failing to delete a widget. The primary disadvantage of using class scope widgets is revealing the class implementation rather than the class interface in the class header. #include <gtkmm/button.h> #include <gtkmm/window.h> class Foo : public Gtk::Window { private: Gtk::Button theButton; // will be destroyed when the Foo object is destroyed }; Function scope widgets If a programmer does not need a class scope widget, a function scope widget may also be used. The advantages to function scope over class scope are the increased data hiding and reduced dependencies. { Gtk::Button aButton; aButton.show(); ... app->run(); } Dynamic allocation with new and delete Although, in most cases, the programmer will prefer to allow containers to automatically destroy their children using Gtk::manage() (see below), the programmer is not required to use Gtk::manage(). The traditional new and delete operators may also be used. Gtk::Button* pButton = new Gtk::Button("Test"); // do something useful with pButton delete pButton; Here, the programmer deletes pButton to prevent a memory leak. Managed Widgets Alternatively, you can let a widget's container control when the widget is destroyed. In most cases, you want a widget to last only as long as the container it is in. To delegate the management of a widget's lifetime to its container, first create it with Gtk::manage() and pack it into its container with Gtk::Container::add(), Gtk::Box::pack_start(), or a similar method. Now the widget will be destroyed whenever its container is destroyed. Dynamic allocation with manage() and add() gtkmm provides the manage() function and add() methods to create and destroy widgets. Every widget except a top-level window must be added or packed into a container in order to be displayed. The manage() function marks a widget so that when the widget is added to a container, the container becomes responsible for deleting the widget. MyContainer::MyContainer() { Gtk::Button* pButton = Gtk::manage(new Gtk::Button("Test")); add(*pButton); //add *pButton to MyContainer } Now, when objects of type MyContainer are destroyed, the button will also be deleted. It is no longer necessary to delete pButton to free the button's memory; its deletion has been delegated to the MyContainer object. Of course, a top-level container will not be added to another container. The programmer is responsible for destroying the top-level container using one of the traditional C++ techniques. For instance, your top-level Window might just be an instance in your main() function. Shared resources Some objects, such as Gdk::Pixbufs and Pango::Fonts, are obtained from a shared store. Therefore you cannot instantiate your own instances. These classes typically inherit from Glib::Object. Rather than requiring you to reference and unreference these objects, gtkmm uses the Glib::RefPtr<> smartpointer. Cairomm has its own smartpointer, Cairo::RefPtr<>. Objects such as Gdk::Pixbuf can only be instantiated with a create() function. For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> pixbuf = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file(filename); You have no way of getting a bare Gdk::Pixbuf. In the example, pixbuf is a smart pointer, so you can do this, much like a normal pointer: int width = 0; if(pixbuf) { width = pixbuf->get_width(); } When pixbuf goes out of scope an unref() will happen in the background and you don't need to worry about it anymore. There's no new so there's no delete. If you copy a RefPtr, for instance Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> pixbuf2 = pixbuf; , or if you pass it as a method argument or a return type, then RefPtr will do any necessary referencing to ensure that the instance will not be destroyed until the last RefPtr has gone out of scope. See the appendix for detailed information about RefPtr. If you wish to learn more about smartpointers, you might look in these books: Bjarne Stroustrup, "The C++ Programming Language" - section 14.4.2 Nicolai M. Josuttis, "The C++ Standard Library" - section 4.2 Glade and Gtk::Builder Although you can use C++ code to instantiate and arrange widgets, this can soon become tedious and repetitive. And it requires a recompilation to show changes. The Glade application allows you to layout widgets on screen and then save an XML description of the arrangement. Your application can then use the Gtk::Builder API to load that XML file at runtime and obtain a pointer to specifically named widget instances. This has the following advantages: Less C++ code is required. UI changes can be seen more quickly, so UIs are able to improve. Designers without programming skills can create and edit UIs. You still need C++ code to deal with User Interface changes triggered by user actions, but using Gtk::Builder for the widget layout allows you to focus on implementing that functionality. Loading the .glade file Gtk::Builder must be used via a Glib::RefPtr. Like all such classes, you need to use a create() method to instantiate it. For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder> builder = Gtk::Builder::create_from_file("basic.glade"); This will instantiate the windows defined in the .glade file, though they will not be shown immediately unless you have specified that via the Properties window in Glade. To instantiate just one window, or just one of the child widgets, you can specify the name of a widget as the second parameter. For instance, Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder> builder = Gtk::Builder::create_from_file("basic.glade", "treeview_products"); Accessing widgets To access a widget, for instance to show() a dialog, use the get_widget() method, providing the widget's name. This name should be specified in the Glade Properties window. If the widget could not be found, or is of the wrong type, then the pointer will be set to 0. Gtk::Dialog* pDialog = 0; builder->get_widget("DialogBasic", pDialog); Gtk::Builder checks for a null pointer, and checks that the widget is of the expected type, and will show warnings on the command line about these. Remember that you are not instantiating a widget with get_widget(), you are just obtaining a pointer to one that already exists. You will always receive a pointer to the same instance when you call get_widget() on the same Gtk::Builder, with the same widget name. The widgets are instantiated during Gtk::Builder::create_from_file(). get_widget() returns child widgets that are manage()ed (see the Memory Management chapter), so they will be deleted when their parent container is deleted. So, if you get only a child widget from Gtk::Builder, instead of a whole window, then you must either put it in a Container or delete it. Windows (such as Dialogs) cannot be managed because they have no parent container, so you must delete them at some point. Example This simple example shows how to load a Glade file at runtime and access the widgets with Gtk::Builder. Source Code File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <gtkmm.h> #include <iostream> Gtk::Dialog* pDialog = 0; static void on_button_clicked() { if(pDialog) pDialog->hide(); //hide() will cause main::run() to end. } int main (int argc, char **argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); //Load the GtkBuilder file and instantiate its widgets: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder> refBuilder = Gtk::Builder::create(); try { refBuilder->add_from_file("basic.glade"); } catch(const Glib::FileError& ex) { std::cerr << "FileError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; return 1; } catch(const Glib::MarkupError& ex) { std::cerr << "MarkupError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; return 1; } catch(const Gtk::BuilderError& ex) { std::cerr << "BuilderError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; return 1; } //Get the GtkBuilder-instantiated Dialog: refBuilder->get_widget("DialogBasic", pDialog); if(pDialog) { //Get the GtkBuilder-instantiated Button, and connect a signal handler: Gtk::Button* pButton = 0; refBuilder->get_widget("quit_button", pButton); if(pButton) { pButton->signal_clicked().connect( sigc::ptr_fun(on_button_clicked) ); } app->run(*pDialog); } delete pDialog; return 0; } Using derived widgets You can use Glade to layout your own custom widgets derived from gtkmm widget classes. This keeps your code organized and encapsulated. Of course you won't see the exact appearance and properties of your derived widget in Glade, but you can specify its location and child widgets and the properties of its gtkmm base class. Use Gtk::Builder::get_widget_derived() like so: DerivedDialog* pDialog = 0; builder->get_widget_derived("DialogBasic", pDialog); Your derived class must have a constructor that takes a pointer to the underlying C type, and the Gtk::Builder instance. All relevant classes of gtkmm typedef their underlying C type as BaseObjectType (Gtk::Dialog typedefs BaseObjectType as GtkDialog, for instance). You must call the base class's constructor in the initialization list, providing the C pointer. For instance, DerivedDialog::DerivedDialog(BaseObjectType* cobject, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder>& builder) : Gtk::Dialog(cobject) { } You could then encapsulate the manipulation of the child widgets in the constructor of the derived class, maybe using get_widget() or get_widget_derived() again. For instance, DerivedDialog::DerivedDialog(BaseObjectType* cobject, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder>& builder) : Gtk::Dialog(cobject), m_builder(builder), m_pButton(0) { //Get the Glade-instantiated Button, and connect a signal handler: m_builder->get_widget("quit_button", m_pButton); if(m_pButton) { m_pButton->signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &DerivedDialog::on_button_quit) ); } } Example This example shows how to load a Glade file at runtime and access the widgets via a derived class. Source Code File: deriveddialog.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_DERIVED_DIALOG_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_DERIVED_DIALOG_H #include <gtkmm.h> class DerivedDialog : public Gtk::Dialog { public: DerivedDialog(BaseObjectType* cobject, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder>& refGlade); virtual ~DerivedDialog(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder> m_refGlade; Gtk::Button* m_pButton; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_DERIVED_WINDOW_H File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "deriveddialog.h" #include <iostream> int main (int argc, char **argv) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); //Load the Glade file and instiate its widgets: Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder> refBuilder = Gtk::Builder::create(); try { refBuilder->add_from_file("derived.glade"); } catch(const Glib::FileError& ex) { std::cerr << "FileError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; return 1; } catch(const Glib::MarkupError& ex) { std::cerr << "MarkupError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; return 1; } catch(const Gtk::BuilderError& ex) { std::cerr << "BuilderError: " << ex.what() << std::endl; return 1; } //Get the GtkBuilder-instantiated dialog:: DerivedDialog* pDialog = 0; refBuilder->get_widget_derived("DialogDerived", pDialog); if(pDialog) { //Start: app->run(*pDialog); } delete pDialog; return 0; } File: deriveddialog.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "deriveddialog.h" DerivedDialog::DerivedDialog(BaseObjectType* cobject, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Builder>& refGlade) : Gtk::Dialog(cobject), m_refGlade(refGlade), m_pButton(0) { //Get the Glade-instantiated Button, and connect a signal handler: m_refGlade->get_widget("quit_button", m_pButton); if(m_pButton) { m_pButton->signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &DerivedDialog::on_button_quit) ); } } DerivedDialog::~DerivedDialog() { } void DerivedDialog::on_button_quit() { hide(); //hide() will cause main::run() to end. } Internationalization and Localization gtkmm applications can easily support multiple languages, including non-European languages such as Chinese and right-to-left languages such as Arabic. An appropriately-written and translated gtkmm application will use the appropriate language at runtime based on the user's environment. You might not anticipate the need to support additional languages, but you can never rule it out. And it's easier to develop the application properly in the first place rather than retrofitting later. The process of writing source code that allows for translation is called internationalization, often abbreviated to i18n. The Localization process, sometimes abbreviated as l10n, provides translated text for other languages, based on that source code. The main activity in the internationalization process is finding strings seen by users and marking them for translation. You do not need to do it all at once - if you set up the necessary project infrastructure correctly then your application will work normally regardless of how many strings you've covered. String literals should be typed in the source code in English, but surrounded by a macro. The gettext (or intltool) utility can then extract the marked strings for translation, and substitute the translated text at runtime. Preparing your project In the instructions below we will assume that you will not be using gettext directly, but intltool, which was written specifically for GNOME. intltool uses gettext(), which extracts strings from source code, but intltool can also combine strings from other files, for example from desktop menu details, and GUI resource files such as Glade files, into standard gettext .pot/.po files. We also assume that you are using autotools (e.g. automake and autoconf) to build your project, and that you are using ./autogen.sh from gnome-common, which, among other things, takes care of some intltool initialization. Create a sub-directory named po in your project's root directory. This directory will eventually contain all of your translations. Within it, create a file named LINGUAS and a file named POTFILES.in. It is common practice to also create a ChangeLog file in the po directory so that translators can keep track of translation changes. LINGUAS contains an alphabetically sorted list of codes identifying the languages for which your program is translated (comment lines starting with a # are ignored). Each language code listed in the LINGUAS file must have a corresponding .po file. So, if your program has German and Japanese translations, your LINGUAS file would look like this: # keep this file sorted alphabetically, one language code per line de ja (In addition, you'd have the files ja.po and de.po in your po directory which contain the German and Japanese translations, respectively.) POTFILES.in is a list of paths to all files which contain strings marked up for translation, starting from the project root directory. So for example, if your project sources were located in a subdirectory named src, and you had two files that contained strings that should be translated, your POTFILES.in file might look like this: src/main.cc src/other.cc If you are using gettext directly, you can only mark strings for translation if they are in source code file. However, if you use intltool, you can mark strings for translation in a variety of other file formats, including Glade UI files, xml, .desktop files and several more. So, if you have designed some of the application UI in Glade then also add your .glade files to the list in POTFILES.in. Now that there is a place to put your translations, you need to initialize intltool and gettext. Add the following code to your configure.ac, substituting 'programname' with the name of your program: IT_PROG_INTLTOOL([0.35.0]) GETTEXT_PACKAGE=programname AC_SUBST(GETTEXT_PACKAGE) AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED([GETTEXT_PACKAGE], ["$GETTEXT_PACKAGE"], [The domain to use with gettext]) AM_GLIB_GNU_GETTEXT PROGRAMNAME_LOCALEDIR=[${datadir}/locale] AC_SUBST(PROGRAMNAME_LOCALEDIR) This PROGRAMNAME_LOCALEDIR variable will be used later in the Makefile.am file, to define a macro that will be used when you initialize gettext in your source code. In the top-level Makefile.am: Add po to the SUBDIRS variable. Without this, your translations won't get built and installed when you build the program Define INTLTOOL_FILES as: INTLTOOL_FILES = intltool-extract.in \ intltool-merge.in \ intltool-update.in Add INTLTOOL_FILES to the EXTRA_DIST list of files. This ensures that when you do a make dist, these commands will be included in the source tarball. Update your DISTCLEANFILES: DISTCLEANFILES = ... intltool-extract \ intltool-merge \ intltool-update \ po/.intltool-merge-cache In your src/Makefile.am, update your AM_CPPFLAGS to add the following preprocessor macro definition: AM_CPPFLAGS = ... -DPROGRAMNAME_LOCALEDIR=\"${PROGRAMNAME_LOCALEDIR}\" This macro will be used when you initialize gettext in your source code. Marking strings for translation String literals should be typed in the source code in English, but they should be surrounded by a call to the gettext() function. These strings will be extracted for translation and the translations may be used at runtime instead of the original English strings. The GNU gettext package allows you to mark strings in source code, extract those strings for translation, and use the translated strings in your application. However, Glib defines gettext() support macros which are shorter wrappers in an easy-to-use form. To use these macros, include <glibmm/i18n.h>, and then, for example, substitute: display_message("Getting ready for i18n."); with: display_message(_("Getting ready for i18n.")); For reference, it is possible to generate a file which contains all strings which appear in your code, even if they are not marked for translation, together with file name and line number references. To generate such a file named my-strings, execute the following command, within the source code directory: xgettext -a -o my-strings --omit-header *.cc *.h Finally, to let you program use the translation for the current locale, add this code to the beginning of your main.cc file, to initialize gettext. bindtextdomain(GETTEXT_PACKAGE, PROGRAMNAME_LOCALEDIR); bind_textdomain_codeset(GETTEXT_PACKAGE, "UTF-8"); textdomain(GETTEXT_PACKAGE); How gettext works intltool / xgettext script extracts the strings and puts them in a mypackage.pot file. The translators of your application create their translations by first copying this .pot file to a localename.po file. A locale identifies a language and an encoding for that language, including date and numerical formats. Later, when the text in your source code has changed, the msmerge script is used to update the localename.po files from the regenerated .pot file. At install time, the .po files are converted to a binary format (with the extension .mo) and placed in a system-wide directory for locale files, for example /usr/share/locale/. When the application runs, the gettext library checks the system-wide directory to see if there is a .mo file for the user's locale environment (you can set the locale with, for instance, "export LANG=de_DE.UTF-8" from a bash console). Later, when the program reaches a gettext call, it looks for a translation of a particular string. If none is found, the original string is used. Testing and adding translations To convince yourself that you've done well, you may wish to add a translation for a new locale. In order to do that, go to the po subdirectory of your project and execute the following command: intltool-update --pot That will create a file named programname.pot. Now copy that file to languagecode.po, such as de.po or hu.po. Also add that language code to LINGUAS. The .po file contains a header and a list of English strings, with space for the translated strings to be entered. Make sure you set the encoding of the .po file (specified in the header, but also as content) to UTF-8. It's possible that certain strings will be marked as fuzzy in the .po file. These translations will not substitute the original string. To make them appear, simply remove the fuzzy tag. Viri More information about what lies behind the internationalization and localization process is presented and demonstrated in: Internationalizing GNOME applications Intltool README How to use Git for GNOME translators gettext manual gtkmm_hello example package gnomemm_hello example package Expecting UTF8 A properly internationalized application will not make assumptions about the number of bytes in a character. That means that you shouldn't use pointer arithmetic to step through the characters in a string, and it means you shouldn't use std::string or standard C functions such as strlen() because they make the same assumption. However, you probably already avoid bare char* arrays and pointer arithmetic by using std::string, so you just need to start using Glib::ustring instead. See the Basics chapter about Glib::ustring. Glib::ustring and std::iostreams Unfortunately, the integration with the standard iostreams is not completely foolproof. gtkmm converts Glib::ustrings to a locale-specific encoding (which usually is not UTF-8) if you output them to an ostream with operator<<. Likewise, retrieving Glib::ustrings from istream with operator>> causes a conversion in the opposite direction. But this scheme breaks down if you go through a std::string, e.g. by inputting text from a stream to a std::string and then implicitly converting it to a Glib::ustring. If the string contained non-ASCII characters and the current locale is not UTF-8 encoded, the result is a corrupted Glib::ustring. You can work around this with a manual conversion. For instance, to retrieve the std::string from a ostringstream: std::ostringstream output; output.imbue(std::locale("")); // use the user's locale for this stream output << percentage << " % done"; label->set_text(Glib::locale_to_utf8(output.str())); Pitfalls There are a few common mistakes that you would discover eventually yourself. But this section might help you to avoid them. Same strings, different semantics Sometimes two english strings are identical but have different meanings in different contexts, so they would probably not be identical when translated. Since the English strings are used as look-up keys, this causes problems. In these cases, you should add extra characters to the strings. For instance, use "jumps[noun]" and "jumps[verb]" instead of just "jumps" and strip them again outside the gettext call. If you add extra characters you should also add a comment for the translators before the gettext call. Such comments will be shown in the .po files. For instance: // note to translators: don't translate the "[noun]" part - it is // just here to distinguish the string from another "jumps" string text = strip(gettext("jumps[noun]"), "[noun]"); Composition of strings C programmers use sprintf() to compose and concatenate strings. C++ favours streams, but unfortunately, this approach makes translation difficult, because each fragment of text is translated separately, without allowing the translators to rearrange them according to the grammar of the language. For instance, this code would be problematic: std::cout << _("Current amount: ") << amount << _(" Future: ") << future << std::endl; label.set_text(_("Really delete ") + filename + _(" now?")); So you should either avoid this situation or use Glib::ustring::compose() which supports syntax such as: std::cout << Glib::ustring::compose( _("Current amount: %1 Future: %2"), amount, future) << std::endl; label.set_text(Glib::ustring::compose(_("Really delete %1 now?"), filename)); Assuming the displayed size of strings You never know how much space a string will take on screen when translated. It might very possibly be twice the size of the original English string. Luckily, most gtkmm widgets will expand at runtime to the required size. Unusual words You should avoid cryptic abbreviations, slang, or jargon. They are usually difficult to translate, and are often difficult for even native speakers to understand. For instance, prefer "application" to "app" Using non-ASCII characters in strings Currently, gettext does not support non-ASCII characters (i.e. any characters with a code above 127) in source code. For instance, you cannot use the copyright sign (©). To work around this, you could write a comment in the source code just before the string, telling the translators to use the special character if it is available in their languages. For english, you could then make an American English en_US.po translation which used that special character. Getting help with translations If your program is free software, there is a whole GNOME subproject devoted to helping you make translations, the GNOME Translation Project. The way it works is that you upload your source code to a git repository where translators can access it, then contact the gnome-i18n mailing list and ask to have your program added to the list of modules to translate. Then you make sure you update the file POTFILES.in in the po/ subdirectory (intltool-update -M can help with this) so that the translators always access updated myprogram.pot files, and simply freeze the strings at least a couple of days before you make a new release, announcing it on gnome-i18n. Depending on the number of strings your program contains and how popular it is, the translations will then start to tick in as languagename.po files. Note that most language teams only consist of 1-3 persons, so if your program contains a lot of strings, it might last a while before anyone has the time to look at it. Also, most translators do not want to waste their time (translating is a very time-consuming task) so if they do not assess your project as being really serious (in the sense that it is polished and being maintained) they may decide to spend their time on some other project. Custom Widgets gtkmm makes it very easy to derive new widgets by inheriting from an existing widget class, either by deriving from a container and adding child widgets, or by deriving from a single-item widget, and changing its behaviour. But you might occasionally find that no suitable starting point already exists. In this case, you can implement a widget from scratch. Custom Containers When deriving from Gtk::Container, you should override the following virtual methods: get_request_mode_vfunc(): Return what Gtk::SizeRequestMode is preferred by the container. get_preferred_width_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural width of the container. get_preferred_height_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural height of the container. get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural width of the container, if it would be given the specified height. get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural height of the container, if it would be given the specified width. on_size_allocate(): Position the child widgets, given the height and width that the container has actually been given. forall_vfunc(): Call the same callback for each of the children. on_add(): Add a child widget to the container. on_remove(): Remove a child widget from the container. child_type_vfunc(): Return what type of child can be added. The get_request_mode_vfunc(), get_preferred_width_vfunc(), get_preferred_height_vfunc(), get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(), get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(), and on_size_allocate() virtual methods control the layout of the child widgets. For instance, if your container has 2 child widgets, with one below the other, your get_request_mode_vfunc() might request height-for-width layout. Then your get_preferred_width_vfunc() might report the maximum of the widths of the child widgets, and get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc() might report the sum of their heights. If you want padding between the child widgets then you would add that to the width and height too. Your widget's container will use this result to ensure that your widget gets enough space, and not less. By examining each widget's parent, and its parent, this logic will eventually decide the size of the top-level window. You are not guaranteed to get the Gtk::SizeRequestMode that you request. Therefore all four of the get_preferred_xxx_vfunc() methods must return sensible values. on_size_allocate() receives the actual height and width that the parent container has decided to give to your widget. This might be more than the minimum, or even more than the natural size, for instance if the top-level window has been expanded. You might choose to ignore the extra space and leave a blank area, or you might choose to expand your child widgets to fill the space, or you might choose to expand the padding between your widgets. It's your container, so you decide. Don't forget to call set_allocation() inside your on_size_allocate() implementation to actually use the allocated space that has been offered by the parent container. Unless your container is a top-level window that derives from Gtk::Window, you should probably also call Gtk::Widget::set_has_window(false) in your constructor. This means that your container does not create its own Gdk::Window, but uses its parent's window. (Note the difference between Gtk::Window and Gdk::Window.) If your container does need its own Gdk::Window, and does not derive from Gtk::Window, you must also override the on_realize() method as described in the Custom Widgets section. And unless your container draws directly onto the underlying Gdk::Window, you should probably call set_redraw_on_allocate(false) to improve performance. By overriding forall_vfunc() you can allow applications to operate on all of the container's child widgets. For instance, show_all_children() uses this to find all the child widgets and show them. Although your container might have its own method to set the child widgets, you should still provide an implementation for the virtual on_add() and on_remove() methods from the base class, so that the add() and remove() methods will do something appropriate if they are called. Your implementation of the child_type_vfunc() method should report the type of widget that may be added to your container, if it is not yet full. This is usually Gtk::Widget::get_type() to indicate that the container may contain any class derived from Gtk::Widget. If the container may not contain any more widgets, then this method should return G_TYPE_NONE. Example This example implements a container with two child widgets, one above the other. Of course, in this case it would be far simpler just to use a vertical Gtk::Box.
Custom Container
Source Code File: mycontainer.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_CUSTOM_CONTAINER_MYCONTAINER_H #define GTKMM_CUSTOM_CONTAINER_MYCONTAINER_H #include <gtkmm/container.h> class MyContainer : public Gtk::Container { public: MyContainer(); virtual ~MyContainer(); void set_child_widgets(Gtk::Widget& child_one, Gtk::Widget& child_two); protected: //Overrides: virtual Gtk::SizeRequestMode get_request_mode_vfunc() const; virtual void get_preferred_width_vfunc(int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const; virtual void get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(int width, int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const; virtual void get_preferred_height_vfunc(int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const; virtual void get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(int height, int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const; virtual void on_size_allocate(Gtk::Allocation& allocation); virtual void forall_vfunc(gboolean include_internals, GtkCallback callback, gpointer callback_data); virtual void on_add(Gtk::Widget* child); virtual void on_remove(Gtk::Widget* child); virtual GType child_type_vfunc() const; Gtk::Widget* m_child_one; Gtk::Widget* m_child_two; }; #endif //GTKMM_CUSTOM_CONTAINER_MYCONTAINER_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include "mycontainer.h" class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; MyContainer m_MyContainer; Gtk::Button m_Button_One; Gtk::Label m_Label_Two; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_One("Child One"), m_Label_Two("Child 2"), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("Custom Container example"); set_border_width(6); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); //Add the child widgets to the custom container: m_MyContainer.set_child_widgets(m_Button_One, m_Label_Two); m_Label_Two.set_alignment(1.0, 0.5); m_VBox.pack_start(m_MyContainer, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(6); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } File: mycontainer.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include <iostream> #include <algorithm> // std::max #include "mycontainer.h" MyContainer::MyContainer() : m_child_one(0), m_child_two(0) { set_has_window(false); set_redraw_on_allocate(false); } MyContainer::~MyContainer() { /* // These calls to Gtk::Widget::unparent() are necessary if MyContainer is // deleted before its children. But if you use a version of gtkmm where bug // https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=605728 // has not been fixed (gtkmm 3.7.10 or earlier) and the children are deleted // before the container, these calls can make the program crash. // That's because on_remove() is not called, when the children are deleted. if (m_child_one) m_child_one->unparent(); if (m_child_two) m_child_two->unparent(); */ } void MyContainer::set_child_widgets(Gtk::Widget& child_one, Gtk::Widget& child_two) { m_child_one = &child_one; m_child_two = &child_two; m_child_one->set_parent(*this); m_child_two->set_parent(*this); } //This example container is a simplified VBox with at most two children. Gtk::SizeRequestMode MyContainer::get_request_mode_vfunc() const { return Gtk::SIZE_REQUEST_HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH; } //Discover the total amount of minimum space and natural space needed by //this container and its children. void MyContainer::get_preferred_width_vfunc(int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const { int child_minimum_width[2] = {0, 0}; int child_natural_width[2] = {0, 0}; if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) m_child_one->get_preferred_width(child_minimum_width[0], child_natural_width[0]); if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) m_child_two->get_preferred_width(child_minimum_width[1], child_natural_width[1]); //Request a width equal to the width of the widest visible child. minimum_width = std::max(child_minimum_width[0], child_minimum_width[1]); natural_width = std::max(child_natural_width[0], child_natural_width[1]); } void MyContainer::get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(int width, int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const { int child_minimum_height[2] = {0, 0}; int child_natural_height[2] = {0, 0}; int nvis_children = 0; if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) { ++nvis_children; m_child_one->get_preferred_height_for_width(width, child_minimum_height[0], child_natural_height[0]); } if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) { ++nvis_children; m_child_two->get_preferred_height_for_width(width, child_minimum_height[1], child_natural_height[1]); } //The allocated height will be divided equally among the visible children. //Request a height equal to the number of visible children times the height //of the highest child. minimum_height = nvis_children * std::max(child_minimum_height[0], child_minimum_height[1]); natural_height = nvis_children * std::max(child_natural_height[0], child_natural_height[1]); } void MyContainer::get_preferred_height_vfunc(int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const { int child_minimum_height[2] = {0, 0}; int child_natural_height[2] = {0, 0}; int nvis_children = 0; if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) { ++nvis_children; m_child_one->get_preferred_height(child_minimum_height[0], child_natural_height[0]); } if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) { ++nvis_children; m_child_two->get_preferred_height(child_minimum_height[1], child_natural_height[1]); } //The allocated height will be divided equally among the visible children. //Request a height equal to the number of visible children times the height //of the highest child. minimum_height = nvis_children * std::max(child_minimum_height[0], child_minimum_height[1]); natural_height = nvis_children * std::max(child_natural_height[0], child_natural_height[1]); } void MyContainer::get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(int height, int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const { int child_minimum_width[2] = {0, 0}; int child_natural_width[2] = {0, 0}; int nvis_children = 0; //Get number of visible children. if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) ++nvis_children; if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) ++nvis_children; if(nvis_children > 0) { //Divide the height equally among the visible children. const int height_per_child = height / nvis_children; if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) m_child_one->get_preferred_width_for_height(height_per_child, child_minimum_width[0], child_natural_width[0]); if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) m_child_two->get_preferred_width_for_height(height_per_child, child_minimum_width[1], child_natural_width[1]); } //Request a width equal to the width of the widest child. minimum_width = std::max(child_minimum_width[0], child_minimum_width[1]); natural_width = std::max(child_natural_width[0], child_natural_width[1]); } void MyContainer::on_size_allocate(Gtk::Allocation& allocation) { //Do something with the space that we have actually been given: //(We will not be given heights or widths less than we have requested, though //we might get more.) //Use the offered allocation for this container: set_allocation(allocation); //Get number of visible children. int nvis_children = 0; if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) ++nvis_children; if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) ++nvis_children; if(nvis_children <= 0) return; //Assign space to the children: Gtk::Allocation child_allocation_one; Gtk::Allocation child_allocation_two; //Place the first child at the top-left: child_allocation_one.set_x( allocation.get_x() ); child_allocation_one.set_y( allocation.get_y() ); //Make it take up the full width available: child_allocation_one.set_width( allocation.get_width() ); if(m_child_one && m_child_one->get_visible()) { //Divide the height equally among the visible children. child_allocation_one.set_height( allocation.get_height() / nvis_children); m_child_one->size_allocate(child_allocation_one); } else child_allocation_one.set_height(0); //Place the second child below the first child: child_allocation_two.set_x( allocation.get_x() ); child_allocation_two.set_y( allocation.get_y() + child_allocation_one.get_height()); //Make it take up the full width available: child_allocation_two.set_width( allocation.get_width() ); //Make it take up the remaining height: child_allocation_two.set_height( allocation.get_height() - child_allocation_one.get_height()); if(m_child_two && m_child_two->get_visible()) m_child_two->size_allocate(child_allocation_two); } void MyContainer::forall_vfunc(gboolean, GtkCallback callback, gpointer callback_data) { if(m_child_one) callback(m_child_one->gobj(), callback_data); if(m_child_two) callback(m_child_two->gobj(), callback_data); } void MyContainer::on_add(Gtk::Widget* child) { if(!m_child_one) { m_child_one = child; m_child_one->set_parent(*this); } else if(!m_child_two) { m_child_two = child; m_child_two->set_parent(*this); } } void MyContainer::on_remove(Gtk::Widget* child) { if(child) { const bool visible = child->get_visible(); bool found = false; if(child == m_child_one) { m_child_one = 0; found = true; } else if(child == m_child_two) { m_child_two = 0; found = true; } if(found) { child->unparent(); if(visible) queue_resize(); } } } GType MyContainer::child_type_vfunc() const { //If there is still space for one widget, then report the type of widget that //may be added. if(!m_child_one || !m_child_two) return Gtk::Widget::get_type(); else { //No more widgets may be added. return G_TYPE_NONE; } } Custom Widgets By deriving directly from Gtk::Widget you can do all the drawing for your widget directly, instead of just arranging child widgets. For instance, a Gtk::Label draws the text of the label, but does not do this by using other widgets. When deriving from Gtk::Widget, you should override the following virtual methods. The methods marked (optional) need not be overridden in all custom widgets. The base class's methods may be appropriate. get_request_mode_vfunc(): (optional) Return what Gtk::SizeRequestMode is preferred by the widget. get_preferred_width_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural width of the widget. get_preferred_height_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural height of the widget. get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural width of the widget, if it would be given the specified height. get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(): Calculate the minimum and natural height of the widget, if it would be given the specified width. on_size_allocate(): Position the widget, given the height and width that it has actually been given. on_realize(): Associate a Gdk::Window with the widget. on_unrealize(): (optional) Break the association with the Gdk::Window. on_map(): (optional) on_unmap(): (optional) on_draw(): Draw on the supplied Cairo::Context. The first 6 methods in the previous table are also overridden in custom containers. They are briefly described in the Custom Containers section. Most custom widgets need their own Gdk::Window to draw on. Then you can call Gtk::Widget::set_has_window(true) in your constructor. (This is the default value.) If you do not call set_has_window(false), you must override on_realize() and call Gtk::Widget::set_realized() and Gtk::Widget::set_window() from there. Example This example implements a widget which draws a Penrose triangle.
Custom Widget
Source Code File: mywidget.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_CUSTOM_WIDGET_MYWIDGET_H #define GTKMM_CUSTOM_WIDGET_MYWIDGET_H #include <gtkmm/widget.h> #include <gtkmm/cssprovider.h> class MyWidget : public Gtk::Widget { public: MyWidget(); virtual ~MyWidget(); protected: //Overrides: virtual Gtk::SizeRequestMode get_request_mode_vfunc() const; virtual void get_preferred_width_vfunc(int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const; virtual void get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(int width, int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const; virtual void get_preferred_height_vfunc(int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const; virtual void get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(int height, int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const; virtual void on_size_allocate(Gtk::Allocation& allocation); virtual void on_map(); virtual void on_unmap(); virtual void on_realize(); virtual void on_unrealize(); virtual bool on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr); Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> m_refGdkWindow; Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::CssProvider> m_refStyleProvider; int m_scale; }; #endif //GTKMM_CUSTOM_WIDGET_MYWIDGET_H File: examplewindow.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H #include <gtkmm.h> #include "mywidget.h" class ExampleWindow : public Gtk::Window { public: ExampleWindow(); virtual ~ExampleWindow(); protected: //Signal handlers: void on_button_quit(); //Child widgets: Gtk::Box m_VBox; MyWidget m_MyWidget; Gtk::ButtonBox m_ButtonBox; Gtk::Button m_Button_Quit; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLEWINDOW_H File: mywidget.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "mywidget.h" #include <gdkmm/general.h> // for cairo helper functions #include <iostream> //#include <gtk/gtkwidget.h> //For GTK_IS_WIDGET() #include <cstring> MyWidget::MyWidget() : //The GType name will actually be gtkmm__CustomObject_mywidget Glib::ObjectBase("mywidget"), Gtk::Widget(), m_scale(1000) { set_has_window(true); //This shows the GType name, which must be used in the CSS file. std::cout << "GType name: " << G_OBJECT_TYPE_NAME(gobj()) << std::endl; //This shows that the GType still derives from GtkWidget: //std::cout << "Gtype is a GtkWidget?:" << GTK_IS_WIDGET(gobj()) << std::endl; //Install a style so that an aspect of this widget may be themed via a CSS //style sheet file: gtk_widget_class_install_style_property(GTK_WIDGET_CLASS( G_OBJECT_GET_CLASS(gobj())), g_param_spec_int("example_scale", "Scale of Example Drawing", "The scale to use when drawing. This is just a silly example.", G_MININT, G_MAXINT, 500, G_PARAM_READABLE) ); m_refStyleProvider = Gtk::CssProvider::create(); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::StyleContext> refStyleContext = get_style_context(); refStyleContext->add_provider(m_refStyleProvider, GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION); try { m_refStyleProvider->load_from_path("custom_gtk.css"); } catch(const Glib::Error& ex) { std::cerr << "Gtk::CssProvider::load_from_path() failed: " << ex.what() << std::endl; } } MyWidget::~MyWidget() { } Gtk::SizeRequestMode MyWidget::get_request_mode_vfunc() const { //Accept the default value supplied by the base class. return Gtk::Widget::get_request_mode_vfunc(); } //Discover the total amount of minimum space and natural space needed by //this widget. //Let's make this simple example widget always need minimum 60 by 50 and //natural 100 by 70. void MyWidget::get_preferred_width_vfunc(int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const { minimum_width = 60; natural_width = 100; } void MyWidget::get_preferred_height_for_width_vfunc(int /* width */, int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const { minimum_height = 50; natural_height = 70; } void MyWidget::get_preferred_height_vfunc(int& minimum_height, int& natural_height) const { minimum_height = 50; natural_height = 70; } void MyWidget::get_preferred_width_for_height_vfunc(int /* height */, int& minimum_width, int& natural_width) const { minimum_width = 60; natural_width = 100; } void MyWidget::on_size_allocate(Gtk::Allocation& allocation) { //Do something with the space that we have actually been given: //(We will not be given heights or widths less than we have requested, though //we might get more) //Use the offered allocation for this container: set_allocation(allocation); if(m_refGdkWindow) { m_refGdkWindow->move_resize( allocation.get_x(), allocation.get_y(), allocation.get_width(), allocation.get_height() ); } } void MyWidget::on_map() { //Call base class: Gtk::Widget::on_map(); } void MyWidget::on_unmap() { //Call base class: Gtk::Widget::on_unmap(); } void MyWidget::on_realize() { //Do not call base class Gtk::Widget::on_realize(). //It's intended only for widgets that set_has_window(false). set_realized(); //Get the themed style from the CSS file: get_style_property("example_scale", m_scale); std::cout << "m_scale (example_scale from the theme/css-file) is: " << m_scale << std::endl; if(!m_refGdkWindow) { //Create the GdkWindow: GdkWindowAttr attributes; memset(&attributes, 0, sizeof(attributes)); Gtk::Allocation allocation = get_allocation(); //Set initial position and size of the Gdk::Window: attributes.x = allocation.get_x(); attributes.y = allocation.get_y(); attributes.width = allocation.get_width(); attributes.height = allocation.get_height(); attributes.event_mask = get_events () | Gdk::EXPOSURE_MASK; attributes.window_type = GDK_WINDOW_CHILD; attributes.wclass = GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT; m_refGdkWindow = Gdk::Window::create(get_parent_window(), &attributes, GDK_WA_X | GDK_WA_Y); set_window(m_refGdkWindow); //set colors override_background_color(Gdk::RGBA("red")); override_color(Gdk::RGBA("blue")); //make the widget receive expose events m_refGdkWindow->set_user_data(gobj()); } } void MyWidget::on_unrealize() { m_refGdkWindow.reset(); //Call base class: Gtk::Widget::on_unrealize(); } bool MyWidget::on_draw(const Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context>& cr) { const double scale_x = (double)get_allocation().get_width() / m_scale; const double scale_y = (double)get_allocation().get_height() / m_scale; // paint the background Gdk::Cairo::set_source_rgba(cr, get_style_context()->get_background_color()); cr->paint(); // draw the foreground Gdk::Cairo::set_source_rgba(cr, get_style_context()->get_color()); cr->move_to(155.*scale_x, 165.*scale_y); cr->line_to(155.*scale_x, 838.*scale_y); cr->line_to(265.*scale_x, 900.*scale_y); cr->line_to(849.*scale_x, 564.*scale_y); cr->line_to(849.*scale_x, 438.*scale_y); cr->line_to(265.*scale_x, 100.*scale_y); cr->line_to(155.*scale_x, 165.*scale_y); cr->move_to(265.*scale_x, 100.*scale_y); cr->line_to(265.*scale_x, 652.*scale_y); cr->line_to(526.*scale_x, 502.*scale_y); cr->move_to(369.*scale_x, 411.*scale_y); cr->line_to(633.*scale_x, 564.*scale_y); cr->move_to(369.*scale_x, 286.*scale_y); cr->line_to(369.*scale_x, 592.*scale_y); cr->move_to(369.*scale_x, 286.*scale_y); cr->line_to(849.*scale_x, 564.*scale_y); cr->move_to(633.*scale_x, 564.*scale_y); cr->line_to(155.*scale_x, 838.*scale_y); cr->stroke(); return true; } File: examplewindow.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" ExampleWindow::ExampleWindow() : m_VBox(Gtk::ORIENTATION_VERTICAL), m_Button_Quit("Quit") { set_title("Custom Widget example"); set_border_width(6); set_default_size(400, 200); add(m_VBox); m_VBox.pack_start(m_MyWidget, Gtk::PACK_EXPAND_WIDGET); m_MyWidget.show(); m_VBox.pack_start(m_ButtonBox, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.pack_start(m_Button_Quit, Gtk::PACK_SHRINK); m_ButtonBox.set_border_width(6); m_ButtonBox.set_layout(Gtk::BUTTONBOX_END); m_Button_Quit.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &ExampleWindow::on_button_quit) ); show_all_children(); } ExampleWindow::~ExampleWindow() { } void ExampleWindow::on_button_quit() { hide(); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "examplewindow.h" #include <gtkmm/application.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.example"); ExampleWindow window; //Shows the window and returns when it is closed. return app->run(window); } Multi-threaded programs The constraints glibmm provides the normal set of thread launching functions, mutexes, condition variables and scoped locking classes required for writing multi-threaded programs using C++. However, care is required when writing programs based on gtkmm using multiple threads of execution, arising from the fact that libsigc++, and in particular sigc::trackable, are not thread-safe. That's because none of the complex interactions that occur behind the scenes when using libsigc++ are protected by a mutex or other means of synchronization. These interactions arise from the fact that, amongst other things, a class inheriting from sigc::trackable will, via that inheritance, have a std::list object keeping track of slots created by calls to sigc::mem_fun() representing any of its non-static methods (more particularly it keeps a list of callbacks which will null the connected slots on its destruction). Each sigc::slot object also keeps, via sigc::slot_rep, its own sigc::trackable object to track any sigc::connection objects which it needs to inform about its demise, and also has a function to deregister itself from any sigc::trackable on disconnection or destruction. sigc::signal objects also keep lists of slots, which will be updated by a call to their connect() method or calls to any sigc::connection object relating to such a connection. The rules This requires a number of rules to be observed when writing multi-threaded programs using gtkmm. These are set out below, but one point to note is that extra care is required when deriving classes from sigc::trackable, because the effects are unintuitive (see particularly points 4 and 5 below). Use Glib::Dispatcher to invoke gtkmm functions from worker threads (this is dealt with in more detail in the next section). A sigc::signal object should be regarded as owned by the thread which created it. Only that thread should connect a sigc::slot object to the signal object, and only that thread should emit() or call operator()() on the signal, or null any connected sigc::slot object. It follows (amongst other things) that any signal object provided by a gtkmm widget should only be operated on in the main GUI thread and any object deriving from sigc::trackable having its non-static methods referenced by slots connected to the signal object should only be destroyed in that thread. Any sigc::connection object should be regarded as owned by the thread in which the method returning the sigc::connection object was called. Only that thread should call sigc::connection methods on the object. A sigc::slot object created by a call to sigc::mem_fun() which references a method of a class deriving from sigc::trackable should never be copied to another thread, nor destroyed by a different thread than the one which created it. (One consequence of this is that Glib::Threads::Thread::create() should not be called with a slot argument created by a call to sigc::mem_fun() which represents a method of such a class. It is however safe to pass Glib::Threads::Thread::create() a function object representing such a method by using, say, boost::bind() or, in C++11, std::bind() or a C++11 lambda expression.) If a particular class object derives from sigc::trackable, only one thread should create sigc::slot objects representing any of the class's non-static methods by calling sigc::mem_fun(). The first thread to create such a slot should be regarded as owning the relevant object for the purpose of creating further slots referencing any of its non-static methods using that function, or nulling those slots by disconnecting them or destroying the trackable object. Although glib is itself thread-safe, any glibmm wrappers which use libsigc++ will not be. So for example, only the thread in which a main loop runs should call Glib::SignalIdle::connect(), Glib::SignalIO::connect(), Glib::SignalTimeout::connect(), Glib::SignalTimeout::connect_seconds for that main loop, or manipulate any sigc::connection object returned by them. The connect*_once() variants, Glib::SignalIdle::connect_once(), Glib::SignalTimeout::connect_once(), Glib::SignalTimeout::connect_seconds_once(), are thread-safe for any case where the slot is not created by a call to sigc::mem_fun() which represents a method of a class deriving from sigc::trackable. This is similar to Glib::Threads::Thread::create() as mentioned in point 4. Using Glib::Dispatcher The slots connected to sigc::signal objects execute in the thread which calls emit() or operator()() on the signal. Glib::Dispatcher does not behave this way: instead its connected slots execute in the thread in which the Glib::Dispatcher object was constructed (which must have a glib main loop). If a Glib::Dispatcher object is constructed in the main GUI thread (which will therefore be the receiver thread), any worker thread can emit on it and have the connected slots safely execute gtkmm functions. Some thread safety rules on the use of Glib::Dispatcher still apply. As mentioned, a Glib::Dispatcher object must be constructed in the receiver thread (the thread in whose main loop it will execute its connected slots). By default this is the main program thread, although there is a Glib::Dispatcher constructor which can take the Glib::MainContext object of any thread which has a main loop. Only the receiver thread should call connect() on the Glib::Dispatcher object, or manipulate any related sigc::connection object, unless additional synchronization is employed. However, any worker thread can safely emit on the Glib::Dispatcher object without any locking once the receiver thread has connected the slots, provided that it is constructed before the worker thread is started (if it is constructed after the thread has started, additional synchronization will normally be required to ensure visibility). Aside from the fact that connected slots always execute in the receiver thread, Glib::Dispatcher objects are similar to sigc::signal<void> objects. They therefore cannot pass unbound arguments nor return a value. The best way to pass unbound arguments is with a thread-safe (asynchronous) queue. At the time of writing glibmm does not have one, although most people writing multi-threaded code will have one available to them (they are relatively easy to write although there are subtleties in combining thread safety with strong exception safety). A Glib::Dispatcher object can be emitted on by the receiver thread as well as by a worker thread, although this should be done within reasonable bounds. On unix-like systems Glib::Dispatcher objects share a single common pipe, which could in theory at least fill up on a very heavily loaded system running a program with a very large number of Dispatcher objects in use. Were the pipe to fill up before the receiver thread's main loop has had an opportunity to read from it to empty it, and the receiver thread attempt to emit and so write to it when it is in that condition, the receiver thread would block on the write, so deadlocking. Where the receiver thread is to emit, a normal sigc::signal<void> object could of course be used instead. Recommended Techniques This section is simply a gathering of wisdom, general style guidelines and hints for creating gtkmm applications. Use GNU autoconf and automake! They are your friends :) Automake examines C files, determines how they depend on each other, and generates a Makefile so the files can be compiled in the correct order. Autoconf permits automatic configuration of software installation, handling a large number of system quirks to increase portability. Subclass Widgets to better organize your code. You should probably subclass your main Window at least. Then you can make your child Widgets and signal handlers members of that class. Create your own signals instead of passing pointers around. Objects can communicate with each other via signals and signal handlers. This is much simpler than objects holding pointers to each other and calling each other's methods. gtkmm's classes uses special versions of sigc::signal, but you should use normal sigc::signals, as described in the libsigc++ documentation. Application Lifetime Most applications will have only one Window, or only one main window. These applications can use the Gtk::Application::run(Gtk::Window&) overload. It shows the window and returns when the window has been hidden. This might happen when the user closes the window, or when your code decides to hide() the window. You can prevent the user from closing the window (for instance, if there are unsaved changes) by overriding Gtk::Window::on_delete_event(). Most of our examples use this technique. Using a <application>gtkmm</application> widget Our examples all tend to have the same structure. They follow these steps for using a Widget: Declare a variable of the type of Widget you wish to use, generally as member variable of a derived container class. You could also declare a pointer to the widget type, and then create it with new in your code. Even when using the widget via a pointer, it's still probably best to make that pointer a member variable of a container class so that you can access it later. Set the attributes of the widget. If the widget has no default constructor, then you will need to initialize the widget in the initalizer list of your container class's constructor. Connect any signals you wish to use to the appropriate handlers. Pack the widget into a container using the appropriate call, e.g. Gtk::Container::add() or pack_start(). Call show() to display the widget. Gtk::Widget::show() lets gtkmm know that we have finished setting the attributes of the widget, and that it is ready to be displayed. You can use Gtk::Widget::hide() to make it disappear again. The order in which you show the widgets is not important, but we do suggest that you show the top-level window last; this way, the whole window will appear with its contents already drawn. Otherwise, the user will first see a blank window, into which the widgets will be gradually drawn. Contributing This document, like so much other great software out there, was created for free by volunteers. If you are at all knowledgeable about any aspect of gtkmm that does not already have documentation, please consider contributing to this document. Ideally, we would like you to provide a patch to the docs/tutorial/C/gtkmm-tutorial-in.xml file. This file is currently in the gtkmm-documentation module in GNOME git. If you do decide to contribute, please post your contribution to the gtkmm mailing list at <gtkmm-list@gnome.org>. Also, be aware that the entirety of this document is free, and any addition you provide must also be free. That is, people must be able to use any portion of your examples in their programs, and copies of this document (including your contribution) may be distributed freely. The RefPtr smartpointer Glib::RefPtr is a smartpointer. Specifically, it is a reference-counting smartpointer. You might be familiar with std::auto_ptr<>, which is also a smartpointer, but Glib::RefPtr<> is much simpler, and more useful. We expect a future version of the C++ Standard Library to contain a reference-counting shared smartpointer, and a future version of gtkmm might possibly use that instead. Reference A smartpointer acts much like a normal pointer. Here are a few examples. Copying You can copy RefPtrs, just like normal pointers. But unlike normal pointers, you don't need to worry about deleting the underlying instance. Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> refPixbuf = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file(filename); Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> refPixbuf2 = refPixbuf; Of course this means that you can store RefPtrs in standard containers, such as std::vector or std::list. std::list< Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> > listPixbufs; Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> refPixbuf = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file(filename); listPixbufs.push_back(refPixbuf); Dereferencing You can dereference a smartpointer with the -> operator, to call the methods of the underlying instance, just like a normal pointer. Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> refPixbuf = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file(filename); int width = refPixbuf->get_width(); But unlike most smartpointers, you can't use the * operator to access the underlying instance. Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> refPixbuf = Gdk::Pixbuf::create_from_file(filename); Gdk::Pixbuf& underlying = *refPixbuf; //Syntax error - will not compile. Casting You can cast RefPtrs to base types, just like normal pointers. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeStore> refStore = Gtk::TreeStore::create(columns); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModel> refModel = refStore; This means that any method which takes a const Glib::RefPtr<BaseType> argument can also take a const Glib::RefPtr<DerivedType>. The cast is implicit, just as it would be for a normal pointer. You can also cast to a derived type, but the syntax is a little different than with a normal pointer. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeStore> refStore = Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeStore>::cast_dynamic(refModel); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeStore> refStore2 = Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeStore>::cast_static(refModel); Checking for null Just like normal pointers, you can check whether a RefPtr points to anything. Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModel> refModel = m_TreeView.get_model(); if(refModel) { int cols_count = refModel->get_n_columns(); ... } But unlike normal pointers, RefPtrs are automatically initialized to null so you don't need to remember to do that yourself. Constness The use of the const keyword in C++ is not always clear. You might not realise that const Something* declares a pointer to a const Something. The pointer can be changed, but not the Something that it points to. Therefore, the RefPtr equivalent of Something* for a method parameter is const Glib::RefPtr<Something>&, and the equivalent of const Something* is const Glib::RefPtr<const Something>&. The const ... & around both is just for efficiency, like using const std::string& instead of std::string for a method parameter to avoid unnecessary copying. Signals Connecting signal handlers gtkmm widget classes have signal accessor methods, such as Gtk::Button::signal_clicked(), which allow you to connect your signal handler. Thanks to the flexibility of libsigc++, the callback library used by gtkmm, the signal handler can be almost any kind of function, but you will probably want to use a class method. Among GTK+ C coders, these signal handlers are often named callbacks. Here's an example of a signal handler being connected to a signal: #include <gtkmm/button.h> void on_button_clicked() { std::cout << "Hello World" << std::endl; } main() { Gtk::Button button("Hello World"); button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(&on_button_clicked)); } There's rather a lot to think about in this (non-functional) code. First let's identify the parties involved: The signal handler is on_button_clicked(). We're hooking it up to the Gtk::Button object called button. When the Button emits its clicked signal, on_button_clicked() will be called. Now let's look at the connection again: ... button.signal_clicked().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(&on_button_clicked)); ... Note that we don't pass a pointer to on_button_clicked() directly to the signal's connect() method. Instead, we call sigc::ptr_fun(), and pass the result to connect(). sigc::ptr_fun() generates a sigc::slot. A slot is an object which looks and feels like a function, but is actually an object. These are also known as function objects, or functors. sigc::ptr_fun() generates a slot for a standalone function or static method. sigc::mem_fun() generates a slot for a member method of a particular instance. Here's a slightly larger example of slots in action: void on_button_clicked(); class some_class { void on_button_clicked(); }; some_class some_object; main() { Gtk::Button button; button.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::ptr_fun(&on_button_clicked) ); button.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::mem_fun(some_object, &some_class::on_button_clicked) ); } The first call to connect() is just like the one we saw last time; nothing new here. The next is more interesting. sigc::mem_fun() is called with two arguments. The first argument is some_object, which is the object that our new slot will be pointing at. The second argument is a pointer to one of its methods. This particular version of sigc::mem_fun() creates a slot which will, when "called", call the pointed-to method of the specified object, in this case some_object.on_button_clicked(). Another thing to note about this example is that we made the call to connect() twice for the same signal object. This is perfectly fine - when the button is clicked, both signal handlers will be called. We just told you that the button's clicked signal is expecting to call a method with no arguments. All signals have requirements like this - you can't hook a function with two arguments to a signal expecting none (unless you use an adapter, such as sigc::bind(), of course). Therefore, it's important to know what type of signal handler you'll be expected to connect to a given signal. Writing signal handlers To find out what type of signal handler you can connect to a signal, you can look it up in the reference documentation or the header file. Here's an example of a signal declaration you might see in the gtkmm headers: Glib::SignalProxy1<bool, Gtk::DirectionType> signal_focus() Other than the signal's name (focus), two things are important to note here: the number following the word SignalProxy at the beginning (1, in this case), and the types in the list (bool and Gtk::DirectionType). The number indicates how many arguments the signal handler should have; the first type, bool, is the type that the signal handler should return; and the next type, Gtk::DirectionType, is the type of this signal's first, and only, argument. By looking at the reference documentation, you can see the names of the arguments too. The same principles apply for signals which have more arguments. Here's one with three (taken from <gtkmm/editable.h>): Glib::SignalProxy3<void, const Glib::ustring&, int, int*> signal_insert_text() It follows the same form. The number 3 at the end of the type's name indicates that our signal handler will need three arguments. The first type in the type list is void, so that should be our signal handler's return type. The following three types are the argument types, in order. Our signal handler's prototype could look like this: void on_insert_text(const Glib::ustring& text, int length, int* position); Disconnecting signal handlers Let's take another look at a Signal's connect method: sigc::signal<void,int>::iterator signal<void,int>::connect( const sigc::slot<void,int>& ); Notice that the return value is of type sigc::signal<void,int>::iterator. This can be implicitely converted into a sigc::connection which in turn can be used to control the connection. By keeping a connection object you can disconnect its associated signal handler using the method sigc::connection::disconnect(). Overriding default signal handlers So far we've told you to perform actions in response to button-presses and the like by handling signals. That's certainly a good way to do things, but it's not the only way. Instead of laboriously connecting signal handlers to signals, you can simply make a new class which inherits from a widget - say, a Button - and then override the default signal handler, such as Button::on_clicked(). This can be a lot simpler than hooking up signal handlers for everything. Subclassing isn't always the best way to accomplish things. It is only useful when you want the widget to handle its own signal by itself. If you want some other class to handle the signal then you'll need to connect a separate handler. This is even more true if you want several objects to handle the same signal, or if you want one signal handler to respond to the same signal from different objects. gtkmm classes are designed with overriding in mind; they contain virtual member methods specifically intended to be overridden. Let's look at an example of overriding: #include <gtkmm/button.h> class OverriddenButton : public Gtk::Button { protected: virtual void on_clicked(); } void OverriddenButton::on_clicked() { std::cout << "Hello World" << std::endl; // call the base class's version of the method: Gtk::Button::on_clicked(); } Here we define a new class called OverriddenButton, which inherits from Gtk::Button. The only thing we change is the on_clicked() method, which is called whenever Gtk::Button emits the clicked signal. This method prints "Hello World" to stdout, and then calls the original, overridden method, to let Gtk::Button do what it would have done had we not overridden. You don't always need to call the parent's method; there are times when you might not want to. Note that we called the parent method after writing "Hello World", but we could have called it before. In this simple example, it hardly matters much, but there are times when it will. With signals, it's not quite so easy to change details like this, and you can do something here which you can't do at all with connected signal handlers: you can call the parent method in the middle of your custom code. Binding extra arguments If you use one signal handler to catch the same signal from several widgets, you might like that signal handler to receive some extra information. For instance, you might want to know which button was clicked. You can do this with sigc::bind(). Here's some code from the helloworld2 example, which you will encounter later. m_button1.signal_clicked().connect( sigc::bind<Glib::ustring>( sigc::mem_fun(*this, &HelloWorld::on_button_clicked), "button 1") ); This says that we want the signal to send an extra Glib::ustring argument to the signal handler, and that the value of that argument should be "button 1". Of course we will need to add that extra argument to the declaration of our signal handler: virtual void on_button_clicked(Glib::ustring data); Of course, a normal "clicked" signal handler would have no arguments. sigc::bind() is not commonly used, but you might find it helpful sometimes. If you are familiar with GTK+ programming then you have probably noticed that this is similar to the extra gpointer data arguments which all GTK+ callbacks have. This is generally overused in GTK+ to pass information that should be stored as member data in a derived widget, but widget derivation is very difficult in C. We have far less need of this hack in gtkmm. X Event signals The Widget class has some special signals which correspond to the underlying X-Windows events. These are suffixed by _event; for instance, Widget::signal_button_pressed_event(). You might occasionally find it useful to handle X events when there's something you can't accomplish with normal signals. Gtk::Button, for example, does not send mouse-pointer coordinates with its clicked signal, but you could handle button_pressed_event if you needed this information. X events are also often used to handle key-presses. These signals behave slightly differently. The value returned from the signal handler indicates whether it has fully "handled" the event. If the value is false then gtkmm will pass the event on to the next signal handler. If the value is true then no other signal handlers will need to be called. Handling an X event doesn't affect the Widget's other signals. If you handle button_pressed_event for Gtk::Button, you'll still be able to get the clicked signal. They are emitted at (nearly) the same time. Note also that not all widgets receive all X events by default. To receive additional X events, you can use Gtk::Widget::set_events() before showing the widget, or Gtk::Widget::add_events() after showing the widget. However, some widgets must first be placed inside an EventBox widget. See the Widgets Without X-Windows chapter. Here's a simple example: bool on_button_press(GdkEventButton* event); Gtk::Button button("label"); button.signal_button_press_event().connect( sigc::ptr_fun(&on_button_press) ); When the mouse is over the button and a mouse button is pressed, on_button_press() will be called. GdkEventButton is a structure containing the event's parameters, such as the coordinates of the mouse pointer at the time the button was pressed. There are several different types of GdkEvent structures for the various events. Signal Handler sequence By default, your signal handlers are called after any previously-connected signal handlers. However, this can be a problem with the X Event signals. For instance, the existing signal handlers, or the default signal handler, might return true to stop other signal handlers from being called. To specify that your signal handler should be called before the other signal handlers, so that it will always be called, you can specify false for the optional after parameter. For instance, button.signal_button_press_event().connect( sigc::ptr_fun(&on_mywindow_button_press), false ); The event is delivered first to the widget the event occurred in. If all signal handlers in that widget return false (indicating that the event has not been handled), then the signal will be propagated to the parent widget and emitted there. This continues all the way up to the top-level widget if no one handles the event. Exceptions in signal handlers When a program is aborted because of an unhandled C++ exception, it's sometimes possible to use a debugger to find the location where the exception was thrown. This is more difficult than usual if the exception was thrown from a signal handler. This section describes primarily what you can expect on a Linux system, when you use the gdb debugger. First, let's look at a simple example where an exception is thrown from a normal function (no signal handler). // without_signal.cc #include <gtkmm.h> bool throwSomething() { throw "Something"; return true; } int main(int argc, char** argv) { throwSomething(); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.without_signal"); return app->run(); } Here is an excerpt from a gdb session. Only the most interesting parts of the output are shown. > gdb without_signal (gdb) run terminate called after throwing an instance of 'char const*' Program received signal SIGABRT, Aborted. (gdb) backtrace #7 0x08048864 in throwSomething () at without_signal.cc:6 #8 0x0804887d in main (argc=1, argv=0xbfffecd4) at without_signal.cc:12 You can see that the exception was thrown from without_signal.cc, line 6 (throw "Something";). Now let's see what happens when an exception is thrown from a signal handler. Here's the source code. // with_signal.cc #include <gtkmm.h> bool throwSomething() { throw "Something"; return true; } int main(int argc, char** argv) { Glib::signal_timeout().connect(sigc::ptr_fun(throwSomething), 500); Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Application> app = Gtk::Application::create(argc, argv, "org.gtkmm.with_signal"); app->hold(); return app->run(); } And here's an excerpt from a gdb session. > gdb with_signal (gdb) run (with_signal:2703): glibmm-ERROR **: unhandled exception (type unknown) in signal handler Program received signal SIGTRAP, Trace/breakpoint trap. (gdb) backtrace #2 0x0063c6ab in glibmm_unexpected_exception () at exceptionhandler.cc:77 #3 Glib::exception_handlers_invoke () at exceptionhandler.cc:150 #4 0x0063d370 in glibmm_source_callback (data=0x804d620) at main.cc:212 #13 0x002e1b31 in Gtk::Application::run (this=0x804f300) at application.cc:178 #14 0x08048ccc in main (argc=1, argv=0xbfffecd4) at with_signal.cc:16 The exception is caught in glibmm, and the program ends with a call to g_error(). Other exceptions may result in different behaviour, but in any case the exception from a signal handler is caught in glibmm or gtkmm, and gdb can't see where it was thrown. To see where the exception is thrown, you can use the gdb command catch throw. > gdb with_signal (gdb) catch throw Catchpoint 1 (throw) (gdb) run Catchpoint 1 (exception thrown), 0x00714ff0 in __cxa_throw () (gdb) backtrace #0 0x00714ff0 in __cxa_throw () from /usr/lib/i386-linux-gnu/libstdc++.so.6 #1 0x08048bd4 in throwSomething () at with_signal.cc:6 (gdb) continue Continuing. (with_signal:2375): glibmm-ERROR ** unhandled exception (type unknown) in signal handler Program received signal SIGTRAP, Trace/breakpoint trap. If there are many caught exceptions before the interesting uncaught one, this method can be tedious. It can be automated with the following gdb commands. (gdb) catch throw (gdb) commands (gdb) backtrace (gdb) continue (gdb) end (gdb) set pagination off (gdb) run These commands will print a backtrace from each throw and continue. The backtrace from the last (or possibly the last but one) throw before the program stops, is the interesting one. Creating your own signals Now that you've seen signals and signal handlers in gtkmm, you might like to use the same technique to allow interaction between your own classes. That's actually very simple by using the libsigc++ library directly. This isn't purely a gtkmm or GUI issue. gtkmm uses libsigc++ to implement its proxy wrappers for the GTK+ signal system, but for new, non-GTK+ signals, you can create pure C++ signals, using the sigc::signal<> template. For instance, to create a signal that sends 2 parameters, a bool and an int, just declare a sigc::signal, like so: sigc::signal<void, bool, int> signal_something; You could just declare that signal as a public member variable, but some people find that distasteful and prefer to make it available via an accessor method, like so: class Server { public: //signal accessor: typedef sigc::signal<void, bool, int> type_signal_something; type_signal_something signal_something(); protected: type_signal_something m_signal_something; }; Server::type_signal_something Server::signal_something() { return m_signal_something; } You can then connect to the signal using the same syntax used when connecting to gtkmm signals. For instance, server.signal_something().connect( sigc::mem_fun(client, &Client::on_server_something) ); Example This is a full working example that defines and uses custom signals. Source Code File: client.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CLIENT_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CLIENT_H #include <sigc++/sigc++.h> //Client must inherit from sigc::trackable. //because libsigc++ needs to keep track of the lifetime of signal handlers. class Client : public sigc::trackable { public: Client(); virtual ~Client(); //Signal handler: void on_server_something(bool a, int b); }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_CLIENT_H File: server.h (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #ifndef GTKMM_EXAMPLE_SERVER_H #define GTKMM_EXAMPLE_SERVER_H #include <sigc++/sigc++.h> class Server { public: Server(); virtual ~Server(); void do_something(); //signal accessor: typedef sigc::signal<void, bool, int> type_signal_something; type_signal_something signal_something(); protected: type_signal_something m_signal_something; }; #endif //GTKMM_EXAMPLE_SERVER_H File: server.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "server.h" #include <iostream> Server::Server() { } Server::~Server() { } Server::type_signal_something Server::signal_something() { return m_signal_something; } void Server::do_something() { m_signal_something.emit(false, 5); } File: main.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "server.h" #include "client.h" #include <iostream> int main(int, char**) { Server server; Client client; //Connect a Server signal to the signal handler in Client. server.signal_something().connect(sigc::mem_fun(client, &Client::on_server_something) ); std::cout << "Before Server::do_something()" << std::endl; //Tell the server to do something that will eventually cause it to emit the //"something" signal. server.do_something(); // Client::on_server_something() will run before // Server::do_something() has completed. std::cout << "After Server::do_something()" << std::endl; return 0; } File: client.cc (For use with gtkmm 3, not gtkmm 2) #include "client.h" #include <iostream> Client::Client() { } Client::~Client() { } void Client::on_server_something(bool a, int b) { std::cout << "Client::on_server_something() called with these parameters: " << a << ", " << b << std::endl; } Comparison with other signalling systems (An aside: GTK+ calls this scheme "signalling"; the sharp-eyed reader with GUI toolkit experience will note that this same design is often seen under the name of "broadcaster-listener" (e.g., in Metrowerks' PowerPlant framework for the Macintosh). It works in much the same way: one sets up broadcasters, and then connects listeners to them; the broadcaster keeps a list of the objects listening to it, and when someone gives the broadcaster a message, it calls all of its objects in its list with the message. In gtkmm, signal objects play the role of broadcasters, and slots play the role of listeners - sort of. More on this later.) gtkmm signal handlers are strongly-typed, whereas GTK+ C code allows you to connect a callback with the wrong number and type of arguments, leading to a segfault at runtime. And, unlike Qt, gtkmm achieves this without modifying the C++ language. Re. Overriding signal handlers: You can do this in the straight-C world of GTK+ too; that's what GTK's object system is for. But in GTK+, you have to go through some complicated procedures to get object-oriented features like inheritance and overloading. In C++, it's simple, since those features are supported in the language itself; you can let the compiler do the dirty work. This is one of the places where the beauty of C++ really comes out. One wouldn't think of subclassing a GTK+ widget simply to override its action method; it's just too much trouble. In GTK+, you almost always use signals to get things done, unless you're writing a new widget. But because overriding methods is so easy in C++, it's entirely practical - and sensible - to subclass a button for that purpose. <application>gtkmm</application> and Win32 One of the major advantages of gtkmm is that it is crossplatform. gtkmm programs written on other platforms such as GNU/Linux can generally be transferred to Windows (and vice versa) with few modifications to the source. gtkmm currently works with the MingW/GCC3.4 compiler and Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 or later (including the freely available express editions) on the Windows platform. There is an installer available for gtkmm on Microsoft Windows. Refer to http://live.gnome.org/gtkmm/MSWindows for instructions how to use it. Building <application>gtkmm</application> on Win32 Please see http://live.gnome.org/gtkmm/MSWindows/BuildingGtkmm for instructions on how to build gtkmm on Windws. Working with gtkmm's Source Code If you are interested in helping out with the development of gtkmm, or fixing a bug in gtkmm, you'll probably need to build the development version of gtkmm. However, you should not install a development version over your stable version. Instead, you should install it alongside your existing gtkmm installation, in a separate path. The easiest way to do this is using jhbuild. jhbuild is a program that makes building GNOME software much easier by calculating dependencies and building things in the correct order. This section will give a brief explanation of how to set up jhbuild to build and install gtkmm from the source repository (git). For up-to-date information on jhbuild, please refer to the jhbuild manual. If you need assistance using jhbuild, you should ask for help on the gnome-love mailing list. Note that to build gtkmm from git, you'll often need to build all of its dependencies from git as well. jhbuild makes this easier than it would normally be, but it will take quite a while to build and install them all. You will probably encounter build problems, though these will usually be corrected quickly if you report them. Setting up jhbuild To set up jhbuild, follow the basic installation instructions from the jhbuild manual. After you have installed jhbuild, you should copy the sample jhbuild configuration file into your home directory by executing the following command from the jhbuild directory: $ cp examples/sample.jhbuildrc ~/.jhbuildrc The gtkmm module is defined in the gnome-suites-core-deps-3.x.modules moduleset, so edit your .jhbuildrc file and set your moduleset setting to the latest version e.g. like so: moduleset = 'gnome-suites-core-deps-3.4' After setting the correct moduleset, you need to tell jhbuild which module or modules to build. To build gtkmm and all of its dependencies, set modules like so: modules = [ 'gtkmm' ] You can build several modules by setting the modules variable to a meta-package, e.g. meta-gnome-core, or listing more than one module name. The modules variable specifies which modules will be built when you don't explicitly specify anything on the command line. You can always build a different moduleset later by specifying it on the commandline (e.g. jhbuild build gtkmm). Setting a prefix By default, jhbuild's configuration is configured to install all software built with jhbuild under the /opt/gnome prefix. You can choose a different prefix, but it is recommended that you keep this prefix different from other software that you've installed (don't set it to /usr!) If you've followed the jhbuild instructions then this prefix belongs to your user, so you don't need to run jhbuild as root. When you downloaded jhbuild from the git repository, you got a number of .modules files, specifying dependencies between modules. By default jhbuild does not use the downloaded versions of these files, but reads the latest versions in the git repository. This is usually what you want. If you don't want it, use the use_local_modulesets variable in .jhbuildrc. Installing and Using the git version of <application>gtkmm</application> Once you've configured jhbuild as described above, building gtkmm should be relatively straightforward. The first time you run jhbuild, you should run the following sequence of commands to ensure that jhbuild has the required tools and verify that it is set up correctly: $ jhbuild bootstrap $ jhbuild sanitycheck Installing <application>gtkmm</application> with <application>jhbuild</application> If everything worked correctly, you should be able to build gtkmm and all of its dependencies from git by executing jhbuild build (or, if you didn't specify gtkmm in the modules variable, with the command jhbuild build gtkmm). This command will build and install a series of modules and will probably take quite a long time the first time through. After the first time, however, it should go quite a bit faster since it only needs to rebuild files that changed since the last build. Alternatively, after you've built and installed gtkmm the first time, you can rebuild gtkmm by itself (without rebuilding all of its dependencies) with the command jhbuild buildone gtkmm. Using the git version of <application>gtkmm</application> After you've installed the git version of gtkmm, you're ready to start using and experimenting with it. In order to use the new version of gtkmm you've just installed, you need to set some environment variables so that your configure script knows where to find the new libraries. Fortunately, jhbuild offers an easy solution to this problem. Executing the command jhbuild shell will start a new shell with all of the correct environment variables set. Now if you re-configure and build your project just as you usually do, it should link against the newly installed libraries. To return to your previous environment, simply exit the jhbuild shell. Once you've built your software, you'll need to run your program within the jhbuild environment as well. To do this, you can again use the jhbuild shell command to start a new shell with the jhbuild environment set up. Alternatively, you can execute a one-off command in the jhbuild environment using the following command: jhbuild run command-name. In this case, the command will be run with the correct environment variables set, but will return to your previous environment after the program exits. Wrapping C Libraries with gmmproc gtkmm uses the gmmproc tool to generate most of its source code, using .defs files that define the APIs of GObject-based libraries. So it's quite easy to create additional gtkmm-style wrappers of other glib/GObject-based libraries. This involves a variety of tools, some of them crufty, but at least they work, and has been used successfully by several projects. The build structure Generation of the source code for a gtkmm-style wrapper API requires use of tools such as gmmproc and generate_wrap_init.pl. In theory you could write your own build files to use these appropriately, but a much better option is to make use of the build infrastructure provided by the mm-common module. To get started, it helps a lot to pick an existing binding module as an example to look at. For instance, let's pretend that we are wrapping a C library called libexample. It provides a GObject-based API with types named, for instance, ExampleThing and ExampleStuff. Copying the skeleton project Typically our wrapper library would be called libsomethingmm. We can start by copying the skeleton source tree from the mm-common module. $ git clone git://git.gnome.org/mm-common $ cp -a mm-common/skeletonmm libsomethingmm This provides a directory structure for the source .hg and .ccg files and the generated .h and .cc files, with filelist.am Automake include files that can specify the various files in use, in terms of generic Automake variables. The directory structure usually looks like this, after we have renamed the directories appropriately: libsomethingmm: The top-level directory. libsomething: Contains the main include file and the pkg-config .pc file. src: Contains .hg and .ccg source files. libsomethingmm: Contains generated and hand-written .h and .cc files. private: Contains generated *_p.h files. As well as renaming the directories, we should rename some of the source files. For instance: $ for f in $(find libsomethingmm -depth -name '*skeleton*'); do \ d="${f%/*}"; b="${f##*/}"; mv "$f" "$d/${b//skeleton/libsomething}"; \ done A number of the skeleton files must still be filled in with project-specific content later. Note that files ending in .in will be used to generate files with the same name but without the .in suffix, by replacing some variables with actual values during the configure stage. Modifying build files Now we edit the files to adapt them to our needs. You might prefer to use a multiple-file search-replace utility for this, such as regexxer. Note that nearly all of the files provided with the skeleton source tree contain placeholder text. Thus, the substitutions should be performed globally, and not be limited to the Automake and Autoconf files. All mentions of skeleton should be replaced by the correct name of the C library you are wrapping, such as "something" or "libsomething". In the same manner, all instances of SKELETON should be replaced by "SOMETHING" or "LIBSOMETHING", and all occurrences of Skeleton changed to "Something". Likewise, replace all instances of Joe Hacker by the name of the intended copyright holder, which is probably you. Do the same for the joe@example.com email address. configure.ac In configure.ac, The AC_CONFIG_SRCDIR() line must mention a file in our source tree. We can edit this later if we don't yet know the names of any of the files that we will create. It is common for binding modules to track the version number of the library they are wrapping. So, for instance, if the C library is at version 1.23.4, then the initial version of the binding module would be 1.23.0. However, avoid starting with an even minor version number as that usually indicates a stable release. The AC_CONFIG_HEADERS() line is used to generate two or more configuration header files. The first header file in the list contains all configuration macros which are set during the configure run. The remaining headers in the list contain only a subset of configuration macros and their corresponding configh.h.in file will not be autogenerated. The reason for this separation is that the namespaced configuration headers are installed with your library and define publically visible macros. The AC_SUBST([SOMETHINGMM_MODULES], ['...']) line may need to be modified to check for the correct dependencies. The AC_CONFIG_FILES() block must mention the correct directory names, as described above. Makefile.am files Next we must adapt the various Makefile.am files: In skeleton/src/Makefile.am we must mention the correct values for the generic variables that are used elsewhere in the build system: binding_name The name of the library, such as libsomethingmm. wrap_init_flags Additional command-line flags passed to the generate_wrap_init.pl script, such as the C++ namespace and the parent directory prefix of include files. In skeleton/skeletonmm/Makefile.am we must mention the correct values for the generic variables that are used elsewhere in the build system: lib_LTLIBRARIES This variable must mention the correct library name, and this library name must be used to form the _SOURCES, _LDFLAGS, and _LIBADD variable names. It is permissible to use variables substituted by configure like @SOMETHINGMM_API_VERSION@ as part of the variable names. AM_CPPFLAGS The command line options passed to the C preprocessor. AM_CXXFLAGS The command line options passed to the C++ compiler. Creating .hg and .ccg files We should now create our first .hg and .ccg files, to wrap one of the objects in the C library. One pair of example source files already exists: skeleton.ccg and skeleton.hg. Create copies of these files as necessary. We must mention all of our .hg and .ccg files in the skeleton/src/filelist.am file, typically in the files_hg variable. Any additional non-generated .h and .cc source files may be placed in skeleton/skeletonmm/ and listed in skeleton/skeletonmm/filelist.am, typically in the files_extra_h and files_extra_cc variables. In the .hg and .ccg files section you can learn about the syntax used in these files. Generating the .defs files. The .defs files are text files, in a lisp format, that describe the API of a C library, including its objects (GObjects, widgets, interfaces, boxed-types and plain structs) functions enums signals properties vfuncs At the moment, we have separate tools for generating different parts of these .defs, so we split them up into separate files. For instance, in the gtk/src directory of the gtkmm sources, you will find these files: gtk.defs Includes the other files. gtk_methods.defs Objects and functions. gtk_enums.defs Enumerations. gtk_signals.defs Signals and properties. gtk_vfuncs.defs vfuncs (function pointer member fields in structs), written by hand. Generating the methods .defs This .defs file describes objects and their functions. It is generated by the h2def.py script which you can find in glibmm's tools/defs_gen directory. For instance, $ ./h2def.py /usr/include/gtk-3.0/gtk/*.h > gtk_methods.defs Generating the enums .defs This .defs file describes enum types and their possible values. It is generated by the enum.pl script which you can find in glibmm's tools directory. For instance, $ ./enum.pl /usr/include/gtk-3.0/gtk/*.h > gtk_enums.defs Generating the signals and properties .defs This .defs file describes signals and properties. It is generated by the special extra_defs utility that is in every wrapping project, such as gtkmm/tools/extra_defs_gen/. For instance $ cd tools/extra_defs_gen $ ./generate_extra_defs > gtk_signals.defs You must edit the source code of your own generate_extra_defs tool in order to generate the .defs for the GObject C types that you wish to wrap. In the skeleton source tree, the source file is named codegen/extradefs/generate_extra_defs_skeleton.cc. If not done so already, the file should be renamed, with the basename of your new binding substituted for the skeleton placeholder. The codegen/Makefile.am file should also mention the new source filename. Then edit the .cc file to specify the correct types. For instance, your main() function might look like this: #include <libsomething.h> int main(int, char**) { something_init(); std::cout << get_defs(EXAMPLE_TYPE_SOMETHING) << get_defs(EXAMPLE_TYPE_THING); return 0; } Writing the vfuncs .defs This .defs file describes virtual functions (vfuncs). It must be written by hand. There is no skeleton to start from. You can look at gtkmm's gtk/src/gtk_vfuncs.defs file. The .hg and .ccg files The .hg and .ccg source files are very much like .h and .cc C++ source files, but they contain extra macros, such as _CLASS_GOBJECT() and _WRAP_METHOD(), from which gmmproc generates appropriate C++ source code, usually at the same position in the header. Any additional C++ source code will be copied verbatim into the corresponding .h or .cc file. A .hg file will typically include some headers and then declare a class, using some macros to add API or behaviour to this class. For instance, gtkmm's button.hg looks roughly like this: #include <gtkmm/bin.h> #include <gtkmm/activatable.h> #include <gtkmm/stockid.h> _DEFS(gtkmm,gtk) _PINCLUDE(gtkmm/private/bin_p.h) namespace Gtk { class Button : public Bin, public Activatable { _CLASS_GTKOBJECT(Button,GtkButton,GTK_BUTTON,Gtk::Bin,GtkBin) _IMPLEMENTS_INTERFACE(Activatable) public: _CTOR_DEFAULT explicit Button(const Glib::ustring& label, bool mnemonic = false); explicit Button(const StockID& stock_id); _WRAP_METHOD(void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label), gtk_button_set_label) ... _WRAP_SIGNAL(void clicked(), "clicked") ... _WRAP_PROPERTY("label", Glib::ustring) }; } // namespace Gtk The macros in this example do the following: _DEFS() Specifies the destination directory for generated sources, and the name of the main .defs file that gmmproc should parse. _PINCLUDE() Tells gmmproc to include a header from the generated private/button_p.h file. _CLASS_GTKOBJECT() Tells gmmproc to add some typedefs, constructors, and standard methods to this class, as appropriate when wrapping a widget. _IMPLEMENTS_INTERFACE() Tells gmmproc to add initialization code for the interface. _CTOR_DEFAULT Add a default constructor. _WRAP_METHOD(), _WRAP_SIGNAL(), and _WRAP_PROPERTY() Add methods to wrap parts of the C API. The .h and .cc files will be generated from the .hg and .ccg files by processing them with gmmproc like so, though this happens automatically when using the above build structure: $ cd gtk/src $ /usr/lib/glibmm-2.4/proc/gmmproc -I ../../tools/m4 --defs . button . ./../gtkmm Notice that we provided gmmproc with the path to the .m4 convert files, the path to the .defs file, the name of a .hg file, the source directory, and the destination directory. You should avoid including the C header from your C++ header, to avoid polluting the global namespace, and to avoid exporting unnecessary public API. But you will need to include the necessary C headers from your .ccg file. The macros are explained in more detail in the following sections. m4 Conversions The macros that you use in the .hg and .ccg files often need to know how to convert a C++ type to a C type, or vice-versa. gmmproc takes this information from an .m4 file in your tools/m4/ directory. This allows it to call a C function in the implementation of your C++ method, passing the appropriate parameters to that C functon. For instance, this tells gmmproc how to convert a GtkTreeView pointer to a Gtk::TreeView pointer: _CONVERSION(`GtkTreeView*',`TreeView*',`Glib::wrap($3)') $3 will be replaced by the parameter name when this conversion is used by gmmproc. Some extra macros make this easier and consistent. Look in gtkmm's .m4 files for examples. For instance: _CONVERSION(`PrintSettings&',`GtkPrintSettings*',__FR2P) _CONVERSION(`const PrintSettings&',`GtkPrintSettings*',__FCR2P) _CONVERSION(`const Glib::RefPtr<Printer>&',`GtkPrinter*',__CONVERT_REFPTR_TO_P($3)) m4 Initializations Often when wrapping methods, it is desirable to store the return of the C function in what is called an output parameter. In this case, the C++ method returns void but an output parameter in which to store the value of the C function is included in the argument list of the C++ method. gmmproc allows such functionality, but appropriate initialization macros must be included to tell gmmproc how to initialize the C++ parameter from the return of the C function. For example, if there was a C function that returned a GtkWidget* and for some reason, instead of having the C++ method also return the widget, it was desirable to have the C++ method place the widget in a specified output parameter, an initialization macro such as the following would be necessary: _INITIALIZATION(`Gtk::Widget&',`GtkWidget*',`$3 = Glib::wrap($4)') $3 will be replaced by the output parameter name of the C++ method and $4 will be replaced by the return of the C function when this initialization is used by gmmproc. For convenience, $1 will also be replaced by the C++ type without the ampersand (&) and $2 will be replaced by the C type. Class macros The class macro declares the class itself and its relationship with the underlying C type. It generates some internal constructors, the member gobject_, typedefs, the gobj() accessors, type registration, and the Glib::wrap() method, among other things. Other macros, such as _WRAP_METHOD() and _WRAP_SIGNAL() may only be used after a call to a _CLASS_* macro. _CLASS_GOBJECT This macro declares a wrapper for a type that is derived from GObject, but whose wrapper is not derived from Gtk::Object. _CLASS_GOBJECT( C++ class, C class, C casting macro, C++ base class, C base class ) For instance, from accelgroup.hg: _CLASS_GOBJECT(AccelGroup, GtkAccelGroup, GTK_ACCEL_GROUP, Glib::Object, GObject) _CLASS_GTKOBJECT This macro declares a wrapper for a type whose wrapper is derived from Gtk::Object, such as a widget or dialog. _CLASS_GTKOBJECT( C++ class, C class, C casting macro, C++ base class, C base class ) For instance, from button.hg: _CLASS_GTKOBJECT(Button, GtkButton, GTK_BUTTON, Gtk::Bin, GtkBin) You will typically use this macro when the class already derives from Gtk::Object. For instance, you will use it when wrapping a GTK+ Widget, because Gtk::Widget derives from Gtk::Object. You might also derive non-widget classes from Gtk::Object so they can be used without Glib::RefPtr. For instance, they could then be instantiated with Gtk::manage() or on the stack as a member variable. This is convenient, but you should use this only when you are sure that true reference-counting is not needed. We consider it useful for widgets. _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE This macro declares a wrapper for a non-GObject struct, registered with g_boxed_type_register_static(). _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE( C++ class, C class, new function, copy function, free function ) For instance, for Gdk::Color: _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE(Color, GdkColor, NONE, gdk_color_copy, gdk_color_free) _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE_STATIC This macro declares a wrapper for a simple assignable struct such as GdkRectangle. It is similar to _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE, but the C struct is not allocated dynamically. _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE_STATIC( C++ class, C class ) For instance, for Gdk::Rectangle: _CLASS_BOXEDTYPE_STATIC(Rectangle, GdkRectangle) _CLASS_OPAQUE_COPYABLE This macro declares a wrapper for an opaque struct that has copy and free functions. The new, copy and free functions will be used to instantiate the default constructor, copy constructor and destructor. _CLASS_OPAQUE_COPYABLE( C++ class, C class, new function, copy function, free function ) For instance, from stockitem.hg: _CLASS_OPAQUE_COPYABLE(StockItem, GtkStockItem, NONE, gtk_stock_item_copy, gtk_stock_item_free) _CLASS_OPAQUE_REFCOUNTED This macro declares a wrapper for a reference-counted opaque struct. The C++ wrapper cannot be directly instantiated and can only be used with Glib::RefPtr. _CLASS_OPAQUE_REFCOUNTED( C++ class, C class, new function, ref function, unref function ) For instance, for Pango::Coverage: _CLASS_OPAQUE_REFCOUNTED(Coverage, PangoCoverage, pango_coverage_new, pango_coverage_ref, pango_coverage_unref) _CLASS_GENERIC This macro can be used to wrap structs which don't fit into any specialized category. _CLASS_GENERIC( C++ class, C class ) For instance, for Pango::AttrIter: _CLASS_GENERIC(AttrIter, PangoAttrIterator) _CLASS_INTERFACE This macro declares a wrapper for a type that is derived from GTypeInterface. _CLASS_INTERFACE( C++ class, C class, C casting macro, C interface struct, Base C++ class (optional), Base C class (optional) ) For instance, from celleditable.hg: _CLASS_INTERFACE(CellEditable, GtkCellEditable, GTK_CELL_EDITABLE, GtkCellEditableIface) Two extra parameters are optional, for the case that the interface derives from another interface, which should be the case when the GInterface has another GInterface as a prerequisitite. For instance, from loadableicon.hg: _CLASS_INTERFACE(LoadableIcon, GLoadableIcon, G_LOADABLE_ICON, GLoadableIconIface, Icon, GIcon) Constructor macros The _CTOR_DEFAULT() and _WRAP_CTOR() macros add constructors, wrapping the specified *_new() C functions. These macros assume that the C object has properties with the same names as the function parameters, as is usually the case, so that it can supply the parameters directly to a g_object_new() call. These constructors never actually call the *_new() C functions, because gtkmm must actually instantiate derived GTypes, and the *_new() C functions are meant only as convenience functions for C programmers. When using _CLASS_GOBJECT(), the constructors should be protected (rather than public) and each constructor should have a corresponding _WRAP_CREATE() in the public section. This prevents the class from being instantiated without using a RefPtr. For instance: class ActionGroup : public Glib::Object { _CLASS_GOBJECT(ActionGroup, GtkActionGroup, GTK_ACTION_GROUP, Glib::Object, GObject) protected: _WRAP_CTOR(ActionGroup(const Glib::ustring& name = Glib::ustring()), gtk_action_group_new) public: _WRAP_CREATE(const Glib::ustring& name = Glib::ustring()) _CTOR_DEFAULT This macro creates a default constructor with no arguments. _WRAP_CTOR This macro creates a constructor with arguments, equivalent to a *_new() C function. It won't actually call the *_new() function, but will simply create an equivalent constructor with the same argument types. It takes a C++ constructor signature, and a C function name. It also takes an optional extra argument: errthrow This tells gmmproc that the C *_new() has a final GError** parameter which should be ignored. When wrapping constructors, it is possible for gmmproc to generate convenience overloads of the wrapped constructors if the C function has parameters that are optional (ie. the C API allows null for those parameters). For instance, to specify if a parameter is optional, the _WRAP_CTOR() macro would look something like the following: _WRAP_CTOR(ToolButton(Widget& icon_widget, const Glib::ustring& label{?}), gtk_tool_button_new) The {?} following the name of the label parameter means that that parameter is optional. In this case, gmmproc will generate an extra constructor without that parameter. It is also possible to have the order of the parameters of the constructor different from that of the C function by using gmmproc's C++ to C parameter mapping functionality. Using this functionality, it is possible to map a C++ parameter to a C parameter by specifying the C parameter name. For instance, assuming that the declaration of the gtk_tool_button_new() function is the following: GtkToolItem* gtk_tool_button_new(GtkWidget* icon_widget, const gchar* label); The parameters of the wrapped constructor could be reordered using the following: _WRAP_CTOR(ToolButton(const Glib::ustring& label{label}, Widget& icon_widget{icon_widget}), gtk_tool_button_new) The {param_name} following each of the names of the parameters tells gmmproc to map those C++ parameters to the C parameters with the given names. Since the C++ parameter names correspond to the C ones, the above could be re-written as: _WRAP_CTOR(ToolButton(const Glib::ustring& label{.}, Widget& icon_widget{.}), gtk_tool_button_new) This same optional parameter syntax and parameter reordering is available for _WRAP_CREATE(). Additional create() overloads would be generated by gmmproc without the specified optional parameters. Hand-coding constructors When a constructor must be partly hand written because, for instance, the *_new() C function's parameters do not correspond directly to object properties, or because the *_new() C function does more than call g_object_new(), the _CONSTRUCT() macro may be used in the .ccg file to save some work. The _CONSTRUCT macro takes a series of property names and values. For instance, from button.ccg: Button::Button(const Glib::ustring& label, bool mnemonic) : _CONSTRUCT("label", label.c_str(), "use_underline", gboolean(mnemonic)) {} Method macros _WRAP_METHOD This macro generates the C++ method to wrap a C function. _WRAP_METHOD( C++ method signature, C function name) For instance, from entry.hg: _WRAP_METHOD(void set_text(const Glib::ustring& text), gtk_entry_set_text) The C function (e.g. gtk_entry_set_text) is described more fully in the .defs file, and the convert*.m4 files contain the necessary conversion from the C++ parameter type to the C parameter type. This macro also generates doxygen documentation comments based on the *_docs.xml and *_docs_override.xml files. There are some optional extra arguments: refreturn Do an extra reference() on the return value, in case the C function does not provide a reference. errthrow Use the last GError* parameter of the C function to throw an exception. deprecated Puts the generated code in #ifdef blocks. Text about the deprecation can be specified as an optional parameter. constversion Just call the non-const version of the same function, instead of generating almost duplicate code. ifdef Puts the generated code in #ifdef blocks. slot_name Tells _WRAP_METHOD() the name of the slot parameter of the method, if it has one. This enables gmmproc to generate code to copy the slot and pass the copy on to the C function in its final gpointer user_data parameter. The slot_callback option must also be used to specify the name of the glue callback function to also pass on to the C function. slot_callback Used in conjunction with the slot_name option to tell _WRAP_METHOD() the name of the glue callback function that handles extracting the slot and then calling it. The address of this callback is also passed on to the C function that the method wraps. no_slot_copy Tells gmmproc not to pass a copy of the slot to the C function, if the method has one. Instead the slot itself is passed. The slot parameter name and the glue callback function must have been specified with the slot_name and slot_callbback options respectively. As with _WRAP_CTOR() it is possible to specify if there are any optional parameters. If that is the case, gmmproc will generate convenience overload methods without those parameters. For example: _WRAP_METHOD(void get_preferred_size(Requisition& minimum_size, Requisition& natural_size{?}) const, gtk_widget_get_preferred_size) Would indicate that the natural_size parameter is optional because its name ends with {?}. In this case, gmmproc would generate a method overload without that parameter. Also, as with _WRAP_CTOR(), it is possible to reorder the parameters of the C++ method by using gmmproc's C++ to C parameter mapping functionality. Using this functionality, it is possible to map a C++ parameter to a C parameter by specifying the C parameter name. For example, if the gtk_widget_set_device_events() declaration is the following: void gtk_widget_set_device_events(GtkWidget* widget, GdkDevice* device, GdkEventMask events); Something like the following would change the order of the parameters in the C++ method: _WRAP_METHOD(void set_device_events(Gdk::EventMask events{events}, const Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Device>& device{device}), gtk_widget_set_device_events) The {param_name} following each of the names of the parameters tells gmmproc to map those C++ parameters to the C parameters with the given names. Since the C++ parameter names correspond to the C ones, the above could be re-written as: _WRAP_METHOD(void set_device_events(Gdk::EventMask events{.}, const Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Device>& device{.}), gtk_widget_set_device_events) With _WRAP_METHOD() it is also possible to include an output parameter in the C++ method declaration in which the return of the C function would be placed and to have the C++ method return void. To do that, simply include the output parameter declaration in the C++ method declaration appending a {OUT} to the output parameter name. For example, if gtk_widget_get_request_mode() is declared as the following: GtkSizeRequestMode gtk_widget_get_request_mode(GtkWidget* widget); And having the C++ method set an output parameter is desired instead of returning a SizeRequestMode, something like the following could be used: _WRAP_METHOD(void get_request_mode(SizeRequestMode& mode{OUT}) const, gtk_widget_get_request_mode) the {OUT} appended to the name of the mode output parameter tells gmmproc to place the return of the C function in that output parameter. In this case, however, a necessary initialization macro like the following would also have to be specified: _INITIALIZATION(`SizeRequestMode&',`GtkSizeRequestMode',`$3 = (SizeRequestMode)($4)') Which could also be written as: _INITIALIZATION(`SizeRequestMode&',`GtkSizeRequestMode',`$3 = ($1)($4)') _WRAP_METHOD() also supports setting C++ output parameters from C output parameters if the C function being wrapped has any. Suppose, for example, that we want to wrap the following C function that returns a value in its C output parameter rect: gboolean gtk_icon_view_get_cell_rect(GtkIconView* icon_view, GtkTreePath* path, GtkCellRenderer* cell, GdkRectangle* rect); To have gmmproc place the value returned in the C++ rect output parameter once the C function returns, something like the following _WRAP_METHOD() directive could be used: _WRAP_METHOD(bool get_cell_rect(const TreeModel::Path& path, const CellRenderer& cell, Gdk::Rectangle& rect{>>}) const, gtk_icon_view_get_cell_rect) The {>>} following the rect parameter name indicates that the C++ output parameter should be set from the value returned in the C parameter from the C function. gmmproc will generate a declaration of a temporary variable in which to store the value of the C output parameter and a statement that sets the C++ output parameter from the temporary variable. In this case it may be necessary to have an _INITIALIZATION() describing how to set a Gdk::Rectangle& from a GdkRectangle* such as the following: _INITIALIZATION(`Gdk::Rectangle&',`GdkRectangle', `$3 = Glib::wrap(&($4))') Selecting which C++ types should be used is also important when wrapping C API. Though it's usually obvious what C++ types should be used in the C++ method, here are some hints: Objects used via RefPtr: Pass the RefPtr as a const reference. For instance, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Action>& action. Const Objects used via RefPtr: If the object should not be changed by the function, then make sure that the object is const, even if the RefPtr is already const. For instance, const Glib::RefPtr<const Gtk::Action>& action. Wrapping GList* and GSList* parameters: First, you need to discover what objects are contained in the list's data field for each item, usually by reading the documentation for the C function. The list can then be wrapped by a std::vector type. For instance, std::vector< Glib::RefPtr<Action> >. You may need to define a Traits type to specify how the C and C++ types should be converted. Wrapping GList* and GSList* return types: You must discover whether the caller should free the list and whether it should release the items in the list, again by reading the documentation of the C function. With this information you can choose the ownership (none, shallow or deep) for the m4 conversion rule, which you should probably put directly into the .hg file because the ownership depends on the function rather than the type. For instance: #m4 _CONVERSION(`GSList*',`std::vector<Widget*>',`Glib::SListHandler<Widget*>::slist_to_vector($3, Glib::OWNERSHIP_SHALLOW)') _WRAP_METHOD_DOCS_ONLY This macro is like _WRAP_METHOD(), but it generates only the documentation for a C++ method that wraps a C function. Use this when you must hand-code the method, but you want to use the documentation that would be generated if the method was generated. _WRAP_METHOD_DOCS_ONLY(C function name) For instance, from container.hg: _WRAP_METHOD_DOCS_ONLY(gtk_container_remove) _IGNORE / _IGNORE_SIGNAL gmmproc will warn you on stdout about functions and signals that you have forgotten to wrap, helping to ensure that you are wrapping the complete API. But if you don't want to wrap some functions or signals, or if you chose to hand-code some methods then you can use the _IGNORE() or _IGNORE_SIGNAL() macro to make gmmproc stop complaining. _IGNORE(C function name 1, C function name2, etc) _IGNORE_SIGNAL(C signal name 1, C signal name2, etc) For instance, from buttonbox.hg: _IGNORE(gtk_button_box_set_spacing, gtk_button_box_get_spacing) _WRAP_SIGNAL This macro generates the C++ libsigc++-style signal to wrap a C GObject signal. It actually generates a public accessor method, such as signal_clicked(), which returns a proxy object. gmmproc uses the .defs file to discover the C parameter types and the .m4 convert files to discover appropriate type conversions. _WRAP_SIGNAL( C++ signal handler signature, C signal name) For instance, from button.hg: _WRAP_SIGNAL(void clicked(),"clicked") Signals usually have function pointers in the GTK struct, with a corresponding enum value and a g_signal_new() in the .c file. There are some optional extra arguments: no_default_handler Do not generate an on_something() virtual method to allow easy overriding of the default signal handler. Use this when adding a signal with a default signal handler would break the ABI by increasing the size of the class's virtual function table. custom_default_handler Generate a declaration of the on_something() virtual method in the .h file, but do not generate a definition in the .cc file. Use this when you must generate the definition by hand. custom_c_callback Do not generate a C callback function for the signal. Use this when you must generate the callback function by hand. refreturn Do an extra reference() on the return value of the on_something() virtual method, in case the C function does not provide a reference. ifdef Puts the generated code in #ifdef blocks. _WRAP_PROPERTY This macro generates the C++ method to wrap a C GObject property. You must specify the property name and the wanted C++ type for the property. gmmproc uses the .defs file to discover the C type and the .m4 convert files to discover appropriate type conversions. _WRAP_PROPERTY(C property name, C++ type) For instance, from button.hg: _WRAP_PROPERTY("label", Glib::ustring) _WRAP_VFUNC This macro generates the C++ method to wrap a virtual C function. _WRAP_VFUNC( C++ method signature, C function name) For instance, from widget.hg: _WRAP_VFUNC(SizeRequestMode get_request_mode() const, get_request_mode) The C function (e.g. get_request_mode) is described more fully in the *_vfuncs.defs file, and the convert*.m4 files contain the necessary conversion from the C++ parameter type to the C parameter type. There are some optional extra arguments: refreturn Do an extra reference() on the return value of the something_vfunc() function, in case the virtual C function does not provide a reference. refreturn_ctype Do an extra reference() on the return value of an overridden something_vfunc() function in the C callback function, in case the calling C function expects it to provide a reference. errthrow Use the last GError* parameter of the C virtual function (if there is one) to throw an exception. custom_vfunc Do not generate a definition of the vfunc in the .cc file. Use this when you must generate the vfunc by hand. custom_vfunc_callback Do not generate a C callback function for the vfunc. Use this when you must generate the callback function by hand. ifdef Puts the generated code in #ifdef blocks. A rule to which there may be exceptions: If the virtual C function returns a pointer to an object derived from GObject, i.e. a reference-counted object, then the virtual C++ function shall return a Glib::RefPtr<> object. One of the extra arguments refreturn or refreturn_ctype is required. Other macros _IMPLEMENTS_INTERFACE This macro generates initialization code for the interface. _IMPLEMENTS_INTERFACE(C++ interface name) For instance, from button.hg: _IMPLEMENTS_INTERFACE(Activatable) There is one optional extra argument: ifdef Puts the generated code in #ifdef blocks. _WRAP_ENUM This macro generates a C++ enum to wrap a C enum. You must specify the desired C++ name and the name of the underlying C enum. For instance, from widget.hg: _WRAP_ENUM(WindowType, GdkWindowType) If the enum is not a GType, you must pass a third parameter NO_GTYPE. This is the case when there is no *_get_type() function for the C enum, but be careful that you don't just need to include an extra header for that function. You should also file a bug against the C API, because all enums should be registered as GTypes. For example, from icontheme.hg: _WRAP_ENUM(IconLookupFlags, GtkIconLookupFlags, NO_GTYPE) _WRAP_GERROR This macro generates a C++ exception class, derived from Glib::Error, with a Code enum and a code() method. You must specify the desired C++ name, the name of the corresponding C enum, and the prefix for the C enum values. This exception can then be thrown by methods which are generated from _WRAP_METHOD() with the errthrow option. For instance, from pixbuf.hg: _WRAP_GERROR(PixbufError, GdkPixbufError, GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR) _MEMBER_GET / _MEMBER_SET Use these macros if you're wrapping a simple struct or boxed type that provides direct access to its data members, to create getters and setters for the data members. _MEMBER_GET(C++ name, C name, C++ type, C type) _MEMBER_SET(C++ name, C name, C++ type, C type) For example, in rectangle.hg: _MEMBER_GET(x, x, int, int) _MEMBER_GET_PTR / _MEMBER_SET_PTR Use these macros to automatically provide getters and setters for a data member that is a pointer type. For the getter function, it will create two methods, one const and one non-const. _MEMBER_GET_PTR(C++ name, C name, C++ type, C type) _MEMBER_SET_PTR(C++ name, C name, C++ type, C type) For example, for Pango::Analysis in item.hg: // _MEMBER_GET_PTR(engine_lang, lang_engine, EngineLang*, PangoEngineLang*) // It's just a comment. It's difficult to find a real-world example. _MEMBER_GET_GOBJECT / _MEMBER_SET_GOBJECT Use these macros to provide getters and setters for a data member that is a GObject type that must be referenced before being returned. _MEMBER_GET_GOBJECT(C++ name, C name, C++ type, C type) _MEMBER_SET_GOBJECT(C++ name, C name, C++ type, C type) For example, in Pangomm, layoutline.hg: _MEMBER_GET_GOBJECT(layout, layout, Pango::Layout, PangoLayout*) Basic Types Some of the basic types that are used in C APIs have better alternatives in C++. For example, there's no need for a gboolean type since C++ has bool. The following list shows some commonly-used types in C APIs and what you might convert them to in a C++ wrapper library. Basic Type equivalents C type C++ type gbooleanbool gintint guintguint gdoubledouble gunichargunichar gchar*Glib::ustring (or std::string for filenames) Hand-coded source files You might want to include additional source files that will not be generated by gmmproc from .hg and .ccg files. You can simply place these in your libsomething/libsomethingmm directory and mention them in the Makefile.am in the files_extra_h and files_extra_cc variables. Initialization Your library must be initialized before it can be used, to register the new types that it makes available. Also, the C library that you are wrapping might have its own initialization function that you should call. You can do this in an init() function that you can place in hand-coded init.h and init.cc files. This function should initialize your dependencies (such as the C function, and gtkmm) and call your generated wrap_init() function. For instance: void init() { Gtk::Main::init_gtkmm_internals(); //Sets up the g type system and the Glib::wrap() table. wrap_init(); //Tells the Glib::wrap() table about the libsomethingmm classes. } The implementation of the wrap_init() method in wrap_init.cc is generated by generate_wrap_init.pl, but the declaration in wrap_init.h is hand-coded, so you will need to adjust wrap_init.h so that the init() function appears in the correct C++ namespace. Problems in the C API. You are likely to encounter some problems in the library that you are wrapping, particularly if it is a new project. Here are some common problems, with solutions. Unable to predeclare structs By convention, structs are declared in glib/GTK+-style headers like so: typedef struct _ExampleWidget ExampleWidget; struct _ExampleWidget { ... }; The extra typedef allows the struct to be used in a header without including its full definition, simply by predeclaring it, by repeating that typedef. This means that you don't have to include the C library's header in your C++ header, thus keeping it out of your public API. gmmproc assumes that this technique was used, so you will see compiler errors if that is not the case. This compiler error might look like this: example-widget.h:56: error: using typedef-name 'ExampleWidget' after 'struct' ../../libexample/libexamplemm/example-widget.h:34: error: 'ExampleWidget' has a previous declaration here make[4]: *** [example-widget.lo] Error 1 or this: example-widget.h:60: error: '_ExampleWidget ExampleWidget' redeclared as different kind of symbol ../../libexample/libexamplemm/example-widget.h:34: error: previous declaration of 'typedef struct _ExampleWidget ExampleWidget' This is easy to correct in the C library, so do send a patch to the relevant maintainer. Lack of properties By convention, glib/GTK+-style objects have *_new() functions, such as example_widget_new() that do nothing more than call g_object_new() and return the result. The input parameters are supplied to g_object_new() along with the names of the properties for which they are values. For instance, GtkWidget* example_widget_new(int something, const char* thing) { return g_object_new (EXAMPLE_TYPE_WIDGET, "something", something, "thing", thing, NULL); } This allows language bindings to implement their own equivalents (such as C++ constructors), without using the *_new() function. This is often necessary so that they can actually instantiate a derived GType, to add their own hooks for signal handlers and vfuncs. At the least, the _new() function should not use any private API (functions that are only in a .c file). Even when there are no functions, we can sometimes reimplement 2 or 3 lines of code in a _new() function as long as those lines of code use API that is available to us. Another workaround is to add a *_construct() function that the C++ constructor can call after instantiating its own type. For instance, GtkWidget* example_widget_new(int something, const char* thing) { ExampleWidget* widget; widget = g_object_new (EXAMPLE_TYPE_WIDGET, NULL); example_widget_construct(widget, "something", something, "thing", thing); } void example_widget_construct(ExampleWidget* widget, int something, const char* thing) { //Do stuff that uses private API: widget->priv->thing = thing; do_something(something); } Adding properties, and ensuring that they interact properly with each other, is relatively difficult to correct in the C library, but it is possible, so do file a bug and try to send a patch to the relevant maintainer. Documentation In general, gtkmm-style projects use Doxygen, which reads specially formatted C++ comments and generates HTML documentation. You may write these doxygen comments directly in the header files. Reusing C documentation You might wish to reuse documentation that exists for the C library that you are wrapping. GTK-style C libraries typically use gtk-doc and therefore have source code comments formatted for gtk-doc and some extra documentation in .sgml and .xml files. The docextract_to_xml.py script, from glibmm's tools/defs_gen directory, can read these files and generate an .xml file that gmmproc can use to generate doxygen comments. gmmproc will even try to transform the documentation to make it more appropriate for a C++ API. For instance, ./docextract_to_xml.py -s ~/checkout/gnome/gtk+/gtk/ -s ~/checkout/gnome/gtk+/docs/reference/gtk/ > gtk_docs.xml Because this automatic transformation is not always appropriate, you might want to provide hand-written text for a particular method. You can do this by copying the XML node for the function from your something_docs.xml file to the something_docs_override.xml file and changing the contents. Documentation build structure If you copied the skeleton source tree in mm-common and substituted the placeholder text, then you will already have suitable Makefile.am and Doxyfile.in files. With the mm-common build setup, the list of Doxygen input files is not defined in the Doxygen configuration file, but passed along from make to the standard input of doxygen. The input file list is defined by the doc_input variable in the Makefile.am file. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/archive-create.page0000644000373100047300000000576012303664112025443 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dodajte datoteke ali mape v nov arhiv. Ustvarjanje novega arhiva

Z Upravljalnikom arhivov lahko ustvarite nov arhiv z naslednjimi koraki:

Click the Create a new archive toolbar button, or click Archive New….

Odprl se bo izbirnik datotek. Uporabite ga za poimenovanje svoje datoteke arhiva in izberite njegovo mesto in kliknite Ustvari.

V tem pogovornem oknu lahko izberete vrsto datoteke, ki jo želite uporabiti. Razpoložljive razširitve bi morale biti izpisane spodaj. Če ne izberete vrste datoteke, bo novi arhiv privzeto vrste

S klikom Druge možnosti lahko določite geslo ali razdelite novi arhiv na manjše, posamezne datoteke, tako da izberete ustrezno možnost in navedete obseg vsakega dela v MB.

Add the desired files to your archive by clicking the Add files to the archive toolbar button, or by clicking EditAdd files…. Archive Manager also allows you to add whole folders by clicking the Add a folder to the archive toolbar button, or selecting Edit Add a folder.

Ko dodate mapo v arhiv, vam bodo ponujene nekatere možnosti:

Ali naj bodo podmape vključene ali ne.

Izberite, katere datoteke želite vključiti.

Izberite, katere podmape ali datoteke želite izključiti.

Vse vrste arhivov ne podpirajo map — če vrsta arhiva, ki ga uporabljate, tega ne podpira, se opozorilo ne bo prikazalo. Če uporabljena vrsta arhiva ne podpira map, bodo datoteke iz map dodane, ne pa tudi same mape.

Ko končate z dodajanjem datotek, je vaš arhiv pripravljen. Shraniti ga ni potrebno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/archive-edit.page0000644000373100047300000000421612303664112025120 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Spremeni vsebino vašega arhiva. Urejanje arhiva

Z Upravljalnikom arhivov lahko uredite obstoječi arhiv z dodajanjem novih datotek, odstranitvijo neželenih ali s spremembo njihovih imen. Z mapami lahko delate na enak način kot z datotekami.

Dodajanje datotek

Obstoječemu arhivu lahko dodate datoteke tako, da sledite navodilom na strani ustvarjanja arhivov.

 Odstranitev datotek

Izbor datoteke.

Kliknite UrediIzbriši ali desno kliknite izbrano datoteko in izberite Izbriši.

 Preimenovanje datotek

Izbor datoteke.

Click Edit Rename…, or right-click on the selected file, and choose Rename….

Odprlo se bo pogovorno okno. Vnesite novo ime datoteke v polje vnosa besedila.

Potrditev ime s klikom na Preimenuj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/archive-extract.page0000644000373100047300000000476512303664112025656 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Razširite datoteke ali mape iz arhiva. Razširi arhiv

Razširite datoteke iz arhiva z Upravljalnikom arhivov tako, da sledite tem korakom:

Odprite arhiv.

Click Archive Extract… or click Extract in the toolbar button.

V izbirniku datotek izberite mesto, kamor naj bodo razširjene datoteke. To bo ciljna mapa.

Oglejte si napredne možnosti za razširjanje datotek za dodatne možnosti razširjanja.

Kliknite Razširi

Če je arhiv zaščiten z geslom, ga bo Upravljalnik arhivov zahteval. Vnesite geslo in kliknite V redu.

Program vam bo v novem oknu pokazal vrstico napredka. Če je razširjanje uspešno boste imeli na voljo naslednje možnosti:

Končaj - ta možnost zapre Upravljalnik arhivov.

Pokaži datoteke - po kliku na ta gumb se bo ciljna mapa odprla v Files.

Zaprite pogovorno okno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/archive-extract-advanced-options.page0000644000373100047300000000530712303664112031103 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Določite svoje možnosti za razširitev arhivov. Napredne možnosti za razširjanje arhivov

Upravljalnik arhivov ponuja različne možnosti med razširjanjem arhiva. Te možnosti si lahko ogledate v pogovornem oknu izbirnika datotek, ki ga uporabite za izbiro mesta razširjenih datotek. Na dnu tega pogovornega okna se lahko odločite, če želite razširiti:

<gui>Vse datoteke</gui>

Vse datoteke in mape v arhivu bodo razširjene.

 <gui>Izbrane datoteke</gui>

Upravljalnik arhivov razširi le izbrane datoteke.

You need to select the files that you wish to extract before you click Archive Extract…. Do this by clicking on the file name. Use Ctrl and Shift keys, to select more than one file.

 <gui>Datoteke</gui>

Vnesete lahko imena datotek, ki jih želite razširiti. Posamezne datoteke ločimo s podpičjem (;)

Imenu datotek mora slediti pripona. Vse datoteke .txt lahko razširite z vnosom *.txt.

V pogovornem oknu izbirnika datotek lahko določite, kaj želite:

<gui>Ohrani strukturo map</gui>

Izberite to možnost, če želite obdržati strukturo map, kot je bila v vašem arhivu.

 <gui>Ne prepiši novejših datotek</gui>

Ta možnost ne bo prepisala obstoječih datotek z enakim imenom, ki imajo bolj nedaven datum spreminjanje, kot tiste v arhivu.

Ta Dejanja so izpisana na dnu pogovornega okna.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/archive-open.page0000644000373100047300000000364512303664112025141 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Odprite obstoječi arhiv. Odpri arhiv

Obstoječi arhiv lahko z Upravljalnikom arhivov odprete na naslednje načine:

s klikom gumba Odpri v orodni vrstici ali

clicking Archive Open…

Možnost Odpri nedavne lahko uporabite na naslednje načine:

Kliknite gumb orodne vrstice Odpri nedavno uporabljen arhiv in izberite datoteko.

Kliknite ArhivOdpri nedavno za ogled seznama nedavno uporabljenih arhivov.

Če Upravljalnik arhivov ne more odpreti vašega nedavno uporabljenega arhiva in pokaže sporočilo o napaki Datoteka ne obstaja, se je morda mesto datoteke arhiva spremenilo. Za njeno iskanje lahko uporabite možnost Odpri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/archive-view.page0000644000373100047300000000531512303664112025146 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ogled obstoječega arhiva in njegove vsebine. Ogled arhiva

Obstajata dva vrsta ogleda arhiva:

Ogled vseh datotek

Za uporabo tega pogleda kliknite PogledPrikaži vse datoteke. Upravljalnik arhivov bo izpisal seznam vseh datotek v arhivu. Izpisani bodo podatki imena, velikosti, vrste, datuma zadnjih sprememb in mesta, kjer se nahaja.

S klikom na glave stolpcev (ime, velikost ...) lahko razvrstite datoteke v arhivu. S ponovnim klikom se obrne vrstni red razvrstitve.

 Pogled kot mapa

Drevesni pogled prikazuje običajno strukturo map. Za uporabo tega kliknite Pogled Prikaži kot mapo.

Medtem ko si ogledujete arhiv na ta način, pritisnite F9 ali kliknite možnost Pogled Mape. V stranskem pladnju boste videli drevo map. Omogoča vam enostavno krmarjenje med mapami.
Odpiranje datotek v arhivu

Odprite datoteke, ki so v arhivu, z dvoklikom na ime datoteke ali desnim klikom na ime datoteke in izbiro Odpri. Upravljalnik arhivov bo odprl datoteko s privzetim programom za to vrsto datotek.

Odprite datoteko z različnim programom s sledenjem naslednjim korakom:

Desno kliknite datoteko.

Click Open With….

Izberite program, ki ga želite uporabiti, in kliknite Izberi.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/index.page0000644000373100047300000000213012303664112023654 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Archive Manager Help Archive Manager Help Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/file-roller-icon.png"> </media> Archive Manager
Upravljanje arhivov
Napredne možnosti
Odpravljanje težav
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000366012303664112025277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod v Upravljalnik arhivov namizja GNOME. Uvod

Upravljalnik arhivov je program za upravljanje arhivskih datotek. Zasnovan je za enostavno uporabo. Zagotavlja vsa orodja, zahtevana za ustvarjanje, spreminjanje ali razširjaje arhivov.

Arhiv je sestavljen iz ene ali več datotek in map, skupaj z metapodatki. Morda je šifriran delno ali v celoti. Z zbiranjem več podatkovnih datotek skupaj v eno so datoteke arhivov uporabne za shranjevanje podatkov in njihov prenos med računalniki.

Z Upravljalnikom arhivov lahko:

Ustvarite nov arhiv

Oglejte si vsebino obstoječega arhiva

si ogledate datoteko, ki je v arhivu,

spremenite obstoječe arhive,

razširite datoteke iz arhiva.
Ogledovanje arhiva z <gui>Upravljalnikom arhivov</gui>

Zaslonska slika glavnega okna Upravljalnika arhivov.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000655312303664112026416 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Seznam bližnjic v Upravljalniku datotek. Tipkovne bližnjice

Uporaba tipkovnih bližnjic lahko pomaga pri pohitritvi dela. V preglednici spodaj je seznam bližnjic, ki jih je mogoče uporabiti v Upravljalniku arhivov.

Ustvari nov arhiv

krmilkaN

Odpri arhiv

krmilkaO

Razširi arhiv

krmilkaE

Pokaži lastnosti arhiva

izmenjalkavnašalka

Zapri

krmilkaW

Izreži

krmilkaX

Kopiraj

krmilkaC

Prilepi

krmilkaV

Preimenovanje datotek ali map iz arhiva

F2

Izberi vse

krmilkaA

Počisti izbor

dvigalkakrmilkaA

Poišči

krmilkaF

Izbris datotek ali map iz arhiva

brisalka

Pokaži drevesni pogled map v stranskem pladnju

F9

Ogled vsebine arhiva kot seznama datotek

krmilka1

Ogled vsebine arhiva kot struktura mape

krmilka2

Zaustavi opravilo

ubežnica

Osveži

krmilkaR

Pokaži vsebino pomoči

F1
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/password-protection.page0000644000373100047300000000561512303664112026606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Nastavite geslo za svoj arhiv Zaščita z geslom

You can encrypt an archive with a password so that only you and those with whom you choose to share the password are able to access it. Note that the password can still be guessed, so for highest security, use a good password.

Upravljalnik arhivov vam omogoča šifriranje arhiva z geslom le v posebnih okoliščinah.

Geslo za šifriranje podatkov v novem arhivu lahko nastavite s sledenjem naslednjim korakom:

Začnite z ustvarjanjem novega arhiva.

Na dnu tega pogovornega okna lahko izberete Vrsto datoteke in v Druge možnosti vnesete geslo v polje Geslo.

Morda gesla ne boste mogli vnesti, ker vse vrste arhivov te možnosti ne podpirajo, zato vam priporočamo, da izberete vrsto datoteke, ki ji je možno zaščititi z geslom, preden nastavite geslo.

Nadaljujte z ustvarjanjem novega arhiva.

Zaščita obstoječega arhiva z nastavitvijo gesla:

Odprite arhiv.

Click EditPassword….

Vnesite geslo v polje Geslo.

Če želite seznam datotek šifrirati, izberite Šifriraj tudi seznam datotek.

Za nadaljevanje kliknite V redu.

Upravljalnik arhivov bo šifriral le nove datoteke, ki bodo dodane v arhiv!

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/supported-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000473112303664112026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Upravljalnik arhivov ima zmožnost uporabe različnih vrst datotek. Podprte vrste datotek

Vrste datotek, ki jih podpira Upravljalnik arhivov, vključujejo:

Le arhiviraj

Majhen arhiv s kazalom AIX (.ar)

Odtis CD diska ISO-9660 [način le za branje] (.iso)

Datoteka kasetnega arhiva (.tar)

Arhiviranje in stiskanje

Arhiv Java (.jar)

Stisnjen arhiv WinRAR (.rar)

Datoteke arhiva kasete, stisnjene z:

gzip (.tar.gz, .tgz)

bzip (.tar.bz, .tbz)

bzip2 (.tar.bz2, .tbz2)

lzop (.tar.lzo, .tzo)

7zip (.tar.7z)

xz (.tar.xz)

Datoteka Cabinet (.cab)

Stripi v arhivu ZIP (.cbz)

Arhiv ZIP (.zip)

Stisnjena datoteka arhiva ZOO (.zoo)

Za nekatere vrste datotek bo Upravljalnik arhivov morda zahteval dodatne vstavke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/test-integrity.page0000644000373100047300000000251512303664112025547 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Preverite, če so v arhivu napake. Preveri celovitost

Archive Manager allows you to check whether the compressed data in an archive contains any errors. Do this by clicking ArchiveTest Integrity.

Pojavilo se bo pogovorno okno z rezultati preizkusa. Videli boste seznam preizkušenih datotek in na dnu bo tudi povzetek preizkusa.

Preizkus celovitosti preveri, da vaši podatki niso okvarjeni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/troubleshooting-archive-open.page0000644000373100047300000000267512303664112030370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ne morem odpreti arhiva. Težave z odpiranjem arhiva

Če obstoječega arhiva nočete odpreti z Upravljalnikom arhivov, preverite vrsto datoteke. Nekatere vrste arhivov morda zahtevajo dodatne vstavke. Namestitveno opravilo za vstavke je različno za različne distribucije.

Če Upravljalnik arhivov ne more odpreti nedavno uporabljenega arhiva, se je morda mesto datoteke arhiva spremenilo. Oglejte si stran pomoči o odpiranju arhiva za nadaljnje podrobnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/file-roller/troubleshooting-password.page0000644000373100047300000000224712303664112027645 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Nastavil sem geslo, a ne zaščiti celotnega arhiva. Težave z nastavljanjem gesla

Upravljalnik arhivov ne zagotavlja zaščite z geslom za obstoječe arhive. Geslo lahko nastavite samo za novo dodane datoteke. Navodila za to lahko najdete na strani Zaščita gesla.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/base.page0000644000373100047300000000204012300453154024476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Osnove števil

Za vnos števil v določeni osnovi uporabite podpisana števila. Naslednja števila so enakovredna.

1001011₂

113₈

75

4B₁₆

Ko je računalo v programerskem načinu so na voljo gumbi za binarni (CtrlB), osmiški (CtrlO) in šestnajstiški (CtrlH) prikaz.

Za nastavitev osnove v kateri so prikazani rezultati spremenite obliko rezultatov.

Za spremembo osnove trenutnega rezultata uporabite gumb osnove ali CtrlD za prikaz v decimalni obliki.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/functions.page0000644000373100047300000000425312300453154025604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Funkcije

Funkcije je mogoče uporabiti z vstavljanjem imena funkcije, ki mu sledi njen argument. V primeru, da argument ni število ali spremenljivka okoli arguemnta uporabite oklepaje.

sin 30

abs (5−9)

Določene so naslednje funkcije.

abs

Absolutna vrednost

cos

Kosinus

cosh

Hiperbolični kosinus

ulom

Enota ulomka

int

Celoštevilčna enota

ln

Naravni logaritem

log

Logaritem

ne

Logični NOT

Enojni

Enojni komplement

sin

Sinus

sinh

Hiperbolični sinus

sqrt

Kvadratni koren

tan

Tangens

tanh

Hiperbolični tangens

dvojni komplement

Dvojni komplement

Calculator does not support user-defined functions.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/modulus.page0000644000373100047300000000054212300453154025261 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deljenje modulov

Deljenje modulov je izvedeno z operatorjem mod.

9 mod 5

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/trigonometry.page0000644000373100047300000000210612300453154026331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Trigonometrija

Trigonometrijo je mogoče izvesti z uporabo funkcij sin, cos in tan.

sin 45

Enote kota je mogoče spremeniti v meniju RačunaloMožnosti. Gumbi trigonometrije so na voljo v Naprednem načinu.

Hiperbolične funkcije so na voljo z dodajanjem "h" koncu funkcije.

sinh 0.34

Obratne funkcije lahko vnesete s simbolom ⁻¹ (CtrlI) ali "a" obliko funkcije. Naslednji dve enačbi sta enakovredni.

sin⁻¹ 0.5

asin 0.5

Za vnos π s tipkovnico uporabite CtrlP.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/conv-character.page0000644000373100047300000000073412300453154026473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Znakovne kode

Ko ste v programerskem načinu, gumb á odpre pogovorno okno za pretvorbo znakov z znakovne kode.

S tipkovnico znakov ni mogoče pretvoriti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000102512300453154024536 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

To delo je licencirano pod Creative Commons priznanje avtorstva deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0 neprenosljivo.

Kot posebno izjemo vam dajejo lastniki avtorskih pravic dovoljenje za kopiranje, spreminjanje in distribuiranje kode primerov, ki jo vsebuje ta dokument pod vašimi pogoji, brez omejitev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/financial.page0000644000373100047300000000523012300453154025514 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Finančne funkcije

Ko ste v finančnem načinu, so na voljo naslednji gumbi.

Ctrm

Izračuna število obrestnih obdobij, ki morajo preteči za povečanje vrednosti investicije s sedanje na prihodnjo vrednost po stalni obrestni meri za obrestno obdobje.

Ddb

Izračuna amortizacijo osnovnega sredstva v določenem časovnem obdobju z metodo dvojno padajočega .

Fv

Izračuna prihodnjo vrednost investicije na podlagi enakih vplačil po periodični obrestni meri v določenem številu plačilnih obdobij.

Dobičkonosnost

Izračuna prodajno ceno izdelka na osnovi stroškov izdelka in želene dobičkonosnosti od prodaje.

Pmt

Izračuna vrednost obročnega plačevanja posojila, kjer se plačila izvajajo ob koncu vsakega obročnega obdobja.

Pv

Izračuna sedanjo vrednost investicije na podlagi niza enakih plačil, diskontiranih po periodični obrestni meri v določenem številu plačilnih obdobij.

Obrestna mera

Izračuna periodične obrestne mere za povečanje investicije na prihodnjo vrednost v določenem številu obrestnih obdobij.

Sln

Izračuna način enakomernega časovnega amortiziranja v določenem obdobju. Ta način enakomerno razdeli strošek skozi vso uporabno življenjsko dobo sredstva. Za uporabno življenjsko dobo šteje vsota obdobij, navadno let, v katerih se sredstvo amortizira.

Syd

Izračuna amortizacijo osnovnega sredstva v določenem časovnem obdobju z metodo vsote letnih številk (SYD). Pri tem načinu je raven amortizacije hitrejša, saj je strošek amortizacije večji na začetku. Za uporabno življenjsko dobo šteje vsota obdobij, navadno let, v katerih se sredstvo amortizira.

Izraz

Izračuna število plačilnih obdobij, ki morajo preteči v obdobju običajne anuitete za akumulacijo prihodnje vrednosti po periodični obrestni meri.

Finančnih funkcij ni mogoče izvesti s tipkovnico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/logarithm.page0000644000373100047300000000146112300453154025560 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Logaritmi

Logaritme je mogoče izračunati s funkcijo log.

log 100

Za izračun logaritma v drugačni osnovi za funkcijo uporabite podpisano število.

log₂ 32

Za izračun naravnega logaritma uporabite funkcijo ln.

ln 1.32

Eulerjeva števila lahko vnesete z uporabo spremenljivke e.

e^1.32

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/absolute.page0000644000373100047300000000065212300453154025411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Absolutne vrednosti

Absolutne vrednosti se izračunajo s simbolom | ali abs function.

|−1|

abs (−1)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/number-display.page0000644000373100047300000000254212300453154026526 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Oblika rezultata

Obliko za prikaz rezultatov lahko spremenite v meniju RačunaloMožnosti.

Desetiško

Razultati so prikazani kot decimalna števila

Znanstven

Razultati so prikazani kot znanstvenem zapisu

Inženirstvo

Rezultati so prikazani v znanstvenem zapisu z izjemo potence, ki je vedno večkratnik števila tri

Dvojiško

Razultati so prikazani kot binarna števila

Osmiško

Razultati so prikazani kot osmiška števila

Šestnajstiško

Razultati so prikazani kot šestnajstiška števila

Mogoče je nastaviti število decimalnih števil in sledeče ničle ter ločnice tisočic (če so prikazane).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/variables.page0000644000373100047300000000241612300453154025543 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spremenljivke

Za dodelitev vrednosti spremenljivki uporabite simbol = ali izberite spremenljivko za dodelitev z gumbom x v naprednem načinu. Ime spremenljivke vsebuje le majhne ali velike črke.

x=5

value=82

Spremenljivke je mogoče uporabiti v katerikoli enačbi. Zamenjane so z njihovo dodeljeno vrednostjo. Spremenljivke je mogoče vstaviti z gumbom x.

6x+3

xy−3x+7y−21

Naslednje spremenljivke so vedno določene.

ans

Rezultat predhodnega izračuna

e

Eulerjevo število

π

Pi

rand

Naključna vrednost v obsegu [0,1] (spremenii se ob vsakem branju)
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/factorial.page0000644000373100047300000000057412300453154025542 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fakultete

Fakultete vnesite s simbolom !. Za izračun fakultete števila 6 vnesite naslednje.

6!

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/power.page0000644000373100047300000000212112300453154024720 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Potence in koreni

Potence lahko vnesete z nadpisanim številom za vrednostjo.

5²

Obratno vrednost lahko vnesete s simbolom ⁻¹ (CtrlI).

3⁻¹

Potence lahko izračunate s simbolom ^. To omogoča izračun potence enačbe.

5^(6−2)

V primeru da vaša tipkovnica nima tipke ^ lahko dvakrat pritisnete **.

Kvadratne korene lahko izračunate s simbolom (CtrlR).

√2

n-te korene lahko izračunate s podpisanim številom pred znakom korena.

₃√2

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/conv-length.page0000644000373100047300000000110512300453154026011 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dolžina/površina/prostornina

Za pretvarjanje med dolžino, površino in prostornino uporabite operator in.

6 metrov v palcih

1 aker v cm²

1 pinta v ml

Pretvarjanja dolžina/površina/prostornina je treba izvesti s tipkovnico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/index.page0000644000373100047300000000157312300453154024705 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Robert Ancell robert.ancell@gmail.com <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png"/> Calculator Help
Uporabniški vmesnik
Enačbe
Števila
Pretvorbe
Finančni izračuni
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/conv-currency.page0000644000373100047300000000115112300453154026363 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Valuta

Za pretvarjanje valut vstopite v finančni način in uporabite nadzornike valut.

Med valutami lahko pretvarjate tudi s tipkovnico in operatorjem in.

13.65 USD in GBP

Podati valut so približni in jih ne uporabljajte za finančne odločitve.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/equation.page0000644000373100047300000000212512300453154025415 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 0 Osnovne enačbe

Enačbe se vnašajo v običajni matematični obliki. Za seštevanje 7 in 2 vnesite naslednje:

7+2

Za rešitev z miško pritisnite na gumb = ali pa na tipkovnici pritisnite Enter.

Izračuni so izvedeni v matematičnem redu - množenje in deljenje sta izvedena pred seštevanjem in odštevanje. Rezultat naslednjega izračuna je 1 (3×2 = 6, 7−6 = 1).

7−3×2

Za spremembo vrstnega reda izračuna uporabite oklepaje. Rezultat naslednjega izračuna je 8 (7−3 = 4, 4×2 = 8).

(7−3)×2

Ta čiščenje prikaza pritisnite gumb Clr ali Ubežno tipko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/scientific.page0000644000373100047300000000163512300453154025715 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Znanstveni zapis

Za vnos števil v znanstveni obliki uporabite gumb ×10x (CtrlE). Način števila se semodejno spremeni v nadpisana. Za vnos 2×10¹⁰⁰ začnite z vnosom osnove (2):

2

Nato pritisnite gumb znanstvenega zapisa (ali pritisnite CtrlE):

2×10

Nato vnesite eksponent (100):

2×10¹⁰⁰

Za prikaz rezultatov v znanstveno obliko spremenite obliko rezultata.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/superscript.page0000644000373100047300000000175112300453154026157 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 _ Nadpisano in podpisano

Nekatere enačbe zahtevajo vnos števil v nadpisani ali podpisani obliki. Na primer

x³+2x²−5

Za vnos nadpisanih števil z miško izberite način števila z uporabo gumbov ↑n in ↓n. Ko je en od teh načinov dejaven bo klik na miškin gumb števila vnesel nadpisano ali podpisano. Za vrnitev v način običajnih števil kliknite dejavni gumb.

Za vnos nadpisanega števila med vnašanjem števila držite Ctrl. Za podpisana števila držite Alt.

Način števila se vrne v običajnega ob vnosu znaka, ki ni število (na primer +).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/percentage.page0000644000373100047300000000135412300453154025710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstotki

Odstotke lahko izračunate s simbolom %.

V primeru dodajanja ali seštevanja znak za odstotek pomeni odstotek vrednosti, ki se prišteje ali odšteje. Naslednja enačba izračuna ceno predmeta vrednega 140€ s 15% davkom (140 + (15÷100)×140).

140+15%

V vseh ostalih primerih znak za odstotek pomeni delež od 100. Naslednja enačba izračuna četrtino od 80 jabolk ((25÷100)×80).

25%×80

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/mouse.page0000644000373100047300000000173012300453154024721 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba miške

Vse enačbe je mogoče vnesti z miško. Za dostop do vseh gumbov je na voljo več načinov, ki jih je mogoče izbrati iz menija Način.

Osnovno

Zagotavlja gumbe primerne za osnovne enačbe

Napredno

Zagotavlja gumbe primerne za napredno matematiko kot je

Finančno

Zagotavlja gumbe primerne za finančne enačbe

Programiranje

Zagotavlja gumbe primerne za računalniške programerje
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/keyboard.page0000644000373100047300000000210712300453154025370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba tipkovnice

Vse matematične enačbe lahko vnesete s tipkovnico.

Naslednje kombinacije tipk je mogoče uporabiti skupaj za vnos tipk, ki morda niso na voljo na vaši tipkovnici.

×

*

÷

/

^

* dvakrat

√

CtrlR

π

CtrlP

Za vnos nadpisanih števil uporabite Ctrlštevilo, za podpisana števila uporabite Altštevilo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/boolean.page0000644000373100047300000000132412300453154025207 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Logična algebra

Logično algebro je mogoče izračunati z operatorji AND, OR in XOR.

010011₂ AND 110101₂

Gumbi za te simbole so na voljo v programerskem načinu.

Funkcija NOT function obrne bite v številu. Velikost besede lahko nastavite v meniju RačunaloMožnosti.

NOT 010011₂

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/factorize.page0000644000373100047300000000063012300453154025555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Faktorizacija

Trenutno prikazano število lahko faktorizirate s pritiskom gumba fact. Ta gumb je viden v programerskem načinu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/complex.page0000644000373100047300000000051012300453154025233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kompleksa števila

Complex numbers are not supported in Calculator.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/conv-time.page0000644000373100047300000000067412300453154025500 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Čas

Za pretvarjanje med časom uporabite operator in.

3 leta v urah

Pretvorbe časa je treba izvesti s tipkovnico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/conv-base.page0000644000373100047300000000073212300453154025447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Osnove števil

Za pretvarjanje med različnimi osnovami vnesite število (ali rešite enačbo) in spremenite obliko rezultata v meniju RačunaloMožnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gnome-calculator/conv-weight.page0000644000373100047300000000067612300453154026033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Masa

Za obsežno pretvarjanje uporabite operator in.

1kg v funtih

Obsežne pretvorbe je treba izvesti s tipkovnico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-printing-select.page0000644000373100047300000000264512315065461025646 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Tiskanje le določenih strani

You can selectively print only certain pages from the document. For example, if you enter the page numbers "1,3,5-7,9", then only pages 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 and 9 will be printed. To print pages of your choice:

Select File Print….

In the General tab in the Print dialog choose Pages from the Range section.

Type the numbers of the pages you want to print from the document, separated by commas. Use a dash to specify a range of pages.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-tabs.page0000644000373100047300000000312712315065461023464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Dodajanje in odstranjevanje zavihkov

Delo z zavihki v gedit vam omogoča nadzor nad več datotekami v enem oknu. Zavihek, ki je večji kot drugi zavihki, nakazuje, da je ta datoteka trenutno odprta. Manjši zavihki nakazujejo, da so druge datoteke na voljo za delo.

Dodajanje zavihkov

To add a new tab, create a new file with Ctrl N. The tab will be added to the right side of any other tabs.

Odstranjevanje zavihkov

To remove a tab, click the × on the tab's right side. To remove all open tabs, press Ctrl ShiftW.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-edit-as-root.page0000644000373100047300000000237512315065461025046 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Urejanje datoteke kot skrbnik

Urejanje datotek kot skrbik je potencialno nevarno in lahko vaš sistem pokvari. Bodite zelo pozorni med urejanjem datotek kot skrbnik.

Za urejanje datotek kot skrbnik zaženite gedit iz terminala z vnašanjem:

sudo gedit

Using the sudo command, you will need to successfully enter your password before gedit will open.

Kot nadomestilo za ukaz sudo lahko skrbniška dovoljenja pridobite z vnosom:

su -

Nato bi zagnali gedit z ukazom gedit.

Once you have opened gedit with administrative privileges, gedit will keep those privileges until you close it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-close-file.page0000644000373100047300000000165512315065461024561 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Zaprtje datoteke

Za zaprtje datoteke v gedit izberite DatotekaZapri. Nadomestno lahko kliknete na majhen "X", ki se pojavi na desni strani zavihka datoteke ali pritisnete CtrlW.

Katerokoli od teh dejanj bo zaprlo datoteko v gedit. V primeru da vaša datoteke vsebuje spremembe, ki niso bile shranjene, vas bo gedit pozval k shranitvi teh sprememb pred zaprtjem datoteke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-pyconsole.page0000644000373100047300000000226312315065461026225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Vzajemna konzola Python v spodnjem pladnju Konzola python

You can add a Python console to the bottom pane, allowing you to test Python scripts without leaving gedit. To enable the Python console, select gedit PreferencesPlugins Python Console.

Once the Python console is enabled, you can open it by selecting ViewBottom Pane, or just press ShiftF9.

V primeru da imate omogočen tudi vstavek Vstavljen terminal, se bo Konzola Python pojavila kot ločen zavihek v spodnjem pladnju.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-change-default-font.page0000644000373100047300000000266412315065461026353 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com 2011 2012 2013 Sprememba privzete pisave

gedit bo privzeto uporabil sistemsko pisavo stalne širine, vendar lahko izberte privzeto pisavo gedit tako, da ustreza vašemu okusu.

Za spremembo privzete pisave v programu <app>gedit</app>:

Select gedit Preferences Font & Colors.

Odstranite polje poleg fraze "Uporabi sistemsko pisavo stalne širine."

Click on the current font name. gedit will open a font-chooser window, allowing you to see available fonts and choose the one that you prefer.

After you have chosen a new font, use the slider under the list of fonts to set the default font size.

Kliknite Izberi in nato kliknite Zapri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-open-files-from-sidepane.page0000644000373100047300000000456412315065461027331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Ogled in odpiranje datotek iz stranskega pladnja

Najbolj pogost način za preklop med datotekami v programu gedit je uporaba zavihkov na vrhu okna gedit. V nekaterih primerih, še posebno ko delate z velikim številom datotek, je lahko stranski pladenj zelo uporaben.

To activate the side pane, select View Side Pane, or just press the F9 key.

You can toggle the side pane open or closed by pressing F9 at any time.

Odpiranje datotek iz stranskega pladnja

To open files from the side pane, first open the side pane by selecting View Side Pane, then click on the file-browser icon at the bottom of the pane.

This will activate the file-browser mode of the side pane. You can then use the navigation buttons at the top of the pane to locate and open your desired files.

Uporaba stranskega pladnja za preklop med odprtimi datotekami

Once you have several files open, you can use the side pane to switch between open files. To activate the file browser portion of the side pane, click on the file icon at the bottom of the side pane.

Klik na katerokoli ime datoteke v stranskem pladnju jo bo odprl za urejanje.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/index.page0000644000373100047300000000344012315065461022546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gedit urejevalnik besedil Gedit urejevalnik besedil Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/gedit-icon.png" its:translate="no"/> gedit Text Editor

Welcome to the gedit help guide. For a quick introduction into both gedit's most basic features, as well as some advanced keyboard shortcuts, visit the Get started with gedit and Shortcut keys pages.

Druge teme pomoči so združene skupaj v odseke spodaj. Uživajte v uporabi gedit!

Delo z datotekami
Nastavite gedit
Vstavki gedit
Tiskanje z gedit
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-change-case.page0000644000373100047300000000367112315065461026354 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Spremenite velikost izbranega besedila Spremeni velikost črk

This plugin helps you to change the case of selected portions of text. You can use it to change text to be all lower case, all upper case, to invert the case, or apply title case. To enable this plugin, select geditPreferences PluginsChange Case.

Ko je vstavek Spremeni velikost črk omogočen, ga lahko uporabite tako da sledite naslednjim korakom:

Poudarite del besedila, ki ga želite spremeniti.

Select geditChange Case

Izberite vašo želeno možnost oblikovanja besedila.

Posodobitve oblikovanja besedila bo imele učinek takoj.

Možnost Obrni velikost besedila bo pretvorila vse male črke ali velike in vse velike črke v male.

Možnost Velike prve črke besed bo pretvorila prvo črko vsake besede v veliko črko. Vse ostale črke bodo pretvorjene v male črke.

If you have not highlighted any text, the Change Case feature will be grayed-out. You need to select a portion of text before you use the Change Case feature.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-doc-stats.page0000644000373100047300000000321212315065461026106 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Ogled statistike dokumenta Statistika dokumenta

The Document Statistics plugin shows you various statistics about your current document. To enable this plugin, select geditPreferences PluginsDocument Statistics.

Uporaba statistike dokumenta

Ko je vstavek omogočen, ga uporabite z izbiro OrodjaStatistika dokumenta. Okno bo prikazalo statistične podatke o dokumentu vključno s številom besed, vrstic, znakov, znakov brez presledkov in velikostjo datoteke v bajtih.

You can also use Document Statistics to show you information about just a portion of your document. To do this, use the mouse pointer to select the portion of text that you want to examine, and then select ToolsDocument Statistics. Gedit will display information for both your entire document, and for the portion of text that you highlighted.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-view-open-files-in-sidepane.page0000644000373100047300000000373212315065461027740 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Oglejte seznama datotek v stranskem pladnju

Sledenje velikemu številu datotek z uporabo zavihkov je lahko težavno. En način upravljanja velikega števila datotek je njihov ogled v stranskem pladnju. Stranski pladnji vam omogočajo ogled več datotek hkrati kot le z zavihki.

To view a list of open files in a side pane, click View Side Pane. A pane will appear to the left of the workspace with a listing of all currently open files. Clicking a file in the side pane will display that file in the workspace.

The side pane also contains a File Browser view. If the pane displays a file directory instead of currently open files, click documents icon at the bottom of the pane to switch to the Documents view.

Stranski pladenj prikazuje le datoteke, ki so odprte v trenutnem oknu. Ko je odprtih več oken, bodo v stranskem pladnju prikazane le datoteke v trenutnem oknu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-spellcheck.page0000644000373100047300000001152612315065462024653 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Enable and use spell-checking feature Preverjanje črkovanja v dokumentih
Omogočitev črkovalnika

The Spell-check feature is provided as a plugin in gedit which can be enabled as required. To enable the plugin:

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Spell Checker to enable the plugin.
Preverjanje črkovanja v dokumentih

To check for misspelt words in your document:

Select Tools Check Spelling.

To have gedit automatically highlight misspelt words in your document as you type, select ToolsHighlight Misspelled Words.
Using spell-check

You can choose the right substitution for misspelt words using the Check Spelling dialog. The misspelt word being checked by the spell-checker is displayed in bold style next to Misspelled word:. You can choose from the following corrective actions:

Change to: allows you to input a word and use Check Word to check the validity of the spelling.

Suggestions: lists the available substitutions for the word.

Ignore allows you to bypass spell check for a instance of current word.

Ignore All allows you to bypass spell check for all instances of the current word.

Change substitutes the misspelt or unrecognized word with a chosen substitute from the Suggestions: list.

Change all substitutes all misspelt or unrecognized words with the chosen substitute from the Suggestions: list.

Add word allows you to add the current word to the gedit User dictionary. Adding custom words to the User dictionary will allow gedit to recognize the word in documents and thus will not be highlighted as a misspelt word.
Določitev jezika za preverjanje črkovanja

By default, gedit will use your current language to spell check your document. If you need to use another language, choose ToolsSet Language…, then choose the language you want to use.

Dictionaries

gedit uses Enchant, a small system utility, for spell checking. Enchant can use several different dictionaries to check your spelling. Two such dictionary back-ends are Hunspell and Aspell.

If the language you want to use is not available in gedit, use your computer's software installer or package manager to install the dictionary back-end that you want.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-shortcut-keys.page0000644000373100047300000002550412315065462025363 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paolo Borelli Jesse van den Kieboom Steve Frécinaux Ignacio Casal Quinteiro Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Tipkovne bližnjice

Uporabite tipkovne bližnjice za izvajanje pogostih opravil hitreje kot z miško in meniji. Naslednja preglednica vsebuje seznam vseh tipkovnih bližnjic gedit.

Z zavihki povezane tipkovne bližnjice

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Premakni trenutni zavihek na levo

CtrlAlt PageUp

Premakni trenutni zavihek na desno

CtrlAlt PageDown

Zapri zavihek

CtrlW

Shrani vse zavihke

CtrlShift L

Zapri vse zavihke

CtrlShift W

Skoči na n-ti zavihek

Alt n
Tipkovne bližnjice za delo z datotekami

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Ustvari nov dokument

CtrlN

Odpri dokument

CtrlO

Shrani trenutni dokument

CtrlS

Shrani trenutni dokument z novim imenom datoteke

CtrlShift S

Natisni trenutni dokument

Ctrl P

Predogled tiskanja

CtrlShift P

Zapri trenutni dokument

CtrlW

Končaj gedit

CtrlQ
Tipkovne bližnjice za urejanje datotek

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Move to the beginning of the current line

Home

Move to the end of the current line

End

Move to the beginning of the document

CtrlHome

Move to the end of the document

CtrlEnd

Move the selected word right one word

AltRight Arrow

Move the selected word left one word

AltLeft Arrow

Razveljavi zadnje dejanje

CtrlZ

Obnovi zadnje razveljavljeno dejanje

CtrlShift Z

Izreže izbrano besedilo ali področje in ga postavi na odložišče

CtrlX

Kopira izbrano besedilo ali področje in ga postavi na odložišče

CtrlC

Prilepi vsebino odložišča

CtrlV

Izbere vse besedilo v datoteki

CtrlA

Izbriši trenutno vrstico

CtrlD

Premakni izbrano vrstico za eno vrstico navzgor

AltUp Arrow

Premakni izbrano vrstico za eno vrstico navzdol

AltDown Arrow

Add a tab stop

Tab

Remove a tab stop

ShiftTab
Tipkovne bližnjice za prikaz in skrivanje pladnjev

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Pokaži / skrij stranski pladenj

F9

Pokaži / skrij stranski pladenj.

CtrlF9
Tipkovne bližnjice za iskanje

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Najdi niz

CtrlF

Poišče naslednjo pojavitev niza

CtrlG

Najdi predhodno pojavitev niza

CtrlShiftG

Poišči in zamenjaj

CtrlH

Počisti poudarjanje

CtrlShift K

Pojdi na vrstico

CtrlI
Tipkovne bližnjice za orodja

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Preveri črkovanje

ShiftF7

Odstrani končne presledke (z vstavkom)

AltF12

Požene "make" v trenutni mapi (z vstavkom)

F8

Seznam map (z vstavkom)

CtrlShift D
Tipkovne bližnjice za uporabniško pomoč

Za to opravilo

Pritisnite to

Odpre uporabniški vodnik gedit

F1
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-install.page0000644000373100047300000000470512315065462025664 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Kako namestiti vstavke tretjih oseb Dodatni vstavki gedit

Nameščanje vstavkov tretjih oseb vam da dodatne zmožnosti, ki privzeto niso vključene v privzetih vstavkih gedit ali dodatnih vstavkih, ki so del paketa gedit-plugins. Spletni seznam vstavkov tretjih oseb lahko najdete tukaj.

Namestitev vstavkov tretjih oseb vključuje prejem vstavka, postavitev vstavka v pravo mapo in njegovo omogočitev.

Običajno lahko vstavek prejmete s spletišča vstavka. Včasih boste za kopiranje skladišča vstavka z interneta morda potrebovali program za nadzor predelav kot je git, bazaar, ali subversion. Za več podrobnosti o tem kako dobiti vstavek si oglejte dokumentacijo vstavka.

Datoteke vstavkov kopirajte v mapo /home/username/.local/share/gedit/plugins.

Besedo uporabniško ime zamenjajte s svojim uporabniškim imenom.

After you have placed the plugin files into the correct directory, the plugin will appear in the Preferences menu. Select Edit PreferencesPlugins [Name of Plugin] to enable the plugin.

Kliknite Zapri.

Po namestitvi vstavka, bo na voljo za uporabo.

Mapa .local je privzeto skrita. Za prikaz skritih datotek kliknite PogledPokaži skrite datoteke ali pritisnite CtrlH.

V primeru da mapa .local/share/gedit/plugins/ na vašem sistemu ni prisotna, jo boste morali ustvariti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-printing.page0000644000373100047300000000753612315065462024376 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Printing documents

Tiskanje z gedit zahteva, da imate povezan in nastavljen tiskalnik. V primeru da tega nimate, si oglejte pomoč o tiskanju za namizno okolje GNOME.

gedit allows you to print both to a file and to paper.

Printing To Paper

You can print your documents to paper using a local or remote printer. To print a file:

Select File Print General.

Select the desired printer from the list of printers available.

You can preview the file using Print Preview and once you are satisfied with the settings, click Print to send the file to printer.

Additionally, from Page Setup tab: you can choose Layout and Paper options. As these settings are available throughout GNOME programs, please consult Layout and Paper options help.

Print Multiple Copies And Between Specified Ranges

You can set Range and Copies options to help you:

Printing To File

You can also use gedit to print to a file. To print your document to file of a different format:

Select File Print Print to File.

Printing is enabled for the following file formats, you may select from:

Prenosljiva vrsta dokumenta (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)

Raztegljiva vektorska grafika (.svg)

To print the document to file, click Print.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-file-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000353412315065462026615 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Uporabite stranski pladenj za brskanje in odpiranje datotek Pladenj pregledovalnika datotek

Če iz programa gedit pogosto odpirate datoteke, vam bo morda v pomoč vstavek Pladenj brskalnika datotek. Ta vstavek v stranski pladenj vstavi brskalnik datotek Gnome, ki vam omogoča enostaven dostop do vaših pogosto uporabljenih datotek.

You can enable the Side Pane by selecting geditPreferences PluginsFile Browser Pane.

Odpiranje datotek iz stranskega pladnja

To activate and use the side pane, select ViewSide pane (or just press F9), and then click on the file-browser icon at the bottom of the pane.

This will activate the file-browser mode of the side pane. You can then use the navigation buttons at the top of the pane to locate and open your desired files.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-open-files.page0000644000373100047300000000310612315065462024572 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Odprte ene ali več datotek

Za odprtje datoteke v gedit, kliknite na gumb Odpri ali pritisnite CtrlO.

This will cause the Open Files dialog to appear. Use your mouse or keyboard to select the file that you wish to open, and then click Open. The file that you've selected will open in a new tab.

Za zaprtje pogovornega okna Odpiranje datotek brez odprtja datoteke kliknite Prekliči.

Za odpiranje več datotek hkrati lahko uporabite tipki Ctrl in Shift. V primeru da med izbiro več datotek držite tipko Ctrl, bo klik na Odpri odprl vse izbrane datoteke.

Pritisk na tipko Shift medtem ko izberete več datotek bo odprl vse datoteke med prvo in zadnjo izbrano.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-syntax-highlighting.page0000644000373100047300000000250612315065462026525 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Omogoči poudarjanje skladnje
Poudarjanje skladnje

gedit zagotavlja poudarjanje skladnje za širok obseg označevalnih, programskih in znanstvenih jezikov. V primeru da gedit prepozna uporabljeno skladnjo, jo bo samodejno poudaril.

If your syntax or language is not highlighted upon startup, you can select the appropriate syntax or language by clicking View Highlight Mode, and then choosing the desired syntax. Alternately, you can select the syntax name from a list at the bottom of the gedit window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-insert-date-time.page0000644000373100047300000000266712315065462027376 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Vstavi trenutni datum in uro na položaj kazalke Vstavi datum/uro

As this name of this plugin suggests, the Insert Date/Time plugin allows you to insert the date and/or time at the current cursor position. To enable this plugin, select gedit PreferencesPlugins Insert Date/Time. To use the plugin, press EditInsert Date and Time.

By default, the Insert Date/Time plugin will prompt you to choose your preferred date/time format each time that you use the plugin. However, you can choose your own default date and time format by selecting geditPreferences PluginsInsert Date/TimeConfigure.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-tabs-moving.page0000644000373100047300000000645312315065462024767 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Premikanje in prerazporeditev zavihkov

Zavihke v gedit lahko premaknete in si s tem olajšate delo z datotekami. Zavihke lahko preuredite v istem oknu, premaknete ven iz gedit (in s tem ustvarite novo okno gedit) in premaknete iz enega okna v drugo.

Sprememinjanje vrstnega red zavihkov v oknu

Za spremembo vrstnega red zavihkov v oknu:

Kliknite in držite miškin gumb na zavihku.

Move the tab to the desired position among the other tab.

Izpustite miškin gumb

Zavihek bo bil postavljen na položaj, kjer boste spustili zavihek, poleg drugih odprtih zavihkov.

Premaknite zavihek in s tem ustvarite novo okno gedit

Za ustvarjanje novega okna iz obstoječega zavihka:

Kliknite in držite miškin gumb na zavihku.

Povlecite zavihek iz okna gedit.

Izpustite miškin gumb

ali izberite DokumentiPremakni v novo okno, medtem ko je odprt zavihek za premikanje

Za premik zavihka v novo okno, ko je gedit razpet, povlecite zavihek v vrhnjo vrstico na vrhu zaslona.
Povlecite zavihek v novo okno gedit

V primeru da želite premakniti zavihek iz enega okna v drugo:

Kliknite in držite miškin gumb na zavihku.

Drag the tab to the new window.

Place it beside other tabs in the new window.

Izpustite miškin gumb

You may find it easier to move a tab from one window to another by dragging the tab to the Activities hot-corner of GNOME Shell. This will reveal each of the open gedit windows. You can then release the tab on the desired gedit window.

See the tab-related shortcut keys table to make it easier to manage your tabs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-quick-open.page0000644000373100047300000000515212315065462026266 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Hitro odpiranje ene ali več datotek Hitro odpiranje

As the name of this plugin would imply, the Quick Open plugin helps you to open files more quickly than using the usual ways of opening files. To enable this plugin, select gedit PreferencesPluginsQuick Open.

Once you have enabled the Quick Open plugin you can use it as follows:

Open the Quick Open dialog box by pressing CtrlAltO, or by selecting FileQuick Open.

Odprlo se bo pogovorno okno datotek Hitro odpiranje.

Uporabite miško in izberite datoteko ali datoteke, ki jih želite odpreti.

Za izbiro več posameznih datotek držite tipko Ctrl medtem ko klikate datoteke, ki jih želite odpreti.

Za izbiro skupine datotek kliknite na prvo datoteko, ki jo želite odpreti, držite tipko Shift in nato kliknite na zadnjo datoteko na seznamu, ki jo želite odpreti.

Kliknite Odpri

Quick Open will look for files in:

The directory of the currently opened document

The root directory of the File Browser Pane plugin

Recent documents which are also shown in theRecent folder in Files

Directories which you have bookmarked in Files

Your Desktop directory

Your Home directory

Quick Open displays files in any of the above locations regardless of whether or not you have opened them previously.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-zeitgeist-dataprovider.page0000644000373100047300000000245512315065462030707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Log user activity for documents which are opened in gedit Zeitgeist dataprovider

Zeitgeist is a service that logs user activities and events. Zeitgeist lets other applications access this information in the form of statistics and timelines.The Zeitgeist dataprovider plugin for gedit records user activity for documents used with gedit giving easy access to recently-used and frequently-used files.

Enable Zeitgeist dataprovider

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Zietgeist Dataprovider.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-open-recent.page0000644000373100047300000000270712315065462024756 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Ponovno odprtje nedavno uporabljene datoteke

Privzeto omogoča program gedit enostaven dostop do petih nazadnje uporabljenih datotek. Za odpiranje nedavnih datotek je treba:

Kliknite navzdol usmerjeno puščico desno od gumba Odpri.

gedit bo prikazal seznam petih najbolj nedavno uporabljenih datotek.

Izberite želeno datoteko in odprla se bo v novem zavihku.

Za prilagoditev števila nedavno uporabljenih datotek, ki jih gedit prikaže, boste morali uporabiti program gconf-editor.

Launch dconf-editor and select org gnomegeditpreferencesui max-recents.

Dvokliknite na število poleg max_recents in spremenite število na želeno vrednost.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugin-guide.page0000644000373100047300000000225612315065462025127 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Nastavite in uporabite vstavke gedit

Program gedit omogoča podporo vstavkov. Privzeto je nameščenih nekaj vstavkov, na voljo pa jih je še veliko več.

Veliko Linux distribucij naredi skupino teh vstavkov na voljo kot paket gedit-plugins. Če želite, da ima gedit na voljo več vstavkov, namestite paket gedit-plugins.
Privzeti vstavki gedit
Dodatni vstavki gedit
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-change-color-scheme.page0000644000373100047300000000320012315065462026327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Spremeni barvno shemo

gedit vključuje več različnih barvnih shem, ki vam omogočajo spremembo videza glavnega okna besedila.

Za spremembo barvne sheme izvedite naslednje korake:

Select gedit Preferences Font & Colors.

Izberite svojo želeno barvno shemo.

Nova barvna shema bo nemudoma uveljavljena.

Uporabi barvno shemo po meri

Uporabite lahko barvne sheme, ki so jih ustvarili drugi ali pa ustvarite in uporabite svoje lastne barvne sheme.

Instructions on how to install custom color schemes, as well as examples of color schemes that you can download and use, are available on the gedit wiki.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-undo-recent-action.page0000644000373100047300000000271512315065462026234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Razveljavi zadnje dejanje

If you make a mistake while using gedit, you can undo it by pressing CtrlZ, or by clicking gedit Undo. Doing so will cause gedit to undo one set of similar actions.

Undoing a "set of similar actions" means, for example, that gedit will remove an entire word rather than removing each character in the word one at a time. This makes gedit's undo feature more efficient.

Stanja pred spremembo ni mogoče več povrniti, če ste datoteko že shranili.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-snippets.page0000644000373100047300000001502112315065462026054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Uporabite koščke za hitro vstavljanje pogosto uporabljenih delov besedila Izrezki

Izrezki zagotavljajo priročen način vstavljanja ponavljajočih se delov kode v vaše datoteke. Na primer izrezek HTML za oznako <img> bi vstavil odpirajoči in zapirajoči del oznake kot tudi stalna mesta, kjer lahko vnesete atribute slike. To lahko naredi pisanje kode lažje in hitrejše.

Enable Snippets Plugin

To enable the Snippets plugin:

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Snippets to enable the plugin.
Browse Snippets

To browse available snippets:

Select Tools Manage Snippets.

Make sure the syntax is set appropriately. The status bar at the bottom of the gedit window will show the current language setting. This language setting is what allows gedit to insert the proper snippets. Gedit will normally detect the language or syntax of the file that you're using, but sometimes you may need to set it.

V tem primeru je jezik nastavljen na HTML

Browse the snippets that are available for your language or syntax.
Using Snippets

To insert a snippet into your current document:

Type the desired snippet name anywhere in your current document.

Press Tab to insert the snippet associated with the input term.
Snippet Example Usage

For example, if you have set the syntax to HTML, type head , and press the Tab key. The text would have auto completed into a snippet as:

Page Title ]]>
Adding Snippets

You can add new Snippets that work either globally (that is, they are language agnostic) or only in a particular syntax.

Select Tools Manage Snippets.

From the Manage Snippets sidebar select the desired syntax and click on the "+" button to list existing snippets for the selected syntax.

To add a snippet that works globally (that is, when no particular syntax or language has been set for the document), select Global from the Manage Snippets sidebar.

To add a new snippet, click on the "plus" icon in the Manage Snippets sidebar.

Input a name for the new snippet. The name of the snippet can be different from the snippet you want to add.

Under the Activation section, you must input a term for the Tab trigger: textarea. You will be using this term to insert your snippet.

If you wish to insert a snippet with a keyboard shortcut, then click your mouse pointer on Shortcut key: textarea and press the desired combination of keys. Once you have pressed and released the keys, the keyboard shortcut will be set.

Under the textarea for Edit:, input the desired text for the snippet. You may use ${n} to indicate variables, where n is replaced with a number that represents the numerical order of variables included.
New Snippet Example

Consider you have created a snippet with the term greetings in Tab trigger:. The Edit: textarea contains:

Hello ${1:wonderful}${2:amazing} world! ]]>

You can insert this snippet by typing greetings in the document and pressing the Tab key. The following text snippet will be inserted:

Hello wonderfulamazing world!]]>

The words "wonderful" and "amazing" can be retained or deleted depending on your choice of usage. To do so, press Tab to choose between "wonderful" and "amazing" and press Del to delete the least preferred option.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-quickstart.page0000644000373100047300000000255012315065462024725 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Kako začeti z gedit

gedit je polno zmožen urejevalnik besedila za namizno okolje GNOME. Uporabite ga lahko za pripravo enostavnih sporočilc in dokumentov ali pa uporabite nekatere od njegovih naprednih zmožnosti in ga uporabljate kot svoje programsko razvojno okolje.

Ko se gedit zažene, lahko takoj začnete pisati. Za shranjevanje svojega besedila enostavno kliknite Shrani.

Za več podrobnosti o zmožnostih gedit in za pomoč pri izvajanju dodatnih nalog raziščite druge dele pomoči gedit.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-sort.page0000644000373100047300000000565312315065462025210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Razvrsti vrstice besedila po abecedi Razvrsti

Vstavek razvrščanja izbrane vrstice besedila razporedi po abecednem vrstnem redu.

You cannot use the Undo feature to correct a Sort operation, so we recommend that you save the file immediately before performing the sort. If you make a mistake with the sort, you can revert to the previously-saved version of the file by selecting FileRevert.
Enable Sort Plugin

To enable the Sort plugin:

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Sort to enable the plugin.
Using Sort Plugin

To use the Sort plugin:

Drag and highlight the desired lines of text.

Select gedit Sort.

The Sort dialog will open, allowing you to choose between several sorting options:

Reverse order will arrange the text in reverse alphabetical order.

Remove duplicates will remove duplicate values from the list.

Ignore case will ignore case sensitivity.

To have the sort ignore the characters at the start of the lines, set the first character that should be used for sorting in the Start at column spin box.

Za izvedbo razvrščanja kliknite Razvrsti.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-modelines.page0000644000373100047300000000663112315065462026175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Podpora za modelines v slogu programov Emacs, Kate in Vim. Modelines

Vstavek Modelines programu gedit omogoča analizo vrstic besedila na začetku in koncu datoteke in nato uveljavitev možnosti dokumenta na datoteko. Vstavek Modelines omogoča uporabo podniza možnosti, ki jih uporbaljajo urejevalniki besedila Emacs, Kate in Vim.

To enable the Modelines plugin, select gedit PreferencesPluginsModelines.

Splošne možnosti modeline

Z gedit modelines lahko nastavite naslednje možnosti:

Širina tabulatorja

Širina zamika

Vstavlajnje presledkov namesto tabulatorjev

Prelom besedila

Širina desnega odmika

Možnosti nastavljene z modelines imajo prednost pred možnostmi, nastavljenimi v pogovornem oknu možnosti.
Modelines Emacs

Prvi dve vrstici dokumenta sta preiskani za modelines Emacs. gedit podpira naslednje možnosti modeline Emacs:

Širina tabulatorja

Odmik zamika

Način zamikanja zavihkov

Samodejno prelaml

Za več podrobnosti o modelines Emacs obiščite Priročnik GNU Emacs.

Modelines Kate

Za modelines Kate je preiskanih prvih in zadnjih deset vrstic dokumenta. gedit podpira naslednje možnosti modeline Kate:

širina-tabulatorja

širina-zamika

presledek zamika

prelomi besede

prelomi besede v stolpcu

Za več podrobnosti o modelines Kate obiščite spletišče Kate.

Modelines Vim

Za modelines Vim so preiskane prve in zadnje tri vrstice dokumenta. gedit podpira naslednje možnosti modeline Vim:

et (razširizavihek)

ts (zaustavi zavihek)

sw (širina zamika)

prelom

širina besedila

Za več podrobnosti o modelines Vim obiščite spletišče Vim.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-printing-order.page0000644000373100047300000000417312315065462025501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Tiskanje kopij v pravilnem vrstnem redu
Obrnjeno

Printers usually print the first page first, and the last page last, so the pages end up in reverse order when you pick them up. To reverse the order:

Select File Print.

In the General tab of the Print dialog under Copies, check Reverse.

The last page will be printed first, and so on.

Zberi

V primeru da tiskate več kot eno kopijo dokumenta, bodo kopije privzeto združene po števili strani (najprej pridejo ven kopije strani eni, nato kopije strani dva, itd.). Zbiranje bo natisnilo vsako kopijo naenkrat v celoti.

Za zbiranje:

Click File Print.

In the General tab of the Print dialog under Copies check Collate.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-replace.page0000644000373100047300000000673112315065462024153 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Zamenjaj besedilo

Urejanje besedila lahko vzame veliko časa. Za prihranek časa gedit vključuje zmožnost Zamenjaj, ki vam pomaga pri iskanju in zamenjavi delov besedila.

Zamenjava besedila v <app>gedit</app>

Open the Replace tool by clicking Search Replace or press CtrlH.

Vnesite besedilo, ki ga želite zamenjati, v polje 'Poišči:'.

Vnesite besedilo za zamenjavo v polje 'Zamenjaj z:'.

Ko ste vnesli izvirno besedilo in besedilo za zamenjavo, izberite možnosti zamenjave:

Za zamenjavo le naslednjega ujemajočega dela besedila kliknite Zamenjaj.

Za zamenjavo vseh primerov iskanega besedila kliknite Zamenjaj vse.

Use the Replace All function with care. Replace All works on the entirety of your text file, and does not allow you to highlight portions of text where the replace function will be performed.
Več možnosti Upoštevaj velikost črk

Možnost Upoštevaj velikost črk vam omogoča navedbo ali naj bo iskanje občutljivo na velikost črk. V primeru da je ta možnost izbrana, bodo iskanja občutljiva na velikost črk. V nasprotnem primeru iskanja na velikost črk ne bodo občutljiva.

 Poišči le cele besede

To možnost uporabite za iskanje določene besede brez vključevanja delčkov drugih besed. Na primer če bi iskali besedo 'in', bi beseda 'in' ustrezala, besedi 'kino' in 'malina' pa ne.

 Iskanje nazaj

Ta ukaz se obnaša enako kot Poišči nazaj. V primeru na želite stopati med rezultati iskanja od začetka proti koncu, izberite to možnost.

 Prelomi vrstice

V primeru da je možnost prelomi vrstice omogočena, bo gedit ponovno zagnal dejanje išči/zamenjaj na vrhu datoteke po tem ko bo dosegel dno datoteke. To zagotovi, da je dejanje išči/zamenjaj izvedeno na vaši celotni datoteki.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-save-file.page0000644000373100047300000000212512315065462024404 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Shranjevanje datoteke

To save a file in gedit, click on the disk-drive icon with the word Save next to it. You may also select File Save, or just press CtrlS.

V primeru da shranjujete novo datoteko, se bo pojavilo pogovorno okno Shrani datoteko. Izberete lahko ime datoteke in mapo kamor jo želite shraniti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000071412315065462022411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 444 Castro Street, Suite 900, Mountain View, California, 94041, USA.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-create-new-file.page0000644000373100047300000000171512315065462025504 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Ustvarjanje nove datoteke

The easiest way to create a new file in gedit, is to click the icon in the toolbar that looks like a blank piece of paper. If you prefer, you may also select FileNew, or press CtrlN.

Katerokoli od teh dejanj bo ustvarilo novo datoteko v oknu gedit. V primeru da imate v gedit odprte druge datoteke, se bo nova datoteka pojavila kot nov zavihek desno od teh datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-full-screen.page0000644000373100047300000000405612315065462024755 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Uporaba celozaslonskega načina

Pri delu z velikimi dokumenti, vam bo morda prav prišel celozaslonski način gedit. Uporaba celozaslonskega načina bo skrila menijsko vrstico, vrstico zavihkov in orodno vrstico ter vam predstavila več vašega besedila in vam omogočila boljše osredotočenje na svoje naloge.

Vklop celozaslonskega načina

To turn on fullscreen mode, select View Fullscreen, or press F11. gedit's menu, title, and tab-bars will hide, and you will only be presented with the text of your current file.

V primeru da želite izvesti dejanje iz menija gedit medtem ko delate v celozaslonskem načinu, premaknite svoj miškin kazalec na vrh zaslona. Menijska vrstica gedit se bo ponovno pojavila in izbrali boste lahko svoje želeno dejanje.

To switch between open tabs while in fullscreen mode, press either CtrlAltPgUp or CtrlAltPgDn.
Izklop celozaslonskega načina

To turn off fullscreen mode and return to the standard gedit window, press F11.

You can also move your mouse cursor to the top of the screen, and wait for the menu bar to appear. When the menu bar appears, select Leave Fullscreen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-plugins-external-tools.page0000644000373100047300000000343712315065462027177 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Poženite skripte na svojih trenutnih datotekah in se sporazumevajte z drugimi programi Zunanja orodja

The External Tools plugin can help simplify repetitive tasks. Specifically, it extends gedit by helping you to run scripts on your working files, and by allowing gedit to interact with other programs on your computer. To enable the External Tools plugin, select gedit PreferencesPlugins External Tools.

Nastavitev vstavka zunanjih orodij

Once you have enabled the plugin, you will need to configure it to suit your needs. The configuration options are available by selecting ToolsManage External Tools.

Ta vstavek je za napredne uporabnike in za učinkovito uporabo zahteva znanje skriptanja. Ta vstavek uporabljajte previdno, saj lahko napake v vaših skriptih na nepredvidljive načine.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-files-basic.page0000644000373100047300000000136012315065462024712 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Osnove datotek: odpiranje, zapiranje in shranjevanje datotek.

V primeru da ste v gedit novi, vam bodo te teme pomagale pri ustvarjanju, shranjevanju in odpiranju in zapiranju datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-open-on-server.page0000644000373100047300000000417112315065462025413 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Odpiranje datoteke, ki se nahaja na strežniku

Pred odpiranjem datoteke na strežniku v gedit morate vedeti nekaj tehničnih podrobnosti o strežniku. Na primer, vedeti boste morali IP naslov ali URL strežnika in morda boste morali vedeti kakšno vrsto strežnika imate (na primer HTTP, FTP, itd.)

Nekatere vrste strežnika omejujejo kaj lahko storite z datotekami, ki so shranjene na strežniku. Tako boste morda lahko odprli datoteko na strežniku, vendar boste morali spremembe datoteke shraniti krajevno na svojem računalniku.

S tem v mislih izvedite naslednje korake za odprtje datoteke s strežnika z uporabo gedit:

Izberite DatotekaOdpri za prikaz pogovornega okna Odpiranje datotek.

Izberite ikono Svinčnik blizu vrha pogovornega okna Odpiranje datotek.

Vnesite IP naslov ali URL ustreznega strežnika.

Najdite in izberite datoteko, ki jo želite odpreti.

V spustnem seznamu Znakovno kodiranje izberite ustrezno znakovno kodiranje.

Kliknite Odpri

Veljavne vrste URI vključujejo http:, ftp:, file: in vse načine, ki jih podpira vfs.

Datoteke iz nekaterih vrsti URI-jev so odprte kot le za branje in vse spremembe, ki jih naredite, morajo biti shranjene na drugo mesto. HTTP na primer omogoča le branje datotek. Datoteke, ki so odprte preko FTP, so le za branje, ker vsi strežniki FTP ne delujejo pravilno s shranjevanjem oddaljenih datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gedit/gedit-search.page0000644000373100047300000000750712315065462024007 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Iskanje besedila

Orodje iskanje vam lahko pomaga pri iskanju določenih zaporedij besedila v vaši datoteki.

Iskanje besedila

Open the search window by clicking Search Find or pressing CtrlF. This will move your cursor to the start of the search window.

Vnesite besedilo, ki ga želite zamenjati, v iskalno okno.

Medtem ko tipkate bo gedit začel poudarjati dele besedila, ki se ujemajo z vnesenim.

Za drsanje med rezultati naredite nekaj od naslednjega:

Click on the up or down facing arrows next to the search window.

Press the up arrow or down arrow keys on your keyboard.

Press CtrlG or CtrlShiftG.

Pritisnite Ctrl in uporabite zmožnost drsenja svoje miške ali drsne ploščice za premik navzgor ali navzdol po besedilu.

Za zaprtje okna iskanja, pritisnite Esc ali Enter. Pritisk na Esc bo vrnil kazalko kjer je bila, preden ste začeli iskanje. Pritisk na Enter bo kazalko vrnil na trenutno mesto med rezultati iskanja.

Iskalni namigi

Če z miško poudarite del besedila in pritisnete CtrlF, se bo poudarjeno besedilo pojavilo v iskalnem oknu.

For more search options, click on the Magnifying Glass icon in the search window, or right-click anywhere in the search window. You can select one or more of the following search options:

Select Match Case to make the search case sensitive.

Select Match Entire Word Only to search only complete words.

Select Wrap Around to search text from top to bottom and cycle back again.

Besedilo, ki ste ga iskali, bo ostalo poudarjeno, tudi ko ste dokončali svoje iskanje. Za odstranitev poudarjanja kliknite IščiPočisti poudarjanje ali pritisnite CtrlShiftK.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gucharmap/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000007023712300411173024122 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Character Map Manual Character Map is a Unicode character map that allows you to select characters from a table and insert then in to a text string. 2004 Sun Microsystems 2003 2004 Chee Bin HOH GNOME Documentation Project Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Chee Bin HOH GNOME Documentation Project
cbhoh@gnome.org
GNOME Documentation Project Character Map Manual V2.1 2004-02-26 Updated for GNOME 2.6, program version 1.3.0. Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Unicode Character Map Manual V2.0 October 2003 Chee Bin HOH cbhoh@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 1.3.0 of Character Map. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Character Map application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. gucharmap Character Map Character Map Introduction The Character Map application allows you to insert special characters into a document or a text field. Character Map provides accented characters, mathematical symbols, special symbols, and punctuation marks. Use Character Map to access characters that are not available on your keyboard. Character Map displays all the characters are available in all of the language scripts on your system, using the Unicode character set. Unicode is a character set standard with the goal to include all of the characters that are used in all of the written languages in the world. Getting Started To Start Character Map You can start Character Map in the following ways: Applications menu Choose AccessoriesCharacter Map. Command line Execute the following command: gnome-character-map When You Start Character Map When you start Character Map, the following window is displayed.
Character Map Window Shows Character Map window.
The Character Map window contains the following elements: Menubar The menus on the menubar contain most of the commands that you need to work with Character Map. Toolbar The toolbar contains a drop-down list of fonts, font style buttons, and a zoom spin box. Display area The display area contains the following components: Script or Unicode Block list box Character Table tabbed section Character Details tabbed section Text to copy text box Copy button Statusbar The statusbar displays the currently selected character's Unicode code point and Unicode character name. Usage To Change the Character-Set List To list the character sets by script name, choose ViewBy Script. To list the character sets by Unicode block, choose ViewBy Unicode Block. To Create a Text String To create a text string in the Text to copy field, perform the following steps: Select a character set from the Script or Unicode Block list box. Insert characters in one of the following ways: Double-click on a character button in the Character Table tabbed section, to insert the character in the Text to copy field. Select a character button in the Character Table tabbed section, then press Return to insert the character in the Text to copy field. Select a character button in the Character Table tabbed section, then click and drag the character to the Text to copy field. Click on the Text to copy field to give focus to the field. If a text string is already in the field, click on the text string at the point where you want to insert the character. Press a character key on your keyboard to insert that character into the field. To Copy and Paste Your Text String into an Application To copy and paste the text string from the Text to copy field into an application, perform the following steps: Click Copy. If none or all of the text string is selected, all of the string is copied to the clipboard. If a portion of the string is selected, only that portion is copied. Switch to your application and choose EditPaste, or press shortcut key CtrlV. When you paste the contents of the Text to copy field into other applications, the text string appears in the current character set of the application. If your text string contains non-visible characters, you can only insert the text string into applications that support the full character set. To Search for a Character To search for a character, perform the following steps: Choose SearchFind, or press shortcut key CtrlF. The Find dialog opens. Enter text to search for in the Search field. Select Match whole word to only find complete words that match your text. By default, only the character names are searched. Select Search in character details to search in other parts of a character's description, such as notes, equivalents, and approximate equivalents. Click Next to find the first occurrence of your text after the currently selected character. Character Map selects the character it finds. Click Next to find the next matching character. Alternatively, choose SearchFind Next, or press shortcut key CtrlG. Click Previous to find the previous matching character. Alternatively, choose SearchFind Previous, or press shortcut key ShiftCtrlG. To Browse Through all Characters To browse through the character map, use the Go menu. Next character, or press shortcut key CtrlN. Previous character, or press shortcut key CtrlP. Next script, or press shortcut key CtrlPage Down. Previous script, or press shortcut key CtrlPage Up. You can browse the character map by individual character, and script or by Unicode block. This depends on whether the character map is showing scripts or Unicode blocks. To change this, choose ViewBy Script or ViewBy Unicode Block. The following keys also work for browsing the character map: Press the arrow keys on the keyboard to browse through the characters. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys to browse through the characters page by page. Press the Home key to select the first character in the Unicode sequence. To select the last character, press the End key. To Display Detailed Information About a Character To display detailed information about a character, perform the following steps: Select a character set from the Script or Unicode Block list box. Example: Basic Latin Select a character from the Character Table tabbed section. Example: B Click on the Character Details tabbed section. The Character Details tabbed section displays the following information about the selected character: Unicode code point Example: U+0042 Unicode character name Example: LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B General Character Properties Unicode category Example: Letter, Uppercase Various Useful Representations UTF-8 encoding Example: 0x42 UTF-16 encoding Example: 0x0042 C octal escaped UTF-8 encoding Example: \102 XML decimal entity Example: "&#66" Annotations and Cross References Example: U+212C SCRIPT CAPITAL B Click on the link to display the details for the referenced character. To Change the Format of a Character To change the format of a character, perform any of the following steps: To change the font, select a font from the font drop-down list. To change the font type to bold type, click on the Bold button, or press shortcut key AltB. To change the font type to italic type, click on the Italic button, or press shortcut key AltI. To increase the font size, choose ViewZoom In or use the zoom spin box, or press shortcut key Ctrl+. To decrease the font size, choose ViewZoom Out or use the zoom spin box, or press shortcut key Ctrl-. To display normal font size, choose ViewNormal Size, or press shortcut key Ctrl=. To magnify the selected character, hold Shift. To Change the Format of the Character Table To change the format of the character table, choose ViewSnap Columns to Power of Two. Character Map changes the Character Table tabbed section so that the number of columns is a power of two, for example, two columns, four columns, eight columns, and so on. The number of columns depends on the size of the window and the size of the font.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gucharmap/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012300411173023253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gtk-doc-manual/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000027627312301102114024757 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 included"> ]> GTK-Doc Manual 1.20 User manual for developers with instructions of GTK-Doc usage. Chris Lyttle
chris@wilddev.net
Dan Mueth
d-mueth@uchicago.edu
Stefan Kost
ensonic@users.sf.net
GTK-Doc project
gtk-doc-list@gnome.org
 2000, 2005 Dan Mueth and Chris Lyttle 2007-2014 Stefan Sauer (Kost) Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps or initial caps. 1.20 16 Feb 2014 ss bug fixes, markdown support, style improvements 1.19 05 Jun 2013 ss bug fixes 1.18 14 Sep 2011 ss bug fixes, speedups, markdown support 1.17 26 Feb 2011 sk urgent bug fix update 1.16 14 Jan 2011 sk bugfixes, layout improvements 1.15 21 May 2010 sk bug and regression fixes 1.14 28 March 2010 sk bugfixes and performance improvements 1.13 18 December 2009 sk broken tarball update 1.12 18 December 2009 sk new tool features and bugfixes 1.11 16 November 2008 mal GNOME doc-utils migration Uvod This chapter introduces GTK-Doc and gives an overview of what it is and how it is used. What is GTK-Doc? GTK-Doc is used to document C code. It is typically used to document the public API of libraries, such as the GTK+ and GNOME libraries. But it can also be used to document application code. How Does GTK-Doc Work? GTK-Doc works by using documentation of functions placed inside the source files in specially-formatted comment blocks, or documentation added to the template files which GTK-Doc uses (though note that GTK-Doc will only document functions that are declared in header files; it won't produce output for static functions). GTK-Doc consists of a number of perl scripts, each performing a different step in the process. There are 5 main steps in the process: Writing the documentation. The author fills in the source files with the documentation for each function, macro, union etc. (In the past information was entered in generated template files, which is not recommended anymore). Gathering information about the code. gtkdoc-scan scans the header files of the code looking for declarations of functions, macros, enums, structs, and unions. It creates the file <module>-decl-list.txt containing a list of the declarations, placing them into sections according to which header file they are in. On the first run this file is copied to <module>-sections.txt. The author can rearrange the sections, and the order of the declarations within them, to produce the final desired order. The second file it generates is <module>-decl.txt. This file contains the full declarations found by the scanner. If for some reason one would like some symbols to show up in the docs, where the full declaration cannot be found by the scanner or the declaration should appear differently, one can place entities similar to the ones in <module>-decl.txt into <module>-overrides.txt. gtkdoc-scangobj can also be used to dynamically query a library about any GObject subclasses it exports. It saves information about each object's position in the class hierarchy and about any GObject properties and signals it provides. gtkdoc-scanobj should not be used anymore. It was needed in the past when GObject was still GtkObject inside gtk+. Generating the "template" files. gtkdoc-mktmpl creates a number of files in the tmpl/ subdirectory, using the information gathered in the first step. (Note that this can be run repeatedly. It will try to ensure that no documentation is ever lost.) Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. gtkdocize supports now a option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system). Generating the SGML/XML and HTML/PDF. gtkdoc-mkdb turns the template files into SGML or XML files in the sgml/ or xml/ subdirectory. If the source code contains documentation on functions, using the special comment blocks, it gets merged in here. If there are no tmpl files used it only reads docs from sources and introspection data. We recommend to use Docbook XML. gtkdoc-mkhtml turns the SGML/XML files into HTML files in the html/ subdirectory. Likewise gtkdoc-mkpdf turns the SGML/XML files into a PDF document called <package>.pdf. Files in sgml/ or xml/ and html/ directories are always overwritten. One should never edit them directly. Fixing up cross-references between documents. After installing the HTML files, gtkdoc-fixxref can be run to fix up any cross-references between separate documents. For example, the GTK+ documentation contains many cross-references to types documented in the GLib manual. When creating the source tarball for distribution, gtkdoc-rebase turns all external links into web-links. When installing distributed (pregenerated) docs the same application will try to turn links back to local links (where those docs are installed). Getting GTK-Doc Requirements Perl v5 - the main scripts are in Perl. DocBook DTD v3.0 - This is the DocBook SGML DTD. http://www.ora.com/davenport Jade v1.1 - This is a DSSSL processor for converting SGML to various formats. http://www.jclark.com/jade Modular DocBook Stylesheets This is the DSSSL code to convert DocBook to HTML (and a few other formats). It's used together with jade. I've customized the DSSSL code slightly, in gtk-doc.dsl, to colour the program code listings/declarations, and to support global cross-reference indices in the generated HTML. http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl docbook-to-man - if you want to create man pages from the DocBook. I've customized the 'translation spec' slightly, to capitalise section headings and add the 'GTK Library' title at the top of the pages and the revision date at the bottom. There is a link to this on http://www.ora.com/davenport NOTE: This does not work yet. Installation There is no standard place where the DocBook Modular Stylesheets are installed. GTK-Doc's configure script searches these 3 directories automatically: /usr/lib/sgml/stylesheets/nwalsh-modular (used by RedHat) /usr/lib/dsssl/stylesheets/docbook (used by Debian) /usr/share/sgml/docbkdsl (used by SuSE) If you have the stylesheets installed somewhere else, you need to configure GTK-Doc using the option: --with-dsssl-dir=<PATH_TO_TOPLEVEL_STYLESHEETS_DIR> About GTK-Doc (FIXME) (History, authors, web pages, license, future plans, comparison with other similar systems.) About this Manual (FIXME) (who it is meant for, where you can get it, license) Setting up your project The next sections describe what steps to perform to integrate GTK-Doc into your project. Theses sections assume we work on a project called 'meep'. This project contains a library called 'libmeep' and an end-user app called 'meeper'. We also assume you will be using autoconf and automake. In addition section plain makefiles or other build systems will describe the basics needed to work in a different build setup. Setting up a skeleton documentation Under your top-level project directory create folders called docs/reference (this way you can also have docs/help for end-user documentation). It is recommended to create another subdirectory with the name of the doc-package. For packages with just one library this step is not necessary. This can then look as shown below: Example directory structure Integration with autoconf Very easy! Just add one line to your configure.ac script. Integration with autoconf This will require all developers to have gtk-doc installed. If it is okay for your project to have optional api-doc build setup, you can solve this as below. Keep it as is, as gtkdocize is looking for GTK_DOC_CHECK at the start of a line. Keep gtk-doc optional The first argument is used to check for the gtkdocversion at configure time. The 2nd, optional argument is used by gtkdocize. The GTK_DOC_CHECK macro also adds several configure switches: --with-html-dir=PATH : path to installed docs --enable-gtk-doc : use gtk-doc to build documentation [default=no] --enable-gtk-doc-html : build documentation in html format [default=yes] --enable-gtk-doc-pdf : build documentation in pdf format [default=no] GTK-Doc is disabled by default! Remember to pass the option to the next configure run. Otherwise pregenerated documentation is installed (which makes sense for users but not for developers). Furthermore it is recommended that you have the following line inside you configure.ac script. This allows gtkdocize to automatically copy the macro definition for GTK_DOC_CHECK to your project. Preparation for gtkdocize Integration with automake First copy the Makefile.am from the examples sub directory of the gtkdoc-sources to your project's API documentation directory ( ./docs/reference/<package>). A local copy should be available under e.g. /usr/share/doc/gtk-doc-tools/examples/Makefile.am. If you have multiple doc-packages repeat this for each one. The next step is to edit the settings inside the Makefile.am. All the settings have a comment above that describes their purpose. Most settings are extra flags passed to the respective tools. Every tool has a variable of the form . All the tools support to list the supported parameters. Integration with autogen Most projects will have an autogen.sh script to setup the build infrastructure after a checkout from version control system (such as cvs/svn/git). GTK-Doc comes with a tool called gtkdocize which can be used in such a script. It should be run before autoheader, automake or autoconf. Running gtkdocize from autogen.sh When running gtkdocize it copies gtk-doc.make to your project root (or any directory specified by the option). It also checks you configure script for the GTK_DOC_CHECK invocation. This macro can be used to pass extra parameters to gtkdocize. Historically GTK-Doc was generating template files where developers entered the docs. This turned out to be not so good (e.g. the need for having generated files under version control). Since GTK-Doc 1.9 the tools can get all the information from source comments and thus the templates can be avoided. We encourage people to keep documentation in the code. gtkdocize supports now a option that chooses a makefile that skips tmpl usage totally. Besides adding the option directly to the command invocation, they can be added also to an environment variable called GTKDOCIZE_FLAGS or set as a 2nd parameter in GTK_DOC_CHECK macro in the configure script. If you have never changed file in tmpl by hand and migrating from older gtkdoc versions, please remove the directory (e.g. from version control system). Running the doc build After the previous steps it's time to run the build. First we need to rerun autogen.sh. If this script runs configure for you, then give it the option. Otherwise manually run configure with this option afterwards. The first make run generates several additional files in the doc-directories. The important ones are: <package>.types, <package>-docs.xml (in the past .sgml), <package>-sections.txt. Running the doc build Now you can point your browser to docs/reference/<package>/index.html. Yes, it's a bit disappointing still. But hang-on, during the next chapter we tell you how to fill the pages with life. Integration with version control systems As a rule of the thumb, it's those files you edit, that should go under version control. For typical projects it's these files: <package>.types, <package>-docs.xml (in the past .sgml), <package>-sections.txt, Makefile.am Integration with plain makefiles or other build systems In the case one does not want to use automake and therefore gtk-doc.mak one will need to call the gtkdoc tools in the right order in own makefiles (or other build tools). Documentation build steps One will need to look at the Makefile.am and gtk-doc.mak to pick the extra options needed. Documenting the code GTK-Doc uses source code comment with a special syntax for code documentation. Further it retrieves information about your project structure from other sources. During the next section you will find all information about the syntax of the comments. Documentation placement In the past most documentation had to be filled into files residing inside the tmpl directory. This has the disadvantages that the information is often not updated and also that the file tend to cause conflicts with version control systems. The avoid the aforementioned problems we suggest putting the documentation inside the sources. This manual will only describe this way of documenting code. The scanner can handle the majority of C headers fine. In the case of receiving warnings from the scanner that look like a special case, one can hint GTK-Doc to skip over them. GTK-Doc comment block Documentation comments A multiline comment that starts with an additional '*' marks a documentation block that will be processed by the GTK-Doc tools. GTK-Doc comment block The 'identifier' is one line with the name of the item the comment is related to. The syntax differs a little depending on the item. (TODO add table showing identifiers) The 'documentation' block is also different for each symbol type. Symbol types that get parameters such as functions or macros have the parameter description first followed by a blank line (just a '*'). Afterwards follows the detailed description. All lines (outside program listings and CDATA sections) just containing a ' *' (blank-asterisk) are converted to paragraph breaks. If you don't want a paragraph break, change that into ' * ' (blank-asterisk-blank-blank). This is useful in preformatted text (code listings). When documenting code, describe two aspects: What it is: The name for a class or function can sometimes be misleading for people coming from a different background. What it does: Tell about common uses. Put it in relation with the other API. One advantage of hyper-text over plain-text is the ability to have links in the document. Writing the correct markup for a link can be tedious though. GTK-Doc comes to help by providing several useful abbreviations. Use function() to refer to functions or macros which take arguments. Use @param to refer to parameters. Also use this when referring to parameters of other functions, related to the one being described. Use %constant to refer to a constant, e.g. %G_TRAVERSE_LEAFS. Use #symbol to refer to other types of symbol, e.g. structs and enums and macros which don't take arguments. Use #Object::signal to refer to a GObject signal. Use #Object:property to refer to a GObject property. Use #Struct.field to refer to a field inside a structure and #GObjectClass.foo_bar() to refer to a vmethod. If you need to use the special characters '<', '>', '()', '@', '%', or '#' in your documentation without GTK-Doc changing them you can use the XML entities "&lt;", "&gt;", "&lpar;", "&rpar;", "&commat;", "&percnt;" and "&num;" respectively or escape them with a backslash '\'. DocBook can do more than just links. One can also have lists, examples, headings, and images. As of version 1.20, the preferred way is to use a subset of the basic text formatting syntax called Markdown. On older GTK-Doc versions any documentation that includes Markdown will be rendered as is. For example, list items will appear as lines starting with a dash. In older GTK-Doc releases, if you need support for additional formatting, you would need to enable the usage of docbook SGML/XML tags inside doc-comments by putting or in the variable MKDB_OPTIONS inside Makefile.am. GTK-Doc comment block using Markdown * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new ("Gorgeous!"); * ]| */ ]]> More examples of what markdown tags are supported can be found in the GTK+ Documentation Markdown Syntax Reference. As already mentioned earlier GTK-Doc is for documenting public API. Thus one cannot write documentation for static symbols. Nevertheless it is good to comment those symbols too. This helps other to understand you code. Therefore we recommend to comment these using normal comments (without the 2nd '*' in the first line). If later the function needs to be made public, all one needs to do is to add another '*' in the comment block and insert the symbol name at the right place inside the sections file. Documenting sections Each section of the documentation contains information about one class or module. To introduce the component one can write a section block. The short description is also used inside the table of contents. All the @fields are optional. Section comment block SECTION:<name> The name links the section documentation to the respective part in the <package>-sections.txt file. The name give here should match the <FILE> tag in the <package>-sections.txt file. @short_description A one line description of the section, that later will appear after the links in the TOC and at the top of the section page. @title The section title defaults to <name> from the SECTION declaration. It can be overridden with the @title field. @section_id Overrides the use of title as a section identifier. For GObjects the <title> is used as a section_id and for other sections it is <MODULE>-<title>. @see_also A list of symbols that are related to this section. @stability An informal description of the stability level this API has. We recommend the use of one of these terms: Stable - The intention of a Stable interface is to enable arbitrary third parties to develop applications to these interfaces, release them, and have confidence that they will run on all minor releases of the product (after the one in which the interface was introduced, and within the same major release). Even at a major release, incompatible changes are expected to be rare, and to have strong justifications. Unstable - Unstable interfaces are experimental or transitional. They are typically used to give outside developers early access to new or rapidly changing technology, or to provide an interim solution to a problem where a more general solution is anticipated. No claims are made about either source or binary compatibility from one minor release to the next. Private - An interface that can be used within the GNOME stack itself, but that is not documented for end-users. Such functions should only be used in specified and documented ways. Internal - An interface that is internal to a module and does not require end-user documentation. Functions that are undocumented are assumed to be Internal. @include The #include files to show in the section synopsis (a comma separated list), overriding the global value from the section file or command line. This item is optional. @image The image to display at the top of the reference page for this section. This will often be some sort of a diagram to illustrate the visual appearance of a class or a diagram of its relationship to other classes. This item is optional. To avoid unnecessary recompilation after doc-changes put the section docs into the c-source where possible. Documenting symbols Each symbol (function, macro, struct, enum, signal and property) is documented in a separate block. The block is best placed close to the definition of the symbols so that it is easy to keep them in sync. Thus functions are usually documented in the c-source and macros, structs and enums in the header file. General tags You can add versioning information to all documentation elements to tell when an API was introduced, or when it was deprecated. Versioning Tags Since: Description since which version of the code the API is available. Deprecated: Paragraph denoting that this function should no be used anymore. The description should point the reader to the new API. (FIXME : Stability information) General tags Function comment block Please remember to: Document whether returned objects, lists, strings, etc, should be freed/unrefed/released. Document whether parameters can be NULL, and what happens if they are. Mention interesting pre-conditions and post-conditions where appropriate. Gtk-doc assumes all symbols (macros, functions) starting with '_' are private. They are treated like static functions. Also, take a look at GObject Introspection annotation tags: http://live.gnome.org/GObjectIntrospection/Annotations Function comment block Function tags Returns: Paragraph describing the returned result. @...: In case the function has variadic arguments, you should use this tag (@Varargs: does also work for historic reasons). Property comment block Property comment block Signal comment block Please remember to: Document when the signal is emitted and whether it is emitted before or after other signals. Document what an application might do in the signal handler. Signal comment block Struct comment block Struct comment block */ GtkWidget parent; /*< public >*/ gboolean bar; } FooWidget; ]]> Use /*< private >*/ before the private struct fields you want to hide. Use /*< public >*/ for the reverse behaviour. Struct comment blocks can also be used for GObjects and GObjectClasses. It is usually a good idea to add a comment block for a class, if it has vmethods (as this is how they can be documented). For the GObject itself one can use the related section docs, having a separate block for the instance struct would be useful if the instance has public fields. One disadvantage here is that this creates two index entries of the same name (the structure and the section). Enum comment block Enum comment block */ SOMETHING_COUNT } Something; ]]> Use /*< private >*/ before the private enum values you want to hide. Use /*< public >*/ for the reverse behaviour. Useful DocBook tags Here are some DocBook tags which are most useful when documenting the code. To link to another section in the GTK docs: Hash Tables ]]> The linkend is the SGML/XML id on the top item of the page you want to link to. For most pages this is currently the part ("gtk", "gdk", "glib") and then the page title ("Hash Tables"). For widgets it is just the class name. Spaces and underscores are converted to '-' to conform to SGML/XML. To refer to an external function, e.g. a standard C function: ... ]]> To include example code: Using a GHashTable. ... ]]> or possibly this, for very short code fragments which don't need a title: ... ]]> For the latter GTK-Doc also supports an abbreviation: To include bulleted lists: ... ... ]]> To include a note which stands out from the text: Make sure you free the data after use. ]]> To refer to a type: unsigned char ]]> To refer to an external structure (not one described in the GTK docs): XFontStruct ]]> To refer to a field of a structure: len ]]> To refer to a class name, we could possibly use: GtkWidget ]]> but you'll probably be using #GtkWidget instead (to automatically create a link to the GtkWidget page - see the abbreviations). To emphasize text: This is important ]]> For filenames use: /home/user/documents ]]> To refer to keys use: ControlL ]]> Filling the extra files There are a couple of extra files, that need to be maintained along with the inline source code comments: <package>.types, <package>-docs.xml (in the past .sgml), <package>-sections.txt. Editing the types file If your library or application includes GObjects, you want their signals, arguments/parameters and position in the hierarchy to be shown in the documentation. All you need to do, is to list the xxx_get_type functions together with their include inside the <package>.types file. Example types file snippet gtk_accel_label_get_type gtk_adjustment_get_type gtk_alignment_get_type gtk_arrow_get_type ]]> Since GTK-Doc 1.8 gtkdoc-scan can generate this list for you. Just add "--rebuild-types" to SCAN_OPTIONS in Makefile.am. If you use this approach you should not dist the types file nor have it under version control. Editing the master document GTK-Doc produces documentation in DocBook SGML/XML. When processing the inline source comments, the GTK-Doc tools generate one documentation page per class or module as a separate file. The master document includes them and place them in an order. While GTK-Doc creates a template master document for you, later run will not touch it again. This means that one can freely structure the documentation. That includes grouping pages and adding extra pages. GTK-Doc has now a test suite, where also the master-document is recreated from scratch. Its a good idea to look at this from time to time to see if there are some new goodies introduced there. Do not create tutorials as extra documents. Just write extra chapters. The benefit of directly embedding the tutorial for your library into the API documentation is that it is easy to link for the tutorial to symbol documentation. Apart chances are higher that the tutorial gets updates along with the library. So what are the things to change inside the master document? For a start is only a little. There are some placeholders (text in square brackets) there which you should take care of. Master document header MODULENAME Reference Manual for MODULENAME [VERSION] The latest version of this documentation can be found on-line at http://[SERVER]/MODULENAME/. [Insert title here] ]]> Editing the section file The section file is used to organise the documentation output by GTK-Doc. Here one specifies which symbol belongs to which module or class and control the visibility (public or private). The section file is a plain text file with XML-like syntax (using tags). Blank lines are ignored and lines starting with a '#' are treated as comment lines. The <FILE> ... </FILE> tag is used to specify the file name, without any suffix. For example, using '<FILE>gnome-config</FILE>' will result in the section declarations being output in the template file tmpl/gnome-config.sgml, which will be converted into the DocBook SGML/XML file sgml/gnome-config.sgml or the DocBook XML file xml/gnome-config.xml. (The name of the HTML file is based on the module name and the section title, or for GObjects it is based on the GObjects class name converted to lower case). The <TITLE> ... </TITLE> tag is used to specify the title of the section. It is only useful before the templates (if used) are initially created, since the title set in the template file overrides this. Also if one uses SECTION comment in the sources, this is obsolete. You can group items in the section by using the <SUBSECTION> tag. Currently it outputs a blank line between subsections in the synopsis section. You can also use <SUBSECTION Standard> for standard GObject declarations (e.g. the functions like g_object_get_type and macros like G_OBJECT(), G_IS_OBJECT() etc.). Currently these are left out of the documentation. You can also use <SUBSECTION Private> for private declarations which will not be output (it is a handy way to avoid warning messages about unused declarations). If your library contains private types which you don't want to appear in the object hierarchy and the list of implemented or required interfaces, add them to a Private subsection. Whether you would place GObject and GObjectClass like structs in public or Standard section depends if they have public entries (variables, vmethods). You can also use <INCLUDE> ... </INCLUDE> to specify the #include files which are shown in the synopsis sections. It contains a comma-separate list of #include files, without the angle brackets. If you set it outside of any sections, it acts for all sections until the end of the file. If you set it within a section, it only applies to that section. Controlling the result A GTK-Doc run generates report files inside the documentation directory. The generated files are named: <package>-undocumented.txt, <package>-undeclared.txt and <package>-unused.txt. All those are plain text files that can be viewed and postprocessed easily. The <package>-undocumented.txt file starts with the documentation coverage summary. Below are two sections divided by blank lines. The first section lists undocumented or incomplete symbols. The second section does the same for section docs. Incomplete entries are those, which have documentation, but where e.g. a new parameter has been added. The <package>-undeclared.txt file lists symbols given in the <package>-sections.txt but not found in the sources. Check if they have been removed or if they are misspelled. The <package>-unused.txt file lists symbol names, where the GTK-Doc scanner has found documentation, but does not know where to put it. This means that the symbol has not yet been added to the <package>-sections.txt file. Enable or add the line in Makefile.am. If at least GTK-Doc 1.9 is installed, this will run sanity checks during make check run. One can also look at the files produced by the source code scanner: <package>-decl-list.txt and <package>-decl.txt. The first one can be compared with the section file if that is manually maintained. The second lists all declarations from the headers. If a symbol is missing one could check if this file contains it. If the project is GObject based, one can also look into the files produced by the object scanner: <package>.args.txt, <package>.hierarchy.txt, <package>.interfaces.txt, <package>.prerequisites.txt and <package>.signals.txt. If there are missing symbols in any of those, one can ask GTK-Doc to keep the intermediate scanner file for further analysis, by running it as GTK_DOC_KEEP_INTERMEDIATE=1 make. Modernizing the documentation GTK-Doc has been around for quite some time. In this section we list new features together with the version since when it is available. GTK-Doc 1.9 When using xml instead of sgml, one can actually name the master document <package>-docs.xml. This version supports in Makefile.am. When this is enabled, the <package>-sections.txt is autogenerated and can be removed from the vcs. This only works nicely for projects that have a very regular structure (e.g. each .{c,h} pair will create new section). If one organize a project close to that updating a manually maintained section file can be as simple as running meld <package>-decl-list.txt <package>-sections.txt. Version 1.8 already introduced the syntax for documenting sections in the sources instead of the separate files under tmpl. This version adds options to switch the whole doc module to not use the extra tmpl build step at all, by using in configure.ac. GTK-Doc 1.10 This version supports in Makefile.am. When this is enabled, the <package>.types is autogenerated and can be removed from the vcs. When using this feature it is important to also setup the IGNORE_HFILES in Makefile.am for code that is build conditionally. GTK-Doc 1.16 This version includes a new tool called gtkdoc-check. This tool can run a set of sanity checks on your documentation. It is enabled by adding these lines to the end of Makefile.am. Enable gtkdoc-check GTK-Doc 1.20 Version 1.18 brought some initial markdown support. Using markdown in doc comments is less intrusive than writing docbook xml. This version improves a lot on this and add a lot more styles. The section that explains the comment syntax has all the details. Documenting other interfaces So far we have been using GTK-Doc to document the API of code. The next sections contain suggestions how the tools can be used to document other interfaces too. Command line options and man pages As one can generate man pages for a docbook refentry as well, it sounds like a good idea to use it for that purpose. This way the interface is part of the reference and one gets the man-page for free. Document the tool Create one refentry file per tool. Following our example we would call it meep/docs/reference/meeper/meep.xml. For the xml tags that should be used and can look at generated file in the xml subdirectory as well as examples e.g. in glib. Adding the extra configure check Extra configure checks Adding the extra makefile rules Extra configure checks DBus interfaces (FIXME: http://hal.freedesktop.org/docs/DeviceKit/DeviceKit.html, http://cgit.freedesktop.org/DeviceKit/DeviceKit/tree/doc/dbus) Frequently asked questions Vprašanje Odgovor No class hierarchy. The objects xxx_get_type() function has not been entered into the <package>.types file. Still no class hierarchy. Missing or wrong naming in <package>-sections.txt file (see explanation). Damn, I have still no class hierarchy. Is the object name (name of the instance struct, e.g. GtkWidget) part of the normal section (don't put this into Standard or Private subsections). No symbol index. Does the <package>-docs.{xml,sgml} contain a index that xi:includes the generated index? Symbols are not linked to their doc-section. Is the doc-comment using the correct markup (added #,% or ())? Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. A new class does not appear in the docs. Is the new page xi:included from <package>-docs.{xml,sgml}. A new symbol does not appear in the docs. Is the doc-comment properly formatted. Check for spelling mistakes in the begin of the comment. Check if the gtkdoc-fixxref warns about unresolvable xrefs. Check if the symbol is correctly listed in the <package>-sections.txt in a public subsection. A type is missing from the class hierarchy. If the type is listed in <package>.hierarchy but not in xml/tree_index.sgml then double check that the type is correctly placed in the <package>-sections.txt. If the type instance (e.g. GtkWidget) is not listed or incidentialy makred private it will not be shown. I get foldoc links for all gobject annotations. Check that xml/annotation-glossary.xml is xi:included from <package>-docs.{xml,sgml}. Parameter described in source code comment block but does not exist Check if the prototype in the header has different parameter names as in the source. multiple "IDs" for constraint linkend: XYZ Symbol XYZ appears twice in <package>-sections.txt file. Element typename in namespace '' encountered in para, but no template matches. Tools related to gtk-doc GtkDocPlugin - a Trac GTK-Doc integration plugin, that adds API docs to a trac site and integrates with the trac search. Gtkdoc-depscan - a tool (part of gtk-doc) to check used API against since tags in the API to determine the minimum required version. Version 1.1, March 2000 2000Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. GNU Free Documentation License 0. PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. This License is a kind of copyleft, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The Document, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as you. A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language. A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only. The Title Page means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. 2. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies. 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. 4. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: A Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. B List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). C State on the Title Page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices. F Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. H Include an unaltered copy of this License. I Preserve the section entitled History, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section entitled History in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. J Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the History section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. K In any section entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. M Delete any section entitled Endorsements. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version. N Do not retitle any existing section as Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. You may add a section entitled Endorsements, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard. You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version . 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled History in the various original documents, forming one section entitled History; likewise combine any sections entitled Acknowledgements, and any sections entitled Dedications. You must delete all sections entitled Endorsements. 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an aggregate, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. 8. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail. 9. TERMINATION You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. Addendum To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.
If you have no Invariant Sections, write with no Invariant Sections instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write no Front-Cover Texts instead of Front-Cover Texts being LIST; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gtk-doc-manual/fdl-appendix.xml0000644000373100047300000006472712301102114025402 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Version 1.1, March 2000 2000Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. GNU Free Documentation License 0. PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. This License is a kind of copyleft, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The Document, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as you. A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language. A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only. The Title Page means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. 2. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies. 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. 4. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: A Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. B List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). C State on the Title Page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices. F Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. H Include an unaltered copy of this License. I Preserve the section entitled History, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section entitled History in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. J Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the History section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. K In any section entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. M Delete any section entitled Endorsements. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version. N Do not retitle any existing section as Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. You may add a section entitled Endorsements, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard. You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version . 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled History in the various original documents, forming one section entitled History; likewise combine any sections entitled Acknowledgements, and any sections entitled Dedications. You must delete all sections entitled Endorsements. 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an aggregate, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. 8. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail. 9. TERMINATION You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. Addendum To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.
If you have no Invariant Sections, write with no Invariant Sections instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write no Front-Cover Texts instead of Front-Cover Texts being LIST; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-labels.page0000644000373100047300000000372612306123564024557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use labels to categorize your mail while keeping it in their folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using Labels

You can add colored labels to emails in order to categorize them. This is similar to Categories in the other Evolution windows.

You can search for messages with specific labels by using the quick search dropdown. Also, search folders can be created based on labels.

Adding a label to a message

To assign a label to a message, right-click the message, click Label, and choose the label to apply.

You can also quickly add a new label by choosing New Label.

Managing labels

You can add, edit and delete all labels under EditPreferencesMail PreferencesLabels. Note that you cannot remove the default labels.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/import-data.page0000644000373100047300000000200212306123564024600 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing data from another application. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Importing data from another application
Programi
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-received-notification.page0000644000373100047300000000403612306123565027563 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Options on notifications of newly received mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Zvočno obvestilo o prejemu nove pošte

Evolution always notifies you of new messages by adding a yellow star to the mailer icon in the window switcher.

Switcher layout when a new message has arrived

In order to also be notified of new messages in the GNOME Notification area at the bottom of the screen, make sure that EditPluginsMail Notification is enabled and that you have set your preferred options in the Configuration tab.

Switcher layout when a new message has arrived

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-webdav.page0000644000373100047300000000340012306123565025402 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using an online Webcal/WebDAV calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba koledarja WebDav

Calendars of this type are read-only.

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type On the Web.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

To izberite le, če želite dostopati do vsebine tudi, ko niste povezani na splet.

Enter the address of the calendar in the URL field.

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime:

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-alarms-and-reminders.page0000644000373100047300000000453012306123565030144 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting up reminder notifications for appointments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Opomniki sestankov
Splošne nastavitve

Under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksReminders you can select those calendars for which you want to receive reminder notifications. If you do not select a calendar, you will not receive reminders for any events in this calendar. You can also define whether to show a reminder for every appointment and for every birthday and anniversary.

Ročni opomniki:

Apart from the general settings you can also set up reminders in the appointment editor for certain appointments only:

Click OptionsReminders or press the Reminder button in the toolbar.

From the dropdown menu, choose either one of the available default options when to show a notification reminder, or choose Customize.

In case of Customize, the reminder can be a popup, a sound played, or a program ran. You can also define whether the reminder should be repeated.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-local.page0000644000373100047300000000254212306123565025277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje krajevnega adresarja. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje krajevnega adresarja

To add another local address book to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewAddress Book.

Select the type On This Computer.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The address book will be added to the list of address books in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/xinclude-filter-vfolder-conditions.xml0000644000373100047300000001033312306123565031156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

Pošiljatelj:

The sender's email address or the name of the sender.

Prejemniki:

The recipients of the message.

Kp:

Only the CC recipients of the message.

Skp:

Only the BCC recipients of the message. Obviously this can only be applied to outgoing filters.

Sender or Recipients:

The sender's email address or the name of the sender or the recipients of the message.

Zadeva:

The subject line of the message.

Določena glava:

Any header including custom ones.

If a message uses a header more than once, Evolution pays attention only to the first instance, even if the message defines the header differently the second time. For example, if a message declares the Resent-From: header as "engineering@example.com" and then restates it as "marketing@example.com", Evolution filters as though the second declaration did not occur. To filter on messages that use headers multiple times, use a regular expression.

Telo sporočila:

Searches in the actual text of the message.

Izraz:

(For programmers only) Match a message according to an expression you write in the Scheme language used to define filters in Evolution.

Datum pošiljanja:

Filters messages according to the date on which they were sent. First, choose the conditions you want a message to meet, such as before a given time or after a given time. Then choose the time. The filter compares the message's time stamp to the system clock when the filter is run, or to a specific time and date you choose from a calendar. You can also have it look for a message within a range of time relative to the filter, such as two to four days ago.

Datum prejema:

This works the same way as the Date Sent option, except that it compares the time you received the message with the dates you specify.

Label:

Messages can have labels of Important, Work, Personal, To Do, or Later. You can set labels with other filters or manually.

Rezultat:

Sets the message score to any whole number greater than 0. You can have one filter set or change a message score, and then set up another filter to move the messages you have scored. A message score is not based on anything in particular: it is simply a number you can assign to messages so other filters can process them.

Velikost (kB):

Sorts based on the size of the message in kilobytes.

Stanje:

Filters according to the status of a message. The status can be Replied To, Draft, Important, Read, or Junk.

Follow Up:

Checks whether the message is flagged for follow-up.

Completed On:

Priloge:

Checks whether there is an attachment for the email.

Mailing List:

Filters based on the mailing list the message came from. This filter might miss messages from some list servers, because it checks for the X-BeenThere header, which is used to identify mailing lists or other redistributors of mail. Mail from list servers that do not set X-BeenThere properly are not be caught by these filters.

Regex Match:

(For programmers only) If you know your way around a regex, or regular expression, this option allows you to search for complex patterns of letters, so that you can find, for example, all words that start with a and end with m, and are between six and fifteen letters long, or all messages that declare a particular header twice. For information about how to use regular expressions, check the man page for the grep command.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-mh-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000430112306123565033152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for MH-format mail directories accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. MH-format mail directories receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the directory by clicking on the button next to Path in the Configuration section. Some default folders are available in the list. If the directory is not among those folders, choose the last option Other.... This will open a directory chooser window.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-write-new-message.page0000644000373100047300000000332512306123565030501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Writing a new email to send to a recipient. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Composing a new message

You can start writing a new email message by clicking FileNewMail Message, by pressing ShiftCtrlM, or by clicking New in the toolbar.

Enter an email address in the To: field. If you want to enter multiple addresses, separate them by commas. See for more information on sending messages to more than one person.

After you have written your message, click Send or press CtrlReturn.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-enable-html-format.page0000644000373100047300000000344212306123565030614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Enable HTML format in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Enabling HTML format

You can change the format of an email message from plain text to HTML in the email composer by choosing FormatHTML from the menu bar.

Alternately, you also can change the first dropdown list below the Subject line from Plain Text to HTML.

If you choose HTML format, a second tool bar will be displayed below the Subject line with HTML-only options.

To send all your mail as HTML by default, enable EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesDefault BehaviorFormat messages in HTML.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-pop.page0000644000373100047300000000576012306123565026774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a POP mail account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. POP mail account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (POP accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (POP accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (POP accounts) Defaults
Security (POP accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-vertical-view.page0000644000373100047300000000367312306123565026100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the mail view for widescreen displays. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Navpični pogled

Evolution provides a vertical view in addition to the classical view. In the vertical view, the message preview pane is located at the right side of the message list when compared to the classical view where the message preview pane is placed below the message list. Vertical view enables you to use the extra width of wide screen monitors.

To switch to vertical view, click ViewPreviewVertical View.

In vertical view, the message list contains double lines of compressed headers, which enables you to consume the extra width in the preview column. The compressed columns have Sender Name and Email, Attachment Icon, Date and Subject in the second line.

To switch back to classical view, click ViewPreviewClassical View.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-displaying-images-in-html.page0000644000373100047300000000625412306123565030271 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On embedded pictures in received HTML messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Slike v sporočilih HTML

When someone sends you HTML mail that includes an image in the body of the message (for example, the welcome message in your Inbox), Evolution displays the image inside the message.

Nalaganje slik

Some images are links in a message, rather than being part of the message. Evolution can download those images from the Internet, but does not do so unless you request it. This is because remotely hosted images can be slow to load and display, and can even be used by spammers to track who reads the email. Not automatically loading images helps protect your privacy.

To load the images for one message, click ViewLoad Images or press CtrlI.

To set the default action for loading images, go to EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHTML MessagesLoading Images.

Automatically download images in emails from people you know

You can download images from emails sent by your contacts. To do this, go to EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHTML MessagesLoading Images. Enable the Load images only in messages from contacts option.

Next, go to EditPreferencesContactsAutocompletion. Enable autocompletion by ticking the Always show address of the autocompleted contact checkbox.

Shranjevanje slik

To save an image that is embedded in an HTML email, right-click on the image and click Save Image....

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/minimize-to-system-tray.page0000644000373100047300000000337712306123565027140 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On minimizing Evolution to the notification area. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Minimizing Evolution to the system tray

GNOME, by default, has a notification area which includes an applet that informs users of any system updates, changes, or events. This includes the arrival of email messages on Evolution. You can refer to this built-in feature of GNOME for any email notifications.

In GNOME version 2 you may modify the notification area and set it up to become a system tray by using external applications which might be available for installation in the software management tool of your distribution. Available options are for example Tint2. This is no longer possible in GNOME 3.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/memos-usage-delete-memo.page0000644000373100047300000000217312306123565027006 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting a memo from your memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Deleting a Memo

If you want to delete a memo in your memo lists, right-click on the memo and select Delete, or click on the memo and click Delete in the tool bar, or click EditDelete Memo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/using-categories.page0000644000373100047300000000674612306123565025653 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba in upravljanje kategorij za sestanke, stike, zapiske in opravila. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba kategorij

Another way to group contacts, appointments, tasks and memos (summarized by the term "objects" in the following text) is to mark them as belonging to different categories. You can mark an object as being in several categories or no category at all. For example in your address book, you put a friend in the "Business" category because he works with you and the "Friends" category because he is a friend.

Da so prikazani samo predmeti v določeni kategoriji, izberite ustrezno kategorijo v vrstici hitrega iskanja.
Nastavljanje kategorij predmeta

To mark an object as belonging to a category,

Double-click the object to bring up the corresponding editor.

Click Categories.... (If this button is not available, select ViewCategories.)

Select the category from the list. You can select as many or as few categories as you like.
Dodajanje in upravljanje kategorij

If the default list of categories does not suit your needs, you can add your own categories either directly via EditAvailable Categories, or indirectly when editing an object:

Dvokliknite poljuben predmet za priklic ustreznega urejevalnika.

Click Categories.... (If this button is not available, select ViewCategories.)

Vnesite novo kategorijo v vnosno polje na vrhu.

Kliknite V redu.

Sedaj lahko vidite kategorijo v besedilnem polju Kategorije v urejevalniku.

Kliknite V redu.

In the Categories Editor you can edit or set the color and icon for each category available by clicking Edit at the bottom of the Categories window. Press Delete to delete categories from the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-usage-delete-task.page0000644000373100047300000000226312306123565027020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Brisanje opravila s seznama opravil. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Brisanje opravila

If you want to delete a task in your task lists, right-click on the task and select Delete, or click on the task and click Delete in the tool bar or press CtrlD, or click EditDelete Task.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/credits.page0000644000373100047300000000543612306123565024033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zasluge in zahvale Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Zasluge in zahvale
Avtorji uporabniške dokumentacije <app>Evolution</app>

André Klapper

April Gonzalez

Barbara M. Tobias

Phil Bull
Prevajalci uporabniške dokumentacije <app>Evolution</app>

(Not applicable to the English version)

Avtorji prejšnje različice

Aaron Weber

Akhil Laddha

André Klapper

Duncan Mak

Ettore Perazzoli

Francisco Javier F. Serrador

Jessica Prabhakar

Kevin Breit

Mark Moulder

Novell, Inc.

Radhika Nair

Srinivasa Ragavan
Podatki o stiku

Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME:

Website

Mailing list

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050712306123565023340 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/sync-with-other-devices.page0000644000373100047300000001372312306123565027060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Synchronize Evolution data with handheld devices and mobile phones. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Synchronize <app>Evolution</app> with other devices

There are currently no "recommended instructions" for users.

Many distributions provide the application SyncEvolution that can be used in combination with devices that support SyncML.

In general it is recommended to use applications and devices that both support the ActiveSync protocol (such as SyncEvolution). A list of collaborative software is available on Wikipedia.

If you can provide good practices or more information on this topic feel free to file a bug report in GNOME's bug tracking system.

Palm

To synchronize with a Palm OS device like the PalmPilot(TM) and the Handspring Visor several steps are needed: First, you need to enable synchronization. Second, your computer needs to recognize and access your handheld. Third, you should decide what sort of synchronization behavior you want.

Omogočitev usklajevanja

If you have not used a handheld device with your computer before, you need to configure it via EditGNOME Pilot Synchronization.... Make sure that you have read and write permissions on the device, which is normally in /dev/pilot. If that does not work, check in /dev/ttyS0 if you have a serial connection, or in /dev/ttyUSB1 for a USB connection. You can do this by becoming root user and adding your username to the group that owns this device node. For a USB device on sync, two device nodes are created, ttyUSB0 and ttyUSB1. The second node is the one to be used in configuring the device.

Selecting Conduits

After your computer and your Palm OS device are communicating, select the conduits you want under the Pilot Conduits section. You can use conduits to synchronize data with several applications; the Evolution conduits are labeled EAddress for the contacts in your address book; ECalendar for your calendar; and ETodo for your task list.

Click Enable, then click Settings to change what the conduit does when activated. Your options can vary depending on the conduit, but typically they are as follows:

Onemogočeno: ne stori ničesar.

Synchronize: Copy new data from the computer to the handheld, and from the handheld to the computer. Remove items that were on both systems but have been deleted on one.

Copy From Pilot: If there is any new data on the handheld device, copy it to the computer.

Copy To Pilot: Copy new data from the computer to the handheld.

Select the behavior you want for each conduit you choose to use. If you're not sure, use Synchronize.

Synchronizing Information

Use the following procedure to synchronize the data on your Palm OS device with the data you store in Evolution.

If you want to back up your information before synchronizing, make a copy of the .local/share/evolution directory inside your home directory.

Put your handheld device in its cradle and press the HotSync button.

If you use Palm OS version 4.0 and have password protection turned on for your handheld device, you might encounter trouble synchronizing. If this happens, try turning off password protection on your handheld, synchronize it with your desktop computer, and then re-enable password protection on your handheld.

Now your Palm OS device will synchronize data with Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-local.page0000644000373100047300000000277312306123565024614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding another local task or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Adding another local task or memo list

To add another local task list to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Kliknite DatotekaNovSeznam opravil ali DatotekaNovoSeznam zapiskov.

Select the type On This Computer.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The task list will be added to the list of task lists in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-timezones.page0000644000373100047300000000451312306123565026155 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using time zones in the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using time zones

Evolution supports using multiple time zones.

Setting your global timezone(s)

By default Evolution uses the system-wide time zone. This can be changed under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksGeneralTimeTime zone.

If you deal a lot with people in another specific time zone you can display that second time zone in the day view of the calendar. You can set a second time zone under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksGeneralTimeSecond zone.

Setting a timezone for an appointment

You can also configure time zone information specific to each appointment. To do that, add a new or edit an existing appointment and click the globe button to customize the time zone that the time exists in. For example, if you live in New York but have a telephone meeting set for noon with someone in California, you need to make sure that your schedules are coordinated. Setting time zones on a per-appointment basis helps avoid that potential confusion.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-unix-mbox-spool-directory.page0000644000373100047300000000434012306123565034033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for standard Unix mbox spool directory accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Standard Unix mbox spool directory receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the directory by clicking on the button next to Path in the Configuration section. Some default folders are available in the list. If the directory is not among those folders, choose the last option Other.... This will open a directory chooser window.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in INBOX.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-moving-emails.page0000644000373100047300000000320712306123565026057 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Moving emails from one folder to another. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Moved emails are still shown in the original folder

If your IMAP mail server does not yet support IMAP's "move" feature which was introduced in January 2013, Evolution "moves" messages by copying and deleting emails. Deleting means "marking messages for deletion" so all the original messages are retained until you expunge the emails marked for deletion.

See the topic on deleting emails for instructions on how to expunge email messages. Note that this applies to other types of accounts as well.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000154712306123565024544 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On organizing and finding your data in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Razvrščanje in organiziranje usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-meetings-delegating.page0000644000373100047300000000307212306123565030053 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vprašajte nekoga drugega, da naj vodi srečanje. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Pooblaščevanje srečanj

Only attendees of a meeting can delegate a meeting, but not the organizer of a meeting.

Desno kliknite na srečanje, ki ga želite pooblastiti.

Kliknite Pooblasti za srečanje.

Določite stike, ki jih želite pooblastiti za srečanje.

Kliknite V redu.

Each contact receives a copy of the meeting invitation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/xinclude-searching.xml0000644000373100047300000000370012306123565026026 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Shranjena iskanja

If you search for something rather often, you will prefer not to type it many times. In this case you can use saved searches.

To save your search results, either click Save instead of OK in the Search dialog, or in case the search results are already displayed, select SearchSave Search. From now on this search will be directly available from the Search menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates-reply.page0000644000373100047300000000313212306123566031704 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use one of your templates for replying to a message Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using a Template as a Reply

Right-click the message you are replying to, then click Templates.

This option lists all the message templates in the Templates folder.

Select the message template of your choice. Make changes if required in the email composer window that will open.

Kliknite Pošlji.

When you select a message template for replying, the subject of the reply is preserved.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-search-folders-enable.page0000644000373100047300000000254012306123566027435 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Activate search folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Enable the Search Folders Functionality

In the unlikely case that there is no Search folders top-level node displayed at the bottom of the mail folder list you have to enable EditPreferencesMail AccountsSearch Folders.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-meetings-replying-to-invitation.page0000644000373100047300000000465212306123566032411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Accepting and replying to a meeting invitation. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Replying to a Meeting Request

Meeting requests are sent as attachments and displayed as the body of an email. All the details about the event are shown, including time and dates.

You can choose whether and how to reply to the invitation and add a personal comment to your reply. Available options are to Decline, Tentatively Accept (Tentative), or Accept. You can also decide whether the time of the meeting will still be shown as free in your calendar.

If the meeting request already includes a reminder you can import the reminder to your calendar by enabling Inherit reminder.

If you click Accept the event is added automatically to the calendar that you have chosen.

After you have added the meeting to your calendar, you can make changes to the meeting, but if the original organizer sends out an update, your changes might be overwritten.

Under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksMeeting InvitationsConflict Search you can define which calendars are used for warning you of meeting conflicts.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-searching-attachment-type.page0000644000373100047300000000222012306123566030353 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Unfortunately this is not possible. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Searching for emails with a specific attachment type

There currently is no way to do search for emails with a specific type of attachment (for example searching for all emails that have a PDF attachment).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-display-settings.page0000644000373100047300000000401012306123566027010 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Options for displaying task completion and due dates. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Prikaz opravil

The following task-related options are available under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksTasks.

Danes zapadla opravila:

Select the color for tasks due today.

Zapadla opravila:

Select the color for overdue tasks.

Skrij dokončana opravila po:

Select this option to have completed tasks hidden after a period of time measured in days, hours, or minutes. If you do not select this option, completed tasks remain in your task list, marked as complete.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-several-pop-accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000357112306123566027367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to split and sort mail when using more than one local account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Separating POP mail for more than one account

It is not possible to have separate accounts in the accounts and folder list pane. Evolution only has one unique inbox for incoming email.

You can either use IMAP instead of POP, or move incoming emails into different folders by creating folders and creating filters: Create a new folder and create two subfolders (for incoming and for sent mail of that account). Now set up an incoming filter via EditMessage Filters...Add to move incoming mail to the incoming folder by filtering on the recipient's address and set up an outgoing filter to move outgoing mail to the sent folder by filtering on the sender's address.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-calendar-sending-invitations.page0000644000373100047300000000442112306123566031053 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending invitations for appointments to contacts via email. Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Pošiljanje vabil po e-pošti

If you create an event in the calendar component, you can then send invitations to the attendee list through the Evolution email tool. The invitation card is sent as an attachment in iCal format.

To send an invitation, right-click on the entry in the calendar and choose Forward as iCalendar.

When you receive an invitation, you have several options:

Sprejmi:

Indicates you will attend the meeting. When you click the OK button, the meeting is entered into your calendar.

Poskusno sprejmi:

Indicates you will probably attend the meeting. When you click the OK button, the meeting is entered into your calendar, but is marked as tentative.

Odkloni:

Indicates you are unable to attend the meeting. The meeting is not entered into your calendar when you click OK, although your response is sent to the meeting host if you have selected the Send reply to sender option.

Odgovori pošiljatelju:

Select this option if you want your response sent to the meeting organizers.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-caldav.page0000644000373100047300000000363512306123566025377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba spletnih koledarjev CalDAV. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba koledarjev CalDAV

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Izberite vrsto CalDAV.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

To izberite le, če želite dostopati do vsebine tudi, ko niste povezani na splet.

Enter the address of the calendar in the URL field.

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime in naslov e-pošte.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-imap-plus.page0000644000373100047300000000643112306123566030102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit an IMAP+ mail account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. IMAP+ mail account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (IMAP+ accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (IMAP+ accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (IMAP+ accounts) Defaults
Security (IMAP+ accounts) Varnost
Other settings (IMAP+ accounts) Druge nastavitve

Other account related settings that are not located in the Account Editor:

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/memos-usage-edit-memo.page0000644000373100047300000000243512306123566026473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing a memo in your memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Editing a Memo

If you want to change a memo that already exists in your memo lists,

Double-click on the memo that you want to edit in the list of memos, or right-click on the memo and click Open Memo.

Edit the memo information.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/exchange-placeholder.page0000644000373100047300000000212012306123566026424 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Povezovanje s strežniki Exchange Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Povezovanje s strežniki Exchange

For topics not covered here please refer to the old Evolution manual.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-reading-keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000725212306123566030560 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Keyboard shortcuts that can save you some time when reading mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using shortcut keys to read mail
Ogled sporočila

In the Mail window you read a message by selecting it in the message list. If you would like to see the message in its own window, either double-click it, press Enter, or press CtrlO.

Navigating in a message

To read mail with the keyboard, you can press the Spacebar to page down and press Backspace to page up while reading an email. Ensure that you use the keys when the message list is focused.

Navigating in a folder in the message list

Navigate in the message list by using the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Navigating in a folder's unread mail in the message list

To go to the next or previous unread messages, press the period (.) or comma (,) keys. On some keyboards, these keys are also marked with the > and < symbols, which is a convenient way to remember that they move you forward and backward in your message list. You can also use the right square bracket (]) for the next unread message, and the left square bracket ([) for the previous unread message.

Navigating in unread mail across folders

You can easily read the unread messages in all the mail folders by using the Spacebar.

When you are in the Mail window, the Spacebar has the following behavior:

When you press the Spacebar for the first time, it takes you to the next unread message.

If the message is more than one screen long, the Spacebar works as Page Down.

If you press the Spacebar after you reach the bottom of the page, it takes you to the next unread message.

If there are no more unread messages in the mailbox, pressing the Spacebar takes you to the next unread message in the next folder.

If new messages arrive in a number of folders, the Spacebar toggles between those folders. This feature allows you to switch to the next unread message in a different folder without clicking the folder.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/backup-restore.page0000644000373100047300000000476612306123566025332 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Varnostno kopiranje in obnovitev podatkov ter nastavitev Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij in obnavljanje

You can back up your Evolution data. The backup saves your settings, mail, contacts, tasks, memos and calendars. It will be stored in a gzip-compressed tar archive file.

Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij

Select FileBack up Evolution Data....

Choose a filename and the folder where you want to save the backup file, and click Save.

You will be asked to close Evolution. Answer with Yes.

Note that your spam filtering settings are not included in the backup file, as these settings are not controlled by Evolution and as developers of spam filtering tools might change implementation details. If you use Bogofilter you will need to back up ~/.bogofilter/. If you use SpamAssassin you will need to back up ~/.spamassassin/.
Obnavljanje

Select FileRestore Evolution Data....

Izberite datoteko in kliknite Odpri.

You will be asked to close Evolution. Answer with Yes.

In the first-run assistant, you can restore Evolution data from a backup file.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-displaying-character-encodings.page0000644000373100047300000000433312306123566031356 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 When letters in an email are not shown correctly or missing. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Nabori znakov
Prejeta e-pošta

If the email application of the sender is broken or misconfigured, plain text emails might not include information about the character encoding used. If you receive such messages, choose ViewCharacter Encoding from the main menu and change the currently chosen character encoding to an appropriate one that might be the encoding used by the sender. You have to make this change every time you view the message.

To make this the default setting, go to EditPreferencesMail PreferencesGeneralMessage DisplayDefault character encoding.

Pošiljanje pošte

In the unlikely event that you would like to change the default character encoding for messages that you send, go to EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesDefault BehaviorCharacter encoding.

This setting only refers to Plain Text messages as HTML messages always use UTF-8 encoding.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-not-sent.page0000644000373100047300000000330012306123566025052 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Possible reasons why emails are not sent. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Mail is not sent

There can be several reasons why emails are not sent:

Invalid email address. Check if all the addresses listed as mail recipients are correct. If the message contains a wrong or invalid email address, the message will not be sent.

Incorrect SMTP settings. Verify if the settings used for outgoing messages is correct. Using the incorrect server address or authentication method may prevent emails from being sent

Offline status. Evolution may be offline. Check on the Send and Receive button; if it is greyed out, then you are offline. To go online, go to FileWork online. You should now be able to use the Send and Receive button.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/problems-reporting-bugs.page0000644000373100047300000000437712306123566027172 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako poročati o napakah v programu. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Kako poročati o hroščih

If you do not need help for configuration but you are sure that you have found a mistake or wrong behavior in the Evolution software, or if you want to request a feature, you can file a report in the GNOME bug tracking system. Note that this requires registration first. Please try to avoid filing duplicates and check the bug writing guidelines first.

Also note that GNOME distributions sometimes introduce their own changes in Evolution that are not included in GNOME Evolution. This is hard to recognize for users but if you are aware of it please file a bug report in the bug tracker of your GNOME distribution instead.

When reporting bugs exact information is welcome as it makes it easier for others to reproduce and fix the issue. If possible please include information such as the Evolution version (under HelpAbout), your distribution, and exact steps to reproduce the problem, click by click. See the Bug Writing Guidelines for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-displaying-sender-photograph.page0000644000373100047300000000437312306123566031110 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display a picture of the sender in the message header area. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Glave sporočil s fotografijami

Evolution automatically displays photographs of the sender of an email at the right side of the message header if the sender already embedded a photograph in the message.

You can also manually enable displaying the photograph of the sender of an email if the sender is in one of your address books and has a photograph stored.

To enable this functionality, select EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHeadersShow the photograph of sender in the message preview.

If there are multiple matches for a contact, the first one is always used.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-microsoft-exchange.page0000644000373100047300000000233212306123566031754 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Microsoft Exchange account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Microsoft Exchange account settings

Please first read Choosing the right connector to find out about the right Exchange account type for you.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-usage-edit-task.page0000644000373100047300000000244612306123566026507 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Urejanje opravila na seznamu opravil. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Urejanje opravila

If you want to change a task that already exists in your task lists,

Double-click on the task that you want to edit in the list of tasks, or right-click on the task and click Open Task.

Urejanje podatkov o nalogi.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-using-several-calendars.page0000644000373100047300000000407712306123566030664 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding and using more than one calendar and different types. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Raba več koledarjev

You can have multiple calendars and overlay them one over the other. For example, you might have a schedule of events for work, one for home, and one for your favorite sports team. The side bar lists those calendars, and you can select or deselect the boxes next to them to show and hide the appointments in your calendar view. By hiding and showing different sets of appointments, you can be sure to avoid conflicts, while keeping a minimum of clutter in your view.

Appointments for each calendar appear in different color.

You can also use calendars that are not on your computer, such as on the internet or in a local network.

For example, the icalshare.com website has an extensive list of shared online calendars, including national and religious holidays, phases of the moon, sports, and local and regional events.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-layout-general-formatting.page0000644000373100047300000000454712306123566031250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 General formatting options for the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Splošne možnosti oblikovanja

The following options are available under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksGeneral.

Čas

Oblika časa:

Choose between twelve-hour (AM/PM) and twenty-four-hour time formats.

Time zone and Second zone:

The city you are located in, and optionally a second city.
Delovni teden

Začetek tedna:

Select the day to display as the first in each week.

Delovni dnevi:

Define which week days are work days.

Začetek dneva:

Define at which time your work day begins.

Konec dneva:

Define at which time your work day ends.
Opozorila

If you want to be warned before you delete any appointment, select this option.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/exporting-data-calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000260612306123566027070 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export calendar data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Izvažanje podatkov koledarja

To export a complete calendar, right-click on the calendar in the list of calendars and click Save as. Available formats are iCalendar format (ICS, recommended), comma separated values (CSV), and RDF format.

If you want to export only one appointment (or task or memo), either select the appointment and select FileSave as iCalendar..., or right-click on the appointment and click Save as iCalendar....

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/index.page0000644000373100047300000000636412306123566023507 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Evolution <media type="image" its:translate="no" src="figures/evolutionlogo.png"/> Evolution Mail and Calendar Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. <media type="image" its:translate="no" src="figures/evolutionlogo.png"> <span its:translate="yes">Evolution logo</span> </media> Evolution Mail and Calendar
Prvi koraki
Upravljanje s pošto
Napredno upravljanje s pošto
Advanced Mail Management (IMAP+ accounts) IMAP+
Sestavljanje sporočil
Napredno sestavljanje sporočil
Upravljanje koledarjev
Napredno upravljanje koledarjev
Upravljanje stikov
Memos and Tasks Management
Data Migration and Synchronization
Poslovna okolja
Microsoft Exchange
Tracking down Problems
Pogosta vprašanja in težave s pošto
Pogosta druga vprašanja in težave
Nadaljnje branje
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-usenet-news.page0000644000373100047300000000657312306123566031241 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Usenet news accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Usenet news receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

You should enable this option if your server supports it.

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want Evolution to remember your password.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

Select if you want to show folders in short notation.

For example, comp.os.linux would appear as c.o.linux.

Select if you want to show relative folder names in the subscriptions window.

If you select to show relative folder names, only the name of the folder is displayed. For example the folder evolution.mail would appear as evolution.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-custom-header-lines.page0000644000373100047300000000464612306123566031016 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using custom fields in the header of composed messages Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Glave sporočil po meri

You can add arbitrary header lines to outgoing emails.

Enabling and managing custom headers

To set up the Custom Header plugin:

Izberite UrediVstavki.

Enable Custom Header.

Click the Configuration tab.

You can add, edit, or remove the header fields. For every header field you add, you can specify the keys and values. The key is used as the title of the Custom Header. You can enter multiple values for the keys. You must use a semicolon to separate every value you enter.
Inserting custom headers in a message

Click NewMail Message or press ShiftCtrlM to open the message composer window.

Select InsertCustom Header.

In the Email Custom Header window, you can view all the defined header fields and values.

Set the values for the header fields by using the dropdown list.

Kliknite V redu.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/exporting-data.page0000644000373100047300000000165612306123566025325 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Exporting data from <em>Evolution</em> usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/data-storage.page0000644000373100047300000000335612306123566024751 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Where does Evolution store my data on the harddisk? Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Data storage locations

This is only interesting for advanced users who want to debug problems.

Evolution 3.6 and later stores its data according to the XDG Base Directory Specification. By default this means:

The user's data files

$HOME/.local/share/evolution

 Various configuration and state files

$HOME/.config/evolution

 Nastavite računa

$HOME/.config/evolution/sources

 Disposable data caches

$HOME/.cache/evolution

 Configuration settings in GSettings

$HOME/.config/dconf

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-spam-marking.page0000644000373100047300000000510712306123566025700 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to mark unwanted junk and spam mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Pete Biggs Barbara Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Marking Mail as Junk

While SpamAssassin comes with a set of predefined rules, Bogofilter needs to be taught first before it will automatically filter junk mail. If you only train Bogofilter on bad messages, it will assume all mail is bad (because it does not know any difference) hence it will not make any decisions until the database is sufficiently large to determine what is and is not spam. In any case, when you first start using junk mail blocking, check the Junk mail folder frequently to be sure that legitimate mail doesn't get flagged as junk mail.

Manually Marking Junk Mail

If Evolution misses junk mail, right-click the message, then click Mark as Junk, or mark the message and press CtrlJ or click the Junk button in the tool bar. When you correct it, the filter can recognize similar messages in the future, and becomes more accurate as time goes on.

If legitimate mail is incorrectly flagged, remove it from the Junk folder by right-clicking it and selecting Mark as Not Junk or pressing ShiftCtrlJ, or mark the message and click the Not Junk button.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-meetings-sending-invitation.page0000644000373100047300000001043012306123567031557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending a Meeting Invitation. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sending a Meeting Invitation

When you create a meeting (group appointment), you can specify the attendees in several categories, such as "chair" or "required". When you save the meeting listing, each attendee is sent an email with the meeting information, which also gives them the option to respond.

If you do not need to collect attendance information when you're scheduling an event, and would rather just announce the event, right-click the meeting and select Forward as iCalendar. This opens a new email message with the event notification attached as an announcement. Recipients can add the event to their calendars with one click, but it will not automatically send you email about whether they plan to attend.

To schedule a meeting:

Click FileNewMeeting.

If you have multiple email accounts, select the one to use by selecting an item in the Organizer field.

Select a calendar in the Calendar drop-down list.

Click Add to add the email addresses of people you want to invite.

Click View in the menu bar to show or hide the Type, Role, Status, and RSVP fields.

Enter a brief summary in the Summary field.

(Optional) Type a location in the Location field.

To select this event as an all day event, click OptionsAll Day Event, or click the All Day Event button on the toolbar.

Izberite datum in čas.

If the event is not an all day event, select either For to specify the duration, or select Until to specify the ending time of the event.

(Optional) Enter a description in the Description field.

To query free/busy information for the attendees, click the Free/Busy button on the toolbar, or click OptionsFree/Busy.

Click Save to save the meeting.

An email is sent out to all the recipients, inviting them to your event.

You can also define a time zone, a category, a reminder, a recurrence, or a classification for the event, or add an attachment.

In Evolution, a meeting can have only one organizer, and only the organizer can add participants to that meeting. Though it is possible to change the organizer of a meeting, this is not recommended as a means to invite additional participants to meetings. If you want to invite additional people to a meeting and are not that meeting's organizer, it is recommended that you forward the invitation message you received from the original meeting organiser to additional participants.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-html.page0000644000373100047300000000425412306123567026106 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing fonts, using colors, and inserting images, tables and links. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Formatting emails (in Plain Text and HTML)

Text formatting tools for basic alignment and paragraph formatting are located in the tool bar below the Subject line. They also appear in the Insert and Format menus.

The icons in the tool bar are explained in tooltips which appear when you hold your mouse pointer over the buttons.

Normally, you cannot set text color or size or embed pictures in messages. However, most newer email applications can do this by using HTML format, which is the format that also web pages use.

Some people do not have HTML-capable mail clients, or prefer not to receive HTML-enhanced mail because it is slower to download and display. Because of this, Evolution sends plain text unless you explicitly ask for HTML.

Plain Text Formatting Options
HTML-only Formatting Options
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-using-several-tasklists.page0000644000373100047300000000272312306123567030322 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding and using more than one task list or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using several task lists or memo lists

You can have multiple task or memo lists and choose which of your lists get displayed. For example, you might have tasks for work, tasks for home, and tasks for the singing club of which you are a member. The side bar shows these lists, and you can select or deselect any of the boxes next to them to show and hide the corresponding tasks or memos in your view.

Tasks and memos from each task or memo list appear as different colors.

You can also use lists that are not on your computer, such as on the internet.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-send-and-receive-manual.page0000644000373100047300000000307512306123567027701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Force sending and receiving emails. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Manually send and receive messages

To receive new messages from the mail server and to send messages you have written that are in the local Outbox, click the Send / Receive button in the toolbar, or press F12, or choose FileSend / Receive from the main menu.

To send and receive only for one of your mail accounts, or to only send or only receive, click the small down-arrow next to the Send / Receive button and choose the corresponding option.

If you just want to send messages which are in your Outbox, you can right-click on the Outbox and click Flush Outbox.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-usenet-news.page0000644000373100047300000000621312306123567030447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Usenet news account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Usenet news account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Usenet News accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Usenet News accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (Usenet News accounts) Defaults
Security (Usenet News accounts) Varnost
Other settings (Usenet News accounts) Druge nastavitve

Other account related settings that are not located in the Account Editor:

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/default-browser.page0000644000373100047300000001017612306123567025502 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Opening links from an email in a browser and opening the mail composer from an email link on a website. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Opening links in and from the web browser
Change which web browser websites are opened in

In case you use Evolution under a different environment from GNOME,

Open a terminal application.

Find out the name of the .desktop file for your preferred browser. Depending on your browser and distribution, the file might be called for example epiphany.desktop, firefox.desktop, google-chrome.desktop, konqbrowser.desktop, or opera-browser.desktop. If you are unsure you can look up most .desktop files in the folder /usr/share/applications/.

Type this command, replace browser.desktop by the actual filename, and press Enter:

xdg-settings set default-url-scheme-handler https browser.desktop

Type this command, replace browser.desktop by the actual filename, and press Enter:

xdg-settings set default-url-scheme-handler http browser.desktop

Evolution may need to be restarted for the settings to take effect.

If the error message "xdg-settings: command not found" is shown, you need to install the package xdg-utils.

Install xdg-utils

Please see the GNOME Desktop Help.

If the preferred browser is set as default application but still does not work correctly please contact your distribution via their forum or bug tracker.

If the error message "Could not open the link: Operation not supported" is shown, you need to install the package gvfs.

Install gvfs
Change which mail application is used to write emails

Please see the GNOME Desktop Help.

Napredne možnosti

If you have a technical background you can also tweak these settings by defining scheme-handlers in $HOME/.local/share/applications/mimeapps.list.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-mail-signatures-manage.page0000644000373100047300000000237312306123567031474 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add, change, edit or delete email signatures. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Managing signatures

You can add, edit and delete all your signatures under EditPreferencesComposer preferencesSignatures.

Assigning a default signature to an email account has to be done in the account settings.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-spellcheck.page0000644000373100047300000000554512306123567027263 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On spell checking your mail in the composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Preverjanje črkovanja
Zahteve

To use spell checking for the emails that you write you first need to make sure that the hunspell package for your specific language and the enchant package are installed via the software management tool of your distribution.

You might need to install hunspell and/or enchant to perform these steps.

Install hunspell

Install enchant
Global Preferences

Under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesSpell CheckingOptions you can define whether your spelling is checked while you type and which color is used for underlining words that are misspelled.

You can also define which installed languages are used for spell checking in the list available under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesSpell CheckingLanguages.

Manual spell checking in the composer

If you do not have Checking spelling while I type enabled in the Composer Preferences you can run a spell check in the email composer by clicking EditSpell Checking or by pressing F7.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-change-columns-in-message-list.page0000644000373100047300000000372212306123567031216 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing the columns displayed in the list of messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Changing the message list columns

If you want to change the columns in the mail message list, right-click on the column headers and choose either Add a Column... or Remove This Column.

If you have a small display, you can replace the Subject column by the Subject - Trimmed which will remove prefixes such as "Re:", or you can replace the From column which displays the sender's name and email address by the Sender column which will only display the sender's name.

If you would like to have the same column layout in all mail folders except for the Sent folder, you can enable EditPreferencesMail PreferencesGeneralApply the same view settings to all folders. Note that this setting also influences Group by Threads and the Message Preview visibility in all folders.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates.page0000644000373100047300000000257612306123567030567 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Message templates to reuse in the composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Message Templates

A message template is a standard message that you can use at any time to send mail with the same pattern.

To enable the Message Template Plugin, click EditPlugins and enable Templates.

Message Templates
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000226012306123567026353 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On address books, searching, contact lists, and categories. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Razvrščanje, organizacija in združevanje stikov

There are several ways how to organize your contacts. You can use several addressbooks and categories, and for conveniently sending messages to a group of people contact lists are available.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/import-apps-mozilla.page0000644000373100047300000000551612306123567026317 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvažanje podatkov iz programa Mozilla Thunderbid. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Mozilla

Click FileImport.

In the Importer Type tab, click Import a single file.

Go to the folder in which Thunderbird stores its data. On a Linux system, Thunderbird's files are located in the hidden folder $HOME/.thunderbird/12345678. 12345678 will be a random string. If you cannot see the .thunderbird folder, make sure to show hidden files in the file selector dialog.

If you would like to import Thunderbird mail, go to Mail/Local Folders (for local mail accounts) or ImapMail/servername (for remote mail accounts). servername will be the address of your remote mail server. Files without a file ending include your messages (not the .msf files).

If you would like to import Thunderbird/Lightning calendar data, you may be able to export your Thunderbird events as an .ical/.ics file first, and import these files into Evolution. This is required as Thunderbird stores its calendar data in a non-standard database format.

The file type will be automatically determined.

Choose the destination (e.g. the folder or calendar in Evolution) for the imported data.

Repeat the import steps until you have imported all your data.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-delete-and-undelete.page0000644000373100047300000000523312306123567027120 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting, expunging, and undeleting mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Deleting and undeleting messages
Brisanje sporočil

To delete a message, select it and press the Delete key, or click the Delete button in the toolbar, or press CtrlD, or right-click the message and click Delete.

When you press Delete or click the Trash folder, your mail is not actually deleted, but is marked for deletion. You can see all message marked for deletion in the Trash folder. To show deleted messages, click ViewShow Deleted Messages. You can view the messages striken off for later deletion.

To permanently erase all the deleted messages in a folder, click FolderExpunge or press CtrlE.

Undeleting Messages

You can undelete a message that has been deleted but not expunged yet. To undelete a message, select the message, click EditUndelete message. Note that ViewShow Deleted Messages must be enabled for this.

If you have marked a message for deletion, undeleting it unmarks it, and the message is not shown anymore in the Trash folder.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-duplicates.page0000644000373100047300000000376012306123567025453 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to handle duplicated email messages April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Duplicate emails get downloaded
Odstranjevanje dvojnikov e-pošte

To remove duplicate emails in a folder, select multiple messages (or select all messages in a folder by clicking EditSelect All or pressing CtrlA) and click MessageRemove Duplicate Messages.

Vzroki

Downloading duplicate emails may be due to one of the following reasons:

There are several copies of the same message in the mailbox

Evolution is having a problem with the UIDL extension.

The cache files located at $HOME/.local/share/evolution/mail/local/ are not writable.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/problems-getting-help.page0000644000373100047300000000255412306123567026606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako dobiti pomoč v primeru težav. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Kako do pomoči

To receive help on problems you can send an email to the Evolution mailing list or talk to developers and other users in the IRC chat channel #evolution on the server irc.gimp.net. To connect to an IRC server you can for example use the internet messenger application Empathy.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/deleting-emails.page0000644000373100047300000000363512306123567025442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting emails or attachments to reduce the size of the mailbox. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Deleting emails or attachments permanently
Elektronska sporočila

Evolution deletes emails on IMAP servers by marking the messages for deletion; space is not freed until you expunge the marked emails.

To Expunge a specific folder, go to FolderExpunge or press CtrlE. To Expunge all folders, go to FileEmpty Trash. This applies to other types of accounts as well.

Priloge

To delete the attachments of an email, select the message and click MessageRemove Attachments.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-decrypting.page0000644000373100047300000000354412306123567030431 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Decrypting and checking the signature of received GPG messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Receiving messages encrypted or signed via GPG
Dešifriranje prejetega sporočila

If you receive an encrypted message, you need to decrypt it before you can read it.

When you view the message, Evolution prompts you for your PGP password. Enter it, and the unencrypted message is displayed.

Senders must have your GPG public key before they can send you an encrypted message.
Checking the signature of a received message

To check the sender's signature of a received message, scroll down to the bottom of the message and click the logo. Evolution will display Security Information for the message.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-sharing-information.page0000644000373100047300000000172212306123567030117 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make your information (appointments and free/busy times) available to others. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sharing your calendar information usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/import-supported-file-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000644412306123567030323 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Supported file formats for importing data. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Podprte vrste datotek

Evolution can import the following types of files:

Pošta

Berkeley Mailbox (.mbox or no extension):

The email format used by Mozilla, Netscape, Evolution (for local folders until version 2.32), Eudora, and many other email clients.

Maildir (no extension):

The format used by Evolution (for local folders since version 3.0). There is no need to import Maildir files as you can configure a Maildir account in Evolution and point to the folder where the Maildir files are stored.

Outlook Express 5/6 Personal Folders (.dbx):

The email file format used by Microsoft Outlook Express 5/6. For newer versions PST import is recommended.

Koledar

vCalendar (.vcs):

A format for storing calendar files, which is generally used by Evolution, Microsoft Outlook, Sunbird, and Korganizer.

iCalendar ali iCal (.ics):

A format for storing calendar files. iCalendar is used by Evolution, Microsoft Outlook, Palm OS handhelds, and others.

Stiki

LDAP Data Interchange Format (.ldif):

A standard data format for contact cards.

vCard (.vcf, .gcrd):

The address book format used by the GNOME, KDE, and many other contact management applications. You should be able to export to vCard format from any address book application.

Razno

Evolution/Mozilla/Outlook CSV/Tab (.csv, .tab):

CSV (Comma-separated values) or Tabulator files saved by using Evolution, Microsoft Outlook and Mozilla.

Osebne mape Outlook Express (.pst):

A file format used to store local copies of messages, calendar events, and other items within Microsoft software such as Microsoft Exchange Client, Windows Messaging, and Microsoft Outlook. It is also called "Personal Storage Table".

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-exchange-ews.page0000644000373100047300000000625012306123567031333 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Exchange Web Services accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Exchange Web Services receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime za ta strežnik.

Either manually enter the Host URL and OAB URL, or click Fetch URL which will ask you for your password and then try to automatically fill in the values.

If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

You can also define if Evolution checks for new messages in all folders.

If you would like to have a copy of the address book on the server for offline access to it, enable Cache offline address book and click Fetch list. Afterwards, select the address book from the available options.

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in Inbox on this server.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-search-folders-conditions.page0000644000373100047300000000413212306123567030360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available conditions for setting up search folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Available Search folder conditions

Message Location:

Checks whether the message is located in a specific folder.

Note that by default, Evolution's Trash and Junk folders are Search folders so they cannot be selected here.

Match All:

Applies an action always to any message, without further conditions. This could be useful at the end of the list of search folders to cover those emails that did not match any conditions for the preceding search folders in the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-webdav.page0000644000373100047300000000353412306123567024770 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba spletnega seznama opravil WebDAV ali seznama zapiskov. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba seznama opravil WebDAV ali seznama zapiskov

Seznami te vrste so le za branje.

Za dodajanje seznama opravil ali seznama zapiskov v Evolution izvedite naslednje korake:

Kliknite DatotekaNovSeznam opravil ali DatotekaNovoSeznam zapiskov.

Select the type On the Web.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also while offline.

Vnesite naslov seznama v polje URL.

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime:

Kliknite Uveljavi.

Seznam bo dodan v Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-classifications.page0000644000373100047300000000345512306123567027324 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Classifying appointments and tasks on groupware servers. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using Classifications

If you are using a calendar on a Novell GroupWise or Microsoft Exchange server, you can select a classification to determine who can view it.

To set a classification for an appointment or a task, click OptionsClassifications and select a classification in the editor. Public is the default category, and a public appointment can be viewed by anyone on the calendar-sharing network. Private denotes one level of security, and Confidential an even higher level.

The different levels vary depending on your server settings; check with your system administrator or adjust your delegation settings.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-display-message-source.page0000644000373100047300000000250412306123567027676 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Displaying the raw source of a message or all header lines. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Message Source

To view the message data, click on ViewMessage Source or press CtrlU. This will display the message data in a new window.

To only view the complete headers for a message, click ViewAll Message Headers. This will display the complete header data on the viewing pane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-unix-mbox-spool-directory.page0000644000373100047300000000632412306123567033257 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Defaults
Security (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-publishing.page0000644000373100047300000000405212306123567026304 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Post your calendar content in public. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Objavljanje koledarjev

In order to make one of your calendars available to the public, you can define calendars to be uploaded to a web server under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksPublishing InformationLocationsAdd.

You can specify the online location, the frequency of publishing, which calendar(s) to publish, and authentication information for uploading.

You can publish Calendar and Free/Busy information to a WebDAV server, FTP server, a remote machine through SSH or to any other web server with HTTP PUT support.

To immediately publish calendar information, click ActionsPublish Calendar Information in the calendar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-ldap.page0000644000373100047300000001137412306123567025132 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use shared address books on a local network. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje dostopa LDAP

The LDAP protocol was created to let users share contact information over a network by sharing access to a central directory. LDAP allows a company to maintain a shared set of contact information. Many companies keep a common LDAP address book for all their employees or for client contacts.

Dodajanje imenik LDAP

Click FileNewAddress Book.

In the General tab, select the type On LDAP Servers.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Enter the address of the server, the port number (the default number is 389) and whether you want to connect securely.

Define the login method and your user name.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

In the Details tab you can define the following settings:

Search Base: The search base is the starting point for a directory search. Contact your system administrator for information about the correct settings.

Search Scope: The search scope is the breadth of a given search. The following options are available:

One: Searches the Search Base and one entry below it.

Sub: Searches the Search Base and all entries below it.

Search Filter: The search filter can be set here for all the LDAP queries. For example:

ObjectClass=*: Lists all the objects from the server.

ObjectClass=User: Lists only the users.

Filter (|(ObjectClass=User)(ObjectClass=groupOfNames)): Retrieves the User and Contact List objects.

(&(mail=*)(ObjectClass=*)): Lists the objects associated with the email addresses.

Timeout (minutes): The maximum time Evolution attempts to download data from the server before giving up.

Download Limit: The maximum number of results for a given search. Most servers refuse to send more than 500 contacts, but you can set the number lower if you want to shorten downloads for very broad searches.

If you are unsure about some settings, ask your system administrator.
Differences to local address books

LDAP address books work like local address books on your computer, with the following exceptions:

Network folders are only available when you are connected to the network. If you use a laptop or have a modem connection, you might want to copy or cache some of the network directory. You do this by dragging and dropping your desired contacts into the local address books.

You can also mark the network folder for offline usage. To mark the folder, right-click the folder, click Properties and select Copy Folder Content Locally for Offline Operation.

To prevent excess network traffic, Evolution does not normally load data from the LDAP server upon opening.

Depending on your server settings, you might not be able to edit all the fields in a contact stored on an LDAP server. Some servers prohibit some or all changes, and others use a smaller set of fields than Evolution allows. Check with your system administrator if you need different settings.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-layout-views.page0000644000373100047300000000436112306123567026613 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using date ranges (day, week, month) to look at the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Razpoložljivi pogledi

Evolution offers five different views of your calendar data:

Dan (CtrlY)

Delovni teden (CtrlJ)

Teden (CtrlK)

Mesec (krmilkaM)

Seznam (CtrlL)

You can switch the view by either using the buttons in the toolbar, or by clicking ViewCurrent View.

You can also select an arbitrary range of days in the small calendar in the side bar. To do this, select the days that you want to view in your calendar.

The Previous and Next buttons move you forward and back in your calendar pages. If you are using a week or month view, you can move by week or month. To return to today's listing, click the Select today button between the two arrow buttons in the toolbar.

To visit calendar entries for a specific date, click the Select a specific date button in the toolbar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates-save.page0000644000373100047300000000414712306123567031517 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Store an existing or new message as a template Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Shranjevanje sporočil kot predlog
Shranjevanje obstoječega sporočila kot predloge

Izberi sporočilo.

Right-click the message and choose Move to folder or Copy to folder.

Select the Templates folder under On This Computer.

You can also edit an existing message and save it as a template:

Open the message and click Reply.

Edit the message body or the addresses according to your requirements.

Select FileSave as Template.
Saving a New Message as a Template

Click New and enter in the composer window what you need for the template.

Select FileSave as Template.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-imap-plus.page0000644000373100047300000000705312306123567030666 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for IMAP+ accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. IMAP+ receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

You should enable this option if your server supports it.

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want Evolution to remember your password.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

Select "Use Quick Resync" if the IMAP server supports IMAP4 Extensions for Quick Mailbox Resynchronization.

You can also define if Evolution checks for new messages in all folders, or only in subscribed folders.

Select if you want Evolution to use custom commands to connect to the IMAP server.

Select if you want Evolution to show only subscribed folders.

Select if you want Evolution to override server-supplied folder namespaces.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-sending-options-smtp.page0000644000373100047300000000471112306123567027414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending options for SMTP. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. SMTP sending options

Enter the address of your mail server for sending mail in the Server field and select if the server requires authentication (entering a username and a password).

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

If the server requires authentication, you need to provide the following information:

Select the authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check. Some servers do not support this, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime:

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-using-several-addressbooks.page0000644000373100047300000000251612306123567031455 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding different types of address books and using more than one address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Adding and creating address books

You can have multiple address books. For example, you might have one address book for work related contacts and one for private contacts. The side bar lists those address books, and you can select which address book is shown.

You can also use address books that are not on your computer, such as on the internet (e.g. Google) or in a local network (e.g. LDAP).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-localized-re-subjects.page0000644000373100047300000000320012306123570027467 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Avoid long subject lines due to translated "Re:" prefixes. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Handling localized "Re:" in subjects

Traditionally a "Re:" prefix is added to a subject line when replying to an email. Some email applications use localized terms for this (like "SV:" in Danish or "AW: in German). Evolution can recognize these terms to avoid subject lines getting longer as the conversation continues.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail.composer-localized-re 'AW:,SV:' (in case that you want "AW:" and "SV:" to be recognized).

You can also use the dconf-editor application to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-mh-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000623012306123570032367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a MH Format Mail Directories account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. MH Format Mail Directories account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Defaults
Security (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-add-automatically.page0000644000373100047300000000361412306123570027600 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Automatically add senders of mail that you have received to your contacts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Barbara Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Adding people automatically to my contacts

You can add people automatically to your contacts when you reply to received email. Enable the plugin Automatic Contacts by going to EditPlugins; click on Automatic Contacts so that it shows a check mark. Then go to EditPreferencesContactsAutomatic Contacts and enable the Create address book entries when sending emails option and select an address book in the drop-down field below that will receive the new contacts.

From now on, contacts will be automatically created for senders of received mail when you reply to that mail.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/import-apps-outlook.page0000644000373100047300000001047412306123570026335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing data from Microsoft Outlook. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Outlook

These steps refer to locally stored data such as POP accounts. For remote data (like IMAP) this is not necessary, since the data is still on the server and does not need to be manually transfered. You can set up the corresponding account in Evolution and the data will be downloaded.

Prerequisites under Windows

First, while using Microsoft Windows, prepare your messages for import:

Find your Outlook files (they normally have the file ending .pst or .ost):

Windows 7, Windows Vista

Windows XP

Outlook 2010

C:\Users\username\My Documents\Outlook Files

C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents\Outlook Files

Outlook 2007 in prejšnji

C:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Outlook

C:\Documents and Settings\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Outlook

(Zamenjajte "username" s svojim uporabniškim imenom.)

Copy the Outlook files to the system or partition that Evolution is installed on.

As your Windows hard drive is probably in the NTFS format, some Linux systems cannot read it without additional software. You might find it simpler to copy the mail folders to a USB drive or to burn a CD.
Uvažanje v Evolution

Depending on your last step, either plug in the disk or USB drive with the data and wait until the file manager window opens, or mount your Windows drive.

Copy all the mail files into your home directory or another convenient place.

Zaženi Evolution.

Optionally select FileNewMail Folder to create the folders you want.

Click FileImport.

In the Importer Type tab, click Import a single file.

Choose the Outlook personal folders (.pst) file that you would like to import.

The file type will be automatically determined.

If the option to import Outlook personal folders (.pst files) is not available under FileImportImport single fileFile type, your distribution might have not enabled this functionality.

Choose the destination (e.g. the folder in Evolution) for the imported data.

Repeat the import steps until you have imported all your data.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/exchange-connectors-overview.page0000644000373100047300000000541412306123570030167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Which additional package to install in order to connect to an Exchange server. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Choosing the right connector

Depending on the version of the Microsoft Exchange server that you would like to connect to it is required to make sure that an additional package is installed that provides this functionality.

For Microsoft Exchange 2007, 2010 and newer it is recommended to use the package evolution-ews.

Install evolution-ews

For older versions of Microsoft Exchange, or if evolution-ews does not work well for you, try evolution-mapi. It uses Microsoft's Messaging API which is also used by Microsoft Outlook. However, evolution-mapi requires installing OpenChange and Samba 4, and is not as performant as evolution-ews.

Install evolution-mapi

If you are unsure which Microsoft Exchange server version is used, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000557112306123570026104 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Iskanje sestankov in srečanj. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Searching for Calendar Items usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000166112306123570025306 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting contacts in address books. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje, urejanje in brisanje stikov usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-local-delivery.page0000644000373100047300000000377312306123570031671 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Local delivery accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Local delivery receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the file by clicking on the button next to File in the Configuration section. This will open a file chooser window.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-usage-delete-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000231412306123570030173 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting a contact from your address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Izbris stika

If you want to delete a contact in your address books, right-click on the contact and select Delete, or click on the contact and click Delete in the tool bar or press CtrlD, or click EditDelete Contact.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-local-delivery.page0000644000373100047300000000607512306123570031105 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Local Delivery account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Local Delivery account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Local Delivery accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Local Delivery accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (Local Delivery accounts) Defaults
Security (Local Delivery accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options.page0000644000373100047300000000255012306123570026750 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available mail receiving options for several server types. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Mail Receiving Options
Mail receiving options for common server types
Mail receiving options for corporate server types
Mail receiving options for local account server types
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-several-recipients.page0000644000373100047300000000630212306123570030734 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending to more than one person and using CC or BCC. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sending a message to several recipients

To send a message to more than one person, enter the addresses in the composer by separating them with commas or semicolons.

If you frequently write email to the same groups of people, you can create contact lists to send them mail as though they have a single address.
Vrste prejemnikov

Email messages can have three different types of recipients. The simplest way is to put the email address or addresses in the To: text field. The Cc: text field is used for recipients that are meant to receive a copy of your message but are not the primary recipients.

Addresses in the Bcc: text field are hidden from the other recipients of the message. It can be used to send mail to large groups of people, especially if they do not know each other or if privacy is a concern. If the Bcc: text field is not shown, click ViewBcc Field.

Samodejno dopolnjevanje

It is recommended to use the Autocompletion feature of the Evolution address book for entering addresses. By using this you avoid typos and save time.

Uporaba gumbov

Instead of typing the recipients' names you can also click the To:, Cc:, or Bcc: buttons to get a list of the email addresses in your address books. Select the addresses and click the arrow buttons to move them into the appropriate address columns (To:, Cc:, Bcc:).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/google-services.page0000644000373100047300000000151412306123570025460 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba storitev Google. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba storitev Google usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-meetings.page0000644000373100047300000000160012306123570025741 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba sestankov v koledarju. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Srečanja usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption.page0000644000373100047300000000400512306123570025473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pošiljanje in sprejemanje šifrirane elektronske pošte Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Šifriranje pošte in potrdila

Evolution offers GPG Encryption and S/MIME Encryption for signing and encrypting email messages. S/MIME is used most often in corporate environments.

GPG
S/MIME
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-libreoffice.page0000644000373100047300000000426512306123570026456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using data from Evolution address books in LibreOffice documents. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Stiki v LibreOffice

You can use your Evolution address books in LibreOffice as a data source. The following steps refer to LibreOffice version 3.3.3.

Click EditExchange Database... in the menu bar. This will bring up the Exchange databases dialog box.

In the right pane under Available Databases, EvolutionLocal is available as a source. Click on the small triangle to get the list of your Evolution address books.

Choose an addressbook and click Define.

In case it is not listed already, click Browse.... A file chooser dialog opens.

As Evolution stores its data in a hidden directory, press CtrlL to get the location bar displayed.

Go to /home/username/.local/share/evolution/addressbook/system/addressbook.db and click Open.

This makes the Evolution address book the default data source for LibreOffice. You can now select a field to insert into an LibreOffice document via InsertFieldsOther.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-html-text.page0000644000373100047300000000615012306123570027057 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change font sizes, styles and colors in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Formatting Text in HTML

Text formatting tools that are available in HTML format only are located in the second tool bar below the Subject line after enabling HTML format. They also appear in the Insert and Format menus.

The icons in the tool bar are explained in tooltips which appear when you hold your mouse pointer over the buttons.

Slogi besedila:

Use these buttons in the lower tool bar to determine the way your email looks. If you have text selected, the style applies to the selected text. If you do not have text selected, the style applies to whatever you type next.

Gumb

Opis

+0

Velikost pisave.

Color chooser for text. The box displays the current text color. To choose a new color, click the arrow button to the right. If you have text selected, the color applies to the selected text. If you do not have text selected, the color applies to whatever you type next. You can select a background color or image by right-clicking the message background, then selecting StylePage Style.

TT

Typewriter text, which is similar to a monospace font.

Krepko

Odebeli besedilo.

Ležeče

Italicizes the text.

Underlined A

Podčrta besedilo.

Strike through A

Marks a line through the text.

The other buttons are explained under .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000636112306123570025253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching messages. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Searching Mail
Searching in a Single Message

To find text in the displayed message, select EditFind in Message... from the main menu.

Searching Across Messages
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-unix-mbox-spool-file.page0000644000373100047300000000625412306123570032166 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Standard Unix mbox Spool File account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Standard Unix mbox Spool File account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Defaults
Security (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-getting-keys.page0000644000373100047300000000361412306123570030663 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Getting and Using GPG Public Keys. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Getting and using GPG public keys

To send an encrypted message, you need to use the recipient's public key in combination with your private key. Evolution handles the encryption, but you need to get the public key and add it to your keyring.

To get public keys from a public key server, enter the command gpg --recv-keys --keyserver wwwkeys.pgp.net keyid, substituting keyid by your recipient's ID. You need to enter your password, and the ID is automatically added to your keyring.

If someone sends you a public key directly, save it as a plain text file and enter the command gpg --import to add it to your keyring.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000174312306123570025661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On task and memo lists, searching, and categories. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Razvrščanje in organiziranje opravil in beležk usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-read-receipts.page0000644000373100047300000000453412306123570026037 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to enable requesting read receipts. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Read receipts for emails

Read receipts are a way for people to acknowledge that they have received your email. The recipient can normally choose whether to acknowledge the receipt or not, so they are not a completely reliable way of checking if your emails have been received by someone.

You can request read receipts by enabling this option in the email composer's menu. To do so, go to OptionsRequest Read Receipt.

For read receipts that you receive you can define Evolution's behavior by going to EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaultsMessage Receipts.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/deleting-to-free-disk-space.page0000644000373100047300000000175212306123570027542 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting emails and calendar entries to reduce the size of the files used by Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Freeing disk space by deleting items usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000164212306123570024614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting tasks. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje, urejanje in brisanje opravil usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-maildir-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000630012306123570033402 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Maildir Format Mail Directories account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Maildir Format Mail Directories account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Pošiljanje e-pošte
Defaults (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Defaults
Security (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/exporting-data-contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000276612306123570027137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export contacts data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Izvažanje podatkov o vaših stikih

Contacts files are stored in a database, but can be saved as a vCard file.

To export a complete address book, click FileSave Address Book As vCard.

If you want to export only one contact, click FileSave as vCard or right-click on the contact and click Save as vCard.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-s-mime-manage.page0000644000373100047300000000453212306123570030113 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding, editing, viewing and deleting S/MIME certificates. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Upravljanje potrdil S/MIME

Certificates allow you to communicate with others securely over an encrypted connection, or sign a message confirming your identity to the contact. These settings only apply to S/MIME encryption.

You can import, view, edit (except for your own certificates), and delete your certificates under EditPreferencesCertificates.

If you get the error "Peer's certificate issuer has been marked as not trusted by the user. (-8172) - Cannot add SMIMEEncKeyPrefs attribute" after adding your mail certificate, go to Authorities and enable Trust this CA to identify email users for the certificate.

Your Certificates displays a list of certificates that you own. To add a signing certificate, click Import, select the file to import, then click Open and enter a password.

Contact Certificates displays a list of certificates that you have for contacts. These certificates allow you to decrypt messages as well verify signed messages.

Authorities displays a list of trusted certificate authorities that verify that your own certificate is valid.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-change-quotation-string.page0000644000373100047300000000365212306123570031707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 It is not possible to change the quotation introduction added when answering mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Changing the "On date, person wrote:" string when replying

Advanced users can change this string.

Open the dconf-editor application.

Navigate to org.gnome.evolution.mail.

Enter the prefered quotation string as the value for the key composer-message-attribution.

You might need to install the dconf-editor package to perform these steps.

Install dconf-editor

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-free-busy.page0000644000373100047300000001134412306123570026035 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using the Free/Busy view on a groupware server to set up meetings. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Podatki o zasedenosti

You can use the Free/Busy search for meetings to determine the availability of invitees.

In addition to the standard meeting scheduling tools, you can use the Free/Busy view to check whether people are available in advance. The Free/Busy feature is normally a function of dedicated groupware servers such as Microsoft Exchange and Novell GroupWise. However, you can also publish Free/Busy information online, and access Free/Busy information published elsewhere. If not everyone you collaborate with publishes Free/Busy data, you can still use meeting invitations to coordinate schedules with other people.

To access the free/busy view:

Click FileNewMeeting.

Click Add to add the email addresses of people you want to invite.

Click the Free/Busy button on the toolbar, or click OptionsFree/Busy.

Adjust the meeting time, either by dragging the meeting borders or by using the Autopick buttons to choose a time automatically, then click Close. Attendees on an Exchange server have the appointment updated automatically; others receive email notification of any change in plans.

Seznam udeležencev:

The Attendee List shows the people who have been invited to the appointment.

Schedule Grid:

The Schedule Grid shows the published Free/Busy information for the people you have invited. This is where you compare schedules to find free time to schedule the appointment. Individuals have visible scheduling information only if they use the same Novell GroupWise or Microsoft Exchange server you do (that is, if they are in the same organization as you), or if they publish free/busy information at a web address (URL) that you can reach and you have entered that web address for the specific contact in the Contact Editor under Personal informationWeb AddressesFree/Busy.

You can publish Calendar and Free/Busy information to a WebDAV server, FTP server, a remote machine through SSH or to any other web server with HTTP PUT support.

In corporate environments you can publish Calendar and Free/Busy information to an Exchange or Groupwise server. Note that you must use the top-level Exchange calendar if you want others to be able to access your Free / Busy information when inviting you to a meeting.

The default server can be defined under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksPublishing InformationDefault Free/Busy Server.

Accessing Free/Busy Data Without a Groupware Server

If individuals give you a URL for Free/Busy data or for their web calendar, you can add the URL under Personal InformationWeb Addresses in the Contact Editor. Then, when you schedule a meeting with them, Evolution looks up the schedule and displays it in the Free/Busy data.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-cannot-see.page0000644000373100047300000000440412306123570025340 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 If you received or sent an email, but you cannot find it anywhere. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. I cannot see some emails, where are they?

Check whether you are using filters on incoming (or outgoing) messages. These could be automatically moving your messages to another destination.

Check your search view in the search bar right above the message list. Perhaps the Show dropdown list is set to a filter like Read Messages, or the text input filed contains some value. Click the broom icon to clear the search field.

If you cannot see any emails at all in a folder, check that you have not maximized the message preview (so the message list pane is hidden). To do this, click ViewPreviewShow Message Preview.

Look in the Junk folder. Messages that are marked as Junk disappear from the original folder and are moved to the Junk folder.

Click EditShow Deleted Messages to make sure all messages are visible.

Check your default folder under EditPreferencesEmail AccountsEditDefaults. Perhaps it is set to some other folder than the folder you thought of.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-attachments.page0000644000373100047300000000155312306123570025621 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Handling of file attachments for writing and reading mail Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Managing attachments usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-set-up.page0000644000373100047300000000454212306123571027470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting up GPG for your mail account to sign and/or encrypt and decrypt messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Setting up GPG for your mail account

You need a GPG key to do this. If you do not have one yet, please refer to Creating a GPG key.

Select EditPreferencesMail Accounts.

Select the account you want to use securely, then click Edit.

Kliknite zavihek Varnost.

Specify your key ID in the PGP/GPG Key ID field.

Below the field you can choose whether to always sign outgoing messages when using this account, and other options.

Kliknite V redu.

Kliknite Zapri.

Evolution requires that you know your key ID. If you do not remember it, you can find it by typing gpg --list-keys in the Terminal application. Your key ID is an eight-character string with random numbers and letters.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-follow-up-flag.page0000644000373100047300000000563312306123571026145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using flags to remind you of actions. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Follow up flags for emails

To make sure you do not forget about a message, you can use the follow-up feature.

Izbor enega ali več sporočil.

Right-click one of the messages.

Click Mark for Follow Up....

You can also do this by selecting the message(s) and clicking MessageMark asFollow Up... or by pressing ShiftCtrlG.

A window opens to allow you to set the type of flag and the due date.

The flag itself is the action you want to remind yourself about, such as Call, Forward and Reply.

After you have added a flag, you can mark it as complete or remove it entirely by right-clicking the message and clicking either Flag Completed or Clear Flag.

When you read a flagged message, its flag status is displayed at the top, before the message headers. An overdue message might tell you "Overdue: Call by April 07, 2012, 5:00 PM."

Flags can help you organize your work in a number of ways. For example, you might add a Flag Status column to your message list and sort that way. Alternately, you could create a search folder that displays all your flagged messages, then clear the flags when you're done, so the search folder contains only messages with upcoming deadlines.

If you prefer a simpler way to remind yourself about messages, you can mark them as important by right-clicking the message, then click Mark as Important, or by selecting MessageMark asImportant from the menubar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-send-and-receive.page0000644000373100047300000000212612306123571026415 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On receiving mail and sending written emails. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sending and receiving mail

This section refers to receiving mail and sending written emails. For writing a new message, please refer to the Composing mail section.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-usage-delete-appointment.page0000644000373100047300000000252212306123571031033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting an appointment in your calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Deleting an Appointment

If you want to delete an appointment in your calendars, right-click on the appointment in the calendar and select Delete Appointment, or click on the appointment and click Delete in the tool bar or press CtrlD. If you are in the list view you can also use EditDelete Appointment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/memos-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000540512306123571025450 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching memos. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Searching Memos
Searching in a Single Memo

To find text in the displayed memo, select EditFind in Memo... from the main menu.

Searching Across Memos
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-imap-subscriptions.page0000644000373100047300000000423612306123571027143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 IMAP folder subscriptions. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Naročnine na mape IMAP

As opening many IMAP folders on the server takes time you can define which IMAP folders to check and display in Evolution, and which ones to ignore for the time being, via the IMAP Subscriptions Manager.

Select FolderSubscriptions, or right-click on the top level node of an email account in the folder list and click Manage subscriptions.

If you have accounts on multiple servers, select the server where you want to manage your subscriptions.

Evolution displays a list of files and folders available on the IMAP server.

Select a file or folder by clicking it.

You should select at least the Inbox folder. Depending upon the way your IMAP server is configured, the list of available files might include non-mail folders. If it does, you can ignore them.

Click a folder's checkbox to add a folder to your subscriptions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/deleting-appointments.page0000644000373100047300000000245312306123571026701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting calendar entries to reduce the size of the mailbox. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Deleting old appointments permanently

To Purge old entries in a calendar, go to ActionsPurge in the Calendar view. You will be asked how many days old the events to remove from the calendar should be. The action will be applied to the currently opened calendar (selected in the list of calendars on the left); other calendars remain unchanged.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-local.page0000644000373100047300000000262512306123571025231 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje novega krajevnega koledarja. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Adding another local calendar

To add another local calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type On This Computer.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-usage-edit-appointment.page0000644000373100047300000000256412306123571030524 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing in appointment in your calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Editing an Appointment

If you want to change an appointment that already exists in your calendars,

Double-click on the appointment that you want to edit in the calendar.

Edit the appointment (see Adding an Appointment for the list of available options).

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-autocompletion.page0000644000373100047300000000436012306123571027244 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Autocompletion of names and email addresses entered in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Samodejno dopolnjevanje prejemnikov pošte

You can enter the first three letters of names and email addresses in the recipients text field and Evolution will present you with a list of matches from your address books.

To enable autocompletion, go to EditPreferencesContactsAutocompletion and choose the address books from the list that Evolution should look in for matches.

Select Always show address of the autocompleted contact to also show the email address along with the name. This can be helpful to distinguish if a contact has several email addresses.

Alternately, you can click the To:, Cc:, or Bcc: buttons to get a list of the email addresses in your contacts. Select addresses and click the arrow buttons to move them into the appropriate address columns.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000173312306123571025242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting appointments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje, urejanje in brisanje sestankov usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-sorting-message-list.page0000644000373100047300000001316412306123571027370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sorting the message list of a mail folder. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sorting the message list

Evolution lets you organize your emails by letting you sort messages in the message list.

Sorting Mail in Email Threads

You can use a threaded message view to sort emails. To enable this feature, click on ViewGroup By Threads or press CtrlT.

This feature, when enabled, groups replies with the original email and allows you to follow the flow of the conversation from one message to the next.

When a new message arrives, it will be added below the parent message. Threads are sorted and displayed based on the date of the most recent message received.

For Advanced Users: There is a GSettings key that allows you to toggle between the collapsed and expanded state of the email threads. The collapsed state is enabled by default. It can be changed by starting the Terminal application and running the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail thread-expand true

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.desktop.interface can-change-accels true
Sorting Mail with Column Headers

The message list displays columns that indicate whether a message has been read, whether it has attachments, how important the message is, the sender, date, and the subject. To change the columns used in the message list, you can do one of the following:

Drag and drop the column header bars

Right-click on the header.

Select the Remove This Column or Add a Column option.

Evolution allows you to sort your messages using these columns. Just click on the column label to sort the emails. The direction of the arrow next to the label indicates the direction of the sort.

Using Other Sorting Options

Evolution provides other ways for sorting email messages. You can use Sort By, Sort Ascending, Sort Descending, or Unsort.

Razvrsti po

You can also sort email messages using the Sort By list.

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Select the Sort By option.

This brings up this list of criteria for sorting email messages:

Subject - Trimmed

Oznake

Prejemniki

Pošiljatelj

Mesto

Rok do

Follow Up Flag

Stanje zastavice

Velikost

Za

Prejeto

Datum

Zadeva

Od

Priloga

Z zastavico

Stanje

Po meri

Select the option you wish to use in sorting email messages.
Razvrsti naraščajoče

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Izberite možnost Razvrsti naraščajoče.

The messages will be displayed with the most recent at the bottom.

Razvrsti padajoče

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Izberite možnost Razvrsti padajoče.

The messages will be displayed with the most recent at the top.

Nerazvrščeno

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Izberite možnost Nerazvrščeno.

This removes sorting from the column, reverting to the order of messages as they were added to the folder.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-displaying-message.page0000644000373100047300000000173612306123571027077 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Rendering an email and handling its attachments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Prikaži sporočilo
Napredno
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-change-time-format.page0000644000373100047300000000303012306123571026746 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the date and time format in the message list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Format of dates and time

You can change the format of the Date column by setting your preferred format under EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHeadersDate/Time format.

The placeholders in the format expression are strftime formats. For a complete list of available strftime formats, run date --help in the Terminal application.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-html-rule.page0000644000373100047300000000330112306123571027036 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Insert a horizontal line in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Inserting a Rule in HTML

You can insert a horizontal line into the email (at the current position of the cursor) to help divide two sections:

Click InsertRule... in the menubar.

Select width, size, and alignment.

Select Shaded if wanted.

Kliknite Zapri.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-google.page0000644000373100047300000000357512306123571025420 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using the online calendar of your Google account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba koledarja Google

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Izberite vrsto Google.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

To izberite le, če želite dostopati do vsebine tudi, ko niste povezani na splet.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime Google.

If you have more than one Google calendar, define which of them to use.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-caldav.page0000644000373100047300000000351112306123571024740 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using an online CalDAV task list or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using a CalDAV task or memo list

Za dodajanje seznama opravil ali seznama zapiskov v Evolution izvedite naslednje korake:

Kliknite DatotekaNovSeznam opravil ali DatotekaNovoSeznam zapiskov.

Select the type On the Web.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also while offline.

Vnesite naslov seznama v polje URL.

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime in naslov e-pošte.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The task list will be added to the list of task lists in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-usage-add-appointment.page0000644000373100047300000000510712306123571030323 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje sestanka. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje sestanka

Click FileNewAppointment, or double-click in a blank space in the calendar to open the Appointment dialog. The particular time on the calendar view against which you have double clicked on will be suggested for the new appointment. You can also directly write in the calendar and then adjust the duration by dragging it with the mouse.

If you use the Appointment dialog:

Select a calendar in the Calendar drop-down list.

Enter a brief summary in the Summary field.

(Optional) Type a location in the Location field.

To select this event as an all day event, click OptionsAll Day Event, or click the All Day Event button on the toolbar.

Izberite datum in čas.

If the event is not an all day event, select either For to specify the duration, or select Until to specify the ending time of the event.

(Optional) Enter a description in the Description field.

To show the time as busy to others, click OptionsShow Time as Busy.

You can also define a time zone, a category, a reminder, a recurrence, or a classification for the event, or add an attachment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-save-as-pdf.page0000644000373100047300000000326512306123571025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Converting emails into PDF files. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Save messages as PDF

In order to save emails in the PDF file format, select FilePrint and then choose Print to File. See the desktop help for general information on printing.

You can also export messages as PDF by dragging and dropping them to the file manager, instead of dropping them in mbox (text) format by default.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail drag-and-drop-save-file-format 'pdf'

You can also use the dconf-editor application to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-using-contact-lists.page0000644000373100047300000000626012306123571030115 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using contact lists for grouping contacts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using Contact Lists

A contact list is a set of contacts with a single nickname that you create. When you send mail to this nickname it is actually sent to every member of the list. This differs from a "real" mailing list in that it exists only on your computer as a convenience to you, rather than as an actual email address managed by a mailing list application on a server.

For example, you could create one contact for each family member, then add those contacts to a contact list called "Family". Then, instead of entering each person's email address individually, you can send emails to "Family" and the messages would go to all of them.

Ustvarjanje seznama stikov

Click FileNewContact List.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Select the address book under Where: to which it will be added.

Specify the list members by either entering the names or email addresses of contacts (the text field supports autocompletion), or by dragging contacts from the Contacts window into the list, or by using the Select... button.

Choose whether you want to hide the email addresses when you send a message to the list.

Unless it is a very small list, it is recommended that you leave the addresses hidden. This is the same thing as using the “Bcc:” feature discussed in Sending a message to several recipients.

Kliknite V redu.

The contact list will be added to the chosen address book in Evolution.

Sending messages to a contact list

To send a message to the contact list, enter the name that you chose for the contact list as the recipient in the mail composer. You can also right-click the contact list in your address book and select Send Message to List.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-access-gmail-pop-account.page0000644000373100047300000000416412306123571030066 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to set up a Gmail POP Account. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Access a Gmail POP Account via Evolution

Follow these steps to set up your Gmail POP Account in Evolution:

Log in to your Gmail account.

Go to SettingsForwarding and POP/IMAP. Refer to the POP Download section.

Enable the POP download feature by ticking the radio button that corresponds to either of these options:

Enable POP for all mail (even mail that's already been downloaded)

Enable POP for mail that arrives from now on

Specify the other required settings for this Gmail feature.

To know the Gmail Account settings, click on Configuration instructionsOtherStandard Instructions.

On your Evolution client, go to EditPreferencesMail Accounts. Click Add.

Provide the required information. For the account settings, refer to Step 5

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-weather.page0000644000373100047300000000340212306123571025570 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display the weather in the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba vremenskega koledarja

Calendars of this type are read-only.

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Izberite vrsto Vreme.

Vnesite želeno ime.

Po želji izberite barvo, ki jo imate raje.

To izberite le, če želite dostopati do vsebine tudi, ko niste povezani na splet.

Choose a location by selecting continent, country and city.

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

Izberite enoto za merjenje temperature.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-access-gmail-imap-account.page0000644000373100047300000000270012306123571030210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to set up a Gmail IMAP Account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Access a Gmail IMAP Account via Evolution

Please refer to the IMAP+ mail account settings.

To access Gmail via IMAP you must turn on IMAP in your Google account. See the Gmail Help for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-two-trash-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000415512306123571026674 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to have only one trash or junk folder per account. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Two Trash or Junk folders shown for the same account

If you use a remote mail account that also has Junk and/or Trash folders on the server you might face duplicated folders in Evolution.

You can easily tell the two Trash folders apart by looking at their icons. The Evolution Trash folder has a special icon whereas the other physical Trash folder looks like any other folder.

By default, Evolution's Trash and Junk folders are Search folders. They do not really exist but simply display all the messages that are marked as junk or for deletion in any folders of that account.

In order to only use the folders for Junk and Trash on the mail server, select the corresponding Use a Real Folder option under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaults. In this case, Evolution's local virtual folders will not be used.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-maildir-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000461612306123571034175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Maildir-format mail directories accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Maildir-format mail directories receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the directory by clicking on the button next to Path in the Configuration section. Some default folders are available in the list. If the directory is not among those folders, choose the last option Other.... This will open a directory chooser window.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in INBOX.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-pop.page0000644000373100047300000000724312306123571027551 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for POP accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Barbara Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. POP receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

You should enable this option if your server supports it.

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want Evolution to remember your password.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

If you want the messages to remain on the server for a period of time, click the Leave messages on server option and the Delete after ... days option and select the number of days to allow messages to remain on the server.

The option Disable support for all POP3 extensions is only useful when accessing old or misconfigured mail servers. POP3 extensions provide enhanced functionality, however only some servers support them. In case of problems with receiving mail, enabling this setting might help.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-usenet-subscriptions.page0000644000373100047300000000316712306123571027522 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Subscribing to Usenet newsgroups. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Naročnine na dopisne sezname

When you create a newsgroup account, you are not subscribed to any groups. To subscribe to a newsgroup:

Select FolderSubscriptions.

If you have accounts on multiple servers, select the server where you want to manage your subscriptions.

Click a group's checkbox to add a folder to your subscriptions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-google.page0000644000373100047300000000322412306123571025454 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the online address book of your Google account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporabljanje imenika Google

To add such an address book to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewAddress Book.

Izberite vrsto Google.

Vnesite želeno ime.

To izberite le, če želite dostopati do vsebine tudi, ko niste povezani na splet.

Vnesite svoje uporabniško ime Google.

Izberite Uporabi varno povezavo, če se želite varno povezati.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

The address book will be added to the list of address books in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-microsoft-exchange-evo-ews.page0000644000373100047300000000611312306123571033334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Microsoft Exchange 2007 or 2010 account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Exchange Web Services account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Exchange Web Services accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Defaults (Exchange Web Services accounts) Defaults
Security (Exchange Web Services accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-marcus-bains-line.page0000644000373100047300000000203412306123571027442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The red "Marcus Bains" line displays the current time. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Prikaz časa v pogledu dneva

The red Marcus Bains Line in the Day view of the calendar is a marker to show the current date and time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-search-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000464012306123571026210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use search folders to see messages in one folder while still keeping them in their original folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using Search folders

If filters are not flexible enough, or you find yourself performing the same search again and again, consider a search folder.

A search folder looks like a folder, it acts like a search, and you set it up like a filter. While a conventional folder actually contains messages, a search folder is a view of messages that might be in several different folders. The messages it contains are determined on the fly using a set of criteria that you have chosen when setting up the search folder.

Evolution automatically updates the search folder contents when new messages are received or message are deleted.

The Unmatched search folder is the opposite of other search folders: it displays all messages that do not appear in other search folders.

If you use remote email storage like IMAP, and have created search folders to search through them, the Unmatched search folder also searches the remote folders. If you do not create any search folders that search remote mail stores, the Unmatched search folder does not search in them either.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/xinclude-mail-account-identity.xml0000644000373100047300000000101312306123571030256 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Identity

Here you define your name and your email address.

Optionally you can make this account your default account (e.g. when writing emails), set a Reply-To email address (if you want replies to messages sent to a different address), and set an organization (the company where you work, or the organization you represent when you send email from this account).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/intro-first-run.page0000644000373100047300000002576412306123572025464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prvi zagon programa Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Prvi zagon programa <app>Evolution</app>

The first time you run Evolution, it opens the First-Run Assistant to help you set up email accounts and import data from other applications.

Obnovi iz varnostne kopije

You will be asked whether to restore from a backup of a previous version. If you do not have a backup, go to the next page.

Show how to restore from a backup Obnavljanje
Prejemanje e-pošte

First, choose the server type from the Server Type drop-down list.

If you are unsure about the type of server to choose, ask your system administrator or Internet Service Provider.

Later on, if you want to change an account, or if you want to create another one, go to EditPreferencesMail Accounts. Select the account you want to change, then click Edit. Alternately, add a new account by clicking Add.
IMAP+

Keeps the mail on the server so you can access your mail from multiple systems.

Show how to configure this account type IMAP+ receiving options
POP

Downloads your email to your hard disk.

Show how to configure this account type POP receiving options
USENET News

Connects to a news server and downloads a list of available news digests.

Show how to configure this account type Usenet news receiving options
Exchange EWS

For connecting to a Microsoft Exchange 2007/2010 or OpenChange server. Note that this is currently under development and will replace the Exchange MAPI account type in the future. It might not be available yet for your distribution.

This requires having the evolution-ews package installed.

Install evolution-ews
Show how to configure this account type Exchange Web Services receiving options
Exchange MAPI

For connecting to a Microsoft Exchange 2007/2010 or OpenChange server.

This requires having the evolution-mapi package installed.

Install evolution-mapi
Show how to configure this account type Exchange MAPI receiving options
Local delivery

Local delivery: If you want to move email from the spool (the location where mail waits for delivery) and store it in your home directory. You need to provide the path to the mail spool you want to use. If you want to leave email in your system's spool files, choose the Standard Unix Mbox Spool option instead.

Show how to configure this account type Local delivery receiving options
MH-Format Mail Directories

For downloading email using MH or another MH-style application.

Show how to configure this account type MH-format mail directories receiving options
Maildir-Format Mail Directories

Maildir-Format Mail Directories: For downloading your email using Qmail or another Maildir-style application.

Show how to configure this account type Maildir-format mail directories receiving options
Standard Unix mbox spool file

Standard Unix mbox spool file: For reading and storing email in the mail spool file on your local system.

Show how to configure this account type Standard Unix mbox spool file receiving options
Standard Unix mbox spool directory

Standard Unix mbox spool directory: For reading and storing email in the mail spool directory on your local system.

Show how to configure this account type Standard Unix mbox spool directory receiving options
None

If you do not plan to use Evolution for receiving email.

Pošiljanje pošte

Podprte vrste strežnikov so:

SMTP

Sends mail using an outbound mail server. This is the most common choice for sending mail.

Show how to configure this account type SMTP sending options
Sendmail

Uses the Sendmail application to send mail from your system. It is not easy to configure, so you should select this option only if you know how to set up a Sendmail service.

Podrobnosti računa

Give the account any name you prefer.

Uvoz pošte (neobvezno)

Continue with Importing data from another application.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-create-key.page0000644000373100047300000000761612306123572030312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Signing or encrypting messages via GPG/OpenPGP that you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Ustvarjanje ključa GPG

These steps are very technical. For average users we recommend using the Seahorse application for managing GPG/OpenPGP keys.

Before you can get or send GPG encrypted mail, you need to generate your public and private keys with GPG.

Open the Terminal application and enter gpg --gen-key.

Izberite algoritem, nato pritisnite vnašalko.

Izberite jakost ključa, nato pritisnite vnašalko.

Enter how long your key should be valid for.

Vnesite svoje pravo ime, nato pritisnite vnašalko.

Vnesite svoj e-poštni naslov, nato pritisnite vnašalko.

(neobvezno) Vnesite komentar, nato pritisnite vnašalko.

Review your selected user ID. If it is correct, press O.

Type a passphrase, then press Enter.

Move your mouse randomly to generate the keys.

After the keys are generated, you can view your key information by entering gpg --list-keys. You should see something similar to this: /home/you/.gnupg/pubring.gpg ---------------------------- pub 1024D/32j38dk2 2001-06-20 you <you@example.com> sub 1024g/289sklj3 2011-06-20 [expires: 2012-11-14]

GPG creates one list, or keyring, for your public keys and one for your private keys. All the public keys you know are stored in the file ~/.gnupg/pubring.gpg. If you want to give other people your key, send them that file.

If you want, you can upload your keys to a key server:

Check your public key ID with gpg --list-keys. It is the string after 1024D on the line beginning with pub. In the example above, it is 32j38dk2.

Enter the command gpg --send-keys --keyserver wwwkeys.pgp.net 32j38dk2. Substitute your key ID for 32j38dk2. You need your password to do this.

Key servers store your public keys for you so that your friends can decrypt your messages. If you choose not to use a key server, you can manually send your public key, include it in your signature file, or put it on your own Web page. However, it is easier to publish a key once, and then let people download it from a central place when they want.

If you don't have a key to unlock or encrypt a message, you can set your encryption tool to look it up automatically. If it cannot find the key, an error message appears.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates-variables.page0000644000373100047300000001037012306123572032520 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Configure variables in templates and reuse items from the message you reply to Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using Variables in Templates
Configuring Variables for Message Templates

Izberite UrediVstavki.

Kliknite Predloge.

Click the Configuration tab.

You can add, edit or remove the key-value pairs. You can specify any number of key-value pairs.

In any template, the occurrence of every $key is replaced by the value it has in the configuration. For example, if you set the key to Manager and the value to Harry, any occurrence of $Manager is replaced by Harry in the message.

Assume that you have 1000 message templates with your current manager's name in them. When the current manager is replaced by a new one, it is not easy for you to manually replace the manager's name in all the 1000 messages. If the messages have a $Manager key value, you can reset the value in the Configuration tab of this plugin.

By default, the entire environment variables are used as a key-value pair. An occurrence of $env_variable is replaced by the value it carries. For example, an occurrence of $PATH in your template is replaced by its value when the template is used.

The replacement process uses the following order of precedence:

$key is replaced by the value set for it in the Configuration tab of the Templates plugin.

If the key is not found, it is then replaced with the value of its environment variable.

If key is neither a configuration option nor an environment variable, no changes are made.
Using Elements From a Message in a Template When Replying

Templates can contain more than just the predefined set of key-value pairs. You can also get any message header values from the email that you are applying the template on, plus the complete message body.

In order to do this, use the format $ORIG[header_name] and replace the variable header_name by the actual header. For example, if you would like to insert the subject line of the message that you reply to, use $ORIG[subject]. To insert the complete body, use $ORIG[body].

If no replacement for a variable is found, the variable is not removed (except for $ORIG[body]) but left in place so that you see that something went wrong. This could happen when trying to use headers that are not necessarily always available in the original message (for example $ORIG[reply-to]).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-recognized-thread-related-headers.page0000644000373100047300000000227512306123572031737 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Which thread-related headers are recognized by Evolution. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Thread related headers recognized by Evolution

Evolution supports the following headers:

References

In-Reply-To

Thread-* headers are Microsoft's proprietary headers and not supported.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-forward-as-attachment.page0000644000373100047300000000264012306123572031326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to forward a message with its attachments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Forwarding a message with its attachments

Click MessageForward as... and choose Attachment, so the forwarded email and also its attachments get attached to the email you want to send.

If you want to have this setting by default, set EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesForward Style to Attachment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-manage-microsoft-exchange-evo-mapi.page0000644000373100047300000000624512306123572033473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Microsoft Exchange MAPI account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Exchange MAPI account settings
Urejevalnik računov

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Exchange MAPI accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Defaults (Exchange MAPI accounts) Defaults
Nastavitve Exchange

In this section you can view the size of all Exchange folders.

Security (Exchange MAPI accounts) Varnost
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-working-offline.page0000644000373100047300000000646212306123572026414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Work with your mail while not being connected to the network. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Delo brez povezave

Forced offline mode helps you communicate with remote mail storage systems like GroupWise, IMAP or Exchange, in situations where you are not connected to the network at all times. Evolution keeps a local copy of one or more folders to allow you to compose messages, storing them in your Outbox to be sent the next time you connect.

Evolution's forced offline mode only refers to mail and does not apply to contacts and calendars.

POP mail downloads all messages to your local system, but other connections usually download just the headers, and get the rest only when you want to read the message. Before you force Evolution to be offline, Evolution downloads the unread messages from the folders you have chosen to store.

Označevanje map za delo brez povezave

To mark a mail folder for offline use,

Right-click the folder, then click Properties.

Click Copy folder content locally for offline operation.
Syncing messages for offline usage

Your connection status is shown by the small icon in the lower left corner of the Evolution main window. When you are online, it displays two connected cables. When you force offline mode via clicking the icon or via FileWork Offline, the cables separate. You will be asked whether you want to go offline immediately or synchronize folders locally before you go offline.

To download Messages for Offline Operations without immediately going offline, select FileDownload Messages for Offline Usage.

Automatic Network State Handling

Evolution automatically understands the network state and acts accordingly. For instance, Evolution switches to offline mode when the network goes down and automatically switches on when the network is up again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-search.page0000644000373100047300000000346112306123572026402 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching for text in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Iskanje v ustvarjalniku pošte

Under the Edit menu in the message composer there are several text searching features available.

Najdi:

Enter a word or phrase, and Evolution finds it in your message.

Poišči znova:

Select this item to repeat the last search you performed.

Zamenjaj:

Find a word or phrase, and replace it with something else.

For all of these menu items you can choose whether to search backwards in the document from the point where your cursor is. You can also determine whether the search is to be case sensitive in determining a match

If you have a technical background you can also select the option to use Regular expressions for searching.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-layout.page0000644000373100047300000000162712306123572025456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adjusting the display and views of the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Changing the calendar layout usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-default-folder-locations.page0000644000373100047300000000434712306123572030202 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the location of Draft, Sent, Trash and Junk folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Mail folder locations

You can set a different place where to store messages in your Draft folder and Sent folder in the Defaults section of the mail account editor (EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaults).

For remote account types (accounts such as IMAP) you can also use folders on the mail server for Junk and Trash by selecting the corresponding Use a Real Folder option. In this case, Evolution's local virtual folders will not be used.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-attachments-received.page0000644000373100047300000000431012306123572027401 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Saving and opening files that are attached to received emails. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Handling attachments in received mail

If you receive an email message with one or more file attachments, Evolution displays the number of attachments and a Save or Save All button between the email header and the content of the email.

Evolution does not support saving all attachments of all messages in one folder at once.

A list of attachments is also available at the bottom of the email.

To save an attachment to disk, click the down-arrow next to the attachment icon and click Save As.

To open an attachment in another application, click the down-arrow next to the attachment icon and choose one of the available applications.

The options available for an attachment vary depending on the type of attachment and the applications that are installed on your system. For example, image files can be opened in the Image Viewer application or in the GIMP graphics editor.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/searching-items.page0000644000373100047300000000154512306123572025453 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching content and data within Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Iskanje predmetov usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-plain-text.page0000644000373100047300000000530012306123572027214 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change font alignment and paragraph formatting in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Formatting Text in Plain Text Format

Text formatting tools are located in the tool bar below the Subject line. They also appear in the Insert and Format menus.

The icons in the tool bar are explained in tooltips which appear when you hold your mouse pointer over the buttons.

Glave in seznami:

At the left of the upper tool bar, you can choose Normal for a default text style or Header 1 through Header 6 for varying sizes of header from large (1) to tiny (6). Other styles include Preformat, to use the HTML tag for preformatted blocks of text, and three types of bullet points for lists.

For instance, instead of using asterisks to mark a bulleted list, you can use the Bulleted List style from the style dropdown list. Evolution uses different bullet styles, and handles word wrap and multiple levels of indentation.

Poravnava:

Located next to the Headers and Lists dropdown, the three paragraph icons should be familiar to users of most word processing software. The left-most button aligns your text to the left, the center button centers text, and the right button aligns the text to the right.

Indentation Rules:

The button with the arrow pointing left decreases a paragraph's indentation, and the right arrow increases its indentation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-refresh-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000253212306123572026400 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ways to update your Evolution folders. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Updating/refreshing the folders on the mail server

To make sure that your local email folders are updated, go to FolderRefresh. This will ensure that all of your emails have been downloaded from the mail server onto your computer so that you can read them all, and that the read status is synced with the mail server.

You can also double-click on the folder name to refresh it, or press F5.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/offline.page0000644000373100047300000000427312306123572024014 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make Evolution mail be online again. Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com Patrick O'Callaghan Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Why is Evolution's mail offline when my net connection is working?

You may have started Evolution with the --offline commandline option to enforce offline mode.

If this is not the case and Evolution normally works but has suddenly stopped connecting to your mail accounts, you may have unintentionally clicked on the connection icon in the lower left corner. When connected, the icon resembles a pair of sockets joined together. If the sockets are open, there is no connection to your mail accounts (and the Send/Receive button is grayed out). Click on the icon to change its state.

If the problem persists and you are sure you have not clicked the icon, but you can still reach the network from other apps on your system (browsers, FTP, SSH, ping etc.) it may be that your network connection is not properly configured. For more information please take a look at the Desktop help or seek help from your distribution support forums, mailing lists etc.

Evolution's forced offline mode only refers to mail and does not apply to contacts and calendars.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-html-image.page0000644000373100047300000000323112306123572027154 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Embed a picture in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Inserting an Image in HTML

You can insert an image into the email (at the current position of the cursor):

Click InsertImage... in the menubar.

Browse to and select the file.

Kliknite Odpri.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line, or drag an image into the text area of the message composer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-usage-edit-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000235212306123572027662 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Urejanje stika v imeniku. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Urejanje stika

If you want to change a contact that already exists in your address books,

Double-click on the contact that you want to edit in the list of contacts, or select the contact and press Enter.

Urejanje podrobnosti stikov.

Kliknite V redu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000642412306123572024750 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use folders to organize your mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba map

Evolution, like most mail systems, uses folders to store email messages. You start out with a few mail folders such as the Inbox, Outbox, and Drafts. You can, however, create more folders if required.

Ustvarjanje mape

To create a folder:

Click on Folder and select New. You can also right-click anywhere on the folder list and select the New Folder option.

Določite ime in mesto mape.

Kliknite na gumb Ustvari.

The new folder will be shown in the folder view. You can then move messages into the folder.

The Inbox folders on most IMAP servers cannot contain both messages and subfolders. When creating additional folders on your IMAP mail server, branch the folders from the root of the IMAP account and not from the Inbox. Creating subfolders in your Inbox may prevent you from reading messages that exist in the Inbox. If this happens, move the folders to the IMAP account.
Premikanje sporočil v novo mapo

You can move messages into folders by using one of the following methods:

Primi in spusti sporočila v mapo.

Right-click on the message and select the Move to Folder option.

Select a message and press ShiftCtrlV.

Select a message and click on MessageMove to Folder.

The steps for copying are similar.

Moving files can be done automatically by setting up filters.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-attachments-sending.page0000644000373100047300000000550612306123572027252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Attaching files to emails you want to send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Adding attachments to an email
Pripenjanje datotek

To attach a file to your email in the composer:

Click Add Attachment..., or click InsertAttachment, or press CtrlM.

Izberite datoteko, ki jo želite pripeti.

Kliknite V redu.

You can also drag a file to the attachment bar of the composer window.

When you send the message, a copy of the attached file goes with it. Be aware that large attachments can take a long time to send and receive.

Attachment Reminder

Evolution has an Attachment Reminder plugin you can use to remind yourself to attach a file to an email. If it determines that you have not attached the file, it displays a reminder window before the email is sent.

To enable the Attachment Reminder:

Izberite UrediVstavki.

Enable Attachment Reminder.

Click the Configuration tab.

Click Add, then enter keywords in your language such as "Attach" or "enclosed".

Based on the keywords you have added, Evolution searches the text of every mail you are going to send. If it finds any of the keywords in your email and there is no actual attached file, the reminder window is displayed.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000172212306123572026304 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On using several calendars, searching, and categories. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sorting and organizing calendars usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-signing-encrypting.page0000644000373100047300000000437312306123572032074 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Signing or encrypting messages via GPG that you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Šifriranje ali podpisovanje sporočil

After you have set up your GPG key, you can sign or encrypt a message by clicking OptionsPGP Sign or PGP Encrypt from the message composer menu.

The Subject line of the message will not be encrypted and should not be used for sensitive information.

To have every message signed or encrypted:

Select EditPreferencesMail Accounts.

Select the mail account to encrypt the messages in.

Kliknite Uredi.

Kliknite zavihek Varnost.

Select Always sign outgoing messages when using this account.

Kliknite V redu.

Kliknite Zapri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-filters-conditions.page0000644000373100047300000000455112306123572027130 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available conditions for setting up filtering. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Available Filter conditions

Izvirni račun:

Filters messages according the server you got them from. This is most useful if you use multiple POP mail accounts.

Pipe to Program:

Evolution can use an external command to process a message, then process it based on the return value. Commands used in this way must return an integer. This is most commonly used to add an external junk mail filter.

Preizkus neželene pošte:

Filters based on the results of the junk mail test.

Match All:

Applies an action always to any message, without further conditions. This could be useful at the end of the list of message filters to cover those emails that did not match any conditions for the preceding filters in the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000543012306123572026145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Iskanje stikov. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Iskanje stikov
Iskanje po posameznem stiku

To find text in the displayed contact, select EditFind in Contact... from the main menu.

Iskanje po stikih
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-word-wrap.page0000644000373100047300000000235612306123572025234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Words are wrapped in outgoing mails at 72 characters. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Words are wrapped in outgoing mails at 72 characters

For better readability lines are wrapped after 72 characters. This value is hardcoded and cannot be changed.

To avoid line breaks within a paragraph, mark the paragraph and choose FormatParagraph StylePreformatted in the mail composer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-spam.page0000644000373100047300000000161712306123572024251 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to automatically handle unwanted mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Upravljanje neželene pošte usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-search-folders-refresh.page0000644000373100047300000000273212306123572027645 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ways of updating Search folders. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Updating/refreshing Search folders

It might happen that one of your Search folders has not updated since some new email arrived or since an email was deleted, for example. This will mean that the list of emails in the folder is not up-to-date.

You can get an updated view of the search folder either by switching to another folder and then back again, or by right-clicking on the search folder and choosing Refresh.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-displaying-collapsible-headers.page0000644000373100047300000000344512306123572031355 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display less email recipients of a specific message. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Collapsible Message Headers

Evolution compresses the To, Cc and Bcc headers of received mail and shows only five addresses in the message preview.

To see all recipients, click the icon next to the To: or Cc: line, or click the ellipsis (...) at the end of the five displayed addresses.

To collapse all of the message headers and just display the subject and sender in one line, click the icon next to the From: line. This is helpful on small screens.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-search-folders-add.page0000644000373100047300000000613712306123572026742 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting up a search folder. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Creating A Search Folder

Click EditSearch Folders, or click MessageCreate Rule and select the criterion the search folder will be based on, or if you have run a search, click SearchCreate Search Folder From Search....

Kliknite Dodaj.

Enter a name in the Rule name field.

Define the conditions for the rule. For each condition, you first select which part of the message will be checked and then define the comparison.

For more information on the available conditions see Available Search Folder conditions.

If you want to define multiple conditions, define under Find items if any or if all conditions have to apply, and click Add Condition and repeat the previous step.

Select which folders will be used for the search folder in the section Search Folder Sources. Options are:

All local folders:

Uses all local folders for the search folder source in addition to individual folders that are selected.

All active remote folders:

Remote folders are considered active if you are connected to the server; you must be connected to your mail server for the search folder to include any messages from that source in addition to individual folders that are selected.

All local and active remote folders:

Uses all local and active remote folders for the search folder source in addition to individual folders that are selected.

Specific folders only:

Uses individual folders for the search folder source. In this case, click the Add to select folders.

Kliknite V redu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-mail-signatures-per-account.page0000644000373100047300000000425012306123572032454 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting a default signature for an email account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Default account signature

You can define a default signature for each of your mail accounts. This can be edited under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditIdentityOptional Information.

If you have a signature for your account defined but exceptionally do not want to use it for one message, or want to use a different signature, you can change it via the dropdown menu in the right upper corner in the email composer window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-forward.page0000644000373100047300000000606412306123572026603 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Forwarding a received email to somebody. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Posredovanje sporočila

When you receive an email, you can forward it to other individuals or groups that might be interested.

You can forward a message as an attachment to a new message (this is the default setting, see Default settings), inline (in your message without the > character before each line), or quoted (with > character before each line).

Attachment forwarding is best if you want to send the full, unaltered message to someone else. Inline or Quoted forwarding is best if you want to send portions of a message, or if you have a large number of comments on different sections of the message you are forwarding.

To forward a message that you are reading:

Click MessageForward, the Forward button in the toolbar, or press CtrlF to use the default forwarding method. In case you want to use a different forward method, click MessageForward as or the small dropdown arrow next to the Forward button in the toolbar to choose the method.

Select a recipient for the message. The subject is already entered, although you can alter it if you want.

Add your comments on the message in the text field.

Click Send or press CtrlReturn.

Attachments to a message you are forwarding are forwarded only when you send the original message as an attachment. Inline messages do not forward any attachments.

Privzete nastavitve

The default settings for replying and forwarding can be changed under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesGeneralReplies and ForwardsForward style.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/exporting-data-mail.page0000644000373100047300000000266712306123572026245 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export mail data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Izvažanje podatkov pošte

To save an email to a file in mbox format, select an email and click FileSave as mbox... or right-click on the message and click Save as mbox....

The same steps apply to save a complete mail folder, but you have to mark all messages in it first.

You can select all messages in a folder by clicking EditSelect All or pressing CtrlA.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-default-CC-and-BCC.page0000644000373100047300000000377412306123572026353 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make somebody always receive copies of your sent mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Privzeti Kp in Skp

You can set email addresses that should always receive copies of your sent mail (either as CC visible for all recipients, or BCC not visible for other recipients) in the Defaults section of the mail account editor (EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaults).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-filters.page0000644000373100047300000001164612306123572024764 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use filter rules to sort your mail automatically into folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Uporaba filtrov

Message filters apply actions on messages based on conditions that you have defined. You can define filters for both incoming and outgoing emails.

Filters will be automatically applied to incoming messages for local accounts (such as POP). Mail servers for remote accounts (such as IMAP) often already filter mail directly on the server as this is faster. If you want to apply your Evolution filters to remote accounts, you can enable this under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving OptionsOptionsApply filters to new messages in Inbox on this server.

To manually apply filters on messages in a folder, select the messages and click MessageApply Filters or press CtrlY.

You can select all messages in a folder by clicking EditSelect All or pressing CtrlA.

Ustvarjanje filtra

Click EditMessage Filters, or click MessageCreate Rule and select the criterion the filter will be based on.

Kliknite Dodaj.

Enter a name in the Rule name field.

Define the conditions for the rule. For each condition, you first select which part of the message will be checked and then define the comparison.

For more information on the available conditions see Available Filter conditions.

If you want to define multiple conditions, define under Find items if any or if all conditions have to apply, and click Add Condition and repeat the previous step.

Select the Actions for the Filter in the Then section.

For more information on the available actions see Available Filter actions.

The order of filters is important. Filters are applied to the original message in sequence, like a recipe.

If your first filter has a Stop Processing rule, then all the email messages that match this filter will ignore all the succeeding filters.

When you move a message to another folder, "moving" actually means appending a copy of the message to the destination folder and marking the original message for deletion. So any subsequent filter rules will be applied to the original message that is now marked for deletion. Therefore moving a message should usually appear last in a sequence of filter rules.

If you want to define multiple actions, click Add Action and repeat the previous step. For example, if you want no other existing filters to be applied choose Stop Processing as the second action in the list.

Kliknite V redu.
Urejanje filtrov

Click EditMessage Filters.

Izbor filtra.

Kliknite Uredi.

Make the desired corrections, then click OK twice.
Brisanje filtrov

Click EditMessage Filters.

Izbor filtra.

Click Remove.

Kliknite V redu.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-filters-actions.page0000644000373100047300000000547712306123573026430 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available actions for setting up filtering. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Available Filter actions

Premakni v mapo:

Moves the message into a folder you specify.

Kopiraj v mapo:

Puts a copy of the message into a folder you specify.

Izbriši:

Marks the message for deletion. The message can be undeleted until you expunge or empty the trash.

Zaustavi obdelavo:

Select this if you want to all other filters ignore this message. Note that only filters listed after this particular rule will be ignored.

Set Label:

Adds a label to a message.

Dodeli barvo:

Marks the message with a color of your choice.

Dodeli rezultat:

Assigns the message a numeric score.

Prilagodi rezultat:

Changes the numeric score by the amount you set.

Nastavi stanje:

Sets the status of the message. The status can be Replied To, Draft, Important, Read, or Junk.

Nenastavljeno stanje:

If the message has a status value, unsets it. If a status value is not set, it does nothing.

Pisk:

Zapiskaj ob opozorilih.

Predvajaj zvok:

Select a sound file for Evolution to play.

Zaženi program:

Evolution runs an application.

Pipe to Program:

Sends the message to an application of your choice. No return value is expected. This feature can be used to create automatic Web postings from email messages or to perform additional message post processing not supported by Evolution.

Posreduj na:

Forwards the message to another email address.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-recurrence.page0000644000373100047300000000325312306123573026274 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ponavljajoči se sestanki. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Using Recurrence

If you have an appointment that takes place regularly, you can define its recurrence by clicking the Recurrence button in the Appointment Editor or by clicking OptionsRecurrence. You can then choose a time and date when the appointment stops recurring, and, under Exceptions, pick individual days when the appointment does not recur. Make your selections from left to right, and you form a sentence: "Every two weeks on Monday and Friday until January 3, 2015" or "Every month on the first Friday for 12 occurrences."

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/intro-application.page0000644000373100047300000000357312306123573026031 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvod v Evolution. Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Prvi koraki

Evolution is a stable and versatile personal information manager for the GNOME project. Evolution allows you to keep your calendars, mail, address books and tasks in one place.

By default Evolution opens the mail view. This is were you can view all your mail. You can change to other views of the application by going to the bottom of the left pane in the window (the so-called "switcher") and selecting the desired view. Learn more about the elements of the main window.

When Evolution starts, it remembers the last view that you used. However you can also explicitly start Evolution in a specific view. For the calendar view, use the command evolution --component=calendar in the Terminal application. Other available options are "mail", "contacts", "tasks", and "memos".

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/memos-usage-add-memo.page0000644000373100047300000000601012306123573026265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding a memo to your memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Adding a Memo

Click FileNewMemo, or press ShiftCtrlO.

Select a memo list in the List dropdown list.

Enter the memo information.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

If you just want to quickly add a memo by entering a summary you can directly enter it in the list of memos.

You can also define a category, or a classification for the memo, or add an attachment.

Shared Memos

Shared Memos are like mail messages except they are scheduled for a particular day and appear on the calendar for that date. You can use shared memos to show vacations, holidays, pay days, birthdays, and so on. Posted shared memos are placed in your Calendar on the date you specify. They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user's Mailbox.

To send a Shared Memo,

Click FileNewShared Memo, or press ShiftCtrlH.

Select the Organizer's account name from the drop-down list given next to the Organizer field.

In the To field, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat this for additional users.

Select the task list (under List) in which you would like to create the entry.

Enter a brief summary in the Summary field.

In the Start Date field, type the date this shared memo should appear in the recipients' calendars.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-send-and-receive-automatically.page0000644000373100047300000000252112306123573031264 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Check automatically and regularly for new received mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Automatically check for new mail

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, enable the option Check for new messages every ... minutes in the Receiving Options page of the mail account settings (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options) and select the frequency in minutes.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/change-switcher-appearance.page0000644000373100047300000000306412306123573027540 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the display of the window buttons in the lower left corner. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Changing the Switcher appearance

The display of the window buttons in the lower left corner (Mail, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks and Memos) can be changed via ViewSwitcher Appearance. This can be helpful if you have a small display. You can also completely hide them.

Razpoložljive možnosti so:

Ikone in besedilo

Le ikone

Le besedilo

Slog orodne vrstice

Pokaži gumbe

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-exchange-mapi.page0000644000373100047300000000543512306123573031464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Exchange MAPI accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Exchange MAPI receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Enter the Domain name for that server.

If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

Click Authenticate and enter your password.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

You can also define if Evolution checks for new messages in all folders.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-reply.page0000644000373100047300000000710412306123573026267 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odgovarjanje na prejeto pošto. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Odgovarjanje na sporočilo
Replying to Email Messages

To reply to a message, select the message to reply to in the message list and click the Reply button in the toolbar, or right-click within the message and select Reply to Sender. This opens the message composer. The To: and Subject: fields are already filled, although you can alter them if you prefer. In addition, the full text of the old message is inserted into the new message, either in grey with a blue line on one side (for HTML display) or with the > character before each line (in plain text mode), to indicate that it is part of the previous message.

If you are reading a message with several recipients, you can use Reply to All instead of Reply. If there are large numbers of people in the Cc: or To: fields, this can save substantial amounts of time.

Using the Reply To All Feature

Susan sends an email to a client and sends copies to Tim and to an internal company mailing list of co-workers. If Tim wants to make a comment for all of them to read, he uses Reply to All, but if he just wants to tell Susan that he agrees with her, he uses Reply. His reply does not reach anyone that Susan put on her Bcc list, because that list is not shared with anyone.

If you subscribe to a mailing list, and want your reply to go just to the list rather than to the sender, select Reply to List instead of Reply or Reply to All.

Tipkovne bližnjice

Dejanje

Tipkovne bližnjice

Odgovori pošiljatelju

CtrlR

Odgovori vsem na dopisnem seznamu

CtrlL

Odgovori vsem

ShiftCtrlR
Privzete nastavitve

The default settings for replying and forwarding can be changed under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesGeneralReplies and ForwardsReply style.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-mail-signatures.page0000644000373100047300000000251012306123573030234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using email signatures at the bottom of a message you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Working with email signatures

A signature consists of one or more lines of text (or even a picture) that will be added at the end of an email that you send. It can contain contact information or other things. A signature always begins with two dashes and a space (-- ).

The term "signature" is also differently used in terms of encryption.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-layout-changing.page0000644000373100047300000000167712306123573026411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the display of the mail window (message list columns and widescreen). Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Changing the mail window layout usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-account-management.page0000644000373100047300000000235712306123573027062 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding, editing and managing mail accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Upravljanje z računom
Common Account Types
Local Account Types
Corporate Account Types
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-spam-settings.page0000644000373100047300000001115612306123573026107 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to set up handling unwanted junk/spam mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Patrick O'Callaghan Pete Biggs April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Junk Mail Settings
Orodja

Evolution lets you check for unwanted junk or spam emails by using the Bogofilter or SpamAssassin tools. To use these tools, you need to make sure that they are installed via the software management tool of your distribution.

You might need to install Bogofilter or SpamAssassin to perform these steps.

Install bogofilter

Install spamassassin

SpamAssassin works through a set of predefined rules, hence it can determine spam straight away. Bogofilter does not come with a default set of spam criteria so it will not automatically filter anything after installing it. You must train it first to make it work. You can modify the actions of SpamAssassin by training it as well.

Junk Mail Folder

Messages that are marked as junk (either manually by the user or automatically via SpamAssassin or Bogofilter) will be moved to the Junk mail folder.

Nastavitve neželene pošte

The junk mail options discussed in this page refer only to POP and Local Delivery accounts. For handling junk mails on IMAP accounts, see the Evolution settings under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options.

You can modify how Evolution handles junk mail by changing the Junk Mail Preferences:

Click EditPreferences or press ShiftCtrlS.

Select Mail Preferences.

Click on the Junk tab. Here, you can specify the following:

Checking incoming mail for junk messages.

Deleting junk messages upon exit, and how often junk messages are to be deleted.

Checking custom headers for junk.

Marking messages as not junk if the sender is in the address book.

Privzeti filter neželene pošte.

Bogofilter and SpamAssassin options.

For more information and specific Bogofilter or SpamAssassin configuration questions it is recommended to check out the Frequently Asked Questions for Bogofilter resp. SpamAssassin.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-priority.page0000644000373100047300000000306512306123573027017 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting a priority for messages to be sent. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Prioritizing outgoing messages

You can prioritize a message to be sent, so that the recipient sees its relative importance. To prioritize a message, click OptionsPrioritize Message in the composer window.

Evolution will ignore the message priority of incoming messages because the recipient should decide whether the message is important or not. You can set the "Important" flag for any messages.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-html-link.page0000644000373100047300000000355612306123573027042 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Insert a link to a website in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Inserting a Link in HTML

You can insert links into the email:

Select the text that you want to turn into a link.

Either click InsertLink... in the menubar, or right-click on the selected text and click Insert Link.

Enter the address in the URL field.

Kliknite Zapri.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line.

If you do not want a special link text you can just enter the address of the link directly. It will be automatically recognized as a link.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/problems-debug-how-to.page0000644000373100047300000000302712306123573026511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to provide good information when tracking down a problem. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. How to track down a problem

As a first hint, error messages will be either displayed in the statusbar or between the tool bar and the search bar.

To further track down a problem, some debug options are listed on the Evolution project website.

To contact the Evolution community for help, please see How to get help.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-composer-html-table.page0000644000373100047300000000335712306123573027173 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Insert a table in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Vstavljanje tabele v HTML

You can insert a table into the email (at the current position of the cursor):

Click InsertTable... in the menubar.

Izberite število vrstic in stolpcev.

Define the type of layout for the table.

Optionally: Select a background color or image for the table.

Kliknite Zapri.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/contacts-usage-add-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000410212306123573027461 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje stika v adresar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje stika

Click FileNewContact, or right-click in a blank space in the list of contacts and click New Contact..., or press ShiftCtrlC.

Select the address book under Where: to which it will be added.

Enter the contact information. Note that there are several tabs.

You can add a photograph to the contact by clicking the large field (showing a stylized person) next to Full Name and Categories.

Kliknite V redu.
Contact Quick-Add from the Email Window

You can also add a contact directly from an email.

Right-click on the email address in the message header.

Izberite Dodaj v adresar ....

Either press Edit Full to bring up the full Contact Editor, or click OK to directly add the contact to the chosen address book.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-receiving-options-unix-mbox-spool-file.page0000644000373100047300000000435512306123573032753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for standard Unix mbox spool file accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Standard Unix mbox spool file receiving options
Prejemanje e-pošte

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the file by clicking on the button next to File in the Configuration section. This will open a file chooser window.
Nastavitve prejemanja

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in INBOX.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/memos-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000221412306123573024606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting memos. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Add, Edit and Delete Memos

Currently there is no support for syncing memos with the Tomboy or Gnote applications.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-usage-add-task.page0000644000373100047300000000465712306123573026316 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje opravila na seznam opravil. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Dodajanje opravila

Click FileNewTask, or press ShiftCtrlT.

Izberite seznam opravil v spustnem seznamu Seznam.

Vnesite podatke o nalogi.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

If you just want to quickly add a task by entering a summary you can directly enter it in the list of tasks.

You can also define a time zone, a category, or a classification for the task, or add an attachment.

Dodeljena opravila

Evolution can be used to assign a task to multiple people.

When you assign a task, you can specify the attendees in several categories, such as "chair" or "required". When you save the task, each attendee is sent an email with the task information, which also gives them the option to respond.

This is similar to meetings.

To create an Assigned Task, click FileNewAssigned Task.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000222012306123573025450 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On folders, sorting, searching, filters, search folders, and labels. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Sorting and organizing mail

Evolution provides several options to organize your mail according to your needs.

Napredne možnosti
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-encryption-s-mime-signing-encrypting.page0000644000373100047300000000451212306123573032502 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Signing or encrypting messages via S/MIME that you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Šifriranje ali podpisovanje sporočil

After you have added your certificate, you can sign or encrypt a message by clicking OptionsS/MIME Sign or S/MIME Encrypt from the message composer menu.

To have every message signed or encrypted:

Select EditPreferencesMail Accounts.

Select the mail account to encrypt the messages in.

Kliknite Uredi.

Kliknite zavihek Varnost.

In the Secure MIME (S/MIME) section, click Select next to Signing Certificate and specify the path to your signing certificate, or click Select next to Encryption Certificate and specify the path to your encryption certificate.

Select the appropriate options.

Kliknite V redu.

The Subject line of the message will not be encrypted and should not be used for sensitive information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/tasks-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000540712306123573025461 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Iskanje opravil. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Iskanje opravil
Iskanje po posameznem opravilu

To find text in the displayed task, select EditFind in Task... from the main menu.

Iskanje po opravilih
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/import-single-files.page0000644000373100047300000000272112306123573026260 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing single files. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Importing single files

To import single files (mail, calendar data or contacts):

Click FileImport.

In the Importer Type tab, click Import a single file.

Izberite datoteko.

The file type will be automatically determined.

Choose the destination (e.g. the folder in Evolution) for the imported data.

You can also import contacts that you have received as a vCard attachment of an email from its attachment menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/intro-main-window.page0000644000373100047300000001732712306123573025761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 An explanation of the areas shown in the Evolution window. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Barbara M. Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Glavno okno programa <app>Evolution</app>

Evolution provides functionality for E-Mail, Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Memos. You can switch to another functionality by using the "Switcher" buttons in the lower left corner. Depending on the displayed functionality also the displayed elements in the window differ.

E-pošta

Glavno okno za pošto Evolution

Corresponding elements in the mail main window:

Menu bar

Tool bar

Folder list

Search bar

Message list

Switcher

Preview pane

Status bar
Seznam map

The folder list gives you a list of the available folders for each account. To see the contents of a folder, click the folder name and its contents are displayed in the message list.

For more information see Using Folders.

 Seznam sporočil

The message list displays all the read and unread messages that you have in the chosen folder. To view an email in the preview pane, click the message in the message list.

 Preklopnik

The switcher at the bottom of the side bar lets you switch between the Evolution tools: Mail, Contacts, Calendars, Memos and Tasks.

For more information see Changing the Switcher appearance.

You can disable the folder list and the switcher side bar by toggling ViewLayoutShow Side Bar or pressing F9.

 Pladenj predogleda

The preview pane displays the message that is currently chosen in the message list.

You can disable the preview pane by toggling ViewPreviewShow Message Preview.
Koledar

Elements in the calendar main window:

Menu bar

Tool bar

Calendar list

Search bar

Appointment list

Seznam nalog

Month pane

Memo list

Switcher

Status bar
Appointment List

The appointment list displays all your scheduled appointments in the time frame selected.

 Month Pane

The month pane is a small view of a calendar month. To display additional months, drag the column border to the right. You can also select a range of days in the month pane to display a custom range of days in the appointment list.

 Task list and Memo list

Tasks and memos are just displayed for your convience and are not associated to any appointments. Use the switcher to go to their main windows.
Stiki

Elements in the contacts main window:

Menu bar

Tool bar

Address book list

Search bar

Contacts list

Switcher

Contact preview

Status bar

You can disable the contact preview by toggling ViewPreviewContact Preview.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/mail-filters-not-working.page0000644000373100047300000000723112306123573027234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fix problems with mail filters that do not sort and organize mail as expected. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Mail filters are not working
Zaporedje filtrov

The order of filters is very important. They are applied to the original message in sequence, like a recipe.

If your first filter has a Stop Processing rule, then all messages that match this filter will ignore all succeeding filters.

When you move a message to another folder, "moving" actually means appending a copy of the message to the destination folder and marking the original message for deletion. So any subsequent filter rules will be applied to the original message that is now marked for deletion. Therefore moving a message should usually appear last in a sequence of filter rules.

To check the rules and their order of an existing filter, review its actions in the Then section by editing the filter.

Using Several Mail Clients

Another thing you have to keep in mind is that filters depend on the "new" flag that is set on the server when a particular email message is initially fetched from the server. If you use another email client aside from Evolution, your filters may not work automatically.

Logging Filter Actions

If it is still unclear why filters do not work as expected, you can enable logging filter actions.

Zaprite Evolution.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail filters-log-actions true

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail filters-log-file "/home/myusername/my-filter-log" and replace myusername by your username. This will create a text file named my-filter-log in your home directory. Note that the absolute path to the file name must be entered; a syntax like ~ or $HOME will not work.

Zaženi Evolution.

Fetch mail to apply filters.

Open the file my-filter-log with a text editor to see which filter actions have been applied.

Note that you can disable filter logging again by using the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail filters-log-actions false

You can also use the dconf-editor application to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/evolution/calendar-layout-appointment-display.page0000644000373100047300000000536712306123573031463 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Določite prikazovanje sestankov v svojem koledarju. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Mojca Ograjšek mojca.ograjsek@gmail.com 2011. Appearance of Appointments

The following calendar-related options are available under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksDisplay.

Splošno

Time Divisions:

Sets the time increments shown as fine lines on the daily view in the calendar.

Show appointment end times in week and month views:

If there is space, Evolution shows the end times in the week and month views for each appointment.

Compress weekends in month view:

Select this option to display weekends in one box instead of two in the month view.

Pokaži številke tednov:

Shows the week numbers next to the respective weeks in the calendar.

Pokaži ponavljajoče se dogodke v ležeči pisavi v spodnjem levem koledarju

Drsenje po tednih v mesečnem pogledu
Oblika datuma/časa

You can change the format of the Date column by setting your preferred format.

The placeholders in the format expression are strftime formats. For a complete list of available strftime formats, run date --help in the Terminal application.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-manage.page0000644000373100047300000000405012317332041024004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako uporabiti IRC z Empathy. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Klepet IRC

Za uporabo IRC-a v Empathy morate imeti nameščen paket telepathy-idle.

Install telepathy-idle
Pogovori in klepetalnice IRC Klepetalnice in pogovori
Pogoste težave z IRC-em Pogoste težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/add-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000402712317332041024166 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje nekoga na seznam stikov. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dodajanje nekoga na vaš seznam stikov

Izberite KlepetDodaj stik.

Na spustnemu seznamu Račun izberite račun, ki ga želite uporabiti za povezovanje z vašim stikom. Vaš stik bo moral uporabiti isto storitev kot račun, ki ste ga izbrali.

V polju Določilo vnesite ID vašega stika, uporabniško ime, prikazano ime ali drugo primerno določilo za vrsto storitve.

V polje Vzdevek vtipkajte ime vašega stika, kot naj se pojavi v vašemu seznamu stikov.

Za dodajanje osebe na vaš seznam stikov kliknite Dodaj.

Za dodajanje nove osebe na vaš seznam stikov morate biti povezani na medmrežje in na vaš račun.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/send-file.page0000644000373100047300000000513712317332041023656 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pošljite datoteko s svojega računalnika enemu od svojih stikov. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pošiljanje datotek

V oknu Seznam stikov izvedite eno od naslednjega:

Desno kliknite na stik, kateremu želite poslati datoteko in izberite Pošlji datoteko.

Kliknite na stik, kateremu želite poslati datoteko in izberite UrediStikPošlji datoteko.

Izberite datoteko za pošiljanje in kliknite na Pošlji.

Pojavilo se bo okno Prenosi datotek.

Počakajte da vaš stik sprejme prenos datotek ali kliknite Zaustavi za zaustavitev prenosa.

Ko je prenos končan, je mogoče okno Prenosi datotek zapreti.

V primeru da imate v oknu več končanih prenosov, kliknite na Počisti za spraznjene seznama. To bo datoteke le odstranilo s seznama in jih ne bo izbrisalo z vašega računalnika.

Pošiljanje datotek je mogoče samo z uporabo naslednjih storitev: Jabber, Google Talk in Ljudje v bližini.

Za pošiljanje datotek morate biti povezani na medmrežje ali krajevno omrežje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-join-room.page0000644000373100047300000000362012317332041024467 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pridružitev kanalu IRC Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pridružitev klepetalnici IRC

Pridružite se lahko klepetalnicam IRC (poznane so tudi kot kanali IRC) na kateremukoli omrežju IRC. Za povezavo z omrežjem IRC si oglejte in .

V okno Seznam stikov izberite SobaPridruži se.

V spustnemu seznamu Račun izberite račun IRC, ki ustreza omrežju, ki ga želite uporabiti.

V besedilno polje Soba vnesite ime kanala, ki se mu želite pridružiti. Imena kanalov IRC se začnejo z znakom (#).

Kliknite Pridruži se za vstop v sobo.

Za pridružitev več sobam boste morali ponoviti korake zgoraj za vsako sobo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000301512317332041024522 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvod v Empathy hipni sporočevalnik. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod

Empathy je program hipnega sporočanja za namizje GNOME. Podpira besedilno sporočanje, zvočne in video klice, prenose datotek in najbolj uporabljene sisteme za sporočanje kot sta MSN in Google Talk.

Empathy vključuje zmožnosti, ki vam pomagajo sodelovati pri delu in zmožnosti, ki vam omogočajo vzdrževanje stikov s svojimi prijatelji.

Z Empathy lahko vse pogovore združite v eno okno, ali imate več oken za različne vrste pogovorov; enostavno iščete skozi svoje predhodne pogovore in date svoje namizje v souporabo s samo dvema klikoma.

Okno <gui>Seznam stikov</gui> Glavno okno Empathy

Glavno okno Empathy.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/geolocation.page0000644000373100047300000000217712317332041024314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabite in razumite geolego v Empathy. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Geografska lega
Geo-lega
Popravi pogoste napake
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/prob-conn-acctdisabled.page0000644000373100047300000000366212317332041026306 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Račun hipnega sporočanja, ki ga želite uporabiti ni omogočen na seznamu računov. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Moj račun ni omogočen

V primeru da račun hipnega sporočanja, ki ga želite uporabiti, v spustnemu seznamu računov ob poskusu začetka novega pogovora ali pridružitve sobe ni omogočen, so morda podrobnosti vašega računa nepravilne.

Prepričajte se, da ste povezani na medmrežje ali na krajevno omrežje.

Izberite UrediRačuni in izberite račun, ki ne deluje.

Ponovno vpišite svoje uporabniško ime in geslo ter se prepričajte da sta pravilna.

V odseku Napredno preverite, da so vse podrobnosti pravilne. Te podrobnosti bi morali najti na spletišču storitve sporočanja.

Preverite, da je račun vklopljen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/disable-account.page0000644000373100047300000000436312317332041025045 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preprečitev samodejnega prijavljanja Empathy v račun. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Onemogočitev računa

Za preprečitev prijave v Empaty brez odstranitve računa lahko račun onemogočite. Morda želite račun onemogočiti in ponovno omogočiti v primeru da želite biti v račun prijavljeni le ob določenih časih, toda želite Empathy še vedno uporabiti za druge račune.

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite UrediRačuni ali pritisnite F4.

Izberite račun, ki ga želite onemogočiti, s seznama računov na levi strani okna.

Na desni strani okna ga izklopite.

Za ponovno omogočitev računa ga vklopite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/geolocation-privacy.page0000644000373100047300000000514112317332041025761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kateri podatki so poslani in komu. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zasebnost Geo-lege
Kateri podatki so poslani

Mogoče je poslati: državo, regijo, krajevnost, področje, ulico, zgradbo, nadstropje, sobo, poštno številko, zemljepisno širino in dolžino, nadmorsko višino, hitrost in smer.

Natančnost in kakovost podatkov o vašemu geografskemu položaju je odvisna od programov infrastrukture uporabljene za odkritje vašega položaja.

Drugačne vrste omrežij imajo morda različne vrste natančnosti in lahko pošljejo različne podatke. Uporaba zunanjih naprav kot sta GPS in mobilni telefon bo povečalo natančnost poslanih podatkov.

Ko je omogočen način zasebnosti, ne bo poslano nič bolj natančno kot vaše mesto, tudi če uporabljate zunanjo napravo.

Kdo lahko vidi poslane podatke

Vaš geografski položaj lahko vidijo le vaši stiki.

Kaj je način zasebnosti

Način zasebnosti je privzeto omogočen način zmanjšane natančnosti, ki bo zmanjšal natančnost geografskega položaja poslanega vašim stikom.

Pregled zasebnosti

Pregled različnih nastavitev zasebnosti geo-lege v Empathy.

Geolega privzeto ni omogočena.

Način zasebnosti je privzeto omogočen.

Način zasebnosti prevlada celo pri uporabi zunanjih in bolj natančnih naprav.

Vaš položaj lahko vidijo le vaši stiki.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/geolocation-supported.page0000644000373100047300000000303312317332041026327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Storitve, ki podpirajo geo-lego in združljivost. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podprte storitve

Zmožnost geo-lege je trenutno združljiva le s storitvijo Jabber. Za uporabo zmožnosti morate imeti vi in vaš stik račun Jabber.

Zahtevano je, da strežnik, ki ga uporabljate, podpira zmožnost geo-lege. Podpira jo večina strežnikov Jabber. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte si dokumentacijo na spletišču vaše storitve.
Združljivost

Zmožnost geo-lege Empathy ni združljiva z drugimi storitvami geografskih položajev kot so Google Latitude, Yahoo Fire Eagle ali Brightkite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-start-conversation.page0000644000373100047300000000342412317332041026425 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Začetek pogovora s stikom IRC. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Klepet z nekom na IRC-u

Z drugimi uporabniki IRC imate lahko zasebne pogovore zunaj javnih klepetalnic IRC. Za začetek pogovora z drugim uporabnikom IRC:

Na seznamu stikov klepetalnice IRC dvokliknite ime uporabnika s katerim želite klepetati. Namesto tega lahko desno kliknete na ima uporabnika in izberete Klepet.

Seznam stikov sobe IRC ni enak kot seznam stikov Empathy. Vsebuje seznam uporabnikov v klepetalnicah IRC, ki ste se jim pridružili. Različne sobe imajo lahko različne sezname stikov.

Seznam stikov sobe IRC je običajno na desni strani okna sobe IRC. V primeru da ga ne vidite izberite PogovorPokaži seznam stikov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/change-status.page0000644000373100047300000000401712317332041024552 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spremenite svoje stanje za oglaševanje vaše razpoložljivosti vašim stikom. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Sprememba stanja

Nastavite lahko svoje stanje za nakaz vaše razpoložljivosti vašim stikov. Empathy vam omogoča izbiro s seznama določenih stanj.

Kliknite na spustni seznam na vrhu okna Seznam stikov.

Izberite stanje s seznama

Oglejte si za seznam vgrajenih stanj in kaj pomenijo. Lahko tudi dodate sporočila stanja po meri za več podrobnosti o vaši razpoložljivosti svojim stikom.

V primeru da svojega računalnika nekaj časa ne uporabljate, ali če je ohranjevalnik zaslona vklopljen bo stanje samodejno nastavljeno na Odsoten.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/prob-conn-name.page0000644000373100047300000000405012317332041024614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 “Ime v uporabi” V glavnemu oknu se pojavi sporočilo napake, ki pravi “Ime v uporabi”. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dobim sporočilo, ki pravi “Ime v uporabi”

Ta vrsta napak se zgodi, ko se poskusite povezati s svojim računom IRC in uporabljate vzdevek, ki ga na istemu omrežju že uporablja nekdo drug.

V sporočilu napake kliknite na ikono uredi.

V besedilno polje Vzdevek vpišite nov vzdevek.

V primeru da ste ta vzdevek ustvarili v omrežju, ki ga uporabljate, nastavite geslo za ta vzdevek. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Izklopite račun in ga ponovno vklopite za poskus ponovne povezave s storitvijo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/prob-conn-auth.page0000644000373100047300000000422512317332041024641 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V glavnemu oknu se pojavi sporočilo napake, ki pravi “Overitev je spodletela”. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dobil sporočilo, ki pravi “Overitev je spodletela”

Ta vrsta napake se zgodi, ko vam storitev takojšnjega sporočanja ne dovoli povezave ker zaradi nekega vzroka ne prepozna vašega uporabniškega imena ali gesla.

Prepričajte se, da ste povezani na medmrežje ali na krajevno omrežje.

Prepričajte se, da ste ustvarili račun za storitev s katero se želite povezati. V primeru da nimate računa, vam večina storitev ne bo dovolila povezave.

V sporočilu napake kliknite na ikono uredi.

Ponovno vpišite svoje uporabniško ime in geslo ter se prepričajte da sta pravilna.

Odstranite izbiro Omogočeno in jo nato ponovno izberite za poskus ponovne povezave s storitvijo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/share-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000000544012317332041024556 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dajte namizje v souporabo s svojimi stiki. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dajte vaše namizje v souporabo

Z nekaterimi stiki je mogoče dati svoje namizje v souporabo ali začeti uporabljati njihovo namizje. To zmožnost lahko uporabljate za prikaz svojega namizja vašim stikom, za iskanje pomoči ali za pomoč svojim stikom pri odpravljanju težav.

Za zmožnost souporabe namizja boste morali imeti nameščen strežnik VNC z ustrezno podporo. Vino, GNOME strežnik VNC ima zahtevano podporo.

V oknu Seznam stikov izvedite eno od naslednjega:

Izberite stik kateremu želite dati svoje namizje v souporabo in izberite UrediStikDaj moje namizje v souporabo.

Desno kliknite na ime stika kateremu želite dati namizje v souporabo in izberite Daj moje namizje v souporabo.

Povabilo za ogled vašega namizja bo bilo poslano izbranemu stiku. Za ogled vašega namizja ga bo moral sprejeti.

Povezavo stika s svojim oddaljenim namizjem lahko prekinete s programom souporabe namizja.

Za več podrobnosti kako uporabiti program oddaljenega pregledovalnika namizja se sklicujte na pomoč.

Ko svoje namizje date v souporabo z nekom drugim, boste morda opazili upočasnjeno delovanje sistema in nizko hitrost medmrežja.

Vsi stiki morda ne podpirajo te zmožnosti. Stiki morajo imeti vsaj Empathy različico 2.28 in na svojemu sistemu nameščen program pregledovalnika oddaljenega namizja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/hide-contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000223312317332041024527 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Skritje nepovezanih stikov iz vašega Seznama stikov. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Skrij nepovezane stike

Običajno Emapthy prikaže vse vaše stike: povezane, s katerimi lahko imate pogovor, in nepovezane.

Za skritje nepovezanih stikov:

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite PogledNepovezani stiki ali pritisnite CtrlH.

Za ponoven prikaz nepovezanih stikov, ponovite postopek zgoraj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/favorite-rooms.page0000644000373100047300000000647612317332041024773 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavite, pridružite se in upravljajte priljubljene sobe. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Priljubljene sobe
Nastavi sobo kot priljubljeno

Pridružite se sobi.

Za več podrobnosti kako se pridružiti sobi IRC si oglejte .

Za več podrobnosti kako začeti ali se pridružiti skupinskemu pogovoru si oglejte .

V oknu pogovora izberite PogovorPriljubljena klepetalnica.
Pridruži se priljubljenim sobam

V oknu Seznam stikov izvedite eno od naslednjega:

Pritisnite F5.

Izberite SobaPridruži se priljubljenim, za pridružitev vsem vašim priljubljenim sobam.

Izberite Soba in izberite sobo, ki se ji želite pridružiti.

Za pridružitev priljubljeni sobi morate biti povezani z medmrežjem in z vašim računom.
Upravljanje s priljubljenimi sobami

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite SobaUpravljaj priljubljene.

V spustnemu seznamu Račun izberite račun, katerega priljubljene sobe želite upravljati.

Izberite Vse za ogled vseh svojih priljubljenih sob.

Izberite priljubljeno sobo, ki jo želite upravljati:

Izberite izbirno polje Samodejna povezava za samodejno povezovanje s to sobo, ko se povežete s svojim računom.

Za odstranitev sobe iz svojih priljubljenih kliknite na Odstrani.

Ko ste končali, kliknite Zapri.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/index.page0000644000373100047300000000336412317332041023117 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Empathy hipni sporočilnik Empathy hipni sporočilnik Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/empathy-logo.png">Logotip hipnega sporočilnika Empathy</media> Empathy hipni sporočilnik
Upravljanje z računi
Upravljanje stikov
Besedilni pogovori
Zvočni in video pogovori
Napredna dejanja
Pogoste težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/import-account.page0000644000373100047300000000424512317332041024753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvozite račun iz drugega programa hipnega sporočanja. Peter Haslam peter.haslam@freenet.de Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvoz obstoječega računa

Ob prvem zagonu Empathy, vam bo ponudil uvoz računov iz drugih programov hipnega sporočanja. Trenutno je edini podprti program Pidgin.

Prvič poženite Empathy. Pomočnik vam bo ponudil več možnosti za ustvarjanje novih računov.

Izberite Da, uvozi podrobnosti mojega računa iz in kliknite Naprej.

Izberite izbirno bolje poleg vsakega računa, ki ga želite uvoziti.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

Trenutno računov po končanju pomočnika prvega zagona ni mogoče uvažati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/prob-conn.page0000644000373100047300000000177512317332041023711 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Diagnoza pogostih težav pri povezovanju s storitvijo takojšnjega sporočanja. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Težave s povezovanjem s storitvijo hipnega sporočanja usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-commands.page0000644000373100047300000000143412317332041024360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podprti ukazi IRC Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podprti ukazi IRC

Za ogled seznama podprtih ukazov IRC v klepetalnico vpišite /help in pritisnite Enter.

Vsi razpoložljivi ukazi imajo kratek opis njihove uporabe.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/geolocation-not-showing.page0000644000373100047300000000326612317332041026566 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Empathy ne objavi mojega geografskega položaja. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Geografska lega ni objavljena

V primeru da vaši stiki ne morejo videti vašega položaj, Empathy morda ne more odkriti vašega geografskega položaja z dobro natančnostjo.

V temu primeru vaš položaj ne bo objavljen, toda še vedno boste lahko videli položaje vaših stikov.

V primeru da želite objaviti vaš geografski položaj, lahko poskusite z uporabo zunanje naprave kot je GPS.

Za objavo svojega geografskega položaja, mora vaš strežnik Jabber podpirati Osebni protokol dogodkov (PEP). Seznam strežnikov s podporo PEP je vdrževan na spletu. Google Talk trenutno te zmožnosti ne podpira.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/status-icons.page0000644000373100047300000000615412317332041024444 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razumevanje različnih stanj in ikon stanja. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Vrste stanj in ikone <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/available.png">Ikona na voljo</media> <gui>Na voljo</gui>

Stanje Na voljo uporabite, ko ste za računalnikom in zmožni klepetati s svojimi stiki. Za to stanje lahko nastavite sporočilo po meri.

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/busy.png">Ikona zaposleno</media> <gui>Zaposleno</gui>

Uporabite stanje Zaposlen da bodo vaši stiki vedeli, da trenutno ne želite klepetati. Še vedno lahko vzpostavijo stik z vami, na primer če želijo razpravljati o nečem nujnem. Privzeto Empathy ne uporablja zvokov in balonskih opomnikov, ko ste zaposleni. Za to stanje lahko nastavite sporočilo po meri.

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/away.png">Ikona odsotno</media> <gui>Odsotno</gui>

Stanje Odsoten uporabite, ko greste proč od računalnika. Empathy vaše stanje samodejno nastavi na odsoten, če računalnika nekaj časa ne uporabljate ali če je vklopljen vaš ohranjevalnik zaslona. Privzeto Empathy ne bo uporabljal zvokov in obvestilnih balončkov, ko ste odsotni. Za to stanje lahko nastavite sporočilo po meri.

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/offline.png">Ikona nepovezano</media> <gui>Nevidno</gui>

Ko nastavite svoje stanje na Nevidno, boste za vaše stike videti nepovezani. Še vedno boste povezani s svojimi računi in še vedno boste videli stanja svojih stikov in lahko začeli pogovore z njimi.

<media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/offline.png">Ikona nepovezano</media> <gui>Nepovezano</gui>

Nastavitev vašega stanja na Nepovezano prekine povezavo z vsemi vašimi računi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-send-file.page0000644000373100047300000000214012317332042024421 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Empathy trenutno ne podpira pošiljanja datotek preko IRC-a. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pošiljanje datotek preko IRC-a

Trenutno preko IRC-a ni mogoče pošiljati datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/video-call.page0000644000373100047300000000552612317332042024032 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Začnite video pogovor z enim od vaših stikov Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Začenjanje video konference

V primeru da imate spletno kamero, lahko svoje stike pokličite in imate z njimi video pogovor. Ta zmožnost deluje le z določenimi vrstami računov in zahteva, da ima druga oseba program, ki podpira video klice.

V oknu Seznam stikov kliknite ikono video klic poleg imena stika, ki ga želite poklicati, in izberite Video klic. Namesto tega lahko desno kliknete na stik in izberete Video klic.

Odprlo se bo novo okno. Ko je povezava vzpostavljena boste na dnu okna videli Povezano skupaj s celotnim časom pogovora.

Za končanje pogovora izberite KlicOdloži.

Za pretvorbo video pogovora v zvočni pogovor izberite VideoIzklopi.
Začnite video pogovor z enim od svojih meta-stikov

V oknu Seznam stikov desno kliknite na meta-stik.

Desno kliknite na ime stika s katerim želite imeti pogovor in izberite Klepet.

Če želite videti ali je stik meta-stik, premaknite miško na stik v oknu Seznam stikov in se nad njim za trenutek zaustavite: pojavilo se bo majhno sporočilo, ki prikazuje število stikov, ki tvorijo meta-stik.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/prob-conn-neterror.page0000644000373100047300000000455112317332042025543 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V glavnemu oknu se pojavi sporočilo napake, ki pravi “Network error”. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dobim sporočilo, ki pravi “Napaka omrežja”

Ta vrsta napake se zgodi, ko Empathy zaradi nekega vzroka ne more komunicirati s storitvijo hipnega sporočanja.

Ta vrsta napake se zgodi, ko poskušate uporabiti račun IRC brez nastavitve vzdevka.

Prepričajte se, da ste povezani na medmrežje ali na krajevno omrežje.

V sporočilu napake kliknite na ikono uredi.

V odseku Napredno preverite, da so vse podrobnosti pravilne. Te podrobnosti bi morali najti na spletišču storitve sporočanja.

Izklopite račun in ga ponovno vklopite za poskus ponovne povezave s storitvijo.
Podpora posredniških strežnikov

Trenutno Empathy ni mogoče nastaviti za delo s posredovalnim strežnikom.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/prev-conv.page0000644000373100047300000000736212317332042023732 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Brskanje ali iskanje po preteklih pogovorih. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ogled preteklih pogovorov

Empathy samodejno shrani vse vaše besedilne pogovore z vašimi stiki. Lahko iščete po vseh vaših predhodnih pogovorih ali brskate predhodne pogovore po stiku in datumu.

Za ogled in iskanje vaših predhodnih pogovorov vam ni treba biti povezan na medmrežje.
Brskaj predhodne pogovore

Svoje predhodne pogovore s svojimi stiki ali klepetalnicami lahko brskate po datumu.

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite PogledPretekli pogovori. Namesto tega lahko pritisnete F3.

Izberite račun s spustnega seznama zgoraj levo. Seznam vseh stikov in klepetalnic za ta račun bo prikazan spodaj.

Izberite stik ali klepetalnico za ogled svojih predhodnih pogovorov. Privzeto bodo prikazani najbolj nedavni stiki.

Svoje pogovore lahko brskate po datumu. Dnevi ob katerih ste imeli pogovor z izbranim stikom bodo prikazni krepko. Kliknite na datum za izbiro. Kliknite puščice poleg meseca in leta za brskanje zgodnejših datumov.

Besedilo v prikazanemu pogovoru lahko iščete s pisanjem v iskalno polje na vrhu. Skladajoče besedilo bo poudarjeno.

Predhodne pogovore z enim od svojih stikov si lahko hitro ogledate v oknu Seznam stikov. Desno kliknite na stik in izberite Ogled predhodnih pogovorov. Odprlo se bo okno Predhodni pogovori s predhodno izbranim stikom.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/add-account.page0000644000373100047300000000604612317332042024173 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje novega računa v Empathy. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Dodajanje novega računa

Račune hipnega sporočanja za sporazumevanje z vsemi svojimi stiki v Empathy lahko dodate s katerekoli podprte naprave. Za nekatere ponudnike računov vam bodo ti koraki omogočili tudi ustvarjanje novega računa. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite UrediRačuni ali pritisnite F4.

Kliknite +.

Na spustnemu seznamu Protokol izberite vrsto računa, ki jo želite dodati.

V primeru da še niste ustvarili novega račun, izberite Ustvari nov račun na strežniku. Ta zmožnost ni na voljo za vse vrste računov in morda ne bo delovala z nekaterimi ponudniki računov. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Vnesite zahtevane podatke. Za večino računov boste potrebovali le ID prijave in geslo. Nekateri računi morda zahtevajo dodatne podrobnosti. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Kliknite Uveljavi.

Za spremembo imena, ki identificira račun v oknu Računi, izberite račun s seznama na levi ali kliknite na ime ali pritisnite preslednico. Uredite ime računa in pritisnite Enter, ko ste končali.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/overview.page0000644000373100047300000000445112317332042023655 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 What instant messaging is and how you can use it. Aruna S aruna.evam@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Overview of instant messaging

Instant messaging, sometimes abbreviated to IM, is a text-based means to communicate instantly over the internet and the local network. While some IM applications work with only one type of account, others, including Empathy, provide IM facilities by using accounts from different service providers. Some of these even support audio and video calling.

Video Conference

Group chats

Chat rooms

Some instant messaging applications can be used to connect to chat rooms, online places where like-minded people meet to talk. One popular means to connect to several chat rooms is the Internet Relay Chat, also known as IRC. IRC provides public chat rooms, which are open to anyone who creates an account on the IRC Server, and private chat rooms, which are password protected and open only to a select few.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/audio-video.page0000644000373100047300000001175212317332042024216 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podatki kdaj je mogoče imeti zvočni ali video pogovor. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podpora za zvok in video

Zvočne in video pogovor imate lahko le s stiki, ki uporabljajo program s podporo te zmožnosti. V primeru da vaši stiki podpirajo zvočne ali video pogovore lahko vidite naslednje ikone poleg njihovih imen na seznamu stikov:

Ikona

Opis

Ikona za zvočni pogovor

Stik lahko ima zvočni pogovor.

V sporočilu napake kliknite na ikono Ikona za video pogovor.

Stik lahko ima video pogovor.

Za zvočni pogovor morate imeti zvočno kartico, ki jo vaš operacijski sistem podpira, in delujoči mikrofon.

Za video pogovor morate imeti spletno kamero, ki jo vaš operacijski sistem podpira, in delujoči mikrofon.
Podprte vrste računov

Video in zvočne pogovore imate lahko le z uporabo računov na določenih podprtih storitvah. Naslednja razpredelnica našteva ali sta zvok in video podprta za vsako vrsto računa.

Vrste računov zagotavljajo vstavki. Vaš sistem morda nima na voljo vseh sledečih vrst, ali morda vsebuje vrste, ki tukaj niso naštete. Posodobljeni vstavki lahko omogočijo zvočni ali video klepet na vrstah računov, ki so tukaj naštete kot nepodprte.

Storitev

Zvok

Video

AIM

Ne

Ne

Facebook klepet

Ne

Ne

gadugadu

Ne

Ne

Google Talk

Da

Da

Groupwise

Ne

Ne

ICQ

Ne

Ne

IRC

Ne

Ne

Jabber

Da

Da

MSN

Da

Da

myspace

Ne

Ne

qq

Ne

Ne

Ljudje v bližini

Ne

Ne

sametime

Ne

Ne

silc

Ne

Ne

SIP

Da

Da

Yahoo!

Ne

Ne

zephyr

Ne

Ne
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/audio-call.page0000644000373100047300000000524412317332042024022 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Klic vaših stikov preko medmrežja. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Začenjanje zvočnega pogovora

Svoje stike lahko pokličete in imate z njimi zvočni pogovor. Ta zmožnost deluje le z določenimi vrstami računov in pod pogojem da ima druga oseba program, ki podpira zvočne klice.

V oknu Seznam stikov kliknite ikono video klic poleg imena stika, ki ga želite poklicati in izberite Zvočni klic.

Odprlo se bo novo okno. Ko je povezava vzpostavljena boste na dnu okna videli Povezano skupaj s celotnim časom pogovora.

Za končanje pogovora izberite KlicOdloži.

Za spremembo zvočnega pogovora v video pogovor izberite VideoVklopi video.
Začetek zvočnega pogovora z meta-stikom

V oknu Seznam stikov desno kliknite na meta-stik.

Desno kliknite na ime stika s katerim želite imeti pogovor in izberite Zvočni klic.

Če želite videti ali je stik meta-stik, premaknite miško na stik v oknu Seznam stikov in se nad njim za trenutek zaustavite: pojavilo se bo majhno sporočilo, ki prikazuje število stikov, ki tvorijo meta-stik.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/accounts-window.page0000644000373100047300000000276612317332042025142 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje, spreminjanje in brisanje računov. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Okno računov

Okno Računi vam omogoča dodajanje, spreminjanje in brisanje računov.

Podrobnosti računa

Za večino vrst računov lahko enostavno vnesete ID prijave in geslo. Nekateri računi ali vrste računov morda zahtevajo dodatne podatke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/remove-account.page0000644000373100047300000000424212317332042024734 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Popolnoma odstrani račun iz Empathy. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Odstranitev računa

V primeru da računa ne želite več uporabljati, lahko račun popolnoma odstranite iz Empathy. V primeru da želite v prihodnosti račun v Empathy ponovno uporabljati boste morali ponovno dodati podrobnosti svojega računa.

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite UrediRačuni ali pritisnite F4.

Na seznamu računov na levi strani okna izberite račun, ki ga želite odstraniti.

Kliknite -.

Pojavilo se pogovorno okno, ki vas bo spraševalo za potrditev. Kliknite gumb Odstrani za odstranitev računa.

Tudi po odstraniti računa Empathy ne izbriše zgodovine vaših pogovorov za ta račun.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/account-irc.page0000644000373100047300000001421312317332042024213 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodatni podatki, potrebni za povezovanje z omrežji IRC. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podrobnosti računa IRC

Računi IRC zahtevajo drugačne podatke kot veliko drugih vrst računov. Za ustvarjanje računa IRC morate navesti vsaj omrežje IRC in vzdevek. Ta stran vsebuje podrobnosti, ki jih lahko navedete za vaš račun IRC.

Za uporabo IRC-a v Empathy morate imeti nameščen paket telepathy-idle.

 <gui>Omrežje</gui>

IRC je odprt sistem, ki ljudem omogoča poganjanje ločenih omrežij IRC. Vsako omrežje je ločeno in ima svoje uporabnike in klepetalnice. Empathy v spustnemu seznamu Omrežje vsebuje najbolj priljubljena omrežja. Dodate lahko dodatna omrežja. Oglejte si spodaj.

 <gui>Vzdevek</gui>

Vaš vzdevek je vaše edinstveno ime na omrežju IRC. Le ena oseba na omrežju lahko uporablja dani vzdevek. V primeru da dobite sporočilo napake boste morali spremeniti svoj vzdevek.

 <gui>Geslo</gui>

Nekateri strežniki, še posebno tisti na zasebnih omrežjih zahtevajo geslo za povezavo. V primeru da ste overjeni za uporabo omrežja, vam bodo skrbniki omrežja priskrbeli geslo.

Gelsa NickServ

Na nekaterih omrežjih je vzdevke mogoče ustvariti z uporabo storitve NickServ. Empathy gesel vzdevkov ne podpira neposredno. Na nekaterih omrežjih, vključno s priljubljenim omrežjem FreeNode, so strežniška gesla samodejno posredovana NickServ, kar vam omogoča nastavitev tega polja za identifikacijo z NickServ. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 <gui>Pravo ime</gui>

Poleg vašega vzdevka lahko navedete tudi svoje pravo ime. Ostali uporabniki ga bodo lahko videli, ko si ogledajo vaše podrobnosti.

 <gui>Sporočilo končanja</gui>

Ko prekinete povezavo, je sporočilo končanja poslano vsem klepetalnicam, v katerih ste in vsem uporabnikom s katerimi imate zasebni pogovor. Uporabite to polje za sporočilo končanja po meri.
Omrežja IRC Omrežja

Empathy vključuje seznam priljubljenih omrežij IRC. V primeru da želite uporabljati drugo omrežje IRC ga lahko dodate na seznam. Omrežja lahko tudi spreminjate in jih odstranjujete s seznama. You can also modify networks and remove them from the list.

Za dodajanje omrežja na seznamu kliknite Dodaj.

Za spremembo omrežja v seznamu izberite omrežje in kliknite Uredi.

Za odstranitev omrežja s seznama izberite omrežje in kliknite Odstrani.

Ob dodajanju ali spreminjanju omrežja lahko vnesete naslednje podatke:

<gui>Omrežje</gui>

To je ime omrežja, ki se bo pojavilo v seznamu omrežij.

 <gui>Znakovni nabor</gui>

To navede znakovno kodiranje, ki je običajno uporabljano na temu omrežju. Znakovno kodiranje je določen način notranjega zapisovanja znakov v računalniku. Obstaja več znakovnih kodiranj. Za pravilen ogled sporočil drugih uporabnikov morate uporabljati isto znakovno kodiranje kot oni.

Privzeto Empathy uporablja UTF-8, priljubljeno znakovno kodiranje, ki lahko upravlja z večino svetovnih jezikov. Drugo pogosto kodiranje za slovenščino in nekatere druge srednjeevropske jezike je ISO-8859-2.

 <gui>Strežniki</gui>

Omrežje IRC ima lahko veliko strežnikov na katere se lahko povežete. Ko ste povezani na strežnik na določenemu omrežju se lahko sporazumevate z vsemi uporabniki na vseh ostalih strežnikih na temu omrežju. Omrežju lahko dodate ali odstranite strežnike z uporabo gumbov Dodaj in Odstrani.

Ko je strežnik izbran za urejanje kliknite na Strežnik ali Vrata. Namesto tega lahko uporabite puščici levo in desno za žariščenje na polje in pritisnite preslednico za začetek urejanja.

Izberite izbirno polje v stolpcu SSL za šifriranje vse komunikacije s strežnikom. Vedite da to ostalim uporabnikom na omrežju ne preprečuje ogleda vnosov, ki ste jih napisali v javne klepetalnice.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/set-custom-status.page0000644000373100047300000000707612317332042025441 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje, urejanje ali brisanje osebnih sporočil za vaša stanja. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Nastavitev sporočila po meri

Včasih si morda želite nastaviti sporočilo po meri za vaše stanje, na primer da ljudem sporočite da določen čas ne boste na voljo.

Sporočilo po meri je mogoče nastaviti na osnovi različnih razpoložljivih stanj.

V oknu Seznam stikov kliknite na spustni seznam na vrhu.

Izberite stanje, kateremu želite dodati sporočilu po meri. Izbrati morate sporočilo z oznako Sporočilo po meri.

V besedilno polje na vrhu okna vnesite sporočilo po meri in pritisnite Enter za nastavitev sporočila.

V primeru da želite nastaviti sporočilo po meri kot priljubljeno in ga shraniti za ponovno uporabo, kliknite na majhno zvezdico na desni besedilnega polja, kjer ste napisali sporočilo po meri.

V primeru da tega ne storite sporočilo ne bo na voljo, ko naslednjič uporabite Empathy. Shranjeno bo le za trenutno sejo.
Urejanje, odstranjevanje in dodajanje sporočila po meri

V oknu Seznam stikov kliknite na spustni seznam na vrhu.

Izberite Uredi sporočilo po meri.

Za urejanje sporočila po meri:

V polju Shranjene prednastavljene izberite sporočilo stanja, ki ga želite uredi, in ga dvokliknite.

Vnesite novo sporočilo po meri in pritisnite Enter za njegovo spremembo.

Za odstranitev sporočila po meri:

V polju Shranjene prednastavljene izberite sporočilo stanja, ki ga želite odstraniti.

Kliknite na gumb Odstrani.

Ko ste končali kliknite na Zapri.

Ko urejate ali dodajate novo sporočilo po meri, ne bo nastavljeno kot trenutno sporočilo stanja. Morali ga boste izbrati v oknu Seznam stikov.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/account-jabber.page0000644000373100047300000000604012317332042024662 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Napredne možnosti za račune Jabber in Google Talk. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podrobnosti računa Jabber

Večina računov Jabber bo za povezavo zahtevala le ID prijave in geslo. Za nekatere računa na nekaterih vrstah omrežij boste morda morali vnesti dodatne podatke v odsek Napredno. Običajno vam naprednih možnosti spodaj ne bo treba uporabljati. Za splošna navodila o dodajanju računa si oglejte .

Google Talk je vrsta računa Jabber. Ta navodila veljajo tudi za računa Google Talk.

 <gui>Zahtevano je šifriranje (TLS/SSL)</gui> <gui>Prezri napake potrdil SSL</gui>

Kadar je mogoče je sporazumevanje med Empathy in strežnikom Jabber šifrirana. V primeru da šifrirana komunikacija ni mogoča, morda morda sporočila poslana nešifrirano. Izberite Zahtevano šifriranj za preprečitev komunikacije Empathy s strežniki Jabber, ko šifriranje ni mogoče.

Nekateri strežniki Jabber lahko šifrirajo podatke z neveljavnimi potrdili ali s potrdili neznanih overiteljev potrdil. V primeru da strežniku na katerega se povezujete zaupate, izberite Prezri napake potrdil SSL za omogočitev šifriranja sporazumevanja z neveljavnimi potrdili.

 <b>Vir</b> <gui>Prednost</gui>

V primeru da je z vašim računi hkrati povezanih več programov (na primer na ločenih računalnikih) lahko nastavite vir za edinstveno identifikacijo vsakega. Privzeto bo Empathy kot vir uporabil Telepathy.

Nastavite lahko prednost za navedbo kateri programi naj prejmejo dohodna sporočila od vaših stikov. Nova sporočila bodo poslana programu z najvišjo prednostjo.

 Kliknite <gui>Prepiši nastavitve strežnika</gui>.

Empathy bo uporabljal privzete nastavitve za povezovanje s strežnikom Jabber na osnovi vašega ID-ja prijave. Za nekatere strežnike Jabber boste morali ročno vnesti nastavitve strežnika po meri. Te nastavitve bi vam moral dati vaš ponudnik Jabber.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/geolocation-what-is.page0000644000373100047300000000320312317332042025656 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razumevanje geo-lege. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Kaj je geo-lega

Geo-lega vam omogoča identifikacijo pravega geografskega položaja računalnika ali naprave povezane na medmrežje.

Z geo-lego v Empathy lahko:

Objavite svoj geografski položaj svojim stikom.

Oglejte si geografski položaj vaših stikov in hitro stopite v stik z njimi.

Nastavite natančnost vašega položaja in napravo uporabljeno za odkritje vašega položaja.

Za ogled geografskih položajev vaših stikov, morajo uporabiti storitev in program, ki podpira geo-lego.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/license.page0000644000373100047300000000272612317332042023434 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pravni podatki. Licenca

Ta delo je distribuirano pod CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

Prosto lahko:

<em>Delite</em>

Za kopiranje, distribuiranje in prenašanje dela.

 <em>Predelate</em>

Prilagajanje dela

Pod naslednjimi pogoji:

<em>Priznanje avtorstva</em>

Delo morate prilastiti na način, ki ga je navedel avtor ali dajalec licence (toda ne na kakršenkoli način, ki predlaga spodbudo vas ali vaše uporabe dela).

 <em>Deljenje pod enakimi pogoji</em>

V primeru da spremenite, preoblikujete ali nadgradite to delo, lahko nastalo delo distribuirate le pod enako, podobno ali združljivo licenco.

Za polno besedilo licence si oglejte spletišče CreativeCommons, ali preberite polno besediloCommons Deed.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/link-contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000456012317332042024561 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Združite in ločite različne stike v enega. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Združevanje in ločevanje stikov

Če ima eden ali več vaših stikov več računov z različnimi storitvami sporočanja, jih lahko združite v enega.

Nastali stik se imenuje meta-stik: stik sestavljen iz več različnih stikov.

V primeru da imate Janeza Novaka, ki uporablja tri različne storitve sporočanja kot:

janez@facebook

janez.novak@gmail

janez_novak@hotmail

Te stike lahko združite v en stik Janez Novak.

Združevanje stikov

V oknu Seznam stikov desno kliknite na enega od stikov, ki ima različne računa in izberite Poveži stike ....

V levem pladnju v oknu Poveži stike izberite stike, ki jih želite združiti.

Kliknite Poveži.

Ko je bil meta-stik ustvarjen, bo za pogovarjanje uporabljen stik z najpogostejšo povezanostjo.
Ločevanje stikov

V Seznamu stikov desno kliknite na stik za ločevanje in izberite Poveži stike ....

Kliknite Razveži.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-nick-password.page0000644000373100047300000000476712317332042025360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zaščitite vaš vzdevek in preprečite da bi ga uporabljali drugi uporabniki IRC. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uporaba gesla vzdevka na IRC-u

Na nekaterih omrežjih IRC lahko ustvarite svoj vzdevek s storitvijo z imenom NickServ. S pošiljanjem posebnih sporočil NickServ lahko nastavite svojo geslo in se identificirate. Nekatere sobe klepeta IRC vam morda ne dovolijo pridružitve brez vpisanega vzdevka.

Empathy trenutno ne podpira ustvarjanja vzdevkov. Nekatera omrežja IRC bodo NickServ samodejno posredovala geslo strežnika. Na teh omrežjih lahko uporabite geslo IRC v Empathy za identifikacijo sebe NickServ. Priljubljeno omrežje FreeNode ima to zmožnost.

Za nastavitev gesla strežnika IRC:

V oknu Seznam stikov izberite UrediRačuni ali pritisnite F4.

Izberite račun IRC s seznama na levi strani pogovornega okna.

V polje Geslo vtipkajte geslo, ki ste ga uporabili za ustvarjanje svojega vzdevka.

Kliknite Uveljavi.

Ta navodila vam dovolijo uporabo z geslom zaščitenega vzdevka na določenih omrežjih IRC. Trenutno z Empathy ni mogoče ustvariti vzdevka IRC ali spremeniti svojega vzdevka ali gesla.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/geolocation-turn.page0000644000373100047300000000335512317332042025302 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako omogočiti in onemogočiti geo-lego v Empathy. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Omogoči/onemogoči geo-lego

Izberite UrediMožnosti.

Izberite zavihek Mesto.

Za omogočenje geo-lege izberite Objavi položaj mojim stikom za objavo geo-lege.

Za onemogočenje geo-lege odstranite njeno izbiro.

Za povečanje natančnosti vašega položaja odstranite izbiro Zmanjšaj natančnost položaja.

V primeru da imate zunanjo napravo kot je GPS ali želite poslati bolj natančen položaj, izberite primerno možnost v odseku Viri mesta.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/send-message.page0000644000373100047300000000404612317332042024362 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pošljite sporočilo enemu od vaših stikov. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pošiljanje sporočila nekomu

V Seznamu stikov dvokliknite ime stika s katerim želite imeti pogovor.

Odprlo se bo novo okno. Vpišite sporočilo v polje na dnu okna in pritisnite Enter za pošiljanje.
Pošiljanje sporočila meta-stiku

V oknu Seznam stikov desno kliknite na meta-stik.

Izberite ime stika s katerim želite imeti pogovor in izberite Klepet.

Če želite videti ali je stik meta-stik, premaknite miško na stik v oknu Seznam stikov in se nad njim za trenutek zaustavite: pojavilo se bo majhno sporočilo, ki prikazuje število stikov, ki tvorijo meta-stik.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/create-account.page0000644000373100047300000001277112317332042024710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ustvarjanje računa z eno od podprtih storitev sporočanja. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ustvarjanje novega računa

Večina vrst računov pred povezovanjem s programom hipnega sporočanja kot je Empathy zahteva ustvarjanje računa s ponudnikom računa. Za nekatere ponudnike računov je mogoče za ustvarjanje novega računa uporabiti Empathy z uporabo enakih korakov kot za dodajanje računa.

Ta stran zagotavlja podatke o ustvarjanju novih računov za različne vrste računov. Vaš ponudnik računa vam bi moral dati ID prijave in geslo ter morebitne dodatne podatke, ki jih potrebujete za povezavo z Empathy.

Facebook

Facebook je eno od najbolj uporabljanih družabnih omrežij. Uporabnikom dovoljuje ustvarjanje njihovega lastnega profila in komunikacijo s prijatelji.

Za uporabo Facebooka za komunikacijo s prijatelji boste morali ustvariti nov račun na spletni strani: www.facebook.com.

Jabber

Jabber je odprt sistem takojšnjega sporočanja. Tako kot elektronska pošta, vam Jabber omogoča izbiro vašega ponudnika računa in sporočanje z vsemi drugimi uporabniki Jabber ne glede na njihovega ponudnika računa.

S ponudnikom Jabber boste morali ustvariti nov račun. Obstaja veliko brezplačnih podudnikov; en priljubljen ponudnik je Jabber.org.

V primeru da uporabljate GMail ali Google Talk že imate račun Jabber. Google Talk je storitev Jabber. Za povezavo v Empathy enostavno uporabite svoj GMail naslov in geslo.

Ljudje v bližini

Za uporabo te zmožnosti vam ni treba ustvariti računa s ponudnikom storitve. Ta storitev deluje kadarkoli ste povezani na krajevno omrežje kot je brezžična vroča točka. Samodejno najde ostale uporabnike na omrežju, ki tudi uporabljajo to storitev.

Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

SIP

SIP je odprt sistem, ki uporabnikom omogoča zvočne in video pogovore preko medmrežja. S ponudnikom SIP morate ustvariti račun. Sporazumevate se lahko z vsemi drugimi uporabniki SIP, ne glede na to katerega ponudnika SIP uporabljajo.

Zaradi tehničnih razlik brezplačna storitev Ekiga.net ne deluje z Empathy.

Nekateri podnudniki SIP vam z vašega računalnika omogočajo klic na običajne telefone. V splošnem se morate za uporabo te zmožnosti naroči na plačljivo storitev.

IRC

Za uporabo IRC-a vam ni treba ustvariti računa. Čeprav ob dodajanju računa IRC v Empathy navedete vzdevek, je vzdevek vzpostavljen ob vsaki povezavi. V primeru da vzdevek uporablja drug uporabnik, boste morali izbrati nov vzdevek.

Nekatera omrežja IRC uporabljajo storitev z imenom NickServ, ki uporabnikom omogoča zaščito njihovih vzdevkov. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Nekateri strežniki IRC so zaščiteni z geslom. Za povezavo s temi strežniki boste morali poznati geslo. V splošnem so to zasebna omrežja IRC.

Lastniške storitve

Različna podjetja in organizacije so razvile veliko lastniških storitev hipnega sporočanja. Empathy vam omogoča povezavo z obstoječim računom za večino priljubljenih storitev. Za ustvarjanje novega računa z eno od teh storitev boste morali obiskati spletišče storitve in se strinjati s pogoji uporabe.

AIM

ICQ

MSN

Yahoo!
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/irc-join-pwd.page0000644000373100047300000000253412317332042024311 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vstop v z geslom zaščitene klepetalnice IRC. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pridružitev zaščiteni klepetalnici IRC

Na nekaterih omrežjih IRC so zasebne sobe IRC morda zaščitene z geslom. Če geslo poznate, uporabite naslednje korake za pridružitev:

Pridružite se sobi kot običajno.

Empathy vas bo pozval za geslo. Vpišite geslo klepetalnice IRC in kliknite na Pridruži se.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/salut-protocol.page0000644000373100047300000000306312317332042024774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razumevanje zmožnosti ljudje v bližini. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Kaj je "Ljudje v bližini"?

Storitev ljudje v bližini je storitev sporočanja brez strežnika: za uporabo se vam ni potrebno povezati in overiti s centralnim strežnikom.

Ta vrsta sistema sporočanja brez strežnika je omejena na krajevno omrežje in dejavna medmrežna povezava ni potrebna.

Ljudje, ki uporabljajo to storitev znotraj istega krajevnega omrežja, bodo samodejno odkriti in mogoče jim bo poslati sporočila in datoteke kot z ostalimi storitvami.

Vsa novejša krajevna omrežja bi morala podpirati to vrsto storitve.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/empathy/group-conversations.page0000644000373100047300000000711312317332042026034 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Začetek ali pridružitev skupinskemu pogovoru z vašimi stiki. Milo Casagrande milo@ubuntu.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Skupinski pogovori

Skupinski pogovori vam omogočajo besedilne pogovor z več kot enim stikom hkrati.

Za skupinski pogovor morate imeti ustvarjen račun Jabber ali Google Talk ali račun Ljudje v bližini.

Skupinske pogovore lahko imate le s stiki, ki uporabljajo enako storitev kot vi.
Začenjanje skupinskega pogovora

V okno Seznam stikov izberite SobaPridruži se.

V spustnemu seznamu Račun izberite račun, ki ga želite uporabiti za skupinski pogovor.

V besedilno polje Strežnik vnesite ime strežnika za gostovanje pogovora.

Polje pustite prazno, če bo soba na trenutnemu strežniku.

V besedilno polje Soba vpišite ime, ki ga želite dati pogovoru.

To bo bilo ime sobe za pogovor. To ime bo javno dostopno za druge ljudi, ki se želijo pridružiti. Zasebne sobe ni mogoče ustvariti.

Za povabilo drugih stikov v skupinski pogovor v oknu Seznam stikov izberite stik, ki ga želite povabiti, in izvedite nekaj od naslednjega:

Desno kliknite na stik in izberite Povabi v kelepetalnico.

Izberite UrediStikPovabi v klepetalnico.

V primeru da imate odprt več kot en skupinski pogovor izberite tistega v katerega želite povabiti svoje stike.
Pridružitev skupinskemu pogovoru

V okno Seznam stikov izberite SobaPridruži se.

Razširite odsek Seznam sob za ogled vseh obstoječih sob.

Dvokliknite na ime sobe za pridružitev.

Ni se mogoče povezati z vsemi obstoječimi sobami. Nekatere sobe morda zahtevajo geslo, ali so dostopne le z vabilom. Empathy ne podpira teh vrst sob.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/commandline.page0000644000373100047300000000344512307574712023415 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ukazna vrstica Ukaz eog lahko odpre številne slike v različnih načinih. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ukazna vrstica

Za zagon Pregledovalnika slik iz Terminala vnesite eog.

Določeno datoteko lahko odprete z vnosom imena datoteke za ukaz eog:

eog slika.jpeg

Določeno mapo lahko odprete z vnosom imena mape za ukazom eog:

Mapa eog

Za ogled vseh slik v mapi naenkrat boste morda želeli brskati po galeriji slik.

Odpri sliko v celozaslonskem načinu eog --fullscreen slika.jpeg
Odprtje slike v novem oknu eog --new-instance slika.jpeg
Odpiranje mape v načinu predstavitve eog --slide-show Slike/
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/preferences.page0000644000373100047300000001002212307574712023415 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pogled slike, predstavitev in vstavki. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Možnosti

Ta tema razloži vse nastavitve, ki jih lahko spremenite v pregledovalniku slik. Za spremembo možnosti kliknite UrediMožnosti.

Možnosti ogleda slike Izboljšave slik

Select Smooth images when zoomed out to enable image smoothing when you zoom in and out. This makes low-resolution (pixelated) pictures look better by smoothing out jagged edges.

Če omogočite Samodejno usmeritev, bodo slike samodejno zavrtene glede na njihove metapodatke Exif. To so podatki o sliki, ki jih digitalni fotoaparat samodejno vstavi in lahko vsebujejo podrobnosti o tem kako je bil fotoaparat obrnjen ob zajemu slike. Če je samodejna usmeritev omogočena, so fotografije portretov samodejno zavrtene navzgor. Vrtenje ni shranjeno dokler zavrtene slike ne shranite.

Samodejna usmeritev ne dela z vsemi slikami. Zavrtene bodo le slike, posnete s fotoaparatom, ki podpira metapodatke usmeritve Exif.

 Prozorni deli

Izberite eno od naslednjih možnosti za določitev kako so prikazani prozorni deli slike:

Kot vzorec šahovnice:

Prikaže prozorne dele slike kot karirast vzorec.

Kot barvo po meri:

Prikaže prozorne dele slike v barvi, ki jo navedete. Za izbor barve kliknite na izbirni gumb.

Kot ozadje:

Prikaže morebitne prozorne dele slike v barvi Ozadja, če je pod Ozadje izbrano Kot barva po meri. Sicer je uporabljena privzeta barva ozadja.
Možnosti predstavitve

Za prilagodite nastavitev predstavitve:

Pod Približanje slike lahko izberete, če želite sliko razširiti do prileganja zaslonu.

Pod Zaporedje lahko izberete koliko sekund naj bo prikazana posamezna slika (med 1 in 100).

Izberite Zaporedje zanke, če želite, da se predstavitev stalno ponavlja. V primeru da možnost ni izbrana, se bo predstavitev začela pri izbrani sliki in končala z zadnjo sliko v mapi.
Možnost vstavka

Tukaj lahko izberete/odstranite izbiro dodatnih možnosti, ki jih želite omogočiti/onemogočiti. Slika na levi prikazuje vstavke, ki so privzeto na voljo.

Namestite lahko tudi paket eog-plugins, ki vsebuje vstavke, ki zagotavljajo številne dodatne zmožnosti. Po namestitvi boste lahko izbrali dodatne vstavke kot so tisti prikazani na sliki na desni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/default.page0000644000373100047300000000323212307574712022545 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev pregledovalnika slik kot privzetega programa za ogled slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Privzeto odpiranje slik s pregledovalnikom slik.

V primeru da želite nastaviti pregledovalnik slik kot privzet program za odpiranje določenih vrst slikovnih datotek:

V programu datoteke desno kliknite na datoteko in izberite Lastnosti.

Kliknite na zavihek Odpri z. Pojavil se bo seznam Priporočeni programi.

Izberite Pregledovalnik slik in kliknite Nastavi kot privzet program.

V primeru da Pregledovalnik slik ni na seznamu Priporočeni programi, kliknite na Pokaži druge programe. Izberite Pregledovalnik slik s seznama, ki se pojavi, in kliknite nastavi kot privzet.

Kliknite Zapri.

V prihodnje bo datoteka iste vrste ob dvokliku odprta v pregledovalniku slik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-python-console.page0000644000373100047300000000274712307574712025410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Konzolo Python lahko uporabite za dodajanje dodatnih zmožnosti in poganjanje skriptov v pregledovalniku slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Konzola python

Pregledovalnik slik ima sistem vstavkov, ki uporablja skriptni jezik Python. Če konzolo Python omogočite, lahko dobite neposreden dostop do tolmača Python iz pregledovalnika slik, ki ga lahko nato uporabite za pisanje skriptov ali programersko upravljanje slik.

Preden lahko omogočite konzolo Python, boste morali namestiti paket eog-plugins.

Ko je paket eog-plugins nameščen, kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite na zavihek Vstavki.

Izberite Konzola Python in kliknite Zapri.

Kliknite OrodjaKonzola Python za priklic konzole.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/index.page0000644000373100047300000000313112307574712022226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pomoč za Pregledovalnik slik Gnomeovo oko <media type="image" src="figures/eog-trail.png"/> Pregledovalnik slik Gnomeovo oko Pregledovalnik slik Gnomeovo oko Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 <media type="image" src="figures/eog-logo.png">Logotip GNOME-ovo oko</media> Pregledovalnik slik GNOME-ovo oko
Ogled slik
Urejanje slik
Tiskanje slik
Dodajanje dodatnih zmožnosti
Napredno
Pogosto zastavljena vprašanja
Triki in namigi
Vključite se
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-zoom-width.page0000644000373100047300000000214412307574712024517 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prilagodi približanje tako, da se slika po širini prilega oknu. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Približaj do prilagojena širini slike

Omogočite vstavek Približanje do prileganja širini slike, če želite, da so slike razširjene do polne širine okna.

Za to kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite v zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Približaj do prileganja širini strani in kliknite Zapri.

Za dodajanje te zmožnosti boste morali namestiti paket eog-plugins.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/zoom.page0000644000373100047300000000373012307574712022110 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za povečanje slike na zaslonu, kliknite PogledPribližaj. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Približanje

Sliko lahko približate in oddaljite in s tem dosežete, da prikažete več ali manj slike naenkrat. To je uporabno, če želite videti celotno sliko ali če želite preučiti fine podrobnosti slike.

Raven približanja lahko spremenite z miškinim koleščkom. Drsajte navzgor za približanje in navzdol za oddaljevanje.

Približujete lahko tudi z uporabo gumbov v orodni vrstici. Za približanje kliknite na ikono Povečaj sliko. Za oddaljitev kliknite na ikono Skrči sliko. Ikoni sta videti kot znaka "plus" in "minus".

Za približanje ali oddaljevanje lahko tudi kliknite PogledPribližaj ali PogledOddalji.

Za ogled slike v izvirni velikosti kliknite PogledObičajna velikost. To je enako kot raven približanja "100%".

Prilagajanje do najboljšega prilaganja oknu

Določite lahko, da se slika popolnoma prilaga oknu, tudi če spremenite njeno velikost. Za to kliknite PogledNajboljše prileganje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/view.page0000644000373100047300000000546312307574712022103 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pritisnite Levo in Desno za premikanje med slikami ali pa uporabite galerijo slik za prikaz vseh slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ogled vseh slik v mapi

Med slikami v mapi lahko hitro brskate z odpiranjem ene od slik in nato klikom na Naprej in Nazaj (na primer). Ogledate si lahko tudi galerijo slik z majhnimi predogledi vseh slik v mapi, ki so prikazani hkrati.

Brskanje po slikah v mapi

Če imate mapo, ki vsebuje več slik, lahko priročno brskate med vsemi slikami ne da bi jih morali posamezno odpirati.

Odprite eno od slik iz mape v kateri želite brskati.

Za premik med slikami kliknite Naslednja in Predhodna v orodni vrstici ali pritisnite tipki Desno ali Levo.

Namesto tega lahko uporabite tipki Navzgor in Navzdol ali tipkami Preslednica in Backspace. Kliknete lahko tudi PojdiPredhodna slika in PojdiNaslednja slika.

Med slikami lahko brskate v celozaslonskem načinu s klikom na PogledCelozaslonski način ali pritiskom na F11. Za premik med slikami v celozaslonskemu načinu uporabite tipke tipkovnice.

Za vrnite v običajni pogled pritisnite Esc ali F11.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/format-change.page0000644000373100047300000000617312307574712023643 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Slike lahko pretvorite iz ene vrste v drugo. Tako lahko naredite paketno za več slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pretvorba v drugo vrsto datoteke

Slike so shranjene v posebnih vrstah kot sta JPEG ali PNG. Slike lahko pretvorite iz ene vrste v drugo.

Pretvorba ene slike v drugo vrsto datoteke

Kliknite SlikaShrani kot. Pojavilo se bo pogovorno okno Shrani sliko.

V polju ime spremenite pripono datoteke v vrsto v katero želite pretvoriti svojo sliko. Pripona datoteke je del imena datoteke za piko.

Za pretvorbo slike JPEG (.jpg) v datoteko Bitmap (.bmp):

nova datoteka:slika.bmp

nova datoteka:slika.bmp

Kliknite Shrani in nova datoteka bo shranjena v novi vrsti. Stara datoteka (v stari vrsti) bo ostala kjer je in ne bo izbrisana.

Pregledovalnik slik poskuša uganiti v kateri vrsti datotek naj shrani sliko na osnovi izbrane pripone datoteke. Če izbrane pripone datoteke ne prepozna ali če ne veste katere uporabiti, kliknite Podprte vrste slik v oknu Shranjevanje slike. To vam bo omogočilo izbiro vrste slike iz spustnega polja.

Pretvorba več slik v drugo vrsto slik

Slike lahko pretvorite iz ene vrste v drugo v enem koraku. To je uporabno, če želite pretvoriti veliko slik.

V galeriji slik pritisnite in držite tipko Ctrl in izberite slike, ki jih želite pretvoriti eno po eno. Namesto tega lahko pritisnite CtrlA za izbiro vseh slik.

Kliknite SlikaShrani kot. Pojavilo se bo okno (prikazano spodaj).

Pretvorjene slike bodo bile privzeto shranjene v trenutno mapo. V primeru da jih želite shraniti drugje, spremenite Ciljno mapo.

Izberite vrsto datoteke, v katero želite pretvoriti datoteke, iz spustnega menija desno od vnosnega polja Vrsta imena datoteke.

Kliknite Shrani.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000327312307574712023123 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prevajanje pregledovalnika slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte prevajati

Pregledovalnik slik in njegovo dokumentacijo prevaja skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Obstaja veliko jezikov za katere prevodi še vedno manjkajo.

Za začetek prevajanja boste morali ustvariti račun in se pridružitiprevajalski ekipi za svoj jezik. S tem boste pridobili zmožnost pošiljanja novih prevodov.

S prevajalci GNOME se lahko pogovarjate s pomočjo omrežjairc. Ljudje na kanalu prihajajo s celega sveta zato zaradi časovne razlike odziva ne boste dobili nemudoma.

Namesto tega lahko stopite v stik s prevajalsko ekipo preko njihovega dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-fullscreen-double-click.page0000644000373100047300000000231012307574712027106 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev celozaslonskega načina z dvojnim klikom na sliko. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Celozaslonski način z dvojnim klikom miške

Če želite, lahko nastavite, da so slike prikazane v celozaslonskem načinu, ko jih dvokliknete v pregledovalniku slik.

Za to kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite v zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Celozaslonski način z dvoklikom in kliknite Zapri.

Ko je slika omogočena, bo dvoklik na sliko preklopil med načinoma celega zaslona in okenskega načina.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/flip-rotate.page0000644000373100047300000000414512307574712023353 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Navpično/vodoravno, v smeri/nasprotni smeri urinega kazalca Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Zrcaljenje ali vrtenje slik

V primeru da so vaše slike napačno obrnjene, jih lahko zrcalite ali zavrtite tako, da so videti prav.

Zrcaljenje slike

Kliknite Uredi.

Izberite zrcali vodoravno ali zrcali navpično.

Če želite sliko obdržati zrcaljeno, kliknite SlikaShrani.

V nasprotnem primeru slike ne shranite in ob naslednjem odprtju bo vrnjena v izvirno usmeritev.
Vrtenje fotografije

Kliknite Uredi.

Izberite zavrti v smeri urinega kazalca ali zavrti v nasprotni smeri urinega kazalca.

Če želite sliko zavrteti na ta način, kliknite SlikaShrani.

V nasprotnem primeru slike ne shranite in ob naslednjem odprtju bo vrnjena v izvirno usmeritev.

Namesto tega lahko uporabite orodja v orodni vrstici. Uporabite lahko tudi tipkovne bližnjice:

Zavrti v smeri urinega kazalca

CtrlR

Zavrti v nasprotni smeri vrtenja urinega kazalca

CtrlShiftR
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000106512307574712022073 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

To delo je licencirano pod To delo se razširja pod licenco CreativeCommons Attribution-Deljenje priznanje avtorstva 3.0 neprenosljivo..

Kot posebno izjemo vam dajejo lastniki avtorskih pravic dovoljenje za kopiranje, spreminjanje in distribuiranje kode primerov, ki jo vsebuje ta dokument pod vašimi pogoji, brez omejitev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-fullscreen-background.page0000644000373100047300000000226012307574712026674 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogoči spremembo barve ozadja v celozaslonskem načinu. Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Sprememba barve ozadja v celozaslonskem načinu

Če želite, lahko spremenite barvo ozadja v celozaslonskem načinu.

Prepričajte se, da je paket eog-plugins nameščen. Nato kliknite UrediMožnosti, pojdite na zavihek Vstavki. Tam izberite Ozadje čez cel zaslon in kliknite Možnosti. Izberite barvo, ki jo želite v celozaslonskem načinu in kliknite Zapri

Sedaj ko ste v celozaslonskem načinu, bo barva ozadja barva, ki ste jo izbrali.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/open.page0000644000373100047300000000251012307574712022060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Slike se odprejo v novem oknu. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Odpiranje slike

Slike bi se morale v pregledovalniku slik samodejno odpreti ob dvokliku v brskalniku datotek datoteke. Če to ni res, boste morda morali nastaviti pregledovalnik slik kot privzet program za ogled slik.

Vsaka odprta slika se bo odprla v novem oknu pregledovalnika slik. Morda boste želeli v enem oknu videti več slik.

Slike lahko odprete tudi iz pregledovalnika slik:

Kliknite SlikaOdpri (ali pritisnite CtrlO). Odprlo se bo pogovorno okno Odpiranje slike.

Izberite sliko, ki jo želite odpreti, in kliknite Odpri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-send-by-mail.page0000644000373100047300000000250712307574712024702 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Enostavno pošiljanje slik s pripenjanjem novi e-pošti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pošiljanje slik po e-pošti

Dodate lahko gumb, ki zagotavlja priročen način za pošiljanje slik preko e-pošte.

Kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite v zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Pošlji preko e-pošte in kliknite Zapri. To vam bo dalo na voljo predmet menija OrodjaPošlji preko e-pošte.

Za dodajanje te zmožnosti boste morali namestiti paket eog-plugins.

Da to deluje, mora biti pošta Evolution nastavljena za povezavo z vašim računom e-pošte.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/print.page0000644000373100047300000000356712307574712022270 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite SlikaNatisni in nato uporabite zavihke za spremembo nastavitev tiskanja. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tiskanje slike

Za tisk slike, ki si jo trenutno ogledujete:

Kliknite SlikaNatisni.

Izberite zavihek Splošno. Izberite tiskalnik, ki ga želite uporabiti in število kopij, ki jih želite natisniti.

Izberite zavihek Nastavitve slike. Tukaj lahko prilagodite Položaj in Velikost slike.

Položaj slike na strani lahko spremenite tako, da sliko povlečete naokoli v predogledu.

Če uporabljate foto papir visoke kakovosti, pojdite v zavihek Nastavitev strani in izberite pravo Vrsto papirja. Pojdite tudi v zavihek Kakovost slike in izberite visoko kakovost, da dobite najboljšo možno kakovost fotografije.

Kliknite Natisni.

Nekateri od zavihkov omenjeni zgoraj za določene modele tiskalnikov niso prisotni. To se zgodi, ker gonilniki za tiskalnike ne omogočajo spremembe nekaterih nastavitev. Če na primer ne vidite zavihka Kakovost slike, to verjetno pomeni, da gonilniki tiskalnika teh nastavitev ne podpirajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/slideshow.page0000644000373100047300000000317612307574712023131 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite PogledPredstavitev za prikaz vseh slik v mapi kot predstavitev. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Predstavitev

Za ogled vseh slik v mapi kot predstavitv:

Odprite eno od slik iz mape.

Kliknite PogledPredstavitev ali pritisnite F5.

Celozaslonska predstavitev se bo začela. Vsakih nekaj sekund bo prikazana nova slika. Če se želite med slkami premikati hitreje ali se vrniti na sliko, ki je bila že prikazana, lahko za ročen premik slike naprej in nazaj uporabite tipki puščic Levo in Desno.

Za končanje predstavitve pritisnite Esc ali F5.

Nastavitve predstavitve lahko spremenite. Na primer kako dolgo naj bo prikazana vsaka slika. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte temo o možnostih predstavitve.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-picasa.page0000644000373100047300000000230712307574712023657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Enostavno pošiljajte slike na PicasaWeb neposredno iz Pregledovalnika slik. Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pošiljanje fotografij na <app>PicasaWeb</app>

PicasaWev je storitev albuma fotografij, ki vam omogoča deljenje slik na spletu. Dodate lahko gumb bližnjice, ki zagotavlja priročen način za pošiljanje slik na PicasaWeb.

Prepričajte se, da je paket eog-plugins nameščen. Nato kliknite UrediMožnosti, pojdite na zavihek Vstavki in izberite Pošiljajnje PicasaWeb.

To zagotovi priročen predmet menija OrodjaPošlji na PicasaWeb.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/formats-view.page0000644000373100047300000000321412307574712023544 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pregledovalnik slik lahko prikaže slike v širokem obsegu vrst slik, vključno s PNG, JPEG in TIFF. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Podprte vrste slik

Pregledovalnik slik lahko odpre naslednje vrste slik:

ANI - Animacija

BMP - Bitna slika

GIF - Graphics Interchange Format

ICO - Ikona Windows

JPEG/JPG - Združena skupina strokovnjakov za fotografije

PCX - PC slikarski čopič

PNG - Prenosljiva omrežna grafika

PNM - Prenosnik Anymap iz orodja PPM

RAS - Sun Raster

SVG - Scalable Vector Graphics

TGA - Targa

TIFF - Vrsta datoteke označene slike

WBMP - Brezžična bitna slika Bitmap

XBM - X bitna slika

XPM - X rastrska slika

V primeru da poskusite odpreti nepodprto vrsto, boste dobili napako Ni mogoče naložiti slike 'ime_slike'..

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000460012307574712023144 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabniški priročnik za pregledovalnik slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Poročajte težavo v pregledovalniku slik

Pregledovalnik slik vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Če imate s pregledovalnikom slik težave (na primer če se sesuje ali se obnaša nepričakovano) ali če mu manjka zmožnost, ki bi jo po vašem mnenju moral imeti, poročajte poročilo o hrošču s klikom na povezavo . Poročila o hrošču so način s katerim razvijalci programov sledijo težavam, da jih lahko popravijo.

Za sodelovanje potrebujete račun, ki vam bo dal zmožnost dostopa, poročanja hroščev in delanja opomb. Vpisati se morate tudi zato, da lahko preko e-pošte prejemate posodobitve o stanju vašega hrošča. Če računa še nimate, kliknite Nov račun za njegovo ustvarjanje.

Ko imate račun, se prijavite in kliknite na File a BugCoreeog. Pred poročanjem hrošča si preberite smernice o poročanju hroščev in preverite, če hrošč že obstaja.

Za poročanje hrošča v meniju Sestavni del izberite sestavni del. Če niste prepričani, v katerem sestavnem delu je hrošč, izberite splošno.

V primeru da zahtevate novo zmožnost v meniju Severity izberite enhancement. Izpolnite odseka Summary in Description in kliknite Commit.

Vašemu poročilu bo dano število ID. Njegovo stanje se bo tekom upravljanja posodabljalo. Popravljanje hroščev lahko traja nekaj časa in razvijalci vas bodo morda vprašali za dodatne informacije za pomoč pri ugotavljanju kaj je težava.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-slideshow-shuffle.page0000644000373100047300000000216012307574712026047 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prikaz fotografij v naključnem redu ob predvajanju predstavitve. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Predstavitev s premešanimi slikami

Sedaj bodo pri ogledu slik v načinu predstavitev le te naključno premešane.

Kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite v zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Premešaj predstavitev in kliknite Zapri.

Za dodajanje te zmožnosti boste morali namestiti paket eog-plugins.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/desktop-background.page0000644000373100047300000000206712307574712024714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako nastaviti svojo najljubšo sliko kot ozadje namizja. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Nastavitev trenutne slike kot ozadje namizja.

To set the picture that you are currently viewing as the background image on your desktop, click ImageSet as Wallpaper .

To bo hipno spremenilo vaše ozadje na sliko, ki jo gledate. Nato boste vprašani, če želite videz slike spremeniti z uporabo pogovornega okna možnosti ozadje. V primeru da kliknite Skrij, bo sporočilo izginilo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/formats-save.page0000644000373100047300000000176512307574713023542 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 JPEG, PNG, BMP in drugi. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Vrste podprte za shranjevanje slik

Pregledovalnik slik lahko shrani slike v naslednje vrste slik:

JPEG/JPG

PNG

BMP

TIFF

Glede na vašo nastavitev sistema boste morda lahko shranili druge vrste slik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000456512307574713022576 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pokažite, skrijte ali uredite orodno vrstico. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Orodna vrstica

Orodna vrstica zagotavlja enostaven dostop do zmožnosti kot sta približanje in vrtenje. Lahko jo skrijete, če vas moti, ali zavzema preveliko prostora.

Prikaže ali skrije orodno vrstico

Za preklop ali je orodna vrstica prikazana ali ne kliknite PogledOrodna vrstica.

Dodajanje, odstranjevanje in preurejanje orodij v orodni vrstici.

Privzeto orodna vrstica vsebuje le osnovna orodja. Dodatne uporabne zmožnosti lahko dodate s spremembo orodne vrstice:

Prepričajte se, da orodna vrstica ni skrita.

Kliknite UrediOrodna vrstica.

Urejevalnik orodje vrstice vsebuje predmete, ki niso v orodni vrstici (oglejte si sliko spodaj). Na voljo je tudi ločilnik, ki ga lahko uporabite za združevanje predmetov v orodni vrstici skupaj.

Za dodajanje novih predmetov orodne vrstice jih povlecite iz urejevalnika orodne vrstice v orodno vrstico.

Za prerazporeditev predmetov v orodni vrstici jih povlecite na nov položaj v orodni vrstici.

Predmete lahko odstranite iz orodne vrstice z vlečenjem iz orodne vrstice v urejevalnik orodne vrstice.

Ko ste končali z urejanjem orodne vrstice, kliknite gumb Zapri v oknu urejevalnika orodne vrstice.

Za ponastavitev orodne vrstice na njene privzete nastavitve v oknu urejevalnika kliknite Ponastavi na privzeto.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugins.page0000644000373100047300000000573112307574713022611 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namestite vstavke za dostop do dodatnih zmožnosti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Vstavki

Namestite lahko paket eog-plugins vsebuje zbirko dodatnih vstavkov za pregledovalnik slik. Vstavki dodajo dodatne zmožnosti.

Paket eog-plugins lahko namestite z upravljalnikom paketov svoje distribucije Linuxa.

namestite eog-plugins

V paketu eog-plugins so vključeni naslednji vstavki:

Datum v vrstici stanj: prikaže datum slike v vrstici stanja okna.

Prikaz Exif: prikaže nastavitve fotoaparata in histograme za digitalne fotografije.

Ozadje v celozaslonskem načinu: omogoči spreminjanje ozadja v celozaslkonskem načinu.

Celozaslonski način z dvojnim klikom: omogočite celozaslonski način z dvojnim klikom.

Zemljevid: prikaže zemljepisno mesto slike na zemljevidu.

Pošiljalnik PicasaWeb: pošljite svoje slike na PicasaWeb.

Konzola Python: konzola skriptanja Python za pregledovalnik slik.

Pošlji po pošti: pošlje sliko prijatelju s prilaganjem novi e-pošti.

premešaj predstavitev: premeša slike v načinu predstavitve.

Približaj do prileganja širini slike: prilagodi približanje, da se slika po širini prilega oknu.

Svoje vstavke lahko upravljate v zavihku vstavkov v oknu Možnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/edit.page0000644000373100047300000000337712307574713022061 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite SlikaOdpri z za urejanje slike z zunanjim urejevalnikom slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Urejanje ali izbris slike
Urejanje slike

Pregledovalnik slik lahko uporabite za ogled slik, ne morete pa jih urejati. Za to morate uporabiti program za urejanje slik, kot je urejevalnik slik GIMP. Za odprtje slike za urejanje v drugem programu:

Kliknite SlikaOdpri z ali desno kliknite na sliko.

Izberite program, ki ga želite uporabljati za urejanje slik.

Ko ste končali z urejanjem, jo shranite in zaprite drug program.

Pregledovalnik slik bo zaznal, če je bila slika spremenjena, in vas bo vprašal, če jo želite ponovno naložiti.
Izbris slike

Za izbris slike, ki je ne želite več, kliknite UrediPremakni v smeti ali desno kliknite na sliko in izberite Premakni v smeti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000206112307574713023642 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dobrodošli v Pregledovalniku slik Gnomeovo oko. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod

GNOME-ovo oko je pregledovalnik slik. Z njim si lahko ogledate slike skoraj katerekoli vrste. Upravlja lahko velike zbirke slik in lahko prikaže predstavitev. Izvajate lahko tudi osnovne spremembe slik kot so vrtenje ali zrcaljenje ali pretvarjanje v drugo vrsto slik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000001121312307574713023156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Seznam vseh tipkovnih bližnjic. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Tipkovne bližnice

To je seznam vseh tipkovnih bližnjic, ki jih lahko uporabite v pregledovalniku slik.

Odpiranje, zapiranje, shranjevanje in tiskanje

Odpri slikovne datoteke

CtrlO

Shrani sliko z istim imenom datoteke

CtrlS

Shrani kopijo trenutne slike z novim imenom datoteke

ShiftCtrlS

Natisne trenutno sliko

CtrlP

Zapri trenutno okno

CtrlW

Nastavitev slike kot ozadja namizja.

CtrlF8
Ogled slik

Gre na predhodno sliko v mapi

Back space / Levo

Gre na naslednjo sliko v mapi

Preslednica / Desno

Gre na prvo sliko v mapi

AltHome

Gre na zadnjo sliko v mapi

AltEnd

Izbere naključno sliko v mapi

CtrlM

Ogled galerije slik

F9

Celozaslonski pogled

F11

Ogled predstavitve

F5

Dejanska velikost

Ctrl0 (nič)

Najboljše prileganje

F

Drsanje po veliki sliki

Altsmerne tipke
Kopira sliko za lepljenje v drug program

Kopiraj

CtrlC
Približanje in vrtenje

Približaj

+

Oddalji

-

Zavrti v smeri urinega kazalca

CtrlR

Zavrti v nasprotni smeri urinega kazalca

ShiftCtrlR
Drugo

Pogled stranskega pulta

CtrlF9

Pogled lastnosti slike

AltReturn

Razveljavi

CtrlZ

Pomoč

F1
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/license.page0000644000373100047300000000272112307574713022546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pravni podatki Dovoljenje

To delo se razširja pod licenco CreativeCommons Attribution-Deljenje priznanje avtorstva 3.0 neprenosljivo.

Lahko:

<em>Delite</em>

Kopirata, distribuirate in priobčujete delo javnosti.

 <em>Predelate</em>

Prilagodite delo.

Pod naslednjimi pogoji:

<em>Priznanje avtorstva</em>

Delo morate priznati na način, kot ga je navedel avtor ali lastnik licence (toda ne na način, ki predlaga, da podirajo vas ali vašo uporabo dela).

 <em>Deljenje pod enakimi pogoji</em>

Če spremenite, prilagodite ali gradite na tem delu, lahko nastalo delo distribuirate le pod enako, podobno ali združljivo licenco.

Za polno besedilo licence si oglejte spletišče CreativeCommons, ali si preberite polno zavezo Commons.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000217412307574713022564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izboljšave pregledovalnika slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Besedilo pomoči

Pregledovalnik slik vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Če želite pomagati pri razvoju Pregledovalnika slik, lahko stopite v stik z razvijalci s pomočjo irc-a ali preko našega dopisnega seznama.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/rename-multiple.page0000644000373100047300000000651012307574713024224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Samodejno paketno preimenovanje in oštevilčenje slik. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Preimenovanje več slik hkrati

Če želite preimenovati veliko slik tako da imajo oštevilčeno obliko imena:

Odprite galerijo slik s pritiskom na F9.

V galeriji slik izberite vse slike, ki jih želite preimenovati s pritiskom na tipko Ctrl in klikom na vsako od slik.

Namesto tega lahko za izbiro vseh slik pritisnete tudi CtrlA.

Kliknite SlikaShrani kot. Pojavilo se bo pogovorno okno z nekaterimi možnosti imena datoteke (slika podaj prikazuje kako je okno videti) .

Preimenovane slike bodo bile privzeto shranjene v trenutni mapi. Za shranjevanje drugje v spustnem meniju Ciljna mapa izberite mesto za shranjevanje.

Uporabite polje Oblika imena datoteke za izbiro oblike poimenovanja slik. Predogled imena datoteke vam pokaže kako bodo videti nova imena datotek. Oglejte si odsek spodaj za nasvet kako preimenovati datoteke.

Prepričajte se, da je vrednost spustnega polja Vrsta datoteke kot je, razen če pretvarjate slike v drugo vrsto datotek.

Kliknite Shrani kot in slike bodo preimenovane.
Izbira oblike imena datoteke

Imena datotek preimenovanih datotek so določena z vsebino polja Oblika imena datoteka.

Izvirno ime datoteke lahko obdržite tako, da kot del novega imena datoteke obdržite %f.

Če na primer v polje Oblika imena datoteke vnesete pariz_%f, bodo slike roža.jpg, hiša.jpg in mucek.jpg preimenovane v pariz_roža.jpg, pariz_hiša.jpg in pariz_mucek.jpg.

Dodajanje %n bo vaše slike zaporedno oštevilčilo. Začelo se bo pri številu, ki ste ga izbrali v Možnostih.

Če na primer v polje Oblika imena datoteke vnesete sonce_%n, bodo slike roža.jpg, hiša.jpg in mucek.jpg preimenovane v sonce_2.jpg, sonce_3.jpg in sonce_1.jpg. (Urejene bodo po abecednem redu izvirnih imen datotek).
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/copy-paste.page0000644000373100047300000000225712307574713023214 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako kopirati/prilepiti iz pregledovalnika slik v drug program. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Kopiranje in lepljenje slike

Za kopiranje slike iz pregledovalnika slik v drug program kliknite UrediKopiraj ali desno kliknite na sliko in izberite Kopiraj.

Sedaj je bila slika kopirana na odložišče in jo lahko prilepite v dokument LibreOffice, sliko Gimp ali drug program.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000225312307574713023775 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pridružite se dokumentacijski ekipi Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Pomagajte pisati dokumentacijo

Dokumentacijo Pregledovalnika slik vzdržuje skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabimo vas k sodelovanju.

Za prispevanje k projektu dokumentacije stopite v stik z nami preko irc-a ali preko našega dopisnega seznama.

Naša stran wiki vsebuje uporabne podatke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/eog/plugin-exif-digital.page0000644000373100047300000000746012307574713024773 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ogled podatkov kot so nastvitve fotoaparata in histogram, geografsko mesto in datum. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Fabiana Simões fabianapsimoes@gmail.com

Dovoljenje Creative Commons - deljenje pod istimi pogoji 3.0

 Ogled podrobnih podatkov o sliki

Slike, posnete z digitalnim fotoaparatom so shranjene skupaj z dodatnimi podatki, ki so vstavljeni v njih kot so datum zajema, nastavitve osvetlite in v nekaterih predmetih celo mesto zajema slike.

Ta tema vam prikazuje kako dostopati do teh podatkov.

Prikaz datuma v vrstici stanja

Datum zajema slike lahko prikažete v vrstici stanja na dnu okna.

Za to kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite na zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Datum v vrstici stanja.

Podrobni podatki Exif

Podrobne informacije shranjene v digitalnih fotografijah se imenujejo podatki Exif. Vidite jih lahko z namestitvijo vstavka za pregledovalnik slik.

Za ogled podatkov Exif, ki so vstavljeni v fotografijah, morate imeti nameščen paket eog-plugins.

Če je paket eog-plugins nameščen, kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite v zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Prikaz Exif in kliknite Zapri.

Kliknite PogledStranski pladenj za ogled nastavitev fotoaparata, ki so bile uporabljene za zajem fotografije. Če si želite ogledati tudi histogram, ki prikazuje ravnotežje barv in svetlobe/sence na sliki, izberite Prikaz Exif na zavihku Vstavki in kliknete Možnosti. Histograme, ki si jih želite ogledati, lahko izberete pod Histogram.

Nastavitve fotoaparata, ki so bile uporabljene za zajem fotografije lahko vidite tudi v vrstici stanja. Izberite Prikaz Exif na zavihku Vstavki in kliknite Možnosti. Izberite Prikaži nastavitve fotoaparata v stranski vrstici.
Pokaži zemljevid s položajem mesta, zajema fotografije

Nekateri fotoaparati digitalnim fotografijam pripnejo podatke geograskega položaja. To so običajno koordinate GPS (zemljepisna dolžina in širina) mesta zajema slike..

Za dodajanje te zmožnosti boste morali namestiti paket eog-plugins.

Če je paket eog-plugins nameščen, kliknite UrediMožnosti in pojdite v zavihek Vstavki. Nato izberite Zemljevid in kliknite Zapri.

Kliknite PogledStranski pladenj za prikaz zemljevida.

Zemljevid vam bo pokazal mesto zajema slike le, če so podatki geografskega mesta priloženi sliki. Veliko fotoaparatov teh podatkov slikam ne priloži.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/seahorse/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000013710312300434241023761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 seahorse-daemon"> key"> ]>
Passwords and Keys Manual 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Jacob Perkins and Adam Schreiber Seahorse Project Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Jacob Perkins Seahorse Project Adam Schreiber Seahorse Project
sadam@clemson.edu
Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project
pcutler@foresightlinux.org
Seahorse Project GNOME Documentation Project Passwords and Keys Manual V2.11.0 May 2009 Paul Cutler pcutler@foresightlinux.org Passwords and Keys Manual V0.10.1 August 2008 Adam Schreiber sadam@clemson.edu Passwords and Keys Manual V0.9.1 November 2006 Milo Casagrande milo_casagrande@yahoo.it Passwords and Keys Manual V0.9.0 July 2005 Adam Schreiber sadam@clemson.edu Seahorse Project Passwords and Keys Manual V0.7.0 February 2003 Jacob Perkins Seahorse Project This manual describes version 2.28.x of Passwords and Keys Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Passwords and Keys application or this manual, follow the directions in the Gnome Feedback Page. Passwords and Keys is the application for managing encryption keys for the GNOME Desktop Seahorse seahorse Encryption Keys Introduction You can use Passwords and Keys to create and manage PGP and SSH keys. Passwords and Keys provides a front end to many of the features of Gnu Privacy Guard (GPG) and integrates with multiple components of the GNOME desktop. With Passwords and Keys you can: Create and manage PGP and SSH keys, Export and import PGP and SSH keys, Share your keys with others, Getting Started Starting <application>Passwords and Keys</application> You can start Passwords and Keys in the following ways: Applications menu Choose Accessories Password and Keys . Command Line Type seahorse then press Return. When You Start <application>Passwords and Keys</application> When you start Passwords and Keys, the Password and Keys window is displayed.
The <application>Passwords and Keys</application> Window Show the Passwords and Keys window.
The Passwords and Keys window contains the following elements: Menubar The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands that you need to perform tasks in Passwords and Keys. Toolbar Use the toolbar to quickly access commonly-used commands. Keys and Passwords Tabs Provides access to the keys and passwords in the keyring. First time options Provides fast access to useful actions for first time users. From here you can: Browse the help system, Import keys in the keyring, Create new keys. Creating OpenPGP Keys OpenPGP is a non proprietary protocol for encrypting e-mail with the use of public key cryptography based on PGP. It defines standard formats for encrypted messages, signatures, private keys and certificates for exchanging public keys. Public key cryptography is a concept which involves the use of two keys: a public key, that you can give to anyone with whom you would like to communicate, and a private key which is private and must be kept secret. To create OpenPGP keys: Choose FileNew... Select PGP Key and click Continue Enter your full name (first - last), your e-mail address and any additional information. You can also specify advanced options for the key: see below. Click Create to create the new key pair. The Passphrase for New PGP Key dialog will open. Enter the passphrase twice for your new key. Use similar practices to generating a strong password when choosing a passphrase. The main difference between a password and a passphrase is that, in a passphrase, spaces are valid characters. Advanced options Expand the Advanced key options section to specify the following options for a new key: Encryption Type This field specifies the encryption algorithms used to generate your keys. DSA ElGamal This is the suggested choice as it will allow you to encrypt, decrypt, sign and verify as needed. DSA Will allow signing only. RSA Will allow signing only. Key Strength (bits) This is the length of the key in bits. The longer the key, the more secure it will be, provided a strong passphrase is used. Conversely, performing any operation with a longer key will require more time than it would with a shorter key. Acceptable values are between 1024 and 4096 bits. At least 2048 bits is recommended. Expiration Date This is the date at which the key will cease to be usable for performing encryption or signing operations. 6 months is a reasonable time to set it to. You will have to either change the expiration date or generate a new key or subkey after this amount of time passes. Sign your new key with your old one before it expires to preserve your trust status. Creating Secure Shell Keys Secure Shell (SSH) is a way of logging into a remote computer to execute commands on that machine. SSH keys are used in key-based authentication system, as an alternative to the default password authentication system. With key-based authentication there is no need to manually type a password to authenticate. Secure Shell keys are made of two keys: a private key, that must be kept secret, and a public key which can be uploaded to any computer you need to access. To create a Secure Shell key: Choose FileNew... Select Secure Shell Key and click Continue Enter a description of what the key is to be used for. You can use your e-mail address or any other reminder. You can also specify advanced options for the key: see below. Click Just Create Key to create the new key, or Create and Set Up to create the key and set up another computer to use it for authentication. The Passphrase for New Secure Shell Key dialog opens. Enter the passphrase twice for your new key. Use similar practices to generating a strong password when choosing a passphrase. The main difference between a password and a passphrase is that, in a passphrase, spaces are valid characters. Advanced options Expand the Advanced key options section to specify the following options for a new key: Encryption Type This field specifies the encryption algorithms used to generate your key. RSA Use the Rivest-ShamirAdleman (RSA) algorithm to create the SSH key. This is the preferred and more secure choice. DSA Use the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) to create the SSH key. Key Strength (bits) This is the length of the key in bits. The longer the key, the more secure it will be, provided a strong passphrase is used. Conversely, performing any operation with a longer key will require more time than it would with a shorter key. Acceptable values are between 1024 and 4096 bits. At least 2048 bits is recommended. OpenPGP Key Properties The descriptions in this section apply to all OpenPGP keys. To view properties of a PGP key: Select the PGP key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Select the Details tab. Properties Fingerprint The fingerprint is a unique string of characters that exactly identifies a key. KeyID The KeyID is similar to the Fingerprint. However the KeyID only contains the last 8 characters of the fingerprint. Most of the time it is possible to identify a key with only the KeyID, but occasionally two keys may have the same ID. Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a key. DSA keys can only sign. ElGamal keys are used to encrypt. Created Indicates the date the key was created. Expires Indicates the date the key can no longer be used. Strength Indicates the length in bits of a key. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. A long key is not enough to make up for the use of a weak passphrase. Trust Trust is an indication of how sure you are of a person's ability to correctly extend the web of trust. When you are faced with a key you have not signed, the validity of that person's key will be determined based on the signatures they have collected and how well or not you trust the people who have made those signatures. By default, an unknown key will require 3 signatures with marginal trust value or 1 fully trusted signature. Unknown: You are not familiar with the person's ability to sign keys correctly. Never: This person cannot correctly sign keys. Marginal: This person checks for photo ID before signing a key, but does not necessarily scrutinize the IDs. Full: This person scrutinizes each and every person's photo IDs before signing them (e.g. they only sign keys that truely belong to the person asking for the signature). Ultimate: This level of trust should only be assigned to your own keys. Enabling and Disabling Keys When a key is enabled, it can be used to perform encryption operations. When a key is disabled, it cannot be used to encrypt to or verify signatures made by it. Expiration Date A key can no longer be used to perform key operations after it has expired. Changing a key's expiration date to a point in the future re-enables it. A good general practice would be to have a master key that never expires and multiple subkeys that do and are signed by the master key. User IDs User IDs allow multiple identities and email addresses to be used with the same key. They usually take the form of: Name (comment) <email address> Adding a User ID Adding a user ID is useful when you want to have an identity for your job and one for your friends. To add a user ID to a key: Select the key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Select the Names and Signatures tab, Click on Add Name. After following the instructions above, you will be presented with a dialog to fill in. The fields are detailed below. Full Name Enter your full name in the form <first> <last> A middle name or initial is optional. You must enter at least 5 characters in this field. Email Address Your email address is how most people will locate your key on a key server or other key provider. Make sure it is correct before continuing. It should be of the form <username>@<domainname> Key Comment The comment field can be used to place any additional information into the displayed name of your new ID. This information can be searched for on key servers. Photo IDs Photo IDs allow a key owner to embed one or more pictures of themselves in a key. These identities can be signed just like normal user IDs. A photo ID must be in JPEG format and is recommended to be no larger than 240x288 pixels. If the chosen image is not of the required file type or size Passwords and Keys can resize and convert it on the fly from any image format supported by the GDK library. Changing the Passphrase To change the passphrase assigned to a key: Select the key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Click on Change Passphrase. Enter the new passphrase and click OK. Deleting a Key To delete a key from your keyring: Select the key from the main window, Right click on it and choose Delete Key or choose Edit Delete Key . You can delete your keys, trusted keys and collected keys. OpenPGP Subkey Properties Each OpenPGP key has a single master key used to sign only. Subkeys are used to encrypt and to sign as well. In this way, if your sub key is compromised, you don't need to revoke your master key. ID This is the identifier of the subkey. Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a subkey. DSA keys can only sign, ElGamal keys are used to encrypt while RSA keys are used to sign or to encrypt. Created Indicates the date the key was created. Expires Indicates the date the key can no longer be used. Status Indicates the status of the key. Strength Indicates the length in bits of the key. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. A long key is not enough to make up for the use of a weak passphrase. Adding a Subkey To add a subkey to a key, from the Subkeys section click on Add button. After following the instructions above, you will be presented with a dialog to fill in. The fields are detailed below. Key Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a subkey. DSA Use the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) to create the subkey. This subkey can sign only. ElGamal Use the ElGamal algorithm to create the subkey. This subkey can encrypt only. RSA Use the Rivest-Shamir Adleman (RSA) algorithm to create the subkey. This subkey can be used to sign or encrypt, but you have to create two different subkeys. Key Length Indicates the length in bits of the subkey. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. Expiration Date Indicates the date the subkey can no longer be used. Changing a Subkey Expiration Date To change a subkey expiration date, select the subkey from the Subkeys section, then: Click on the Expire button on the left, From the date dialog choose the new expiration date or select Never expires for no expiration date. Revoking a Subkey To revoke a subkey, select the subkey from the Subkeys section, then: Click on the Revoke button on the left, Choose a reason why to revoke the subkey: No Reason There isn't a specific reason to revoke the key. Compromised The key has been compromised. Superseded The key has been superseded by another one. Not Used The key is not used anymore. Enter a description of why you are revoking the key, Click on Revoke. The effect of revoking a subkey is immediate. Deleting a Subkey To delete a subkey, select the subkey from the Subkeys section, then: Click on the Delete button on the left. Secure Shell Key Properties The descriptions in this section apply to all SSH keys. To view properties of a SSH key: Select the Secure Shell key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Select the Details tab. Properties Fingerprint The fingerprint is a unique string of characters that exactly identifies a key. Algorithm Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a key. Location This is the location where the private key has been stored. Strength Indicates the length in bits of a key. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. A long key is not enough to make up for the use of a weak passphrase. Deleting a Secure Shell Key To delete a Secure Shell key: Select the SSH key from the main window, Right click on it and choose Delete key or choose Edit Delete Key . Importing Keys To import keys choose File Import and select, from the file chooser, a file containing at least one ASCII armored public key. Importing can also be performed by pasting the keys inside Passwords and Keys: Select an ASCII armored public block of text, Copy it to the clipboard, Choose Edit Paste Keys . Exporting Keys To export keys, select the keys in the main window and choose File Export . You can also export keys to the clipboard in an ASCII armored block of text: Select the keys in the main window, Choose Edit Copy Keys . Signing a Key Signing another person's key means you are giving trust to that person. Before signing a key, you have to carefully check the key's fingerprint to be sure that the key really belongs to that person. To sign a key in your keyring: Select the key you want to sign from the Trusted Keys or Other Collected Keys tabs, Choose Sign from the toolbar or File Sign , Select how carefully the key has been checked, Indicate if the signature should be local to your keyring, and if your signature can be revoked, Click on Sign. Preferences This section describes the preferences settable in Passwords and Keys by choosing Edit Preferences from within Passwords and Keys. Password Keyrings Creating Keyrings To create a new keyring, from the menu choose FileNew and choose Password Keyring. Enter a name for the new keyring, and press enter. Changing Keyring Passwords To change the unlock password of the keyring, first select the appropriate keyring and then press Change Unlock Password button. You will then be prompted to type the old password in the Old password text box, the new password in the New password text box and confirm it in the Confirm password text box. To apply the settings, press Change. If the old password is correct, you will get a status message indicating the success of the operation. If the old password is not correct you will be asked to check its correctness. Removing Keyrings To remove a keyring, first select the appropriate keyring and then from the menu choose Edit Delete. Key Servers Keep your and other's keys up to date by syncing keys periodically with remote keyservers. Syncing will make sure that you have the latest signatures made on all of your keys so that the web of trust will be the most useful. Passwords and Keys provides support for HKP and LDAP keyservers. HKP Servers HKP keyservers are ordinary web based keyservers such as the popular hkp://pool.sks-keyservers.net, also accessible at http://sks-keyservers.net. LDAP Keyservers LDAP keyservers are less common, but use the standard LDAP protocol to serve keys. ldap://keyserver.pgp.com is a good LDAP server. Key Sharing Key Sharing is provided by DNS-SD, also known as Bonjour or Rendevous. Enabling key sharing will add the local Passwords and Keys users' public key rings to the remote search dialog. Using these local "key servers" will most likely be faster than accessing remote servers. About Passwords and Keys Passwords and Keys, its associated plugins, the preferences applet and the panel applet are known collectively as Seahorse. Seahorse was written by Jacob Perkins. The current maintainers are Stef Walter and Adam Schreiber. This manual is by Adam Schreiber. The project's web site was designed by Jim Pharis. To find more information about Seahorse, the project , please visit the Seahorse web page. To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or this manual, follow the directions in the Feedback section of the GNOME User Guide. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license is included with this documentation; another can be found in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/seahorse/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012300434241023116 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/scan-file-system.page0000644000373100047300000000425512307647421024744 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Preišči vse notranje in odstranljive naprave. Preišči datotečni sistem

Da ugotovite, koliko prostora zavzame vaš datotečni sistem:

Izberite Orodje za preučevanjePreišči datotečni sistem v meniju

Vaš datotečni sistem vsebuje vse priklopljene notranje in odstranljive naprave shrambe, ko je ustrezna mapa preiskovana.

Če je datotečni sistem, ki ga želite preiskati, velik, bo trajalo nekaj minut za dokončanje preiskovanja.

Izberite Orodje za preučevanjeZaustavi za zaustavitev trenutnega preiskovanja ali Orodje za preučevanjeOsveži za ponovitev zadnjega preiskovanja.

The results may be useful in deciding which folders can be archived, deleted or moved to free up space. You can also use the results to estimate how much space would be needed for a backup of specific folders.

Desno kliknite na katerokoli mapo in izberite Odpri mapo za zagon Datoteke programa, ali Premakni v smeti za premik mape v Smeti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/scan-home.page0000644000373100047300000000522412307647421023430 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Preiščite vse vaše osebne datoteke, ki so na vaših notranjih napravah shrambe. Preiščite vašo mapo <file>Domača mapa</file>

V mapi Domača mapa se nahaja največ datotek za povprečnega uporabnika, saj privzete nastavitve pogosto shranjujejo ali kopirajo datoteke v njene podmape. To vključuje prejeme iz interneta, dokumente, na katerih delate, in slike iz vašega fotoaparata. Ponavadi obstaja ena Domača mapa za vsakega uporabnika na računalniku.

Izberite Orodje za preučevanjePreišči Domačo mapo v meniju

Izberite Orodje za preučevanjeZaustavi za zaustavitev trenutnega preiskovanja ali Orodje za preučevanjeOsveži za ponovitev zadnjega preiskovanja.

The results may be useful in deciding which folders can be archived, deleted or moved to free up space. You can also use the results to estimate how much space would be needed for a backup of your Home folder.

Desno kliknite na katerokoli mapo in izberite Odpri mapo za zagon Datoteke programa, ali Premakni v smeti za premik mape v Smeti.

Privzete podmape med drugim ponavadi vključujejo Namizje, Dokumenti, Prejemi, Slike in Glasba. Nekatere izmed teh bodo že obstajale z namestitvijo GNOME; druge bodo ustvarjene preko programov, če bodo potrebovane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/scan-folder.page0000644000373100047300000000446612307647421023762 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Preišči krajevne mape, vključujoč vse podmape. Preišči mapo

Preiskovanje posameznih map je hitrejše od tistih, ki so v celotnem datotečnem sistemu, tako da je učinkoviteje, če želite podrobnosti zgolj o določenem delu vašega datotečnega sistema.

Izberite Orodje za preučevanjePreišči mapo... v meniju

Uporabite brskalnik datotek za krmarjenje po vašem datotečnem sistemu in izberite željeno mapo

Kliknite Odpri za pričetek preiskovanja

Izberite Orodje za preučevanjeZaustavi za zaustavitev trenutnega preiskovanja ali Orodje za preučevanjeOsveži za ponovitev zadnjega preiskovanja.

The results may be useful in deciding which folders can be archived, deleted or moved to free up space. You can also use the results to estimate how much space would be needed for a backup of specific folders.

Desno kliknite na katerokoli mapo in izberite Odpri mapo za zagon Datoteke programa, ali Premakni v smeti za premik mape v Smeti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/pref.page0000644000373100047300000000262212307647421022511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Preskoči posamezne naprave in razdelke ob preiskovanju datotečnega sistema. Onemogoči preiskovanje posameznih naprav shrambe in razdelkov

Orodje preiskovanja uporabe diska vam omogča preiskovanje zgolj tistih particij in naprav shrambe, ki ste jih izbrali v oknu Možnosti. Privzeto so izbrane vse naprave in razdelki, ampak program bo shranil vaše možnosti, ko ga boste zaprli.

Izberite UrediMožnosti.

Izberite naprave shrambe in razdelke, ki jih želite preiskati, ali odstranite izbiro tistih, ki jih ne želite preiskati

Kliknite Zapri za shranjevanje vaših možnosti

Prvi predmet na seznamu, ki je priklopljen na /, ne more biti neizbran

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/scan-remote.page0000644000373100047300000000715312307647421023776 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Oddaljeno preiščite mapo preko vašega računalnika. Preišči oddaljeno mapo

Orodje za preučevanje porabe diska lahko preišče naprave shrambe, ki so dostopne na daljavo. Za preiskovanje oddaljenega celotnega datotečnega sistema ali izbrane mape:

Izberite PreiskovalnikPreišči oddaljeno mapo... v meniju

Izberite protokol, ki ga želite uporabljati

Vnesite v IP naslov oddaljene naprave shrambe v Strežnik polje ali URI, odvisno od protokola, ki ga uporabljate.

Kliknite Preišči za nadaljevanje; lahko boste vprašani za več podrobnosti pred začetkom preiskovanja kot na primer geslo in uporabniško ime.

Preiskovanje preko omrežja je lahko počasnejše kot preiskovanje krajevnega datotečnega sistema.

Desno kliknite na katerokoli mapo in izberite Odpri mapo za zagon Datoteke programa, ali Premakni v smeti za premik mape v Smeti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/pref-view-menu.page0000644000373100047300000000211312307647421024416 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Skrij ali prikaži orodno vrstico in vrstico stanja. Orodna vrstica in vrstica stanja

Orodna vrstica vsebuje bližnjice do različnih dejanj preiskovanja, medtem ko Vrstica stanja vsebuje stanje programa (na primer Pripravljen and Preiskovanje…).

Izberite PogledOrodna vrstica v meniju in omogočite ali onemogočite možnost

Izberite PogledVrstica stanja v meniju in omogočite ali onemogočite možnost

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/pref-view-chart.page0000644000373100047300000000265012307647421024561 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Prikaži rezultate kot obroče grafikona ali kot drevesni pregled. Različni grafikonski pogledi

Privzeto pokažejo rezultati preiskovanja posamezno podmapo kot del obroča, ki vključuje velikostno razmerje do mape, v kateri se nahaja. Podmape so prikazane v različnih barvah.

Če premaknete miško preko obročov grafikona, bo prikazanih več podrobnosti o podmapah.

Vidnost grafikona se lahko spremeni v Drevesni pogled z uporabo spustnega seznama na vrhu grafikona na desni strani. Drevesni razpored prikaže mape kot kvadratke, ki so sorazmerno urejeni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/index.page0000644000373100047300000000176612307647421022674 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Orodje za preučevanje porabe diska, grafični preiskovalnik naprav shrambe. Orodje za preučevanje porabe diska
Preišči naprave shrambe
Pogledi in možnosti
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/baobab/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000306012307647421024273 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Orodje za preučevanje porabe diska, tudi baobab, grafično predstavi vašo uporabo prostora za hrambo. Predstavitev

Preučevalnik porabe diska je grafični program za preučevanje porabe prostora na napravah shrambe. Uporabite ga lahko za preiskavo več krajevnih ali oddaljenih naprav shramb (vključno s trdimi diski, SSD-ji, ključi USB , digitalnimi fotoaparati in spominskimi karticami). Preučevalnik porabe diska lahko preišče celoten datotečni sistem, vašo Domačo mapo, uporabniško določeno mapo ali oddaljeno mapo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-stickykeys.page0000644000373100047300000000631412320731727025572 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Vtipkajte tipkovne bližnjice po eno tipko na enkrat namesto pritiska vseh tipk hkrati. Vklop lepljivih tipk

Lepljive tipke vam omogočajo tipkanje tipkovnih bližnjic eno tipko za drugo namesto pritiska vseh tipk naenkrat. Bližnjica AltTab preklopi med okni. Brez vklopljenih lepljivih tipk bi morali hkrati pritisniti na obe tipki. Z lepljivimi tipkami lahko isto storite tako, da najprej pritisnete Alt in nato Tab.

Morda boste želeli lepljive tipke vklopiti, če težko pritisnete več tipk hkrati.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Vklopite Lepljive tipke.

 Hiter vklop in izklop lepljivih tipk

Pod Omogočite prek tipkovnice izberite Vključite razpoložljive funkcije dostopnosti prek tipkovnice za vklop ter izklop lepljivih tipk prek tipkovnice.Ko je ta možnost izbrana, pritisnite tipko Shift petkrat da bi omogočili oziroma onemogočili lepljive tipke.

V primeru da pritisnete dve tipki hkrati, lahko lepljive tipke začasno izklopite, kar vam omogoča vnos tipkovne bližnjice na običajen način.

Na primer, če imate lepljive tipke vklopljene, vendar hkrati pritisnete Alt and Tab, lepljive tipke v primeru vklopljene možnosti ne bi čakale za pritisk še ene tipke. Čakale pa bi, če bi pritisnili samo eno tipko. To je uporabno, če lahko hkrati pritisnete le nekatere tipkovne bližnjice (na primer tipke, ki so blizu skupaj).

Za omogočitev tega izberite Onemogoči, če sta dve tipki pritisnjeni skupaj.

Računalnik lahko proizvede zvok piska, ko začnete vnašati tipkovno bližnjico z vklopljenimi lepljivimi tipkami. To je uporabno, če želite vedeti ali lepljive tipke pričakujejo vnos tipkovne bližnjice in bodo naslednji pritiski tipk obravnavani kot del bližnjice. Za omogočitev tega izberite Zapiskaj, ko je pritisnjena spremenilna tipka.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-turn-on-off.page0000644000373100047300000000541412320731727026774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev ali onemogočitev naprave Bluetooth na vašem računalniku. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Vklop ali izklop Bluetooth

Ikona Bluetooth v menijski vrstici

Bluetooth lahko vklopite, za uporabo naprav Bluetooth ter za pošiljanje in prejemanje datotek in ga izklopite za varčevanje z energijo. Za vklop Bluetootha kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in kliknite Vklopi Bluetooth.

Bluetooth vklopite za uporabo napravo Bluetooth in za pošiljanje in prejemanje datotek. Kadar ga ne uporabljate, ga izklopite in varčujte z energijo. Za vklop Bluetooth kliknite na ikono Bluetooth v zgornji vrstici in Bluetooth vklopite.

Več prenosnih računalnikov ima tipko oz. kombinacijo tipk za vklop/izklop naprave Bluetooth. Če je strojna oprema Bluetooth izklopljena, ikone Bluetooth v menijski vrstici me boste videli. Poiščite stikalo na svojem računalniku oz. tipko na svoji tipkovnici. Tipka je pogosto dostopna s pomočjo tipkeFn.

Veliko prenosnikov ima strojno stikalo ali kombinacijo tipk za vklop ali izklop Bluetootha. V primeru da je strojna oprema Bluetooth izklopljena, ikone Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici ne boste videli. Najdite stikalo na računalniku ali tipko na tipkovnici. Do tipke na tipkovnici je pogosto mogoče dostopati s tipko Fn.

Za izklop Bluetootha kliknite na ikono Bluetooth in kliknite Izklopi Bluetooth.

Za izklop Bluetooth kliknite na ikono Bluetooth in Bluetooth izklopite.

Vidnost vklopite le, če bi se radi na računalnik povezali z druge naprave. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power.page0000644000373100047300000000225112320731730023741 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natalia Ruz nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl V pripravljenost, varčevanje z energijo, izklop, zatemnitev zaslona… Napajanje in baterija
Nastavitve baterije
Težave z napajanjem Odpravite težave z napajanjem in baterijo Težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-connect.page0000644000373100047300000001527412320731730026111 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ogled in urejanje datotek na drugem računalniku preko FTP, SSH, souporab Windows ali WebDAV. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Brskanje datotek na strežniku ali omrežni souporabi

Če se povežete s strežnikom ali omrežno souporabo za brskanje, si lahko datoteke ogledate natanko tako, kot če bi bili na svojem računalniku. To je priročen način za prejem ali pošiljanje datotek na internetu ali za izmenjavo datotek z drugimi v vašem krajevnem omrežju.

Za brskanje po datotekah v omrežju iz Pregledne plošče odprite program Datoteke. Nato kliknite Prebrskaj vsebino omrežja v stranski vrstici. Upravljalnik datotek bo našel vse računalnike v vašem krajevnem omrežju, ki oglašujejo možnost streženja datotek. Če se želite povezati s strežnikom na internetu ali ne vidite računalnika, ki ga iščete, se lahko ročno povežete s strežnikom, tako da vtipkate internetni oz. omrežni naslov.

Povezava z datotečnim strežnikom

V menijski vrstici upravljalnika datotek kliknite na Datoteka in nato izberite iz menija programa Poveži se s strežnikom.

Vnesite naslov strežnika v obliki URL. Podrobnosti o podprtih naslovih URL so izpisana spodaj.

Če ste se nekoč že povezali na strežnik, ga najdete na seznamu Nedavni strežniki.

Kliknite Poveži. Novo okno se bo odprlo z datotekami na strežniku. Po datotekah lahko brskate, kot bi brskali po tistih na svojem računalniku. Strežnik bo dodan v stransko vrstico, tako da naslednjič lahko hitro dostopate do njega.
Pisanje naslovov URL

Naslov URL ali enolični krajevnik vira je oblika naslova, ki se nanaša na mesto ali datoteko na omrežju. Naslov je oblikovan:

protokol://imestreznika.example.com/mapa

Protokol opredeljuje protokol ali vrsto strežnika. Example.com del naslova se imenuje ime domene. Če je zahtevano uporabniško ime, se doda pred imenom strežnika.

protokol://uporabniskoime@imestreznika.example.com/mapa

Nekateri protokoli zahtevajo, da se določi številka vrat. Dodajte številko za ime domene:

protokol://uporabniskoime@imestreznika.example.com:vrata/mapa

Spodaj so posebni primeri raznih vrst podprtih strežnikov.

Vrste strežnikov

Povežete se lahko na različne vrste strežnikov. Nekateri strežniki so javni in se lahko vsak poveže gor. Drugi strežniki pa zahtevajo, da se prijavite z uporabniškim imenom in geslom.

Morda ne boste imeli dovoljenj za izvajanje določenih dejanj na strežniku. Na javnih strežnikih FTP na primer ne boste mogli brisati datotek.

Naslov URL ki ga vnesete je odvisen od protokola, ki ga strežnik uporablja za izvoz deljenih datotek.

SSH

V primeru, da imate na strežniku račun varne lupine, se lahko povežete na ta način. Večina spletnih gostiteljev zagotavlja svojim članom račune SSH zato, da lahko varno pošiljajo datoteke. Strežniki SSH zahtevajo, da se prijavite.

Značilen naslov URL za SSH zgleda:

ssh://uporabniskoime@imestreznika.example.com/mapa

Pri uporabi SSH bodo vsi poslani podatki (vključno z vašim geslom) šifrirani zato, da jih drugi uporabniki na omrežju ne morejo videti.

 FTP (s prijavo)

FTP je priljubljen način za izmenjavo datotek na Internetu. Ker podatki preko FTP niso šifrirani, veliko strežnikov sedaj zagotavlja dostop preko SSH. Nekateri strežniki še vedno omogočajo ali zahtevajo uporabo FTP za pošiljanje ali prejem datotek. Spletišča FTP s prijavami običajno dovoljujejo brisanje in pošiljanje datotek.

Značilen naslov URL za FTP zgleda:

ftp://uporabniskoime@ftp.example.com/pot/

 Javni FTP

Spletišča, ki vam omogočajo prejem datotek, včasih zagotavljajo javen ali anonimni dostop do FTP. Ti strežniki uporabniškega imena in gesla ne zahtevajo in vam običajno ne dovolijo izbrisa ali pošiljanja datotek.

Značilen naslov URL za anonimni FTP zgleda:

ftp://ftp.example.com/pot/

Nekatera anonimna spletišča FTP zahtevajo prijavo z javnim uporabniškim imenom in geslom ali prijavo z javnim uporabniškim imenom in vašim naslovom e-pošte namesto gesla. Za te strežnike uporabite način FTP (s prijavo) in uporabite dovoljenja, ki jih določi spletišče FTP.

 Souporaba s sistemom Windows

Računalniki Windows za souporabo datotek preko krajevnega omrežja uporabljalo lastniški protokol. Računalniki na omrežju Windows so včasih združeni v domene za organizacijo in za boljši nadzor dostopa. V primeru da imate na oddaljenemu računalniku prava dovoljenja, se lahko do souporabe Windows povežete iz upravljalnika datotek.

Značilen naslov URL za souporabo Windows zgleda:

smb://servername/Souporaba

 WebDAV in Varen WebDAV

WebDAV je osnovan na protokolu HTTP in se včasih uporablja za deljenje datotek preko krajevnega omrežja in za shranjevanje datotek na internetu. V primeru da strežnik na katerega se povezujete podpira varne povezave, izberite to možnost. Varni WebDAV uporablja močno šifriranje SSL zato, da drugi uporabniki ne morejo videti vašega gesla.

Značilen naslov URL za WebDAV zgleda:

http://example.imegostitelja.com/pot
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-scrollbars-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000575412320731730027265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prekrivni drsniki so tanki oranžni trakovi na dolgih dokumentih. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Kaj so prekrivni drsniki?

Ubuntu vključuje prekrivne drsnike, ki zavzamejo manj prostora na zaslonu kot običajni drsniki in vam dajejo več prostora za vašo vsebino. Navdihnili so jih drsniki mobilnih naprav, kjer običajni drsniki niso zahtevani, vendar pa prekrivni drsniki Ubuntu prav tako dobro delujejo tudi z miško.

Nekateri programi kot sta Firefox in LibreOffice še ne podpirajo novih prekrivnih drsnikov.

Uporaba drsnikov

Prekrivni drsnik se pojavi kot tanek oranžen trak na desnem robu okna. Položaj drsnika ustreza položaju vašega zaslona v drsljivi vsebini. Dolžina drsnika ustreza dolžini vsebine. Krajši kot je drsnik, daljša je vsebina.

Premaknite miškin kazalec čez katerokoli točko robu drsanja vsebine za prikaz velikega drsniak.

Načini uporabe drsnikov:

Kliknite na zgornjo polovico velikega drsnika za drsanje eno stran navzgor. Kliknite spodnjo polovico za drsanje stran navzdol.

Povlecite veliki drsnik navzgor ali navzdol za premik položaja zaslona natanko tja, kjer ga želite imeti.

na veliki drsnik za premik položaja zaslona brez potrebe po vlečenju ali drsanju stran na stran. To je še posebno uporabno v dolgih dokumentih.
Onemogočitev drsnikov

Če vam je všeč starejši slog, lahko nove drsnike onemogočite:

Odprite Terminal s pritiskom CtrlAltt ali iskanjem terminal v Pregledni plošči.

Vtipkajte naslednji ukaz in pritisnite Enter:

gsettings set com.canonical.desktop.interface scrollbar-mode normal

Če se premislite in želite drsnike ponovno omogočite, zaženite ta ukaz:

gsettings reset com.canonical.desktop.interface scrollbar-mode

Nastavitev vaše teme na Visok kontrast bo onemogočila tudi prekrivne drsnike.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard-nav.page0000644000373100047300000001544012320731730025173 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Uporaba programov in namizja brez miške. Krmarjenje s tipkami

Ta stran opisuje krmarjenje s tipkovnico za ljudi, ki ne morejo uporabiti miške ali druge kazalne naprave ali za tiste, ki želijo tipkovnico uporabljati kolikor je le mogoče. Za tipkovne bližnjice, ki so uporabne za vse uporabnike, si oglejte .

V primeru da imate težave z uporabo miške ali druge kazalne naprave, lahko miškin kazalec nadzirate s številsko tipkovnico. Za podrobnosti si oglejte .

 Krmarjenje po uporabniškem vmesniku

Tab in CtrlTab

Premika žarišče tipkovnice med različnimi nadzorniki. Ctrl Tab se premika med skupinami nadzornikov kot iz stranske vrstice v glavno vsebino. S CtrlTab se lahko premaknete tudi izven področij, ki uporabljajo Tab kot je področje besedila.

Držite tipkoShift za premik žarišča v obratnem vrstnem redu.

Smerne tipke

Premika izbiro med predmeti v enem nadzorniku ali med zbirko pvoezanih nadzornikov. Uporabite smerne tipke za osredotočenje na gumbe v orodni vrstici, izbiro predmetov v seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu ali izbiro izbrinega gumba iz skupine.

V drevesnem pogledu izberite tipki leve in desne puščice za zlaganje in razširitev predmetov s podrejenimi predmeti.

CtrlSmerne tipke

V seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu premaknite žarišče tipkovnice na drug predmet ne da bi spremenili kateri predmet je izbran.

ShiftSmerne tipke

V seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu izberite vse predmete iz trenutno izbranega predmeta na predmet, ki je na novo v žarišču.

Preslednica

Omogoči predmet v žarišču kot je gumb, izbiro polje ali predmet seznama.

CtrlPreslednica

V seznamskem ali ikonskem pogledu lahko izberite ali odstranite izbiro predmeta v žarišču ne da bi odstranili izbiro drugih predmetov.

Alt

Držite tipkoAlt za prikazpospeševalnikov : podčrtanih črk na predmetih menija, gumbih in drugih nadzornikih. Pritisnite Alt in podčrtano črko za omogočitev nadzornika kot če bi nanj kliknili.

Esc

Konča meni, pojavno okno, preklopnik ali pogovorno okno.

F10

Odprite prvi meni v menijski vrstici okna. Uporabite smerne tipke za krmarjenje po menijih.

ShiftF10 ali tipka meni

Prikaže vsebinski meni za trenutno izbiro kot če bi desno kliknili.

CtrlF10

V upravljalniku datotek odpre vsebinski meni za trenutno mapo kot če bi desno kliknili na ozadje in ne na enega od predmetov.

CtrlPageUp in CtrlPageDown

V vmesniku z zavihki preklopi na zavihek na levi ali desni.
Krmarjenje po namizju
Krmarjenje po oknih

AltF4

Zapre trenutno okno.

CtrlSuper↓

Obnovi razpeto okno na izvirno velikost.

AltF7

Premakne trenutno okno. Pritisnite AltF7 in nato uporabite smerne tipke za premik okna. Pritisnite Enter za končanje premikanja okna ali Esc za njegovo vrnitev na njegovo izvirno mesto.

AltF8

Spremeni velikost trenutnega okna. PritisniteAltF8 in nato uporabite smerne tipke za spremembo velikosti okna. Pritisnite Enter za končanje spreminjanja velikosti okna ali Esc za njegovo vrnitev na izvirno velikost.

CtrlSuper↑

Razpne okno.

CtrlSuper←

Razpne okno navpično ob levi strani zaslona.

CtrlSuper→

Razpne okno navpično ob desni strani zaslona.

AltPreslednica

Prikaže meni okna kot če bi desno kliknili v nazivni vrstici.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-alert.page0000644000373100047300000000311112320731730025036 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Izberite zvok za predvajanje ob novih sporočilih, nastavite glasnost opozoril ali onemogočite opozorilne zvoke. Izbira ali onemogočitev opozorilnega zvoka

Vaš računalnik bo predvajal enostaven opozorilni zvok za določene vrste sporočil in dogodkov. Za alarme lahko izberete drugačne zvoke, neodvisno od sistemske glasnosti nastavite glasnost opozorila ali popolnoma onemogočite opozorilne zvoke.

Kliknite na meni zvoka v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve zvoka.

V zavihku Učinki zvoka izberite opozorilni zvok. Zvoki se bodo ob kliku na njih predvajali zato lahko slišite, kakšni so.

Uporabite drsnik glasnosti v zavihku Zvočni učinki za nastavitev glasnosti opozorilnega zvoka. To ne bo vplivalo na glasnost vaše glasbe, filmov in drugih zvočnih datotek.

Za popolno onemogočitev zvokov opozoril izberite Utišaj poleg Glasnost opozoril.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-visibility.page0000644000373100047300000000251312320731730027000 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ali lahko druge naprave odkrijejo vaš računalnik. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Kaj je vidnost Bluetooth?

Vidnost Bluetooth pomeni ali lahko druge naprave najdejo vaš računalnik, ko iščejo naprave Bluetooth. Ko je vidnost Bluetooth vklopljena, se bo vaš računalnik pokazal vsem napravam v bližini in jim dovolil poskus povezave z vami.

Vašemu računalniku ni treba biti viden za iskanje drugih naprav, vendar morajo te naprave biti vidne vašemu računalniku, da jih lahko odkrije.

Ko ste se povezali z napravo za sporazumevanje ni zahtevana ne vidnost računalnika in ne naprave.

Vidnost pustite izklopljeno, razen če se morate vi ali nekdo drug povezati z računalnikom z druge naprave .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/wacom.page0000644000373100047300000000103312320731730023710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitve možnosti tablice Wacom Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Grafična tablica Wacom usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard-cursor-blink.page0000644000373100047300000000320512320731730027015 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev utripanja vstavitvene točke in nadzor hitrosti utripanja. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ali naj vrivnik tipkovnice utripa

Če kazalko tipkovnice težko vidite v besedilnem polju, lahko nastavite, da utripa, kar izboljša njeno vidljivost.

Kliknite ikono menijske vrstice skrajno desno in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku strojna oprema kliknite Tipkovnica.

Izberite Vrivnik utripa v besedilnih poljih.

Uporabite drsnik Hitrost za prilagoditev hitrosti utripanja vrivnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-email-virus.page0000644000373100047300000000355212320731730025633 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Virusi zelo verjetno ne bodo okužili vašega računalnika, vendar lahko okužijo druge ljudi, ki jim pošiljate e-pošto. Ali moram svojo e-pošto preiskati za viruse?

Virusi so programi, ki na vašem računalniku povzročajo težave. Pogosto se prenesejo na računalnik preko sporočil e-pošte.

Virusi, ki učinkujejo na računalnike na katerih teče Linux so precej redki, zato je malo verjetno, da bi se okužili z virusom preko e-pošte ali kako drugače. Če prejmete e-pošto s skritim virusom, verjetno na vaš računalnik ne bo imel vpliva. Zato vam svoje e-pošte ni treba preiskati za prisotnost virusov.

Vendar morda želite preiskati svojo e-pošto za viruse, da ne bi vursa posredovali od ene k drugi osebi. Na primer, če ima en od vaših prijateljev računalnik Windows z virusov in vam pošlje e-pošto okuženo z virusom, ki jo nato posredujete drugemu prijatelju z računalnikom Windows, potem lahko virus dobi tudi drugi prijatelj. Da bi se temi izognili lahko namestite protivirusni progam za preiskovanje svoje e-pošte, vendar je verjetnost takšnega dogodka zelo majhna in večina ljudi z Windows ali Mac OS ima nameščen svoj protivirusni program.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-chat.page0000644000373100047300000000137312320731730024314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Klepet na kateremukoli omrežju z Empathy, video klici, namestitev skype, programi družabnih omrežij Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Klepet in družabna omrežja usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/video-dvd-restricted.page0000644000373100047300000000441212320731730026635 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Večina komercialnih DVD-jev je šifriranih, zato jih ne boste mogli predvajati brez programov za odšifriranje. Dokumentacijski projekt Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Kaj naj omogočim omejene kodeke za predvajanje DVD-jev?

Podpore DVD ni mogoče privzeto zagotoviti v Ubuntuju zaradi pravnih in tehničnih omejitev. Večina komercialnih DVD-jev je šifriranih in zato za predvajanje zahtevajo uporabo odšifrirnih programov

Uporaba Fluendo za legalno predvajanje DVD-kev

Kupite lahko komercialni odkodirnik DVD podjetja Fluendo, ki lahko upravlja z zaščito pred kopiranjem. Deluje v Linuxu in bi moral biti dovoljen v vseh državah.

Uporaba drugih programov za šifriranje

V nekaterih državah uporaba spodnjih programov za odšifriranje zakonsko ni dovoljena. Preverite, da imate pravico do njihove uporabe.

Namestite libdvdnav4, libdvdread4, gstreamer0.10-plugins-bad, and gstreamer0.10-plugins-ugly.

V primeru da želite predvajati šifrirane DVD-je (oglejte si pravne opombe zgoraj), odprite Pregledno ploščo in zaženite Terminal.

Vpišite naslednje v zaslon, ki se pojavi, in pritisnite Enter.

sudo /usr/share/doc/libdvdread4/install-css.sh

Vnesite svoje geslo za dokončanje namestitve.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000625012320731730025152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranite datoteke ali mape, ki jih ne potrebujete več. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Izbris datotek in map

Če datoteke ali mape ne želite več, jo lahko izbrišete. Ko predmet izbrišete, je premaknjen v mapo Smeti, kjer je shranjen, dokler smeti ne izpraznite. Predmete, ki so shranjeni v mapi Smeti, lahko obnovite na njihovo izvirno mesto, če se odločite, da jih potrebujte ali pa ste jih izbrisali po nesreči.

Za pošiljanje datoteke v smeti:

Izberite predmet, ki ga želite izbrisati, tako da nanj enkrat kliknete.

Pritisnite tipko Delete na tipkovnici. Namesto tega lahko predmet povlečete v Smeti v stranski vrstici.

Za trajen izbris datotek in sprostitev prostora na računalniku morate izprazniti smeti. Za izpraznitev smeti desno kliknite na Smeti v stranski vrstici in izberite Izprazni smeti.

Trajno izbriši datoteko

Datoteko lahko takoj trajno izbrišete brez pošiljanja v smeti.

Za trajen izbris datoteke:

Izberite predmet, ki ga želite izbrisati.

Pritisnite in držite tipko Shift in nato pritisnite tipko Delete.

Ker tega ne morete razveljaviti boste morali potrditi, da želite datoteko ali mapo izbrisati.

V primeru, da morate datoteke pogosto izbrisati brez prehoda v smeti (na primer, če pogosto delate z občutljivimi podatki), lahko v meni desnega klika za datoteke in mape dodate vnos Izbriši. Kliknite na Datoteke v menijski vrstici in izberite Možnosti in nato kliknite na zavihek Obnašanje. Izberite Vključi ukaz Izbriši, ki obide Smeti.

Izbrisane datoteke na odstranljivih napravah morda na drugih operacijskih sistemih kot sta Windows ali Mac OS ne bodo vidne. Datoteke so še vedno tam in bodo na voljo, ko napravo priklopite nazaj v svoj računalnik.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-views.page0000644000373100047300000001320312320731730025603 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavite privzeti pogled, vrstni red razvrščanja in ravni za upravljalnik datotek. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Možnosti prikaza <app>Datoteke</app>

Spremenite lahko privzeti pogled za nove mape, kako so datoteke in mape privzeto razvrščene, raven približanja za ikonski in strnjeni pogled in ali so datoteke prikazane v stranski vrstici. V vrhnji vrstici izberite Datoteke Možnosti medtem, ko je program Datoteke odprt in nato izberite zavihek Pogledi.

Privzet prikaz <gui>Za ogled novih map uporabi</gui>

Privzeto so nove mape prikazane v ikonskem pogledu. Če želite seznamski pogled, ga lahko nastavite kot privzetega. Med brskanjem lahko za vsako mapo izberete pogled s klikom na gumb v orodni vrstici in nato izberete med Glej predmete kot seznam ali Glej predmete kot mrežo ikon.

 <gui>Uredi predmete</gui>

Spremenite lahko privzeti vrstni red razvrščanja, ki je uporabljen v datotekah s pomočjo spustnega seznama v nastavitvah Uredite predmete, za razvrščanje po imenu, velikosti datoteke, vrsti datoteke, kdaj so bile nazadnje spremenjene, kdaj se je nazadnje dostopalo do njih in kdaj so bile izbrisane.

Razvrstitev datotek v posameznih mapa lahko spremenite s klikom na gumb Poglej možnosti v orodni vrstici in z izbiro Po imenu, Po velikosti, Po vrsti ali Po datumu spremembe ali s klikom na seznam glav stolpcev v seznamskem pogledu. Ta meni vpliva le na trenutno mapo.

 <gui>Razvrsti mape pred datotekami</gui>

Privzeto upravljalnik datotek ne pokaže vseh map pred datotekami. Če želite videti vse mape izpisane pred datotekami, omogočite to možnost.

 <gui>Pokaži skrite datoteke in varnostne kopije</gui>

Upravljalnik datotek privzeto ne prikazuje skritih datotek ali map. Vedno lahko pokažete skrite datoteke z izbiro te možnosti.

Lahko tudi pokažete skrite datoteke v posameznem oknu z izbiro Pokaži skrite datoteke iz menija Poglej možnosti v orodni vrstici.
Privzete lastnosti ikonskega prikaza <gui>Privzeta raven približanja</gui>

S to možnostjo lahko ikone in besedilo v ikonskem pogledu privzeto povečate ali pomanjšate. To lahko za posamezno mapo naredite s klikom na gumb Poglej možnosti v orodni vrstici in z izbiroPribližaj, Oddalji ali Normalna velikost.V primeru, da pogosto uporabljate večjo ali manjšo raven približanja, lahko s to možnostjo spremenite privzeto vrednost.

V ikonskem pogledu je prikazanih, odvisno od ravni približanja, več ali manj napisov.
Privzete lastnosti seznamskega prikaza <gui>Privzeta raven približanja</gui>

Z uporabo te možnosti lahko ikone in besedilo v seznamskem pogledu povečate ali pomanjšate. To lahko za posamezno mapo naredite s klikom na gumbPoglej možnosti v orodni vrstici in z izbiro Približaj, Oddalji ali Normalna velikost.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-screen.page0000644000373100047300000000435312320731731027132 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje zaslona je pomembno za natančen prikaz barv na zaslonu. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako umeriti zaslon?

Umerjanje vašega zaslona mora biti pogoj, če se ukvarjate z računalniškim oblikovanjem ali umetnostjo.

Z uporabe naprave, ki se imenuje barvomer, lahko natančno izmerite različne barve, ki jih lahko prikaže vaš zaslon. Če zaženete Sistemske nastavitveBarva, lahko ustvarite profil in čarovnik vam bo pokazal, kako povezati napravo barvomer in kakšne nastavitve lahko prilagajate.

Z uporabe naprave, ki se imenuje barvomer, lahko natančno izmerite različne barve, ki jih lahko prikaže vaš zaslon. Če zaženete Sistemske nastavitveBarva, lahko ustvarite profil in čarovnik vam bo pokazal, kako povezati napravo barvomer in kakšne nastavitve lahko prilagajate.

Zasloni se spreminjajo skozi čas - svetlost osvetlitve v TFT zaslonu se bo razpolovila v približno 18 mesecih in bo s staranjem postala rumenkasta. To pomeni, da morate ponovno umeriti zaslon, ko se v nadzorni plošči pojavi ikona klicaj [!].

Zasloni LED se tudi spreminjajo skozi čas, toda veliko počasneje kot zasloni TFT.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-display.page0000644000373100047300000000466712320731731026132 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadziranje napisa ikon, ki se uporablja v upravljalniku datotek. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Možnosti prikaza upravljalnika datotek

You can control how the file manager displays captions under icons. Click Edit in the menu bar, pick Preferences and select the Display tab.

Naslovi ikon

Ikone upravljalnika datotek z napisi

Ko uporabite ikonski pogled, lahko izberete prikaz dodatnih podrobnosti o datotekah in mapah v slikici pod vsako ikono. To je na primer uporabno, če morate pogosto videti kdo je lastnik datoteke ali kdaj je bila zadnjič spremenjena.

S klikom na Pogled Približaj ali s pritiskom Ctrl+ lahko mapo približate. Ko mapo približate, bo upravljalnik datotek v napisih prikazal več in več podrobnosti. Za prikaz v napisih lahko izberete do tri stvari. Prva bo prikazana pri večini ravneh približanja. Zadnja bo prikazana le pri zelo velikih velikostih.

V primeru da je okno upravljalnika datotek odprto, boste morda morali za učinek sprememb ponovno naložiti sličice ikon. Kliknite na PogledPonovno naloži ali pritisnite CtrlR.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-previews.page0000644000373100047300000000260512320731731026454 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Predogledate si lahko samo krajevno shranjene datoteke. Zakaj nekatere datoteke nimajo predogleda?

When you open Documents, a preview thumbnail is displayed for documents that are stored locally. Those stored on a remote server like Google Docs or SkyDrive show as missing (or blank) preview thumbnails.

Če prejmete dokument Google Docs ali SkyDrive na krajevni hranilnik podatkov, se bo sličica ustvarila.

Krajevne kopije dokumenta prejete iz Google Docs ali SkyDrive ne bo mogoče posodobiti na spletu. Če želite nadaljevati z urejanjem na spletu potem je boljše, da je ne prejmete.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-change-size.page0000644000373100047300000000235512320731731027755 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Naredite ikone v Zaganjalniku večje ali manjše. Sprememba velikosti ikon v Zaganjalniku

Ikone Zaganjalnika lahko naredite manjše, kar pomeni, da v Zaganjalnik lahko spravite več predmetov. Ikone lahko tudi povečate, da jih je lažje klikniti.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Kliknite Videz.

Premaknite drsnik Velikost ikon zaganjalnika za povečanje ali zmanjšanje velikosti ikon Zaganjalnika.

Privzeta velikost ikon Zaganjalnika je 48.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/wacom-left-handed.page0000644000373100047300000000234512320731731026071 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Preklopite tablico Wacom v Levoročna orientacija. Uporaba tablice z levico

Nekatere tablice imajo na eni strani gumbe. Tablico lahko zavrtite za 180 stopinj, da so gumbi na položajih, ki ustrezajo levičarjem. Za spremembo usmerjenosti na levo ročno.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Spremenite Uporaba z levico na VKLOPLJENO.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/disk-capacity.page0000644000373100047300000000675512320731731025350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com S Preučevalnikom porabe diska ali Nadzornikom sistema lahko preverite razpoložljiv prostor in zmogljivost. Preverjanje koliko prostora na disku je ostalo

Količino prostega prostora na disku lahko preverite s pomočjo programov Preučevalnik porabe diska ali Nadzornik sistema.

Preveri s Preučevalnikom porabe diska

Da s programom Preučevalnik porabe diska preverite prazen prostor in velikost diska:

Odprite Orodje za preučevanje porabe diska iz Pregledne plošče. Okno bi prikazalo Celotno zmogljivost datotečnega sistema in Celotno porabo datotečnega sistema.

Odprite program Diski iz pregleda Dejavnosti. Okno bo prikazalo celotno zmogljivost datotečnega sistema in celotna uporaba datotečnega sistema.

Kliknite na enega od gumbov orodne vrstice za izbiro Pregleda domače mape, Pregleda datotečnega sistema, Pregleda mape ali Pregelda oddaljene mape.

Podatki so prikazani glede na Mapo, Uporabo, Velikost in Vsebino. Več podrobnosti lahko vidite v Preučevalniku uporabe diska.

Preveri s programom Nadzornik sistema

Da bi preverili količino prostora na disku, ki je na voljo in velikost diska s programom Nadzornik sistema:

Odprite program Nadzornik sistema iz Pregledne plošče.

Odprite program Nadzornik sistema iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite zavihek Datotečni sistemi za ogled razdelkov sistema in porabo diska. Podatki so prikazani v Skupaj, Razpoložljivo, Na voljo in Uporabljeno.
Kaj storiti, če je disk prepoln?

V primeru da je disk prepoln:

Izbrišite datoteke, ki niso pomembne ali jih ne boste več uporabljali.

Naredite varnostne kopije pomembnih datotek, ki jih nekaj časa ne boste potrebovali, ter jih izbrišite s trdega diska.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000054212320731731023557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

To delo je objavljeno z dovoljenjem Priznanje avtorstva s Creative Commons in deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0 neprenosljivo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-admin-explain.page0000644000373100047300000000722212320731731026313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za spremembo pomembnih delov svojega sistema potrebujete skrbniška dovoljenja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Kako delujejo skrbniška dovoljenja?

Vaš računalnik poleg datotek, ki jih ustvarite vi, vsebuje tudi številne datoteke, ki jih sistem potrebuje za pravilno delovanje. V primeru napačnih sprememb teh pomembnih sistemskih datotek, se lahko različne stvari pokvarijo, zato so privzeto zaščitene pred spremembami. Tudi določeni programi spremenijo pomembne dele sistema in so zato zaščiteni.

Zaščita spremembo datotek ali uporabo programov omogoča le uporabnikom s skrbniškimi dovoljenji. Pri vsakodnevni uporabi vam sistemskih datotek ne bo treba spreminjati ali uporabljati teh programov. Zato privzeto skrbniških dovoljenj nimate.

Včasih morate te programe uporabiti, zato lahko začasno dobite skrbniške pravice, ki vam omogočajo opravljanje sprememb. V primeru da program potrebuje skrbniške pravice, vas bo vprašal za vaše geslo. Na primer, če želite namestiti novo programsko opremo, vas bo namestilnik paketov (upravljalnik paketov) vprašal za skrbniško geslo, ki mu dovoljuje nameščanje novega programa na sistem. Ko program konča, vam bodo skrbniška dovoljenja ponovno odvzeta.

Skrbniška dovoljenja so povezana z uporabniškim računom. Nekateri uporabniki lahko imajo skrbniška dovoljenja, drugi pa ne. V primeru da nimate skrbniških dovoljenj, na primer ne boste morali namestiti programov. Nekateri uporabniški računi (na primer račun "root") imajo trajna skrbniška dovoljenja. Skrbniških dovoljenj ne uporabljajte ves čas, saj lahko po nesreči spremenite pomembnega (na primer zahtevano sistemsko datoteko) in kaj pokvarite .

Na kratko povedano vam skrbniška dovoljenja omogočajo spreminjanje pomembnih delov sistema, ko to potrebujete, ter vam preprečijo, da bi to storili po nesreči.

Kaj pomeni "super uporabnik"?

Drugo ime za uporabnika s skrbniškimi dovoljenji je super uporabnik. To ime obstaja, ker ima super uporabnik več dovoljenj kot običajni uporabniki. Morda boste videli ljudi, ki razpravljajo o stvareh kot so su in sudo. Ti programi vam začasno dajo pravice "super uporabnika" (skrbnika).
Zakaj so skrbniška dovoljenja uporabna?

Zahtevanje skrbniških dovoljenj od uporabnikov pred pomembnimi sistemskimi spremembami je uporabno, ker pomaga pri preprečevanju namerne ali nenamerne okvare vašega sistema.

V primeru da bi imeli skrbniška dovoljenja ves čas, bi morda po nesreči spremenili pomembno datoteko ali pognali program, ki po nesreči spremeni nekaj pomembnega. Začasno pridobivanje skrbniških dovoljenj, ko jih potrebujete, zmanjša tveganje teh napak.

Samo določeni, zaupanja vredni uporabniki bi morali imeti skrbniška dovoljenja.To uporabnikom prepreči odstranjevanje programov, ki jih potrebujete, nameščanje programov, ki jih ne potrebujete ali spreminjanje pomembnih datotek. To je uporabno z vidika varnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/wacom-mode.page0000644000373100047300000000322412320731731024637 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Preklopite tablico med načinom tablice in miške. Izberite način sledenja tablice Wacom

Način sledenja določi kako je kazalec preslikan na zaslon.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Poleg Načina sledenja izberite Tablica (absolutno) ali Drsna ploščica (relativno).

V absolutnem načinu se vsaka točka na tablici preslika na točko na zaslonu. Zgornji levi kot zaslona vedno ustreza isti točki na tablici.

V relativnem načinu se, v primeru da kazalnik vzdignete s tablice in ga postavite na drugo mesto, kazalec na zaslonu ne premakne. Na ta način deluje miška. To vam omogoča premik preko večje razdalje z manj premikanja roke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000305212320731731025401 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabniki Dodaj uporabnika ali gostujoči uporabnik, sprememba gesla, skrbniki … Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Uporabniški računi

Vsaka oseba, ki uporablja računalnik, bi morala imeti drug uporabniški račun. To jim omogoča izbiro svojih lastnih nastavitev in ločeno shranjevanje svojih datotek. To je tudi varnejše. Do drugega uporabniškega računa lahko dostopate le, če poznate geslo.

Računi Upravljanje uporabniških računov
Gesla
Dovoljenja Uporabniška dovoljenja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard-shortcuts-set.page0000644000373100047300000000537612320731731027246 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Tipkovne bližnjice lahko določite ali spremenite v nastavitvah Tipkovnica. Nastavitev tipkovnih bližnjic

Za spremembo tipke ali tipk, ki jih je treba pritisniti za tipkovno bližnjico:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Tipkovnica in izberite zavihek Bližnjice.

V levem pladnju izberite kategorijo, na desni pa vrstico za želeno dejanje. Definicija trenutne bližnjice se bo spremenila v Nov pospeševalnik ....

Držite željeno kombinacijo tipk ali pritisnite Backspace za izbris.
Bližnjice po meri

Za ustvarjanje svoje tipkovne bližnjice:

V levem pladnju izberite Bližnjice po meri in kliknite gumb + (ali kliknite gumb + v katerikoli kategoriji.) Pojavilo se bo okno Bližnjica po meri.

Vnesite Ime za določitev istovetnosti bližnjice in Ukaz za zagon programa in nato kliknite Uveljavi. Če na primer želite bližnjico za odprtje Rhythmbox, lahko bližnjico poimenujete Glasba in uporabite ukaz rhythmbox.

V vrstici, ki je bila pravkar dodana, kliknite Onemogočeno. Ko se spremenil v Nov pospeševalnik ... pritisnite želeno kombinacijo tipk bližnjic.

Vneseni ukaz naj bo veljaven sistemski ukaz. Ali ukaz deluje, lahko preverite z odpiranjem Terminala in vnosom tja. Ukaz, ki odpre program, morda nima popolnoma enakega imena kot program.

Če želite spremeniti ukaz, ki je povezan s tipkovno bližnjico po meri, dvokliknite na ime bližnjice. Pojavilo se bo okno Bližnjica po meri in lahko boste uredili ukaz.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-whydim.page0000644000373100047300000000273612320731731025251 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ko vaš prenosnik deluje na bateriji, se bo zaslon zatemnil medtem ko je računalnik nedejaven za varčevanje z energijo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakaj se moj zaslon po določenem času zatemni?

Ko vaš prenosnik uporablja napetost baterije, se bo zaslon medtem ko je računalnik nedejaven, zatemnil za varčevanje z energijo. Ko začnete računalnik ponovno uporabljati, se bo zaslon osvetlil.

Zatemnjevanje zaslona lahko preprečite:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Svetlost in zaklep in odstranite oznako Zatemni zaslon za varčevanje z energijo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-nosound.page0000644000373100047300000001220612320731731025422 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite, da zvok ni utišan, da so kabli pravilno vklopljeni in da je bila zvočna kartica zaznana. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ne slišim nobenih zvokov

V primeru da na svojem računalniku ne morete slišati zvoka, na primer, če poskusite predvajati glasbo, poskusite naslednje korake za odpravljanje težav.

Prepričajte se, da zvok ni utišan

Kliknite na meni zvoka v menijski vrstici (videti je kot zvočnik) in se prepričajte, da zvok ni utišan ali glasnost zmanjšana.

Nekateri prenosniki imajo stikala ali tipke za utišanje. Poskusite pritisniti to tipko in preverite, če to povrne glasnost zvoka.

Preverite tudi, da program, ki ga uporabljate za predvajanje zvoka, (na primer vaš predvajalnik glasbe ali filmov) ni utišan. Program ima morda v svojem oknu gumb za utišanje ali glasnost. Kliknite tudi na zvočno ikono na vrhnjem pultu in izberite Nastavitve zvoka. Ko se pojavi okno Zvok, pojdite na zavihek Programi in se prepričajte, da vaš program tam ni utišan.

Preverite ali so zvočniki vklopljeni in pravilno povezani

V primeru da ima računalnik zunanje zvočnike, se prepričajte, da so vklopljeni in da je glasnost povečana. Prepričajte se, da je kabel zvočnikov varno vklopljen v "izhodni" zvočni vtič na zadnjem delu računalnika. Ta vtič je običajno zelene barve.

Nekatere zvočne kartice lahko preklapljajo med vtiči, ki jih uporabljajo za izhod (do zvočnikov) in vhod (na primer iz mikrofona). Vtič izhoda je lahko pri delovanju na Linuxu drugačen kot pri delovanju na Windows ali Mac OS. Kabel zvočnikov poskusite povezati z različnimi vtiči zvoka na računalniku in preverite, če delujejo.

Zadnja stvar, ki jo preverite je, da je kabel varno vklopljen v zadnji del zvočnikov. Nekateri zvočniki imajo več kot en vhod.

Preverite, da je izbrana prava zvočna naprava

Nekateri računalniki imajo nameščenih več "zvočnih gonilnikov". Nekateri od njih so zmožni izhoda zvoka, drugi pa ne. Zato preverite, da imate izbranega pravega. To lahko vključuje nekaj poskusov in napak preden najdete pravega.

Kliknite na meni zvoka v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve zvoka.

V oknu Zvok poskusite izbrati druga izhod s seznama Predvajaj zvok na.

Za izbrano napravo kliknite Preizkus zvoka. V pojavnem oknu kliknite na gumb za vsak zvočnik. Vsak gumb bo svoj položaj sporočil samo kanalu, ki ustreza temu zvočniku.

V primeru da to ne deluje, poskusite storiti isto za vse druge naprave, ki so na seznamu.
Preverite, da je bila zvočna kartica pravilno zaznana

Vaša zvočna kartica morda ni bila pravilno zaznana. V primeru da se to zgodi, bo vaš računalnik mislil, da ne more predvajati zvoka. Mogoč razlog za nepravilno zaznavanje kartice so nenameščeni gonilniki za kartico.

Pojdite v Pregledno ploščo in odprite Terminal.

Vtipkajte aplay -l in pritisnite Enter.

Izpisal se bo seznam naprav. V primeru da ni naprav strojne opreme predvajanja, vaša zvočna kartica ni bila zaznana.

V kolikor vaša zvočna kartica ni zaznana, boste zanjo morali ročno namestiti gonilnike. Kako to storiti je odvisno od kartice, ki jo imate.

Kakšno zvočno kartico imate lahko vidite z uporabo ukaza lspci v Terminalu. Morda boste morali zagnati lspci kot super uporabnik. Vtipkajte sudo lspci in vtipkajte svoje geslo. Poglejte si, če je nadzornik zvoka ali zvočna naprava na seznamu - vsebovati bi moral proizvajalca zvočne kartice in številko modela. sudo lspci -v bo pokazal podrobnejši seznam.

Morda boste našli in namestili gonilnike za vašo kartico z iskanjem po internetu. Drugače pa lahko prijavite hrošča.

V primeru da ne morete dobiti gonilnikov za svojo zvočno kartico, boste morda želeli kupiti novo zvočno kartico. Dobite lahko zvočne kartice, ki jih namestite v računalnik in zunanje zvočne kartice USB.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/prefs-language.page0000644000373100047300000000221412320731732025506 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Namesti jezike, spremeni jezik, področne oblike, vhodni viri… Jezik in področje
Jezikovna podpora
Vnos besedila
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-slowkeys.page0000644000373100047300000000452712320731732025250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakasnitev med pritiskom tipke in njeno pojavitvijo na zaslonu. Vklop počasnih tipk

Vklopite počasne tipke, če želite, da je med pritiskom tipke in njenim prikazom na zaslonu zakasnitev. To pomeni, da morate vsako tipko, preden se pojavi, nekaj časa držati. Počasne tipke uporabite, če med tipkanjem po nesreči pritisnete več tipk ali prvič težko pritisnete pravo tipko na tipkovnici.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Vklopite Počasne tipke.

 Hiter vklop in izklop počasnih tipk

Pod Omogočite prek tipkovnice izberite Vključite razpoložljive funkcije dostopnosti prek tipkovnice za vklop ter izklop počasnih tipk prek tipkovnice. Ko je ta možnost izbrana, pritisnite ter držite tipko Shift osem sekund da bi omogočili oziroma onemogočili počasne tipke.

Uporabite drsnik Zamik sprejema za nadzor kako dolgo morate pritiskati tipko preden je zaznana.

Vaš računalnik lahko ob pritisku tipke, ko je tipka pritisnjena ali ko je pritisk tipke zavrnjen, ker je niste pritisnili dovolj dolgo, proizvede zvok.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/clock-set.page0000644000373100047300000000532312320731732024476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Posodobitev časa/datuma prikazanega na vrhu zaslona. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijski projekt Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba datuma in časa

Če sta prikazana datum in čas v menijski vrstici napačna ali v napačni obliki, ju lahko spremenite:

Če sta datum in čas prikazana v vrhnji vrstici nepravilna ali v napačni obliki, ju lahko spremenite:

Za nastavitev datuma in časa kliknite na uro, ki se nahaja na menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa.

Spremenite časovni pas sistema s klikom na zemljevid ali vnosom svojega mesta v polje Mesto.

Privzeto Ubuntu občasno uskladi uro z zelo natančno uro na internetu, zato vam tega ni treba početi ročno.

Kliknite na uro na desni strani vrhnje vrstice in izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa.

Morda boste morali klikniti Odkleni in vpisati skrbniško geslo.

Nastavite datum in čas s klikom na puščici za izbiro ure in minute. Iz spustnega seznama lahko izberete leto, mesec in dan.

Če želite, se lahko ura samodejno posodablja, če vklopite Omrežni čas.

Ko je Omrežni čas vklopljen, bo računalnik svojo uro občasno uskladil z zelo natančno uro na internetu, zato vam tega ni treba početi ročno. To bo delovalo samo, če ste povezani na internet.

Lahko tudi spremenite kako je ura prikazana z izbiro 24-urnega ali 12-urnega prikaza.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/clock-timezone.page0000644000373100047300000000347212320731732025540 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje drugih časovnih pasov in ogled časa v drugih mestih. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prikaz drugih časovnih pasov

V primeru da želite vedeti koliko je ura v različnih mestih po svetu lahko v meni ure dodate dodatne časovne pasove. Dodatna mesta bodo prikazana pod koledarjem, ko kliknete na uro.

Kliknite na uro in izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa.

Izberite zavihek Ura in izberite Čas na drugih mestih.

Kliknite Izbor mesta.

Kliknite na + za dodajanje mesta.

Polje Mesto zapolnite z imenom mesta, ki ga želite dodati. Počakajte trenutek, da se v spustnem seznamu pojavi seznam mogočih mest.

Izberite želeno mesto in trenutni čas na tem mestu bo samodejno izpolnjen.

Kliknite - za izbris mesta s seznama.

Mesta lahko tudi povlečete in spustite v okno Mesta za spremembo vrstnega reda v katerem se bodo prikazala v meniju ura.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-dwellclick.page0000644000373100047300000000571012320731732025500 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zmožnost lebdečega klika vam omogoča klik z držanjem miške pri miru. Simulacija klika s prehodom

Kliknete ali vlečete lahko s prehodom kazalca vaše miške nad nadzornikom ali predmetom na zaslonu. To je uporabno, če težko hkrati premikate miško in klikate. Ta zmožnost se imenuje klik s prehodom ali zadržani klik.

Ko je klik s prehodom omogočen, lahko miškin kazalec premaknete nad nadzornik, spustite miško in nato počakajte nekaj časa, preden bo gumb kliknjen.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Kliknite na svoje ime v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Kazanje in klikanje.

Vklopite Zadržani klik.

Odprlo se bo okno Zadržani klik, ki bo ostalo nad vašimi drugimi okni. To lahko uporabite za izbiro vrste klika, ki se naj zgodi pri lebdenju nad gumbom. V primeru, da izberete Drugotni klik, bo miška po nekaj sekundah nad gumbom desno kliknila. Po dvokliku, desnem kliku ali vlečenju, se bo možnost samodejno spremenila nazaj na klikanje.

Ko miško držite nad gumbom in je ne premikate, bo postopoma spreminjala barvo. Ko je barva popolnoma spremenjena, bo gumb kliknjen.

Prilagodite nastavitev Zamik za spremembo, kako dolgo morate držati miškin kazalec pred klikom.

Pri prehodu gumba vam za njegov klik miške ni treba držati popolnoma pri miru. Kazalec se lahko malo premika in sistem bo čez nekaj časa še vedno zaznal klik. V primeru, da se premakne preveč, se klik ne bo zgodil.

Prilagodite nastavitev Prag premikanja za spremembo, koliko se lahko kazalec premakne, da bo še vedno mišljen kot lebdeč.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts-which-application.page0000644000373100047300000000557612320731732030044 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012-2013 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Programi lahko uporabijo račune ustvarjene v Spletnem računu in storitve, ki jih izkoriščajo. Kateri programi izkoriščajo prednosti spletnih računov?

Spletne račune lahko uporabljajo zunanji programi za samodejno nastavitev.

Z računom Google

E-poštni program Evolution. Vaš e-poštni račun bo samodejno dodan v Evolution. Ta bo prejel vašo pošto, vam omogočil dostop do vaših stikov ter prikazal opravila na dnevnem redu Google.

Program za hipno sporočanje Empathy. Vaš spletni račun bo dodan in vam bo omogočil komunikacijo z vašimi prijatelji.

Stiki omogočajo ogled in urejanje vaših stikov.

Dokumenti lahko dostopajo in prikažejo vaše spletne dokumente.
Z računi Windows Live, Facebook ali Twitter

Empathy lahko uporabi te račune, da vam omogoči pogovore z vašimi stiki, prijatelji ter sledilci.

Z računom SkyDrive

Dokumenti lahko dostopajo ter prikažejo vaše spletne dokumente v Microsoft SkyDrive.

Z računom Exchange

Enkrat ko ustvarite račun Exchange bo Evolution začel s prejemanjem pošto za ta račun.

Z računom ownCloud

Ko je račun ownCloud nastavljen, Evolution lahko dostopa ter ureja stike in sestanke v koledarju.

Datoteke in drugi programi bodo lahko izpisali ter dostopali do vaših spletnih datotek shranjenih v namestitvi ownCloud.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-forgottenpassword.page0000644000373100047300000001544712320731732027370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Napredne tehnike za ponastavitev vašega gesla Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Pozabil/a sem svoje geslo!

Pomembno je, ne samo izbrati dobro in varno geslo, ampak tudi tako geslo, katerega si lahko zapomnite. Če ste pozabili geslo za prijavo v svoj račun, sledite naslednjim korakom za ponastavitev gesla.

V primeru da imate šifrirano domačo mapo, pozabljenega gesla ne boste mogli ponastaviti.

V primeru da želite svoje geslo spremeniti, si oglejte .

Ponastavitev gesla z uporabo Gruba

Da odprete meni Grub, morate ponovno zagnati računalnik in med zagonom držati tipko Shift.

Če imate nameščenih več operacijskih sistemov in med zagonom izbirate katerega zagnati, bi se moral Grub pokazati brez potrebe po držanju tipke Shift.

V primeru da v zagonski meni Grub ne morete priti in zato ne morete urediti vrstic jedra Linux, lahko za ponastavitev uporabniškega gesla uporabite živi CD.

Pritisnite tipko navzdol na tipkovnici za poudarjanje vrstice, ki se konča z besedema 'recovery mode'. Nato pritisnite Enter.

Vaš računalnik se bo zdaj začel zaganjati. Po nekaj sekundah se bo pojavil Obnovitveni meni. Uporabite puščico navzdol za poudarjanje root in pritisnite Enter.

Pri simbolu # vtipkajte:

passwd uporabniško_ime, kjer je uporabniško_ime uporabniško ime računa za katerega spreminjate geslo.

Pozvani boste bili k vnosu novega gesla UNIX in k potrditvi novega gesla.

Nato vpišite:

# reboot

Po uspešni prijavi ne boste mogli dostopati do svoje zbirke ključev (ker se ne spominjate starega gesla). To pomeni, da vsa vaša shranjena gesla za brezžična omrežja, račune jabber, itd. ne bodo več dostopna. Morali boste izbrisati staro zbirko ključev in ustvariti novo.

Ponastavitev gesla z uporabo živega CD-ja ali USB-ja

Zaženite živi CD ali USB.

Priklopite svoj pogon

Da odprete okno Zaženi program, pritisnite AltF2.

Za zagon upravljalnika datotek s sistemskimi pravicami vpišite gksudo nautilus.

Na pogonu, ki ste ga ravnokar priklopili, lahko preverite, da je to pravi pogon s klikom na domov in nato na svoje uporabniško ime.

Pojdite v vrhnjo mapo priklopljenega pogona. Nato pojdite v mapo etc.

Najdite datoteko 'shadow' in ustvarite varnostno kopijo:

Desno kliknite na datoteko shadow in izberite kopiraj.

Nato desno kliknite na prazen prostor in izberite prilepi.

Preimenujte varnostno kopijo "shadow.bak".

Uredite izvirno datoteko "shadow" z urejevalnikom besedila.

Najdite uporabniško ime za katerega ste pozabili geslo. Videti bi moralo biti približno takole (znaki po stolpcu bodo drugačni):

username:$1$2abCd0E ali

username:$1$2abCd0E:13721a:0:99999:7:::

Znake za prvim stolpcem in pred drugim stolpcem, izbrišite. To bo odstranilo geslo računa.

Shranite datoteko, zaprite vse programe in znova zaženite svoj računalnik brez živega CD-ja ali USB-ja.

Ko sistem zaženete nazaj v svojo namestitev, kliknite na svoje ime v menijski vrstici. Odprite Moj račun in ponastavite svoje geslo.

Polje Trenutno geslo pustite prazno. Kliknite Overi in vnesite novo geslo.

Po uspešni prijavi ne boste mogli dostopati do svoje zbirke ključev (ker se ne spominjate starega gesla). To pomeni, da vsa vaša shranjena gesla za brezžična omrežja, račune jabber, itd. ne bodo več dostopna. Morali boste izbrisati staro zbirko ključev in ustvariti novo.

Odstranitev zbirke ključev

To bo izbrisalo vsa vaša shranjena gesla za brezžična omrežja, račune hipnega sporočanja, itd. To storite le, če se ne morete spomniti gesla, ki ste ga uporabili za zbirko ključev.

Pojdite v domačo mapo z vnosom 'domov' v Pregledno ploščo.

Pritisnite Ctrlh (ali kliknite PogledPokaži skrite datoteke.)

Dvoklik na mapo ~/.local/share.

Dvokliknite na mapo z imenom keyrings.

Izbrišite vse datoteke, ki jih najdete v mapi zbirke ključev.

Ponovno zaženite računalnik.

Potem ko ponovno zaženete računalnik in se ponovno prijavite, boste morali vnesti geslo za svoja brezžična omrežja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-right-click.page0000644000373100047300000000567612320731732025576 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Pritisnite in držite levi miškin gumba za desni klik. Simulacija desnega klika miške

Desno lahko kliknete tako, da za kratek čas držite levi miškin gumb. To je uporabno, če težko premikate posamezne prste na roki, ali pa imate miško z le enim gumbom.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Kliknite na svoje ime v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Kazanje in klikanje.

Vklopite Simulirani drugotni klik.

Spremenite lahko, kako dolgo morate držati levi miškin gumb, preden je zaznan kot desni klik. V zavihku Kazanje in klikanje spremenite Zakasnitev sprejema pod Simulirani drugotni klik.

Za desni klik s simuliranim drugotnim klikom držite levi miškin gumb, kjer želite desno klikniti, in ga nato izpustite. Medtem ko držite levi miškin gumb, se kazalec polni z modro barvo. Ko je popolnoma moder, izpustite miškin gumb za desni klik.

Nekateri posebni kazalci, na primer kazalci za spreminjanje velikosti, barv ne spreminjajo. Simuliran drugotni klik lahko še vedno uporabljate, tudi če od kazalca ne dobite vidnega odziva.

Če uporabljajte Miškine tipke, vam to omogoča desni klik tudi z držanjem tipke 5 na številčni tipkovnici.

V pregledu Dejavnosti lahko vedno dolgo pritisnete za desni klik tudi, če je ta zmožnost onemogočena. Dolgi pritiski v pregledu delujejo rahlo drugače: za desni klik vam ni treba izpustiti gumba.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/hardware-driver.page0000644000373100047300000000324712320731732025703 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gonilnik za strojno opremo/napravo omogoča računalniku, da uporabi naprave, ki so nanj priklopljene Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Kaj je gonilnik?

Naprave so fizični "deli" računalnika. Lahko so zunanje kot tiskalniki in monitor ali notranje kot grafične in zvočne kartice.

Da bi vaš računalnik lahko te naprave uporabljal, mora vedeti, kako se z njimi sporazumevati. To stori program, ki se imenuje gonilnik naprav.

Ko napravo priklopite na računalnik, morate za njeno pravilno delovanje imeti nameščen pravi gonilnik. Če na primer vklopite tiskalnik, a pravilni gonilnik ni na voljo, tiskalnika ne boste mogli uporabiti. Običajno vsak model naprave uporablja gonilnik, ki ni združljiv s katerimkoli drugim modelom.

Na Linuxu so gonilniki za večino naprav že privzeto nameščeni, zato bi moralo vse delovati, ko napravo priklopite. Obstaja pa tudi možnost, da boste morali gonilnik namestiti ročno ali pa da sploh ni na voljo.

Nekateri obstoječi gonilniki so nedokončani ali le delno delujoči. Lahko se na primer zgodi, da tiskalnik ne more izvesti dvostranskega tiskanja, a sicer popolnoma deluje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-nonm.page0000644000373100047300000000317612320731732024351 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Pritisnite AltF2. Vpišite nm-applet Ni menija omrežja v menijski vrstici.

Če je meni omrežja izginil iz menijske vrstice morda se ne izvaja vaš Upravljalnik omrežja. Za ponovni zagon:

Pritisnite AltF2

Vtipkajte nm-applet in pritisnite Enter.

Morda se bo pojavilo polje Overitev brezžičnega omrežja. Vnesite svoje geslo v ustrezno polje in kliknite Poveži.

Če to ne deluje, morda težavo povzroča Upravljalnik Omrežja. Da bi videli, če je to res, pojdite v Pregledno ploščo in odprite Terminal. Vnesite nm-applet, pritisnite Enter in preverite, če se pojavi omrežni meni. Če se ne pojavi, bi se morala v Terminalu pojaviti sporočila o napakah. Ta bi vam morala povedati kaj je šlo narobe, vendar bodo morda precej tehnična. Če se to zgodi, vprašajte za pomoč na podpornem forumu in vključite ta sporočila o napakah.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-font-size.page0000644000373100047300000000307012320731733025277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporaba večjih pisav, da je besedilo mogoče lažje brati. Sprememba velikosti besedila na zaslonu

Če imate težave z branjem besedila na zaslonu, lahko spremenite velikost pisave.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Izrisovanje.

Preklopite Veliko besedilo na Vključeno.

V veliko programih lahko velikost besedila povečate s pritiskom na Ctrl+. Velikost besedila lahko zmanjšate s pritiskom na Ctrl-.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-preview.page0000644000373100047300000000246012320731733025373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Hiter prikaz in skrivanje predogledov za dokumente, slike, videoposnetke in več. Predogled datotek in map

Predogled datotek lahko vidite brez odpiranja v namenskem programu. Izberite katerokoli datoteko in pritisnite preslednico. Datoteka se bo odprla v oknu predogleda. Za zaprtje predogleda ponovno pritisnite preslednico.

Vgrajeni predogled podpira večino vrst datotek za dokumente, slike, video in zvok. V predogledu lahko drsate med dokumenti ali iščete po videu ali zvoku.

Če si želite ogledati predogled celozaslonsko pritisnite f. Pritisnite f za izhod iz celozaslonskega načina ali pritisnite preslednico če želite izhod iz predogleda.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-hidden.page0000644000373100047300000000645712320731733025157 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Naredite datoteko nevidno, tako da je v upravljalniku datotek ni mogoče videti. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Skritje datoteke

Upravljalnik datotek GNOME vam daje zmožnost skritja ali odkritja datotek po svojih željah. Skrite datoteke so privzeto nevidne, saj v upravljalniku datotek niso prikazane. Vendar pa se še vedno nahajajo v mapi.

Za skritje datoteke jo preimenujte s . na začetku imena. Za skritje datoteke primer.txt jo preimenujte v .primer.txt.

Mape lahko skrijete na enak način kot datoteke. Mapo preimenujte in na začetek njenega imena dodajte ..
Prikaz vseh skritih datotek

If you want to see all hidden files in a folder, go to that folder and either click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files, or press CtrlH. You will see all hidden files, along with regular files that are not hidden.

Za ponovno skritje teh datotek, v orodni vrstici kliknite na gumb dol in izberite Pokaži skrite datoteke ali ponovno pritisnite CtrlH.

Prikaz datoteke

Za odstranitev skritja datoteke pojdite v mapo, ki vsebuje skrito datoteko, in v orodni vrstici kliknite na gumb dol in izberite Pokaži skrite datoteke. Nato najdite skrito datoteko in jo preimenujte, tako da na začetku svojega imena nima .. Tako na primer za odstranitev skritja datoteke .primer.txt datoteko preimenujte v primer.txt.

Ko ste datoteko preimenovali, lahko kliknete v orodni vrstici kliknite na gumb dol in izberite Pokaži skrite datoteke ali pritisnite CtrlH za ponovno skritje drugih skritih datotek.

Privzeto bodo skrite datoteke prikazane le v trenutnem oknu dokler upravljalnika datotek ne zaprete. Za spremembo te nastavitve, da bodo skrite datoteke vedno prikazane v upravljalniku datotek, si oglejte .

Večina skritih datotek ima na začetku svojega imena .. Druge skrite datoteke imajo na koncu svojega imena ~. Te datoetke so datoteke varnostnih kopij. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts-provider-not-available.page0000644000373100047300000000326212320731733030776 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Kevin M. Godby kevin@godby.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Zakaj ponudniki storitev niso izpisani? Zakaj moja vrsta računa ni na seznamu?

Podporo za vašega priljubljenega ponudnika spletnih storitev mora nekdo razviti. Trenutno so podprte naslednje vrste spletnih računov:

Facebook

Flickr

Google

Twitter

AIM

Windows Live

Salut

Jabber

Yahoo

Če vas zanima dodajanje podpore za druge storitve, stopite v stik z razvijalci prek sledilnika hroščev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-tiled.page0000644000373100047300000000275712320731733026521 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Razpenjanje dveh oken enega ob drugem. Razpostavitev oken

Okno lahko razpete le na levi ali desni strani zaslona kar vam omogoča postavitev dveh oken eno ob drugo za hiter preklop med njima.

Za razpetje okna na eni od strani zaslona povlecite nazivno vrstico in jo povlecite na levo ali desno stran dokler ni poudarjena polovica zaslona. Uporabite lahko tudi tipkovnico. Držite Ctrl in Super in pritisnite tipko Levo ali Desno.

Držite tipko Alt in vlecite kjerkoli v oknu za njegov premik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-firewall-ports.page0000644000373100047300000000507712320731733026357 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za omogočitev/onemogočitev dostopa do omrežja za program s požarnim zidom morate navesti prava omrežna vrata. Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Pogosto uporabljena vrata omrežja

To je seznam omrežnih vrat, ki jih običajno uporabljajo programi, ki zagotavljajo omrežne storitve kot sta izmenjava datotek ali ogled oddaljenega namizja. Svoj sistemski požarni zid lahko spremenite, da blokira ali omogoči dostop do teh programov. V uporabi je na tisoče vrat, zato ta preglednica ni popolna.

Vrata

Ime

Opis

5353/udp

mDNS, Avahi

Omogoča sistemom, da lahko najdejo drug drugega in opišejo, katero storitev ponujajo ne da bi vam bilo treba ročno navesti podrobnosti.

631/udp

Tiskanje

Omogoča pošiljanje tiskalniških poslov na tiskalnik preko omrežja.

631/tcp

Tiskanje

Omogoča souporabo tiskalnika z drugimi osebami preko omrežja.

5298/tcp

Prisotnost

Omogoča vam oglaševanje vašega stanja hipnega sporočanja z drugimi ljudmi v omrežju kot so "na voljo" ali "zaposleno".

5900/tcp

Oddaljeno namizje

Omogoča vam, da delite svoje namizje, tako da si ga lahko drugi ljudje ogledajo ali pomagajo na daljavo.

3689/tcp

Souporaba glasbe (DAAP)

Omogoča vam, da delite svojo glasbeno knjižnico z drugimi v omrežju.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net.page0000644000373100047300000000232112320731733023374 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Brezžično, žično, težave s povezavo, brskanje po sletu, računi e-pošte, hipno sporočanje … Omreženje, splet, pošta in klepet usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-list.page0000644000373100047300000000667412320731733025442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirajte kateri podatki so prikazani v stolpcih v seznamskem pogledu. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Možnosti seznama stolpcev v upravljalniku datotek

V seznamskem pogledu upravljalnika datotek je na voljo devet stolpcev s podatki, ki jih lahko prikažete. V menijski vrstici kliknite na Datoteke izberite Možnosti in nato zavihek Stolpci seznama za izbiro vidnih stolpcev.

Za izbiro vrstnega reda v katerem se pojavijo izbrani stolpci uporabite gumba Premakni navzgor in Premakni navzdol.

 <gui>Ime</gui>

Ime map in datotek v mapi za ogled.

 <gui>Velikost</gui>

Velikost mape je podana kot število predmetov, ki so v mapi. Velikost datoteke je podana kot bajti, KB ali MB.

 <gui>Vrsta</gui>

Prikazano kot mapa ali datoteka vrste kot je dokument PDF, slika JPEG, zvok MP3 in več.

 <gui>Spremenjeno</gui>

Poda datum in čas zadnje spremembe datoteke.

 <gui>Lastnik</gui>

Ime uporabnika, ki je lastnik datoteke ali mape.

 <gui>Skupina</gui>

Skupina, ki je lastnik datoteke. Na domačih računalnikih je vsak uporabnik v svoji lastni skupini. Skupine se včasih uporabljajo v poslovnih okoljih, kjer so uporabniki morda v skupinah glede na oddelek ali projekt.

 <gui>Dovoljenja</gui>

Prikaže dovoljenja za dostop do datoteke na primer drwxrw-r--

Prvi znak - je vrsta datoteke. - pomeni običajna datoteka in d pomeni mapa.

Naslednji trije znaki rwx določijo dovoljenja uporabnika, ki je lastnik datoteke.

Naslednji trije znaki rw- določajo dovoljenja vseh članov skupine, ki je lastnik datoteke.

Zadnji trije znaki v stolpcu r-- določajo dovoljenja za vse uporabnike na sistemu.

Vsak znak ima naslednje pomene:

r : dovoljenje za branje.

w : dovoljenje za branje.

x : dovoljenje za izvajanje.

-: brez dovoljenja.

 <gui>Vrsta MIME</gui>

Prikaže predmetovo vrsto MIME.

 <gui>Mesto</gui>

Pot do mesta datoteke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-wepwpa.page0000644000373100047300000000266312320731733026541 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org WEP in WPA sta načina za šifriranje podatkov na brezžičnih omrežjih. Kaj WEP in WPA pomenita?

WEP in WPA (skupaj z WPA2) sta imeni za različna orodja šifriranja, ki se uporabijo za zavarovanje vaše brezžične povezave. Šifriranje omrežno povezavo "premeša" tako, da ji ne more nihče "prisluškovati" in videti katere spletne strani si ogledujete. WEP pomeni zasebnost enaka žični povezavi in WPA pomeni zaščiten brezžični dostop. WPA2 je druga različica standarda WPA.

Uporaba nekaj šifriranja je vedno boljša kot nič šifriranja, vendar je WEP najmanj varen od teh standardov, zato se ga izognite, če se ga lahko. WPA2 je najbolj varen od teh treh. V primeru da tako vaša brezžična kartica in usmerjevalnik podpirata WPA2, ga uporabite pri nastavljanju svojega brezžičnega omrežja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts-setup.page0000644000373100047300000000243612320731733025571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Shranite svoje stike v krajevnem imeniku ali na spletnem računu. Prvo začenjanje stikov

Ko prvič zaženete Stike, se odpre okno Nastavitev stikov.

Če imate nastavljene spletne stike, bodo izpisani iz Krajevnega imenika. Izberite predmet s seznama in kliknite Izberi.

Kliknite Nastavitve spletnih računov za urejanje nastavitev obstoječega računa.

Če spletnih računov nimate nastavljenih, kliknite Spletni računi za začetek nastavitve. Če spletnih računov trenutno ne želite nastaviti, kliknite Krajevni imenik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-restore.page0000644000373100047300000000270012320731733025535 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obnovite svoje datoteke iz varnostne kopije. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Obnovitev varnostne kopije

Če ste izgubili ali izbrisali nekatere od svojih datotek, vendar imate njihovo varnostno kopijo, jih lahko obnovite iz varnostne kopije:

Za obnovitev varnostne kopije iz naprave kot je zunanji trdi disk, naprava USB ali drugi računalnik na omrežju, lahko kopirate datoteke nazaj na svoj računalnik.

If you created your backup using a backup application such as Déjà Dup, it is recommended that you use the same application to restore your backup. Review the application help for your backup program: it will provide specific instructions on how to restore your files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard-repeat-keys.page0000644000373100047300000000405012320731733026636 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavite tipkovnico tako, da ne ponavlja črk medtem ko držite tipko ali spremenite zakasnitev in hitrost ponavljanja tipk. Izklop ponavljajočih se pritiskov tipk

Privzeto se, ko pritisnete tipko na tipkovnici, črka ali simbol ponavlja dokler tipke ne izpustite. V primeru da imate težave z dovolj hitrim dvigom prsta, lahko to možnost onemogočite ali spremenite kako dolgo traja preden se pritiski tipk začnejo ponavljati.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku strojna oprema kliknite Tipkovnica.

Izklopite Pritiski tipk se ponovijo, ko je tipka pritisnjena za popolno onemogočitev ponavljajočih tipk.

Namesto tega lahko tudi prilagodite drsnik Zakasnitev za spremembo kako dolgo morate držati tipko preden se začne ponavljati in prilagodite drsnik Hitrost za prilagoditev hitrosti ponavljanja pritiskov tipk.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-contrast.page0000644000373100047300000000274412320731733025225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Naredi okna in gumbe na zaslonu bolj (ali manj) živa, da jih je lažje videti. Prilagoditev kontrasta

Kontrast oken in gumbov lahko prilagodite tako, da jih je lažje videti. To ni enako spreminjanju svetlosti celotnega zaslona. Spremenili se bodo le deli uporabniškega vmesnika.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Izrisovanje.

Vklopite Odskočne tipke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/addremove-ppa.page0000644000373100047300000000417512320731734025344 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Dodajte PPA-je za pomoč pri preizkušanju neizdanih ali posebnih programov. Dodajanje osebnega arhiva paketov (PPA)

Osebni arhivi paketov (PPA-ji) so programska skladišča zasnovana za uporabnike Ubuntuja, ki so lažja za namestitev kot druga skladišča tretjih oseb.

Dodajte skladišča programske opreme iz virov, ki jim zaupate!

Skladišč tretjih oseb člani Ubuntu ne preverjajo za varnost ali zanesljivost in morda vsebujejo programe, ki lahko škodljo vašemu računalniku.

 Nameščanje PPA-ja

Na domači strani PPA najdite naslov Adding this PPA to your system. Kopirajte naslov PPA, ki je videti podobno kot: ppa:mozillateam/firefox-next.

Kliknite ikono Programsko središče Ubuntu v Zaganjalniku ali iščite Programsko središče v Pregledni plošči.

When the Software Center launches, click Edit Software Sources

Kliknite na zavihek Drugi programi.

Kliknite Dodaj in vnesite mesto ppa:.

Kliknite Dodaj. Vnesite svoje geslo v overitvenem oknu.

Zaprite okno Programskih virov. Programsko središče Ubuntu bo nato v programskih virih preverilo, če so na voljo novi programi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrationtargets.page0000644000373100047300000000243112320731734027606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjevalni cilji so potrebni za do profiliranje kamere in optičnega bralnika. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Katere vrste ciljev so podprte?

Podprte so naslednje vrste ciljev:

CMP DigitalTarget

ColorChecker 24

ColorChecker DC

ColorChecker SG

i1 RGB Scan 14

LaserSoft DC Pro

QPcard 201

IT8.7/2

Cilje lahko kupite od dobro znanih ponudnikov kot so KODAK, X-Rite in LaserSoft v različnih spletnih trgovinah.

Cilje lahko kupite tudi od podjetja Wolf Faust za zelo spodobno ceno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/hardware-cardreader.page0000644000373100047300000000506612320731734026507 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpravljanje težav čitalcev kartic Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Težave z bralnikom večpredstavnosnih kartic

Številni računalniki imajo bralnike za SD (Secure Digital), MMC (MultiMediaCard), SmartMedia, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, in druge pomnilniške kartice. Morale bi biti samodejno priklopljene.

Prepričajte se, da je kratica pravilno vstavljena. Veliko kartic je ob vstavitvi videti, kot da so narobe obrnjene. Prepričajte se, da je kartica trdno vstavljena, saj nekatere kartice za pravilno vstavitev zahtevajo določeno količino sile. (Pazite, da ne pritisnete pretrdo! Če začutite nekaj trdega ne pritiskajte ob njega.)

Open Files by using the Dash. Does the inserted card appear in the Devices list in the left sidebar? Sometimes the card appears in this list but is not mounted; click it once to mount. (If the sidebar is not visible, press F9 or click View Sidebar Show Sidebar.)

V primeru da se vaša kartica ne pojavi v stranski vrstici, kliknite PojdiRačunalnik. V primeru da je vaš bralnik kartic pravilno nastavljen, bi se bralnik moral pojaviti kot pogon, ko kartica in na voljo in kot kartica, ko je kartica priklopljena (oglejte si sliko spodaj).

V primeru da vidite bralnik kartic, a ne kartice, je težava lahko v kartici. Poskusite drugo kartico ali preverite kartico na drugem bralniku, če je to mogoče.

V primeru da v mapi Računalnik ni kartic ali pogonov, morda vaš bralnik kartic na deluje na Linuxu zaradi težav z gonilniki. V primeru da je bralnik kartic notranji (znotraj računalnika), je to verjetnejše. Najboljša rešitev je neposreden priklop vaše naprave (fotoaparat, telefon) na vrata USB na računalniku. Na voljo so tudi zunanji bralniki kartic USB, ki so na Linuxu precej bolje podprti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-install-java-plugin.page0000644000373100047300000000153012320731734027255 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Pomagajte svojemu brskalniku delovati s spletišči, ki zahtevajo Javo. Nameščanje vstavka Java za brskalnike

Nekatera spletišča uporabljajo majhne programe Java, ki za izvajanje zahtevajo nameščen vstavek Java.

Namestite paket icedtea6-plugin za ogled programov Java v spletnem brskalniku.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-changepicture.page0000644000373100047300000000315512320731734026412 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje fotografije prijavnemu in uporabniškim zaslonom. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Spremenite svojo fotografijo v prijavnem zaslonu.

Ko se prijavite ali preklopite uporabnike, boste videli seznam uporabnikov z njihovimi prijavnimi fotografijami. Fotografijo lahko spremenite na eno od priloženih ali pa na svojo sliko. S spletno kamero lahko zajamete novo prijavno fotografijo.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Uporabiški računi.

Kliknite na sliko poleg vašega imena. Prikazana bo spustna galerija z nekaj privzetimi prijavnimi fotografijami. Če vam je kakšna všeč, nanjo kliknite, da jo uporabite zase.

V primeru da želite uporabiti sliko, ki jo že imate na svojem računalniku, kliknite Brskaj za več slik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-states.page0000644000373100047300000000777212320731734026726 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obnovite, spremenite velikost, uredite in skrijte okna. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Opravila oken

Okna lahko skrijete ali spremenite njihovo velikost, da ustrezajo vašemu načinu dela.

Skrčenje, obnova in zaprtje okna

Za skrčenje okna lahko:

Kliknite na - v zgornjem levem kotu menijske vrstice programa. Če je program razpet (zavzema vaš celoten zaslon), se bo menijska vrstica pojavila na vrhu zaslona. V nasprotnem primeru se bo gumb za skrčitev pojavil na vrhu okna programa.

Ali pa pritisnite AltPreslednica za priklic menija okna. Nato pritisnite n. Okno 'izgine' v zagnjalnik.

Za obnovitev okna:

Kliknite nanj v zaganjalniku ali ga pridobite iz preklopnika oken s pritiskom na AltTab.

Za zaprtje okna:

Kliknite x v zgornjem levem kotu okna ali

Pritisnite AltF4 ali

Pritisnite AltPreslednica za priklic menija okna. Nato pritisnite z.
Spreminjanje velikosti

Velikosti okna ne morete spremeniti, če je razpeto.

Za spremembo velikosti okna v vodoravni in/ali navpični smeri:

Premaknite miškin kazalnik na vrh ali dno okna dokler se ne spremeni v 'vrhnji-kazalnik' ali 'spodnji-kazalnik'. Ko se to zgodi, kliknite in držite ter vlecite za spremembo velikosti okna v navpični smeri.

Za spremembo velikosti le v vodoravni smeri:

Premaknite miškin kazalnik na levo stran okna dokler se ne spremeni v 'stranski-kazalnik'. Ko postane 'stranski-kazalnik', kliknite in držite ter vlecite za spremembo velikosti okna v vodoravni smeri.

Za spremembo velikosti le v navpični smeri:

Premaknite miškin kazalnik na vrh ali dno okna dokler se ne spremeni v 'vrhnji-kazalnik' ali 'spodnji-kazalnik'. Ko se to zgodi, kliknite in držite ter vlecite za spremembo velikosti okna v navpični smeri.
Urejanje oken na delovni površini

Za postavitev dveh oken enega ob drugo:

Za razpenjanje okna kliknite na nazivno vrstico programa in jo povlecite na vrh zaslona. Ko se miškin kazalec dotakne robu, postane levi del zaslona poudarjen. Izpustite miškin gumb in okno bo zapolnilo levo polovico zaslona.

Povlecite drugo okno na desno stran: ko je desna polovica zaslona poudarjena, ga izpustite. Vsako od oken zapolni polovico zaslona.

Pritisnite na tipko Alt in kliknite, držite in vlecite kjerkoli v oknu. Za nekatere ljudi je to lažje kot klik na nazivno vrstico programa.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/index.page0000644000373100047300000000355012320731734023723 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namizni vodnik Ubuntu Namizni vodnik Ubuntu <media type="image" mime="image/png" width="16" height="16" src="figures/ubuntu-logo.png">Pomoč</media> Namizni vodnik Ubuntu <media type="image" src="figures/ubuntu-logo.png">Ubuntu logotip</media> Namizni vodnik Ubuntu usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-viewgrid.page0000644000373100047300000000307312320731734026433 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com 2014 Spremenite način prikaza dokumentov. Oglejte datotek na seznamu ali mreži

Privzeto so zbirke in dokumenti predstavljene v obliki Mreže. Za ogled v obliki Seznama:

Pojdite na vrhnjo vrstico in kliknite Dokumenti za prikaz programskega menija.

Kliknite Seznam iz odseka Ogled kot.

Seznamski pogled ima stolpce, ki prikazujejo vrsto dokumenta in datum spremembe in če je shranjen krajevno ali na Google Docs oz. SkyDrive.

Kliknite Mreža v programskem meniju, da se vrnete na privzeto obliko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-initial-check.page0000644000373100047300000000575612320731734033176 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Prepričajte se, da so nastavitve omrežja pravilne in se pripravite za naslednjih nekaj korakov odpravljanja težav. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji Preverite svojo internetno povezavo.

V naslednjem koraku boste preverili nekaj osnovnih podatkov o svoji brezžični povezavi. S tem boste preverili, da vaše težave ne povzroča relativno enostavna težava kot je izklopljena brezžična povezava in se pripravili na naslednjih nekaj korakov za odpravljanje težav.

Prepričajte se, da vaš prenosnik ni povezan z žično internetno povezavo.

V primeru da imate zunanjo brezžično kartico (kot je brezžična kartica USB ali kartica PCMICA), se prepričajte, da je vstavljena v ustrezen prostor na računalniku.

V primeru da je brezžična kartica znotraj računalnika, se prepričajte, da je stikalo brezžičnega prilagodilnika vklopljeno.

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in se prepričajte, da je možnost Omogoči brezžično omrežje označena.

Odprite Terminal, vtipkajte nm-tool in pritisnite Enter.

To bo prikazalo podatke o vaši omrežni strojni opremi in stanju povezave. Oglejte si podatke in preverite, če obstaja odsek, ki se nanaša na brezžično kartico. Podatki za omrežne naprave so ločeni z vrstico pomišljajev. Če v odseku za brezžično kartico najdete odsek Stanje: povezano pomeni, da deluje in da je povezana z brezžičnim usmerjevalnikom.

V primeru da ste povezani s svojim brezžičnim usmerjevalnikom in še vedno ne morete dostopati do interneta, morda vaš usmerjevalnik ni nastavljen pravilno ali pa ima vaš ponudnik internetnih storitev tehnične težave. Preglejte svoj usmerjevalnik in vodiče za nastavitev svojega ponudnika internetnih storitev ali stopite v stik s podporo svojega ponudnika internetnih storitev.

V primeru da izhod nm-toll ne nakazuje, da ste bili povezani z omrežjem, kliknite Naprej za nadaljevanje z naslednjim delom vodnika za odpravljanje težav.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wired.page0000644000373100047300000000125312320731734024510 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Žične internetne povezave, Stalni naslovi IP … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Žične povezave usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/session-language.page0000644000373100047300000000626512320731734026066 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preklopite na drug jezik za uporabniški vmesnik in besedilo pomoči. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Izbira jezika, ki ga uporabljate

Svoje namizje in programe lahko uporabljate v kateremkoli od ducat jezikov, če imate na svojem računalniku nameščene jezikovne pakete.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Kliknite na Jezikovna podpora.

V zavihku Jezik izberite želeni jezik. Povlecite jezik na vrh seznama.

Za uveljavljanje jezikovnih sprememb se morate najprej odjaviti in nato znova prijaviti. Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in za odjavo izberite Odjava.

Nekateri prevodi so morda nepopolni in nekateri programi vašega jezika morda sploh ne podpirajo.

V vaši domači mapi so posebne mape v katere programi shranjujejo glasbo, dokumente in slike. Te mape uporabljajo standardna imena glede na vaš jezik. Ko se ponovno prijavite, boste vprašani, če želite te mape preimenovati v standardna imena za svoj izbrani jezik. V primeru da nov jezik nameravate vedno uporabljati, je imena map pametno posodobiti.

Sprememba sistemskega jezika

Ko svoj jezik spremenite, ga lahko spremenite za svoj račun potem, ko se prijavite. Spremenite lahko tudi sistemski jezik, ki se uporablja na mestih, kot je prijavni zaslon.

Spremenite svoj jezik kot je opisano zgoraj.

Kliknite Uveljavi za celoten sistem.

Zahtevana so skrbniška dovoljenja. Vnesite svoje geslo ali geslo za zahteveni skrbniški račun.

Več pomoči o jezikih in krajevnih oblikah lahko najdete v Pomoči jezikovne podpore.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-files.page0000644000373100047300000000333112320731734025776 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Iskanje datotek, map in prejemov. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Leča datoteke

Leča datotek je druga leča po domu Pregledne plošče v vrstici leč in je predstavljena z dokumentom. Leča datotek vam ponuja dostop do nedavno uporabljenih datotek, map ali prejemov.

Za odprtje pregledne plošče neposredno v leči datotek lahko uporabite SuperF.

Če uporabljate Google Drive, za ogled rezultatov iskanje iz Google Drive se prepričajte, da so vaša Google poverila v Spletni računi.
Predogledi

Desno kliknite na rezultat iskanja za odprtje predogleda. Predogled pokaže vrsto datoteke, velikost datoteke in kdaj je bila nazadnje shranjena.

Datoteko lahko odprete, jo pošljete preko e-pošte ali odprete mapo, ki vsebuje datoteko.

Filtri

Kliknite Filtiraj rezultate za filtriranje po vrsti datoteke, velikosti datoteke ali zadnjem času, ko je bila datoteka shranjena.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-airplane.page0000644000373100047300000000320512320731734027023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in odkljukajte Omogoči brezžično. Izklop brezžičnega omrežja (letalski način)

V primeru da imate svoj računalnik na letalu (ali kje drugje, kjer brezžične povezave niso dovoljene), bi morali svojo brezžično povezavo izklopiti. Morda boste brezžično povezavo želeli izklopiti tudi zaradi varčevanja z baterijo.

Za to kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in odkljukajte Omogoči brezžično omrežje. To bo izklopilo vašo brezžično povezavo dokler je ponovno ne omogočite.

Za ponovni vklop brezžične povezave kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Omogoči brezžično, tako, da ima kljukico pred imenom.

Vaš prenosnik morda še vedno vsesmerno oddaja, če niste izklopili Bluetootha.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-select.page0000644000373100047300000000336312320731735026075 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Uporabite način izbire za izbiro več kot enega dokumenta ali zbirke. Izbira dokumentov

Iz izbirnega načina v programu Dokumenti lahko odpremo, natisnemo, ogledamo ali naredimo zbirko svojih dokumentov. Za uporabo izbirnega načina:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

Izberite enega ali več dokumentov ali zbirk. Vrstica z gumbi se prikaže z veljavnimi dejanji za vašo izbiro.
Dejanja načina izbire

Po izbiri enega ali več dokumentov lahko:

Odprete z Pregledovalnikom dokumentov (ikona mape).

Natisnete (ikona tiskalnika): natisnite dokument (na voljo, ko je izbran samo en dokument).

Uredite (ikona plus): ustvarite zbirko dokumentov.

Lastnosti (ikona ključa): prikaže lastnosti dokumenta (na voljo, ko je izbran samo en dokument).

Izbriši (ikona smeti): izbrišete eno ali več zbirk.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-friends.page0000644000373100047300000000274512320731735026337 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Brskajte po sporočilih iz vaših računov spletnih družabnih medijev. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Vir Prijatelji

Vir Prijatelji je šesta leča po domu Pregledne plošče v vrstici leč in je predstavljena z oblačkom za govor. Vir Prijatelji vam ponuja dostop do vaših računov družabnih omrežij.

Za neposredno odpiranje Pregledne plošče na ikoni vira Prijatelji lahko uporabite SuperG.

Leča bo prazna, dokler ne vnesete poveril v Spletne račune.
Predogledi

Desni klik na rezultat iskanje odpre predogled. Predogled vam ponuja več podrobnosti in "všečkanje" ali deljenje objav.

Filtri

Kliknite Filtriraj rezultate za filtriranje po računih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-suspend.page0000644000373100047300000000363012320731735025427 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prehod v stanje pripravljenosti pošlje vaš računalnik v stanje pripravljenosti, da porabi manj energije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Kaj se zgodi, ko pošljem računalnik v pripravljenost?

Ko svoj računalnik pošljete v pripravljenost, vsi vaši programi in dokumenti ostanejo odprti, vendar se zaslon in drugi deli računalnika izklopijo za varčevanje z energijo. Računalnik je še vedno vklopljen in porablja majhno količino energije. Iz stanja pripravljenosti ga lahko povrnete s pritiskom na tipko ali klikom na miško. V primeru da to ne deluje, poskusite s pritiskom na gumb za vklop.

Nekateri računalniki imajo težavo s podporo strojne opreme. To pomeni, da morda ne bodo mogli ustrezno preiti v stanje pripravljenosti ali mirovanje. Delovanje stanja pripravljenosti/mirovanja je dobro preizkusiti preden ga začnete uporabljati.

Pred prehodom v stanje pripravljenosti/mirovanje vedno shranite svoje delo

Pred prehodom v mirovanje ali stanje pripravljenosti svoje delo shranite za vsak slučaj, če bi šlo kaj narobe in odprtih programov in dokumentov ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika ne bi bilo mogoče obnoviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts-link-unlink.page0000644000373100047300000000517312320731735026667 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Združite podatke za stik iz več virov. Povežite ali odstranite stike usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard-layouts.page0000644000373100047300000001256412320731735026120 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Juanjo Marín juanj.marin@juntadeandalucia.es Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Dodaj vhodne vire in preklapljaj med njimi. Uporabi nadomestne vhodne vire

Tipkovnice obstajajo v na stotine različnih razporeditvah za različne jezike. Tudi za isti jezik pogosto obstaja več razporeditev tipk kot je na primer razporeditev Dvorak za angleščino. Vaša tipkovnica se lahko obnaša kot tipkovnica z drugačno razporeditvijo ne glede na črke in simbole, ki so natisnjeni na tipkah. To je uporabno, če pogosto preklapljate med več jeziki.

Nekateri jeziki, kot sta kitajščina in korejščina , potrebujejo bolj zapletene vnosne metode kot preprosta preslikava znaka v tipko. Zato nekateri od vhodnih virov med katerimi lahko izbirate, omogočajo tako metodo.

Možnosti s načini vnosa so na voljo, če je pogon načina vnosa nameščen. Ko namestite jezik, je primeren pogon načina vnosa samodejno nameščen. Na primer, če namestite korejski jezik, se namesti paket ibus-hangul. Naslednjič ko se prijavite, je na voljo vir vhoda Korejščina (Hangul). Pogon načina vnosa IBus lahko tudi posebej namestite.
Dodaj vhodni vir

Ogledate si lahko predogled slike katerekoli postavitve, tako da izberete postavitev na seznamu in kliknete predogled.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku Osebno kliknite na Vnos besedila.

Kliknite na +, izberite vhodni vir in kliknite Dodaj.

Privzeti vir je vir na vrhu seznama. Uporabite gumba ↑ in ↓ za premik virov gor in dol po seznamu.

Če izberete vir z načinom vnosa, lahko kliknete na možnosti za dostop do, pogovornega okna z možnostmi načina.
Kazalnik vhodnega vira

Hitro lahko preklopite med izbranimi viri z uporabo kazalnika vhodnih virov v menijski vrstici. Meni bo prikazal kratko določilo za trenutni vir, kot je En za postavitev standardne angleščine ali simbol v primeru, da vir uporablja poseben vnosni način, kot je npr. kitajščina (Chewing). Kliknite na kazalnik vhodnih virov in izberite v meniju vir, ki ga želite uporabiti.

Tipkovne bližnjice

Tipkovne bližnjice lahko uporabite za hiter preklop med izbranimi vhodnimi viri. Privzeto bližnjica za preklop na naslednji vir je SuperPresledek ampak lahko jo spremenite:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku Osebno kliknite na Vnos besedila.

Kliknite trenutno določilo za bližnjico pod oznako Preklopi na naslednji vir z uporabo.

Če se je določilo bližnjice spremenilo v Nov pospeševalnik ..., pritisnite tipke, ki jih želite uporabljati kot novo bližnjico.
Nastavite vhodni vir za vsa okna ali za vsako okno posebej

Če uporabljate več virov, lahko izberete, da ima več oken isti vir ali nastavite različne vire za posamezno okno. Uporaba različnih virov za posamezno okno je uporabna, če na primer, pišete članek v drugem jeziku v oknu besednega opravilnika. Vaša izbira vhodnega vira bo zapomnjena za vsako okno, ko boste preklapljali med njimi.

Privzeto bodo nova okna uporabljala privzeti vhodni vir. Lahko pa nastavite da uporabljajo vir zadnjega odprtega okna.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/tips.page0000644000373100047300000000117612320731735023576 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Posebni znaki, bližnjice s srednjim klikom ... Namigi in triki usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-crackle.page0000644000373100047300000000376012320731735025352 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite svoje zvočne kable in gonilnike zvočne kartice. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Slišim praskanje ali brenčanje med predvajanjem zvokov

V primeru da med predvajanjem zvoka na svojem računalniku slišite praskanje ali brenčanje, imate morda težavo z zvočnimi kabli ali povezovalniki ali pa imate težavo z gonilnikom za zvočno kartico.

Preverite, da so zvočniki pravilno vklopljeni.

V primeru, da zvočniki niso polno priklopljeni ali če so vklopljeni v napačen vtič, lahko slišite brenčeč zvok.

Prepričajte se, da kabel zvočnikov/slušalk ni poškodovan.

Zvočni kabli in povezovalniki se lahko z uporabo postopoma obrabijo. Poskusite priklopiti kabel ali slušalke v drugo zvočno napravo (kot je MP3 ali CD predvajalnik) in preverite ali tudi tam slišite prasketajoč zvok. Če je zvok praskajoč, boste morda morali zamenjati kabel ali slušalke.

Preverite ali so zvočni gonilniki dobri.

Nekatere zvočne kartice na Linuxu ne delujejo zelo dobro, ker nimajo zelo dobrih gonilnikov. To težavo je težje določiti. Poskusite najti proizvajalca in model svoje zvočne kartice na internetu skupaj z iskalnim nizom "Linux" in preverite, če imajo drugi enako težavo kot vi.

Za več podrobnosti o svoji zvočni kartici lahko uporabite ukaz sudo lspci -v v Terminalu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-usemic.page0000644000373100047300000000354612320731735025235 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporabite analogni ali USB mikrofon in izberite privzeto vhodno napravo. Uporaba drugega mikrofona

Zunanji mikrofon lahko uporabite za zvočne konference, snemanja zvoka ali za uporabo predstavnostnih programov. Tudi če ima vaš računalnik vgrajen mikrofon ali spletno kamero z mikrofonom, ločen mikrofon običajno zagotavlja boljšo kakovost zvoka.

V primeru da ima vaš mikrofon okrogel priključek, ga vklopite v ustrezen vtič na svojem računalniku. Večina računalnikov ima dva vtiča: enega za mikrofone in enega za zvočnike. Najdite sliko mikrofona poleg vtiča. Mikrofoni vklopljeni v ustrezen vtič bodo ponavadi privzeto uporabljeni. V kolikor se to ne zgodi, si spodaj oglejte navodila za izbiro privzete vhodne naprave.

V primeru da imate mikrofon USB, ga vklopite v katerakoli vrata USB na svojem računalniku. Mikrofoni USB se obnašajo kot ločene zvočne naprave zato morate navesti kateri mikrofon želite privzeto uporabljati.

Izberite privzeto zvočno vhodno napravo

Kliknite na meni zvoka v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve zvoka.

V zavihku Vhod izberite napravo s seznama naprav. Ko govorite, bi se moral kazalnik odzvati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000147512320731735025070 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sprememba privzetega brskalnika, namestitev flash, namestitev vstavka java, podpora Silverlight … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Spletni brskalniki usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-default-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000340612320731735026506 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Privzeti spletni brskalnik spremenite tako, da obiščete Podrobnosti v Sistemske nastavitve. Spremenite spletni brskalnik v katerem so odprta spletišča

Ko kliknete na povezavo na spletno stran v kateremukoli programu, bo spletni brskalnik samodejno odprl to stran. V primeru da imate nameščen več kot en brskalnik, se stran morda ne bo odprla v želenem brskalniku. To lahko popravite s spremembo privzetega spletnega brskalnika:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Podrobnosti in s seznama na levi strani okna izberite Privzeti programi.

Spremenite možnost Splet, da izberete brskalnik za odpiranje povezav.

Ko odprete drug spletni brskalnik, vam bo morda sporočil, da ni več privzeti brskalnik. Če se to zgodi, kliknite gumb Prekliči ali podoben, zato da se brskalnik ne bo ponovno poskusil nastaviti kot privzeti brskalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/look-resolution.page0000644000373100047300000000635012320731735025763 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sprememba ločljivosti zaslona in njegove usmerjenosti (vrtenje). Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba velikosti ali vrtenja zaslona

S spremembo ločljivosti zaslona lahko spremenite kako velike (ali kako podrobno) so videti stvari na zaslonu. V katero smer je zaslon usmerjen (na primer, če imate vrteči se zaslon) lahko spremenite s spremembo vrtenja.

Kliknite na ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Zasloni.

Če imate več zaslonov in niso zrcaljeni, lahko imate različne nastavitve na zaslonu. Izberite zaslon v področju predogleda.

Izberite svoje želeno ločljivost in vrtenje.

Kliknite Uveljavi. Nova nastavitev bo pred povrnitvijo nazaj uporabljena 30 sekund. Na ta način bodo v primeru da z novi nastavitvami nič ne vidite, stare nastavitve samodejno obnovljene. Če ste z novimi nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Obdrži to nastavitev.

Ko uporabljate drug zaslon, kot je na primer projektor, bi moral biti samodejno zaznan, zato lahko spremenite njegove nastavitve na enak način kot za običajen zaslon. V primeru da se to ne zgodi, kliknite na gumb Zaznava zaslonov.
Ločljivost

Ločljivost je število točk (pik na zaslonu) v vsaki smeri, ki jih je mogoče prikazati. Vsaka ločljivost ima razmerje velikosti, razmerje med širino in višino. Široki zaslonu uporabljajo razmerje velikosti 16:9, običajni zasloni pa uporabljajo 4:3. Če uporabite ločljivost, ki se ne ujema z razmerjem velikosti vašega zaslona, se bodo na zaslonu pojavile črne proge za izognitev popačenju.

Želeno ločljivost lahko izberete iz možnosti v spustnem meniju Ločljivosti. V primeru da izberete napačno ločljivost za svoj zaslon, je lahko videti meglen ali točkast.

Vrtenje

Nekateri prenosniki omogočajo vrtenje zaslona v več smeri, zato je možnost spremembe vrtenja zaslona lahko uporabna. Želeno vrtenje za svoj zaslon lahko izberete iz spustnega menija Vrtenje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-differentsize.page0000644000373100047300000000342112320731735027303 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje dokumenta na papirju drugačne velikosti, oblike ali usmeritve. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Spreminjanje velikosti papirja za tiskanje

V primeru da želite spremeniti velikost papirja svojega dokumenta (na primer, tiskanje PDF velikosti pisma ZDA na papirju A4), lahko spremenite obliko dokumenta.

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

Izberite zavihek Nastavitev strani.

V stolpcu Papir izberite svojo Velikost papirja s spustnega seznama.

Kliknite Natisni in vaš dokument bi se moral začeti tiskati.

Za izbiro drugačne usmeritve lahko uporabite tudi meni Usmeritev:

Pokončno

Ležeče

Obrnjeno pokončno

Obrnjeno ležeče

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-othersconnect.page0000644000373100047300000000413212320731735026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavitve (kot je geslo) za omrežno povezavo lahko shranite, da se lahko z njo povežejo vsi uporabniki računalnika. Drugi uporabniki se ne morejo povezati z internetom

V primeru da ste nastavili omrežno povezavo, vendar se drugi uporabniki ne morejo povezati z njo, verjetno ob poskusu povezave ne vnašajo pravilnega gesla. Na primer, če imate brezžično povezavo, morda ne vnašate pravega brezžičnega gesla.

Povezavo lahko nastavite tako, da lahko vsi uporabljajo povezavo za omrežno povezavo. To pomeni, da morate povezavo nastaviti le enkrat in vsi ostali na računalniku se bodo lahko z njo povezali, ne da bi jim bilo treba odgovarjati na vprašanja. Za to:

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav.

Najdite povezavo do katere želite omogočiti dostop vsem uporabnikom. Verjetno boste morali izbrati zavihek Brezžično. Kliknite na ime omrežja in nato kliknite Uredi.

Izberite Na voljo vsem uporabnikom in kliknite Shrani. Za shranitev sprememb boste morali vnesti skrbniško geslo. Nastavitve lahko shranijo le skrbniki.

Drugi uporabniki računalnika bodo lahko to povezavo uporabljali brez vnašanja dodatnih podrobnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-chat-skype.page0000644000373100047300000000362612320731735025455 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Skype je lastniški program, zato ga je treba na Ubuntuju ročno namestiti. Kako lahko na Ubuntuju uporabljam Skype?

Skype je lastniški program, ki vam omogoča klice preko interneta z računalnikom.

Skype uporablja decentralizirane tehnologije od sovrstnika do sovrstnika zato vaši klici ne gredo skozi osrednji strežnik ampak skozi distribuirane strežnike in druge uporabnike.

Program Skype je brezplačen za uporabo, vendar ni prost program. Izvorna koda je lastniška in ni na voljo za spreminjanje.

Skype privzeto na Ubuntuju ni nameščen. Če ga želite uporabiti, namestite paket skype.

Za namestitev Skype boste morali omogočiti skladišče partnerjev Canonicala.

 Dodatni viri pomoči s <app>Skype</app>

Kako snemati pogovore s programom Skype

Seznam spletnih kamer, ki so združljive s programom Skype

Odpravljanje težav s programom Skype - za napredne uporabnike

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-file-properties-permissions.page0000644000373100047300000001021012320731736032131 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzira kdo si lahko ogleda in uredi vaše datoteke in mape. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavitev dovoljenja datotek

Za nadzor kdo lahko vidi in ureja datoteke katerih lastnik ste lahko uporabite dovoljenja datotek. Za ogled in nastavitev dovoljenj datoteke, desno kliknite nanjo in izberite Lastnosti in nato izberite zavihek Dovoljenja.

Oglejte si and spodaj za podrobnosti o vrstah dovoljenj, ki jih lahko nastavite.

Datoteke

Nastavite lahko dovoljenja za lastnika datotek, skupine lastnika in vse druge uporabnike na sistemu. Za svoje datoteke ste lastnik vi in lahko sebi dodelite pravice le za branje ali za branje in pisanje. Nastavite datoteko na le za branje, če je ne želite po nesreči spremeniti.

Vsak uporabnik na vašem računalniku spada v skupino. Na domačih računalnikih ima vsak uporabnik pogosto svojo lastno skupino, zato se skupinska dovoljenja redko uporabljajo. Vsaka datoteka pripada tako lastniku kot skupini. Nastavite lahko skupino datoteke in s tem nastavite dovoljenja za vse uporabnike v tej skupini. Skupino datoteke lahko nastavite le na skupino, kateri pripadate.

Nastavite lahko tudi dovoljenja za uporabnike, ki niso lastniki in za tiste, ki so v skupini datoteke.

V primeru da je datoteka program kot je skript, morate za njeno poganjanje izbrati Dovoli izvajanje datoteke kot programa. Tudi če je ta možnost izbrana, bo morda upravljalnik datotek še vedno odprl datoteko v programu in vas vprašal kaj želite narediti. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Mape

Dovoljenja map lahko nastavite za lastnika, skupino in druge uporabnike. Oglejte si podrobnosti dovoljenj datotek zgoraj za razlago o skrbnikih, skupinah in drugih uporabnikih.

Dovoljenja, ki jih nastavite za mapo, so drugačna od dovoljenj za datoteko.

<gui>Brez</gui>

Uporabnik ne bo mogel niti videti katere datoteke so v mapi.

 <gui>Le izpiši datoteke</gui>

Uporabnik bo lahko videl katere datoteke so v mapi, vendar datotek ne bo mogel odpreti, ustvariti ali izbrisati.

 <gui>Dostop do datotek</gui>

Uporabnik bo lahko odprl datoteke v mapi (pod pogojem, da ima za to dovoljenje do določene datoteke), vendar ne bodo mogli brisati datotek ali ustvariti novih datotek.

 <gui>Ustvarjanje in brisanje datotek</gui>

Uporabnik bo imel poln dostop do mape ključno z odpiranjem, ustvarjanjem in brisanjem datotek.

Dovoljenja datotek lahko hitro nastavite za vse datoteke v mapi s klikom na Spremeni dovoljenja za vse priložene datoteke. Uporabite spustne sezname za prilagoditev dovoljenj vsebovanih datotek ali map in kliknite Spremeni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/look-background.page0000644000373100047300000000531512320731736025700 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako nastaviti sliko, barvo ali preliv kot ozadje namizja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sprememba ozadja namizja

Spremenite lahko sliko, ki se uporablja kot ozadje vašega namizja ali pa ga nastavite kot barvo ali preliv.

Desno kliknite na namizju in izberite Spremeni ozadje namizja.

Izberite sliko ali barvo. Nastavitve so takoj uveljavljene. Preklopite na prazno delovno površino za ogled celotnega namizja.

V spustnem seznamu zgoraj desno so tri izbire.

Izberite Ozadja za uporabo ene od profesionalnih slik ozadja, ki so del Ubuntuja. Z izjemo ozadja Ubuntu so vsa privzeta ozadja namizja ustvarili zmagovalci tekmovanja ozadij skupnosti.

Nekatera ozadja so delno prozorna in dovolijo barvi ozadja, da se prikaže skozi. Za taka ozadja bo prikazan gumb izbirnika barve v spodnjem desnem kotu.

Izberite Mapo slik za uporabo eno od svojih fotografij iz mape Slike. Tukaj fotografije shranjuje večina programov za upravljanje fotogafij.

Izberete lahko tudi Barve in prelive za uporabo barve ali linearnega preliva. V spodnjem desnem kotu se bodo pojavili gumbi izbirnikov barv.

Uporabite lahko tudi katerokoli sliko na računalniku s klikom na gumb +. Vsaka slika, ki jo dodate na ta način, bo prikazana v Mapi slik. Sliko lahko odstranite s seznama tako, da jo izberete in kliknete na gumb -.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-mousekeys.page0000644000373100047300000000700112320731736025763 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev miškinih tipk za nadzor miške s tipkovnico. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Klik in premikanje miškinega kazalca s številsko tipkovnico

V primeru da imate težave z uporabo miške ali druge kazalne naprave, lahko miškin kazalec nadzirate s številsko tipkovnico. Ta zmožnost se imenuje miškine tipke.

Pritisnite tipko Super za odprtje Pregledne plošče.

Vnesite Splošni dostop in pritisnite Enter za odprtje nastavitev splošnega dostopa.

Enkrat pritisnite Tabulator za izbiro zavihka Videnje.

Pritisnite ← za preklop na zavihek Kazanje in klikanje.

Enkrat pritisnite ↓ za izbiro Miškinih tipk in nato pritisnite Enter za njihov vklop.

Prepričajte se, da je Num Lock izklopljen. Sedaj boste lahko miškin kazalec premikali s številsko tipkovnico.

Ta navodila zagotavljajo najkrajši način za omogočanje miškinih tipk s tipkovnico. Izberite Nastavitve splošnega dostopa za ogled več možnosti dostopnosti.

Številska tipkovnica je zbirka številskih gumbov na tipkovnici, ki so običajno urejene v kvadratno mrežo. V primeru da imate tipkovnico brez številske tipkovnice (kot je na primer tipkovnica prenosnika), boste morda morali držati funkcijsko tipko (Fn) in kot številsko tipkovnico uporabiti določene druge tipke na svoji tipkovnici. V primeru da to možnost uporabljate na prenosniku, lahko kupite zunanje USB številčne tipkovnice.

Vsako število na številski tipkovnici ustreza določeni smeri. Pritisk na 8 bo kazalec premaknil navzgor in pritisk na 2 ga bo premaknil navzdol. Pritisnite 5 za klik z miško ali jo hitro pritisnite dvakrat za dvoklik.

Večina tipkovnic ima posebno tipko, ki vam omogoča desni klik. Pogosto je blizu preslednice. Ta tipka se odziva kjer je žarišče vaše tipkovnice, ne kjer je vaš miškin kazalec. Za podatke kako desno klikniti z držanjem tipke 5 ali levega miškinega gumba si oglejte .

V primeru da želite številsko tipkovnico uporabiti za vnašanje medtem ko so miškine tipke omogočene, Num Lock vklopite. Ko je Num Lock vklopljen, miške ne morete nadzirati.

Običajne številske tipke v vrsti na vrhu tipkovnice miškinega kazalca ne bodo nadzorovale. Uporabite lahko samo tipke številske tipkovnice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000217712320731736024441 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Dodaj račune, Odstrani račune, Onemogoči storitve Spletni računi

Svoje prijavne podrobnosti za spletno storitev, kot sta Google in Facebook, lahko vnesete v program Spletni računi. Tako boste pridobili dostop do koledarja, e-pošte, računov za klepet in podobnih programov, brez da bi še enkrat vnašali podrobnosti svojega računa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-whatisspace.page0000644000373100047300000000647012320731736026251 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barvni prostor je definiran razpon barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kaj je barvni prostor?

Barvni prostor je definiran razpon barv. Dobro znani barvni prostori so sRGB, AdobeRGB in ProPhotoRGB.

Človeški vidni sistem ni enostaven senzor RGB, vendar lahko ocenimo kako se oko odzove z diagramom kromatičnosti CIE 1931, ki prikazuje človeški vidni odziv v obliki konjske podkve. Vidite lahko, da človeški vid zazna več sence zelene kot modre ali rdeče. S trikromatskim barvnim prostorom kot je RGB predstavimo barve na računalniku s tremi vrednostmi, kar omeji kodiranje na trikotnik barv.

Uporaba modelov kot je diagram kromatičnosti CIE 1931 je ogromna poenostavitev človeškega vidnega sistema in pravi gamuti so izraženi kot 3D trup namesto 2D projekcije. 2D projekcija 3D oblike je lahko včasih zavajajoča, zato za ogled 3D oblike namestite program gnome-color-manager in nato zaženite gcm-viewer.
sRGB, AdobeRGB in ProPhotoRGB predstavljeni z belimi trikotniki

Najprej, ko gledate na sRGB, ki je najmanjši prostor in lahko kodirate najmanjše število barv. To je približek 10 let starega zaslona CRT in večina sodobnih zaslonov lahko prikaže več barv kot ta. sRGB je standard najmanjšega-skupnega-imenovalca in je v velikem številu uporabljen pri programih (vključno z Internetom).

AbodeRGB se pogosto uporablja kot urejevalni prostor. Kodira lahko več barv kot sRGB. To pomeni, da lahko barve na fotografiji prilagodite brez skrbi o odstranitvi najbolj živih barv ali črnine.

ProPhoto je največji razpoložljivi prostor, ki se pogosto uporablja za arhiviranje dokumentov. Kodira lahko skoraj celoten obseg barv, ki jih lahko zazna človeško oko in tudi barve, ki jih človeško oko ne more zaznati.

Zakaj se ProPhoto ne uporablja za povsod, če je najboljši? Odgovor je kvantizacija. Če imate samo 8 bitov (256 stopenj) za kodiranje vsakega kanala, potem ima večji obseg večje korake med posameznimi vrednostmi.

Večji koraki pomenijo večjo napako med zajeto in shranjeno barvo, kar je za nekatere barve velika težava. Za nekatere ključne barve kot so kožne barve bodo že majhne napake opazne.

Uporaba 16 bitne slike bo zagotovila več korakov in veliko manjšo napako zaradi kvantizacije slike, vendar to podvoji velikost vsake slikovne datoteke. Večina današnje vsebine vsebuje 8 bitov za točko.

Upravljenje barv je opravilo pretvarjanja iz enega barvnega prostora v drugega, kjer je barvni prostor lahko splošno določen kot je sRGB ali osebni profil kot je profil vašega zaslona ali tiskalnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-device-drivers.page0000644000373100047300000001412512320731736033375 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Nekateri gonilniki naprav ne delujejo dobro z določenimi brezžičnimi karticami, zato boste morda morali najti boljšega. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji Prepričajte se, da so nameščeni delujoči gonilniki naprave

Pri tem koraku lahko preverite, če lahko gonilnike naprav za brezžično kartico spravite k delovanju. Gonilnik naprave je program, ki računalniku pove kako spraviti napravo strojne opreme k delovanju. Tudi če računalnik prepozna brezžično kartico, morda nima gonilnikov, ki delujejo zelo dobro. Morda boste lahko našli druge gonilnike za brezžično kartico, ki delujejo. Poskusite nekaj od možnosti spodaj:

Preverite, če je vaša brezžična kartica na seznamu podprtih naprav

Večina distribucij Linux ima seznam brezžičnih naprav, ki jih podpirajo. Včasih ti seznami zagotavljajo dodatne podatke kako zagotoviti, da gonilniki za določene brezžične kartice delujejo pravilno. Pojdite na seznam za svojo distribucijo (na primer Ubuntu, Fedora ali openSuSE) in si oglejte, če je proizvajalec in model brezžičnega gonilnika izpisan. Morda boste morali uporabiti te podatke, da bi brezžične spravili gonilnike k delovanju.

Iskanje dodatnih odprtih ali lastniških gonilnikov

Čeprav Ubuntu vključuje podporo za številne naprave, je treba nekatere gonilnike namestiti ločeno. Uporabite orodje Dodatni gonilniki za preverjanje možnosti namestitve dodatnih odprtih ali lastniških gonilnikov.

Kliknite gumb na skrajni desni strani menijske vrstice in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku Sistem kliknite Programski viri.

Preklopite na zavihek Dodatni gonilniki.

Uporaba gonilnikov Windows za vašo kartico

V splošnem gonilnika zasnovanega za določen operacijski sistem (kot je na primer Windows) ne morete uporabiti na drugem operacijskem sistemu (kot je na primer Linux). To se zgodi zato, ker imajo različen način upravljanja naprav. Za brezžične kartice lahko namestite plast združljivosti NDISwrapper, ki vam omogoča uporabo nekaterih gonilnikov Windows na Linuxu. To je uporabno, ker imajo brezžične kartice skoraj vedno na voljo gonilnike Windows, gonilniki Linux pa včasih niso na voljo. Več o tem kako uporabiti NDISwrapper lahko izveste tukaj. Vedite, da z NDISwrapper ne morete uporabiti vseh brezžičnih gonilnikov.

Več podrobnosti o ndiswrapper vključno s pomočjo odpravljanja težav za ndiswrapper lahko najdete na tej strani.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-filter.page0000644000373100047300000000236312320731736026103 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Izberite dokumente za prikaz. Filtriraj dokumente

Kliknite na gumb dol zraven vrstice iskanja za omejitev vira iskanja znotraj naslednjih kategorij:

Viri: krajevno, Google, SkyDrive ali vsi.

Vrsta: Zbirke, Dokumenti PDF, Predstavitve, Preglednice, Besedilni dokumenti ali Vse.

Naslov, avtor ali vse.

Da bi se Google ali SkyDrive prikazala na seznamu filtrov, morate nastaviti Google ali Windows Live kot spletni račun.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/display-dual-monitors.page0000644000373100047300000000526212320731736027060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev dvojnih zaslonov na vaš prenosniku. Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Povezava zunanjega zaslona s prenosnikom
Nastavitev zunanjega zaslona

Za nastavitev zunanjega zaslona s prenosnikom povežite zaslon s prenosnikom. Če ga vaš sistem ne prepozna nemudoma ali bi želeli prilagoditi nastavitve:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Zasloni.

Kliknite na sliko zaslona, ki jo želite omogočiti ali onemogočiti in ga nato VKLOPITE/IZKLOPITE.

Privzeto je zaganjalnik prikazan le na glavnem zaslonu. Za spremembo kateri zaslon je "glavni", spremenite zaslon v spustnem polju Postavitev zaganjalnika. Namesto tega lahko v predogledu zaganjalnik povlečete na zaslon, ki ga želite nastaviti kot "glavni" zaslon.

Če želite, da je zaganjalnik prikazan na vseh zaslonih, spremenite Postavitev zaganjalnika na Vsi zasloni.

Za spremembo "položaja" zaslona kliknite nanj in ga povlecite na želeni položaj.

Če želite, da oba zaslona prikažeta isto vsebino, izberite polje Zrcali zaslona.

Ko ste z nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Uveljavi in nato kliknite Obdrži te nastavitve.

Za zapiranje programa Zasloni kliknite na x zgoraj v kotu.
Lepljivi robovi

Značilen problem pri uporabi dveh zaslonov je, da kazalec miške zlahka "zdrsne" na drug zaslon, ko tega ne želimo. Unity Lepljivi robovi pomagajo pri tem problemu tako, da zahtevajo, da malo bolj potisnemo miškin kazalec iz enega na drug zaslon.

Lepljive robove lahko izključite, če ne marate te zmožnosti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-batterylife.page0000644000373100047300000000770212320731736026265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namigi za zmanjšanje električne porabe vašega računalnika. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Poraba manjše količine energije in podaljšanje trajanja baterije

Računalniki lahko porabijo veliko energije. Z uporabo nekaterih strategij za varčevanje z energijo lahko zmanjšate svoj račun za elektriko in pomagate okolju. Če imate prenosnik, vam bo to pomagalo podaljšati trajanje delovanja prenosnika na bateriji.

Splošni namigi

Računalnik pošljite v pripravljenost, ko ga ne uporabljate. To občutno zmanjša količino porabljene energije in omogoča zelo hitro povrnitev računalnika.

Računalnik izklopite, če ga ne boste uporabljali dlje časa. Nekatere skrbi, da pogosto izklapljanje računalnika lahko povzroči hitrejšo obrabo, ampak to ne drži.

Za spremembo svojih nastavitev porabe uporabite možnosti Upravljanje porabe. Na voljo so številne možnosti, ki vam bodo pomagale varčevati z energijo: lahko samodejno zatemnite zaslon ali ga po določenem času pošljete v mirovanje, zmanjšate svetlost zaslona (za prenosnike) in nastavite samodejen prehod v stanje pripravljenosti, če računalnika določen čas ne uporabljate.

Izklopite zunanje naprave (kot so tiskalniki in optični bralniki), ko jih ne uporabljate.
Prenosniki, mini prenosniki in druge naprave z baterijami

Zmanjšajte svetlost zaslona; napajanje zaslona predstavlja znaten del prenosnikove porabe energije.

Večina prenosnikov ima na tipkonici gumb (ali tipkovno bližnjico), ki ga lahko uporabite za zmanjšanje svetlosti.

V primeru, da nekaj časa internetne povezave ne potrebujete, izklopite brezžično/Bluetooth kartico. Te naprave delujejo z oddajanjem radijskih valov, ki porablja kar nekaj energije.

Nekateri računalniki imajo fizično stikalo, ki ga lahko uporabite za izklop, drugi pa imajo za to tipkovno bližnjico. Ko brezžično povezavo spet potrebujete, jo lahko ponovno vklopite.
Naprednejši namigi

Zmanjšajte število opravil, ki se izvajajo v ozadju. Računalniki porabijo več energije, če delajo.

Večina vaših programov dela zelo malo, če jih ne uporabljate dejavno. Programi, ki pogosto pridobijo podatke z interneta, predvajajo glasbo ali filme ali poganjajo distribuirane izračune, lahko vplivajo na vašo porabo energije.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/look-display-fuzzy.page0000644000373100047300000000503512320731736026412 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Morda je ločljivost zaslona nepravilno nastavljena. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zakaj je moj zaslon videti meglen/točkast?

To se lahko zgodi, ker nastavljena ločljivost zaslona ni prava za vaš zaslon.

Za rešitev tega kliknite na ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve. V oddelku strojna oprema izberite Zasloni. Poskusite spremeniti Ločljivost in izberite tisto, katera vam najbolj ustreza.

Ko je priklopljenih več zaslonov

V primeru da imate z računalnikom povezana dva zaslona (na primer običajen zaslon in projektor), bosta morda zaslona imela različni ločljivosti. Grafična kartica računalnika lahko hkrati prikaže zaslon le pri eni ločljivosti, zato bo vsaj eden od zaslonov morda videti megleno.

Dva zaslona imata lahko različni ločljivosti, vendar potem iste stvari ne boste mogli prikazati na obeh zaslonih hkrati. Hkrati boste imeli povezana dva različna zaslona. Okna lahko premikate z enega zaslona na drug zaslon, vendar hkrati za oba zaslona ne morete pokazati enakega okna.

Za nastavitev zaslonov tako da bo imel vsak svojo ločljivost:

Kliknite na ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve. Odprite Zasloni.

Odstranite izbiro Zrcalna zaslona.

Izberite zaslon iz sivega polja na vrhu okna Zasloni. Spreminjajte Ločljivost, dokler ni videti prav.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wired-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000325012320731736026140 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Za nastavitev večine žičnih omrežnih povezav morate le vklopiti omrežni kabel. Povezava z žičnim (Eternet) omrežjem

Za nastavitev večine žičnih omrežnih povezav, vse kar morate storite je, da priključite omrežni kabel. Ikona omrežja v menijski vrstici bi morala utripat nekaj sekund in nato se spremeni v ikono "vtičnice", ko ste povezani.

V primeru da se to ne zgodi, se najprej prepričajte, da je vaš omrežni kabel vklopljen. En konec kabla bi moral biti vklopljen v pravokotna vrata Ethernet (omrežje) na vašem računalniku, drugi konec bi moral biti vklopljen v stikalo, usmerjevalnik, vtič zidu ali podobno (odvisno od omrežne nastavitve, ki jo imate).

Računalnika ne morete vklopiti neposredno v drugega z omrežnim kablom (vsaj ne brez dodatnih nastavitev). Za povezavo dveh računalnikov oba vklopite v omrežni razdelilnik, usmerjevalnik ali stikalo.

Če še vedno niste povezani, potem vaše omrežje mogoče ne podpira samodejne nastavitve (DHCP). V tem primeru jo boste mogli ročno nastavit.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/addremove-install-synaptic.page0000644000373100047300000000511012320731736030052 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com

Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 (CC BY-SA 3.0).

 Synaptic je zmogljiv a zapleten nadomestek Programskega središča Ubuntu za upravljanje programov. Uporaba programa Synaptic za naprednejše upravljanje programov

Upravitelj paketov Synaptic je bolj zmogljiv in lahko opravlja nekatera opravila upravljanja programov, ki jih Programsko središče Ubuntu ne zmore. Synapticov vmesnik je dosti bolj zapleten in ne podpira novejših zmožnosti Programskega središča, kot so ocene ter mnenja. Zato ga novim uporabnikom Ubuntuja ne priporočamo.

Synaptic ni privzeto nameščen, vendar ga lahko namestite s Programskim središčem.

Namestitev programske opreme s programom Synaptic

Odprite Synaptic iz Pregledne plošče ali Zaganjalnika. V okno Overitev boste morali vnesti svoje geslo.

Kliknite Iskanje za iskanje programa oz. kliknite Oddelki in se sprehodite po kategorijah.

Desno kliknite na program, ki ga želite namestite in izberite Označi za namestitev.

Če boste vprašani po označevanju dodatnih sprememb, kliknite na Označi.

Izberite druge programe, ki jih želite namestiti.

Kliknite Uveljavi in nato v oknu, ki se pojavi, kliknite Uveljavi. Izbrani programi bodo prejeti in nameščeni.

Za več podrobnosti o uporabi programa Synaptic, si oglejte Podrobni vodnik Synaptic.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/report-ubuntu-bug.page0000644000373100047300000000605012320731736026222 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako in kje poročati težave z Ubuntujem. Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Poročanje težave v Ubuntuju

V primeru da v Ubuntuju opazite težavo, lahko izpolnite poročilo o hrošču.

Pritisnite AltF2 in vnesite ubuntu-bug imeprograma

V primeru da imate težavo s strojno opremo ali ne veste imena programa s težavami, vnesite ubuntu-bug

Po poganjanju enega od zgornjih ukazov bo Ubuntu zbral podatke o hrošču. To lahko traja nekaj minut. Če želite, preglejte zbrane podatke. Kliknite Pošlji za nadaljevanje.

Odprl se bo nov zavihek spletnega brskalnika za nadaljevanje obdelovanja podatkov o hrošču. Za upravljanje poročil o hrošču Ubuntu uporablja spletišče Launchpad. V primeru da računa Launchpad nimate, ga boste morali za poročanje hrošča in prejem posodobitev o njegovem stanju preko e-pošte ustvariti. To lahko storite s klikom na Ustvari nov račun.

Po prijavi v Launchpad vnesite opis težave v polje povzetek.

Po kliku na Naprej bo Launchpad iskal podobne hrošče za primer da je hrošč že poročal nekdo drug. V primeru da je bil hrošč že poročan, lahko označite, da hrošč vpliva tudi na vas. Lahko se tudi naročite na poročilo o hrošču, da prejmete posodobitve o napredku pri njegovem popravljanju. V primeru da hrošča ni še nihče poročal, kliknite Ne, poročati moram nov hrošč.

Izpolnite polje opisa s toliko podatki kot lahko. Pomembno je, da navedete tri stvari.

Kaj pričakujete, da se bo zgodilo

Kaj se je dejansko zgodilo

Če je mogoče, najmanjše število korakov, zahtevanih za ponovitev težave, kjer je 1. korak "zaženi program"

Vaše poročilo bo dobilo številko ID in njegovo stanje bo posodobljeno, medtem ko se obdeluje. Hvala, ker pomagate izboljševati Ubuntu!

V primeru da dobite napako "To ni pristen paket Ubuntu", to pomeni, da program, za katerega poskušate poročati hrošč, ni iz uradnih skladišč Ubuntu. V tem primeru Ubuntujevega vgrajenega orodja za poročanje hroščev ne morete uporabiti.

Za več podrobnosti o poročanju hroščev v Ubuntuju si preberite obširno spletno dokumentacijo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-default-email.page0000644000373100047300000000307212320731737026113 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Spremenite privzeti odjemalec e-pošte tako da greste v Podrobnosti v Sistemskih nastavitvah. Spremenite poštni program s katerim boste pisali e-pošto.

Ko kliknete na gumb ali povezavo za pošiljanje nove e-pošte (na primer v urejevalniku besedila), se bo odprl vaš privzet program e-pošte s praznim sporočilom. V primeru da imate nameščen več kot en program e-pošte, se bo morda odprl napačen program. To lahko popravite s spremembo privzetega programa e-pošte:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Podrobnosti in s seznama na levi strani okna izberite Privzeti programi.

Privzeti poštni odjemalec lahko izberete s spremembo možnosti Pošta.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-batteryoptimal.page0000644000373100047300000000371512320731737027014 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namigi kot so "Ne pustite, da se baterija preveč izprazni" Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Kako dobiti največ iz baterije prenosnika

Ko se baterije prenosnika starajo, se njihova zmožnost shranjevanja slabša in zmogljivost počasi zmanjšuje. Z določenimi tehnikami lahko njihovo življenje podaljšate, vendar ne pričakujte velike razlike.

Baterije ne izpraznite popolnoma. Vedno znova napolnite baterijo preden postane skoraj prazna, čeprav ima večina baterij varovala, ki preprečijo prenizko napolnjenost baterije. Polnjenje delno izpraznjene baterije je učinkovitejše, polnjenje skoraj polne baterije pa je za baterijo slabše.

Toplota ima škodljiv učinek na učinkovitost polnjenja. Ne pustite, da se baterija segreje bolj kot bi bilo treba.

Baterije se starajo tudi, če jih pustite v shrambi. Kupovanje nadomestne baterije ob nakupu nove ni smiselno. Baterije vedno kupite, ko jih potrebujete.

Ta nasvet velja za Litij ionske (Li-ion) baterije, ki so najpogostejša vrsta baterij. Druge vrste baterij se morda obnašajo drugače.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/prefs-language-install.page0000644000373100047300000000365412320731737027170 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namestite več prevodov in povezane podporne pakete jezika. Gunnar Hjalmarsson gunnarhj@ubuntu.com Namestite jezike

Ko nameščate Ubuntu, izbrani jezik ob namestitvi bo nameščen skupaj z angleščino. Dodate lahko tudi druge jezike.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku Osebno kliknite Jezikovna podpora.

Kliknite na Namesti / Odstrani jezik .... Okno Nameščeni jeziki izpiše vse jezike ki so na voljo. Trenutno nameščeni jeziki so označeni.

Označite jezike, ki želite da se namestijo in odznačite jezik, ki so trenutno nameščeni ampak želite da se odstranijo.

Kliknite Uveljavi spremembe.

Zahtevana so skrbniška dovoljenja. Vnesite svoje geslo ali geslo za zahteveni skrbniški račun.

Poleg prevodov uporabljenih za prikaz menijev in sporočil, nov jezik lahko s seboj potegne še slovarje za preverjanje črkovanja, pisave in vnosne metode.

Nekateri prevodi so morda nepopolni in nekateri programi vašega jezika morda sploh ne podpirajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000625212320731737026037 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pregledna plošča je vrhnji gumb v zaganjalniku. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com S Pregledno ploščo najdite datoteke, programe, glasbo in več

Iskanje Unity

Pregledna plošča vam omogoča iskanje programov, datotek, glasbe in videov in vam prikaže predmete, ki ste jih nedavno uporabili. Če ste kdaj delali na preglednici ali ruedili sliko in pozabili, kje ste jo shranili, bo ta zmožnost Pregledne plošče zagotovo uporabna.

Za uporabo Pregledne plošče kliknite na vrhnjo ikono v Zaganjalniku. Ikona vsebuje logotip Ubuntu. Za hitrejši dostop lahko pritisnete tipko Super.

Za skritje Pregledne plošče ponovno kliknite na zgornjo ikono ali pritisnite Super ali Esc.

Iskanje vsega iz doma Pregledne plošče

Prva stvar, ki jo boste opazili po odprtju Pregledne plošče, je dom Pregledne plošče. Preden karkoli vnesete ali kliknete, vam bo dom Pregledne plošče prikazal datoteke in mape, ki ste jih nedavno uporabljali.

Za vsako vrsto rezultatov bo prikazana samo ena vrsta. Če obstaja več rezultatov, lahko kliknete na Ogled več rezultatov za njihov ogled.

Za iskanje enostavno začnite tipkati in povezani rezultati iskanja se bodo samodejno pojavili iz različnih nameščenih leč.

Kliknite na rezultat za njegovo odprtje ali pritisnite Enter za odprtje prvega predmeta na seznamu.

Leče

Leče vam omogočajo zoženje rezultatov Pregledne plošče in izključitev rezultatov iz drugih leč.

Razpoložljive leče lahko vidite v vrstici leč, temnejšemu traku na dnu Pregledne plošče.

Za preklop na drugo lečo, kliknite na ustrezno ikono ali pritisnite CtrlTab.

Filtri

Filtri, ki vam omogočijo nadaljnjo zožitev iskanja.

Kliknite Filtriraj rezultate za izbiro filtrov. Morda boste morali za ogled razpoložljivih virov klikniti na glavo filtrov, kot je VIri.

Predogledi

Če desno kliknete na rezultat iskanja, se bo odprl predogled z več podrobnosti o rezultatih.

Za zaprtje predogled kliknite na katerikoli prazen prostor ali pritisnite Esc.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/disk-format.page0000644000373100047300000000535212320731737025041 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Odstranite vse datoteke in mape iz zunanjega trdega diska ali USB ključka s formatiranjem. Odstranitev vsega z odstranljivega diska

V primeru da imate odstranljiv disk kot je ključek USB ali zunanji trdi disk, boste morda želeli popolnoma odstraniti vse njegove datoteke in mape. To lahko storite s formatiranjem diska - to izbriše vse datoteke na disku in ga pusti praznega.

Formatiranje odstranljivega diska

Iz Pregledne plošče odprite program Diski.

Odprite program Diskovna orodja iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite disk, ki ga želite izbrisati, s seznama Naprave shrambe.

Prepričajte se, da ste izbrali pravi disk! V primeru da izberete napačen disk, bodo vse datoteke na drugem disku izbrisane!

V odseku Nosilcu kliknite Odklopi nosilec. Nato kliknice Formatiraj nosilce.

V oknu, ki se pojavi, izberite Vrsto datotečnega sistema za disk.

V primeru, da disk uporabljate tudi na sistemih Windows in Mac OS, izberite FAT. Če ga uporabljate le na Windows, je NTFS boljša možnost. Kratek opis vrste datotečnega sistema bo predstavljen kot oznaka.

Disk poimenujte in za začetek izbrisa podatkov kliknite Formatiraj.

Ko se je formatiranje končalo, disk varno odstranite. Sedaj bi moral biti prazen in pripravljen za ponovno uporabo.

 Formatiranje diska vaših datotek ne izbriše varno

Formatiranje diska ni popolnoma varen način izbrisa podatkov. Formatiran disk bo videti kot da na njem ni datotek, vendar je mogoče s posebnimi obnovitvenimi programi datoteke obnoviti. V primeru da želite datoteke varno izbrisati, uporabite pripomoček kot je shred.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-broken.page0000644000373100047300000000162712320731737025230 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpravljanje težav kot je računalnik brez zvoka ali s slabo kakovostjo zvoka. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Težave z zvokom

Obstaja več načinov, kako se lahko pokvari predvajanje zvoka na vašem računalniku. Katera od tem spodaj najbolje opiše težavo, ki jo imate?

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-photos.page0000644000373100047300000000311512320731737026213 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Oglejte si fotografije na računalniku ali računih spletnih družabnih medijev. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Leča fotografije

Leča fotografije je peta leča po domu Pregledne plošče v vrstici leč in je predstavljena s fotoaparatom. Leča fotografije vam ponuja dostop do fotografij na vašem računalniku ali iz Spletnih rčaunov kot sta Facebook ali Google Picasa.

Za odprtje Pregledne plošče neposredno v leči fotografij lahko uporabite SuperC.

Predogledi

Desno kliknite na rezultat za odprtje predogleda z več podrobnostmi o fotografiji in večjo sličico.

Fotografije shranjene na računalniku lahko odprete, natisnete, si jih ogledat ali jih pošljete preko e-pošte.

Filtri

Kliknite Filtriraj rezultate za filtriranje po datumu zajema fotografije ali viru.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-what-is-ip-address.page0000644000373100047300000000325312320731737027010 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com IP naslov je kot telefonska številka vašega računalnika. Kaj je naslov IP?

"Naslov IP" pomeni Naslov internetnega protokola. Vsaka naprava, ki je povezana z omrežjem (kot je na primer Internet), jo ima.

IP naslov je podoben vaši telefonski številki. Vaša telefonska številka je edinstveno zaporedje števil, ki vaš telefon določi tako, da vas drugi ljudje lahko pokličejo. Podobno je IP naslov edinstveno zaporedje števil, ki določi vaš računalnik tako, da lahko pošlje in prejme podatke z drugih računalnikov.

Trenutno je večina naslovov IP sestavljena iz štirih zaporedij števil, ki so ločena s piko. Primer naslova IP je 192.168.1.42.

Vsak naslov IP je lahko dinamičen ali statičen. Dinamični naslovi IP so začasno dodeljeni vsakič, ko vaš računalnik dostopa do omrežja. Statični naslovi IP se ne spreminjajo. Dinamični naslovi IP so bolj pogosti kot statični naslovi - statični naslovi IP se uporabljajo le, ko obstajajo posebne zahteve kot je na primer skrbništvo strežnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-howtoimport.page0000644000373100047300000000273212320731737026327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barvne profile lahko uvozite tako da jih odprete. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako lahko uvozim barvne profile?

Profil lahko uvozite z dvojnim klikom na datoteko .ICC or .ICM v brskalniku datotek.

Namesto tega lahko izberete Uvoz profila ... iz Sistemske nastavitveBarva, ko izbirate profil za napravo.

Namesto tega lahko izberete Uvoz profila ... iz Sistemske nastavitveBarva, ko izbirate profil za napravo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/wacom-stylus.page0000644000373100047300000000420312320731737025262 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Določitev funkcij gumbov in občutek pritiska zaslonskega pisala Wacom. Nadzor pisala

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Nižji del pulta vsebuje podrobnosti in nastavitve, določene za vašo zaslonsko pisalo z imenom naprave (razred pisala) in diagramom na levi. Te nastavitve je mogoče prilagoditi.

Občutek pritiska radirke: uporabite drsnik za prilagoditev "občutka" (kako je fizični pritisk preveden v digitalne vrednosti) med Mehkim in Trdim.

Nastavitve Gumba/Drsnega koleščka (te spremembe se odražajo pri pisalu). Kliknite na meni poleg vsake oznake za izbiro ene od teh funkcij: brez dejanja, levi miškin klik, srednji miškin klik, desni miškin klik, drsenje navzgor, drsenje navzdol, drsenje levo, drsenje desno, nazaj, naprej.

Občutek pritiska konice: uporabite drsnik za prilagoditev "občutka" med Mehkim in Trdim.

Če imate več kot eno zaslonsko pisalo, ko se dodatno pisalo približa tablici, se bo poleg imena naprave prikazal pozivnik. Uporabite pozivnik za izbiro, katero pisalo želite nastaviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-problem-notmoving.page0000644000373100047300000001121012320731737027413 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako preveriti, če miška ne deluje. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Miškin kazalec se ne premika
Preverite, da je miška vklopljena

V primeru da imate miško s kablom, preverite, da je trdno priklopljena na vaš računalnik.

V primeru da imate miško USB (s pravokotnim povezovalnikom), jo poskusite priklopiti na druga vrata USB. V primeru da imate miško PS/2 (z majhnim, okroglim povezovalnikom s šestimi nožicami) se prepričajte, da je vklopljena v zelena vrata in ne v vijolična vrata tipkovnica. Morda boste morali računalnik znova zagnati, če miška ni bila priklopljena.

Preverite, da je računalnik prepoznal vašo miško

Pritisnite CtrlAltT za odpiranje Terminala.

V okno terminala vpišite xsetpointer -l | grep Pointer natanko tako kot je videti tukaj in pritisnite Enter.

Pojavil se bo kratek seznam miškinih gonilnikov. Preverite, da je poleg vsaj enega od predmetov [XExtensionPointer] in da je levo od vsaj enega predmeta [XExtensionPointer] ime miške.

V primeru da ni vnosa, ki vsebuje ime miške, ki mu sledi [XExtensionPointer], potem računalnik miške ni prepoznal. V primeru da vnos obstaja, je računalnik miško prepoznal. V tem primeru bi morali preveriti, da je miška priklopljena in da je v delujočem stanju.

V primeru da ima vaša miška zaporedni (RS-232) povezovalnik, boste morda morali za njeno delovanje izvesti nekaj več korakov. Ti koraki so morda odvisni od proizvajalca ali modela vaše miške.

Težave s prepoznavanjem miške je včasih težko popraviti. Vprašajte za podporo pri svoji distribuciji ali proizvajalcu, če mislite, da vaša miška ni bila pravilno zaznana.

Preverite, če miška deluje

Priklopite miško na drug računalnik in preverite, če dela.

V primeru da imate optično ali lasersko miško, bi morala iz dna miške sijati svetloba. V primeru da svetlobe ni, preverite, da je vklopljena. V primeru da je miška vklopljena in ni svetlobe, je miška morda pokvarjena.

Preverjanje brezžične miške

Prepričajte se, da je miška vklopljena. Običajno je na dnu miške stikalo za popoln izklop miške, da jo lahko premikate brez stalnega zbujanja.

Če uporabljate Bluetooth, se prepričajte, da ste dejansko seznanili miško s svojim računalnikom. Oglejte si .

Kliknite na gumb in si oglejte, če se miškin kazalec zdaj premakne. Nekatere brezžične miške gredo za varčevanje z energijo v pripravljenost, zato se morda ne bodo odzvale, dokler ne kliknete na gumb. Oglejte si .

Preverite, če je miškina baterija napolnjena.

Prepričajte se, da je sprejemnik trdno vklopljen v računalnik.

V primeru da lahko vaša miška in sprejemnik delata na različnih radio kanalih, se prepričajte, da delata na istem kanalu.

Morda boste morali pritisniti gumb na miški, sprejemniku ali obeh za vzpostavitev povezave. Priročnik vaše miške bi moral vsebovati več podrobnosti.

Večina RF (radijskih) brezžičnih mišk bi morala ob vklopu v računalnik samodejno delovati. V primeru da imate Bluetooth ali IR (infrardečo) brezžično miško, boste morda morali izvesti dodatno pogoje za njeno delovanje. Koraki so morda odvisni od proizvajalca ali modela vaše miške.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-print.page0000644000373100047300000000222112320731737025744 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Tiskajte dokumente, kateri so shranjeni krajevno ali na spletu. Tiskanje dokumenta

Za tiskanje dokumenta:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

V izbirnem načinu, izberite dokument za tiskanje.

Kliknite na gumb Natisni v vrstici z gumbi. Odpre se pogovorno okno Natisni

Tiskanje ni na voljo, ko je izbran več kot en dokument ali ko je izbrana zbirka.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrationdevices.page0000644000373100047300000000415512320731737027567 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Podpiramo veliko število naprav za umerjanje. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kateri instrumenti za merjenje barv so podprti?

Za podporo barvnih inštrumentov se GNOME zanaša na projekt Argyll. Podprti so naslednji inštrumenti za merjenje zaslona:

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Pro (spektrometer)

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Monitor (spektrometer)

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Display 1, 2 or LT (kolorimeter)

X-Rite i1 Display Pro (kolorimeter)

X-Rite ColorMunki Design or Photo (spektrometer)

X-Rite ColorMunki Create (kolorimeter)

X-Rite ColorMunki Display (kolorimeter)

Pantone Huey (kolorimeter)

MonacoOPTIX (kolorimeter)

ColorVision Spyder 2 and 3 (kolorimeter)

Colorimètre HCFR (kolorimeter)

Pantone Huey je trenutno najcenejša in najbolje podprta strojna oprema v Linuxu.

Po zaslugi Argyll so na podprti tudi številni odbojni spektrometri, ki vam pomagajo pri umerjanju in karakterizaciji vaših tiskalnikov:

X-Rite DTP20 "Pulse" ("swipe" vrsta odbojnega spektrometra)

X-Rite DTP22 Digital Swatchbook (točkovni odbojni spektrometer)

X-Rite DTP41 (točkovni in pasovni odbojni sprektometer)

X-Rite DTP41T (točkovni in pasovni odbojni sprektometer)

X-Rite DTP51 (točkovni odbojni spektrometer)

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-visualalert.page0000644000373100047300000000336312320731740025717 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Omogočite vidna opozoril za blisk zaslona ali okna, ko se predvaja zvok alarma. Blisk zaslona za zvoke alarma

Vaš računalnik bo za določene vrste sporočil in dogodkov predvajal enostaven zvok alarma. V primeru da te zvoke težko slišite, lahko nastavite, da vaš celoten zaslon ali vaše trenutno okno zabliska, ko se predvaja zvok alarma.

To je lahko uporabno, če se nahajate v okolju, kjer ne želite da se vaš računalnik oglaša kot npr. v knjižnici (oglejte si kako utišati zvok opozorila).

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Slišanje.

Vključite Vidna opozorila. Izberite ali želite da celoten zaslon ali samo naslov trenutnega okno utripa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-testing.page0000644000373100047300000000345712320731740025410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Preizkušanje upravljanja barv ni težko, na voljo vam je tudi nekaj preizkusnih profilov. Kako lahko preizkusim ali upravljanje barv deluje pravilno?

Učinki barvnega profila so včasih majhni zato je težko videti, če se je kaj spremenilo.

V GNOME je vključenih več profilov, ki zelo jasno pokažejo kateri profili so uveljavljeni:

Modrikast preizkus: spremeni zaslon v modrega in preizkusi, če so umeritvene krivulje pravilno poslane zaslonu

ADOBEGAMMA-test: spremeni zaslon v roza barvo in preizkusi različne zmožnosti barvnega profila

FakeBRG: To ne bo spremenilo zaslona, vendar kanale RGB spermeni v BGR. Barvni prelivi bodo videti večinoma pravilno in na zaslonu ne bo velike razlike, vendar pa bodo slike v programih, ki podpirajo upravljanje barv videti občutno drugače.

Svojemu zaslonu lahko enega od profilov dodate z uporabo možnosti Sistemske nastavitveBarva.

S temi profili lahko jasno vidite kdaj program podpira upravljanje barv.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/disk-benchmark.page0000644000373100047300000000547712320731740025505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zaženete lahko primerjalni preizkus trdega diska in preverite kako hiter je. Preizkus hitrosti delovanja trdega diska

Za izmeritev hitrosti delovanja svojega trdega diska:

Odprite program Diski iz Pregledne plošče.

Odprite program Diski iz pregleda dejavnosti.

Izberite disk s seznama Diskovni pogoni.

Kliknite na gumb koles in izberite Primerjalni preizkus pogona.

Kliknite Začni primerjalni preizkus in prilagodite parametra Hitrost prenosa in Dostopni čas, kot želite.

Kliknite Začni primerjalni preizkus, da preizkusite, kako hitro je mogoče podatke brati z diska. Morda bodo zahtevana Skrbniška dovoljenja. Vnesite svoje geslo ali geslo za zahtevani skrbniški račun.

Če je izbrana možnost Izvedi tudi primerjalni preizkus pisanja, bo primerjalni preizkus preizkusil kako hitro je mogoče podatke brati in pisati na disk. To bo trajalo dlje časa.

Ko se preizkus konča, bodo rezultati prikazani na grafu. Zelene točke in povezovalne črte nakazujejo na odvzete vzorce; te ustrezajo desni osi in prikazujejo dostopni čas. Spodnja osi pa prikazuje odstotek pretečenega časa. Modra črta predstavlja vrednost branja medtem ko rdeča črta predstavlja vrednost pisanja. Te so prikazane kot vrednosti dostopa do podatkov na levi osi, narisane v odstotkih prepotovane poti diska, od zunaj do vretena pa po spodnji osi.

Pod grafom so prikazane vrednosti za najmanjšo, največjo ter povprečno vrednost branja in pisanja, povprečen dostopni čas ter pretekel čas od zadnjega primerjalnega preizkusa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-printer.page0000644000373100047300000000314612320731740027335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje vašega tiskalnika je pomembno za tiskanje natančnih barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kako umeriti tiskalnik?

Obstajata dva načina za profiliranje tiskalnika:

Uporaba fotospektrometrične naprave kot je Pantone ColorMunki

Prejemanje in tiskanje referenčne datoteke iz barvnega podjetja

Uporaba barvnega podjetja za ustvarjanje profila tiskalnika je običajno najcenejša možnost, če imate na voljo le eno ali dve različni vrsti papirja. S spletišča podjetja prejemite referenčne grafe, jih natisnite in v ovojnici pošljite podjetju, kjer bodo papir optično prebrali, ustvarili profil in vam poslali natančen profil ICC preko e-pošte.

Uporaba dragih naprav kot je ColorMunki je smiselna le, če profilirate večje število vrst črnila ali papirja.

Če zamenjate ponudnika črnila, ponovno umerite tiskalnik!

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-templates.page0000644000373100047300000000373412320731740025713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Hitro ustvarite nove dokumente iz predlog datotek po meri. Anita Reitere nitalynx@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Predloge za pogosto uporabljane vrste dokumentov

Če pogosto ustvarjate dokumente osnovane na isti vsebini, lahko uporabite predloge datotek. Predloga datoteke je lahko dokument, katerega oblikovanje bi želeli ponovno uporabiti. Naredite lahko na primer predlogo glave pisma.

Ustvarjanje nove predloge

Ustvarite dokument, ki bi ga radi uporabljali kot predlogo. V urejevalniku dokumentov lahko naredite glavo pisma.

Shranite datoteko z vsebino predloge v mapo Predloge v mapi Domača mapa. Če mapa Predloge ne obstaja, jo boste najprej morali ustvarili.

 Uporaba predloge za ustvarjanje dokumenta.

Odprite mapo kamor želite shraniti nov dokument.

Desno kliknite kjerkoli na prazen prostor v mapi, nato izberite Ustvari nov dokument. Imena razpoložljivih predlog bodo izpisana v podmeniju.

Izberite želeno predlogo s seznama.

Vnesite ime za novo ustvarjeni dokument.

Dvokliknite datoteko, da jo odprete in začnete urejati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-notifications.page0000644000373100047300000000351312320731740026575 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Lahko ste obveščeni, če je vaš barvni profil zastarel in nenatančen. Ali sem lahko obveščen/a, ko je moj barvni profil nenatančen?

Žal brez ponovnega umerjanja ni mogoče povedati ali je barvni profil natančen. Za določitev ali je potrebno ponovno umerjanje je zato uporabljen čas od zadnjega umerjanja.

Nekatera podjetja imajo zelo določena pravila zakasnitve profilov, saj lahko nenatančen barvni profil naredi veliko razliko pri končnemu izdelku.

Če nastavite pravilo časovne zakasnitve in je profil starejši kot pravilo, se bo prikazal rdeči opozorilni trikotnik zraven profila v NastavitveBarva pogovornem oknu. Prav tako se bo prikazalo opozorilno obvestilo vsakič ko se prijavite v svoj računalnik.

Za nastavitev pravila za zaslone in tiskalnike določite največjo starost profila v dneh:

[rupert@gnome] gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color recalibrate-printer-threshold 180 [rupert@gnome] gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color recalibrate-display-threshold 180 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/addremove-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000322412320731740026050 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Odstranite programe, ki jih ne uporabljate več. Odstranjevanje programov

Programsko središče Ubuntu vam pomaga odstraniti programsko opremo, katero več ne uporabljate.

Kliknite ikono Programsko središče Ubuntu v Zaganjalniku ali iščite Programsko središče v Pregledni plošči.

Ko se Programsko središče odpre, v zgornjem delu kliknite gumb Nameščeno.

Najdite program, ki ga želite odstraniti, z uporabo iskalne vrstice ali z ogledom seznama nameščenih programov.

Izberite program in kliknite Odstrani.

Morda boste morali vnesti svoje geslo. Po vpisanem geslu bo vaš program odstranjen.

Nekateri programi se za pravilno delovanje zanašajo na druge programe. V primeru, da poskusite odstraniti program, ki ga drug program potrebuje, bosta odstranjena oba. Preden bosta programa odstranjena, boste vprašani za potrditev, da si to res želite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-othersedit.page0000644000373100047300000000432112320731740025544 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com V možnostih omrežne povezave morate odstraniti oznako Na voljo vsem uporabnikom. Drugi uporabniki ne morejo urejati omrežnih povezav

V primeru da urejate omrežno povezavo, drugi uporabniki na računalniku pa ne morejo nastaviti povezave, da je na voljo za vse uporabnike. To pomeni, da se lahko vsi na računalniku povežejo s to povezavo, nastavitve pa lahko spremenijo le uporabniki s skrbniškimi pravicami.

Vzrok za to je, da nastavitve vplivajo na vse uporabnike, zato jih lahko spreminjajo le skrbniki.

V primeru da si drugi uporabniki želijo spremeniti povezavo, jo nastavite tako, da ni na voljo za vse na računalniku. Na ta način bodo lahko vsi upravljali svoje nastavitve povezave namesto da bi se zanašali na skupne, sistemske nastavitve povezave.

Prepričajte se, da si povezave ne delite več

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav.

Najdite povezavo za katero želite, da jo lahko urejajo vsi. Kliknite nanjo za izbiro in nato kliknite Uredi.

Za spremembo povezave boste morali vnesti skrbniško geslo, saj lahko to storijo le skrbniki.

Izberite Na voljo vsem uporabnikom in kliknite Shrani. Sedaj bodo lahko drugi uporabniki upravljali povezavo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/hardware.page0000644000373100047300000000233512320731740024406 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Strojna oprema Težave s strojno opremo, tiskalniki, nastavitve porabe, upravljanje barv, Bluetooth, diski … Strojna oprema in gonilniki Več tem
Težave Težave s strojno opremo Pogoste težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-macaddress.page0000644000373100047300000000401612320731740025501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Edinstveno določilo, ki je dodeljeno strojni opremi omrežja. Kaj je naslov MAC?

Naslov MAC je edinstveno določilo, ki jo je proizvajalec dodelil omrežni strojni opremi (kot je brezžična kartica ali kartica eternet). MAC pomeni Nadzor do dostopa predstavnosti in vsaka koda je edinstvena za določeno napravo.

Naslovi MAC so sestavljeni iz šestih nizov dveh znakov, ki so ločeni z dvopičjem. Primer naslova MAC je 00:1B:44:11:3A:B7.

Za določitev naslova MAC svoje omrežne strojne opreme:

Kliknite na omrežni meni v menijski vrstici.

Izberite Podrobnosti o povezavi.

Vaš naslov MAC bo prikazan kot Naslov strojne opreme.

V praksi boste morda želeli spremeniti ali "ponarediti" naslov MAC. Na primer, nekateri ponudniki interneta lahko zahtevajo, da se za dostop do njihove storitve uporabi določeni naslov MAC. Če omrežna kartica preneha delovati in morate vstaviti novo delujočo kartico, storitev več ne bo delovala. V takih primerih boste morali ponarediti naslov MAC.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sharing-bluetooth.page0000644000373100047300000000266312320731740026253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bluetooth souporaba datotek in možnosti prejema. Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Nadzorujte souporabo prek Bluetootha

Dovolite lahko dostop do map Javno in Prejemi za Bluetooth souporabo datotek in omejite dostop samo za zaupanja vredne naprave. Nastavite možnosti osebne souporabe datotek za nadzor dostopa do map v souporabi na vašem računalniku.

Naprava Bluetooth je zaupanja vredna če ste jo seznanili ali povezali vaš računalnik z njo. Oglejte si .

 Souporaba mape <file>Javno</file> prek Bluetootha

V Pregledni plošči odprite Osebna souporaba datotek.

Na seznamu izberite želene možnosti za souporabo datotek prek Bluetootha in možnosti prejemanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/app-cheese.page0000644000373100047300000000312012320731740024614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com To je kot da bi imeli svojo fotografsko kabino. Ustvarjanje zabavnih fotografij in videov s spletno kamero

S programom Cheese in spletno kamero lahko zajamete fotografije in videoposnetke, uveljavite zabavne posebne učinke in zabavo delite z drugimi.

Cheese privzeto v Ubuntuju ni nameščen. Za namestitev programa Cheese:

Kliknite to povezavo za zagon Programskega središča.

Preberite podrobnosti in mnenja o Cheese in se prepričajte, da ga želite namestiti.

V primeru da izberete namestitev, v oknu Programskega središča kliknite Namesti.

Morda boste morali za končanje namestitve vpisati skrbniško geslo.

Za pomoč pri uporabi Cheese si preberite Uporabniški vodnik Cheese.

Preden lahko preberete uporabniški vodnik Cheese ga morate namestiti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/about-this-guide.page0000644000373100047300000000360312320731740025762 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Nekaj nasvetov o uporabi Namiznega vodnika Ubuntu. O tem vodniku

Ta vodnik vas popelje po zmožnostih namizja Ubuntu, odgovori vam na vaša računalniško povezana vprašanja in vam priskrbi namige o učinkoviti rabi računalnika.

Vodnik je razdeljen na več manjših, na opravila usmerjenih tem in ne poglavij. To pomeni, da ne rabite pregledati cel priročnik, da bi našli odgovor na svoje vprašanje.

Sorodni predmeti so povezani. Povezave na dnu nekaterih strani, poimenovane "Nadaljnje branje" vas bodo usmerile na sorodne teme.

Vnosno polje na vrhu tega vodnika deluje kot iskalna vrstica. Ko začnete pisati, se bodo pojavili ustrezni rezultati iskanja. Da bi odprli stran, levo kliknite na katerikoli rezultat.

Ta vodnik se stalno posodablja. Čeprav poskušamo zagotoviti izčrpno zbirko podatkov, vemo, da tukaj ne bomo odgovorili na vsa vaša vprašanja. Vseeno bomo stalno dodajali več stvari, da vam bo vodnik v večjo pomoč.

Hvala vam, da ste si vzeli čas za branje Namiznega vodnika Ubuntu.

-- Ekipa dokumentacije Ubuntu

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-workspaces-switch.page0000644000373100047300000000372612320731740027403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odprite preklopnik delovnih površin in dvokliknite na eno od njih. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Preklop med delovnimi površinami Uporaba miške:

Odprite Zaganjalnik in kliknite na gumb preklopnik delovnih površin blizu dna. Dvokliknite na katerokoli okno ali delovno površino za preklop nanj ali ponovno pritisnite gumb preklopnika delovnih površin za vrnitev na svojo prejšnjo delovno površino.

 Uporaba tipkovnice:

Pritisnite CtrlAlt→ za premik na delovno površino, ki je desno od trenutne delovne površine.

Pritisnite CtrlAlt← za premik na delovno površino, ki je levo od trenutne delovne površine.

Pritisnite CtrlAlt↓ za premik na delovno površino, ki je pod trenutno delovno površino.

Pritisnite CtrlAlt↑ za premik na delovno površino, ki je nad trenutno delovno delovno površino.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-menu.page0000644000373100047300000000271412320731741026524 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Stephen M. Webb stephen@ubuntu.com Desni klik na ikono Zaganjalnika vam pokaže meni dejanj. Meniji ikone Zaganjalnika

Desni klik na ikono na Zaganjalnika vam odkrije meni dejanj. Dejanja na voljo so odvisna od tega ali je ikona na zaganjalniku zaklenjena ali ne, če je ikona za program ali se ta izvaja. Dejanja, ki so na voljo so naslednja.

zagon programa ali odpiranje dokumenta, mape ali naprave

odklepanje ikone na Zaganjalniku, če je bila predhodno zaklenjena (glej )

zaklepanje ikone na Zaganjalnik, če je bila predhodno odklenjena (glej )

končanje programa, ki se izvaja

preklapljanje med primerki programov ali okni, če je več kot en primerek ali okno

bližnjice določene za programe, kot so odpri nov dokument ali okno

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth.page0000644000373100047300000000237512320731741024623 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Povezava, pošiljanje datotek, vklop in izklop … Bluetooth

Bluetooth je brezžični protokol, ki vam omogoča povezavo z veliko različnimi vrstami naprav. Bluetooth se pogosto uporablja za naglavne slušalke in vhodne naprave kot so miške in tipkovnice. Bluetooth lahko uporabite tudi za pošiljanje datotek med napravami kot je z računalnika na vaš mobilni telefon.

Težave z Bluetooth Težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-install-moonlight.page0000644000373100047300000000307212320731741027041 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Nekatera spletišča za prikaz spletnih strani uporabljajo Silverlight. Vstavek Moonlight vam omogoča ogled teh strani. Nameščanje vstavka Silverlight

Silverlight je vstavek za vaš spletni brskalnik, ki vam omogoča ogled videov in uporabo vzajemnih spletnih strani na nekaterih spletiščih. Nekatera spletišča brez Silverlighta ne bodo delovala.

V primeru da gledate spletišče, ki zahteva Silverlight a ga nimate nameščenega, boste verjetno videli sporočilo, ki vas bo o tem obvestilo. Sporočilo bi moralo imeti navodila kako dobiti vstavek, vendar ta navodila morda ne bodo primerna za vaš spletni brskalnik ali različico Linuxa.

V primeru da želite videti spletišča, ki zahtevajo Silverlight, namestite vstavek Moonlight. To je prosta, odprtokodna različica Silverlight, ki deluje na Linuxu.

Za več podrobnosti in navodila za namestitev si oglejte spletišče Moonlight website.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-search.page0000644000373100047300000000241112320731741026051 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Poiščite svoje dokumente po naslovu ali avtorju. Iskanje datotek

Za začetek iskanja v programu Dokumenti:

Pritisnite CtrlF.

Kliknite na ikono povečevalnega stekla.

Začnite tipkati. Dokumenti se bodo ujemali po naslovu ali avtorju.

Rezultate iskanja lahko omejite ali filtrirate s klikom na gumb dol in izberete želene filtre.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-2sided.page0000644000373100047300000000323412320731741025613 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiskanje na obeh straneh papirja ali več strani na list. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Dvostransko tiskanje in tiskanje več strani na stran.

Natisnete lahko obe strani lista papirja:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

Pojdite na zavihek Nastavitev strani okna Tiskanje in s spustnega seznama izberite možnost Dvostransko. V primeru da je možnost onemogočena, dvostransko tiskanje za vaš tiskalnik ni na voljo.

Tiskalniki dvostransko tiskanje upravljajo na različne načine. Priporočamo vam preizkus svojega tiskalnika, da vidite, kako deluje.

Natisnete lahko več kot eno stran dokumenta na vsako stran papirja. Za to uporabite možnost Strani na stran.

Razpoložljivost teh možnosti je morda odvisna od vrste tiskalnika, ki jo imate kot tudi programa, ki ga uporabljate. Ta možnost morda ne bo vedno na voljo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-notspecifiededid.page0000644000373100047300000000252312320731741027227 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Privzeti profili zaslona nimajo datuma umerjanja. Zakaj privzetim profilom zaslona umeritev ne poteče?

Privzeti barvni profil za vsak zaslon je samodejno ustvarjen na osnovi EDID zaslona, ki je shranjen v čipu pomnilnika v zaslonu. EDID poda le posnetek razpoložljivih barv, ki jih je zaslon lahko prikazal ob času proizvodnje in ne vsebuje veliko drugih podatkov o popravilu barv.

EDID ni mogoče posodobiti zato nikoli ne poteče.

Pridobitev profila od proizvajalca zaslona ali ustvaritev lastnega profila pomaga pri natančnejšemu popravljanju barve.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-view.page0000644000373100047300000000261312320731741025562 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Oglejte si dokumente celozaslonsko. Prikažite dokumente shranjene krajevno ali na spletu

Ko odprete program Dokumenti so vsi vaši dokumenti, tisti shranjeni krajevno kot tudi tisti na spletu, prikazani kot sličice.

Da bi se vaši dokumenti Google Docs ali SkyDrive prikazali, je potrebno nastaviti Google ali Windows Live kot spletni račun.

Za prikaz vsebine dokumenta:

Kliknite na sličico. Dokument je prikazan s polno širino (ali celozaslonsko, če je razpet) v oknu Dokumenti.

Za izhod iz dokumenta kliknite na puščico za nazaj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-file-properties-basic.page0000644000373100047300000001141612320731741030644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ogled osnovnih podatkov, nastavitev dovoljenj in izbira privzetih programov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Lastnosti datoteke

Za ogled podatkov o datoteki ali mapi desno kliknite in izberite Lastnosti. Namesto tega lahko tudi izberete datoteko in pritisnite AltEnter.

Okno lastnosti datoteke prikazuje podrobnosti kot so vrsta datoteke, velikost datoteke in kdaj ste jo nazadnje spremenili. Če te podatke potrebujete pogosto, jih lahko imate prikazane v pogledu seznama stolpcev ali ikon.

Podatki v zavihku Osnovno so razloženi spodaj. Na voljo so tudi zavihka Dovoljenja in Odpri z. Za določene vrste datoteke kot so slike in videi bo na voljo dodaten zavihek, ki vsebuje podatke o merah, trajanju in kodeku.

Osnovne lastnosti <gui>Ime</gui>

Datoteko lahko preimenujete s spremembo tega polja. Datoteko lahko preimenujete tudi izven okna lastnosti. Oglejte .

 <gui>Vrsta</gui>

To vam pomaga določiti vrste datotek kot so dokument PDF, besedilo OpenDocument ali slika JPEG. Vrsta datoteke med drugim določa kateri programi lahko odprejo datoteko. Slike na primer ne morete odpreti s predvajalnikom glasbe. Za več podrobnosti o tem si oglejte .

Vrsta MIME je datoteka prikazana v oklepaju; vrsta MIME je standardni način, ki ga računalniki uporabljajo za sklicevanje na vrsto datoteke.

 Vsebina

To polje se prikaže, če gledate lastnosti mape, ne datoteke. Pomaga vam videti število predmetov v mapi. Če mapa vsebuje druge mape, se posamezne notranje mape štejejo kot en predmet, tudi če vsebujejo več predmetov. Vsaka datoteka se prav tako šteje kot en predmet. Če je mapa prazna, bo vsebina prikazala ničesar.

 Velikost

To polje se prikaže, če gledate datoteko (ne mape). Velikost datoteke vam pove, koliko prostora na disku zaseda. To je tudi pokazatelj, kako dolgo bo trajalo, da prenesete datoteko ali jo pošljete preko e-pošte (velike datoteke za pošiljanje/prejemanje zahtevajo več časa).

Velikosti so lahko v bajtih, KB, MB, or GB; v primeru zadnjih treh bo velikost v bajtih podana tudi v oklepaju. 1 KB je 1024 bajtov, 1 MB je 1024 KB in tako dalje.

 Mesto

Mesto vsake datoteke na računalniku je podano z absolutno potjo. To je edinstven "naslov" datoteke na računalniku, sestavljen iz seznama map, ki je potreben za najdbo datoteke. Na primer, če ima Jure datoteko z imenom Naloga.pdf v svoji domači mapi, bo njeno mesto /home/jure/Naloga.pdf.

 Nosilec

Datotečni sistem ali naprava, na katerem je datoteka shranjena. To vam pokaže, kje je datoteka fizično shranjena, na primer, če je na trdem disku ali na CD-ju, ali omrežni souporabi ali datotečnem strežniku. Trde diske lahko razdelite na več razdelkov. Razdelek bo prikazan tudi pod odsekom Nosilec.

 Nezaseden prostor

To je prikazano samo za mape. Podaja količino prostora, ki je na voljo na disku, na katerem je mapa. To je uporabno za preverjanje, če je trdi disk poln.

 Dostopano

Datum in čas, ko je bila datoteka zadnjič odprta.

 Spremenjeno

Datum in čas zadnje spremembe in shranjevanja datoteke.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-changepassword.page0000644000373100047300000000571312320731741026601 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obdržite svoj račun varen s pogostim spreminjanem gesla v nastavitvah računa. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Spreminjanje gesla

Občasno spreminjanje gesla je dobra ideja, še posebno, če mislite, da nekdo drug pozna vaše geslo.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Uporabiški računi.

Kliknite na oznako poleg Geslo.

Oznaka bi morala biti prikazana kot vrsta pik ali škatel, če že imate nastavljeno geslo.

Vnesite svoje trenutno geslo in nato novo geslo. Ponovno vnesite svoje geslo v polje Potrditev gesla.

Da izberete naključno ustvarjeno varno geslo, lahko kliknete na gumb poleg polja Novo geslo. Ta gesla so težka in jih drugi ne morejo uganiti, si jih boste pa tudi težko zapomnili, zato bodite previdni.

Kliknite Spremeni.

Prepričajte se, da ste izbrali dobro geslo. To vam bo pomagalo obdržati vaš račun varen.

Sprememba gesla zbirke ključev

V primeru da svoje prijavno geslo spremenite, lahko postane neusklajeno z geslom zbirke ključev. Zbirka ključev vam omogoča, da si zapomnite veliko različnih gesel le z enim glavnim geslom, ki omogoča dostop do vseh gesel. V primeru da spremenite svoje uporabniško geslo (glejte zgoraj), bo geslo vaše zbirke ključev ostalo enako kot vaše stare geslo. Za spremembo gesla zbirke ključev (da se bo ujemalo z vašim prijavnim geslom):

Odprite program Gesla in ključi iz Pregledne plošče.

Prepričajte se, da je v meniju Pogled izbrana možnot Po zbirki ključev.

V stranski vrstici pod Gesla desno kliknite na Zbirka prijavnih ključev. Izberite Spremeni geslo.

Vnesite svoje Staro geslo, ki mu sledi novo Geslo in Potrdite svoje novo geslo z njegovim ponovnim vnašanjem.

Kliknite V redu.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-batteryestimate.page0000644000373100047300000000452612320731741027156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Trajanje baterije, ki je prikazano, ko kliknete na ikono baterije, je le ocena. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Ocenjeno trajanje baterije je napačno

Ko preverite preostalo trajanje baterije, lahko ugotovite da preostali čas ni nujno enak dejanskemu trajanju baterije. To je zato, ker je količino preostalega časa baterije mogoče le oceniti. Vendar pa bi se ocene morale s časom izboljšati.

Za oceno preostalega časa baterije je treba v račun vključiti veliko dejavnikov. En od njih je trenutna poraba. Poraba je odvisna od števila odprtih programov, vklopljenih naprav in ali izvajate intenzivne naloge (kot sta na primer ogled DVD-jev ali pretvarjanje glasbenih datotek). Poraba se stalno spreminja in jo je težko predvideti.

Drug dejavnik je kako se baterija prazni. Nekatere baterije se praznijo hitreje, ko so bolj prazne. Brez natančnega znanja kako se baterije praznijo, je mogoče narediti le grobo oceno preostalega življenja baterije.

Ko se baterija prazni, bo Upravljalnik porabe ugotovil njene lastnosti praznjenja in se naučil kako boljše oceniti trajanje baterije. Vendar pa ocene nikoli ne bodo popolnoma natančne.

V primeru da dobite popolnoma smešno oceno trajanja baterije (na primer stotine dni!), Upravljalniku porabe verjetno manjkajo nekateri podatki, ki jih potrebuje za smiselno oceno.

Če napajanje odklopite in nekaj časa prenosnik poganjate na bateriji, ga nato priklopite in ga pustite polniti, bi Upravljalnik porabe moral dobiti podatke, ki jih potrebuje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-copy.page0000644000373100047300000001001312320731741024654 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kopiranje ali premik predmetov v novo mapo. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kopiranje ali premik datotek ali map

Mapo ali datoteko lahko kopirate ali premaknete na novo mesto z vlečenjem in spuščanjem z miško, z uporabo ukazov kopiraj in prilepi ali z uporabo tipkovnih bližnjic.

Morda boste na primer želeli predstavitev kopirati na usb ključek zato, da ga lahko vzamete s seboj na delo. Ali pa lahko naredite varnostno kopijo dokumenta preden ga spremenite (in nato uporabite staro kopijo, če vam spremembe niso všeč.)

Ta navodila veljajo tako za datoteke in mape. Datoteke in mape lahko kopirate na popolnoma enak način.

Kopiranje in lepljenje datotek

Z enojnim klikom izberite datoteko, ki jo želite kopirati.

Desni klik in izberite Kopiraj ali pritisnite CtrlC.

Krmarite do druge mape kamor želite kopirati datoteko.

Za končanje kopiranja datoteke kliknite na ikono zobnika in izberite Prilepi ali pritisnite CtrlV. Sedaj bo kopija datoteke v izvirni mapi in v drugi mapi.

 Izrez in lepljenje datotek za njihov premik

Z enojnim klikom izberite datoteko, ki jo želite premakniti.

Desni klik in izberite Izreži ali pritisnite CtrlX.

Krmarite v drugo mapo kamor želite premakniti datoteko.

Za končanje premikanja datoteke kliknite na ikono zobnika v orodni vrstici in izberite Prilepi ali pritisnite CtrlV. Sedaj bo bila datoteka iz izvirni mapi premaknjena v drugo mapo.

 Vleka datotek za kopiranje ali premik

Odprite upravljalnik datotek in pojdite v mapo, ki vsebuje datoteko, ki jo želite kopirati.

Za odprtje novega okna kliknite Datoteka v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Novo okno (ali pritisnite CtrlN). V novem oknu krmarite do mape kamor želite kopirati ali premakniti datoteko.

Kliknite in povlecite datoteko iz enega okna v drugo. Privzeto bo vlečenje predmeta predmet premaknilo, če je cilj na isti napravi in kopiralo, če je cilj na drugi napravi.

Če na primer datoteko povlečete iz USB ključka v svojo domačo mapo, bo datoteka kopirana, ker datoteko vlečete z ene naprave na drugo.

Za prisiljenje kopiranja datoteke med vlečenjem pritisnite in držite tipko Ctrl, za prisiljenje premikanja med vlečenjem pritisnite in držite tipko Shift.

Datoteke ne morete kopirati ali premakniti v mapo, ki je na voljo le za branje. Nekatere mape so le za branje zato, da vam preprečijo spremembe vsebine. Mape lahko iz dostopnosti le za branje spremenite s spremembo dovoljenj datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts-disable-service.page0000644000373100047300000000376212320731741027475 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Nekateri spletni računi vam dovolijo uporabo več storitev (kot sta koledar in e-pošta). Vi izberete katere storitve želite da jih krajevni programi uporabljajo. Onemogoči storitve računa

Nekatere vrste spletnih računov vam dovolijo dostop do več storitev iz enega uporabniškega računa. Na primer, račun Google vam zagotavlja dostop do e-pošte, koledarja, stikov, itn. Vi pa lahko izberete Google za e-pošto in Yahoo! za klepet oziroma katerokoli kombinacijo ki vam jo dovoli ponudnik storitev.

Za onemogočanje storitev:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Izberite Spletni računi.

Izberite račun, ki ga želite spremeniti, iz pladnja na levi strani.

Storitve, ki so na voljo za ta račun, so izpisane na pladnju na desni strani.

Izključite storitve, ki ne želite da so uporabljene.

Enkrat ko je storitev onemogočena, krajevni programi ne bodo imeli dostop do nje. Za obnovitev dostopa, pojdite nazaj v Spletni računi in vključite storitev nazaj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-collections.page0000644000373100047300000000400612320731741027124 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Povežite sorodne dokumente v zbirko. Ustvarjanje zbirk dokumentov

Dokumenti vam omogočajo, da dokumente različnih vrst, združite skupaj na enem mestu imenovanem zbirka. Če imate dokumente, ki so sorodni, jih lahko za lažje iskanje združite skupaj. Na primer, če ste imeli poslovno potovanje za katerega ste naredili predstavitev, vaše prosojnice, načrt potovanja (dokument PDF), preglednica stroškov in drugi dokumenti PDF/ODF se lahko združijo v eno zbirko.

Za ustvarjanje ali dodajanje k zbirki:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

V načinu izbire, označite dokumente za zbirko.

Kliknite gumb + v vrstici z gumbi.

Na seznamu zbirk kliknite Dodaj in vnesite ime nove zbirke ali izberite obstoječo zbirko. Izbrani dokumenti bodo dodani k zbirki.

Zbirke se ne obnašajo kot mape in njihova hierarhija: ne morete dati zbirke znotraj zbirke..

Za izbris zbirke:

Kliknite na gumb ✓.

V izbirnem načinu izberite katero zbirko želite izbrisati.

Kliknite na gumb Smeti v vrstici z gumbi. Zbirka bo izbrisana, prvotni dokumenti pa ohranjeni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-goodpassword.page0000644000373100047300000000724412320731742026306 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporabite daljša, bolj zapletena gesla. Izbor varnega gesla

Naredite gesla dovolj enostavna, da si jih lahko zapomnite, vendar zelo težka za ugibanje (tudi za računalniške programe).

Izbira dobrega gesla vam bo pomagala obdržati vaš računalnik varen. V primeru da je vaše geslo enostavno uganiti, ga lahko nekdo ugotovi in pridobi dostop do vaših osebnih podatkov.

Ljudje lahko za sistematično ugibanje gesel uporabijo računalniške programe. Zato je lahko geslo, ki bi ga človek težko uganil, za računalnik izjemno enostavno. Tukaj je nekaj namigov za izbiro dobrega gesla:

Uporabite tako velike kot male črke, številke, simbole in presledke v geslu. Tako je geslo veliko težje uganiti. Veliko simbolov je na voljo zato je tudi veliko različnih gesel potrebno preverit, če nekdo poskuša uganiti vaše geslo.

Dober način izbire gesla je da vzamete prvo črko vsake besede iz stavka, ki si ga lahko zapomnite. Stavek je lahko naslov filma, knjige, pesmi ali albuma. Na primer "Gremo mi po svoje 2" postane Gmps2 ali GMpsDve.

Naredite svoja gesla kolikor je mogoče dolga. Več črk kot vsebujejo, dlje časa bo oseba ali računalnik porabila za njihovo ugibanje.

Ne uporabite besed, ki je pojavijo v slovarju v kateremukoli jeziku. Programi za zlom gesel najprej preizkusijo slovarje. Najbolj pogosto geslo je "geslo" - ljudje lahko takšna gesla zelo hitro uganejo!

Ne uporabljajte osebnih podatkov kot so datum, registrske tablice ali pa ime kateregakoli člana družine.

Ne uporabljajte samostalnikov.

Izberite geslo katerega lahko hitro natipkate in tako zmanjšate možnost, da nekdo ki vsa slučajno gleda si zapomni kaj ste natipkali.

Nikoli si ne zapisati gesla, ker nekdo lahko ta listek najde!

Uporabite različna gesla za različne stvari.

Uporabite različna gesla za različne račune.

V primeru da za vse račune uporabljate isto geslo, bo tisti, ki ga ugane, lahko nemudoma dostopal do vseh vaših računov.

Težko si je zapomniti veliko gesel. Čeprav ni tako varno kot različna gesla za vsako stran, je lažje če uporabite eno geslo za stvari, ki vam niso pomembne (na primer spletišča) in različna gesla za pomembne stvari (kot so spletni bančni račun in vaša e-pošta).

Redno spreminjajte svoje geslo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/media.page0000644000373100047300000000304412320731742023670 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Fotoaparati, iPodi, predvajanje videov… Zvok, video in slike
Zvok Zvok Zvok Glasnost, zvočniki in slušalke, mikrofoni … Osnovni zvok
Glasba in predvajalniki Glasba in prenosni predvajalniki zvoka
Fotografije Fotografije in digitalni fotoaparati
Video posnetki Videoposnetki in video kamere
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-braille.page0000644000373100047300000000203112320731742024767 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporabite bralnik zaslona Orka z osvežujočim se Braillovim zaslonom. Preberite zaslon v Braillovi pisavi

GNOME provides the Orca screen reader to display the user interface on a refreshable Braille display. Depending on how you installed GNOME, you might not have Orca installed. Install Orca, then refer to the Orca Help for more information.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-connect-device.page0000644000373100047300000000731712320731742027511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Parjenje naprav Bluetooth. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Povezava računalnika z napravo Bluetooth.

Preden lahko prenašate datoteke med napravami z omogočenim Bluetoothom, jih morate povezati. To se imenuje tudi spoznavanje naprav Bluetooth.

Preden začnete, se prepričajte, da je Bluetooth na vašem računalniku omogočen. Oglejte si .

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavi novo napravo.

Izberite ikono Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavi novo napravo.

Naredite drugo napravo Bluetooth vidno in jo postavite manj kot 10 metrov stran od računalnika. Nato izberite Naprej. Vaš računalnik bo začel z iskanjem naprav.

V primeru da je izpisanih preveč naprav, uporabite spustno vrstico Vrsta naprave za prikaz le ene vrste naprav na seznamu.

Izberite Možnosti PIN za nastavitev dostavljanja PIN na drugo napravo.

Samodejna nastavitev PIN bo uporabila številčno kodo iz šestih znakov. Naprava brez vnosnih tipk ali zaslona kot je miška ali slušalke morda zahteva določen PIN kot je 0000 ali nobenega PIN-a sploh. Za pravilno nastavitev preverite priročnik svoje naprave.

Izberite primerno nastavitev PIN za svojo napravo in nato izberite Zapri.

Kliknite Naprej za nadaljevanje. V primeru da niste izbrali prenastavljenega PIN, se bo prikazal na zaslonu.

Če je to zahtevano, potrdite PIN na drugi napravi. Naprava bi vam morala pokazati PIN, ki ga vidite na računalniškem zaslonu ali vas lahko pozove k vnosu PIN-a. Potrdite PIN na napravi in nato kliknite Ujemanja.

Na večini naprav morate vnašanje končati v približno 20 sekundah ali pa se povezava ne bo dokončala. V primeru da se to zgodi, se vrnite na seznam naprav in začnite znova.

Ko se povezava uspešno dokonča, se pojavi sporočilo. Kliknite Zapri.

Če želite, lahko kasneje povezavo Bluetooth odstranite.

Za nadzor dostopa vaših datotek v souporabi, glejte nastavitve Souporaba Bluetooth. Glejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-admin-change.page0000644000373100047300000000411012320731742026073 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabnike, ki lahko spreminjajo sistem, lahko dodate tako, da jim dodate skrbniška dovoljenja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Sprememba kdo ima skrbniška dovoljenja

Skrbniška dovoljenja so način za odločanje kdo lahko naredi spremembe pomembnih delov sistema. Spremenite lahko uporabnike, ki imajo ali nimajo skrbniških dovoljenj. To je dober način za ohranjanje vašega sistema varnega in preprečevanje morebitnih škodljivih neoverjenih sprememb.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Uporabiški računi.

Da odklenete nastavitve računa, kliknite Odkleni in vnesite svoje geslo. (Da nekomu dodelite skrbniške pravice, morate imeti tudi sami skrbniške pravice.)

Izberite uporabnika katerega dovoljenja želite spremeniti.

Kliknite na oznako Običajen poleg Vrsta računa in nato izberite Skrbnik.

Zaprite okno Uporabniški računi. Dovoljenja uporabnikov bodo spremenjena ob njihovi naslednji prijavi.

Prvi uporabniški račun na sistemu ima skrbniške pravice. To je uporabniški račun, ki je bil ustvarjen, ko ste prvič namestili sistem.

Na sistemu ni dobro imeti preveč uporabnikov s pravico Skrbnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-problem-connecting.page0000644000373100047300000000526412320731742030407 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vmesnik je lahko izklopljen ali pa morda nimate gonilnikov ali pa je Bluetooth onemogočen ali blokiran. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ne morem se povezati s svojo napravo Bluetooth

Obstajajo številni vzroki zakaj svoje naprave Bluetooth (kot je telefon ali slušalke) ne morete povezati.

Povezava je blokirana ali ni zaupanja vredna

Nekatere naprave povezave Bluetooth privzeto blokirajo ali pa od vas zahtevajo spremembo nastavitve, ki omogoči vzpostavitev povezav. Prepričajte se, da je vaša povezava nastavljena za omogočanje povezav.

 Strojna oprema Bluetooth ni prepoznana

Vaše kartice Bluetooth morda računalnik ni prepoznal. To se lahko zgodi, ker gonilniki za kartico niso nameščeni. Nekatere kartice Bluetooth na Linuxu niso podprte, zato morda ne morete dobiti pravih gonilnikov za njih. V tem primeru boste verjetno morali dobiti drugo kartico Bluetooth.

 Vmesnik ni vklopljen

Prepričajte se, da je vaš vmesnik Bluetooth vklopljen. Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in preverite, da ni onemogočena.

Make sure that your Bluetooth adapter is switched on. Click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and check that it's not disabled.

 Povezava naprave Bluetooth je izklopljena

Preverite, da je Bluetooth na napravi, s katero se poskušate povezati, vklopljen. Če se na primer poskušate povezati s telefonom, se prepričajte, da ni v letalskem načinu.

 Na vašem računalniku ni vmesnika Bluetooth

Večina računalnikov nima Bluetootha. V primeru da želite Bluetooth uporabiti, lahko kupite kartico Bluetooth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-disconnecting.page0000644000373100047300000000652612320731742030067 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Morda imate šibek signal ali pa vam omrežje ne dopušča primerne povezave. Zakaj se povezava z mojim brezžičnim omrežjem kar naprej prekinja?

Lahko se zgodi, da se vaša povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem prekine, čeprav ste želeli ostati povezani. Vaš računalnik se ponavadi takoj ko se kaj takega zgodi sam poskuša ponovno povezati z omrežjem (ikona omrežja začne utripati, če se računalnik poskuša ponovno povezati). Vseeno je to lahko zoprno, še posebno, če ste takrat uporabljali internet.

Šibek brezžični signal

Pogost vzrok za prekinitev povezave z brezžičnim omrežjem je šibek signal. Brezžične povezave imajo omejen doseg zato v primeru, da ste predaleč od osnovne brezžične postaje, morda ne boste imeli dovolj močnega signala za vzdrževanje povezave. Zidovi in drugi predmeti med vami in postajo lahko naredijo signal šibkejši.

Ikona omrežja v menijski vrstici prikazuje, kako močan je vaš brezžični signal. Če je signal videti šibek, se premaknite bližje k brezžični napravi.

Omrežna povezava ni bila ustrezno vzpostavljena

Včasih je ob poskusu povezave z brezžičnim omrežjem morda najprej videti, da ste se uspešno povezali, vendar bo nato povezava prekinjena. To se običajno zgodi, ker je bil vaš računalnik le delno uspešen pri povezovanju z omrežjem. Računalnik je uspel vzpostaviti povezavo, vendar povezave ni mogel zaključiti in je zato povezavo prekinil.

Mogoč vzrok za to je, da ste vnesli napačno šifrirno frazo ali pa da vaš računalnik ni dovoljen na omrežju (ker omrežje za prijavo zahteva uporabniško ime).

Nezanesljiva brezžična strojna oprema/gonilniki

Nekatera strojna oprema brezžičnih omrežij je lahko nezanesljiva. Brezžična omrežja so zapletena, zato imajo brezžične kartice in osnovne postaje občasno manjše težave in lahko prekinejo povezave. To je moteče, vendar se z veliko napravami pogosto dogaja. V primeru da se vaše omrežne povezave občasno prekinjajo, je to lahko vzrok. V primeru da se to dogaja zelo pogosto, preizkusite drugo strojno opremo.

Zaposlena brezžična omrežja

Z brezžičnimi povezavami na zaposlenih mestih (na primer na univerzah in v kavarnah) se pogosto poskuša povezati več računalnikov hkrati. Včasih so ta omrežja prezaposlena in ne morejo upravljati vseh računalnikov, ki se poskušajo povezati, zato povezavo z nekaterimi od njih prekinejo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-willnotturnon.page0000644000373100047300000000512312320731742026701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Možna vzroka sta razrahljani kabli in težave s strojno opremo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Moj računalnik se ne prižge

Obstaja veliko razlogov zakaj se računalnik ne prižge. Ta tema na kratko opiše nekaj mogočih vzrokov.

Računalnik ni vklopljen, prazna baterija ali razrahljan kabel

Prepričajte se, da napajalni kabli računalnika so trdno priključeni ter da so vtičnice vklopljene. Prav tako se prepričajte, da je zaslon priključen in vklopljen. Če imate prenosni računalnik, priključite napajalne kable (v primeru, da zmanjka baterije). Prav tako lahko preverite, da je baterija pravilno nameščena (preverite spodnjo stran prenosnika), če je odstranljiva.

Težave s strojno opremo računalnika

Sestavni del vašega računalnika je lahko pokvarjen. V tem primeru morate svoj računalnik popraviti. Pogoste napake so pokvarjen napajalnik, nepravilno vstavljeni sestavni deli (kot je na primer RAM) in pokvarjena matična plošča.

Računalnik zapiska in se izklopi.

V primeru da računalnik ob vklopu večkrat zapiska in se nato izklopi (ali se noče vklopiti), to morda nakazuje, da je zaznal težavo. Ti piski se imenujejo tudi kode piska in vzorci piskov vam povejo kaj je narobe z računalnikom. Različni proizvajalci uporabljajo različne kode piskanja zato si oglejte priročnik za svojo matično ploščo ali ga odnesite na popravilo.

Ventilatorji se vrtijo, vendar ni ničesar na zaslonu

Prva stvar, ki jo preverite, je ta, da je zaslon priklopljen in prižgan.

Vaša težava bi lahko bila napaka strojne opreme. Ventilatorji se morda ob pritisku na gumb za vklop zavrtijo, vendar se drugi nujni deli računalnika morda ne vklopijo. V tem primeru svoj računalnik odpeljite na popravilo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-assignprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000404612320731742026760 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za spremembo te možnosti si oglejte Sistemske nastavitveBarva. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako določiti profile napravam?

Odprite Sistemske nastavitveBarva in kliknite na napravo kateri želite dodati profil.

Odprite Sistemske nastavitveBarva in kliknite na napravo kateri želite dodati profil.

S klikom na Dodaj profil lahko izberete obstoječi profil ali uvozite novo datoteko.

Za vsako napravo lahko določite več profilov, vendar lahko le en profil nastavite kot privzeti profil. Privzeti profil se uporablja, ko ni na voljo dodatnih podatkov, ki omogočajo samodejen izbor profila. Primer te samodejne izbire je, če je bil en profil ustvarjen za bleščeč in drug za običajen papir.

Profil lahko naredite privzet tako da ga izberete z izbirnim gumbom.

Če je povezana strojna oprema umerjanja, bo gumb Umeri ... ustvaril nov profil.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-usespeakers.page0000644000373100047300000000514712320731742026277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Povežite zvočnike ali slušalke in izberite privzeto izhodno zvočno napravo. Uporaba drugih zvočnikov ali slušalk

Na svojem računalniku lahko uporabljate zunanje zvočnike ali slušalke. Zvočniki se običajno priklopijo preko okroglega priključka TRS (konica, obroč, rokav) ali preko USB-ja.

V primeru da imajo vaši zvočniki ali slušalke vtič TRS, ga vklopite v ustrezen vtič na računalniku. Večina računalnikov ima dva vtiča: enega za mikrofone in enega za zvočnike. Najdite sliko mikrofona poleg vtiča. Zvočniki ali slušalke vklopljene v vtič TRS bodo običajno privzeto uporabljene. V primeru da niso, si oglejte navodila za izbiro privzete naprave.

Nekateri računalniki podpirajo večkanalni izhod za prostorski zvok. To običajno pomeni več priključkov TRS, ki so pogosto obarvani. Če niste prepričani kateri priključki spadajo v katere vtiče, lahko zvočni izhod preizkusite v nastavitvah zvoka. Kliknite zvočni meni v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve zvoka. Izberite svoje zvočnike s seznama naprav in nato kliknite Preizkus zvoka. V pojavnem oknu kliknite na gumb za vsak zvočnik. Vsak gumb bo svoj položaj sporočil samo kanalu, ki ustreza temu zvočniku.

V primeru da imate zvočnike ali slušalke USB ali analogne slušalke vklopljene v zvočno kartico USB, jih vklopite v katerakoli vrata USB. Zvočniki USB se obnašajo kot ločene zvočne naprave, zato boste morda morali navesti, katere zvočnike želite privzeto uporabiti.

Izberite privzeto zvočno vhodno napravo

Kliknite na meni zvoka v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve zvoka.

Na zavihku Izhod izberite napravo s seznama naprav.

V primeru da svoje naprave ne vidite v zavihku Izhod, preverite zavihek Strojna oprema. Izberite svojo napravo in poskusite različne profile.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sound-volume.page0000644000373100047300000000437312320731742025254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Nastavitev glasnosti za računalnik in nadziranje glasnosti vsakega programa. Spreminjanje glasnosti zvoka

Za spremembo glasnosti kliknite zvočni meni v menijski vrstici in premaknite drsnik glasnosti levo ali desno. Zvok lahko popolnoma izklopite z izbiro Utišaj.

Nekatere tipkovnice imajo tipke, ki vam omogočajo nadzor glasnosti. Običajno so videti kot zvočniki z valovi, ki prihajajo iz njih. Običajno so blizu tipk "F" (na primer F7).

Seveda lahko, če imate zunanje zvočnike, glasnost spremenite tudi z nadzorom glasnosti na zvočnikih. Tudi nekatere slušalke vsebujejo nadzor glasnosti.

Spreminjanje glasnosti za posamezne programe

Spremenite lahko glasnost za en program ter jo pustite nespremenjeno za druge programe. To je uporabno kadar poslušate glasbo in na primer brskate po spletu. Morda želite utišati glasnost v spletnem brskalniku, tako da zvoki iz spletnih strani ne motijo vaše glasbe.

Nekateri programi imajo lasten nadzor glasnosti znotraj glavnega okna. Če vaš program ima tak nadzor, potem spremenite glasnost znotraj programa. Če takega nadzora nima, kliknite zvočni meni v menijski vrstici in nato Nastavitve zvoka. Pojdite na zavihek Programi in tam spremenite glasnost programa.

Prikazani bodo le programi, ki predvajajo zvoke. V primeru da program predvaja zvoke, a ni na seznamu, morda ne podpira nadzora glasnosti na ta način. V tem primeru njegove glasnosti ne morete spremeniti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-apps.page0000644000373100047300000000361512320731742025643 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zaganjanje, namestitev ali odstranitev programov. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Leča programi

Leča programi je prva leča po domu Pregledne plošče v vrstici leč. Leča programi vam ponuja dostop do vaših programov ali programov, ki so na voljo za namestitev.

Za odprtje pregledne plošče neposredno v leči programov lahko uporabite SuperA.

Predogledi

Desno kliknite na rezultat iskanja za odprtje predogleda. Predogled pokaže kratek opis programa, zaslonsko sliko, oceno iz Programskega središča in katera različica je na voljo.

Za nameščene programe lahko vidite kdaj so bile nameščeni ter jih zaženete ali odstranite. Določenih nujnih programov iz predogleda ni mogoče odstraniti.

Programe, ki še niso bili nameščeni, lahko namestite iz predogleda.

Filtri

Kliknite filtriraj rezultate, če želite videti le rezultate za določeno vrsto programov. Kliknete lahko ViriKrajevni programi za ogled le nameščenih programov ali ViriProgramsko središče za ogled le programov, ki so na voljo za namestitev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-workspaces-movewindow.page0000644000373100047300000000415112320731742030273 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odprite preklopnik delovnih površin in povlecite okno na drugo delovno površino. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Premik trenutnega okna na drugo delovno površino

Uporaba miške:

Odprite Zaganjalnik in kliknite na ikono preklopnika delovnih površin blizu dna.

Povlecite okno na delovno površino po svoji izbiri.

Uporaba tipkovnice:

Izberite okno za premik

Pritisnite CtrlAltShift→ za premik okna na delovno površino, ki je desno od trenutne delovne površine v preklopniku delovnih površin.

Pritisnite CtrlAltShift← za premik okna na delovno površino, ki je levo od trenutne delovne površine v preklopniku delovnih površin.

Pritisnite CtrlAltShift↓ za premik okna na delovno površino, ki je pod trenutno delovno površino v preklopniku delovnih površin.

Pritisnite CtrlAltShift↑ za premik okna na delovno površino, ki je nad trenutno delovno površino v preklopniku delovnih površin.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-chat-empathy.page0000644000373100047300000000306712320731742025766 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Z Empathy lahko klepetate, vzpostavljate zvočne in video klice s prijatelji in znanci na številnih omrežjih. Hipno sporočanje na Ubuntuju

Z Empathy lahko klepetati s povezanimi ljudmi in prijatelji, ki uporabljajo Google Talk, AIM, Windows Live in veliko drugih programov za klepet. Z mikrofonom ali spletno kamero lahko vzpostavite tudi zvočne ali video klice.

Empathy je v Ubuntuju privzeto nameščen. Hipno sporočanje Empathy lahko zaženete iz Pregledne plošče, Zaganjalnika ali izberete Klepet iz menija Sporočanje.

Svoje stanje hipnega sporočanja (Na voljo, Odsoten, Zaposlen, itd.) lahko spremenite v meniju Sporočanje.

Za pomoč pri uporabi Empathy preberite priročnik Empathy.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-bookmarks-edit.page0000644000373100047300000000417312320731743027373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje, brisanje in preimenovanje zaznamkov v upravljalniku datotek. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Urejanje zaznamkov map

Vaši zaznamki so izpisani v stranski vrstici upravljalnika datotek.

Dodajanje zaznamka:

Odprite mapo (ali mesto) katerega zaznamek želite ustvariti.

V orodni vrstici kliknite na ikono zobnika in izberite Zaznamuj to mesto.

 Izbris zaznamka:

V vrhnji vrstici kliknite na Datoteke in izberite Zaznamki iz menija programa.

V oknu Zaznamki izberite zaznamek, ki ga želite izbrisati in kliknite na gumb -.

 Preimenovanje zaznamka:

V vrhnji vrstici kliknite na Datoteke in izberite Zaznamki iz menija programa.

V oknu Zaznamki izberite zaznamek, ki ga želite preimenovati.

V besedilnem polju Ime vpišite novo ime zaznamka.

Preimenovanje zaznamka mape ne preimenuje. V primeru da imate zaznamke do dveh različnih map na dveh različnih mestih, ki imata enako ime, bosta zaznamka imela enako ime in ju ne boste mogli ločiti. V tem primeru je zaznamku uporabno dati ime, ki se razlikuje od imena mape, do katere kaže.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/disk.page0000644000373100047300000000140012320731743023536 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Prostor na disku, primerjava zmogljivosti, težave, nosilci in razdelki … Diski in shramba usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard.page0000644000373100047300000000225612320731743024416 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vhodni viri, utripanje vrivnika, tipka super, dostopnost tipkovnice … Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Tipkovnica Jezik in področje Splošni dostop Druge teme usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-sensitivity.page0000644000373100047300000000445212320731743026336 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spremenite kako hitro se premika miškin kazalec, ko uporabite miško ali drsno ploščico. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prilagoditev hitrosti miške in drsne ploščice

Če se vaš kazalec ob premiku miške ali uporabi drsne ploščice premika prehitro ali prepočasi, lahko prilagodite hitrost kazalca za te naprave.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

Prilagodite drsnik HItrost kazalca dokler ni premik kazalca za vas udoben.

Hitrost kazalca lahko različno nastavite za miško in drsno ploščico. Včasih najbolj udobne nastavitve za eno napravo niso najboljše za drugo napravo. Nastavite drsnika tako v odseku Miška kot Drsna ploščica.

Odsek Drsna ploščica se pojavi le, če vaš sistem vsebuje drsno ploščico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-shapes.page0000644000373100047300000000373412320731743027050 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Trikotnik vam prikaže trenutno izvajajoče se programe. Kaj pomenijo različne oblike in barve ikon Zaganjalnika?

Ko zaženete program, ikona Zagnjalnika utripa in vas s tem obvesti, da Ubuntu začenja vaš program. To je uporabno, ker program nekaterih programov traja nekaj časa.

Ko se je program nehal zaganjati, se bo na levi strani kvadrata Zaganjalnika pojavil majhen bel trikotnik. Dva trikotnika pomenita, da sta odprti dve okni istega programa. Če so odprta tri ali več oken, bodo prikazani trije trikotniki.

Ikone Programov, ki se trenutno ne izvajajo, so v Zaganjalniku prozorne. Ko se program izvaja, je njegova ikona v zaganjalniku zapolnjena z barvo.
Obvestila

Če program želi vašo pozornost, da vas obvesti o nečem (kot na primer o končanem prejemu), se bo ikona Zaganjalnika zazibala in trikotnik bo postal moder. Kliknite na ikono Zaganjalnika za zavračanje obvestila.

Programi lahko na ikoni Zaganjalnika prikažejo število. Programi sporočanja uporabljajo to število, da vam povejo, koliko neprebranih sporočil imate. Posodobitev program število uporablja za prikaz števila razpoložljivih posodobitev.

Programi lahko uporabijo vrstico napredka, da vas obvestijo, kako dolgo opravilo traja ne da bi morali ohraniti okno programa vidno.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/addremove-install.page0000644000373100047300000000474512320731743026235 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Uporaba Programskega središča Ubuntu za dodajanje programov in delanje Ubuntuja uporabnejšega. Namestitev dodatnih programov

Ekipa razvijalcev Ubuntuja je izbrala privzete programe za katere meni, da bodo Ubuntu naredili najbolj uporaben za večino vsakodnevnih nalog. Vendar pa boste zagotovo želeli namestiti več programov, da bo Ubuntu za vas še uporabnejši.

Za namestitev dodatnih paketov izvedite naslednje korake:

Povežite se na internet z uporabo brezžične ali žične povezave.

Kliknite ikono Programsko središče Ubuntu v Zaganjalniku ali iščite Programsko središče v Pregledni plošči.

Ko se Programsko središče zažene, poiščite program ali izberite kategorijo in najdite program na seznamu.

Izberite program, ki ga želite namestiti, in kliknite Namesti.

Vprašani boste za svoje geslo. Ko ga vnesete, se bo namestitev začela.

Namestitev se običajno hitro konča, a lahko traja nekaj časa, če imate počasno internetno povezavo.

Bližnjica do novega programa bo dodana v zaganjalnik. Za onemogočitev te zmožnosti odstranite izbiro PogledNovi programi v zaganjalniku.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sharing.page0000644000373100047300000000141012320731743024240 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Souporaba namizja, Souporaba datotek… Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Souporaba usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-mobile.page0000644000373100047300000000520112320731743024642 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Povezava na internet z uporabo mobilnega širokoposovnega omrežja Povezava z mobilnim širokopasovnim omrežjem

Mobilno širokopasovno omrežje je katerakoli vrsta širokopasovnega ineternetne povezave, ki jo zagotavlja zunanja naprava kot je 3G ključek USB ali mobilni telefon z vgrajeno podatkovno povezavo HSPA/UMTS/GPRS. Nekateri novejši prenosniki imajo naprave mobilne širokopasovne povezave že vgrajene.

Večina mobilnih širokopasovnih naprav bi morala biti ob vstavitvi v računalnik samodejno prepoznana. Ubuntu vas bo pozval k nastavitvi naprave.

Ko povežete napravo, se bo samodejno odprl čarovnik Nova mobilna širokopasovna povezava.

Kliknite Naprej in vnesite svoje podrobnosti vključno z državo kjer je bila mobilna širokopasovna naprava izdana, ponudnikom omrežja in vrsto povezave (na primer, Naročnina ali predplačniško).

Dajte povezavi imen in kliknite Uveljavi.

Vaša povezava je sedaj pripravljena za uporabo. Za povezavo kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite vašo novo povezavo.

Za prekinitev povezave kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in nato Prekini povezavo.

V primeru, da ob povezavi naprave niste pozvani za njeno nastavitev, jo je morda Ubuntu vseeno prepoznal. V takih primerih lahko povezavo ročno dodate.

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav ....

Kliknite na zavihek Mobilni širokopasovni dostop.

Kliknite Dodaj.

To bi moralo odpreti čarovnik Nova mobilna širokopasovna povezava. Vnesite svoje podrobnosti kot je opisano zgoraj.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts-add-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000356212320731743026456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lucie Hankey ldhankey@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Dodajte ali odstranite stik iz krajevnega imenika. Dodajanje ali odstranitev stika

Za dodajanje stika:

Pritisnite Nov.

V okno Nov stik vnesite ime stika in želene podatke. Kliknite na meni poleg vsakega od polij za izbiro Delo, Doma, Drugo ali Po meri .... (Po meri vam omogoča vnos lastnega imena kategorije.)

Pritisnite Ustvarite stik.

Za odstranitev stika:

Izberite stik iz seznama stikov.

Pritisnite Uredi v zgornjem desnem kotu programa Stiki.

Pritisnite Odstrani stik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-touchpad-click.page0000644000373100047300000001034512320731743026634 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite, vlecite ali drsajte z uporabo udarjanja ali kretenj na vaši drsni ploščici. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kliknite, vlecite ali drsajte z drsno ploščico

Z drsno ploščico lahko klikate, dvoklikate, vlečete in drsite brez posebnih gumbov strojne opreme.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

V odseku Drsna ploščica izberite Udarjanje za klik.

Odsek Drsna ploščica se pojavi le, če vaš sistem vsebuje drsno ploščico.

Za klik udarite po drsni ploščici

Za dvoklik udarite dvakrat

Za vlečenje predmeta dvakrat udarite, vendar po drugem udarcu svojega prsta na dvignite. Povlecite predmet, kamor ga žalite in nato dvignite svoj prst za spust.

V primeru da vaša drsna ploščica podpira udarce z več prsti, desno kliknite z udarjanjem z dvema prstoma hkrati. Sicer boste morali za desni klik uporabiti strojne gumbe. Oglejte si za način desnega klika brez desnega miškinega gumba.

V primeru da vaša drsna ploščica podpira udarce z več prsti, srednje kliknite z udarjanjem s tremi prsti hkrati.

Ko udarjate ali vlečete z več prsti, se prepričajte, da so prsti dovolj narazen. Če so prsti preveč blizu, bo vaš računalnik morda mislil, da je en prst.
Drsenje z dvema prstoma

Drsate lahko z uporabo dveh prstov na drsni ploščici.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

V odseku Drsna ploščica izberite Drsenje z dvema prstoma.

When this is selected, tapping and dragging with one finger will work as normal, but if you drag two fingers across any part of the touchpad, it will scroll instead. If you also select Enable horizontal scrolling, you can move your fingers left and right to scroll horizontally. Be careful to space your fingers a bit apart. If your fingers are too close together, they just look like one big finger to your touchpad.

Drsenje z dvema prstoma morda ne bo delovalo na vseh drsnih ploščicah.
Vsebina se lepi na prste

Vsebino lahko z drsno ploščico vlečete, kot da bi drseli po fizičnem kosu papirja.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

V odseku Drsna ploščica izberite Vsebina se lepi na prste.

Ta zmožnost se imenuje tudi Naravno drsenje ali Obratno drsenje.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-maximize.page0000644000373100047300000000336712320731743027242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dvokliknite na nazivno vrstico za razpenjanje ali obnovitev okna. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Razpenjanje in pomanjšanje okna

Okna lahko razpnete, da zavzamejo ves prostor na vašem namizju, in pomanjšate, da jih povrnete na normalno velikost. Okna lahko razpnete tudi navpično po levi in desni strani zaslona, tako da lahko gledate dve okni hkrati. Oglejte si za več podrobnosti.

Za razpenjanje okna zgrabite nazivno vrstico in jo povlecite na vrh zaslona ali dvakrat kliknite nazivno vrstico. Za razpenjanje okna z uporabo tipkovnice pritisnite Ctrl in Super ter pritisnite ↑.

Za obnovitev okna na njegovo predhodno velikost ga povlecite z robov zaslona. Če je okno popolnoma razpeto, lahko za obnovitev njegove velikosti dvokliknite na nazivno vrstico. Uporabite lahko tudi tipkovno bližnjico Ctrl Super ↓.

Držite tipko Alt in vlecite kjerkoli v oknu za njegov premik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing.page0000644000373100047300000000253012320731743024443 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Nastavitev krajevnega tiskalnika, zbiranje in zlaganje, dvostransko in večstransko … Tiskanje
Namestavitev Nastavitev tiskalnika
Velikosti in razporeditve Različne velikosti in razporeditve papirja.
Nezaznani tiskalniki, zataknjen papir, izpisi so videti narobe ... Težave s tiskalnikom
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-bouncekeys.page0000644000373100047300000000373512320731743025541 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prezri hitro ponavljajoče se pritiske na isto tipko. Vklop odskočnih tipk

Vklopite odskočne tipke za prezrtje pritiskov tipke, ki se hitro ponavljajo. Možnost je koristna za uporabnike, ki imajo težave s tresavico rok, zaradi katere je posamezna tipka pogosto pritisnjena večkrat zaporedno.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Vklopite Odskočne tipke

Če želite spremeniti, kako dolgo odskočne tipke čakajo, preden zaznajo naslednji pritisk tipke, potem ko ste tipko enkrat že pritisnili, uporabite drsnik Zamik sprejema. Izberite Zapiskaj, ko je tipka zavrnjena, če želite, da računalnik predvaja zvok vsakič, ko prezre pritisk tipke, ker se je zgodil prehitro ali prepozno po predhodnem pritisku tipke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-preview.page0000644000373100047300000000507312320731744026142 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirajte kdaj so sličice uporabljene za datoteke. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Možnosti predogleda upravljalnika datotek

Upravljalnik datotek ustvari sličice predogleda slikovnih, video, besedilnih in zvočnih datotek. Predogledi so lahko za velike datoteke preko omrežja počasni zato lahko nadzirate kdaj so predogledi ustvarjeni. V menijski vrstici kliknite na Datoteke izberite Možnosti in nato zavihek Predogled.

<gui>Datoteke</gui>

Privzeto so vsi predogledi narejeni zaSamo krajevne datoteke, tiste na vašem računalniku ali na povezanih zunanjih pogonih. To zmožnost lahko vključite Vedno ali Nikoli. Upravljalnik datotek lahko brska po datotekah na drugih računalnikih preko krajevnega omrežja ali interneta. V primeru, da pogosto brskate po datotekah preko krajevnega omrežja in ima omrežje visoko pasovno širino, boste morda želeli nekatere ali vse možnosti predogleda nastaviti na Vedno.

Dodatno lahko nastavite Samo za datoteke manjše kot da omejite velikost predogleda datotek.

 <gui>Mape</gui>

V primeru da imate velikosti datotek prikazane v stolpcu seznama pogledov ali sličicah ikone, bodo mape prikazane s številom datotek in map, ki jih vsebujejo. Štetje predmetov v mapi je lahko počasno, še posebno za zelo velike mape ali preko omrežja. To zmožnost lahko vklopite, izklopite ali pa jo vklopite samo za datoteke na svojem računalniku in krajevnih zunanjih diskih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-envelopes.page0000644000373100047300000000427312320731744026450 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prepričajte se, da je ovojnica/oznaka obrnjena v pravo smer in da ste izbrali pravilno velikost papirja. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Tiskanje ovojnic in oznak

Večina tiskalnikov vam bo omogočala tiskanje neposredno na ovojnico ali papir oznak. To je še posebno uporabno, če morate poslati veliko pisem.

Tiskanje na ovojnice

Pri tiskanju na ovojnice obstajata dve stvari, ki jih morate vedeti. Prva je, da tiskalnik ve, kakšne velikosti je ovojnica. Potem ko kliknete Natisni in se pojavi okno Tiskanje, pojdite v zavihek Nastavitev strani in izberite vrsto papirja kot "ovojnico", če jo lahko. V primeru da tega ne morete storiti, si oglejte, če lahko spremenite velikost papirja na velikost ovojnice (na primer "C5"). Na paketu ovojnic piše, kakšne velikosti so. Večina ovojnic je standardnih velikosti.

Prepričati se morate, da so ovojnice v podajalnik tiskalnika naložene s pravo stranjo navzgor. Za to preverite priročnik tiskalnika ali poskusite natisniti eno ovojnico in preverite katera stran mora biti obrnjena navzgor.

Nekateri tiskalniki niso zasnovani za tiskanje ovojnic, še posebno nekateri laserski tiskalniki. Preverite priročnik svojega tiskalnika za ogled, če sprejema ovojnice. V nasprotnem primeru lahko tiskalnik z vstavljanjem ovojnic poškodujete.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-change-autohide.page0000644000373100047300000000260512320731744030607 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Pokaži Zaganjalnik samo ko ga potrebujete. Samodejno skrivanje zaganjalnika

Zaganjalnik lahko skrijete, če ga želite videti le, ko premaknete miško ali kazalec drsne ploščice na levo stran zaslona.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku osebno kliknite Videz.

Preklopite na zavihek Obnašanje.

Vklopite Samodejno skrij zaganjalnik.

Da bi preprečili prikaz Zaganjalnika po nesreči, Ubuntu zahteva da za prikaz Zaganjalnika pritisnite miško ali kazalnik drsne ploščice nekoliko močneje. Zahtevano silo lahko prilagodite z nastavitvijo Občutljivost prikaza.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-manual.page0000644000373100047300000000464412320731744024663 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Če omrežne nastavitve niso samodejno dodeljene, jih boste morda mogli vnesti sami. Ročno nastavi omrežne nastavitve

V primeru da vaše omrežje vašemu računalniku nastavitev omrežja ne dodeli samodejno, jih boste morali vnesti ročno. Ta tema predpostavlja, da že veste, katere nastavitve morate vnesti. Če to ni res, vprašajte skrbnika omrežja ali poglejte nastavitve svojega usmerjevalnika ali stikala.

Za ročno nastavitev omrežnih povezav:

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav.

Izberite omrežno povezavo, ki jo želite nastaviti ročno. Na primer, če ste priključeni prek omrežnega kabla, kliknite na zavihek Žično.

Kliknite na povezavo, ki jo želite urediti in nato kliknite Uredi.

Pojdite v zavihek Nastavitve IPv4 in spremenite možnost Način na Ročno.

Kliknite Dodaj in vpišite naslov IP, masko omrežja in naslov IP privzetega prehoda v ustrezne stolpce na seznamu Naslovi. Pritisnite Enter ali Tabulator po vnosu vsakega naslova.

Ti trije naslovi morajo biti naslovi IP; to je, morajo biti štiri števila ločena s pikami (na primer 123.45.6.78).

Vpišite naslove IP strežnikov DNS, ki jih želite uporabiti v ustrezno polje, ločene z vejicami.

Kliknite Shrani. Če niste povezani z omrežjem, kliknite na ikono omrežja v menijski vrstici in se povežite. Preizkusite nastavitve omrežja tako, da poskusite obiskat spletišče ali si na primer oglejte na omrežju datoteke v souporabi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-music.page0000644000373100047300000000271612320731744026023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Najdite in predvajajte glasbo z računalnika ali interneta. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Leča glasba

Leča glasba je četrta leča po domu Pregledne plošče v vrstici leč in je predstavljena z noto. Leča glasba vam ponuja dostop do vaše glasbe ali glasbe, ki je na voljo na spletu.

Za odprtje Pregledne plošče neposredno v leči glasbe lahko uporabite SuperM.

Predogledi

Desno kliknite na rezultat iskanje za odprtje predogleda. Predogled prikaže naslovnico in skladbe.

Kliknite na številko skladbe za predvajanje iz predogleda. Ponovno kliknite na številko skladbe za premor predvajanja.

Filtri

Kliknite Filtriraj rezultate za filtriranje po desetletju ali zvrsti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000520612320731744026504 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Viden uvod v namizje Unity. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Dobrodošli v Ubuntuju

Ubuntu vsebuje Unity, na novo zasnovan način za uporabo računalnika. Unity je zasnovan za zmanjšanje motenj, da vam da več prostora za delo in vam pomaga narediti stvari.

Ta vodnik je zasnovan, da bi odgovoril na vaša vprašanja o uporabi vmesnika Unity in namizja Ubuntu. Najprej si oglejte nekatere ključne zmožnosti Unity in kako jih lahko uporabite.

Kako začeti z Unity

Namizje Unity
Zaganjalnik

Zaganjalnik

Zaganjalnik se samodejno prikaže ob prijavi na namizje in vam omogoča hiter dostop do najbolj uporabljenih programov.

Naučite se več o zaganjalniku.
Pregledna plošča

Gumb Ubuntu je blizu zgornjega levega kota zaganjalnika in je vedno vrhnji predmet v Zaganjalniku. Če kliknete na Gumb Ubuntu, vam bo Unity predstavil dodatno zmožnost namizja, Pregledno ploščo.

Pregledna plošča Unity

Pregledna plošča je zasnovana, da vam olajša iskanje, odpiranje in uporabo programov, datotek, glasbo in več. Če na primer v Iskalno vrstico vnesete besedo "dokument", vam bo pregledna plošča pokazala vaše programe, ki vam pomagajo pisati in urediti dokumente. Pokazala vam bo tudi ustrezne mape in dokumente na katerih ste nedavno delali.

Naučite se več o Pregledni plošči.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-hardware-check.page0000644000373100047300000001520412320731744033330 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Čeprav je brezžična kartica priključena na računalnik, je računalnik morda ne prepozna kot omrežno napravo. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi povezavami Preverite, da je bila brezžična kartica prepoznana

Čeprav je brezžična kartica priključena na računalnik, je računalnik morda ne prepozna kot omrežno napravo. V tem koraku boste preverili ali je bila naprava pravilno prepoznana.

Odprite Terminal in vpišite sudo lshw -C network in pritisnite Enter. Če se pojavi sporočilo o napaki, namestite program lshw na svoj računalnik tako, da vpišete ukazom sudo apt-get install lshw v terminal.

Preberite izhod tega ukaza in preverite odsek Brezžični vmesnik. V primeru da je vaša brezžična kartica zaznana, bi moral izhod videti podoben temu:

*-network description: Wireless interface product: PRO/Wireless 3945ABG [Golan] Network Connection vendor: Intel Corporation

V primeru da je brezžična naprava izpisana, nadaljujte na stran z gonilniki naprav.

Če brezžična naprava mi na seznamu, bodo naslednji koraki odvisni od vrste naprave, ki jo uporabljate. Oglejte si odsek, ki je pomemben za vrsto brezžične kartice, ki jo uporabljate: PCI(notranja), USB ali PCMCIA.
Preverjanje za PCI (notranjo) brezžično napravo

Najbolj pogoste so notranje kartice PCI, ki jih je mogoče najti na prenosnikih, ki so bili narejeni v zadnjih nekaj letih.

Odprite Terminal, vtipkajte lscpi in pritisnite Enter.

Oglejte si prikazan seznam naprav in najdite vrstice z Network controller ali Ethernet controller. Na ta način je lahko označenih več naprav. Tista, ki ustreza vaši brezžični kartici lahko vključuje besede kot so wireless, WLAN, wifi ali 802.11. Tukaj je primer kako je vnos morda videti:

Network controller: Intel Corporation PRO/Wireless 3945ABG [Golan] Network Connection

V primeru da je prejšnji ukaz prepoznal vašo napravo, čestitamo. Nadaljujte na strani Gonilniki naprav. V primeru da zgornji ukaz ne pokaže izpisa povezanega z vašim brezžičnim gonilnikom, si oglejte navodila spodaj.
USB brezžična kartica

Brezžične kartice, ki jih vklopite v vrata USB, so manj pogoste. Vklopite jih lahko neposredno v vrata USB ali pa jih povežete preko kabla USB. Kartice 3G/mobilnega širokopasovnega interneta so videti precej podobno kot brezžične (wifi) kartice, zato dvakrat preverite, da nimate 3G kartice. Za preverjanje ali je bila USB brezžična kartica prepoznana:

Odprite Terminal, vtipkajte lsusb in pritisnite Enter.

Oglejte si prikazan seznam naprav in poskusite najti karkoli, kar se nanaša na brezžično ali omrežno napravo. Vrstica, ki se nanaša na brezžično kartico, morda vključuje besede kot so wireless, WLAN, wifi ali 802.11. Tukaj je primer kako so lahko videti:

Bus 005 Device 009: ID 12d1:140b Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. EC1260 Wireless Data Modem HSD USB Card

V primeru da je prejšnji ukaz prepoznal vašo napravo, čestitamo. Nadaljujte na strani Gonilniki naprav. V primeru da zgornji ukaz ne pokaže izpisa povezanega z vašim brezžičnim gonilnikom, si oglejte navodila spodaj.
Preverjanje za napravo PCMCIA

Brezžične kartice PCMCIA so običajno pravokotne kartice, ki ustrezajo reži na strani vašega prenosnika. Pogosto jih lahko najdete v starejših računalnikih. Za preverjanje, če je bila kartica PCMCIA prepoznana:

Zaženite svoj računalnik brez vklopljene brezžične kartice.

Odprite Terminal in vpišite naslednje in pritisnite Enter.

tail -f /var/log/dmesg

To bo prikazalo seznam sporočil, povezanih s strojno opremo vašega računalnika, ki se bo samodejno posodobil, če se kaj na vaši strojni opremi spremeni.

Vstavite svojo brezžično kartico v režo PCMCIA in preverite kaj se spremeni v oknu Terminala. Spremembe bi morale vsebovati podatke o vaši brezžični kartici. Oglejte si jih in preverite, če lahko določite, katero brezžično kartico imate.

Za zaustavitev poganjanja ukaza iz Terminala pritisnite CtrlC. Ko ste to storili, lahko Terminal zaprete.

V primeru da je prejšnji ukaz prepoznal vašo napravo, čestitamo. Nadaljujte na strani Gonilniki naprav. V primeru da zgornji ukaz ne pokaže izpisa povezanega z vašim brezžičnim gonilnikom, si oglejte navodila na dnu te strani.
Brezžična kartica ni bila prepoznana

Če vaš brezžični vmesnik ni bil prepoznan, mogoče ne deluje pravilno ali pa pravi gonilniki niso bili nameščeni.

Za podrobnejšo pomoč si oglejte možnosti podpore na spletišču svoje distribucije. Te morda vključujejo dopisne seznama in spletne klepete kjer lahko na primer vprašate o svoji brezžični kartici.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts-add.page0000644000373100047300000000531012320731744025156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Poveži se s spletnimi računi Dodaj račun

Dodajanje računa bo pomagalo povezati vaše spletni račun z vašim namizjem Ubuntu. Tako bodo vaša e-pošta, klepet in drugi sorodni programi nastavljeni za vas.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Izberite Spletni računi.

Izberite Vrsta računa iz pladnja na desni strani.

Če želite nastaviti več računov, preprosto ponovite opravljene korake.

Odprl se bo majhen spletni vmesnik, kjer vnesete svoja poverila za spletni račun. Na primer, če se želite povezati z računom Google, vnesite uporabniško ime ter geslo za Google ter se prijavite.

Če ste vnesli prava poverila, boste bili pozvani da sprejmete pogoje uporabe. Za nadaljevanje izberite Sprejmem. Ko sprejmete pogoje, Ubuntu potrebuje vaše dovoljenje za dostop do računa. Če želite dovoliti, kliknite na gumb Dovoli dostop. Ko boste pozvani, vpišite geslo trenutnega uporabnika.

Sedaj lahko izberete programe, ki jih želite povezani s svojim spletnim računom. Na primer, če želite uporabiti spletni račun za klepet in ne želite koledarja potem možnost koledarja izključite.

Po tem ko ste dodali račune, vsak program ki ste ga izbrali, bo samodejno uporabil poverila, ko se prijavite v svoj račun.

Zaradi varnostnih razlogov Ubuntu vašega gesla ne bo shranjeval na računalnik. Namesto njega bo shranil žeton, ki ga ponudi spletna storitev. Če želite v celoti razveljaviti povezavo med vašim namizjem in spletno storitvijo, ga odstranite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-check.page0000644000373100047300000000326212320731744025135 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite, da je bila vaša varnostna kopija uspešna. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Preverjanje varnostnih kopij

Potem ko ste ustvarili varnostne kopije svojih datotek, se prepričajte, da je bilo opravilo uspešno zaključeno. V nasprotnem primeru lahko izgubite pomembne podatke, saj lahko nekatere datoteke v varnostni kopiji manjkajo.

Ko uporabite upravljalnik datotek za premik ali kopiranje datotek, računalnik preveri, da so bili vsi podatki pravilno preneseni. Če prenašate podatke, ki so za vas zelo pomembni, je pametno dodatno preveriti, da so bili podatki pravilno preneseni.

Dodatno preverjanje lahko izvedete z ogledom kopiranih datotek in map na ciljnem mediju. S preverjanjem, da so prenesene datoteke in mape dejansko v varnostni kopiji, imate lahko dodatno zaupanje, da je opravilo uspelo.

V primeru da delate redne varnostne kopije velikih količin podatkov, boste morda ugotovili, da je lažje uporabiti namenski program za varnostne kopije kot je Déjà Dup. Takšen program je bolj zmogljiv in zanesljivejši kot kopiranje in lepljenje datotek.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/session-screenlocks.page0000644000373100047300000000332312320731744026607 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V nastavitvah Svetlost in zaklep spremenite po kolikšnem času se zaklene zaslon. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zaslon se prehitro zaklene

V primeru da računalnik za nekaj minut zapustite, se bo zaslon samodejno zaklenil, zato morate za začetek ponovne uporabe računalnika vnesti geslo. To je narejeno zaradi varnostnih vzrokov (zato da nihče ne more upravljati z računalnikom, če ga pustite nenadzorovanega), vendar je lahko moteče, če se zaslon prehitro zaklene.

Za daljše čakanje pred samodejnim zaklepom zaslona:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Kliknite Svetlost in zaklep.

Spremenite vrednost v spustnem seznamu Zakleni zaslon po.

V primeru da samodejnega zaklepa zaslona ne želite, izklopite Zaklep.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000133012320731744024425 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Dostopajte do svojih stikov. Stiki

Uporabite Stike za shranjevanje, dostop ali urejanje podatkov o vaših stikih, ki so krajevno ali v vaših Spletnih računih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts-search.page0000644000373100047300000000334112320731744025674 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Iskanje stika Iskanje stika

Spletne stike lahko iščete na enega od dveh načinov:

V pregledu Dejavnosti začnite tipkati ime stika.

Namesto običajnega seznama programov se bodo v pregledu pokazali ujemajoči se stiki.

Za izbiro stika na vrhu seznama pritisnite tipkoEnter ali kliknite na stik, ki ga želite izbrati, če ta ni na vrhu.

Za iskanje znotraj programa Stiki

Kliknite v iskalno polje.

Začnite tipkati ime stika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000001231712320731744027557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba namizja s tipkovnico. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Uporabne tipkovne bližnjice

Ta stran zagotavlja pregled tipkovnih bližnjic, ki vam lahko pomagajo pri bolj učinkoviti uporabiti namizja in programov. Če miške ali kazalne naprave ne morete uporabiti, si za več podrobnosti o krmarjenju po vmesniku s tipkovnico oglejte .

Spoznavanje namizja

AltF4

Zapre trenutno okno.

AltF2

Pojavno ukazno okno (za hitro izvajanje ukazov)

AltTab

Hiter preklop med okni. Držite Shift za obratni vrstni red.

Alt`

Preklopi med okni iz istega programa ali iz izbranega programa za AltTab.

Ta bližnjica na tipkovnicah ZDA uporablja `, kjer je ` tipka nad Tab. Na vseh drugih tipkovnicah je bližnjica Alt in tipka, ki je nad tipko Tab.

SuperS

Omogoči preklopnik delovnih površin. Oddalji se od vseh delovnih površin.

SuperW

Omogoči način "Galerija". Prikaže vsa okna s trenutne delovne površine.

CtrlAltSmerne tipke

Preklapljanje med delovnimi površinami.

CtrlAltShiftSmerne tipke

Premik trenutnega okna na drugo delovno površino.

CtrlAltDelete

Odjava.

CtrlSuperD

Skrije vsa okna in pokaže namizje. Za obnovitev svojih oken ponovno pritisnite tipki.

CtrlAltL

Zakleni zaslon.
Pogoste bližnjice za urejanje

CtrlA

Izbere vse besedilo ali predmete na seznamu.

CtrlX

Izreže (odstrani) izbrano besedilo ali predmete in jih postavi na odložišče.

CtrlC

Kopira izbrano besedilo ali predmete na odložišče.

CtrlV

Prilepi vsebino odložišča.

CtrlZ

Razveljavi zadnje dejanje.
Zajem zaslonske slike

Print Screen

Zajem zaslonske slike.

AltPrint Screen

Zajem zaslonske slike okna.

ShiftPrint Screen

Zajem zaslonske slike področja na zaslonu. Kazalec se spremeni v merilec. Kliknite in povlecite za izbiro področja.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-remove-connection.page0000644000373100047300000000342212320731744030250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranitev naprave s seznama naprav Bluetooth. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Odstranitev povezave med napravami Bluetooth

Če ne želite biti več povezani z napravo Bluetooth, lahko povezavo odstranite. To je uporabno, če ne želite več uporabiti naprave kot sta miška ali slušalke ali če ne želite več prenesti datotek z ali na napravo.

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

Kliknite na ikono BLuetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

V levem pladnju izberite napravo s katero želite prekiniti povezavo in kliknite na - pod seznamom.

Kliknite Odstrani v potrditvenem oknu.

Napravo Bluetooth lahko kasneje ponovno povežete, če želite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-guest-session.page0000644000373100047300000000512312320731745026531 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Posodite računalnik prijatelju ali znancu na varen način. Gunnar Hjalmarsson gunnarhj@ubuntu.com Zagon omejene seje za goste
Začasna seja z omejenimi dovoljenji

Vsake toliko časa si lahko prijatelj, družinski član ali sodelavec želi sposoditi vaš računalnik. Ubuntu zmožnost Seja za goste omogoča priročen način z visoko stopnjo varnosti, za posodo računalnika nekomu drugemu. Sejo za goste je mogoče začeti iz prijavnega zaslona ali iz redne seje. Če ste trenutno prijavljeni, kliknite na ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Seja za goste. To bo zaklenilo zaslon za vašo sejo in začelo sejo za goste.

Gost ne more videti domače mape drugih uporabnikov in po odjavi bodo privzeto odstranjeni/ponastavljeni vsi shranjeni podatki ali spremenjene nastavitve. To pomeni, da vsaka se seja začne s svežim okoljem, ne glede na to kaj so počenjali prejšnji gostje.

Prilagoditev

Spletni vodnik Prilagoditev seje za goste razloži, kako lahko prilagodite videz in vedenje seje za goste.

Onemogočanje zmožnosti

Če na svojem računalniku ne želite dovoliti seje gosta, onemogočite zmožnost Seja gosta. Za onemogočanje pritisnite CtrlAltT da odprete okno terminala in nato zaženite ta ukaz (je en dolg ukaz, da se ne bi zmotili ga kopirajte in nato prilepite v terminal):

sudo sh -c 'printf "[SeatDefaults]\nallow-guest=false\n" >/usr/share/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d/50-no-guest.conf'

Ta ukaz ustvari majhno nastavitveno datoteko. Za ponovno omogočanje Seje gosta preprosto odstranite to datoteko:

sudo rm /usr/share/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d/50-no-guest.conf

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-share.page0000644000373100047300000000550212320731745025017 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prenesite datoteke vašim e-poštnim stikom iz upravljalnika datotek. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Souporaba in prenos datotek

Datoteke lahko delite s svojimi stiki ali jih prenesete na zunanjo napravo ali jih daste vsouporabo prek omrežja neposredno iz upravljalnika datotek.

Odprite upravljalnik datotek.

Najdite datoteko, ki jo želite prenesti.

Desno kliknite na datoteko in izberite Pošlji.

Pojavilo se bo okno Pošlji na. Izberite kam želite poslati datoteko in kliknite Pošlji. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte seznam ciljev.

Hkrati lahko pošljete več datotek. Več datotek lahko izberete s pritiskom na Ctrl in desnim klikom na eno od izbranih datotek. Datoteke lahko samodejno stisnete v arhiv tar ali zip.

 Cilji

Za pošiljanje datoteke preko e-pošte, izberite E-pošta in vnesite naslov e-pošte prejemnika.

Za pošiljanje datoteke stiku hipnega klepeta izberite Hipno sporočilo in nato v spustnem seznamu izberite stik. Da bo to delovalo, boste morda morali zagnati program hipnega sporočanja.

Za zapisovanje datoteke na CD ali DVD izberite Ustvarjalnik CD-jev/DVD-jev. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Za prenos datoteke na napravo Bluetooh izberite Bluetooth (OBEX Push) in izberite napravo na katero želite poslati datoteke. To deluje le na napravah s katerimi se je vaš računalnik že spoznal. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Za kopiranje datoteke na zunanjo napravo kot je pomnilniška naprava USB ali za pošiljanje na strežnik, s katerim ste povezani, izberite Odstranljivi diski in izmenjava nato izberite napravo ali strežnik, na katerega želite kopirati datoteko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-video.page0000644000373100047300000000260612320731745026010 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Iščite in predvajajte videoposnetke z računalnika ali interneta. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Leča video

Leča video je tretja leča po domu Pregledne plošče v vrstici leč in je predstavljena s filmskim trakom. Leča video vam ponuja dostop do vaših videov ali videov, ki so na voljo na spletu.

Iz Pregledne plošče lahko celo kupite ali najamete videe.

Za odprtje Pregledne plošče neposredno v leči videa lahko uporabite SuperV.

Predogledi

Desno kliknite na rezultat iskanja za odprtje predogleda z več podrobnosti o videu.

Filtri

Kliknite Filtriraj rezultate za filtriranje po viru videa.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-tracker.page0000644000373100047300000000216412320731745026250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Krajevni ali oddaljeni dokumenti se ne prikažejo. Moji dokumenti niso vidni

Če Dokumenti ne prikažejo vaših dokumentov, potem Sledilnik ni pravilno nameščen oziroma se ne izvaja. Prepričajte se, da se Tracker izvaja v vaši seji. Privzeta nastavitev, ki nastavi beleženje datotek v vaši domači mapi (nerekurzivno) in mape XDG (rekurzivno), bo zadostovala. Prepričajte se, da so vaši dokumenti v eni od teh poti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/wacom-multi-monitor.page0000644000373100047300000000247312320731745026544 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Preslikava tablice Wacom na določen zaslon. Izberite zaslon

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Grafična tabilca Wacom.

Če tablica ne bo zazna, boste bili pozvani Priklopite ali vklopite tablico Wacom.

Kliknite Preslikaj na zaslon ....

Izberite Preslikaj na en zaslon.

Poleg Izhoda izberite zaslon, do katerega želite prejeti vhod iz grafične tablice.

Izbrali boste lahko samo nastavljene zaslone.

Kliknite Zapri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/display-dimscreen.page0000644000373100047300000000503312320731745026230 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zatemnitev zaslona za varčevanje z energijo ali povečanje svetlosti, da je zaslon na svetlobi lažje berljiv. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Nastavitev svetlosti zaslona

Svetlost zaslona lahko spremenite za varčevanje z energijo ali da naredite zaslon na svetlobi lažje berljiv. Nastavite lahko tudi samodejno zatemnitev zaslona, ko uporabljate baterijsko napajanje ali samodejen izklop zaslona, ko ni v uporabi.

Nastavitev svetlosti

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Izberite Svetlost in zaklep.

Prilagodite drsnik Svetlost do udobne vrednosti.

Veliko prenosnikov ima posebne tipke za prilagoditev svetlosti. Te imajo sliko Sonca in so običajno na funkcijskih tipkah na vrhu tipkovnice. Za uporabo teh tipk pritisnite Fn.

Izberite Zatemni zaslon za varčevanje z energijo, da se svetlost ob napajanju iz baterije samodejno zmanjša. Osvetlitev zaslona lahko porabi veliko energije in lahko močno zmanjša trajanje baterije vašega prenosnika.

Zaslon se bo po nedejavnosti samodejno izklopil. To vpliva samo na zaslon in ne na vaš sistem. Lahko prilagodite, kako dolgo morate biti nedejavni v možnosti Izklopi zaslon po.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-vpn-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000627312320731745025641 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org VPN-ji vam omogočajo povezavo s krajevnim omrežjem preko interneta. Naučite se kako nastaviti povezavo VPN. Povezava z VPN

VPN (ali Navidezno zasebno omrežje) je način povezovanja s krajevnim omrežjem preko interneta. Vzemimo primer, ko se želite povezati s krajevnim omrežjem v svoji službi medtem ko ste na poslovnem izletu. Nekje najdite internetno povezavo (na primer v hotelu) in se nato povežite z VPN-jem svojega delovnega mesta. Vse bo delovalo tako, kot da ste se povezali na omrežje v službi, vendar bo dejanska omrežna povezava potekala skozi internetno povezavo hotela. Povezave VPN so običajno šifrirane, da ljudem brez prijave preprečijo dostop do krajevnega omrežja, s katerim se povezujete.

Obstajajo številne različne vrste VPN. Morda morate namestiti dodatne programe glede na vrsto VPN-ja, ki jo imate. Ugotovite podrobnosti povezave od osebe, ki je odgovorna za VPN, in si oglejte katero vrsto odjemalca VPN morate uporabiti. Nato pojdite v Programsko središče Ubuntu in najdite paket Upravljalnika omrežij, ki deluje z vašim VPN-jem (če obstaja), in ga namestite.

V primeru da za vašo vrsto VPN ne obstaja paket Upravljalnika omrežij, boste verjetno morali prejeti in namestiti program odjemalca podjetja, ki zagotavlja programe VPN. Verjetno boste morali za vzpostavitev delovanja slediti drugačnim navodilom.

Ko je to narejeno, lahko nastavite povezavo VPN:

Kliknite meni omrežja v menijski vrstici pod VPN izberite Dodaj.

Kliknite Dodaj in izberite vrsto povezave VPN, ki jo imate.

Kliknite Ustvari, sledite navodilom na zaslonu in vnesite podrobnosti kot sta uporabniško ime ali geslo.

Ko ste končali z nastavitvijo VPN-ja, kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici, pojdite na zavihek VPN ter kliknite na povezavo, katero ste ustvarili. Poskusila se bo vzpostaviti povezava VPN - ikona omrežja se bo med poskusom povezovanja spremenila.

Verjetno se boste uspešno povezali z VPN. Morda boste morali dvakrat preveriti nastavitve VPN, ki ste jih vnesli. To lahko storite s klikom na ikono omrežja, klikom na Uredi povezave in pojdite v zavihek VPN.

Za prekinitev povezave VPN kliknite na ikono omrežja v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Prekini povezavo pod imenom povezave VPN.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-doubleclick.page0000644000373100047300000000426712320731745026232 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirajte kako hitro morate drugič pritisniti miškin gumb za dvoklik. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Prilagoditev hitrosti dvojnega klika

Dvoklik se zgodi, ko dovolj hitro dvakrat pritisnete na miškin gumb. V primeru da je drugi pritisk predolgo za prvim, boste dobili dva ločena klika in ne dvoklika. V primeru da imate težave s hitrim pritiskom na miškin gumb, povečajte zakasnitev.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

Pod Splošno prilagodite drsnik Dvoklik na vrednost, ki je za vas udobna.

Za preizkus kliknite na gumb Preizkusite svoje nastavitve. Enojni klik v oknu bo poudaril zunanji krog. Dvoklik bo poudaril notranji krog.

V primeru da vaša miška dvoklikne, ko ste želeli izvesti enojni klik, čeprav ste povečali zakasnitev dvojnega klika, je vaša miška morda pokvarjena. V računalnik poskusite priklopiti drugo miško in preverite, če pravilno deluje. Namesto tega lahko miško priklopite v drug računalnik in preverite, če imate še vedno isto težavo.

Ta nastavitev bo vplivala tako na vašo miško in drsno ploščico kot tudi na katerokoli drugo napravo kazanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/screen-shot-record.page0000644000373100047300000000423112320731745026321 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zajemite sliko dogajanja na svojem namizju. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Zaslonske slike

Zajamete lahko sliko svojega zaslona (zaslonsko sliko) ali posnamete videoposnetek dogajanja na zaslonu (zaslonski posnetek). To je uporabno, če želite nekomu drugemu pokazati, kako nekaj narediti z računalnikom. Zaslonske slike in posnetki so običajne slikovne/video datoteke, zato jih lahko pošljete preko e-pošte in delite preko spleta.

Zajeme zaslonske slike

Zajemite sliko dogajanja na svojem zaslonu:

Pojdite v Pregledno ploščo in odprite orodje Zaslonska slika.

V oknu Zajem zaslonskega posnetka izberite ali želite zgrabiti celotno namizje, posamezno okno ali področje na zaslonu. Nastavite zamik, če želite izbrati okno ali drugače nastaviti svoje namizje za zajem zaslonske slike. Nato izberite morebitne želene učinke.

Kliknite Zajemi zaslonsko sliko.

V primeru da ste izbrali Izbor področja za zajem, se bo kazalec spremenil v križec. Kliknite in vlecite področje, ki ga želite na zaslonski sliki.

V oknu Shrani zaslonsko sliko izberite ime datoteke in mapo ter kliknite Shrani.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/prefs-display.page0000644000373100047300000000122012320731745025370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Ozadje, velikost in vrtenje, svetlost … Zaslon usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting.page0000644000373100047300000000434312320731745030465 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Določitev in popravilo težav z brezžičnimi povezavami Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji

To je vodnik odpravljanja težav korak za korakom, ki vam bo pomagal določiti in popraviti težave z brezžičnimi povezavami. Če se z brezžičnim omrežjem ne morete povezati, poskusite z navodili tukaj.

Za povezavo računalnika z internetom priporočamo izvedbo naslednjih korakov:

Izvajanje začetnega preverjanja

Zbiranje podrobnosti o strojni opremi

Preverjanje strojne opreme

Poskušanje ustvarjanja povezave z brezžičnim usmerjevalnikom

Preverjanje modema in usmerjevalnika

Za začetek kliknite na Naprej v zgornjem desnem delu strani. Ta povezava in druge na naslednjih straneh vas bodo peljale skozi vse korake v vodniku.

Uporaba ukazne vrstice

Nekaj navodil v tem vodniku bo od vas zahtevalo vnos ukazov v ukazno vrstico (Terminal). Program Terminal lahko najdete v Pregledni plošči.

Če vam uporaba ukazne vrstice ni znana, ne skrbite - ta vodnik vas bo vodil ob vsakem koraku. Vse, kar si morate zapomniti, je, da so ukazi občutljivi na velikost črk (zato jih morate vnesti natanko tako, kot so videti tukaj) in da morate za zagon ukaza po njegovem vnosu pritisniti Enter.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-add.page0000644000373100047300000000665412320731745024332 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajaje novih uporabnikov da se lahko na računalnik prijavijo tudi drugi ljudje. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dodajanje novega uporabniškega računa

Na svoj računalnik lahko dodate več uporabniških računov. Vsaki osebi v svojem gospodinjstvu ali podjetju dajte en račun. Vsak uporabnik ima svojo domačo mapo, dokumente in nastavitve.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Uporabiški računi.

Za dodajanje uporabniških računov potrebujete skrbniška dovoljenja. Kliknite Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo.

Na seznamu računov na levi, kliknite na gumb + za dodajanje novega uporabniškega računa.

Če želite, da ima nov uporabnik skrbniški dostop do računalnika, za vrsto računa izberite Skrbnik. Skrbniki lahko dodajajo ali brišejo uporabnike, nameščajo programe in gonilnike ter spremenijo datum in čas.

Vnesite polno ime uporabnika. Uporabniško ime bo samodejno izpolnjeno glede na polno ime. Privzeto je najverjetneje v redu, ampak ga lahko po želji tudi spremenite.

Kliknite Ustvari

Račun je omogočen dokler se ne odločite kaj boste storili z uporabniškim geslom. V Možnostih prijave kliknite na Račun je onemogočen poleg polja Geslo. Izberite Nastavi geslo iz spustnega seznama Dejanje in pustite uporabniku vnos gesla v polju Novo geslo in Potrdi geslo. Oglejte si .

Da izberete naključno ustvarjeno varno geslo, lahko kliknete na gumb poleg polja Novo geslo. Ta gesla so težka in jih drugi ne morejo uganiti, si jih boste pa tudi težko zapomnili, zato bodite previdni.

Kliknite Spremeni.

V oknu Uporabniški računi lahko kliknete na sliko, ki je poleg uporabnikovega imena na desni, za nastavitev slike računa. Slika bo prikazana v prijavnem oknu. GNOME zagotavlja nekaj fotografij, ki jih lahko uporabite ali pa lahko izberete svojo lastno sliko oz. jo zajamete s svojo spletno kamero.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-shopping.page0000644000373100047300000000370312320731745025613 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spletni rezultati naredijo Pregledno ploščo uporabnejšo in pomagajo financirati razvoj Ubuntuja. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Zakaj so v Pregledni plošči povezave nakupovanja?

Poleg pomoči pri iskanju programov in datotek na vašem računalniku vam Pregledna plošča za vaša iskanja pokaže tudi povezane spletne rezultate. Spletni viri vključujejo Amazon.com in ducat drugih spletnih virov.

Ko kupite glasbo ali izdelke iz teh virov, Canonical prejme majhen del zaslužka v zamenjavo za usmeritev na te trgovino. Canonical, podjetje, ki je ustvarilo in podpira projekt Ubuntu, ta denar uporabi za izboljšave Ubuntuja.

Izklopi spletne rezultate iskanja

Če ne želite prejemati predlogov spletnega iskanja, lahko onemogočite to zmožnost.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Varnost in zasebnost in izberite zavihek Iskanje

Izklopite Vključi spletne rezultate iskanja.

Za uveljavljavitev spremembe se najprej odjavite in nato znova prijavite.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-hardware-info.page0000644000373100047300000000475312320731746033217 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sodelavci wiki dokumentacije Ubuntu Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Morda boste potrebovali podrobnosti kot je številka modela vaše brezžične kartice v naslednjih korakih odpravljanja težav. Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi omrežji Zberite podatke o omrežni strojni opremi:

V tem koraku boste zbrali podatke o svoji napravi brezžičnega omrežja. Način odpravljanja brezžičnih povezav je odvisen od proizvajalca in številke modela brezžične kartice, zato si te podatke shranite. Morda vam bodo prav prišli predmeti kot so diski za namestitev gonilnikov. Najdite naslednje predmete, če jih še imate:

Pakiranje in navodila za vašo brezžično napravo (še posebno uporabniški vodnik za usmerjevalnik)

Disk, ki vsebuje gonilnike za brezžično kartico (tudi če vsebuje le gonilnike Windows)

Proizvajalci in številke modela vašega računalnika, brezžične kartice in usmerjevalnika. Te podatke lahko običajno najdete na zadnji/spodnji strani naprave.

Morebitne številke različic, ki so natisnjene na napravah ali njihovem pakiranju. To vam lahko še posebno pomaga, zato pozorno poglejte.

Karkoli na disku z gonilniki, ki določa napravo, njeno različico "strojne programske opreme" ali sestavne dele, ki jih uporablja.

Če je mogoče, poskusite dobiti dostop do druge internetne povezave, da lahko prejmete programe in gonilnike, če je to potrebno. (priklop računalnika neposredno v usmerjevalnik z Ethernet omrežnim kablom je eden od načinov za to, vendar ga priklopite le, ko ga potrebujete.)

Ko imate kolikor je mogoče od teh predmetov, kliknite Naprej.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files.page0000644000373100047300000000347212320731746023724 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Datoteke Iskanje, izbris datotek, varnostne kopije, odstranljivi pogoni,dokumenti … Datoteke, mape in iskanje

Upravljalnik datotek Nautilus

 Pogoste naloge Več tem
Odstranljivi pogoni in zunanji diski
Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij
Dokumenti
Triki in vprašanja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/disk-check.page0000644000373100047300000000572612320731746024633 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Svoj disk lahko preizkusite za težave in se prepričate, da je zdrav. Preverjanje trdega diska za težave.
Preverjanje trdega diska

Trdi diski imajo vgrajeno orodje za preverjanje zdrava SMART, ki stalno preverja za morebitne težave diska. SMART vas tudi opozori, če je disk pred odpovedjo in vam pomaga pri izogibanju izgube pomembnih podatkov.

Čeprav se SMART izvaja samodejno, lahko zdravje diska preverite tudi s programom Diski:

Preverite zdravje diska s programom Diski

Iz Pregledne plošče odprite program Diski.

Odprite program Diskovna orodja iz pregleda Dejavnosti.

Izberite disk, ki ga želite preveriti, s seznama Naprave shrambe. Podatki in stanje diska se bosta pojavila pod Pogon.

Stanje SMART bi moralo reči "Disk deluje brezhibno".

Kliknite na gumb Podatki SMART za ogled več podatkov o pogonu ali za izvajanje preizkusov.
Kaj storiti, če disk ne deluje brezhibno?

Tudi če Stanje SMART nakazuje, da disk ni zdrav, vam morda ni treba skrbeti. Vseeno je boljše biti pripravljen z varnostno kopijo za preprečitev izgube podatkov.

V primeru da stanje pravi "Pre-fail" je disk v razumno dobrem stanju, vendar so bili zaznani znaki obrabe, kar pomeni, da se bo lahko kmalu pokvaril. V primeru da je vaš trdi disk (ali računalnik) star nekaj let, boste to sporočilo verjetno videli vsaj na nekaj preverjanjih stanja. Redno ustvarjajte varnostne kopije pomembnih datotek in občasno preverite ali se stanje diska slabša.

V primeru da se stanje poslabša, odpeljite računalnik/trdi disk k profesionalcu za nadaljnjo diagnozo in popravilo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/get-involved.page0000644000373100047300000000256712320731746025231 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako in kje poročati težave s temi temami pomoči. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Sodelujte pri izboljšavi tega vodnika

Ta sistem pomoči ustvarja skupnost prostovoljcev. Vabljeni ste k sodelovanju. Če opazite težavo s temi stranmi pomoči (kot so tipkarske napake, nepravilna navodila ali teme, ki bi morale biti obravnavane, a niso), lahko pošljete poročilo o hrošču.

Za poročanje hrošča pritisnite AltF2 in vnesite ubuntu-bug ubuntu-docs. Pritisnite Enter za začetek opravila zbiranja hrošča.

Oglejte si navodila o prijavi hrošča Ubuntuju za več podrobnosti o tem kako prijaviti hrošča.

Hvala, ker pomagate izboljševati Ubuntu!

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000254112320731746026063 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2013 Pošljite e-pošto, klepetajte ali pokličite stik. Povežite se z svojim stikom

Za pošiljanje e-pošte, klepet ali klic v Stikih:

Izberite stik iz seznama stikov.

Pritisnite na Podrobnosti, katere želite uporabiti. Kot na primer, za pošiljanje e-pošte vašemu stiku pritisnite na e-poštni naslov.

Zagnal se bo ustrezen program, ki bo uporabljal podrobnosti stika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-othercountry.page0000644000373100047300000000411712320731746026516 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vaš računalnik bo deloval, vendar morda potrebuje drugačen kabel ali pretvornik napetosti. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ali bo moj računalnik deloval s polnilcem iz druge države?

Različne države uporabljajo polnilce z različnimi napetostmi (običajno 110V ali 220-240V) in frekvencami (običajno 50 Hz ali 60 Hz). Vaš računalnik bi moral delovati z napajalniki iz različnih držav dokler imate ustrezen vmesnik. Morda boste morali obrniti stikalo.

V primeru da imate prenosnik, je vse, kar morate storiti, najti pravi vtič za svoj napajalnik. Večina prenosnikov ima več kot en vtič za svoj napajalnik, zato morda že imate pravega. Če ga nimate, bo vklop obstoječega vtiča v običajni potovalni vmesnik zadostoval.

V primeru da imate namizni računalnik, lahko dobite tudi kabel z drugačnim vtičem ali uporabite potovalni prilagodilnik. V tem primeru boste morda morali spremeniti stikalo napetosti na napajalniku računalnika, če obstaja. Večina računalnikov takšnega stikala nima in bo delovalo z obema napetostma. Oglejte si zadnjo stran računalnika in najdite priključek za vklop kabla z električnega omrežja. Nekje blizu je lahko majhno stikalo označeno s "110V" ali "230V". Preklopite ga, če je to potrebno.

Pri spreminjanju kablov električnega omrežja ali uporabi potovalnih prilagodilnikov bodite previdni. Izklopite vse, kar lahko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-exit.page0000644000373100047300000000730612320731746024700 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Naučite se kako se odjavite, preklapljate med uporabniki in še več. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Alexandre Franke afranke@gnome.org Odjava, izklop, preklop uporabnikov

Ko ste končali z uporabo računalnika, ga lahko izklopite, pošljete v stanje pripravljenosti (za zmanjšanje porabe) ali ga pustite vklopljenega in se odjavite.

Odjava ali preklop uporabnika

Da lahko vaš računalnik uporabljajo tudi drugi uporabniki, se lahko odjavite ali ostanete prijavljeni in enostavno preklopite uporabnike. V primeru da enostavno preklopite uporabnike, se bodo vsi vaši programi še naprej izvajali in bo ob ponovni prijavi vse ostalo, kjer je bilo.

Za odjavo ali preklop uporabnikov kliknite na sistemski meni skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite ustrezno možnost.

Zaklepanje zaslona

V primeru da računalnik za kratek čas zapuščate, zaklenite zaslon in s tem drugim ljudem preprečite dostop do svojih datotek in izvajajočih se programov. Ko se vrnete, vnesite svoje geslo za ponovno prijavo. V primeru da svojega zaslona ne zaklenete, se bo po določenem času samodejno zaklenil.

Za zaklep zaslona kliknite meni sistema v menijski vrstici in izberite Zaklep zaslona.

Ko je zaslon zaklenjen, se lahko drugi uporabniki prijavijo v svoje račune s klikom na Preklop uporabnika na zaslonu z geslom. Ko končate, lahko preklopite nazaj na svoje namizje.

V pripravljenost

Za zmanjšanje porabe dajte računalnik v stanje pripravljenosti, ko ga ne uporabljate. Če uporabljate prenosnik, Ubuntu ob zaprtju pokrova vaš računalnik samodejno da v stanje pripravljenosti. To shrani stanje vašega računalnika v pomnilnik računalnika in izklopi večino zmožnosti računalnika. V stanju pripravljenosti se porablja majhna količina energije.

Če želite ročno poslati računalnik v pripravljenost, izberite meni sistema v menijski vrstici in izberite V pripravljenost.

Izklop ali ponoven zagon

Če želite izklopiti ali ponovno zagnati svoj računalnik kliknite na meni sistema in izberite Izklop.

V primeru da so prijavljeni tudi drugi uporabniki, računalnika morda ne boste mogli izklopiti ali ponovno zagnati, ker bo to končalo njihove seje. V primeru da ste skrbnik, boste morali za odjavo vnesti svoje geslo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-email.page0000644000373100047300000000121612320731746024467 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Privzeti programi e-pošte Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Projekt dokumentacije GNOME E-pošta, programi e-pošte usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-constantfan.page0000644000373100047300000000356512320731746026275 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Manjka program za nadzor ventilatorjev ali pa se vaš prenosnik pregreva. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ventilator prenosnika se vedno vrti

V primeru da se ventilator vedno vrti, to lahko pomeni, da stojna oprema, ki nadzora hladilni sistem v prenosniku, na Linuxu ni dobro podprta. Nekateri prenosniki za učinkovit nadzor svojih ventilatorjev potrebujejo dodatne programe, vendar morda ta program ni nameščen (ali pa sploh ni na voljo za Linux), zato se ventilatorji ves čas vrtijo s polno hitrostjo.

V tem primeru boste morda lahko spremenili nekatere nastavitve ali namestili dodatne programe, ki omogočajo poln nadzor ventilatorja. Za nekatere prenosnike Sony VAIO lahko na primer namestite vaiofand. Nameščanje takšnih programov je tehnično opravilo, ki je močno odvisno od proizvajalca vašega prenosnika, zato najdite navodila, kako to storiti na svojem računalniku.

Mogoče je tudi, da vaš prenosnik proizvaja veliko toplote. To ne pomeni nujno, da se pregreva. Morda mora zato, da ostane dovolj hladen stalno poganjati ventilator s polno hitrostjo. V tem primeru nimate druge možnosti kot da pustite ventilator delovati s polno hitrostjo ves čas. Včasih lahko za svoj prenosnik kupite dodatne hladilne pripomočke, ki vam lahko pomagajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-batteryslow.page0000644000373100047300000000177212320731746026334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekateri prenosniki se namenoma upočasnijo, ko tečejo na bateriji. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Zakaj je moj prenosnik počasen, ko uporablja napetost baterije?

Nekateri prenosniki se med delovanjem na bateriji namenoma upočasnijo za varčevanje z energijo. Procesor prenosnika preklopi na nižjo hitrost in zato porabi manj energije. Baterija zato traja dlje.

Ta zmožnost se imenuje spreminjanje frekvence CPE.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-security-tips.page0000644000373100047300000000543512320731746026233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Splošni namigi za uporabo interneta Steven Richards steven.richardspc@gmail.com Varnost na internetu

Eden od vzrokov za uporabo Linuxa je robustna varnost po kateri je znan. En vzrok zakaj je Linux relativno varen pred zlonamerno programsko opremo in virusi je zaradi števila ljudi, ki ga uporabljajo. Virusi napadajo priljubljene operacijske sisteme kot je Windows, ki imajo ogromno število uporabnikov. Linux je zelo varen tudi zaradi njegove odprtokodne narave, ki strokovnjakom omogoča spreminjanje in izboljševanje varnostnih zmožnosti, ki so vključene v vsako distribucijo.

Kljub vsem ukrepom, da bi bila vaša namestitev Linuxa varna, ranljivosti vedno obstajajo. Kot običajen uporabnik na internetu ste še vedno izpostavljeni:

Lažnemu predstavljanju (spletišča, ki s prevaro poskušajo pridobiti občutljive podatke)

Posredovanje zlonamerne e-pošte

Programom z zlonamernimi nameni (virusi)

Neodobren oddaljeni/krajevni dostop do omrežja

Da bi ostali na spletui varni, se držite naslednjih namigov:

Ne odpirajte e-pošte, prilog ali povezav, ki so vam jih poslali neznanci.

V primeru da je ponudba spletišča predobra, da bi bila res, ali vpraša za občutljive podatke, ki se zdijo nepotrebni, dvakrat premislite kaj pošiljate in morebitne posledice, če te podatke dobijo tatovi identitete in drugi kriminalci.

Bodite previdni pri zagotavljanju skrbniških dovoljenj programom, še posebno tistim, ki jih še niste uporabljali ali programom, ki niso dobro znani. Dodeljevanje skrbniških pravic komurkoli/čemurkoli vaš računalnik postavi v visoko tvegan položaj.

Prepričajte se, da poganjate le nujne storitve oddaljenega dostopa. Poganjanje SSH ali VNC je lahko uporabno, vendar vaš računalnik pusti izpostavljen vlomu, če ni pravilno zavarovan. Razmislite o uporabi požarnega zidu za pomoč pri zaščiti vašega računalnika pred vlomom.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/windows-key.page0000644000373100047300000000425312320731746025100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tipka Super omogoča dostop do Pregledne plošče in Zaganjalnika. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Kaj je tipka "Super"?

Tipko lahko običajno najdete v spodnjem levem delu tipkovnice poleg tipke Alt in ima običajno ikono windows/kvadratkov. Včasih se imenuje tipka Windows, logo ali sistemska tipka.

V primeru, da imate tipkovnico Apple, na vaši tipkovnici tipke windows ne bo. Namesto nje uporabite tipko ⌘ (Command).

Tipka Super ima v Unity posebne zmožnosti. Če pritisnete tipko Super, je prikazana pregledna plošča. Če pritisnete in držite tipko Super, se bo, dokler tipke Super ne izpustite, prikazal pregled tipkovnih bližnjic Unity.

Tipka Super vam lahko pomaga pri več kot tem. Za več o uporabah tipke Super si oglejte stran tipkovne bližnjice.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-admin-problems.page0000644000373100047300000000253112320731746026502 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatere stvari kot na primer nameščanje programov lahko izvedete le, če imate skrbniška dovoljenja. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Težave, ki jih povzročijo skrbniške omejitve

V primeru da nimate skrbniških dovoljenj, imate lahko nekaj težav. Nekatere stvari za delovanje od vas zahtevajo skrbniška dovoljenja:

Povezava z omrežij/brezžičnimi omrežji

Ogled vsebine odstranljivega diska priklopljenega na računalnik ali vsebine drugega razdelka na disku (na primer, če imate razdelek Windows)

Nameščanje novih programov

Lahko spremenite osebo, ki ima skrbniška dovoljenja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-findip.page0000644000373100047300000000406112320731746024652 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Poznavanje vašega naslova IP vam lahko pomaga pri odpravljanju težav z omrežjem. Najdite svoj naslov IP

Poznavanje vašega naslova IP vam lahko pomaga pri odpravljanju težav z vašo internetno povezavo. Vaš računalnik ima dva naslova IP: naslov IP vašega računalnika na notranjem omrežju in naslov IP vašega računalnika na internetu.

Najdite svoj notranji (omrežni) naslov IP

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite Žično ali Brezžično s seznama na levi, odvisno od tega za katero omrežno povezavo želite najti naslov IP.

Vaš notranji naslov IP bo prikazan na seznamu podatkov.

 Najdite svoj zunanji, internetni naslov IP:

Obiščite whatismyipaddress.com.

Spletišče vam bo za vas prikazalo vaš zunanji naslov IP.

Odvisno od tega kako se vaš računalnik poveže z internetom, so lahko naslovi enaki.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/session-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000557712320731747025767 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Izberite regijo, ki naj se uporablja za datum in čas, števila, valuto in merske enote. Sprememba datuma in oblik merjenja

Nadzirate lahko oblike, ki se uporabljajo za datume, čase, števila, valuto in merske enote, ki se ujemajo s krajevnimi običaji vaše regije.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Jezikovna podpora in izberite zavihek Področne oblike.

Izberite regijo, ki se najbolj ujema z oblikami, ki jih želite uporabiti. Privzeto so na seznamu prikazane le regije, ki uporabljajo jezik, ki je nastavljen v zavihku Jezik.

Za uveljavitev spremembe se morate najprej odjaviti in nato znova prijaviti. Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in za odjavo izberite Odjava.

Ko ste izbrali regijo, bo področje pod seznamamom prikazalo različne primere prikaza datumov in drugih vrednosti. Čeprav to ni prikazano v primerih, vaša regija vpliva tudi na začetni dan tedna v koledarjih.

Sprememba oblik sistema

Ko spremenite svojo regijo za oblike, jo lahko spremenite za svoj račun potem, ko se prijavite. Lahko spremenite tudi sistemske oblike, oblike, ki se uporabljajo na mestih kot je prijavni zaslon.

Spremenite svoje oblike kot je opisano zgoraj.

Kliknite Uveljavi za celoten sistem.

Zahtevana so skrbniška dovoljenja. Vnesite svoje geslo ali geslo za zahteveni skrbniški račun.

Več pomoči o jezikih in krajevnih oblikah lahko najdete v Pomoči jezikovne podpore.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-thinkabout.page0000644000373100047300000000605012320731747026231 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Seznam map kjer lahko najdete dokumente, datoteke in nastavitve katerih varnostno kopijo boste morda želeli ustvariti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kje lahko najdem datoteke katerih varnostno kopijo želim ustvariti?

Spodaj so izpisana najbolj pogosta mesta pomembnih datotek in nastavitev, ki si jih morda želite varnostno kopirati.

Osebne datoteke (dokumenti, glasba, fotografije in videoposnetki)

Te so ponavadi shranjene v vaši domači mapi (/home/vaše_ime). Lahko so v podmapah kot je Namizje, Dokumenti, Slike, Glasba in Videi.

Če je na vašem mediju varnostne kopije dovolj prostora (na primer če je to zunanji trdi disk), razmislite o ustvarjanju varnostne kopije celotne Domače mape. Koliko prostora zavzema Domača mapa lahko ugotovite z orodjem Preučevalnik porabe diska.

Skrite datoteke

Katerokoli ime datoteke ali mape, ki se začne s piko (.), je privzeto skrito. Za ogled skritih datotek kliknite PogledPokaži skrite datoteke ali pritisnite CtrlH.

Osebne nastavitve (možnosti namizja, teme in nastavitve programov)

Večina programov shrani svoje nastavitve v skrite mape v vaši Domači mapi (glejte zgoraj za podrobnosti o skritih datotekah).

Večina vaših nastavitev programov je shranjena v skritih mapah .config, .gconf, .gnome2 in .local v vaši Domači mapi.

Sistemske nastavitve

Nastavitve pomembnih delov sistema niso shranjene v Domači mapi. Obstajajo številna mesta, kjer so lahko shranjena, vendar jih je večina shranjena v mapi /etc. V splošnem vam varnostne kopije teh datotek na domačem računalniku ni treba ustvariti. Če imate strežnik, je pametno ustvariti varnostno kopijo datotek za storitve, ki jih strežnik poganja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-chat-social.page0000644000373100047300000000342112320731747025570 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Objava na Twitter, Facebook in druga družabna omrežja neposredno z namizja Družabno omrežje z namizja

Z Ubuntujem lahko objavljate na svojih najljubših spletiščih družabnega omrežja s svojega namizja. Ubuntu za organizacijo spletišč družabnih omrežij na enem mestu in za objavljanje posodobitev iz Osebnega menija brez odpiranja spletišč uporablja vir Prijatelji.

Za nastavitev računov družabnih omrežij:

Odprite meni sistema na desni strani menijske vrstice in izberite "Sistemske nastavitve ..."

Izberite Spletni računi

Izberite spletišče družabnega omrežja, ki ga želite nastaviti in kliknite Dodaj račun ....

Kliknite Overi, vstavite nastavitve računa za spletišče in sledite navodilom

Sedaj si lahko sporočila z družabnih omrežij ogledate iz menija sporočanja na desni strani menijske vrstice, v odseku Vsesmerno oddajanje. Kliknite na kateregakoli od predmetov v tem odseku za odprtje vira Prijatelji in za branje ali objavo sporočil na svojem družabnem omrežju.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color.page0000644000373100047300000000173412320731747023740 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj je to pomembno, Barvni profili, Kako umeriti napravo … Upravljanje barv
Barvni profili
Umerjanje
Težave
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless.page0000644000373100047300000000170112320731747025235 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Poveži se z brezžičnim omrežjem, Skrita omrežja, Uredi nastavitve povezave, Prekinjanje povezave … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Brezžične povezave usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-hidden.page0000644000373100047300000000405212320731747026470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Kliknite meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Poveži se s skritim brezžičnim omrežjem. Povezava s skritim brezžičnim omrežjem

Brezžično omrežje je mogoče nastaviti tako, da je "skrito". Skrita omrežja se ne pokažejo na seznamu omrežij, ki so prikazana ob kliku na ikono omrežja v menijski vrstici (ali na seznamu omrežij na kateremkoli drugem računalniku). Za povezavo s skritim brezžičnim omrežjem:

Kliknite meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Poveži se s skritim brezžičnim omrežjem.

V oknu, ki se pojavi, vnesite ime omrežja, izberite vrsto brezžične varnosti in kliknite Poveži se.

Morda boste morali preveriti nastavitve brezžične postaje/usmerjevalnika za preverjanje imena omrežja. Včasih se imenuje BSSID in je videti približno takole: 02:00:01:02:03:04.

Preverite tudi varnostne nastavitve brezžične postaje. Iščite izraze kot sta WEP in WPA.

Morda mislite, da bo skritje vašega brezžičnega omrežja izboljšalo varnost, saj bo ljudem, ki zanj ne vedo, preprečilo povezovanje. To ni res, saj je vaše omrežje težje najti, vendar ga je še vedno mogoče zaznati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-batterybroken.page0000644000373100047300000000312412320731747026622 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vaš baterija verjetno ni pokvarjena. Bolj verjetno je samo stara. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Napaka poroča, da ima moja baterija nizko zmogljivost

Ob prvi prijavi boste morda videli sporočilo:

Baterija je morda poškodovana. Baterija ima zelo nizko zmogljivost.To pomeni, da je stara ali poškodovana.

To sporočilo je prikazano, ko računalnik zazna, da baterija ne more shraniti veliko energije. Najverjetnejši vzrok je, da je vaša baterija stara. Verjetno ni pokvarjena, zato vam ni treba skrbeti.

Čez čas vse baterije prenosnikov izgubijo svojo zmožnost shranjevanja energije. Čez nekaj časa (običajno po letu dni ali več), bodo baterije lahko shranile le del naboja, ki so ga lahko shranile, ko so bile nove. To sporočilo se prikaže, ko se to zgodi.

V primeru da je vaš računalnik ali baterija relativno nova, bi morala biti zmožna zadržati visok odstotek zasnovanega naboja. Če tega ne more storiti, je morda pokvarjena in jo morate morda zamenjati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-general.page0000644000373100047300000000156312320731747025023 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Najdite svoj naslov IP, varnost WEP in WPA, naslovi MAC, posredniški strežniki … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Projekt dokumentacije GNOME Izrazi in namigi omrežja usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/more-help.page0000644000373100047300000000147212320731747024511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Namigi za uporabo tega vodnika, pomagajte izboljšati ta vodnik … Dobite več pomoči

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-problem.page0000644000373100047300000000133612320731747025044 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odpravljanje težav z brezžičnimi povezavami, iskanje brezžične povezave … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Težave z omrežjem usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-canshareprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000302612320731747027262 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deljenje barvnih profilov ni priporočeno, ker se strojna oprema spreminja skozi čas. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Ali lahko svoj barvni profil delim z drugimi?

Barvni profili, ki ste jih sami ustvarili, so določeni za strojno opremo in pogoje osvetlitve, za katero ste jih umerili. Zaslon ki je bil prižgan nekaj sto ur, bo imel zelo drugačen barvni profil kot podoben zaslon, ki je bil prižgan na tisoče ur.

To pomeni, da boste v primeru da svoj barvni profil delite z nekom, morda spravili bližje umerjanju, vendar je zavajujoče reči, da je njihov zaslon umerjen.

Podobno deljenje profila, ki ste ga ustvarili za svoje svetlobne pogoje nima smisla, če nimate v prostoru za urejanje slik vsi popolnoma enake osvetlitve (brez sončne svetlobe z oken, črnih zidov, dnevnih žarnic).

Previdno preverite pogoje razširjanja za profile, ki ste jih prejeli s spletišč proizvajalca ali pa jih je za vas nekdo ustvaril.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-order.page0000644000373100047300000000370612320731747025566 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zbiranje strani in obratni vrstni red tiskanja. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Tiskanje strani v drugem vrstnem redu
Obrnjeno

Tiskalniki običajno najprej natisnejo prvo stran in nazadnje zadnjo stran, zato so strani v obratnem vrstnem redu, ko jih obrnete. Če želite, lahko vrstni red tiskanja obrnete.

Za obratni vrstni red:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V zavihku Splošno okna tiskanja pod Kopije izberite Obratno. Najprej bo natisnjena zadnja stran in tako naprej.
Zbiranje

V primeru da tiskate več kot eno kopijo dokumenta, bodo izpisi privzeto združeni po številki strani (naprej bodo natisnjene vse kopije prve strani, nato vse kopije druge strani in tako naprej). Zbiranje bo izpise združilo po kopijah z vsemi stranmi.

Za zbiranje:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni.

V zavihku Splošno okna tiskanja pod Kopije izberite Zberi.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/video-sending.page0000644000373100047300000000527212320731747025356 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverijo, da imajo nameščene prave kodeke. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Drugi ljudje ne morejo predvajati mojih videoposnetkov

V primeru, da ste naredili video na svojem računalniku z Linuxom in ga poslali nekomu, ki uporablja Windows ali Mac OS, bo morda imel težave z njegovim predvajanjem.

Da bi lahko predvajala vaš videoposnetek, mora imeti oseba, ki ste ji poslali videoposnetek, nameščene prave kodeke. Kodek je majhen program, ki ve, kako video prikazati na zaslonu. Obstaja veliko različnih vrst videa in vsaka za predvajanje zahteva svoj kodek.

Odprite upravljalnik datotek.

Desno kliknite na video datoteko in izberite Lastnosti.

Pojdite v zavihek Zvok/Video in preverite kateri kodek je naveden pod Video.

Osebo s težavami s predvajanjem vprašajte, če ima nameščen pravi kodek. Morda jim bo pomagalo iskanje po spletu z imenom kodeka in njihovega video programa. Na primer, če vaš video uporablja vrsto Theora in imate prijatelja, ki uporablja Windows Media Player in si ga želite ogledati, iščite "theora windows media player". Pogosto boste lahko pravi kodek prejeli brezplačno, če še ni nameščen.

Če pravega kodeka ne morete najti, poskusite predvajalnik VLC. Deluje na sistemih Windows, Mac OS in Linux in podpira veliko različnih vrst videa. V nasprotnem primeru poskusite pretvoriti video v drugo vrsto. To lahko stori večina urejevalnikov videa, na voljo pa so tudi posebni programi za pretvarjanje videa. Preverite kaj je na voljo v Programskem središču Ubuntu.

Obstaja še nekaj drugih težav, ki lahko nekomu preprečijo predvajanje vašega videoposnetka. Video je lahko bil ob pošiljanju poškodovan (včasih velike datoteke niso pravilno kopirane), lahko imajo težave s svojim programom za predvajanje videa ali pa video ni bil pravilno ustvarjen (ob shranjevanju videoposnetka je morda prišlo do nekaj napak).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-streaks.page0000644000373100047300000000344512320731747026127 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V primeru da so izpisi progasti, bledi ali pa jim manjkajo barve, preverite ravni črnila ali očistite glavo tiskalnika. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Zakaj so na mojih izpisih proge, črte ali napačne barve?

V primeru da so vaši izpisi črtasti, bledi, imajo vrstice, ki tam ne bi smele biti, ali so slabe kakovosti, je to morda zaradi težave s tiskalnikom ali nizke ravni črnila/tonerja.

Pojemajoče besedilo ali slike

Morda vam zmanjkuje črnila ali tonerja. Preverite svojo zalogo črnila/tonerja in kupite novo kartušo, če je to potrebno.

Proge in črte

V primeru da imate brizgalni tiskalnik, je glava tiskalnika morda umazana ali delno blokirana. Poskusite očistiti glavo tiskalnika (oglejte si priročnik tiskalnika).

Napačne barve

Tiskalniku je morda zmanjkalo ene barve črnila ali tonerja. Preverite svojo zalogo črnila/tonerja in kupite novo kartušo, če je to potrebno.

Nazobčene ali neravne črte

V primeru da so črte, ki bi morale biti ravne nazobčene, morate morda poravnati glavo tiskalnika. Za podrobnosti o tem si oglejte priročnik tiskalnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-search.page0000644000373100047300000000717012320731750025161 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Najdite datoteke na osnovi njihovega imena in vrste. Shranite svoje rezultate za kasnejšo uporabo. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iskanje datotek

Datoteke lahko iščete na osnovi njihovega imena ali vrste neposredno iz upravljalnika datotek. Pogosta iskanja lahko shranite in pojavila se bodo kot posebne mape v vaši domači mapi.

Drugi programi za iskanje Iskanje

Odprite upravljalnik datotek

V primeru da veste, da so datoteke, ki jih želite, v določeni mapi, pojdite v to mapo.

V orodni vrstici kliknite na povečevalno steklo ali pritisnite CtrlF.

Vpišite besedo ali besede, ki se pojavijo v imenu datoteke. Na primer, če ste vse svoje račune imenovali z besedo "račun", vpišite račun in pritisnite tipko Enter.Pri ujemanju besed velikost črk ni pomembna.

Svoje rezultate lahko zožite glede na mesto in vrsto datoteke.

Kliknite na Domov za omejitev rezultatov na našo Domačo mapo ali Vse datoteke za iskanje povsod.

Kliknite na gumb + in izberite Vrsta datoteke iz spustnega seznama za omejitev rezultatov iskanja glede na vrsto datoteke. Kliknite na gumb x za odstranitev te možnosti in razširitev rezultatov iskanja.

Svoje datoteke lahko iz rezultatov iskanja odpirate, kopirate, izbrišete in delate kot bi iz katerekoli mape v upravljalniku datotek.

Za izhod iz iskanja in povratek v mapo v orodni vrstici ponovno kliknite na povečevalno steklo.

V primeru da določena iskanja pogosto izvajate, jih lahko shranite za hiter dostop.

Shranitev iskanja

Začnite iskanje kot je prikazano zgoraj.

Ko ste s parametri iskanja zadovoljni, kliknite na gumb zobnika ⚙ in izberite Shrani iskanje kot.

Iskanju dajte ime in kliknite Shrani. Če želite, lahko za shranjevanje iskanja izberete drugo mapo. Ko si to mapo ogledate, boste svoje shranjeno iskanje videli kot oranžno ikono mape s povečevalnim steklom na njej.

Za odstranitev iskanja datoteke enostavno izbrišite iskanje kot bi izbrisali katerokoli drugo datoteko. Ko izbrišete shranjeno iskanje, datoteke, ki se ujemajo z iskanjem, niso izbrisane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-hibernate.page0000644000373100047300000000716112320731750025707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Mirovanje je privzeto onemogočeno, ker ni dobro podprto. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Kako dam računalnik v mirovanje?

Ko je računalnik v mirovanju, se vsi vaši programi ter dokumenti shranijo in računalnik se popolnoma ugasne, tako da ne uporablja energije. Programi in dokumenti bodo še vedno odprti, ko znova vklopite računalnik.

Na žalost mirovanje v veliko primerih ne deluje, kar lahko povzroči izgubo podatkov, če pričakujete, da se bodo vaši dokumenti in programi ponovno odprli, ko računalnik ponovno vklopite. Zato je mirovanje privzeto onemogočeno.

Preizkus, če mirovanje deluje Pred prehodom v stanje mirovanje vedno shranite svoje delo

Pred prehodom v mirovanje ali stanje pripravljenosti svoje delo shranite za vsak slučaj, če bi šlo kaj narobe in odprtih programov in dokumentov ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika ne bi bilo mogoče obnoviti.

Za preizkus, če mirovanje deluje na vašem računalniku, lahko uporabite ukazno vrstico.

Odprite Terminal s pritiskom Ctrl Altt ali iskanjem terminal v Pregledni plošči.

Odprite Terminal z iskanjem terminal v Pregledu dejavnosti.

Vtipkajte sudo pm-hibernate v terminal in pritisnite Enter.

Ob pozivu vnesite svoje geslo.

Ko se računalnik izklopi, ga ponovno vklopite. Ali so se vaši programi ponovno odprli?

Če mirovanje ne deluje, preverite, če je velikost vašega izmenjevalnega razdelka vsaj tako velika kot je velikost vašega razpoložljivega pomnilnika (RAM-a).
Omogočitev mirovanja

Če preizkus mirovanja deluje, lahko nadaljujete z uporabo ukaza sudo pm-hibernate.

Prav tako pa lahko omogočite možnost mirovanja v menijih. Z urejevalnikom besedila ustvarite datoteko /etc/polkit-1/localauthority/50-local.d/com.ubuntu.enable-hibernate.pkla. Dodajte naslednje vrstice v datoteko in jo shranite:

[Re-enable hibernate by default in upower] Identity=unix-user:* Action=org.freedesktop.upower.hibernate ResultActive=yes [Re-enable hibernate by default in logind] Identity=unix-user:* Action=org.freedesktop.login1.hibernate ResultActive=yes
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-send-file.page0000644000373100047300000001131212320731750026456 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Souporaba datotek z napravami z omogočenim Bluetooth, kot je telefon. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Pošiljanje datoteke na drugo napravo Bluetooth

Datoteke lahko pošiljate povezanim napravam Bluetooth, kot so mobilni telefoni ter drugi računalniki. Nekatere naprave ne dovolijo prenosa datotek oz. določenih vrst datotek. Datoteke lahko pošiljate na tri načine: uporabite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici, iz okna nastavitev Bluetootha ali neposredno iz upravljalnika datotek.

Datoteke lahko pošljete na povezane naprave Bluetooth kot so mobilni telefoni in drugi računalniki. Nekatere vrste naprav ne omogočajo prenosa datotek ali določenih vrst datotek. Datoteke lahko pošljete z uporabo ikone Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici ali iz okna nastavitev Bluetooth.

Za pošiljanje datotek neposredno iz upravljalnika datotek si oglejte .

Preden začnete, se prepričajte, da je Bluetooth na vašem računalniku omogočen. Oglejte si .

 Pošljanje datotek z ikono Bluetooth

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Pošlji datoteke napravi.

Kliknite na ikono Bluetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Pošlji datoteke na napravo.

Izberite datoteko, ki jo želite poslati, in kliknite Izberi.

Za pošiljanje več kot ene datoteke v mapi med izbiranjem datotek držite tipko Ctrl.

S seznama izberite napravo na katero želite poslati datoteke in nato kliknite Pošlji.

Seznam naprav bo prikazal tako naprave s katerimi ste že povezani in vidne naprave v dosegu. Če se z izbrano napravo še niste povezali, boste pozvani k spoznavanju z napravo po pritisku na Pošlji. To bo verjetno zahtevalo potrditev na drugi napravi.

Če imate veliko naprav, lahko seznam omejite le na določene vrste naprav s pomočjo spustnega seznama Vrsta naprave.

Lastnik prejemajoče naprave mora za sprejem datoteke običajno pritisniti gumb. Ko lastnik datoteke sprejme ali zavrne, se bo rezultat prenosa datotek prikazal na vašem zaslonu.

 Pošiljanje datotek iz nastavitev Bluetooth

Kliknite ikono Bluetooth v menijski vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

Kliknite na ikono BLuetooth v vrhnji vrstici in izberite Nastavitve Bluetooth.

Izberite napravo na katero želite poslati datoteke s seznama na levi. Seznam prikazuje le naprave s katerimi ste že povezani. Oglejte si .

V podatki o napravi na desni kliknite Pošlji datoteke.

Izberite datoteko, ki jo želite poslati, in kliknite Izberi.

Za pošiljanje več kot ene datoteke v mapi med izbiranjem datotek držite tipko Ctrl.

Lastnik prejemajoče naprave mora za sprejem datoteke običajno pritisniti gumb. Ko lastnik datoteke sprejme ali zavrne, se bo rezultat prenosa datotek prikazal na vašem zaslonu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-scanner.page0000644000373100047300000000345112320731750027303 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje optičnega bralnika je pomembno pri natančnemu zajemu barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako umeriti optični bralnik?

Svojo tarčno datoteko lahko optično preberete in jo shranite kot nestisnjeno sliko TIFF. Nato lahko kliknete Umeri ... iz Sistemske nastavitveBarva za ustvarjanje profila za napravo.

Svojo tarčno datoteko lahko optično preberete in jo shranite kot nestisnjeno sliko TIFF. Nato lahko kliknete Umeri ... iz Sistemske nastavitveBarva za ustvarjanje profila za napravo.

Optični bralniki so časovno in temperaturno zelo stabilne naprave in jih običajno ni treba ponovno umerjati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/user-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000406412320731750025031 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odstranitev uporabnikov, ki ne uporabljajo več vašega računalnika. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Izbris uporabniškega računa

Na svoj računalnik lahko dodate več uporabniških računov. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte . V primeru da nekdo vašega računalnika ne uporablja več, lahko račun tega uporabnika izbrišete.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Uporabiški računi.

Kliknite Odkleni v zgornjem desnem kotu in vnesite svoje geslo, da uveljavite spremembe. Da lahko izbrišete uporabniške račune, morate biti skrbnik.

Izberite uporabnika, ki ga želite izbrisati, in nato kliknite gumb -.

Vsak uporabnik ima svojo domačo mapo za svoje datoteke in nastavitve. Domačo mapo uporabnika lahko obdržite ali izbrišete. Kliknite Izbriši datoteke, če ste prepričani, da jih ne boste več potrebovali in če morate izprazniti prostor na disku. Te datoteke so trajno izbrisane. Ni jih mogoče obnoviti. Morda boste želeli pred izbrisom datotek ustvariti varnostno kopijo na zunanjem pogonu ali CD-ju.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-paperjam.page0000644000373100047300000000246612320731750026246 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kako popraviti zastoj papirja je odvisno od proizvajalca in modela vašega tiskalnika. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Odstranjevanje zataknjenega papirja

Včasih tiskalnik nepravilno poda liste papirja, ki se zato zataknejo.

Priročnik za vaš tiskalnik bo ponavadi zagotovil podrobna navodila kako odpraviti zastoje papirja. Običajno morate odpreti eno od tiskalnikovih stranic, kar vam omogoča dostop do zastoja znotraj in nato trdno (a previdno!) potegniti zataknjen papir ven iz tiskalnikovega mehanizma podajanja.

Ko ste zastoj počistili, boste morda morali za nadaljevanje tiskanja pritisniti na gumb Nadaljuj. Za nekatere modele tiskalnikov boste morda za ponoven začetek posla tiskanja tiskalnik izklopiti in ponovno vklopiti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts-whyadd.page0000644000373100047300000000236712320731750025714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Susanna Huhtanen ihmis.suski@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Zakaj dodati račune e-pošte ali družabnih medijev na namizje? Zakaj naj dodam račun?

Dodajanje svojih računov prinaša izbiro storitev kot so koledar, klepet in e-pošta neposredno na vaše namizje in s tem storitve neopazno postanejo del vaše uporabniške izkušnje. Z dodajanjem računov, lahko uporabljate več različnih klepetov hkrati. Samo enkrat nastavite svoj račun in vedno, ko zaženete računalnik, bodo vsi računi in storitve, ki ste jih dodali, pripravljeni za vas.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-camera.page0000644000373100047300000000300512320731750027075 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje vašega fotoaparata je pomembno za zajem natančnih barv. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kako umeriti fotoaparat?

Fotoaparat lahko umerite z zajemom fotografije tarče pod želenimi svetlobnimi pogoji. S pretvorbo datoteke RAW v datoteko TIFF ga lahko uporabite za umerjanje fotoaparata v nadzorni plošči barve.

Datoteko TIFF boste morali obrezati, da bo vidna le tarča. Prepričajte se, da so beli ali črni robovi še vedno vidni. Kalibracija ne bo delovala, če je slika obrnjena narobe ali če je močno popačena.

Nastali profil je veljaven le pod svetlobnimi pogoji pod katerimi ste zajeli izvirno sliko. To pomeni, da boste morda morali profilirati večkrat za studijske, sončne in oblačne svetlobne pogoje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000625512320731750026667 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Povežite se na internet - brezžično. Povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem

V primeru da imate računalnik z omogočenim brezžičnim internetom, se lahko povežete z brezžičnim omrežjem v dometu za dostop do interneta, ogled souporabljenih datotek na internetu in tako naprej.

V primeru da imate na svojem računalniku stikalo brezžične kartice, se prepričajte, da je vklopljeno.

Kliknite meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in nato kliknite na ime omrežja, na katerega se želite povezati.

Če imena omrežja ni na seznamu izberite Več omrežij in poglejte, če se omrežje nahaja nižje na seznamu. Če še vedno ne vidite omrežja, ste mogoče izven dosega ali pa je omrežje skrito.

V primeru da je omrežje zaščiteno z geslom (šifrirni ključ), ob pozivu vnesite geslo in kliknite Poveži se.

Ključ je morda napisan pod brezžičnim usmernikom ali osnovno postajo, v navodilih za uporabo ali pa morate vprašati osebo, ki skrbi za brezžično omrežje.

Videz ikone omrežja se bo spremenil medtem ko se računalnik poskuša povezati z omrežjem.

V primeru uspešne povezave, se bo ikona spremenila v piko z loki nad njo. Več lokov nakazuje na močnejšo povezavo z omrežjem. Majhno število lokov nakazuje na šibko in morda ne preveč zanesljivo povezavo.

Če povezava ni bila uspešna, boste mordamorali ponovno vpisati geslo ali boste pa bili obveščeni da je bila povezava prekinjena. Veliko je razlogov zakaj se je to zgodilo. Lahko da ste vnesli napačno geslo, brezžični signal je prešibak ali pa ima vaša brezžična kartica težave na primer. Za več pomoči si oglejte .

Močnejša povezava z brezžičnim omrežjem ne pomeni nujno hitrejše internetne povezave ali višjih hitrosti prejemanja. Brezžična povezava vaš računalnik poveže z napravo, ki zagotavlja brezžično povezavo (kot je usmernik ali modem), vendar sta ti dve povezavi dejansko različni in bosta delovali pri različnih hitrostih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-fixed-ip-address.page0000644000373100047300000000462512320731750026532 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Uporaba statičnih naslovov IP vam lahko olajša zagotavljanje nekaterih omrežnih storitev z vašega računalnika. Ustvarite povezavo s stalnim naslovom IP

Večina omrežij bo samodejno dodelila naslov IP in druge podatke računalniku, ko se povežete v omrežje. Ti podatki se lahko občasno spremenijo, vendar boste morda želeli imeti določen naslov IP računalnika, tako da boste vedno vedeli, kakšen je njegov naslov (na primer, če je datotečni strežnik).

Da vašemu računalniku stalni (statični) naslov IP:

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav.

V zavihku Žično izberite Žična povezava ali pa v zavihku Brezžično kliknite na svoje brezžično omrežje in kliknite Uredi.

Kliknite na zavihek Nastavitve IPv4 in spremenite Način v Ročno.

V primeru da na seznamu Naslovi ni podatkov o povezavi ali če želite vzpostaviti novo povezavo, kliknite Dodaj.

Vnesite Naslove IP, Omrežno masko in podatke Prehoda v ustrezna polja. Izbira teh nastavitev je odvisna od nastavitev vašega omrežja. Obstajajo določena pravila, ki določajo kateri naslovi IP in omrežne maske so veljavne za dano omrežje.

Če je to potrebno, vnesite naslov Strežnik imen domen v polje Strežniki DNS. To je naslov IP strežnika, ki poišče imena domen. Večina podjetij in ponudnikov interneta ima namenske strežnike DNS.

Kliknite Shrani. Omrežna povezava bi sedaj morala imeti stalni naslov IP.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/sharing-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000000760012320731750025714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Pustite drugim ljudem ogled in delo z vašim namizjem z uporabo VNC. Dajte svoje namizje v souporabo

Drugim lahko pustite, da si iz drugega računalnika s programom, ki lahko spremlja namizje, ogledujejo in nadzirajo vaše namizje. Da dovolite drugim, da dostopajo do vašega namizja, nastavite Deljenje namizja in možnosti varnosti.

In the Dash, open Desktop Sharing.

Če želite, da lahko drugi delajo z vašim namizje, omogoči možnosti Dovoli drugim uporabnikom ogled mojega namizja. To pomeni, da se bodo drugi ljudje lahko povezali z vašim računalnikom.

Da bi drugim pustili delo z vašim namizjem, omogočite možnost Drugim uporabnikom dovoli nadzor mojega namizja. To bo morda drugi osebi dovolilo premik vaše miške, poganjanje programov in brskanje med datotekami na računalniku, odvisno od varnostnih nastavitev, ki jih trenutno uporabljate.
Varnost

Pomembno je, da dobro premislite, kaj vsaka možnost varnosti pomeni, preden jo spremenite.

Potrdite dostop do vašega računalnika

Če želite izbrati ali želite nekomu omogočiti dostop do svojega namizja, izberite Potrditi morate vsak dostop do tega računalnika. V primeru da to možnost onemogočite, ne boste vprašani ali želite nekomu dovoliti povezavo s svojim računalnikom.

Ta možnost je privzeto omogočena

 Omogoči geslo

Če želite, da morajo drugi ljudje za povezavo z vašim namizjem vnesti geslo, izberite Zahtevaj, da uporabnik vnese to geslo. Če te možnosti ne uporabite, si lahko kdorkoli poskusi ogledati vaše namizje.

Ta možnost je privzeto onemogočena, vendar je pametno, da jo omogočite in nastavite varno geslo.

 Dovolite drugim dostop do svojega namizja preko Interneta

V primeru da vaš usmerjevalnik podpira Protokol UPnP Internet Gateway Device in je omogočen, lahko drugim ljudem, ki niso na vašem krajevnem omrežju, dovolite ogled vašega namizja. Za omogočitev tega izberite Samodejno nastavi usmerjevalnik UPnP za odprtje in posredovanje vrat. Namesto tega lahko svoj usmerjevalnik nastavite ročno.

Ta možnost je privzeto onemogočena.
Pokaži ikono obvestilnega področja

Da bi lahko prekinili povezavo z nekom, ki si ogleduje vaše namizje, morate to možnost omogočiti. V primeru da izberete Vedno, bo ta iona vedno vidna ne glede na to ali si kdo ogleduje vaše namizje ali ne.

Če onemogočite to možnost, obstaja možnost, ki je odvisna od nastavitev varnosti, da se bo nekdo brez vaše vednosti povezal na vaše namizje.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/video-dvd.page0000644000373100047300000000424312320731750024473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Morda nimate nameščenih pravih kodekov ali pa je DVD iz napačne regije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Zakaj ne morem predvajati DVD-jev?

V primeru da v svoj računalnik vstavite DVD in se ne predvaja, morda nimate nameščenih pravih DVD kodekov ali pa je DVD iz druge regije.

Nameščanje pravih kodekov za predvajanje DVD

Za predvajanje DVD-jev boste morali imeti nameščene prave kodeke. Kodek je program, ki programom omogoča branje določene vrste videa ali zvoka. Če poskusite predvajati DVD in nimate nameščenih pravih kodekov, bi vas moral Predvajalnik filmov o tem obvestiti in ponuditi njihovo namestitev.

DVD-ji so zaščiteni pred kopiranjem s sistemom CSS. To vam prepreči kopiranje DVD-jev, vendar vam hkrati prepreči tudi njihovo predvajanje razen če imate dodatne programe za upravljanje z zaščito pred kopiranjem.

Preverjanje področja DVD-ja

DVD-ji imajo kodo regije, ki vam pove, v katerem področju sveta lahko predvajate DVD. Predvajalniki DVD lahko predvajajo le DVD-je iz iste regije. Na primer, če imate predvajalnik DVD regije 1, boste lahko predvajali le DVD-je iz Severne Amerike.

Pogosto lahko spremenite regijo, ki jo uporablja vaš predvajalnik DVD-jev, vendar lahko ponavadi to storite le nekajkrat preden se trajno zaklene na eno regijo. Za spremembo regije DVD predvajalnika DVD svojega računalnika, uporabite regionset.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-hotcomputer.page0000644000373100047300000000500712320731750026314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Računalniki se običajno segrejejo, vendar se lahko tudi pregrejejo, kar lahko povzroči poškodbe. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Moj računalnik postane zelo vroč

Večina računalnikov se po nekaj časa segreje in nekateri lahko postanejo precej vroči. To je običajno in je del načina hlajenja računalnika. Vendar pa je zelo topel računalnik znak pregrevanja, ki lahko povzroči škodo.

Večina prenosnikov se po uporabi segreje. Običajno vam zaradi tega ni treba skrbeti. Računalniki proizvedejo veliko toplote. Ker so prenosniki majhni, morajo svojo toploto hitro odstraniti, zato se zunanji del ohišja segreje. Nekateri prenosniki postanejo prevroči in so neudobni za uporabo. To je ponavadi posledica slabo zasnovanega sistema hlajenja. Včasih lahko dobite dodatne pripomočke hlajenja, ki se prilegajo na dno prenosnika in zagotavljajo učinkovito hlajenje.

V primeru da imate namizni računalnik, ki je prevroč za dotikanje, ima morda nezadostno hlajenje. V primeru da vas to skrbi lahko kupite dodatne ventilatorje ali preverite, da v ventilatorjih ni prahu ali drugih blokad. Morda želite razmisliti o postavitvi računalnika v bolj prezračeno področje. V omejenih prostorih (na primer v omari) morda računalniški sistem hlajenja ne bo mogel odstraniti toplote in zagotoviti dovolj hitrega kroženja hladnega zraka.

Nekatere ljudi skrbi zdravstveno tveganje pri uporabi vročih prenosnikov. Nekateri trdijo, da lahko dolga uporaba vročega prenosnika v vašem naročju morda zmanjša (moško) plodnost, obstajajo pa tudi poročila o rahlih opeklinah (v ekstremnih primerih). V primeru da vas to skrbi, se posvetujte s svojim zdravnikom ali pa prenosnika ne dajajte v naročje.

Večina novejših računalnikov se v primeru da postanejo prevroči ugasne in s tem prepreči pojav škode. V primeru da se vaš računalnik ugaša, je to lahko vzrok. V primeru da se vaš računalnik pregreva, ga boste verjetno morali popraviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y.page0000644000373100047300000000514512320731751023370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Videnje, slušanje, mobilnost, braillova pisava … Splošni dostop

Namizje Unity vključuje tehnologije dostopnosti, ki podpirajo uporabnike z različnimi invalidnostmi in posebnimi potrebami ter se sporazumevajo s pogostimi napravami dostopnosti. Do veliko zmožnosti dostopnosti lahko dostopate iz odseka Splošni dostop v Sistemskih nastavitvah.

Namizje GNOME vključuje pomožne tehnologije, ki podpirajo uporabnike z različnimi invalidnostmi in posebnimi potrebami ter se sporazumevajo s pogostimi pomožnimi napravami. Do veliko zmožnosti dostopnosti je mogoče dostopati iz menija dostopnosti v vrhnji vrstici.
Težave z vidom Slepota Slabovidnost Barva slepota Druge teme
Težave s sluhom
Težave z gibanjem Premikanje miške Klikanje in vlečenje Uporaba tipkovnice Druge teme
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-what.page0000644000373100047300000000470012320731751025017 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ustvarite varnostno kopijo vsega, česar nočete izgubiti, če gre kaj narobe. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iz česa naj bo ustvarjena varnostna kopija

Prednostno ustvarite varnostne kopije najpomembnejših datotek in tistih, ki jih je težko ustvariti. Primer datotek od najpomembnejših do najmanj pomembnih:

Vaše osebne datoteke

To vključuje dokumente, preglednice, e-pošto, sestanke koledarja, finančne podatke, družinske fotografije, vse kar ste ustvarili in vam je pomembno. To so najpomembnejše stvari saj jih morda ne morete zamenjati.

 Vaše osebne nastavitve

To vključuje morebitne spremembe barv, ozadij, ločljivosti zaslona in nastavitev miške na svojem namizju. To vključuje tudi možnosti programov kot so nastavitve za LibreOffice, predvajalnik glasbe in vaš program e-pošte. Te lahko zamenjate, vendar lahko to traja nekaj časa.

 Sistemske nastavitve

Večina ljudi nikoli ne spremeni nastavitev, ki so ustvarjene med namestitvijo. V primeru da svoj sistem prilagajate, boste morda želeli ustvariti varnostno kopijo teh nastavitev.

 Nameščeni programi

Take programe lahko običajno hitro obnovite s ponovno namestitvijo.

V splošnem boste morda želeli ustvariti varnostno kopijo datotek, ki jih ni mogoče zamenjati ali zahtevajo za ponovno ustvarjanje veliko časa. V primeru da lahko stvari enostavno zamenjate, morda ne boste želeli porabljati prostora na disku za njihove varnostne kopije.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/accounts-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000314512320731751025725 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Odstrani storitve spletnega računa Odstranitev računa

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Izberite Spletni računi.

Iz levega pladnja izberite račun, ki ga želite odstraniti.

Kliknite gumb Odstrani račun v spodnjem desnem delu okna.

Odstranitev računa iz programa Spletni računi v nobenem načinu ne vpliva na račun pri vašem ponudniku storitev.

Kliknite na gumb Odstrani.

Namesto, da popolnoma izbrišete račun, lahko omejite storitev tako, da namizje ne dostopa do nje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-hud-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000403112320731751025665 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba HUD za iskanje menijev v programih, ki jih uporabljate. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Kaj je HUD?

HUD ali Heads Up Display je na iskanju temelječe nadomestilo tradicionalnim menijem in je bil predstavljen v Ubuntuju 12.04 LTS.

Nekateri programi kot Gimp ali Inkscape vsebujejo na stotine predmetov menijev. Če uporabljate takšne programe, se boste morda spomnili možnosti menija, ne pa tudi kako jo najti v menijih.

Uporaba iskalnega polja je veliko hitrejša kot krmarjenje po razširjeni hierarhiji menija. HUD je prav tako veliko bolj dostopen kot normalni meniji ker nekateri ljudje ne zmorejo natančno nadzorovati miškin kazalec.

Uporaba HUD

Za preizkus HUD-a:

Pritisnite Alt za odpiranje HUD-a.

Začnite tipkati.

Ko vidite rezultat, ki ga želite zagnati, uporabite tipki gor in dol za izbiro rezultata in pritisnite Enter ali kliknite na želeni rezultat iskanja.

Če spremenite mnenje in želite zapreti HUD ponovno pritisnite na tipko Alt ali Esc. HUD lahko zaprete tudi tako da kliknete zunaj območja HUD-a.

HUD si beleži vašo zgodovino iskanja in prilagodi rezultate iskanja tako, da bodo postali še bolj uporabni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-whatisprofile.page0000644000373100047300000000236512320731751026612 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barvni profil je enostavna datoteka, ki izrazi barvni prostor ali odziv naprave. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kaj je barvni profil?

Barvni profil je zbirka podatkov, ki karakterizira napravo kot je projektor ali barvni prostor kot je sRGB.

Večina barvnih profilov je v obliki ICC, majhni datoteki s pripono datoteke .ICC ali .ICM.

Barvne profile lahko vstavite v slike za določitev obsega game v podatke. To zagotovi, da uporabnik vidi isto barvo na različnih napravah.

Vsaka naprava, ki obdeluje barvo, bi morala imeti svoj profil ICC in ko je to doseženo ima sistem barvno upravljano delo od enega do drugega konca. V tem primeru ste lahko prepričani, da se barve ne izgubljajo ali spreminjajo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/display-lock.page0000644000373100047300000000366112320731751025211 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preprečite drugim ljudem uporabo svojega namizja, ko greste stran od računalnika. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Samodejen zaklep zaslona

Ko zapustite računalnik, vam priporočamo zaklep zaslona s katerim boste drugim ljudem preprečili uporabo vašega namizja in dostop do vaših datotek. Še vedno boste prijavljeni in vsi vaši programi se bodo izvajali, vendar boste morali za ponovno uporabo računalnika vnesti svoje geslo. Zaslon lahko zaklenete ročno, lahko pa nastavite tudi samodejen zaklep zaslona.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Izberite Svetlost in zaklep.

Prepričajte se, da je Zaklep vklopljen in nato izberite zakasnitev iz spustnega menija spodaj. Zaslon se bo samodejno zaklenil potem, ko ste bili določen čas nedejavni. Izberete lahko tudi Zaslon se izklopi za zaklep zaslona potem, ko je zaslon samodejno izklopljen, kar lahko nadzirate s spustnim seznamom zgoraj Izklopi zaslon, ko je nedejaven.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-menubar-intro.page0000644000373100047300000001303412320731751026541 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Menijska vrstica je temen trak na vrhu zaslona. Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Upravljanje programov in nastavitev z menijsko vrstico

Menijska vrstica je temen trak na vrhu zaslona. Vsebuje gumbe za upravljanje oken, programske menije in menije stanja.

Gumbi za upravljanje z okni

Gumbi za upravljanje z okni so v zgornjem levem kotu oken. Kadar je okno razpeto, so gumbi v zgornjem levem kotu zaslona. Kliknite na gumbe za zaprtje, skrčitev, razpetje ali obnovitev oken.

Meniji programa

Meniji programa se privzeto nahajajo na desni strani gumbov za upravljanje z okni. Unity skrije menije programa in gumbe za upravljanje z okni, razen če premaknete miškin kazalec v zgornji levi kot zaslona ali pritisnete AltF10. Ta zmožnost vam omogoča, da lahko vidite več svoje vsebine naenkrat, kar je še posebej koristno na manjših zaslonih, kot so tisti v mini prenosnikih.

Če želite, lahko spremenite privzeto obnašanja in meniji bodo v naslovni vrstici okna programa in ne v menijski vrstico.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku Osebno kliknite na Videz in izberite zavihek Obnašanje.

Pod Pokaži menija okna izberite V naslovni vrstici okna.
Meniji stanja

Ubuntu vsebuje več menijev stanja (včasih se imenujejo tudi kazalniki) na desni strani menijske vrstice. Meniji stanja so priročno mesto, kjer lahko preverite in spremenite stanje svojega računalnika in programov.

Seznam menijev stanja in njihovih zmožnosti

Meni omrežja Ikona za nepovezano omrežje

Povezava z žičnimi, brezžičnimi, mobilnimi in VPN omrežji.

Meni vhodnega vira Ikona vhodnega vira

Izberite razporeditev tipk/vhodni vir, nastavite vhodni vir.

Meni Bluetooth-a Ikona Bluetooth-a

Pošljite ali prejmite datoteke prek naprave Bluetooth. Meni je skrit, če naprava Bluetooth ni zaznana.

Meni sporočanja Ikona sporočila

Omogoča enostaven zagon in prejemanje dohodnih sporočil od programov sporočanja vključno z e-pošto, družabnimi omrežji in internetnim klepetom.

Meni baterije Ikona baterije

Preverite stanje polnjenja baterije prenosnika. Meni je skrit, če baterija ni bila zaznana.

Meni zvoka Ikona za glasnost

Nastavite glasnost, nastavite zvočne nastavitve in nadzirajte predstavnostne predvajalnike kot je Rhythmbox.

Ura

Dostop do trenutnega datuma in časa. Tukaj so lahko prikazani tudi sestanki iz vašega koledarja Evolution.

Meni Sistem Ikona zobnika napajanja

Dostop do podrobnosti o računalniku, tega vodnika pomoči in sistemskih nastavitev. Preklop uporabnika, zaklep zaslona, odjava, prehod v stanje pripravljenost, ponoven zagon ali izklop računalnika.

Nekatere ikone v menijih kazalnika se spremenijo glede na stanje programa.

Menije kazalnika lahko v pult dodajo tudi drugi programi kot sta Tomboy ali Transmission.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wrongnetwork.page0000644000373100047300000000323712320731751026147 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Uredite nastavitve povezave ali odstranite neželeno povezavo. Moj računalnik se poveže na napačno omrežje

Ko svoj računalnik vklopite ali ga premaknete na drugo mesto, se bo samodejno poskušal povezati z brezžičnimi omrežji s katerimi ste bili povezani v preteklosti. V primeru da se vsakič poskuša povezati na napačno omrežje (na tistega na katerega nočete), naredite naslednje:

Kliknite na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav.

Pojdite v zavihek Brezžično in najdite omrežje s katereim se ne želite povezovati.

Kliknite na to omrežje in kliknite Izbriši. Vaš računalnik se s tem omrežjem ne bo več poskusil povezati.

Če se pozneje odločite povezati na izbrisano omrežje, ga preprosto izberite na seznamu brezžičnih omrežij, katero se pojavi ob kliku na meni omrežja v menijski vrstici - tako, kot bi se povezali na katerokoli drugo omrežje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/clock-calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000455512320731751025463 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prikaz sestankov v koledarju na vrhu zaslona. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sestanki v koledarju

Svoje sestanke v koledarju lahko organizirate s klikom na uro na pultu, če uporabljate program pošte in koledarja Evolution.

Če ste že nastavili Evolution, kliknite uro na menijski vrstici in nato kliknite Dodaj dogodek za dodajanje sestankov. Ko so sestanki dodani, se bodo ob kliku na uro pokazali pod koledarjem.

Za hiter dostop do polnega koledarja Evolution kliknite na uro in kliknite na prvo vrstico, kjer je današnji datum.

To bo delovalo le, če imate obstoječ račun Evolution. V nasprotnem primeru se bo pojavilo okno s koraki za dodajanje vašega prvega računa.
Izklop vključitve koledarja Evolution

To zmožnost lahko izklopite, če želite.

Kliknite na uro in izberite Nastavitve časa in datuma.

Pojdite v zavihek Ura.

Odstranite izbiro Prihajajoči dogodki iz koledarja Evolution.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-whyimportant.page0000644000373100047300000000621612320731751026476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Upravljanje barv je pomembno za razvijalce, fotografe in umetnike. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj je upravljanje z barvami pomembno?

Upravljanje barv je opravilo zajemanja barv na vhodni naprav, njihov prikaz na zaslonu in tisk medtem ko so natančne barve in obseg upravljane na vsakem mediju.

Potrebo po barvnem upravljanju je najbrž najlažje razložiti s fotografijo ptice na leden zimski dan.

Ptič na zmrznjenem zidu kot jo vidi fotoaparat

Običajno prikaže preveč nasičen moder kanal, ki povzroči, da je slika videti mrzlo.

To uporabnik vidi na zaslonu običajnega poslovnega prenosnika.

Opazite kako bela ni popolnoma bela in da je črno oko sedaj blatno rjavo.

To vidi uporabnik, ko sliko natisne na običajnem brizgalnem tiskalniku.

Osnovna težava je, da vsaka naprava lahko upravlja različen obseg barv. Zato boste morda lahko zajeli fotografijo električno modre barve, vendar je večina tiskalnikov ne bo mogla natisniti.

Večina slikovnih naprav zajema v RGB (rdeča, zelena, modra) in morajo za tiskanje pretvoriti v CMYK (sinja, magenta, rumena in črna). Druga težava je, da ne morate imeti bele barve, zato je lahko belina le tako dobra kot papir.

Druga težava so enote. Brez merila barv ni mogoče vedeti, če je 100% rdeča blizu infrardeče barve ali najtemnejša rdeča barva na tiskalniku. 50% rdeča na enem zaslonu je verjetno 62% rdeča na drugem zaslonu. To je enako kot da bi nekomu povedali, da ste prevozili 7 enot, ne bi pa povedali, ali je to 7 metrov ali kilometrov.

V barvah so enote gamut. Gamut je obseg barv, ki jih je mogoče prikazati. Naprava kot je DSLR fotoaparat ima lahko zelo velik gamut in lahko zajame vse barve v sončnem zahodu, projektor pa ima majhen gamut, zato bodo vse barve videti "izprano".

V nekaterih primerih je mogoče izhod naprave popraviti s spreminjanjem poslanih podatkov, v primerih, ko to ni mogoče (električno modre ni mogoče natisniti), pa je treba uporabniku pokazati, kakšen bi bil rezultat.

Za fotografe je smiselno uporabiti polen tonski obseg barvne naprave, ki lahko naredi spremembe barve gladkejše. Za drugo grafiko boste morda želeli barvo ujemati natančno, kar je pomembno, če želite natisniti kozarec z logotipom Red Hat, ki mora biti natanko Red Hat rdeča.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-disc-write.page0000644000373100047300000000660512320731752025772 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Zapis datotek in dokumentov na prazen CD ali DVD z uporabo zapisovalca CD-jev/DVD-jev. Zapis datotek na CD ali DVD

Datoteke lahko zapišete na prazen disk z Ustvarjalnikom CD-jev/DVD-jev. Možnost ustvarjanja CD-ja ali DVD-ja se bo v upravljalniku datotek pojavila takoj, ko vstavite CD v zapisovalnik CD/DVD. Upravljalnik datotek vam omogoča enostaven prenos datotek na druge računalnike ali ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij s kopiranjem datotek na prazen disk. Za zapisovanje datotek na CD ali DVD:

Prazen disk vstavite v zapisljivi pogon CD/DVD.

V oknu Prazen disk CD/DVD-R, ki se pojavi, izberite Ustvarjalnik CD/DVD in kliknite V redu. Odprlo se bo okno mape Ustvarjalnik CD-jev/DVD-jev.

(Lahko tudi kliknete na Prazen disk CD/DVD-R pod Naprave v stranski vrstici upravljalnika datotek.)

V polje Ime diska vpišite ime diska.

Povlecite ali kopirajte želene datoteke v okno.

Kliknite Zapiši na disk.

V Izbor diska za zapisovanje izberite prazen disk.

(Namesto tega izberite Datoteka odtisa. To bo iz datotek ustvarilo odtis diska, ki bo shranjen na vaš računalnik. Odtis diska lahko kasneje zapišete na prazen disk.)

V primeru da želite prilagoditi hitrost zapisovanja, mesto začasnih datotek in druge možnosti, kliknite Lasnosti. Privzete možnosti bi morale biti v redu.

Za začetek zapisovanja kliknite na gumb Zapiši.

V primeru da ste izbrali Zapiši več kopij, boste pozvani k vstavitvi dodatnih diskov.

Ko je zapisovanje diska končano, bo samodejno izvržen. Za končanje izberite Naredi več kopij ali Zapri.

Za naprednejše projekte zapisovanja CD/DVD poskusite Brasero.

Za pomoč pri uporabi programa Brasero, preberite uporabniški vodnik.
Če disk ni bil pravilno zapisan

Včasih računalnik podatkov ne zapiše pravilno, zato ne boste mogli videti datotek, ko disk vstavite v računalnik.

V tem primeru poskusite disk znova zapisati pri manjši hitrosti zapisovanja, na primer 12x namesto 48x. Zapisovanje pri nižjih hitrostih je bolj zanesljivo. Hitrost zapisovanja lahko izberete s klikom na gumb Lastnosti v oknu Ustvarjalnik CD-jev/DVD-jev.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-select.page0000644000373100047300000000366412320731752025201 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Pritisnite CtrlS za izbiro več datotek s podobnimi imeni. Izbor datotek z vzorcem

Datoteke v mapi lahko izberete z vzorcem imena datotek. Pritisnite CtrlS za priklic okna Izbor ujemanja predmetov. Vpišite vzorec z uporabo skupnih delov imen datotek in nadomestnih znakov. Na voljo sta dva nadomestna znaka:

* se ujema s katerikoli številom znakov tudi z nič znaki.

? se ujema natanko z enim znakom.

Na primer:

V primeru da imate datoteko OpenDocument Text, datoteko PDF in sliko, ki imajo enako osnovno ime Račun, vse tri izberite z vzorcem

Račun.*

V primeru da imate fotografije z imeni Počitnice-001.jpg, Počitnice-002.jpg, Počitnice-003.jpg, lahko vse izberete z vzorcem

Počitnice-???.jpg

V primeru da imate fotografije kot prej, vendar ste nekatere od njih uredili in ste na konec imena dodali -urejeno, lahko urejene fotografije izberete z

Počitnice-???-urejeno.jpg

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-cancel-job.page0000644000373100047300000000610012320731752026433 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preklic čakajočega posla tiskanja in njegova odstranitev iz vrste. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Preklic, premor ali sprostitev posla tiskalnika

V nastavitvah tiskalnika lahko prekličete čakajoči posel tiskanja in ga odstranite iz vrste.

Preklic posla tiskanja

Če ste začeli tiskati dokument po nesreči, lahko tiskanje hitro prekličete in se izognete porabi črnila in papirja.

Kako preklicati posel tiskalnika:

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Kliknite na gumb Pokaži posle na desni strani pogovornega okna Tiskalniki.

Prekličite tiskarniški posel s klikom na gumb stop.

Če ne prekliče tiskalniškega posla, kot ste pričakovali, poskusite držati gumb Prekliči na vašem tiskalniku.

Kot zadnjo možnost, še posebno, če imate velik posel tiskanja z veliko stranmi, ki ne bodo preklicane, odstranite papir iz pladnja tiskalnika. Tiskalnik bo opazil, da ni papirja in bo prenehal tiskati. Nato lahko poskusite s preklicem posla tiskanja ali izklopom in ponovnim vklopom tiskalnika.

Bodite previdni, da tiskalnika med odstranjevanjem papirja ne poškodujete. Če morate za odstranitev papirja močno vleči, ga je morda bolje pustiti, kjer je.
Premor in sprostitev tiskalniškega posla

Če želite premor ali sprostitev tiskalniškega posla, lahko to storite s klikom na primerni gumb v pogovornem oknu poslov v nastavitvah tiskalnika.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Kliknite Tiskalniki.

Kliknite na gumb Pokaži posle na levi strani pogovornega okna Tiskalniki in glede na vaše potrebe ali začasno ustavite ali sprostite tiskalniški posel.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-firewall-on-off.page0000644000373100047300000000564212320731752026373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nadzirate lahko do katerih programov je mogoče dostopati preko omrežja. To pomaga obdržati vaš računalnik varen. Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Omogočanje in blokiranje dostopa do požarnega zidu

Ubuntu vsebuje Nezapleten požarni zid (ufw), vendar privzeto ni omogočen. Ker Ubuntu v privzeti namestitvi nima odprtih storitev omrežja (razen osnovne infrastrukture omrežja), požarni zid za blokiranje zlonamernih povezav ni zahtevan.

Za več podrobnosti o uporabi ufw si oglejte spletno dokumentacijo.

Vklop ali izklop požarnega zidu

Za vklop požarnega zidu v terminal vpišite sudo ufw enable. Za izklop ufw vnesite sudo ufw disable

Omogočitev ali blokiranje določene omrežne dejavnosti

Veliko programov ponuja omrežne storitve. Na primer, lahko souporabite vsebino ali pustite nekomu drugemu, da si oddaljeno ogleda vaše namizje. Če ste namestili dodatne programe, boste morda morali prilagoditi požarni zid, ki tem storitvam omogoča, da pravilno delujejo. UfW vsebuje številna prednastavljena pravila. Če želite na primer dovoliti povezave SSH v terminal vnesite sudo ufw allow ssh. Za blokiranje ssh vnesite sudo ufw block ssh.

Vsak program, ki zagotavlja storitve, uporablja določena vrata omrežja. Za omogočitev dostopa do storitev tega programa boste morda morali dovoliti dostop do njegovih dodeljenih vrat na požarnem zidu. Za omogočitev povezav na vratih 53 v terminal vnesite sudo ufw allow 53. Za blokiranje vrat 53 vnesite sudo ufw block 53.

Za preverjanje trenutnega stanja ufv v terminal vnesite sudo ufw status

Uporaba ufw brez terminala

V primeru da požarni zid rajši nastavljate brez terminala, lahko namestite gufw. Za namestitev kliknite na to povezavo.

Ta program lahko zaženete z iskanjem Nastavitve požarnega zidu v Pregledni plošči. Da požarni zid deluje, programa ni treba imeti odprtega.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/whats-new.page0000644000373100047300000000640612320731752024534 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izboljšave v zadnji različici Ubuntuja. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Kaj je novega v Ubuntu 14.04?

Ubuntu 14.04 LTS nadaljuje z evolucijo vmesnika Unity. Spodaj je nekaj poudarkov od različice Ubuntu 12.04 LTS:

Nove in izboljšane zmožnosti

Menije programa v žarišču so privzeto na voljo v Ubuntujevi menijski vrstici. Če želite pa lahko preklopite na klasični način in pokažete menije programa v naslovni vrstici okna (zadnja možnost je na voljo od Ubuntu 13.10).

Dodana je podpora za spreminjanje velikosti Unityja, ki vam omogoča boljšo izkušnjo na zaslonih z visokim številom pik na palec (DPI). Podobno spreminjanje velikosti je na voljo v LibreOfficeu in Chromiumu.

Izboljšan videz in slog, vključno z zaobljenimi okraski okna, novim vmesnikom za zaklep zaslona in drugimi prilagoditvami teme.

Enovit vmesnik za vnos besedila in povezane vhodne vire v meniju stanja so zasnovani za nastavitev tako razporeditve tipkovnice kot načine vnosa IBus.

Veliko izboljšav je bilo narejenih na Pregledni plošči:

Pregledna plošča lahko sedaj išče po ducatu različnih spletnih virov hkrati. Iskanje po spletu se lahko onemogoči.

Pregledna plošča lahko filtrira rezultate iskanja po kategoriji in viru ...

Desni klik na rezultat iskanja v Pregledni plošči bo prikazalo celozaslonski predogled z več podrobnostmi.

Uporabite lečo fotografije za ogled fotografij na svojem računalniku ali s svojih družabnih omrežij.

Prilagodite svojo izkušnjo z dodajanjem ali odstranjevanjem virov iz Pregledne plošče.

Brskajte po sporočilih vaših družabnih omrežij z virom Prijatelji.

Vnesite svoja poverila v Spletne račune za enostavno nastavitev spletne podpore za Pregledno ploščo, Empathy in več.

Spremljajte podrobnosti stikov svojih prijateljev in sodelavcev s Stiki, svojim osebnim imenikom.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-sort.page0000644000373100047300000000722012320731752024701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Urejanje datotek po imenu, velikosti, vrsti ali času sprememb. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Razvrščanje datotek in map

Datoteke v mapi lahko razvrstite na različne načine na primer po datumu ali velikosti datotek. Za seznam pogostih načinov razvrščanja datotek si oglejte spodaj. Za podrobnosti kako spremeniti privzeti vrstni red razvrščanja si oglejte .

Način na katerega lahko razvrščate datoteke je odvisen od pogleda mape, ki ga uporabljate. Trenutni pogled lahko spremenite z uporabo seznama ali ikon gumbov v orodni vrstici.

Ikonski pogled

Za razvrstitev datotek v drugem redu v orodni vrstici kliknite na gumb dol in izberite Po imenu, Po velikosti, Po vrsti ali Po datumu spremembe.

V primeru, da izberete Po imenu bodo datoteke razvrščene po imenu v abecednem vrstnem redu. Za druge možnosti si oglejte .

Datoteke lahko razvrstite v obratnem vrstnem redu z izbiro Obratni vrstni red iz spustnega menija.

Seznamski pogled

Za razvrstitev datotek v drugačnem vrstnem redu kliknite na eno od glav v upravljalniku datotek. Za razvrstitev po vrsti datotek kliknite na glavo stolpca Vrsta. Za obratni vrstni red ponovno kliknite glavo stolpca.

V seznamskem pogledu lahko pokažete stolpce z več atributi in razvrščate po teh stolpcih. Kliknite na gumbdol v orodni vrstici in izberite Vidni stolpci in označite stolpce, ki jih želite videti. Nato boste lahko po teh stolpcih razvrščali. Za opise razpoložljivih stolpcev si oglejte

Načini razvrščanja datotek Po imenu

V abecednem vrstnem redu razvrsti po imenu datoteke.

 Po velikosti

Razvrsti po velikosti datoteke (koliko prostora na disku zavzame). Privzeto so razvrščene od najmanjše do največje.

 Po vrsti

Abecedno razvrsti po vrsti datoteke. Datoteke iste vrste so združene skupaj in nato razvrščene po imenu.

 Po datumu spremembe

Razvrsti po datumu in času spremembe datoteke. Privzeto razvrsti od najstarejše do najnovejše.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/clock-more-info.page0000644000373100047300000000353112320731752025577 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izberite prikaz dodatnih podrobnosti kot sta datum ali dan v tednu. Dokumentacijski projekt Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Koliko podatkov je prikazanih v uri

Privzeto Ubuntu v uri pokaže le čas. Uro lahko nastavite, da prikaže dodatne podatke.

Kliknite na uro in izberite Nastavitve datuma in časa. Preklopite na zavihek Ura. Nastavite možnosti datuma in časa, ki jih želite prikazati.

Uro lahko popolnoma izklopite z odstranitvijo izbire Pokaži uro v menijski vrstici.

Če se premislite, lahko uro vrnete s klikom na ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici in izberete Sistemske nastavitve. V oddelku Sistem kliknite Čas in datum.
Sprememba oblike datuma

Spremenite lahko tudi obliko datuma ure, da se prilaga standardu za vaše mesto.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V odseku Osebno kliknite Jezikovna podpora.

Preklopite na zavihek Krajevne oblike.

S spustnega seznama izberite svoje želeno mesto.

Da bodo spremembe imele učinek, se boste morali odjaviti in ponovno prijaviti.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/tips-specialchars.page0000644000373100047300000000551712320731752026237 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Vnos znakov, ki jih na svoji tipkovnici ne najdete, vključno s tujimi abecedami, matematičnimi simboli in okrasnimi znaki. Vnos posebnih znakov

Vnesete in ogledate si lahko tisoče znakov iz večine svetovnih sistemov pisanja, tudi tiste, ki jih na vaši tipkovnici ni mogoče najti. Ta stran našteva nekaj različnih načinov s katerimi lahko vnesete posebne znake.

Načini za vnos znakov
Preglednica znakov

GNOME vsebuje program preglednice znakov, ki vam omogoča brskanje po vseh znakih v razpredelnici Unicode. Uporabite ga za iskanje znaka, ki ga potrebujete, in ga nato kopirajte in prilepite kamor ga potrebujete.

V Pregledni plošči lahko najdete Preglednico znakov. Za več podrobnosti o preglednici znakov si oglejte pomoč preglednice znakov.

Točke kode

Katerikoli znak Unicode lahko s tipkovnico vnesete s številsko kodo znaka. Vsak znak je določen s kodo sestavljeno iz štirih števil. Za iskanje kode za znak najdite znak v programu preglednice znakov in poglejte v vrstico stanja na zavihku Podrobnosti znaka. Koda so štirje znaki za U+.

Za vnos znaka s pomočjo njegove kode pritisnite Ctrl in Shift, vtipkajte u in štiri številčno kodo in nato izpustite Ctrl in Shift. V primeru da te znake pogosto uporabljate in do njih z drugimi načini ne morete enostavno dostopati, si vam bo morda lažje zapomniti kodo za hiter vnos znakov.

Vhodni viri

Vaša tipkovnica se lahko obnaša kot tipkovnica drugega jezika, ne glede na črke, ki so natisnjene na tipkah. Lahko celo preklapljate med različnimi vhodnimi viri z uporabo ikone v menijski vrstici. Več izveste na .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-suspendfail.page0000644000373100047300000001021312320731752026255 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatera strojna oprema računalnikov povzroči težave s stanjem pripravljenosti ali mirovanjem. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Zakaj se računalnik ne prižge po tem, ko je šel v pripravljenost?

Če ste dali računalnik v pripravljenost ali v mirovanje in ga poskusite zbuditi ali vklopiti, se zna zgoditi, da ne deluje tako kot ste pričakovali. Razlog za to je mogoče ta, ker pripravljenost ter mirovanje nista popolnoma podprta s strani vaše strojne opreme.

Moj računalnik je v pripravljenosti in se ne zbudi

Če računalnik pošljete v pripravljenost in nato pritisnete tipko ali kliknete z miško, bi se mogle zbuditi in prikazati zaslon, za vpis vašega gesla. Če se to ne zgodi, pritisnite gumb za vklop (pritisnite enkrat - brez držanja).

V primeru da tudi to ne pomaga, se prepričajte, da je zaslon vašega računalnika vklopljen in ponovno pritisnite tipko na tipkovnici.

Kot zadnjo možnost poskusite izklopiti računalnik s pritiskom na gumb za vklop za 5-10 sekund. S tem boste izgubili vse neshranjeno delo, vendar boste lahko računalnik ponovno prižgali.

V primeru da se to zgodi vsakič, ko računalnik pošljete v stanje pripravljenosti, zmožnost stanja pripravljenosti morda z vašo strojno opremo ne deluje.

Če vaš računalnik izgubi energijo in nima nadomestnega vira energije (kot je delujoča baterija), se bo izklopil.
Moji programi/dokumenti ob ponovnem vklopu računalnika niso odprti

V primeru da ste računalnik dali v stanje pripravljenosti in ga ponovno vklopili, vendar noben od vaših dokumentov ali programov ni odprt, je verjetno prehod v mirovanje spodletel. Včasih se to zgodi zaradi manjše težave in bo vaš računalnik lahko naslednjič pravilno prešel v mirovanje. Morda se je to zgodilo, ker ste namestili programsko posodobitev, ki je zahtevala ponoven zagon računalnika. V tem primeru se bo računalnik namesto prehoda v mirovanje ponovno zagnal.

Prav tako je mogoče, da računalnik ne zmore preiti v stanje mirovanja, ker strojna oprema tega ne podpira pravilno. To se na primer lahko zgodi zaradi težav z gonilniki Linux za vašo strojno opremo. To lahko preizkusite tako, da pošljete računalnik v mirovanje in se prepričate, če deluje tudi drugič. Če ne, so verjetno razlog gonilniki računalnika.

Moja brezžična povezava (ali druga strojna oprema) ne deluje, ko računalnik povrnem iz stanja pripravljenosti ali mirovanja

Če računalnik pošljete v mirovanje in ga znova zbudite, se zna zgoditi da vaša internetna povezava, miška ali katera druga naprava ne deluje pravilno. To se lahko zgodi, če gonilnik vaše naprave ne podpira pravilno pripravljenosti ali mirovanja. To je težava z gonilnikom in ne z napravo samo.

V primeru da ima naprava stikalo za vklop, ga poskusite izklopiti in nato ponovno vklopiti. V večini primerov bo naprava začela ponovno delovati. V primeru da se naprava poveže preko kabla USB ali podobno, napravo odklopite in jo ponovno priklopite.

V primeru da naprave ne morete izklopiti ali to ne deluje, boste morda morali za delovanje naprave znova zagnati računalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000154712320731752026272 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhill@src.gnome.org 2012 Dokumenti prikažejo število priljubljenih vrst dokumenta. Podprti zapisi

Dokumenti prikazujejo PDF, DVI, XPS, PostScript ter vrste podprte s strani Pregledovalnika dokumentov (Evince), Microsoft Office, LibreOffice ter Google Docs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/music-cantplay-drm.page0000644000373100047300000000404412320731752026324 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Podpora za vrsto datoteke morda ni nameščena ali pa so skladbe "zaščitene pred kopiranjem". Skladb, kupljenih v spletni glasbeni trgovini, ne morem predvajati

Če ste prejeli glasbo iz spletne trgovine ste morda ugotovili, da se ne predvaja na vašem računalniku, še posebej, če ste jo kupili na računalniku Windows ali Mac OS X ter jo skopirali.

To se lahko zgodi, ker je glasba v obliki, ki je računalnik ne prepozna. Za predvajanje skladbe morate imeti nameščeno podporo za prave vrste zvoka - na primer, če želite predvajati datoteke MP3, morate imeti nameščeno podporo MP3. V primeru da nimate podpore za dano vrsto zvoka, boste morda ob poskusu predvajanja zvoka videli sporočilo, ki vas bo o tem opozorilo. Sporočilo bi moralo tudi zagotavljati navodila kako namestiti podporo za predvajanje te vrste.

V primeru da imate nameščeno podporo za predvajanje vrste zvoka skladbe, a je še vedno ne morete predvajati, je skladba morda zaščitena pred kopiranjem (znana tudi kot omejitev DRM). DRM je način omejevanja kdo lahko predvaja skladbo in na katerih napravah jo lahko predvaja. Skladbo nadzira podjetje, ki vam jo je prodalo, ne vi. V primeru da ima glasbena datoteka omejitve DRM, je verjetno ne boste mogli predvajati. V splošnem za predvajanje datotek omejenih z DRM potrebujete poseben program ponudnika, vendar je le nekaj od teh podprtih na Linuxu.

Več o DRM se lahko naučite na Electronic Frontier Foundation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-open.page0000644000373100047300000000615012320731752024654 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odprite datoteke s programom, ki ni privzet program za to vrsto datotek. Spremenite lahko tudi privzet program za odpiranje datotek. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Odpiranje datotek z drugimi programi

Ko v upravljalniku datotek dvokliknete na datoteko, bo odprta s privzetim programom za to vrsto datotek. Odprete jo lahko z drugim programom, na spletu poiščete programe ali nastavite privzeti program za vse datoteke iste vrste.

Za odprtje datoteke z ne-privzetim programom desno kliknite na datoteko in izberite program z vrha menija. Če želenega programa ne vidite, kliknite Odpri z drugim programom. Privzeto bo upravljalnik datotek prikazal le programe za katere ve, da lahko upravljajo z datoteko. Za iskanje med vsemi programi na računalniku kliknite Pokaži druge programe.

V primeru da še vedno ne morete najti želenega programa, lahko več programov najdete s klikom na Najdi več programov na spletu. Upravljalnik datotek bo na spletu poiskal pakete, ki vsebujejo programe, ki znajo upravljati datoteke te vrste.

Sprememba privzetega programa

Spremenite lahko privzet program, ki se uporablja za odpiranje datotek dane vrste. To vam dovoli odpiranje želenega programa, ko dvokliknete za odpiranje datotek. Morda želite, da se ob kliku na priljubljeno datoteko MP3 odpre vaš najljubši predvajalnik glasbe.

Izberite datoteko vrste, katere privzeti program želite spremeniti. Za spremembo programa, ki ga želite uporabiti za odprtje datotek MP3, izberite datoteko .mp3.

Desno kliknite na datoteko in izberite Lastnosti.

Izberite zavihek Odpri z.

Izberite program in kliknite Nastavi kot privzet. Privzeto upravljalnik datotek prikaže le programe, za katere ve, da lahko upravljajo z datoteko. Za ogled vseh programov na računalniku kliknite na Pokaži druge programe.

V primeru da Drugi programi vsebuje program, ki ga včasih želite uporabiti, vendar nočete, da je privzet, izberite program in kliknite Dodaj. To ga bo dodalo med Priporočene programe. Nato boste lahko program uporabili z desnim klikom na datoteko in izbiro s seznama.

To spremeni privzeti program ne le za izbrano datoteko ampak za vse datoteke iste vrste.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents-info.page0000644000373100047300000000412012320731752025540 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com 2014 Oglejte si ime dokumenta, mesto, datum spremembe ali vrsto. Iskanje podatkov o dokumentih

Ko je dokument ustvarjen, se ustvarijo tudi metapodatki. Dokumenti prikažejo naslednje metapodatke za vsak dokument:

Naslov: naziv dokumente, katerega pa lahko uredimo;

Izvor: pot mape, katera vsebuje dokument;

Datum spremembe;

Vrsta: vrsta dokumenta.

Da si ogledate lastnosti dokumenta:

Kliknite na gumbPreveri za preklop na izbirni način.

Izberite dokument.

Kliknite na gumb Lastnosti skrajno desno v vrstici z gumbi.

Nekatere vrste dokumentov (npr. datoteke PDF) lahko zaščitimo z geslom in s tem preprečimo dostop do njihovih metapodatkov ali vsebine.

Datoteke trenutno ne ponuja nobenega mehanizma za zagotavljanje zasebnosti dokumenta. To lahko storite iz programa s katerim ste ustvarili dokument (npr. LibreOffice ali Adobe Acrobat).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-where.page0000644000373100047300000000455012320731753025173 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nasvet kje shraniti varnostne kopije in katero vrsto naprave shrambe uporabiti. c Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Kam shraniti varnostne kopije

Varnostne kopije svojih datotek shranjujte ločeno od računalnika - na primer na zunanjem trdem disku. Na ta način bo varnostna kopija v primeru okvare računalnika ostala nedotaknjena. Za največjo varnost varnostne kopije ne imejte v isti zgradbi kot računalnik. V primeru požara ali kraje sta lahko, v primeru da ju shranjujete na istem mestu, obe kopiji podatkov izgubljeni.

Pomembno je tudi, da izberete primeren medij varnostne kopije. Varnostne kopije morate shraniti na napravo, ki ima dovolj prostora na disku za varnostno kopijo vseh datotek.

Možnosti krajevne in oddaljene shrambe

Pomnilniški ključ USB (nizka velikost)

Zapisljivi CD-ji ali DVD-ji (nizka/srednja velikost)

Zunanji trdi disk (običajno visoka velikost)

Notranji diskovni pogon (visoka velikost)

Pogon priključen na omrežje (visoka velikost)

Datotečni strežnik/Strežnik za varnostne kopije (visoka velikost)

Spletna storitev varnostnih kopij (na primer Amazon S3; velikost je odvisna od cene)

Nekatere izmed teh možnosti imajo dovoljšnjo velikost, da lahko shranite vsako datoteko vašega sistema. To je poznano tudi kot popolna varnostna kopija sistema

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-rename.page0000644000373100047300000001001612320731753025157 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sprememba imena datoteke ali mape. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Preimenovanje datoteke ali mape

Spremembo imena datoteke ali mape lahko uporabite upravljalnik datotek.

Za preimenovanje datoteke ali mape:

Desno kliknite na predmet in izberite Preimenuj ali izberite datoteko in pritisnite F2.

Vpišite novo ime in pritisnite Enter.

Datoteko lahko preimenujete tudi iz okna lastnosti.

Ko datoteko preimenujete, je izbran le prvi del datoteke in ne pripona (del za "."). Pripona običajno pove, kakšne vrste je datoteka (na primer datoteka.PDF je dokument PDF). Tega običajno ne želite spremeniti. V primeru da morate spremeniti tudi pripono, izberite celotno ime datoteke.

Če ste preimenovali napačno datoteko ali pa ste datoteko nepravilno preimenovali, lahko preimenovanje razveljavite. Za povrnitev dejanja nemudoma kliknite na ikono zobnika in izberite Razveljavi in s tem obnovite prejšnje ime.
Veljavni znaki za imena datotek

V imenih datotek lahko uporabite katerikoli znak razen / (desna poševnica). Nekatere naprave uporabljajo datotečni sistem, ki ima več omejitev glede imen. Zato se je v imenih datotek pametno izogibati naslednjim znakom: |, \, ?, *, <, ", :, >, /.

V primeru, da je prvi znak imena datoteke ., bo datoteka ob poskusu ogleda v upravljalniku datotek skrita.
Pogoste težave Ime datoteke je že v uporabi

V isti mapi ne morete imeti dveh datotek ali map z istim imenom. V primeru da boste datoteko poskusili preimenovati v ime, ki v trenutni mapi že obstaja, vam upravljalnik datotek tega ne bo dovolil.

Imena in mape so občutljive na velikost črk. Tako sta Datoteka.txt in DATOTEKA.txt različni imeni. To je dovoljeno, vendar ni vedno pametno.

 Ime datoteke je predolgo

Na nekaterih datotečnih sistemih imena datotek ne morejo biti daljša od 255 znakov. Omejitev 255 znakov vključuje tako ime datoteke kot pot do nje (na primer /home/brigita/Dokumenti/delo/delovni-načrti/ ...), zato se, kjer je mogoče izognite dolgim imenom datotek in map.

 Možnost za preimenovanje je osivela

V primeru da je Preimenuj osivel, nimate dovoljenj za preimenovanje datoteke. V splošnem datotek do katerih nimate ustreznih dovoljenj za preimenovanje ni pametno preimenovati. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/addremove-sources.page0000644000373100047300000000644712320731753026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Dodajte dodatna skladišča za razširitev programskih virov, ki jih Ubuntu uporablja za namestitev in nadgradnje. Dodajanje dodatnih programskih skladišč

Programi so na voljo iz virov tretjih oseb kot tudi iz privzetih programskih skladišč Ubuntu. V primeru da želite namestiti program iz programskega skladišča tretje osebe, ga morate dodati na Ubuntujev seznam razpoložljivih skladišč.

Dodajte skladišča programske opreme iz virov, ki jim zaupate!

Skladišč tretjih oseb člani Ubuntu ne preverjajo za varnost ali zanesljivost in morda vsebujejo programe, ki lahko škodljo vašemu računalniku.

 Namestitev drugih skladišč

Kliknite na ikono Programsko središče Ubuntu v zaganjalniku ali pa ga najdite v iskalni vrstici Pregledne plošče.

When the Software Center launches, click Edit Software Sources

Vprašani boste za vnos gesla. Ko boste to storili, preklopite na zavihek Drugi programi.

Kliknite Dodaj in vnesite vrstico APT za skladišče. Ta bi morala biti na voljo na spletišču odložišča in bi morala biti videti podobno:

deb http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ trusty main

Kliknite Dodaj vir in nato zaprite okno Programskih Virov. Programsko središče Ubuntu bodo preverilo vaše programske vire za posodobitve.
Omogočitev skladišča partnerjev Canonicala

Skladišče partnerjev Canonicala ponuja nekatere lastniške programe, ki so brezplačni, vendar so zaprtokodni. Mednje spadajo programi kot so Skype, Adobe Reader in Adobe Flash Plugin. Programi v tem skladišču se bodo pojavili v rezultatih iskanja Programskega središča Ubuntu, vendar jih ne boste mogli namestiti, dokler to skladišče ni omogočeno.

Za omogočitev skladišča sledite korakom zgoraj za odprtje zavihka Drugi programi v Programskih virih. V primeru da na seznamu vidite Partnerje Canonicala, se prepričajte, da je izbrano in nato zaprite okno Programski viri. V primeru da ga ne vidite, kliknite na Dodaj in vnesite:

deb http://archive.canonical.com/ubuntu trusty partner

Kliknite Dodaj vir in nato zaprite okno Programskih virov. Počakajte trenutek, da Programsko središče Ubuntu prejme podatke o skladiščih.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/music-player-ipodtransfer.page0000644000373100047300000000374412320731753027732 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Za kopiranje glasbe in varno odstranjevanje iPoda uporabite večpredstavnostni predvajalnik. Ko skladbe kopiram na svoj iPod, se tam ne pojavijo

Ko iPod priklopite na računalnik, se bo pojavil v vašemu predvajalniku glasbe in tudi v upravljalniku datotek (program Datoteke v Zaganjalniku). Skladbe morate na iPod kopirati s predvajalnikom glasbe - če jih kopirate z upravljalnikom datotek, ne bo deloval, ker skladbe ne bodo na pravem mestu. iPodu imajo posebno mesto za shranjevanje datotek do katerih lahko predvajalnik glasbe dostopa, upravljalnik datotek pa ne.

Pred odklopom iPoda počakajte, da se kopiranje skladb konča. Pred odklopom iPoda se prepričajte, da izberete njegovo varno odstranitev. To bo zagotovilo, da so bile vse datoteke pravilno kopirane.

Eden od razlogov, zakaj se skladbe morda na vašem iPodu ne pojavijo je, da glasbeni predvajalnik, ki ga uporabljate, ne podpira pretvarjanja skladb iz ene vrste zvoka v drugo. V primeru da kopirate skladbo, ki je shranjena v vrsto zvoka, ki je vaš iPod ne podpira (na primer datoteka Ogg Vorbis (.oga)), jo bo predvajalnik glasbe poskusil pretvoriti v vrsto, ki jo iPodi razumejo (kot je MP3). V primeru da ustrezen program za pretvarjanje (znan pod imenom kodek ali kodirnik) ni nameščen, predvajalnik glasbe ne bo mogel izvesti pretvorbe in zato glasbe ne bo kopiral. Ustrezen kodek poiščite v namestilniku programov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-antivirus.page0000644000373100047300000000360712320731753025430 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Za Linux obstaja zelo malo virusov, zato verjetno protivirusnega programa ne potrebujete. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Ali potrebujem protivirusni program?

Če ste navajeni uporabljati Windows ali Mac OS, ste verjetno navajeni, da protivirusni se program izvaja ves čas. Protivirusni program se izvaja v ozadju ter nenehno preverja za obstoj računalniških virusov, ki bi lahko našli svojo pot na vaš računalnik in povzročili težave.

Za Linux obstajajo protivirusni programi, vendar pa vam jih verjetno ni treba uporabljati. Virusi, ki vplivajo na Linux, so še vedno zelo redki. Nekateri trdijo, da je to zato, ker je Linux ni tako razširjen kot drugi operacijski sistemi, zato zanj nihče ne piše virusov. Drugi trdijo, da je Linux bolj varen in da so varnostni problemi, ki bi jih lahko virusi zlorabili, popravljeni zelo hitro.

Ne glede na razlog, so virusi za Linux tako redki, da vam trenutno glede njih ni treba skrbeti.

V primeru da želite biti dodatno varni ali želite preveriti za obstoj virusov v datotekah, ki jih pošiljate ljudem, ki uporabljajo Windows in Mac OS, lahko še vedno namestite protivirusni program. Preverite v Programskem središču Ubuntu, kjer so na voljo številni programi.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-security.page0000644000373100047300000000125512320731753025250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Protivirusni programi, osnovni požarni zidovi … Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Varnost na internetu usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/prefs.page0000644000373100047300000000152412320731753023733 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitve Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Tipkovnica, miška, zaslon, jeziki, uporabniški računi … Uporabniške in sistemske nastavitve usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-browse.page0000644000373100047300000000621012320731753025212 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Upravljanje in organizacija datotek z upravljalnikom datotek Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Brskanje med datotekami in mapami

Za brskanje po datotekah v svoji domači mapi, na zunanjih napravah, na datotečnih strežnikih in na datotečnem sistemu računalnika uporabite program Datoteke.

Za zagon upravljalnika datotek odprite Datoteke prek Zaganjalnika. Datoteke in mape lahko s Pregledno ploščo iščete na enak način, kot lahko iščete programe. Pojavili se bodo pod naslovom Datoteke in mape.

Raziskovanje vsebin map

V upravljalniku datotek dvokliknite na katerokoli mapo za ogled njene vsebine in dvokliknite na katerokoli datoteko za odprtje s privzetim programom zanjo. Na mapo lahko tudi desno kliknete za odprtje v novem zavihku ali oknu.

Vrstica poti nad seznamom datotek in map vam pokaže katere mape si ogledujete vključno z nadrejenimi mapami do vaše domače mape. Kliknite na nadrejeno mapo v vrstici poti za vstop vanjo. Desno kliknete na mapo v vrstici poti za njeno odprtje v novem zavihku ali oknu, kopiranje, premik ali dostop do njenih lastnosti.

Če želite hitro skočiti do datoteke v mapi, ki jo gledate, začnite tipkati njeno ime. Na dnu okna se bo pojavilo iskalno okno in prva datoteka, ki se ujema z vašim iskanjem, bo poudarjena. Pritisnite puščico navzdol ali drsajte z miško za skok na naslednjo datoteko, ki se ujema z vašim iskanjem.

Do pogostih mest lahko hitro dostopate iz stranske vrstice. V primeru da stranske vrstice ne vidite, v orodni vrstici kliknite gumbdol in izberite Pokaži stransko vrstico. Dodate lahko zaznamke do map, ki jih pogosto uporabljate. Zaznamki se bodo pojavili v stranski vrstici. Za to uporabite meni Zaznamki ali pa mapo enostavno povlecite v stransko vrstico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-removedrive.page0000644000373100047300000000537412320731753026252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Izvrzite ali odklopite USB ključek, CD, DVD ali drugo napravo. Varna odstranitev zunanjega pogona

Ko uporabljate naprave zunanje shrambe kot so USB ključki, jih pred odklopom varno odstranite. V primeru da napravo izklopite brez varne odstranitve, tvegate odklop naprave medtem ko jo program še vedno uporablja. To lahko povzroči izgubo ali poškodbo nekaterih datotek. Iste korake lahko uporabite za izvrzitev optičnega diska kot je CD ali DVD.

Za izvrzitev odstranljive naprave:

Odprite upravljalnik datotek.

Najdite napravo v stranski vrstici. Poleg imena naj bi imela majhno ikono imenovano izvrzi. Za varno odstranjevanje naprave kliknite nanjo.

Namesto tega lahko desno kliknite na napravo v stranski vrstici in izberite Izvrzi.
Varna odstranitev naprave, ki je v uporabi

V primeru da imate datoteke, ki so shranjene na napravi, odprte v programu, naprave ne boste mogli varno odstraniti. Odprlo se bo okno, ki vam bo povedalo, da je "nosilec zaposlen" in izpisalo vse odprte datoteke na napravi. Ko zaprete vse datoteke na napravi, bo naprava samodejno varno odstranjena (zato da jo lahko odklopite ali izvržete).

V primeru da ene od datotek ne morete zapreti, na primer, da se program, ki uporablja datotek zaklene, lahko v oknu Nosilec je zasposlen desno kliknete na datoteko in izberete Končaj opravilo. To bo prisililo zaprtje zaklenjenega programa, kar lahko povzroči zaprtje drugih datotek, ki ste jih odprli s tem programom.

Izberete lahko tudi Vseeno izvrži za odstranitev naprave brez zapiranja datotek . To lahko povzroči napake v programih v katerih so te datoteke odprte.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-slow.page0000644000373100047300000000635112320731753024367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Morda se prejemajo druge stvari, morda imate slabo povezavo ali pa je zaposlen čas dneva. Internet je počasen

V primeru da uporabljate internet in se zdi počasen, obstajajo številne stvari, ki bi lahko povzročile upočasnitev.

Nekaj hitrih popravkov, ki jih lahko poskusite, so zaprtje in ponovno odprtje spletnega brskalnika in prekinitev in ponovna vzpostavitev povezave z internetom. (To ponastavi veliko stvari, ki lahko upočasnijo delovanje interneta.)

Zaposleni čas dneva

Ponudniki internetnih storitev internetne povezave pogosto nastavijo tako, da si jih deli več gospodinjstev. Čeprav se povežete ločeno s svojo telefonsko ali kabelsko povezavo, si morda povezavo do preostanka interneta delite z drugimi. Če je to res in hkrati z vami internet uporablja več sosedov, lahko opazite upočasnitev. To upočasnitev lahko opazite, ko so sosedje na internetu (na primer zvečer).

Prejemanje več stvari hkrati

V primeru da vi ali nekdo drug, ki uporablja vašo internetno povezavo, prejema več datotek hkrati, ali gleda videoposnetke, internetna povezava morda ni dovolj hitra za zahteve. V tem primeru bo videti počasnejša.

Nezanesljiva povezava

Nekatere internetne povezave so nezanesljive, še posebno začasne na področjih z velikimi zahtevami. V primeru da ste v zasedeni kavarni ali konferenčnem centru, je morda internetna povezava prezaposlena ali enostavno nezanesljiva.

Šibek signal brezžične povezave

Če ste povezani na internet prek brezžične povezave, preverit meni omrežja v menijski vrstici, če je dober brezžični signal. Če ni, je lahko internet počasen zaradi šibkega signala.

Uporaba počasne mobilne internetne povezave

V primeru da imate mobilno internetno povezavo in opazite, da je počasna, ste se morda premaknili na področje, kjer je sprejem signala šibek. Ko se to zgodi, bo internetna povezava samodejno preklopila s hitre "mobilne širokopasovne" povezave kot je 3G na zanesljivejšo, toda počasnejšo povezavo kot je GPRS.

Spletni brskalnik ima težavo

Včasih spletni brskalniki naletijo na težave, ki jih upočasnijo. To se lahko zgodi zaradi različnih vzrokov - lahko ste obiskali spletišče, ki ga brskalnik ni mogel naložiti, ali pa ste imeli brskalnik odprt dolg čas. Poskusite zapreti vsa okna brskalnika in znova odprite brskalnik in preverite, če to naredi razliko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/hardware-driver-proprietary.page0000644000373100047300000000331212320731753030255 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lastniški gonilniki naprav niso prosto dostopni ali odprtokodni. Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Kaj so lastniški gonilniki?

Večina naprav (strojne opreme), ki je pripeta na vaš računalnik, bi morala v Ubuntuju pravilno delovati. Te naprave bodo verjetno imele odprtokodne gonilnike, kar pomeni, da lahko gonilnike razvijalci Ubuntuja spreminjajo in zato tudi popravijo z njimi povezane težave.

Nekatera strojna oprema nima odprtokodnih gonilnikov, ker proizvajalec strojne opreme ni izdal podrobnosti o strojni opremi, ki so potrebne za ustvarjanje takšnega gonilnika. Te naprave imajo običajno omejene zmožnosti ali pa sploh ne delujejo.

Če je za določeno napravo na voljo lastniški gonilnik, ga lahko namestite in omogočite pravilno delovanje naprave ali dodate nove zmožnosti. Namestitev lastniškega gonilnika za določene grafične kartice vam bo morda omogočila uporabo naprednejših vidnih učinkov.

Veliko računalnikov lastniških gonilnikov sploh ne potrebuje, ker odprtokodni gonilniki popolnoma podpirajo strojno opremo.

Večine težav z lastniškimi gonilniki razvijalci Ubuntuja ne morejo popraviti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-lowpower.page0000644000373100047300000000405312320731753025624 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Omogočitev popolne izpraznitve baterije je zanjo slaba. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Zakaj se je računalnik ugasnil/šel v pripravljenost, ko je nivo baterije dosegel 10%?

Ko se nivo napolnjenosti baterije preveč zniža, bo šel vaš računalnik samodejno v pripravljenost. To stori zato, da se baterija popolnoma ne izprazni, ker je to slabo za vašo baterijo. Če bi se baterija popolnoma izpraznila, računalnik ne bi imel dovolj časa, da bi se pravilno zaustavil.

Kaj se zgodi, ko raven baterije postane prenizka, lahko spremenite s klikom na meni baterije v menijski vrstici in izbiro Nastavitve porabe. Oglejte si nastavitev Ko je napolnjenost baterije kritično nizka. Izberete lahko, da računalnik preide v stanje pripravljenosti, mirovanje ali pa se izklopi. V primeru da izberete izklop, vaši programi in dokumenti pred izklopom računalnika ne bodo shranjeni.

Nekateri računalniki imajo težave s pripravljenostjo in morda ne bodo mogli obnoviti programov in dokumentov, katere ste imeli odprte, ko znova vklopite računalnik. V tem primeru je možna izguba vašega dela, če ga niste shranili, preden je šel računalnik v pripravljenost. Morda lahko popravite težave s pripravljenostjo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-why.page0000644000373100047300000000244712320731753024673 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kaj, zakaj, kje in kako varnostnih kopij. Varnostne kopije Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ustvarjanje varnostne kopije pomembnih datotek

Ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij vaših datotek pomeni ustvarjanje kopije vaših datotek. To je narejeno za primer, če izvirne datoteke postanejo neuporabne zaradi izgube ali okvare. Te kopije lahko uporabite za obnovitev izvirnih podatkov v primeru izgube. Kopije shranite na drugo napravo kot izvorne datoteke. Uporabite lahko na primer pogon USB, zunanji trdi disk, CD/DVD ali oddaljen strežnik.

Najboljši način ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij je redno, oddaljeno shranjeno in (če je le mogoče) šifrirano.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-inklevel.page0000644000373100047300000000325112320731753026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Preverite količino preostalega črnila ali tonerja v kartušah tiskalnika. Anita Reitere nitalynx@gmail.com Kako preverim nivo črnila/tonerja v tiskalniku?

Kako preverite nivo preostalega črnila ali tonerja v tiskalniku je odvisno od modela in proizvajalca tiskalnika in gonilnikov ter programov nameščenih na računalniku.

Nekateri tiskalniki imajo vgrajen prikazovalnik nivoja črnila in drugih podatkov.

Gonilnike in orodja stanja za večino tiskalnikov HP zagotavlja projekt HP Linux slike in tiskanje (HPLIP). Drugi proizvajalci morda zagotavljajo lastniške gonilnike s podobnimi zmožnostmi.

Namesto tega lahko namestite program za preverjanje ali nadziranje količine črnila. Inkblot pokaže stanje črnila za veliko tiskalnikov HP, Epson in Canon. Oglejte si, če je vaš tiskalnik na seznamu podprtih modelov. Drug program količine črnila za Epson in nekatere druge tiskalnike je mktink.

Nekateri tiskalniki na Linuxu še niso dobro podprti, drugi pa niso zasnovani za poročanje o količini črnila.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/display-dual-monitors-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000000402112320731754030517 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2013 Nastavitev dvojnih zaslonov na vašem namiznem računalniku. Povežite dodatni zaslon

Za nastavitev drugega zaslona na vašem namiznem računalnik, priključite zaslon. Če ga vaš sistem takoj ne prepozna ali pa bi želeli prilagoditi nastavitve:

Kliknite na svoje ime v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Zasloni.

Kliknite na sliko zaslona, ki jo želite omogočiti ali onemogočiti in ga nato VKLOPITE/IZKLOPITE.

Zaslon z menijsko vrstico je glavni zaslon. Za spremembo kateri zaslon je "glavni", kliknite na vrhnjo vrstico in jo povlecite na zaslon, ki ga želite uporabiti kot "glavni" zaslon.

Za spremembo "položaja" zaslona kliknite nanj in ga povlecite na želeni položaj.

Če želite, da oba zaslona prikažeta isto vsebino, izberite polje Zrcali zaslona.

Ko ste z nastavitvami zadovoljni, kliknite Uveljavi in nato kliknite Obdrži te nastavitve.

Za zapiranje programa Zasloni kliknite na x zgoraj v kotu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-autorun.page0000644000373100047300000001254212320731754025414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Samodejno poganjanje programov za CD-je in DVD-je, fotoaparate, predvajalnike zvoka in druge naprave in medije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Odpiranje programov za naprave ali diske

Programe lahko nastavite na samodejni zagon ob priklopu naprave. Morda boste želeli, da se ob priklopu digitalnega fotoaparata zažene vaš organizator fotografij. To zmožnost lahko tudi izklopite, kar pomeni, da se ob priklopu naprave ne zgodi nič.

Za odločitev kateri programi naj se zaženejo, ko priklopite različne naprave:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Izberite PodrobnostiOdstranljivi mediji.

Izberite program ali dejanje za želeno napravo ali vrsto medija. Glejte spodaj za opis različnih vrst naprav in medijev.

Namesto zaganjanja programa lahko nastavite, da je naprava prikazana v upravljalniku datotek. Ko se to zgodi, boste vprašani, kaj želite storiti ali pa se samodejno ne bo zgodilo nič.

Možnost Program je rahlo drugačna od drugih - v primeru da računalnik zazna, da je na vstavljenem disku program, lahko poskuša samodejno izvesti program. To je dobro, če je na CD-ju nameščen program in ga želite zagnati ob vstavitvi diska (na primer predstavitev).

Če naprave ali vrste medija, ki jo želite spremeniti, na seznamu (kot na primer Blu-ray diski ali E-bralniki knjig) ne vidite, kliknite Drugi mediji za ogled podrobnejšega seznama naprav. Izberite vrsto naprave ali medija iz spustnega menija Vrsta in program ali dejanje iz spustnega menija Dejanje.

V primeru da nobenih programov ne želite odpreti samodejno ne glede na to kaj priklopite, izberite Nikoli ne pozovi k zagoni programov ob vstavitvi medija na dnu okna Mediji.
Vrste naprav in medijev Zvočni diski

Za upravljanje zvočnih CD-jev izberite svoj najljubši glasbeni program ali program za izvleko glasbe. Če uporabljate zvočne DVD-je (DVD-A), ravnanje z njimi določite pod Drugi mediji. Če odprete zvočni disk z upravljalnikom datotek, se bodo skladbe pojavile kot datoteke WAV, ki jih lahko predvajate v kateremkoli programu predvajalnika zvoka.

 Video diski

Izberite svoj priljubljeni video program za upravljanje video DVD-jev. Za nastavitev programa za Blu-ray-je, HD DVD-je, video CD-je (VCD) in super video CD-je (SVCD) uporabite gumb Drugi mediji. Če DVD-ji ali drugi video diski ob vstavitvi ne delujejo pravilno, si oglejte .

 Prazni diski

Uporabite gumb Drugi mediji za izbiro programa za zapisovanje praznih CD-jev, praznih DVD-jev, praznih diskov Blu-ray in praznih HD DVD-jev.

 Fotografije in digitalni fotoaparati

Uporabite spustni seznam Fotografije za izbiro programa upravljanja fotografij za zagon ob priklopu digitalnega fotoaparata ali ko vstavitev medijsko kartico s fotoaparata, kot je kartica CF, SD, MCC ali MS. Med fotografijami lahko tudi brskate z upravljalnikom datotek.

Pod Drugi mediji lahko izberete program za odpiranje slikovnih CD-jev Kodak. To so običajni podatkovni CD-ji s slikami JPEG v mapi PICTURES.

 Predvajalniki glasbe

Izberite program za upravljanje glasbene knjižnice na prenosnem predvajalniku ali pa datoteke upravljajte sami z upravljalnikom datotek.

 Bralniki e-knjig

Uporabite gumb Drugi mediji za izbiro programa za upravljanje knjig na bralniku e-knjig ali pa datoteke upravljajte sami z upravljalnikom datotek.

 Programska oprema

Nekateri diski in odstranljivi mediji vsebujejo programe, ki naj bi se ob vstavitvi medija samodejno zagnali. Uporabite možnost Programi za nadzor kaj naj se zgodi, ko je vstavljen medij s samodejno zagonljivimi programi. Pred zagonom programa boste vedno vprašani za potrditev.

Nikoli ne zaženite programov z medija, ki mu ne zaupate.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-middleclick.page0000644000373100047300000000677312320731754026222 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporabite srednji miškin gumb za odpiranje programov, lepljenje besedila, odpiranje zavihkov in več. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Srednji klik

Dosti mišk in nekatere sledilne ploščice imajo srednji miškin gumb. Na miški s sledilnim koleščkom lahko ponavadi pritisnemo navzdol sledilni kolešček za srednji klik. Če nimate srednjega miškinega gumba, lahko za srednji klik pritisnete levi ter desni miškin gumb hkrati. Če se vam zdi, da na ta način ni mogoče klikati, poskusite naslednja navodila.

Na drsnih ploščicah, ki podpirajo udarce z več prsti, lahko za srednji klik enkrat udarite s tremi prsti. Da bo to delovalo, morate v nastavitvah omogočiti klikanje z udarjanjem.

Veliko programov uporablja srednji klik za napredne bližnjice klikanja.

Ena od pogostih bližnjic je lepljenje izbranega besedila (to se včasih imenuje lepljenje osnovne izbire). Izberite besedilo, ki ga želite prilepiti, nato pojdite na mesto lepljenja in srednje kliknite. Besedilo bo prilepljeno na položaj miške.

Lepljenje besedila s srednjim miškinim gumbom je popolnoma ločeno od običajnega odložišča. Izbira besedila ne kopira na odložišče. Ta hiter način lepljenja deluje le s srednjim miškinim gumbom.

Na drsnikih običajen klik v prazen prostor premakne za določeno količino (kot je ena stran) v kliknjeni smeri. Lahko tudi srednje kliknete v prazen prostor za premik natanko na mesto klika.

Novo okno programa lahko hitro odprete s srednjim klikom. Enostavno srednje kliknite na ikono programa v Zaganjalniku na levi ali v Pregledni plošči.

Večina spletnih brskalnikov vam dovoli hitro odpiranje povezav v zavihkih s srednjim miškinim klikom. Kliknite na povezavo s srednjim miškinim gumbom in odprla se bo v novem zavihku. Pri kliku na povezavo v spletnem brskalniku Firefox bodite pozorni. V brskalniku Firefox bo srednji klik drugje kot na povezavi poskusil naložiti izbrano besedilo URL, kot če bi s srednjim klikom prilepili besedilo v naslovno vrstico in pritisnili Enter.

V upravljalniku datotek srednji klik služi dvema vlogama. V primeru da srednjo kliknete na mapo, se bo odprla v novem zavihku. To posnema obnašanje priljubljenih spletnih brskalnikov. V primeru da srednje kliknete datoteko, jo bo odprl, kot če bi jo dvokliknili.

Nekateri posebni programi vam omogočajo uporabo srednjega miškinega klika za druge zmožnosti. V pomoči za program iščite srednji klik ali srednji miškin gumb.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-apps-favorites.page0000644000373100047300000000333312320731754026665 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodajanje, premik ali odstranitev ikon pogosto uporabljenih programov v zaganjalniku. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijski projekt Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@list.ubuntu.com Spreminjanje kateri programi se pojavijo v zaganjalniku

Dodajanje programa za hiter dostop v Zaganjalnik:

Povlecite ikono programa iz Pregledne plošče v zaganjalnik.

Namesto tega lahko medtem ko se program izvaja desno kliknite na ikono programa in izberete Zakleni na zaganjalnik.

Vrstni red ikon v zaganjalniku lahko spremenite z vlečenjem ikone z zaganjalnika in nato nazaj na želeno mesto.

Za odstranitev ikone programa iz zaganjalnika desno kliknite na ikono programa in izberite Odkleni z zaganjalnika.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-why-calibrate.page0000644000373100047300000000233412320731754026464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje je pomembno, če vam ni vseeno kakšne barve prikazujete ali natisnete. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Zakaj moram sam izvesti umerjanje?

Splošni profili so ponavadi slabi. Ko proizvajalec ustvari nov model, vzamejo nekaj predmetov iz proizvodnega traku in ustvarijo njihovo povprečje:

Povprečeni profili

Zasloni so precej različni od enote do enote in se s starostjo občutno spreminjajo. To je še težje za tiskalnike, saj lahko že druga vrsta papirja naredi profil nenatančen.

Najboljši način kako se lahko prepričate, da je vaš profil natančen, je, da umerjanje izvedete sami, ali da to za vas stori zunanje podjetje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-frequency.page0000644000373100047300000000406312320731754026062 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Naučite se kako pogosto bi morali ustvariti varnostno kopijo pomembnih datotek, da so varne. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Pogostost varnostnih kopij

Kako pogosto ustvariti varnostne kopije je odvisno od vrste podatkov katerih varnostna kopija bo ustvarjena. Če na primer poganjate okolje omrežja, kjer so na vašem omrežju shranjeni kritični podatki, potem morda celo vsakodnevne varnostne kopije ne bodo dovolj.

V primeru da ustvarjate varnostne kopije podatkov na svojem domačem računalniku, so varnostne kopije vsako uro verjetno odveč. Morda vam bo v pomoč, če pri načrtovanu razporeda ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij upoštevate nekaj stvari:

Količina časa, ki jo preživite za računalnikom.

Kako pogosto in za koliko se podatki na računalniku spremenijo.

V primeru da imate samo nekaj glasbe, e-pošte in družinskih fotografij, bodo tedenske morda celo mesečne varnostne kopije zadostovale. V primeru da ste sredi urejanja davkov, boste morda morali varnostne kopije izdelati pogosteje.

Splošno pravilo je, da čas med varnostnimi kopijami ne bi smel biti daljši od časa, ki ga lahko porabite za ponovno delanje izgubljenega dela. Na primer, če je en teden za ponovno pisanje izgubljenih dokumentov za vas preveč, ustvarjajte varnostne kopije vsaj enkrat tedensko.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-closelid.page0000644000373100047300000000533612320731754025552 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Prenosniki gredo ob zaprtju pokrova v stanje pripravljenosti za varčevanje z energijo. Zakaj se moj računalnik ob zaprtju pokrova izklopi?

Ko zaprete pokrov prenosnika bo šel vaš računalnik v pripravljenost, da bi varčeval z energijo. To pomeni, da se računalnik ne bo dejansko izklopil ampak bo samo v pripravljenosti. Iz pripravljenosti ga povrnete tako, da dvignete pokrov prenosnika. Če se ne povrne, poskusite s klikom miške ali s pritiskom tipke. Če tudi to ne deluje, pritisnite na gumb za vklop.

Nekateri računalniki ne morejo preiti v stanje pripravljenosti. Običajno se to zgodi, ker njihove strojne opreme operacijski sistem ne podpira popolnoma (na primer gonilniki Linux so nepopolni). V tem primeru boste morda ugotovili, da svojega računalnika po zaprtju pokrova ne morete povrniti iz stanja pripravljenosti. Poskusite lahko popraviti težavo s stanjem pripravljenosti ali pa računalniku preprečite poizkus prehoda v stanje pripravljenosti ob zaprtju pokrova.

Preprečitev prehoda v stanje pripravljenosti ob zaprtju pokrova

Če ne želite, da gre vaš računalnik v pripravljenost, ko zaprete pokrov prenosnika, lahko spremenite nastavitve:

Pri spreminjanju te nastavitve bodite previdni. Nekateri prenosniki se lahko pregrejejo, če delujejo z zaprtim pokrovom, še posebno, če so v omejenem prostoru kot je nahrbtnik.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

V oddelku Strojna oprema kliknite na Napajanje.

Nastavite spustni meni Ko je pokrov zaprt na Ne naredi ničesar.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/keyboard-osk.page0000644000373100047300000000265212320731754025212 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporaba zaslonske tipkovnice za vnos besedila s klikom na gumbe z miško. Uporaba zaslonske tipkovnice

Če nimate tipkovnice ali je ne želite uporabljati, lahko za vnos besedila vklopite zaslonsko tipkovnico.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Splošni dostop in izberite zavihek Tipkanje.

Za prikaz zaslonske tipkovnice vklopite Pomočnik tipkanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/addremove.page0000644000373100047300000000144112320731754024561 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dodaj/odstrani programsko opremo Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Namesti, odstrani, dodatna skladišča … Dodajanje in odstranjevanje programov usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/music-player-notrecognized.page0000644000373100047300000000464112320731754030102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dodajte datoteko .is_audio_player, ki bo vašemu računalniku povedala, da je to predvajalnik zvoka. Zakaj moj predvajalnik zvoka ob vklopu ni prepoznan?

V primeru da vaš predvajalnik zvoka (predvajalnik MP3 in podobno) vklopite v računalnik, vendar ga v programu za organizacijo ne morete videti, potem morda ni bil pravilno prepoznan kot predvajalnik zvoka.

Predvajalnik poskusite odklopiti in ponovno priklopiti. Če to ne pomaga, odprite upravljalnik datotek. Predvajalnik bi morali videti pod Naprave v stranski vrstici. Kliknite nanj za odprtje mape predvajalnika zvoka. Sedaj kliknite DatotekaNov dokumentPrazen dokument, vnesite .is_audio_player in pritisnite Enter (pika in podčrtaji so pomembni. Uporabite male črke). Ta datoteka pove računalniku, naj napravo prepozna kot predvajalnik zvoka.

Sedaj najdite predvajalnik zvoka v stranski vrstici upravljalnika datotek in ga izvrzite (desno kliknite nanj in kliknite Izvrzi. Odklopite ga in ga priklopite nazaj. Tokrat bi ga moral organizator glasbe prepoznati kot predvajalnik zvoka. Če se to ne zgodi, poskusite organizator glasbe zapreti in ga znova odpreti.

Ta navodila ne bodo delovala za iPode in nekatere druge predvajalnike zvoka. To bi moralo delovati, če je vaš predvajalnik naprava obsežne shrambe USB. To bi moralo pisati v priročniku naprave.

Ko boste ponovno pogledali v mapo predvajalnika zvoka, datoteke .is_audio_player ne boste več videli. To je posledica tega, da pika upravljalniku datotek pove, naj datoteko skrije. Če je še vedno tam, lahko preverite s klikom na PogledPokaži skrite datoteke.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-behavior.page0000644000373100047300000001061612320731754026260 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kliknite za odprtje datotek, poganjanje ali ogled izvedljivih besedilnih datotek in navedite obnašanje smeti. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Možnosti obnašanja upravljalnika datotek

Nastavite lahko ali datoteke odpre enojni klik ali dvoklik, kako je mogoče upravljati z izvedljivimi datotekami in obnašanje smeti. Kliknite Datoteke v menijski vrstici, izberite Možnosti in izberite zavihek Obnašanje.

Obnašanje <gui>Enojni klik za odpiranje predmetov</gui> <gui>Dvojni klik za odpiranje predmetov</gui>

Privzeto enojni klik izbere datoteke, dvojni klik pa jo odpre. Namesto tega lahko datoteke in mape odprete z enojnim klikom. Ko uporabite način enega klika, lahko med klikanjem držite Ctrl za izbiro ene ali več datotek.
Izvedljive besedilne datoteke

Izvedljiva besedilna datoteka vsebuje program, ki ga lahko zaženete (izvedete). Dovoljenja datotek morajo dovoliti poganjanje datoteke kot programa. Najbolj pogosti so Shell,Python in Perl skripti. Ti majo pripone .sh, .py in .pl.

Ob odprtju izvedljive besedilne datoteke lahko izberete med:

Ob odprtju zaženi izvedljive besedilne datoteke

View executable text files when they are opened

Vsakič vprašaj

V primeru, da je izbrana Vsakič vprašaj, se bo pojavilo pogovorno okno, ki vas bo vprašalo, če želite izbrano besedilno datoteko zagnati ali pogledati.

Izvedljive besedilne datoteke se imenujejo tudi skripti. Vsi skripti v mapi ~/.local/share/nautilus/scripts se bodo prikazali v vsebinskem meniju v podmeniju Skripti. Ko je skript izvršen iz krajevne mape, vse izbrane datoteke bodo prilepljene skriptu kot parametri. Za izvršitev skripta na datoteki:

Krmarite do želene mape.

Izberite želeno datoteko.

Za odprtje vsebinskega menija, desni klik na datoteko in izberite skript, ki ga želite izvesti iz menija Skripti

Skriptu ne bodo posredovani nobeni parametri, ko se izvrši iz oddaljene mape kot je mapa, ki kaže spletno ali vsebino ftp.
Možnosti smeti upravljalnika datotek Smeti <gui>Vprašaj pred praznjenjem Smeti ali brisanjem datotek</gui>

Ta možnost je privzeto izbrana. Ko smeti izpraznite, bo prikazano sporočilo, ki bo potrdilo, da želite datoteke poslati v smeti ali izbrisati.

 <gui>Vključi ukaz Izbriši, ki obide Smeti</gui>

Izbira te možnosti bo v meni, ki se pojavi ob desnem kliku v programu Datoteke dodala predmet Izbriši.

Izbris predmeta z uporabo možnosti Izbriši obide smeti. Predmet je popolnoma odstranjen s sistema in ga ni več mogoče obnoviti.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/a11y-screen-reader.page0000644000373100047300000000170012320731754026101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporaba bralnika zaslona Orca za izgovorjavo uporabniškega vmesnika. Preberi vsebino zaslona naglas

GNOME provides the Orca screen reader to speak the user interface. Depending on how you installed GNOME, you might not have Orca installed. Install Orca, and then refer to the Orca Help for more information.

usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-wakeup.page0000644000373100047300000000245312320731754025241 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 V primeru da morate miško stresti ali klikniti preden se odzove. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Miška se odziva z zamudo preden začne delati

Brezžične in optične miške kot tudi drsne ploščice na prenosnikih se morda morajo pred delovanjem "zbuditi". Ko niso v uporabi, gredo samodejno v stanje pripravljenosti za varčevanje z energijo. Za povrnitev iz stanja pripravljenosti miške ali drsne ploščice, kliknite na miškin gumb ali premaknite miško.

Drsne ploščice prenosnikov se odzovejo z zakasnitvijo potem ko nehate tipkati, preden začnejo delovati. To naj bi vam preprečilo dotikanje drsne ploščice z dlanjo, medtem kot tipkate. Za podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse.page0000644000373100047300000000236612320731755023753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba miške z levico, hitrost in občutljivost, klikanje in drsanje po drsni ploščici … Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Miška
Pogoste težave z miško Pogoste težave Pogoste težave
Namigi miške Namigi Namigi
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-install-flash.page0000644000373100047300000000502512320731755026143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Morda boste morali za ogled spletišč kot je YouTube in vzajemne spletne strani namestiti Flash. Nameščanje vstavka Flash

Flash je vstavek za vaš spletni brskalnik, ki vam omogoča ogled videov in uporabo vzajemnih spletnih strani na nekaterih spletiščih. Nekatera spletišča brez Flasha ne bodo delovala.

V primeru da Flasha nimate nameščenega, boste verjetno videli sporočilo, ki vas bo obvestilo, da ga spletišče potrebuje. Flash je na voljo kot brezplačen (toda ne odprtokoden) prejem za večino spletnih brskalnikov.

Kako namestiti Flash

Kliknite to povezavo za zagon Programskega središča.

Preberite si opis in mnenja in se prepričajte, da želite namestiti Flash.

V primeru da izberete namestitev Flash, v oknu Programskega središča kliknite Namesti.

V primeru da imate odprta okna spletnega brskalnika jih zaprite in ponovno odprite. Spletni brskalnik bi se moral ob ponovnem odprtju zavedati, da je Flash nameščen in sedaj si boste lahko ogledati spletišča, ki uporabljajo Flash.
Odprtokodni nadomestki za Flash

Na voljo je več prostih, odprtokodnih nadomestkov Flash. Ti na nekaterih področjih delujejo boljše kot vstavek Flash (na primer boljše upravljanje predvajanja zvoka), na drugih pa slabše (na primer na morejo prikazati nekaterih zapletenejših spletnih strani Flash).

Morda bi želeli enega od njih preizkusiti, če s predvajalnikom Flash niste zadovoljni ali pa želite imeti na svojem računalniku toliko odprtokodnih programov kot je le mogoče. Tukaj je nekaj možnosti:

Gnash

LightSpark
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-disabletouchpad.page0000644000373100047300000000305112320731755027074 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Med tipkanjem izklopite drsno ploščico za preprečitev nenamernih klikov. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Onemogočitev sledilne ploščice med tipkanjem

Drsniki na prenosnikih so pogosto na mestih, kamor med tipkanjem položite svoje zapestje. To lahko včasih med tipkanjem povzroči neželene klike. Drsno ploščico lahko med tipkanjem izklopite. Delovati bo začela kratek čas po vašem zadnjem pritisku na tipko.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

V odseku Drsna ploščica izberite Onemogoči med tipkanjem.

Odsek Drsna ploščica se pojavi le, če vaš sistem vsebuje drsno ploščico.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-find.page0000644000373100047300000000422512320731755026156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Brezžično omrežje je lahko izklopljeno ali pokvarjeno ali pa je blizu preveč brezžičnih omrežij ali pa ste izven obsega. Svojega brezžičnega omrežja ne morem videti na seznamu

Veliko je razlogov, zakaj ne morete videt svojega brezžičnega omrežja na seznamu omrežij, ki se pokaže ob kliku na ikono omrežja v menijski vrstici.

V primeru da na seznamu ni prikazano nobeno brezžično omrežje, je vaša brezžična morda izklopljena ali pa ne deluje pravilno. Prepričajte se, da je vklopljena.

V primeru da je v bližin veliko brezžičnih omrežij, omrežje, ki ga iščete, morda ne bo na prvi strani na seznamu. V tem primeru poglejte na dno seznama za puščico, ki kaže proti desni in naredite nad njo prehod z miško za prikaz preostalih brezžičnih omrežij.

Lahko ste izven obsega omrežja. Poskusite se premakniti bližje brezžični postaji/usmerjevalniku in si oglejte, če se omrežje čez nekaj časa pojavi na seznamu.

Posodabljanje seznama brezžičnih omrežij traja nekaj časa. V primeru da ste svoj računalnik pravkar vklopili ali ga premaknili na drugo mesto, počakajte trenutek in preverite, če se omrežje pojavi na seznamu.

Omrežje je lahko skrito. V tem primeru se morate povezati na drugačen način.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-noconnection.page0000644000373100047300000000600012320731755027723 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Dvakrat preverite geslo. Namesto gesla poskusite uporabiti šifrirni ključ, izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico ... Vnes-el/la sem pravilno geslo, vendar se še vedno ne morem povezati

V primeru da ste prepričani, da ste vnesli pravilno brezžično geslo, a se še vedno ne morete uspešno povezati z brezžičnim omrežje, poskusite nekaj od naslednjega:

Dvakrat preverite, da imate pravo geslo

Gesla so občutljiva na velikost črk (pomembno je ali so črke velike ali majhne). Zato preverite, da niste napisali znakov napačne velikosti.

Poskusite šestnajstiški ali ASCII ključ

Geslo je lahko predstavljeno tudi na drugačen način - kot niz znakov v šestnajstiškem sistemu (števila od 0-9 in črke od a-f), ki se imenuje šifrirni ključ. V primeru da imate geslo do šifrirnega ključa in geslo/šifrirno frazo, poskusite s tipkanjem šifrirnega ključa. Prepričajte se, da izberete pravilno možnost brezžična varnost (če na primer vnašate 40 znakovni šifrirni ključ za z WEP šifrirano povezavo, izberite WEP 40/128-biten ključ).

Izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico

Včasih brezžične kartice obtičijo ali imajo manjšo težavo, ki pomeni, da se ne bodo povezale. Kartico poskusite izklopiti in ponovno vklopiti za njeno ponastavitev. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

Preverite, da uporabljate pravo vrsto brezžične varnosti

Ko ste pozvani za geslo svoje brezžične varnosti, lahko izberete katero vrsto brezžične varnosti želite uporabiti. Prepričajte se, da ste izbrali tiso, ki jo uporablja usmerjevalnik ali brezžična postaja. Privzeto bi morala biti izbrana prava možnost, vendar včasih ni. Če ne veste katera možnost je prava, poskusite vse.

Preverite, če je vaša brezžična kartica pravilno podprta

Nekatere brezžične kartice niso zelo dobro podprte. Pokažejo brezžična povezava, vendar se z njimi ne morejo povezati, ker gonilnikom manjka ta zmožnost. Oglejte si, če lahko dobite drug brezžični gonilnik ali če morate izvesti nekaj dodatne nastavitve (kot je namestitev drugačne strojne programske opreme). Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/disk-partitions.page0000644000373100047300000000606412320731755025746 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Naučite se kaj so nosilci in diski in uporabiti diskovna orodja za njihovo upravljanje. Upravljanje nosilcev in razdelkov

Beseda nosilec se uporablja za napravo shrambe kot je trdi disk. Lahko je tudi del naprave shrambe, ker lahko shrambo razdelite na več kosov. Računalnik naredi shrambo na voljo preko vašega datotečnega sistema preko opravila, ki se imenuje priklapljanje. Priklopljeni nosilci so lahko trdi diski, pogoni USB, DVD-RW-ji, kartice SD in drugi mediji. V primeru da je nosilec trenutno priklopljen, lahko z njega berete (in morda tudi zapisujete) datoteke.

Pogosto se priklopljen nosilec imenuje razdelek, čeprav nista nujno ista stvar. "Razdelek" se nanaša na fizično področje shrambe na enem trdem disku. Ko je razdelek priklopljen, ga lahko kličete nosilec, saj lahko dostopate do datotek na njem. O nosilcih lahko razmišljajte kot označenih "izložbah" do "trgovine" razdelkov in pogonov.

Ogled in upravljanje nosilcev in razdelkov z diskovnimi orodji

Nosilce shrambe računalnika lahko preverite in spreminjate z diskovnimi orodji.

Odprite Pregledno ploščo in zaženite program Diskovna orodja.

V pladnju Naprave shrambe boste našli trde diske, pogone CD/DVD in druge fizične naprave. Kliknite na napravo, ki jo želite preučiti.

V desnem pladnju področje Nosilci zagotavlja viden pregled nosilcev in razdelkov na izbrani napravi. Vsebuje tudi različna orodja za upravljanje teh nosilcev.

Bodite previdni: s temi pripomočki lahko popolnoma izbrišete podatke na disku.

Vaš računalnik ima najverjetneje vsaj en primarni razdelek in en izmenjalni razdelek. Izmenjalni razdelek operacijski sistem uporablja za upravljanje pomnilnika in je le redko priklopljen. Primarni razdelek vsebuje vaš operacijski sistem, programe, nastavitve in osebne datoteke. Te datoteke lahko razdelite na več razdelkov zaradi varnosti ali priročnosti.

En primerni razdelek mora vsebovati podatke, ki jih vaš računalnik uporablja za zagon. Zato se imenuje zagonski razdelek ali nosilec. Za določitev ali je mogoče iz nosilca zagnati sistem, si oglejte Zastavice razdelkov v diskovnih orodjih. Zagonljiv razdelek lahko vsebujejo tudi zunanji mediji kot so pogoni USB in CD-ji.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-tilde.page0000644000373100047300000000321712320731755025020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 To so datoteke varnostnih kopij. Privzeto so skrite. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kaj je datoteka s "~" na koncu imena?

Datoteke s "~" na koncu svojega imena (na primer primer.txt~) so samodejno ustvarjene varnostne kopije dokumentov urejenih v urejevalniku besedil gedit ali drugih programih. Lahko jih brez skrbi izbrišete, vendar nič ne škodi, če jih pustite na računalniku.

Te datoteke so privzeto skrite. V primeru da jih vidite, je to zato, ker ste izbrali Pokaži skrite datoteke (prek gumba dol v meniju orodne vrstice programa Datoteke) ali pritisnili CtrlH. S ponovitvijo enega od teh korakov jih lahko ponovno skrijete.

Te datoteke se obravnavajo na enak način kot običajne skrite datoteke. Za nasvet o upravljanju s skritimi datotekami si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-calibrationcharacterization.page0000644000373100047300000000433112320731755031473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Umerjanje in karakterizacija sta dve popolnoma različni stvari. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kakšna je razlika med umerjanjem in karakterizacijo?

Veliko ljudi je na začetku zmedenih o razliki med umerjanjem in karakterizacijo. Umerjanje je opravilo spreminjanja obnašanja barve naprave. To je običajno narejeno z dvema mehanizmoma:

Spreminjanje nadzornikov ali njihovih notranjih nastavitev

Uveljavljenje krivulj v barvne kanale.

Cilj umerjanja je nastaviti napravo v določeno stanje glede na njen barvni odziv. Pogosto se to uporablja kot način za zagotavljanje ponovljivega obnašanja. Običajno je umerjanje shranjeno na napravi ali za sistem določenih vrstah datotek, ki posname nastavitve naprave ali umeritvene krivulje za kanal.

Karakterizacija (ali profiliranje) je snemanje načina na katerega naprava proizvede ali se odzove na barvo. Običajno je rezultat shranjen v profilu ICC naprave. Takšen profil ne spremeni barve na noben način. Sistemu kot je CMM (modul za upravljanje barv) ali programu, ki se zaveda barv, omogoča spreminjanje barv, ko je združen z drugim profilom naprave.

Karakterizacija (profil) za napravo bo veljavna le, dokler je v istem stanju umerjanja, kot je bila ob karakterizaciji.

V primeru zaslonskih profilov obstaja dodatna zmeda, ker so zaradi priročnosti podatki o umerjanju pogosto shranjeni v profilu. Po dogovoru je shranjen v oznaki vcgt. Čeprav je shranjen v profilu, se ga običajni programi osnovani na ICC ne zavedajo in ne počenjajo nič z njim. Podobno se ga ne bodo zavedala in z njim upravljala običajna orodja in programi za umerjanje.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-overview.page0000644000373100047300000000202312320731755025564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Namizje Uvod, tipkovne bližnjice, okna … Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Namizje, programi in okna
Namizje
Programi in okna
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/mouse-lefthanded.page0000644000373100047300000000270312320731755026042 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Obrnite levi in desni miškin gumb v nastavitvah miške. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Uporaba miške z levico

Obnašanje levega in desnega miškinega gumba na miški ali drsni ploščici lahko zamenjate in s tem olajšate uporabo z levico.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno v menijski vrstici in izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Miška in drsna ploščica.

V odseku Splošno zamenjajte Osnovi gumb v Desni.

Ta nastavitev bo vplivala tako na vašo miško in drsno ploščico kot tudi na katerokoli drugo napravo kazanja.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-edit-connection.page0000644000373100047300000002174612320731755030327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Izvedite kaj pomenijo možnosti na zaslonu urejanja brezžičnih povezav. Urejanje brezžične povezave

Ta tema opisuje vse možnosti, ki so vam na voljo, ko urejate brezžično povezavo. Za urejanje povezave, kliknite meni omrežja v menijski vrstici in izberite Urejanje povezav.

Večina omrežij bo delovala povsem dobro, če te nastavitve pustite na privzetih vrednostih, zato vam jih verjetno ni treba spremeniti. Veliko možnosti tukaj vam zagotavlja večji nadzor nad naprednejšimi omrežji.
Na voljo vsem uporabnikom / samodejna povezava <gui>Samodejna povezava</gui>

To možnost izberite, če želite, da se računalnik poskuša povezati s tem brezžičnim omrežjem kadar je v njegovem obsegu.

V primeru da ste na dosegu več omrežij, ki so nastavljena za samodejno povezovanje, se bo računalnik povezal z omrežjem, ki je prvo prikazano v zavihku Brezžično v oknu Omrežne povezave. Računalnik za povezavo z drugim omrežjem v doseg katerega je pravkar prišel ne bo prekinil povezave z obstoječim omrežjem.

 <gui>Na voljo vsem uporabnikom</gui>

Izberite to možnost, če želite, da imajo vsi uporabniki računalnika dostop do tega brezžičnega omrežja. V primeru da ima omrežje geslo WEP/WPA, boste geslo morali vnesti le enkrat. Vsi drugi uporabniki na vašem računalniku se bodo lahko z omrežjem povezali, ne da bi jim bilo treba vedeti geslo.

V primeru da je ta možnost izbrana, morate biti za spreminjanje možnosti tega omrežja skrbnik. Morda boste morali vnesti svoje skrbniško geslo.
Brezžično <gui>SSID</gui>

To je ime brezžičnega omrežja s katerim se povezujete, znano tudi pod kratico SSID. Tega ne spreminjajte, če niste spremenili imena brezžičnega omrežja (na primer s spremembo nastavitev svojega brezžičnega usmerjevalnika ali osnovne postaje).

 <gui>Način</gui>

Uporabite to za določanje, če se povezujete v omrežje Infrastruktura (ko se računalniki brezžično povezujejo v osrednjo osnovno enoto ali usmerjevalnik) ali omrežje Ad-hoc (ko ni osrednje enote in so računalniki v omrežju povezani en z drugim). Večina omrežij je infrastrukturnih; kljub temu mogoče želite sami nastaviti lastno omrežje ad-hoc.

V primeru da izberete Ad-hoc, boste videli dve drugi možnosti, Pas in Kanal. Ti možnosti določita v katerem frekvenčnem pasu bo ad-hoc brezžično omrežje delovalo. Nekateri računalniki lahko delujejo le na nekaterih pasovih (na primer le A ali le B), zato boste morda želeli izbrati pas, ki ga lahko uporabijo vsi računalniki na ad-hoc omrežju. Na zaposlenih mestih je morda na istem kanalu na voljo več omrežij. To lahko vašo povezavo upočasni, zato lahko spremenite tudi kanal, ki ga uporabljate.

 <gui>BSSID</gui>

To je Osnovno določilo zbirke storitev. SSID (glejte zgoraj) je ime omrežja, ki naj bi ga brali ljudje. BSSID je ime, ki ga razume računalnik (to je niz črk in števil, ki je za določeno brezžično omrežje edinstven). Če je omrežje skrito, ne bo imelo SSID, vendar bo imelo BSSID.

 <gui>MAC naslov naprave</gui>

Naslov MAC je koda, ki določi kos omrežne strojne opreme (na primer brezžično kartico, omrežno kartico Eternet ali usmerjevalnik). Vsaka naprava, ki jo povežete z omrežjem, ima edinstven naslov MAC, ki ji je bil dodeljen v tovarni.

To možnost lahko uporabite za spremembo naslova MAC svoje omrežne kartice.

 <gui>Kloniran naslov MAC</gui>

Vaša omrežna strojna oprema (brezžična kartica) se lahko pretvarja, da ima drugačen naslov MAC. To je uporabno, če imate napravo ali storitev, ki se bo sporazumevala le z določenimi naslovi MAC (na primer širokopasovni kabelski modem). V primeru da naslov MAC vnesete v polje kloniran naslov MAC, bo naprava/storitev mislila, da ima vaš računalnik kloniran naslov MAC in ne pravi naslov MAC.

 <gui>MTU</gui>

Ta nastavitev spremeni Največjo enoto prenosa, ki je največji kos podatkov, ki ga je mogoče poslati preko omrežja. Ko so datoteke poslane preko omrežja, so podatki razdeljeni v majhne koščke (znane pod imenom paketi). Optimalni MTU za vaše omrežje je odvisen od tega kako verjetno je, da se bodo paketi izgubili (zaradi šuma v povezavi) in kako hitra je povezava. Ponavadi vam te nastavitve ni treba spreminjati.
Brezžična varnost <gui>Varnost</gui>

To določi katero vrsto šifriranja uporablja vaše brezžično omrežje. Šifrirana omrežja pomagajo pri zaščiti vaše brezžične povezave pred prestrezanjem, zato drugi ljudje ne morejo "prisluškovati" in videti katera spletišča obiskujete in tako naprej.

Nekatere vrste šifriranja so močnejše kot druge, vendar jih morda starejša oprema brezžičnega omrežja ne podpira. Običajno boste morali za povezavo vnesti geslo. Bolj izpopolnjene vrste varnosti morda zahtevajo tudi uporabniško ime in digitalno potrdilo. Za več podrobnosti o priljubljenih vrstah brezžičnega šifriranja si oglejte .
Nastavitve IPv4

Uporabite ta zavihek za določitev podrobnosti kot sta naslov IP vašega računalnika in strežniki DNS, ki naj jih uporabi. Spremenite Način za ogled različnih načinov dobivanja/nastavljanja teh podrobnosti.

Na voljo so naslednji načini:

<gui>Samodejno (DHCP)</gui>

Dobite podatke kot sta naslov IP in strežnik DNS od strežnika DHCP. Strežnik DHCP je računalnik (ali druga naprava kot je usmernik), ki je povezan na omrežje in se odloči katere omrežne nastavitve naj ima računalnik. Ko se prvič povežete na omrežje, vam bodo pravilne nastavitve samodejno dodeljene. Večina omrežij uporablja DHCP.

 <gui>Le samodejni (DHCP) naslovi</gui>

V primeru da izberete to nastavitev, bo vaš računalnik svoj naslov IP dobil od strežnika DHCP, vendar boste morali druge podrobnosti določiti ročno (kot je strežnik DNS, ki ga želite uporabiti).

 <gui>Ročno</gui>

Izberite to možnost, če želite sami določiti vse nastavitve omrežja, vključno z naslovom IP.

 <gui>Poveži le krajevno</gui>

Poveži krajevno je način povezave računalnikov na omrežju brez zahteve po strežniku DHCP ali ročnemu določevanju naslovov IP in drugih podatkov. V primeru da se povežete z omrežjem Poveži krajevno, se bodo računalniki na omrežju med sabo odločili katere naslove IP bodo uporabili in tako naprej. To je uporabno, če želite nekaj računalnikov začasno povezati, da se lahko sporazumevajo med sabo.

 <gui>Onemogočeno</gui>

Ta možnost bo onemogočila omrežno povezavo in vam preprečila povezovanje z njo. IPv4 in IPv6 se obravnavata kot ločeni povezavi, čeprav veljata za isto omrežno kartico. V primeru da imate eno omogočeno, boste morda želeli drugo onemogočiti.
Nastavitve IPv6

To je podobno zavihku IPv4, vendar upravlja z novejšim standardom IPv6. Zelo moderna omrežja uporabljajo IPv6, vendar je trenutno IPv4 še vedno bolj priljubljen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-setup-default-printer.page0000644000373100047300000000404012320731755030705 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izberite tiskalnik, ki ga najpogosteje uporabljate. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Nastavitev privzetega tiskalnika

V primeru da imate na voljo več kot en tiskalnik, lahko izberete svoj privzeti tiskalnik. Morda želite izbrati tiskalnik, ki ga najbolj pogosto uporabljate.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Tiskalniki.

Desno kliknite na želeni privzeti tiskalnik v seznamu razpoložljivih tiskalnikov in kliknite Nastavi kot privzeti.

Ko izbirate iz seznama tiskalnikov na voljo, lahko filtrirate rezultate iskanje z opredelitvijo imena ali mesta tiskalnika (na primer 1. nadstropje ali vhod).

Filtriranje rezultatov iskanja je na voljo samo v pogovornem oknu za dodajanje novih tiskalnikov.

Ko v programu tiskate, je privzeti tiskalnik samodejno uporabljen, razen če za določen posel tiskanja izberete drug tiskalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-windows.page0000644000373100047300000000451412320731755025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Premikajte in organizirajte svoja okna. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Okna in delovne površine

Tako kot druga namizja tudi Unity za prikaz izvajajočih se programov uporablja okna. Z uporabo Pregledne plošče in Zaganjalnika lahko zaženete nove programe in nadzirate katero okno je dejavno.

Poleg oken lahko skupaj združite programe znotraj delovnih površin. Obiščite teme pomoči oken in delovnih površin spodaj, da boste boljše razumeli kako uporabiti te zmožnosti.

Okna Delo z okni
Delovne površine Delo z delovnimi površinami
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/backup-how.page0000644000373100047300000000502712320731755024660 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uporaba Déjà Dup (ali katerega drugega programa za izdelavo varnostnih kopij) za izdelavo kopij vrednih datotek in storitev za zaščito pred izgubo podatkov. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kako ustvariti varnostno kopijo

Priporočeni način ustvarjanja varnostnih kopij vaših datotek in nastavitev je, da prepustite da to opravilo za vas naredi program za ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij. Veliko različnih programov za ustvarjanje varnostnih kopij je na voljo, kot na primer Déjà Dup.

Pomoč za vaš izbrani program vas bo vodila skozi nastavljanje možnosti varnostne kopije in tudi skozi obnovitev podatkov, če pride do težav.

Druga možnost je enostavno kopiranje vaših datotek na varno mesto kot je zunanji trdi disk, drug računalnik na omrežju ali pogon USB. Vaše osebne datoteke in nastavitve so ponavadi v vaši domači mapi, zato jih lahko kopirate od tam.

Količina podatkov katerih varnostno kopijo lahko ustvarite je omejena z velikostjo naprave shrambe. V primeru da imate na svoji napravi varnostne kopije prostor, je najboljše narediti varnostno kopijo cele domače mape z naslednjimi izjemami:

Datoteke, ki že imajo varnostne kopije drugje, kot na primer na CD-ju, DVD-ju ali drugih odstranljivih medijih.

Datoteke, ki jih lahko enostavno ponovno ustvarite. Če ste na primer programer, vam ni treba ustvariti varnostne kopije datotek, ki so proizvedene, ko kodno prevajate svoje programe. Namesto tega se prepričajte, da ustvarite varnostno kopijo izvirnih izvornih datotek.

Vaše datoteke smeti, ki jih lahko najdete v ~/.local/share/Trash (mapa smeti).

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-chat-video.page0000644000373100047300000000216212320731756025425 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Katere programe lahko uporabim za izvajanje video klicev? Video klici

Lahko opravljate video klice iz Ubuntuja, brez da bi namestili dodaten program, z uporabo programa Empathy prek Google Talk, MSN, Jabber in SIP omrežij. Oglejte si priročnik Empathy za pomoč pri uporabi video klicev s programom Empathy.

Drugi programi, ki podpirajo video klice vključujejo

Skype

Ekiga

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/contacts-edit-details.page0000644000373100047300000000352312320731756027004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Uredite podrobnosti vsakega stika. Urejanje podrobnosti stika

Urejanje podrobnosti stika vam pomaga obdržati podatke v imeniku posodobljene in celovite.

Izberite stik iz seznama stikov.

Pritisnite Uredi v zgornjem desnem kotu programa Stiki.

Uredite podrobnosti stika

Za dodajanje podrobnosti kot je nova telefonska številka ali e-poštni naslov, pritisnite Nova podrobnost in izberite polje, ki ga želite dodati.

Pritisnite Končano ko končate z urejanjem stika.

V primeru povezanih stikov lahko profil uredite s klikom na podobo profila.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/music-player-newipod.page0000644000373100047300000000241312320731756026672 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Nove iPode morate pred uporabo nastaviti z uporabo programa iTunes. Moj novi iPod ne deluje

V primeru da imate nov iPod, ki še nikoli ni bil povezan z računalnikom, ob povezavi z računalnikom Linux ne bo pravilno prepoznan. To se zgodi, ker je treba nove iPode nastaviti in posodobiti s programom iTunes, ki deluje le na Windows ali Mac OS X.

Za nastavitev iPoda, namestite iTunes na računalnik Windows ali Mac in ga priklopite. Vodeni boste skozi nastavitvene korake. Ko boste vprašani za Obliko nosilca, izberite MS-DOS (FAT), Windows ali podobno. Druga oblika (HFS/Mac) z Linuxom ne deluje dobro.

Ko ste nastavitev končali, bi moral iPod ob vklopu v računalnik Linux delovati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-select.page0000644000373100047300000000242312320731756025725 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natisnite le določene strani ali le obseg strani. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiskanje le določenih strani

Za tiskanje le določenih strani v dokumentu:

Kliknite DatotekaNatisni

V zavihku Splošno okna Tiskanje v odseku Obseg izberite Strani.

V besedilno polje vpišite številke strani, ki jih želite natisniti, ločene z vejicami. Za oznako obsega strani uporabite pomišljaj.

Na primer, če v besedilno polje Strani vnesete "1,3,5-7,9" , bodo natisnjene strani 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 in 9.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-nowireless.page0000644000373100047300000000414312320731756026143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nekatere brezžične naprave imajo težave, ko gre vaš računalnik v pripravljenost in se ne zbudi pravilno. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ko računalnik povrnem iz stanja pripravljenosti, nimam brezžičnega omrežja

V primeru, da ste svoj računalnik poslali v stanje pripravljenosti ali mirovanje, se lahko zgodi, da ob povrnitvi brezžična internetna povezava ne deluje. To se zgodi, ko gonilniki brezžične naprave določenih zmožnosti varčevanja z energijo ne podpirajo popolnoma. Posledično se običajno brezžična povezava po zbujanju računalnika ne vklopi.

Izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico:

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici iz izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite zavihek Brezžično.

Izklopite in znova vklopite brezžično kartico

Če brezžično omrežje še vedno ne deluje vklopit in izklopite Letalski način

Če to ne pomaga, s ponovnim zagonom računalnika bi mogel brezžični vmesnik znova delovati.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/clock.page0000644000373100047300000000134512320731756023713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavitev datuma in časa, časovni pas, koledar in sestanki … Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Čas in datum usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-lost.page0000644000373100047300000000416312320731756024702 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sledit tem namigom, če ne morete najti datoteke, ki ste jo ustvarili ali prejeli. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Iskanje izgubljene datoteke

V primeru da ste ustvarili ali prejeli datoteko, vendar je ne morete najti, sledite tem namigom.

V primeru da se ne spomnite, kam ste datoteko shranili. Če veste, kako ste jo preimenovali, lahko iščete po njenem imenu. Iskati se lahko naučite na .

V primeru da ste datoteko pravkar prejeli, jo je vaš spletni brskalnik morda samodejno shranil v skupno mapo. Preverite mapi Namizje in Prejeto v svoji domači mapi.

Morda ste datoteko izbrisali po nesreči. Ko datoteko izbrišete, se premakne v smeti, kjer ostane dokler smeti ročno ne izpraznite. Za navodila kako obnoviti izbrisano datoteko si oglejte .

Morda ste datoteko preimenovali na način, da je postala skrita. Datoteke, ki se začnejo z . ali končajo z ~, so v upravljalniku datotek skrite. V orodni vrstici upravljalnika datotek kliknite na gumb dol in za prikaz izberite Pokaži skrite datoteke. Za več podrobnosti si oglejte .

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000322012320731756026712 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zaganjalnik je na levi strani zaslona. Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu Uporaba zaganjalnika za zaganjanje programov

Ikone zaganjalnika

Zaganjalnik je eden od ključnih sestavnih delov namizja Unity. Ko se prijavite na namizje, se bo pojavil na levi strani zaslona. Zaganjalnik zagotavlja enostaven dostop do programov, delovnih površin, odstranljivih naprav in smeti.

V primeru da se program, ki ga želite uporabljati, nahaja v Zaganjalniku, lahko kliknete na ikono programa in začel se bo pripravljen za uporabo.

Za več o Zaganjalniku raziščite katerokoli od tem pomoči o Zaganjalniku spodaj.

Uporaba Zaganjalnika
Prilagoditev Zaganjalnika
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-adhoc.page0000644000373100047300000000355312320731756026320 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Uporaba ad-hoc omrežja za omogočanje povezave z vami in vašimi omrežnimi povezavami drugim napravam. Ustvarjanje brezžične dostopne točke

Svoj računalnik lahko uporabite kot brezžično dostopno točno. To drugim napravam omogoča povezavo z vami brez ločenega omrežja in vam omogoča souporabo internetne povezave z drugim vmesnikom kot je žično omrežje ali preko mobilnega omrežja.

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in izberite Brezžično na levi strani.

Desno kliknite na gumb Uporabi kot dostopno točko.

Če ste že povezani z brezžičnim omrežjem, boste vprašani, če želite prekiniti povezavo z omrežjem. Ena brezžična kartica se lahko sočasno poveže samo z enim omrežjem. Kliknite Ustvari dostopno točko za potrditev.

Ime omrežja (SSID) in varnostni ključ sta samodejno ustvarjena. Ime omrežja bo osnovano na imenu računalnika. Druge naprave te podatke potrebujejo za povezavo z dostopno točko, ki ste jo pravkar ustvarili.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/printing-setup.page0000644000373100047300000000632112320731756025607 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Nastavite tiskalnik, ki je povezan z vašim računalnikom. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Steven Richards steven.richardspc@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Nastavitev krajevnega tiskalnika

Vaš sistem lahko prepozna veliko vrsti tiskalnikov samodejno. Večina tiskalnikov je povezana preko USB kabla, ki se pripne na vaš računalnik.

Ni treba izbrati ali želite sedaj namestiti omrežni ali krajevni tiskalnik. Izpisani so v enem oknu.

Prepričajte se, da je tiskalnik vklopljen.

Povežite tiskalnik s svojim sistemom preko ustreznega kabla. Morda boste na zaslonu videli dejavnost medtem ko sistem išče gonilnike in morda se boste morali za njihovo namestitev overiti.

Sporočilo bo prikazano, ko sistem konča z namestitvijo tiskalnika. Izberite Natisni preizkusno stran za tiskanje preizkusne strani ali Možnosti za dodatne spremembe v nastavitvi tiskalnika.

V primeru da vaš tiskalnik ni bil samodejno nameščen, ga lahko dodate v nastavitvah tiskalnika.

Kliknite na skrajno desno stran menijske vrstice in izberite Nastavitve sistema.

Odprite Tiskalniki.

Kliknite Dodaj in izberite tiskalnik iz okna Naprave.

Kliknite Naprej in počakajte medtem ko računalnik išče gonilnike.

Če želite, lahko prilagodite ime, opis in mesto tiskalnika. Ko končate, kliknite Uveljavi.

Sedaj lahko natisnete preizkusno stran ali kliknite Prekliči za izpust tega koraka.

V primeru da je za vaš računalnik na voljo več gonilnikov, boste morda morali izbrati gonilnik. Za uporabo priporočenega gonilnika kliknite Naprej, da pridete do strani proizvajalcev in modelov.

Ko končate z nameščanjem tiskalnika, boste morda želeli spremeniti svoj privzeti tiskalnik.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/power-batterywindows.page0000644000373100047300000000364312320731756027042 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vzrok te težave so lahko prilagoditve proizvajalca in različne ocene trajanja baterije. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Zakaj moja baterija traja manj časa kot na Windows/Mac OS?

Nekateri računalniki kažejo, da imajo pri delovanju na Linuxu krajše trajanje baterije kot pri poganjanju na Windows ali Mac OS. En vzrok za to je, da nekateri ponudniki na Windows/Mac OS namestijo posebne programe, ki optimizirajo različne nastavitve strojne opreme/programov za dan model računalnika. Te prilagoditve so običajno visoko specifične in morda niso dokumentirane, zato jih je v Linux težko vključiti.

Na žalost ne obstaja enostaven način za uveljavitev teh prilagoditev brez znanja kaj natančno so. Morda boste ugotovili, da uporaba nekaterih načinov varčevanja z energijo pomaga. V primeru da ima vaš računalnik procesor s spremenljivo hitrostjo, je lahko sprememba te nastavitve uporabna.

Drug možen vzrok je različen način ocenjevanja trajanja baterije na Windows/Mac OS in na Linuxu. Dejansko trajanje baterije bi lahko bilo popolnoma enako, vendar različni načini dajejo različne ocene.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/files-recover.page0000644000373100047300000000351312320731756025364 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izbrisane datoteke so običajno poslane v Smeti. Datoteke lahko iz Smeti dobite nazaj. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Obnovitev datoteke iz Smeti

Če datoteko izbrišete z upravljalnikom datotek, je datoteka običajno premaknjena v Smeti, zato jo lahko obnovite.

Za obnovitev datoteke iz smeti:

Odprite Zaganjalnik in nato kliknite bližnjico Smeti, ki se nahaja na dnu zaganjalnika.

V primeru da ste datoteko izbrisali tam, desno kliknite nanjo in izberite Obnovi. Obnovljena bo v mapo iz katere je bila izbrisana.

V primeru da ste datoteko izbrisali s ShiftDelete ali iz ukazne vrstice, datoteke na ta način ni mogočne obnoviti, ker je bila trajno izbrisana. Datotek, ki so bile trajno izbrisane, ni mogoče obnoviti iz Smeti.

Na voljo so številna obnovitvena orodja, ki lahko včasih obnovijo datoteke, ki so bile trajno izbrisane. Običajno jih ni enostavno uporabiti. V primeru da ste datoteko trajno izbrisali, za nasvet vprašajte na podpornem forumu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-missingvcgt.page0000644000373100047300000000222112320731756026263 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Celozaslonski barvni popravek spremeni barve v vseh oknih. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Ali vam manjkajo podatki za celozaslonski popravek barve?

Na žalost veliko profilov ICC, ki jih zagotavljajo ponudniki, ne vključuje podatkov, ki so zahtevani za celozaslonski popravek barv. Ti profili so lahko še vedno uporabni za programe, ki izvajajo nadomestilo barv, vendar se ne bodo spremenile vse barve na zaslonu.

Za ustvarjanje profila zaslona, ki vključuje tako podatke umerjanja in karakterizacije, boste potrebovali posebna inštrumenta za merjenje barv, ki se imenujeta kolorimeter ali spektrometer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/nautilus-prefs.page0000644000373100047300000000117512320731756025602 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Možnosti upravljalnika datotek usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-virtualdevice.page0000644000373100047300000000406712320731757026607 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Navidezna naprava je barvno upravljana naprava, ki ni povezana z računalnikom. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Kaj je navidezno barvno upravljana naprava?

Navidezna naprava je barvno upravljana naprava, ki ni povezana z računalnikom. Primeri tega so:

Spletna tiskarska trgovina, kamor pošljete fotografije, ki so nato natisnjene in poslane k vam

Slike z digitalnega fotoaparata shranjene na spominski kartici.

Za ustvarjanje navideznega profila za digitalni fotoaparat samo povlecite in spustite datoteke slike na pogovorno okno Sistemske nastavitve Barva. Nato mu lahko dodelite profile tako kot katerikoli drugi napravi ali pa ga celo umerite.

Za ustvarjanje navideznega profila za digitalni fotoaparat samo povlecite in spustite datoteke slike na pogovorno okno Sistemske nastavitve Barva. Nato mu lahko dodelite profile tako kot katerikoli drugi napravi ali pa ga celo umerite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/net-proxy.page0000644000373100047300000000515312320731757024567 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Posredniški strežniki filtrirajo spletišča, ki jih gledate. Običajen vzrok je nadzor ali varnostni nameni. Določitev nastavitvev posredniškega strežnika
Kaj je posredniški strežnik?

Spletni posredniški strežnik filtrira spletišča, ki jih gledate. Na podlagi pravil se odloči katera od zahtevanih spletnih strani in njihov delov vam bo prikazana. Običajno se uporabljajo v podjetjih in javnih brezžičnih dostopnih točkah za nadzor do spletišč, ki jih lahko gledate, preprečevanje dostopa do interneta brez prijave ali za preverjanje varnosti spletišč.

Sprememba posredniškega strežnika

Kliknite ikono skrajno desno na menijski vrstici ter izberite Sistemske nastavitve.

Odprite Omrežje in s seznama na levi strani okna izberite Omrežni posredniški strežnik.

Med naslednjimi načini izberite kateri posredniški strežnik želite uporabiti.

Brez

Programi bodo za pridobivanje vsebine s spleta uporabili neposredno povezavo.

 Ročno

Za vsak protokol protokol preko posredniškega strežnika določi posredniški strežnik in vrata za protokol. Protokoli so HTTP, HTTPS, FTP in SOCKS.

 Samodejno

Url kaže na vir, ki vsebuje ustrezno nastavitev za vaš sistem.

Nastavitve posredniškega strežnika bodo uveljavljene za programe, ki za uporabo izbranih nastavitev uporabijo omrežno povezavo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-workspaces.page0000644000373100047300000000471612320731757026114 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Delovne površine so način za združevanje oken na vašem namizju. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Kaj je delovna površina in kako mi bo pomagala?

Gumb preklopnika delovnih površin

Delovne površine pomagajo pri združevanju oken na vašem namizju. Ustvarite lahko veliko delovnih površin, ki se obnašajo kot navidezna namizja. Delovne površine zmanjšajo navlako na vašem namizju in naredijo krmarjenje po namizju enostavnejše.

Za organizacijo svojega dela lahko uporabite delovne površine. Tako imate lahko na primer vsa okna sporočanja kot sta e-pošta in vaš program klepetanja na eni delovni površini in delate na drugi delovni površini. Vaš upravljalnik glasbe bi lahko bil na tretji delovni površini.

Odprite Zaganjalnik in kliknite na ikono preklopnika oken blizu dna. Privzeto Ubuntu prikaže 4 delovne površine razporejene v 2 vrstici in 2 stolpca. Število delovnih površin lahko spremenite:

Sprememba števila delovnih površin

Pojdite v Pregledno ploščo in odprite Terminal.

Za spremembo števila vrstic vnesite naslednji ukaz in zadnjo število spremenite na želeno število vrstic. Pritisnite Enter.

gsettings set org.compiz.core:/org/compiz/profiles/unity/plugins/core/ vsize 2

Za spremembo števila stolpcev vnesite naslednji ukaz in zadnjo število spremenite na želeno število stolpcev. Pritisnite Enter.

gsettings set org.compiz.core:/org/compiz/profiles/unity/plugins/core/ hsize 3 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/documents.page0000644000373100047300000000233412320731757024621 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Dokumentacijska ekipa Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Uredite dokumente shranjene krajevno na svojem računalniku ali ustvarjene na spletu. Dokumenti

Dokumenti je program GNOME, ki vam omogoča prikaz, urejanje in tiskanje dokumentov na vašem računalniku ali tistih ustvarjenih z Google Docs ali SkyDrive.

Pogled, Razvrsti ter Iskanje
Izberite, Uredite, Tiskajte
Vprašanja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-switching.page0000644000373100047300000000567512320731757027427 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pritisnite tipki AltTalulator. Dokumentacijski projekt GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Dokumentacijski projekt Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Preklop med okni
Iz zaganjalnika

Prikažite zaganjalnik s premikom miške v zgornji levi kot zaslona.

Programi, ki se izvajajo, imajo na levi strani majhen bel trikotnik. Kliknite na ikono izvajajočega se programa za preklop nanj.

V primeru da ima izvajajoči se program odprtih več oken, bo na levi več belih puščic. Dvakrat kliknite na ikono programa za prikaz vseh odprtih oken oddaljeno. Kliknite na okno na katerega želite preklopiti.
S tipkovnico

Pritisnite AltTab za priklic preklopnika oken.

Izpustite Alt za izbiro naslednjega (poudarjenega) okna v preklopniku.

Medtem ko držite tipko Alt, pritisnite Tab za premikanje med odprtimi okni. Za premikanje nazaj držite Alt in pritisnite ShiftTab.

Okna v preklopniku oken so združena po programih. Predogledi programov z več okni se pojavijo, ko kliknete na njih.

Med ikonami programov se lahko v preklopniku oken premikate s tipkama → ali ← ali jo izberete z miškinim klikom.

Predoglede programov z enim okno lahko prikažete s tipko ↓.

Prikazana bodo le okna s trenutne delovne površine. Za prikaz oken z vseh delovnih površin držite tipki Ctrl in Alt in pritisnite Tab ali ShiftTab.

Pritisnite SuperW za oddaljen prikaz vseh odprtih oken.

Kliknite okno na katerega želite preklopiti
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/hardware-problems-graphics.page0000644000373100047300000000133412320731757030033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Odpravljanje težav z zaslonom in grafiko. Težave z zaslonom

Večino težav z zaslonov povzročajo težave z grafičnimi gonilniki ali nastavitve. Katero izmed poglavij najbolje opiše vašo težavo?

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/ubuntu-help/color-gettingprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000270712320731757027145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Barve profile zagotavljajo ponudniki, lahko pa jih ustvarite tudi sami. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Kje lahko dobim barvne profile?

Najboljši način za pridobivanje profilov je, da jih ustvarite sami, čeprav to zahteva nekaj predhodnega znanja.

Večina proizvajalcev poskuša zagotavljati barvne profile za naprave, vendar so včasih oviti v pakete gonilnikov, ki jih morate prejeti, razširiti in nato v njih najti barvne profile.

Nekateri proizvajalci ne zagotavljajo natančnih profilov za strojno opremo. V primeru da je datum ustvarjanja profila več kot leto pred datumom nakupa naprave, so v njem verjetno preizkusni podatki, ki so neuporabni.

Oglejte si za podrobnosti zakaj so barvni profili proizvajalcev pogosto popolnoma neuporabni.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/glade/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000005007212300405316023224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Priročnik snovalnika uporabniških vmesnikov Glade Glade je snovalnik uporabniških vmesnikov za programe GTK+. 2006 Vincent Geddes 2004 2003 Sun Microsystems 20022000 Michael Vance Projekt dokumentacije GNOME Vincent Geddes GNOME Documentation Project
vincent.geddes@gmail.com
 Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Michael Vance GNOME Documentation Project Glade Manual 3.0 5 December 2006 Vincent Geddes GNOME Documentation Project Glade Manual 2.1; 17 June 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 2.0 25 February 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 1.2 10 Feb 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 1.1 30 Mar 2002 Michael Vance GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 1.0 11 May 2000 Michael Vance GNOME Documentation Project Priročnik opisuje Glade različice 3.1.0 Odziv To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Glade application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. glade user interface designer Uvod Snovalnik uporabniških vmesnikov Glade, omogoča ustvarjanje in spreminjanje uporabniških vmesnikov za programe GTK+. Knjižnica GTK+ določa obsežno zbirko sestavnih delov uporabniškega vmesnika, kot so na primer besedilna polja, nazivi pogovornih oken, številčne vnose, potrditvena polja in menije. Ti sestavni deli se imenujejo gradniki. Z Glade je mogoče postaviti gradnike v grafični vmesnik. Omogoča spreminjanje postavitve in lastnosti gradnikov. Glade lahko uporabite za dodajanje povezav med gradniki in izvorno kodo programa. Uporabniški vmesniki zasnovani s programom Glade so shranjeni v zapisu XML, kar omogoča enostavno povezovanje z zunanjimi orodji. Za izgradnjo grafičnega vmesnika iz opisa XML lahko uporabite knjižnico libglade. Kako začeti Zagon programa <application>Glade</application> Program Glade je mogoče zagnati na naslednje načine: Programski meni Choose Programming Glade Interface Designer . Ukazna vrstica Za zagon programa Glade iz ukazne vrstice, je treba vpisati ukaz glade-3 in pritisniti tipko Enter. Ko zaženete <application>Glade</application> Ko zaženete program Glade se prikaže naslednje okno.
Okno <application>Glade</application> Shows theGlade window.
Okno programa Glade vsebuje naslednje predmete: Menijska vrstica Meniji v menijski vrstici vsebujejo vse ukaze, ki jih je mogoče uporabiti pri delu z datotekami Glade. Orodna vrstica Orodna vrstica vsebuje podmnožico ukazov, ki so dostopni iz menijske vrstice. Snovalno območje Snovalno območje je predel, kjer je mogoče vidno urejati uporabniški vmesnik. Paleta Paleta vsebuje gradnike, ki se uporabljajo za izgradnjo uporabniškega vmesnika. Nadzornik Nadzornik pokaže podrobnosti o gradnikih v projektu. Urejevalnik lastnosti Urejevalnik lastnosti se uporablja za delo z lastnostmi gradnikov in za dodajanje povezav z izvorno kodo. Vrstica stanja Vrstica stanja prikazuje podrobnosti o trenutni dejavnosti programa Glade in vsebinske podrobnosti o predmetih menija. Delo s projekti Ustvarjanje novega projekta Za ustvarjanje novega projekta izberite DatotekaNovo. Program pokaže nov prazen projekt v oknu Glade. Odpiranje projekta Da bi odprli obstoječi projekt, izberite DatotekaOdpri. Program pokaže projekt v oknu Glade. Shranjevanje projekta Projekte lahko shranite na naslednje načine: Za shranjevanje obstoječega projekta, je treba izbrati DatotekaShrani. To save a new project file or to save an existing project file under a new filename, choose File Save As . Enter a name for the project file in the Save As dialog, then click Save. Delo z gradniki Izbiranje gradnikov iz okna palete Z gradniki v oknu Paleta je mogoče delati na naslednje načine: Način izbiranja Za uporabo načina izbiranja pritisnite na puščico Izbirnika. Kazalnik se spremeni v puščico in tako pokaže da je način izbiranja dejaven. V tem načinu uporabljate miško za izbiranje gradnikov v projektu. Z uporabo okna Lastnosti je nato mogoče urejati lastnosti gradnikov. Za izbiranje gradnika lahko uporabite tudi vsebinski meni gradnika. Za odpiranje vsebinskega menija gradnika uporabite desni klik miške, postavljene na gradniku.Več gradnikov iste vrste je mogoče dodati iz Palete v svoj projekt tako, da držite tipko Ctrl, ko izbirate gradnik. Za vrnitev v običajni način dela, je treba pritisniti na puščico Izbirnika ali drug gradnik v Paleti. Način postavitve gradnikov Za uporabo načina umeščanja gradnikov izberite gradnik v oknu Paleta. Pri večini izbranih gradnikov se kazalnik spremeni v kazalnik s križem. Tedaj lahko umestite gradnik v zabojnike, gradnike najvišje ravni in podobno. Po umestitvi gradnika, se način delovanja povrne v način izbiranja. Način umeščanja na najvišje ravni Za uporabo načina umeščanja najvišje ravni izberite določeno najvišjo raven gradnika v oknu Paleta. Ko je izberan v oknu Paleta, se gradnik pojavi na vašem namizju. Tedaj lahko urejate gradnik. Po izbiri se način delovanja povrne v način izbiranja. Urejanje gradnikov v projektu Za postavljanje in urejanje gradnikov v oknu projekta uporabite zabojnike in polja za gradnike. V oknu Paleta lahko izberete naslednje zabojnike za gradnike: Vodoravno polje Navpično polje Preglednica Določen položaj Vodoravno polje gumbov Navpično polje gumbov Vodoraven pladenj Navpičen pladenj Beležnica Okvir Drsno okno Vidno polje Polja lahko ugnezdite in tako ustvarite zapletene postavitve. Ko ustvarite vodoravne in navpična polja, Glade vpraša koliko vrstic in stolpcev naj na začetku ustvari. Seveda pa je mogoče vrstice ali stolpce dodati in izbrisati tudi kasneje. Ko ste ustvarili vsa zahtevana polja, lahko vanje dodate določene gradnike kot so oznake, gumbe in tudi druge bolj zapletene gradnike. Program Glade združuje gradnike v postavitev, kar odstrani veliko dolgočasnega dela. Uporaba polj omogoča spreminjanje velikosti oken za nameščanje oznak različnih velikosti v različnih jezikih, ko je program krajevno prilagojen. Dodajanje gradnika v odložišče To remove a widget from a parent and place the widget on the clipboard, select the widget then choose Edit Cut . Kopiranje gradnika v odložišče To copy a widget to the clipboard, select the widget then choose Edit Copy . The original widget remains attached to the parent. Prelepljenje gradnika iz odložišča v projekt To paste a widget that exists on the clipboard into your project, choose Edit Paste .Znotraj programa Glade morajo imeti vsi gradniki edinstvena imena. Če gradnik izrežete in ga nato prilepite v projekt, gradnik in vsi podrejeni gradniki ohranijo svoja prvotna imena. V kolikor pa gradnik kopirate ali večkrat prilepite v projekt, gradniku program Glade ustvari novo ime. Brisanje gradnika To delete a widget from the parent without moving the widget to the clipboard, select the widget then choose Edit Delete . Spreminjanje lastnosti gradnika Urejevalnik lastnosti se uporablja za urejanje lastnosti izbranega gradnika. Za spreminjanje lastnosti gradnika izberite gradnik in vnesite želeno vrednost v enega izmed polj v oknu lastnosti. O Glade Snovalnik Glade vzdržujejo Glade razvijalci in prostovoljci skupnosti GNOME. Če želite o programu Glade najti več podrobnosti, sledite povezavi na spletno stran Glade. V primeru, da želite prijaviti programski hrošč ali podati predloge glede programa in priročnika, lahko to naredite preko bugzille. Dodatni viri so tudi uporabniški in razvijalski dopisni seznami. Seznami omogočajo tudi brskanje po arhivih dostopnih na istih povezavah. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this link, or in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/glade/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000742112300405316022361 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Veliko imen, ki jih podjetja uporabljajo za prepoznavo njihovih izdelkov in storitev, je registriranih blagovnih znamk. Kjerkoli se v dokumentaciji GNOME ta imena pojavijo in je članom projekta dokumentacije GNOME znano, da blagovna znamka obstaja, je ime zapisano z velikimi tiskanimi črkami ali velikimi začetnicami. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/sl/gpl/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000004621512311475532022747 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Splošno javno dovoljenje GNU 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Free Software Foundation Projekt dokumentacije GNOME 2 1991-06
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
. Vsakdo sme razmnoževati in razširjati dobesedne kopije tega dokumenta, ni pa ga dovoljeno spreminjati. Različica 2, junij 1991 Dovoljenja večine programske opreme so zasnovane tako, da preprečujejo njegovo svobodno razširjanje in spreminjanje. Za razliko od teh pa Splošno Javno Dovoljenje GNU (angl. GNU General Public License, GPL) jamči svobodo pri razširjanju in spreminjanju proste programske opreme ter s tem zagotovilo, da ostane ta prosta za vse njene uporabnike. Predgovor Dovoljenja večine programske opreme so zasnovane tako, da preprečujejo njegovo svobodno razširjanje in spreminjanje. Za razliko od teh pa Splošno Javno Dovoljenje GNU (angl. GNU General Public License, GPL) jamči svobodo pri razširjanju in spreminjanju proste programske opreme ter s tem zagotovilo, da ostane ta prosta za vse njene uporabnike. Dovoljenje GPL se nanaša na večino programske opreme ustanove Free Software Foundation in na vse druge programe, katerih avtorji so se zavezali k njeni uporabi. (Nekatera druga programska oprema ustanove Free Software Foundation je namesto tega pokrita s Splošnim dovoljenjem GNU za knjižnice, angl. GNU Library General Public License.) Uporabite jo lahko tudi za vaše programe. Ko govorimo o prosti programski opremi, imamo s tem v mislih svobodo, ne cene. Splošna Javna dovoljenja GNU zagotavlja pravico razširjanja kopij proste programske opreme (in po želji zaračunavati za to storitev); pravico do dostopa do izvorne kode; pravico spreminjanja programske opreme ali uporabljanje njenih delov v novi prosti programski opremi; in seznanjanje z vsemi temi pravicami. Zaradi zavarovanja vaših pravic je uvedena omejitev, ki prepoveduje vsakomur, da bi vam te pravice kratil ali od vas zahteval predajo teh pravic. Te omejitve se prevedejo v vašo odgovornost, če razširjate kopije programske opreme ali jo spreminjate. Na primer, če razširjate kopije takega programa, bodisi zastonj ali za plačilo, morate dati prejemnikom vse pravice, ki jih imate vi. Prepričati se morate, da bodo tudi oni prejeli ali imeli dostop do izvorne kode. In morate jim pokazati te pogoje (opp. izvirnik), da bodo poznali svoje pravice. Pravice uporabnika so varovanev dveh korakih: s pravno zaščito programske opreme in ponujenim dovoljenjem, ki vam daje pravno dovoljenje za razmnoževanje, razširjanje in/ali spreminjanje programske opreme. Prav tako, za zaščito vsakega avtorja in zaradi naše zaščite želimo zagotoviti, da vsakdo razume, da za to prosto programsko opremo ni nobenega jamstva. Če je programsko opremo spremenil nekdo drug in ga posredoval naprej, želimo, da njegovi prejemniki vedo, da to, kar imajo, ni izvirnik, zato da se problemi, ki jih povzročijo drugi, ne bodo odražali na ugledu izvornega avtorja. Končno, vsaki prosti programski opremi nenehno grozijo programski patenti. Želimo se izogniti nevarnosti, da bi razširjevalci proste programske opreme posamično dobivali patentna dovoljenja in s tem naredili program lastniški (angl. proprietary). Za preprečitev tega jasno zahtevamo, da mora biti dovoljenje vsakega patenta tako, da ga lahko vsakdo prosto uporablja, ali pa sploh ne sme biti omejen s kakršnimkoli dovoljenjem. Sledijo natančne določitve in pogoji za razmnoževanje, razširjanje in spreminjanje. Določila in pogoji za razmnoževanje, razširjanje in spreminjanje Razdelek 0 Dovoljenje se nanaša na vsak program ali drugo delo, ki vsebuje obvestilo lastnika avtorskih pravic (angl. copyright holder) z izjavo, da se program ali drugo delo lahko razširja pod pogoji Splošnega Javnega Dovoljenja GNU (angl. General Public License). Program se v nadaljevanju nanaša na vsak tak program ali delo, in delo, ki temelji na tem programu pomeni bodisi program ali pa katerokoli izvedeno delo po zakonu o avtorskih pravicah (angl. copyright law): se pravi delo, ki vsebuje program ali njegov del, bodisi dobesedno ali s spremembami in/ali prevedeno v drug jezik. (Tukaj in povsod v nadaljevanju je prevod vključen brez omejitev v pojem spremembe.) Vsak zavezanec k dovoljenju je opredeljen kot vi. Dovoljenje ne pokriva nobenih drugih dejavnosti razen razmnoževanja, razširjanja in sprememb; ostale so izven njenega dosega. Dejanje zagona programa ni omejeno in odvodni zapis programa je zajet le, če njegova vsebina sestavlja delo, iz katerega je izpeljan program (ne glede na to, da je bil narejen z zagnanim programom). Ali je to res ali ne, je odvisno od tega, kaj program dela. Razdelek 1 Dovoljeno je razmnoževati in razširjati dobesedne izvode izvorne kode programa v enaki obliki, kot jo dobite, preko kateregakoli nosilca, če je le na vsakem izvodu razločno in primerno objavljeno obvestilo o pravicah razširjanja in zanikanje jamstva; vsa obvestila, ki se nanašajo na to dovoljenje in odsotnost vsakršnega jamstva pustite nedotaknjena; in da prejmejo vsi drugi prejemniki programa poleg programa še izvod tega dovoljenja. Za fizično dejanje prenosa kopije lahko zaračunavate in po vaši presoji lahko ponudite garancijsko zaščito v zameno za plačilo. Razdelek 2 Dovoljeno je spreminjati vaš izvod ali izvode programa ali katerikoli njegov del, in tako narediti delo, ki temelji na programu, ter razmnoževati in razširjati takšne spremembe ali dela pod pogoji zgornjega Razdelka 1, če je zadoščeno tudi vsem naslednjim pogojem: Zagotoviti je treba, da spremenjene datoteke nosijo vidna obvestila o tem, da so spremenjena in datum vsake spremembe. Zagotoviti je treba, da je vsako delo, ki ga razširjate ali izdajate in ki v celoti ali deloma vsebuje program ali katerikoli njegov del ali pa je iz njega izpeljano, objavljeno pod pogoji tega dovoljenja kot celota brez plačila katerikoli tretji osebi. Če spremenjeni program ob zagonu navadno bere ukaze interaktivno, je treba zagotoviti, da se ob najbolj običajnem zagonu za takšno interaktivno uporabo izpiše ali pokaže najava, ki vključuje ustrezno sporočilo o pravicah razširjanja in sporočilo, da jamstvo ni zagotovljeno (ali pa sporočilo, da ponujate jamstvo) in da lahko uporabniki razširjajo program pod temi pogoji, in pove uporabniku, kako pogledati izvod tega dovoljenja. Izjema: Če je sam program interaktiven, vendar navadno ne izpiše takšne najave, tudi za vaše delo, ki temelji na programu, ni nujno, da jo. Te zahteve se nanašajo na spremenjeno delo kot celoto. Če razdelki tega dela, ki jih je lahko prepoznati, niso izpeljani iz programa in se jih lahko ima za neodvisna in ločena dela sama po sebi, potem to dovoljenje in njeni pogoji zanje ne veljajo, kadar jih razširjate ločeno. Vendar, kadar te iste razdelke razširjate kot del celote, ki je delo, ki temelji na programu, mora biti razširjanje celote izvedeno pod pogoji tega dovoljenja, katerega dovoljenja za druga dovoljenja se razširjajo na vso celoto in torej na vsak njen del, ne glede na to, kdo ga je napisal. Torej, namen tega razdelka ni, da bi zanikal ali spodbijal vaše pravice do dela, ki ste ga v celoti napisali sami; namesto tega je namen razširiti pravico do nadzora razširjanja na izpeljana ali zbrana dela, ki temeljijo na programu. Poleg tega, če gre za zgolj kopičenje drugega dela, ki ne temelji na programu, s programom (ali z delom, ki temelji na programu) na mediju za shranjevanje ali distribucijskem mediju, se dovoljenje na to drugo delo ne nanaša. Razdelek 3 Program (ali delo, ki temelji na njem, pod določil razdelka 2) je dovoljeno razmnoževati in razširjati v objektni kodi ali izvedljivi obliki pod pogoji zgornjih razdelkov 1 in 2, če izpolnite tudi kaj od tega: opremite ga s popolno in ustrezno izvorno kodo v strojno berljivi obliki, ki mora biti razširjana pod pogoji zgornjih razdelkov 1 in 2 na nosilcu, ki se navadno uporablja za izmenjavo programske opreme; ali, opremite ga z napisano ponudbo, veljavno vsaj tri leta, da boste katerikoli tretji osebi, za plačilo, ki ne bo presegalo vaših stroškov fizičnega izvajanja izvorne distribucije, dali popoln izvod ustrezne izvorne kode v strojno berljivi obliki, ki bo razširjana pod pogoji zgornjih razdelkov 1 in 2 na nosilcu, ki se običajno uporablja za izmenjavo programske opreme; ali, opremite ga s podatki, ki ste jih dobili vi, kot ponudbo distribucije ustrezne izvorne kode. (Ta alternativa je dovoljena le za nekomercialne distribucije in le, če ste dobili program v obliki izvorne kode ali izvedljivi obliki s takšno ponudbo, glede na podrazdelek b, zgoraj.) Izvorna koda pri delih pomeni obliko dela, najprimernejšo za izdelavo sprememb. Pri izvedljivem delu pomeni izvorna koda vso izvorno kodo za vse module, ki jih vsebuje, poleg tega pa še morebitne datoteke z definicijami vmesnika, povezane s tem delom in skripte, uporabljane za nadzor prevajanja in namestitev izvedljive datoteke. Vendar - kot posebna izjema - ni nujno, da razširjana izvorna koda vključuje vse, kar se navadno razširja (v izvorni ali strojni obliki) z večjimi komponentami (prevajalnik, jedro, in tako naprej) operacijskega sistema, na katerem teče izvedljiva datoteka, razen če ta komponenta spremlja izvedljivo datoteko. Če se razširjanje izvedljive datoteke ali objektne kode izvede s ponujenim dostopom za prepisovanje z za to namenjenega mesta, potem ponujanje ekvivalentnega dostopa za razmnoževanje izvorne kode z istega mesta šteje kot razširjanje izvorne kode, čeprav tretje osebe niso prisiljene razmnoževati izvorne kode poleg objektne kode. Razdelek 4 Ni dovoljeno razmnoževati, spreminjati, podrejati dovoljenja ali razširjati programa drugače, kot to izrecno določa pričujoče dovoljenje. Vsak drugi poskus razmnoževanja, spreminjanja, podrejanja dovoljenja ali razširjanja Dokumenta je ničen, in samodejno prekine vaše pravice, izhajajoče iz tega dovoljenja. Vendar pa se osebam, ki so svoj izvod ali pravice dobile od vas pod tem dovoljenjem, dovoljenje ne prekine, dokler se ji popolnoma podrejajo. Razdelek 5 Ni vam treba sprejeti pogojev dovoljenja, saj ga niste podpisali. Vendar vam razen nje nič ne dovoljuje spreminjanja ali razširjanja programa ali iz njega izpeljanih del. Če ne sprejmete tega dovoljenja, ta dejanja prepoveduje zakon. Torej, s spremembo ali razširjanjem programa (ali kateregakoli dela, ki temelji na programu), pokažete svoje strinjanje s tem dovoljenjem in z vsemi njegovimi določili in pogoji za razmnoževanje, razširjanje ali spreminjanje programa ali del, ki temeljijo na njem. Razdelek 6 Vsakič, ko razširjate program (ali katerokoli delo, ki temelji na programu), prejemnik samodejno prejme dovoljenje izvornega izdajatelja dovoljenja (angl. original licensor) za razmnoževanje, razširjanje ali spreminjanje programa glede na ta določila in pogoje. Ni dovoljeno vsiljevati nobenih nadaljnjih omejitev izvajanja prejemnikovih pravic, podeljenih tukaj. Niste odgovorni za vsiljevanje strinjanja tretjih oseb s tem dovoljenjem. Razdelek 7 Če so vam, kot posledica presoje sodišča ali suma kršitve patenta ali zaradi kateregakoli drugega razloga (ne omejenega zgolj na patentna vprašanja), vsiljeni pogoji (bodisi z odlokom sodišča, sporazumom ali drugače), ki nasprotujejo pogojem tega dovoljenja, vas ne odvezujejo pogojev tega dovoljenja. Če programa ne morete razširjati tako, da hkrati zadostite svojim obvezam pod dovoljenjem in katerimkoli drugim pristojnim obvezam, potem posledično sploh ne smete razširjati programa. Na primer, če patentno dovoljenje ne dovoli razširjanja programa brez plačevanja avtorskega honorarja vseh, ki prejmejo kopije neposredno ali posredno od vas, potem je edina možna pot, da zadostite temu pogoju in temu dovoljenju ta, da se v celoti vzdržite razširjanja programa. Če se za katerikoli del tega razdelka ugotovi, da je neveljaven ali da se ga ne da izvajati pod kateremkoli določenim pogojem, je mišljeno, da velja usmeritev tega razdelka (angl. balance of the section) in razdelek kot celota velja v drugih primerih. Namen tega razdelka ni, da bi vas napeljeval h kršitvi patentov ali drugih trditev lastništva pravic ali izpodbijal veljavnost katerihkoli takšnih trditev; edini namen tega razdelka je ščitenje integritete sistema distribucije proste programske opreme, ki je izveden s prakso javnih dovoljenj. Mnogi ljudje so radodarno prispevali k širokemu naboru programske opreme, razširjane preko tega sistema, v upanju na njegovo dosledno izvajanje; od avtorja/dajalca je odvisno, če je pripravljen razširjati programje skozi katerikoli drug sistem, in izdajatelj dovoljenja ne more vsiljevati te izbire. Ta razdelek namerava temeljito pojasniti, kaj so predvidene posledice nadaljevanja dovoljenja. Razdelek 8 Če sta razširjanje in/ali uporaba programa omejena v določenih državah, bodisi zaradi patentov ali vmesnikov s posebno pravico razširjanja (angl. copyrighted interfaces), lahko izvorni lastnik ali lastnica pravic razširjanja, ki postavlja program pod to dovoljenje, doda izrecno zemljepisno omejitev razširjanja, ki izključuje te države, tako da je razširjanje dovoljeno le v in med državami, ki niso na tak način izključene. V takem primeru to dovoljenje vključuje omejitve, kot da so napisane v telesu tega dovoljenja. Razdelek 9 Ustanova Free Software Foundation lahko od časa do časa izdaja preurejene in/ali nove različice Splošnega Javnega dovoljenja (angl. General Public License). Nove različice bodo pisane v duhu trenutne različice, vendar se lahko razlikujejo v podrobnostih, ki bodo obravnavale nove težave ali poglede. Vsaki različici je prirejena razločevalna številka različice. Če program določa številko različice tega dovoljenja, ki se nanaša nanj in na katerekoli poznejše različice, imate izbiro upoštevanja pogojev in določil bodisi te različice ali katerekoli poznejše različice, ki jo je izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation. Če program ne določa številke različice tega dovoljenja, lahko izberete katerokoli različico, ki jo je kdajkoli izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation. Razdelek 10 Če želite vključiti dele programa v druge proste programe, katerih pogoji razširjanja so drugačni, pišite avtorju in ga prosite za dovoljenje. Za programje, katerega pravice razširjanja ima Free Software Foundation, pišite na Free Software Foundation; včasih naredimo izjemo pri tem. Našo odločitev bosta vodila dva cilja: ohranitev prostega statusa vseh izvedenih del iz naše proste programske opreme in spodbujanje razdeljevanja in ponovne uporabe programja na splošno. BREZ JAMSTVA Razdelek 11 KER JE PROGRAM Z DOVOLJENJEM OPREDELJEN KOT BREZPLAČEN, NI NOBENEGA JAMSTVA ZA PROGRAM DO MEJE, KI JO DOLOČA PRISTOJNI ZAKON. RAZEN, ČE NI DRUGAČE NAPISANO, IMETNIKI PRAVIC RAZŠIRJANJA IN/ALI DRUGE OSEBE PONUJAJO PROGRAM TAK, KOT JE, BREZ ZAGOTOVILA KAKRŠNEKOLI VRSTE, NEPOSREDNEGA ALI POSREDNEGA, KAR VKLJUČUJE, A NI OMEJENO NA POSREDNA JAMSTVA CENOVNE VREDNOSTI IN PRIMERNOSTI ZA DOLOČENO UPORABO. CELOTNO TVEGANJE GLEDE KAKOVOSTI IN DELOVANJA PROGRAMA PREVZAMETE SAMI. ČE SE PROGRAM IZKAŽE ZA OKVARJENEGA, SAMI NOSITE STROŠKE VSEH POTREBNIH STORITEV, POPRAVIL ALI POPRAVKOV. Razdelek 12 V NOBENEM PRIMERU, RAZEN ČE TAKO PRAVI VELJAVNI ZAKON ALI JE PISNO DOGOVORJENO, NE BO LASTNIK PRAVIC RAZŠIRJANJA ALI KATERAKOLI DRUGA OSEBA, KI LAHKO SPREMENI IN/ALI PONOVNO RAZŠIRJA PROGRAM, KOT JE DOVOLJENO ZGORAJ, PREVZEL ODGOVORNOSTI ZARADI ŠKODE, NAJSI GRE ZA SPLOŠNO, POSEBNO, NENAMERNO ŠKODO ALI ŠKODO, IZHAJAJOČO IZ UPORABE ALI NEZMOŽNOSTI UPORABE PROGRAMA (VKLJUČNO Z, A NE OMEJENO NA, IZGUBO PODATKOV ALI NENATANČNO OBDELAVO PODATKOV ALI IZGUBO, POVZROČENO VAM ALI TRETJIM OSEBAM ALI NEZMOŽNOST PROGRAMA, DA BI DELOVAL S KAKIM DRUGIM PROGRAMOM), ČETUDI JE BIL TAK LASTNIK ALI DRUGA OSEBA OBVEŠČEN O MOŽNOSTI NASTANKA TAKŠNE ŠKODE.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/lgpl/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000007362612311475532023131 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Manj splošno dovoljenje GNU 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Free Software Foundation Projekt dokumentacije GNOME 2.1 1999-02
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
. Vsakdo sme razmnoževati in razširjati dobesedne kopije tega dokumenta, ni pa ga dovoljeno spreminjati. Različica 2.1, februar 1999 Licančne pogodbe večine programske opreme so zasnovane tako, da vam preprečujejo njegovo svobodno razširjanje in spreminjanje. Za razliko od teh pa vam Splošna dovoljenja GNU (angl. GNU General Public Licenses, GPL) jamčijo svobodo pri razširjanju in spreminjanju proste programske opreme ter s tem zagotovljajo, da ostane ta prosta za vse njene uporabnike. Predgovor Licenčne pogodbe večine programske opreme so zasnovane tako, da vam preprečujejo njegovo svobodno razširjanje in spreminjanje. Za razliko od teh pa vam Splošna dovoljenja GNU (angl. GNU General Public Licenses, GPL) jamčijo svobodo pri razširjanju in spreminjanju proste programske opreme ter s tem zagotovljajo, da ostane ta prosta za vse njene uporabnike. Ko govorimo o prosti programski opremi, imamo s tem v mislih svobodo, ne cene. Splošna dovoljenja GNU zagotavlja pravico razširjanja kopij proste programske opreme (in po želji zaračunavati za to storitev); pravico do dostopa do izvorne kode; pravico spreminjanja programske opreme ali uporabljanja njenih delov v novi prosti programski opremi; in seznanjanje z vsemi temi pravicami. To dovoljenje, Manj splošno dovoljenje, se nanaša na nekatere posebej zasnovane programske pakete - navadno knjižnice - ustanove Free Software Foundation in na vse druge programe, katerih avtorji so se zavezali k njeni uporabi. Tudi vi ga lahko uporabljate, a najprej vam priporočamo, da glede na razlago spodaj pazljivo razmislite, ali je v določenem primeru bolje uporabljati to dovoljenje ali morda navadno Splošno dovoljenje. Ko govorimo o prosti programski opremi, imamo s tem v mislih svobodo, ne cene. Splošna dovoljenja GNU zagotavlja pravico razširjanja kopij proste programske opreme (in po želji zaračunavati za to storitev); pravico do dostopa do izvorne kode; pravico spreminjanja programske opreme ali uporabljanja njenih delov v novi prosti programski opremi; in seznanjanje z vsemi temi pravicami. Zaradi zavarovanja vaših pravic je uvedena omejitev, ki prepoveduje vsakomur, da bi vam te pravice kratil ali od vas zahteval predajo teh pravic. Te omejitve se prevedejo v določeno vašo odgovornost, če razširjate kopije knjižnice ali jo spreminjate. Na primer, če razširjate kopije neke knjižnice, bodisi zastonj ali za plačilo, morate dati prejemnikom vse pravice, ki jih imate sami. Prepričati se morate, da bodo tudi oni prejeli ali imeli dostop do izvorne kode. Če s knjižnico povezujete drugo kodo, morate prejemnikom ponuditi popolne objektne datoteke, tako da jih lahko potem, ko knjižnico spremenijo, vnovič povežejo s knjižnico in prevedejo. In morate jim pokazati te pogoje (pravzaprav izvirnik, opomba prevajalca), da bodo poznali svoje pravice. Vaše pravice ščitimo v dveh potezah: (1) avtorsko zaščitimo knjižnico in (2) vam ponujamo to dovoljenje, ki vam daje pravno dovoljenje za razmnoževanje, razširjanje in/ali spreminjanje knjižnice. Prav tako, za zaščito vsakega avtorja in zaradi naše zaščite želimo zagotoviti, da vsakdo razume, da za to prosto programsko opremo ni nobenega jamstva. Če je programsko opremo spremenil nekdo drug in ga posredoval naprej, želimo, da njegovi prejemniki vedo, da to, kar imajo, ni izvirnik, zato da se problemi, ki jih povzročijo drugi, ne bodo odražali na ugledu izvornega avtorja. Zaradi zaščite vsakega razširjevalca želimo zagotoviti, da vsakdo razume, da za to prosto knjižnico ni nikakršnega jamstva. Če je knjižnico spremenil nekdo drug in jo posredoval naprej, želimo, da njeni prejemniki vedo, da to, kar imajo, ni izvirnik, da problemi, ki jih povzročijo drugi, ne bodo kvarili ugleda izvornega avtorja. Končno, vsak prosti program nenehno ogrožajo programski patenti. Želimo se izogniti nevarnosti, da bi podjetja učinkovito omejevala uporabnike prostega programa s pridobivanjem omejujočih licenc od lastnikov patentov. Za preprečitev tega jasno zahtevamo, da mora biti vsak patent za katerokoli izpeljano različico knjižnice licenciran tako, da je popolnoma konsistenten s popolno svobodo rabe, kot jo določa to dovoljenje. Večino programja GNU, vključno z nekaterimi knjižnicami, pokriva navadno Splošno dovoljenje GNU. To dovoljenje, Manj splošno dovoljenje GNU, se nanaša na določene posebne knjižnice, in se precej razlikuje od navadnega Splošnega dovoljenja. To dovoljenje uporabljamo za tiste knjižnice, za katere želimo omogočiti tudi povezovanje v neproste programe. Ko se program poveže s knjižnico, najsibo statično ali pa s pomočjo deljene knjižnice, je kombinacija obojega skupaj, pravno gledano, združeno delo, izpeljanka izvirne knjižnice. Navadno Splošno dovoljenje torej dovoljuje takšno povezovanje le, če celotna kombinacija zadošča prav tam določenim kriterijem svobode. Manj splošno dovoljenje dovoljuje bolj ohlapne pogoje za povezovanje druge kode s knjižnico. Tem dovoljenju pravimo Manj splošno dovoljenje, saj manj zavaruje svobodo uporabnika kot pa navadno Splošno dovoljenje. Drugim razvijalcem prostega programja tudi ponuja manj prednosti pred konkurenčnimi neprostimi programi. Te pomanjkljivosti so razlog, da smo za številne knjižnice uporabili navadno Splošno dovoljenje. Vendar Manj splošno dovoljenje v določenih pogojih pomeni prednost. Denimo, da v redkih primerih obstaja posebna potreba spodbuditi kar najširšo rabo določene knjižnice, da bi ta postala de-facto standard. Da lahko to dosežemo, mora biti neprostim programom dovoljeno uporabljati to knjižnico. Pogosteje se zgodi, da prosta knjižnica opravi enako delo kot široko uporabljane neproste knjižnice. V tem primeru pridobimo le malo, če omejimo rabo proste knjižnice le na prosto programje, zato raje uporabimo Manj splošno dovoljenje. V drugih primerih dovoljenje rabe določene knjižnice v neprostih programih omogoči večjemu številu ljudi, da uporabljajo večji obseg prostega programja. Dovoljenje za uporabo knjižnice GNU C v neprostih programih je, denimo, omogočilo mnogim ljudem, da so uporabljali popoln operacijski sistem GNU, kot tudi njegovo inačico, operacijski sistem GNU/Linux. Čeprav Manj splošno dovoljenje manj zaščiti uporabnikovo svobodo, pa vendarle zagotavlja, da ima uporabnik programa, ki je povezan s knjižnico, proste roke pri poganjanju tega programa s spremenjeno različico te knjižnice. Sledijo natančne določitve in pogoji za razmnoževanje, razširjanje in spreminjanje. Pozorni bodite na razliko med delom, ki temelji na knjižnici in delom, ki uporablja knjižnico. Prvo vsebuje kodo, izpeljano iz knjižnice, medtem, ko mora biti drugo kombinirano s knjižnico, da lahko teče. DOLOČILA IN POGOJI ZA RAZMNOŽEVANJE, RAZŠIRJANJE IN SPREMINJANJE Razdelek 0 Ta licenca se nanaša na vsako programsko knjižnico ali drug program, ki vsebuje obvestilo lastnika avtorskih pravic (angl. copyright holder) ali druge pooblaščene osebe, z izjavo, da se lahko razširja pod pogoji Manj splošnega dovoljenja GNU (angl. Lesser General Public License), imenovanega tudi ta licenca. Vsakega izdajatelja licence naslavljamo z vi. Knjižnica pomeni zbirko programskih funkcij in/ali podatkov, pripravljenih tako, da jih je moč priročno povezovati z uporabnimi programi (ki uporabljajo nekatere teh funkcij in podatkov), da s tem oblikujemo izvedljive datoteke. Knjižnica v nadaljevanju pomeni vsako takšno programsko knjižnico ali delo, ki se razširja pod temi pogoji. Delo, ki temelji na knjižnici pomeni bodisi knjižnico ali pa katerokoli izvedeno delo po zakonu o avtorski in sorodnih pravicah (angl. copyright law): se pravi delo, ki vsebuje knjižnico ali njen del, bodisi dobesedno ali s spremembami in/ali prevedeno v drug jezik. (Tukaj in povsod v nadaljevanju je prevod vključen brez omejitev v pojem spremembe.) Izvorna koda pri delih pomeni obliko dela, najprimernejšo za izdelavo sprememb. Pri knjižnici pomeni izvorna koda vso izvorno kodo za vse module, ki jih vsebuje, poleg tega pa še morebitne datoteke z definicijami vmesnika, povezanega s tem delom, ter skripte za nadzor prevajanja in namestitev knjižnice. Dovoljenje ne pokriva nobenih drugih dejavnosti razen razmnoževanja, razširjanja in spreminjanja; ostale so izven njegovega dosega. Dejanje zagona programa z uporabo knjižnice ni omejeno in odvodni zapis programa je zajet le, če njegova vsebina predstavlja delo, ki je izpeljano iz knjižnice (ne glede na to, da je bila pri orodju za njegovo pisanje uporabljena knjižnica). Ali je to res ali ne, je odvisno od tega, kaj knjižnica dela in kaj dela program, ki knjižnico uporablja. Razdelek 1 Dovoljeno je razmnoževati in razširjati dobesedne izvode izvorne kode programa v enaki obliki, kot jo dobite, preko kateregakoli nosilca, če je le na vsakem izvodu razločno in primerno objavljeno obvestilo o pravicah razširjanja in zanikanje jamstva; vsa obvestila, ki se nanašajo na to dovoljenje in odsotnost vsakršnega jamstva pustite nedotaknjena; in da prejmejo vsi drugi prejemniki programa poleg programa še izvod tega dovoljenja.Razmnožujete in razširjate lahko dobesedne izvode izvorne kode knjižnice v enaki obliki, kot jo dobite, preko kateregakoli medija, če le na vsakem izvodu razločno in primerno objavite obvestilo o pravicah razširjanja in zanikanju jamstva; vsa obvestila, ki se nanašajo na to dovoljenje in odsotnost vsakršnega jamstva pustite nedotaknjena; in da prejmejo vsi drugi prejemniki programa poleg programa še izvod tega dovoljenja. Za fizično dejanje prenosa kopije lahko zaračunavate in po vaši presoji lahko ponudite garancijsko zaščito v zameno za plačilo. Razdelek 2 Dovoljeno je spreminjati svoj izvod ali izvode knjižnice ali katerega koli njenega dela, in tako narediti delo, ki temelji na knjižnici, ter razmnoževati in razširjati takšne spremembe ali dela pod pogoji zgornjega razdelka 1, če je zadoščeno tudi vsem naslednjim pogojem: Spremenjeno delo mora biti programska knjižnica. Zagotoviti je treba, da spremenjene datoteke nosijo vidna obvestila o tem, da so spremenjena, in datum vsake spremembe. Zagotoviti morate, da je celotno delo brezplačno licencirano tretjim osebamo pod pogoji te licence. Če se funkcionalnost v spremenjeni knjižnici sklicuje na funkcijo ali tabelo podatkov, ki jih priskrbi uporabni program, ki to funkcionalnost uporablja, na drug način kot argument ob klicu funkcionalnosti, morate v dobri veri poskrbeti, da tudi v primeru, ko program ne ponuja take funkcije ali tabele, funkcionalnost še vedno deluje, in izvaja katerikoli del svojega namena, ki še ostaja smiseln. (Funkcija, ki v neki knjižnici skrbi za izračun kvadratnih korenov, ima namen, ki je popolnoma dobro definiran in neodvisen od programa. Podrazdelek 2.d. torej zahteva, da katerakoli funkcija ali tabela, ki jo glavni program ponuja tej funkciji, ni obvezna za pravilno delovanje funkcije za izračuna kvadratnih korenov.) Te zahteve se nanašajo na spremenjeno delo kot celoto. Če razdelki tega dela, ki jih je mogoče prepoznati, niso izpeljani iz knjižnice in jih je mogoče same po sebi utemeljeno obravnavati kot neodvisna in ločena dela, potem to dovoljenje in njegova določila za te razdelke ne velja, če jih razširjate kot ločena dela. A če razširjate iste razdelke kot dele celote, ki je delo, ki temelji na knjižnici, mora biti razširjanje celote izvedeno pod pogoji tega dovoljenja, katerega dovoljenja uporabe za druge uporabnike dovoljenja se razširijo na vso celoto, in torej na vsak njen del, ne glede na to, kdo ga je napisal. Namen tega razdelka torej ni, da bi zanikal ali spodbijal vaše pravice do dela, ki ste ga v celoti napisali sami; namesto tega je namen razdelka razširiti pravico nadzora nad razširjanjem izpeljanih ali združenih del, ki temeljijo na knjižnici. Poleg tega zgolj uvrščanje drugega dela, ki ne temelji na knjižnici, poleg knjižnice (ali poleg dela, ki temelji na knjižnici), na enoti nosilca ali mediju za razširjanje, se dovoljenje na to drugo delo ne nanaša. Razdelek 3 Po želji lahko uporabite namesto tega dovoljenja za dani izvod knjižnice tudi pogoje navadnega Splošnega dovoljenja GNU. Če želite to storiti, morate spremeniti vsa sklicevanja na to dovoljenje tako, da se, namesto na to dovoljenje, sklicujejo na navadno Splošno dovoljenje GNU (angl. GNU General Public License) različice 2. (Če obstaja različica navadnega Splošnega dovoljenja GNU številke, večje od 2, potem lahko, če tako želite, določite to številko različice.) V teh obvestilih ne spreminjajte ničesar drugega. Ko se enkrat zgodi opisana sprememba za dani izvod, je za ta izvod to nepovratno, torej Splošno dovoljenje GNU velja tudi za vse nadaljnje izvode in izpeljana dela, ki izvirajo iz tega izvoda. Ta možnost je uporabna, če želite prepisati del kode knjižnice v program, ki ni knjižnica. Razdelek 4 Knjižnico (ali delo, ki temelji na njej, pod določili razdelka 2) je dovoljeno razmnoževati in razširjati v objektni kodi ali izvedljivi obliki pod pogoji zgornjih razdelkov 1 in 2, če jo pospremite s popolno ustrezno strojno berljivo izvorno kodo, ki mora biti razširjana pod pogoji zgornjih razdelkov 1 in 2 na nosilcu, navadno uporabljanem za izmenjavo programja. Če se razširjanje objektne kode omogoča s ponujanjem dostopa do izvoda z določenega mesta, potem pogoju za razširjanje izvorne kode zadošča tudi omogočenje enakega dostopa do izvoda izvorne kode, čeprav tretje osebe niso dolžne razmnoževati izvorne kode poleg objektne kode. Razdelek 5 Program, ki ne vsebuje izpeljanke nobenega dela knjižnice, a je zasnovan tako, da deluje s to knjižnico tako, da je z njo preveden ali povezan, se imenuje delo, ki uporablja knjižnico. Tako delo samo po sebi ni iz knjižnice izpeljano delo, in torej ni predmet te licence. Vendar povezovanje dela, ki uporablja knjižnico s knjižnico naredi izvedljivo datoteko, ki je izpeljanka te knjižnice (ker vsebuje dele knjižnice), in ne delo, ki uporablja knjižnico. Izvedljiva datoteka je torej pokrita s to licenco. Pogoje razširjanja takšnih programov določarazdelek 6. Če delo, ki uporablja knjižnico uporablja snov material iz glave, ki je del knjižnice, je lahko objektna koda za delo izpeljano delo iz knjižnice, čeprav morda izvorna koda ni. Ali je to res je posebej pomembno, če je delo moč povezati brez knjižnice, ali pa je delo samo po sebi knjižnica. Zakon povsem ne določa pogojev, pod katerimi to velja. Če takšna objektna datoteka uporablja le numerične parametre, podatkovne strukture in načine dostopa, in male makroukaze in male vključene funkcije (dolge deset vrstic ali manj), potem uporaba objektne datoteke ni omejena, ne glede na to, da je pravno gledano to izpeljano delo. (Izvedljive datoteke, ki vsebujejo objektno kodo in dele knjižnice, še vedno sodijo pod razdelek 6.) Če je sicer delo izpeljano iz knjižnice, lahko razširjate izvorno kodo dela pod pogoji razdelka 6. Katerekoli izvedljive datoteke, ki tudi vsebujejo delo, sodijo pod razdelek 6, ne glede na to, ali so neposredno povezane s samo knjižnico ali ne. Razdelek 6 Kot izjemo glede na zgornje razdelke lahko tudi kombinirate ali povezujete delo, ki uporablja knjižnico s knjižnico, ki izdela delo, ki vsebuje dele knjižnice, in razširjate to delo pod pogoji po vaši izbiri, če ti pogoji dovoljujejo spreminjanje dela za uporabnikovo lastno rabo in obratni inženiring za razhroščevanje takšnih sprememb. Poleg vsakega izvoda dela morate dodati jasno obvestilo, da delo uporablja knjižnico in da rabo knjižnice določa ta licenca. Oddati morate tudi izvod te licence. Če delo med izvajanjem izpisuje pravice razširjanja, morate med njimi vključiti tudi sporočilo o pravicah razširjanja za knjižnico, kot tudi sklic, ki usmerja uporabnika na izvod te licence. Narediti morate tudi eno od teh stvari: Opremite delo s popolno ustrezno strojno berljivo izvorno kodo za knjižnico, vključno z vsemi spremembami v tem delu (ki mora biti razširjano pod pogoji zgornjih razdelkov 1 in 2); in, če delo ni izvedljivo povezano s knjižnico, popolno strojno berljivo delo, ki uporablja knjižnico, kot objektno kodo in/ali izvorno kodo, tako da lahko uporabnik spremeni knjižnico in potem vnovič poveže program, da izdela spremenjeno izvedljivo datoteko, ki vsebuje spremenjeno knjižnico. (Razume se, da uporabnik, ki spremeni vsebino definicijskih datotek v knjižnici, morda ne bo mogel vnovič prevesti programa, da bi uporabil spremenjene definicije.) Za povezovanje s knjižnico uporabite primeren mehanizem deljenih knjižnic. Primeren mehanizem (1) ob teku uporablja izvod programa, ki že obstaja v uporabnikovem računalniškem sistemu, namesto, da bi prepisal knjižnične funkcije v samo izvedljivo datoteko, in (2) pravilno deluje s spremenjeno različico knjižnice, če jo uporabnik namesti, če je le vmesnik spremenjene različice združljiv z različico, za katero je bilo delo izdelano. Opremite delo s pisno ponudbo, veljavno vsaj tri leta, ki ponuja istemu uporabniku gradiva, določena v zgornjem podrazdelku 6a, proti plačilu zneska, ki ne presega dejanskih stroškov takšnega razširjanja. Če se razširjanje dela izvede s ponujenim dostopom do izvoda z določenega mesta, potem ponujanje ekvivalentnega dostopa za razmnoževanje zgoraj navedenih gradiv z istega mesta šteje kot razširjanje izvorne kode. Preverite, da je uporabnik že prejel izvod teh gradiv ali da ste temu uporabniku izvod že poslali. Pri izvedljivem delu mora zahtevana oblika dela, ki uporablja knjižnico vključevati vse podatke in pomožne programe, potrebne za ponovno izdelavo izvedljive datoteke iz nje. Vendar - kot posebna izjema - ni nujno, da razširjano gradivo vključuje vse, kar se navadno razširja (v izvorni ali strojni obliki) z večjimi komponentami (prevajalnik, jedro, itn.) operacijskega sistema, na katerem teče izvedljiva datoteka, razen če ta komponenta spremlja izvedljivo datoteko. Lahko se zgodi, da te zahteve nasprotujejo licenčnim omejitvam drugih lastniških knjižnic, ki navadno ne spremljajo operacijskega sistema. Takšno nasprotovanje pomeni, da jih ne morete uporabljati hkrati s knjižnico v izvedljivi datoteki, ki jo boste razširjali. Razdelek 7 Dele knjižnice, ki so dela, temelječa na Knjižnici, lahko uvrstite v skupno knjižnico z drugimi deli knjižnice, ki jih ta Licenca ne pokriva, ter razširjate takšno kombinirano knjižnico, če je sicer dovoljeno ločeno razširjati Knjižnico in druge dele knjižnice, in če naredite naslednji stvari: Kombinirano knjižnico pospremite z izvodom istega dela, ki temelji na Knjižnici, brez kakršnihkoli dodatnih delov knjižnice. To se mora razširjati pod pogoji iz zgornjih razdelkov. Poleg kombinirane knjižice podajte vidno obvestilo, da deli knjižnice temeljijo na Knjižnici, in pojasnite, kje najti ustrezno nekombinirano obliko istega dela. Razdelek 8 Knjižnice ni dovoljeno razmnoževati, spreminjati, podrejati dovoljenja, jo povezovati ali razširjati, če to ni izrecno dovoljeno s pričujočim dovoljenjem. Vsak siceršnji poskus razmnoževanja, spreminjanja, podrejanja dovoljenja, povezovanja ali razširjanja knjižnice je ničen in vam samodejno odvzame pravice, izhajajoče iz tega dovoljenja. Vendar pa se osebam, ki so svoj izvod ali pravice dobile od vas pod tem dovoljenjem, dovoljenje ne prekine, dokler jo v celoti spoštujejo. Razdelek 9 Ni vam treba sprejeti pogojev dovoljenja, saj ga niste podpisali. Vendar vam brez slednjega nič ne dovoljuje spreminjanja ali razširjanja knjižnice ali iz nje izpeljanih del. Če ne sprejmete tega dovoljenja, so ta dejanja nezakonita. Torej, s spremembo ali razširjanjem knjižnice (ali kateregakoli dela, ki temelji na knjižnici) pokažete svoje strinjanje s tem dovoljenjem in z vsemi njegovimi določili in pogoji za razmnoževanje, razširjanje ali spreminjanje knjižnice ali del, ki temeljijo na njej. Razdelek 10 Vsakič, ko razširjate knjižnico (ali katerokoli delo, ki temelji na knjižnici), prejemnik samodejno prejme dovoljenje izvornega izdajatelja dovoljenja (angl. original licensor) za razmnoževanje, razširjanje, povezovanje ali spreminjanje knjižnice glede na ta določila in pogoje. Ni dovoljeno vsiljevati nobenih nadaljnjih omejitev izvajanja prejemnikovih pravic, podeljenih tukaj. Niste odgovorni za vsiljevanje strinjanja tretjih oseb s tem dovoljenjem. Razdelek 11 Če so vam, kot posledica presoje sodišča ali suma kršitve patenta ali iz katerega koli drugega razloga (ne omejenega zgolj na patentna vprašanja), vsiljeni pogoji (bodisi z odlokom sodišča, sporazumom ali drugače), ki nasprotujejo pogojem tega dovoljenja, vas ne odvezujejo spoštovanja pogojev tega dovoljenja. Če knjižnice ne morete razširjati tako, da hkrati zadostite svojim obvezam pod tem dovoljenjem in vsem drugim ustreznim obvezam, potem posledično sploh ne smete razširjati knjižnice. Na primer, če patentno dovoljenje ne dovoli razširjanja knjižnice brez plačevanja avtorskega honorarja vseh, ki prejmejo izvode neposredno ali posredno od vas, potem je edina možna pot, da zadostite temu pogoju in temu dovoljenju, ta, da se v celoti vzdržite razširjanja knjižnice. Če se za katerikoli del tega razdelka ugotovi, da je neveljaven ali da ga ni mogoče izvajati pod nobenim določenim pogojem, je mišljeno, da velja usmeritev tega razdelka (angl. balance of the section) in razdelek kot celota velja v drugih primerih. Namen tega razdelka ni, da bi vas napeljeval h kršitvi patentov ali drugih trditev lastništva pravic ali izpodbijal veljavnost katerihkoli takšnih trditev; edini namen tega razdelka je ščitenje integritete sistema razširjanja proste programske opreme, ki je izveden s prakso javnih dovoljenj. Mnogi ljudje so radodarno prispevali k širokemu naboru programske opreme, razširjane preko tega sistema, v upanju na njegovo dosledno izvajanje; od avtorja/dajalca je odvisno, če je pripravljen razširjati programje skozi katerikoli drug sistem, in izdajatelj dovoljenja ne more vsiljevati te izbire. Ta razdelek namerava temeljito pojasniti, kaj so predvidene posledice preostalega besedila dovoljenja. Razdelek 12 Če sta razširjanje in/ali uporaba knjižnice v določenih državah omejena, bodisi zaradi patentov ali avtorsko zaščitenih vmesnikov, lahko izvorni lastnik ali lastnica avtorskih pravic, ki postavlja knjižnico pod to dovoljenje, doda izrecno zemljepisno omejitev razširjanja, ki izključuje te države, tako da je razširjanje dovoljeno le v in med državami, ki niso na tak način izključene. V takem primeru to dovoljenje vključuje omejitve, kot da so zapisane v besedilu tega dovoljenja. Razdelek 13 Ustanova Free Software Foundation lahko od časa do časa izdaja preurejene in/ali nove različice Manj splošnega dovoljenja (angl. Lesser General Public License). Nove različice bodo pisane v duhu trenutne različice, vendar se lahko razlikujejo v podrobnostih, ki bodo obravnavale nove težave ali poglede. Vsaki različici je določena razločevalna številka različice. Če knjižnica določa številko različice tega dovoljenja, ki se nanaša nanjo in na katero koli poznejšo različico, imate izbiro upoštevanja pogojev in določil bodisi te različice ali poljubne kasnejše različice, ki jo je izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation. Če knjižnica ne določa številke različice tega dovoljenja, lahko izberete poljubno različico, ki jo je kdajkoli izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation. Razdelek 14 Če želite vključiti dele knjižnice v drugo prosto programsko opremo, katere pogoji razširjanja so drugačni od teh, pišite avtorju in ga prosite za dovoljenje. Za programje, katerega pravice razširjanja ima Free Software Foundation, pišite na Free Software Foundation; včasih pri tem naredimo izjemo. Našo odločitev bosta vodila dva cilja: ohranitev prostega statusa vseh izvedenih del iz naše proste programske opreme in spodbujanje razdeljevanja in ponovne uporabe programja na splošno. BREZ JAMSTVA Razdelek 15 KER JE KNJIŽNICA Z DOVOLJENJEM OPREDELJENA KOT BREZPLAČNA, NI NOBENEGA JAMSTVA ZA KNJIŽNICO DO MEJE, KI JO DOLOČA PRISTOJNI ZAKON. ČE NI DRUGAČE ZAPISANO, IMETNIKI PRAVIC RAZŠIRJANJA IN/ALI DRUGE OSEBE PONUJAJO KNJIŽNICO TAKŠNO, KOT JE, BREZ ZAGOTOVILA KAKRŠNE KOLI VRSTE, NEPOSREDNEGA ALI POSREDNEGA, KAR VKLJUČUJE, A NI OMEJENO NA POSREDNA JAMSTVA CENOVNE VREDNOSTI IN PRIMERNOSTI ZA DOLOČENO RABO. CELOTNO TVEGANJE GLEDE KAKOVOSTI IN DELOVANJA KNJIŽNICE PREVZAMETE SAMI. ČE SE KNJIŽNICA IZKAŽE ZA OKVARJENO, SAMI NOSITE STROŠKE VSEH POTREBNIH STORITEV, POPRAVIL ALI POPRAVKOV. Razdelek 16 V NOBENEM PRIMERU, RAZEN ČE TAKO PRAVI VELJAVNI ZAKON ALI JE PISNO DOGOVORJENO, NE BO LASTNIK PRAVIC RAZŠIRJANJA ALI KATERAKOLI DRUGA OSEBA, KI LAHKO SPREMENI IN/ALI PONOVNO RAZŠIRJA KNJIŽNICO, KOT JE DOVOLJENO ZGORAJ, PREVZEL ODGOVORNOSTI ZARADI ŠKODE, NAJSI GRE ZA SPLOŠNO, POSEBNO, NENAMERNO ŠKODO ALI ŠKODO, IZHAJAJOČO IZ UPORABE ALI NEZMOŽNOSTI UPORABE KNJIŽNICE (VKLJUČNO Z, A NE OMEJENO NA, IZGUBO PODATKOV ALI NENATANČNO OBDELAVO PODATKOV ALI IZGUBO, POVZROČENO VAM ALI TRETJIM OSEBAM ALI NEZMOŽNOST KNJIŽNICE, DA BI DELOVALA S KAKO DRUGO PROGRAMSKO OPREMO), ČETUDI JE BIL TAK LASTNIK ALI DRUGA OSEBA OBVEŠČEN O MOŽNOSTI NASTANKA TAKŠNE ŠKODE.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/fdl/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000006136212311475533022733 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Dovoljenje za prosto dokumentacijo GNU Različica 1.1, marec 2000 2000Free Software Foundation, Inc Free Software Foundation Projekt dokumentacije GNOME 1.1 2000-03
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
. Vsakdo sme kopirati in razširjati dobesedne kopije tega dokumenta dovoljenja, ni pa ga dovoljeno spreminjati. Namen dovoljenja je omogočiti, da priročnik, učbenik, ali kak drug pisani dokument, postane prost v pomenski obliki prostosti: zagotoviti vsakomur učinkovito prostost, da besedilo prepisuje in razširja, s spremembami ali brez njih, komercialno ali nekomercialno. Dovoljenje ohranja avtorske in založniške zasluge, vendar brez prenesene odgovornosti za spremembe, ki so jih naredili drugi. Predgovor Namen dovoljenja je omogočiti, da priročnik, učbenik, ali kak drug pisani dokument, postane prost v pomenski obliki prostosti: zagotoviti vsakomur učinkovito prostost, da besedilo prepisuje in razširja, s spremembami ali brez njih, komercialno ali nekomercialno. Dovoljenje ohranja avtorske in založniške zasluge, vendar brez prenesene odgovornosti za spremembe, ki so jih naredili drugi. Dovoljenje je opredeljeno kot odprta avtorska pravica (copyleft), kar pomeni, da morajo biti spremembe v izpeljanih delih prav tako proste v istem pomenu te besede. Dovoljenje dopolnjuje Splošno javno dovoljenje GNU (v originalu GNU General Public License), ki je prav tako odprta avtorska pravica, vendar zasnovana za prosto programsko opremo. Dovoljenje je zasnovano za priročnike za prosto programsko opremo, saj je prosta dokumentacija pogosto sestavni del prostih programov: prosti program bi moral vključevati priročnike, ki imajo enaka določila svoboščin, kot sam program. To dovoljenje pa ni omejeno le na priročnike programov; uporablja se lahko za katerokoli besedilno delo, ne glede na temo ali način izdaje. To dovoljenje je priporočljivo predvsem za dela, katerih namen je podajanje navodil in sklicnih podatkov. Primernost in definicije Dovoljenje se nanaša na katerikoli priročnik ali drugo delo z obvestilom imetnika pravic razširjanja, v katerem ta izjavlja, da se lahko delo razširja pod pogoji tega dovoljenja. Dokument, spodaj, se nanaša na takšen priročnik ali delo. Vsak posameznik je upravičen do uporabe dovoljenja in je v dokumentu naslovljen v drugi osebi. Spremenjena različica (v originalu Modified Version) dokumenta pomeni vsako delo, ki vsebuje ta dokument ali del tega, bodisi prepisan dobesedno ali s spremembami in/ali preveden v drug jezik. Drugotni razdelek (v originalu Secondary Section) se imenuje dodatek ali razdelek na prednjih straneh Dokumenta, ki obravnava izključno odnose izdajatelja ali avtorja tega dokumenta do splošne vsebine dokumenta (ali s tem povezanih vsebin) in ne vsebuje ničesar, kar bi sodilo neposredno v to splošno vsebino. (Če je, denimo, ta dokument del učbenika matematike, drugotni razdelek ne sme vključevati razlage matematike.) Odnos je lahko stvar zgodovinske povezave s predmetom ali s povezanimi vsebinami, ali pravni, pridobitni, filozofski, etični ali politični položaj glede teh vsebin. Nespremenljivi razdelki (v originalu Invariant Sections) so določeni Drugotni razdelki, katerih naslovi so označeni kot nespremenljivi razdelki v izjavi, da se ta Dokument razširja pod pogoji tega dovoljenja. Besedila na platnicah (v originalu Cover Texts) so določeni kratki deli besedila, ki so našteti kot besedila za prvo ali zadnjo stran knjige, v izjavi, ki pravi, da je Dokument izdan pod pogoji tega dovoljenja. Jasen izvod (v originalu Transparent copy) dokumenta pomeni izvod v strojno berljivi obliki, katere določila so dostopna splošni javnosti, katerega vsebina se lahko gleda in ureja neposredno in enostavno s splošnimi urejevalniki besedil ali (za bitne slike) splošnimi risarskimi programi ali (za risbe) nekaterimi splošno dostopnimi urejevalniki risb, in je primeren kot vhod oblikovalnikom besedila ali za samodejno pretvarjanje v različne druge oblike, primerne za vhod oblikovalnikom besedila. Izvod sicer jasne datoteke, katere oznake so bile zasnovane tako, da bralcem preprečijo ali otežijo naknadne spremembe, ni Jasen. Izvod, ki ni Jasen, se imenuje Nejasen. Nekateri primeri primernih oblik zapisa za jasne izvode so: ASCII ali ISO 8859-2 brez oblikovanja, vhodna oblika za Texinfo, vhodna oblika za LaTeX, SGML ali XML, ki uporablja javno dostopen DTD, in preprosta standardna oblika HTML, namenjena temu, da jo spremeni človek. Nejasne oblike vključujejo PostScript, PDF, lastniške oblike, ki jih lahko beremo in urejamo le z lastniškimi urejevalniki besedil, SGML ali XML, za katerega DTD in/ali orodja za obdelavo niso splošno dostopna, in strojno ustvarjen HTML, ki ga nekateri urejevalniki besedil izdelujejo le kot izhodno obliko zapisa. Naslovna stran pri natisnjeni knjigi pomeni sámo naslovno stran skupaj s takšnimi nadaljnjimi stranmi, ki so neizogibne za čitljivo izražanje stvari, za katere to dovoljenje zahteva, da se pojavljajo na naslovni strani. Za dela v oblikah, ki nimajo naslovne strani kot take, Naslovna stran pomeni besedilo blizu najvidnejši pojavitvi naslova dela, pred začetkom telesa besedila. Dobesedno razmnoževanje Dokument je dovoljeno razmnoževati in razširjati na kakršenkoli način, pridobitno ali nepridobitno, če je le na vsakem izvodu objavljeno to dovoljenje, izjave o pravicah razširjanja, in obvestilo dovoljenja, ki pravi, da se to nanaša na ta dokument, in da določilom tega dovoljenja niso posebej dodane omejitve. Ni dovoljeno uporabljati tehničnih ukrepov, ki bi preprečevali ali nadzorovali branje ali nadaljnje razširjanje izvodov, ki jih naredite ali razširjate. Izvode je dovoljeno zaračunati. V kolikor razširjate dovolj veliko število izvodov, je treba upoštevati tudi določila iz 3. razdelka. Izvode je dovoljeno posojati, pod enakimi pogoji, kot so opisani zgoraj, in jih tudi javno prikazovati. Množično razmnoževanje Pri izdajanju natisnjenih izvodov tega Dokumenta v nakladi več kot 100 izvodov, in dovoljenje dokumenta zahteva tudi Besedila na platnicah, je treba izvode obdati s platnicami, ki čitljivo in razumljivo nosijo vsa ta Besedila na platnicah: besedila na naslovnici in besedila na zadnji strani platnic. Na obeh platnicah mora biti tudi čitljivo in razumljivo zavedeno imenovanje izdajatelja teh izvodov. Prednja platnica mora vsebovati popoln naslov z vsemi enako izrazito natisnjenimi in vidnimi besedami naslova. Na platnice je ob tem dovoljeno dodati tudi druge stvari. Kopiranje s spremembami, omejenimi na platnice, če le ohranijo naslov tega documentain zadoščajo tem pogojem, se lahko v drugih ozirih štejejo za dobesedno kopiranje. Če je zahtevanih besedil za katero od platnic preveč, da bi jih bilo mogoče podati čitljivo, je treba najprej vstaviti prve naštete (kolikor jih pač razumno gre) na pravo platnico, in vstaviti preostanek na strani, ki neposredno sledijo naslovnici. Če objavljate ali razširjate Nejasne izvode tega Dokumenta, v nakladi več kot 100 izvodov, je treba bodisi vključiti strojno berljivo Jasno obliko poleg vsakega Nejasnega izvoda, ali poleg vsakega Nejasnega izvoda objaviti tudi javno dostopno mesto v računalniškem omrežju, kjer je dostopna popolna Jasna kopija dokumenta, brez dodatnega materiala, in kjer jo splošna javnost, ki uporablja omrežje, lahko brezplačno prejme preko javnih standardnih omrežnih protokolov. Če uporabite zadnjo izbiro, je treba razumno preudarno poskrbeti za to, da bo po objavi Nejasne oblike dela, Jasna oblika ostala dostopna na objavljenem mestu vsaj še eno leto po preteku datuma, ko je javnosti posredovan (neposredno ali prek zastopnikov oziroma trgovcev na drobno) zadnji Nejasni izvod. Priporočeno je, ne pa tudi zahtevano, da se precej pred začetkom razširjanja večjega števila izvodov, vzpostavi stik z avtorji tega Dokumenta, da imajo možnost priskrbeti pred razširjanjem posodobljene različice dokumenta. Spremembe Spremenjeno različico tega Dokumenta je dovoljeno razmnoževati in razširjati pod pogoji iz 2. in 3. razdelka, v kolikor bo izdana Spremenjena različica pod točno tem dovoljenjem, kjer Spremenjena različica prevzame vlogo tega dokumenta, in torej to dovoljenje ureja razširjanje in spreminjanje Spremenjene različice za kogarkoli, ki poseduje njen izvod. Poleg tega je treba v Spremenjeni različici narediti še naslednje: Na naslovni strani (ali platnicah, če obstajajo) uporabite naslov, različen od naslova izvirnega Dokumenta in vseh prejšnjih različic (ki bi morale biti, če jih je kaj, naštete v razdelku Zgodovina v dokumentu). Če se izvirni založnik s tem strinja, lahko uporabite isti naslov kot ga ima prejšnja različica. Na naslovni strani kot avtorje našteti eno ali več oseb ali družb, odgovornih za avtorstvo sprememb v Spremenjeni različici, skupaj z vsaj petimi glavnimi avtorji Dokumenta (ali vsemi avtorji, če jih je manj kot pet). Na naslovni strani imenovati založnika Spremenjene različice. Ohraniti vsa obvestila o pravicah razširjanja Dokumenta. Dodati ustrezno obvestilo o pravicah razširjanja za vse spremembe poleg drugih obvestil o pravicah razširjanja. Takoj po obvestilih o pravicah razširjanja vključiti obvestilo dovoljenja, ki javno dovoljuje rabo Spremenjene različice pod pogoji tega dovoljenja, v obliki, prikazani v Dodatku, spodaj. V tem obvestilu dovoljenja ohranite popoln seznam Nespremenljivih razdelkov in zahtevanih Besedil na ovitku, podanih v obvestilu dovoljenja tega Dkumenta. Vključite nespremenjen izvod tega dovoljenja. Ohranite razdelek, imenovan Zgodovina, in njegov naslov, in vanj dodajte postavko z vsaj naslovom, letom, novimi avtorji in izdajateljem Spremenjene različice, kot je podana na Naslovni strani. Če v dokumentu ni razdelka, imenovanega Zgodovina, ga ustvarite, in podajte naslov, leto, avtorje in izdajatelja Dokumenta kot je podan na njegovi Naslovni strani, potem pa še dodajte postavko, v kateri opišite Spremenjeno različico, kot piše v prejšnjem stavku. V kolikor obstaja, je priporočeno ohraniti omrežno mesto, za javni dostop do Jasnih izvodov Dokumenta, ki je navedeno v dokumentu, in podobno tudi vsa omrežna mesta s prejšnjimi različicami dokumenta, ki so navedena v dokumentu. Priporočljivo jih je dodati v razdelek Zgodovine. Mogoče pa je omrežna mesta tudi izpustiti za delo, ki je bilo izdano vsaj štiri leta pred samim dokumentom, ali, če izdajatelj, omenjen v ustrezni različici, to dovoli. V vsakem razdelku, poimenovanem Zahvale ali Posvetila, je treba ohraniti naslov razdelka in v razdelku ohraniti vso izvorno vsebino za vse tam podane zahvale in/ali posvetila. Ohraniti je treba vse Nespremenljive razdelke Dokumenta, z nespremenjenim besedilom in naslovi. Številke ali druge oznake razdelkov ne štejejo za del naslovov razdelkov. Izbrisati je treba vse razdelke, naslovljene Odobritve. Takšni razdelki ne smejo biti vključeni v Spremenjeni različici. Ni dovoljeno preimenovati kateregakoli obstoječega razdelka v Odobritve ali v isto ime, kot ga ima Nespremenljivi razdelek. V primeru, da Spremenjena različica vključuje nove čelne razdelke ali dodatke, ki štejejo za Drugotne razdelke in ne vsebujejo iz dokumenta prepisane snovi, je dovoljeno po lastni presoji označiti nekatere ali vse takšne razdelke kot nespremenljive. To je treba storiti tako, da se dodajo njihovi naslovi v seznam Nespremenljivih razdelkov v obvestilu dovoljenja Spremenjene različice. Ti naslovi se morajo razlikovati od vseh drugih naslovov razdelkov. Dodate lahko razdelek, imenovan Odobritve, če ne vsebuje nič drugega kot odobritve vaše Spremenjene različice različnih strank – na primer, recenzijske izjave ali besedilo, ki je bilo odobreno s strani organizacije kot veljavna definicija standarda. Kot Besedilo na naslovnici Spremenjene različice je dovoljeno dodati odlomek največ petih besed, kot Besedilo na zadnji strani pa odlomek največ 25 besed. Vsaka oseba lahko doda le po en odlomek Besedilu na naslovnici in Besedilu na zadnji strani platnic, vključno z odlomki po dogovorih. Če Dokument že vsebuje besedilo na naslovnici za isti ovitek, ki je bil že dodan ali je bil dodan po dogovoru z isto (fizično ali pravno) osebo v zastopstvu, ni dovoljeno dodati še enega, pač pa je dovoljeno starega nadomestiti z izrecnim soglasjem prejšnjega izdajatelja, ki je stari odlomek dodal. Avtorji in izdajatelji Dokumenta s tem dovoljenjem ne dovolijo uporabe njihovih imen ali pritrditve ali implicitnega soglasja za katerokoli Spremenjeno različico. Združevanje dokumentov Dokument je dovoljeno združevati s katerimikoli drugimi dokumenti, izdanimi pod pogoji tega dovoljenja, pod zgornjimi pogoji za spremenjene različice iz 4. razdelka, če vključite vse Nespremenljive razdelke vseh izvirnih dokumentov, nespremenjenih, in so v izjavi dovoljenja našteti kot Nespremenljivi razdelki novega, združenega dela. Združeno delo zahteva le en izvod tega dovoljenja, in več istih Nespremenljivih razdelkov se lahko nadomesti z enim samim. Če obstaja več Nespremenljivih razdelkov z istim imenom, vendar različno vsebino, je treba naslov vsakega od njih spremeniti v edinstvenega, tako da na njegov konec v oklepajih dodate ime izvirnega avtorja ali izdajatelja, če vam je znano, sicer pa edinstveno število. Iste spremembe je treba narediti v imenih razdelkov v seznamu Nespremenljivih razdelkov v izjavi dovoljenja vašega združenega dela. V združenem delu je treba združiti vse razdelke v različnih izvirnih dokumentih, poimenovane Zgodovina, tako da se oblikuje en sam razdelek Zgodovina; podobno je treba združiti vse razdelke Zahvale in Posvetila. Izbrisati pa je treba vse razdelke, poimenovane Odobritve. Zbirka dokumentov Dovoljeno je napraviti zbirko tega Dokumenta in drugih dokumentov, izdanih pod pogoji tega dovoljenja, in nadomestiti posamezne izvode tega dovoljenja v različnih dokumentih z enim samim izvodom, ki je vključen v zbirko, upoštevajoč zahteve tega dovoljenja za dobesedno razmnoževanje vsakega od teh dokumentov v vseh drugih pogledih. Iz take zbirke je dovoljeno izluščiti posamezen dokument in ga posebej razširjati pod pogoji tega dovoljenja, če je v izluščen dokument vstavljen izvod tega dovoljenja in v vseh drugih ozirih glede dobesednega razmnoževanja upoštevajoč to dovoljenje. Združevanje z neodvisnimi deli Združevanje Dokumenta ali njegovih izpeljanih različic z drugimi ločenimi in neodvisnimi dokumenti ali deli, v knjigi ali kakršnemkoli nosilcu hrambe ali razširjanja, kot celota ne šteje za Spremenjeno različico dokumenta, če za združeno zbirko nihče ne zahteva pravic razširjanja. Takšno združeno delo se imenuje zbirka in to dovoljenje ne velja za druga samostojna dela, tako združena z dokumentom, zaradi tega, ker so združena z dokumentom, če niso sama izpeljana dela dokumenta. V kolikor so zahteve besedila na ovitku skladne z oddelkom 3 tega dokumenta, potem je dovoljeno, v kolikor je dokument del, ki je manjši od četrtine celotne zbirke, besedilo na naslovnici postaviti na platnici, ki sta neposredno povezani le z dokumentom v zbirki. Sicer mora biti besedilo izpisano na naslovnicah celotne zbirke. Prevod Prevod šteje za vrsto spremembe, zato lahko razširjate prevode Dokumenta pod pogoji 4. razdelka. Nadomeščanje Nespremenljivih razdelkov s prevodi zahteva posebno dovoljenje imetnikov pravic njihovega razširjanja, lahko pa vključite prevode nekaterih Nespremenljivih razdelkov poleg izvirnih različic teh Nespremenljivih razdelkov. Vključite lahko tudi prevod tega dovoljenja, če vključite tudi izvirno angleško različico tega dovoljenja. V primeru neskladja med prevodom in angleškim izvirnikom tega dovoljenja, velja izvirna angleška različica. Prenehanje veljavnosti Dokumenta ni dovoljeno razmnoževati, spreminjati, podrejati dovoljenja ali ga razširjati, razen če je to izrecno dovoljeno s tem dovoljenjem. Vsak drugi poskus razmnoževanja, spreminjanja, podrejanja dovoljenja ali razširjanja Dokumenta je ničen, in samodejno prekine vaše pravice, izhajajoče iz tega dovoljenja. Vendar pa se osebam, ki so svoj izvod ali pravice dobile od vas pod tem dovoljenjem, dovoljenje ne prekine, dokler se ji popolnoma podrejajo. Prihodnje popravljene izdaje tega dovoljenja Ustanova Free Software Foundation lahko od časa do časa izdaja nove, popravljene, različice dovoljenja Proste dokumentacije GNU. Nove različice bodo pisane v duhu trenutne različice, vendar se lahko razlikujejo v podrobnostih, ki bodo opredeljevale nove težave ali poglede. Več o tem si je mogoče ogledati na naslovu http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Vsaki različici dovoljenja je dodeljena edinstvena številka različice. Če Dokument določa, da zanj velja določena ali katerakoli poznejša različica tega dovoljenja, je dovoljeno izbirati pogoje in določila bodisi te različice ali katerekoli poznejše izdane različice (ne pa tudi osnutka), ki jo je izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation. Če program ne določa številke različice dovoljenja, lahko izberete katerokoli različico, ki jo je kdajkoli izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation (ne pa tudi osnutka). Dostavek Za uporabo tega dovoljenja v dokumentu, ki ste ga napisali, vključite izvod dovoljenja v dokument in takoj za naslovno stranjo vključite naslednje obvestilo o dovoljenju in pravicah razširjanja:
Avtorske pravice © LETO VAŠE IME. Dokument je dovoljeno razmnoževati, razširjati in/ali spreminjati pod pogoji Dovoljenja za prosto dokumentacijo GNU (GNU FreeDocumentation License), različice 1.1 ali katerekoli poznejše različice, ki jo je izdala ustanova Free Software Foundation; z Nespremenljivimi razdelki: NAŠTEJTE NJIHOVE NASLOVE, z Besedilom na naslovnici: NAVEDITE SEZNAM, in z Besedilom na zadnji strani:NAVEDITE SEZNAM. Izvod dovoljenja je vključen v razdelku, imenovanem Dovoljenje za prosto dokumentacijo GNU.
V primeru, da ni Nespremenljivih razdelkov, je treba v dokumentu zapisati, da je ta brez Nespremenljivih razdelkov, namesto, da so posamič opredeljeni. Podobno je treba storiti tudi, če ni Besedila na ovitku. V kolikor dokument vsebuje netrivialne primere programske kode, vam priporočamo, da te primere izdate vzporedno pod dovoljenjem proste programske opreme, kot je Splošno dovoljenje GNU (angl. GNU General Public License), po vašem izboru, da dovolite rabo te kode v prostih programih.
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/tools-check-integrity.page0000644000373100047300000000324212253720477026235 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Po zapisu diska lahko preverite njegovo celovitost. Paulina Gonzalez pau.gonzalezbr@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Preverjanje celovitosti podatkov na disku

Po zapisu CD-ja/DVD-ja z Braserom lahko preverite njegovo celovitost, da se prepričate, da datoteke na disku niso pokvarjene.

Izberite OrodjaPreveri celovitost ....

Če vam je ljubša možnost Uporabi datoteko MD5 za preverjanje diska, če vam je ljubša.

MD5 (Message-Digest algoritem 5) je funkcija kriptografskega razprševanja, ki se pogosto uporablja za preverjanje celovitosti podatkov.

Če izberete to možnost, boste morali najti datoteko MD5 s klikom na ikono mape postavljeno spodaj.

Pritisnite Preveri za nadaljevanje ali Zapri za preklic.

Ko je preverjanje končano, lahko izberete Preveri ponovno ali enostavno kliknite Zapri.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000256212253720477024533 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Uvod v Brasero, program za zapisovanje diskov. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Uvod

Brasero je program za zapisovanje CD-R/W-jev in DVD-R/W-jev, zasnovan za enostavno uporabo in zagotavljanje vseh orodij potrebnih za zapisovanje.

Z Brasero lahko:

Zapišete podatke na CD-je in DVD-je

Zapišete zvočne CD-je iz digitalnih zvočnih datotek (kot so ogg, flac in mp3)

Kopirante CD-je in DVD-je

Ustvarite video DVD-je ali SVCD-je

Ustvarite datoteke odtisa in zapišete obstoječe datoteke odtisa

Izbrišete CD-R/W-je in DRD-R/W-je

Preverite celovitost diskov in diskovnih odtisov
Glavno okno <gui>Brasero</gui>
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/prob-dvd.page0000644000373100047300000000251612253720477023526 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ne morem zapisati DVD-R ali DVD-RW. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Težave z ustvarjanjem DVD-jev

Nekatere vrste DVD-R-jev in DVD-RW-jev niso združljive z vsemi zapisovalniki. Preverite naslednje in izvedite, če jih lahko uporabite s svojim zapisovalnikom.

Preverite, ali vaš pogon DVD sprejema diske DVD+ ali DVD-. Če je označen z "multi", to običajno pomeni, da sprejema oboje. Preverite svoj disk, če je enake vrste kot pogon DVD.

Preverite, če je disk eno ali dvoslojni: nekateri pogoni DVD ne morejo zapisovati na dvoslojni disk.

Če poskušate uporabiti DVD-R, preverite ali ste nanj že zapisovali. Če uporabljati DVD-RW, ga poskusite pred poskusom zapisovanja sprazniti.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/create-cover.page0000644000373100047300000000426412253720477024372 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ustvari ovitek za škatlo. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ustvari ovitek

You can use Brasero to create inlays for your jewel cases. Access the creator by clicking Tools Cover Editor.

Če končate z ustvarjanjem zvočnega projekta, bodo ob dostopu do vmesnika Urejevalnika ovitkov iz okna zvočnega projekta skladbe samodejno izpisane na zadnji strani.

Če Urejevalnik naslovnic zaprete, bodo vaše spremembe izgubljene.

Odprite Urejevalnik ovitkov.

Izberite oblikovanje, ki ga želite uporabiti za besedilo, in vnesite za besedilo. Drsajte navzdol za ogled stranskega dela in nazaj za ogled plasti.

Ko pogovorno okno Urejevalnik ovitkov vidite prvič, ne boste mogli kliknite na nobeno od možnosti oblikovanja besedila. Kliknite na

Za dodajanje ozadja trenutnemu ovitku kliknite na ikono orodne vrstice Lastnosti ozadja ali desno kliknite na ovite, ki ga želite urejati in izberite Nastavi lastnosti ozadja. Izberete lahko obarvano ozadje ali sliko ozadja.

Če izberete sredinjeno sliko ozadja, se Brasero včasih sesuje, ko kliknite na gumb Zapri.

Kliknite na gumb Zapri za uveljavitev sprememb in zaprite pogovorno okno Lastnosti ozadja.

Natisnite ovitek s klikom na gumb Natisni, ki je v zgornjem desnem kotu pogovornega okna.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/project-data.page0000644000373100047300000000470712253720477024372 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zapis podatkov na CD ali DVD. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ustvarjanje podatkovnega projekta

Podatkovni projekt se uporablja za zapisovanje podatkov (na primer datotek, fotografij ali glasbe) na disk brez spreminjanja datotek na kakršenkoli način. To je lahko uporabno za prenašanje datotek med računalniki.

Na začetni strani kliknite Podatkovni projekt ali izberite ProjektNov projektNov podatkovni projekt.

Želene datoteke dodajte projektu s klikom na Dodaj v orodni vrstici in izbiro datotek. Datoteke lahko dodate tudi z vlečenjem in spuščanjem na področje projekta ali s klikom na UrediDodaj datoteke.

Za shranjevanje podatkov na CD-ju na bolj strukturiran način lahko ustvarite mape. Za ustvaritev mape kliknite Nova mapa v orodni vrstici ali izberite UrediNova mapa iz menijske vrstice. Mape lahko ustvarite tudi znotraj drugih map.

Naslov diska lahko dodate v besedilnem polju pod področjem projekta.

V spustnemu seznamu izberite prazen disk.

Za nadaljevanje kliknite Zapiši ....

V spustnem seznamu izberite Hitrost zapisovanja in druge možnosti, ki jih morda želite.

Kliknite Zapiši za zapis enega CD-ja projekta ali Zapiši več kopij za zapis projekta na več CD-jev

Če uporabljate prepisljiv disk, ki že vsebuje podatke, boste vprašani, če ga želite izprazniti ali vstaviti drug disk.

Če uporabljate prepisljiv disk in podatki nanj niso pravilno zapisani, boste mora pred ponovnim poskusom morali narediti polno (ne hitro) praznjenje diska.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/index.page0000644000373100047300000000135212253720477023115 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png"/> Brasero Help
Ustvarjanje novega projekta
Odpravljanje težav
Druga orodja
usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/project-save.page0000644000373100047300000000451212253720477024411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shranjevanje projekta za kasnejše urejanje ali zapis. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Shrani projekt

V programu Brasero

Ustvarite projekt in mu dodajte datoteke, ki jih želite uporabiti.

Za shranjevanje projekta kliknite ProjektShrani-.

Vnesite ime pod katerim želite projekt shraniti in nato kliknite Shrani za shranjevanje projekta.

Obstaja več načinov s katerimi lahko odprete shranjen projekt Brasero:

izberite ga s seznama na začetni strani pod Nedavni projekti.

kliknite na ProjektNedavni projekti

kliknite na ProjektOdpri in izberite projekt

Odpiranje projekta iz brskalnika datotek

Only one instance of Brasero can be opened at any time. If you try to open a second instance, the currently open Brasero window will be focused.

If Brasero is already running and you try to open some files with it from Files, the files will be added to the project that you are currently working on.

Ko odprete shranjen projekt, ga bo Brasero obravnaval kot nov projekt. Če želite shraniti posodobljeno različico vas bo vprašal za njegovo ime. Izberete lahko isto ime in staro različico prepišete ali pa izberete drugo ime in staro različico obdržite.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/project-audio.page0000644000373100047300000000377412253720477024565 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ustvarjanje zvočnega projekta. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Zapis glasbenega DCja

Brasero lahko zvočne datoteke zapiše na CD, ki lahko nato uporabite za predvajanje v predvajalnikih CD in tako naprej. Najboljše je, da uporabite neprepisljiv CD, saj nekateri predvajalniki CD-jev ne predvajajo prepisljivih CD-jev.

Na začetni strani kliknite Zvočni projekt ali izberite ProjektNov projektNov zvočni projekt.

Projektu dodajte zvočne datoteke s klikom na Dodaj v orodni vrstici in izbiro želenih datotek. Datoteke lahko dodate z vlečenjem in spuščanjem na podočje projekta s klikom na UrediDodaj datoteke.

Naslov CD-ja lahko dodate v besedilno polje pod področjem projekta.

V spustnem seznamu izberite prazen CD.

Za nadaljevanje kliknite Zapiši ....

V spustnem seznamu izberite Hitrost zapisovanja in druge možnosti, ki jih morda želite.

Kliknite zapiši za zapis enega diska ali zapiši več kopij za zapis vašega projekta na več diskov.

Posamezne sledi lahko razdelite v več sledi z uporabo orodja Razdeli in dodate dve sekundni premor za skladbo z uporabo gumba Premor.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/split-track.page0000644000373100047300000000533612253720477024251 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Razdelitev skladbe zvočnega projekta v več skladb. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Razdelitev skladbe

Med sestavljanjem zvočnega projekta lahko eno skladbo razdelite v več skladb.

Začnite zvočni projekt in dodajte skladbe, ki jih želite uporabiti.

S klikom izberite skladbo, ki jo želite razdeliti, ter nato kliknite UrediRazdeli skladbo … ali desno kliknite na skladbo in v meniju izberite Razdeli skladbo …

Izberite način razdeljevanja skladb:

Razdeli skladbo ročno

Ta možnost vam omogoča ročno izbiro natančne dolžine za vsak nov odsek skladbe.

Razdelitev skladb na dele z določeno dolžino

Uporabite ta način za razdelitev skladbe v več odsekov enake dolžine.

 Razdelitev skladbe na določeno število delov

Ta način vam omogoča razdelitev skladbe v številne odseke, ki bodo vsi enake dolžine.

 Razdeli skladbo za vsako tišino

Izberite ta način, da bo Brasero samodejno zaznal tišino pri snemanju in razdelil skladbe na teh točkah.

Nadaljujte z razdeljevanjem skladb s klikom Razreži.

Če skladbo poskusite razdeliti na odsek, ki je krajši od šestih sekund, mu bo pripet nov posnetek, tako da bo posnetek dolg 6 sekund.

Kliknite V redu za potrditev razdelitve skladb in uveljavitev sprememb.

Medtem ko ste v pogovornem oknu razdeljevanja skladb, lahko skladbo razdelite in združite kolikokrat hočete. Ko s klikom na V redu potrdite razdelitev skladb, razdeljenih odsekov ne boste mogli več združiti. Za povrnitev sprememb odstranite vse odseke skladbe iz projekta in skladbo ponovno dodajte.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/prob-cd.page0000644000373100047300000000246512253720477023342 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Moji MP3-ji se ne predvajanju v CD ali DVD predvajalniku. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 CD se ne predvaja v CD predvajalniku

Če se vaš CD ne predvaja v vašemu prevajalniku CD ali glasbenem stolpu, je to verjetno zato, ker glasba ni bila pravilno zapisana na disk ali ker ste za zapis glasbe na CD uporabili podatkovni namesto zvočnega projekta.

Veliko novih CD in DVD predvajalnikov predvaja glasbene CD-je, ki so bili ustvarjeni s podatkovnim projektom, večina starejših predvajalnikov pa ne.

Stari CD predvajalniki morda ne bodo mogli predvajati CD-RW-jev .

Če uporabljate CD-RW, spraznite CD.

Prepis CD-ja kot zvočni projekt.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/project-disc-copy.page0000644000373100047300000000317012253720477025344 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ustvarjanje enake kopije diska. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Kopiranje diska

Na začetni strani kliknite na Kopiraj disk ali izberite ProjektNov ProjektKopiraj disk ....

Izberite disk s katerega bi radi kopirali v spustnem meniju pod Izbor diska za kopiranje. Če imate več kot en diskovni pogon, bodo izpisani vsi pogoni v katerih je disk.

Izberite ali želite narediti kopijo na drug disk ali ustvariti odtis za kasnejšo uporabo.

Kliknite na gumb Lastnosti za izbiro hitrosti zapisovanja in drugih možnosti po meri.button to select burning speed and other custom options.

Kliknite Kopiraj za začetek kopiranja diska ali Naredi več kopij, če nameravate narediti več kot eno kopijo diska.

Če disk kopirate in imate le en diskovni pogon, boste morali disk, ki ga kopirate, zamenjati z zapisljivim diskom potem ko bo bila vsebina začasno prekopirana na trdi disk.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/tools-blank.page0000644000373100047300000000247212253720477024237 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Izbris prepisljivega CD-ja ali DVD-ja s praznjenjem Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Praznjenje diska

Prepisljiv disk z obstoječimi podatki lahko pripravite na pisanje s praznjenjem.

Izberite OrodjaSprazni ....

Če imate v več kot enem pogonu prepisljiv disk, lahko pod Izbor diska izberete kateri disk želite prepisati.

Za hitrejše praznjenje CD-ja lahko izberete Hitro praznjenje-

Če imate težave pri pisanju na disk, ki ste ga hitro spraznili, hitro praznjenje onemogočite in poskusite znova.

Za nadaljevanje kliknite Prazno.

Disk bo morda ob končanju praznjenja izvržen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/project-video.page0000644000373100047300000000344312253720477024563 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 3 Zapis videa na DVD ali SVCD. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Ustvarjanje video projekta

Brasero lahko uporabite za ustvarjanje video diskov za predvajanje v predvajalniku DVD ali prenosniku.

Na začetni strani kliknite na Video projekt ali izberite ProjektNov projektNov video projekt.

Projektu lahko videoposnetke dodate s klikom na Dodaj v orodni vrstici in izbiro datotek. Datoteke lahko dodate tudi z vlečenjem in spuščanjem na področje projekta ali klikom na UrediDodaj datoteke.

Naslov diska lahko dodate v besedilnem polju pod področjem projekta.

V spustnemu seznamu izberite prazen disk.

Za nadaljevanje kliknite Zapiši ....

V spustnem seznamu izberite Hitrost zapisovanja in druge možnosti, ki jih morda želite.

Kliknite zapiši za zapis enega diska ali zapiši več kopij za zapis vašega projekta na več diskov.

 usr/share/help-langpack/sl/brasero/project-image-burn.page0000644000373100047300000000573112253720477025505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zapis obstoječega odtisa diska na CD ali DVD. Marta Bogdanowicz majus85@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons - deljenje pod enakimi pogoji 3.0

 Zapis odtisa

Brasero vam omogoča zapis odtisov na CD ali DVD. Podpira naslednje pripone za odtise optičnih diskov: .iso, .toc and .cue.

Odtisi diska so datoteke arhivov, ki vsebujejo vse podatke na CD-ju ali DVD-ju. Hkrati je lahko na CD-ju le en odtis diska, vendar lahko vsak arhiv vsebuje kolikor malo ali kolikor veliko podatkov želite, dokler se prilega na disk.

Za zapis odtisa diska na CD ali DVD sledite tem korakom:

Click Burn image on the start page or select ProjectNew ProjectBurn image… .

Izberite odtis diska za zapisovanje s klikom na Kliknite tukaj za zapis odtisa na disku.

Izberite disk, na katerega bi radi zapisovali v spustnem meniju Izbor diska za pisanje. Če imate več kot en diskovni pogon, bodo izpisani vsi pogoni v katerih je disk.

Po izbiri diska Brasero pokaže koliko praznega prostora bo ostalo na disku po zapisovanju.

Kliknite na gumb Lastnosti za izbiro hitrosti zapisovanja in drugih možnosti po meri.button to select burning speed and other custom options.

Kliknite Zapiši za začetek zapisovanja odtisa. Po tem opravilu lahko končate z zapisovanjem ali naredite še eno kopijo odtisa.

Če uporabljate prepisljiv disk, ki že vsebuje podatke, boste vprašani, če ga želite izprazniti ali vstaviti drug disk.

language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/0000755000000000000000000000000012321560613014420 5ustar language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/0000755000000000000000000000000012321560643016210 5ustar language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/devhelp.po0000644000000000000000000003150712321560613020202 0ustar # Slovenian translations for devhelp. # Copyright (C) 2005-2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the devhelp package. # # Matej Urbančič , 2007 - 2013. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: devhelp master\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: " "http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=devhelp&keywords=I18N+L10N&co" "mponent=general\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-17 12:43+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-06-08 14:06+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Matej Urbančič \n" "Language-Team: Slovenian GNOME Translation Team \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2014-04-10 11:32+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 16976)\n" "Language: sl_SI\n" "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #. i18n: Please don't translate "Devhelp" (it's marked as translatable #. * for transliteration only) #: ../data/devhelp.desktop.in.in.h:1 ../src/dh-app.c:162 ../src/dh-app.c:347 #: ../src/dh-window.c:655 msgid "Devhelp" msgstr "Devhelp" #: ../data/devhelp.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Developer's Help program" msgstr "Program za pomoč razvijalcem" #: ../data/devhelp.desktop.in.in.h:3 msgid "Documentation Browser" msgstr "Pregledovalnik dokumentacije" #: ../data/devhelp.desktop.in.in.h:4 msgid "documentation;information;manual;developer;api;" msgstr "dokumentacija;podrobnosti;podatki;priročnik;razvoj;api;" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:1 msgid "Main window maximized state" msgstr "Razpeto glavno okno" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:2 msgid "Whether the main window should start maximized." msgstr "Ali naj bo glavno okno ob zagonu razpeto." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:3 msgid "Width of the main window" msgstr "Širina glavnega okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:4 msgid "The width of the main window." msgstr "Širina glavnega okna." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:5 msgid "Height of main window" msgstr "Višina glavnega okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:6 msgid "The height of the main window." msgstr "Višina glavnega okna." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:7 msgid "X position of main window" msgstr "X položaj glavnega okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:8 msgid "The X position of the main window." msgstr "X položaj glavnega okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:9 msgid "Y position of main window" msgstr "Y položaj glavnega okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:10 msgid "The Y position of the main window." msgstr "Y položaj glavnega okna." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:11 msgid "Width of the index and search pane" msgstr "Širina indeksa in iskalnega pladnja." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:12 msgid "The width of the index and search pane." msgstr "Širina kazala in iskalnega pladnja." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:13 msgid "Selected tab: \"content\" or \"search\"" msgstr "Izbrani zavihek: \"vsebina\" ali \"iskanje\"" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:14 msgid "Which of the tabs is selected: \"content\" or \"search\"." msgstr "Kateri zavihek je izbran: \"vsebina\" ali \"iskanje\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:15 msgid "Books disabled" msgstr "Onemogočene knjige" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:16 msgid "List of books disabled by the user." msgstr "Seznam knjig, ki so privzeto onemogočene" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:17 msgid "Group by language" msgstr "Združi po jeziku" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:18 msgid "Whether books should be grouped by language in the UI" msgstr "Ali naj se knjige združujejo v skupine po jeziku" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:19 msgid "Width of the assistant window" msgstr "Širina okna pomočnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:20 msgid "The width of the assistant window." msgstr "Širina okna pomočnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:21 msgid "Height of assistant window" msgstr "Višina okna pomočnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:22 msgid "The height of the assistant window." msgstr "Višina okna pomočnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:23 msgid "X position of assistant window" msgstr "X položaj okna pomočnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:24 msgid "The X position of the assistant window." msgstr "X položaj okna pomočnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:25 msgid "Y position of assistant window" msgstr "Y položaj okna pomočnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:26 msgid "The Y position of the assistant window." msgstr "Y položaj okna pomočnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:27 msgid "Use system fonts" msgstr "Uporabi sistemske pisave" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:28 msgid "Use the system default fonts." msgstr "Uporabi privzete sistemske pisave." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:29 msgid "Font for text" msgstr "Pisava za besedilo" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:30 msgid "Font for text with variable width." msgstr "Pisava za besedilo s spremenljivo širino." #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:31 msgid "Font for fixed width text" msgstr "Pisava z določeno širino" #: ../data/org.gnome.devhelp.gschema.xml.h:32 msgid "Font for text with fixed width, such as code examples." msgstr "Pisava za besedilo z določeno širino, kot so vzorci kode." #: ../misc/gedit-plugin/devhelp.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Devhelp support" msgstr "Devhelp podpora" #: ../misc/gedit-plugin/devhelp.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Makes F2 bring up Devhelp for the word at the cursor" msgstr "Tipka F2 prikaže pomoč Devhelp za besedo ob kazalki" #: ../misc/gedit-plugin/devhelp.py:69 msgid "Show API Documentation" msgstr "Pokaži API dokumentacijo" #: ../misc/gedit-plugin/devhelp.py:71 msgid "Show API Documentation for the word at the cursor" msgstr "Pokaži API dokumentacijo za besedo ob kazalki" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:1 msgid "New window" msgstr "Novo okno" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:2 msgid "Preferences" msgstr "Možnosti" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:3 msgid "About Devhelp" msgstr "O programu Devhelp" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:4 msgid "Quit" msgstr "Končaj" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:5 msgid "New _Tab" msgstr "Nov _zavihek" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:6 msgid "_Print" msgstr "_Natisni" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:7 msgid "_Find" msgstr "_Najdi" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:8 msgid "_Larger text" msgstr "_Večje besedilo" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:9 msgid "S_maller text" msgstr "_Manjše besedilo" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:10 msgid "_Normal size" msgstr "_Običajna velikost" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:11 msgid "_Group by language" msgstr "_Združi po jeziku" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:12 msgid "Enabled" msgstr "Omogočeno" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:13 msgid "Title" msgstr "Naslov" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:14 msgid "Book Shelf" msgstr "Knjižna polica" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:15 msgid "_Use system fonts" msgstr "_Uporabi sistemske pisave" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:16 msgid "_Variable width: " msgstr "_Spremenljiva širina: " #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:17 msgid "_Fixed width:" msgstr "_Stalna širina:" #: ../src/devhelp.ui.h:18 msgid "Fonts" msgstr "Pisave" #: ../src/dh-app.c:157 msgid "translator_credits" msgstr "" "Matej Urbančič, \n" "\n" "Launchpad Contributions:\n" " Matej Urbančič https://launchpad.net/~mateju\n" " Matic Zgur https://launchpad.net/~mr-zgur" #: ../src/dh-app.c:164 msgid "A developers' help browser for GNOME" msgstr "Pregledovalnik pomoči razvijalcem za GNOME" #: ../src/dh-app.c:172 msgid "DevHelp Website" msgstr "Spletišče Devhelp" #. i18n: Please don't translate "Devhelp". #: ../src/dh-assistant.c:121 msgid "Devhelp — Assistant" msgstr "Devhelp - pomočnik" #: ../src/dh-assistant-view.c:403 msgid "Book:" msgstr "Knjiga:" #: ../src/dh-book.c:255 #, c-format msgid "Language: %s" msgstr "Jezik: %s" #: ../src/dh-book.c:256 msgid "Language: Undefined" msgstr "Jezik: nedoločen" #. i18n: a documentation book #: ../src/dh-link.c:267 msgid "Book" msgstr "Knjiga" #. i18n: a "page" in a documentation book #: ../src/dh-link.c:270 msgid "Page" msgstr "Stran" #. i18n: a search hit in the documentation, could be a #. * function, macro, struct, etc #: ../src/dh-link.c:274 msgid "Keyword" msgstr "Ključna beseda" #. i18n: in the programming language context, if you don't #. * have an ESTABLISHED term for it, leave it #. * untranslated. #: ../src/dh-link.c:279 msgid "Function" msgstr "Funkcija" #. i18n: in the programming language context, if you don't #. * have an ESTABLISHED term for it, leave it #. * untranslated. #: ../src/dh-link.c:284 msgid "Struct" msgstr "Struct" #. i18n: in the programming language context, if you don't #. * have an ESTABLISHED term for it, leave it #. * untranslated. #: ../src/dh-link.c:289 msgid "Macro" msgstr "Makro" #. i18n: in the programming language context, if you don't #. * have an ESTABLISHED term for it, leave it #. * untranslated. #: ../src/dh-link.c:294 msgid "Enum" msgstr "Enum" #. i18n: in the programming language context, if you don't #. * have an ESTABLISHED term for it, leave it #. * untranslated. #: ../src/dh-link.c:299 msgid "Type" msgstr "Vrsta" #: ../src/dh-main.c:43 msgid "Opens a new Devhelp window" msgstr "Odpre novo okno Devhelp" #: ../src/dh-main.c:48 msgid "Search for a keyword" msgstr "Iskanje ključne besede" #: ../src/dh-main.c:49 ../src/dh-main.c:54 msgid "KEYWORD" msgstr "Ključna beseda" #: ../src/dh-main.c:53 msgid "Search and display any hit in the assistant window" msgstr "Poišči in prikaži vse zadetke v oknu pomočnika" #: ../src/dh-main.c:58 msgid "Display the version and exit" msgstr "Pokaži pomoč in končaj program" #: ../src/dh-main.c:63 msgid "Quit any running Devhelp" msgstr "Končaj zagnani Devhelp" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:97 ../src/dh-parser.c:199 ../src/dh-parser.c:263 #: ../src/dh-parser.c:273 #, c-format msgid "Expected '%s', got '%s' at line %d, column %d" msgstr "Pričakovano '%s', vpisano '%s' v vrstici %d, stolpec %d" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:114 #, c-format msgid "Invalid namespace '%s' at line %d, column %d" msgstr "Neveljaven imenski prostor '%s' v vrstici %d, stolpec %d" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:143 #, c-format msgid "" "\"title\", \"name\" and \"link\" elements are required at line %d, column %d" msgstr "" "\"title\" (naslov), \"name\" (ime) in \"link\" (povezava) predmeta so " "zahtevani v vrstici %d in stolpcu %d" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:218 #, c-format msgid "" "\"name\" and \"link\" elements are required inside on line %d, column " "%d" msgstr "" "\"ime\" in \"povezava\" predmeta sta zahtevana znotraj v vrstici %d in " "stolpcu %d" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:298 #, c-format msgid "" "\"name\" and \"link\" elements are required inside '%s' on line %d, column %d" msgstr "" "\"ime\" in\"povezava\" predmeta sta zahtevana znotraj '%s' v vrstici %d in " "stolpcu %d" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:311 #, c-format msgid "\"type\" element is required inside on line %d, column %d" msgstr "" "\"vrstni\" element je zahtevan znotraj v vrstici %d in " "stolpcu %d" #: ../src/dh-parser.c:514 #, c-format msgid "Cannot uncompress book '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče razširiti knjige '%s': %s" #. Setup the Current/All Files selector #: ../src/dh-sidebar.c:478 msgid "Current" msgstr "Trenutna" #: ../src/dh-sidebar.c:481 msgid "All Books" msgstr "Vse knjige" #: ../src/dh-window.c:86 msgid "50%" msgstr "50%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:87 msgid "75%" msgstr "75%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:88 msgid "100%" msgstr "100%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:89 msgid "125%" msgstr "125%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:90 msgid "150%" msgstr "150%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:91 msgid "175%" msgstr "175%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:92 msgid "200%" msgstr "200%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:93 msgid "300%" msgstr "300%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:94 msgid "400%" msgstr "400%" #: ../src/dh-window.c:688 msgid "Back" msgstr "Nazaj" #: ../src/dh-window.c:695 msgid "Forward" msgstr "Naprej" #: ../src/dh-window.c:967 msgid "Error opening the requested link." msgstr "Napaka med odpiranjem zahtevane povezave." #: ../src/dh-window.c:1317 ../src/dh-window.c:1503 msgid "Empty Page" msgstr "Prazna stran" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:320 msgid "Find:" msgstr "Najdi:" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:329 msgid "Find Previous" msgstr "Najdi predhodne" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:333 ../src/eggfindbar.c:336 msgid "Find previous occurrence of the search string" msgstr "Najdi predhodno ponovitev iskanega niza" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:342 msgid "Find Next" msgstr "Najdi naslednje" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:346 ../src/eggfindbar.c:349 msgid "Find next occurrence of the search string" msgstr "Najdi naslednjo ponovitev iskanega niza" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:358 msgid "C_ase Sensitive" msgstr "_Razlikovanje velikosti črk" #: ../src/eggfindbar.c:362 ../src/eggfindbar.c:365 msgid "Toggle case sensitive search" msgstr "Preklopi iskanje z razlikovanjem velikih in malih črk" language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/eog.po0000644000000000000000000013536712321560614017337 0ustar # Slovenian translations for eog. # Copyright (C) 2005-2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the eog package. # # Andraž Tori , 2002. # Matej Urbančič , 2006 - 2011. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: eog master\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: " "http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=eog&keywords=I18N+L10N&compon" "ent=general\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-11 11:52+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-12-29 16:02+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Damir Jerovšek \n" "Language-Team: Slovenian GNOME Translation Team \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%100==1 ? 1 : n%100==2 ? 2 : n%100==3 || " "n%100==4 ? 3 : 0);\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2014-04-10 11:39+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 16976)\n" "X-Poedit-Country: SLOVENIA\n" "Language: \n" "X-Poedit-Language: Slovenian\n" "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #. Translaters: This string is for a toggle to display a toolbar. #. * The name of the toolbar is automatically computed from the widgets #. * on the toolbar, and is placed at the %s. Note the _ before the %s #. * which is used to add mnemonics. We know that this is likely to #. * produce duplicates, but don't worry about it. If your language #. * normally has a mnemonic at the start, please use the _. If not, #. * please remove. #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:992 #, c-format msgid "Show “_%s”" msgstr "Pokaži \"_%s\"" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:1485 msgid "_Move on Toolbar" msgstr "_Premakni na orodni vrstici" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:1486 msgid "Move the selected item on the toolbar" msgstr "Premakne izbrani predmet na orodni vrstici" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:1487 msgid "_Remove from Toolbar" msgstr "_Odstrani iz orodne vrstice" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:1488 msgid "Remove the selected item from the toolbar" msgstr "Odstrani izbrani predmet iz orodne vrstice" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:1489 msgid "_Delete Toolbar" msgstr "_Izbriši orodno vrstico" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-editable-toolbar.c:1490 msgid "Remove the selected toolbar" msgstr "Odstrani izbrano orodno vrstico" #: ../cut-n-paste/toolbar-editor/egg-toolbar-editor.c:489 msgid "Separator" msgstr "Ločilnik" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:1 ../src/eog-window.c:4038 msgid "_View" msgstr "Po_gled" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:2 ../src/eog-window.c:4064 msgid "_Toolbar" msgstr "_Orodna vrstica" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:3 ../src/eog-window.c:4067 msgid "_Statusbar" msgstr "Vrstica _stanja" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:4 ../src/eog-window.c:4070 msgid "_Image Gallery" msgstr "_Galerija slik" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:5 ../src/eog-window.c:4073 msgid "Side _Pane" msgstr "Stranski _pladenj" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:6 ../src/eog-window.c:4052 msgid "Prefere_nces" msgstr "_Možnosti" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:7 ../src/eog-window.c:2565 #: ../src/eog-window.c:4041 msgid "_Help" msgstr "Pomo_č" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:8 msgid "_About Image Viewer" msgstr "_O programu" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:9 msgid "_Quit" msgstr "_Končaj" #: ../data/eog.desktop.in.in.h:1 ../src/eog-application.c:269 #: ../src/eog-window.c:6163 msgid "Image Viewer" msgstr "Pregledovalnik slik" #: ../data/eog.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Browse and rotate images" msgstr "Prebrskajte in zavrtite slike" #. Extra keywords that can be used to search for eog in GNOME Shell and Unity #: ../data/eog.desktop.in.in.h:4 msgid "Picture;Slideshow;Graphics;" msgstr "Slike;Predstavitev;Grafika;Fotografije;" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:1 ../src/eog-window.c:5039 msgid "Image Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti slike" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "_Previous" msgstr "_Predhodna" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "_Next" msgstr "_Naslednja" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:4 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:495 msgid "Name:" msgstr "Ime:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:5 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:497 msgid "Width:" msgstr "Širina:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:6 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:499 msgid "Height:" msgstr "Višina:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:7 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:501 msgid "Type:" msgstr "Vrsta:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:8 msgid "Bytes:" msgstr "Bajti:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:9 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:505 msgid "Folder:" msgstr "Mapa:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:10 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:493 msgid "General" msgstr "Splošno" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:11 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:530 msgid "Aperture Value:" msgstr "Vrednost zaslonke:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:12 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:533 msgid "Exposure Time:" msgstr "Čas osvetlitve:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:13 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:536 msgid "Focal Length:" msgstr "Goriščna razdalja:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:14 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:538 msgid "Flash:" msgstr "Bliskavica:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:15 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:542 msgid "ISO Speed Rating:" msgstr "Raven hitrosti ISO:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:16 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:545 msgid "Metering Mode:" msgstr "Metrični način:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:17 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:548 msgid "Camera Model:" msgstr "Model fotoaparata:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:18 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:550 msgid "Date/Time:" msgstr "Datum/čas:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:19 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:555 msgid "Description:" msgstr "Opis:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:20 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:558 msgid "Location:" msgstr "Mesto:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:21 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:561 msgid "Keywords:" msgstr "Ključne besede:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:22 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:563 msgid "Author:" msgstr "Avtor:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:23 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:566 msgid "Copyright:" msgstr "Avtorske pravice:" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:24 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:569 msgid "Details" msgstr "Podrobnosti" #: ../data/eog-image-properties-dialog.ui.h:25 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:526 msgid "Metadata" msgstr "Metapodatki" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "Save As" msgstr "Shrani kot" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:5 #, no-c-format msgid "%f: original filename" msgstr "%f: izvorno ime datoteke" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:7 #, no-c-format msgid "%n: counter" msgstr "%n: števec" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:6 msgid "Filename format:" msgstr "Zapis datoteke:" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:10 msgid "Choose a folder" msgstr "Izberite mapo" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:8 msgid "Destination folder:" msgstr "Ciljna mapa:" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:11 msgid "File Path Specifications" msgstr "Določila poti datoteke" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:10 msgid "Start counter at:" msgstr "Začni števec z:" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:11 msgid "Replace spaces with underscores" msgstr "Zamenjaj presledke s podčrtaji" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:14 msgid "Options" msgstr "Možnosti" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:15 msgid "Rename from:" msgstr "Preimenuj iz:" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:16 msgid "To:" msgstr "Na:" #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:17 msgid "File Name Preview" msgstr "Predogled imena datoteke" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:1 #| msgid "Prefere_nces" msgid "Preferences" msgstr "Možnosti" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "Image Enhancements" msgstr "Prilagajanje slike" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "Smooth images when zoomed _out" msgstr "Glajenje slik med _oddaljevanjem" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:4 msgid "Smooth images when zoomed _in" msgstr "Glajenje slik med _približevanjem" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:5 msgid "_Automatic orientation" msgstr "_Samodejno usmerjevanje" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:6 msgid "Background" msgstr "Ozadje" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:7 msgid "As custom color:" msgstr "Kot barva po meri:" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:8 #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Background Color" msgstr "Barva ozadja" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:9 msgid "Transparent Parts" msgstr "Prosojni deli" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:10 msgid "As check _pattern" msgstr "Kot _vzorec šahovnice" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:11 msgid "As custom c_olor:" msgstr "Kot barva _po meri:" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:12 msgid "Color for Transparent Areas" msgstr "Barva za prosojne površine" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:13 msgid "As _background" msgstr "kot _ozadje" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:14 msgid "Image View" msgstr "Pogled slike" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:15 msgid "Image Zoom" msgstr "Približanje slike" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:16 msgid "E_xpand images to fit screen" msgstr "_Razširi slike na velikost zaslona" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:17 msgid "Sequence" msgstr "Zaporedje" #. I18N: This sentence will be displayed above a horizonzal scale to select a number of seconds in eog's preferences dialog. #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:19 msgid "_Time between images:" msgstr "_Čas med slikami:" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:20 msgid "_Loop sequence" msgstr "_Slike prikazuj krožno" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:21 msgid "Slideshow" msgstr "Predstavitev" #: ../data/eog-preferences-dialog.ui.h:22 msgid "Plugins" msgstr "Vstavki" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Automatic orientation" msgstr "Samodejno usmerjevanje slike" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "Whether the image should be rotated automatically based on EXIF orientation." msgstr "" "Ali naj bo slika zavrtena samodejno na osnovi EXIF podatkov usmerjenosti." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "The color that is used to fill the area behind the image. If the use-" "background-color key is not set, the color is determined by the active GTK+ " "theme instead." msgstr "" "Barva, ki je uporabljena kot barva ozadja slike. V kolikor možnost uporabi-" "barvo-ozadja ni določena, bo uporabljana barva polnila trenutne GTK+ teme." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Interpolate Image" msgstr "Preslikaj sliko" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Whether the image should be interpolated on zoom-out. This leads to better " "quality but is somewhat slower than non-interpolated images." msgstr "" "Ali naj bo slika preslikana ob oddaljevanju ali ne. Preslikava ustvari " "boljšo kakovost slike, vendar je opravilo pogosto nekoliko počasnejše." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Extrapolate Image" msgstr "Preslikaj sliko" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "" "Whether the image should be extrapolated on zoom-in. This leads to blurry " "quality and is somewhat slower than non-extrapolated images." msgstr "" "Ali naj bo slika preslikana ob približanju ali ne. Preslikava ustvari " "zamegljeno sliko in je pogosto nekoliko počasnejše." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Transparency indicator" msgstr "Določilnik prosojnosti" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "" "Determines how transparency should be indicated. Valid values are " "CHECK_PATTERN, COLOR and NONE. If COLOR is chosen, then the trans-color key " "determines the color value used." msgstr "" "Vrednost določa kako naj bo prikazana prosojnost. Veljavne vrednosti so " "CHECK_PATTEREN, COLOR in NONE. Če je izbrana vrednost COLOR, potem " "uporabljeno barvo določa ključ trans_color." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Scroll wheel zoom" msgstr "Približanje z drsnikom" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Whether the scroll wheel should be used for zooming." msgstr "" "Ali naj se srednji gumb miške uporablja za približevanje slike ali ne." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Zoom multiplier" msgstr "Koraki približevanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:15 #, no-c-format msgid "" "The multiplier to be applied when using the mouse scroll wheel for zooming. " "This value defines the zooming step used for each scroll event. For example, " "0.05 results in a 5% zoom increment for each scroll event and 1.00 result in " "a 100% zoom increment." msgstr "" "Vrednost približanja pri uporabi srednjega kolesa miške. Vrednost določa " "korak približanja za vsak premik kolesa. Vrednost 0,05, na primer, poveča " "sliko za 5% ob vsakem premiku srednjega gumba miške, vrednost 1,00 pa poveča " "za 100%." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "Transparency color" msgstr "Barva prosojnosti" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "" "If the transparency key has the value COLOR, then this key determines the " "color which is used for indicating transparency." msgstr "" "V primeru, da je ključ prosojnosti vrednost COLOR, ta ključ določa katera " "barva naj se uporabi kot prosojna barva." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Use a custom background color" msgstr "Uporabi barvo ozadja po meri" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "" "If this is active, the color set by the background-color key will be used to " "fill the area behind the image. If it is not set, the current GTK+ theme " "will determine the fill color." msgstr "" "V primeru, da je dejavna barva določena s ključem barve-ozadja, bo ta " "uporabljena kot barva ozadja slike. V kolikor barva ni določena, bo " "uporabljana barva polnila trenutne teme GTK+." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Loop through the image sequence" msgstr "Kroži med izbranimi slikami" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "Whether the sequence of images should be shown in an endless loop." msgstr "Ali naj se izbrane slike prikazujejo neprestano." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:23 #, no-c-format msgid "Allow zoom greater than 100% initially" msgstr "Dovoli privzeto približanje večje kot 100%" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "" "If this is set to FALSE small images will not be stretched to fit into the " "screen initially." msgstr "" "V primeru, da vrednost ni izbrana, male slike med prikazovanjem ne bodo " "raztegnjene na velikost ekrana." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Delay in seconds until showing the next image" msgstr "Zamik v sekundah pred prikazom naslednje slike." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:26 msgid "" "A value greater than 0 determines the seconds an image stays on screen until " "the next one is shown automatically. Zero disables the automatic browsing." msgstr "" "Vrednost večja kot 0 določi čas v sekundah, za čas, ko slika ostane na " "ekranu, preden se pokaže naslednja. Vrednost 0 onemogoči samodejno " "prikazovanje." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:27 msgid "Show/Hide the window toolbar." msgstr "Pokaži / Skrij orodno vrstico." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:28 msgid "Show/Hide the window statusbar." msgstr "Pokaži / Skrij vrstico stanja." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:29 msgid "Show/Hide the image gallery pane." msgstr "Pokaži / Skrij okno galerije slik" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:30 msgid "" "Image gallery pane position. Set to 0 for bottom; 1 for left; 2 for top; 3 " "for right." msgstr "" "Položaj pladnja galerije slik. Vrednost 0 določa spodnji del; 1 določa " "levega; 2 na vrhu; 3 na desni." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:31 msgid "Whether the image gallery pane should be resizable." msgstr "Ali naj bo pladenj galerije slik razširljiv ali ne." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:32 msgid "Show/Hide the window side pane." msgstr "Pokaži / Skrij stranski pladenj." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:33 msgid "Show/Hide the image gallery pane scroll buttons." msgstr "Pokaži / Skrij drsne gumbe pladnja galerije slik." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:34 msgid "Close main window without asking to save changes." msgstr "Zapri glavno okno brez vprašanja o shranjevanju sprememb." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:35 msgid "Trash images without asking" msgstr "Slike vrzi v smeti brez vprašanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:36 msgid "" "If activated, Eye of GNOME won't ask for confirmation when moving images to " "the trash. It will still ask if any of the files cannot be moved to the " "trash and would be deleted instead." msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoči, da program ne bo več zahteval potrditve ob " "premikanju slik v smeti. Še vedno pa bo zahteval odgovor v primeru, da " "datoteke v smeti ni mogoče premakniti in bo zato slika trajno izbrisana." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:37 msgid "" "Whether the file chooser should show the user's pictures folder if no images " "are loaded." msgstr "" "Ali naj izbirnik datotek pokaže uporabnikovo mapo s slikami, kadar ni " "naloženih slik." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:38 msgid "" "If activated and no image is loaded in the active window, the file chooser " "will display the user's pictures folder using the XDG special user " "directories. If deactivated or the pictures folder has not been set up, it " "will show the current working directory." msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoča, da izbirnik datotek pokaže uporabnikovo mapo s " "slikami z uporabo XDG uporabniških map. Pri onemogočeni možnosti ali pa pri " "nedoločeni mapi s slikami, pa bo prikazana trenutna delovna mapa." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:39 msgid "" "Whether the metadata list in the properties dialog should have its own page." msgstr "Ali naj ima seznam metapodatkov v oknu lastnosti svojo stran." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:40 msgid "" "If activated, the detailed metadata list in the properties dialog will be " "moved to its own page in the dialog. This should make the dialog more usable " "on smaller screens, e.g. as used by netbooks. If disabled, the widget will " "be embedded on the \"Metadata\" page." msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoča, da je seznam metapodatkov premaknjen na svojo stran " "v pogovornem oknu. S tem se uporabnost pogovornega okna poveča pri delu na " "majhnih zaslonih, kot so dlančniki in tablični računalniki. Onemogočen " "gradnik bo vključen na strani \"Metapodatkov\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:41 msgid "External program to use for editing images" msgstr "Zunanji program za urejanje slik." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:42 msgid "" "The desktop file name (including the \".desktop\") of the application to use " "for editing images (when the \"Edit Image\" toolbar button is clicked). Set " "to the empty string to disable this feature." msgstr "" "Ime datoteke namizja (vključno z \".desktop\") programa za urejanje slik " "(kadar je kliknjen gumb \"Uredi sliko\" na orodni vrstici). Prazno polje " "onemogoči možnost." #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:43 msgid "Active plugins" msgstr "Dejavni vstavki" #: ../data/org.gnome.eog.gschema.xml.in.h:44 msgid "" "List of active plugins. It doesn't contain the \"Location\" of the active " "plugins. See the .eog-plugin file for obtaining the \"Location\" of a given " "plugin." msgstr "" "Seznam dejavnih vstavkov ne vsebuje podatkov \"mesta\" dejavnega vstavka. " "Oglejte si .eog-plugin datoteko za podatke o \"mestu\" vstavka." #: ../plugins/fullscreen/fullscreen.plugin.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Fullscreen with double-click" msgstr "Celozaslonski način z dvojnim klikom" #: ../plugins/fullscreen/fullscreen.plugin.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Activate fullscreen mode with double-click" msgstr "Omogoči celozaslonski način z dvojnim klikom miške" #: ../plugins/reload/eog-reload-plugin.c:74 #: ../plugins/reload/reload.plugin.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Reload Image" msgstr "Ponovno naloži sliko" #: ../plugins/reload/eog-reload-plugin.c:76 #: ../plugins/reload/reload.plugin.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Reload current image" msgstr "Ponovno naloži trenutno sliko" #: ../plugins/statusbar-date/statusbar-date.plugin.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Date in statusbar" msgstr "Datum v vrstici stanja" #: ../plugins/statusbar-date/statusbar-date.plugin.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Shows the image date in the window statusbar" msgstr "Prikaže datum slike v vrstici stanja" #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:166 msgid "Close _without Saving" msgstr "Zapri _brez shranjevanja" #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:212 msgid "Question" msgstr "Vprašanje" #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:391 msgid "If you don't save, your changes will be lost." msgstr "V primeru, da ne shranite, bodo spremembe izgubljene." #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:428 #, c-format msgid "Save changes to image \"%s\" before closing?" msgstr "Ali naj se shranijo spremembe slike \"%s\" pred zapiranjem?" #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:635 #, c-format msgid "There is %d image with unsaved changes. Save changes before closing?" msgid_plural "" "There are %d images with unsaved changes. Save changes before closing?" msgstr[0] "Odprtih je %d slik s spremembami. Ali naj se spremembe shranijo?" msgstr[1] "Odprta je %d slika s spremembami. Ali naj se spremembe shranijo?" msgstr[2] "Odprti sta %d sliki s spremembami. Ali naj se spremembe shranijo?" msgstr[3] "Odprte so %d slike s spremembami. Ali naj se spremembe shranijo?" #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:652 msgid "S_elect the images you want to save:" msgstr "_Izbor slike za shranjevanje:" #. Secondary label #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:671 msgid "If you don't save, all your changes will be lost." msgstr "V primeru, da ne shranite, bodo spremembe izgubljene." #: ../data/eog-multiple-save-as-dialog.ui.h:2 #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:172 #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:119 ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:456 #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:464 ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:472 #: ../src/eog-window.c:3367 ../src/eog-window.c:3370 ../src/eog-window.c:3621 msgid "_Cancel" msgstr "_Prekliči" #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:124 ../src/eog-window.c:847 msgid "_Reload" msgstr "_Ponovno naloži" #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:129 ../src/eog-window.c:4085 msgid "Save _As…" msgstr "Shrani _kot ..." #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:171 #, c-format msgid "Could not load image '%s'." msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti slike `%s'." #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:213 #, c-format msgid "Could not save image '%s'." msgstr "Slike '%s' ni mogoče shraniti." #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:256 #, c-format msgid "No images found in '%s'." msgstr "Ni mogoče najti slik v '%s'." #: ../src/eog-error-message-area.c:263 msgid "The given locations contain no images." msgstr "Izbrano mesto ne vsebuje slik." #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:65 msgid "Camera" msgstr "Fotoaparat" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:66 msgid "Image Data" msgstr "Podatki slike" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:67 msgid "Image Taking Conditions" msgstr "Pogoji fotografiranja" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:68 msgid "GPS Data" msgstr "Podatki GPS" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:69 msgid "Maker Note" msgstr "Beležnica" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:70 msgid "Other" msgstr "Ostalo" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:72 msgid "XMP Exif" msgstr "XMP Exif" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:73 msgid "XMP IPTC" msgstr "XMP IPTC" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:74 msgid "XMP Rights Management" msgstr "XMP upravljanje dovoljenj" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:75 msgid "XMP Other" msgstr "XMP Ostalo" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:251 msgid "Tag" msgstr "Oznaka" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:258 msgid "Value" msgstr "Vrednost" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:436 msgid "North" msgstr "Sever" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:439 msgid "East" msgstr "Vzhod" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:442 msgid "West" msgstr "Zahod" #: ../src/eog-metadata-details.c:445 msgid "South" msgstr "Jug" #. A strftime-formatted string, to display the date the image was taken. #: ../src/eog-exif-util.c:120 ../src/eog-exif-util.c:160 msgid "%a, %d %B %Y %X" msgstr "%a, %d. %B %Y %X" #. A strftime-formatted string, to display the date the image was taken, for the case we don't have the time. #: ../src/eog-exif-util.c:154 msgid "%a, %d %B %Y" msgstr "%a, %d. %B %Y" #. TRANSLATORS: This is the actual focal length used when #. the image was taken. #: ../src/eog-exif-util.c:251 #, c-format msgid "%.1f (lens)" msgstr "%.1f (leča)" #. Print as float to get a similar look as above. #. TRANSLATORS: This is the equivalent focal length assuming #. a 35mm film camera. #: ../src/eog-exif-util.c:262 #, c-format msgid "%.1f (35mm film)" msgstr "%.1f (35mm film)" #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:119 msgid "File format is unknown or unsupported" msgstr "Zapis datoteke ni znan ali pa ni podprt." #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:124 #| msgid "" #| "Eye of GNOME could not determine a supported writable file format based " #| "on the filename." msgid "" "Image Viewer could not determine a supported writable file format based on " "the filename." msgstr "" "Pregledovalnik slik ne more zaznati podprte vrste datotek za pisanje na " "osnovi imena datoteke." #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:125 msgid "Please try a different file extension like .png or .jpg." msgstr "Poskusite z drugo pripono datotek, kot na primer .png ali .jpg." #. Filter name: First description then file extension, eg. "The PNG-Format (*.png)". #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:160 #, c-format msgid "%s (*.%s)" msgstr "%s (*.%s)" #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:212 msgid "All files" msgstr "Vse datoteke" #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:217 msgid "Supported image files" msgstr "Vse slikovne datoteke" #. Pixel size of image: width x height in pixel #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:289 ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:232 #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:236 ../src/eog-properties-dialog.c:134 #: ../src/eog-properties-dialog.c:136 ../src/eog-thumb-view.c:515 msgid "pixel" msgid_plural "pixels" msgstr[0] "točk" msgstr[1] "točka" msgstr[2] "točki" msgstr[3] "točke" #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:459 msgid "Open Image" msgstr "Odpri sliko" #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:467 msgid "Save Image" msgstr "Shrani sliko" #: ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:475 msgid "Open Folder" msgstr "Odpri mapo" #: ../src/eog-image.c:613 #, c-format msgid "Transformation on unloaded image." msgstr "Pretvorba na še ne naloženi sliki." #: ../src/eog-image.c:641 #, c-format msgid "Transformation failed." msgstr "Pretvorba ni uspela." #: ../src/eog-image.c:1116 #, c-format msgid "EXIF not supported for this file format." msgstr "EXIF ni podprta oblika zapisa slike." #: ../src/eog-image.c:1265 #, c-format msgid "Image loading failed." msgstr "Nalaganje slike ni uspelo." #: ../src/eog-image.c:1846 ../src/eog-image.c:1966 #, c-format msgid "No image loaded." msgstr "Ni nobene naložene slike." #: ../src/eog-image.c:1854 ../src/eog-image.c:1975 #, c-format msgid "You do not have the permissions necessary to save the file." msgstr "Ni ustreznih dovoljenj za shranjevanje datoteke." #: ../src/eog-image.c:1864 ../src/eog-image.c:1986 #, c-format msgid "Temporary file creation failed." msgstr "Napaka med ustvarjanjem trenutne datoteke." #: ../src/eog-image-jpeg.c:374 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't create temporary file for saving: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti začasne datoteke za shranjevanje: %s" #: ../src/eog-image-jpeg.c:393 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for loading JPEG file" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodeliti pomnilnika za nalaganje datoteke JPEG" #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:245 ../src/eog-properties-dialog.c:151 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "Neznano" #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:503 msgid "File size:" msgstr "Velikost datoteke:" #: ../src/eog-metadata-sidebar.c:519 ../src/eog-properties-dialog.c:666 #: ../src/eog-window.c:4089 msgid "Show the folder which contains this file in the file manager" msgstr "Pokaži mapo, ki vsebuje datoteko v upravljalniku datotek" #: ../src/eog-preferences-dialog.c:109 #, c-format msgid "%lu second" msgid_plural "%lu seconds" msgstr[0] "%lu sekund" msgstr[1] "%lu sekunda" msgstr[2] "%lu sekundi" msgstr[3] "%lu sekunde" #: ../src/eog-print.c:371 msgid "Image Settings" msgstr "Nastavitve slik" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:902 msgid "Image" msgstr "Slika" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:903 msgid "The image whose printing properties will be set up" msgstr "Slika kateri bodo nastavljene lastnosti tiskanja" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:909 msgid "Page Setup" msgstr "Nastavitev strani" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:910 msgid "The information for the page where the image will be printed" msgstr "Podrobnosti strani, kjer bo natisnjena slika" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:936 msgid "Position" msgstr "Položaj" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:940 msgid "_Left:" msgstr "_Levo:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:942 msgid "_Right:" msgstr "_Desno:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:943 msgid "_Top:" msgstr "_Zgoraj:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:944 msgid "_Bottom:" msgstr "_Spodaj:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:947 msgid "C_enter:" msgstr "Sr_edina:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:952 msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:954 msgid "Horizontal" msgstr "Vodoravno" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:956 msgid "Vertical" msgstr "Navpično" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:958 msgid "Both" msgstr "Oba" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:974 msgid "Size" msgstr "Velikost" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:977 msgid "_Width:" msgstr "_Širina:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:979 msgid "_Height:" msgstr "_Višina:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:982 msgid "_Scaling:" msgstr "_Merilo:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:993 msgid "_Unit:" msgstr "_Enota:" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:998 msgid "Millimeters" msgstr "Milimetri" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:1000 msgid "Inches" msgstr "Cole" #: ../src/eog-print-image-setup.c:1029 msgid "Preview" msgstr "Predogled" #: ../src/eog-save-as-dialog-helper.c:162 msgid "as is" msgstr "kot je" #. Translators: This string is displayed in the statusbar. #. * The first token is the image number, the second is total image #. * count. #. * #. * Translate to "%Id" if you want to use localized digits, or #. * translate to "%d" otherwise. #. * #. * Note that translating this doesn't guarantee that you get localized #. * digits. That needs support from your system and locale definition #. * too. #: ../src/eog-statusbar.c:126 #, c-format msgid "%d / %d" msgstr "%d / %d" #: ../src/eog-thumb-view.c:543 msgid "Taken on" msgstr "Prevzeto na" #: ../src/eog-uri-converter.c:980 #, c-format msgid "At least two file names are equal." msgstr "Vsaj dve imeni datotek sta enaki." #: ../src/eog-util.c:68 #| msgid "Could not display help for Eye of GNOME" msgid "Could not display help for Image Viewer" msgstr "Pomoči za pregledovalnik slik ni mogoče prikazati" #: ../src/eog-util.c:116 msgid " (invalid Unicode)" msgstr " (neveljaven Unicode)" #. Translators: This is the string displayed in the statusbar #. * The tokens are from left to right: #. * - image width #. * - image height #. * - image size in bytes #. * - zoom in percent #: ../src/eog-window.c:541 #, c-format msgid "%i × %i pixel %s %i%%" msgid_plural "%i × %i pixels %s %i%%" msgstr[0] "%i × %i točk %s %i%%" msgstr[1] "%i × %i točka %s %i%%" msgstr[2] "%i × %i točki %s %i%%" msgstr[3] "%i × %i točke %s %i%%" #: ../src/eog-window.c:849 ../src/eog-window.c:2784 msgctxt "MessageArea" msgid "Hi_de" msgstr "_Skrij" #. The newline character is currently necessary due to a problem #. * with the automatic line break. #: ../src/eog-window.c:859 #, c-format msgid "" "The image \"%s\" has been modified by an external application.\n" "Would you like to reload it?" msgstr "" "Slika \"%s\" je spremenjena za zunanjim programom.\n" "Ali želite sliko ponovno naložiti?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:1023 #, c-format msgid "Use \"%s\" to open the selected image" msgstr "Uporabi \"%s\" za odpiranje izbrane slike" #. Translators: This string is displayed in the statusbar #. * while saving images. The tokens are from left to right: #. * - the original filename #. * - the current image's position in the queue #. * - the total number of images queued for saving #: ../src/eog-window.c:1179 #, c-format msgid "Saving image \"%s\" (%u/%u)" msgstr "Shranjevanje slike \"%s\" (%u/%u)" #: ../src/eog-window.c:1574 #, c-format msgid "Opening image \"%s\"" msgstr "Odpiranje slike \"%s\"" #. L10N: This the reason why the screensaver is inhibited. #: ../src/eog-window.c:2030 msgid "Viewing a slideshow" msgstr "Prikaz diapredstavitve" #: ../src/eog-window.c:2259 #, c-format msgid "" "Error printing file:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Napaka med tiskanjem datoteke:\n" "%s" #: ../src/eog-window.c:2558 msgid "Toolbar Editor" msgstr "Urejevalnik orodnih vrstic" #: ../src/eog-window.c:2561 msgid "_Reset to Default" msgstr "_Povrni na privzeto" #: ../src/eog-window.c:2731 ../src/eog-window.c:2746 msgid "Error launching System Settings: " msgstr "Napaka med zaganjanjem sistemskih nastavitev: " #. I18N: When setting mnemonics for these strings, watch out to not #. clash with mnemonics from eog's menubar #: ../src/eog-window.c:2782 msgid "_Open Background Preferences" msgstr "_Odpri možnosti ozadja" #. The newline character is currently necessary due to a problem #. * with the automatic line break. #: ../src/eog-window.c:2798 #, c-format msgid "" "The image \"%s\" has been set as Desktop Background.\n" "Would you like to modify its appearance?" msgstr "" "Slika \"%s\" je določena kot ozadje namizja.\n" "Ali želite spremeniti njen videz?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3265 msgid "Saving image locally…" msgstr "Krajevno shranjevanje slike ..." #: ../src/eog-window.c:3343 #, c-format msgid "" "Are you sure you want to remove\n" "\"%s\" permanently?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite trajno izbrisati \"%s\" datotek?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3346 #, c-format msgid "" "Are you sure you want to remove\n" "the selected image permanently?" msgid_plural "" "Are you sure you want to remove\n" "the %d selected images permanently?" msgstr[0] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite trajno\n" "izbrisati %d izbranih slik?" msgstr[1] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite trajno\n" "izbrisati %d izbrano sliko?" msgstr[2] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite trajno\n" "izbrisati %d izbrani sliki?" msgstr[3] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite trajno\n" "izbrisati %d izbrane slike?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3368 ../src/eog-window.c:3632 msgid "_Delete" msgstr "_Izbriši" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3371 ../src/eog-window.c:3634 msgid "_Yes" msgstr "_Da" #. add 'dont ask again' button #: ../src/eog-window.c:3375 ../src/eog-window.c:3626 msgid "Do _not ask again during this session" msgstr "_To sejo ne vprašaj več" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3419 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't retrieve image file" msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti datoteke slike" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3435 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't retrieve image file information" msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti podrobnosti slike" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3451 ../src/eog-window.c:3693 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't delete file" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati datoteke" #. set dialog error message #: ../src/eog-window.c:3501 ../src/eog-window.c:3789 #, c-format msgid "Error on deleting image %s" msgstr "Napaka med brisanjem datoteke %s." #: ../src/eog-window.c:3594 #, c-format msgid "" "Are you sure you want to move\n" "\"%s\" to the trash?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite premakniti\n" "\"%s\" v smeti?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3597 #, c-format msgid "" "A trash for \"%s\" couldn't be found. Do you want to remove this image " "permanently?" msgstr "Smeti za \"%s\" ni mogoče najti. Ali želite slike trajno izbrisati?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3602 #, c-format msgid "" "Are you sure you want to move\n" "the selected image to the trash?" msgid_plural "" "Are you sure you want to move\n" "the %d selected images to the trash?" msgstr[0] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite premakniti\n" "%d izbranih slik v smeti?" msgstr[1] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite premakniti\n" "%d izbrano sliko v smeti?" msgstr[2] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite premakniti\n" "%d izbrani sliki v smeti?" msgstr[3] "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite premakniti\n" "%d izbrane slike v smeti?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3607 msgid "" "Some of the selected images can't be moved to the trash and will be removed " "permanently. Are you sure you want to proceed?" msgstr "" "Nekaterih izbranih slik ni mogoče premakniti v smeti in bodo trajno " "izbrisane. Ali ste prepričani, da želite nadaljevati?" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3624 ../src/eog-window.c:4115 ../src/eog-window.c:4142 msgid "Move to _Trash" msgstr "Premakni v _smeti" #: ../src/eog-window.c:3671 ../src/eog-window.c:3685 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't access trash." msgstr "Ni mogoč dostop do smeti." #: ../src/eog-window.c:4036 msgid "_Image" msgstr "_Slika" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4037 msgid "_Edit" msgstr "_Uredi" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4039 msgid "_Go" msgstr "P_ojdi" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4040 msgid "_Tools" msgstr "_Orodja" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4043 msgid "_Open…" msgstr "_Odpri…" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4044 msgid "Open a file" msgstr "Odpri datoteko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:2563 ../src/eog-window.c:4046 msgid "_Close" msgstr "_Zapri" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4047 msgid "Close window" msgstr "Zapri okno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4049 msgid "T_oolbar" msgstr "_Orodna vrstica" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4050 msgid "Edit the application toolbar" msgstr "Urejanje orodne vrstice programa" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4053 #| msgid "Preferences for Eye of GNOME" msgid "Preferences for Image Viewer" msgstr "Možnosti za pregledovalnik slik" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4055 msgid "_Contents" msgstr "_Vsebina" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4056 msgid "Help on this application" msgstr "Pomoč za delo s programom" #: ../data/eog-app-menu.xml.h:8 ../src/eog-window.c:4058 msgid "_About" msgstr "_O programu" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4059 msgid "About this application" msgstr "O programu" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4065 msgid "Changes the visibility of the toolbar in the current window" msgstr "Spremeni prikazovanje orodne vrstice trenutnega okna." #: ../src/eog-window.c:4068 msgid "Changes the visibility of the statusbar in the current window" msgstr "Spremeni prikaz vrstice stanja trenutnega okna." #: ../src/eog-window.c:4071 msgid "" "Changes the visibility of the image gallery pane in the current window" msgstr "Spremeni prikazovanje pladnja slik galerije v trenutnem oknu." #: ../src/eog-window.c:4074 msgid "Changes the visibility of the side pane in the current window" msgstr "Spremeni prikazovanje stranskega pladnja v trenutnem oknu." #: ../src/eog-close-confirmation-dialog.c:178 ../src/eog-file-chooser.c:465 #: ../src/eog-window.c:4079 msgid "_Save" msgstr "_Shrani" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4080 msgid "Save changes in currently selected images" msgstr "Shrani spremembe trenutno izbranih slik" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4082 msgid "Open _with" msgstr "Odpri _s programom" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4083 msgid "Open the selected image with a different application" msgstr "Odpri izbrano sliko z drugim programom" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4086 msgid "Save the selected images with a different name" msgstr "Shrani izbrano sliko z drugim imenom" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4088 msgid "Show Containing _Folder" msgstr "Pokaži vsebujočo _mapo" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4091 msgid "_Print…" msgstr "_Natisni ..." #: ../src/eog-window.c:4092 msgid "Print the selected image" msgstr "Natisni izbrano sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4094 msgid "Prope_rties" msgstr "_Lastnosti" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4095 msgid "Show the properties and metadata of the selected image" msgstr "Pokaži lastnosti in metapodatke izbrane slike" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4097 msgid "_Undo" msgstr "_Razveljavi" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4098 msgid "Undo the last change in the image" msgstr "Razveljavi zadnje spremembe v sliki" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4100 msgid "Flip _Horizontal" msgstr "Zrcali _vodoravno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4101 msgid "Mirror the image horizontally" msgstr "Zrcali sliko vodoravno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4103 msgid "Flip _Vertical" msgstr "Zrcali _navpično" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4104 msgid "Mirror the image vertically" msgstr "Zrcali sliko navpično" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4106 msgid "_Rotate Clockwise" msgstr "Zavrti v _desno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4107 msgid "Rotate the image 90 degrees to the right" msgstr "Zavrti sliko za 90 stopinj v desno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4109 msgid "Rotate Counterc_lockwise" msgstr "Zavrti v _levo" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4110 msgid "Rotate the image 90 degrees to the left" msgstr "Zavrti sliko za 90 stopinj v levo" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4112 msgid "Set as Wa_llpaper" msgstr "Nastavi za _ozadje namizja" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4113 msgid "Set the selected image as the wallpaper" msgstr "Nastavi izbrano sliko kot ozadje namizja." #: ../src/eog-window.c:4116 msgid "Move the selected image to the trash folder" msgstr "Premakni izbrano sliko v mapo smeti" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4118 msgid "_Delete Image" msgstr "_Izbriši sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4119 msgid "Delete the selected image" msgstr "Izbriši izbrano sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4121 msgid "_Copy" msgstr "_Kopiraj" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4122 msgid "Copy the selected image to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopiraj izbrano sliko na odložišče" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4124 ../src/eog-window.c:4133 ../src/eog-window.c:4136 msgid "_Zoom In" msgstr "_Približaj" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4125 ../src/eog-window.c:4134 msgid "Enlarge the image" msgstr "Približaj sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4127 ../src/eog-window.c:4139 msgid "Zoom _Out" msgstr "_Oddalji" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4128 ../src/eog-window.c:4137 ../src/eog-window.c:4140 msgid "Shrink the image" msgstr "Oddalji sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4130 msgid "_Normal Size" msgstr "_Običajna velikost" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4131 msgid "Show the image at its normal size" msgstr "Pokaži sliko v običajni velikosti" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4148 msgid "_Fullscreen" msgstr "_Celozaslonski način" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4149 msgid "Show the current image in fullscreen mode" msgstr "Pokaži trenutno sliko v celozaslonskem načinu" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4151 msgid "Pause Slideshow" msgstr "Premor predvajanja" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4152 msgid "Pause or resume the slideshow" msgstr "Premor ali nadaljevanje predvajanja predstavitve" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4154 msgid "_Best Fit" msgstr "_Najboljša prilagoditev" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4155 msgid "Fit the image to the window" msgstr "Prilagodi sliko velikosti okna" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4160 ../src/eog-window.c:4175 msgid "_Previous Image" msgstr "_Predhodna slika" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4161 msgid "Go to the previous image of the gallery" msgstr "Skoči na predhodno sliko galerije" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4163 msgid "_Next Image" msgstr "_Naslednja slika" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4164 msgid "Go to the next image of the gallery" msgstr "Skoči na naslednjo sliko galerije" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4166 ../src/eog-window.c:4178 msgid "_First Image" msgstr "_Prva slika" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4167 msgid "Go to the first image of the gallery" msgstr "Skoči na prvo sliko galerije" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4169 ../src/eog-window.c:4181 msgid "_Last Image" msgstr "_Zadnja sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4170 msgid "Go to the last image of the gallery" msgstr "Skoči na zadnjo sliko galerije" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4172 msgid "_Random Image" msgstr "_Naključna slika" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4173 msgid "Go to a random image of the gallery" msgstr "Skoči na naključno sliko galerije" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4331 msgid "S_lideshow" msgstr "_Predstavitev" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4332 msgid "Start a slideshow view of the images" msgstr "Začni predstavitveno prikazovanje slik" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4404 msgid "Previous" msgstr "Predhodna" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4409 msgid "Next" msgstr "Naslednja" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4416 msgid "Right" msgstr "Desno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4419 msgid "Left" msgstr "Levo" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4422 msgid "Show Folder" msgstr "Pokaži mapo" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4425 msgid "In" msgstr "Povečaj" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4428 msgid "Out" msgstr "Pomanjšaj" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4431 msgid "Normal" msgstr "Običajno" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4434 msgid "Fit" msgstr "Prilagodi" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4437 msgid "Gallery" msgstr "Galerija" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4454 msgctxt "action (to trash)" msgid "Trash" msgstr "Premakni v smeti" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4820 #, c-format msgid "Edit the current image using %s" msgstr "Uredi trenutno sliko s programom %s" #: ../src/eog-window.c:4822 msgid "Edit Image" msgstr "Uredi sliko" #: ../src/eog-window.c:6166 msgid "The GNOME image viewer." msgstr "Pregledovalnik slik za GNOME" #: ../src/eog-window.c:6169 msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "" "Matej Urbančič \n" "\n" "Launchpad Contributions:\n" " Andraz Tori https://launchpad.net/~andraz-tori1\n" " Andrej Znidarsic https://launchpad.net/~andrej.znidarsic\n" " Damir Jerovšek https://launchpad.net/~jierro\n" " Dražen Matešić https://launchpad.net/~crazylemon\n" " Klemen Košir https://launchpad.net/~klemen.kosir\n" " Matej Urbančič https://launchpad.net/~mateju\n" " Matic Zgur https://launchpad.net/~mr-zgur\n" " Morgoth https://launchpad.net/~mat-krnc\n" " mrt https://launchpad.net/~mrtt" #: ../src/main.c:56 #| msgid "Eye of GNOME Image Viewer" msgid "GNOME Image Viewer" msgstr "Pregledovalnik slik GNOME" #: ../src/main.c:63 msgid "Open in fullscreen mode" msgstr "Odpri v celozaslonskem načinu" #: ../src/main.c:64 msgid "Disable image gallery" msgstr "Onemogoči galerijo slik" #: ../src/main.c:65 msgid "Open in slideshow mode" msgstr "Odpri v načinu predstavitve" #: ../src/main.c:66 msgid "Start a new instance instead of reusing an existing one" msgstr "Začni novo sejo, namesto ponovne uporabe obstoječe seje programa" #: ../src/main.c:67 msgid "" "Open in a single window, if multiple windows are open the first one is used" msgstr "" "Odprto je eno okno. V kolikor je odprtih več oken, je uporabljeno prvo." #: ../src/main.c:69 msgid "Show the application's version" msgstr "Pokaži različico programa" #: ../src/main.c:99 msgid "[FILE…]" msgstr "[DATOTEKA ...]" #. I18N: The '%s' is replaced with eog's command name. #: ../src/main.c:112 #, c-format msgid "Run '%s --help' to see a full list of available command line options." msgstr "Za popoln seznam možnosti ukazne vrstice zaženite '%s --help'." language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/evolution-3.10.po0000644000000000000000000237201312321560614021161 0ustar # Slovenian translation for evolution. # Copyright (C) 2009 evolution COPYRIGHT HOLDER # This file is distributed under the same license as the evolution package. # # Andraž Tori , 2002. # Matej Urbančič , 2006 - 2010. # Andrej Žnidaršič , 2009 - 2010, 2010. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: evolution master\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: " "http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=evolution&keywords=I18N+L10N" "\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-06 17:25+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-01-24 08:33+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Primoz Princic \n" "Language-Team: Slovenščina \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%100==1 ? 1 : n%100==2 ? 2 : n%100==3 || " "n%100==4 ? 3 : 0);\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2014-04-10 11:44+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 16976)\n" "X-Poedit-Country: SLOVENIA\n" "Language: \n" "X-Poedit-Language: Slovenian\n" "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:1 msgid "This address book could not be opened." msgstr "Imenika ni mogoče odpreti." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "This address book server might be unreachable or the server name may be " "misspelled or your network connection could be down." msgstr "" "Strežnik imenika morda ni dosegljiv, morda je ime strežnika napačno črkovano " "ali pa je povezava z omrežjem prekinjena." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Failed to authenticate with LDAP server." msgstr "Overitev na strežniku LDAP ni uspela." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:4 msgid "" "Check to make sure your password is spelled correctly and that you are using " "a supported login method. Remember that many passwords are case sensitive; " "your caps lock might be on." msgstr "" "Preverite, ali ste pravilno vnesli geslo in ali uporabljate podprt način " "prijave. Vedite, da mnoga gesla ločijo velike/male črke. Morda imate " "vklopljeno tipko za velike črke." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:5 msgid "This address book server does not have any suggested search bases." msgstr "Strežnik imenika nima predlogov za iskanje zbirke." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "This LDAP server may use an older version of LDAP, which does not support " "this functionality or it may be misconfigured. Ask your administrator for " "supported search bases." msgstr "" "Strežnik LDAP morda uporablja starejšo različico LDAP, ki ne podpira te " "zmožnosti ali pa je napačno nastavljen. Za podprto iskalno zbirko se obrnite " "na vašega sistemskega skrbnika." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:7 msgid "This server does not support LDAPv3 schema information." msgstr "Strežnik ne podpira podatkov sheme LDAPv3." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:8 msgid "Could not get schema information for LDAP server." msgstr "Ni mogoče dobiti podatkov o shemi za strežnik LDAP." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:9 msgid "LDAP server did not respond with valid schema information." msgstr "Strežnik LDAP se ni odzval z veljavnimi podatki sheme." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:10 msgid "Could not remove address book." msgstr "Ni mogoče odstraniti imenika." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:11 msgid "Delete address book '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati imenik '{0}'?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:12 msgid "This address book will be removed permanently." msgstr "Imenik bo trajno izbrisan." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:13 #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:7 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:66 msgid "Do _Not Delete" msgstr "_Ne izbriši" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:14 msgid "Delete remote address book "{0}"?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati oddaljeni imenik "{0}"?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:15 msgid "" "This will permanently remove the address book "{0}" from the " "server. Are you sure you want to proceed?" msgstr "" "To bo trajno izbrisalo imenik "{0}" s strežnika. Ali ste " "prepričani, da želite nadaljevati?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:16 #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:61 msgid "_Delete From Server" msgstr "_Izbriši s strežnika" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:17 msgid "Category editor not available." msgstr "Urejevalnik kategorij ni na voljo." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:18 msgid "Unable to open address book" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti imenika" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:19 msgid "Unable to perform search." msgstr "Iskanja ni mogoče izvesti." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:20 msgid "Would you like to save your changes?" msgstr "Ali želite shraniti svoje spremembe?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:21 msgid "" "You have made modifications to this contact. Do you want to save these " "changes?" msgstr "Spremenili ste podatke o stiku. Ali želite spremembe shraniti?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:22 msgid "_Discard" msgstr "_Zavrzi" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:23 msgid "Cannot move contact." msgstr "Ni mogoče premakniti stika." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:24 msgid "" "You are attempting to move a contact from one address book to another but it " "cannot be removed from the source. Do you want to save a copy instead?" msgstr "" "Stik poskušate prenesti iz enega imenika v drugega, vendar ga ni mogoče " "izbrisati iz vira. Ali želite namesto tega shraniti kopijo?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:25 msgid "" "The image you have selected is large. Do you want to resize and store it?" msgstr "Izbrana slika je velika. Ali jo želite zmanjšati in shraniti?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:26 msgid "_Resize" msgstr "_Spremeni velikost" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:27 msgid "_Use as it is" msgstr "_Uporabi kot je" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:28 msgid "_Do not save" msgstr "_Ne shrani" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:29 msgid "Unable to save {0}." msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti {0}." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:30 msgid "Error saving {0} to {1}: {2}" msgstr "Napaka med shranjevanjem {0} v {1}: {2}" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:31 msgid "Address '{0}' already exists." msgstr "Naslov '{0}' že obstaja." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:32 msgid "" "A contact already exists with this address. Would you like to add a new card " "with the same address anyway?" msgstr "" "Stik s tem naslovom že obstaja. Ali želite vseeno dodati novo vizitko z " "enakim naslovom?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:33 #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:997 ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:397 msgid "_Add" msgstr "_Dodaj" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:34 msgid "Some addresses already exist in this contact list." msgstr "Nekateri naslovi že obstajajo na tem seznamu stikov." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:35 msgid "" "You are trying to add addresses that are part of this list already. Would " "you like to add them anyway?" msgstr "Ti naslovi so že del seznama. Ali želite podatke vseeno dodati?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:36 msgid "Skip duplicates" msgstr "Preskoči dvojnike" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:37 msgid "Add with duplicates" msgstr "Dodaj z dvojniki" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:38 msgid "List '{0}' is already in this contact list." msgstr "Seznam '{0}' je že na seznamu stikov." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:39 msgid "" "A contact list named '{0}' is already in this contact list. Would you like " "to add it anyway?" msgstr "" "Seznam stikov '{0}' že obstaja na tem seznamu. Ali ga želite vseeno dodati?" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:40 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1251 msgid "Failed to delete contact" msgstr "Izbris stika ni uspel" #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:41 msgid "You do not have permission to delete contacts in this address book." msgstr "Nimate dovoljenja za izbris stika iz imenika." #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:42 msgid "Cannot add new contact" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati novega stika" #. For Translators: {0} is the name of the address book source #: ../addressbook/addressbook.error.xml.h:44 msgid "" "'{0}' is a read-only address book and cannot be modified. Please select a " "different address book from the side bar in the Contacts view." msgstr "" "'{0}' je imenik le za branje in ga ni mogoče spreminjati. Izberite drug " "imenik iz stranske vrstice v pogledu stikov." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:1 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:650 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:672 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:2958 msgid "Contact Editor" msgstr "Urejevalnik stikov" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:2 msgid "Image" msgstr "Slika" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:3 msgid "Nic_kname:" msgstr "_Vzdevek:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:4 msgid "_File under:" msgstr "_Zavedi pod:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:5 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:3 msgid "_Where:" msgstr "_Kje:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:6 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:16 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:1 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:27 msgid "Ca_tegories..." msgstr "Ka_tegorije ..." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:7 msgid "Full _Name..." msgstr "_Polno ime ..." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:8 msgid "_Wants to receive HTML mail" msgstr "Želi prejemati pošto _HTML" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:9 #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-merging.c:409 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:6 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:590 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:966 #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:395 msgid "Email" msgstr "Elektronska pošta" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:10 msgid "Telephone" msgstr "Telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:11 msgid "Instant Messaging" msgstr "Hipno sporočanje" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:12 #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-vcard-importer.c:1003 msgid "Contact" msgstr "Stik" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:13 msgid "_Home Page:" msgstr "Do_mača stran:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:14 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:709 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:22 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1889 msgid "_Calendar:" msgstr "_Koledar:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:15 msgid "_Free/Busy:" msgstr "_Zasedenost:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:16 msgid "_Video Chat:" msgstr "_Video klepet:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:17 msgid "Home Page:" msgstr "Domača stran:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:18 #: ../modules/cal-config-google/evolution-cal-config-google.c:97 msgid "Calendar:" msgstr "Koledar:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:19 msgid "Free/Busy:" msgstr "Zasedenost:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:20 msgid "Video Chat:" msgstr "Video klepet:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:21 msgid "_Blog:" msgstr "_Blog:" #. Translators: an accessibility name #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:23 msgid "Blog:" msgstr "Blog:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:24 msgid "Web Addresses" msgstr "Spletni naslovi" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:25 msgid "Web addresses" msgstr "Spletni naslovi" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:26 msgid "_Profession:" msgstr "_Poklic:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:27 msgctxt "Job" msgid "_Title:" msgstr "_Naziv:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:28 msgid "_Company:" msgstr "Po_djetje:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:29 msgid "_Department:" msgstr "O_ddelek:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:30 msgid "_Manager:" msgstr "_Upravljalec:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:31 msgid "_Assistant:" msgstr "_Pomočnik:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:32 msgid "Job" msgstr "Posel" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:33 msgid "_Office:" msgstr "Pi_sarna:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:34 msgid "_Spouse:" msgstr "_Partner(ka):" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:35 msgid "_Birthday:" msgstr "_Rojstni dan:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:36 msgid "_Anniversary:" msgstr "Ob_letnica:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:37 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:685 #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:2278 msgid "Anniversary" msgstr "Obletnica" #. XXX Allow the category icons to be referenced as named #. * icons, since GtkAction does not support GdkPixbufs. #. Get the icon file for some default category. Doesn't matter #. * which, so long as it has an icon. We're just interested in #. * the directory components. #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:38 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:684 #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:2277 ../shell/main.c:128 msgid "Birthday" msgstr "Rojstni dan" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:39 msgid "Miscellaneous" msgstr "Razno" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:40 msgid "Personal Information" msgstr "Osebni podatki" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:41 msgid "_City:" msgstr "_Mesto:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:42 msgid "_Zip/Postal Code:" msgstr "_Poštna številka:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:43 msgid "_State/Province:" msgstr "_Regija/provinca:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:44 msgid "_Country:" msgstr "Držav_a:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:45 msgid "_PO Box:" msgstr "_Poštni predal:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:46 msgid "_Address:" msgstr "_Naslov:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:47 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:191 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-contact-map.c:372 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:357 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:81 msgid "Home" msgstr "Doma" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:48 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:190 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-contact-map.c:385 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:354 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:80 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:666 msgid "Work" msgstr "Delo" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:49 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:192 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:82 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:368 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:719 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:3963 msgid "Other" msgstr "Drugo" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:50 msgid "Mailing Address" msgstr "Poštni naslovi" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/contact-editor.ui.h:51 msgid "Notes" msgstr "Opombe" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:170 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:593 msgid "AIM" msgstr "AIM" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:171 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:596 msgid "Jabber" msgstr "Jabber" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:172 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:598 msgid "Yahoo" msgstr "Yahoo" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:173 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:599 msgid "Gadu-Gadu" msgstr "Gadu-Gadu" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:174 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:597 msgid "MSN" msgstr "MSN" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:175 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:595 msgid "ICQ" msgstr "ICQ" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:176 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:594 msgid "GroupWise" msgstr "GroupWise" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:177 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:600 msgid "Skype" msgstr "Skype" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:178 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:601 msgid "Twitter" msgstr "Twitter" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:230 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:503 msgid "Error adding contact" msgstr "Napaka med dodajanjem stika" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:250 msgid "Error modifying contact" msgstr "Napaka med spreminjanjem stika" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:270 msgid "Error removing contact" msgstr "Napaka med odstranjevanjem stika" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:666 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:2952 #, c-format msgid "Contact Editor - %s" msgstr "Urejevalnik stikov - %s" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3485 msgid "Please select an image for this contact" msgstr "Izberite sliko za ta stik" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3486 msgid "_No image" msgstr "_Brez slike" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3827 msgid "" "The contact data is invalid:\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Podatki o stiku so neveljavni:\n" "\n" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3833 #, c-format msgid "'%s' has an invalid format" msgstr "'%s' ima neveljavno obliko" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3841 #, c-format msgid "'%s' cannot be a future date" msgstr "'%s' ne more datum v prihodnosti" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3849 #, c-format msgid "%s'%s' has an invalid format" msgstr "%s'%s' ima neveljavno obliko" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3862 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3876 #, c-format msgid "%s'%s' is empty" msgstr "%s'%s' je prazen" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-editor.c:3891 msgid "Invalid contact." msgstr "Neveljaven stik." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-quick-add.c:452 msgid "Contact Quick-Add" msgstr "Hitro dodaj stik" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-quick-add.c:455 msgid "_Edit Full" msgstr "_Uredi celoto" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-quick-add.c:508 msgid "_Full name" msgstr "_Polno ime" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-quick-add.c:521 msgid "E_mail" msgstr "Elektronska _pošta" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/e-contact-quick-add.c:534 msgid "_Select Address Book" msgstr "_Izbor imenika" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:1 msgid "Mr." msgstr "G." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:2 msgid "Mrs." msgstr "Ga." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:3 msgid "Ms." msgstr "Ga." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:4 msgid "Miss" msgstr "Gdč." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:5 msgid "Dr." msgstr "Dr." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:6 msgid "Sr." msgstr "St." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:7 msgid "Jr." msgstr "Ml." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:8 msgid "I" msgstr "I" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:9 msgid "II" msgstr "II" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:10 msgid "III" msgstr "III" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:11 msgid "Esq." msgstr "Ssq." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:12 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:2 msgid "Full Name" msgstr "Polno ime" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:13 msgid "_First:" msgstr "_Ime:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:14 msgctxt "FullName" msgid "_Title:" msgstr "_Polno ime:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:15 msgid "_Middle:" msgstr "_Drugo ime:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:16 msgid "_Last:" msgstr "_Priimek:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-editor/fullname.ui.h:17 msgid "_Suffix:" msgstr "P_ripona:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:1 #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/e-contact-list-editor.c:818 msgid "Contact List Editor" msgstr "Urejevalnik seznama stikov" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:2 msgid "_List name:" msgstr "_Ime seznama:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:4 msgid "Members" msgstr "Člani" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:5 msgid "_Type an email address or drag a contact into the list below:" msgstr "" "_Vnesite naslov elektronske pošte ali potegnite stik na spodnji seznam:" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:6 msgid "_Hide addresses when sending mail to this list" msgstr "_Skrij naslove ob pošiljanju pošte na ta seznam" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:7 msgid "Add an email to the List" msgstr "Dodaj elektronsko pošto na seznam" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:8 msgid "Remove an email address from the List" msgstr "Odstrani elektronski naslov s seznama" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:9 msgid "Insert email addresses from Address Book" msgstr "Vstavi elektronski naslov iz imenika" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/contact-list-editor.ui.h:10 msgid "_Select..." msgstr "Izb_eri ..." #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/e-contact-list-editor.c:941 msgid "Contact List Members" msgstr "Člani seznama stikov" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/e-contact-list-editor.c:1475 msgid "_Members" msgstr "_Člani" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/e-contact-list-editor.c:1597 msgid "Error adding list" msgstr "Napaka med dodajanjem seznama" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/e-contact-list-editor.c:1617 msgid "Error modifying list" msgstr "Napaka med spreminjanjem seznama" #: ../addressbook/gui/contact-list-editor/e-contact-list-editor.c:1637 msgid "Error removing list" msgstr "Napaka med odstranjevanjem seznama" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-commit-duplicate-detected.ui.h:1 #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-duplicate-detected.ui.h:1 msgid "Duplicate Contact Detected" msgstr "Zaznan je bil podvojen stik" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-commit-duplicate-detected.ui.h:2 msgid "" "The name or email of this contact already exists in this folder. Would you " "like to save the changes anyway?" msgstr "" "Ime ali naslov elektronske pošte stika že obstaja v tej mapi. Ali želite " "spremembe vseeno shraniti?" #. Translators: Heading of the contact which has same name or email address in this folder already. #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-commit-duplicate-detected.ui.h:4 msgid "Conflicting Contact:" msgstr "Sporni stik:" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-commit-duplicate-detected.ui.h:5 msgid "Changed Contact:" msgstr "Spremenjeni stik:" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-duplicate-detected.ui.h:2 #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-merging.c:364 msgid "_Merge" msgstr "_Združi" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-duplicate-detected.ui.h:3 msgid "" "The name or email address of this contact already exists\n" "in this folder. Would you like to add it anyway?" msgstr "" "Ime ali naslov elektronske pošte tega stika že obstaja v tej mapi.\n" "Ali želite podatke vseeno dodati?" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-duplicate-detected.ui.h:5 msgid "Original Contact:" msgstr "Izvirni stik:" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-duplicate-detected.ui.h:6 msgid "New Contact:" msgstr "Nov stik:" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-merging.c:244 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:14 msgid "Cancelled" msgstr "Preklicano" #: ../addressbook/gui/merging/eab-contact-merging.c:346 msgid "Merge Contact" msgstr "Združi stik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/addresstypes.xml.h:1 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1151 msgid "Name contains" msgstr "Ime vsebuje" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/addresstypes.xml.h:2 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1144 msgid "Email begins with" msgstr "Elektronska pošta se začne z" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/addresstypes.xml.h:3 #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:26 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:19 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:30 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1137 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1771 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:791 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:990 msgid "Any field contains" msgstr "Katerokoli polje vsebuje" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-model.c:163 msgid "No contacts" msgstr "Ni stikov" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-model.c:167 #, c-format msgid "%d contact" msgid_plural "%d contacts" msgstr[0] "%d stikov" msgstr[1] "%d stik" msgstr[2] "%d stika" msgstr[3] "%d stiki" # book je v 99% primerov address book=imenik #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-model.c:373 msgid "Error getting book view" msgstr "Napaka med dobivanju pogleda imenika" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-model.c:820 msgid "Search Interrupted" msgstr "Iskanje je prekinjeno" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-table-adapter.c:204 msgid "Error modifying card" msgstr "Napaka med spreminjanjem vizitke" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:649 msgid "Cut selected contacts to the clipboard" msgstr "Izreži izbrane stike v odložišče" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:655 msgid "Copy selected contacts to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopiraj izbrane stike v odložišče" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:661 msgid "Paste contacts from the clipboard" msgstr "Prilepi stike iz odložišča" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:667 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:951 msgid "Delete selected contacts" msgstr "Izbriši izbrane stike" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:673 msgid "Select all visible contacts" msgstr "Izberi vse vidne stike" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1299 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete these contact lists?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati sezname stikov?" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1303 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this contact list?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati seznam stikov?" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1307 #, c-format msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this contact list (%s)?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati seznam stikov (%s)?" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1313 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete these contacts?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati te stike?" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1317 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this contact?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati ta stik?" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1321 #, c-format msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this contact (%s)?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati stik (%s)?" #. Translators: This is shown for > 5 contacts. #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1477 #, c-format msgid "" "Opening %d contacts will open %d new windows as well.\n" "Do you really want to display all of these contacts?" msgid_plural "" "Opening %d contacts will open %d new windows as well.\n" "Do you really want to display all of these contacts?" msgstr[0] "" "Odpiranje %d stikov bo odprlo %d novih oken.\n" "Ali zares želite prikazati vse te stike?" msgstr[1] "" "Odpiranje %d stika bo odprlo %d novo okno.\n" "Ali zares želite prikazati ta stik?" msgstr[2] "" "Odpiranje %d stikov bo odprlo %d novi okni.\n" "Ali zares želite prikazati oba stika?" msgstr[3] "" "Odpiranje %d stikov bo odprlo %d nova okna.\n" "Ali zares želite prikazati vse te stike?" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1485 msgid "_Don't Display" msgstr "_Ne pokaži" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.c:1486 msgid "Display _All Contacts" msgstr "Pokaži _vse stike" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:1 msgid "File As" msgstr "Zavedi kot" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:3 msgid "Given Name" msgstr "Rojstno ime" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:4 msgid "Family Name" msgstr "Družinsko ime" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:5 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:592 msgid "Nickname" msgstr "Vzdevek" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:7 msgid "Email 2" msgstr "Naslov elektronske pošte 2" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:8 msgid "Email 3" msgstr "Naslov elektronske pošte 3" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:9 msgid "Assistant Phone" msgstr "Telefon pomočnika" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:10 msgid "Business Phone" msgstr "Službeni telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:11 msgid "Business Phone 2" msgstr "Službeni telefon 2" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:12 msgid "Business Fax" msgstr "Službeni faks" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:13 msgid "Callback Phone" msgstr "Povratni telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:14 msgid "Car Phone" msgstr "Telefon v avtu" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:15 msgid "Company Phone" msgstr "Telefon podjetja" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:16 msgid "Home Phone" msgstr "Domači telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:17 msgid "Home Phone 2" msgstr "Domači telefon 2" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:18 msgid "Home Fax" msgstr "Domači faks" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:19 msgid "ISDN Phone" msgstr "Telefon ISDN" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:20 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:682 msgid "Mobile Phone" msgstr "Prenosni telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:21 msgid "Other Phone" msgstr "Drug telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:22 msgid "Other Fax" msgstr "Drug faks" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:23 msgid "Pager" msgstr "Pozivnik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:24 msgid "Primary Phone" msgstr "Osnovni telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:25 msgid "Radio" msgstr "Radio" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:26 msgid "Telex" msgstr "Teleks" #. Translators: This is a vcard standard and stands for the type of #. phone used by the hearing impaired. TTY stands for "teletype" #. (familiar from Unix device names), and TDD is "Telecommunications #. Device for Deaf". However, you probably want to leave this #. abbreviation unchanged unless you know that there is actually a #. different and established translation for this in your language. #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:33 msgid "TTYTDD" msgstr "TTYTDD" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:34 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:645 msgid "Company" msgstr "Podjetje" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:35 msgid "Unit" msgstr "Enota" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:36 msgid "Office" msgstr "Pisarna" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:37 msgid "Title" msgstr "Naziv" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:38 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:666 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:5 msgid "Role" msgstr "Vloga" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:39 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:649 msgid "Manager" msgstr "Upravljalnik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:40 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:650 msgid "Assistant" msgstr "Pomočnik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:41 msgid "Web Site" msgstr "Spletna stran" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:42 msgid "Journal" msgstr "Dnevnik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:43 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:20 #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:12 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:6 #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:4 ../e-util/e-categories-dialog.c:89 msgid "Categories" msgstr "Kategorije" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:44 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:686 msgid "Spouse" msgstr "Partner(ka)" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-addressbook-view.etspec.h:45 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:741 msgid "Note" msgstr "Opomba" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-contact-map-window.c:374 msgid "Contacts Map" msgstr "Zemljevid stikov" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard-view.c:191 msgid "" "\n" "\n" "Searching for the Contacts..." msgstr "" "\n" "\n" "Iskanje stikov ..." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard-view.c:194 msgid "" "\n" "\n" "Search for the Contact\n" "\n" "or double-click here to create a new Contact." msgstr "" "\n" "\n" "Poiščite stik\n" "\n" "ali pa tukaj dvakrat kliknite z miško za ustvarjanje novega." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard-view.c:197 msgid "" "\n" "\n" "There are no items to show in this view.\n" "\n" "Double-click here to create a new Contact." msgstr "" "\n" "\n" "V tem pogledu ni predmetov za prikaz\n" "\n" "V kolikor želite ustvariti nov stik, dvojno kliknite tukaj." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard-view.c:201 msgid "" "\n" "\n" "Search for the Contact." msgstr "" "\n" "\n" "Iskanje stika." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard-view.c:203 msgid "" "\n" "\n" "There are no items to show in this view." msgstr "" "\n" "\n" "V tem pogledu ni predmetov za prikaz." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard.c:93 msgid "Work Email" msgstr "Službena elektronska pošta" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard.c:94 msgid "Home Email" msgstr "Domača elektronska pošta" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard.c:95 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/e-minicard.c:828 msgid "Other Email" msgstr "Druga elektronska pošta" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-addressbook-view.c:95 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-addressbook-view.c:104 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard-view.c:194 msgid "evolution address book" msgstr "Imenik Evolutiona" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard-view.c:36 msgid "New Contact" msgstr "Nov stik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard-view.c:37 msgid "New Contact List" msgstr "Nov seznam stikov" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard-view.c:177 #, c-format msgid "current address book folder %s has %d card" msgid_plural "current address book folder %s has %d cards" msgstr[0] "mapa trenutnega imenika %s ima %d vizitk" msgstr[1] "mapa trenutnega imenika %s ima %d vizitko" msgstr[2] "mapa trenutnega imenika %s ima %d vizitki" msgstr[3] "mapa trenutnega imenika %s ima %d vizitke" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard.c:34 msgid "Open" msgstr "Odpri" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard.c:160 msgid "Contact List: " msgstr "Seznam stikov: " #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard.c:161 msgid "Contact: " msgstr "Stik: " #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/ea-minicard.c:188 msgid "evolution minicard" msgstr "evolution minicard" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:150 msgid "Copy _Email Address" msgstr "Kopiraj _elektronski naslov" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:152 #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:428 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:307 msgid "Copy the email address to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopira elektronski naslov v odložišče" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:157 #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:433 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:312 msgid "_Send New Message To..." msgstr "Pošlji novo _sporočilo osebi ..." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:159 #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:435 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:314 msgid "Send a mail message to this address" msgstr "Pošlji poštno sporočilo na ta naslov" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-display.c:291 #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:970 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:990 #, c-format msgid "Click to mail %s" msgstr "Kliknite za pošiljanje pošte osebi %s" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:137 msgid "Open map" msgstr "Odpri zemljevid" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:529 msgid "List Members:" msgstr "Člani seznama:" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:646 msgid "Department" msgstr "Oddelek" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:647 msgid "Profession" msgstr "Poklic" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:648 msgid "Position" msgstr "Položaj" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:651 msgid "Video Chat" msgstr "Video klepet" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:652 #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:8 ../e-util/e-send-options.c:546 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:216 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:245 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view.c:591 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:21 msgid "Calendar" msgstr "Koledar" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:653 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:116 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:343 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:2 msgid "Free/Busy" msgstr "Zasedenost" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:654 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:681 msgid "Phone" msgstr "Telefon" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:655 msgid "Fax" msgstr "Faks" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:656 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:683 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:709 msgid "Address" msgstr "Naslov" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:679 msgid "Home Page" msgstr "Domača stran" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:680 msgid "Web Log" msgstr "Spletni dnevnik" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:696 msgid "Personal" msgstr "Osebno" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:930 msgid "List Members" msgstr "Člani seznama" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:951 msgid "Job Title" msgstr "Službeni naziv" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:992 msgid "Home page" msgstr "Domača stran" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-contact-formatter.c:1002 msgid "Blog" msgstr "Blog" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:123 msgid "" "This address book cannot be opened. This either means this book is not " "marked for offline usage or not yet downloaded for offline usage. Please " "load the address book once in online mode to download its contents." msgstr "" "Tega imenika ni mogoče odpreti. To pomeni, da imenik ni bil označen za " "uporabo brez povezave ali pa še ni bil prejet. Za prejem vsebine imenika, ga " "je treba še enkrat naložiti v načinu s povezavo." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:142 #, c-format msgid "" "This address book cannot be opened. Please check that the path %s exists " "and that permissions are set to access it." msgstr "" "Tega imenika ni mogoče odpreti. Preverite, ali pot %s obstaja in ali imate " "dovoljenje za dostop." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:155 msgid "" "This version of Evolution does not have LDAP support compiled in to it. To " "use LDAP in Evolution an LDAP-enabled Evolution package must be installed." msgstr "" "Trenutna različica programa Evolution nima prevedene podpore za LDAP. V " "primeru, da želite možnost omogočiti, morate namestiti paket programa " "Evolution s podporo LDAP." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:164 msgid "" "This address book cannot be opened. This either means that an incorrect URI " "was entered, or the server is unreachable." msgstr "" "Tega imenika ni mogoče odpreti. To pomeni, da je vnesen nepravilen naslov " "URI ali pa je strežnik nedosegljiv." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:174 msgid "Detailed error message:" msgstr "Podrobno sporočilo o napaki:" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:211 msgid "" "More cards matched this query than either the server is \n" "configured to return or Evolution is configured to display.\n" "Please make your search more specific or raise the result limit in\n" "the directory server preferences for this address book." msgstr "" "Poizvedbi ustreza več vizitk kot jih lahko vrne strežnik \n" "ali kot jih lahko prikaže Evolution.\n" "Vnesite bolj natančne pogoje iskanja ali povečajte omejitev števila\n" "rezultatov iskanja za ta imenik v možnostih strežnika map." #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:218 msgid "" "The time to execute this query exceeded the server limit or the limit\n" "configured for this address book. Please make your search\n" "more specific or raise the time limit in the directory server\n" "preferences for this address book." msgstr "" "Čas za izvedbo poizvedbe je presegel omejitev strežnika ali\n" "omejitev, ki ste jo nastavili za imenik. Vnesite bolj natančne pogoje\n" "iskanja ali pa povečajte časovno omejitev za ta imenik v\n" "možnostih strežnika map." #. Translators: %s is replaced with a detailed error message, or an empty string, if not provided #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:226 #, c-format msgid "The backend for this address book was unable to parse this query. %s" msgstr "Zaledje imenika ni uspelo razčleniti te poizvedbe. %s" #. Translators: %s is replaced with a detailed error message, or an empty string, if not provided #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:231 #, c-format msgid "The backend for this address book refused to perform this query. %s" msgstr "Zaledje imenika je zavrnilo izvajanje poizvedbe. %s" #. Translators: %s is replaced with a detailed error message, or an empty string, if not provided #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:237 #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:243 #, c-format msgid "This query did not complete successfully. %s" msgstr "Poizvedba se ni izvedla v celoti. %s" #. This is a filename. Translators take note. #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:265 msgid "card.vcf" msgstr "vizitka.vcf" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:316 msgid "Select Address Book" msgstr "Izbor imenika" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:398 msgid "list" msgstr "seznam" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:587 msgid "Move contact to" msgstr "Premakni stik v" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:589 msgid "Copy contact to" msgstr "Kopiraj stik v" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:592 msgid "Move contacts to" msgstr "Premakni stike v" #: ../addressbook/gui/widgets/eab-gui-util.c:594 msgid "Copy contacts to" msgstr "Kopiraj stike v" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:747 #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-ldif-importer.c:549 #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-vcard-importer.c:281 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:440 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:935 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:974 ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Importing..." msgstr "Uvažanje ..." #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:1082 msgid "Outlook Contacts CSV or Tab (.csv, .tab)" msgstr "Stiki Outlook CSV ali Tab (.csv, .tab)" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:1083 msgid "Outlook Contacts CSV and Tab Importer" msgstr "Uvoznik stikov Outlook CSV in Tab" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:1091 msgid "Mozilla Contacts CSV or Tab (.csv, .tab)" msgstr "Stiki Mozilla CSV ali Tab (.csv, .tab)" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:1092 msgid "Mozilla Contacts CSV and Tab Importer" msgstr "Uvoznik stikov Mozilla CSV in Tab" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:1100 msgid "Evolution Contacts CSV or Tab (.csv, .tab)" msgstr "Stiki Evolution CSV ali Tab (.csv, .tab)" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-csv-importer.c:1101 msgid "Evolution Contacts CSV and Tab Importer" msgstr "Uvoznik stikov Evolution CSV in Tab" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-ldif-importer.c:807 msgid "LDAP Data Interchange Format (.ldif)" msgstr "Zapis za izmenjavo podatkov LDAP (.ldif)" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-ldif-importer.c:808 msgid "Evolution LDIF importer" msgstr "Uvoznik Evolution LDIF" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-vcard-importer.c:666 msgid "vCard (.vcf, .gcrd)" msgstr "vCard (.vcf, .gcrd)" #: ../addressbook/importers/evolution-vcard-importer.c:667 msgid "Evolution vCard Importer" msgstr "Uvoznik vCard Evolution" #. Uncomment next if it is successful to get total number if pages in list view #. * g_object_get (operation, "n-pages", &n_pages, NULL) #: ../addressbook/printing/e-contact-print.c:764 #, c-format msgid "Page %d" msgstr "Stran %d" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:59 msgid "Specify the output file instead of standard output" msgstr "Navedite izhodno datoteko namesto standardnega izhoda" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:60 msgid "OUTPUTFILE" msgstr "IZHODNADATOTEKA" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:63 msgid "List local address book folders" msgstr "Naštej krajevne mape imenikov" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:66 msgid "Show cards as vcard or csv file" msgstr "Pokaži vizitke kot datoteke vcard ali csv" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:67 msgid "[vcard|csv]" msgstr "[vcard|csv]" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:136 msgid "" "Command line arguments error, please use --help option to see the usage." msgstr "" "Napaka argumentov ukazne vrstice. Uporabite možnost --help za ogled uporabe." #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:150 msgid "Only support csv or vcard format." msgstr "Podpira le zapisa csv ali vcard." #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export.c:181 msgid "Unhandled error" msgstr "Neobravnavana napaka" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export-list-cards.c:625 #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export-list-folders.c:46 msgid "Can not open file" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti datoteke" #: ../addressbook/tools/evolution-addressbook-export-list-folders.c:76 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open client '%s': %s" msgstr "Odpiranje odjemalca '%s' je spodletelo: %s" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify-dialog.c:106 msgid "minute" msgid_plural "minutes" msgstr[0] "minut" msgstr[1] "minuta" msgstr[2] "minuti" msgstr[3] "minute" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify-dialog.c:119 msgid "hour" msgid_plural "hours" msgstr[0] "ur" msgstr[1] "ura" msgstr[2] "uri" msgstr[3] "ure" #. For Translator : 'day' is part of the sentence of the form 'appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [first] [day] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in[square brackets]). This means that after 'first', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify-dialog.c:132 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1248 msgid "day" msgid_plural "days" msgstr[0] "dni" msgstr[1] "dan" msgstr[2] "dneva" msgstr[3] "dnevi" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify-dialog.c:329 msgid "Start time" msgstr "Začetni čas" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:1 msgid "Appointments" msgstr "Sestanki" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:2 msgid "Dismiss _All" msgstr "Opusti _vse" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:3 msgid "_Snooze" msgstr "_Dremež" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:4 ../e-util/e-alert-dialog.c:166 msgid "_Dismiss" msgstr "_Opusti" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:5 #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1835 #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1845 #: ../modules/cal-config-weather/evolution-cal-config-weather.c:209 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1501 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1612 msgid "Location:" msgstr "Mesto:" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:6 msgid "location of appointment" msgstr "mesto sestanka" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:7 msgid "Snooze _time:" msgstr "Čas _dremeža:" #. Translators: This is the last part of the sentence: #. * "Purge events older than <> days" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:8 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:6 ../e-util/filter.ui.h:8 #: ../e-util/e-interval-chooser.c:143 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:352 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:6 msgid "days" msgstr "dni" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:9 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:5 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:18 ../e-util/filter.ui.h:7 #: ../e-util/e-interval-chooser.c:141 msgid "hours" msgstr "ur" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-notify.ui.h:10 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:4 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:19 ../e-util/filter.ui.h:6 #: ../e-util/e-interval-chooser.c:139 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-provider-page.c:527 msgid "minutes" msgstr "minut" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1679 #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1815 msgid "No summary available." msgstr "Povzetek ni na voljo." #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1688 #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1690 msgid "No description available." msgstr "Opis ni na voljo." #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1698 msgid "No location information available." msgstr "Podatki o mestu niso na voljo." #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1703 #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1806 #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:2145 msgid "Evolution Reminders" msgstr "Opomniki Evolution" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1747 #, c-format msgid "You have %d reminder" msgid_plural "You have %d reminders" msgstr[0] "Imate %d opomnikov" msgstr[1] "Imate %d opomnik" msgstr[2] "Imate %d opomnika" msgstr[3] "Imate %d opomnike" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1965 msgid "Warning" msgstr "Opozorilo" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1971 #, c-format msgid "" "An Evolution Calendar reminder is about to trigger. This reminder is " "configured to run the following program:\n" "\n" " %s\n" "\n" "Are you sure you want to run this program?" msgstr "" "Opomnik koledarja Evolution se bo sprožil. Opomnik je nastavljen, da zažene " "naslednji program:\n" "\n" " %s\n" "\n" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite ta program zagnati?" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/alarm-queue.c:1986 msgid "Do not ask me about this program again." msgstr "O tem programu me ne sprašuj več." #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/util.c:44 msgid "invalid time" msgstr "neveljaven čas" #. Translator: Entire string is like "Pop up an alert %d hours before start of appointment" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/util.c:70 ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:370 #: ../calendar/gui/misc.c:96 #, c-format msgid "%d hour" msgid_plural "%d hours" msgstr[0] "%d ur" msgstr[1] "%d ura" msgstr[2] "%d uri" msgstr[3] "%d ure" #. Translator: Entire string is like "Pop up an alert %d minutes before start of appointment" #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/util.c:76 ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:376 #: ../calendar/gui/misc.c:102 #, c-format msgid "%d minute" msgid_plural "%d minutes" msgstr[0] "%d minut" msgstr[1] "%d minuta" msgstr[2] "%d minuti" msgstr[3] "%d minute" #. TRANSLATORS: here, "second" is the time division (like "minute"), not the ordinal number (like "third") #. Translator: Entire string is like "Pop up an alert %d seconds before start of appointment" #. TRANSLATORS: here, "second" is the time division (like "minute"), not the ordinal number (like "third") #: ../calendar/alarm-notify/util.c:80 ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:382 #: ../calendar/gui/misc.c:106 #, c-format msgid "%d second" msgid_plural "%d seconds" msgstr[0] "%d sekund" msgstr[1] "%d sekunda" msgstr[2] "%d sekundi" msgstr[3] "%d sekunde" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Would you like to send all the participants a cancelation notice?" msgstr "Ali želite vsem udeležencem poslati sporočilo o preklicu?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "If you do not send a cancelation notice, the other participants may not know " "the meeting is canceled." msgstr "" "V kolikor ne pošljete sporočila o preklicu, ostali sodelujoči morda ne bodo " "vedeli, da je srečanje odpovedano." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Do _not Send" msgstr "Ne _pošlji" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:4 msgid "_Send Notice" msgstr "_Pošlji obvestilo" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:5 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-comp.c:193 #, c-format msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this meeting?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati to srečanje?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "All information on this meeting will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki o tem srečanju bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:8 msgid "" "If you do not send a cancelation notice, the other participants may not know " "the task has been deleted." msgstr "" "V kolikor ne pošljete sporočila o preklicu, ostali sodelujoči morda ne bodo " "vedeli, da je bila naloga izbrisana." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:9 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-comp.c:196 #, c-format msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this task?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati to nalogo?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:10 msgid "All information on this task will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki o tej nalogi bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:11 msgid "Would you like to send a cancelation notice for this memo?" msgstr "Ali želite poslati sporočilo o preklicu tega opomnika?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:12 msgid "" "If you do not send a cancelation notice, the other participants may not know " "the memo has been deleted." msgstr "" "V kolikor ne pošljete sporočila o preklicu, ostali sodelujoči morda ne bodo " "vedeli, da je bil opomnik izbrisan." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:13 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-comp.c:199 #, c-format msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this memo?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati ta opomnik?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:14 msgid "All information on this memo will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki o tem opomniku bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:15 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete the meeting titled '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati srečanje z nazivom '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:16 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete the appointment titled '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati sestanek z nazivom '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:17 msgid "" "All information on this appointment will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki o tem sestanku bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:18 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this appointment?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati ta sestanek?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:19 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete the '{0}' task?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati nalogo '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:20 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete the memo '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati opomnik '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:21 msgid "All information in this memo will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki v tem opomniku bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:22 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete these {0} appointments?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati teh {0} sestankov ?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:23 msgid "" "All information on these appointments will be deleted and can not be " "restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki o teh sestankih bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:24 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete these {0} tasks?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati teh {0} nalog?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:25 msgid "" "All information on these tasks will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki o teh nalogah bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:26 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete these {0} memos?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati teh {0} opomnikov?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:27 msgid "" "All information in these memos will be deleted and can not be restored." msgstr "" "Vsi podatki v teh opomnikih bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:28 msgid "Would you like to save your changes to this meeting?" msgstr "Ali želite shraniti svoje spremembe tega srečanja?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:29 msgid "You have changed this meeting, but not yet saved it." msgstr "Srečanje ste spremenili, vendar ga še niste shranili." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:30 msgid "_Save Changes" msgstr "_Shrani spremembe" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:31 #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:16 msgid "_Discard Changes" msgstr "_Prezri spremembe" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:32 msgid "Would you like to save your changes to this appointment?" msgstr "Ali želite shraniti svoje spremembe sestanka?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:33 msgid "You have changed this appointment, but not yet saved it." msgstr "Sestanek ste spremenili, vendar ga niste shranili." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:34 msgid "Would you like to save your changes to this task?" msgstr "Ali želite shraniti svoje spremembe te naloge?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:35 msgid "You have changed this task, but not yet saved it." msgstr "Nalogo ste spremenili, vendar je še niste shranili." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:36 msgid "Would you like to save your changes to this memo?" msgstr "Ali želite shraniti svoje spremembe tega opomnik?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:37 msgid "You have made changes to this memo, but not yet saved them." msgstr "Ta opomnik ste spremenili, vendar ga še niste shranili." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:38 msgid "Would you like to send meeting invitations to participants?" msgstr "Ali želite udeležencem srečanja poslati vabila?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:39 msgid "" "Email invitations will be sent to all participants and allow them to reply." msgstr "" "Povabila bodo po elektronski pošti poslana vsem sodelujočim in jim bodo " "omogočila odgovor." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:40 #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:13 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:8 #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-attachment-reminder.error.xml.h:5 msgid "_Send" msgstr "_Pošlji" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:41 msgid "Would you like to send updated meeting information to participants?" msgstr "Ali želite udeležencem poslati posodobljene podatke o srečanju?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:42 msgid "" "Sending updated information allows other participants to keep their " "calendars up to date." msgstr "" "Pošiljanje posodobljenih podatkov ostalim sodelujočim omogoča, da imajo " "posodobljene koledarje." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:43 msgid "Would you like to send this task to participants?" msgstr "Ali želite udeležencem poslati to nalogo?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:44 msgid "" "Email invitations will be sent to all participants and allow them to accept " "this task." msgstr "" "Povabila bodo po elektronski pošti poslana vsem sodelujočim in jim bodo " "omogočila sprejem te naloge." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:45 msgid "Download in progress. Do you want to save the task?" msgstr "Poteka prejemanje podatkov. Ali želite shraniti nalogo?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:46 msgid "" "Some attachments are being downloaded. Saving the task would result in the " "loss of these attachments." msgstr "" "Nekatere priloge se še prejemajo. Trenutno bi shranjevanje nalog povzročilo " "izgubo teh prilog." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:47 ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:297 msgid "_Save" msgstr "_Shrani" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:48 msgid "Download in progress. Do you want to save the appointment?" msgstr "Poteka prejemanje podatkov. Ali želite shraniti sestanek?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:49 msgid "" "Some attachments are being downloaded. Saving the appointment would result " "in the loss of these attachments." msgstr "" "Nekatere priloge se še prejemajo. Trenutno bi shranjevanje sestanka " "povzročilo izgubo teh prilog." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:50 msgid "Would you like to send updated task information to participants?" msgstr "Ali želite udeležencem poslati posodobljene podatke o nalogi?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:51 msgid "" "Sending updated information allows other participants to keep their task " "lists up to date." msgstr "" "Pošiljanje posodobljenih podatkov ostalim sodelujočim omogoča, da imajo " "posodobljene sezname nalog." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:52 msgid "Editor could not be loaded." msgstr "Urejevalnika ni mogoče naložiti." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:53 msgid "Delete calendar '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati koledar '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:54 msgid "This calendar will be removed permanently." msgstr "Koledar bo trajno odstranjen." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:55 msgid "Delete task list '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati seznam nalog '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:56 msgid "This task list will be removed permanently." msgstr "Seznam nalog bo trajno odstranjen." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:57 msgid "Delete memo list '{0}'?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati seznam opomnikov '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:58 msgid "This memo list will be removed permanently." msgstr "Seznam opomnikov bo trajno odstranjen." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:59 msgid "Delete remote calendar '{0}'?" msgstr "Izbris oddaljenega koledarja '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:60 msgid "" "This will permanently remove the calendar '{0}' from the server. Are you " "sure you want to proceed?" msgstr "" "To bo trajno odstranilo koledar '{0}' s strežnika. Ali ste prepričani, da " "želite nadaljevati?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:62 msgid "Delete remote task list '{0}'?" msgstr "Izbris oddaljenega seznama nalog '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:63 msgid "" "This will permanently remove the task list '{0}' from the server. Are you " "sure you want to proceed?" msgstr "" "To bo trajno odstranilo seznam nalog '{0}' s strežnika. Ali ste prepričani, " "da želite nadaljevati?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:64 msgid "Delete remote memo list '{0}'?" msgstr "Izbris oddaljenega seznama opomnikov '{0}'?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:65 msgid "" "This will permanently remove the memo list '{0}' from the server. Are you " "sure you want to proceed?" msgstr "" "To bo trajno odstranilo seznam opomnikov '{0}' s strežnika. Ali ste " "prepričani, da želite nadaljevati?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:66 msgid "Are you sure you want to save the appointment without a summary?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite shraniti sestanek brez povzetka?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:67 msgid "" "Adding a meaningful summary to your appointment will give you an idea of " "what your appointment is about." msgstr "" "Če boste sestankom dodali pomenljiv povzetek, bodo vaši prejemniki lažje " "razumeli vsebino sestanka." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:68 msgid "Are you sure you want to save the task without a summary?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite shraniti nalogo brez povzetka?" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:69 msgid "" "Adding a meaningful summary to your task will give you an idea of what your " "task is about." msgstr "" "Če boste nalogam dodali pomenljiv povzetek, bodo vaši prejemniki lažje " "razumeli vsebino naloge." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:70 msgid "Are you sure you want to save the memo without a summary?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite shraniti opomnik brez povzetka?" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:72 msgid "Error loading calendar '{0}'" msgstr "Napaka med nalaganjem koledarja '{0}'" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:73 msgid "The calendar is not marked for offline usage." msgstr "Koledar ni označen za uporabo brez povezave." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:74 msgid "Cannot save event" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti dogodka" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar source #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:76 msgid "" "'{0}' is a read-only calendar and cannot be modified. Please select a " "different calendar that can accept appointments." msgstr "" "'{0}' je koledarj le za branje in ga ni mogoče spremeniti. Izberite drug " "koledar, ki lahko sprejema sestanke." #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:77 msgid "Cannot save task" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti naloge" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar source #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:79 msgid "" "'{0}' does not support assigned tasks, please select a different task list." msgstr "'{0}' ne podpira dodeljenih nalog. Izberite drug seznam nalog." #. Translators: {0} is the name of the task list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:81 msgid "Error loading task list '{0}'" msgstr "Napaka med nalaganjem seznama nalog '{0}'" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:82 msgid "The task list is not marked for offline usage." msgstr "Seznam nalog ni označen za uporabo brez povezave." #. Translators: {0} is the name of the memo list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:84 msgid "Error loading memo list '{0}'" msgstr "Napaka med nalaganjem seznama opomnikov '{0}'" #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:85 msgid "The memo list is not marked for offline usage." msgstr "Seznam opomnikov ni označen za uporabo brez povezave." #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:87 msgid "Failed to copy an event into the calendar '{0}'" msgstr "Kopiranje dogodka v koledar '{0}' je spodletelo" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the task list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:89 msgid "Failed to copy a task into the task list '{0}'" msgstr "Kopiranje opravila v seznam opravil '{0}' je spodletelo" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the memo list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:91 msgid "Failed to copy a memo into the memo list '{0}'" msgstr "Kopiranje opomnika v seznam opomnikov '{0}' je spodletelo" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:93 msgid "Failed to move an event into the calendar '{0}'" msgstr "Premik dogodka v koledar '{0}' je spodletel" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the task list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:95 msgid "Failed to move a task into the task list '{0}'" msgstr "Premik opravila v seznam opravil '{0}' je spodletel" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the memo list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:97 msgid "Failed to move a memo into the memo list '{0}'" msgstr "Premik opomnika v seznam opomnikov '{0}' je spodletel" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:99 msgid "Copying an event into the calendar '{0}'" msgstr "Kopiranje dogodka v koledar '{0}'" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the task list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:101 msgid "Copying a task into the task list '{0}'" msgstr "Kopiranje opravila v seznam opravil '{0}'" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the memo list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:103 msgid "Copying a memo into the memo list '{0}'" msgstr "Kopiranje opomnika v seznam opomnikov '{0}'" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the calendar. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:105 msgid "Moving an event into the calendar '{0}'" msgstr "Premikanje dogodka v koledar '{0}'" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the task list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:107 msgid "Moving a task into the task list '{0}'" msgstr "Premikanje opravila v seznam opravil '{0}'" #. Translators: {0} is the name of the memo list. #: ../calendar/calendar.error.xml.h:109 msgid "Moving a memo into the memo list '{0}'" msgstr "Premikanje opomnika v seznam opomnikov '{0}'" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:1 #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:4 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:3 #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:2 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:1 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:1 ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:376 msgid "Summary" msgstr "Povzetek" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:2 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:2 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:2 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:11 msgid "contains" msgstr "vsebuje" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:3 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:3 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:3 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:17 msgid "does not contain" msgstr "ne vsebuje" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:4 ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:4 #: ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:4 ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:4 #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:4 ../e-util/e-attachment-tree-view.c:528 #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:69 msgid "Description" msgstr "Opis" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:5 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:5 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:7 msgid "Any Field" msgstr "Katerokoli polje" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:6 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:7 msgid "Classification" msgstr "Razvrstitev" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:7 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:8 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:9 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:34 msgid "is" msgstr "je" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:8 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:9 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:10 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:40 msgid "is not" msgstr "ni" #. To Translators: This is task classification #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:9 ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:2 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.c:250 ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:454 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:461 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:547 #: ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:10 msgid "Public" msgstr "Javno" #. To Translators: This is task classification #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:10 ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:4 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.c:251 ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:463 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:548 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:11 msgid "Private" msgstr "Zasebno" #. To Translators: This is task classification #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:11 ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:6 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.c:252 ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:465 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:549 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:12 #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:7 msgid "Confidential" msgstr "Zaupno" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:12 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:6 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:5 msgid "Organizer" msgstr "Organizator" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:13 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:2 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:6 msgid "Attendee" msgstr "Udeleženec" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:14 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:5 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:14 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:897 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:22 #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:390 msgid "Location" msgstr "Mesto" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:15 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:13 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:23 ../e-util/e-categories-selector.c:328 msgid "Category" msgstr "Kategorija" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:16 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:14 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:15 ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print.c:54 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print-headers.c:204 #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:6 msgid "Attachments" msgstr "Priloge" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:17 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:15 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:16 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:27 msgid "Exist" msgstr "Obstaja" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:18 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:16 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:17 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:24 msgid "Do Not Exist" msgstr "Ne obstaja" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:19 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:310 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:331 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:15 msgid "Recurrence" msgstr "Ponovitev" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:20 msgid "Occurs" msgstr "Pojavitve" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:21 msgid "Less Than" msgstr "Manj kot" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:22 msgid "Exactly" msgstr "Natančno" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:23 msgid "More Than" msgstr "Več kot" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:24 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:17 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:28 msgid "Summary Contains" msgstr "Povzetek vsebuje" #: ../calendar/gui/caltypes.xml.h:25 ../calendar/gui/memotypes.xml.h:18 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:29 msgid "Description Contains" msgstr "Opis vsebuje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:669 msgid "Edit Reminder" msgstr "Uredi opomnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:897 #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:412 msgid "Pop up an alert" msgstr "Pojavi okno opozorila" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:898 #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:408 msgid "Play a sound" msgstr "Predvajaj zvok" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:899 #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:420 msgid "Run a program" msgstr "Zaženi program" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:900 #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:416 msgid "Send an email" msgstr "Pošlji elektronsko pošto" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:909 msgid "before" msgstr "pred" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:910 msgid "after" msgstr "po" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:919 msgid "start of appointment" msgstr "začetek sestanka" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.c:920 msgid "end of appointment" msgstr "konec sestanka" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "minute(s)" msgstr "minut(a)" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "hour(s)" msgstr "ur(a)" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "day(s)" msgstr "dan/dni" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:7 msgid "Add Reminder" msgstr "_Dodaj opomnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:8 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:353 msgid "Reminder" msgstr "Opomnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:9 msgid "Repeat" msgstr "Ponavljanje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:10 msgid "_Repeat the reminder" msgstr "_Ponovno nastavi opomnik" #. This is part of the sentence: 'Repeat the reminder %d extra times every %d minutes'. Where %d are numbers. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:12 msgid "extra times every" msgstr "dodatnih ponovitev vsakih" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:13 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:30 msgid "Options" msgstr "Možnosti" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:14 msgid "Custom _message" msgstr "Sporočilo _po meri" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:15 msgid "Mes_sage:" msgstr "_Sporočilo:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:16 msgid "Custom reminder sound" msgstr "Zvok opomnika po meri" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:17 msgid "_Sound:" msgstr "_Zvok:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:18 msgid "Select A File" msgstr "Izbor datoteke" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:19 msgid "_Program:" msgstr "_Program:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:20 msgid "_Arguments:" msgstr "_Argumenti:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-dialog.ui.h:21 msgid "Send To:" msgstr "Pošlji:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-list-dialog.c:240 msgid "Action/Trigger" msgstr "Dejanje/Sprožilec" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-list-dialog.ui.h:1 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:25 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:62 msgid "Reminders" msgstr "Opomniki" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/alarm-list-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "A_dd" msgstr "_Dodaj" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:60 msgid "This event has been deleted." msgstr "Ta dogodek je bil izbrisan." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:64 msgid "This task has been deleted." msgstr "Ta naloga je bila izbrisana." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:68 msgid "This memo has been deleted." msgstr "Ta opomnik je bil izbrisan." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:78 #, c-format msgid "%s You have made changes. Forget those changes and close the editor?" msgstr "" "%s Narejene so bile spremembe. Ali naj se urejevalnik zapre brez " "shranjevanja?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:80 #, c-format msgid "%s You have made no changes, close the editor?" msgstr "%s Narejenih ni nobenih sprememb. Ali naj se urejevalnik zapre?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:85 msgid "This event has been changed." msgstr "Ta dogodek je bil spremenjen." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:89 msgid "This task has been changed." msgstr "Ta naloga je bil spremenjena." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:93 msgid "This memo has been changed." msgstr "Ta opomnik je bil spremenjen." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:103 #, c-format msgid "" "%s You have made changes. Forget those changes and update the editor?" msgstr "" "%s Narejene so bile spremembe. Ali naj se prekličejo in naj se urejevalnik " "posodobi?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/changed-comp.c:105 #, c-format msgid "%s You have made no changes, update the editor?" msgstr "%s Narejenih ni nobenih sprememb. Ali naj se urejevalnik posodobi?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:266 msgid "Could not save attachments" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti prilog" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:620 msgid "Could not update object" msgstr "Ni mogoče posodobiti predmeta" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:754 msgid "Edit Appointment" msgstr "Uredi sestanek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:761 #, c-format msgid "Meeting - %s" msgstr "Srečanje - %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:763 #, c-format msgid "Appointment - %s" msgstr "Sestanek - %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:769 #, c-format msgid "Assigned Task - %s" msgstr "Dodeljena naloga - %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:771 #, c-format msgid "Task - %s" msgstr "Naloga - %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:776 #, c-format msgid "Memo - %s" msgstr "Opomnik -%s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:792 msgid "No Summary" msgstr "Brez povzetka" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:913 msgid "Keep original item?" msgstr "Ali naj se ohrani izvirni predmet?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1080 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1108 msgid "Unable to synchronize with the server" msgstr "Usklajevanje s strežnikom ni mogoče" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1222 msgid "Close the current window" msgstr "Zapri trenutno okno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1229 ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:121 #: ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:558 ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:455 #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:1296 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:341 #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:1305 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:136 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:888 msgid "Copy the selection" msgstr "Kopiraj izbor" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1236 ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:114 #: ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:553 ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:1290 #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:1299 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:143 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:895 msgid "Cut the selection" msgstr "Izreži izbor" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1243 ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:135 #: ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:568 ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:902 msgid "Delete the selection" msgstr "Izbriši izbor" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1250 msgid "View help" msgstr "Poglejte pomoč" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1257 ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:128 #: ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:563 ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:1302 #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:1311 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:150 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:923 msgid "Paste the clipboard" msgstr "Prilepi iz odložišča" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1278 msgid "Save current changes" msgstr "Shrani trenutne spremembe" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1283 #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:317 msgid "Save and Close" msgstr "Shrani in zapri" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1285 msgid "Save current changes and close editor" msgstr "Shrani trenutne spremembe in zapri urejevalnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1292 ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:142 #: ../e-util/e-focus-tracker.c:573 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:157 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1000 msgid "Select all text" msgstr "Izberi vse besedilo" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1299 msgid "_Classification" msgstr "_Razvrstitev" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1306 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:19 ../e-util/filter.ui.h:16 #: ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:171 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:32 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1028 msgid "_Edit" msgstr "_Uredi" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1313 #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:322 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:164 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1035 msgid "_File" msgstr "_Datoteka" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1320 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1042 msgid "_Help" msgstr "Pomo_č" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1327 msgid "_Insert" msgstr "_Vstavi" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1334 #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:320 msgid "_Options" msgstr "M_ožnosti" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1341 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:178 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1077 ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:5 msgid "_View" msgstr "Po_gled" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1351 #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:269 msgid "_Attachment..." msgstr "_Priloga ..." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1353 #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:271 ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:413 msgid "Attach a file" msgstr "Priloži datoteko" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1361 msgid "_Categories" msgstr "_Kategorije" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1363 msgid "Toggles whether to display categories" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz kategorij" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1369 msgid "Time _Zone" msgstr "Časovni _pas" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1371 msgid "Toggles whether the time zone is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz časovnega pasu" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1380 msgid "Pu_blic" msgstr "_Javno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1382 msgid "Classify as public" msgstr "Razvrsti kot javno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1387 msgid "_Private" msgstr "Z_asebno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1389 msgid "Classify as private" msgstr "Razvrsti kot zasebno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1394 msgid "_Confidential" msgstr "_Zaupno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1396 msgid "Classify as confidential" msgstr "Razvrsti kot zaupno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1404 msgid "R_ole Field" msgstr "Polje Vl_oga" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1406 msgid "Toggles whether the Role field is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja Vloga" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1412 msgid "_RSVP" msgstr "_RSVP" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1414 msgid "Toggles whether the RSVP field is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja RSVP" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1420 msgid "_Status Field" msgstr "Polje _Stanje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1422 msgid "Toggles whether the Status field is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja Stanje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1428 msgid "_Type Field" msgstr "Polje _Vrsta" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:1430 msgid "Toggles whether the Attendee Type is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja Vrsta udeleženca" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:2211 #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:488 msgid "Attach" msgstr "Priloži" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:2541 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:2751 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:3764 msgid "Changes made to this item may be discarded if an update arrives" msgstr "Spremembe tega predmeta bodo morda prezrte, če prispe posodobitev" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:3726 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:121 msgid "attachment" msgstr "priloga" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor.c:3796 msgid "Unable to use current version!" msgstr "Ni mogoče uporabiti trenutne različice!" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/comp-editor-page.c:441 #, c-format msgid "Validation error: %s" msgstr "Napaka med potrjevanjem veljavnosti: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/copy-source-dialog.c:121 msgid "Could not open destination" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti cilja" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/copy-source-dialog.c:131 msgid "Destination is read only" msgstr "Cilj je mogoče le brati" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/copy-source-dialog.c:173 msgid "Cannot create object" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti predmeta" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/copy-source-dialog.c:204 msgid "Could not open source" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti vira" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-comp.c:216 msgid "_Delete this item from all other recipient's mailboxes?" msgstr "" "_Ali naj bo ta predmet izbrisan iz poštnih predalov vseh ostalih prejemnikov?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-comp.c:219 msgid "_Retract comment" msgstr "_Umakni opombo" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:55 #, c-format msgid "The event could not be deleted due to a dbus error: %s" msgstr "Dogodka ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake vodila dbus: %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:59 #, c-format msgid "The task could not be deleted due to a dbus error: %s" msgstr "Naloge ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake vodila dbus: %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:63 #, c-format msgid "The memo could not be deleted due to a dbus error: %s" msgstr "Opomnika ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake vodila dbus: %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:67 #, c-format msgid "The item could not be deleted due to a dbus error: %s" msgstr "Predmeta ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake vodila dbus: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:74 msgid "The event could not be deleted because permission was denied" msgstr "Dogodka ni bilo mogoče izbrisati zaradi neustreznih dovoljenj" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:77 msgid "The task could not be deleted because permission was denied" msgstr "Naloge ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi neustreznih dovoljenj" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:80 msgid "The memo could not be deleted because permission was denied" msgstr "Opomnika ni bilo mogoče izbrisati zaradi neustreznih dovoljenj" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:83 msgid "The item could not be deleted because permission was denied" msgstr "Predmeta ni bilo mogoče izbrisati zaradi neustreznih dovoljenj" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:91 #, c-format msgid "The event could not be deleted due to an error: %s" msgstr "Dogodka ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake: %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:95 #, c-format msgid "The task could not be deleted due to an error: %s" msgstr "Naloge ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake: %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:99 #, c-format msgid "The memo could not be deleted due to an error: %s" msgstr "Opomnika ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake: %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is replaced with a detailed error message #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/delete-error.c:103 #, c-format msgid "The item could not be deleted due to an error: %s" msgstr "Predmeta ni mogoče izbrisati zaradi napake: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/e-delegate-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "Enter Delegate" msgstr "Vnesite pooblaščenca" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/e-delegate-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "Delegate To:" msgstr "Pooblasti zastopanje za:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/e-delegate-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "Contacts..." msgstr "Stiki ..." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:205 msgid "_Reminders" msgstr "_Opomniki" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:207 msgid "Set or unset reminders for this event" msgstr "Določi ali odstrani opomnike za ta dogodek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:215 msgid "Show Time as _Busy" msgstr "Pokaži čas kot _zaseden" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:217 msgid "Toggles whether to show time as busy" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz zasedenosti časa" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:226 msgid "_Recurrence" msgstr "_Ponovitev" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:228 msgid "Make this a recurring event" msgstr "Označi dogodek kot ponovljiv" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:233 ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:14 msgid "Send Options" msgstr "Možnosti pošiljanja" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:235 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-editor.c:96 msgid "Insert advanced send options" msgstr "Vstavi napredne možnosti pošiljanja" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:243 msgid "All _Day Event" msgstr "Celo_dnevni dogodek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:245 msgid "Toggles whether to have All Day Event" msgstr "Preklopi celodnevnost dogodka" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:254 msgid "_Free/Busy" msgstr "_Zasedenost" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:256 msgid "Query free / busy information for the attendees" msgstr "Poizvedi o stanju zasedenosti udeležencev" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:307 ../calendar/gui/print.c:3505 msgid "Appointment" msgstr "Sestanek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:377 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:24 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:165 msgid "Attendees" msgstr "Udeleženci" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-editor.c:574 msgid "Print this event" msgstr "Natisni ta dogodek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:557 msgid "Event's start time is in the past" msgstr "Začetni čas dogodka je v preteklosti" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:634 msgid "Event cannot be edited, because the selected calendar is read only" msgstr "" "Dogodka ni mogoče urejati, ker je izbrani koledar na voljo le za branje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:638 msgid "Event cannot be fully edited, because you are not the organizer" msgstr "Dogodka ni mogoče polno urejati, ker niste organizator" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:650 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:3165 msgid "This event has reminders" msgstr "Dogodek ima opomnike" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:717 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:13 msgid "Or_ganizer:" msgstr "Or_ganizator:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1300 msgid "Event with no start date" msgstr "Dogodek brez začetnega datuma" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1303 msgid "Event with no end date" msgstr "Dogodek brez končnega datuma" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1476 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.c:726 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:1025 msgid "Start date is wrong" msgstr "Začetni datum je napačen" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1487 msgid "End date is wrong" msgstr "Končni datum je napačen" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1511 msgid "Start time is wrong" msgstr "Začetni čas je napačen" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1519 msgid "End time is wrong" msgstr "Končni čas je napačen" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1683 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.c:765 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:1079 msgid "An organizer is required." msgstr "Zahtevan je organizator." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1718 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:1114 msgid "At least one attendee is required." msgstr "Zahtevan je vsaj en udeleženec." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1924 msgid "_Delegatees" msgstr "_Pooblaščenci" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:1926 msgid "Atte_ndees" msgstr "Udeleže_nci" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:3445 #, c-format msgid "%d day before appointment" msgid_plural "%d days before appointment" msgstr[0] "%d dni pred sestankom" msgstr[1] "%d dan pred sestankom" msgstr[2] "%d dni pred sestankom" msgstr[3] "%d dni pred sestankom" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:3451 #, c-format msgid "%d hour before appointment" msgid_plural "%d hours before appointment" msgstr[0] "%d ur pred sestankom" msgstr[1] "%d uro pred sestankom" msgstr[2] "%d uri pred sestankom" msgstr[3] "%d ure pred sestankom" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:3457 #, c-format msgid "%d minute before appointment" msgid_plural "%d minutes before appointment" msgstr[0] "%d minut pred sestankom" msgstr[1] "%d minuto pred sestankom" msgstr[2] "%d minuti pred sestankom" msgstr[3] "%d minute pred sestankom" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:3478 msgid "Customize" msgstr "Prilagodi" #. Translators: "None" for "No reminder set" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.c:3485 msgctxt "cal-reminders" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #. TRANSLATORS: 'for' in a sense of 'duration'; example string: Time: [date] [time] for [ H ] hours [ M ] minutes #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:2 msgctxt "eventpage" msgid "for" msgstr "za" #. TRANSLATORS: 'until' in a sense of 'duration'; example string: Time: [date] [time] until [ date ] [ time ] #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:4 msgctxt "eventpage" msgid "until" msgstr "do" #. TRANSLATORS: Predefined reminder's description #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:6 msgctxt "eventpage" msgid "15 minutes before appointment" msgstr "15 minut pred sestankom" #. TRANSLATORS: Predefined reminder's description #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:8 msgctxt "eventpage" msgid "1 hour before appointment" msgstr "1 uro pred sestankom" #. TRANSLATORS: Predefined reminder's description #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:10 msgctxt "eventpage" msgid "1 day before appointment" msgstr "1 dan pred sestankom" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:11 msgid "_Location:" msgstr "_Mesto:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:12 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:2 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:29 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-dialog.c:357 msgid "_Description:" msgstr "_Opis:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:14 msgid "_Time:" msgstr "_Čas:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:15 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:13 msgid "Time _zone:" msgstr "Časovni _pas:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:17 msgid "_Summary:" msgstr "Pov_zetek:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:21 msgid "Event Description" msgstr "Opis dogodka:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:23 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:30 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:547 msgid "Atte_ndees..." msgstr "Udeleže_nci ..." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:26 msgid "_Reminder" msgstr "_Opomnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/event-page.ui.h:27 msgid "Custom Reminder:" msgstr "Opomnik po meri:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "January" msgstr "januar" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "February" msgstr "februar" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "March" msgstr "marec" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:4 msgid "April" msgstr "april" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:5 msgid "May" msgstr "maj" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:6 msgid "June" msgstr "junij" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:7 msgid "July" msgstr "julij" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:8 msgid "August" msgstr "avgust" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:9 msgid "September" msgstr "september" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:10 msgid "October" msgstr "oktober" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:11 msgid "November" msgstr "november" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:12 msgid "December" msgstr "december" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:13 msgid "Select Date" msgstr "Izbor datuma" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/goto-dialog.ui.h:14 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1379 msgid "Select _Today" msgstr "Izberi _danes" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-editor.c:106 ../calendar/gui/print.c:3509 msgid "Memo" msgstr "Opomnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-editor.c:156 msgid "Print this memo" msgstr "Natisni ta opomnik" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.c:421 msgid "Memo's start date is in the past" msgstr "Začetni čas opomnika je v preteklosti" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.c:457 msgid "Memo cannot be edited, because the selected memo list is read only" msgstr "" "Opomnika ni mogoče polno urejati, ker je izbrani seznam opomnikov na voljo " "le za branje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.c:461 msgid "Memo cannot be fully edited, because you are not the organizer" msgstr "Opomnika ni mogoče polno urejati, ker niste organizator" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.c:1160 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:203 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:220 #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:49 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:78 #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:9 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:66 msgid "To" msgstr "Za" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:3 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:426 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:31 msgid "_List:" msgstr "_Seznam:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:4 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:434 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:24 msgid "Organi_zer:" msgstr "Organi_zator:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:5 msgid "T_o:" msgstr "_Za:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:6 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:26 msgid "Sta_rt date:" msgstr "Začetni _datum:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/memo-page.ui.h:7 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:23 msgid "Su_mmary:" msgstr "Po_vzetek:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:53 #, c-format msgid "You are modifying a recurring event. What would you like to modify?" msgstr "Spreminjate ponavljajoč dogodek. Kaj želite spremeniti?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:55 #, c-format msgid "" "You are delegating a recurring event. What would you like to delegate?" msgstr "" "Pooblastiti želite zastopanje ponavljajočega se dogodka. Kaj želite " "zastopati?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:59 #, c-format msgid "You are modifying a recurring task. What would you like to modify?" msgstr "Spreminjate ponavljajočo nalogo. Kaj želite spremeniti?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:63 #, c-format msgid "You are modifying a recurring memo. What would you like to modify?" msgstr "Spreminjate ponavljajoči opomnik. Kaj želite spremeniti?" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:89 msgid "This Instance Only" msgstr "Samo ta primerek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:93 msgid "This and Prior Instances" msgstr "Ta in pretekli primerki" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:99 msgid "This and Future Instances" msgstr "Ta in prihodnji primerki" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recur-comp.c:104 msgid "All Instances" msgstr "Vsi primerki" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:575 msgid "This appointment contains recurrences that Evolution cannot edit." msgstr "Ta sestanek vsebuje ponovitve, ki jih Evolution ne more urejati." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1000 msgid "Recurrence date is invalid" msgstr "Datum ponovitve ni veljaven" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1044 msgid "End time of the recurrence was before event's start" msgstr "Končni čas ponavljanja je pred začetkom dogodka" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] week(s) on [Wednesday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after the 'on', name of a week day always follows. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1073 msgid "on" msgstr "v" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [first] [Monday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after 'first', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1154 msgid "first" msgstr "prvi" #. TRANSLATORS: here, "second" is the ordinal number (like "third"), not the time division (like "minute") #. * Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [second] [Monday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after 'second', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1160 msgid "second" msgstr "drugi" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [third] [Monday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after 'third', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1165 msgid "third" msgstr "tretji" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [fourth] [Monday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after 'fourth', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1170 msgid "fourth" msgstr "četrti" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [fifth] [Monday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after 'fifth', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1175 msgid "fifth" msgstr "peti" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [last] [Monday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). This means that after 'last', either the string 'day' or #. * the name of a week day (like 'Monday' or 'Friday') always follow. #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1180 msgid "last" msgstr "zadnji" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [Other date] [11th to 20th] [17th] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1204 msgid "Other Date" msgstr "Drugi datum" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a submenu option string to split the date range into three submenus to choose the exact day of #. * the month to setup an appointment recurrence. The entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) #. * on the [Other date] [1st to 10th] [7th] [forever]' (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1210 msgid "1st to 10th" msgstr "1. do 10." #. TRANSLATORS: This is a submenu option string to split the date range into three submenus to choose the exact day of #. * the month to setup an appointment recurrence. The entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) #. * on the [Other date] [11th to 20th] [17th] [forever]' (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1216 msgid "11th to 20th" msgstr "11. do 20." #. TRANSLATORS: This is a submenu option string to split the date range into three submenus to choose the exact day of #. * the month to setup an appointment recurrence. The entire string is for example: This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) #. * on the [Other date] [21th to 31th] [27th] [forever]' (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets]). #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1222 msgid "21st to 31st" msgstr "21. do 31." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1249 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:25 msgid "Monday" msgstr "ponedeljek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1250 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:28 msgid "Tuesday" msgstr "torek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1251 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:31 msgid "Wednesday" msgstr "sreda" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1252 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:34 msgid "Thursday" msgstr "četrtek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1253 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:37 msgid "Friday" msgstr "petek" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1254 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:40 msgid "Saturday" msgstr "sobota" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1255 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:43 msgid "Sunday" msgstr "nedelja" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every [x] month(s) on the [second] [Tuesday] [forever]' #. * (dropdown menu options are in [square brackets])." #. #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1386 msgid "on the" msgstr "na" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:1571 msgid "occurrences" msgstr "pojavitve" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:2341 msgid "Add exception" msgstr "Dodaj izjemo" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:2383 msgid "Could not get a selection to modify." msgstr "Ni mogoče dobiti izbire za spreminjanje." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:2389 msgid "Modify exception" msgstr "Spremeni izjemo" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:2435 msgid "Could not get a selection to delete." msgstr "Ni mogoče dobiti izbire za brisanje." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.c:2576 msgid "Date/Time" msgstr "Datum/čas" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:2 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "day(s)" msgstr "dni" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:4 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "week(s)" msgstr "tednov" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:6 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "month(s)" msgstr "mesecev" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:8 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "year(s)" msgstr "let" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:10 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "for" msgstr "za" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:12 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "until" msgstr "do" #. TRANSLATORS: Entire string is for example: 'This appointment recurs/Every[x][day(s)][for][1]occurrences' (combobox options are in [square brackets]) #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:14 msgctxt "recurrpage" msgid "forever" msgstr "za vedno" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:16 msgid "This appointment rec_urs" msgstr "Ta sestanek se _ponavlja" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:17 msgid "Every" msgstr "Vsak" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:18 msgid "Exceptions" msgstr "Izjeme" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/recurrence-page.ui.h:20 msgid "Preview" msgstr "Predogled" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/send-comp.c:173 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/send-comp.c:255 msgid "Send my reminders with this event" msgstr "Pošlji opomnike skupaj z dogodkom" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/send-comp.c:175 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/send-comp.c:257 msgid "Notify new attendees _only" msgstr "Obvesti _samo nove udeležence" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-editor.c:94 msgid "_Send Options" msgstr "Možnosti _pošiljanja" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-editor.c:149 ../calendar/gui/print.c:3507 #: ../e-util/e-send-options.c:553 msgid "Task" msgstr "Naloga" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-editor.c:286 msgid "Print this task" msgstr "Natisni to nalogo" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:330 msgid "Task's start date is in the past" msgstr "Začetni čas opravila je v preteklosti" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:331 msgid "Task's due date is in the past" msgstr "Datum zapadlosti opravila je v preteklosti" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:364 msgid "Task cannot be edited, because the selected task list is read only" msgstr "" "Naloge ni mogoče urejati, ker je izbran seznam nalog dostopen le za branje" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:368 msgid "Task cannot be fully edited, because you are not the organizer" msgstr "Naloge ni mogoče v polno urejati, saj niste organizator" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:372 msgid "" "Task cannot be edited, because the selected task list does not support " "assigned tasks" msgstr "" "Naloge ni mogoče urejati, ker izbrani seznam nalog ne podpira dodeljenih " "nalog." #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:1006 msgid "Due date is wrong" msgstr "Datum zapadlosti je napačen" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:1174 #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.c:1199 msgid "Completed date is wrong" msgstr "Datum konca je napačen" #. To Translators: This is task priority #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:8 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:337 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:573 ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:19 #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:2 ../mail/message-list.c:320 msgid "High" msgstr "Visoka" #. To Translators: This is task priority #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:10 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:339 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:1666 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:574 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:20 ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:5 #: ../mail/message-list.c:319 msgid "Normal" msgstr "Običajno" #. To Translators: This is task priority #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:12 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:341 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:575 ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:21 #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:4 ../mail/message-list.c:318 msgid "Low" msgstr "nizka" #. To Translators: This is task priority #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:14 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:576 ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:22 #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:1 msgid "Undefined" msgstr "Nedoločeno" #. To Translators: This is task status #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:16 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:322 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:311 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:553 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:214 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:229 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:656 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3591 ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:11 msgid "Not Started" msgstr "Ni začeto" #. To Translators: This is task status #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:18 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:312 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:313 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:555 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:633 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:216 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:231 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:657 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3594 msgid "In Progress" msgstr "V teku" #. To Translators: This is task status #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:20 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:315 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:315 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:557 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:205 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:228 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:218 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:233 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:658 ../calendar/gui/print.c:3597 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:13 #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:380 msgid "Completed" msgstr "Končano" #. To Translators: This is task status #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:22 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:318 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:317 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:559 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:220 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:235 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:659 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3600 ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:878 msgid "Canceled" msgstr "Preklicano" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:25 msgid "D_ue date:" msgstr "Dat_um zapadlosti:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:28 msgid "Time zone:" msgstr "Časovni pas:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:32 msgid "_Status:" msgstr "_Stanje:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:33 msgid "Date _completed:" msgstr "Datum _dokončanega:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:34 msgid "_Percent complete:" msgstr "_Procenti dokončanega:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:35 msgid "Priorit_y:" msgstr "Pred_nost:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:36 msgid "C_lassification:" msgstr "_Razvrstitev:" #: ../calendar/gui/dialogs/task-page.ui.h:37 msgid "_Web Page:" msgstr "_Spletna stran:" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view.c:324 msgid "New Appointment" msgstr "Nov sestanek" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view.c:325 msgid "New All Day Event" msgstr "Nov celodnevni dogodek" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view.c:326 msgid "New Meeting" msgstr "Novo srečanje" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view.c:327 msgid "Go to Today" msgstr "Pojdi na današnji dan" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view.c:328 msgid "Go to Date" msgstr "Pojdi na datum" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:298 msgid "It has reminders." msgstr "Ima opomnike." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:301 msgid "It has recurrences." msgstr "Ima ponovitve." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:304 msgid "It is a meeting." msgstr "Je srečanje." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:311 #, c-format msgid "Calendar Event: Summary is %s." msgstr "Dogodek koledarja: povzetek je %s." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:314 msgid "Calendar Event: It has no summary." msgstr "Dogodek koledarja: ni povzetka." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:337 msgid "calendar view event" msgstr "pogled dogodka koledarja" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-cal-view-event.c:569 msgid "Grab Focus" msgstr "Zgrabi žarišče" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view.c:154 ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view.c:154 #, c-format msgid "It has %d event." msgid_plural "It has %d events." msgstr[0] "Ima %d dogodkov." msgstr[1] "Ima %d dogodek." msgstr[2] "Ima %d dogodka." msgstr[3] "Ima %d dogodke." #. To translators: Here, "It" is either like "Work Week View: July #. 10th - July 14th, 2006." or "Day View: Thursday July 13th, 2006." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view.c:161 ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view.c:157 msgid "It has no events." msgstr "Nima dogodkov." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view.c:169 #, c-format msgid "Work Week View: %s. %s" msgstr "Pogled delovnega tedna: %s. %s" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view.c:176 #, c-format msgid "Day View: %s. %s" msgstr "Dnevni pogled: %s. %s" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view.c:210 msgid "calendar view for a work week" msgstr "pogled koledarja za delovni teden" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view.c:212 msgid "calendar view for one or more days" msgstr "pogled koledarja za enega ali več dni" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-day-view-main-item.c:327 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view-main-item.c:354 msgid "a table to view and select the current time range" msgstr "preglednica za ogled in izbiro trenutnega časovnega obsega" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:48 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:56 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1114 msgid "Gnome Calendar" msgstr "Gnome Koledar" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:204 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1191 msgid "%A %d %b %Y" msgstr "%A %d.%m.%Y" #. strftime format %a = abbreviated weekday name, %d = day of month, #. * %b = abbreviated month name. Don't use any other specifiers. #. strftime format %a = abbreviated weekday name, #. * %d = day of month, %b = abbreviated month name. #. * You can change the order but don't change the #. * specifiers or add anything. #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:208 ../calendar/gui/e-day-view.c:2793 #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-top-item.c:859 #: ../calendar/gui/e-week-view-main-item.c:219 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1195 msgid "%a %d %b" msgstr "%a %d.%m." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:211 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:217 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:220 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1198 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1204 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1207 msgid "%a %d %b %Y" msgstr "%a %d.%b.%Y" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:239 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:247 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:254 #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:257 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1224 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1235 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1242 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1245 msgid "%d %b %Y" msgstr "%d.%m.%Y" #. strftime format %d = day of month, %b = abbreviated month name. #. * Don't use any other specifiers. #. strftime format %d = day of month, %b = abbreviated #. * month name. You can change the order but don't #. * change the specifiers or add anything. #: ../calendar/gui/ea-gnome-calendar.c:244 ../calendar/gui/e-day-view.c:2809 #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-top-item.c:863 #: ../calendar/gui/e-week-view-main-item.c:233 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1231 msgid "%d %b" msgstr "%d.%m." #: ../calendar/gui/ea-jump-button.c:151 msgid "Jump button" msgstr "Gumb skoči" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-jump-button.c:160 msgid "Click here, you can find more events." msgstr "Kliknite tukaj za iskanje več dogodkov." #. Translator: Entire string is like "Pop up an alert %d days before start of appointment" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:358 #, c-format msgid "%d day" msgid_plural "%d days" msgstr[0] "%d dni" msgstr[1] "%d dan" msgstr[2] "%d dneva" msgstr[3] "%d dni" #. Translator: Entire string is like "Pop up an alert %d weeks before start of appointment" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:364 #, c-format msgid "%d week" msgid_plural "%d weeks" msgstr[0] "%d tednov" msgstr[1] "%d teden" msgstr[2] "%d tedna" msgstr[3] "%d tedne" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:426 msgid "Unknown action to be performed" msgstr "Izvedeno bo neznano dejanje" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:441 #, c-format msgid "%s %s before the start of the appointment" msgstr "%s %s pred začetkom sestanka" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:447 #, c-format msgid "%s %s after the start of the appointment" msgstr "%s %s po začetku sestanka" #. Translator: The %s refers to the base, which would be actions like #. * "Play a sound" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:454 #, c-format msgid "%s at the start of the appointment" msgstr "%s ob začetku sestanka" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:466 #, c-format msgid "%s %s before the end of the appointment" msgstr "%s %s pred koncem sestanka" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:472 #, c-format msgid "%s %s after the end of the appointment" msgstr "%s %s po koncu sestanka" #. Translator: The %s refers to the base, which would be actions like #. * "Play a sound" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:479 #, c-format msgid "%s at the end of the appointment" msgstr "%s na koncu sestanka" #. Translator: The first %s refers to the base, which would be actions like #. * "Play a Sound". Second %s is an absolute time, e.g. "10:00AM" #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:503 #, c-format msgid "%s at %s" msgstr "%s ob %s" #. Translator: The %s refers to the base, which would be actions like #. * "Play a sound". "Trigger types" are absolute or relative dates #: ../calendar/gui/e-alarm-list.c:511 #, c-format msgid "%s for an unknown trigger type" msgstr "%s za neznano vrsto sprožilca" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view.c:163 #, c-format msgid "Month View: %s. %s" msgstr "Mesečni pogled: %s. %s" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view.c:168 #, c-format msgid "Week View: %s. %s" msgstr "Tedenski pogled: %s. %s" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view.c:202 msgid "calendar view for a month" msgstr "mesečni pogled v koledarju" #: ../calendar/gui/ea-week-view.c:204 msgid "calendar view for one or more weeks" msgstr "pogled koledarja za enega ali več tednov" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:223 ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:750 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-page.c:126 msgid "Untitled" msgstr "Neimenovano" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:231 msgid "Categories:" msgstr "Kategorije:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:263 msgid "Summary:" msgstr "Povzetek:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:272 msgid "Start Date:" msgstr "Začetni datum:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:284 msgid "End Date:" msgstr "Končni datum:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:296 msgid "Due Date:" msgstr "Datum zapadlosti:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:308 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1504 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1621 msgid "Status:" msgstr "Stanje:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:335 msgid "Priority:" msgstr "Prednost:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:360 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-service-page.c:672 msgid "Description:" msgstr "Opis:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-component-preview.c:391 msgid "Web Page:" msgstr "Spletna stran:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-selector.c:358 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1097 #, c-format msgid "Copying an event into the calendar %s" msgstr "Kopiranje dogodka v koledar %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-selector.c:359 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1096 #, c-format msgid "Moving an event into the calendar %s" msgstr "Premikanje dogodka v koledar %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:1 msgid "Click to add a task" msgstr "Kliknite tukaj za dodajanje naloge" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:2 msgid "Start date" msgstr "Datum začetka" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:3 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:652 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:4 #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:3 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-tree-view.c:586 #: ../mail/e-mail-account-tree-view.c:159 msgid "Type" msgstr "Vrsta" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:5 msgid "Completion date" msgstr "Datum zaključka" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:6 ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:880 msgid "Complete" msgstr "Končano" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:7 msgid "Due date" msgstr "Datum zapadlosti" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:9 #, no-c-format msgid "% Complete" msgstr "% končano" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:10 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:18 #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:387 msgid "Priority" msgstr "Prednost" #. To Translators: 'Status' here means the state of the attendees, the resulting string will be in a form: #. * Status: Accepted: X Declined: Y ... #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:11 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:4017 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:695 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:9 #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:8 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:75 #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:1 msgid "Status" msgstr "Stanje" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:13 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:7 #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:6 #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:381 msgid "Created" msgstr "Ustvarjeno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-table.etspec.h:14 #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:8 #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:7 msgid "Last modified" msgstr "Zadnjič spremenjeno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:446 msgid "Cut selected events to the clipboard" msgstr "Izreži izbrane dogodke v odložišče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:452 msgid "Copy selected events to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopiraj izbrane dogodke v odložišče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:458 msgid "Paste events from the clipboard" msgstr "Prilepi izbrane dogodke iz odložišča" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:464 msgid "Delete selected events" msgstr "Izbriši izbrane dogodke" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:484 ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:183 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:270 msgid "Deleting selected objects" msgstr "Brisanje izbranih predmetov" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:646 ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:878 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:1176 msgid "Updating objects" msgstr "Posodabljanje predmetov" #. To Translators: It will display "Organiser: NameOfTheUser " #. To Translators: It will display #. * "Organizer: NameOfTheUser " #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:2084 ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:553 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:840 #, c-format msgid "Organizer: %s <%s>" msgstr "Organizator: %s <%s>" #. With SunOne accouts, there may be no ':' in organiser.value #. With SunOne accounts, there may be no ':' in #. * organizer.value. #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:2088 ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:558 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:844 #, c-format msgid "Organizer: %s" msgstr "Organizator: %s" #. To Translators: It will display "Location: PlaceOfTheMeeting" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:2104 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:2664 ../calendar/gui/print.c:3545 #, c-format msgid "Location: %s" msgstr "Mesto: %s" #. To Translators: It will display "Time: ActualStartDateAndTime (DurationOfTheMeeting)" #: ../calendar/gui/e-calendar-view.c:2135 #, c-format msgid "Time: %s %s" msgstr "Čas: %s %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:1 #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:5 msgid "Start Date" msgstr "Začetni daum" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-list-view.etspec.h:2 msgid "End Date" msgstr "Končni datum" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:467 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:185 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:199 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:135 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:170 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:233 ../calendar/gui/print.c:1251 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1268 ../e-util/e-charset.c:52 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3508 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6092 #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:100 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "Neznano" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:1668 msgid "Recurring" msgstr "Ponavljajoče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:1670 msgid "Assigned" msgstr "Dodeljeno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:1672 ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:1163 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:209 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:177 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:187 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1024 msgid "Yes" msgstr "Da" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:1672 ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:1163 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:210 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:189 msgid "No" msgstr "Ne" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:3958 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:221 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:197 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:220 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6080 msgid "Accepted" msgstr "Sprejeto" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:3959 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:222 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:199 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:222 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6086 msgid "Declined" msgstr "Odklonjeno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:3960 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:223 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:201 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:224 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:526 msgid "Tentative" msgstr "Poskusno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:3961 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:224 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:203 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:226 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6089 msgid "Delegated" msgstr "Pooblaščeno zastopanje" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model.c:3962 msgid "Needs action" msgstr "Zahteva dejanje" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-calendar.c:125 #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:631 msgid "Free" msgstr "Prosto" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-calendar.c:128 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:527 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:632 msgid "Busy" msgstr "Zasedeno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:499 msgid "" "The geographical position must be entered in the format: \n" "\n" "45.436845,125.862501" msgstr "" "Zemljepisna lega mora biti zapisana v obliki: \n" "\n" "45.436845,125.862501" #. Translators: "None" for task's status #: ../calendar/gui/e-cal-model-tasks.c:551 msgctxt "cal-task-status" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a time, 24-hour. #: ../calendar/gui/e-cell-date-edit-text.c:159 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %H:%M:%S" msgstr "%a %d.%m.%Y %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a time, 12-hour. #: ../calendar/gui/e-cell-date-edit-text.c:162 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %I:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%a %d.%m.%Y %H.%M.%S" #: ../calendar/gui/e-cell-date-edit-text.c:170 #, c-format msgid "" "The date must be entered in the format: \n" "%s" msgstr "" "Datum mora biti vpisan v obliki: \n" "%s" #. String to use in 12-hour time format for times in the morning. #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view.c:1983 ../calendar/gui/e-week-view.c:1554 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1074 ../calendar/gui/print.c:1093 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:2637 ../calendar/gui/print.c:2657 msgid "am" msgstr "dop" #. String to use in 12-hour time format for times in the afternoon. #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view.c:1986 ../calendar/gui/e-week-view.c:1557 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1079 ../calendar/gui/print.c:1095 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:2642 ../calendar/gui/print.c:2659 msgid "pm" msgstr "pop" #. strftime format %A = full weekday name, %d = day of month, #. * %B = full month name. Don't use any other specifiers. #. strftime format %A = full weekday name, %d = day of #. * month, %B = full month name. You can change the #. * order but don't change the specifiers or add #. * anything. #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view.c:2776 ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-top-item.c:855 #: ../calendar/gui/e-week-view-main-item.c:210 ../calendar/gui/print.c:2093 msgid "%A %d %B" msgstr "%A %d.%m." #. To Translators: the %d stands for a week number, it's value between 1 and 52/53 #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view.c:3438 #, c-format msgid "Week %d" msgstr "Teden %d" #. Translators: %02i is the number of minutes; #. * this is a context menu entry to change the #. * length of the time division in the calendar #. * day view, e.g. a day is displayed in #. * 24 "60 minute divisions" or #. * 48 "30 minute divisions". #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-time-item.c:801 #, c-format msgid "%02i minute divisions" msgstr "%02i delitev minute" #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-time-item.c:826 msgid "Show the second time zone" msgstr "Pokaži drug časovni pas" #. Translators: "None" indicates no second time zone set for a day view #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-time-item.c:843 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.c:306 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.c:358 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:11 msgctxt "cal-second-zone" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../calendar/gui/e-day-view-time-item.c:877 #: ../calendar/gui/e-timezone-entry.c:324 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.c:389 msgid "Select..." msgstr "Izb_eri ..." #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:64 msgid "Chair Persons" msgstr "Predsedujoči" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:65 msgid "Required Participants" msgstr "Zahtevani udeleženci" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:66 msgid "Optional Participants" msgstr "Neobvezni udeleženci" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:67 msgid "Resources" msgstr "Sredstva" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:181 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:110 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:127 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1018 ../calendar/gui/print.c:1247 msgid "Individual" msgstr "Individualno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:182 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:112 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:129 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1248 ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:5 msgid "Group" msgstr "Skupina" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:183 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:114 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:131 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1249 msgid "Resource" msgstr "Sredstvo" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:184 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:116 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:133 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1250 msgid "Room" msgstr "Soba" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:195 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:145 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:162 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1264 msgid "Chair" msgstr "Predsedujoči" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:196 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:147 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:164 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1021 ../calendar/gui/print.c:1265 msgid "Required Participant" msgstr "Zahtevani udeleženci" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:197 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:149 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:166 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1266 msgid "Optional Participant" msgstr "Neobvezni udeleženci" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:198 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:151 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:168 #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:1267 msgid "Non-Participant" msgstr "Ne-sodelujoči" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:220 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:195 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:218 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1031 msgid "Needs Action" msgstr "Zahteva dejanje" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:626 msgid "Attendee " msgstr "Udeleženec " #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-list-view.c:681 #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:6 msgid "RSVP" msgstr "Povratnica" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:207 ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:230 msgid "In Process" msgstr "V obdelavi" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1910 #, c-format msgid "" "Enter password to access free/busy information on server %s as user %s" msgstr "" "Vnesite geslo za dostop do podatkov prostosti/zasedenosti na strežniku %s " "kot uporabnik %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1920 #, c-format msgid "Failure reason: %s" msgstr "Vzrok napake: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-store.c:1925 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:351 #: ../smime/gui/component.c:64 msgid "Enter password" msgstr "Vnesite geslo" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:528 msgid "Out of Office" msgstr "Izven pisarne" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:530 msgid "No Information" msgstr "Ni podatkov" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:570 msgid "O_ptions" msgstr "_Možnosti" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:590 msgid "Show _only working hours" msgstr "Pokaži le del_ovne ure" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:603 msgid "Show _zoomed out" msgstr "Pokaži _oddaljeno" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:621 msgid "_Update free/busy" msgstr "_Posodobi zasedenost" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:638 msgid "_<<" msgstr "_<<" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:658 msgid "_Autopick" msgstr "_Samodejno izberi" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:675 msgid ">_>" msgstr ">_>" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:696 msgid "_All people and resources" msgstr "Vsi ljudje in vs_a sredstva" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:707 msgid "All _people and one resource" msgstr "Vsi _ljudje in eno sredstvo" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:718 msgid "_Required people" msgstr "Za_htevani ljudje" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:728 msgid "Required people and _one resource" msgstr "Zahtevani ljudje in _eno sredstvo" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:767 msgid "_Start time:" msgstr "_Začetni čas:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:796 msgid "_End time:" msgstr "_Končni čas:" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:2660 #, c-format msgid "" "Summary: %s\n" "Location: %s" msgstr "" "Povzetek: %s\n" "Mesto: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.c:2662 ../calendar/gui/print.c:3534 #, c-format msgid "Summary: %s" msgstr "Povzetek: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:1 msgid "Click here to add an attendee" msgstr "Kliknite tukaj za dodajanje udeleženca" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:3 msgid "Member" msgstr "Član" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:7 msgid "Delegated To" msgstr "Pooblastitev zastopanja za" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:8 msgid "Delegated From" msgstr "Pooblastitev zastopanja od" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:10 msgid "Common Name" msgstr "Splošno ime" #: ../calendar/gui/e-meeting-time-sel.etspec.h:11 msgid "Language" msgstr "Jezik" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:434 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-content.c:482 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:212 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:227 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view.c:307 msgid "Memos" msgstr "Opomniki" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:515 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:803 msgid "* No Summary *" msgstr "* Ni povzetka *" #. Translators: This is followed by an event's start date/time #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:602 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:887 msgid "Start: " msgstr "Začetek: " #. Translators: This is followed by an event's due date/time #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:621 ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:905 msgid "Due: " msgstr "Datum zapadlosti: " #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:742 msgid "Cut selected memos to the clipboard" msgstr "Izreži izbrane opomnike v odložišče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:748 msgid "Copy selected memos to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopiraj izbrane opomnike v odložišče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:754 msgid "Paste memos from the clipboard" msgstr "Prilepi opomnike iz odložišča" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:760 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:589 msgid "Delete selected memos" msgstr "Izbriši izbrane opomnike" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.c:766 msgid "Select all visible memos" msgstr "Izberi vse vidne opomnike" #: ../calendar/gui/e-memo-table.etspec.h:1 msgid "Click to add a memo" msgstr "Kliknite za dodajanje opomnika" #. Translators: "%d%%" is the percentage of a task done. #. * %d is the actual value, %% is replaced with a percent sign. #. * Result values will be 0%, 10%, 20%, ... 100% #. #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:604 #, c-format msgid "%d%%" msgstr "%d%%" #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:721 ../calendar/gui/print.c:2418 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:79 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1078 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:61 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-content.c:439 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:235 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:250 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view.c:462 msgid "Tasks" msgstr "Naloge" #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:1040 msgid "Cut selected tasks to the clipboard" msgstr "Izreži izbrane naloge v odložišče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:1046 msgid "Copy selected tasks to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopiraj izbrane naloge v odložišče" #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:1052 msgid "Paste tasks from the clipboard" msgstr "Prilepi naloge iz odložišča" #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:1058 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:713 msgid "Delete selected tasks" msgstr "Izbriši izbrane naloge" #: ../calendar/gui/e-task-table.c:1064 msgid "Select all visible tasks" msgstr "Izberi vse vidne naloge" #: ../calendar/gui/e-timezone-entry.c:335 msgid "Select Timezone" msgstr "Izberi časovni pas" #. strftime format %d = day of month, %B = full #. * month name. You can change the order but don't #. * change the specifiers or add anything. #: ../calendar/gui/e-week-view-main-item.c:227 ../calendar/gui/print.c:2072 msgid "%d %B" msgstr "%d. %m." #: ../calendar/gui/gnome-cal.c:2369 msgid "Purging" msgstr "Čiščenje" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:648 ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:706 #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:840 msgid "An organizer must be set." msgstr "Organizator mora biti nastavljen." #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:697 msgid "At least one attendee is necessary" msgstr "Zahtevan je vsaj en udeleženec" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:928 ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1089 msgid "Event information" msgstr "Podatki o dogodku" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:931 ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1092 msgid "Task information" msgstr "Podatki o nalogi" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:934 ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1095 msgid "Memo information" msgstr "Podatki o opomnikih" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:937 ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1113 msgid "Free/Busy information" msgstr "Podatki o zasedenosti" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:940 msgid "Calendar information" msgstr "Podatki o koledarju" #. Translators: This is part of the subject #. * line of a meeting request or update email. #. * The full subject line would be: #. * "Accepted: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:977 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Accepted" msgstr "Sprejeto" #. Translators: This is part of the subject #. * line of a meeting request or update email. #. * The full subject line would be: #. * "Tentatively Accepted: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:984 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Tentatively Accepted" msgstr "Poskusno sprejeto" #. Translators: This is part of the subject #. * line of a meeting request or update email. #. * The full subject line would be: #. * "Declined: Meeting Name". #. Translators: This is part of the subject line of a #. * meeting request or update email. The full subject #. * line would be: "Declined: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:991 ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1039 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Declined" msgstr "Odklonjeno" #. Translators: This is part of the subject #. * line of a meeting request or update email. #. * The full subject line would be: #. * "Delegated: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:998 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Delegated" msgstr "Pooblaščeno zastopanje" #. Translators: This is part of the subject line of a #. * meeting request or update email. The full subject #. * line would be: "Updated: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1011 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Updated" msgstr "Posodobljeno" #. Translators: This is part of the subject line of a #. * meeting request or update email. The full subject #. * line would be: "Cancel: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1018 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Cancel" msgstr "Prekliči" #. Translators: This is part of the subject line of a #. * meeting request or update email. The full subject #. * line would be: "Refresh: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1025 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Refresh" msgstr "Osveži" #. Translators: This is part of the subject line of a #. * meeting request or update email. The full subject #. * line would be: "Counter-proposal: Meeting Name". #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1032 msgctxt "Meeting" msgid "Counter-proposal" msgstr "Nasprotni-predlog" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1110 #, c-format msgid "Free/Busy information (%s to %s)" msgstr "Podatki o zasedenosti (%s do %s)" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1118 msgid "iCalendar information" msgstr "Podrobnosti iCalendar" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1146 msgid "Unable to book a resource, the new event collides with some other." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče rezervirati vira. Nov dogodek je v sporu z drugimi dogodki." #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1154 #, c-format msgid "Unable to book a resource, error: %s" msgstr "Vira ni mogoče zaznamovati, napaka: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/itip-utils.c:1326 msgid "You must be an attendee of the event." msgstr "Biti morate udeleženec dogodka." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:661 msgid "1st" msgstr "1." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:661 msgid "2nd" msgstr "2." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:661 msgid "3rd" msgstr "3." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:661 msgid "4th" msgstr "4." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:661 msgid "5th" msgstr "5." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:662 msgid "6th" msgstr "6." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:662 msgid "7th" msgstr "7." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:662 msgid "8th" msgstr "8." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:662 msgid "9th" msgstr "9." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:662 msgid "10th" msgstr "10." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:663 msgid "11th" msgstr "11." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:663 msgid "12th" msgstr "12." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:663 msgid "13th" msgstr "13." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:663 msgid "14th" msgstr "14." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:663 msgid "15th" msgstr "15." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:664 msgid "16th" msgstr "16." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:664 msgid "17th" msgstr "17." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:664 msgid "18th" msgstr "18." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:664 msgid "19th" msgstr "19." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:664 msgid "20th" msgstr "20." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:665 msgid "21st" msgstr "21." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:665 msgid "22nd" msgstr "22." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:665 msgid "23rd" msgstr "23." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:665 msgid "24th" msgstr "24." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:665 msgid "25th" msgstr "25." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:666 msgid "26th" msgstr "26." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:666 msgid "27th" msgstr "27." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:666 msgid "28th" msgstr "28." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:666 msgid "29th" msgstr "29." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:666 msgid "30th" msgstr "30." #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:667 msgid "31st" msgstr "31." #. Translators: These are workday abbreviations, #. * e.g. Su=Sunday and Th=thursday #. G_DATE_BAD_WEEKDAY #. G_DATE_MONDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:727 msgid "Mo" msgstr "po" #. G_DATE_TUESDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:728 msgid "Tu" msgstr "to" #. G_DATE_WEDNESDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:729 msgid "We" msgstr "sr" #. G_DATE_THURSDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:730 msgid "Th" msgstr "če" #. G_DATE_FRIDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:731 msgid "Fr" msgstr "pe" #. G_DATE_SATURDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:732 msgid "Sa" msgstr "so" #. G_DATE_SUNDAY #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:733 msgid "Su" msgstr "ne" #. Translators: This is part of "START to END" text, #. * where START and END are date/times. #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3328 msgid " to " msgstr " do " #. Translators: This is part of "START to END #. * (Completed COMPLETED)", where COMPLETED is a #. * completed date/time. #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3338 msgid " (Completed " msgstr " (Končano " #. Translators: This is part of "Completed COMPLETED", #. * where COMPLETED is a completed date/time. #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3344 msgid "Completed " msgstr "Končano " #. Translators: This is part of "START (Due DUE)", #. * where START and DUE are dates/times. #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3354 msgid " (Due " msgstr " (Datum zapadlosti " #. Translators: This is part of "Due DUE", #. * where DUE is a date/time due the event #. * should be finished. #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3361 msgid "Due " msgstr "Datum zapadlosti " #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3564 msgid "Attendees: " msgstr "Navzoči: " #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3608 #, c-format msgid "Status: %s" msgstr "Stanje: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3624 #, c-format msgid "Priority: %s" msgstr "Prednost: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3642 #, c-format msgid "Percent Complete: %i" msgstr "Odstotkov opravljeno: %i" #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3656 #, c-format msgid "URL: %s" msgstr "URL: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3670 #, c-format msgid "Categories: %s" msgstr "Kategorije: %s" #: ../calendar/gui/print.c:3681 msgid "Contacts: " msgstr "Stiki: " #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:12 msgid "In progress" msgstr "V teku" #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:25 #, no-c-format msgid "% Completed" msgstr "% končano" #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:26 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:38 msgid "is greater than" msgstr "je večje kot" #: ../calendar/gui/tasktypes.xml.h:27 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:39 msgid "is less than" msgstr "je manjše kot" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:78 msgid "Appointments and Meetings" msgstr "Sestanki in srečanja" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:462 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:901 msgid "Opening calendar" msgstr "Odpiranje koledarja" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:610 msgid "iCalendar files (.ics)" msgstr "Datoteke iCalendar (.ics)" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:611 msgid "Evolution iCalendar importer" msgstr "Uvoznik Evolution iCalendar" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:703 msgid "Reminder!" msgstr "Opomnik!" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:787 msgid "vCalendar files (.vcs)" msgstr "Datoteke vCalendar (.vcf)" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:788 msgid "Evolution vCalendar importer" msgstr "Uvoznik Evolution vCalendar" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1071 msgid "Calendar Events" msgstr "Dogodki koledarja" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1115 msgid "Evolution Calendar intelligent importer" msgstr "Pametni uvoznik koledarja Evolutiona" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1186 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1500 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Meeting" msgstr "Srečanje" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1186 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1500 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Event" msgstr "Dogodek" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1189 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1501 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Task" msgstr "Naloga" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1192 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1502 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Memo" msgstr "Opomnik" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1201 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "has recurrences" msgstr "ima ponavljanja" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1206 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "is an instance" msgstr "je primerek" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1211 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "has reminders" msgstr "ima opomnike" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1216 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "has attachments" msgstr "ima priloge" #. Translators: Appointment's classification #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1229 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Public" msgstr "Javno" #. Translators: Appointment's classification #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1232 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Private" msgstr "Zasebno" #. Translators: Appointment's classification #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1235 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Confidential" msgstr "Zaupno" #. Translators: Appointment's classification section name #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1239 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Classification" msgstr "Razvrstitev" #. Translators: Appointment's summary #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1244 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1544 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Summary" msgstr "Povzetek" #. Translators: Appointment's location #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1250 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Location" msgstr "Mesto" #. Translators: Appointment's start time #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1258 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1539 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Start" msgstr "Začetek" #. Translators: 'Due' like the time due a task should be finished #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1269 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Due" msgstr "Datum zakasnelosti" #. Translators: Appointment's end time #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1281 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "End" msgstr "Konec" #. Translators: Appointment's categories #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1291 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Categories" msgstr "Kategorije" #. Translators: Appointment's complete value (either percentage, or a date/time of a completion) #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1315 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Completed" msgstr "Končano" #. Translators: Appointment's URL #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1323 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "URL" msgstr "URL" #. Translators: Appointment's organizer #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1334 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1337 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Organizer" msgstr "Organizator" #. Translators: Appointment's attendees #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1357 #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1360 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Attendees" msgstr "Udeleženci" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1374 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Description" msgstr "Opis" #: ../calendar/importers/icalendar-importer.c:1534 msgctxt "iCalImp" msgid "Type" msgstr "Vrsta" #. #. * #. * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or #. * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public #. * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either #. * version 2 of the License, or (at your option) version 3. #. * #. * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, #. * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of #. * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU #. * Lesser General Public License for more details. #. * #. * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public #. * License along with the program; if not, see #. * #. * #. * Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Novell, Inc. (www.novell.com) #. * #. #. #. * These are the timezone names from the Olson timezone data. #. * We only place them here so gettext picks them up for translation. #. * Don't include in any C files. #. #: ../calendar/zones.h:26 msgid "Africa/Abidjan" msgstr "Afrika/Abidjan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:27 msgid "Africa/Accra" msgstr "Afrika/Accra" #: ../calendar/zones.h:28 msgid "Africa/Addis_Ababa" msgstr "Afrika/Addis_Ababa" #: ../calendar/zones.h:29 msgid "Africa/Algiers" msgstr "Afrika/Algiers" #: ../calendar/zones.h:30 msgid "Africa/Asmera" msgstr "Afrika/Asmara" #: ../calendar/zones.h:31 msgid "Africa/Bamako" msgstr "Afrika/Bamako" #: ../calendar/zones.h:32 msgid "Africa/Bangui" msgstr "Afrika/Bangui" #: ../calendar/zones.h:33 msgid "Africa/Banjul" msgstr "Afrika/Banjul" #: ../calendar/zones.h:34 msgid "Africa/Bissau" msgstr "Afrika/Bissau" #: ../calendar/zones.h:35 msgid "Africa/Blantyre" msgstr "Afrika/Blantyre" #: ../calendar/zones.h:36 msgid "Africa/Brazzaville" msgstr "Afrika/Brazzaville" #: ../calendar/zones.h:37 msgid "Africa/Bujumbura" msgstr "Afrika/Bujumbura" #: ../calendar/zones.h:38 msgid "Africa/Cairo" msgstr "Afrika/Kairo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:39 msgid "Africa/Casablanca" msgstr "Afrika/Casablanca" #: ../calendar/zones.h:40 msgid "Africa/Ceuta" msgstr "Afrika/Ceuta" #: ../calendar/zones.h:41 msgid "Africa/Conakry" msgstr "Afrika/Conakry" #: ../calendar/zones.h:42 msgid "Africa/Dakar" msgstr "Afrika/Dakar" #: ../calendar/zones.h:43 msgid "Africa/Dar_es_Salaam" msgstr "Afrika/Dar_es_Salaam" #: ../calendar/zones.h:44 msgid "Africa/Djibouti" msgstr "Afrika/Džibuti" #: ../calendar/zones.h:45 msgid "Africa/Douala" msgstr "Afrika/Douala" #: ../calendar/zones.h:46 msgid "Africa/El_Aaiun" msgstr "Afrika/El_Aaiun" #: ../calendar/zones.h:47 msgid "Africa/Freetown" msgstr "Afrika/Freetown" #: ../calendar/zones.h:48 msgid "Africa/Gaborone" msgstr "Afrika/Gaborone" #: ../calendar/zones.h:49 msgid "Africa/Harare" msgstr "Afrika/Harare" #: ../calendar/zones.h:50 msgid "Africa/Johannesburg" msgstr "Afrika/Johannesburg" #: ../calendar/zones.h:51 msgid "Africa/Kampala" msgstr "Afrika/Kampala" #: ../calendar/zones.h:52 msgid "Africa/Khartoum" msgstr "Afrika/Khartoum" #: ../calendar/zones.h:53 msgid "Africa/Kigali" msgstr "Afrika/Kigali" #: ../calendar/zones.h:54 msgid "Africa/Kinshasa" msgstr "Afrika/Kinshasa" #: ../calendar/zones.h:55 msgid "Africa/Lagos" msgstr "Afrika/Lagos" #: ../calendar/zones.h:56 msgid "Africa/Libreville" msgstr "Afrika/Libreville" #: ../calendar/zones.h:57 msgid "Africa/Lome" msgstr "Afrika/Lome" #: ../calendar/zones.h:58 msgid "Africa/Luanda" msgstr "Afrika/Luanda" #: ../calendar/zones.h:59 msgid "Africa/Lubumbashi" msgstr "Afrika/Lubumbashi" #: ../calendar/zones.h:60 msgid "Africa/Lusaka" msgstr "Afrika/Lusaka" #: ../calendar/zones.h:61 msgid "Africa/Malabo" msgstr "Afrika/Malabo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:62 msgid "Africa/Maputo" msgstr "Afrika/Maputo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:63 msgid "Africa/Maseru" msgstr "Afrika/Maseru" #: ../calendar/zones.h:64 msgid "Africa/Mbabane" msgstr "Afrika/Mbabane" #: ../calendar/zones.h:65 msgid "Africa/Mogadishu" msgstr "Afrika/Mogadishu" #: ../calendar/zones.h:66 msgid "Africa/Monrovia" msgstr "Afrika/Monrovia" #: ../calendar/zones.h:67 msgid "Africa/Nairobi" msgstr "Afrika/Nairobi" #: ../calendar/zones.h:68 msgid "Africa/Ndjamena" msgstr "Afrika/Ndjamena" #: ../calendar/zones.h:69 msgid "Africa/Niamey" msgstr "Afrika/Niamey" #: ../calendar/zones.h:70 msgid "Africa/Nouakchott" msgstr "Afrika/Nouakchott" #: ../calendar/zones.h:71 msgid "Africa/Ouagadougou" msgstr "Afrika/Ouagadougou" #: ../calendar/zones.h:72 msgid "Africa/Porto-Novo" msgstr "Afrika/Porto-Novo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:73 msgid "Africa/Sao_Tome" msgstr "Afrika/Sao_Tome" #: ../calendar/zones.h:74 msgid "Africa/Timbuktu" msgstr "Afrika/Timbuktu" #: ../calendar/zones.h:75 msgid "Africa/Tripoli" msgstr "Afrika/Tripolis" #: ../calendar/zones.h:76 msgid "Africa/Tunis" msgstr "Afrika/Tunis" #: ../calendar/zones.h:77 msgid "Africa/Windhoek" msgstr "Afrika/Windhoek" #: ../calendar/zones.h:78 msgid "America/Adak" msgstr "Amerika/Adak" #: ../calendar/zones.h:79 msgid "America/Anchorage" msgstr "Amerika/Anchorage" #: ../calendar/zones.h:80 msgid "America/Anguilla" msgstr "Amerika/Angvila" #: ../calendar/zones.h:81 msgid "America/Antigua" msgstr "Amerika/Antigva" #: ../calendar/zones.h:82 msgid "America/Araguaina" msgstr "Amerika/Araguaina" #: ../calendar/zones.h:83 msgid "America/Aruba" msgstr "Amerika/Aruba" #: ../calendar/zones.h:84 msgid "America/Asuncion" msgstr "Amerika/Asuncion" #: ../calendar/zones.h:85 msgid "America/Barbados" msgstr "Amerika/Barbados" #: ../calendar/zones.h:86 msgid "America/Belem" msgstr "Amerika/Belem" #: ../calendar/zones.h:87 msgid "America/Belize" msgstr "Amerika/Belize" #: ../calendar/zones.h:88 msgid "America/Boa_Vista" msgstr "Amerika/Boa_Vista" #: ../calendar/zones.h:89 msgid "America/Bogota" msgstr "Amerika/Bogota" #: ../calendar/zones.h:90 msgid "America/Boise" msgstr "Amerika/Boise" #: ../calendar/zones.h:91 msgid "America/Buenos_Aires" msgstr "Amerika/Buenos_Aires" #: ../calendar/zones.h:92 msgid "America/Cambridge_Bay" msgstr "Amerika/Cambridge_Bay" #: ../calendar/zones.h:93 msgid "America/Cancun" msgstr "Amerika/Cancun" #: ../calendar/zones.h:94 msgid "America/Caracas" msgstr "Amerika/Caracas" #: ../calendar/zones.h:95 msgid "America/Catamarca" msgstr "Amerika/Catamarca" #: ../calendar/zones.h:96 msgid "America/Cayenne" msgstr "Amerika/Cayenne" #: ../calendar/zones.h:97 msgid "America/Cayman" msgstr "Amerika/Cayman" #: ../calendar/zones.h:98 msgid "America/Chicago" msgstr "Amerika/Chicago" #: ../calendar/zones.h:99 msgid "America/Chihuahua" msgstr "Amerika/Chihuahua" #: ../calendar/zones.h:100 msgid "America/Cordoba" msgstr "Amerika/Cordoba" #: ../calendar/zones.h:101 msgid "America/Costa_Rica" msgstr "Amerika/Kostarika" #: ../calendar/zones.h:102 msgid "America/Cuiaba" msgstr "Amerika/Cuiaba" #: ../calendar/zones.h:103 msgid "America/Curacao" msgstr "Amerika/Curacao" #: ../calendar/zones.h:104 msgid "America/Danmarkshavn" msgstr "Amerika/Danmarkshavn" #: ../calendar/zones.h:105 msgid "America/Dawson" msgstr "Amerika/Dawson" #: ../calendar/zones.h:106 msgid "America/Dawson_Creek" msgstr "Amerika/Dawson_Creek" #: ../calendar/zones.h:107 msgid "America/Denver" msgstr "Amerika/Denver" #: ../calendar/zones.h:108 msgid "America/Detroit" msgstr "Amerika/Detroit" #: ../calendar/zones.h:109 msgid "America/Dominica" msgstr "Amerika/Dominika" #: ../calendar/zones.h:110 msgid "America/Edmonton" msgstr "Amerika/Edmonton" #: ../calendar/zones.h:111 msgid "America/Eirunepe" msgstr "Amerika/Eirunepe" #: ../calendar/zones.h:112 msgid "America/El_Salvador" msgstr "Amerika/Salvador" #: ../calendar/zones.h:113 msgid "America/Fortaleza" msgstr "Amerika/Fortaleza" #: ../calendar/zones.h:114 msgid "America/Glace_Bay" msgstr "Amerika/Glace_Bay" #: ../calendar/zones.h:115 msgid "America/Godthab" msgstr "Amerika/Godthab" #: ../calendar/zones.h:116 msgid "America/Goose_Bay" msgstr "Amerika/Goose_Bay" #: ../calendar/zones.h:117 msgid "America/Grand_Turk" msgstr "Amerika/Grand_Turk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:118 msgid "America/Grenada" msgstr "Amerika/Grenada" #: ../calendar/zones.h:119 msgid "America/Guadeloupe" msgstr "Amerika/Guadeloupe" #: ../calendar/zones.h:120 msgid "America/Guatemala" msgstr "Amerika/Gvatemala" #: ../calendar/zones.h:121 msgid "America/Guayaquil" msgstr "Amerika/Guayaquil" #: ../calendar/zones.h:122 msgid "America/Guyana" msgstr "Amerika/Guyana" #: ../calendar/zones.h:123 msgid "America/Halifax" msgstr "Amerika/Halifax" #: ../calendar/zones.h:124 msgid "America/Havana" msgstr "Amerika/Havana" #: ../calendar/zones.h:125 msgid "America/Hermosillo" msgstr "Amerika/Hermosillo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:126 msgid "America/Indiana/Indianapolis" msgstr "Amerika/Indiana/Indianapolis" #: ../calendar/zones.h:127 msgid "America/Indiana/Knox" msgstr "Amerika/Indiana/Knox" #: ../calendar/zones.h:128 msgid "America/Indiana/Marengo" msgstr "Amerika/Indiana/Marengo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:129 msgid "America/Indiana/Vevay" msgstr "Amerika/Indiana/Vevay" #: ../calendar/zones.h:130 msgid "America/Indianapolis" msgstr "Amerika/Indianapolis" #: ../calendar/zones.h:131 msgid "America/Inuvik" msgstr "Amerika/Inuvik" #: ../calendar/zones.h:132 msgid "America/Iqaluit" msgstr "Amerika/Iqaluit" #: ../calendar/zones.h:133 msgid "America/Jamaica" msgstr "Amerika/Jamajka" #: ../calendar/zones.h:134 msgid "America/Jujuy" msgstr "Amerika/Jujuy" #: ../calendar/zones.h:135 msgid "America/Juneau" msgstr "Ameriška Samoa" #: ../calendar/zones.h:136 msgid "America/Kentucky/Louisville" msgstr "Amerika/Kentucky/Louisville" #: ../calendar/zones.h:137 msgid "America/Kentucky/Monticello" msgstr "Amerika/Kentucky/Monticello" #: ../calendar/zones.h:138 msgid "America/La_Paz" msgstr "Amerika/La_Paz" #: ../calendar/zones.h:139 msgid "America/Lima" msgstr "Amerika/Lima" #: ../calendar/zones.h:140 msgid "America/Los_Angeles" msgstr "Amerika/Los_Angeles" #: ../calendar/zones.h:141 msgid "America/Louisville" msgstr "Amerika/Louisville" #: ../calendar/zones.h:142 msgid "America/Maceio" msgstr "Amerika/Maceio" #: ../calendar/zones.h:143 msgid "America/Managua" msgstr "Amerika/Managua" #: ../calendar/zones.h:144 msgid "America/Manaus" msgstr "Amerika/Manaus" #: ../calendar/zones.h:145 msgid "America/Martinique" msgstr "Amerika/Martinik" #: ../calendar/zones.h:146 msgid "America/Mazatlan" msgstr "Amerika/Mazatlan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:147 msgid "America/Mendoza" msgstr "Amerika/Mendoza" #: ../calendar/zones.h:148 msgid "America/Menominee" msgstr "Amerika/Menominee" #: ../calendar/zones.h:149 msgid "America/Merida" msgstr "Amerika/Merida" #: ../calendar/zones.h:150 msgid "America/Mexico_City" msgstr "Amerika/Mexico_City" #: ../calendar/zones.h:151 msgid "America/Miquelon" msgstr "Amerika/Miquelon" #: ../calendar/zones.h:152 msgid "America/Monterrey" msgstr "Amerika/Monterrey" #: ../calendar/zones.h:153 msgid "America/Montevideo" msgstr "Amerika/Montevideo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:154 msgid "America/Montreal" msgstr "Amerika/Montreal" #: ../calendar/zones.h:155 msgid "America/Montserrat" msgstr "Amerika/Montserrat" #: ../calendar/zones.h:156 msgid "America/Nassau" msgstr "Amerika/Nassau" #: ../calendar/zones.h:157 msgid "America/New_York" msgstr "Amerika/New_York" #: ../calendar/zones.h:158 msgid "America/Nipigon" msgstr "Amerika/Nipigon" #: ../calendar/zones.h:159 msgid "America/Nome" msgstr "Amerika/Nome" #: ../calendar/zones.h:160 msgid "America/Noronha" msgstr "Amerika/Noronha" #: ../calendar/zones.h:161 msgid "America/North_Dakota/Center" msgstr "Amerika/Severna_Dakota/Center" #: ../calendar/zones.h:162 msgid "America/Panama" msgstr "Amerika/Panama" #: ../calendar/zones.h:163 msgid "America/Pangnirtung" msgstr "Amerika/Pangnirtung" #: ../calendar/zones.h:164 msgid "America/Paramaribo" msgstr "Amerika/Paramaribo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:165 msgid "America/Phoenix" msgstr "Amerika/Phoenix" #: ../calendar/zones.h:166 msgid "America/Port-au-Prince" msgstr "Amerika/Port-au-Prince" #: ../calendar/zones.h:167 msgid "America/Port_of_Spain" msgstr "Amerika/Port_of_Spain" #: ../calendar/zones.h:168 msgid "America/Porto_Velho" msgstr "Amerika/Porto_Velho" #: ../calendar/zones.h:169 msgid "America/Puerto_Rico" msgstr "Amerika/Portoriko" #: ../calendar/zones.h:170 msgid "America/Rainy_River" msgstr "Amerika/Rainy_River" #: ../calendar/zones.h:171 msgid "America/Rankin_Inlet" msgstr "Amerika/Rankin_Inlet" #: ../calendar/zones.h:172 msgid "America/Recife" msgstr "Amerika/Recife" #: ../calendar/zones.h:173 msgid "America/Regina" msgstr "Amerika/Regina" #: ../calendar/zones.h:174 msgid "America/Rio_Branco" msgstr "Amerika/Rio_Branco" #: ../calendar/zones.h:175 msgid "America/Rosario" msgstr "Amerika/Rosario" #: ../calendar/zones.h:176 msgid "America/Santiago" msgstr "Amerika/Santiago" #: ../calendar/zones.h:177 msgid "America/Santo_Domingo" msgstr "Amerika/Santo_Domingo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:178 msgid "America/Sao_Paulo" msgstr "Amerika/Sao_Paulo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:179 msgid "America/Scoresbysund" msgstr "Amerika/Scoresbysund" #: ../calendar/zones.h:180 msgid "America/Shiprock" msgstr "Amerika/Shiprock" #: ../calendar/zones.h:181 msgid "America/St_Johns" msgstr "Amerika/St_Johns" #: ../calendar/zones.h:182 msgid "America/St_Kitts" msgstr "Amerika/St_Kitts" #: ../calendar/zones.h:183 msgid "America/St_Lucia" msgstr "Amerika/St_Lucia" #: ../calendar/zones.h:184 msgid "America/St_Thomas" msgstr "Amerika/St_Thomas" #: ../calendar/zones.h:185 msgid "America/St_Vincent" msgstr "Amerika/St_Vincent" #: ../calendar/zones.h:186 msgid "America/Swift_Current" msgstr "Amerika/Swift_Current" #: ../calendar/zones.h:187 msgid "America/Tegucigalpa" msgstr "Amerika/Tegucigalpa" #: ../calendar/zones.h:188 msgid "America/Thule" msgstr "Amerika/Thule" #: ../calendar/zones.h:189 msgid "America/Thunder_Bay" msgstr "Amerika/Thunder_Bay" #: ../calendar/zones.h:190 msgid "America/Tijuana" msgstr "Amerika/Tijuana" #: ../calendar/zones.h:191 msgid "America/Tortola" msgstr "Amerika/Tortola" #: ../calendar/zones.h:192 msgid "America/Vancouver" msgstr "Amerika/Vancouver" #: ../calendar/zones.h:193 msgid "America/Whitehorse" msgstr "Amerika/Whitehorse" #: ../calendar/zones.h:194 msgid "America/Winnipeg" msgstr "Amerika/Winnipeg" #: ../calendar/zones.h:195 msgid "America/Yakutat" msgstr "Amerika/Yakutat" #: ../calendar/zones.h:196 msgid "America/Yellowknife" msgstr "Amerika/Yellowknife" #: ../calendar/zones.h:197 msgid "Antarctica/Casey" msgstr "Antarktika/Casey" #: ../calendar/zones.h:198 msgid "Antarctica/Davis" msgstr "Antarktika/Davis" #: ../calendar/zones.h:199 msgid "Antarctica/DumontDUrville" msgstr "Antarktika/DumontDUrville" #: ../calendar/zones.h:200 msgid "Antarctica/Mawson" msgstr "Antarktika/Mawson" #: ../calendar/zones.h:201 msgid "Antarctica/McMurdo" msgstr "Antarktika/McMurdo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:202 msgid "Antarctica/Palmer" msgstr "Antarktika/Palmer" #: ../calendar/zones.h:203 msgid "Antarctica/South_Pole" msgstr "Antarktika/Južni_pol" #: ../calendar/zones.h:204 msgid "Antarctica/Syowa" msgstr "Antarktika/Syowa" #: ../calendar/zones.h:205 msgid "Antarctica/Vostok" msgstr "Antarktika/Vostok" #: ../calendar/zones.h:206 msgid "Arctic/Longyearbyen" msgstr "Arktika/Longyearbyen" #: ../calendar/zones.h:207 msgid "Asia/Aden" msgstr "Azija/Aden" #: ../calendar/zones.h:208 msgid "Asia/Almaty" msgstr "Azija/Almaty" #: ../calendar/zones.h:209 msgid "Asia/Amman" msgstr "Azija/Amman" #: ../calendar/zones.h:210 msgid "Asia/Anadyr" msgstr "Azija/Anadyr" #: ../calendar/zones.h:211 msgid "Asia/Aqtau" msgstr "Azija/Aqtau" #: ../calendar/zones.h:212 msgid "Asia/Aqtobe" msgstr "Azija/Aqtobe" #: ../calendar/zones.h:213 msgid "Asia/Ashgabat" msgstr "Azija/Ašgabat" #: ../calendar/zones.h:214 msgid "Asia/Baghdad" msgstr "Azija/Bagdad" #: ../calendar/zones.h:215 msgid "Asia/Bahrain" msgstr "Azija/Bahrain" #: ../calendar/zones.h:216 msgid "Asia/Baku" msgstr "Azija/Baku" #: ../calendar/zones.h:217 msgid "Asia/Bangkok" msgstr "Azija/Bangkok" #: ../calendar/zones.h:218 msgid "Asia/Beirut" msgstr "Azija/Bejrut" #: ../calendar/zones.h:219 msgid "Asia/Bishkek" msgstr "Azija/Biškek" #: ../calendar/zones.h:220 msgid "Asia/Brunei" msgstr "Azija/Brunej" #: ../calendar/zones.h:221 msgid "Asia/Calcutta" msgstr "Azija/Kalkuta" #: ../calendar/zones.h:222 msgid "Asia/Choibalsan" msgstr "Azija/Choibalsan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:223 msgid "Asia/Chongqing" msgstr "Azija/Chongqing" #: ../calendar/zones.h:224 msgid "Asia/Colombo" msgstr "Azija/Colombo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:225 msgid "Asia/Damascus" msgstr "Azija/Damask" #: ../calendar/zones.h:226 msgid "Asia/Dhaka" msgstr "Azija/Daka" #: ../calendar/zones.h:227 msgid "Asia/Dili" msgstr "Azija/Dili" #: ../calendar/zones.h:228 msgid "Asia/Dubai" msgstr "Azija/Dubaj" #: ../calendar/zones.h:229 msgid "Asia/Dushanbe" msgstr "Azija/Dušanbej" #: ../calendar/zones.h:230 msgid "Asia/Gaza" msgstr "Azija/Gaza" #: ../calendar/zones.h:231 msgid "Asia/Harbin" msgstr "Azija/Harbin" #: ../calendar/zones.h:232 msgid "Asia/Hong_Kong" msgstr "Azija/Hong_Kong" #: ../calendar/zones.h:233 msgid "Asia/Hovd" msgstr "Azija/Hovd" #: ../calendar/zones.h:234 msgid "Asia/Irkutsk" msgstr "Azija/Irkutsk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:235 msgid "Asia/Istanbul" msgstr "Azija/Istanbul" #: ../calendar/zones.h:236 msgid "Asia/Jakarta" msgstr "Azija/Jakarta" #: ../calendar/zones.h:237 msgid "Asia/Jayapura" msgstr "Azija/Jayapura" #: ../calendar/zones.h:238 msgid "Asia/Jerusalem" msgstr "Azija/Jeruzalem" #: ../calendar/zones.h:239 msgid "Asia/Kabul" msgstr "Azija/Kabul" #: ../calendar/zones.h:240 msgid "Asia/Kamchatka" msgstr "Azija/Kamčatka" #: ../calendar/zones.h:241 msgid "Asia/Karachi" msgstr "Azija/Karači" #: ../calendar/zones.h:242 msgid "Asia/Kashgar" msgstr "Azija/Kashgar" #: ../calendar/zones.h:243 msgid "Asia/Katmandu" msgstr "Azija/Katmandu" #: ../calendar/zones.h:244 msgid "Asia/Krasnoyarsk" msgstr "Azija/Krasnojarsk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:245 msgid "Asia/Kuala_Lumpur" msgstr "Azija/Kuala_Lumpur" #: ../calendar/zones.h:246 msgid "Asia/Kuching" msgstr "Azija/Kuching" #: ../calendar/zones.h:247 msgid "Asia/Kuwait" msgstr "Azija/Kuvajt" #: ../calendar/zones.h:248 msgid "Asia/Macao" msgstr "Azija/Makao" #: ../calendar/zones.h:249 msgid "Asia/Macau" msgstr "Azija/Makau" #: ../calendar/zones.h:250 msgid "Asia/Magadan" msgstr "Azija/Magadan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:251 msgid "Asia/Makassar" msgstr "Azija/Makassar" #: ../calendar/zones.h:252 msgid "Asia/Manila" msgstr "Azija/Manila" #: ../calendar/zones.h:253 msgid "Asia/Muscat" msgstr "Azija/Muscat" #: ../calendar/zones.h:254 msgid "Asia/Nicosia" msgstr "Azija/Nikozija" #: ../calendar/zones.h:255 msgid "Asia/Novosibirsk" msgstr "Azija/Novosibirsk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:256 msgid "Asia/Omsk" msgstr "Azija/Omsk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:257 msgid "Asia/Oral" msgstr "Azija/Ural" #: ../calendar/zones.h:258 msgid "Asia/Phnom_Penh" msgstr "Azija/Phnom_Penh" #: ../calendar/zones.h:259 msgid "Asia/Pontianak" msgstr "Azija/Pontianak" #: ../calendar/zones.h:260 msgid "Asia/Pyongyang" msgstr "Azija/Pjongjang" #: ../calendar/zones.h:261 msgid "Asia/Qatar" msgstr "Azija/Katar" #: ../calendar/zones.h:262 msgid "Asia/Qyzylorda" msgstr "Asia/Qyzylorda" #: ../calendar/zones.h:263 msgid "Asia/Rangoon" msgstr "Azija/Rangoon" #: ../calendar/zones.h:264 msgid "Asia/Riyadh" msgstr "Azija/Riad" #: ../calendar/zones.h:265 msgid "Asia/Saigon" msgstr "Azija/Sajgon" #: ../calendar/zones.h:266 msgid "Asia/Sakhalin" msgstr "Azija/Sakhalin" #: ../calendar/zones.h:267 msgid "Asia/Samarkand" msgstr "Azija/Samarkand" #: ../calendar/zones.h:268 msgid "Asia/Seoul" msgstr "Azija/Seul" #: ../calendar/zones.h:269 msgid "Asia/Shanghai" msgstr "Azija/Shanghai" #: ../calendar/zones.h:270 msgid "Asia/Singapore" msgstr "Azija/Singapur" #: ../calendar/zones.h:271 msgid "Asia/Taipei" msgstr "Azija/Taipei" #: ../calendar/zones.h:272 msgid "Asia/Tashkent" msgstr "Azija/Taškent" #: ../calendar/zones.h:273 msgid "Asia/Tbilisi" msgstr "Azija/Tbilisi" #: ../calendar/zones.h:274 msgid "Asia/Tehran" msgstr "Azija/Teheran" #: ../calendar/zones.h:275 msgid "Asia/Thimphu" msgstr "Azija/Thimphu" #: ../calendar/zones.h:276 msgid "Asia/Tokyo" msgstr "Azija/Tokijo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:277 msgid "Asia/Ujung_Pandang" msgstr "Azija/Ujung_Pandang" #: ../calendar/zones.h:278 msgid "Asia/Ulaanbaatar" msgstr "Azija/Ulan_Bator" #: ../calendar/zones.h:279 msgid "Asia/Urumqi" msgstr "Azija/Urumqi" #: ../calendar/zones.h:280 msgid "Asia/Vientiane" msgstr "Azija/Vientiane" #: ../calendar/zones.h:281 msgid "Asia/Vladivostok" msgstr "Azija/Vladivostok" #: ../calendar/zones.h:282 msgid "Asia/Yakutsk" msgstr "Azija/Yakutsk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:283 msgid "Asia/Yekaterinburg" msgstr "Azija/Ekaterinburg" #: ../calendar/zones.h:284 msgid "Asia/Yerevan" msgstr "Azija/Erevan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:285 msgid "Atlantic/Azores" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Azori" #: ../calendar/zones.h:286 msgid "Atlantic/Bermuda" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Bermudi" #: ../calendar/zones.h:287 msgid "Atlantic/Canary" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Kanarski_otoki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:288 msgid "Atlantic/Cape_Verde" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Zelenortski otoki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:289 msgid "Atlantic/Faeroe" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Ferski_otoki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:290 msgid "Atlantic/Jan_Mayen" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Jan_Mayen" #: ../calendar/zones.h:291 msgid "Atlantic/Madeira" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Madeira" #: ../calendar/zones.h:292 msgid "Atlantic/Reykjavik" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Reykjavik" #: ../calendar/zones.h:293 msgid "Atlantic/South_Georgia" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Južna_Georgia" #: ../calendar/zones.h:294 msgid "Atlantic/St_Helena" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Sveta_Helena" #: ../calendar/zones.h:295 msgid "Atlantic/Stanley" msgstr "Atlantski_ocean/Stanley" #: ../calendar/zones.h:296 msgid "Australia/Adelaide" msgstr "Avstralija/Adelaide" #: ../calendar/zones.h:297 msgid "Australia/Brisbane" msgstr "Avstralia/Brisbane" #: ../calendar/zones.h:298 msgid "Australia/Broken_Hill" msgstr "Avstralija/Broken_Hill" #: ../calendar/zones.h:299 msgid "Australia/Darwin" msgstr "Avstralija/Darwin" #: ../calendar/zones.h:300 msgid "Australia/Hobart" msgstr "Avstralija/Hobart" #: ../calendar/zones.h:301 msgid "Australia/Lindeman" msgstr "Avstralija/Lindeman" #: ../calendar/zones.h:302 msgid "Australia/Lord_Howe" msgstr "Avstralija/Lord_Howe" #: ../calendar/zones.h:303 msgid "Australia/Melbourne" msgstr "Avstralija/Melbourne" #: ../calendar/zones.h:304 msgid "Australia/Perth" msgstr "Avstralija/Perth" #: ../calendar/zones.h:305 msgid "Australia/Sydney" msgstr "Avstralija/Sydney" #: ../calendar/zones.h:306 msgid "Europe/Amsterdam" msgstr "Evropa/Amsterdam" #: ../calendar/zones.h:307 msgid "Europe/Andorra" msgstr "Evropa/Andora" #: ../calendar/zones.h:308 msgid "Europe/Athens" msgstr "Evropa/Atene" #: ../calendar/zones.h:309 msgid "Europe/Belfast" msgstr "Evropa/Belfast" #: ../calendar/zones.h:310 msgid "Europe/Belgrade" msgstr "Evropa/Beograd" #: ../calendar/zones.h:311 msgid "Europe/Berlin" msgstr "Evropa/Berlin" #: ../calendar/zones.h:312 msgid "Europe/Bratislava" msgstr "Evropa/Bratislava" #: ../calendar/zones.h:313 msgid "Europe/Brussels" msgstr "Evropa/Brusel" #: ../calendar/zones.h:314 msgid "Europe/Bucharest" msgstr "Evropa/Bukarešta" #: ../calendar/zones.h:315 msgid "Europe/Budapest" msgstr "Evropa/Budimpešta" #: ../calendar/zones.h:316 msgid "Europe/Chisinau" msgstr "Evropa/Chisinau" #: ../calendar/zones.h:317 msgid "Europe/Copenhagen" msgstr "Evropa/Kobenhavn" #: ../calendar/zones.h:318 msgid "Europe/Dublin" msgstr "Evropa/Dublin" #: ../calendar/zones.h:319 msgid "Europe/Gibraltar" msgstr "Evropa/Gibrlaltar" #: ../calendar/zones.h:320 msgid "Europe/Helsinki" msgstr "Evropa/Helsinki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:321 msgid "Europe/Istanbul" msgstr "Evropa/Istanbul" #: ../calendar/zones.h:322 msgid "Europe/Kaliningrad" msgstr "Evropa/Kaliningrad" #: ../calendar/zones.h:323 msgid "Europe/Kiev" msgstr "Evropa/Kijev" #: ../calendar/zones.h:324 msgid "Europe/Lisbon" msgstr "Evropa/Lizbona" #: ../calendar/zones.h:325 msgid "Europe/Ljubljana" msgstr "Evropa/Ljubljana" #: ../calendar/zones.h:326 msgid "Europe/London" msgstr "Evropa/London" #: ../calendar/zones.h:327 msgid "Europe/Luxembourg" msgstr "Evropa/Luksemburg" #: ../calendar/zones.h:328 msgid "Europe/Madrid" msgstr "Evropa/Madrid" #: ../calendar/zones.h:329 msgid "Europe/Malta" msgstr "Evropa/Malta" #: ../calendar/zones.h:330 msgid "Europe/Minsk" msgstr "Evropa/Minsk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:331 msgid "Europe/Monaco" msgstr "Evropa/Monako" #: ../calendar/zones.h:332 msgid "Europe/Moscow" msgstr "Evropa/Moskva" #: ../calendar/zones.h:333 msgid "Europe/Nicosia" msgstr "Evropa/Nikozija" #: ../calendar/zones.h:334 msgid "Europe/Oslo" msgstr "Evropa/Oslo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:335 msgid "Europe/Paris" msgstr "Evropa/Pariz" #: ../calendar/zones.h:336 msgid "Europe/Prague" msgstr "Evropa/Praga" #: ../calendar/zones.h:337 msgid "Europe/Riga" msgstr "Evropa/Riga" #: ../calendar/zones.h:338 msgid "Europe/Rome" msgstr "Evropa/Rim" #: ../calendar/zones.h:339 msgid "Europe/Samara" msgstr "Evropa/Samara" #: ../calendar/zones.h:340 msgid "Europe/San_Marino" msgstr "Evropa/San_Marino" #: ../calendar/zones.h:341 msgid "Europe/Sarajevo" msgstr "Evropa/Sarajevo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:342 msgid "Europe/Simferopol" msgstr "Evropa/Simferopol" #: ../calendar/zones.h:343 msgid "Europe/Skopje" msgstr "Evropa/Skopje" #: ../calendar/zones.h:344 msgid "Europe/Sofia" msgstr "Evropa/Sofija" #: ../calendar/zones.h:345 msgid "Europe/Stockholm" msgstr "Evropa/Stockholm" #: ../calendar/zones.h:346 msgid "Europe/Tallinn" msgstr "Evropa/Tallinn" #: ../calendar/zones.h:347 msgid "Europe/Tirane" msgstr "Evropa/Tirana" #: ../calendar/zones.h:348 msgid "Europe/Uzhgorod" msgstr "Evropa/Užgorod" #: ../calendar/zones.h:349 msgid "Europe/Vaduz" msgstr "Evropa/Vaduz" #: ../calendar/zones.h:350 msgid "Europe/Vatican" msgstr "Evropa/Vatikan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:351 msgid "Europe/Vienna" msgstr "Evropa/Dunaj" #: ../calendar/zones.h:352 msgid "Europe/Vilnius" msgstr "Evropa/Vilnius" #: ../calendar/zones.h:353 msgid "Europe/Warsaw" msgstr "Evropa/Varšava" #: ../calendar/zones.h:354 msgid "Europe/Zagreb" msgstr "Evropa/Zagreb" #: ../calendar/zones.h:355 msgid "Europe/Zaporozhye" msgstr "Evropa/Zaporožje" #: ../calendar/zones.h:356 msgid "Europe/Zurich" msgstr "Evropa/Zurich" #: ../calendar/zones.h:357 msgid "Indian/Antananarivo" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Antananarivo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:358 msgid "Indian/Chagos" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Chagos" #: ../calendar/zones.h:359 msgid "Indian/Christmas" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Božični otoki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:360 msgid "Indian/Cocos" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Kokosovi otoki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:361 msgid "Indian/Comoro" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Komori" #: ../calendar/zones.h:362 msgid "Indian/Kerguelen" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Kerguelen" #: ../calendar/zones.h:363 msgid "Indian/Mahe" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Mahe" #: ../calendar/zones.h:364 msgid "Indian/Maldives" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Maldivi" #: ../calendar/zones.h:365 msgid "Indian/Mauritius" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Mavricijus" #: ../calendar/zones.h:366 msgid "Indian/Mayotte" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Mayotte" #: ../calendar/zones.h:367 msgid "Indian/Reunion" msgstr "Indijski_ocean/Reunion" #: ../calendar/zones.h:368 msgid "Pacific/Apia" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Apia" #: ../calendar/zones.h:369 msgid "Pacific/Auckland" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Auckland" #: ../calendar/zones.h:370 msgid "Pacific/Chatham" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Chatham" #: ../calendar/zones.h:371 msgid "Pacific/Easter" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Velikonočni otok" #: ../calendar/zones.h:372 msgid "Pacific/Efate" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Efate" #: ../calendar/zones.h:373 msgid "Pacific/Enderbury" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Enderbury" #: ../calendar/zones.h:374 msgid "Pacific/Fakaofo" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Fakaofo" #: ../calendar/zones.h:375 msgid "Pacific/Fiji" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Fidži" #: ../calendar/zones.h:376 msgid "Pacific/Funafuti" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Funafuti" #: ../calendar/zones.h:377 msgid "Pacific/Galapagos" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Galapagos" #: ../calendar/zones.h:378 msgid "Pacific/Gambier" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Gambier" #: ../calendar/zones.h:379 msgid "Pacific/Guadalcanal" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Guadalcanal" #: ../calendar/zones.h:380 msgid "Pacific/Guam" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Gvam" #: ../calendar/zones.h:381 msgid "Pacific/Honolulu" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Honolulu" #: ../calendar/zones.h:382 msgid "Pacific/Johnston" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Johnstonovi_otoki" #: ../calendar/zones.h:383 msgid "Pacific/Kiritimati" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Kiritimati" #: ../calendar/zones.h:384 msgid "Pacific/Kosrae" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Kosrae" #: ../calendar/zones.h:385 msgid "Pacific/Kwajalein" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Kwajalein" #: ../calendar/zones.h:386 msgid "Pacific/Majuro" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Majuro" #: ../calendar/zones.h:387 msgid "Pacific/Marquesas" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Marquesas" #: ../calendar/zones.h:388 msgid "Pacific/Midway" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Midway" #: ../calendar/zones.h:389 msgid "Pacific/Nauru" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Nauru" #: ../calendar/zones.h:390 msgid "Pacific/Niue" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Niue" #: ../calendar/zones.h:391 msgid "Pacific/Norfolk" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Norfolk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:392 msgid "Pacific/Noumea" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Noumea" #: ../calendar/zones.h:393 msgid "Pacific/Pago_Pago" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Pago_Pago" #: ../calendar/zones.h:394 msgid "Pacific/Palau" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Palau" #: ../calendar/zones.h:395 msgid "Pacific/Pitcairn" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Pitcairin" #: ../calendar/zones.h:396 msgid "Pacific/Ponape" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Ponape" #: ../calendar/zones.h:397 msgid "Pacific/Port_Moresby" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Port_Moresby" #: ../calendar/zones.h:398 msgid "Pacific/Rarotonga" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Rarotonga" #: ../calendar/zones.h:399 msgid "Pacific/Saipan" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Saipan" #: ../calendar/zones.h:400 msgid "Pacific/Tahiti" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Tahiti" #: ../calendar/zones.h:401 msgid "Pacific/Tarawa" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Tarawa" #: ../calendar/zones.h:402 msgid "Pacific/Tongatapu" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Tongatapu" #: ../calendar/zones.h:403 msgid "Pacific/Truk" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Truk" #: ../calendar/zones.h:404 msgid "Pacific/Wake" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Wake" #: ../calendar/zones.h:405 msgid "Pacific/Wallis" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Wallis" #: ../calendar/zones.h:406 msgid "Pacific/Yap" msgstr "Tihi_ocean/Yap" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:203 msgid "Save as..." msgstr "Shrani kot ..." #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:276 #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:308 msgid "_Close" msgstr "_Zapri" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:278 msgid "Close the current file" msgstr "Zapri trenutno datoteko" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:283 msgid "New _Message" msgstr "Novo _sporočilo" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:285 msgid "Open New Message window" msgstr "Odpre okno novega sporočila" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:292 ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:937 msgid "Configure Evolution" msgstr "Nastavitve programa Evolution" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:299 msgid "Save the current file" msgstr "Shrani trenutno datoteko" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:304 msgid "Save _As..." msgstr "Shrani _kot ..." #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:306 msgid "Save the current file with a different name" msgstr "Shrani trenutno datoteko z drugim imenom" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:313 msgid "Character _Encoding" msgstr "Znakovno _kodiranje" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:330 msgid "_Print..." msgstr "Na_tisni ..." #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:337 msgid "Print Pre_view" msgstr "Predogled _tiskanja" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:344 msgid "Save as _Draft" msgstr "Shrani kot _osnutek" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:346 msgid "Save as draft" msgstr "Shrani kot osnutek" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:351 msgid "S_end" msgstr "_Pošlji" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:353 msgid "Send this message" msgstr "Pošlje to sporočilo" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:361 msgid "PGP _Encrypt" msgstr "Šifriraj s _PGP" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:363 msgid "Encrypt this message with PGP" msgstr "Šifrira to sporočilo s PGP" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:369 msgid "PGP _Sign" msgstr "_Podpiši s PGP" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:371 msgid "Sign this message with your PGP key" msgstr "Podpiše to sporočilo z vašim ključem PGP" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:377 msgid "_Picture Gallery" msgstr "_Galerija slik" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:379 msgid "Show a collection of pictures that you can drag to your message" msgstr "Pokaži zbirko slik, ki jih lahko povlečete v svoje sporočilo" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:385 msgid "_Prioritize Message" msgstr "Naredi sporočilo _prednostno" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:387 msgid "Set the message priority to high" msgstr "Nastavi prednost sporočila na visoko" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:393 msgid "Re_quest Read Receipt" msgstr "Zaht_evaj povratnico" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:395 msgid "Get delivery notification when your message is read" msgstr "Dobi obvestilo o dostavi, ko je vaše sporočilo prebrano" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:401 msgid "S/MIME En_crypt" msgstr "_Šifriraj s S/MIME" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:403 msgid "Encrypt this message with your S/MIME Encryption Certificate" msgstr "Šifrira to sporočilo z vašim šifrirnim potrdilom S/MIME" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:409 msgid "S/MIME Sig_n" msgstr "Podpis _s S/MIME" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:411 msgid "Sign this message with your S/MIME Signature Certificate" msgstr "Podpiši to sporočilo s svojim potrdilom podpisa S/MIME" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:417 msgid "_Bcc Field" msgstr "Polje _Skp" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:419 msgid "Toggles whether the BCC field is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja SKP" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:425 msgid "_Cc Field" msgstr "Polje _Kp" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:427 msgid "Toggles whether the CC field is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja KP" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:433 msgid "_Reply-To Field" msgstr "Polje o_dgovori-na" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:435 msgid "Toggles whether the Reply-To field is displayed" msgstr "Preklopi prikaz polja Odgovori na" #: ../composer/e-composer-actions.c:494 msgid "Save Draft" msgstr "Shrani osnutek" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:39 msgid "Enter the recipients of the message" msgstr "Vnesite prejemnike sporočila" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:41 msgid "Enter the addresses that will receive a carbon copy of the message" msgstr "Vnesite naslove, ki bodo prejeli kopijo sporočila" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:44 msgid "" "Enter the addresses that will receive a carbon copy of the message without " "appearing in the recipient list of the message" msgstr "" "Vnesite naslove, ki bodo prejeli kopijo sporočila, vendar se ne bodo " "pojavili na seznamu prejemnikov sporočila" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:772 msgid "Fr_om:" msgstr "_Od:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:779 msgid "_Reply-To:" msgstr "Odgovori-_na:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:784 msgid "_To:" msgstr "_Za:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:790 msgid "_Cc:" msgstr "_Kp:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:796 msgid "_Bcc:" msgstr "_Skp:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:801 msgid "_Post To:" msgstr "_Objavi na:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:805 msgid "S_ubject:" msgstr "Z_adeva:" #: ../composer/e-composer-header-table.c:813 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:489 msgid "Si_gnature:" msgstr "_Podpis:" #: ../composer/e-composer-name-header.c:235 msgid "Click here for the address book" msgstr "Kliknite tukaj za imenik" #: ../composer/e-composer-post-header.c:184 msgid "Click here to select folders to post to" msgstr "Kliknite tukaj za izbiro map za objavljanje" #: ../composer/e-msg-composer.c:879 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot sign outgoing message: No signing certificate set for this account" msgstr "" "Odhodnega sporočila ni mogoče podpisati: za ta račun ni nastavljeno nobeno " "potrdilo za podpisovanje" #: ../composer/e-msg-composer.c:888 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot encrypt outgoing message: No encryption certificate set for this " "account" msgstr "" "Odhodnega sporočila ni mogoče šifrirati: za ta račun ni nastavljeno nobeno " "potrdilo za šifriranje" #: ../composer/e-msg-composer.c:1569 ../composer/e-msg-composer.c:1981 msgid "Compose Message" msgstr "Sestavi sporočilo" #: ../composer/e-msg-composer.c:4249 msgid "" "The composer contains a non-text message body, which cannot be edited." msgstr "" "Sestavljalnik vsebuje nebesedilno telo sporočila, ki ga ni mogoče urejati." #: ../composer/e-msg-composer.c:4949 msgid "Untitled Message" msgstr "Neimenovano sporočilo" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:1 msgid "You cannot attach the file "{0}" to this message." msgstr "Sporočilu ni mogoče priložiti datoteke "{0}"." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:2 msgid "The file '{0}' is not a regular file and cannot be sent in a message." msgstr "" "Datoteka '{0}' ni običajna datoteka in je ni mogoče poslati s sporočilom." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Could not retrieve messages to attach from {0}." msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti sporočil za prilaganje iz {0}." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:4 msgid "Because "{1}"." msgstr "Zaradi "{1}"." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Do you want to recover unfinished messages?" msgstr "Ali želite obnoviti nedokončana sporočila?" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "Evolution quit unexpectedly while you were composing a new message. " "Recovering the message will allow you to continue where you left off." msgstr "" "Evolution se je nepričakovano končal med sestavljanjem novega sporočila. " "Obnavljanje sporočila vam bo omogočilo nadaljevanje od tam, kjer ste končali." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:7 msgid "_Do not Recover" msgstr "_Ne obnovi" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:8 msgid "_Recover" msgstr "_Obnovi" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:9 msgid "Could not save to autosave file "{0}"." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče shraniti v datoteko za samodejno shranjevanje "{0}"." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:10 msgid "Error saving to autosave because "{1}"." msgstr "Ni mogoče samodejno shraniti zaradi "{0}"." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:11 msgid "Download in progress. Do you want to send the mail?" msgstr "Poteka prejemanje podatkov. Ali želite poslati pošto?" # pending? #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:12 msgid "" " There are few attachments getting downloaded. Sending the mail will cause " "the mail to be sent without those pending attachments " msgstr "" " Trenutno se prejema več prilog. Pošiljanje pošte bo povzročilo, da bodo " "sporočila poslana brez čakajočih prilog " #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:14 msgid "" "Are you sure you want to discard the message, titled '{0}', you are " "composing?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite prezreti sporočilo '{0}', ki ga sestavljate?" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:15 msgid "" "Closing this composer window will discard the message permanently, unless " "you choose to save the message in your Drafts folder. This will allow you to " "continue the message at a later date." msgstr "" "Zapiranje okna sestavljalnika bo trajno izbrisalo sporočilo, razen če ga " "shranite v mapo Osnutki. V tem primeru boste lahko sporočilo kasneje " "dokončali in poslali." #. Response codes were chosen somewhat arbitrarily. #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:18 msgid "_Continue Editing" msgstr "_Nadaljuj z urejanjem" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:19 msgid "_Save Draft" msgstr "_Shrani osnutek" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:20 msgid "Could not create message." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti sporočila." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:21 msgid "" "Because "{0}", you may need to select different mail options." msgstr "" "Zaradi "{0}", boste morda morali izbrati drugačne možnosti pošte." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:22 msgid "Could not read signature file "{0}"." msgstr "Ni mogoče prebrati datoteke podpisa "{0}"." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:23 msgid "All accounts have been removed." msgstr "Vsi računi so bili odstranjeni." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:24 msgid "You need to configure an account before you can compose mail." msgstr "Pred sestavljanjem pošte morate nastaviti račun." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:25 msgid "An error occurred while saving to your Outbox folder." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med shranjevanjem v vašo mapo odhodne pošte." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:26 msgid "" "The reported error was "{0}". The message has not been sent." msgstr "Javljena napaka je "{0}". Sporočilo ni bilo poslano." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:27 msgid "An error occurred while saving to your Drafts folder." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med shranjevanjem v mapo Osnutki" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:28 msgid "" "The reported error was "{0}". The message has most likely not been " "saved." msgstr "" "Javljena napaka je "{0}". Sporočilo najverjetneje ni bilo " "shranjeno." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:29 msgid "An error occurred while sending. How do you want to proceed?" msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med pošiljanje. Kako želite nadaljevati?" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:30 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:156 msgid "The reported error was "{0}"." msgstr "Poročana napaka je bila "{0}"." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:31 msgid "_Save to Outbox" msgstr "_Shrani v mapo odhodne pošte" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:32 msgid "_Try Again" msgstr "_Poskusi znova" #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:33 msgid "Your message was sent, but an error occurred during post-processing." msgstr "" "Vaše sporočilo je poslano, vendar je prišlo do napake med po-obdelavo." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:34 msgid "Saving message to Outbox." msgstr "Shranjevanje sporočila v mapo odhodne pošte." #: ../composer/mail-composer.error.xml.h:35 msgid "" "The message will be saved to your local Outbox folder, because the " "destination service is currently unavailable. You can send the message by " "clicking the Send/Receive button in Evolution's toolbar." msgstr "" "Sporočilo bo shranjeno v vašo krajevno mapo Odhodna pošta, ker ciljna " "storitev trenutno ni na voljo. Sporočilo lahko pošljete s klikom na gumb " "Pošlji/Prejmi na orodni vrstici Evolution." #: ../data/evolution-alarm-notify.desktop.in.in.h:1 msgid "Evolution Alarm Notify" msgstr "Obvestilo o alarmu Evolution" #: ../data/evolution-alarm-notify.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Calendar event notifications" msgstr "Obvestila dogodkov koledarja" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:1 ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:1033 #: ../modules/mailto-handler/evolution-mailto-handler.c:212 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-private.c:243 msgid "Evolution" msgstr "Evolution" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:2 ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:83 msgid "Groupware Suite" msgstr "Zbirka za skupinsko delo" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:3 msgid "Evolution Mail and Calendar" msgstr "Koledar in pošta Evolution" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:4 msgid "Manage your email, contacts and schedule" msgstr "Upravljajte s pošto, stiki in razporedi" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:5 msgid "mail;calendar;contact;addressbook;task;" msgstr "pošta;koledar;stik;imenik;opravek;" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:6 msgid "Compose New Message" msgstr "Sestavi novo sporočilo" #: ../data/evolution.desktop.in.in.h:7 ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:453 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:304 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view.c:372 msgid "Contacts" msgstr "Stiki" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Enable address formatting" msgstr "Omogoči oblikovanje naslovov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "Whether addresses should be formatted according to standard in their " "destination country" msgstr "Ali naj bodo naslovi oblikovani glede na standard ciljne države" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Autocomplete length" msgstr "Dolžina za samodejno dopolnjevanje" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "The number of characters that must be typed before Evolution will attempt to " "autocomplete." msgstr "" "Število znakov, ki jih je treba vnesti preden Evolution poskusi samodejno " "dopolniti vnos." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Show autocompleted name with an address" msgstr "Pokaži samodejno dopolnjeno ime z elektronskim naslovom" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Whether force showing the mail address with the name of the autocompleted " "contact in the entry." msgstr "" "Ali naj bo elektronski naslov prikazan z imenom samodejno dopolnjenega stika " "v vnosu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "URI for the folder last used in the select names dialog" msgstr "" "URI mape, ki je bila nazadnje uporabljena v pogovornem oknu za izbiro imen" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "URI for the folder last used in the select names dialog." msgstr "" "URI mape, ki je bila nazadnje uporabljena v pogovornem oknu za izbiro imen." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Contact layout style" msgstr "Slog razporeditve stikov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "" "The layout style determines where to place the preview pane in relation to " "the contact list. \"0\" (Classic View) places the preview pane below the " "contact list. \"1\" (Vertical View) places the preview pane next to the " "contact list." msgstr "" "Slog razporeditve določa kje bo postavljen pladenj predogleda glede na " "seznam stikov. Vrednost \"0\" predstavlja običajni pogled s pladnjem " "predogleda pod seznamom stikov, \"1\" pa predstavlja navpični slog, kjer sta " "okni eno ob drugem." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Contact preview pane position (horizontal)" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda stikov (vodoravno)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Position of the contact preview pane when oriented horizontally." msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda stikov, kadar je usmerjen vodoravno." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Contact preview pane position (vertical)" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda stikov (navpično)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Position of the contact preview pane when oriented vertically." msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda stikov, kadar je usmerjen navpično." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Show maps" msgstr "Pokaži zemljevide" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "Whether to show maps in preview pane" msgstr "Ali naj bodo prikazani zemljevidi na pladnju predogleda" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Primary address book" msgstr "Osnovni imenik stikov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "" "The UID of the selected (or \"primary\") address book in the sidebar of the " "\"Contacts\" view" msgstr "" "UID izbranega (ali \"glavnega\") imenika v stranski vrstici pogleda " "\"Stiki\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "Show preview pane" msgstr "Pokaži pladenj predogleda" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Whether to show the preview pane." msgstr "Ali naj bo prikazan pladenj predogleda." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.bogofilter.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Convert mail messages to Unicode" msgstr "Pretvori poštna sporočila v znakovni nabor Unicode" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.bogofilter.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "Convert message text to Unicode UTF-8 to unify spam/ham tokens coming from " "different character sets." msgstr "" "Pretvori sporočilo v Unicode UTF-8 za poenotenje žetonov neželene pošte, ki " "so v drugih naborih znakov." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Save directory for reminder audio" msgstr "Shrani mapo za zvočne opomnike" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Directory for saving reminder audio files" msgstr "Mapa za shranjevanje zvočnih datotek opomnikov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Birthday and anniversary reminder value" msgstr "Vrednost opomnika rojstnih dni in obletnic" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Number of units for determining a birthday or anniversary reminder" msgstr "Število enot za določanje opomnika za rojstni dan ali obletnico." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Birthday and anniversary reminder units" msgstr "Enote opomnika rojstnih dni in obletnic" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Units for a birthday or anniversary reminder, \"minutes\", \"hours\" or " "\"days\"" msgstr "" "Enote opomnika za rojstni dan ali obletnico: \"minute\", \"ure\" ali " "\"dnevi\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Compress weekends in month view" msgstr "Stisni vikende v mesečnem pogledu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "" "Whether to compress weekends in the month view, which puts Saturday and " "Sunday in the space of one weekday" msgstr "" "Ali naj bodo vikendi v mesečnem pogledu stisnjeni tako, da bosta sobota in " "nedelja zavzemala prostor enega dneva." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Ask for confirmation when deleting items" msgstr "Vprašaj za potrditev ob brisanju predmetov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Whether to ask for confirmation when deleting an appointment or task" msgstr "Ali naj se zahteva potrditev ob brisanju sestankov in nalog." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Confirm expunge" msgstr "Potrdi uničenje" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Whether to ask for confirmation when expunging appointments and tasks" msgstr "Ali naj se zahteva potrditev ob uničenju sestankov in nalog." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Month view vertical pane position" msgstr "Položaj navpičnega pladnja v mesečnem pogledu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "" "Position of the vertical pane, between the calendar lists and the date " "navigator calendar" msgstr "" "Položaj navpičnega pladnja med seznami koledarja in krmarjem datumov " "koledarja." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Workday end hour" msgstr "Ura konca delovnega dne" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "Hour the workday ends on, in twenty four hour format, 0 to 23" msgstr "Ura, ko se konča delovni dan (od 0 do 23)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Workday end minute" msgstr "Minuta konca delovnega dne" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Minute the workday ends on, 0 to 59." msgstr "Minuta, ko se konča delovni dan (od 0 do 59)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "Workday start hour" msgstr "Ura začetka delovnega dne" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Hour the workday starts on, in twenty four hour format, 0 to 23." msgstr "Ura, ko se začne delovni dan (od 0 do 23)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "Workday start minute" msgstr "Minuta začetka delovnega dne" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:22 msgid "Minute the workday starts on, 0 to 59." msgstr "Minuta, ko se začne delovni dan (od 0 do 59)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:23 msgid "The second timezone for a Day View" msgstr "Drug časovni pas v dnevnem pogledu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "" "Shows the second time zone in a Day View, if set. Value is similar to one " "used in a 'timezone' key" msgstr "" "V dnevnem pogledu prikaže drug časovni pas, če je nastavljen. Vrednost je " "podobna vrednosti ključa 'timezone'." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Recently used second time zones in a Day View" msgstr "Nedavno uporabljeni drugi časovni pasovi v dnevnem pogledu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:26 msgid "List of recently used second time zones in a Day View" msgstr "Seznam nedavno uporabljenih drugih časovnih pasov v dnevnem pogledu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:27 msgid "Maximum number of recently used timezones to remember" msgstr "Največje število nedavno uporabljenih časovnih pasov za pomnjenje." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:28 msgid "" "Maximum number of recently used timezones to remember in a 'day-second-" "zones' list" msgstr "" "Največje število nedavno uporabljenih časovnih pasov na seznamu drugotnih " "časovnih pasov za pomnjenje" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:29 msgid "Default reminder value" msgstr "Privzeta vrednost opomnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:30 msgid "Number of units for determining a default reminder" msgstr "Število enot za določanje privzetega opomnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:31 msgid "Default reminder units" msgstr "Privzete enote opomnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:32 msgid "Units for a default reminder, \"minutes\", \"hours\" or \"days\"" msgstr "Enote privzetega opomnika: \"minute\", \"ure\" ali \"dnevi\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:33 msgid "Show categories field in the event/meeting/task editor" msgstr "Pokaži polje kategorij v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:34 msgid "Whether to show categories field in the event/meeting editor" msgstr "Ali naj se prikaže polje kategorij v urejevalniku dogodkov/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:35 msgid "Show Role field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Pokaži polje vloga v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:36 msgid "Whether to show role field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Ali naj se prikaže polje vloga v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:37 msgid "Show RSVP field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Pokaži polje RSVP v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:38 msgid "Whether to show RSVP field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Ali naj se prikaže polje RSVP v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:39 msgid "Show status field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Pokaži polje stanja v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:40 msgid "Whether to show status field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "" "Ali naj se prikaže polje stanja v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:41 msgid "Show timezone field in the event/meeting editor" msgstr "Pokaži polje časovnega pasu v urejevalniku dogodkov/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:42 msgid "Whether to show timezone field in the event/meeting editor" msgstr "" "Ali naj se v urejevalniku dogodkov/srečanj prikaže polje časovnega pasu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:43 msgid "Show type field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Pokaži polje vrsta v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:44 msgid "Whether to show type field in the event/task/meeting editor" msgstr "Ali naj se v urejevalniku dogodkov/nalog/srečanj prikaže polje vrsta" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:45 msgid "Hide completed tasks" msgstr "Skrij končane naloge" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:46 msgid "Whether to hide completed tasks in the tasks view" msgstr "Ali naj bodo dokončane naloge skrite v pogledu nalog." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:47 msgid "Hide task units" msgstr "Skrij enote nalog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:48 msgid "" "Units for determining when to hide tasks, \"minutes\", \"hours\" or \"days\"" msgstr "" "Enote za določanje skrivanja nalog \"minute\", \"ure\" ali \"dnevi\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:49 msgid "Hide task value" msgstr "Skrij vrednost nalog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:50 msgid "Number of units for determining when to hide tasks" msgstr "Število enot za določanje, kdaj so naloge skrite." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:51 msgid "Horizontal pane position" msgstr "Položaj vodoravnega pladnja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:52 msgid "" "Position of the horizontal pane, between the date navigator calendar and the " "task list when not in the month view, in pixels" msgstr "" "Položaj vodoravnega pladnja med krmarjem datumov koledarja in seznamom " "nalog, kadar ni v mesečnem pogledu v točkah." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:53 msgid "Last reminder time" msgstr "Zadnji čas opomnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:54 msgid "Time the last reminder ran, in time_t" msgstr "Čas, ko je tekel zadnji opomnik, v time_t." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:55 msgid "Marcus Bains Line Color - Day View" msgstr "Barva črte Marcusa Baina - dnevni pogled" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:56 msgid "Color to draw the Marcus Bains line in the Day View" msgstr "Barva črt Marcusa Baina v dnevnem pogledu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:57 msgid "Marcus Bains Line Color - Time bar" msgstr "Barva črte Marcusa Baina - vrstica časa" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:58 msgid "" "Color to draw the Marcus Bains Line in the Time bar (empty for default)" msgstr "" "Barva črt Marcusa Baina v vrstici časa (prazno za privzeto vrednost)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:59 msgid "Marcus Bains Line" msgstr "Črta Marcusa Baina" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:60 msgid "" "Whether to draw the Marcus Bains Line (line at current time) in the calendar" msgstr "" "Ali naj se v koledarju izrišejo črte Marcusa Baina (črta ob trenutnem času)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:61 msgid "Memo preview pane position (horizontal)" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda opomnikov (vodoravno)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:62 msgid "Position of the task preview pane when oriented horizontally" msgstr "Položaj pladnja nalog, kadar je ta usmerjen vodoravno." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:63 msgid "Memo layout style" msgstr "Slog razporeditve opomnikov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:64 msgid "" "The layout style determines where to place the preview pane in relation to " "the memo list. \"0\" (Classic View) places the preview pane below the memo " "list. \"1\" (Vertical View) places the preview pane next to the memo list" msgstr "" "Slog razporeditve določa kje sta postavljena pladenj predogleda in seznam " "opomnikov. Vrednost \"0\" predstavlja običajni pogled s pladnjem predogleda " "pod seznamom opomnikov, \"1\" pa predstavlja navpični slog, kjer sta okni " "eno ob drugem." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:65 msgid "Memo preview pane position (vertical)" msgstr "Položaj okna predogleda opomnikov (navpično)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:66 msgid "Position of the memo preview pane when oriented vertically" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda opomnikov, kadar je ta usmerjen navpično." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:67 msgid "Month view horizontal pane position" msgstr "Položaj vodoravnega pladnja v mesečnem pogledu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:68 msgid "" "Position of the horizontal pane, between the view and the date navigator " "calendar and task list in the month view, in pixels" msgstr "" "Položaj vodoravnega pladnja med pogledom in krmarjem datumov koledarja ter " "seznamom nalog v mesečnemu pogledu v točkah." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:69 msgid "Scroll Month View by a week, not by a month" msgstr "" "Ali naj drsenje v mesečnem pogledu poteka po tednu namesto po mesecu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:70 msgid "Whether to scroll a Month View by a week, not by a month" msgstr "" "Ali naj drsenje v mesečnem pogledu poteka po tednu namesto po mesecu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:71 msgid "Reminder programs" msgstr "Programi za opomnike" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:72 msgid "Programs that are allowed to be run by reminders" msgstr "Programi, ki jih lahko zaženejo opomniki." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:73 msgid "Show display reminders in notification tray" msgstr "Pokaži zaslonske opomnike v obvestilni vrstici" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:74 msgid "Whether or not to use the notification tray for display reminders" msgstr "Ali naj bo za zaslonske opomnike uporabljena obvestilna vrstica." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:75 msgid "Preferred New button item" msgstr "Prednostni predmet novega gumba" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:76 msgid "Name of the preferred New toolbar button item" msgstr "Ime prednostnega novega gumba orodne vrstice" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:77 msgid "Primary calendar" msgstr "Osnovni koledar" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:78 msgid "" "The UID of the selected (or \"primary\") calendar in the sidebar of the " "\"Calendar\" view" msgstr "" "UID izbranega (ali \"glavnega\") seznama koledarjev v stranski vrstici " "pogleda \"Koledar\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:79 msgid "Primary memo list" msgstr "Osnovni seznam opomnikov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:80 msgid "" "The UID of the selected (or \"primary\") memo list in the sidebar of the " "\"Memos\" view" msgstr "" "UID izbranega (ali \"glavnega\") seznama opomnikov v stranski vrstici " "pogleda \"Opomniki\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:81 msgid "Primary task list" msgstr "Osnovni seznam nalog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:82 msgid "" "The UID of the selected (or \"primary\") task list in the sidebar of the " "\"Tasks\" view" msgstr "" "UID izbranega (ali \"glavnega\") seznama nalog v stranski vrstici pogleda " "\"Naloge\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:83 msgid "Free/busy template URL" msgstr "URL predloge zasedenosti" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:85 #, no-c-format msgid "" "The URL template to use as a free/busy data fallback, %u is replaced by the " "user part of the mail address and %d is replaced by the domain" msgstr "" "Predloga URL za določanje stanja zasedenosti. Niz %u se nadomesti z " "uporabnikovim delom naslova elektronske pošte, %d pa z domeno." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:86 msgid "Recurrent Events in Italic" msgstr "Ponavljajoči se dogodki so zapisani v ležeči pisavi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:87 msgid "" "Show days with recurrent events in italic font in bottom left calendar" msgstr "" "Pokaži dneve s ponavljajočimi se dogodki v ležeči pisavi v spodnjem levem " "koledarju." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:88 msgid "Search range for time-based searching in years" msgstr "Iskanje razpona za časovno osnovana iskanja v letih" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:89 msgid "" "How many years can the time-based search go forward or backward from " "currently selected day when searching for another occurrence; default is ten " "years" msgstr "" "Koliko let se lahko iskanje na osnovi časa pomika naprej ali nazaj s " "trenutno izbranega dneva med iskanjem druge pojavitve; privzeto je deset let" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:90 msgid "Show appointment end times in week and month views" msgstr "Pokaži čase koncev sestankov v tedenskih in mesečnih pogledih" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:91 msgid "Whether to display the end time of events in the week and month views" msgstr "" "Ali naj se prikažejo časi konca dogodkov v tedenskih in mesečnih pogledih" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:92 msgid "Show the memo preview pane" msgstr "Pokaži pladenj predogleda opomnikov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:93 msgid "If \"true\", show the memo preview pane in the main window" msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoča prikaz pladnja predogleda opomnikov v glavnem oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:94 msgid "Show the task preview pane" msgstr "Pokaži pladenj predogleda nalog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:95 msgid "If \"true\", show the task preview pane in the main window" msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoča prikaz pladnja predogleda nalog v glavnem oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:96 msgid "Show week numbers in Day View, Work Week View, and Date Navigator" msgstr "" "Pokaži številke tednov v dnevnem pogledu, pogledu delovnega tedna in krmarju " "koledarja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:97 msgid "Whether to show week numbers in various places in the Calendar" msgstr "" "Ali naj bodo številke tednov prikazane na različnih mestih koledarja." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:98 msgid "Vertical position for the tag pane" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda stikov (navpično)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:99 msgid "Highlight tasks due today" msgstr "Poudari naloge, ki zakasnijo danes" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:100 msgid "" "Whether highlight tasks due today with a special color (task-due-today-color)" msgstr "Ali naj se naloge, ki zakasnijo danes, poudarijo s posebno barvo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:101 msgid "Tasks due today color" msgstr "Barva nalog, ki zakasnijo danes" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:102 msgid "" "Background color of tasks that are due today, in \"#rrggbb\" format. Used " "together with task-due-today-highlight" msgstr "" "Barva ozadja nalog, ki zakasnijo danes, v obliki \"#rrggbb\". Uporabljeno " "skupaj z možnostjo poudarjanja danes zakasnelih nalog." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:103 msgid "Task preview pane position (horizontal)" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda nalog (vodoravno)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:104 msgid "Task layout style" msgstr "Slog razporeditve nalog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:105 msgid "" "The layout style determines where to place the preview pane in relation to " "the task list. \"0\" (Classic View) places the preview pane below the task " "list. \"1\" (Vertical View) places the preview pane next to the task list" msgstr "" "Slog razporeditve določa kje sta postavljena pladenj predogleda in seznam " "nalog. Vrednost \"0\" predstavlja običajni pogled s pladnjem predogleda pod " "seznamom nalog, \"1\" pa predstavlja navpični slog, kjer sta okni eno ob " "drugem." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:106 msgid "Task preview pane position (vertical)" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda nalog (navpično)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:107 msgid "Position of the task preview pane when oriented vertically" msgstr "Položaj pladnja predogleda nalog, kadar je ta usmerjen navpično." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:108 msgid "Highlight overdue tasks" msgstr "Poudari zakasnele naloge" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:109 msgid "" "Whether highlight overdue tasks with a special color (task-overdue-color)" msgstr "Ali naj se zakasnjene naloge poudarijo s posebno barvo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:110 msgid "Overdue tasks color" msgstr "Barva zakasnelih nalog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:111 msgid "" "Background color of tasks that are overdue, in \"#rrggbb\" format. Used " "together with task-overdue-highlight." msgstr "" "Barva ozadja zakasnjenih nalog v obliki \"#rrggbb\". Uporabljeno skupaj z " "možnostjo poudarjanja zakasnjenih nalog." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:112 msgid "Time divisions" msgstr "Delitve časa" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:113 msgid "Intervals shown in Day and Work Week views, in minutes" msgstr "" "Časovni razmiki prikazani v dnevnemu pogledu in pogledu delovnega tedna v " "minutah." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:114 msgid "Timezone" msgstr "Časovni pas" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:115 msgid "" "The default timezone to use for dates and times in the calendar, as an " "untranslated Olson timezone database location like \"America/New York\"" msgstr "" "Privzet časovni pas za uporabo časov in datumov v koledarju kot neprevedena " "podatkovna zbirka časovnih pasov Olsen, kot npr. \"America/New York\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:116 msgid "Twenty four hour time format" msgstr "24-urna oblika časa" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:117 msgid "" "Whether to show times in twenty four hour format instead of using am/pm" msgstr "Ali naj bo čas prikazan v 24-urni obliki namesto DOP/POP." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:118 msgid "Birthday and anniversary reminder" msgstr "Opomnik rojstnih dni in obletnic" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:119 msgid "Whether to set a reminder for birthdays and anniversaries" msgstr "Ali naj se nastavi opomnik za rojstne dneve in obletnice." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:120 msgid "Default appointment reminder" msgstr "Privzet opomnik za sestanke" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:121 msgid "Whether to set a default reminder for appointments" msgstr "Ali naj se nastavi privzet opomnik za sestanke." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:122 msgid "Use system timezone" msgstr "Uporabi sistemski časovni pas" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:123 msgid "Use the system timezone instead of the timezone selected in Evolution" msgstr "" "Uporabi sistemski časovni pas namesto območja določenega v programu " "Evolution." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:124 msgid "First day of the week" msgstr "Prvi dan tedna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:125 msgid "Monday is a work day" msgstr "Ponedeljek je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:126 msgid "Tuesday is a work day" msgstr "Torek je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:127 msgid "Wednesday is a work day" msgstr "Sreda je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:128 msgid "Thursday is a work day" msgstr "Četrtek je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:129 msgid "Friday is a work day" msgstr "Petek je je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:130 msgid "Saturday is a work day" msgstr "Sobota je je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:131 msgid "Sunday is a work day" msgstr "Nedelja je je delovni dan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:132 msgid "(Deprecated) First day of the week, from Sunday (0) to Saturday (6)" msgstr "(Opuščeno) Prvi dan tedna, od nedelje (0) do sobote (6)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:133 msgid "" "This key was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use " "\"week-start-day-name\" instead." msgstr "" "Ta ključ je bil opuščen v različici 3.10 in ni več v uporabi. Namesto tega " "uporabite \"teden-začetni-dan-ime\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:134 msgid "(Deprecated) Work days" msgstr "(Opuščeno) Delovni dnevi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:135 msgid "" "Days on which the start and end of work hours should be indicated. (This key " "was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use the \"work-" "day-monday\", \"work-day-tuesday\", etc. keys instead.)" msgstr "" "Dnevi, na katere naj se prikaže začetek in konec delovnih ur. (Ta ključ je " "bil opuščen v različici 3.10 in ni več v uporabi. Namesto tega uporabite " "\"delovni-dan-ponedeljek\", \"delovni-dan-torek\" itd.)" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Previous Evolution version" msgstr "Predhodna različica Evolution" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "The most recently used version of Evolution, expressed as " "\"major.minor.micro\". This is used for data and settings migration from " "older to newer versions." msgstr "" "Najbolj nedavno uporabljena različica programa Evolution, izražena kot " "\"glavna.manjša.mikro\". To se uporablja za selitev podatkov in nastavitev " "iz starejših v novejše različice." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "List of disabled plugins" msgstr "Seznam onemogočenih vstavkov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "The list of disabled plugins in Evolution" msgstr "Seznam privzeto onemogočenih vstavkov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "The window's X coordinate" msgstr "Koordinata X okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "The window's Y coordinate" msgstr "Koordinata Y okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "The window's width in pixels" msgstr "Širina okna v točkah." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "The window's height in pixels" msgstr "Višina okna v točkah." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Whether the window is maximized" msgstr "Ali je okno razpeto." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.importer.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Gnome Calendar's calendar import done" msgstr "Uvoz koledarja Gnome je uspešno končan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.importer.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Whether calendar from Gnome Calendar has been imported or not" msgstr "Ali je koledar Gnome uvožen ali ne" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.importer.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Gnome Calendar's tasks import done" msgstr "Uvoz nalog koledarja Gnome je uspešno končan" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.importer.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Whether tasks from Gnome Calendar have been imported or not" msgstr "Ali so bile naloge iz programa Gnome koledar uvožene ali ne" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Check whether Evolution is the default mailer" msgstr "Preveri, ali je Evolution privzet poštni odjemalec" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "Every time Evolution starts, check whether or not it is the default mailer." msgstr "" "Ob vsakem zagonu Evolutiona preveri, ali je privzeti poštni odjemalec." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Default charset in which to compose messages" msgstr "Privzeti znakovni nabor za sestavljanje sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Default charset in which to compose messages." msgstr "Privzeti znakovni nabor za sestavljanje sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Path where picture gallery should search for its content" msgstr "Pot za iskanje vsebine galerije slik" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "This value can be an empty string, which means it'll use the system Picture " "folder, usually set to ~/Pictures. This folder will be also used when the " "set path is not pointing to the existent folder" msgstr "" "Ta vrednost je lahko prazen niz. To pomeni, da bo uporabljena sistemska mapa " "slik, običajno ~/Slike. Ta mapa bo uporabljena tudi, ko nastavljena pot ne " "kaže na obstoječo mapo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Spell check inline" msgstr "Preverjaj črkovanje besedila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Draw spelling error indicators on words as you type." msgstr "Med pisanjem podčrtaj napačno črkovane besede." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Automatic link recognition" msgstr "Samodejno prepoznavanje povezav" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Recognize links in text and replace them." msgstr "Prepoznaj povezave v besedilu in jih zamenjaj." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Automatic emoticon recognition" msgstr "Samodejno prepoznavanje izraznih ikon" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Recognize emoticons in text and replace them with images." msgstr "Prepoznaj izrazne ikone v besedilu in jih zamenjaj s slikami." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Attribute message" msgstr "Sporočilo pripisa." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "" "The text that is inserted when replying to a message, attributing the " "message to the original author" msgstr "" "Besedilo, ki je vstavljeno pri odgovoru na sporočilo, ki pripisuje sporočilo " "izvirnemu avtorju." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Forward message" msgstr "Posredovano sporočilo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "" "The text that is inserted when forwarding a message, saying that the " "forwarded message follows" msgstr "" "Besedilo, ki je vstavljeno ob posredovanju sporočila, ki pravi, da sledi " "posredovano sporočilo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Original message" msgstr "Izvirno sporočilo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "" "The text that is inserted when replying to a message (top posting), saying " "that the original message follows" msgstr "" "Besedilo, ki je vstavljeno pri odgovarjanju na sporočilo (vrhnje " "pošiljanje), ki pravi, da sledi izvirno sporočilo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "Group Reply replies to list" msgstr "Skupinski odgovor je odgovor na dopisni seznam" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "" "Instead of the normal \"Reply to All\" behaviour, this option will make the " "'Group Reply' toolbar button try to reply only to the mailing list through " "which you happened to receive the copy of the message to which you're " "replying." msgstr "" "Namesto običajnega \"odgovori vsem\", možnost omogoča ustvarjanje gumba " "orodne vrstice za 'skupinski odgovor' za pošiljanje sporočila le na dopisni " "seznam preko katerega je bilo prvotno sporočilo prejeto." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "Put the cursor at the bottom of replies" msgstr "Postavi kazalec na dno odgovorov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:22 msgid "" "Users get all up in arms over where the cursor should go when replying to a " "message. This determines whether the cursor is placed at the top of the " "message or the bottom." msgstr "" "Uporabniki so različnih mnenj glede mesta kazalca pri odgovorih na " "sporočila. Ta možnost določa ali naj bo kazalec na vrhu ali na dnu sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:23 msgid "Always request read receipt" msgstr "Vedno zahtevaj povratnico branja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "" "Whether a read receipt request gets added to every message by default." msgstr "Ali se povratnica privzeto samodejno doda k vsakemu sporočilu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Send HTML mail by default" msgstr "Pošto privzeto pošiljaj v obliki HTML" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:26 msgid "Send HTML mail by default." msgstr "Pošto privzeto pošiljaj v obliki HTML." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:27 msgid "Spell checking color" msgstr "Barva preverjanja črkovanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:28 msgid "Underline color for misspelled words when using inline spelling." msgstr "Barva podčrtane narobe zapisane besede med uporabo črkovalnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:29 msgid "Spell checking languages" msgstr "Jeziki za preverjanje črkovanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:30 msgid "List of dictionary language codes used for spell checking." msgstr "Seznam jezikovnih kod slovarjev uporabljenih za črkovanje." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:31 msgid "Show \"Bcc\" field when sending a mail message" msgstr "Pokaži polje \"Skp\" pri pošiljanju poštnega sporočila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:32 msgid "" "Show the \"Bcc\" field when sending a mail message. This is controlled from " "the View menu when a mail account is chosen." msgstr "" "Pokaži polje \"Skp\" pri pošiljanju poštnega sporočila. Možnost je mogoče " "nastaviti v meniju Pogled, ko je izbran poštni račun." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:33 msgid "Show \"Cc\" field when sending a mail message" msgstr "Pokaži polje \"Kp\" pri pošiljanju poštnega sporočila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:34 msgid "" "Show the \"Cc\" field when sending a mail message. This is controlled from " "the View menu when a mail account is chosen." msgstr "" "Pokaži polje \"Kp\" pri pošiljanju poštnega sporočila. Možnost je mogoče " "nastaviti v meniju Pogled, ko je izbran poštni račun." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:35 msgid "Show \"Reply To\" field when sending a mail message" msgstr "Pokaži polje \"Odgovori\" pri pošiljanju poštnega sporočila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:36 msgid "" "Show the \"Reply To\" field when sending a mail message. This is controlled " "from the View menu when a mail account is chosen." msgstr "" "Pokaži polje \"Odgovori\" pri pošiljanju poštnega sporočila. Možnost je " "mogoče nastaviti v meniju Pogled, ko je izbran poštni račun." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:37 msgid "Show \"From\" field when posting to a newsgroup" msgstr "Pokaži polje \"Od\" pri objavi na novičarski skupini" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:38 msgid "" "Show the \"From\" field when posting to a newsgroup. This is controlled from " "the View menu when a news account is chosen." msgstr "" "Pokaži polje \"Od\" pri objavi na novičarski skupini. Možnost je mogoče " "nastaviti v meniju Pogled, ko je izbran poštni račun." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:39 msgid "Show \"Reply To\" field when posting to a newsgroup" msgstr "Pokaži polje \"Odgovori\" pri objavi na novičarski skupini" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:40 msgid "" "Show the \"Reply To\" field when posting to a newsgroup. This is controlled " "from the View menu when a news account is chosen." msgstr "" "Pokaži polje \"Odgovori\" pri objavi na novičarski skupini. Možnost je " "mogoče nastaviti v meniju Pogled, ko je izbran poštni račun." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:41 msgid "Digitally sign replies when the original message is signed" msgstr "" "Digitalno podpiši odgovore sporočil, kadar je podpisano tudi izvirno " "sporočilo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:42 msgid "" "Automatically enable PGP or S/MIME signatures when replying to a message " "which is also PGP or S/MIME signed." msgstr "" "Samodejno omogoči podpise PGP ali S/MIME pri odgovarjanju na sporočilo, ki " "je bilo prav tako podpisano s PGP ali S/MIME" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:43 msgid "Encode filenames in an Outlook/GMail way" msgstr "Kodiraj imena datotek v načinu MS Outlook/GMail" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:44 msgid "" "Encode filenames in the mail headers same as Outlook or GMail do, to let " "them display correctly filenames with UTF-8 letters sent by Evolution, " "because they do not follow the RFC 2231, but use the incorrect RFC 2047 " "standard." msgstr "" "Možnost omogoča kodiranje imen datotek v glavi sporočila na enak način kot v " "MS Outlooku in Gmailu. To MS Outlooku in GMailu omogoča pravilen prikaz imen " "z znaki v naboru UTF-8, ki jih pošilja program Evolution. Odjemalca " "uporabljata namesto RFC 2231 neveljaven standard RFC 2047." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:45 msgid "Put personalized signatures at the top of replies" msgstr "Postavi poosebljene podpise na vrh odgovorov" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:46 msgid "" "Users get all up in arms over where their signature should go when replying " "to a message. This determines whether the signature is placed at the top of " "the message or the bottom." msgstr "" "Uporabniki so različnih mnenj glede mesta podpisa pri odgovorih na " "sporočila. Ta možnost določa ali naj bo podpis na vrhu ali na dnu sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:47 msgid "Do not add signature delimiter" msgstr "Ne dodaj razmejevalnika podpisa" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:48 msgid "" "Set to TRUE in case you do not want to add signature delimiter before your " "signature when composing a mail." msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost pri sestavljanju sporočila onemogoči dodajanje razmejilnika " "podpisa pred podpis." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:49 msgid "Ignore list Reply-To:" msgstr "Prezri seznam odgovori-na:" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:50 msgid "" "Some mailing lists set a Reply-To: header to trick users into sending " "replies to the list, even when they ask Evolution to make a private reply. " "Setting this option to TRUE will attempt to ignore such Reply-To: headers, " "so that Evolution will do as you ask it. If you use the private reply " "action, it will reply privately, while if you use the 'Reply to List' action " "it will do that. It works by comparing the Reply-To: header with a List-" "Post: header, if there is one." msgstr "" "Nekateri dopisni seznami določajo možnost odgovori-na: s katerim se " "sporočila pošiljajo na seznam tudi, če je izbrana možnost zasebnega " "sporočila pošiljatelju. Izbrana možnost poskuša prezreti odgovarjanje na " "naslov dopisnega seznama. Program Evolution bo zahteval potrdilo za " "pošiljanje na zasebni naslov ali na dopisni seznam.." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:51 msgid "List of localized 'Re'" msgstr "Seznam krajevno prilagojenih okrajšanih predpon 'Re:'" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:52 msgid "" "Comma-separated list of localized 'Re' abbreviations to skip in a subject " "text when replying to a message, as an addition to the standard \"Re\" " "prefix. An example is 'SV,AV'." msgstr "" "Z vejico ločen seznam krajevno prilagojenih okrajšanih predpon za odgovor na " "sporočilo v vrstici zadeve, ki se izpiše med odgovarjanjem na sporočilo, kot " "prevod običajne predpone \"Re:\". Primer je 'Odg.: ali Odgovor:'." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:53 msgid "Save file format for drag-and-drop operation" msgstr "Shrani datoteko v obliki primerni za delovanje s povleci in spusti" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:54 msgid "Can be either 'mbox' or 'pdf'." msgstr "Lahko je 'mbox' ali 'pdf'." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:55 msgid "Show image animations" msgstr "Pokaži animacije slik" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:56 msgid "" "Enable animated images in HTML mail. Many users find animated images " "annoying and prefer to see a static image instead." msgstr "" "Omogoči animirane slike v pošti HTML. Animirane slike so za veliko " "uporabnikov nadležne, zato rajši vidijo običajne slike." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:57 msgid "Ellipsize mode for folder names in side bar" msgstr "Način okrajševanje za imena map v stranski vrstici" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:58 msgid "Enable or disable type ahead search feature" msgstr "Omogoči ali onemogoči možnost iskanja med tipkanjem" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:59 msgid "" "Enable the side bar search feature to allow interactive searching of folder " "names." msgstr "" "Omogoči zmožnost iskanja v stranski vrstici za vzajemno iskanje imen map." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:60 msgid "Enable or disable magic space bar" msgstr "Omogoči ali onemogoči možnost čarobne preslednice" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:61 msgid "" "Enable this to use Space bar key to scroll in message preview, message list " "and folders." msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoči uporabo preslednice za drsenje v predogledu " "sporočila, seznama sporočil in map." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:62 msgid "Enable to use a similar message list view settings for all folders" msgstr "" "Omogoči uporabo nastavitve ogleda seznama podobnih sporočil za vse mape" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:63 msgid "Enable to use a similar message list view settings for all folders." msgstr "" "Izbrana možnost omogoči uporabo podobnega seznama sporočil za vse mape." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:64 msgid "Mark citations in the message \"Preview\"" msgstr "Označi citate v \"Predogledu\" sporočila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:65 msgid "Mark citations in the message \"Preview\"." msgstr "Označi citate v \"Predogledu\" sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:66 msgid "Citation highlight color" msgstr "Barva poudarjanja citata" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:67 msgid "Citation highlight color." msgstr "Barva poudarjanja citata." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:68 msgid "Enable/disable caret mode" msgstr "Omogoči/onemogoči način kazalke" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:69 msgid "Enable caret mode, so that you can see a cursor when reading mail." msgstr "" "Omogoči način kazalke, pri katerem je med branjem pošte viden kazalec." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:70 msgid "Default charset in which to display messages" msgstr "Privzeti znakovni nabor za prikaz sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:71 msgid "Default charset in which to display messages." msgstr "Privzeti znakovni nabor za prikaz sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:72 msgid "Automatically load images for HTML messages over HTTP" msgstr "Samodejno naloži slike za sporočila HTML preko HTTP" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:73 msgid "Show Animations" msgstr "Pokaži animacije" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:74 msgid "Show animated images as animations." msgstr "Animirane slike prikaži kot animacije." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:75 msgid "Show all message headers" msgstr "Pokaži vse glave sporočila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:76 msgid "Show all the headers when viewing a messages." msgstr "Pokaže vse glave med pregledovanjem sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:77 msgid "List of headers to show when viewing a message." msgstr "Seznam prikazanih glav pri ogledu sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:78 msgid "" "Each header is represented as a pair: the header name, and a boolean " "indicating whether the header is enabled. Disabled headers are not shown " "when viewing a message, but are still listed in Preferences." msgstr "" "Vsaka glava je predstavljena kot par: ime glave in oznaka, ki nakazuje, če " "je glava omogočena. Onemogočene glave niso prikazane, ko se ogleduje " "sporočilo, a so še vedno na seznamu v Možnostih." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:79 msgid "Show photo of the sender" msgstr "Pokaži fotografijo pošiljatelja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:80 msgid "Show the photo of the sender in the message reading pane." msgstr "Pokaži fotografijo pošiljatelja na pladnju branja sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:81 msgid "Mark as Seen after specified timeout" msgstr "Označi kot Videno po navedeni zakasnitvi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:82 msgid "Mark as Seen after specified timeout." msgstr "Označi kot Videno po navedeni zakasnitvi." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:83 msgid "Timeout for marking messages as seen" msgstr "Čas po katerem se sporočilo označi kot videno" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:84 msgid "Timeout in milliseconds for marking messages as seen." msgstr "Čas v milisekundah po katerem se sporočilo označi kot videno." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:85 msgid "Sender email-address column in the message list" msgstr "Stolpec elektronskega naslova na seznamu sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:86 msgid "" "Show the email-address of the sender in a separate column in the message " "list." msgstr "" "Pokaži elektronski naslov pošiljatelja v ločenem stolpcu na seznamu sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:87 msgid "" "Determines whether to use the same fonts for both \"From\" and \"Subject\" " "lines in the \"Messages\" column in vertical view" msgstr "" "Določa ali sta v navpičnem pogledu v stolpcu \"Sporočila\" za vrstici \"Od\" " "in \"Zadeva\" uporabljeni isti pisavi." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:88 msgid "" "Determines whether to use the same fonts for both \"From\" and \"Subject\" " "lines in the \"Messages\" column in vertical view." msgstr "" "Določa ali sta v navpičnem pogledu v stolpcu \"Sporočila\" za vrstici \"Od\" " "in \"Zadeva\" uporabljeni isti pisavi." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:89 msgid "Show deleted messages in the message-list" msgstr "Pokaži izbrisana sporočila na seznamu sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:90 msgid "Show deleted messages (with a strike-through) in the message-list." msgstr "Pokaži izbrisana sporočila (prečrtana) na seznamu sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:91 msgid "Enable Unmatched search folder" msgstr "Omogoči neujemajoče iskalne mape" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:92 msgid "" "Enable Unmatched search folder within Search Folders. It does nothing if " "Search Folders are disabled." msgstr "" "Omogoči iskalno mapo Brez zadetka v Iskalnih mapah. Če so Iskalne mape " "onemogočene, se ne zgodi nič." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:93 msgid "Hides the per-folder preview and removes the selection" msgstr "Skrije predogled map in odstrani izbiro" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:94 msgid "" "This key is read only once and reset to \"false\" after read. This unselects " "the mail in the list and removes the preview for that folder." msgstr "" "Ključ je določen le za enkratno branje, po branju pa se samodejno ponastavi " "na \"napak\". To odstrani oznako sporočila na seznamu in odstrani predogled " "za to mapo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:95 msgid "Height of the message-list pane" msgstr "Višina pladnja seznama sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:96 msgid "Height of the message-list pane." msgstr "Višina pladnja seznama sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:97 msgid "Whether message headers are collapsed in the user interface" msgstr "Ali so glave sporočil zložene v uporabniškem vmesniku" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:98 msgid "Width of the message-list pane" msgstr "Širina pladnja s seznamom sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:99 msgid "Width of the message-list pane." msgstr "Širina pladnja s seznamom sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:100 msgid "Layout style" msgstr "Slog razporeditve" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:101 msgid "" "The layout style determines where to place the preview pane in relation to " "the message list. \"0\" (Classic View) places the preview pane below the " "message list. \"1\" (Vertical View) places the preview pane next to the " "message list." msgstr "" "Slog razporeditve določa kje bosta postavljena pladenj predogleda in seznam " "sporočil. Vrednost \"0\" predstavlja običajni pogled s pladnjem predogleda " "pod seznamom sporočil, \"1\" pa predstavlja navpični slog, kjer sta okni eno " "ob drugem." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:102 msgid "Variable width font" msgstr "Pisava spremenljive širine" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:103 msgid "The variable width font for mail display." msgstr "Pisava spremenljive širine za prikaz pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:104 msgid "Terminal font" msgstr "Pisava terminala" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:105 msgid "The terminal font for mail display." msgstr "Pisava terminala za prikaz pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:106 msgid "Use custom fonts" msgstr "Uporabi pisave po meri" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:107 msgid "Use custom fonts for displaying mail." msgstr "Za prikaz pošte uporabi pisave po meri." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:108 msgid "Compress display of addresses in TO/CC/BCC" msgstr "Stisne prikaz naslovov v poljih ZA/KP/SKP" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:109 msgid "" "Compress display of addresses in TO/CC/BCC to the number specified in " "address_count." msgstr "" "Stisne prikaz naslovov v poljih ZA/KP/SKP na število, navedeno v " "address_count." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:110 msgid "Number of addresses to display in TO/CC/BCC" msgstr "Število naslovov za prikaz v poljih ZA/KP/SKP" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:111 msgid "" "This sets the number of addresses to show in default message list view, " "beyond which a '...' is shown." msgstr "" "To določa število naslovov, ki se prikažejo v privzetem pogledu seznama " "sporočil, preko katerega se prikaže '...'." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:112 msgid "Thread the message-list based on Subject" msgstr "Niten seznam sporočil na podlagi polja Zadeva" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:113 msgid "" "Whether or not to fall back on threading by subjects when the messages do " "not contain In-Reply-To or References headers." msgstr "" "Ali naj se nitenje, ko sporočila ne vsebujejo glav Kot-Odgovor-Na ali " "Reference, navezuje na zadeve." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:114 msgid "Default value for thread expand state" msgstr "Privzeta vrednost stanja razširitve niti sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:115 msgid "" "This setting specifies whether the threads should be in expanded or " "collapsed state by default. Evolution requires a restart." msgstr "" "Nastavitev določa, ali naj niti sporočil ostanejo privzeto razširjene ali " "skrčene. Spreminjanje nastavitve zahteva ponovni zagon programa." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:116 msgid "Whether sort threads based on latest message in that thread" msgstr "Ali naj bodo niti razvrščene po zadnjih sporočilih v niti" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:117 msgid "" "This setting specifies whether the threads should be sorted based on latest " "message in each thread, rather than by message's date. Evolution requires a " "restart." msgstr "" "Nastavitev določa, ali naj privzete niti sporočil ostanejo razvrščene po " "zadnjemu sporočilu v vsakem nizu namesto po datumu sporočila. Spreminjanje " "nastavitve zahteva ponovni zagon programa." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:118 msgid "Sort accounts alphabetically in a folder tree" msgstr "Račune v drevesu map razvrsti abecedno" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:119 msgid "" "Tells how to sort accounts in a folder tree used in a Mail view. When set to " "true accounts are sorted alphabetically, with an exception of On This " "Computer and Search folders, otherwise accounts are sorted based on an order " "given by a user" msgstr "" "Pove kako naj bodo razvrščeni računi v drevesu map v pogledu pošte. Izbrana " "možnost pomeni abecedno razvrščanje z izjemo map na tem računalniku in " "iskalnih map, sicer pa se računi razvrstijo po zaporedju, ki ga določi " "uporabnik." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:120 msgid "Log filter actions" msgstr "Beleži dejanja filtra" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:121 msgid "Log filter actions to the specified log file." msgstr "Beleži dejanja filtra v navedeno dnevniško datoteko." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:122 msgid "Logfile to log filter actions" msgstr "Dnevniška datoteka za beleženje dejanj filtra" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:123 msgid "Logfile to log filter actions." msgstr "Dnevniška datoteka za beleženje dejanj filtra." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:124 msgid "Flush Outbox after filtering" msgstr "Počisti odhodni predal po filtriranju" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:125 msgid "" "Whether to flush Outbox after filtering is done. Outbox flush will happen " "only when there was used any 'Forward to' filter action and approximately " "one minute after the last action invocation." msgstr "" "Ali naj bo odhodni predal po filtriranju počiščen. Čiščenje odhodnega " "predala se bo zgodilo samo ko je bilo uporabljeno dejanje filtra 'Posreduj " "na' in približno eno minuto po preklicu zadnjega dejanja." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:126 msgid "Default forward style" msgstr "Privzet način posredovanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:127 msgid "Default reply style" msgstr "Privzet slog odgovarjanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:128 msgid "Prompt on empty subject" msgstr "Opozori ob prazni zadevi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:129 msgid "" "Prompt the user when he or she tries to send a message without a Subject." msgstr "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi poslati sporočilo brez Zadeve." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:130 msgid "Prompt when emptying the trash" msgstr "Opozori ob praznjenju smeti" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:131 msgid "Prompt the user when he or she tries to empty the trash." msgstr "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi izprazniti smeti." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:132 msgid "Prompt when user expunges" msgstr "Opozori ob uničenju" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:133 msgid "Prompt the user when he or she tries to expunge a folder." msgstr "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi uničiti mapo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:134 msgid "Prompt before sending to recipients not entered as mail addresses" msgstr "" "Pozovi pred pošiljanjem prejemnikov, ki niso vneseni kot veljavni poštni " "naslovi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:135 msgid "" "It disables/enables the repeated prompts to warn that you are trying to send " "a message to recipients not entered as mail addresses" msgstr "" "Onemogoči ali omogoči možnost ponavljajočih se opozoril, ki vas opozorijo da " "poskušate poslati sporočilo prejemnikom, ki niso vneseni kot poštni naslovi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:136 msgid "Prompt when user only fills Bcc" msgstr "Opozori uporabnika, ko izpolni le Skp" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:137 msgid "Prompt when user tries to send a message with no To or Cc recipients." msgstr "" "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi poslati sporočilo brez prejemnikov v poljih Za " "ali Kp." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:138 msgid "Prompt when user tries to send unwanted HTML" msgstr "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi poslati neželen HTML" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:139 msgid "" "Prompt when user tries to send HTML mail to recipients that may not want to " "receive HTML mail." msgstr "" "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi pošto v obliki HTML poslati prejemnikom, ki " "morda ne želijo prejemati pošte HTML." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:140 msgid "Prompt when user tries to open 10 or more messages at once" msgstr "Opozori uporabnika, ko želi hkrati odpreti 10 ali več sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:141 msgid "" "If a user tries to open 10 or more messages at one time, ask the user if " "they really want to do it." msgstr "" "V primeru da uporabnik poskuša odpreti 10 ali več sporočil hkrati, ga " "vprašaj, ali želi to res storiti." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:142 msgid "Prompt while marking multiple messages" msgstr "Opozori ob označevanju več sporočil" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:143 msgid "Enable or disable the prompt whilst marking multiple messages." msgstr "Onemogoči ali omogoči opozorilo pri označevanju več sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:144 msgid "Prompt when deleting messages in search folder" msgstr "Opozori ob brisanju sporočil v iskalni mapi" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:145 msgid "" "It disables/enables the repeated prompts to warn that deleting messages from " "a search folder permanently deletes the message, not simply removing it from " "the search results." msgstr "" "Onemogoči ali omogoči ponavljajoča se obvestila, da brisanje sporočil iz " "iskalne mape sporočila trajno izbriše in ne zgolj odstrani iz zadetkov " "iskanja." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:146 msgid "Asks whether to copy a folder by drag & drop in the folder tree" msgstr "" "Vpraša za možnost kopiranja mape z načinom povleci in spusti v drevesu map" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:147 msgid "" "Possible values are: 'never' - do not allow copy with drag & drop of " "folders in folder tree, 'always' - allow copy with drag & drop of " "folders in folder tree without asking, or 'ask' - (or any other value) will " "ask user." msgstr "" "Možne vrednosti so: 'nikoli' - ne dovoli kopiranja map z načinom povleci in " "spusti v drevesu map, 'vedno' - dovoli kopiranje map z načinom povleci in " "spusti v drevesu map brez poziva in 'vprašaj' - (ali katerakoli druga " "vrednost), ki bo pozvala uporabnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:148 msgid "Asks whether to move a folder by drag & drop in the folder tree" msgstr "" "Vpraša za možnost premikanja mape z načinom povleci in spusti v drevesu map" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:149 msgid "" "Possible values are: 'never' - do not allow move with drag & drop of " "folders in folder tree, 'always' - allow move with drag & drop of " "folders in folder tree without asking, or 'ask' - (or any other value) will " "ask user." msgstr "" "Možne vrednosti so: 'nikoli' - ne dovoli premikanja map z načinom povleci in " "spusti v drevesu map, 'vedno' - dovoli premikanje map z načinom povleci in " "spusti v drevesu map brez poziva in 'vprašaj' - (ali katerakoli druga " "vrednost), ki bo pozvala uporabnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:150 msgid "Prompt when replying privately to list messages" msgstr "Opozori med zasebnim odgovarjanjem na sporočilo dopisnega seznama" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:151 msgid "" "It disables/enables the repeated prompts to warn that you are sending a " "private reply to a message which arrived via a mailing list." msgstr "" "Onemogoči ali omogoči možnost ponavljajočih se opozoril z vprašanjem ali " "pošiljate zasebni odgovor na sporočilo prejeto preko dopisnega seznama." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:152 msgid "Prompt when mailing list hijacks private replies" msgstr "Opozori kadar dopisni seznam prejema zasebne odgovore" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:153 msgid "" "It disables/enables the repeated prompts to warn that you are trying sending " "a private reply to a message which arrived via a mailing list, but the list " "sets a Reply-To: header which redirects your reply back to the list" msgstr "" "Onemogoči ali omogoči možnost ponavljajočih se opozoril z opozorilom, da je " "zasebni odgovor na sporočilo, ki je prispelo preko dopisnega seznama, " "poslano preko odgovori-na možnosti nazaj na dopisni seznam." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:154 msgid "Prompt when replying to many recipients" msgstr "Opozori med odgovarjanjem več prejemnikom" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:155 msgid "" "It disables/enables the repeated prompts to warn that you are sending a " "reply to many people." msgstr "" "Onemogoči ali omogoči možnost ponavljajočih se opozoril z vprašanjem ali " "pošiljate odgovor več prejemnikom." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:156 msgid "" "Policy for automatically closing the message browser window when forwarding " "or replying to the displayed message." msgstr "" "Pravilo za samodejno zapiranje sporočilnega okna brskalnika, ko se posreduje " "ali odgovarja na prikazano sporočilo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:157 msgid "Empty Trash folders on exit" msgstr "Ob izhodu iz programa izprazni mape smeti" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:158 msgid "Empty all Trash folders when exiting Evolution." msgstr "Ob izhodu iz programa izprazni vse mape smeti" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:159 msgid "Minimum days between emptying the trash on exit" msgstr "Najmanjše število dni med praznjenji koša ob izhodu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:160 msgid "Minimum time between emptying the trash on exit, in days." msgstr "Najmanjši čas med praznjenji koša ob izhodu v dneh." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:161 msgid "Last time Empty Trash was run" msgstr "Čas zadnjega praznjenja koša" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:162 msgid "" "The last time Empty Trash was run, in days since January 1st, 1970 (Epoch)." msgstr "Čas zadnjega praznjenja koša v dneh od epoha (1. Januar 1970)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:163 msgid "" "Amount of time in seconds the error should be shown on the status bar." msgstr "Čas v sekundah, ko je obvestilo o napaki prikazano v vrstici stanja." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:164 msgid "Level beyond which the message should be logged." msgstr "Raven nad katero bi moralo sporočilo biti zabeleženo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:165 msgid "" "This can have three possible values. \"0\" for errors. \"1\" for warnings. " "\"2\" for debug messages." msgstr "" "Mogoče so tri vrednosti. \"0\" za napake, \"1\" za opozorila in \"2\" za " "sporočila razhroščevanja." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:166 msgid "Show original \"Date\" header value." msgstr "Pokaži izvirno vrednost \"Datum\" v glavi sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:167 msgid "" "Show the original \"Date\" header (with a local time only if the time zone " "differs). Otherwise always show \"Date\" header value in a user preferred " "format and local time zone." msgstr "" "Pokaži osnovno glavo \"Datum\" (s krajevnim časom le v primeru, da sta je " "časovni pas različen). V nasprotnem primeru, bo glava \"Datum\" pokazana v " "prednostni obliki uporabnika in v krajevnem časovnem pasu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:168 msgid "List of Labels and their associated colors" msgstr "Seznam oznak in z njimi povezanih barv" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:169 msgid "" "List of labels known to the mail component of Evolution. The list contains " "strings containing name:color where color uses the HTML hex encoding." msgstr "" "Seznam oznak, ki jih pozna poštna komponenta Evolutiona. Seznam vsebuje nize " "v obliki ime:barva, kjer je barva podana v šestiškem kodiranju HTML." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:170 msgid "Check incoming mail being junk" msgstr "Preveri dohodno pošto za neželeno" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:171 msgid "Run junk test on incoming mail." msgstr "V dohodni pošti izvedi preizkus neželene pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:172 msgid "Empty Junk folders on exit" msgstr "Ob izhodu iz programa izprazni mapo neželene pošte" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:173 msgid "Empty all Junk folders when exiting Evolution." msgstr "Ob izhodu iz programa izprazni vse mape neželene pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:174 msgid "Minimum days between emptying the junk on exit" msgstr "Najmanjše število dni med praznjenji neželene pošte ob izhodu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:175 msgid "Minimum time between emptying the junk on exit, in days." msgstr "Najmanjši čas med praznjenji neželene pošte ob izhodu v dneh." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:176 msgid "Last time Empty Junk was run" msgstr "Čas zadnjega praznjenja neželene pošte" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:177 msgid "" "The last time Empty Junk was run, in days since January 1st, 1970 (Epoch)." msgstr "" "Čas zadnjega praznjenja neželene pošte v dneh od epoha (1. Januar 1970)." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:178 msgid "The default plugin for Junk hook" msgstr "Privzeti vstavek za neželeno pošto" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:179 msgid "" "This is the default junk plugin, even though there are multiple plugins " "enabled. If the default listed plugin is disabled, then it won't fall back " "to the other available plugins." msgstr "" "Privzeti vstavek neželene pošte, čeprav je lahko hkrati omogočenih več " "vstavkov. V primeru, da je privzeti vstavek onemogočen, se preverjanje ne " "povrne na ostale razpoložljive vstavke." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:180 msgid "Determines whether to lookup in address book for sender email" msgstr "" "Določa ali naj bo imenik pregledan za elektronski naslov pošiljatelja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:181 msgid "" "Determines whether to lookup the sender email in address book. If found, it " "shouldn't be a spam. It looks up in the books marked for autocompletion. It " "can be slow, if remote address books (like LDAP) are marked for " "autocompletion." msgstr "" "Določa ali naj se imenik pregleda za elektronski naslov pošiljatelja. V " "primeru najdenega naslova sporočilo ne more biti označeno kot neželena " "pošta. Imena so pregledana v imenikih označenih za samodejno dopolnjevanje. " "Postopek je lahko počasen, če uporabljate oddaljene imenike kot je LDAP." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:182 msgid "" "Determines whether to look up addresses for junk filtering in local address " "book only" msgstr "" "Določa ali naj bo za filtriranje neželene pošte imenik pregledan le v " "krajevnem imeniku" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:183 msgid "" "This option is related to the key lookup_addressbook and is used to " "determine whether to look up addresses in local address book only to exclude " "mail sent by known contacts from junk filtering." msgstr "" "Možnost je povezana s ključem lookup_addressbook in je uporabljena za " "določevanje vpogleda v naslove krajevnega imenika za izločevanje pošte " "poslane s strani znanih stikov iz filtriranja neželene pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:184 msgid "Determines whether to use custom headers to check for junk" msgstr "" "Določa ali so za preverjanje neželene pošte uporabljene glave po meri." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:185 msgid "" "Determines whether to use custom headers to check for junk. If this option " "is enabled and the headers are mentioned, it will be improve the junk " "checking speed." msgstr "" "Določa ali so za preverjanje neželene pošte uporabljene glave po meri. V " "primeru, da je možnost omogočena in so glave omenjene, se izboljša hitrost " "preverjanja neželene pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:186 msgid "Custom headers to use while checking for junk." msgstr "Glave po meri za uporabo pri preverjanju neželene pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:187 msgid "" "Custom headers to use while checking for junk. The list elements are string " "in the format \"headername=value\"." msgstr "" "Glave po meri za uporabo pri preverjanju neželene pošte. Zapis je v obliki " "\"imeglave=vrednost\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:188 msgid "UID string of the default account." msgstr "Niz UID privzetega računa." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:189 msgid "Save directory" msgstr "Shrani mapo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:190 msgid "Directory for saving mail component files." msgstr "Mapa za shranjevanje datotek sestavnih delov pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:191 msgid "Composer load/attach directory" msgstr "Mapa nalaganja/prilaganja sestavljalniku" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:192 msgid "Directory for loading/attaching files to composer." msgstr "Mapa za nalaganje/pripenjanje datotek k sestavljalniku." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:193 msgid "Check for new messages on start" msgstr "Preveri za nova sporočila ob zagonu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:194 msgid "" "Whether to check for new messages when Evolution is started. This includes " "also sending messages from Outbox." msgstr "" "Ali naj program preveri za nova sporočilu ob zagonu programa. To dejanje " "vključuje tudi pošiljanje sporočil iz odhodne mape." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:195 msgid "Check for new messages in all active accounts" msgstr "Preveri za nova sporočila v vseh dejavnih računih" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:196 msgid "" "Whether to check for new messages in all active accounts regardless of the " "account \"Check for new messages every X minutes\" option when Evolution is " "started. This option is used only together with 'send_recv_on_start' option." msgstr "" "Ali naj program preveri za nova sporočila v vseh dejavnih računih ob zagonu " "programa Evolution ne glede na možnost \"Preveri za nova sporočila vsakih X " "minut\". Ta možnost se uporablja le skupaj z možnostjo 'send_recv_on_start'." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:197 msgid "Server synchronization interval" msgstr "Interval usklajevanja strežnika" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:198 msgid "" "Controls how frequently local changes are synchronized with the remote mail " "server. The interval must be at least 30 seconds." msgstr "" "Nadzira kako pogosto se krajevne spremembe uskladijo z oddaljenim poštnim " "strežnikom. Interval mora biti vsaj 30 sekund." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:199 msgid "(Deprecated) Default forward style" msgstr "(Opuščeno) Privzet slog posredovanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:200 msgid "" "This key was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use " "\"forward-style-name\" instead." msgstr "" "Ta ključ je bil opuščen v različici 3.10 in ni več v uporabi. Namesto tega " "uporabite \"posreduj-slog-ime\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:201 msgid "(Deprecated) Default reply style" msgstr "(Opuščeno) Privzet slog odgovarjanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:202 msgid "" "This key was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use " "\"reply-style-name\" instead." msgstr "" "Ta ključ je bil opuščen v različici 3.10 in ni več v uporabi. Namesto tega " "uporabite \"posreduj-slog-ime\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:203 msgid "(Deprecated) List of custom headers and whether they are enabled." msgstr "(Opuščeno) Seznam glav izdelanih po meri in ali so omogočene." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:204 msgid "" "This key was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use " "\"show-headers\" instead." msgstr "" "Ta ključ je bil opuščen v različici 3.10 in se ne uporablja več. Namesto " "tega uporabite \"prikaži-glave\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:205 msgid "(Deprecated) Load images for HTML messages over HTTP" msgstr "(Opuščeno) Naloži slike za sporočila HTML preko HTTP" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:206 msgid "" "This key was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use " "\"image-loading-policy\" instead." msgstr "" "Ta ključ je bile opuščen v različici 3.10 in se ne uporablja več. Namesto " "tega uporabite \"pravilo-nalaganja-slik\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:207 msgid "" "(Deprecated) Asks whether to close the message window when the user forwards " "or replies to the message shown in the window" msgstr "" "(Opuščeno) Vpraša ali naj zapre okno sporočila, ko uporabnik posreduje ali " "odgovarja na sporočilo, ki je prikazano v oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.mail.gschema.xml.in.h:208 msgid "" "This key was deprecated in version 3.10 and should no longer be used. Use " "\"browser-close-on-reply-policy\" instead." msgstr "" "Ta ključ je opuščen z različico 3.10 in se ne uporablja več. Namesto tega " "uporabite \"pravilo-zapiranja-brskalnika-ob-odgovoru\"." #. Translators: This is the a list of words for the attach reminder plugin to look #. for in a message body. Please use any number of words here in your language that might #. indicate that an attachment should have been attached to the message. #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.attachment-reminder.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "['attachment','attaching','attached','enclosed']" msgstr "['priloga','prilaganje','priložena','zaprta']" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.attachment-reminder.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "" "List of clues for the attachment reminder plugin to look for in a message " "body" msgstr "" "Seznam namigov, ki naj jih vstavek opomnik prilog išče v telesu sporočila" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.attachment-reminder.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "List of clues for the attachment reminder plugin to look for in a message " "body." msgstr "" "Seznam namigov, ki naj jih vstavek opomnik prilog išče v telesu sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Address book source" msgstr "Vir imenika" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Address book to use for storing automatically synced contacts." msgstr "" "Naslov knjige se uporablja za shranjevanje samodejno usklajenih stikov." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Auto sync Pidgin contacts" msgstr "Samodejno uskladi stike Pidgin" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Whether Pidgin contacts should be automatically synced." msgstr "Ali naj bodo stiki Pidgin samodejno usklajeni." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Enable autocontacts" msgstr "Omogoči samodejne stike" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Whether contacts should be automatically added to the user's address book." msgstr "Ali naj bodo stiki samodejno dodani k uporabnikovemu imeniku." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Pidgin address book source" msgstr "Vir imenika Pidgin" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "" "Address book to use for storing automatically synced contacts from Pidgin." msgstr "" "Kateri imenik naj se uporabi za shranjevanje samodejno usklajenih stikov iz " "programa Pidgin." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Pidgin check interval" msgstr "Razmik preverjanj Pidgin" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Check interval for Pidgin syncing of contacts." msgstr "Razmik preverjanja za usklajevanje stikov Pidgin." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Pidgin last sync MD5" msgstr "Pidgin zadnje usklajevanje MD5" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Pidgin last sync MD5." msgstr "Pidgin zadnje usklajevanje MD5." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Pidgin last sync time" msgstr "Zadnji čas usklajevanja Pidgin" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.autocontacts.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Pidgin last sync time." msgstr "Zadnji čas usklajevanja Pidgin." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.email-custom-header.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "List of Custom Headers" msgstr "Seznam glav po meri" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.email-custom-header.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "The key specifies the list of custom headers that you can add to an outgoing " "message. The format for specifying a Header and Header value is: Name of the " "custom header followed by \"=\" and the values separated by \";\"" msgstr "" "Ključ določa seznam glav po meri, ki jih lahko dodate odhajajoči pošti. " "Oblika za navedbo glave in vrednosti glave je: Ime glave po meri, ki mu " "sledi znak \"=\" in nato vrednosti ločene z znakom \";\"" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.external-editor.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Default External Editor" msgstr "Privzeti zunanji urejevalnik" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.external-editor.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "The default command that must be used as the editor." msgstr "Privzeti ukaz za zagon urejevalnika." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.external-editor.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Automatically launch when a new mail is edited" msgstr "Samodejno zaženi med urejanjem nove pošte" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.external-editor.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Automatically launch editor when key is pressed in the mail composer." msgstr "" "Samodejno zaženi urejevalnik, ko je pritisnjena tipka v sestavljalniku pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.face-picture.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Insert Face picture by default" msgstr "Privzeto vstavi sličico obraza odhajajočemu sporočilu" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.face-picture.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "Whether insert Face picture to outgoing messages by default. The picture " "should be set before checking this, otherwise nothing happens." msgstr "" "Ali naj se odhajajočemu sporočilu privzeto pripne sličica obraza. Sliko je " "treba izbrati pred izbiro te možnosti." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.itip.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Delete processed" msgstr "Opravilo brisanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.itip.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Whether to delete processed iTip objects" msgstr "Ali naj se obdelani predmeti iTip izbrišejo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Notify new messages for Inbox only." msgstr "Obvesti o novih sporočilih le v mapi Prejete pošte." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Whether to notify new messages in Inbox folder only." msgstr "" "Ali naj se prikaže obvestilo le za nova sporočila v mapi prihajajočih " "sporočil." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Enable D-Bus messages." msgstr "Omogoči sporočila D-Bus." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Generates a D-Bus message when new mail messages arrive." msgstr "Ustvari sporočilo D-Bus, ko prispejo nova sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Enable icon in notification area." msgstr "Omogoči ikono v obvestilnem področju." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "Show new mail icon in notification area when new messages arrive." msgstr "" "Ko prispejo nova sporočila, pokaži ikono nove pošte v obvestilnem področju." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Popup message together with the icon." msgstr "Pojavno sporočilo naj se prikaže skupaj z ikono." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Whether show message over the icon when new messages arrive." msgstr "Ali naj prikaže sporočilo preko ikone ob prejemu novega sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Enable audible notifications when new messages arrive." msgstr "Omogoči zvočna obvestila, ko prispejo nova sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "" "Whether to make a sound of any kind when new messages arrive. If \"false\", " "the \"notify-sound-beep\", \"notify-sound-file\", \"notify-sound-play-file\" " "and \"notify-sound-use-theme\" keys are disregarded." msgstr "" "Ali naj bo proizveden zvok, ko prispejo nova sporočila. Če je nastavljen na " "\"napak\", so ključi \"notify-sound-beep\", \"notify-sound-file\", \"notify-" "sound-play-file\" in \"notify-sound-use-theme\" prezrti." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Whether to emit a beep." msgstr "Ali naj program zapiska." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Whether to emit a beep when new messages arrive." msgstr "Ali naj program zapiska, ko prispejo nova sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Sound filename to be played." msgstr "Ime zvočne datoteke za predvajanje." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "" "Sound file to be played when new messages arrive, if \"notify-sound-play-" "file\" is \"true\"." msgstr "" "Zvočna datoteka, ki se predvaja, ko prispejo nova sporočila, če je \"notify-" "sound-play-file\" nastavljen na \"prav\"." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Whether to play a sound file." msgstr "Ali naj se predvaja zvočna datoteka." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "" "Whether to play a sound file when new messages arrive. The name of the sound " "file is given by the 'notify-sound-file' key." msgstr "" "Ali naj se predvaja zvočna datoteka, ko prispejo nove sporočila. Ime zvočne " "datoteke je podano s ključem 'notify-sound-file'." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Use sound theme" msgstr "Uporabi zvočno temo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.mail-notification.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Play themed sound when new messages arrive, if not in beep mode." msgstr "" "Predvajaj zvok teme ob prejetju novega sporočila, če ni določen le pisk." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.prefer-plain.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Mode to use when displaying mails" msgstr "Način za prikaz elektronske pošte" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.prefer-plain.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "The mode to use for displaying mails. \"normal\" makes Evolution choose the " "best part to show, \"prefer_plain\" makes it use the text part, if present, " "and \"only_plain\" forces Evolution to only show plain text" msgstr "" "Način prikazovanja elektronskih sporočil. Običajni način pomeni, da program " "Evolution izbere najboljši del za prikaz, možnost \"prefer_plain\" uporabi " "besedilni del, če je vsebovan, \"only_plain\" pa vsili prikaz običajnega " "besedila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.prefer-plain.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Whether to show suppressed HTML output" msgstr "Ali naj bo prikazan zavrt odvod HTML" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.publish-calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "List of Destinations for publishing" msgstr "Seznam ciljev za objavo" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.publish-calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "The key specifies the list of destinations to where publish calendars. Each " "values specifies an XML with setup for publishing to one destination." msgstr "" "Ključ določi seznam ciljev kjer bodo objavljeni koledarji. Vrednosti " "določijo XML z nastavitvijo za objavo na enem cilju." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.plugin.templates.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "" "List of keyword/value pairs for the Templates plugin to substitute in a " "message body." msgstr "" "Seznam ključnih besed in vrednosti za vstavek predlog kot zamenjavo v telesu " "sporočila." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Skip development warning dialog" msgstr "Preskoči opozorilo o razvojni različici" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "Whether the warning dialog in development versions of Evolution is skipped." msgstr "" "Ali naj se opozorilno okno v razvojnih različicah Evolution preskoči." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Initial attachment view" msgstr "Začetni pogled prilog" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "Initial view for attachment bar widgets. \"0\" is Icon View, \"1\" is List " "View." msgstr "" "Začetni pogled za gradnike vrstice prilog. \"0\" je ikonski pogled, \"1\" je " "seznamski pogled." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Initial file chooser folder" msgstr "Začetna mapa izbirnika datotek" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "Initial folder for GtkFileChooser dialogs." msgstr "Začetna mapa za pogovorna okna GtkFileChooser." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:7 ../shell/main.c:308 msgid "Start in offline mode" msgstr "Začni v načinu brez povezave" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "" "Whether Evolution will start up in offline mode instead of online mode." msgstr "" "Ali naj se Evolution zažene v načinu brez povezave namesto v načinu s " "povezavo." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Offline folder paths" msgstr "Poti map stanja brez povezave" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "" "List of paths for the folders to be synchronized to disk for offline usage." msgstr "" "Seznam poti map, ki naj se krajevno uskladijo na disk za delo brez povezave" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Enable express mode" msgstr "Omogoči hitri način" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Flag that enables a much simplified user interface." msgstr "Zastavica, ki omogoči poenostavljen uporabniški vmesnik." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Window buttons are visible" msgstr "Gumbi okna so vidni" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Whether the window buttons should be visible." msgstr "Ali naj bodo gumbi okna vidni." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Window button style" msgstr "Slog gumbov okna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "" "The style of the window buttons. Can be \"text\", \"icons\", \"both\", " "\"toolbar\". If \"toolbar\" is set, the style of the buttons is determined " "by the GNOME toolbar setting." msgstr "" "Slog gumbov okna. Lahko je \"besedilo\", \"ikone\", \"oboje\" ali \"orodna " "vrstica\". Če je izbrana \"orodna vrstica\", je slog gumbov enak kot v " "nastavitvah orodne vrstice GNOME." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Toolbar is visible" msgstr "Orodna vrstica je vidna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Whether the toolbar should be visible." msgstr "Ali naj bo orodna vrstica vidna." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "Sidebar is visible" msgstr "Stranska vrstica je vidna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Whether the sidebar should be visible." msgstr "Ali naj bo stranska vrstica vidna." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "Statusbar is visible" msgstr "Vrstica stanja je vidna" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:22 msgid "Whether the status bar should be visible." msgstr "Ali naj bo vrstica stanja vidna." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:23 msgid "ID or alias of the component to be shown by default at start-up." msgstr "" "ID ali vzdevek sestavnega dela, ki naj se privzeto prikaže ob zagonu." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "Default sidebar width" msgstr "Privzeta širina stranske vrstice" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.shell.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "The default width for the sidebar, in pixels." msgstr "Privzeta širina stranske vrstice v točkah." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.spamassassin.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Use only local spam tests." msgstr "Uporabi le krajevno preskušanje neželene pošte" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution.spamassassin.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Use only the local spam tests (no DNS)." msgstr "Uporabi le krajevno preskušanje neželene pošte (brez DNS)." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-attachment.c:397 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-bar.c:101 ../e-util/e-attachment-bar.c:106 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:176 ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:181 #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:4 msgid "Attachment" msgid_plural "Attachments" msgstr[0] "Prilog" msgstr[1] "Priloga" msgstr[2] "Prilogi" msgstr[3] "Priloge" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-attachment.c:398 msgid "Display as attachment" msgstr "Prikaži kot prilogo" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-headers.c:107 #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:47 ../mail/e-mail-tag-editor.c:272 #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:5 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:64 msgid "From" msgstr "Od" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-headers.c:133 msgid "(no subject)" msgstr "(brez zadeve)" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-headers.c:333 #, c-format msgid "This message was sent by %s on behalf of %s" msgstr "To sporočilo je poslano z računa %s v imenu %s" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-image.c:152 msgid "Regular Image" msgstr "Običajna slika" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-image.c:153 msgid "Display part as an image" msgstr "Prikaži del kot sliko" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-message-rfc822.c:246 msgid "RFC822 message" msgstr "Sporočilo RFC822" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-message-rfc822.c:247 msgid "Format part as an RFC822 message" msgstr "Oblikuj del kot sporočilo RFC822" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print.c:54 #: ../e-util/gal-view-instance-save-as-dialog.c:95 #: ../mail/e-mail-label-tree-view.c:99 #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:1328 #: ../modules/cal-config-google/e-google-chooser.c:237 #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:67 msgid "Name" msgstr "Ime" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print.c:54 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-tree-view.c:574 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:10 msgid "Size" msgstr "Velikost" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print-headers.c:144 msgid "GPG signed" msgstr "Podpisano z GPG" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print-headers.c:150 msgid "GPG encrpyted" msgstr "Šifrirano z GPG" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print-headers.c:156 msgid "S/MIME signed" msgstr "Podpisano s S/MIME" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print-headers.c:162 msgid "S/MIME encrpyted" msgstr "Šifrirano s S/MIME" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-print-headers.c:171 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:645 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:195 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:129 msgid "Security" msgstr "Varnost" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-headers.c:168 #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:52 ../mail/e-mail-tag-editor.c:277 #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:77 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:6 #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:69 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:712 msgid "Subject" msgstr "Zadeva" #. pseudo-header #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-headers.c:187 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:344 #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:1145 msgid "Mailer" msgstr "Poštni odjemalec" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-text-enriched.c:91 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-text-enriched.c:98 msgid "Richtext" msgstr "Bogato besedilo" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-text-enriched.c:92 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-text-enriched.c:99 msgid "Display part as enriched text" msgstr "Prikaži del kot obogateno besedilo" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-text-html.c:90 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-text-html.c:351 msgid "HTML" msgstr "HTML" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-text-html.c:91 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-text-html.c:352 msgid "Format part as HTML" msgstr "Oblikuj del kot HTML" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-text-plain.c:115 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-text-plain.c:185 msgid "Plain Text" msgstr "Običajno besedilo" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-quote-text-plain.c:116 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-text-plain.c:186 msgid "Format part as plain text" msgstr "Oblikuj del kot običajno besedilo" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:52 msgid "Unsigned" msgstr "Nepodpisano" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:52 msgid "" "This message is not signed. There is no guarantee that this message is " "authentic." msgstr "" "To sporočilo ni podpisano, zato ni mogoče zagotoviti njegove pristnosti." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:53 msgid "Valid signature" msgstr "Veljaven podpis" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:53 msgid "" "This message is signed and is valid meaning that it is very likely that this " "message is authentic." msgstr "" "To sporočilo je podpisano in veljavno, zato je zelo verjetno tudi pristno." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:54 msgid "Invalid signature" msgstr "Neveljaven podpis" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:54 msgid "" "The signature of this message cannot be verified, it may have been altered " "in transit." msgstr "" "Podpisa tega sporočila ni mogoče preveriti. Morda je bilo med prenosom " "spremenjeno." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:55 msgid "Valid signature, but cannot verify sender" msgstr "Veljaven podpis, vendar ni mogoče preveriti pošiljatelja" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:55 msgid "" "This message is signed with a valid signature, but the sender of the message " "cannot be verified." msgstr "" "Sporočilo je podpisano z veljavnim podpisom, vendar pošiljatelja ni mogoče " "preveriti." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:56 msgid "Signature exists, but need public key" msgstr "Podpis obstaja, vendar potrebuje javni ključ" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:56 msgid "" "This message is signed with a signature, but there is no corresponding " "public key." msgstr "" "Sporočilo je podpisano, vendar ustreznega javnega ključa ni mogoče preveriti." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:63 msgid "Unencrypted" msgstr "Nešifrirano" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:63 msgid "" "This message is not encrypted. Its content may be viewed in transit across " "the Internet." msgstr "" "Sporočilo ni šifrirano, zato je njegova vsebina med prenosom po medmrežju " "vidna." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:64 msgid "Encrypted, weak" msgstr "Šibko šifrirano" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:64 msgid "" "This message is encrypted, but with a weak encryption algorithm. It would be " "difficult, but not impossible for an outsider to view the content of this " "message in a practical amount of time." msgstr "" "Sporočilo je šifrirano, vendar s šibkim šifrirnim algoritmom, zato je tujcu " "v razumno kratkemu času sicer težko, a še vedno mogoče pogledati njegovo " "vsebino." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:65 msgid "Encrypted" msgstr "Šifrirano" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:65 msgid "" "This message is encrypted. It would be difficult for an outsider to view " "the content of this message." msgstr "Sporočilo je šifrirano, zato je tujcu njegovo vsebino težko videti." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:66 msgid "Encrypted, strong" msgstr "Močno šifrirano" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:66 msgid "" "This message is encrypted, with a strong encryption algorithm. It would be " "very difficult for an outsider to view the content of this message in a " "practical amount of time." msgstr "" "To sporočilo je šifrirano z močnim šifrirnim algoritmom, zato je tujcu v " "razumno kratkemu času zelo težko pogledati njegovo vsebino." #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:187 #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:20 msgid "_View Certificate" msgstr "_Poglej potrdila" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-secure-button.c:202 msgid "This certificate is not viewable" msgstr "Tega potrdila ni mogoče pogledati" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-source.c:115 msgid "Source" msgstr "Izvorna koda" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-source.c:116 msgid "Display source of a MIME part" msgstr "Prikaži vir dela MIME" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:204 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:221 #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:50 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:67 msgid "Cc" msgstr "Kp" #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:205 #: ../em-format/e-mail-formatter-utils.c:222 #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:51 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:68 msgid "Bcc" msgstr "Skp" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-application-mbox.c:88 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing MBOX part: %s" msgstr "Napaka med razčlenjevanjem dela MBOX: %s" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-application-smime.c:84 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse S/MIME message: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti sporočila S/MIME: %s" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-inlinepgp-encrypted.c:80 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse PGP message: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti sporočila PGP: %s" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-inlinepgp-signed.c:83 #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-multipart-signed.c:128 #, c-format msgid "Error verifying signature: %s" msgstr "Napaka med preverjanjem podpisa: %s" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-message-external.c:69 msgid "Malformed external-body part" msgstr "Slabo oblikovan del zunanjega telesa" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-message-external.c:102 #, c-format msgid "Pointer to FTP site (%s)" msgstr "Kazalec na povezavo FTP (%s)" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-message-external.c:113 #, c-format msgid "Pointer to local file (%s) valid at site \"%s\"" msgstr "Kazalec na krajevno datoteko (%s) veljaven na strežniku \"%s\"" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-message-external.c:115 #, c-format msgid "Pointer to local file (%s)" msgstr "Kazalec na krajevno datoteko (%s)" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-message-external.c:134 #, c-format msgid "Pointer to remote data (%s)" msgstr "Kazalec na oddaljene podatke (%s)" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-message-external.c:152 #, c-format msgid "Pointer to unknown external data (\"%s\" type)" msgstr "Kazalec na neznane zunanje podatke (vrsta \"%s\")" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-multipart-encrypted.c:67 #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-multipart-signed.c:81 msgid "Could not parse MIME message. Displaying as source." msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti sporočila MIME. Prikazano bo kot vir." #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-multipart-encrypted.c:83 msgid "Unsupported encryption type for multipart/encrypted" msgstr "Nepodprta vrsta šifriranja za večdelno/šifrirano" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-multipart-encrypted.c:102 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse PGP/MIME message: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti sporočila PGP/MIME: %s" #: ../em-format/e-mail-parser-multipart-signed.c:114 msgid "Unsupported signature format" msgstr "Nepodprta oblika podpisa" #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:48 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:65 msgid "Reply-To" msgstr "Odgovori-na" #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:53 ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:550 #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:573 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:7 #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:70 msgid "Date" msgstr "Datum" #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:54 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:71 msgid "Newsgroups" msgstr "Novičarske skupine" #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-headers.c:55 ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:72 #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Face" msgstr "Obraz" #: ../em-format/e-mail-part-utils.c:500 #, c-format msgid "%s attachment" msgstr "priloga %s" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:3 msgid "Standard" msgstr "Običajno" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:6 msgid "Proprietary" msgstr "Lastniško" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:8 msgid "Secret" msgstr "Skrivnost" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:9 msgid "Top Secret" msgstr "Najstrožja skrivnost" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:10 msgid "For Your Eyes Only" msgstr "Le za vaše oči" #. Translators: Used in send options dialog #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:12 msgctxt "send-options" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:13 msgid "Mail Receipt" msgstr "Poštna povratnica" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:15 msgid "R_eply requested" msgstr "_Zahtevan odgovor" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:16 msgctxt "ESendOptionsWithin" msgid "Wi_thin" msgstr "Zno_traj" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:17 msgctxt "ESendOptionsWithin" msgid "days" msgstr "dni" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:18 msgid "_When convenient" msgstr "_Ko je pripravno" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:19 ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:840 msgid "Replies" msgstr "Odgovori" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:20 msgid "_Delay message delivery" msgstr "Za_drži dostavo sporočila" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:21 msgctxt "ESendOptionsAfter" msgid "_After" msgstr "_Po" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:22 msgctxt "ESendOptionsAfter" msgid "days" msgstr "dni" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:23 msgid "_Set expiration date" msgstr "Na_stavi čas poteka" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:24 msgctxt "ESendOptions" msgid "_Until" msgstr "_Do" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:25 msgid "Delivery Options" msgstr "Možnosti dostave" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:26 msgid "_Priority:" msgstr "_Prednost:" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:27 msgid "_Classification:" msgstr "_Razvrstitev:" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:28 msgid "Gene_ral Options" msgstr "Splošne _možnosti" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:29 msgid "Creat_e a sent item to track information" msgstr "Ustvari poslani predm_et za sledenje podatkov" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:30 msgid "_Delivered" msgstr "_Dostavljeno" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:31 msgid "Deli_vered and opened" msgstr "Dosta_vljeno in odprto" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:32 msgid "_All information" msgstr "_Vsi podatki" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:33 msgid "A_uto-delete sent item" msgstr "S_amodejno izbriši poslani predmet" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:34 msgid "Status Tracking" msgstr "Sledenje stanja" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:35 msgid "_When opened:" msgstr "_Ko je odprto:" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:36 msgid "When decli_ned:" msgstr "Ko je odklo_njeno:" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:37 msgid "When co_mpleted:" msgstr "Ko je ko_nčano:" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:38 msgid "When acce_pted:" msgstr "Ko je s_prejeto:" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:39 msgid "Return Notification" msgstr "Povratno obvestilo" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.ui.h:40 msgid "Sta_tus Tracking" msgstr "Sledenje s_tanja" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:1 msgid "_Sort..." msgstr "_Razvrsti ..." #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:2 msgid "_Group By..." msgstr "Z_druži po ..." #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:3 msgid "_Fields Shown..." msgstr "_Prikazana polja ..." #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:6 msgid "Clear _All" msgstr "Počisti _vse" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:7 msgid "_Show field in View" msgstr "_Pokaži polje v meniju pogleda" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:8 ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1753 msgid "Ascending" msgstr "Naraščajoče" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:9 ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1753 msgid "Descending" msgstr "Padajoče" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:10 msgid "Group Items By" msgstr "Združi predmete po" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:11 msgid "Show _field in View" msgstr "Pokaži po_lje v meniju pogleda" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:12 msgid "Then By" msgstr "in nato po" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:13 msgid "Show field i_n View" msgstr "Pokaži polje _v meniju pogleda" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:14 msgid "Show field in _View" msgstr "Pokaži polje v _meniju pogleda" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:15 msgid "Sort" msgstr "Razvrsti" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:16 msgid "Clear All" msgstr "Počisti vse" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.ui.h:17 msgid "Sort Items By" msgstr "Razvrsti predmete po" #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "Select a Time Zone" msgstr "Izbor časovnega pasu" #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "" "Use the left mouse button to zoom in on an area of the map and select a time " "zone.\n" "Use the right mouse button to zoom out." msgstr "" "Uporabite lev miškin gumb za približanje območja zemljevida in izbiro " "časovnega pasu.\n" "Uporabite desni miškin gumb za oddaljevanje." #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.ui.h:4 msgid "Time Zones" msgstr "Časovni pasovi" #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.ui.h:5 msgid "_Selection" msgstr "_Izbor" #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.ui.h:6 msgid "Timezone drop-down combination box" msgstr "Spustni meni časovnih pasov" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:1 ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:1239 #: ../mail/em-utils.c:240 msgid "Incoming" msgstr "Dohodna" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:2 msgid "the current time" msgstr "trenutni čas" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:3 msgid "the time you specify" msgstr "čas, ki ga navedete" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:4 msgid "a time relative to the current time" msgstr "čas relativno na trenutni čas" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:5 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:78 msgid "seconds" msgstr "sekund" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:9 ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:7 msgid "weeks" msgstr "tednov" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:10 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:8 msgid "months" msgstr "mesecev" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:11 msgid "years" msgstr "let" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:12 msgid "ago" msgstr "nazaj" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:13 msgid "in the future" msgstr "v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:14 msgid "Show filters for mail:" msgstr "Pokaži filtre za pošto:" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:15 ../mail/em-filter-editor.c:166 msgid "_Filter Rules" msgstr "Pravila _filtriranja" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:17 msgid "Compare against" msgstr "Primerjaj z" #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:18 msgid "" "The message's date will be compared against\n" "the current time when filtering occurs." msgstr "" "Datum tega sporočila bo primerjan s trenutnim\n" "časom, ko se izvede filtriranje." #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:20 msgid "" "The message's date will be compared against\n" "12:00am of the date specified." msgstr "" "Datum tega sporočila bo primerjan s časom\n" "12:00 na navedeni datum." #: ../e-util/filter.ui.h:22 msgid "" "The message's date will be compared against\n" "a time relative to when filtering occurs." msgstr "" "Datum tega sporočila bo primerjan s časom,\n" "relativnim na časa filtriranja." #: ../e-util/gal-view-instance-save-as-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "_Create new view" msgstr "Ustvari _nov pogled" #: ../e-util/gal-view-instance-save-as-dialog.ui.h:2 #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-script-dialog.c:417 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:311 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:341 msgid "_Name:" msgstr "_Ime:" #: ../e-util/gal-view-instance-save-as-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "_Replace existing view" msgstr "_Zamenjaj obstoječi pogled" #: ../e-util/e-activity-proxy.c:311 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1734 msgid "Cancel" msgstr "Prekliči" #. Translators: This is a cancelled activity. #: ../e-util/e-activity.c:259 #, c-format msgid "%s (cancelled)" msgstr "%s (preklicano)" #. Translators: This is a completed activity. #: ../e-util/e-activity.c:262 #, c-format msgid "%s (completed)" msgstr "%s (zaključeno)" #. Translators: This is an activity waiting to run. #: ../e-util/e-activity.c:265 #, c-format msgid "%s (waiting)" msgstr "%s (v čakanju)" #. Translators: This is a running activity which #. * the user has requested to cancel. #: ../e-util/e-activity.c:269 #, c-format msgid "%s (cancelling)" msgstr "%s (v postopku preklica)" #: ../e-util/e-activity.c:271 #, c-format msgid "%s" msgstr "%s" #: ../e-util/e-activity.c:276 #, c-format msgid "%s (%d%% complete)" msgstr "%s (%d%% končano)" #. Translators: Escape is a keyboard binding. #: ../e-util/e-alert-bar.c:121 msgid "Close this message (Escape)" msgstr "Zapre to sporočilo (Escape)" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-bar.c:660 ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:703 msgid "Icon View" msgstr "Ikonski pogled" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-bar.c:662 ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:705 msgid "List View" msgstr "Seznamski pogled" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-dialog.c:318 msgid "Attachment Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti priloge" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-dialog.c:340 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:273 msgid "F_ilename:" msgstr "_Ime datoteke:" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-dialog.c:375 msgid "MIME Type:" msgstr "Vrsta MIME:" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-dialog.c:383 ../e-util/e-attachment-store.c:483 msgid "_Suggest automatic display of attachment" msgstr "Predlagaj _samodejen prikaz prilog" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-handler-image.c:97 msgid "Could not set as background" msgstr "Ni mogoče nastaviti kot ozadje" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-handler-image.c:147 msgid "Set as _Background" msgstr "Nastavi kot _ozadje" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-icon-view.c:166 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-tree-view.c:549 msgid "Loading" msgstr "Nalaganje" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-icon-view.c:178 #: ../e-util/e-attachment-tree-view.c:561 msgid "Saving" msgstr "Shranjevanje" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:104 msgid "Hide Attachment _Bar" msgstr "Skrij _vrstico prilog" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:106 ../e-util/e-attachment-paned.c:719 msgid "Show Attachment _Bar" msgstr "Pokaži _vrstico prilog" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-store.c:463 msgid "Add Attachment" msgstr "Doda prilogo" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-store.c:466 msgid "A_ttach" msgstr "_Priloži" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-store.c:537 msgid "Save Attachment" msgid_plural "Save Attachments" msgstr[0] "Shrani priloge" msgstr[1] "Shrani prilogo" msgstr[2] "Shrani prilogi" msgstr[3] "Shrani priloge" #. Translators: Default attachment filename. #: ../e-util/e-attachment-store.c:568 ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2056 #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2716 msgid "attachment.dat" msgstr "priloga.dat" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:378 msgid "Open With Other Application..." msgstr "Odpri z drugim programom ..." #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:385 msgid "S_ave All" msgstr "Shrani _vse" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:411 msgid "A_dd Attachment..." msgstr "Dod_aj prilogo ..." #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:435 msgid "_Hide" msgstr "_Skrij" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:442 msgid "Hid_e All" msgstr "Skrij _vse" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:449 msgid "_View Inline" msgstr "Poglej _znotrajvrstično" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:456 msgid "Vie_w All Inline" msgstr "Poglej vse _medvrstično" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:786 #, c-format msgid "Open With \"%s\"" msgstr "Odpri z \"%s\"" #: ../e-util/e-attachment-view.c:789 #, c-format msgid "Open this attachment in %s" msgstr "Odpri prilogo v %s" #. To Translators: This text is set as a description of an attached #. * message when, for example, attaching it to a composer. When the #. * message to be attached has also filled Subject, then this text is #. * of form "Attached message - Subject", otherwise it's left as is. #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:1106 msgid "Attached message" msgstr "Priloženo sporočilo" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2137 ../e-util/e-attachment.c:3022 msgid "A load operation is already in progress" msgstr "Dejanje nalaganja je že v teku" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2145 ../e-util/e-attachment.c:3030 msgid "A save operation is already in progress" msgstr "Dejanje shranjevanja je že v teku" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2262 #, c-format msgid "Could not load '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti '%s'" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2265 #, c-format msgid "Could not load the attachment" msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti priloge" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2569 #, c-format msgid "Could not open '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti '%s'" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:2572 #, c-format msgid "Could not open the attachment" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti priloge" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:3039 msgid "Attachment contents not loaded" msgstr "Vsebina priloge ni naložena" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:3115 #, c-format msgid "Could not save '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti '%s'" #: ../e-util/e-attachment.c:3118 #, c-format msgid "Could not save the attachment" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti priloge" #: ../e-util/e-book-source-config.c:98 msgid "Mark as default address book" msgstr "Označi kot privzet imenik" #: ../e-util/e-book-source-config.c:103 msgid "Autocomplete with this address book" msgstr "Samodejno dopolnjevanje z imenikom" #: ../e-util/e-book-source-config.c:277 msgid "Copy book content locally for offline operation" msgstr "Kopiraj vsebino knjige krajevno za nepovezano opravilo" #. To Translators: The text is concatenated to a form: "Ctrl-click to open a link http://www.example.com" #: ../e-util/e-buffer-tagger.c:410 msgid "Ctrl-click to open a link" msgstr "S Ctrl+klikom se odpre povezava" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:170 msgid "Mark as default calendar" msgstr "Označi kot privzet koledar" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:173 msgid "Mark as default task list" msgstr "Označi kot privzet seznam nalog" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:176 msgid "Mark as default memo list" msgstr "Označi kot privzet seznam opomnikov" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:201 msgid "Color:" msgstr "Barva:" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:406 msgid "Copy calendar contents locally for offline operation" msgstr "Kopiraj vsebino koledarja krajevno za nepovezano opravilo" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:410 msgid "Copy task list contents locally for offline operation" msgstr "Kopiraj seznam nalog krajevno za nepovezano opravilo" #: ../e-util/e-cal-source-config.c:414 msgid "Copy memo list contents locally for offline operation" msgstr "Kopiraj seznam opomnikov krajevno za nepovezano opravilo" #. This is a strftime() format. %B = Month name. #: ../e-util/e-calendar-item.c:1327 ../e-util/e-calendar-item.c:2195 msgctxt "CalItem" msgid "%B" msgstr "%B" #. This is a strftime() format. %Y = Year. #: ../e-util/e-calendar-item.c:1329 msgctxt "CalItem" msgid "%Y" msgstr "%Y" #. This is a strftime() format. %B = Month name, %Y = Year. #: ../e-util/e-calendar-item.c:1366 msgctxt "CalItem" msgid "%B %Y" msgstr "%B %Y" #: ../e-util/e-calendar.c:190 msgid "Previous month" msgstr "Predhodni mesec" #: ../e-util/e-calendar.c:215 msgid "Next month" msgstr "Naslednji mesec" #: ../e-util/e-calendar.c:241 msgid "Previous year" msgstr "Predhodno leto" #: ../e-util/e-calendar.c:266 msgid "Next year" msgstr "Naslednje leto" #: ../e-util/e-calendar.c:290 msgid "Month Calendar" msgstr "Mesečni koledar" #: ../e-util/e-categories-editor.c:224 msgid "Currently _used categories:" msgstr "Trenutno _uporabljene kategorije:" #: ../e-util/e-categories-editor.c:235 msgid "_Available Categories:" msgstr "K_ategorije na voljo:" #: ../e-util/e-categories-selector.c:323 msgid "Icon" msgstr "Ikona" #: ../e-util/e-category-completion.c:300 #, c-format msgid "Create category \"%s\"" msgstr "Ustvari kategorijo \"%s\"" #: ../e-util/e-category-editor.c:137 msgid "Category Icon" msgstr "Ikona kategorije" #: ../e-util/e-category-editor.c:141 msgid "_No Image" msgstr "_Brez slike" #: ../e-util/e-category-editor.c:178 msgid "Category _Name" msgstr "I_me kategorije" #: ../e-util/e-category-editor.c:190 msgid "Category _Icon" msgstr "_Ikona kategorije" #: ../e-util/e-category-editor.c:216 msgid "Category Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti kategorije" #: ../e-util/e-category-editor.c:277 #, c-format msgid "" "There is already a category '%s' in the configuration. Please use another " "name" msgstr "Kategorija '%s' že obstaja v nastavitvah. Uporabite drugo ime" #: ../e-util/e-cell-combo.c:186 msgid "popup list" msgstr "pojavni seznam" #: ../e-util/e-cell-date-edit.c:299 msgid "Now" msgstr "Zdaj" #. strftime format of a weekday and a date. #: ../e-util/e-cell-date-edit.c:307 ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:209 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1900 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:230 msgid "Today" msgstr "Danes" #. Translators: "None" as a label of a button to unset date in a #. * date table cell. #: ../e-util/e-cell-date-edit.c:317 msgctxt "table-date" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../e-util/e-cell-date-edit.c:325 msgid "OK" msgstr "V redu" #: ../e-util/e-cell-date-edit.c:873 #, c-format msgid "The time must be in the format: %s" msgstr "Datum mora biti v obliki: %s" #: ../e-util/e-cell-date.c:51 ../mail/message-list.c:1851 msgid "?" msgstr "?" #: ../e-util/e-cell-percent.c:80 msgid "The percent value must be between 0 and 100, inclusive" msgstr "Vrednost v odstotkih mora biti med vključno 0 in 100" #: ../e-util/e-charset-combo-box.c:100 msgid "Character Encoding" msgstr "Znakovno kodiranje" #: ../e-util/e-charset-combo-box.c:123 msgid "Enter the character set to use" msgstr "Vnesite nabor znakov, ki naj se uporablja" #: ../e-util/e-charset-combo-box.c:369 msgid "Other..." msgstr "Drugo ..." #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:53 msgid "Arabic" msgstr "Arabsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:54 msgid "Baltic" msgstr "Baltsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:55 msgid "Central European" msgstr "Srednjeevropsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:56 msgid "Chinese" msgstr "Kitajsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:57 msgid "Cyrillic" msgstr "Cirilično" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:58 msgid "Greek" msgstr "Grško" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:59 msgid "Hebrew" msgstr "Hebrejsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:60 msgid "Japanese" msgstr "Japonsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:61 msgid "Korean" msgstr "Korejsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:62 msgid "Thai" msgstr "Tajsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:63 msgid "Turkish" msgstr "Turško" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:64 msgid "Unicode" msgstr "Unicode" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:65 msgid "Western European" msgstr "Zahodnoevropsko" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:66 msgid "Western European, New" msgstr "Zahodnoevropsko, Novo" #. Translators: Character set "Chinese, Traditional" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:85 ../e-util/e-charset.c:87 ../e-util/e-charset.c:89 msgid "Traditional" msgstr "Tradicionalno" #. Translators: Character set "Chinese, Simplified" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:91 ../e-util/e-charset.c:93 ../e-util/e-charset.c:95 #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:97 msgid "Simplified" msgstr "Poenostavljeno" #. Translators: Character set "Cyrillic, Ukrainian" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:101 msgid "Ukrainian" msgstr "Ukrajinsko" #. Translators: Character set "Hebrew, Visual" #: ../e-util/e-charset.c:105 msgid "Visual" msgstr "Vidno" #: ../e-util/e-client-cache.c:1162 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create a client object from extension name '%s'" msgstr "Iz imena razširitve '%s' ni mogoče ustvariti predmeta odjemalca" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:524 msgid "Date and Time" msgstr "Datum in čas" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:549 msgid "Text entry to input date" msgstr "Besedilno polje za vnos datuma" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:572 msgid "Click this button to show a calendar" msgstr "Kliknite ta gumb za prikaz koledarja" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:626 msgid "Drop-down combination box to select time" msgstr "Spustno polje za izbiro časa" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:627 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:9 msgid "Time" msgstr "Čas" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:701 msgid "No_w" msgstr "Zda_j" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:708 msgid "_Today" msgstr "_Danes" #. Note that we don't show this here, since by default a 'None' date #. * is not permitted. #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:717 msgid "_None" msgstr "_Brez" #. Translators: "None" for date field of a date edit, shown when #. * there is no date set. #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:1839 ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:2087 msgctxt "date" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:1979 msgid "Invalid Date Value" msgstr "Neveljavna vrednost datuma" #: ../e-util/e-dateedit.c:2024 msgid "Invalid Time Value" msgstr "Neveljavna vrednost časa" #. strftime format of a weekday and a date. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:220 ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:258 msgid "Tomorrow" msgstr "Jutri" #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:222 msgid "Yesterday" msgstr "Včeraj" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:230 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Mon" msgstr "Naslednji pon" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:236 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Tue" msgstr "Naslednji tor" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:242 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Wed" msgstr "Naslednja sre" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:248 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Thu" msgstr "Naslednji čet" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:254 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Fri" msgstr "Naslednji pet" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:260 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Sat" msgstr "Naslednja sob" #. Translators: This is used for abbreviated days in the future. #. * You can use strftime modifiers here too, like "Next %a", to avoid #. * repeated translation of the abbreviated day name. #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:266 msgctxt "DateFmt" msgid "Next Sun" msgstr "Naslednja ned" #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:353 ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:363 #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:372 msgid "Use locale default" msgstr "Uporabi privzete nastavitve jezikovne oznake" #: ../e-util/e-datetime-format.c:577 msgid "Format:" msgstr "Oblika:" #: ../e-util/e-file-utils.c:121 msgid "(Unknown Filename)" msgstr "(Neznano ime datoteke)" #. Translators: The string value is the basename of a file. #: ../e-util/e-file-utils.c:125 #, c-format msgid "Writing \"%s\"" msgstr "Zapisovanje \"%s\"" #. Translators: The first string value is the basename of a #. * remote file, the second string value is the hostname. #: ../e-util/e-file-utils.c:130 #, c-format msgid "Writing \"%s\" to %s" msgstr "Zapisovanje \"%s\" v %s" #. Don't delete this code, since it is needed so that xgettext can extract the translations. #. * Please, keep these strings in sync with the strings in the timespans array #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:67 #, c-format msgid "1 second ago" msgid_plural "%d seconds ago" msgstr[0] "Pred %d sekundami" msgstr[1] "Pred %d sekundo" msgstr[2] "Pred %d sekundama" msgstr[3] "Pred %d sekundami" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:68 #, c-format msgid "1 second in the future" msgid_plural "%d seconds in the future" msgstr[0] "%d sekund v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d sekunda v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d sekundi v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d sekunde v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:69 #, c-format msgid "1 minute ago" msgid_plural "%d minutes ago" msgstr[0] "Pred %d minutami" msgstr[1] "Pred %d minuto" msgstr[2] "Pred %d minutama" msgstr[3] "Pred %d minutami" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:70 #, c-format msgid "1 minute in the future" msgid_plural "%d minutes in the future" msgstr[0] "%d minut v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d minuta v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d minuti v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d minute v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:71 #, c-format msgid "1 hour ago" msgid_plural "%d hours ago" msgstr[0] "Pred %d urami" msgstr[1] "Pred %d uro" msgstr[2] "Pred %d urama" msgstr[3] "Pred %d urami" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:72 #, c-format msgid "1 hour in the future" msgid_plural "%d hours in the future" msgstr[0] "%d ur v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d ura v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d uri v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d ure v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:73 #, c-format msgid "1 day ago" msgid_plural "%d days ago" msgstr[0] "Pred %d dnevi" msgstr[1] "Pred %d dnevom" msgstr[2] "Pred %d dnevoma" msgstr[3] "Pred %d dnevi" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:74 #, c-format msgid "1 day in the future" msgid_plural "%d days in the future" msgstr[0] "%d dni v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d dan v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d dneva v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d dnevi v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:75 #, c-format msgid "1 week ago" msgid_plural "%d weeks ago" msgstr[0] "Pred %d tedni" msgstr[1] "Pred %d tednom" msgstr[2] "Pred %d tednoma" msgstr[3] "Pred %d tedni" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:76 #, c-format msgid "1 week in the future" msgid_plural "%d weeks in the future" msgstr[0] "%d tednov v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d teden v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d tedna v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d tedni v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:77 #, c-format msgid "1 month ago" msgid_plural "%d months ago" msgstr[0] "Pred %d meseci" msgstr[1] "Pred %d mesecem" msgstr[2] "Pred %d mesecema" msgstr[3] "Pred %d meseci" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:78 #, c-format msgid "1 month in the future" msgid_plural "%d months in the future" msgstr[0] "%d mesecev v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d mesec v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d meseca v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d meseci v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:79 #, c-format msgid "1 year ago" msgid_plural "%d years ago" msgstr[0] "pred %d leti" msgstr[1] "pred %d letom" msgstr[2] "pred %d letoma" msgstr[3] "pred %d leti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:80 #, c-format msgid "1 year in the future" msgid_plural "%d years in the future" msgstr[0] "%d let v prihodnosti" msgstr[1] "%d leto v prihodnosti" msgstr[2] "%d leti v prihodnosti" msgstr[3] "%d leta v prihodnosti" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:130 msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:133 ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:144 #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:155 msgid "now" msgstr "sedaj" #. strftime for date filter display, only needs to show a day date (i.e. no time) #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:140 msgid "%d-%b-%Y" msgstr "%d.%m.%Y" #: ../e-util/e-filter-datespec.c:289 msgid "Select a time to compare against" msgstr "Izberite čas s katerim naj se primerja" #: ../e-util/e-filter-file.c:187 msgid "Choose a File" msgstr "Izbor datoteke" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:743 msgid "R_ule name:" msgstr "Ime _pravila:" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:793 msgid "all the following conditions" msgstr "vsi naslednji pogoji" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:794 msgid "any of the following conditions" msgstr "katerikoli od naslednjih pogojev" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:800 msgid "_Find items which match:" msgstr "_Najdi predmete, ki se ujemajo s/z:" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:823 msgid "Find items that meet the following conditions" msgstr "Najdi predmete, ki ustrezajo naslednjim pogojem" #. Translators: "None" for not including threads; #. * part of "Include threads: None" #. protocol: #. name: #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:838 ../e-util/e-mail-signature-combo-box.c:369 #: ../libemail-engine/camel-null-store.c:28 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:139 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:622 msgid "None" msgstr "brez" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:839 msgid "All related" msgstr "Vse povezano" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:841 msgid "Replies and parents" msgstr "Odgovori in nadrejeni" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:842 msgid "No reply or parent" msgstr "Brez odgovora ali nadrejenega" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:845 msgid "I_nclude threads:" msgstr "Vključi _niti:" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:922 msgid "A_dd Condition" msgstr "Dodaj _pogoj" #: ../e-util/e-filter-rule.c:1239 ../mail/em-utils.c:241 msgid "Outgoing" msgstr "Odhodna" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:256 msgid "" "Choose the file that you want to import into Evolution, and select what type " "of file it is from the list." msgstr "" "Izberite datoteko, ki jo želite uvoziti v Evolution in izberite vrsto " "datoteke s seznama." #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:283 msgid "Select a file" msgstr "Izbor datoteke" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:297 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:472 msgid "File _type:" msgstr "Vrs_ta datoteke:" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:340 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:921 msgid "Choose the destination for this import" msgstr "Izberite cilj za ta uvoz" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:365 msgid "Choose the type of importer to run:" msgstr "Izberite vrsto uvoznika, ki naj se zažene:" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:373 msgid "Import data and settings from _older programs" msgstr "Uv_ozi podatke in nastavitve iz starejših programov" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:381 msgid "Import a _single file" msgstr "Uvozi eno _samo datoteko" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:403 #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-mail-config-import-page.c:202 msgid "Please select the information that you would like to import:" msgstr "Izberite podatke, ki jih želite uvoziti:" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:533 msgid "" "Evolution checked for settings to import from the following applications: " "Pine, Netscape, Elm, iCalendar. No importable settings found. If you would " "like to try again, please click the \"Back\" button." msgstr "" "Evolution je iskal nastavitve programov Pine, Netscape, Elm in iCalendar, " "vendar jih ni mogoče najti. V primeru, da želite poskusiti znova, kliknite " "gumb \"Nazaj\"." #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:559 #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-mail-config-import-page.c:231 #, c-format msgid "From %s:" msgstr "Od: %s:" #. Install a custom "Cancel Import" button. #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:775 msgid "_Cancel Import" msgstr "_Prekliči uvoz" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:920 msgid "Preview data to be imported" msgstr "Predogled podatkov za uvoz" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:926 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:939 #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1292 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1368 #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1377 msgid "Import Data" msgstr "Uvozi podatke" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:934 msgid "Select what type of file you want to import from the list." msgstr "Izberite vrsto datotek za uvoz iz seznama." #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1282 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1317 msgid "Evolution Import Assistant" msgstr "Pomočnik za uvoz v Evolution" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1299 ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1355 msgid "Import Location" msgstr "Uvozi mesto" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1310 msgid "" "Welcome to the Evolution Import Assistant.\n" "With this assistant you will be guided through the process of importing " "external files into Evolution." msgstr "" "Dobrodošli v Pomočniku za uvoz podatkov v program Evolution.\n" "Pomočnik vas vodi skozi postopek uvoza zunanjih datotek v program Evolution." #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1327 msgid "Importer Type" msgstr "Vrsta uvoznika" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1337 msgid "Select Information to Import" msgstr "Izberite podatke za uvoz" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1346 msgid "Select a File" msgstr "Izbor datoteke" #: ../e-util/e-import-assistant.c:1363 msgid "Click \"Apply\" to begin importing the file into Evolution." msgstr "Kliknite \"Uvozi\" za začetek uvoza datoteke v Evolution." #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-combo-box.c:378 msgid "Autogenerated" msgstr "Samodejno ustvarjeno" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:310 msgid "Close" msgstr "Zapri" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:315 msgid "_Save and Close" msgstr "_Shrani in zapri" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:529 msgid "Edit Signature" msgstr "Uredi podpis" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:549 msgid "_Signature Name:" msgstr "_Ime podpisa:" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-editor.c:595 msgid "Unnamed" msgstr "Neimenovan" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-manager.c:337 msgid "Add _Script" msgstr "Dodaj _skript" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-manager.c:422 msgid "Add Signature Script" msgstr "Dodaj skript podpisa" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-manager.c:492 msgid "Edit Signature Script" msgstr "Uredi skript podpisa" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-script-dialog.c:395 msgid "" "The output of this script will be used as your\n" "signature. The name you specify will be used\n" "for display purposes only." msgstr "" "Izhod skripta bo uporabljen kot vaš\n" "podpis. Navedeno ime bo uporabljeno\n" "samo za prikaz." #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-script-dialog.c:446 msgid "S_cript:" msgstr "_Skript:" #: ../e-util/e-mail-signature-script-dialog.c:477 msgid "Script file must be executable." msgstr "Datoteka skripta mora biti izvedljiva." #: ../e-util/e-map.c:886 msgid "World Map" msgstr "Zemljevid sveta" #: ../e-util/e-map.c:889 msgid "" "Mouse-based interactive map widget for selecting timezone. Keyboard users " "should instead select the timezone from the drop-down combination box below." msgstr "" "Gradnik za interaktivni izbor časovnega pasu z miško na zemljevidu. " "Uporabniki tipkovnice lahko časovni pas izberejo iz spodnjega spustnega " "polja." #: ../e-util/e-misc-utils.c:242 msgid "Could not open the link." msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti povezave." #: ../e-util/e-misc-utils.c:289 msgid "Could not display help for Evolution." msgstr "Ni mogoče prikazati pomoči za program Evolution." #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:279 msgid "Show Contacts" msgstr "Pokaži stike" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:311 msgid "Address B_ook:" msgstr "_Imenik:" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:318 msgid "Cat_egory:" msgstr "_Kategorija:" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:342 msgid "_Search:" msgstr "_Poišči:" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:368 #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:1276 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1113 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1733 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:767 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:938 msgid "Any Category" msgstr "Katerakoli kategorija" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:370 msgid "Co_ntacts" msgstr "_Stiki" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:447 msgid "Search" msgstr "Iskanje" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:450 #: ../mail/importers/pine-importer.c:431 msgid "Address Book" msgstr "Imenik" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:578 msgid "Select Contacts from Address Book" msgstr "Izberi stike iz imenika" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-dialog.c:1001 msgid "_Remove" msgstr "_Odstrani" #. To Translators: This would be similiar to "Expand MyList Inline" where MyList is a Contact List #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-entry.c:3028 #, c-format msgid "E_xpand %s Inline" msgstr "Ra_zširi %s medvrstično" #. Copy Contact Item #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-entry.c:3044 #, c-format msgid "Cop_y %s" msgstr "_Kopiraj %s" #. Cut Contact Item #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-entry.c:3055 #, c-format msgid "C_ut %s" msgstr "_Izreži %s" #. Edit Contact item #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-entry.c:3073 #, c-format msgid "_Edit %s" msgstr "_Uredi %s" #: ../e-util/e-name-selector-list.c:583 #, c-format msgid "_Delete %s" msgstr "_Izbriši %s" #: ../e-util/e-online-button.c:31 msgid "Evolution is currently online. Click this button to work offline." msgstr "" "Program Evolution je povezan v omrežje. Kliknite na gumb za delo brez " "povezave." #: ../e-util/e-online-button.c:34 msgid "Evolution is currently offline. Click this button to work online." msgstr "" "Program Evolution trenutno ni povezan. Kliknite na gumb za delo s povezavo." #: ../e-util/e-online-button.c:37 msgid "Evolution is currently offline because the network is unavailable." msgstr "" "Program Evolution trenutno ni povezan, ker omrežna povezava ni na voljo." #: ../e-util/e-passwords.c:127 msgid "Keyring key is unusable: no user or host name" msgstr "" "Ključ zbirke ključev ni uporaben: ni določenega uporabnika ali imena " "gostitelja" #: ../e-util/e-passwords.c:447 msgid "You have the Caps Lock key on." msgstr "Vključeno imate tipko Caps Lock." #: ../e-util/e-passwords.c:578 msgid "_Remember this passphrase" msgstr "_Zapomni si to šifrirno reklo" #: ../e-util/e-passwords.c:579 msgid "_Remember this passphrase for the remainder of this session" msgstr "Zapomni si to _šifrirno reklo do konca seje" #: ../e-util/e-passwords.c:584 msgid "_Remember this password" msgstr "_Zapomni si to geslo" #: ../e-util/e-passwords.c:585 msgid "_Remember this password for the remainder of this session" msgstr "Zapomni si to _geslo do konca seje" #: ../e-util/e-preferences-window.c:318 msgid "Evolution Preferences" msgstr "Možnosti Evolution" #: ../e-util/e-print.c:161 msgid "An error occurred while printing" msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med tiskanjem" #: ../e-util/e-print.c:168 msgid "The printing system reported the following details about the error:" msgstr "Podrobnosti o napaki sistema tiskanja:" #: ../e-util/e-print.c:174 msgid "" "The printing system did not report any additional details about the error." msgstr "Ni dodatnih podrobnosti o napaki sistema tiskanja." #: ../e-util/e-rule-editor.c:185 msgid "Add Rule" msgstr "Dodaj pravilo" #: ../e-util/e-rule-editor.c:287 msgid "Edit Rule" msgstr "Uredi pravilo" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:81 #, c-format msgid "Matches: %u" msgstr "Ujemanja: %u" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:565 msgid "Close the find bar" msgstr "Zapri vrstico iskanja" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:573 msgid "Fin_d:" msgstr "_Najdi:" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:585 msgid "Clear the search" msgstr "Počisti iskanje" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:609 msgid "_Previous" msgstr "_Predhodni" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:615 msgid "Find the previous occurrence of the phrase" msgstr "Najde predhodno ponovitev izraza" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:624 msgid "_Next" msgstr "_Naslednji" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:630 msgid "Find the next occurrence of the phrase" msgstr "Najde naslednjo ponovitev izraza" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:639 msgid "Mat_ch case" msgstr "_Upoštevaj velikost črk" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:667 msgid "Reached bottom of page, continued from top" msgstr "Doseženo je dno strani, nadaljevanje z vrha" #: ../e-util/e-search-bar.c:689 msgid "Reached top of page, continued from bottom" msgstr "Dosežen je bil vrh strani, nadaljevanje z dna" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.c:538 ../mail/importers/elm-importer.c:331 #: ../mail/importers/pine-importer.c:424 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view.c:1088 msgid "Mail" msgstr "Pošta" #: ../e-util/e-send-options.c:570 msgid "When de_leted:" msgstr "Ko je iz_brisano:" #: ../e-util/e-source-config.c:681 ../e-util/e-source-config.c:685 msgid "Type:" msgstr "Vrsta:" #: ../e-util/e-source-config.c:693 ../e-util/e-source-config.c:697 msgid "Name:" msgstr "Ime:" #. Translators: This is the first of a sequence of widgets: #. * "Refresh every [NUMERIC_ENTRY] [TIME_UNITS_COMBO]" #: ../e-util/e-source-config.c:1302 msgid "Refresh every" msgstr "Osveži vsakih" #: ../e-util/e-source-config.c:1332 ../e-util/e-source-config.c:1402 msgid "Use a secure connection" msgstr "Uporabi varno povezavo" #: ../e-util/e-source-config.c:1428 msgid "Unset _trust for SSL certificate" msgstr "Odstrani _zaupaj za SSL certifikat" #: ../e-util/e-source-config.c:1464 msgid "User" msgstr "Uporabnik" #: ../e-util/e-source-selector-dialog.c:229 msgid "_Destination" msgstr "_Cilj" #: ../e-util/e-source-selector-dialog.c:342 msgid "Select destination" msgstr "Izberite cilj" #. no suggestions. Put something in the menu anyway... #: ../e-util/e-spell-entry.c:384 msgid "(no suggestions)" msgstr "(brez predlogov)" #: ../e-util/e-spell-entry.c:408 msgid "More..." msgstr "Dodatno ..." #. + Add to Dictionary #: ../e-util/e-spell-entry.c:479 #, c-format msgid "Add \"%s\" to Dictionary" msgstr "Dodaj \"%s\" v slovar" #. - Ignore All #: ../e-util/e-spell-entry.c:530 msgid "Ignore All" msgstr "Prezri vse" #: ../e-util/e-spell-entry.c:558 msgid "Spelling Suggestions" msgstr "Predlogi črkovanja" #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:1 msgid "A file named \"{0}\" already exists. Do you want to replace it?" msgstr "Datoteka z imenom \"{0}\" že obstaja. Ali jo želite zamenjati?" #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "The file already exists in \"{0}\". Replacing it will overwrite its contents." msgstr "" "Datoteka že obstaja v mapi \"{0}\". S prepisom bo izgubljena njena vsebina." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:3 msgid "_Replace" msgstr "_Zamenjaj" #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:4 msgid "Cannot save file \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti datoteke \"{0}\"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Because \"{1}\"." msgstr "Zaradi \"{1}\"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:6 msgid "Cannot open file \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti datoteke \"{0}\"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:7 msgid "Failed to remove data source "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med odstranjevanjem vira podatkov "{0}"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:8 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:61 msgid "The reported error was "{1}"." msgstr "Sporočena napaka je bila "{1}"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:9 msgid "Failed to update data source "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med posodabljanjem vira podatkov "{0}"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:10 msgid "Failed to delete resource "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med izbrisom sredstva "{0}"." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:11 msgid "" "The address book backend servicing "{0}" has quit unexpectedly." msgstr "Storitve zaledja imenika "{0}" se je nepričakovano končal." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:12 msgid "" "Some of your contacts may not be available until Evolution is restarted." msgstr "" "Nekateri izmed vaših stikov ne bodo na voljo do ponovnega zagona Evolutiona." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:13 msgid "The calendar backend servicing "{0}" has quit unexpectedly." msgstr "" "Storitve zaledja koledarja "{0}" se je nepričakovano končal." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:14 msgid "" "Some of your appointments may not be available until Evolution is restarted." msgstr "" "Nekateri izmed vaših sestankov ne bodo na voljo do ponovnega zagona " "Evolutiona." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:15 msgid "" "The memo list backend servicing "{0}" has quit unexpectedly." msgstr "" "Storitve zaledja opomnikov "{0}" se je nepričakovano končal." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:16 msgid "Some of your memos may not be available until Evolution is restarted." msgstr "" "Nekateri izmed vaših opomnikov ne bodo na voljo do ponovnega zagona " "Evolutiona." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:17 msgid "" "The task list backend servicing "{0}" has quit unexpectedly." msgstr "" "Storitve zaledja seznama nalog "{0}" se je nepričakovano končal." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:18 msgid "Some of your tasks may not be available until Evolution is restarted." msgstr "" "Nekaj vaših nalog ne bo na voljo dokler se Evolution ponovno ne zažene." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:19 msgid "" "The address book backend servicing "{0}" encountered an error." msgstr "V storitvah zaledja imenika "{0}" je prišlo do napake." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:20 msgid "The calendar backend servicing "{0}" encountered an error." msgstr "V storitvah zaledja koledarja "{0}" je prišlo do napake." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:21 msgid "The memo list backend servicing "{0}" encountered an error." msgstr "V storitvah zaledja opomnika "{0}" je prišlo do napake." #: ../e-util/e-system.error.xml.h:22 msgid "The task list backend servicing "{0}" encountered an error." msgstr "" "V storitvah zaledja seznama nalog "{0}" je prišlo do napake." #: ../e-util/e-table-click-to-add.c:680 #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-table-click-to-add.c:62 #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-table-click-to-add.c:143 msgid "click to add" msgstr "kliknite za dodajanje" #: ../e-util/e-table-column-selector.c:266 msgid "Move selected column names to top" msgstr "Premakni imena izbranih kolon na vrh" #: ../e-util/e-table-column-selector.c:271 msgid "Move selected column names up one row" msgstr "Premakni imena izbranih kolon eno vrstico gor" #: ../e-util/e-table-column-selector.c:276 msgid "Move selected column names down one row" msgstr "Premakni imena izbranih kolon eno vrstico dol" #: ../e-util/e-table-column-selector.c:281 msgid "Move selected column names to bottom" msgstr "Premakni imena izbranih kolon na dno" #: ../e-util/e-table-column-selector.c:286 msgid "Select all column names" msgstr "Izberi vsa imena kolon" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.c:389 ../e-util/e-table-config.c:435 msgid "(Ascending)" msgstr "(naraščajoče)" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.c:389 ../e-util/e-table-config.c:435 msgid "(Descending)" msgstr "(padajoče)" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.c:396 msgid "Not sorted" msgstr "Nerazvrščeno" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.c:441 msgid "No grouping" msgstr "Brez združevanja v skupine" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.c:546 msgid "Show Fields" msgstr "Pokaži polja" #: ../e-util/e-table-config.c:562 msgid "Choose the order of information to appear in the message list." msgstr "Izberi vrstni red prikazovanja informacij v seznamu sporočil." #: ../e-util/e-table-field-chooser-dialog.c:227 msgid "Add a Column" msgstr "Dodaj stolpec" #: ../e-util/e-table-field-chooser.c:167 msgid "" "To add a column to your table, drag it into\n" "the location in which you want it to appear." msgstr "" "Za dodajanje stolpca k svoji razpredelnici ga\n" "povlecite do mesta kjer naj se pojavi." #: ../e-util/e-table-group-container.c:369 #, c-format msgid "%s: %s (%d item)" msgid_plural "%s: %s (%d items)" msgstr[0] "%s : %s (%d predmetov)" msgstr[1] "%s : %s (%d predmet)" msgstr[2] "%s : %s (%d predmeta)" msgstr[3] "%s : %s (%d predmeti)" #: ../e-util/e-table-group-container.c:383 #, c-format msgid "%s (%d item)" msgid_plural "%s (%d items)" msgstr[0] "%s (%d predmetov)" msgstr[1] "%s (%d predmet)" msgstr[2] "%s (%d predmeta)" msgstr[3] "%s (%d predmeti)" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1576 msgid "Customize Current View" msgstr "Prilagodi trenutni pogled" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1599 msgid "Sort _Ascending" msgstr "Razvrsti _naraščajoče" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1602 msgid "Sort _Descending" msgstr "Razvrsti _padajoče" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1605 msgid "_Unsort" msgstr "O_dstrani razvrstitev" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1608 msgid "Group By This _Field" msgstr "Združi po tem _polju" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1611 msgid "Group By _Box" msgstr "Združi po _škatli" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1615 msgid "Remove This _Column" msgstr "Odstrani ta _stolpec" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1618 msgid "Add a C_olumn..." msgstr "_Dodaj stolpec ..." #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1622 msgid "A_lignment" msgstr "_Poravnava" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1625 msgid "B_est Fit" msgstr "Najboljše _prileganje" #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1628 msgid "Format Column_s..." msgstr "_Oblikuj stolpce ..." #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1632 msgid "Custo_mize Current View..." msgstr "Prila_godi trenutni pogled ..." #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1703 msgid "_Sort By" msgstr "_Razvrsti po" #. Custom #: ../e-util/e-table-header-item.c:1726 msgid "_Custom" msgstr "_Po meri" #: ../e-util/e-text.c:2098 msgid "Select All" msgstr "Izberi vse" #: ../e-util/e-text.c:2111 msgid "Input Methods" msgstr "Načini vnosa" #. Put the "UTC" entry at the top of the combo's list. #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.c:207 ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.c:429 #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.c:433 ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.c:437 #: ../e-util/e-timezone-dialog.c:803 msgid "UTC" msgstr "UTC" #: ../e-util/e-url-entry.c:109 msgid "Click here to open the URL" msgstr "Klikni tu, da odpreš URL" #: ../e-util/e-url-entry.c:111 msgid "Enter a URL here" msgstr "URL vpiši tu" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:406 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:285 msgid "_Copy Link Location" msgstr "_Kopiraj mesto povezave" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:408 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:287 msgid "Copy the link to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopira povezavo na odložišče" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:416 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:295 msgid "_Open Link in Browser" msgstr "_Odpri povezavo v brskalniku" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:418 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:297 msgid "Open the link in a web browser" msgstr "Odpre povezavo v spletnemu brskalniku" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:426 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:305 msgid "_Copy Email Address" msgstr "Kopiraj _elektronski naslov" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:443 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:322 msgid "_Copy Image" msgstr "_Kopiraj sliko" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:445 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:324 msgid "Copy the image to the clipboard" msgstr "Kopira sliko v odložišče" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:465 ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:1308 #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:351 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:1317 msgid "Select all text and images" msgstr "Izberi vse besedilo in slike" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:972 ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:974 #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:976 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:992 #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:994 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:996 #, c-format msgid "Click to call %s" msgstr "Kliknite za klicanje %s" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:978 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:998 msgid "Click to hide/unhide addresses" msgstr "Kliknite za skritje/prikaz naslovov" #: ../e-util/e-web-view-gtkhtml.c:980 ../e-util/e-web-view.c:1000 #, c-format msgid "Click to open %s" msgstr "Kliknite za odpiranje %s" #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:329 msgid "Save _Image..." msgstr "Shrani _sliko ..." #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:331 msgid "Save the image to a file" msgstr "Shrani sliko v datoteko" #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:2894 msgid "Copying image to clipboard" msgstr "Kopiram sliko v odložišče" #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:3082 msgid "Save Image" msgstr "Shrani sliko" #: ../e-util/e-web-view.c:3118 #, c-format msgid "Saving image to '%s'" msgstr "Shranjujem sliko v '%s'" #: ../e-util/ea-calendar-item.c:315 ../e-util/ea-calendar-item.c:324 msgid "%d %B %Y" msgstr "%d. %B %Y" #: ../e-util/ea-calendar-item.c:327 #, c-format msgid "Calendar: from %s to %s" msgstr "Koledar: od %s do %s" #: ../e-util/ea-calendar-item.c:364 msgid "evolution calendar item" msgstr "predmet koledarja evolution" #: ../e-util/evolution-source-viewer.c:635 msgid "Evolution Source Viewer" msgstr "Pregledovalnik virov Evolution" #. Translators: The name that is displayed in the user interface #: ../e-util/evolution-source-viewer.c:665 msgid "Display Name" msgstr "Prikazno ime" #: ../e-util/evolution-source-viewer.c:674 msgid "Flags" msgstr "Zastavice" #: ../e-util/evolution-source-viewer.c:726 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:678 msgid "Identity" msgstr "Istovetnost" #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Missing date." msgstr "Manjka datum." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:2 msgid "You must choose a date." msgstr "Izbrati morate datum." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Missing filename." msgstr "Manjka ime datoteke." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:4 msgid "You must specify a filename." msgstr "Navesti morate ime datoteke." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:5 msgid "File "{0}" does not exist or is not a regular file." msgstr "Datoteka "{0}" ne obstaja ali ni logična datoteka." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:6 msgid "Bad regular expression "{0}"." msgstr "Napačen logični izraz "{0}"." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:7 msgid "Could not compile regular expression "{1}"." msgstr "Ni mogoče prevesti logičnega izraza "{1}"." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:8 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:100 msgid "Missing name." msgstr "Manjka ime." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:9 msgid "You must name this filter." msgstr "Filtru morate dati ime." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:10 msgid "Name "{0}" already used." msgstr "Ime "{0}" je že uporabljeno." #: ../e-util/filter.error.xml.h:11 msgid "Please choose another name." msgstr "Izberite drugačno ime." #. Translators: description of a "popup" action #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-cell-popup.c:128 msgid "popup a child" msgstr "prikaže podrejen predmet v pojavnem oknu" #. Translators: description of a "toggle" action #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-cell-toggle.c:180 msgid "toggle the cell" msgstr "preklopi celico" #. Translators: description of an "expand" action #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-cell-tree.c:215 msgid "expands the row in the ETree containing this cell" msgstr "razširi vrstico v ETree, ki vsebuje to celico" #. Translators: description of a "collapse" action #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-cell-tree.c:223 msgid "collapses the row in the ETree containing this cell" msgstr "zloži vrstico v ETree, ki vsebuje to celico" #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-cell.c:123 msgid "Table Cell" msgstr "Celica preglednice" #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-table-click-to-add.c:72 msgid "click" msgstr "kliknite" #: ../e-util/gal-a11y-e-table-column-header.c:163 msgid "sort" msgstr "razvrsti" #: ../e-util/gal-view-instance-save-as-dialog.c:296 msgid "Save Current View" msgstr "Shrani trenutni pogled" #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Do you wish to save your changes?" msgstr "Ali želite shraniti spremembe?" #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:2 msgid "This signature has been changed, but has not been saved." msgstr "Podpis je bil spremenjen, a ni bil shranjen." #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:3 msgid "_Discard changes" msgstr "_Prezri spremembe" #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:4 msgid "Blank Signature" msgstr "Prazen podpis" #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Please provide an unique name to identify this signature." msgstr "Izberite edinstveno ime za ugotovitev istovetnosti tega podpisa." #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:6 msgid "Unable to copy image to clipboard." msgstr "Slike ni možno prekopirati v odložišče." #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:7 msgid "Unable to save image." msgstr "Slike ni možno shraniti." #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:8 msgid "Could not load signature." msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti podpisa." #: ../e-util/widgets.error.xml.h:9 msgid "Could not save signature." msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti podpisa." #: ../libemail-engine/camel-sasl-xoauth2.c:27 msgid "OAuth2" msgstr "OAuth2" #: ../libemail-engine/camel-sasl-xoauth2.c:28 msgid "" "This option will use an OAuth 2.0 access token to connect to the server" msgstr "" "Ta opcija bo uporabila OAuth 2.0 žeton dostopa za priklop na strežnik" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-authenticator.c:182 #, c-format msgid "Invalid authentication result code (%d)" msgstr "Neveljavna koda rezultata overitve (%d)" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:114 #, c-format msgid "Saving message to folder '%s'" msgstr "Shranjevanje sporočila v mapo '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:572 msgid "Forwarded messages" msgstr "Posredovana sporočila" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:682 #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:933 #, c-format msgid "Retrieving %d message" msgid_plural "Retrieving %d messages" msgstr[0] "Pridobivanje %d sporočil" msgstr[1] "Pridobivanje %d sporočila" msgstr[2] "Pridobivanje %d sporočil" msgstr[3] "Pridobivanje %d sporočil" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:776 msgid "Scanning messages for duplicates" msgstr "Preiskovanje podvojenih sporočil" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:1184 #, c-format msgid "Removing folder '%s'" msgstr "Odstranjevanje mape '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:1321 #, c-format msgid "File \"%s\" has been removed." msgstr "Datoteka \"%s\" je odstranjena." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:1325 msgid "File has been removed." msgstr "Datoteka je odstranjena." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:1384 msgid "Removing attachments" msgstr "Odstranjevanje prilog" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:1548 #, c-format msgid "Saving %d message" msgid_plural "Saving %d messages" msgstr[0] "Shranjevanje %d sporočil" msgstr[1] "Shranjevanje %d sporočila" msgstr[2] "Shranjevanje %d sporočil" msgstr[3] "Shranjevanje %d sporočil" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-folder-utils.c:1926 #, c-format msgid "Invalid folder URI '%s'" msgstr "Neveljaven naslov URI mape '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session-utils.c:540 msgid "No mail transport service available" msgstr "Na voljo ni storitev za prenos pošte" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session-utils.c:640 #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:730 #, c-format msgid "Failed to apply outgoing filters: %s" msgstr "Uveljavljanje izhodnih filtrov ni uspelo: %s" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session-utils.c:689 #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:774 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to append to %s: %s\n" "Appending to local 'Sent' folder instead." msgstr "" "Pripenjanje v %s ni uspelo: %s\n" "Pripenjanje v krajevno mapo 'Poslano'." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session-utils.c:715 #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:798 #, c-format msgid "Failed to append to local 'Sent' folder: %s" msgstr "Pripenjanje v krajevno mapo 'Poslano' ni uspelo: %s" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session-utils.c:916 #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:929 ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1031 msgid "Sending message" msgstr "Pošiljanje sporočila" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:120 ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:342 #: ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:789 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1061 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1072 msgid "Inbox" msgstr "Dohodna pošta" #. E_MAIL_LOCAL_FOLDER_INBOX #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:121 ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:782 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1059 msgid "Drafts" msgstr "Osnutki" #. E_MAIL_LOCAL_FOLDER_DRAFTS #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:122 ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:793 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1063 msgid "Outbox" msgstr "Odhodni predal" #. E_MAIL_LOCAL_FOLDER_OUTBOX #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:123 ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:797 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1065 msgid "Sent" msgstr "Poslano" #. E_MAIL_LOCAL_FOLDER_SENT #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:124 ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:785 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1067 #: ../plugins/templates/org-gnome-templates.eplug.xml.h:1 #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:1082 ../plugins/templates/templates.c:1381 #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:1391 msgid "Templates" msgstr "Predloge" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:1347 #, c-format msgid "User cancelled operation" msgstr "Uporabnik je preklical opravilo" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:1542 #, c-format msgid "%s authentication failed" msgstr "Overitev %s je spodletela." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:1592 #, c-format msgid "No data source found for UID '%s'" msgstr "Vira podatkov za UID '%s' ni bilo mogoče najti." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:1655 #, c-format msgid "" "No destination address provided, forwarding of the message has been " "cancelled." msgstr "" "Ciljni naslov ni bil določen, posredovanje sporočila je bilo preklicano." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-session.c:1668 #, c-format msgid "" "No identity found to use, forwarding of the message has been cancelled." msgstr "" "Najdene ni nobene istovetnosti za uporabo, posredovanje sporočila je bilo " "prekinjeno." #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-store-utils.c:190 #, c-format msgid "Disconnecting from '%s'" msgstr "Prekinjanje povezave s strežnikom '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-store-utils.c:279 #, c-format msgid "Reconnecting to '%s'" msgstr "Ponovno povezovanje s strežnikom '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/e-mail-store-utils.c:370 #, c-format msgid "Preparing account '%s' for offline" msgstr "Pripravljanje računa '%s' za delo brez povezave" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-folder-cache.c:1241 #, c-format msgid "Pinging %s" msgstr "Pošiljanje pinga %s" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:94 msgid "Filtering Selected Messages" msgstr "Filtriranje izbranih sporočil" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:152 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to filter selected messages. One reason can be that folder location " "set in one or more filters is invalid. Please check your filters in Edit-" ">Message Filters.\n" "Original error was: %s" msgstr "" "Filtriranje izbranih sporočil ni možno. Razlog je lahko, da mesto mape " "nastavljeno v enem ali več filtrih ni ustrezno. Prosimo, da preverite vaše " "filtre v Urejanje->Filtri sporočil. \n" "Izvirna napaka je bila: %s" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:233 #, c-format msgid "Fetching mail from '%s'" msgstr "Pridobivanje pošte od '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:724 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to apply outgoing filters. One reason can be that folder location set " "in one or more filters is invalid. Please check your filters in Edit-" ">Message Filters.\n" "Original error was: %s" msgstr "" "Izhodnih filtrov ni možno uporabiti. Razlog je lahko , da mesto mape " "nastavljeno v enem ali več filtrih ni ustrezno. Prosimo preverite vaše " "filtre v Urejanje->Filtri sporočil.\n" "Izvirna napaka je bila: %s" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:940 #, c-format msgid "Sending message %d of %d" msgstr "Pošiljanje sporočila %d od %d" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:992 #, c-format msgid "Failed to send a message" msgid_plural "Failed to send %d of %d messages" msgstr[0] "Pošiljanje %d od %d sporočil je spodletelo." msgstr[1] "Pošiljanje %d od %d sporočila je spodletelo." msgstr[2] "Pošiljanje %d od %d sporočil je spodletelo." msgstr[3] "Pošiljanje %d od %d sporočil je spodletelo." #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:998 msgid "Canceled." msgstr "Preklicano." #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1000 msgid "Complete." msgstr "Končano." #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1112 #, c-format msgid "Moving messages to '%s'" msgstr "Premikanje sporočil v '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1113 #, c-format msgid "Copying messages to '%s'" msgstr "Kopiranje sporočil v '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1232 #, c-format msgid "Storing folder '%s'" msgstr "Shranjevanje mape '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1360 #, c-format msgid "Expunging and storing account '%s'" msgstr "Uničevanje in shranjevanje računa '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1361 #, c-format msgid "Storing account '%s'" msgstr "Shranjevanje računa '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-ops.c:1435 #, c-format msgid "Emptying trash in '%s'" msgstr "Praznjenje smeti v '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-tools.c:71 #, c-format msgid "Could not create spool directory '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti vrstilne mape '%s': %s" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-tools.c:111 #, c-format msgid "Trying to movemail a non-mbox source '%s'" msgstr "Poskus premika pošte v vir non-mbox '%s'" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-tools.c:237 #, c-format msgid "Forwarded message - %s" msgstr "Posredovano sporočilo - %s" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-tools.c:239 msgid "Forwarded message" msgstr "Posredovano sporočilo" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-vfolder.c:153 #, c-format msgid "Setting up Search Folder: %s" msgstr "Nastavljanje iskalne mape: %s" #: ../libemail-engine/mail-vfolder.c:306 #, c-format msgid "Updating Search Folders for '%s' - %s" msgstr "Posodabljanje iskalne mape za '%s' - %s" #. Translators: The first %s is name of the affected #. * search folder(s), the second %s is the URI of the #. * removed folder. For more than one search folder is #. * each of them on a separate line, with four spaces #. * in front of its name, without quotes. #: ../libemail-engine/mail-vfolder.c:670 #, c-format msgid "" "The Search Folder \"%s\" has been modified to account for the deleted " "folder\n" "\"%s\"." msgid_plural "" "The following Search Folders\n" "%s have been modified to account for the deleted folder\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[0] "" "Naslednje iskalne mape\n" "%s so bile spremenjene zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[1] "" "Iskalna mapa \"%s\" je bila spremenjena zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[2] "" "Naslednji iskalni mapi\n" "%s sta bili spremenjeni zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[3] "" "Naslednje iskalne mape\n" "%s so bile spremenjene zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." #: ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:116 ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:203 msgid "Open _Online Accounts" msgstr "Odpri _spletne račune" #: ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:142 ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:229 msgid "This account was created through the Online Accounts service." msgstr "Ta račun je bil odprt preko storitve spletnih računov." #: ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:690 msgid "_Restore Default" msgstr "_Obnovi privzeto" #: ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:703 msgid "You can drag and drop account names to reorder them." msgstr "" "Imena računov je mogoče prerazporediti tako, da jih povlečete in spustite." #: ../mail/e-mail-account-manager.c:746 msgid "De_fault" msgstr "_Privzeto" #: ../mail/e-mail-account-tree-view.c:85 #: ../modules/mail/em-composer-prefs.c:443 #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:359 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:890 msgid "Enabled" msgstr "Omogočeno" #: ../mail/e-mail-account-tree-view.c:109 msgid "Account Name" msgstr "Ime računa" #: ../mail/e-mail-account-tree-view.c:136 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:335 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:475 ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3600 #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:49 msgid "Default" msgstr "Privzeto" #: ../mail/e-mail-autoconfig.c:578 msgid "No email address provided" msgstr "Naslov e-pošte ni določen" #: ../mail/e-mail-autoconfig.c:587 msgid "Missing domain in email address" msgstr "V naslovu e-pošte manjka domena" #: ../mail/e-mail-backend.c:754 msgid "Unknown background operation" msgstr "Neznano ozadnje opravilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:129 ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:860 #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:867 ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:874 msgid "Close this window" msgstr "Zapri to okno" #: ../mail/e-mail-browser.c:286 msgid "(No Subject)" msgstr "(brez zadeve)" #. GtkAssistant sinks the floating button reference. #: ../mail/e-mail-config-assistant.c:102 msgid "_Skip Lookup" msgstr "_Preskoči iskanje" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-assistant.c:562 msgid "Evolution Account Assistant" msgstr "Pomočnik za račune Evolution" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-auth-check.c:352 msgid "Check for Supported Types" msgstr "Preveri za podprte vrste" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-confirm-page.c:157 msgid "" "Congratulations, your mail configuration is complete.\n" "\n" "You are now ready to send and receive email using Evolution.\n" "\n" "Click \"Apply\" to save your settings." msgstr "" "Nastavljanje vaše pošte je končano.\n" "\n" "Sedaj je mogoče prejemati in pošiljati pošto s pomočjo programa Evolution.\n" "\n" "S klikom na gumb \"Uveljavi\" bodo spremembe shranjene." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-confirm-page.c:169 msgid "Done" msgstr "Končano" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:552 msgid "Special Folders" msgstr "Posebne mape" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:561 msgid "Draft Messages _Folder:" msgstr "_Mapa osnutkov sporočil:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:571 msgid "Choose a folder for saving draft messages." msgstr "Izberite mapo za shranjevanje osnutkov sporočil." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:585 msgid "Sent _Messages Folder:" msgstr "_Mapa poslanih sporočil:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:595 msgid "Choose a folder for saving sent messages." msgstr "Izberite mapo za shranjevanje poslanih sporočil." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:614 msgid "S_ave replies in the folder of the message being replied to" msgstr "S_hrani odgovore v mapo sporočila na katerega odgovarja" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:631 msgid "_Restore Defaults" msgstr "_Obnovi privzeto" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:645 msgid "Use a Real Folder for _Trash:" msgstr "Uporabi pravo mapo za _Smeti:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:646 msgid "Choose a folder for deleted messages." msgstr "Izberite mapo za izbrisana sporočila." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:655 msgid "Use a Real Folder for _Junk:" msgstr "Uporabi pravo mapo za _Neželeno pošto:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:656 msgid "Choose a folder for junk messages." msgstr "Izberite mapo za neželena sporočila." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:673 msgid "Composing Messages" msgstr "Sestavljanje sporočil" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:682 msgid "Alway_s carbon-copy (cc) to:" msgstr "Vedno pošlji _kopije (Kp) na:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:707 msgid "Always _blind carbon-copy (bcc) to:" msgstr "Vedno pošlji _slepe kopije (Skp) na:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:742 msgid "Message Receipts" msgstr "Prejemniki sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:751 msgid "S_end message receipts:" msgstr "Pošlji povratnic_e sporočil:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:776 msgid "Never" msgstr "Nikoli" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:782 msgid "Always" msgstr "Vedno" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:788 msgid "Ask for each message" msgstr "Vprašaj za vsako sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-defaults-page.c:859 msgid "Defaults" msgstr "Privzeto" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:266 msgid "" "Please enter your name and email address below. The \"optional\" fields " "below do not need to be filled in, unless you wish to include this " "information in email you send." msgstr "" "Spodaj vnesite svoje ime in naslov elektronske pošte. Polj \"dodatno\" ni " "treba izpolnjevati, razen če želite tudi te podatke vključiti v elektronsko " "pošto, ki jo boste pošiljali." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:294 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:324 msgid "Account Information" msgstr "Podrobnosti računa" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:303 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:333 msgid "" "Type the name by which you would like to refer to this account.\n" "For example, \"Work\" or \"Personal\"." msgstr "" "Vtipkajte ime, ki bi ga radi uporabili za ta račun.\n" "Na primer, \"Delo\" ali \"Osebno\"." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:348 msgid "Required Information" msgstr "Zahtevani podatki" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:357 msgid "Full Nam_e:" msgstr "Polno im_e:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:384 msgid "Email _Address:" msgstr "_Elektronski naslov:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:431 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:26 msgid "Optional Information" msgstr "Dodatne podrobnosti" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:440 msgid "Re_ply-To:" msgstr "Od_govori-na:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:467 msgid "Or_ganization:" msgstr "Or_ganizacija:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-identity-page.c:522 msgid "Add Ne_w Signature..." msgstr "Dodaj no_v podpis ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-lookup-page.c:68 msgid "Looking up account details..." msgstr "Iskanje podrobnosti računa ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-provider-page.c:485 msgid "Checking for New Mail" msgstr "Preverjanje za novo pošto" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-provider-page.c:501 msgid "Check for _new messages every" msgstr "Samodejno preveri _novo pošto vsakih" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-provider-page.c:700 msgid "Receiving Options" msgstr "Možnosti prejemanja" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-receiving-page.c:50 msgid "Receiving Email" msgstr "Prejemanje elektronske pošte" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:260 #: ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:266 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:24 #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:114 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:47 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/config-ui.c:91 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:16 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:653 msgid "General" msgstr "Splošno" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:269 msgid "_Do not sign meeting requests (for Outlook compatibility)" msgstr "Ne po_dpisuj zahtev za srečanja (za združljivost z Outlookom)" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:291 msgid "Pretty Good Privacy (OpenPGP)" msgstr "Precej dobra zasebnost (OpenPGP)" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:300 msgid "OpenPGP _Key ID:" msgstr "OpenPGP ID _ključ:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:322 msgid "Si_gning algorithm:" msgstr "Po_dpisovalni algoritem:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:338 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:478 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:50 msgid "SHA1" msgstr "SHA1" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:341 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:481 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:51 msgid "SHA256" msgstr "SHA256" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:344 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:484 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:52 msgid "SHA384" msgstr "SHA384" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:347 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:487 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:53 msgid "SHA512" msgstr "SHA512" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:363 msgid "Al_ways sign outgoing messages when using this account" msgstr "Ob uporabi tega računa _vedno podpiši odhodno pošto" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:375 msgid "Always encrypt to _myself when sending encrypted messages" msgstr "Ob pošiljanju šifrirane pošte vedno šifriraj tudi _sebi" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:387 msgid "Always _trust keys in my keyring when encrypting" msgstr "Med šifriranjem vedno _zaupaj ključem v moji zbirki ključev" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:411 msgid "Secure MIME (S/MIME)" msgstr "Varne vrste MIME (S/MIME)" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:420 msgid "Sig_ning certificate:" msgstr "Po_dpisovanje potrdila:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:444 #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:550 msgid "Select" msgstr "Izberi" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:462 msgid "Signing _algorithm:" msgstr "Podpisovalni _algoritem:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:503 msgid "Always sign outgoing messages when using this account" msgstr "Vedno ko uporabljaš ta račun, podpiši odhodna sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:526 msgid "Encryption certificate:" msgstr "Potrdilo za šifriranje:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:568 msgid "Always encrypt outgoing messages when using this account" msgstr "Vedno ko uporabljaš ta račun, šifriraj odhodna sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-security-page.c:588 msgid "Always encrypt to myself when sending encrypted messages" msgstr "Vedno šifriraj sebi, ko pošiljaš šifrirana sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-sending-page.c:50 msgid "Sending Email" msgstr "Pošiljanje elektronske pošte" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-service-page.c:640 msgid "Server _Type:" msgstr "Vrs_ta strežnika:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:142 msgid "SSL" msgstr "SSL" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:145 msgid "TLS" msgstr "TLS" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:307 msgid "" "This is a summary of the settings which will be used to access your mail." msgstr "" "To je povzetek nastavitev, ki bodo uporabljene za dostop do elektronske " "pošte." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:372 msgid "Personal Details" msgstr "Osebne podrobnosti" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:381 msgid "Full Name:" msgstr "Polno Ime:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:395 msgid "Email Address:" msgstr "E-naslov:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:409 msgid "Receiving" msgstr "Prejemanje" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:421 msgid "Sending" msgstr "Pošiljanje" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:433 msgid "Server Type:" msgstr "Vrsta strežnika:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:454 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:608 msgid "Server:" msgstr "Strežnik:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:475 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:697 msgid "Username:" msgstr "Uporabniško ime:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:496 msgid "Security:" msgstr "Varnost:" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-summary-page.c:787 msgid "Account Summary" msgstr "Povzetek računa" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-welcome-page.c:157 msgid "" "Welcome to the Evolution Mail Configuration Assistant.\n" "\n" "Click \"Continue\" to begin." msgstr "" "Dobrodošli v pomočniku za poštne nastavitve programa Evolution.\n" "\n" "Kliknite \"Nadaljuj\" za začetek." #: ../mail/e-mail-config-welcome-page.c:167 #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-startup-assistant.c:152 msgid "Welcome" msgstr "Dobrodošli" #: ../mail/e-mail-config-window.c:327 msgid "Account Editor" msgstr "Urejevalnik računov" #: ../mail/e-mail-display.c:96 msgid "_Add to Address Book..." msgstr "Dod_aj v imenik ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-display.c:103 msgid "_To This Address" msgstr "_Za ta naslov" #: ../mail/e-mail-display.c:110 msgid "_From This Address" msgstr "_Iz tega naslova" #: ../mail/e-mail-display.c:117 msgid "Send _Reply To..." msgstr "_Odgovori pošiljatelju ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-display.c:119 msgid "Send a reply message to this address" msgstr "Pošlji odgovor na sporočilo na ta naslov" #: ../mail/e-mail-display.c:126 msgid "Create Search _Folder" msgstr "Ustvari _iskalno mapo" #. Label + combo box has a 12px left margin so it's #. * aligned with the junk mail options above it. #: ../mail/e-mail-junk-options.c:252 msgid "Junk filtering software:" msgstr "Filtriranje neželene pošte:" #: ../mail/e-mail-label-dialog.c:225 msgid "_Label name:" msgstr "_Ime oznake:" #: ../mail/e-mail-label-list-store.c:57 msgid "I_mportant" msgstr "Po_membno" #. red #: ../mail/e-mail-label-list-store.c:58 msgid "_Work" msgstr "_Služba" #. orange #: ../mail/e-mail-label-list-store.c:59 msgid "_Personal" msgstr "_Osebno" #. green #: ../mail/e-mail-label-list-store.c:60 msgid "_To Do" msgstr "_Seznam opravil" #. blue #: ../mail/e-mail-label-list-store.c:61 msgid "_Later" msgstr "_Pozneje" #: ../mail/e-mail-label-manager.c:170 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1030 msgid "Add Label" msgstr "Dodaj oznako" #: ../mail/e-mail-label-manager.c:221 msgid "Edit Label" msgstr "Uredi oznako" #: ../mail/e-mail-label-manager.c:353 msgid "" "Note: Underscore in the label name is used\n" "as mnemonic identifier in menu." msgstr "" "Opomba: Vezaj v oznaki imena se uporablja\n" "kot določilo hitrega dostopa do menija." #: ../mail/e-mail-label-tree-view.c:89 msgid "Color" msgstr "Barva" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:167 msgid "Move selected headers to top" msgstr "Premakni izbrane glave na vrh" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:172 msgid "Move selected headers up one row" msgstr "Premakni izbrane glave eno vrsto višje" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:177 msgid "Move selected headers down one row" msgstr "Premakni izbrane glave eno vrsto nižje" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:182 msgid "Move selected headers to bottom" msgstr "Premakni izbrane glave na dno" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:187 msgid "Select all headers" msgstr "Izberi vse glave" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:206 msgid "Header Name" msgstr "Ime glave" #: ../mail/e-mail-print-config-headers.c:215 msgid "Header Value" msgstr "Vrednost glave" #: ../mail/e-mail-printer.c:125 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:101 msgid "Headers" msgstr "Glave" #: ../mail/e-mail-printer.c:167 #, c-format msgid "Page %d of %d" msgstr "Stran %d od %d" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:351 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:12 msgid "Copy to Folder" msgstr "Kopira v mapo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:351 ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:518 msgid "C_opy" msgstr "K_opiraj" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:851 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:54 msgid "Move to Folder" msgstr "Premakne v mapo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:851 ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:518 msgid "_Move" msgstr "Pre_makni" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1177 ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1389 #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1429 msgid "_Do not ask me again." msgstr "_Ne vprašaj več" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1435 msgid "_Always ignore Reply-To: for mailing lists." msgstr "_Vedno prezri dogovore-na: za dopisne sezname" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1637 msgid "Failed to retrieve message:" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem sporočila:" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1677 ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2842 #, c-format msgid "Retrieving message '%s'" msgstr "Pridobivanje sporočila '%s'" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1865 msgid "A_dd Sender to Address Book" msgstr "_Dodaj pošiljatelja v imenik" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1867 msgid "Add sender to address book" msgstr "Doda pošiljatelja v imenik" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1872 msgid "Check for _Junk" msgstr "Preveri _neželeno pošto" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1874 msgid "Filter the selected messages for junk status" msgstr "Preveri, ali so izbrana sporočila neželena" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1879 msgid "_Copy to Folder..." msgstr "_Kopiraj v mapo ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1881 msgid "Copy selected messages to another folder" msgstr "Kopira izbrana sporočila v drugo mapo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1886 msgid "_Delete Message" msgstr "_Izbriši sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1888 msgid "Mark the selected messages for deletion" msgstr "Označi izbrana sporočila za brisanje" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1893 msgid "Create a Filter Rule for Mailing _List..." msgstr "Ustvari novo pravilo filtriranja za dopisni _seznam ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1895 msgid "Create a rule to filter messages to this mailing list" msgstr "Ustvari pravilo za filtriranje sporočil temu dopisnemu seznamu" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1900 msgid "Create a Filter Rule for _Recipients..." msgstr "Ustvari novo pravilo filtriranja za _prejemnike ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1902 msgid "Create a rule to filter messages to these recipients" msgstr "Ustvari pravilo za filtriranje sporočil tem prejemnikom" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1907 msgid "Create a Filter Rule for Se_nder..." msgstr "Ustvari pravilo filtriranja za p_ošiljatelja ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1909 msgid "Create a rule to filter messages from this sender" msgstr "Ustvari pravilo za filtriranje sporočil tega pošiljatelja" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1914 msgid "Create a Filter Rule for _Subject..." msgstr "Ustvari novo pravilo filtriranja za _zadevo ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1916 msgid "Create a rule to filter messages with this subject" msgstr "Ustvari pravilo za filtriranje sporočil s to zadevo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1921 msgid "A_pply Filters" msgstr "_Uveljavi filtre" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1923 msgid "Apply filter rules to the selected messages" msgstr "Uveljavi pravila filtra na izbranih sporočilih" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1928 msgid "_Find in Message..." msgstr "_Najdi v sporočilu ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1930 msgid "Search for text in the body of the displayed message" msgstr "Išče besedilo v telesu prikazanega sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1935 msgid "_Clear Flag" msgstr "Po_čisti zastavico" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1937 msgid "Remove the follow-up flag from the selected messages" msgstr "Odstrani zastavico navezave iz izbranih sporočil" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1942 msgid "_Flag Completed" msgstr "_Zastavica je končana" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1944 msgid "Set the follow-up flag to completed on the selected messages" msgstr "Nastavi zastavico navezave kot končano na izbranih sporočilih" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1949 msgid "Follow _Up..." msgstr "Na_vezava ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1951 msgid "Flag the selected messages for follow-up" msgstr "Z zastavico označi izbrana sporočila za navezavo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1956 msgid "_Attached" msgstr "_Priloženo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1958 ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1965 msgid "Forward the selected message to someone as an attachment" msgstr "Posreduje izbrano sporočilo kot prilogo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1963 msgid "Forward As _Attached" msgstr "P_osreduj kot priloženo ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1970 msgid "_Inline" msgstr "Kot del sporoč_ila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1972 ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1979 msgid "Forward the selected message in the body of a new message" msgstr "Posreduje izbrano sporočilo v telesu novega sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1977 msgid "Forward As _Inline" msgstr "P_osreduj v novem sporočilu" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1984 msgid "_Quoted" msgstr "_Citirano" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1986 ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1993 msgid "Forward the selected message quoted like a reply" msgstr "Posreduj izbrano sporočilo citirano kot odgovor" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1991 msgid "Forward As _Quoted" msgstr "P_osreduj kot citirano ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:1998 msgid "_Load Images" msgstr "Na_loži slike" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2000 msgid "Force images in HTML mail to be loaded" msgstr "Prisili, da bodo slike v pošti HTML naložene" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2005 msgid "_Important" msgstr "_Pomembno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2007 msgid "Mark the selected messages as important" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila označi kot pomembna" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2012 msgid "_Junk" msgstr "_Neželena pošta" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2014 msgid "Mark the selected messages as junk" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila označi kot neželena" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2019 msgid "_Not Junk" msgstr "_Ni neželeno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2021 msgid "Mark the selected messages as not being junk" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila označi kot zaželena" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2026 msgid "_Read" msgstr "_Preberano" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2028 msgid "Mark the selected messages as having been read" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila označi kot že prebrana" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2033 msgid "Uni_mportant" msgstr "Nepo_membno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2035 msgid "Mark the selected messages as unimportant" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila označi kot nepomembna" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2040 msgid "_Unread" msgstr "_Neprebrano" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2042 msgid "Mark the selected messages as not having been read" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila označi kot še ne prebrana" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2047 msgid "_Edit as New Message..." msgstr "_Uredi kot novo sporočilo ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2049 msgid "Open the selected messages in the composer for editing" msgstr "Odpri izbrana sporočila v sestavljalniku za urejanje" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2054 msgid "Compose _New Message" msgstr "Sestavi _novo sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2056 msgid "Open a window for composing a mail message" msgstr "Odpri okno za sestavljanje novega sporočila elektronske pošte" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2061 msgid "_Open in New Window" msgstr "_Odpri v novem oknu" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2063 msgid "Open the selected messages in a new window" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila odpre v novem oknu" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2068 msgid "_Move to Folder..." msgstr "Premakne v _mapo ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2070 msgid "Move selected messages to another folder" msgstr "Izbrana sporočila premakne v drugo mapo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2075 msgid "_Next Message" msgstr "_Naslednje sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2077 msgid "Display the next message" msgstr "Pokaže naslednje sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2082 msgid "Next _Important Message" msgstr "Naslednje po_membno sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2084 msgid "Display the next important message" msgstr "Pokaže naslednje pomembno sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2089 msgid "Next _Thread" msgstr "Naslednja ni_t" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2091 msgid "Display the next thread" msgstr "Pokaže naslednjo nit" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2096 msgid "Next _Unread Message" msgstr "Naslednje n_eprebrano sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2098 msgid "Display the next unread message" msgstr "Pokaže naslednje neprebrano sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2103 msgid "_Previous Message" msgstr "_Predhodno sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2105 msgid "Display the previous message" msgstr "Pokaže predhodno sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2110 msgid "Pr_evious Important Message" msgstr "Pr_edhodno pomembno sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2112 msgid "Display the previous important message" msgstr "Pokaže predhodno pomembno sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2117 msgid "Previous T_hread" msgstr "_Predhodna nit" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2119 msgid "Display the previous thread" msgstr "Pokaže predhodno sporočilno nit" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2124 msgid "P_revious Unread Message" msgstr "P_redhodno neprebrano sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2126 msgid "Display the previous unread message" msgstr "Pokaže predhodno neprebrano sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2133 msgid "Print this message" msgstr "Natisni to sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2140 msgid "Preview the message to be printed" msgstr "Predogled sporočila pred tiskanjem" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2145 msgid "Re_direct" msgstr "_Preusmeri" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2147 msgid "Redirect (bounce) the selected message to someone" msgstr "Preusmeri izbrano sporočilo k nekomu" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2152 msgid "Remo_ve Attachments" msgstr "_Odstrani priloge" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2154 msgid "Remove attachments" msgstr "Odstrani priloge" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2159 msgid "Remove Du_plicate Messages" msgstr "Odstrani po_dvojena sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2161 msgid "Checks selected messages for duplicates" msgstr "Preveri izbrana sporočila za dvojnike" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2166 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:27 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1547 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-attachment-handler.c:214 msgid "Reply to _All" msgstr "Odgovori _vsem" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2168 msgid "Compose a reply to all the recipients of the selected message" msgstr "Sestavi odgovor vsem prejemnikom izbranega sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2173 ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:25 msgid "Reply to _List" msgstr "Odgovori na _seznam" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2175 msgid "Compose a reply to the mailing list of the selected message" msgstr "Sestavi odgovor dopisnemu seznamu izbranega sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2180 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-attachment-handler.c:221 msgid "_Reply to Sender" msgstr "_Odgovori pošiljatelju" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2182 msgid "Compose a reply to the sender of the selected message" msgstr "Sestavi odgovor pošiljatelju izbranega sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2187 msgid "_Save as mbox..." msgstr "_Shrani kot mbox..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2189 msgid "Save selected messages as an mbox file" msgstr "Shrani izbrana sporočila kot datoteko mbox" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2194 msgid "_Message Source" msgstr "_Vir sporočil" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2196 msgid "Show the raw email source of the message" msgstr "Pokaže surov vir elektronskega sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2208 msgid "_Undelete Message" msgstr "_Povrni izbrisano sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2210 msgid "Undelete the selected messages" msgstr "Povrne izbrana izbrisana sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2215 msgid "_Normal Size" msgstr "Običaj_na velikost" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2217 msgid "Reset the text to its original size" msgstr "Ponastavi besedilo na njegovo izvorno velikost" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2222 msgid "_Zoom In" msgstr "_Približaj" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2224 msgid "Increase the text size" msgstr "Poveča velikost besedila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2229 msgid "Zoom _Out" msgstr "_Oddalji" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2231 msgid "Decrease the text size" msgstr "Zmanjša velikost besedila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2238 msgid "Cre_ate" msgstr "Ustv_ari" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2245 msgid "Ch_aracter Encoding" msgstr "Zn_akovno kodiranje" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2252 msgid "F_orward As" msgstr "P_osreduj kot" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2259 msgid "_Group Reply" msgstr "_Skupinski odgovor" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2266 msgid "_Go To" msgstr "Po_jdi na" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2273 msgid "Mar_k As" msgstr "Označi _kot" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2280 msgid "_Message" msgstr "_Sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2287 msgid "_Zoom" msgstr "_Približaj" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2297 msgid "Create a Search Folder from Mailing _List..." msgstr "Ustvari iskalno mapo iz dopisnega _seznama ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2299 msgid "Create a search folder for this mailing list" msgstr "Ustvari iskalno mapo za ta dopisni seznam" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2304 msgid "Create a Search Folder from Recipien_ts..." msgstr "Ustvari Iskalno mapo prejem_nikov ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2306 msgid "Create a search folder for these recipients" msgstr "Ustvari iskalno mapo za te prejemnike" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2311 msgid "Create a Search Folder from Sen_der..." msgstr "Ustvari Iskalno mapo pošiljate_ljev ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2313 msgid "Create a search folder for this sender" msgstr "Ustvari iskalno mapo za tega pošiljatelja" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2318 msgid "Create a Search Folder from S_ubject..." msgstr "Ustvari Iskalno mapo zade_v ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2320 msgid "Create a search folder for this subject" msgstr "Ustvari iskalno mapo za to zadevo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2343 msgid "Mark for Follo_w Up..." msgstr "Označi kot na_vezujoče ..." #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2351 msgid "Mark as _Important" msgstr "Označi kot p_omembno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2355 msgid "Mark as _Junk" msgstr "Označi kot _neželeno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2359 msgid "Mark as _Not Junk" msgstr "Označi kot _zaželeno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2363 msgid "Mar_k as Read" msgstr "Označi kot _prebrano" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2367 msgid "Mark as Uni_mportant" msgstr "Označi kot nepo_membno" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2371 msgid "Mark as _Unread" msgstr "Označi kot _neprebrano" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2415 msgid "_Caret Mode" msgstr "Način _kazalke" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2417 msgid "Show a blinking cursor in the body of displayed messages" msgstr "Pokaže utripajoč kazalec v telesu prikazanih sporočil" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2423 msgid "All Message _Headers" msgstr "Vse _glave sporočil" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2425 msgid "Show messages with all email headers" msgstr "Pokaži sporočila z vsemi glavami elektronske pošte" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:2848 msgid "Retrieving message" msgstr "Pridobivanje sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3770 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-attachment-handler.c:207 msgid "_Forward" msgstr "_Posreduj naprej" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3771 msgid "Forward the selected message to someone" msgstr "Nekomu posreduje izbrano sporočilo" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3790 msgid "Group Reply" msgstr "Skupinski odgovor" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3791 msgid "Reply to the mailing list, or to all recipients" msgstr "Ali je odgovor namenjen dopisnemu seznamu ali vsem prejemnikom" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3857 ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:15 msgid "Delete" msgstr "Izbriši" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3869 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1372 msgid "Next" msgstr "Naslednji" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3873 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1365 msgid "Previous" msgstr "Predhodni" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader.c:3882 ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:15 msgid "Reply" msgstr "Odgovori" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader-utils.c:151 msgid "Do not warn me again" msgstr "Ne opozori več" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader-utils.c:976 msgid "Printing" msgstr "Tiskanje" #. Translators: %s is replaced with a folder #. * name %u with count of duplicate messages. #: ../mail/e-mail-reader-utils.c:1211 #, c-format msgid "" "Folder '%s' contains %u duplicate message. Are you sure you want to delete " "it?" msgid_plural "" "Folder '%s' contains %u duplicate messages. Are you sure you want to delete " "them?" msgstr[0] "" "Mapa '%s' vsebuje %u podvojenih sporočil. Ali ste prepričani, da želite " "sporočila izbrisati?" msgstr[1] "" "Mapa '%s' vsebuje %u podvojeno sporočilo. Ali ste prepričani, da želite " "sporočilo izbrisati?" msgstr[2] "" "Mapa '%s' vsebuje %u podvojeni sporočili. Ali ste prepričani, da želite " "sporočili izbrisati?" msgstr[3] "" "Mapa '%s' vsebuje %u podvojena sporočila. Ali ste prepričani, da želite " "sporočila izbrisati?" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader-utils.c:2026 msgid "Save Message" msgid_plural "Save Messages" msgstr[0] "Shrani sporočila" msgstr[1] "Shrani sporočilo" msgstr[2] "Shrani sporočili" msgstr[3] "Shrani sporočila" #. Translators: This is part of a suggested file name #. * used when saving a message or multiple messages to #. * mbox format, when the first message doesn't have a #. * subject. The extension ".mbox" is appended to the #. * string; for example "Message.mbox". #: ../mail/e-mail-reader-utils.c:2047 msgid "Message" msgid_plural "Messages" msgstr[0] "Sporočila" msgstr[1] "Sporočilo" msgstr[2] "Sporočili" msgstr[3] "Sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-reader-utils.c:2416 msgid "Parsing message" msgstr "Razčlenjevanje sporočila" #: ../mail/e-mail-request.c:197 msgid "The message has no text content." msgstr "Sporočilo nima nobene vsebine." #: ../mail/e-mail-tag-editor.c:238 msgid "Flag to Follow Up" msgstr "Zastavica za navezavo" #. Note to translators: this is the attribution string used #. * when quoting messages. Each ${Variable} gets replaced #. * with a value. To see a full list of available variables, #. * see mail/em-composer-utils.c:attribvars array. #: ../mail/em-composer-utils.c:1372 msgid "" "On ${AbbrevWeekdayName}, ${Year}-${Month}-${Day} at ${24Hour}:${Minute} " "${TimeZone}, ${Sender} wrote:" msgstr "" "Dne ${Day}.${Month}.${Year} (${AbbrevWeekdayName}) ob ${24Hour}:${Minute} " "${TimeZone} je ${Sender} napisal(a):" #: ../mail/em-composer-utils.c:1378 msgid "-------- Forwarded Message --------" msgstr "-------- Posredovano sporočilo --------" #: ../mail/em-composer-utils.c:1383 msgid "-----Original Message-----" msgstr "-------- Izvirno sporočilo --------" #: ../mail/em-composer-utils.c:2528 msgid "an unknown sender" msgstr "neznan pošiljatelj" #: ../mail/em-composer-utils.c:2949 msgid "Posting destination" msgstr "Cilj objave" #: ../mail/em-composer-utils.c:2950 msgid "Choose folders to post the message to." msgstr "Izberite mape, v katere želite objaviti sporočilo." #: ../mail/em-filter-editor-folder-element.c:157 msgid "Select Folder" msgstr "Izbor mape" #. Automatically generated. Do not edit. #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:2 msgid "Adjust Score" msgstr "Prilagodi točke" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:3 msgid "Any header" msgstr "Vsakršna glava" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:4 msgid "Assign Color" msgstr "Dodeli barvo" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:5 msgid "Assign Score" msgstr "Dodeli rezultat" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:7 msgid "BCC" msgstr "SKP" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:8 msgid "Beep" msgstr "Pisk" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:9 msgid "CC" msgstr "KP" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:10 msgid "Completed On" msgstr "Dokončano dne" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:13 msgid "Date received" msgstr "Datum prejema" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:14 msgid "Date sent" msgstr "Datum pošiljanja" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:16 msgid "Deleted" msgstr "Izbrisano" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:18 msgid "does not end with" msgstr "se ne konča z" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:19 msgid "does not exist" msgstr "ne obstaja" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:20 msgid "does not have words" msgstr "ne vsebuje besed" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:21 msgid "does not return" msgstr "ne vrne" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:22 msgid "does not sound like" msgstr "ne zveni kot" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:23 msgid "does not start with" msgstr "se ne začne z" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:25 msgid "Draft" msgstr "Osnutek" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:26 msgid "ends with" msgstr "se konča z" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:28 msgid "exists" msgstr "obstaja" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:29 msgid "Expression" msgstr "Izraz" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:30 msgid "Follow Up" msgstr "Navezava" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:31 msgid "Forward to" msgstr "Posreduj na" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:32 msgid "has words" msgstr "vsebuje besede" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:33 msgid "Important" msgstr "Pomembno" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:35 msgid "is after" msgstr "je po" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:36 msgid "is before" msgstr "je pred" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:37 msgid "is Flagged" msgstr "je označeno z zastavico" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:41 msgid "is not Flagged" msgstr "ni označeno z zastavico" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:42 msgid "is not set" msgstr "ni nastavljeno" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:43 msgid "is set" msgstr "je nastavljeno" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:44 ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:108 msgid "Junk" msgstr "Neželena pošta" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:45 msgid "Junk Test" msgstr "Preizkus neželene pošte" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:46 msgid "Label" msgstr "Oznaka" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:47 msgid "Mailing list" msgstr "Dopisni seznam" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:48 msgid "Match All" msgstr "Skladaj vse" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:49 msgid "Message Body" msgstr "Telo sporočila" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:50 msgid "Message Header" msgstr "Glava sporočila" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:51 msgid "Message is Junk" msgstr "Sporočilo je neželeno" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:52 msgid "Message is not Junk" msgstr "Sporočilo ni neželeno" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:53 msgid "Message Location" msgstr "Mesto sporočila" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:55 msgid "Pipe to Program" msgstr "Pipa za program" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:56 msgid "Play Sound" msgstr "Predvajaj zvok" #. Past tense, as in "has been read". #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:57 ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:14 msgid "Read" msgstr "Prebrano" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:58 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:16 msgid "Recipients" msgstr "Prejemniki" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:59 msgid "Regex Match" msgstr "Skladanje z logičnim izrazom" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:60 msgid "Replied to" msgstr "Odgovorjeno na" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:61 msgid "returns" msgstr "vrne" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:62 msgid "returns greater than" msgstr "vrne večje kot" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:63 msgid "returns less than" msgstr "vrne manjše kot" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:64 msgid "Run Program" msgstr "Zaženi program" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:65 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:3 msgid "Score" msgstr "Točke" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:66 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:15 msgid "Sender" msgstr "Pošiljatelj" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:67 msgid "Sender or Recipients" msgstr "Pošiljatelj ali prejemniki" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:68 msgid "Set Label" msgstr "Nastavi oznako" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:69 msgid "Set Status" msgstr "Nastavi stanje" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:70 msgid "Size (kB)" msgstr "Velikost (kB)" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:71 msgid "sounds like" msgstr "zveni kot" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:72 msgid "Source Account" msgstr "Izvirni račun" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:73 msgid "Specific header" msgstr "Navedena glava" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:74 msgid "starts with" msgstr "se začne z" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:76 msgid "Stop Processing" msgstr "Zaustavi obdelavo" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:79 msgid "Unset Color" msgstr "Odstrani barvo" #: ../mail/em-filter-i18n.h:80 msgid "Unset Status" msgstr "Nenastavljeno stanje" #. and now for the action area #: ../mail/em-filter-rule.c:583 msgid "Then" msgstr "Nato" #: ../mail/em-filter-rule.c:648 msgid "Add Ac_tion" msgstr "Dodaj _dejanje" #: ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:145 msgid "Unread messages:" msgid_plural "Unread messages:" msgstr[0] "Neprebrana sporočila:" msgstr[1] "Neprebrano sporočilo:" msgstr[2] "Neprebrani sporočili:" msgstr[3] "Neprebrana sporočila:" #: ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:156 msgid "Total messages:" msgid_plural "Total messages:" msgstr[0] "Skupaj sporočil:" msgstr[1] "Skupaj sporočilo:" msgstr[2] "Skupaj sporočili:" msgstr[3] "Skupaj sporočila:" #: ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:177 #, c-format msgid "Quota usage (%s):" msgstr "Omejitev uporabe (%s):" #: ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:179 #, c-format msgid "Quota usage" msgstr "Omejitev uporabe" #: ../mail/em-folder-properties.c:347 msgid "Folder Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti mape" #: ../mail/em-folder-selection-button.c:80 msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../mail/em-folder-selector.c:390 msgid "C_reate" msgstr "Ustva_ri" #: ../mail/em-folder-selector.c:396 msgid "Folder _name:" msgstr "Ime _mape:" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:644 msgid "Folder names cannot contain '/'" msgstr "Ime mape ne sme vsebovati '/'" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:781 #, c-format msgctxt "folder-display" msgid "%s (%u%s)" msgstr "%s (%u%s)" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:1609 msgid "Mail Folder Tree" msgstr "Drevesna razporeditev poštnih map" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:2179 ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:112 #, c-format msgid "Moving folder %s" msgstr "Premikanje mape %s" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:2182 ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:114 #, c-format msgid "Copying folder %s" msgstr "Kopiranje mape %s" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:2189 ../mail/message-list.c:2280 #, c-format msgid "Moving messages into folder %s" msgstr "Premikanje sporočil v mapo %s" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:2193 ../mail/message-list.c:2282 #, c-format msgid "Copying messages into folder %s" msgstr "Kopiranje sporočil v mapo %s" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree.c:2212 #, c-format msgid "Cannot drop message(s) into toplevel store" msgstr "Sporočil(a) ni mogoče spustiti v vrhnjo shrambo" #. UNMATCHED is always last. #: ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:176 ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:178 msgid "UNMATCHED" msgstr "Brez zadetka" #: ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:873 ../mail/em-folder-tree-model.c:1170 msgid "Loading..." msgstr "Nalaganje ..." #: ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:519 msgid "Move Folder To" msgstr "Premakni mapo v" #: ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:519 msgid "Copy Folder To" msgstr "Kopiraj mapo v" #: ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:617 msgid "Create Folder" msgstr "Ustvari mapo" #: ../mail/em-folder-utils.c:618 msgid "Specify where to create the folder:" msgstr "Določite kje naj se ustvari mapa:" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:867 msgid "_Subscribe" msgstr "_Naroči se" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:876 msgid "Su_bscribe To Shown" msgstr "Naroči se na _prikazano" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:884 msgid "Subscribe To _All" msgstr "Naroči se na _vse" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:981 ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1875 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1641 msgid "_Unsubscribe" msgstr "_Prekliči naročnino" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:990 msgid "Unsu_bscribe From Hidden" msgstr "Prekliči naročnino na _skrito" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:998 msgid "Unsubscribe From _All" msgstr "Prekliči naročnino na _vse" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1712 msgid "Folder Subscriptions" msgstr "Naročnine na mape" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1751 msgid "_Account:" msgstr "R_ačun:" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1764 msgid "Clear Search" msgstr "Počisti iskanje" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1781 msgid "Sho_w items that contain:" msgstr "Pok_aži predmete, ki vsebujejo:" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1828 msgid "Subscribe to the selected folder" msgstr "Naroči se na izbrano mapo" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1829 msgid "Su_bscribe" msgstr "_Naroči" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1874 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1643 msgid "Unsubscribe from the selected folder" msgstr "Prekliče naročnino na izbrano mapo" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1914 msgid "Collapse all folders" msgstr "Skrči vse mape" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1915 msgid "C_ollapse All" msgstr "_Skrči vse" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1925 msgid "Expand all folders" msgstr "Razširi vse mape" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1926 msgid "E_xpand All" msgstr "_Razširi vse" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1936 msgid "Refresh the folder list" msgstr "Osveži seznam map" #: ../mail/em-subscription-editor.c:1948 msgid "Stop the current operation" msgstr "Zaustavi trenutno opravilo" #. Translators: This message is shown only for ten or more #. * messages to be opened. The %d is replaced with the actual #. * count of messages. If you need a '%' in your text, then #. * write it doubled, like '%%'. #: ../mail/em-utils.c:86 #, c-format msgid "Are you sure you want to open %d message at once?" msgid_plural "Are you sure you want to open %d messages at once?" msgstr[0] "Ali ste prepričani, da želite hkrati odpreti %d sporočil?" msgstr[1] "Ali ste prepričani, da želite hkrati odpreti %d sporočilo?" msgstr[2] "Ali ste prepričani, da želite hkrati odpreti %d sporočili?" msgstr[3] "Ali ste prepričani, da želite hkrati odpreti %d sporočila?" #: ../mail/em-utils.c:142 #: ../modules/mailto-handler/evolution-mailto-handler.c:150 msgid "_Do not show this message again" msgstr "_Ne pokaži več tega sporočila" #: ../mail/em-utils.c:252 msgid "Message Filters" msgstr "Filtri sporočil" #: ../mail/em-utils.c:982 #, c-format msgid "Messages from %s" msgstr "Sporočila od %s" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor.c:105 msgid "Search _Folders" msgstr "Iskalne _mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:397 msgid "Add Folder" msgstr "Dodaj mapo" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:523 msgid "Search Folder Sources" msgstr "Viri iskalne mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:555 msgid "Automatically update on any _source folder change" msgstr "Samodejno posodobi ob vsaki spremembi _izvorne mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:567 msgid "All local folders" msgstr "Vse krajevne mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:568 msgid "All active remote folders" msgstr "Vse dejavne oddaljene mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:569 msgid "All local and active remote folders" msgstr "Vse krajevne in dejavne oddaljene mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:570 msgid "Specific folders" msgstr "Določene mape" #: ../mail/em-vfolder-editor-rule.c:608 msgid "include subfolders" msgstr "vključi podmape" #: ../mail/importers/elm-importer.c:178 msgid "Importing Elm data" msgstr "Uvažanje podatkov Elm" #: ../mail/importers/elm-importer.c:378 msgid "Evolution Elm importer" msgstr "Uvoznik Elm Evolution" #: ../mail/importers/elm-importer.c:379 msgid "Import mail from Elm." msgstr "Uvozi pošto iz Elma." #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:140 #: ../plugins/dbx-import/dbx-importer.c:250 msgid "_Destination folder:" msgstr "_Ciljna mapa:" #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:146 #: ../plugins/dbx-import/dbx-importer.c:256 #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:545 msgid "Select folder" msgstr "Izbor mape" #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:147 #: ../plugins/dbx-import/dbx-importer.c:257 #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:546 msgid "Select folder to import into" msgstr "Izberite mapo za uvoz" #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:437 msgctxt "mboxImp" msgid "Subject" msgstr "Zadeva" #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:442 msgctxt "mboxImp" msgid "From" msgstr "Od" #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:486 #: ../shell/e-shell-utils.c:172 msgid "Berkeley Mailbox (mbox)" msgstr "Poštni predal Berkeley (mbox)" #: ../mail/importers/evolution-mbox-importer.c:487 msgid "Importer Berkeley Mailbox format folders" msgstr "Uvoznik map v obliki poštnih predalov Berkeley" #: ../mail/importers/mail-importer.c:63 msgid "Importing mailbox" msgstr "Uvažanje poštnega predala" #. Destination folder, was set in our widget #: ../mail/importers/mail-importer.c:153 #: ../plugins/dbx-import/dbx-importer.c:612 #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:764 #, c-format msgid "Importing '%s'" msgstr "Uvažanje '%s'" #: ../mail/importers/mail-importer.c:316 #, c-format msgid "Scanning %s" msgstr "Preiskovanje %s" #: ../mail/importers/pine-importer.c:252 msgid "Importing Pine data" msgstr "Uvažanje podatkov Pine" #: ../mail/importers/pine-importer.c:479 msgid "Evolution Pine importer" msgstr "Uvoznik Pine Evolution" #: ../mail/importers/pine-importer.c:480 msgid "Import mail from Pine." msgstr "Uvozi pošto iz Pina." #: ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:70 #, c-format msgid "Mail to %s" msgstr "Pošta za %s" #: ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:226 ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:269 #, c-format msgid "Mail from %s" msgstr "Pošta od %s" #: ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:252 #, c-format msgid "Subject is %s" msgstr "Zadeva je %s" #: ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:293 #, c-format msgid "%s mailing list" msgstr "%s poštnih seznamov" #: ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:403 msgid "Add Filter Rule" msgstr "Dodaj pravilo filtra" #. Translators: The first %s is name of the affected #. * filter rule(s), the second %s is URI of the removed #. * folder. For more than one filter rule is each of #. * them on a separate line, with four spaces in front #. * of its name, without quotes. #: ../mail/mail-autofilter.c:512 #, c-format msgid "" "The filter rule \"%s\" has been modified to account for the deleted folder\n" "\"%s\"." msgid_plural "" "The following filter rules\n" "%s have been modified to account for the deleted folder\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[0] "" "Naslednja pravila filtra\n" "%s so bila spremenjena zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[1] "" "Pravilo filtra %s je bilo spremenjeno zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[2] "" "Naslednji pravili filtra\n" "%s sta bili spremenjeni zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." msgstr[3] "" "Naslednja pravila filtra\n" "%s so bila spremenjena zaradi odstranjene mape\n" "\"%s\"." #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:1 msgid "Set custom junk header" msgstr "Določi glavo neželenih sporočil po meri" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:2 msgid "" "All new emails with header that matches given content will be automatically " "filtered as junk" msgstr "" "Vsa nova sporočila z glavo, ki sovpada določeni vsebini, bo filtrirana kot " "neželena pošta." #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:3 msgid "Header name" msgstr "Ime glave" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:4 msgid "Header content" msgstr "Vsebina glave" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:5 msgid "Default Behavior" msgstr "Privzeto obnašanje" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:6 msgid "For_mat messages in HTML" msgstr "Oblikuj sporočila v HTML" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:7 msgid "Automatically insert _emoticon images" msgstr "Samodejno vstavi slike _izraznih ikon" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:8 msgid "Always request rea_d receipt" msgstr "Vedno zaht_evaj povratnico" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:9 msgid "Encode filenames in an _Outlook/GMail way" msgstr "Kodiraj imena datotek v načinu MS _Outlook/GMail" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:10 msgid "Ch_aracter encoding:" msgstr "Zn_akovni nabor:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:11 msgid "Replies and Forwards" msgstr "Odgovori in posredovanja" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:12 msgid "_Reply style:" msgstr "Slog odgovo_ra:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:13 msgid "_Forward style:" msgstr "Način _posredovanja:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:14 msgid "Start _typing at the bottom on replying" msgstr "Ob odgovarjanju se pisanje se začne na _dnu" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:15 msgid "_Keep signature above the original message on replying" msgstr "_Ohrani podpis nad izvirnim sporočilom ob odgovoru" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:16 msgid "Ig_nore Reply-To: for mailing lists" msgstr "_Prezri odgovori-na: za dopisne sezname" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:17 msgid "Gro_up Reply goes only to mailing list, if possible" msgstr "" "Skupinski _odgovor pošlje sporočilo le na dopisni seznam, če je to mogoče" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:18 msgid "Digitally _sign messages when original message signed (PGP or S/MIME)" msgstr "" "Digitalno _podpiši sporočila, kadar je podpisano tudi izvirno sporočilo (PGP " "ali S/MIME)" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:19 msgctxt "ReplyForward" msgid "Attachment" msgstr "Priloga" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:20 msgctxt "ReplyForward" msgid "Inline (Outlook style)" msgstr "Medvrtično (slog Outlook)" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:21 msgctxt "ReplyForward" msgid "Quoted" msgstr "Navedeno" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:22 msgctxt "ReplyForward" msgid "Do Not Quote" msgstr "Ne citiraj" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:23 msgctxt "ReplyForward" msgid "Inline" msgstr "Medvrstično" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:25 msgid "Sig_natures" msgstr "Podpi_si" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:26 msgid "Signatures" msgstr "Podpisi" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:27 msgid "_Languages" msgstr "_Jeziki" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:28 msgid "Languages Table" msgstr "Razpredelnica jezikov" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:29 msgid "" "The list of languages here reflects only the languages for which you have a " "dictionary installed." msgstr "Ta seznam jezikov vsebuje le jezike, katerih slovar imate nameščen." #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:31 msgid "Check spelling while I _type" msgstr "Preverjaj črkovanje med _tipkanjem" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:32 msgid "Color for _misspelled words:" msgstr "Barva n_apačno črkovanih besed:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:33 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:58 msgid "Pick a color" msgstr "Izbor barve" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:34 msgid "Spell Checking" msgstr "Preverjanje črkovanja" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:35 msgid "" "To help avoid email accidents and embarrassments, ask for confirmation " "before taking the following checkmarked actions:" msgstr "" "Za pomoč pri izogibanju nesrečam in osramotitvam preko e-pošte, vprašaj za " "potrditev pred izvajanjem naslednjih izbranih dejanj:" #. This is in the context of: Ask for confirmation before... #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:37 msgid "Sending a message with an _empty subject line" msgstr "Pošiljanje sporočila s _praznim poljem zadeva" #. This is in the context of: Ask for confirmation before... #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:39 msgid "Sending a message with only _Bcc recipients defined" msgstr "Pošiljanje sporočila le z določenimi prejemniki _Skp" #. This is in the context of: Ask for confirmation before... #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:41 msgid "Sending a _private reply to a mailing list message" msgstr "Pošiljanje _zasebnega odgovora na sporočilo dopisnega seznama" #. This is in the context of: Ask for confirmation before... #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:43 msgid "Sending a reply to a large _number of recipients" msgstr "Pošiljanje odgovora velikemu _številu prejemnikov" #. This is in the context of: Ask for confirmation before... #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:45 msgid "Allowing a _mailing list to redirect a private reply to the list" msgstr "_Dopisnemu seznamu dovoli preusmeritev na zaseben odgovor na seznamu" #. This is in the context of: Ask for confirmation before... #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:47 msgid "Sending a message with _recipients not entered as mail addresses" msgstr "" "Pošiljanje sporočila s _prejemniki, ki niso vneseni kot poštni naslovi" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:48 msgid "Confirmations" msgstr "Potrjevanje" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:54 ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:1 msgid "a" msgstr "a" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:55 ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:2 msgid "b" msgstr "b" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:56 msgid "Proxy Settings" msgstr "Nastavitve posredniškega strežnika" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:57 msgid "_Use system defaults" msgstr "Uporabi _privzete sistemske vrednosti" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:58 msgid "_Direct connection to the Internet" msgstr "_Neposredna povezava z medmrežjem" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:59 msgid "_Manual proxy configuration:" msgstr "_Ročna nastavitev posredniškega strežnika:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:60 msgid "H_TTP Proxy:" msgstr "Posredniški strežnik _HTTP:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:61 msgid "_Secure HTTP Proxy:" msgstr "_Varni posredniški strežnik HTTP:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:62 msgid "SOC_KS Proxy:" msgstr "Posredniški strežnik SOC_KS:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:63 msgid "No _Proxy for:" msgstr "Ni _posredniškega strežnika za:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:64 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:614 msgid "Port:" msgstr "Vrata:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:65 msgid "Use Authe_ntication" msgstr "Uporabi _overitev" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:66 msgid "Us_ername:" msgstr "Uporab_niško ime:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:67 msgid "Pass_word:" msgstr "_Geslo:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:68 msgid "Start up" msgstr "Zagon" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:69 msgid "Check for new _messages on start" msgstr "Preveri za nova _sporočila ob zagonu" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:70 msgid "Check for new messa_ges in all active accounts" msgstr "Samodejno preveri za _novo pošto v vseh dejavnih računih" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:71 msgid "Message Display" msgstr "Prikaz sporočil" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:72 msgid "_Use the same fonts as other applications" msgstr "_Uporabi enake pisave kot drugi programi" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:73 msgid "S_tandard Font:" msgstr "_Običajna pisava:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:74 msgid "Select HTML fixed width font" msgstr "Izberite pisavo HTML stalne širine" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:75 msgid "Select HTML variable width font" msgstr "Izberite pisavo HTML spremenljive širine" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:76 msgid "Fix_ed Width Font:" msgstr "_Pisava stalne širine:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:77 msgid "_Mark messages as read after" msgstr "_Označi sporočila kot prebrana po" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:79 msgid "Highlight _quotations with" msgstr "Poudari _citate z" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:80 msgid "color" msgstr "barva" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:81 msgid "Default character e_ncoding:" msgstr "Privzet _nabor znakov:" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:82 msgid "Apply the same _view settings to all folders" msgstr "Uporabi enake nastavitve _pogleda za vse mape" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:83 msgid "F_all back to threading messages by subject" msgstr "_Povrni se na nitenje sporočil po zadevi" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:84 msgid "Delete Mail" msgstr "Izbriši pošto" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:85 msgid "Empty _trash folders" msgstr "Izprazni mape _smeti" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:86 msgid "Confirm _when expunging a folder" msgstr "Potrdi ob _uničevanju mape" #. If enabled, show animation; if disabled, only display a static image without any animation #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:88 msgid "_Show animated images" msgstr "_Pokaži animirane slike" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:89 msgid "_Prompt on sending HTML mail to contacts that do not want them" msgstr "" "O_pozori ob pošiljanju sporočil v obliki HTML tistim stikom, ki tega nočejo" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:90 msgid "Loading Images" msgstr "Nalaganje slik" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:91 msgid "_Never load images from the Internet" msgstr "_Nikoli ne nalagaj slik z medmreja" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:92 msgid "_Load images only in messages from contacts" msgstr "_Naloži slike le v sporočilih s stikov" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:93 msgid "_Always load images from the Internet" msgstr "Vedno n_aloži slike s spleta" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:94 msgid "HTML Messages" msgstr "Sporočila HTML" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:95 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:19 msgid "Labels" msgstr "Oznake" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:96 msgid "Sender Photograph" msgstr "Fotografija pošiljatelja" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:97 msgid "_Show the photograph of sender in the message preview" msgstr "Pokaži sliko pošiljatelja v _predogledu sporočila" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:98 msgid "Displayed Message Headers" msgstr "Pokaži glave sporočil" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:99 msgid "Mail Headers Table" msgstr "Preglednica glav pošte" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:100 #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:117 #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:54 msgid "Date/Time Format" msgstr "Zapis datuma/časa" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:102 msgid "Check incoming _messages for junk" msgstr "Preveri _dohodno pošto za neželena sporočila" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:103 msgid "_Delete junk messages" msgstr "_Zbriši neželena sporočila" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:104 msgid "Check cu_stom headers for junk" msgstr "Preveri glave _po meri za neželeno pošto" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:105 msgid "Do not mar_k messages as junk if sender is in my address book" msgstr "" "_Ne označi sporočila kot neželenega, če je pošiljatelj v mojem imeniku" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:106 msgid "_Lookup in local address book only" msgstr "_Poglej le v krajevni imenik" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:107 msgid "Option is ignored if a match for custom junk headers is found." msgstr "Možnost je prezrta, če je najdena glava po meri za neželeno pošto." #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:109 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:225 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:159 msgid "No encryption" msgstr "Brez šifriranja" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:110 msgid "TLS encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje TLS" #: ../mail/mail-config.ui.h:111 msgid "SSL encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje SSL" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:1 msgid "" "The messages you have selected for follow up are listed below.\n" "Please select a follow up action from the \"Flag\" menu." msgstr "" "Sporočila, ki ste jih izbrali za navezavo, so navedena spodaj.\n" "Izberite dejanje navezave iz menija \"Zastavica\"." #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:3 msgid "_Flag:" msgstr "_Zastavica:" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:4 msgid "_Due By:" msgstr "_Datum zapadlosti:" #. Translators: Flag Completed #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:6 msgid "Co_mpleted" msgstr "_Končano" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:7 msgid "Call" msgstr "Kliči" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:8 msgid "Do Not Forward" msgstr "Ne posreduj" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:9 msgid "Follow-Up" msgstr "Navezava" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:10 msgid "For Your Information" msgstr "Vam na znanje" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:11 msgid "Forward" msgstr "Posreduj" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:12 msgid "No Response Necessary" msgstr "Odgovor ni potreben" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:16 msgid "Reply to All" msgstr "Odgovori vsem" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:17 msgid "Review" msgstr "Ocena" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:18 msgid "License Agreement" msgstr "Licenčni dogovor" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:19 msgid "_Tick this to accept the license agreement" msgstr "_Obkljukajte za sprejem licenčnega dogovora" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:20 msgid "_Accept License" msgstr "_Sprejmi licenco" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:21 msgid "Security Information" msgstr "Varnostni podatki" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:22 msgid "Digital Signature" msgstr "Digitalni podpis" #: ../mail/mail-dialogs.ui.h:23 msgid "Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Invalid authentication" msgstr "Neveljavna overitev" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "This server does not support this type of authentication and may not support " "authentication at all." msgstr "" "Strežnik ne podpira tovrstne overitve ni morda sploh ne podpira nikakršne " "overitve." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Your login to your server \"{0}\" as \"{0}\" failed." msgstr "Prijava na vaš strežnik \"{0}\" kot \"{0}\" ni uspela." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:4 msgid "" "Check to make sure your password is spelled correctly. Remember that many " "passwords are case sensitive; your caps lock might be on." msgstr "" "Preverite, ali ste pravilno vnesli geslo. Vedite, da mnoga gesla ločijo " "velike/male črke. Morda imate vklopljen Caps Lock." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Are you sure you want to send a message in HTML format?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite sporočilo poslati v obliki HTML?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "Please make sure the following recipients are willing and able to receive " "HTML email:\n" "{0}" msgstr "" "Prepričajte se, da naslednji prejemniki želijo in lahko prejemajo pošto v " "obliki HTML:\n" "{0}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:9 msgid "Are you sure you want to send a message without a subject?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite poslati sporočilo brez zadeve?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:10 msgid "" "Adding a meaningful Subject line to your messages will give your recipients " "an idea of what your mail is about." msgstr "" "V primeru da sporočila dopolnite z ustrezno izpolnjenim poljem Zadeva, bodo " "prejemniki hitreje ugotovili, o čem govori pošta." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:11 msgid "Are you sure you want to send a message with only BCC recipients?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite sporočilo poslati le s prejemniki Skp?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:12 msgid "" "The contact list you are sending to is configured to hide list recipients.\n" "\n" "Many email systems add an Apparently-To header to messages that only have " "BCC recipients. This header, if added, will list all of your recipients in " "your message. To avoid this, you should add at least one To: or CC: " "recipient. " msgstr "" "Seznam stikov, ki jim pošiljate pošto, je nastavljen tako, da skrije seznam " "prejemnikov.\n" "\n" "Številni sistemi elektronske pošte dodajo sporočilom, ki vsebujejo " "prejemnike le v polju SKP, glavo Očitno-Za. V tem primeru bo glava vsebovala " "vse prejemnike. Temu se lahko izognete, če dodate vsaj enega prejemnika v " "polje Za: ali KP:. " #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:15 msgid "" "Many email systems add an Apparently-To header to messages that only have " "BCC recipients. This header, if added, will list all of your recipients to " "your message anyway. To avoid this, you should add at least one To: or CC: " "recipient." msgstr "" "Številni sistemi elektronske pošte dodajo sporočilom, ki vsebujejo " "prejemnike le v polju SKP, glavo Očitno-Za. V tem primeru glava vsebuje vse " "prejemnike. Temu se lahko izognete, če dodate vsaj enega prejemnika v polje " "Za: ali KP:." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:16 msgid "Are you sure you want to send a message with invalid address?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite poslati sporočilo z neveljavnim naslovom?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:17 msgid "" "The following recipient was not recognized as a valid mail address:\n" "{0}" msgstr "" "Navedeni naslov prejemnika ni bil prepoznan kot veljavni elektronski " "naslov:\n" "{0}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:19 msgid "Are you sure you want to send a message with invalid addresses?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite poslati sporočilo z neveljavnimi naslovi?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:20 msgid "" "The following recipients were not recognized as valid mail addresses:\n" "{0}" msgstr "" "Navedeni naslovi prejemnikov niso bili prepoznani kot veljavni elektronski " "naslovi:\n" "{0}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:22 msgid "Send private reply?" msgstr "Ali naj se odgovor pošlje zasebno?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:23 msgid "" "You are replying privately to a message which arrived via a mailing list, " "but the list is trying to redirect your reply to go back to the list. Are " "you sure you want to proceed?" msgstr "" "Odgovarjate zasebno pošiljatelju na sporočilo, ki je prispelo preko " "dopisnega seznama, vendar pa bo sporočilo poslano neposredno na dopisni " "seznam. Ali želite nadaljevati?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:24 msgid "Reply _Privately" msgstr "Odgovori zasebno" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:26 msgid "" "You are replying to a message which arrived via a mailing list, but you are " "replying privately to the sender; not to the list. Are you sure you want to " "proceed?" msgstr "" "Odgovarjate na sporočilo, ki je prispelo preko dopisnega seznama, vendar " "odgovarjate zasebno pošiljatelju in ne na seznam. Ali želite nadaljevati?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:28 msgid "Send reply to all recipients?" msgstr "Ali naj se odgovor sporočilu pošlje vsem prejemnikom?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:29 msgid "" "You are replying to a message which was sent to many recipients. Are you " "sure you want to reply to ALL of them?" msgstr "" "Odgovarjate na sporočilo, ki je bilo poslano več prejemnikom. Ali ste " "prepričani, da želite odgovor poslati vsem prejemnikom?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:30 msgid "" "This message cannot be sent because you have not specified any recipients" msgstr "" "Tega sporočila ni mogoče poslati, ker niste navedli nobenega prejemnika" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:31 msgid "" "Please enter a valid email address in the To: field. You can search for " "email addresses by clicking on the To: button next to the entry box." msgstr "" "Vnesite veljaven naslov elektronske pošte v polje Za:. Naslove elektronske " "pošte lahko poiščete s klikom na gumb Za: ob vnosnem polju." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:32 msgid "Use default drafts folder?" msgstr "Ali naj bo uporabljena privzeta mapa osnutkov?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:33 msgid "" "Unable to open the drafts folder for this account. Use the system drafts " "folder instead?" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče odpreti mape osnutkov za ta račun. Ali želite uporabiti sistemsko " "mapo osnutkov?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:34 msgid "Use _Default" msgstr "Uporabi _privzeto" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:35 msgid "" "Are you sure you want to permanently remove all the deleted messages in " "folder \"{0}\"?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite trajno odstraniti vsa izbrisana sporočila v " "mapi \"{0}\"?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:36 msgid "If you continue, you will not be able to recover these messages." msgstr "V primeru, da boste nadaljevali, teh sporočil ne bo mogoče obnoviti." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:37 msgid "_Expunge" msgstr "_Uniči" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:38 msgid "" "Are you sure you want to permanently remove all the deleted messages in all " "folders?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite za vedno odstraniti vsa izbrisana sporočila v " "vseh mapah?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:39 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1529 msgid "_Empty Trash" msgstr "Izprazni _smeti" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:40 msgid "Opening too many messages at once may take a long time." msgstr "" "Odpiranje prevelikega števila sporočil hkrati lahko traja nekaj časa." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:41 msgid "_Open Messages" msgstr "_Odpri sporočila" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:42 msgid "You have unsent messages, do you wish to quit anyway?" msgstr "Imate neposlana sporočila. Ali želite kljub temu končati?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:43 msgid "" "If you quit, these messages will not be sent until Evolution is started " "again." msgstr "" "V primeru, da program končate, sporočila ne bodo poslana do ponovnega zagona " "Evolutiona." #. Translators: the {0} is replaced with an operation name, which failed. #. It can be basically anything run asynchronously, like "Fetching Mail", #. "Sending message" and others, mostly from mail-ops.c file. #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:47 msgid "Error while {0}." msgstr "Napaka med {0}." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:48 msgid "Error while performing operation." msgstr "Napaka med izvajanjem opravila." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:49 msgid "Enter password." msgstr "Vnesite geslo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:50 msgid "Error loading filter definitions." msgstr "Napaka med nalaganjem določil filtrov." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:51 msgid "Cannot save to directory \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti v mapo \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:52 msgid "Cannot save to file \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti v datoteko \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:53 msgid "Cannot create the save directory, because \"{1}\"" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape za shranjevanje, ker \"{1}\"" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:54 msgid "Cannot create temporary save directory." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape za začasno shranjevanje." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:55 msgid "File exists but cannot overwrite it." msgstr "Datoteka obstaja, vendar je ni mogoče prepisati." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:56 msgid "File exists but is not a regular file." msgstr "Datoteka obstaja, vendar ni običajna datoteka." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:57 msgid "Cannot delete folder \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati mape \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:58 msgid "Cannot delete system folder \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati sistemske mape \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:59 msgid "" "System folders are required for Evolution to function correctly and cannot " "be renamed, moved, or deleted." msgstr "" "Za pravilno delovanje Evolutiona je treba ohraniti sistemske mape, ki ne " "smejo biti preimenovane, premaknjene ali izbrisane." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:60 msgid "Failed to expunge folder "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med brisanjem mape "{0}"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:62 msgid "Failed to refresh folder "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med osveževanjem mape "{0}"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:63 msgid "Cannot rename or move system folder \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati ali premakniti sistemske mape \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:64 msgid "Really delete folder \"{0}\" and all of its subfolders?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati mapo \"{0}\" in vse njene podmape?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:65 msgid "" "If you delete the folder, all of its contents and its subfolders' contents " "will be deleted permanently." msgstr "" "V primeru, da mapo izbrišete, bo njena vsebina in vsebina njenih podmap " "trajno izbrisana." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:67 msgid "Really delete folder \"{0}\"?" msgstr "Ali želite izbrisati mapo \"{0}\"?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:68 msgid "" "If you delete the folder, all of its contents will be deleted permanently." msgstr "" "V primeru, da mapo izbrišete, bo trajno izbrisana tudi njena celotna vsebina." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:69 msgid "These messages are not copies." msgstr "Ta sporočila niso kopije sporočil." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:70 msgid "" "Messages shown in Search Folders are not copies. Deleting them from a Search " "Folder will delete the actual messages from the folder or folders in which " "they physically reside. Do you really want to delete these messages?" msgstr "" "Sporočila v seznamu iskanja map niso kopije sporočil. Brisanje sporočil iz " "iskalne mape, izbriše tudi dejansko sporočilo iz ene od vaših krajevnih ali " "oddaljenih map. Ali zares želite nadaljevati?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:71 msgid "Cannot rename \"{0}\" to \"{1}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati \"{0}\" v \"{1}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:72 msgid "A folder named \"{1}\" already exists. Please use a different name." msgstr "Mapa z imenom \"{1}\" že obstaja. Uporabite drugačno ime." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:73 msgid "Cannot move folder \"{0}\" to \"{1}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče premakniti mape \"{0}\" v \"{1}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:74 msgid "Cannot open source folder. Error: {2}" msgstr "Ni možno odpreti izvirne mape. Napaka: {2}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:75 msgid "Cannot open target folder. Error: {2}" msgstr "Ni možno odpreti ciljne mape. Napaka: {2}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:76 msgid "Cannot copy folder \"{0}\" to \"{1}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče kopirati mape \"{0}\" v \"{1}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:77 msgid "Cannot create folder \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:78 msgid "Cannot open folder. Error: {1}" msgstr "Ni možno odpreti mape. Napaka: {1}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:79 msgid "Cannot save changes to account." msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti sprememb računa." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:80 msgid "You have not filled in all of the required information." msgstr "Niste vpisali vseh zahtevanih podatkov." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:81 msgid "You may not create two accounts with the same name." msgstr "Dveh računov z enakim imenom ni mogoče ustvariti." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:82 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this account?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati ta račun?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:83 msgid "If you proceed, the account information will be deleted permanently." msgstr "" "V primeru da nadaljujete, bodo vsi podatki o računu trajno izbrisani." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:84 msgid "Are you sure you want to delete this account and all its proxies?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite izbrisati ta račun in vse njegove posredniške " "strežnike?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:85 msgid "" "If you proceed, the account information and\n" "all proxy information will be deleted permanently." msgstr "" "V primeru, da boste nadaljevali, bodo podatki o računu in\n" "vsi podatki o posredniških strežnikih trajno izbrisani." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:87 msgid "" "Are you sure you want to disable this account and delete all its proxies?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite onemogočiti ta račun in izbrisati vse njegove " "posredniške strežnike?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:88 msgid "If you proceed, all proxy accounts will be deleted permanently." msgstr "" "V primeru da boste nadaljevali, bodo vsi računi posredniških strežnikov " "trajno izbrisani." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:89 msgid "Do _Not Disable" msgstr "Ne _onemogoči" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:90 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:649 msgid "_Disable" msgstr "O_nemogoči" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:91 msgid "Cannot edit Search Folder \"{0}\" as it does not exist." msgstr "Ni mogoče urejati iskalne mape \"{0}\", saj mapa ne obstaja." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:92 msgid "" "This folder may have been added implicitly,\n" "go to the Search Folder editor to add it explicitly, if required." msgstr "" "Mapa je bila morda dodana implicitno.\n" "Pojdite v urejevalnik map iskanja in jo dodajte izrecno, če je to potrebno." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:94 msgid "Cannot add Search Folder \"{0}\"." msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati iskalne mape \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:95 msgid "A folder named \"{0}\" already exists. Please use a different name." msgstr "Mapa z imenom \"{0}\" že obstaja. Uporabite drugačno ime." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:96 msgid "Search Folders automatically updated." msgstr "Samodejno posodabljanje iskalnih map." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:97 msgid "Mail filters automatically updated." msgstr "Poštni filtri se samodejno posodabljajo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:98 msgid "Missing folder." msgstr "Manjkajoča mapa." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:99 msgid "You must specify a folder." msgstr "Navesti morate mapo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:101 msgid "You must name this Search Folder." msgstr "To iskalno mapo morate poimenovati." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:102 msgid "No folder selected." msgstr "Ni izbranih map." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:103 msgid "" "You must specify at least one folder as a source.\n" "Either by selecting the folders individually, and/or by selecting all local " "folders, all remote folders, or both." msgstr "" "Kot vir morate navesti vsaj eno mapo.\n" "Mape lahko izberete posamično ali pa izberete vse krajevne mape, vse " "oddaljene mape ali oboje." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:105 msgid "Problem migrating old mail folder \"{0}\"." msgstr "Napaka med seljenjem mape s staro pošto \"{0}\"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:106 msgid "" "A non-empty folder at \"{1}\" already exists.\n" "\n" "You can choose to ignore this folder, overwrite or append its contents, or " "quit." msgstr "" "Mapa v \"{1}\" že obstaja in ni prazna.\n" "\n" "Mapo lahko prezrete, prepišete, dodate vsebino ali pa končate." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:109 msgid "Ignore" msgstr "Prezri" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:110 msgid "_Overwrite" msgstr "_Prepiši" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:111 msgid "_Append" msgstr "P_ripni" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:112 msgid "Evolution's local mail format has changed." msgstr "Oblika krajevne pošte Evolution se je spremenila." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:113 msgid "" "Evolution's local mail format has changed from mbox to Maildir. Your local " "mail must be migrated to the new format before Evolution can proceed. Do you " "want to migrate now?\n" "\n" "An mbox account will be created to preserve the old mbox folders. You can " "delete the account after ensuring the data is safely migrated. Please make " "sure there is enough disk space if you choose to migrate now." msgstr "" "Oblika krajevne pošte Evolution se je spremenila iz mbox v Maildir. Vaša " "krajevna pošta mora biti pred nadaljevanjem preoblikovana v novo obliko. Ali " "jo želite preoblikovati zdaj?\n" "\n" "Ustvarjen bo račun mbox za ohranitev starih map mbox. Račun lahko izbrišete " "potem, ko se prepričate, da so bili podatki varno preoblikovani. Če želite " "podatke preoblikovati sedaj, se prepričajte da je na voljo dovolj prostora " "na disku." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:116 msgid "_Exit Evolution" msgstr "_Končaj Evolution" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:117 msgid "_Migrate Now" msgstr "_Preseli zdaj" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:118 msgid "Unable to read license file." msgstr "Licenčne datoteke ni mogoče prebrati." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:119 msgid "" "Cannot read the license file \"{0}\", due to an installation problem. You " "will not be able to use this provider until you can accept its license." msgstr "" "Licenčne datoteke \"{0}\" ni mogoče prebrati zaradi napake med namestitvijo. " "Uporaba tega ponudnika ni mogoča, dokler ne sprejmete njegove licence." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:120 msgid "Please wait." msgstr "Počakajte." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:121 msgid "Querying server for a list of supported authentication mechanisms." msgstr "Poizvedovanje strežnika za seznam podprtih mehanizmov overitve." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:122 msgid "" "Failed to query server for a list of supported authentication mechanisms." msgstr "" "Poizvedovanje strežnika za seznam podprtih mehanizmov overitve je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:123 msgid "Synchronize folders locally for offline usage?" msgstr "Ali naj se mape krajevno uskladijo za delo brez povezave?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:124 msgid "" "Do you want to locally synchronize the folders that are marked for offline " "usage?" msgstr "Ali želite krajevno uskladiti mape označene za delo brez povezave?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:125 msgid "Do _Not Synchronize" msgstr "_Ne uskladi" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:126 msgid "_Synchronize" msgstr "_Uskladi" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:127 msgid "Do you want to mark all messages as read?" msgstr "Ali želite vsa sporočila označiti kot prebrana?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:128 msgid "This will mark all messages as read in the selected folder." msgstr "" "To bo označilo vsa sporočila v izbrani mapi in njenih podmapah kot prebrana." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:129 msgid "Also mark messages in subfolders?" msgstr "Ali naj bodo označena tudi sporočila v podmapah?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:130 msgid "" "Do you want to mark messages as read in the current folder only, or in the " "current folder as well as all subfolders?" msgstr "" "Ali želite označiti sporočila kot prebrana le v trenutni mapi ali pa tudi v " "podmapah?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:131 msgid "In Current Folder and _Subfolders" msgstr "V trenutni mapi in _podmapah" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:132 msgid "In Current _Folder Only" msgstr "_Le v trenutni mapi" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:133 msgid "Should Evolution close this window when replying or forwarding?" msgstr "" "Naj Evolution zapre to okno, ko sporočilo posredujete ali nanj odgovarjate?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:134 msgid "_Yes, Always" msgstr "_Da, vedno" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:135 msgid "_No, Never" msgstr "_Ne, nikoli" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:136 msgid "Copy folder in folder tree." msgstr "Kopiraj mapo v drevesu map." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:137 msgid "Are you sure you want to copy folder '{0}' to folder '{1}'?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite kopirati mapo '{0}' v mapo '{1}'?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:138 msgid "_Yes" msgstr "_Da" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:139 msgid "_No" msgstr "_Ne" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:140 msgid "_Always" msgstr "_Vedno" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:141 msgid "N_ever" msgstr "N_ikoli" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:142 msgid "Move folder in folder tree." msgstr "Premakni mapo v drevesu map." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:143 msgid "Are you sure you want to to move folder '{0}' to folder '{1}'?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite premakniti mapo '{0}' v mapo '{1}'?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:144 msgid "" "This message cannot be sent because the account you chose to send with is " "not enabled" msgstr "" "Tega sporočila ni mogoče poslati, ker račun za pošiljanje ni omogočen" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:145 msgid "Please enable the account or send using another account." msgstr "Omogočite račun ali pošljite z drugim računom." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:146 msgid "Mail Deletion Failed" msgstr "Neuspel izbris pošte" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:147 msgid "You do not have sufficient permissions to delete this mail." msgstr "Nimate zadostnih dovoljenj za izbris te pošte." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:148 msgid "\"Check Junk\" Failed" msgstr "\"Preverjanje za neželeno\" je spodletelo" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:149 msgid "\"Report Junk\" Failed" msgstr "\"Poročilo neželeno\" ni uspelo" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:150 msgid "\"Report Not Junk\" Failed" msgstr "\"Poročilo ni neželeno\" ni uspelo" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:151 msgid "Remove duplicate messages?" msgstr "Ali želite odstraniti podvojena sporočila?" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:152 msgid "No duplicate messages found." msgstr "Podvojenih sporočil ni mogoče najti." #. Translators: {0} is replaced with a folder name #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:154 msgid "Folder '{0}' doesn't contain any duplicate message." msgstr "Mapa '{0}' ne vsebuje podvojenih sporočil." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:155 msgid "Failed to disconnect account "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med prekinitvijo povezave z računom "{0}"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:157 msgid "Failed to unsubscribe from folder "{0}"." msgstr "Napaka med preklicem naročnine na mapo "{0}"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:158 msgid "Unable to retrieve message." msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti sporočila." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:159 msgid "{0}" msgstr "{0}" #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:160 msgid "Failed to open folder." msgstr "Odpiranje mape je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:161 msgid "Failed to find duplicate messages." msgstr "Iskanje podvojenih sporočil je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:162 msgid "Failed to retrieve messages." msgstr "Pridobivanje sporočil je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:163 msgid "Failed to mark messages as read." msgstr "Sporočila ni bilo možno označiti kot prebranega." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:164 msgid "Failed to remove attachments from messages." msgstr "Odstranjevanje priloge iz sporočila je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:165 msgid "Failed to download messages for offline viewing." msgstr "Prejemanje sporočil za pregledovanje brez povezave je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:166 msgid "Failed to save messages to disk." msgstr "Shranjevanje sporočila na disk je spodletelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:167 msgid "Hidden file is attached." msgstr "Priložena je skrita datoteka." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:168 msgid "" "The attachment named {0} is a hidden file and may contain sensitive data. " "Please review it before sending." msgstr "" "Priloga z imenom {0} je skrita datoteka, ki morda vsebuje občutljive " "podatke. Preglejte in preverite vsebino pred pošiljanjem sporočila." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:169 msgid "Printing failed." msgstr "Tiskanje ni uspelo." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:170 msgid "The printer replied "{0}"." msgstr "Tiskalnik je odgovoril "{0}"." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:171 msgid "Could not perform this operation on {0}." msgstr "Tega dejanja ni mogoče izvesti na {0}." #: ../mail/mail.error.xml.h:172 msgid "You must be working online to complete this operation." msgstr "Za dokončanje tega opravila morate biti povezani." #: ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:202 msgid "Canceling..." msgstr "Prekinjanje ..." #: ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:546 msgid "Send & Receive Mail" msgstr "Pošlji in prejmi pošto" #: ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:562 msgid "Cancel _All" msgstr "Prekliči _vse" #: ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:655 ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:1047 msgid "Updating..." msgstr "Posodabljanje ..." #: ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:655 ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:736 msgid "Waiting..." msgstr "Čakanje ..." #: ../mail/mail-send-recv.c:1020 #, c-format msgid "Checking for new mail at '%s'" msgstr "Preverjanje nove pošte na '%s'" #: ../mail/mail-vfolder-ui.c:78 msgid "Search Folders" msgstr "Iskalne mape" #: ../mail/mail-vfolder-ui.c:158 msgid "Edit Search Folder" msgstr "Uredi iskalno mapo" #: ../mail/mail-vfolder-ui.c:279 msgid "New Search Folder" msgstr "Nova iskalna mapa" #: ../mail/message-list.c:298 msgid "Unseen" msgstr "Nepregledano" #: ../mail/message-list.c:299 msgid "Seen" msgstr "Videno" #: ../mail/message-list.c:300 msgid "Answered" msgstr "Odgovorjeno" #: ../mail/message-list.c:301 msgid "Forwarded" msgstr "Posredovano" #: ../mail/message-list.c:302 msgid "Multiple Unseen Messages" msgstr "Več nepregledanih sporočil" #: ../mail/message-list.c:303 msgid "Multiple Messages" msgstr "Več sporočil" #: ../mail/message-list.c:316 msgid "Lowest" msgstr "najnižja" #: ../mail/message-list.c:317 msgid "Lower" msgstr "nizka" #: ../mail/message-list.c:321 msgid "Higher" msgstr "visoka" #: ../mail/message-list.c:322 msgid "Highest" msgstr "najvišja" #: ../mail/message-list.c:466 ../mail/message-list.c:5730 msgid "Generating message list" msgstr "Ustvarjanje seznama sporočil" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 12-hour format, without seconds. #: ../mail/message-list.c:1858 ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:244 msgid "Today %l:%M %p" msgstr "Danes %H.%M" #: ../mail/message-list.c:1867 msgid "Yesterday %l:%M %p" msgstr "Včeraj %H.%M" #: ../mail/message-list.c:1879 msgid "%a %l:%M %p" msgstr "%a %H.%M" #: ../mail/message-list.c:1887 msgid "%b %d %l:%M %p" msgstr "%d. %m. %H.%M" #: ../mail/message-list.c:1889 msgid "%b %d %Y" msgstr "%d. %m. %Y" #: ../mail/message-list.c:2767 msgid "Select all visible messages" msgstr "Izberi vsa vidna sporočila" #: ../mail/message-list.c:3395 ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:17 msgid "Messages" msgstr "Sporočila" #. default follow-up flag name to use when clicked in the message list column #: ../mail/message-list.c:4774 msgid "Follow-up" msgstr "Navezava" #: ../mail/message-list.c:5668 msgid "" "No message satisfies your search criteria. Change search criteria by " "selecting a new Show message filter from the drop down list above or by " "running a new search either by clearing it with Search->Clear menu item or " "by changing the query above." msgstr "" "Nobeno sporočilo ne ustreza vašim iskalnim kriterijem. Iskalne kriterije " "spremenite z izbiro novega filtra Pokaži sporočilo s spustnega seznama " "zgoraj ali z izvajanjem novega iskanja s čiščenjem s predmetom menija " "Išči>Počisti ali s spremembo poizvedbe zgoraj." #: ../mail/message-list.c:5676 msgid "There are no messages in this folder." msgstr "V tej mapi ni sporočil." #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:2 msgid "Flagged" msgstr "Označeno z zastavico" #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:8 msgid "Received" msgstr "Prejeto" #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:11 msgid "Flag Status" msgstr "Stanje zastavice" #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:12 msgid "Follow Up Flag" msgstr "Zastavica navezave" #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:13 msgid "Due By" msgstr "Datum zapadlosti" #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:18 msgid "Messages To" msgstr "Sporočila za" #: ../mail/message-list.etspec.h:20 msgid "Subject - Trimmed" msgstr "Zadeva - Okleščeno" #: ../mail/searchtypes.xml.h:1 msgid "Subject or Addresses contains" msgstr "Zadeva ali Nalovi vsebujejo" #: ../mail/searchtypes.xml.h:2 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2012 msgid "Recipients contain" msgstr "Prejemniki vsebujejo" #: ../mail/searchtypes.xml.h:3 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2005 msgid "Message contains" msgstr "Sporočilo vsebuje" #: ../mail/searchtypes.xml.h:4 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2026 msgid "Subject contains" msgstr "Zadeva vsebuje" #: ../mail/searchtypes.xml.h:5 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2019 msgid "Sender contains" msgstr "Pošiljatelj vsebuje" #: ../mail/searchtypes.xml.h:6 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1998 msgid "Body contains" msgstr "Telo vsebuje" #. To Translators: 'Table column' is a label for configurable date/time format for table columns showing a date in message list #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:123 #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:1213 msgid "_Table column:" msgstr "_Stolpec razpredelnice:" #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:126 msgid "Address formatting" msgstr "Oblikovanje naslova" #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:129 msgid "_Format address according to standard of its destination country" msgstr "_Oblikuj naslov glede na navade v ciljni državi" #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:137 msgid "Autocompletion" msgstr "Samodejno dopolnjevanje" #: ../modules/addressbook/autocompletion-config.c:140 msgid "Always _show address of the autocompleted contact" msgstr "Vedno _pokaži naslov samodejno dopolnjenega stika" #: ../modules/addressbook/eab-composer-util.c:148 msgid "Multiple vCards" msgstr "Več vizitk vCard" #: ../modules/addressbook/eab-composer-util.c:156 #, c-format msgid "vCard for %s" msgstr "Vizitka vCard za %s" #: ../modules/addressbook/eab-composer-util.c:168 #: ../modules/addressbook/eab-composer-util.c:195 #, c-format msgid "Contact information" msgstr "Podatki o stiku" #: ../modules/addressbook/eab-composer-util.c:197 #, c-format msgid "Contact information for %s" msgstr "Podatki o stiku za %s" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:259 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:125 msgid "New Address Book" msgstr "Nov imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:268 msgctxt "New" msgid "_Contact" msgstr "_Stik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:270 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:979 msgid "Create a new contact" msgstr "Ustvari nov stik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:275 msgctxt "New" msgid "Contact _List" msgstr "Seznam _stikov" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:277 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:986 msgid "Create a new contact list" msgstr "Ustvari nov seznam stikov" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:285 msgctxt "New" msgid "Address _Book" msgstr "_Imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:287 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:902 msgid "Create a new address book" msgstr "Ustvari nov imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-backend.c:315 msgid "Certificates" msgstr "Potrdila" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:198 msgid "Address Book Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti imenika" #. Translators: This is a save dialog title #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:476 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:772 msgid "Save as vCard" msgstr "Shrani kot VCard" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:879 msgid "Co_py All Contacts To..." msgstr "Ko_piraj vse stike v ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:881 msgid "Copy the contacts of the selected address book to another" msgstr "Kopiraj stike izbranega imenika v drugega" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:886 msgid "D_elete Address Book" msgstr "_Izbriši imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:888 msgid "Delete the selected address book" msgstr "Izbriše izbrani imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:893 msgid "Mo_ve All Contacts To..." msgstr "Premakni _vse stike v ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:895 msgid "Move the contacts of the selected address book to another" msgstr "Premakne stike izbranega imenika v drug imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:900 msgid "_New Address Book" msgstr "_Nov imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:907 msgid "Address _Book Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti _imenika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:909 msgid "Show properties of the selected address book" msgstr "Pokaže lastnosti izbranega imenika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:914 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1414 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:636 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:760 msgid "Re_fresh" msgstr "_Osveži" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:916 msgid "Refresh the selected address book" msgstr "Osveži izbran imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:921 msgid "Address Book _Map" msgstr "Zemljevid _imenika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:923 msgid "Show map with all contacts from selected address book" msgstr "Pokaži zemljevid z vsemi stiki izbranega imenika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:928 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1421 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:643 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:767 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1620 msgid "_Rename..." msgstr "_Preimenuj ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:930 msgid "Rename the selected address book" msgstr "Preimenuje izbrani imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:937 msgid "Stop loading" msgstr "Ustavi nalaganje" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:942 msgid "_Copy Contact To..." msgstr "_Kopiraj stik v..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:944 msgid "Copy selected contacts to another address book" msgstr "Kopira izbrane stike v drug imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:949 msgid "_Delete Contact" msgstr "_Izbriši stik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:956 msgid "_Find in Contact..." msgstr "_Najdi v stiku ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:958 msgid "Search for text in the displayed contact" msgstr "Poišči besedilo v prikazanem stiku" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:963 msgid "_Forward Contact..." msgstr "_Posreduj stik ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:965 msgid "Send selected contacts to another person" msgstr "Pošlje izbrane stike drugi osebi" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:970 msgid "_Move Contact To..." msgstr "_Premakni stik v ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:972 msgid "Move selected contacts to another address book" msgstr "Premakni izbrane stike v drug imenik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:977 msgid "_New Contact..." msgstr "_Nov stik ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:984 msgid "New Contact _List..." msgstr "Nov _seznam stikov ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:991 msgid "_Open Contact" msgstr "_Odpri stik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:993 msgid "View the current contact" msgstr "Ogled trenutnega stika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:998 msgid "_Send Message to Contact..." msgstr "Pošlji _sporočilo stiku ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1000 msgid "Send a message to the selected contacts" msgstr "Pošlje sporočilo izbranim stikom" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1007 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1577 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:825 msgid "_Actions" msgstr "_Dejanja" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1014 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:680 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:832 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1785 msgid "_Preview" msgstr "_Predogled" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1023 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1594 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:693 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:845 msgid "_Delete" msgstr "_Izbriši" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1027 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1536 msgid "_Properties" msgstr "_Lastnosti" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1035 msgid "Address Book Map" msgstr "Zemljevid imenika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1067 msgid "Contact _Preview" msgstr "_Predogled stika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1069 msgid "Show contact preview window" msgstr "Pokaže okno s predogledom stika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1075 msgid "Show _Maps" msgstr "Pokaži _zemljevide" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1077 msgid "Show maps in contact preview window" msgstr "Pokaže zemljevid v oknu predogleda stika" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1096 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:750 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:914 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1915 msgid "_Classic View" msgstr "_Običajni pogled" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1098 msgid "Show contact preview below the contact list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled stika pod seznamom stikov" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1103 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:757 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:921 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1922 msgid "_Vertical View" msgstr "_Navpični pogled" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1105 msgid "Show contact preview alongside the contact list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled stika ob seznamu stikov" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1120 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1754 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:774 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:973 msgid "Unmatched" msgstr "Brez zadetka" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1130 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1764 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:784 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:983 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1991 #: ../shell/e-shell-content.c:658 msgid "Advanced Search" msgstr "Napredno iskanje" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1163 msgid "Print all shown contacts" msgstr "Natisni vse prikazane stike" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1170 msgid "Preview the contacts to be printed" msgstr "Predogled stikov pred tiskanjem" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1177 msgid "Print selected contacts" msgstr "Natisni izbrane stike" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1192 msgid "S_ave Address Book as vCard" msgstr "Shr_ani imenik kot VCard" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1194 msgid "Save the contacts of the selected address book as a vCard" msgstr "Shrani stike izbranega imenika kot VCard" #. Translators: This is an action label #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1200 #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1210 msgid "_Save as vCard..." msgstr "_Shrani kot vCard ..." #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view-actions.c:1202 msgid "Save selected contacts as a vCard" msgstr "Shrani izbrane stike kot VCard" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view.c:312 msgid "_Forward Contacts" msgstr "Posreduj _stike" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view.c:314 msgid "_Forward Contact" msgstr "P_osreduj stik" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view.c:345 msgid "_Send Message to Contacts" msgstr "_Pošlji sporočilo stikom" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view.c:347 msgid "_Send Message to List" msgstr "_Pošlji sporočilo seznamu" #: ../modules/addressbook/e-book-shell-view.c:349 msgid "_Send Message to Contact" msgstr "_Pošlji sporočilo stiku" #: ../modules/audio-inline/e-mail-formatter-audio.c:316 msgid "Audio Player" msgstr "Predvajalnik glasbe" #: ../modules/audio-inline/e-mail-formatter-audio.c:317 msgid "Play the attachment in embedded audio player" msgstr "Predvajaj prilogo v vgrajnem predvajalniku zvoka" #: ../modules/backup-restore/e-mail-config-restore-page.c:165 msgid "" "You can restore Evolution from a backup file.\n" "\n" "This will restore all your personal data, settings mail filters, etc." msgstr "" "Evolution lahko obnovite iz varnostne kopije.\n" "\n" "To bo obnovilo vse vaše osebne podatke, nastavitve, filtre sporočil, itd." #: ../modules/backup-restore/e-mail-config-restore-page.c:180 msgid "_Restore from a backup file:" msgstr "_Obnovi iz varnostne kopije:" #: ../modules/backup-restore/e-mail-config-restore-page.c:191 msgid "Choose a backup file to restore" msgstr "Izberite varnostno kopijo za obnovitev" #. Keep the title identical to EMailConfigRestorePage #. * so it's only shown once in the assistant sidebar. #: ../modules/backup-restore/e-mail-config-restore-page.c:311 #: ../modules/backup-restore/e-mail-config-restore-ready-page.c:57 msgid "Restore from Backup" msgstr "Obnovi iz varnostne kopije" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:217 msgid "Select name of the Evolution backup file" msgstr "Izberite ime datoteke varnostne kopije Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:250 msgid "_Restart Evolution after backup" msgstr "_Znova zaženi Evolution po ustvarjanju varnostne kopije" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:277 msgid "Select name of the Evolution backup file to restore" msgstr "Izberite ime varnostne kopije za obnovitev" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:290 msgid "_Restart Evolution after restore" msgstr "_Znova zaženi Evolution po obnovitvi" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:308 msgid "_Back up Evolution Data..." msgstr "_Ustvari varnostno kopijo trenutnih podatkov programa Evolution ..." #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:310 msgid "Back up Evolution data and settings to an archive file" msgstr "" "Ustvari varnostno kopijo podatkov in nastavitev programa Evolution v " "datoteko arhiva" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:315 msgid "R_estore Evolution Data..." msgstr "O_bnovi podatke Evolution ..." #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-restore.c:317 msgid "Restore Evolution data and settings from an archive file" msgstr "" "Obnovi podatke in nastavitve iz varnostne kopije podatkov programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:84 msgid "Back up Evolution directory" msgstr "Ustvari varnostno kopijo mape programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:86 msgid "Restore Evolution directory" msgstr "Povrni mapo Evolutiona" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:88 msgid "Check Evolution Back up" msgstr "Preveri varnostno kopijo Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:90 msgid "Restart Evolution" msgstr "Znova zaženi Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:92 msgid "With Graphical User Interface" msgstr "Z grafičnim uporabniškim vmesnikom" #. FIXME Will the versioned setting always work? #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:322 #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:516 msgid "Shutting down Evolution" msgstr "Izklapljanje programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:331 msgid "Backing Evolution accounts and settings" msgstr "Varnostno kopiranje računov in nastavitev" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:348 msgid "Backing Evolution data (Mails, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos)" msgstr "" "Varnostna kopija podatkov Evolution (pošta, imenik, koledar, naloge, " "zaznamki)" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:364 msgid "Back up complete" msgstr "Varnostna kopija je uspešno ustvarjena" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:371 #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:703 msgid "Restarting Evolution" msgstr "Ponovni zagon programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:522 msgid "Back up current Evolution data" msgstr "Ustvari varnostno kopijo trenutnih podatkov programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:529 msgid "Extracting files from back up" msgstr "Razširjanje datotek iz varnostne kopije" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:611 msgid "Loading Evolution settings" msgstr "Nalaganje nastavitev programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:677 msgid "Removing temporary back up files" msgstr "Odstranjevanje začasnih datotek varnostnih kopij" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:688 msgid "Reloading registry service" msgstr "Ponovno nalaganje storitve registra" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:915 msgid "Evolution Back Up" msgstr "Varnostna kopija programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:916 #, c-format msgid "Backing up to the folder %s" msgstr "Shranjevanje varnostne kopije v mapo %s" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:920 msgid "Evolution Restore" msgstr "Obnavljanje Evolutiona" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:921 #, c-format msgid "Restoring from the folder %s" msgstr "Obnavljanje podatkov iz mape %s" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:991 msgid "Backing up Evolution Data" msgstr "Varnostna kopija podatkov programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:992 msgid "Please wait while Evolution is backing up your data." msgstr "Počakajte, dokler program ne naredi varnostne kopije vaših podatkov." #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:994 msgid "Restoring Evolution Data" msgstr "Obnovitev podatkov programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:995 msgid "Please wait while Evolution is restoring your data." msgstr "Počakajte, dokler program ne obnovi vaših podatkov." #: ../modules/backup-restore/evolution-backup-tool.c:1017 msgid "" "This may take a while depending on the amount of data in your account." msgstr "" "Postopek je lahko dolgotrajen, saj je odvisen od količine podatkov na vašemu " "računu." #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Invalid Evolution backup file" msgstr "Neveljavna datoteka varnostne kopije programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:2 msgid "Please select a valid backup file to restore." msgstr "Izberite datoteko veljavne varnostne kopije za obnovitev." #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Are you sure you want to close Evolution?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite zapreti program Evolution?" #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:4 msgid "" "To back up your data and settings, you must first close Evolution. Please " "make sure that you save any unsaved data before proceeding." msgstr "" "Za ustvarjanje varnostne kopije podatkov in nastavitev morate najprej " "zapreti program Evolution. Najprej seveda shranite vse neshranjene podatke." #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Close and Back up Evolution" msgstr "Zapri in ustvari varnostno kopijo podatkov programa Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "Are you sure you want to restore Evolution from the selected backup file?" msgstr "" "Ali ste prepričani, da želite obnoviti program Evolution iz izbrane datoteke " "varnostne kopije?" #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:7 msgid "" "To restore your data and settings, you must first close Evolution. Please " "make sure that you save any unsaved data before proceeding. This will delete " "all your current Evolution data and settings and restore them from your " "backup." msgstr "" "Za obnovitev podatkov in nastavitev je treba najprej zapreti program " "Evolution. Najprej je treba seveda shraniti vse podatke. Z dejanjem bodo " "najprej izbrisani podatki in izbrisane trenutne nastavitve, potem pa bodo " "obnovljene iz varnostne kopije." #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:8 msgid "Close and Restore Evolution" msgstr "Zapri in obnovi program Evolution" #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:9 msgid "Insufficient Permissions" msgstr "Nezadostna dovoljenja" #: ../modules/backup-restore/org-gnome-backup-restore.error.xml.h:10 msgid "The selected folder is not writable." msgstr "V izbrano mapo ni mogoče pisati." #: ../modules/bogofilter/evolution-bogofilter.c:145 #, c-format msgid "Failed to spawn Bogofilter (%s): " msgstr "Oživitev vstavka Bogofilter je spodletela (%s): " #: ../modules/bogofilter/evolution-bogofilter.c:163 msgid "Failed to stream mail message content to Bogofilter: " msgstr "" "Pretakanje vsebine elektronskega sporočila na Bogofilter je spodletelo: " #: ../modules/bogofilter/evolution-bogofilter.c:212 msgid "Bogofilter either crashed or failed to process a mail message" msgstr "Bogofilter se je ali sesul ali pa ni obdelal elektronskega sporočila" #: ../modules/bogofilter/evolution-bogofilter.c:308 msgid "Bogofilter Options" msgstr "Možnosti Bogofilter" #: ../modules/bogofilter/evolution-bogofilter.c:317 msgid "Convert message text to _Unicode" msgstr "Pretvori poštna sporočila v znakovni nabor _Unicode" #: ../modules/bogofilter/evolution-bogofilter.c:474 msgid "Bogofilter" msgstr "Bogofilter" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:447 msgid "Standard LDAP Port" msgstr "Standardna vrata LDAP" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:453 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:625 msgid "LDAP over SSL (deprecated)" msgstr "LDAP pred SSL (opuščeno)" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:459 msgid "Microsoft Global Catalog" msgstr "Microsoft Global Catalog" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:465 msgid "Microsoft Global Catalog over SSL" msgstr "Microsoft Global Catalog preko SSL" #. Page 1 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:570 msgid "Connecting to LDAP" msgstr "Povezovanje z LDAP" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:587 msgid "Server Information" msgstr "Podrobnosti o strežniku" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:628 msgid "StartTLS (recommended)" msgstr "StartTLS (priporočeno)" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:630 msgid "Encryption:" msgstr "Šifriranje:" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:654 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:246 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:180 msgid "Authentication" msgstr "Overitev" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:677 msgid "Anonymous" msgstr "Brezimno" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:680 msgid "Using email address" msgstr "Z uporabo elektronskega naslova" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:683 msgid "Using distinguished name (DN)" msgstr "Z uporabo razločnega imena (DN)" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:685 msgid "Method:" msgstr "Način:" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:690 msgid "" "This is the method Evolution will use to authenticate you. Note that " "setting this to \"Using email address\" requires anonymous access to your " "LDAP server." msgstr "" "To je način, ki ga bo Evolution uporabil za vašo overitev. Nastavitev na \"z " "uporabo naslova e-pošte\" zahteva anonimen dostop do vašega strežika LDAP." #. Page 2 #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:705 msgid "Using LDAP" msgstr "Uporaba LDAP" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:722 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view.c:117 msgid "Searching" msgstr "Iskanje" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:744 msgid "Search Base:" msgstr "Iskalna osnova" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:749 msgid "Find Possible Search Bases" msgstr "Najdi mogoče iskalne zbirke" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:774 msgid "One Level" msgstr "Ena raven" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:776 msgid "Subtree" msgstr "Poddrevo" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:778 msgid "Search Scope:" msgstr "Obseg iskanja:" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:783 msgid "" "The search scope defines how deep you would like the search to extend down " "the directory tree. A search scope of \"Subtree\" will include all entries " "below your search base. A search scope of \"One Level\" will only include " "the entries one level beneath your search base." msgstr "" "Obseg iskanja določa, kako globoko želite razširiti iskanje navzdol po " "drevesu map. Obseg iskanja \"poddrevesa\" bo vključeval vse vnose pod vašo " "iskalno osnovo. Obseg iskanja \"Ena raven\" bo vključevala vnose le eno " "raven pod iskalno osnovo." #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:792 msgid "Search Filter:" msgstr "Filter iskanja:" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:804 msgid "Downloading" msgstr "Prejemanje" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:825 msgid "Limit:" msgstr "Omejitev:" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:836 msgid "contacts" msgstr "stiki" #: ../modules/book-config-ldap/evolution-book-config-ldap.c:841 msgid "Browse until limit is reached" msgstr "Brskajte dokler ne dosežete meje" #: ../modules/book-config-webdav/evolution-book-config-webdav.c:136 #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/evolution-cal-config-caldav.c:205 #: ../modules/cal-config-webcal/evolution-cal-config-webcal.c:128 msgid "URL:" msgstr "URL:" #: ../modules/book-config-webdav/evolution-book-config-webdav.c:146 msgid "Avoid IfMatch (needed on Apache < 2.2.8)" msgstr "Izogibajte se IfMatch (zahtevano na Apache < 2.2.8)" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:447 #, c-format msgid "HTTP Error: %s" msgstr "Napaka HTTP: %s" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:475 msgid "Could not parse response" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti odgovora" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:484 msgid "Empty response" msgstr "Odziv brez vsebine" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:492 msgid "Unexpected reply from server" msgstr "Nepričakovan odgovor strežnika" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:1124 msgid "Could not locate user's calendars" msgstr "Uporbnikovega koledarja ni mogoče najti" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser.c:1348 msgid "Path" msgstr "Pot" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser-dialog.c:264 #: ../modules/cal-config-google/e-google-chooser-dialog.c:200 msgid "Choose a Calendar" msgstr "Izberite koledar" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser-dialog.c:267 msgid "Choose a Memo List" msgstr "Izberite seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/e-caldav-chooser-dialog.c:270 msgid "Choose a Task List" msgstr "Izberite seznam opravil" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/evolution-cal-config-caldav.c:219 msgid "Find Calendars" msgstr "Poiščite koledarje" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/evolution-cal-config-caldav.c:222 msgid "Find Memo Lists" msgstr "Poiščite seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/evolution-cal-config-caldav.c:225 msgid "Find Task Lists" msgstr "Poiščite seznam opravil" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/evolution-cal-config-caldav.c:243 msgid "Email:" msgstr "Elektronska pošta:" #: ../modules/cal-config-caldav/evolution-cal-config-caldav.c:248 msgid "Server handles meeting invitations" msgstr "Vabila za sestanke obravnava strežnik" #: ../modules/cal-config-contacts/evolution-cal-config-contacts.c:71 msgid "Choose which address books to use." msgstr "Izberite, kateri imenik želite uporabljati." #: ../modules/cal-config-contacts/evolution-cal-config-contacts.c:201 msgid "Use in Birthdays & Anniversaries calendar" msgstr "Uporabite v koledarju rojstnih dnevov in obletnic" #: ../modules/cal-config-google/e-google-chooser-button.c:127 msgid "Default User Calendar" msgstr "Privzeti uporabniški koledar" #: ../modules/cal-config-google/e-google-chooser.c:515 #, c-format msgid "Enter Google password for user '%s'." msgstr "Vnesite geslo Google za uporabnika '%s'." #: ../modules/cal-config-google/e-google-chooser.c:532 msgid "User declined to provide a password" msgstr "Uporabnik je zavrnil vnos gesla" #: ../modules/cal-config-local/evolution-cal-config-local.c:160 msgid "Use an existing iCalendar (ics) file" msgstr "Uporabi obstoječo datoteko iCalendar (ics)" #: ../modules/cal-config-local/evolution-cal-config-local.c:185 msgid "iCalendar File" msgstr "Datoteka iCalendar" #: ../modules/cal-config-local/evolution-cal-config-local.c:197 msgid "Choose an iCalendar file" msgstr "Izberite datoteko iCalendar" #: ../modules/cal-config-local/evolution-cal-config-local.c:200 msgid "File:" msgstr "Datoteka:" #: ../modules/cal-config-local/evolution-cal-config-local.c:215 msgid "Allow Evolution to update the file" msgstr "Dovoli programu Evolution, da posodobi datoteko" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-attachment-handler.c:320 #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:9 msgid "I_mport" msgstr "_Uvozi" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-attachment-handler.c:406 msgid "Select a Calendar" msgstr "Izbor koledarja" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-attachment-handler.c:433 msgid "Select a Task List" msgstr "Izbor seznama nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-attachment-handler.c:443 msgid "I_mport to Calendar" msgstr "Uvoz_i v koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-attachment-handler.c:450 msgid "I_mport to Tasks" msgstr "Uvoz_i v naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.c:517 msgid "Selected Calendars for Alarms" msgstr "Izbrani koledarji za alarme" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.c:925 msgid "Ti_me and date:" msgstr "_Čas in datum:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.c:926 msgid "_Date only:" msgstr "Le _datum:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:1 msgid "Minutes" msgstr "Minute" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:2 msgid "Hours" msgstr "Ure" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:3 msgid "Days" msgstr "Dnevi" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:4 msgid "60 minutes" msgstr "60 minut" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:5 msgid "30 minutes" msgstr "30 minut" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:6 msgid "15 minutes" msgstr "15 minut" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:7 msgid "10 minutes" msgstr "10 minut" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:8 msgid "05 minutes" msgstr "05 minut" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:10 msgid "Se_cond zone:" msgstr "_Drug pas:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:12 msgid "(Shown in a Day View)" msgstr "(Prikazano v dnevnem pogledu)" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:14 msgid "Use s_ystem time zone" msgstr "Uporabi _sistemski časovni pas" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:15 msgid "Time format:" msgstr "Oblika izpisa časa:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:16 msgid "_12 hour (AM/PM)" msgstr "_12 urna (dop./pop.)" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:17 msgid "_24 hour" msgstr "_24 urna" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:18 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1716 msgid "Work Week" msgstr "Delovni teden" #. A weekday like "Monday" follows #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:20 msgid "Wee_k starts on:" msgstr "_Začetek tedna:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:21 msgid "Work days:" msgstr "Delovni dnevi:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:22 msgid "_Day begins:" msgstr "Začetek _dneva:" #. Monday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:24 msgid "_Mon" msgstr "po_n" #. Tuesday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:27 msgid "_Tue" msgstr "_tor" #. Wednesday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:30 msgid "_Wed" msgstr "_sre" #. Thursday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:33 msgid "T_hu" msgstr "č_et" #. Friday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:36 msgid "_Fri" msgstr "_pet" #. Saturday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:39 msgid "_Sat" msgstr "so_b" #. Sunday #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:42 msgid "S_un" msgstr "_ned" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:44 msgid "Day _ends:" msgstr "Konec dn_eva:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:45 msgid "Alerts" msgstr "Opozorila" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:46 msgid "_Ask for confirmation when deleting items" msgstr "_Vprašaj za potrditev ob brisanju predmetov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:48 msgid "_Time divisions:" msgstr "Deli_tve časa:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:49 msgid "_Show appointment end times in week and month view" msgstr "Pokaži čase koncev _sestankov v tedenskih in mesečnih pogledih" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:50 msgid "_Compress weekends in month view" msgstr "_Stisni vikende v mesečnem pogledu" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:51 msgid "Show week _numbers" msgstr "Pokaži _številke tednov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:52 msgid "Show r_ecurring events in italic in bottom left calendar" msgstr "" "Pokaži p_onavljajoče se dogodke v ležeči pisavi v spodnjem levem koledarju" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:53 msgid "Sc_roll Month View by a week" msgstr "D_rsenje po tednih v mesečnem pogledu" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:55 msgid "Display" msgstr "Pokaži" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:56 msgid "Task List" msgstr "Seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:57 msgid "Highlight t_asks due today" msgstr "Poudari naloge, ki zakasnijo danes" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:59 msgid "Highlight _overdue tasks" msgstr "Poudari zakasnele naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:60 msgid "_Hide completed tasks after" msgstr "_Skrij opravljene naloge po" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:63 msgid "Display reminders in _notification area only" msgstr "Prikaži opomnike v obvestilnem p_odročju" #. This is the first half of a user preference. "Show a reminder [time-period] before every appointment" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:65 msgid "Sh_ow a reminder" msgstr "Pokaži _opomnik" #. This is the last half of a user preference. "Show a reminder [time-period] before every appointment" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:67 msgid "before every appointment" msgstr "pred vsakim sestankom" #. This is the first half of a user preference. "Show a reminder [time-period] before every anniversary/birthday" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:69 msgid "Show a _reminder" msgstr "Pokaži o_pomnik" #. This is the last half of a user preference. "Show a reminder [time-period] before every anniversary/birthday" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:71 msgid "before every anniversary/birthday" msgstr "pred vsako obletnico ali rojstnim dnem" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:72 msgid "Select the calendars for reminder notification" msgstr "Izberite koledarje za obvestila opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:73 msgid "Default Free/Busy Server" msgstr "Privzet strežnik zasedenosti" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:74 msgid "Template:" msgstr "Predloga:" #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:76 #, no-c-format msgid "%u and %d will be replaced by user and domain from the email address." msgstr "" "%u in %d bosta zamenjana s podatki uporabnika in domene iz elektronskega " "naslova." #: ../modules/calendar/e-calendar-preferences.ui.h:77 msgid "Publishing Information" msgstr "Objavi podrobnosti" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:313 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:191 msgid "New Calendar" msgstr "Nov koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:322 msgctxt "New" msgid "_Appointment" msgstr "_Sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:324 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1521 msgid "Create a new appointment" msgstr "Ustvari nov sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:329 msgctxt "New" msgid "All Day A_ppointment" msgstr "Celodnevni _sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:331 msgid "Create a new all-day appointment" msgstr "Ustvari nov celodnevni sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:336 msgctxt "New" msgid "M_eeting" msgstr "S_rečanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:338 msgid "Create a new meeting request" msgstr "Ustvari nov zahtevek za srečanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:346 msgctxt "New" msgid "Cale_ndar" msgstr "_Koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:348 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1395 msgid "Create a new calendar" msgstr "Ustvari nov koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-backend.c:703 msgid "Calendar and Tasks" msgstr "Koledar in naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-sidebar.c:119 #, c-format msgid "Opening calendar '%s'" msgstr "Odpiranje koledarja '%s'" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-sidebar.c:591 msgid "Calendar Selector" msgstr "Izbirnik koledarjev" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:216 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:245 msgid "Print" msgstr "Natisni" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:291 msgid "Calendar Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti koledarja" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:322 msgid "" "This operation will permanently erase all events older than the selected " "amount of time. If you continue, you will not be able to recover these " "events." msgstr "" "S tem dejanjem bodo trajno izbrisani vsi dogodki, ki so starejši od izbrane " "vrednosti. V primeru, da boste nadaljevali, teh dogodkov ne bo mogoče " "obnoviti." #. Translators: This is the first part of the sentence: #. * "Purge events older than <> days" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:339 msgid "Purge events older than" msgstr "Počisti dogodke starejše kot" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:585 msgid "Copying Items" msgstr "Kopiranje predmetov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:878 msgid "Moving Items" msgstr "Premikanje predmetov" #. Translators: Default filename part saving an event to a file when #. * no summary is filed, the '.ics' extension is concatenated to it. #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1211 msgid "event" msgstr "dogodek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1213 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:231 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:298 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:527 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:644 msgid "Save as iCalendar" msgstr "Shrani kot iCalendar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1351 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:608 msgid "_Copy..." msgstr "_Kopiraj ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1358 msgid "D_elete Calendar" msgstr "_Izbriši koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1360 msgid "Delete the selected calendar" msgstr "Izbriše izbrani koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1367 msgid "Go Back" msgstr "Pojdi nazaj" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1374 msgid "Go Forward" msgstr "Pojdi naprej" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1381 msgid "Select today" msgstr "Izbere danes" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1386 msgid "Select _Date" msgstr "Izberi _datum" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1388 msgid "Select a specific date" msgstr "Izberi določen datum" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1393 msgid "_New Calendar" msgstr "_Nov koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1407 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:816 msgid "Purg_e" msgstr "Poč_isti" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1409 msgid "Purge old appointments and meetings" msgstr "Počisti stare sestanke in srečanja" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1416 msgid "Refresh the selected calendar" msgstr "Osveži izbrani koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1423 msgid "Rename the selected calendar" msgstr "Preimenuj izbrani koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1428 msgid "Find _next" msgstr "Najdi _naslednje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1430 msgid "Find next occurrence of the current search string" msgstr "Najde naslednjo pojavitev trenutnega iskalnega niza" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1435 msgid "Find _previous" msgstr "Najdi _predhodno" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1437 msgid "Find previous occurrence of the current search string" msgstr "Najde predhodno pojavitev trenutnega iskalnega niza" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1442 msgid "Stop _running search" msgstr "Ustavi _trenutno iskanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1444 msgid "Stop currently running search" msgstr "Ustavi trenutno izvajajoče se iskanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1449 msgid "Show _Only This Calendar" msgstr "Pokaži _le ta koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1456 msgid "Cop_y to Calendar..." msgstr "Kopiraj v _koledar ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1463 msgid "_Delegate Meeting..." msgstr "_Poblaščeno zastopanje srečanja..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1470 msgid "_Delete Appointment" msgstr "_Izbriši sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1472 msgid "Delete selected appointments" msgstr "Izbriše izbrane sestanke" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1477 msgid "Delete This _Occurrence" msgstr "Izbriši to _pojavitev" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1479 msgid "Delete this occurrence" msgstr "Izbriše to pojavitev" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1484 msgid "Delete All Occ_urrences" msgstr "Izbriši _vse pojavitve" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1486 msgid "Delete all occurrences" msgstr "Zbriše vse pojavitve" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1491 msgid "New All Day _Event..." msgstr "Nov _celodnevni dogodek ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1493 msgid "Create a new all day event" msgstr "Ustvari nov celodnevni sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1498 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:265 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:338 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:601 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:725 msgid "_Forward as iCalendar..." msgstr "_Posreduj kot iCalendar ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1505 msgid "New _Meeting..." msgstr "Novo _srečanje ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1507 msgid "Create a new meeting" msgstr "Ustvari novo srečanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1512 msgid "Mo_ve to Calendar..." msgstr "Premakni _v koledar ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1519 msgid "New _Appointment..." msgstr "Nov _sestanek ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1526 msgid "Make this Occurrence _Movable" msgstr "Naredi to pojavitev _premakljivo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1533 msgid "_Open Appointment" msgstr "_Odpri sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1535 msgid "View the current appointment" msgstr "Ogled trenutnega sestanka" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1540 msgid "_Reply" msgstr "Odgovo_ri" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1554 msgid "_Schedule Meeting..." msgstr "_Načrtuj srečanje ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1556 msgid "Converts an appointment to a meeting" msgstr "Pretvori sestanek v srečanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1561 msgid "Conv_ert to Appointment..." msgstr "_Pretvori v sestanek ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1563 msgid "Converts a meeting to an appointment" msgstr "Pretvori srečanje v sestanek" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1568 msgid "Quit" msgstr "Končaj" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1688 msgid "Day" msgstr "Dan" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1690 msgid "Show one day" msgstr "Pokaži en dan" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1695 msgid "List" msgstr "Seznam" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1697 msgid "Show as list" msgstr "Pokaži kot seznam" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1702 msgid "Month" msgstr "Mesec" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1704 msgid "Show one month" msgstr "Pokaži en mesec" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1709 msgid "Week" msgstr "Teden" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1711 msgid "Show one week" msgstr "Pokaži en teden" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1718 msgid "Show one work week" msgstr "Pokaži en delovni teden" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1726 msgid "Active Appointments" msgstr "Dejavni sestanki" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1740 msgid "Next 7 Days' Appointments" msgstr "Sestanki naslednjih 7 dni" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1747 msgid "Occurs Less Than 5 Times" msgstr "Ponovi se manj kot petkrat" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1778 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:798 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:997 msgid "Description contains" msgstr "Opis vsebuje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1785 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:805 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:1004 msgid "Summary contains" msgstr "Povzetek vsebuje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1797 msgid "Print this calendar" msgstr "Natisni ta koledar" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1804 msgid "Preview the calendar to be printed" msgstr "Predogled koledarja pred tiskanjem" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1826 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:306 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:393 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:846 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:1045 msgid "_Save as iCalendar..." msgstr "_Shrani kot iCalendar ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-actions.c:1903 msgid "Go To" msgstr "Pojdi na" #. Translators: Default filename part saving a memo to a file when #. * no summary is filed, the '.ics' extension is concatenated to it. #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:229 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:525 msgid "memo" msgstr "opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:272 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:657 msgid "New _Memo" msgstr "Nov _opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:274 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:219 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:659 msgid "Create a new memo" msgstr "Ustvari nov opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:279 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:664 msgid "_Open Memo" msgstr "_Odpri opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:281 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:666 msgid "View the selected memo" msgstr "Ogled izbranega opomnika" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:286 #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:373 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:671 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:809 msgid "Open _Web Page" msgstr "Odpri _spletno stran" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-memopad.c:298 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:831 msgid "Print the selected memo" msgstr "Natisni izbrani opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1562 msgid "Searching next matching event" msgstr "Iskanje naslednjega ujemajočega se dogodka" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1563 msgid "Searching previous matching event" msgstr "Iskanje prehodnega ujemajočega se dogodka" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1584 #, c-format msgid "Cannot find matching event in the next %d year" msgid_plural "Cannot find matching event in the next %d years" msgstr[0] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v naslednjih %d letih" msgstr[1] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v naslednjem %d letu" msgstr[2] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v naslednjih %d letih" msgstr[3] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v naslednjih %d letih" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1588 #, c-format msgid "Cannot find matching event in the previous %d year" msgid_plural "Cannot find matching event in the previous %d years" msgstr[0] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v predhodnih %d letih" msgstr[1] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v predhodnem %d letu" msgstr[2] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v predhodnih %d letih" msgstr[3] "Ni mogoče najti ujemajočega dogodka v predhodnih %d letih" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-private.c:1613 msgid "Cannot search with no active calendar" msgstr "Ni mogoče iskati brez dejavnega koledarja" #. Translators: Default filename part saving a task to a file when #. * no summary is filed, the '.ics' extension is concatenated to it. #. Translators: Default filename part saving a task to a file when #. * no summary is filed, the '.ics' extension is concatenated to it #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:296 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:642 msgid "task" msgstr "naloga" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:331 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:704 msgid "_Assign Task" msgstr "Dodeli _nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:345 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:781 msgid "_Mark as Complete" msgstr "_Označi kot opravljeno" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:347 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:783 msgid "Mark selected tasks as complete" msgstr "Označi izbrane naloge kot opravljene" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:352 msgid "_Mark as Incomplete" msgstr "_Označi kot nedokončano" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:354 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:790 msgid "Mark selected tasks as incomplete" msgstr "Označi izbrane naloge kot nedokončane" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:359 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:795 msgid "New _Task" msgstr "Nova _naloga" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:361 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:216 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:797 msgid "Create a new task" msgstr "Ustvari novo nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:366 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:802 msgid "_Open Task" msgstr "_Odpri nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:368 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:804 msgid "View the selected task" msgstr "Pogled izbrane naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-cal-shell-view-taskpad.c:385 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:1030 msgid "Print the selected task" msgstr "Natisni izbrano nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:208 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:196 msgid "New Memo List" msgstr "Nov seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:217 msgctxt "New" msgid "Mem_o" msgstr "_Opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:224 msgctxt "New" msgid "_Shared Memo" msgstr "_Souporabljen opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:226 msgid "Create a new shared memo" msgstr "Ustvari nov souporabljen opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:234 msgctxt "New" msgid "Memo Li_st" msgstr "_Seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-backend.c:236 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:624 msgid "Create a new memo list" msgstr "Ustvari nov seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-sidebar.c:117 #, c-format msgid "Opening memo list '%s'" msgstr "Odpiranje seznama opomnikov '%s'" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-sidebar.c:547 msgid "Memo List Selector" msgstr "Izbirnik seznama opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:212 #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:227 msgid "Print Memos" msgstr "Natisni opomnike" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:268 msgid "Memo List Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti seznama opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:587 msgid "_Delete Memo" msgstr "_Izbriši opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:594 msgid "_Find in Memo..." msgstr "_Najdi v opomniku ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:596 msgid "Search for text in the displayed memo" msgstr "Poišči besedilo v prikazanem opomniku" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:615 msgid "D_elete Memo List" msgstr "_Izbriši seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:617 msgid "Delete the selected memo list" msgstr "Izbriši izbran seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:622 msgid "_New Memo List" msgstr "_Nov seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:638 msgid "Refresh the selected memo list" msgstr "Osveži izbran seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:645 msgid "Rename the selected memo list" msgstr "Preimenuj izbran seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:650 msgid "Show _Only This Memo List" msgstr "Pokaži _le ta seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:729 msgid "Memo _Preview" msgstr "_Predogled opomnika" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:731 msgid "Show memo preview pane" msgstr "Pokaži pladenj predogleda opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:752 msgid "Show memo preview below the memo list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled opomnikov pod seznamom opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:759 msgid "Show memo preview alongside the memo list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled opomnikov ob seznamu opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:817 msgid "Print the list of memos" msgstr "Natisni seznam opomnikov" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-actions.c:824 msgid "Preview the list of memos to be printed" msgstr "Predogled seznama opomnikov pred tiskanjem" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view.c:239 msgid "Delete Memos" msgstr "Izbriši opomnike" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view.c:241 msgid "Delete Memo" msgstr "Izbriši opomnik" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-private.c:538 #, c-format msgid "%d memo" msgid_plural "%d memos" msgstr[0] "%d opomnikov" msgstr[1] "%d opomnik" msgstr[2] "%d opomnika" msgstr[3] "%d opomniki" #: ../modules/calendar/e-memo-shell-view-private.c:542 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-private.c:746 #, c-format msgid "%d selected" msgstr "%d izbranih" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:205 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:219 msgid "New Task List" msgstr "Nov seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:214 msgctxt "New" msgid "_Task" msgstr "_Naloga" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:221 msgctxt "New" msgid "Assigne_d Task" msgstr "_Dodeljena naloga" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:223 msgid "Create a new assigned task" msgstr "Ustvari novo dodeljeno nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:231 msgctxt "New" msgid "Tas_k List" msgstr "Seznam _nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-backend.c:233 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:748 msgid "Create a new task list" msgstr "Ustvari nov seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-sidebar.c:117 #, c-format msgid "Opening task list '%s'" msgstr "Odpiranje seznama opravil '%s'" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-sidebar.c:547 msgid "Task List Selector" msgstr "Izbirnik seznama nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:235 #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:250 msgid "Print Tasks" msgstr "Natisni naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:291 msgid "Task List Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti seznama nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:586 msgid "" "This operation will permanently erase all tasks marked as completed. If you " "continue, you will not be able to recover these tasks.\n" "\n" "Really erase these tasks?" msgstr "" "To dejanje bo trajno izbrisalo vse naloge označene kot opravljene. Če boste " "nadaljevali, nalog ne bo mogoče obnoviti.\n" " \n" "Ali želite izbrisati te naloge?" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:593 msgid "Do not ask me again" msgstr "Ne sprašuj več" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:711 msgid "_Delete Task" msgstr "_Izbriši nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:718 msgid "_Find in Task..." msgstr "_Najdi v nalogi ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:720 msgid "Search for text in the displayed task" msgstr "Poišči besedilo v prikazani nalogi" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:732 msgid "Copy..." msgstr "Kopiraj ..." #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:739 msgid "D_elete Task List" msgstr "_Izbriši seznam opravil" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:741 msgid "Delete the selected task list" msgstr "Izbriši izbrani seznam opravil" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:746 msgid "_New Task List" msgstr "_Nov seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:762 msgid "Refresh the selected task list" msgstr "Osveži izbrani seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:769 msgid "Rename the selected task list" msgstr "Preimenuj izbrani seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:774 msgid "Show _Only This Task List" msgstr "Pokaži _le ta seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:788 msgid "Mar_k as Incomplete" msgstr "_Označi kot nedokončano" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:818 msgid "Delete completed tasks" msgstr "Izbriši končane naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:893 msgid "Task _Preview" msgstr "_Predogled nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:895 msgid "Show task preview pane" msgstr "Pokaže pladenj predogleda nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:916 msgid "Show task preview below the task list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled nalog pod seznamom nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:923 msgid "Show task preview alongside the task list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled nalog ob seznamu nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:931 msgid "Active Tasks" msgstr "Dejavne naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:945 msgid "Completed Tasks" msgstr "Končane naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:952 msgid "Next 7 Days' Tasks" msgstr "Naloge naslednjih 7 dni" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:959 msgid "Overdue Tasks" msgstr "Zakasnjene naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:966 msgid "Tasks with Attachments" msgstr "Naloge s prilogami" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:1016 msgid "Print the list of tasks" msgstr "Natisni seznam nalog" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-actions.c:1023 msgid "Preview the list of tasks to be printed" msgstr "Predogled seznama nalog pred tiskanjem" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view.c:374 msgid "Delete Tasks" msgstr "Izbriši naloge" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view.c:376 msgid "Delete Task" msgstr "Izbriši nalogo" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-private.c:631 msgid "Expunging" msgstr "Uničuvanje" #: ../modules/calendar/e-task-shell-view-private.c:742 #, c-format msgid "%d task" msgid_plural "%d tasks" msgstr[0] "%d nalog" msgstr[1] "%d naloga" msgstr[2] "%d nalogi" msgstr[3] "%d naloge" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/e-mail-formatter-itip.c:149 msgid "ITIP" msgstr "ITIP" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/e-mail-formatter-itip.c:150 msgid "Display part as an invitation" msgstr "Prikaži del kot vabilo" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 24-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:235 msgid "Today %H:%M" msgstr "Danes %H.%M" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 24-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:239 msgid "Today %H:%M:%S" msgstr "Danes %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 12-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:248 msgid "Today %l:%M:%S %p" msgstr "Danes %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 24-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:263 msgid "Tomorrow %H:%M" msgstr "Jutri %H.%M" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 24-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:267 msgid "Tomorrow %H:%M:%S" msgstr "Jutri %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 12-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:272 msgid "Tomorrow %l:%M %p" msgstr "Jutri %H.%M" #. strftime format of a time, #. * in 12-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:276 msgid "Tomorrow %l:%M:%S %p" msgstr "Jutri %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:295 #, c-format msgid "%A" msgstr "%A" #. strftime format of a weekday and a #. * time, in 24-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:300 msgid "%A %H:%M" msgstr "%A %H.%M" #. strftime format of a weekday and a #. * time, in 24-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:304 msgid "%A %H:%M:%S" msgstr "%A %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday and a #. * time, in 12-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:309 msgid "%A %l:%M %p" msgstr "%A %H.%M" #. strftime format of a weekday and a #. * time, in 12-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:313 msgid "%A %l:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%A %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday and a date #. * without a year. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:322 msgid "%A, %B %e" msgstr "%A, %e. %B" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date #. * without a year and a time, #. * in 24-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:328 msgid "%A, %B %e %H:%M" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %H.%M" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date without a year #. * and a time, in 24-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:332 msgid "%A, %B %e %H:%M:%S" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date without a year #. * and a time, in 12-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:337 msgid "%A, %B %e %l:%M %p" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %H.%M" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date without a year #. * and a time, in 12-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:341 msgid "%A, %B %e %l:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday and a date. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:347 msgid "%A, %B %e, %Y" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %Y" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 24-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:352 msgid "%A, %B %e, %Y %H:%M" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %Y %H.%M" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 24-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:356 msgid "%A, %B %e, %Y %H:%M:%S" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %Y %H.%M.%S" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 12-hour format, without seconds. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:361 msgid "%A, %B %e, %Y %l:%M %p" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %Y %H.%M" #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 12-hour format. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:365 msgid "%A, %B %e, %Y %l:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%A, %e. %B %Y %H.%M.%S" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:403 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:404 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:493 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:494 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:583 msgid "An unknown person" msgstr "neznana oseba" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:408 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:498 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:587 #, c-format msgid "Please respond on behalf of %s" msgstr "Odzovite se v imenu %s" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:410 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:500 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:589 #, c-format msgid "Received on behalf of %s" msgstr "Prejeto v imenu %s" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:415 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has published the following meeting information:" msgstr "%s je preko %s objavil(a) naslednje podatke o srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:417 #, c-format msgid "%s has published the following meeting information:" msgstr "%s je objavil(a) naslednje podatke o srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:422 #, c-format msgid "%s has delegated the following meeting to you:" msgstr "%s vam je pooblastil zastopanje naslednjega srečanja:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:425 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s requests your presence at the following meeting:" msgstr "%s preko %s zahteva vašo navzočnost na naslednjem srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:427 #, c-format msgid "%s requests your presence at the following meeting:" msgstr "%s zahteva vašo navzočnost na naslednjem srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:433 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s wishes to add to an existing meeting:" msgstr "%s vas želi preko %s dodati k obstoječemu srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:435 #, c-format msgid "%s wishes to add to an existing meeting:" msgstr "%s vas želi dodati k obstoječemu srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:439 #, c-format msgid "" "%s through %s wishes to receive the latest information for the following " "meeting:" msgstr "%s želi preko %s pridobiti najnovejše podrobnosti o srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:441 #, c-format msgid "" "%s wishes to receive the latest information for the following meeting:" msgstr "%s želi dobiti najnovejše podatke o naslednjem srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:445 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has sent back the following meeting response:" msgstr "%s je preko %s poslal(a) naslednji odgovor o srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:447 #, c-format msgid "%s has sent back the following meeting response:" msgstr "%s je poslal(a) naslednji odgovor o srečanju:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:451 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has canceled the following meeting:" msgstr "%s je preko %s preklical(a) naslednje srečanje:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:453 #, c-format msgid "%s has canceled the following meeting:" msgstr "%s je preklical(a) naslednje srečanje:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:457 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has proposed the following meeting changes." msgstr "%s preko %s predlaga naslednje spremembe srečanja." #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:459 #, c-format msgid "%s has proposed the following meeting changes:" msgstr "%s predlaga naslednje spremembe srečanja:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:463 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has declined the following meeting changes:" msgstr "%s je preko %s odklonil(a) naslednje spremembe srečanja:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:465 #, c-format msgid "%s has declined the following meeting changes:" msgstr "%s je odklonil(a) naslednje spremembe srečanja:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:505 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has published the following task:" msgstr "%s je preko %s objavil(a) naslednje naloge:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:507 #, c-format msgid "%s has published the following task:" msgstr "%s je objavil(a) naslednjo nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:512 #, c-format msgid "%s requests the assignment of %s to the following task:" msgstr "%s zahteva dodelitev %s naslednji nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:515 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has assigned you a task:" msgstr "%s vam je preko %s dodelil(a) nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:517 #, c-format msgid "%s has assigned you a task:" msgstr "%s vam je dodelil(a) nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:523 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s wishes to add to an existing task:" msgstr "%s vas želi preko %s dodati k obstoječi nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:525 #, c-format msgid "%s wishes to add to an existing task:" msgstr "%s vas želi dodati k obstoječi nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:529 #, c-format msgid "" "%s through %s wishes to receive the latest information for the following " "assigned task:" msgstr "" "%s želi preko %s pridobiti najnovejše podrobnosti o naslednji nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:531 #, c-format msgid "" "%s wishes to receive the latest information for the following assigned task:" msgstr "%s želi dobiti najnovejše podatke o naslednji nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:535 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has sent back the following assigned task response:" msgstr "%s preko %s pošilja naslednji odgovor o dodeljeni nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:537 #, c-format msgid "%s has sent back the following assigned task response:" msgstr "%s je poslal(a) naslednji odgovor o dodeljeni nalogi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:541 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has canceled the following assigned task:" msgstr "%s je preko %s preklical(a) naslednjo dodeljeno nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:543 #, c-format msgid "%s has canceled the following assigned task:" msgstr "%s je preklical(a) naslednjo dodeljeno nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:547 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has proposed the following task assignment changes:" msgstr "%s je preko %s predlagal(a) naslednje spremembe dodelitev naloge:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:549 #, c-format msgid "%s has proposed the following task assignment changes:" msgstr "%s je predlagal(a) naslednje spremembe dodelitev naloge:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:553 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has declined the following assigned task:" msgstr "%s je preko %s odklonil(a) naslednjo dodeljeno nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:555 #, c-format msgid "%s has declined the following assigned task:" msgstr "%s je odklonil(a) naslednjo dodeljeno nalogo:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:594 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has published the following memo:" msgstr "%s je preko %s objavil(a) naslednji opomnik:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:596 #, c-format msgid "%s has published the following memo:" msgstr "%s je objavil(a) naslednji opomnik:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:601 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s wishes to add to an existing memo:" msgstr "%s vas želi preko %s dodati k obstoječemu opomniku:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:603 #, c-format msgid "%s wishes to add to an existing memo:" msgstr "%s vas želi dodati k obstoječemu opomniku:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:607 #, c-format msgid "%s through %s has canceled the following shared memo:" msgstr "%s je preko %s preklical(a) naslednji zapisek v souporabi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:609 #, c-format msgid "%s has canceled the following shared memo:" msgstr "%s je preklical(a) naslednji opomnik v souporabi:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:682 msgid "All day:" msgstr "Celodnevno:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:688 msgid "Start day:" msgstr "Dan začetka:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:688 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1502 msgid "Start time:" msgstr "Čas začetka:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:697 msgid "End day:" msgstr "Dan konca:%d dni" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:697 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1503 msgid "End time:" msgstr "Čas konca:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1028 msgid "Ope_n Calendar" msgstr "Odpr_i koledar" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1031 msgid "_Decline all" msgstr "_Odkloni vse" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1034 msgid "_Decline" msgstr "_Odkloni" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1037 msgid "_Tentative all" msgstr "Vse _poskusno" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1040 msgid "_Tentative" msgstr "_Poskusno" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1043 msgid "Acce_pt all" msgstr "Spr_ejmi vse" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1046 msgid "Acce_pt" msgstr "Spr_ejmi" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1049 msgid "Send _Information" msgstr "Pošlji _podrobnosti" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1052 msgid "_Update Attendee Status" msgstr "_Posodobi stanje udeleženca" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1055 msgid "_Update" msgstr "_Posodobi" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1505 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1553 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1624 msgid "Comment:" msgstr "Opomba:" #. RSVP area #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1541 msgid "Send reply to sender" msgstr "Odgovori pošiljatelju" #. Updates #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1556 msgid "Send _updates to attendees" msgstr "Pošlji _posodobitve udeležencem" #. The recurrence check button #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1559 msgid "_Apply to all instances" msgstr "Uveljavi za vse _primerke" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1560 msgid "Show time as _free" msgstr "Pokaži čas kot _prosto" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1561 msgid "_Preserve my reminder" msgstr "_Ohrani moj opomnik" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1562 msgid "_Inherit reminder" msgstr "_Prevzemi opomnik" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1892 msgid "_Tasks:" msgstr "_Naloge:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:1895 msgid "_Memos:" msgstr "_Opomniki:" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3123 msgid "Sa_ve" msgstr "Sh_rani" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3583 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5028 msgid "Attendee status updated" msgstr "Stanje udeleženca je posodobljeno" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3762 #, c-format msgid "An appointment in the calendar '%s' conflicts with this meeting" msgstr "Sestanek v koledarju '%s' je v sporu s tem srečanjem" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3791 #, c-format msgid "Found the appointment in the calendar '%s'" msgstr "Sestanek je bil najden v koledarju '%s'" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3904 msgid "Unable to find any calendars" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti nobenega koledarja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3912 msgid "Unable to find this meeting in any calendar" msgstr "Srečanja ni mogoče najti v nobenem koledarju" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3917 msgid "Unable to find this task in any task list" msgstr "Naloge ni mogoče najti v nobenem seznamu nalog" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:3922 msgid "Unable to find this memo in any memo list" msgstr "Opomnika ni mogoče najti v nobenem seznamu opomnikov" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4266 msgid "Opening the calendar. Please wait..." msgstr "Odpiranje koledarja. Počakajte ..." #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4271 msgid "Searching for an existing version of this appointment" msgstr "Iskanje obstoječe različice tega sestanka" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4664 #, c-format msgid "Unable to send item to calendar '%s'. %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati predmeta v koledar '%s'. %s" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4679 #, c-format msgid "Sent to calendar '%s' as accepted" msgstr "Poslano koledarju '%s' kot sprejeto" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4684 #, c-format msgid "Sent to calendar '%s' as tentative" msgstr "Poslano koledarju '%s' kot poskusno" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4690 #, c-format msgid "Sent to calendar '%s' as declined" msgstr "Poslano koledarju '%s' kot odklonjeno" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4696 #, c-format msgid "Sent to calendar '%s' as canceled" msgstr "Poslano koledarju '%s' kot preklicano" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4717 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5174 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5280 msgid "Saving changes to the calendar. Please wait..." msgstr "Shranjujejo se spremembe v koledar. Počakajte ..." #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4758 msgid "Unable to parse item" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti predmeta" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4951 #, c-format msgid "Organizer has removed the delegate %s " msgstr "Organizator je odstranil pooblaščenca %s " #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4968 msgid "Sent a cancelation notice to the delegate" msgstr "Pooblaščencu je bilo poslano obvestilo o preklicu" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:4972 msgid "Could not send the cancelation notice to the delegate" msgstr "Pooblaščencu ni mogoče poslati obvestila o preklicu" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5020 #, c-format msgid "Unable to update attendee. %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče posodobiti udeleženca. %s" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5063 msgid "The meeting is invalid and cannot be updated" msgstr "Srečanje ni veljavno in ga ni mogoče posodobiti" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5139 msgid "Attendee status could not be updated because the status is invalid" msgstr "Stanja udeleženca ni mogoče posodobiti zaradi neveljavnega stanja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5211 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5250 msgid "Attendee status can not be updated because the item no longer exists" msgstr "Stanja udeleženca ni mogoče posodobiti, ker predmet ne obstaja več" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5313 msgid "Meeting information sent" msgstr "Podatki o srečanju so bili uspešno poslani" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5318 msgid "Task information sent" msgstr "Podatki o nalogi so bili uspešno poslani" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5323 msgid "Memo information sent" msgstr "Podatki o opomniku so bili uspešno poslani" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5334 msgid "Unable to send meeting information, the meeting does not exist" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče poslati podrobnosti srečanja, saj srečanje še ni ustvarjeno" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5339 msgid "Unable to send task information, the task does not exist" msgstr "Podrobnosti naloge ni mogoče poslati, saj ne obstaja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5344 msgid "Unable to send memo information, the memo does not exist" msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati opomnika, saj ta še ni ustvarjen" #. Translators: This is a default filename for a calendar. #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5409 msgid "calendar.ics" msgstr "koledar.ics" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5414 msgid "Save Calendar" msgstr "Shrani koledar" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5463 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5476 msgid "The calendar attached is not valid" msgstr "Priložen koledar ni veljaven" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5464 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5477 msgid "" "The message claims to contain a calendar, but the calendar is not a valid " "iCalendar." msgstr "" "Sporočilo trdi, da vsebuje koledar, vendar ni v veljavni obliki iCalendar." #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5519 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5549 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5650 msgid "The item in the calendar is not valid" msgstr "Predmet v koledarju ni veljaven" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5520 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5550 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5651 msgid "" "The message does contain a calendar, but the calendar contains no events, " "tasks or free/busy information" msgstr "" "Sporočilo vsebuje koledar, vendar koledar ne vsebuje nobenih dogodkov, nalog " "ali podatkov o zasedenosti" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5565 msgid "The calendar attached contains multiple items" msgstr "Priložen koledar vsebuje več predmetov" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:5566 msgid "" "To process all of these items, the file should be saved and the calendar " "imported" msgstr "" "Za obdelavo vseh predmetov morate shraniti datoteko in uvoziti koledar" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6067 msgctxt "cal-itip" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6083 msgid "Tentatively Accepted" msgstr "Poskusno sprejeto" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6243 msgid "This meeting recurs" msgstr "Srečanje se ponavlja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6246 msgid "This task recurs" msgstr "Ta naloga se ponavlja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/itip-view.c:6249 msgid "This memo recurs" msgstr "Opomnik se ponavlja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/org-gnome-itip-formatter.error.xml.h:1 msgid "" "This response is not from a current attendee. Add the sender as an attendee?" msgstr "" "Tega odgovora ni poslal trenutni udeleženec. Naj bo pošiljatelj dodan kot " "udeleženec?" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/org-gnome-itip-formatter.error.xml.h:2 msgid "This meeting has been delegated" msgstr "To srečanje je bilo pooblaščeno zastopano" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/org-gnome-itip-formatter.error.xml.h:3 msgid "" "'{0}' has delegated the meeting. Do you want to add the delegate '{1}'?" msgstr "" "'{0}' je pooblastil(a) srečanje. Ali želite dodati pooblaščenca '{1}'?" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/config-ui.c:82 msgid "Meeting Invitations" msgstr "Povabila na srečanja" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/config-ui.c:108 msgid "_Delete message after acting" msgstr "Izbriši sporočilo po _dejanju" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/config-ui.c:122 #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/config-ui.c:153 msgid "Conflict Search" msgstr "Iskanje sporov" #. Source selector #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/config-ui.c:137 msgid "Select the calendars to search for meeting conflicts" msgstr "Izberite koledarje za iskanje sporov med srečanji" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/org-gnome-itip-formatter.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Itip Formatter" msgstr "Oblikovalnik Itip" #: ../modules/itip-formatter/plugin/org-gnome-itip-formatter.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Display \"text/calendar\" MIME parts in mail messages." msgstr "Pokaže MIME dele \"besedil/koledar\" v poštnih sporočilih." #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-google-summary.c:252 msgid "Google Features" msgstr "Zmožnosti Google" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-google-summary.c:261 msgid "Add Google Ca_lendar to this account" msgstr "Temu računu dodaj Google ko_ledar" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-google-summary.c:269 msgid "Add Google Con_tacts to this account" msgstr "Temu računu dodaj Google s_tike" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-google-summary.c:277 msgid "You may need to enable IMAP access" msgstr "Morda boste morali omogočiti dostop IMAP" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:246 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:292 msgid "Mail _Directory:" msgstr "_Mapa pošte:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:247 msgid "Choose a MH mail directory" msgstr "Izberite mapo pošte MH" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:269 msgid "Local Delivery _File:" msgstr "_Datoteka krajevne dostave:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:270 msgid "Choose a local delivery file" msgstr "Izberite krajevno datoteko dostave" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:293 msgid "Choose a Maildir mail directory" msgstr "Izberite mapo pošte Maildir" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:315 msgid "Spool _File:" msgstr "Vrstilna _datoteka:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:316 msgid "Choose a mbox spool file" msgstr "Izberite vrstilno datoteko mbox" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:338 msgid "Spool _Directory:" msgstr "Vrstilna _mapa:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-local-accounts.c:339 msgid "Choose a mbox spool directory" msgstr "Izberite vrstilno mapo poštnega nabiralnika" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:137 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:54 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:80 #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:159 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Nastavitve" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:155 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:98 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:24 msgid "_Server:" msgstr "_Strežnik:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:169 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:111 msgid "_Port:" msgstr "_Vrata:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:181 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:227 msgid "User_name:" msgstr "Uporab_niško ime:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:214 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:148 msgid "Encryption _method:" msgstr "_Način šifriranja:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:229 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:163 msgid "STARTTLS after connecting" msgstr "STARTTLS po povezovanju" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-remote-accounts.c:233 #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:167 msgid "SSL on a dedicated port" msgstr "SSL na namenskih vratih" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:70 msgid "_Use custom binary, instead of 'sendmail'" msgstr "_Uporabi binarno datoteko po meri, namesto 'sendmail'" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:74 msgid "_Custom binary:" msgstr "_Binarna datoteka po meri:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:91 msgid "U_se custom arguments" msgstr "Up_orabi argumente po meri" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:95 msgid "Cus_tom arguments:" msgstr "Ar_gumenti po meri:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:113 msgid "" "Default arguments are '-i -f %F -- %R', where\n" " %F - stands for the From address\n" " %R - stands for the recipient addresses" msgstr "" "Privzeti argumenti so '-i -f %F -- %R', kjer je\n" " %F - naslov pošiljatelja\n" " %R - naslove prejemnikov" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-sendmail-backend.c:128 msgid "Send mail also when in offline _mode" msgstr "Pošiljaj sporočila tudi med nepovezanim _načinom" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:123 msgid "Ser_ver requires authentication" msgstr "St_režnik zahteva overitev" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-smtp-backend.c:209 msgid "T_ype:" msgstr "V_rsta:" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-yahoo-summary.c:247 msgid "Yahoo! Features" msgstr "Zmožnosti Yahoo!" #: ../modules/mail-config/e-mail-config-yahoo-summary.c:256 msgid "Add Yahoo! Ca_lendar and Tasks to this account" msgstr "Dodaj ko_ledar in naloge Yahoo! temu računu" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-attachment-handler.c:425 #, c-format msgid "%d attached message" msgid_plural "%d attached messages" msgstr[0] "%d priloženih sporočil" msgstr[1] "%d priloženo sporočilo" msgstr[2] "%d priloženi sporočili" msgstr[3] "%d priložena sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:321 msgctxt "New" msgid "_Mail Message" msgstr "_Poštno sporočilo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:323 msgid "Compose a new mail message" msgstr "Sestavi novo poštno sporočilo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:331 msgctxt "New" msgid "Mail Acco_unt" msgstr "Poštni _račun" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:333 msgid "Create a new mail account" msgstr "Ustvari nov poštni račun" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:338 msgctxt "New" msgid "Mail _Folder" msgstr "Poštna _mapa" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:340 msgid "Create a new mail folder" msgstr "Ustvari novo poštno mapo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:636 msgid "Mail Accounts" msgstr "Poštni računi" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:645 msgid "Mail Preferences" msgstr "Možnosti pošte" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:654 msgid "Composer Preferences" msgstr "Možnosti sestavljalnika" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:663 msgid "Network Preferences" msgstr "Možnosti omrežja" #. Translators: The first item in the list, to be #. * able to set rule: [Label] [is/is-not] [None] #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-backend.c:954 msgctxt "label" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:672 msgid "Marking messages as read..." msgstr "Označevanje prebranih sporočil ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1522 msgid "_Disable Account" msgstr "_Onemogoči račun" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1524 msgid "Disable this account" msgstr "Onemogoči ta račun" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1531 msgid "Permanently remove all the deleted messages from all folders" msgstr "Trajno odstrani vsa izbrisana sporočila iz vseh map" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1538 msgid "Edit properties of this account" msgstr "Uredi lastnosti računa" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1543 msgid "_Refresh" msgstr "_Osveži" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1545 msgid "Refresh list of folders of this account" msgstr "Osveži seznam map tega računa" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1550 msgid "_Download Messages for Offline Usage" msgstr "_Prejmi sporočila za pregledovanje brez povezave" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1552 msgid "Download messages of accounts and folders marked for offline usage" msgstr "Prejmi sporočila računov in map označenih za delo brez povezave" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1557 msgid "Fl_ush Outbox" msgstr "_Odplakni odhodna sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1564 msgid "_Copy Folder To..." msgstr "_Kopiraj mapo v ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1566 msgid "Copy the selected folder into another folder" msgstr "Kopira izbrano mapo v drugo mapo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1573 msgid "Permanently remove this folder" msgstr "Trajno odstrani to mapo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1578 msgid "E_xpunge" msgstr "_Uniči" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1580 msgid "Permanently remove all deleted messages from this folder" msgstr "Trajno odstrani vsa izbrisana sporočila iz te mape" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1585 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1685 msgid "Mar_k All Messages as Read" msgstr "Označi vsa sporočila _kot prebrana" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1587 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1687 msgid "Mark all messages in the folder as read" msgstr "Označi vsa sporočila v mapi kot prebrana" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1592 msgid "_Move Folder To..." msgstr "Premakni _mapo v ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1594 msgid "Move the selected folder into another folder" msgstr "Premakne izbrano mapo v drugo mapo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1599 msgid "_New..." msgstr "_Nova ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1601 msgid "Create a new folder for storing mail" msgstr "Ustvari novo mapo za shranjevanje pošte" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1608 msgid "Change the properties of this folder" msgstr "Spremeni lastnosti te mape" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1615 msgid "Refresh the folder" msgstr "Osveži mapo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1622 msgid "Change the name of this folder" msgstr "Spremeni ime te mape" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1627 msgid "Select Message _Thread" msgstr "Izberi _nit sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1629 msgid "Select all messages in the same thread as the selected message" msgstr "Izberi vsa sporočila iz iste niti kot izbrano sporočilo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1634 msgid "Select Message S_ubthread" msgstr "Izberi pod_nit sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1636 msgid "Select all replies to the currently selected message" msgstr "Izbere vse odgovore na trenutno izbrano sporočilo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1648 msgid "Empty _Trash" msgstr "Izprazni _smeti" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1650 msgid "Permanently remove all the deleted messages from all accounts" msgstr "Trajno odstrani vsa izbrisana sporočila iz vseh računov" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1655 msgid "_New Label" msgstr "_Nova oznaka" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1664 msgid "N_one" msgstr "_Brez" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1678 msgid "_Manage Subscriptions" msgstr "Upravljanje _naročnin" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1680 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1764 msgid "Subscribe or unsubscribe to folders on remote servers" msgstr "Naroči se ali prekliče naročnino na mape z oddaljenih strežnikov" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1692 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1713 msgid "Send / _Receive" msgstr "Pošlji / p_rejmi" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1694 msgid "Send queued items and retrieve new items" msgstr "Pošlje čakajočo pošto in prejme novo" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1699 msgid "R_eceive All" msgstr "P_rejmi vse" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1701 msgid "Receive new items from all accounts" msgstr "Prejemi nove predmete za vse račune" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1706 msgid "_Send All" msgstr "_Pošlji vse" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1708 msgid "Send queued items in all accounts" msgstr "Pošlje čakajoče predmete v vseh računih" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1736 msgid "Cancel the current mail operation" msgstr "Prekliči trenutno opravilo pošte" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1741 msgid "Collapse All _Threads" msgstr "Zloži vse ni_ti" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1743 msgid "Collapse all message threads" msgstr "Zloži niti vseh sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1748 msgid "E_xpand All Threads" msgstr "_Razširi vse niti" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1750 msgid "Expand all message threads" msgstr "Razširi niti vseh sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1755 msgid "_Message Filters" msgstr "Filtri _sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1757 msgid "Create or edit rules for filtering new mail" msgstr "Ustvari ali uredi pravila za filtriranje nove pošte" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1762 msgid "_Subscriptions..." msgstr "_Naročnine ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1771 msgid "F_older" msgstr "_Mapa" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1778 msgid "_Label" msgstr "_Oznaka" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1795 msgid "C_reate Search Folder From Search..." msgstr "Ustva_ri iskalno mapo iz iskanja ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1802 msgid "Search F_olders" msgstr "Iskalne _mape" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1804 msgid "Create or edit search folder definitions" msgstr "Ustvari ali uredi določila iskalnih map" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1843 msgid "_New Folder..." msgstr "_Nova mapa ..." #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1871 msgid "Show Message _Preview" msgstr "Pokaži _predogled sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1873 msgid "Show message preview pane" msgstr "Pokaži pladenj predogleda sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1879 msgid "Show _Deleted Messages" msgstr "Pokaži _izbrisana sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1881 msgid "Show deleted messages with a line through them" msgstr "Pokaži izbrisana sporočila (prečrtana) na seznamu sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1887 msgid "_Group By Threads" msgstr "_Združi po nitih" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1889 msgid "Threaded message list" msgstr "Niten seznam sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1895 msgid "_Unmatched Folder Enabled" msgstr "_Neusklajena mapa je omogočena" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1897 msgid "Toggles whether Unmatched search folder is enabled" msgstr "Preklaplja omogočitev neusklajene iskalne mape" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1917 msgid "Show message preview below the message list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled sporočil pod seznamom sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1924 msgid "Show message preview alongside the message list" msgstr "Pokaži predogled sporočil ob seznamu sporočil" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1932 msgid "All Messages" msgstr "Vsa sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1939 msgid "Important Messages" msgstr "Pomembna sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1946 msgid "Last 5 Days' Messages" msgstr "Sporočila zadnjih 5 dni" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1953 msgid "Messages Not Junk" msgstr "Sporočila, ki niso neželena" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1960 msgid "Messages with Attachments" msgstr "Sporočila s prilogami" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1967 msgid "No Label" msgstr "Brez oznake" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1974 msgid "Read Messages" msgstr "Prebrana sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:1981 msgid "Unread Messages" msgstr "Neprebrana sporočila" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2033 msgid "Subject or Addresses contain" msgstr "Zadeva ali pošiljatelj vsebuje" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2043 msgid "All Accounts" msgstr "Vsi računi" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2050 msgid "Current Account" msgstr "Trenutni račun" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-actions.c:2057 msgid "Current Folder" msgstr "Trenutna mapa" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view.c:638 msgid "All Account Search" msgstr "Iskanje po vseh računih" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view.c:746 msgid "Account Search" msgstr "Iskanje računa" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:973 #, c-format msgid "%d selected, " msgid_plural "%d selected, " msgstr[0] "%d izbranih, " msgstr[1] "%d izbrano, " msgstr[2] "%d izbrani, " msgstr[3] "%d izbrana, " #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:982 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:999 #, c-format msgid "%d deleted" msgid_plural "%d deleted" msgstr[0] "%d izbrisanih" msgstr[1] "%d izbrisano" msgstr[2] "%d izbrisani" msgstr[3] "%d izbrisana" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1008 #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1014 #, c-format msgid "%d junk" msgid_plural "%d junk" msgstr[0] "%d neželenih" msgstr[1] "%d neželeno" msgstr[2] "%d neželeni" msgstr[3] "%d neželena" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1021 #, c-format msgid "%d draft" msgid_plural "%d drafts" msgstr[0] "%d osnutkov" msgstr[1] "%d osnutek" msgstr[2] "%d osnutka" msgstr[3] "%d osnutki" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1027 #, c-format msgid "%d unsent" msgid_plural "%d unsent" msgstr[0] "%d neposlanih" msgstr[1] "%d neposlano" msgstr[2] "%d neposlani" msgstr[3] "%d neposlana" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1033 #, c-format msgid "%d sent" msgid_plural "%d sent" msgstr[0] "%d poslanih" msgstr[1] "%d poslano" msgstr[2] "%d poslani" msgstr[3] "%d poslana" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1045 #, c-format msgid "%d unread, " msgid_plural "%d unread, " msgstr[0] "%d neprebranih, " msgstr[1] "%d neprebrano, " msgstr[2] "%d neprebrani, " msgstr[3] "%d neprebrana, " #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1048 #, c-format msgid "%d total" msgid_plural "%d total" msgstr[0] "skupaj: %d" msgstr[1] "skupaj: %d" msgstr[2] "skupaj: %d" msgstr[3] "skupaj: %d" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1069 msgid "Trash" msgstr "Smeti" #: ../modules/mail/e-mail-shell-view-private.c:1507 msgid "Send / Receive" msgstr "Oddaja / sprejem" #: ../modules/mail/em-composer-prefs.c:447 msgid "Language(s)" msgstr "Jezik(i)" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:81 msgid "On exit, every time" msgstr "Ob izhodu, vsakič" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:82 msgid "On exit, once per day" msgstr "Ob izhodu, enkrat dnevno" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:83 msgid "On exit, once per week" msgstr "Ob izhodu, enkrat tedensko" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:84 msgid "On exit, once per month" msgstr "Ob izhodu, enkrat mesečno" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:85 msgid "Immediately, on folder leave" msgstr "Takoj, ob zapustitvi mape" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:356 msgid "Header" msgstr "Glava" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:360 msgid "Contains Value" msgstr "Vsebuje vrednost" #. To Translators: 'Date header' is a label for configurable date/time format for 'Date' header in mail message window/preview #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:1215 msgid "_Date header:" msgstr "_Glava datuma:" #: ../modules/mail/em-mailer-prefs.c:1216 msgid "Show _original header value" msgstr "Pokaži _izvirno vrednost glave" #: ../modules/mailto-handler/evolution-mailto-handler.c:142 msgid "Do you want to make Evolution your default email client?" msgstr "Ali želite, da Evolution postane vaš privzeti poštni odjemalec?" #. Translators: First %s is an email address, second %s #. * is the subject of the email, third %s is the date. #: ../modules/mdn/evolution-mdn.c:311 #, c-format msgid "Your message to %s about \"%s\" on %s has been read." msgstr "Sporočilo za %s z zadevo \"%s\" poslano dne %s je prebrano." #. Translators: %s is the subject of the email message. #: ../modules/mdn/evolution-mdn.c:378 #, c-format msgid "Delivery Notification for \"%s\"" msgstr "Obvestilo o prejemu za \"%s\"" #: ../modules/mdn/evolution-mdn.c:543 #, c-format msgid "Send a read receipt to '%s'" msgstr "Pošlji povratnico za '%s'" #. name doesn't matter #: ../modules/mdn/evolution-mdn.c:548 msgid "_Notify Sender" msgstr "_Pošlji povratnico" #: ../modules/mdn/evolution-mdn.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Sender wants to be notified when you have read this message." msgstr "Pošiljatelj želi biti obveščen, ko bo to sporočilo prebrano." #: ../modules/mdn/evolution-mdn.error.xml.h:2 msgid "Sender has been notified that you have read this message." msgstr "Pošiljatelj je bil obveščen, da je bilo to sporočilo prebrano." #: ../modules/offline-alert/evolution-offline-alert.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Evolution is currently offline." msgstr "Evolution trenutno ni povezan." #: ../modules/offline-alert/evolution-offline-alert.error.xml.h:2 msgid "Click 'Work Online' to return to online mode." msgstr "Kliknite 'Delo s povezavo' za vrnitev v povezan način." #: ../modules/offline-alert/evolution-offline-alert.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Evolution is currently offline due to a network outage." msgstr "" "Program Evolution trenutno ni povezan, ker omrežna povezava ni na voljo." #: ../modules/offline-alert/evolution-offline-alert.error.xml.h:4 msgid "" "Evolution will return to online mode once a network connection is " "established." msgstr "" "Program Evolution se bo v povezan način vrnil, ko bo vzpostavljena omrežna " "povezava." #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:68 msgid "Author(s)" msgstr "Avtor(ji)" #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:254 msgid "Plugin Manager" msgstr "Upravljalnik vstavkov" #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:269 msgid "Note: Some changes will not take effect until restart" msgstr "" "Opozorilo: nekatere spremembe ne bodo uveljavljene do ponovnega zagona" #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:298 msgid "Overview" msgstr "Pregled" #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:367 #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:450 msgid "Plugin" msgstr "Vstavek" #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:488 msgid "_Plugins" msgstr "_Vstavki" #: ../modules/plugin-manager/evolution-plugin-manager.c:489 msgid "Enable and disable plugins" msgstr "Omogoči ali onemogoči vstavke" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-display-popup-prefer-plain.c:140 msgid "Display plain text version" msgstr "Prikaži različico običajnega besedila" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-display-popup-prefer-plain.c:142 msgid "Display plain text version of multipart/alternative message" msgstr "Prikaži različico besedila večdelnega/nadomestnega sporočila" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-display-popup-prefer-plain.c:148 msgid "Display HTML version" msgstr "Prikaži različico HTML" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-display-popup-prefer-plain.c:150 msgid "Display HTML version of multipart/alternative message" msgstr "Prikaži različico HTML večdelnega/nadomestnega sporočila" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:78 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:44 msgid "Show HTML if present" msgstr "Pokaži HTML, če je na voljo" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:79 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:45 msgid "Let Evolution choose the best part to show." msgstr "Naj program sam izbere najboljši del za prikaz." #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:82 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:48 msgid "Show plain text if present" msgstr "Pokaži le običajno besedilo, če je prisotno" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:83 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:49 msgid "" "Show plain text part, if present, otherwise let Evolution choose the best " "part to show." msgstr "" "Pokaži le običajno besedilo, v nasprotnem primeru pa naj program Evolution " "izbere najboljši način prikaza." #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:87 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:53 msgid "Only ever show plain text" msgstr "Pokaži le običajno besedilo" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/e-mail-parser-prefer-plain.c:88 #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:54 msgid "" "Always show plain text part and make attachments from other parts, if " "requested." msgstr "" "Vedno pokaži le običajno besedilo, oblikovano besedilo pa naj se oblikuje v " "priloge." #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:105 msgid "Show s_uppressed HTML parts as attachments" msgstr "Pokaži zadržane HTML dele sporočila kot _priloge" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/config-ui.c:127 msgid "HTML _Mode" msgstr "Način _HTML" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/org-gnome-prefer-plain.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Prefer Plain Text" msgstr "Prednostno uporabi običajno besedilo" #. but then we also need to create our own section frame #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/org-gnome-prefer-plain.eplug.xml.h:3 msgid "Plain Text Mode" msgstr "Način običajnega besedila" #: ../modules/prefer-plain/plugin/org-gnome-prefer-plain.eplug.xml.h:4 msgid "View mail messages as plain text, even if they contain HTML content." msgstr "" "Ogled sporočil kot običajno besedilo, tudi če vsebujejo vsebino HTML." #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:151 #, c-format msgid "Failed to spawn SpamAssassin (%s): " msgstr "Oživitev vstavka SpamAssassin je spodletela (%s): " #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:174 msgid "Failed to stream mail message content to SpamAssassin: " msgstr "" "Pretakanje vsebine elektronskega sporočila na SpamAssassin je spodletelo:. " #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:193 #, c-format msgid "Failed to write '%s' to SpamAssassin: " msgstr "Ni mogoče zapisati '%s' za SpamAssassin: " #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:221 msgid "Failed to read output from SpamAssassin: " msgstr "Branje odvoda vstavka SpamAssassin je spodletelo: " #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:276 msgid "SpamAssassin either crashed or failed to process a mail message" msgstr "" "SpamAssassin se je ali sesul ali pa ni obdelal elektronskega sporočila" #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:356 msgid "SpamAssassin Options" msgstr "Možnosti SpamAssassin" #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:371 msgid "I_nclude remote tests" msgstr "Vključi oddalje_ne preskuse" #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:385 msgid "This will make SpamAssassin more reliable, but slower." msgstr "" "S tem bo postalo delovanje vstavka SpamAssasin bolj zanesljivo, vendar " "počasnejše" #: ../modules/spamassassin/evolution-spamassassin.c:559 msgid "SpamAssassin" msgstr "SpamAssassin" #. Keep the title identical to EMailConfigImportPage #. * so it's only shown once in the assistant sidebar. #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-mail-config-import-page.c:262 #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-mail-config-import-progress-page.c:342 msgid "Importing Files" msgstr "Uvažanje datotek" #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-mail-config-import-progress-page.c:261 msgid "Import cancelled." msgstr "Uvoz je bil preklican." #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-mail-config-import-progress-page.c:278 msgid "Import complete." msgstr "Uvoz je končan." #: ../modules/startup-wizard/e-startup-assistant.c:156 msgid "" "Welcome to Evolution.\n" "\n" "The next few screens will allow Evolution to connect to your email accounts, " "and to import files from other applications." msgstr "" "Dobrodošli v Evolution.\n" "\n" "Naslednjih nekaj zaslonov bo omogočilo programu Evolution, da se poveže z " "vašimi računi e-pošte in da uvozi datoteke iz drugih programov." #: ../modules/startup-wizard/evolution-startup-wizard.c:229 msgid "Loading accounts..." msgstr "Nalaganje računov ..." #: ../modules/text-highlight/e-mail-display-popup-text-highlight.c:95 msgid "_Format as..." msgstr "_Oblikuj kot ..." #: ../modules/text-highlight/e-mail-display-popup-text-highlight.c:103 msgid "_Other languages" msgstr "_Drugi jeziki" #: ../modules/text-highlight/e-mail-formatter-text-highlight.c:337 msgid "Text Highlight" msgstr "Poudarjanje besedila" #: ../modules/text-highlight/e-mail-formatter-text-highlight.c:338 msgid "Syntax highlighting of mail parts" msgstr "Poudarjanje besedila skladnje delov pošte" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:32 msgid "_Plain text" msgstr "_Običajno besedilo" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:38 msgid "_Assembler" msgstr "_Zbirnik" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:43 msgid "_Bash" msgstr "_Bash" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:54 msgid "_C/C++" msgstr "_C/C++" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:63 msgid "_C#" msgstr "_C#" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:68 msgid "_Cascade Style Sheet" msgstr "_Caskadna slogovna predloga" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:73 msgid "_HTML" msgstr "_HTML" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:81 msgid "_Java" msgstr "_Java" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:87 msgid "_JavaScript" msgstr "_JavaScript" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:93 msgid "_Patch/diff" msgstr "_Patch/diff" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:99 msgid "_Perl" msgstr "_Perl" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:110 msgid "_PHP" msgstr "_PHP" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:123 msgid "_Python" msgstr "_Python" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:128 msgid "_Ruby" msgstr "_Ruby" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:135 msgid "_Tcl/Tk" msgstr "_Tcl/Tk" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:141 msgid "_TeX/LaTeX" msgstr "_TeX/LaTeX" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:147 msgid "_Vala" msgstr "_Vala" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:152 msgid "_Visual Basic" msgstr "_Visual Basic" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:159 msgid "_XML" msgstr "_XML" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:177 msgid "_ActionScript" msgstr "_ActionScript" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:182 msgid "_ADA95" msgstr "_ADA95" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:189 msgid "_ALGOL 68" msgstr "_ALGOL 68" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:194 msgid "(_G)AWK" msgstr "(_G)AWK" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:199 msgid "_COBOL" msgstr "_COBOL" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:204 msgid "_DOS Batch" msgstr "_DOS paketno" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:209 msgid "_D" msgstr "_D" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:214 msgid "_Erlang" msgstr "_Erlang" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:219 msgid "_FORTRAN 77" msgstr "_FORTRAN 77" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:225 msgid "_FORTRAN 90" msgstr "_FORTRAN 90" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:230 msgid "_F#" msgstr "_F#" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:235 msgid "_Go" msgstr "_Go" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:240 msgid "_Haskell" msgstr "_Haskell" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:245 msgid "_JSP" msgstr "_JSP" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:250 msgid "_Lisp" msgstr "_Lisp" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:258 msgid "_Lotus" msgstr "_Lotus" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:263 msgid "_Lua" msgstr "_Lua" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:268 msgid "_Maple" msgstr "_Maple" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:273 msgid "_Matlab" msgstr "_Matlab" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:278 msgid "_Maya" msgstr "_Maya" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:283 msgid "_Oberon" msgstr "_Oberon" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:288 msgid "_Objective C" msgstr "_Objective C" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:294 msgid "_OCaml" msgstr "_OCaml" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:299 msgid "_Octave" msgstr "_Octave" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:304 msgid "_Object Script" msgstr "_Object Script" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:309 msgid "_Pascal" msgstr "_Pascal" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:314 msgid "_POV-Ray" msgstr "_POV-Ray" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:319 msgid "_Prolog" msgstr "_Prolog" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:324 msgid "_PostScript" msgstr "_PostScript" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:329 msgid "_R" msgstr "_R" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:334 msgid "_RPM Spec" msgstr "_RPM Spec" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:339 msgid "_Scala" msgstr "_Scala" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:344 msgid "_Smalltalk" msgstr "_Smalltalk" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:350 msgid "_TCSH" msgstr "_TCSH" #: ../modules/text-highlight/languages.c:355 msgid "_VHDL" msgstr "_VHDL" #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:129 #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-part-vcard.c:152 msgid "Show F_ull vCard" msgstr "Pokaži _poln vCard" #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:132 #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-part-vcard.c:170 msgid "Show Com_pact vCard" msgstr "Pokaži _strjen vCard" #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:157 msgid "Save _To Addressbook" msgstr "Shrani _v imenik" #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:178 msgid "There is one other contact." msgstr "Obstaja en drug stik." #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:184 #, c-format msgid "There is %d other contact." msgid_plural "There are %d other contacts." msgstr[0] "Obstaja še %d drugih stikov." msgstr[1] "Obstaja še %d drug stik." msgstr[2] "Obstajata še %d druga stika." msgstr[3] "Obstajajo še %d drugi stiki." #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:209 msgid "Addressbook Contact" msgstr "Stik imenika" #: ../modules/vcard-inline/e-mail-formatter-vcard.c:210 msgid "Display the part as an addressbook contact" msgstr "Prikaži del kot stik imenika" #: ../modules/web-inspector/evolution-web-inspector.c:96 msgid "Evolution Web Inspector" msgstr "Evolution nadzornik spleta" #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/attachment-reminder.c:121 msgid "_Do not show this message again." msgstr "Tega sporočila _ne prikaži več." #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/attachment-reminder.c:583 #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:480 msgid "Keywords" msgstr "Ključne besede" #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-attachment-reminder.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Message has no attachments" msgstr "Sporočilo nima priloge" #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-attachment-reminder.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "Evolution has found some keywords that suggest that this message should " "contain an attachment, but cannot find one." msgstr "" "Program Evolution je našel nekaj ključnih besed, ki namigujejo, da bi " "sporočilo moralo vsebovati priloge, vendar jih ne najde." #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-attachment-reminder.error.xml.h:3 msgid "_Add Attachment..." msgstr "Dodaj _prilogo ..." #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-attachment-reminder.error.xml.h:4 msgid "_Edit Message" msgstr "Ur_edi sporočilo" #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-evolution-attachment-reminder.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Attachment Reminder" msgstr "Opomnik prilog" #: ../plugins/attachment-reminder/org-gnome-evolution-attachment-reminder.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Reminds you when you forgot to add an attachment to a mail message." msgstr "Opomnik v primeru da pozabite dodati prilogo poštnemu sporočilu." #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:635 ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:644 #: ../plugins/bbdb/org-gnome-evolution-bbdb.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Automatic Contacts" msgstr "Samodejni stiki" #. Enable BBDB checkbox #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:659 msgid "Create _address book entries when sending mails" msgstr "_Ustvari vnose v imeniku pri odgovarjanju na sporočila" #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:666 msgid "Select Address book for Automatic Contacts" msgstr "Izberite imenik za samodejne stike" #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:683 msgid "Instant Messaging Contacts" msgstr "Stiki hipnega sporočanja" #. Enable Gaim Checkbox #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:698 msgid "_Synchronize contact info and images from Pidgin buddy list" msgstr "_Uskladi podatke in slike stikov s seznama stikov programa Pidgin" #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:705 msgid "Select Address book for Pidgin buddy list" msgstr "Izberite imenik za seznam stikov Pidgin" #. Synchronize now button. #: ../plugins/bbdb/bbdb.c:718 msgid "Synchronize with _buddy list now" msgstr "Uskladi s _seznamom prijateljev" #: ../plugins/bbdb/org-gnome-evolution-bbdb.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "BBDB" msgstr "BBDB" #: ../plugins/bbdb/org-gnome-evolution-bbdb.eplug.xml.h:3 msgid "" "Takes the gruntwork out of managing your address book.\n" "\n" "Automatically fills your address book with names and email addresses as you " "reply to messages. Also fills in IM contact information from your buddy " "lists." msgstr "" "Prevzame dolgočasni del upravljanja imenika.\n" "\n" "Samodejno doda imena in naslove elektronske pošte v imenik, ko odgovarjate " "na sporočila. Prav tako doda stike iz seznama prijateljev odjemalca za hipno " "sporočanje." #: ../plugins/dbx-import/dbx-importer.c:282 msgid "Importing Outlook Express data" msgstr "Uvažanje podatkov Outlook Express" #: ../plugins/dbx-import/org-gnome-dbx-import.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Outlook DBX import" msgstr "Uvoz Outlook PST" #: ../plugins/dbx-import/org-gnome-dbx-import.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Outlook Express 5/6 personal folders (.dbx)" msgstr "Osebne mape Outlook Express 5/6 (.dbx)" #: ../plugins/dbx-import/org-gnome-dbx-import.eplug.xml.h:3 msgid "Import Outlook Express messages from DBX file" msgstr "Uvažanje Outlook Express sporočil iz datoteke DBX" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:291 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Security:" msgstr "Varnost:" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:295 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Personal" msgstr "Osebno" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:296 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Unclassified" msgstr "Nerazvrščeno" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:297 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Protected" msgstr "Zaščiteno" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:298 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Confidential" msgstr "Zaupno" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:299 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Secret" msgstr "Srkivnost" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:300 msgctxt "email-custom-header-Security" msgid "Top secret" msgstr "Stroga skrivnost" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:360 msgctxt "email-custom-header" msgid "None" msgstr "Brez" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:536 msgid "_Custom Header" msgstr "_Glava sporočila po meri" #. To translators: This string is used while adding a new message header to configuration, to specifying the format of the key values #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:806 msgid "" "The format for specifying a Custom Header key value is:\n" "Name of the Custom Header key values separated by \";\"." msgstr "" "Oblika za navajanje glave po meri je:\n" "Ime vrednosti glave po meri ločenih z znakom \";\"." #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:859 msgid "Key" msgstr "Ključ" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/email-custom-header.c:876 #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:489 msgid "Values" msgstr "Vrednosti" #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/org-gnome-email-custom-header.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Custom Header" msgstr "Glava sporočila po meri" #. For Translators: 'custom header' string is used while adding a new message header to outgoing message, to specify what value for the message header would be added #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/org-gnome-email-custom-header.eplug.xml.h:3 msgid "Add custom headers to outgoing mail messages." msgstr "Dodaj glavo po meri za odhajajoča poštna sporočila." #: ../plugins/email-custom-header/org-gnome-email-custom-header.ui.h:1 msgid "Email Custom Header" msgstr "Glava elektronske pošte po meri" #: ../plugins/external-editor/external-editor.c:112 msgid "Command to be executed to launch the editor: " msgstr "Ukaz za zagon urejevalnika: " #: ../plugins/external-editor/external-editor.c:113 msgid "" "For XEmacs use \"xemacs\"\n" "For Vim use \"gvim -f\"" msgstr "" "Za XEmacs uporabite \"xemacs\"\n" "Za Vim uporabite \"gvim -f\"" #: ../plugins/external-editor/external-editor.c:123 msgid "_Automatically launch when a new mail is edited" msgstr "_Zaženi samodejno, ko se ureja novo sporočilo" #: ../plugins/external-editor/external-editor.c:413 #: ../plugins/external-editor/external-editor.c:415 msgid "Compose in External Editor" msgstr "Sestavi v zunanjem urejevalniku" #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "External Editor" msgstr "Zunanji urejevalnik" #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Use an external editor to compose plain-text mail messages." msgstr "" "Uporabi zunanji urejevalnik besedila za sestavljanje neoblikovanih " "besedilnih sporočil." #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Editor not launchable" msgstr "Urejevalnika ni mogoče zagnati" #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "The external editor set in your plugin preferences cannot be launched. Try " "setting a different editor." msgstr "" "Zunanjega urejevalnika, nastavljenega med možnostmi vstavka, ni mogoče " "zagnati. Poskusite nastaviti drug urejevalnik." #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Cannot create Temporary File" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti začasne datoteke" #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.error.xml.h:4 msgid "" "Evolution is unable to create a temporary file to save your mail. Retry " "later." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče ustvariti začasne datoteke za shranjevanje vaše pošte. Poskusite " "kasneje." #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.error.xml.h:5 msgid "External editor still running" msgstr "Zunanji urejevalnik je še vedno zagnan" #: ../plugins/external-editor/org-gnome-external-editor.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "The external editor is still running. The mail composer window cannot be " "closed as long as the editor is active." msgstr "" "Zunanji urejevalnik je še vedno zagnan. Okno sestavljalnika pošte ne more " "biti zaprto dokler je urejevalnik dejaven." #: ../plugins/face/face.c:171 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:322 msgid "Unknown error" msgstr "Neznana napaka" #: ../plugins/face/face.c:289 msgid "Select a Face Picture" msgstr "Izberi sličico obraza" #: ../plugins/face/face.c:299 msgid "Image files" msgstr "Slikovne datoteke" #: ../plugins/face/face.c:358 msgid "_Insert Face picture by default" msgstr "Privzeto _vstavi sličico obraza" #: ../plugins/face/face.c:371 msgid "Load new _Face picture" msgstr "Naloži novo _sličico obraza" #: ../plugins/face/face.c:432 msgid "Include _Face" msgstr "Vstavi _sličico obraza" #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Attach a small picture of your face to outgoing messages." msgstr "Pripenjanje majhne sličice vašega obraza k odhajajočim sporočilom." #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Failed Read" msgstr "Napaka med branjem" #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.error.xml.h:2 msgid "The file cannot be read" msgstr "Datoteke ni mogoče prebrati" #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Invalid Image Size" msgstr "Neveljavna velikost slike" #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.error.xml.h:4 msgid "Please select an image of size 48 * 48" msgstr "Izberite sliko velikosti 48*48 točk" #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Not an image" msgstr "Ni slika" #: ../plugins/face/org-gnome-face.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "The file you selected does not look like a valid .png image. Error: {0}" msgstr "Izbrana datoteka ni veljavna slika .png. Napaka: {0}" #: ../plugins/image-inline/org-gnome-image-inline.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Inline Image" msgstr "Slika znotraj sporočila" #: ../plugins/image-inline/org-gnome-image-inline.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "View image attachments directly in mail messages." msgstr "Pregled slikovnih prilog neposredno v poštnih sporočilih." #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:368 msgid "Get List _Archive" msgstr "Pridobi _arhiv seznama" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:370 msgid "Get an archive of the list this message belongs to" msgstr "Pridobi arhiv seznama, ki mu pripada to sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:375 msgid "Get List _Usage Information" msgstr "Pridobi podatke o _uporabi seznama" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:377 msgid "Get information about the usage of the list this message belongs to" msgstr "Pridobi podatke o uporabi seznama, ki mu pripada to sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:382 msgid "Contact List _Owner" msgstr "Stopi v stik z _lastnikom seznama" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:384 msgid "Contact the owner of the mailing list this message belongs to" msgstr "" "Stop v stik z lastnikom dopisnega seznama, ki mu pripada to sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:389 msgid "_Post Message to List" msgstr "_Objavi sporočilo na seznam" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:391 msgid "Post a message to the mailing list this message belongs to" msgstr "Objavi sporočilo na dopisni seznam, ki mu pripada to sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:396 msgid "_Subscribe to List" msgstr "_Naroči se na seznam" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:398 msgid "Subscribe to the mailing list this message belongs to" msgstr "Naroči se na dopisni seznam, ki mu pripada to sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:403 msgid "_Unsubscribe from List" msgstr "_Prekliči naročnino na seznam" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:405 msgid "Unsubscribe from the mailing list this message belongs to" msgstr "Prekliče naročnino na dopisni seznam, ki mu pripada to sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/mailing-list-actions.c:412 msgid "Mailing _List" msgstr "Dopisni _seznam" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Mailing List Actions" msgstr "Dejanja dopisnega seznama" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Perform common mailing list actions (subscribe, unsubscribe, etc.)." msgstr "" "Omogoča dejanja za pogoste ukaze dopisnih seznamov (naroči se, prekliči " "naročnino, ...)." #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:1 msgid "Action not available" msgstr "Dejanje ni na voljo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:2 msgid "" "This message does not contain the header information required for this " "action." msgstr "" "To sporočilo ne vsebuje podatkov o glavi, ki so zahtevani za to dejanje." #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:3 msgid "Posting not allowed" msgstr "Objavljanje ni dovoljeno" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:4 msgid "" "Posting to this mailing list is not allowed. Possibly, this is a read-only " "mailing list. Contact the list owner for details." msgstr "" "Objavljanje na ta dopisni seznam ni dovoljeno. Morda je dopisni seznam le za " "branje. Za podrobnosti se obrnite na lastnika dopisnega seznama." #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:5 msgid "Send e-mail message to mailing list?" msgstr "Ali naj bo sporočilo elektronske pošte poslano na dopisni seznam?" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:6 msgid "" "An e-mail message will be sent to the URL \"{0}\". You can either send the " "message automatically, or see and change it first.\n" "\n" "You should receive an answer from the mailing list shortly after the message " "has been sent." msgstr "" "E-poštno sporočilo bo poslano na URL \"{0}\". Sporočilo lahko pošljete " "samodejno ali pa si ga najprej pregledate in spremenite.\n" "\n" "Odgovor dopisnega seznama bi morali prejeti kmalu zatem ko pošljete " "sporočilo." #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:9 msgid "_Send message" msgstr "Pošlji _sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:10 msgid "_Edit message" msgstr "Ur_edi sporočilo" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:11 msgid "Malformed header" msgstr "Nepravilno oblikovana glava" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:12 msgid "" "The {0} header of this message is malformed and could not be processed.\n" "\n" "Header: {1}" msgstr "" "Glava tega sporočila {0} je nepravilna in je ni mogoče obdelati.\n" "\n" "Glava: {1}" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:15 msgid "No e-mail action" msgstr "Brez dejanja elektronske pošte" #: ../plugins/mailing-list-actions/org-gnome-mailing-list-actions.error.xml.h:16 msgid "" "The action could not be performed. The header for this action did not " "contain any action that could be processed.\n" "\n" "Header: {0}" msgstr "" "Dejanja ni bilo mogoče izvesti. Glava tega dejanja ni vsebovala nobenega " "dejanja, ki bi ga bilo mogoče izvesti.\n" "\n" "Glava: {0}" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:384 #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:420 #, c-format msgid "You have received %d new message." msgid_plural "You have received %d new messages." msgstr[0] "Prejeli ste %d novih sporočil." msgstr[1] "Prejeli ste %d novo sporočilo." msgstr[2] "Prejeli ste %d novi sporočili." msgstr[3] "Prejeli ste %d nova sporočila." #. Translators: "From:" is preceding a new mail #. * sender address, like "From: user@example.com" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:395 #, c-format msgid "From: %s" msgstr "Od: %s" #. Translators: "Subject:" is preceding a new mail #. * subject, like "Subject: It happened again" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:409 #, c-format msgid "Subject: %s" msgstr "Zadeva: %s" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:426 msgid "New email in Evolution" msgstr "Nova pošta v Evolutionu" #. Translators: The '%s' is a mail #. * folder name. (e.g. "Show Inbox") #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:461 #, c-format msgid "Show %s" msgstr "Pokaži %s" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:663 msgid "_Play sound when a new message arrives" msgstr "Ob prejemu novih sporočil _predvajaj zvok." #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:695 msgid "_Beep" msgstr "_Pisk" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:708 msgid "Use sound _theme" msgstr "Uporabi _zvočno temo" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:727 msgid "Play _file:" msgstr "Predvajaj _datoteko:" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:736 msgid "Select sound file" msgstr "Izbor zvočne datoteke" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:792 msgid "Notify new messages for _Inbox only" msgstr "Pokaži obvestilo le za nova sporočila v mapi _prihajajočih sporočil" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/mail-notification.c:802 msgid "Show _notification when a new message arrives" msgstr "Ob prejemu novih sporočil pokaži obvestilo" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/org-gnome-mail-notification.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Mail Notification" msgstr "Obvestilo o novi pošti" #: ../plugins/mail-notification/org-gnome-mail-notification.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Notifies you when new mail messages arrive." msgstr "Ob prejemu novega sporočila se prikaže obvestilo." #. To Translators: The full sentence looks like: "Created from a mail by John Doe " #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:232 #, c-format msgid "Created from a mail by %s" msgstr "Ustvarjeno iz pošte z %s" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:616 #, c-format msgid "" "Selected calendar contains event '%s' already. Would you like to edit the " "old event?" msgstr "" "Izbran koledar že vsebuje dogodek '%s'. Ali želite urejati stari dogodek?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:619 #, c-format msgid "" "Selected task list contains task '%s' already. Would you like to edit the " "old task?" msgstr "" "Izbran seznam nalog že vsebuje nalogo '%s'. Ali želite urediti staro nalogo?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:622 #, c-format msgid "" "Selected memo list contains memo '%s' already. Would you like to edit the " "old memo?" msgstr "" "Izbran koledar že vsebuje opomnik '%s'. Ali želite urejati star opomnik?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:642 #, c-format msgid "" "You have selected %d mails to be converted to events. Do you really want to " "add them all?" msgid_plural "" "You have selected %d mails to be converted to events. Do you really want to " "add them all?" msgstr[0] "" "Izbranih je %d elektronskih sporočil za pretvarjanje v dogodke koledarja. " "Ali zares želite pretvoriti vse?" msgstr[1] "" "Izbrano je %d elektronsko sporočilo za pretvarjanje v dogodke koledarja. Ali " "zares želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[2] "" "Izbrani sta %d elektronski sporočili za pretvarjanje v dogodke koledarja. " "Ali zares želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[3] "" "Izbrana so %d elektronska sporočila za pretvarjanje v dogodke koledarja. Ali " "zares želite nadaljevati?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:649 #, c-format msgid "" "You have selected %d mails to be converted to tasks. Do you really want to " "add them all?" msgid_plural "" "You have selected %d mails to be converted to tasks. Do you really want to " "add them all?" msgstr[0] "" "Izbranih je %d elektronskih sporočil za pretvarjanje v naloge. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[1] "" "Izbrano je %d elektronsko sporočilo za pretvarjanje v nalogo. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[2] "" "Izbrani sta %d elektronski sporočili za pretvarjanje v naloge. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[3] "" "Izbrana so %d elektronska sporočila za pretvarjanje v naloge. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:656 #, c-format msgid "" "You have selected %d mails to be converted to memos. Do you really want to " "add them all?" msgid_plural "" "You have selected %d mails to be converted to memos. Do you really want to " "add them all?" msgstr[0] "" "Izbranih je %d elektronskih sporočil za pretvarjanje v opomnike. Ali zares " "želite pretvoriti vse?" msgstr[1] "" "Izbrano je %d elektronsko sporočilo za pretvarjanje v opomnik. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[2] "" "Izbrani sta %d elektronski sporočili za pretvarjanje v opomnike. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" msgstr[3] "" "Izbrana so %d elektronska sporočila za pretvarjanje v opomnike. Ali zares " "želite nadaljevati?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:677 msgid "Do you wish to continue converting remaining mails?" msgstr "" "Ali želite nadaljevati s pretvarjanjem preostalih elektronskih sporočil?" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:753 msgid "[No Summary]" msgstr "[Brez povzetka]" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:766 msgid "Invalid object returned from a server" msgstr "Strežnik je vrnil neveljaven predmet" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:821 #, c-format msgid "An error occurred during processing: %s" msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med obdelavo: %s" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:855 #, c-format msgid "Cannot open calendar. %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti koledarja. %s" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:862 msgid "" "Selected calendar is read only, thus cannot create event there. Select other " "calendar, please." msgstr "" "Izbrani koledar se lahko samo bere, zato ni možno vpisati dogodka. Prosimo, " "izberite drug koledar." #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:865 msgid "" "Selected task list is read only, thus cannot create task there. Select other " "task list, please." msgstr "" "Izbran seznam nalog se lahko samo bere, zato ni možno vpisati naloge. " "Prosimo izberite drug seznam nalog." #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:868 msgid "" "Selected memo list is read only, thus cannot create memo there. Select other " "memo list, please." msgstr "" "Izbran seznam opomnikov se lahko samo bere, zato ni možno vpisati opomnika. " "Prosimo, izberite drug seznam opomnikov." #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1203 msgid "No writable calendar is available." msgstr "Na voljo ni nobenega zapisljivega koledarja" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1280 msgid "Create an _Appointment" msgstr "Ustvari _sestanek" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1282 msgid "Create a new event from the selected message" msgstr "Ustvari nov dogodek iz izbranega sporočila" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1287 msgid "Create a Mem_o" msgstr "Ustvari _opomnik" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1289 msgid "Create a new memo from the selected message" msgstr "Ustvari nov opomnik iz izbranega sporočila" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1294 msgid "Create a _Task" msgstr "Ustvari _nalogo" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1296 msgid "Create a new task from the selected message" msgstr "Ustvari novo nalogo iz izbranega sporočila" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1304 msgid "Create a _Meeting" msgstr "Ustvari _srečanje" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/mail-to-task.c:1306 msgid "Create a new meeting from the selected message" msgstr "Ustvari novo srečanje iz izbranega sporočila" #: ../plugins/mail-to-task/org-gnome-mail-to-task.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Convert a mail message to a task." msgstr "Pretvori sporočilo v novo nalogo." #: ../plugins/pst-import/org-gnome-pst-import.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Outlook PST import" msgstr "Uvoz Outlook PST" #: ../plugins/pst-import/org-gnome-pst-import.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Outlook personal folders (.pst)" msgstr "Outlook osebne mape (.pst)" #: ../plugins/pst-import/org-gnome-pst-import.eplug.xml.h:3 msgid "Import Outlook messages from PST file" msgstr "Uvozi pošto iz datoteke Outlook PST" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:530 msgid "_Mail" msgstr "_Pošta" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:559 msgid "Destination folder:" msgstr "Ciljna mapa:" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:569 msgid "_Address Book" msgstr "_Imenik" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:574 msgid "A_ppointments" msgstr "_Sestanki" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:579 ../views/tasks/galview.xml.h:1 msgid "_Tasks" msgstr "_Naloge" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:584 msgid "_Journal entries" msgstr "_Dnevnik" #: ../plugins/pst-import/pst-importer.c:701 msgid "Importing Outlook data" msgstr "Uvažanje podatkov Outlooka" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/org-gnome-publish-calendar.eplug.xml.h:1 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:141 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:148 msgid "Calendar Publishing" msgstr "Objavljanje koledarjev" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/org-gnome-publish-calendar.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Locations" msgstr "Mesta" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/org-gnome-publish-calendar.eplug.xml.h:3 msgid "Publish calendars to the web." msgstr "Objavi koledarje na spletu." #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:217 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:484 #, c-format msgid "Could not open %s:" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti %s:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:236 #, c-format msgid "There was an error while publishing to %s:" msgstr "Med objavljanjem v %s je prišlo do napake:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:242 #, c-format msgid "Publishing to %s finished successfully" msgstr "Objavljanje v %s je uspešno končano" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:290 #, c-format msgid "Mount of %s failed:" msgstr "Priklop %s je spodletel:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:649 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:33 msgid "E_nable" msgstr "_Omogoči" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:799 msgid "Are you sure you want to remove this location?" msgstr "Ali ste prepričani, da želite odstraniti to mesto?" #. To Translators: This is shown to a user when creation of a new thread, #. * where the publishing should be done, fails. Basically, this shouldn't #. * ever happen, and if so, then something is really wrong. #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:1138 msgid "Could not create publish thread." msgstr "Ni mogoče objaviti niti sporočil." #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.c:1148 msgid "_Publish Calendar Information" msgstr "Objavi _podatke o koledarju" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:1 msgid "iCal" msgstr "iCal" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:3 msgid "Daily" msgstr "Dnevno" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:4 msgid "Weekly" msgstr "Tedensko" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:5 msgid "Manual (via Actions menu)" msgstr "Ročno (preko menija Dejanja)" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:9 msgid "Secure FTP (SFTP)" msgstr "Varen FTP (SFTP)" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:10 msgid "Public FTP" msgstr "Javni FTP" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:11 msgid "FTP (with login)" msgstr "FTP (s prijavo)" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:12 msgid "Windows share" msgstr "Souporaba s sistemom Windows" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:13 msgid "WebDAV (HTTP)" msgstr "WebDAV (HTTP)" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:14 msgid "Secure WebDAV (HTTPS)" msgstr "Varen WebDAV (HTTPS)" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:15 msgid "Custom Location" msgstr "Mesto po meri" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:17 msgid "_Publish as:" msgstr "_Objavi kot:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:18 msgid "Publishing _Frequency:" msgstr "_Pogostost objave:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:19 msgid "Time _duration:" msgstr "_Trajanje:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:20 msgid "Sources" msgstr "Viri" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:23 msgid "Service _type:" msgstr "_Vrsta storitve:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:25 msgid "_File:" msgstr "_Datoteka:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:27 msgid "P_ort:" msgstr "_Vrata:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:28 msgid "_Username:" msgstr "_Uporabniško ime:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:29 msgid "_Password:" msgstr "_Geslo:" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:30 msgid "_Remember password" msgstr "Za_pomni si geslo" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-calendar.ui.h:31 msgid "Publishing Location" msgstr "Mesto objave" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-format-fb.c:100 #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/publish-format-ical.c:103 #, c-format msgid "Invalid source UID '%s'" msgstr "Napačen vir IOD '%s'" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/url-editor-dialog.c:540 msgid "New Location" msgstr "Novo mesto" #: ../plugins/publish-calendar/url-editor-dialog.c:542 msgid "Edit Location" msgstr "Urejanje mesta" #. Translators: the %F %T is the third argument for a #. * strftime function. It lets you define the formatting #. * of the date in the csv-file. #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:161 msgid "%F %T" msgstr "%d.%m.%Y %H.%M.%S" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:375 msgid "UID" msgstr "UID" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:377 msgid "Description List" msgstr "Seznam opisov" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:378 msgid "Categories List" msgstr "Seznam kategorij" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:379 msgid "Comment List" msgstr "Seznam opomb" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:382 msgid "Contact List" msgstr "Seznam stikov" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:383 msgid "Start" msgstr "Začetek" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:384 msgid "End" msgstr "Konec" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:385 msgid "Due" msgstr "Datum zapadlosti" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:386 msgid "percent Done" msgstr "odstotkov končano" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:388 msgid "URL" msgstr "URL" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:389 msgid "Attendees List" msgstr "Seznam udeležencev" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:391 msgid "Modified" msgstr "Spremenjeno" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:564 msgid "A_dvanced options for the CSV format" msgstr "_Napredne možnosti zapisa CSV" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:572 msgid "Prepend a _header" msgstr "Spredaj dodaj _glavo" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:581 msgid "_Value delimiter:" msgstr "Razmejilnik _vrednosti:" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:592 msgid "_Record delimiter:" msgstr "Razmejilnik _zapisov:" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:603 msgid "_Encapsulate values with:" msgstr "_Ovij vrednosti z:" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/csv-format.c:629 msgid "Comma separated values (.csv)" msgstr "Z vejico ločene vrednosti (.csv)" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/ical-format.c:184 ../shell/e-shell-utils.c:178 msgid "iCalendar (.ics)" msgstr "iCalendar (.ics)" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/org-gnome-save-calendar.eplug.xml.h:1 msgid "Save Selected" msgstr "Shrani izbrano" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/org-gnome-save-calendar.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "Save a calendar or task list to disk." msgstr "Shrani koledar ali nalogo na disk." #. #. * Translator: the %FT%T is the thirth argument for a strftime function. #. * It lets you define the formatting of the date in the rdf-file. #. * Also check out http://www.w3.org/2002/12/cal/tzd #. * #: ../plugins/save-calendar/rdf-format.c:147 msgid "%FT%T" msgstr "%FT%T" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/rdf-format.c:385 msgid "RDF (.rdf)" msgstr "RDF (.rdf)" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/save-calendar.c:121 msgid "_Format:" msgstr "_Oblika:" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/save-calendar.c:187 msgid "Select destination file" msgstr "Izberite ciljno datoteko" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/save-calendar.c:343 msgid "Save the selected calendar to disk" msgstr "Shrani izbrani koledar na disk" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/save-calendar.c:374 msgid "Save the selected memo list to disk" msgstr "Shrani izbrani seznam opomnikov na disk" #: ../plugins/save-calendar/save-calendar.c:405 msgid "Save the selected task list to disk" msgstr "Shrani seznam nalog na disk" #: ../plugins/templates/org-gnome-templates.eplug.xml.h:2 msgid "" "Drafts based template plugin. You can use variables like $ORIG[subject], " "$ORIG[from], $ORIG[to] or $ORIG[body], which will be replaced by values from " "an email you are replying to." msgstr "" "Vstavek predloge osnutkov sporočil. Uporabiti je mogoče spremenljivke kot so " "$ORIG[zadeva], $ORIG[od], $ORIG[za] ali $ORIG[telo], ki bodo zamenjane z " "vrednostmi iz elektronskega sporočila, na katerega odgovarjate." #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:1148 msgid "No Title" msgstr "Brez naslova" #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:1257 msgid "Save as _Template" msgstr "Shrani kot _predlogo" #: ../plugins/templates/templates.c:1259 msgid "Save as Template" msgstr "Shrani kot predlogo" #: ../shell/e-shell.c:279 msgid "Preparing to go offline..." msgstr "Priprava za delo brez povezave ..." #: ../shell/e-shell.c:332 msgid "Preparing to go online..." msgstr "Priprava za delo v povezavi ..." #: ../shell/e-shell.c:413 msgid "Preparing to quit" msgstr "Priprava na izhod" #: ../shell/e-shell.c:419 msgid "Preparing to quit..." msgstr "Priprava na končanje ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-content.c:721 ../shell/e-shell-content.c:722 msgid "Searches" msgstr "Iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-content.c:765 msgid "Save Search" msgstr "Shrani iskanje" #. Translators: The "Show:" label precedes a combo box that #. * allows the user to filter the current view. Examples of #. * items that appear in the combo box are "Unread Messages", #. * "Important Messages", or "Active Appointments". #: ../shell/e-shell-searchbar.c:939 msgid "Sho_w:" msgstr "Po_kaži:" #. Translators: This is part of the quick search interface. #. * example: Search: [_______________] in [ Current Folder ] #: ../shell/e-shell-searchbar.c:964 msgid "Sear_ch:" msgstr "Po_išči:" #. Translators: This is part of the quick search interface. #. * example: Search: [_______________] in [ Current Folder ] #: ../shell/e-shell-searchbar.c:1032 msgid "i_n" msgstr "_v" #: ../shell/e-shell-utils.c:175 msgid "vCard (.vcf)" msgstr "vCard (.vcf)" #: ../shell/e-shell-utils.c:199 msgid "All Files (*)" msgstr "Vse datoteke (*)" #: ../shell/e-shell-view.c:292 msgid "Saving user interface state" msgstr "Shranjevanje stanja uporabniškega vmesnika" #. The translator-credits string is for translators to list #. * per-language credits for translation, displayed in the #. * about dialog. #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:74 msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "" "Matjaž Horvat \n" "Matej Urbančič \n" "Andrej Žnidaršič \n" "\n" "Launchpad Contributions:\n" " Andraz Tori https://launchpad.net/~andraz-tori1\n" " Andrej Znidarsic https://launchpad.net/~andrej.znidarsic\n" " Bernard Banko https://launchpad.net/~beernarrd\n" " Damir Jerovšek https://launchpad.net/~jierro\n" " Dejan Ribič https://launchpad.net/~dejan-ribic\n" " Martin Srebotnjak https://launchpad.net/~miles\n" " Matej Urbančič https://launchpad.net/~mateju\n" " Matic Zgur https://launchpad.net/~mr-zgur\n" " Miha Gašperšič https://launchpad.net/~miha.gaspersic\n" " Peter Klofutar https://launchpad.net/~peter-klofutar\n" " Primoz Princic https://launchpad.net/~primoz-princic\n" " Sasa Batistic https://launchpad.net/~sasa-batistic\n" " Tomaž Gorenc https://launchpad.net/~tomzigorenc\n" " mrt https://launchpad.net/~mrtt" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:85 msgid "Evolution Website" msgstr "Evolution spletna stran" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:341 msgid "Categories Editor" msgstr "Urejevalnik kategorij" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:672 msgid "Bug Buddy is not installed." msgstr "Program Bug buddy ni nameščen." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:673 msgid "Bug Buddy could not be run." msgstr "Programa Bug buddy ni mogoče zagnati." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:853 msgid "Show information about Evolution" msgstr "Pokaže podatke o Evolutionu" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:858 ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:872 msgid "_Close Window" msgstr "_Zapri okno" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:879 msgid "_Contents" msgstr "_Vsebina" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:881 msgid "Open the Evolution User Guide" msgstr "Odpre uporabniško pomoč programa" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:907 msgid "I_mport..." msgstr "_Uvozi ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:909 msgid "Import data from other programs" msgstr "Uvozi podatke iz drugih programov" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:914 msgid "New _Window" msgstr "Novo _okno" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:916 msgid "Create a new window displaying this view" msgstr "Ustvari novo okno s prikazom tega pogleda" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:928 msgid "Available Cate_gories" msgstr "Razpoložljive _kategorije" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:930 msgid "Manage available categories" msgstr "Upravljanje z razpoložljivimi kategorijami" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:942 msgid "_Quick Reference" msgstr "_Hitri priročnik" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:944 msgid "Show Evolution's shortcut keys" msgstr "Pokaži tipkovne bližnjice programa Evolution" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:951 msgid "Exit the program" msgstr "Izhod iz programa" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:956 msgid "_Advanced Search..." msgstr "N_apredno iskanje ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:958 msgid "Construct a more advanced search" msgstr "Sestavljanje naprednejšega iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:965 msgid "Clear the current search parameters" msgstr "Počisti trenutne parametre iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:970 msgid "_Edit Saved Searches..." msgstr "_Uredi shranjena iskanja ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:972 msgid "Manage your saved searches" msgstr "Upravljanje s shranjenimi iskanji" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:979 msgid "Click here to change the search type" msgstr "Kliknite tukaj za zamenjavo vrste iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:984 msgid "_Find Now" msgstr "_Najdi zdaj" #. Block the default Ctrl+F. #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:986 msgid "Execute the current search parameters" msgstr "Izvedi trenutna parametre iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:991 msgid "_Save Search..." msgstr "_Shrani iskanje ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:993 msgid "Save the current search parameters" msgstr "Shrani trenutne parametre iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1005 msgid "Submit _Bug Report..." msgstr "Pošlji _poročilo o hrošču ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1007 msgid "Submit a bug report using Bug Buddy" msgstr "Pošlje poročilo o hrošču z uporabo progama Bug buddy" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1012 msgid "_Work Offline" msgstr "_Delo brez povezave" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1014 msgid "Put Evolution into offline mode" msgstr "Nadaljuje v načinu brez povezave" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1019 msgid "_Work Online" msgstr "_Delo s povezavo" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1021 msgid "Put Evolution into online mode" msgstr "Nadaljuje v povezanem načinu" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1049 msgid "Lay_out" msgstr "Razp_oreditev" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1056 msgid "_New" msgstr "_Nova" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1063 msgid "_Search" msgstr "I_skanje" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1070 msgid "_Switcher Appearance" msgstr "Videz _preklopnika" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1084 msgid "_Window" msgstr "_Okno" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1113 msgid "Show Side _Bar" msgstr "Pokaži s_transko vrstico" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1115 msgid "Show the side bar" msgstr "Pokaže stransko vrstico" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1121 msgid "Show _Buttons" msgstr "Pokaži _gumbe" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1123 msgid "Show the switcher buttons" msgstr "Pokaže preklopne gumbe" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1129 msgid "Show _Status Bar" msgstr "Pokaži vrstico _stanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1131 msgid "Show the status bar" msgstr "Pokaže vrstico stanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1137 msgid "Show _Tool Bar" msgstr "Pokaži orodno vrs_tico" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1139 msgid "Show the tool bar" msgstr "Pokaže orodno vrstico" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1161 msgid "_Icons Only" msgstr "Le _ikone" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1163 msgid "Display window buttons with icons only" msgstr "Pokaže gumbe okna le z ikonami" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1168 msgid "_Text Only" msgstr "_Le besedilo" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1170 msgid "Display window buttons with text only" msgstr "Pokaže gumbe okna le z besedilom" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1175 msgid "Icons _and Text" msgstr "I_kone in besedilo" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1177 msgid "Display window buttons with icons and text" msgstr "Pokaže gumbe okna z ikonami in besedilom" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1182 msgid "Tool_bar Style" msgstr "Slog orodne _vrstice" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1184 msgid "Display window buttons using the desktop toolbar setting" msgstr "Pokaži gumbe okna z uporabo nastavitev orodnih vrstic namizja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1192 msgid "Delete Current View" msgstr "Zbriši trenutni pogled" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1199 msgid "Save Custom View..." msgstr "Shrani pogled po meri ..." #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1201 msgid "Save current custom view" msgstr "Shrani trenutni pogled po meri" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1208 msgid "C_urrent View" msgstr "Tren_utni pogled" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1218 msgid "Custom View" msgstr "Pogled po meri" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1220 msgid "Current view is a customized view" msgstr "Trenutni pogled je prilagojen" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1230 msgid "Change the page settings for your current printer" msgstr "Spremeni nastavitve strani za vaš trenutni tiskalnik" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1591 #, c-format msgid "Switch to %s" msgstr "Preklopi na %s" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1714 #, c-format msgid "Select view: %s" msgstr "Izbor pogleda: %s" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1731 #, c-format msgid "Delete view: %s" msgstr "Zbriši pogled: %s" #: ../shell/e-shell-window-actions.c:1825 msgid "Execute these search parameters" msgstr "Izvedi te parametre iskanja" #: ../shell/e-shell-window.c:504 msgid "New" msgstr "Nov" #. Translators: This is used for the main window title. #: ../shell/e-shell-window-private.c:580 #, c-format msgid "%s - Evolution" msgstr "%s - Evolution" #. Preview/Alpha/Beta version warning message #: ../shell/main.c:183 #, no-c-format msgid "" "Hi. Thanks for taking the time to download this preview release\n" "of the Evolution groupware suite.\n" "\n" "This version of Evolution is not yet complete. It is getting close,\n" "but some features are either unfinished or do not work properly.\n" "\n" "If you want a stable version of Evolution, we urge you to uninstall\n" "this version, and install version %s instead.\n" "\n" "If you find bugs, please report them to us at bugzilla.gnome.org.\n" "This product comes with no warranty and is not intended for\n" "individuals prone to violent fits of anger.\n" "\n" "We hope that you enjoy the results of our hard work, and we\n" "eagerly await your contributions!\n" msgstr "" "Pozdravljeni! Hvala, ker ste si vzeli čas za prenos predstavitvene\n" "izdaje zbirke za skupinsko delo Evolution.\n" "\n" "Ta različica Evolutiona še ni povsem končana, zato nekatere\n" "zmogljivosti niso dokončane ali ne delujejo pravilno.\n" "\n" "Če želite stabilno različico Evolutiona, predlagamo da odstranite\n" "to različico in namesto nje namestite različico %s.\n" "\n" "Če najdete hrošče, jih lahko sporočite na bugzilla.gnome.org.\n" "Ta izdelek prihaja brez kakršnegakoli jamstva in ni primeren za\n" "osebe, ki doživljajo nasilne napade jeze.\n" "\n" "Upamo, da boste uživali sadove našega trdega dela, in nestrpno\n" "pričakujemo vaše prispevke!\n" #: ../shell/main.c:207 msgid "" "Thanks\n" "The Evolution Team\n" msgstr "" "Hvala!\n" "Ekipa Evolution\n" #: ../shell/main.c:213 msgid "Do not tell me again" msgstr "Ne opozarjaj več" #. Translators: Do NOT translate the five component #. * names, they MUST remain in English! #: ../shell/main.c:302 msgid "" "Start Evolution showing the specified component. Available options are " "'mail', 'calendar', 'contacts', 'tasks', and 'memos'" msgstr "" "Zaženi Evolution, ki prikazuje določen sestavni del. Razpoložljive možnosti " "so 'pošta', 'koledar', 'stiki', 'naloge' in 'opomniki'" #: ../shell/main.c:306 msgid "Apply the given geometry to the main window" msgstr "Uveljavi podane nastavitve velikosti na glavnem oknu" #: ../shell/main.c:310 msgid "Start in online mode" msgstr "Začni v povezanemu načinu" #: ../shell/main.c:312 msgid "Ignore network availability" msgstr "Prezri razpoložljivost omrežja" #: ../shell/main.c:315 msgid "Forcibly shut down Evolution" msgstr "Vsiljeno končaj program Evolution" #: ../shell/main.c:318 msgid "Disable loading of any plugins." msgstr "Onemogoči nalaganje vseh vstavkov." #: ../shell/main.c:320 msgid "Disable preview pane of Mail, Contacts and Tasks." msgstr "Onemogoči pladenj predogleda za pošto, stike in naloge." #: ../shell/main.c:324 msgid "Import URIs or filenames given as rest of arguments." msgstr "Uvozi naslove URI ali imena datotek podana kot argumenti." #: ../shell/main.c:326 msgid "Request a running Evolution process to quit" msgstr "Zahteva po končanju programa Evolution" #: ../shell/main.c:403 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot start Evolution. Another Evolution instance may be unresponsive. " "System error: %s" msgstr "" "Evolution ni možno zagnati. Drug primerek Evolution je lahko neodziven. " "Sistemska napaka: %s" #: ../shell/main.c:499 ../shell/main.c:504 msgid "- The Evolution PIM and Email Client" msgstr "- Poštni odjemalec in PIM Evolution" #: ../shell/main.c:571 #, c-format msgid "" "%s: --online and --offline cannot be used together.\n" " Run '%s --help' for more information.\n" msgstr "" "%s: --online in --offline ne moreta biti uporabljena sočasno.\n" " Uporabite '%s --help' za več podrobnosti.\n" #: ../shell/main.c:577 #, c-format msgid "" "%s: --force-online and --offline cannot be used together.\n" " Run '%s --help' for more information.\n" msgstr "" "%s: --force-online in --offline ne moreta biti uporabljena sočasno.\n" " Uporabite '%s --help' za več podrobnosti.\n" #: ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:2 msgid "Upgrade from previous version failed:" msgstr "Nadgradnja iz prejšnje različice ni uspela:" #: ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:3 msgid "" "{0}\n" "\n" "If you choose to continue, you may not have access to some of your old " "data.\n" msgstr "" "{0}\n" "\n" "V primeru nadaljevanja morda do nekaterih starih podatkov ne boste mogli več " "dostopati.\n" #: ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:7 msgid "Continue Anyway" msgstr "Vseeno nadaljuj" #: ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:8 msgid "Quit Now" msgstr "Končaj takoj" #: ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:9 msgid "Cannot upgrade directly from version {0}" msgstr "Nadgradnja neposredno z različice {0} ni mogoča" #: ../shell/shell.error.xml.h:10 msgid "" "Evolution no longer supports upgrading directly from version {0}. However as " "a workaround you might try first upgrading to Evolution 2, and then " "upgrading to Evolution 3." msgstr "" "Evolution ne podpira neposredne nadgradnje z različice {0}. Namesto tega " "poskusite najprej posodobiti na Evolution 2 in nato na Evolution 3." #: ../smime/gui/ca-trust-dialog.c:109 #, c-format msgid "" "Certificate '%s' is a CA certificate.\n" "\n" "Edit trust settings:" msgstr "" "Potrdilo '%s' je potrdilo CA.\n" "\n" "Uredi nastavitve zaupanja:" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:73 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:92 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:112 msgid "Certificate Name" msgstr "Ime potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:74 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:94 msgid "Issued To Organization" msgstr "Izdano za organizacijo" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:75 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:95 msgid "Issued To Organizational Unit" msgstr "Izdano za oddelek organizacije" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:76 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:96 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:114 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:638 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:134 msgid "Serial Number" msgstr "Zaporedna številka" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:77 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:97 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:115 msgid "Purposes" msgstr "Nameni" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:78 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:98 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:116 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:640 msgid "Issued By" msgstr "Izdajatelj" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:79 ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:99 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:117 msgid "Issued By Organization" msgstr "Izdano s strani organizacije" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:80 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:100 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:118 msgid "Issued By Organizational Unit" msgstr "Izdano s strani oddelka organizacije" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:81 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:101 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:119 msgid "Issued" msgstr "Izdano" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:82 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:102 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:120 msgid "Expires" msgstr "Poteče" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:83 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:103 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:121 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:650 msgid "SHA1 Fingerprint" msgstr "Prstni odtis SHA1" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:84 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:104 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:122 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:651 msgid "MD5 Fingerprint" msgstr "Prstni odtis MD5" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:93 #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:113 msgid "Email Address" msgstr "Elektronski naslov" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:614 msgid "Select a certificate to import..." msgstr "Izberite potrdilo za uvoz ..." #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:628 msgid "All files" msgstr "Vse datoteke" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:664 msgid "Failed to import certificate" msgstr "Uvažanje potrdila je spodletelo" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:1046 msgid "All PKCS12 files" msgstr "Vse datoteke PKCS12" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:1063 msgid "All email certificate files" msgstr "Datoteke potrdil za overjanje elektronske pošte" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-manager.c:1080 msgid "All CA certificate files" msgstr "Vsa CA potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:292 msgid "Not part of certificate" msgstr "Ni del potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:600 msgid "This certificate has been verified for the following uses:" msgstr "To potrdilo je preverjeno za naslednje vrste uporabe:" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:604 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:387 msgid "SSL Client Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo odjemalca SSL" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:609 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:391 msgid "SSL Server Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo strežnika SSL" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:614 msgid "Email Signer Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo podpisnika elektronske pošte" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:619 msgid "Email Recipient Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo prejemnika elektronske pošte" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:634 msgid "Issued To" msgstr "Izdano osebi" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:635 ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:641 msgid "Common Name (CN)" msgstr "Splošno ime (CN)" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:636 ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:642 msgid "Organization (O)" msgstr "Organizacija (O)" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:637 ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:643 msgid "Organizational Unit (OU)" msgstr "Organizacijska enota (OU)" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:645 msgid "Validity" msgstr "Veljavnost" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:646 msgid "Issued On" msgstr "Izdano dne" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:647 msgid "Expires On" msgstr "Poteče dne" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:649 msgid "Fingerprints" msgstr "Prstni odtisi" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:671 msgid "Certificate Hierarchy" msgstr "Hierarhija potrdil" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:674 msgid "Certificate Fields" msgstr "Polja potrdil" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:677 msgid "Field Value" msgstr "Vrednost polja" #: ../smime/gui/certificate-viewer.c:679 msgid "Details" msgstr "Podrobnosti" #: ../smime/gui/cert-trust-dialog.c:153 msgid "" "Because you trust the certificate authority that issued this certificate, " "then you trust the authenticity of this certificate unless otherwise " "indicated here" msgstr "" "Ker zaupate odgovornemu pooblastitelju potrdil, zaupate tudi pristnosti tega " "potrdila, razen če določite drugače" #: ../smime/gui/cert-trust-dialog.c:158 msgid "" "Because you do not trust the certificate authority that issued this " "certificate, then you do not trust the authenticity of this certificate " "unless otherwise indicated here" msgstr "" "Ker ne zaupate pooblastitelju potrdil, ne zaupate tudi pristnosti tega " "potrdila, razen če določite drugače" #: ../smime/gui/component.c:56 #, c-format msgid "Enter the password for '%s', token '%s'" msgstr "Vpišite geslo za '%s', žeton '%s'" #: ../smime/gui/component.c:58 #, c-format msgid "Enter the password for '%s'" msgstr "Vnesite geslo za '%s'" #. we're setting the password initially #: ../smime/gui/component.c:86 msgid "Enter new password for certificate database" msgstr "Vnesite geslo za podatkovno zbirko potrdil" #: ../smime/gui/component.c:89 msgid "Enter new password" msgstr "Vnesite novo geslo" #. FIXME: add serial no, validity date, uses #: ../smime/gui/e-cert-selector.c:122 #, c-format msgid "" "Issued to:\n" " Subject: %s\n" msgstr "" "Izdano za:\n" " Zadeva: %s\n" #: ../smime/gui/e-cert-selector.c:123 #, c-format msgid "" "Issued by:\n" " Subject: %s\n" msgstr "" "Izdal:\n" " Zadeva: %s\n" #: ../smime/gui/e-cert-selector.c:176 msgid "Select certificate" msgstr "Izbor potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:3 msgid "You have certificates from these organizations that identify you:" msgstr "" "Imate potrdilo naslednjih organizacij, ki ugotavljajo vašo istovetnost:" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:4 msgid "Certificates Table" msgstr "Preglednica potrdil" #. This is a verb, as in "make a backup". #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:7 msgid "_Backup" msgstr "_Varnostna kopija" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:8 msgid "Backup _All" msgstr "V_arnostna kopija vsega" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:10 msgid "Your Certificates" msgstr "Vaša potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:11 msgid "You have certificates on file that identify these people:" msgstr "Imate datoteke potrdil, ki ugotavljajo istovetnost naslednjih ljudi:" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:12 msgid "Contact Certificates" msgstr "Potrdila stika" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:13 msgid "" "You have certificates on file that identify these certificate authorities:" msgstr "" "Imate datoteke potrdil, ki ugotavljajo istovetnost naslednjih overiteljev:" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:14 msgid "Authorities" msgstr "Overitelji" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:15 msgid "Certificate Authority Trust" msgstr "Zaupanje pooblastitelju potrdil" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:16 msgid "Trust this CA to identify _websites." msgstr "" "Zaupaj overitelju potrdil CA pri ugotavljanju istovetnosti _spletnih strani." #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:17 msgid "Trust this CA to identify _email users." msgstr "" "Zaupaj overitelju potrdil CA pri ugotavljanju istovetnosti _uporabnikov " "elektronske pošte." #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:18 msgid "Trust this CA to identify _software developers." msgstr "" "Zaupaj overitelju potrdil CA pri ugotavljanju istovetnosti _razvijalcev " "programske opreme." #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:19 msgid "" "Before trusting this CA for any purpose, you should examine its certificate " "and its policy and procedures (if available)." msgstr "" "Preden zaupate tej CA za poljuben namen, si oglejte njeno potrdilo, ravnanje " "in postopke (če so na voljo)." #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:21 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:658 msgid "Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:22 msgid "Certificate details" msgstr "Podrobnosti potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:23 msgid "Email Certificate Trust Settings" msgstr "Nastavitve zaupanja potrdil elektronske pošte." #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:24 msgid "Trust the authenticity of this certificate" msgstr "Zaupaj pristnosti tega potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:25 msgid "Do not trust the authenticity of this certificate" msgstr "Ne zaupaj pristnosti tega potrdila" #: ../smime/gui/smime-ui.ui.h:26 msgid "_Edit CA Trust" msgstr "Ur_edi zaupanje CA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:95 msgid "Version" msgstr "Različica" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:110 msgid "Version 1" msgstr "Različica 1" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:113 msgid "Version 2" msgstr "Različica 2" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:116 msgid "Version 3" msgstr "Različica 3" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:192 msgid "PKCS #1 MD2 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 MD2 z RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:195 msgid "PKCS #1 MD5 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 MD5 z RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:198 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-1 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-1 z RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:201 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-256 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-256 z RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:204 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-384 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-384 z RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:207 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-512 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-512 z RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:234 msgid "PKCS #1 RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 RSA" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:237 msgid "Certificate Key Usage" msgstr "Uporaba ključa potrdila" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:240 msgid "Netscape Certificate Type" msgstr "Vrsta potrdila Netscapa" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:243 msgid "Certificate Authority Key Identifier" msgstr "Določevalnik ključa pooblastitelja potrdil" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:255 #, c-format msgid "Object Identifier (%s)" msgstr "Določilo predmeta (%s)" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:306 msgid "Algorithm Identifier" msgstr "Določilo algoritma" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:314 msgid "Algorithm Parameters" msgstr "Določila algoritma" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:336 msgid "Subject Public Key Info" msgstr "Podatki o javnem ključu zadeve" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:341 msgid "Subject Public Key Algorithm" msgstr "Algoritem javnega ključa zadeve" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:356 msgid "Subject's Public Key" msgstr "Javni ključ zadeve" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:378 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:428 msgid "Error: Unable to process extension" msgstr "Napaka: ni mogoče obdelati razširitve" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:399 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:411 msgid "Object Signer" msgstr "Podpisnik predmeta" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:403 msgid "SSL Certificate Authority" msgstr "Pooblastitelj potrdil SSL" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:407 msgid "Email Certificate Authority" msgstr "Pooblastitelj potrdil elektronske pošte" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:436 msgid "Signing" msgstr "Podpisovanje" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:440 msgid "Non-repudiation" msgstr "Nepreklicno" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:444 msgid "Key Encipherment" msgstr "Šifriranje ključa" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:448 msgid "Data Encipherment" msgstr "Šifriranje podatkov" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:452 msgid "Key Agreement" msgstr "Dogovor o ključu" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:456 msgid "Certificate Signer" msgstr "Podpisnik potrdila" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:460 msgid "CRL Signer" msgstr "Podpisnik CRL" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:509 msgid "Critical" msgstr "Kritično" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:511 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:514 msgid "Not Critical" msgstr "Ni kritično" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:535 msgid "Extensions" msgstr "Razširitve" #. Translators: This string is used in Certificate #. * details for fields like Issuer or Subject, which #. * shows the field name on the left and its respective #. * value on the right, both as stored in the #. * certificate itself. You probably do not need to #. * change this string, unless changing the order of #. * name and value. As a result example: #. * "OU = VeriSign Trust Network" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:615 #, c-format msgid "%s = %s" msgstr "%s = %s" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:672 ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:807 msgid "Certificate Signature Algorithm" msgstr "Algoritem podpisa potrdila" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:681 msgid "Issuer" msgstr "Izdajatelj" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:735 msgid "Issuer Unique ID" msgstr "Edinstven ID izdajatelja" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:754 msgid "Subject Unique ID" msgstr "Edinstven ID zadeve" #: ../smime/lib/e-asn1-object.c:813 msgid "Certificate Signature Value" msgstr "Vrednost podpisa potrdila" #: ../smime/lib/e-cert.c:201 ../smime/lib/e-cert.c:213 msgid "%d/%m/%Y" msgstr "%d.%m.%Y" #. x509 certificate usage types #: ../smime/lib/e-cert.c:392 msgid "Sign" msgstr "Podpiši" #: ../smime/lib/e-cert.c:393 msgid "Encrypt" msgstr "Šifriraj" #: ../smime/lib/e-cert-db.c:864 msgid "Certificate already exists" msgstr "Potrdilo že obstaja" #: ../smime/lib/e-pkcs12.c:199 msgid "PKCS12 File Password" msgstr "Geslo datoteke PKCS12" #: ../smime/lib/e-pkcs12.c:200 msgid "Enter password for PKCS12 file:" msgstr "Vnesite geslo za datoteko PKCS12:" #: ../smime/lib/e-pkcs12.c:307 msgid "Imported Certificate" msgstr "Uvoženo potrdilo" #: ../views/addressbook/galview.xml.h:1 msgid "_Address Cards" msgstr "_Vizitke" #: ../views/addressbook/galview.xml.h:2 ../views/calendar/galview.xml.h:5 msgid "_List View" msgstr "_Seznamski pogled" #: ../views/addressbook/galview.xml.h:3 msgid "By _Company" msgstr "Po _podjetju" #: ../views/calendar/galview.xml.h:1 msgid "_Day View" msgstr "_Dnevni pogled" #: ../views/calendar/galview.xml.h:2 msgid "_Work Week View" msgstr "Pogled de_lovnega tedna" #: ../views/calendar/galview.xml.h:3 msgid "W_eek View" msgstr "T_edenski pogled" #: ../views/calendar/galview.xml.h:4 msgid "_Month View" msgstr "_Mesečni pogled" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:1 msgid "_Messages" msgstr "_Sporočila" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:2 msgid "As _Sent Folder" msgstr "Kot mapa Po_slano" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:3 msgid "By Su_bject" msgstr "Po _zadevi" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:4 msgid "By Se_nder" msgstr "Po _pošiljatelju" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:5 msgid "By S_tatus" msgstr "Po s_tanju" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:6 msgid "By _Follow Up Flag" msgstr "Po zastavici _navezave" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:7 msgid "For _Wide View" msgstr "Za š_irok pogled" #: ../views/mail/galview.xml.h:8 msgid "As Sent Folder for Wi_de View" msgstr "Kot mapa Poslano za Širok pogle_d" #: ../views/memos/galview.xml.h:1 msgid "_Memos" msgstr "_Opomniki" #: ../views/tasks/galview.xml.h:2 msgid "With _Due Date" msgstr "Z _datumom zapadlosti" #: ../views/tasks/galview.xml.h:3 msgid "With _Status" msgstr "S _stanjem" language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/evolution-data-server-3.10.po0000644000000000000000000056376112321560614023406 0ustar # Slovenian translations for evolution-data-server. # Copyright (C) 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the evolution-data-server package. # # Andraž Tori 2002 # Matej Urbančič , 2007 - 2012. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: evolution-data-server master\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: " "http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=evolution-data-" "server&keywords=I18N+L10N&component=Misc.\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-17 13:03+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-01-25 20:07+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Primoz Princic \n" "Language-Team: Slovenian GNOME Translation Team \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%100==1 ? 1 : n%100==2 ? 2 : n%100==3 || " "n%100==4 ? 3 : 0);\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2014-04-10 11:47+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 16976)\n" "X-Poedit-Country: SLOVENIA\n" "Language: \n" "X-Poedit-Language: Slovenian\n" "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:115 #, c-format msgid "Failed to remove file '%s': %s" msgstr "Odstranjevanje datoteke `%s' je spodletelo: %s" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:143 #, c-format msgid "Failed to make directory %s: %s" msgstr "Ustvarjanje mape %s je spodletelo: %s" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:394 #, c-format msgid "Failed to create hardlink for resource '%s': %s" msgstr "Ustvarjanje trde povezave za vir '%s' je spodletelo: %s" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:499 #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1135 msgid "No UID in the contact" msgstr "Ni vrednosti UID stika" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:773 #, c-format msgid "Conflicting UIDs found in added contacts" msgstr "Med dodanimi stiki so nekatere vrednosti UID v sporu" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:881 msgid "Loading..." msgstr "Nalaganje ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:883 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:4424 msgid "Searching..." msgstr "Iskanje ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1164 #, c-format msgid "Tried to modify contact '%s' with out of sync revision" msgstr "Poskus spreminjanja stika '%s' z neusklajeno različico" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1300 #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1369 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:2707 #, c-format msgid "Contact '%s' not found" msgstr "Stika '%s' ni mogoče najti" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1411 #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1478 #, c-format msgid "Query '%s' not supported" msgstr "Poizvedba '%s' ni podprta" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1420 #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1487 #, c-format msgid "Invalid Query '%s'" msgstr "Neveljavna poizvedba '%s'" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file.c:1671 #, c-format msgid "Failed to rename old database from '%s' to '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati stare podatkovne zbirke iz '%s' v '%s': %s" #: ../addressbook/backends/file/e-book-backend-file-migrate-bdb.c:149 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:1245 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:4319 #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:383 #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:825 #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-book-contacts-types.c:35 #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:58 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sexp.c:874 #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:576 #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:607 #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:619 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2335 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:268 #: ../camel/camel-imapx-command.c:650 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:177 msgid "Unknown error" msgstr "Neznana napaka" #. Query for new contacts asynchronously #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-backend-google.c:833 msgid "Querying for updated contacts…" msgstr "Poizvedovanje za posodobitvami stikov ..." #. Run the query asynchronously #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-backend-google.c:985 msgid "Querying for updated groups…" msgstr "Poizvedovanje za posodobitvami skupin ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-backend-google.c:1673 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:5055 #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1299 msgid "The backend does not support bulk additions" msgstr "Ozadnji program ne podpira množičnega dodajanja" #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-backend-google.c:1822 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:5191 #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1401 msgid "The backend does not support bulk modifications" msgstr "Ozadnji program ne podpira množičnega spreminjanja" #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-backend-google.c:2022 #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1493 msgid "The backend does not support bulk removals" msgstr "Ozadnji program ne podpira množičnega odstranjevanja" #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-backend-google.c:2148 msgid "Loading…" msgstr "Nalaganje ..." #. System Group: My Contacts #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-google-utils.c:1620 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/system-address-book.source.in.h:1 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/system-calendar.source.in.h:1 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/system-memo-list.source.in.h:1 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/system-task-list.source.in.h:1 msgid "Personal" msgstr "Osebno" #. System Group: Friends #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-google-utils.c:1622 msgid "Friends" msgstr "Prijatelji" #. System Group: Family #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-google-utils.c:1624 msgid "Family" msgstr "Družina" #. System Group: Coworkers #: ../addressbook/backends/google/e-book-google-utils.c:1626 msgid "Coworkers" msgstr "Sodelavci" #. Translators: An error message shown to a user when trying to do an #. * operation on the LDAP address book which is not connected to the server #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:174 msgid "Not connected" msgstr "Ni povezave" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:973 msgid "Failed to bind using either v3 or v2 binds" msgstr "Povezovanje je spodletelo z vezmi različice v2 in v3" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:1096 msgid "Reconnecting to LDAP server..." msgstr "Ponovno povezovanje s strežnikom LDAP ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:1226 msgid "Invalid DN syntax" msgstr "Neveljavna razločna skladnja DN" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:1242 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:4318 #, c-format msgid "LDAP error 0x%x (%s)" msgstr "Prišlo je do napake LDAP 0x%x (%s)" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:1854 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:2177 #, c-format msgid "%s: NULL returned from ldap_first_entry" msgstr "%s: vrnjena je prazna vrednost (NULL) predmeta ldap_first_entry" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:2107 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:2235 #, c-format msgid "%s: Unhandled result type %d returned" msgstr "%s: vrnjena je neupravljana vrsta iskanja %d" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:2368 #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:2495 #, c-format msgid "%s: Unhandled search result type %d returned" msgstr "%s: vrnjena je neupravljana vrsta iskanja %d" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:4267 msgid "Receiving LDAP search results..." msgstr "Sprejemanje rezultatov iskanja LDAP ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:4446 msgid "Error performing search" msgstr "Napaka med iskanjem" #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:4574 #, c-format msgid "Downloading contacts (%d)..." msgstr "Prejemanje stikov (%d) ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:5138 msgid "Adding contact to LDAP server..." msgstr "Dodajanje stika na strežnik LDAP ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:5213 msgid "Modifying contact from LDAP server..." msgstr "Spreminjam stik na strežniku LDAP ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:5279 msgid "Removing contact from LDAP server..." msgstr "Odstranjujem stik iz strežnika LDAP ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/ldap/e-book-backend-ldap.c:5668 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get the DN for user '%s'" msgstr "Pridobivanje razločnega imena (DN) za uporabnika '%s' je spodletelo." #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:804 msgid "Loading Addressbook summary..." msgstr "Nalaganje povzetka imenika ..." #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:822 #, c-format msgid "PROPFIND on webdav failed with HTTP status %d (%s)" msgstr "Ukaz PROPFIND je na webdav spodletel s stanjem HTTP %d (%s)" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:841 msgid "No response body in webdav PROPFIND result" msgstr "Ni telesa odziva med razultati ukaza webdav PROPFIND" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:883 #, c-format msgid "Loading Contacts (%d%%)" msgstr "Nalaganje stikov (%d%%)" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1221 msgid "Cannot transform SoupURI to string" msgstr "Naslova SoupURI ni mogoče preoblikovati v niz" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1332 #, c-format msgid "Create resource '%s' failed with HTTP status %d (%s)" msgstr "Ustvarjanje vira '%s' je spodletelo s stanjem HTTP %d (%s)" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1430 msgid "Contact on server changed -> not modifying" msgstr "Stik na strežniku je spremenjen -> spremembe ne bodo uveljavljene" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1438 #, c-format msgid "Modify contact failed with HTTP status %d (%s)" msgstr "Spreminjanje stika je spodletelo s stanjem HTTP %d (%s)" #: ../addressbook/backends/webdav/e-book-backend-webdav.c:1514 #, c-format msgid "DELETE failed with HTTP status %d" msgstr "Ukaz DELETE je spodletel s stanjem HTTP %d" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-book-contacts-types.c:24 #| msgctxt "BookClientError" #| msgid "No such book" msgid "No such book" msgstr "Ni takega imenika" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-book-contacts-types.c:26 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:346 msgid "Contact not found" msgstr "Stika ni mogoče najti" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-book-contacts-types.c:28 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:347 msgid "Contact ID already exists" msgstr "ID stika že obstaja" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-book-contacts-types.c:30 #| msgctxt "BookClientError" #| msgid "No such source" msgid "No such source" msgstr "Ni takega vira" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-book-contacts-types.c:32 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:363 msgid "No space" msgstr "Ni prostora" #. Dummy row as EContactField starts from 1 #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:123 msgid "Unique ID" msgstr "Edinstven ID" #. FILE_AS is not really a structured field - we use a getter/setter #. * so we can generate its value if necessary in the getter #. Translators: This is an EContact field description, in this case it's a #. * preferred user's description (or display name) of the contact. Note 'File' is a verb here. #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:128 msgid "File Under" msgstr "Uredi pod" #. URI of the book to which the contact belongs to #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:130 msgid "Book UID" msgstr "UID knjige" #. Name fields #. FN isn't really a structured field - we use a getter/setter #. * so we can set the N property (since evo 1.4 works fine with #. * vcards that don't even have a N attribute. *sigh*) #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:136 msgid "Full Name" msgstr "Polno ime" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:137 msgid "Given Name" msgstr "Rojstno ime" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:138 msgid "Family Name" msgstr "Družinsko ime" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:139 msgid "Nickname" msgstr "Vzdevek" #. Email fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:142 msgid "Email 1" msgstr "Elektronski naslov 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:143 msgid "Email 2" msgstr "Elektronski naslov 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:144 msgid "Email 3" msgstr "Elektronski naslov 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:145 msgid "Email 4" msgstr "Elektronski naslov 4" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:147 msgid "Mailer" msgstr "Poštni odjemalec" #. Address Labels #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:150 msgid "Home Address Label" msgstr "Vizitka domačega naslova" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:151 msgid "Work Address Label" msgstr "Vizitka službenega naslova" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:152 msgid "Other Address Label" msgstr "Vizitka drugega naslova" #. Phone fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:155 msgid "Assistant Phone" msgstr "Pomožni telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:156 msgid "Business Phone" msgstr "Službeni telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:157 msgid "Business Phone 2" msgstr "Službeni telefon 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:158 msgid "Business Fax" msgstr "Službeni faks" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:159 msgid "Callback Phone" msgstr "Povratni telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:160 msgid "Car Phone" msgstr "Telefon v avtu" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:161 msgid "Company Phone" msgstr "Telefon podjetja" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:162 msgid "Home Phone" msgstr "Domači telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:163 msgid "Home Phone 2" msgstr "Domači telefon 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:164 msgid "Home Fax" msgstr "Domači faks" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:165 msgid "ISDN" msgstr "ISDN" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:166 msgid "Mobile Phone" msgstr "Prenosni telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:167 msgid "Other Phone" msgstr "Drug telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:168 msgid "Other Fax" msgstr "Drugi faks" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:169 msgid "Pager" msgstr "Pozivnik" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:170 msgid "Primary Phone" msgstr "Osnovni telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:171 msgid "Radio" msgstr "Radio" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:172 msgid "Telex" msgstr "Teleks" #. To translators: TTY is Teletypewriter #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:174 msgid "TTY" msgstr "TTY" #. Organizational fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:177 msgid "Organization" msgstr "Organizacija" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:178 msgid "Organizational Unit" msgstr "Organizacijska enota" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:179 msgid "Office" msgstr "Pisarna" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:180 msgid "Title" msgstr "Naziv" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:181 msgid "Role" msgstr "Vloga" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:182 msgid "Manager" msgstr "Direktor:" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:183 msgid "Assistant" msgstr "Pomočnik" #. Web fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:186 msgid "Homepage URL" msgstr "Naslov URL domače strani" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:187 msgid "Weblog URL" msgstr "Naslov URL bloga" #. Contact categories #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:190 msgid "Categories" msgstr "kategorije" #. Collaboration fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:193 msgid "Calendar URI" msgstr "Naslov URI koledarja" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:194 msgid "Free/Busy URL" msgstr "Naslov URL zaposlenosti" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:195 msgid "ICS Calendar" msgstr "Koledar ICS" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:196 msgid "Video Conferencing URL" msgstr "Naslov URL videokonference" #. Misc fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:199 msgid "Spouse's Name" msgstr "Ime soproga(e)" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:200 msgid "Note" msgstr "Opomba" #. Instant messaging fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:203 msgid "AIM Home Screen Name 1" msgstr "Domači ID za AIM 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:204 msgid "AIM Home Screen Name 2" msgstr "Domači ID za AIM 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:205 msgid "AIM Home Screen Name 3" msgstr "Domači ID za AIM 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:206 msgid "AIM Work Screen Name 1" msgstr "Službeni ID za AIM 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:207 msgid "AIM Work Screen Name 2" msgstr "Službeni ID za AIM 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:208 msgid "AIM Work Screen Name 3" msgstr "Službeni ID za AIM 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:209 msgid "GroupWise Home Screen Name 1" msgstr "Domači ID za GroupWise 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:210 msgid "GroupWise Home Screen Name 2" msgstr "Domači ID za GroupWise 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:211 msgid "GroupWise Home Screen Name 3" msgstr "Domači ID za GroupWise 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:212 msgid "GroupWise Work Screen Name 1" msgstr "Domači ID za GroupWise 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:213 msgid "GroupWise Work Screen Name 2" msgstr "Službeni ID za GroupWise 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:214 msgid "GroupWise Work Screen Name 3" msgstr "Službeni ID za GroupWise 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:215 msgid "Jabber Home ID 1" msgstr "Domači Jabber ID 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:216 msgid "Jabber Home ID 2" msgstr "Domači Jabber ID 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:217 msgid "Jabber Home ID 3" msgstr "Domači Jabber ID 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:218 msgid "Jabber Work ID 1" msgstr "Službeni Jabber ID 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:219 msgid "Jabber Work ID 2" msgstr "Službeni Jabber ID 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:220 msgid "Jabber Work ID 3" msgstr "Službeni Jabber ID 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:221 msgid "Yahoo! Home Screen Name 1" msgstr "Domači ID za Yahoo! 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:222 msgid "Yahoo! Home Screen Name 2" msgstr "Domači ID za Yahoo! 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:223 msgid "Yahoo! Home Screen Name 3" msgstr "Domači ID za Yahoo! 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:224 msgid "Yahoo! Work Screen Name 1" msgstr "Službeni ID za Yahoo! 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:225 msgid "Yahoo! Work Screen Name 2" msgstr "Službeni ID za Yahoo! 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:226 msgid "Yahoo! Work Screen Name 3" msgstr "Službeni ID za Yahoo! 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:227 msgid "MSN Home Screen Name 1" msgstr "Domači ID za MSN 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:228 msgid "MSN Home Screen Name 2" msgstr "Domači ID za MSN 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:229 msgid "MSN Home Screen Name 3" msgstr "Domači ID za MSN 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:230 msgid "MSN Work Screen Name 1" msgstr "Službeni ID za MSN 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:231 msgid "MSN Work Screen Name 2" msgstr "Službeni ID za MSN 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:232 msgid "MSN Work Screen Name 3" msgstr "Službeni ID za MSN 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:233 msgid "ICQ Home ID 1" msgstr "Domači ICQ ID 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:234 msgid "ICQ Home ID 2" msgstr "Domači ICQ ID 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:235 msgid "ICQ Home ID 3" msgstr "Domači ICQ ID 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:236 msgid "ICQ Work ID 1" msgstr "Službeni ICQ ID 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:237 msgid "ICQ Work ID 2" msgstr "Službeni ICQ ID 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:238 msgid "ICQ Work ID 3" msgstr "Službeni ICQ ID 3" #. Last modified time #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:241 msgid "Last Revision" msgstr "Zadnji pregled" #. Translators: This is an EContact field description, in this case it's a #. * virtual field, which returns either name of the contact or the organization #. * name, recognized by multiple other fields, where the first filled is used. #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:245 msgid "Name or Org" msgstr "Ime ali org." #. Address fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:248 msgid "Address List" msgstr "Seznam naslovov" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:249 msgid "Home Address" msgstr "Domači naslov" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:250 msgid "Work Address" msgstr "Službeni naslov" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:251 msgid "Other Address" msgstr "Drug naslov" #. Contact categories #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:254 msgid "Category List" msgstr "Seznam kategorij" #. Photo/Logo #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:257 msgid "Photo" msgstr "Fotografija" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:258 msgid "Logo" msgstr "Logo" #. Translators: This is an EContact field description, in this case it's a name #. * of the contact, as specified in http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6350#section-6.2.2 #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:262 msgid "Name" msgstr "Ime" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:263 msgid "Email List" msgstr "Seznam elektronskih naslovov" #. Instant messaging fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:266 msgid "AIM Screen Name List" msgstr "Seznam imen za AIM" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:267 msgid "GroupWise ID List" msgstr "Seznam GroupWise ID" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:268 msgid "Jabber ID List" msgstr "Seznam Jabber ID" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:269 msgid "Yahoo! Screen Name List" msgstr "Seznam imen za Yahoo!" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:270 msgid "MSN Screen Name List" msgstr "Seznam imen za MSN" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:271 msgid "ICQ ID List" msgstr "Seznam ICQ ID" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:273 msgid "Wants HTML Mail" msgstr "Želi pošto v obliki HTML" #. Translators: This is an EContact field description, in this case it's a #. * field describing whether it's a Contact list (list of email addresses) or a #. * regular contact for one person/organization/... #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:278 msgid "List" msgstr "Seznam" #. Translators: This is an EContact field description, in this case it's a flag #. * used to determine whether when sending to Contact lists the addresses should be #. * shown or not to other recipients - basically whether to use BCC field or CC #. * message header when sending messages to this Contact list. #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:283 msgid "List Shows Addresses" msgstr "V seznamu so pokazani tudi naslovi" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:285 msgid "Birth Date" msgstr "Rojstni datum" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:286 #: ../calendar/backends/contacts/e-cal-backend-contacts.c:887 msgid "Anniversary" msgstr "Obletnica" #. Security fields #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:289 msgid "X.509 Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo X.509" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:291 msgid "Gadu-Gadu Home ID 1" msgstr "Domači Gadu-Gadu ID 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:292 msgid "Gadu-Gadu Home ID 2" msgstr "Domači Gadu-Gadu ID 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:293 msgid "Gadu-Gadu Home ID 3" msgstr "Domači Gadu-Gadu ID 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:294 msgid "Gadu-Gadu Work ID 1" msgstr "Službeni Gadu-Gadu ID 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:295 msgid "Gadu-Gadu Work ID 2" msgstr "Službeni Gadu-Gadu ID 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:296 msgid "Gadu-Gadu Work ID 3" msgstr "Službeni Gadu-Gadu ID 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:297 msgid "Gadu-Gadu ID List" msgstr "Seznam Gadu-Gadu ID" #. Geo information #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:300 msgid "Geographic Information" msgstr "Zemljepisne podrobnosti" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:302 msgid "Telephone" msgstr "Telefon" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:304 msgid "Skype Home Name 1" msgstr "Domači ID za Skype 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:305 msgid "Skype Home Name 2" msgstr "Domači ID za Skype 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:306 msgid "Skype Home Name 3" msgstr "Domači ID za Skype 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:307 msgid "Skype Work Name 1" msgstr "Službeni ID za Skype 1" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:308 msgid "Skype Work Name 2" msgstr "Službeni ID za Skype 2" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:309 msgid "Skype Work Name 3" msgstr "Službeni ID za Skype 3" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:310 msgid "Skype Name List" msgstr "Seznam imen za Skype" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:312 msgid "SIP address" msgstr "SIP naslov" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:314 #| msgid "Skype Home Name 1" msgid "Google Talk Home Name 1" msgstr "Domače ime 1 za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:315 #| msgid "Skype Home Name 2" msgid "Google Talk Home Name 2" msgstr "Domače ime 2 za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:316 #| msgid "Skype Home Name 3" msgid "Google Talk Home Name 3" msgstr "Domače ime 3 za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:317 #| msgid "Skype Work Name 1" msgid "Google Talk Work Name 1" msgstr "Službeno ime 1 za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:318 #| msgid "Skype Work Name 2" msgid "Google Talk Work Name 2" msgstr "Službeno ime 2 za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:319 #| msgid "Skype Work Name 3" msgid "Google Talk Work Name 3" msgstr "Službeno ime 3 za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:320 #| msgid "Skype Name List" msgid "Google Talk Name List" msgstr "Seznam imen za Google Talk" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:322 msgid "Twitter Name List" msgstr "Seznam stikov Twitter" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-contact.c:1627 #: ../addressbook/libebook/e-destination.c:883 msgid "Unnamed List" msgstr "Neimenovan seznam" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:43 msgid "The library was built without phone number support." msgstr "Knjižnica je zgrajena brez podpore za telefonske številke." #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:45 msgid "The phone number parser reported an yet unkown error code." msgstr "Razčlenjevalnik telefonskih številk poroča o še neznani kodi napake." #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:47 msgid "Not a phone number" msgstr "Ni telefonska številka" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:49 msgid "Invalid country calling code" msgstr "Neveljavna klicna številka države" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:51 msgid "" "Remaining text after the country calling code is too short for a phone number" msgstr "" "Vnos za kodo države je prekratek, da bi bil lahko telefonska številka." #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:53 msgid "Text is too short for a phone number" msgstr "Vnos je prekratek za telefonsko številko" #: ../addressbook/libebook-contacts/e-phone-number.c:55 msgid "Text is too long for a phone number" msgstr "Vnos je predolg za telefonsko številko" #: ../addressbook/libebook/e-book-client.c:749 #, c-format msgid "Unknown book property '%s'" msgstr "Neznana lastnost imenika '%s'" #: ../addressbook/libebook/e-book-client.c:764 #, c-format msgid "Cannot change value of book property '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče spremeniti vrednosti lastnosti imenika '%s'" #: ../addressbook/libebook/e-book-client.c:1099 #: ../addressbook/libebook/e-book-client.c:1274 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:1522 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:1704 #, c-format msgid "Unable to connect to '%s': " msgstr "Ni mogoče vzpostaviti povezave z/s '%s': " #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:796 #, c-format msgid "Error introspecting unknown summary field '%s'" msgstr "Napaka pregleda neznanega polja povzetka '%s'" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:1295 msgid "Error parsing regular expression" msgstr "Napaka razčlenjevanja logičnega izraza" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:1340 #: ../camel/camel-db.c:544 #, c-format msgid "Insufficient memory" msgstr "Nezadostna količina pomnilnika" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:1473 #, c-format msgid "Invalid contact field '%d' specified in summary" msgstr "V povzetku je določeno neveljavno polje stika '%d'" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:1507 #, c-format msgid "" "Contact field '%s' of type '%s' specified in summary, but only boolean, " "string and string list field types are supported" msgstr "" "V povzetku je navedeno polje stika '%s' vrste '%s', vendar so podprte le " "vrste polj boolean, string in string list." #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:2695 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:3772 #, c-format msgid "" "Full search_contacts are not stored in cache. vcards cannot be returned." msgstr "" "Polni podatki za iskanje stikov niso shranjeni v predpomnilniku, zato " "zapisov vcard ni mogoče vrniti." #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:3898 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:3979 #, c-format msgid "Query contained unsupported elements" msgstr "Poizvedba je vsebovala nepodprte predmete" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:3902 #, c-format msgid "Invalid Query" msgstr "Neveljavna poizvedba" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:3926 #, c-format msgid "" "Full search_contacts are not stored in cache. Hence only summary query is " "supported." msgstr "" "Polni podatki za iskanje stikov niso shranjeni v predpomnilniku, zato je " "podprta le poizvedba po povzetku." #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:3983 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:358 #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:993 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:412 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1299 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:164 #, c-format msgid "Invalid query" msgstr "Neveljavna poizvedba" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:4026 #, c-format msgid "" "Full vcards are not stored in cache. Hence only summary query is supported." msgstr "" "Polne vizitke vcard niso shranjene v predpomnilniku, zato je podprta le " "poizvedba po povzetku." #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-book-backend-sqlitedb.c:4729 #, c-format msgid "Unable to remove the db file: errno %d" msgstr "" "Datoteke podatkovne zbirke ni mogoče odstraniti: številka napake je %d" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:342 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:393 msgid "Success" msgstr "Uspešno zaključeno" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:343 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2303 ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:394 #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:131 msgid "Backend is busy" msgstr "Zaledje je zaposleno" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:344 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:395 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:141 msgid "Repository offline" msgstr "Odložišče ni povezano" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:345 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2317 ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:396 #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:148 msgid "Permission denied" msgstr "Ni ustreznih dovoljenj" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:348 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:401 msgid "Authentication Failed" msgstr "Overitev je spodletela" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:349 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:402 msgid "Authentication Required" msgstr "Zahtevana je overitev" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:350 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:403 msgid "Unsupported field" msgstr "Nepodprto polje" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:351 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:405 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:156 msgid "Unsupported authentication method" msgstr "Nepodprt način overitve" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:352 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:406 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:158 msgid "TLS not available" msgstr "TLS ni na voljo" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:353 msgid "Address book does not exist" msgstr "Imenik ne obstaja." #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:354 msgid "Book removed" msgstr "Knjiga je odstranjena" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:355 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:409 msgid "Not available in offline mode" msgstr "Ni na voljo v načinu brez povezave" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:356 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:410 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:160 msgid "Search size limit exceeded" msgstr "Presežena je omejitev velikosti iskanja" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:357 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:411 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:162 msgid "Search time limit exceeded" msgstr "Presežena je omejitev časa iskanja" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:359 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:413 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:166 msgid "Query refused" msgstr "Poizvedba zavrnjena" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:360 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:414 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:152 msgid "Could not cancel" msgstr "Ni mogoče preklicati" #. { E_DATA_BOOK_STATUS_OTHER_ERROR, N_("Other error") }, #. { OtherError, N_("Other error") }, #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:362 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:416 msgid "Invalid server version" msgstr "Neveljavna različica strežnika" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:364 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2301 ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:417 #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:129 msgid "Invalid argument" msgstr "Neveljaven argument" #. Translators: The string for NOT_SUPPORTED error #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:366 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:1060 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:1428 #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:1908 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2340 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:419 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:154 #, c-format msgid "Not supported" msgstr "Ni podprto" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:367 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:420 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:172 #| msgid "Backend is busy" msgid "Backend is not opened yet" msgstr "Ozadnji program še ni odprt" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:368 #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:174 msgid "Object is out of sync" msgstr "Predmet ni usklajen" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:376 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:428 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:170 msgid "Other error" msgstr "Drugačna napaka" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1018 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1324 msgid "Invalid query: " msgstr "Neveljavna poizvedba: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1070 msgid "Cannot open book: " msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti imenika: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1107 msgid "Cannot refresh address book: " msgstr "Ni mogoče osvežiti imenika: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1138 msgid "Cannot get contact: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti stika: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1176 msgid "Cannot get contact list: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti seznama stikov: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1228 msgid "Cannot get contact list uids: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti seznama naslovov UID stikov: %s " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1275 msgid "Cannot add contact: " msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati stika: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1324 msgid "Cannot modify contacts: " msgstr "Ni mogoče spremeniti stikov: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book.c:1366 msgid "Cannot remove contacts: " msgstr "Ni mogoče odstraniti stika: " #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book-factory.c:273 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal-factory.c:276 #, c-format msgid "No backend name in source '%s'" msgstr "Ni imena ozadnjega programa v viru '%s'" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book-factory.c:324 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal-factory.c:330 #, c-format msgid "Missing source UID" msgstr "Manjka vrednost UID vira" #: ../addressbook/libedata-book/e-data-book-factory.c:335 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal-factory.c:340 #, c-format msgid "No such source for UID '%s'" msgstr "Za UID '%s' ni mogoče najti podatkovnega vira" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:574 #, c-format msgid "Server is unreachable (%s)" msgstr "Strežnik ni na voljo (%s)" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:605 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to a server using SSL: %s" msgstr "Povezovanje s strežnikom z uporabo SSL je spodletelo: %s" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:616 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected HTTP status code %d returned (%s)" msgstr "Odgovor HTTP je vrnil napačno kodo stanja %d (%s)" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:635 msgid "CalDAV backend is not loaded yet" msgstr "Ozadnji program CalDAV še ni naložen" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:1072 msgid "Invalid Redirect URL" msgstr "Neveljaven preusmeritveni naslov URL" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:2563 #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:2955 #, c-format msgid "" "Server is unreachable, calendar is opened in read-only mode.\n" "Error message: %s" msgstr "" "Strežnik ni dosegljiv; koledar je odprt v načinu le za branje. \n" "Sporočilo napake: %s" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:2907 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create local cache folder '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti krajevne mape predpomnilnika '%s'" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:3995 msgid "CalDAV does not support bulk additions" msgstr "Sistem CalDAV ne podpira množičnega dodajanja" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:4098 msgid "CalDAV does not support bulk modifications" msgstr "Sistem CalDAV ne podpira množičnega spreminjanja" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:4274 msgid "CalDAV does not support bulk removals" msgstr "Sistem CalDAV ne podpira množičnega odstranjevanja" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:4941 msgid "Calendar doesn't support Free/Busy" msgstr "Koledar ne podpira možnosti prostosti/zasedenosti" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:4950 msgid "Schedule outbox url not found" msgstr "Naslova URL odhodnega predala ni mogoče najti" #: ../calendar/backends/caldav/e-cal-backend-caldav.c:5047 msgid "Unexpected result in schedule-response" msgstr "Nepričakovan rezultat v odzivu" #: ../calendar/backends/contacts/e-cal-backend-contacts.c:889 msgid "Birthday" msgstr "Rojstni dan" #: ../calendar/backends/contacts/e-cal-backend-contacts.c:925 #, c-format msgid "Birthday: %s" msgstr "Rojstni dan: %s" #: ../calendar/backends/contacts/e-cal-backend-contacts.c:956 #, c-format msgid "Anniversary: %s" msgstr "Obletnica: %s" #: ../calendar/backends/file/e-cal-backend-file.c:245 msgid "Cannot save calendar data: Malformed URI." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče shraniti podatkov koledarja: nepravilno oblikovan naslov URI." #: ../calendar/backends/file/e-cal-backend-file.c:252 #: ../calendar/backends/file/e-cal-backend-file.c:258 msgid "Cannot save calendar data" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti podatkov koledarja" #: ../calendar/backends/http/e-cal-backend-http.c:479 #, c-format msgid "Malformed URI: %s" msgstr "Nepravilno oblikovan naslov URI: %s" #: ../calendar/backends/http/e-cal-backend-http.c:570 #, c-format msgid "Redirected to Invalid URI" msgstr "Preusmerjeno na neveljaven naslov URI" #: ../calendar/backends/http/e-cal-backend-http.c:613 #, c-format msgid "Bad file format." msgstr "Napačna oblika datoteke." #: ../calendar/backends/http/e-cal-backend-http.c:623 #, c-format msgid "Not a calendar." msgstr "Ni koledar." #: ../calendar/backends/http/e-cal-backend-http.c:927 #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:494 msgid "Could not create cache file" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti datoteke predpomnilnika" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:170 msgid "Could not retrieve weather data" msgstr "Podatkov vremena ni mogoče pridobiti" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:281 msgid "Weather: Fog" msgstr "Vreme: megleno" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:282 msgid "Weather: Cloudy Night" msgstr "Vreme: oblačna noč" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:283 msgid "Weather: Cloudy" msgstr "Vreme: oblačno" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:284 msgid "Weather: Overcast" msgstr "Vreme: oblačno" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:285 msgid "Weather: Showers" msgstr "Vreme: plohe" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:286 msgid "Weather: Snow" msgstr "Vreme: sneženo" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:287 msgid "Weather: Clear Night" msgstr "Vreme: jasna noč" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:288 msgid "Weather: Sunny" msgstr "Vreme: sončno" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:289 msgid "Weather: Thunderstorms" msgstr "Vreme: nevihtno" #: ../calendar/backends/weather/e-cal-backend-weather.c:410 msgid "Forecast" msgstr "Napoved" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2305 msgid "Repository is offline" msgstr "Odložišče ni na zvezi" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2307 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:255 msgid "No such calendar" msgstr "Ni takega koledarja" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2309 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:257 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:398 msgid "Object not found" msgstr "Predmeta ni mogoče najti" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2311 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:259 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:399 msgid "Invalid object" msgstr "Neveljaven predmet" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2313 msgid "URI not loaded" msgstr "Naslov URI ni naložen" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2315 msgid "URI already loaded" msgstr "Naslov URI je že naložen" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2319 msgid "Unknown User" msgstr "Neznan uporabnik" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2321 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:263 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:400 msgid "Object ID already exists" msgstr "Predmet ID že obstaja" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2323 msgid "Protocol not supported" msgstr "Protokol ni podprt" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2325 msgid "Operation has been canceled" msgstr "Opravilo je preklicano" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2327 msgid "Could not cancel operation" msgstr "Ni mogoče preklicati dejanja" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2329 ../libedataserver/e-client.c:137 msgid "Authentication failed" msgstr "Overitev je spodletela" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2331 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:911 #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:139 msgid "Authentication required" msgstr "Zahtevana je overitev" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2333 msgid "A D-Bus exception has occurred" msgstr "Prišlo je do izjemne napake vodila D-Bus" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal.c:2337 msgid "No error" msgstr "Brez napake" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:261 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:408 msgid "Unknown user" msgstr "Neznan uporabnik" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:265 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:397 msgid "Invalid range" msgstr "Neveljavno območje" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:928 #, c-format msgid "Unknown calendar property '%s'" msgstr "Neznana lastnost koledarja '%s'" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-client.c:943 #, c-format msgid "Cannot change value of calendar property '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti predmeta lastnosti koledarja '%s'" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-component.c:1340 msgid "Untitled appointment" msgstr "Neimenovan sestanek" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4038 msgid "1st" msgstr "1." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4039 msgid "2nd" msgstr "2." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4040 msgid "3rd" msgstr "3." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4041 msgid "4th" msgstr "4." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4042 msgid "5th" msgstr "5." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4043 msgid "6th" msgstr "6." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4044 msgid "7th" msgstr "7." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4045 msgid "8th" msgstr "8." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4046 msgid "9th" msgstr "9." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4047 msgid "10th" msgstr "10." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4048 msgid "11th" msgstr "11." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4049 msgid "12th" msgstr "12." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4050 msgid "13th" msgstr "13." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4051 msgid "14th" msgstr "14." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4052 msgid "15th" msgstr "15." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4053 msgid "16th" msgstr "16." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4054 msgid "17th" msgstr "17." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4055 msgid "18th" msgstr "18." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4056 msgid "19th" msgstr "19." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4057 msgid "20th" msgstr "20." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4058 msgid "21st" msgstr "21." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4059 msgid "22nd" msgstr "22." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4060 msgid "23rd" msgstr "23." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4061 msgid "24th" msgstr "24." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4062 msgid "25th" msgstr "25." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4063 msgid "26th" msgstr "26." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4064 msgid "27th" msgstr "27." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4065 msgid "28th" msgstr "28." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4066 msgid "29th" msgstr "29." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4067 msgid "30th" msgstr "30." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-recur.c:4068 msgid "31st" msgstr "31." #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:707 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:734 #| msgid "High" msgctxt "Priority" msgid "High" msgstr "visoka" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:709 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:736 #| msgid "Normal" msgctxt "Priority" msgid "Normal" msgstr "običajna" #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:711 ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:738 #| msgid "Low" msgctxt "Priority" msgid "Low" msgstr "nizka" #. An empty string is the same as 'None'. #: ../calendar/libecal/e-cal-util.c:732 #| msgid "Undefined" msgctxt "Priority" msgid "Undefined" msgstr "Nedoločeno" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:78 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1056 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1365 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1492 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1541 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects one argument" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje 1 argument" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:85 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:667 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1372 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1380 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the first argument to be a string" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je prvi argument niz" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:160 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects two or three arguments" msgstr "Funkcija \"%s\" zahteva dva ali tri argumente." #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:167 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:256 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:318 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:817 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1063 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1441 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1499 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1548 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the first argument to be a time_t" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je prvi argument time_t" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:176 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:264 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:328 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:826 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the second argument to be a time_t" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je drugi argument time_t" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:186 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the third argument to be a string" msgstr "Funkcija \"%s\" pričakuje tretji argument kot niz." #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:248 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects none or two arguments" msgstr "Funkcija \"%s\" zahteva en ali dva argumenta." #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:311 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:660 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:810 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1434 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects two arguments" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje 2 argumenta" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:596 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:619 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:742 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:774 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:981 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1014 #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1326 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects no arguments" msgstr "\"%s\" ne pričakuje argumentov" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:676 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the second argument to be a string" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je drugi argument niz" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:707 #, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\" expects the first argument to be either \"any\", \"summary\", or " "\"description\", or \"location\", or \"attendee\", or \"organizer\", or " "\"classification\"" msgstr "" "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je prvi argument \"karkoli\", \"povzetek\", \"opis\", " "\"mesto\", \"navzoči\", \"organizator\" ali \"klasifikacija\"" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:878 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects at least one argument" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje vsaj en argument" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:893 #, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\" expects all arguments to be strings or one and only one argument to " "be a boolean false (#f)" msgstr "" "\"%s\" pričakuje, da so vsi argumenti nizi ali da je natanko en argument " "neresnična Boolova vrednost (#f)" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1389 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the first argument to be an ISO 8601 date/time string" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je prvi argument časovni niz ISO 8601" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-cal-backend-sexp.c:1450 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" expects the second argument to be an integer" msgstr "\"%s\" pričakuje, da je drugi argument celo število" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:404 msgid "Unsupported method" msgstr "Nepodprta metoda" #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:407 msgid "Calendar does not exist" msgstr "KOledar ne obstaja" #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1495 msgid "Cannot open calendar: " msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1532 msgid "Cannot refresh calendar: " msgstr "Ni mogoče osvežiti koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1573 msgid "Cannot retrieve calendar object path: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti poti predmeta koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1625 msgid "Cannot retrieve calendar object list: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti seznama predmetov koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1676 msgid "Cannot retrieve calendar free/busy list: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti seznama koledarja prosti/zasedeni: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1719 msgid "Cannot create calendar object: " msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti predmeta koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1787 msgid "Cannot modify calendar object: " msgstr "Ni mogoče spremeniti predmeta koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1865 msgid "Cannot remove calendar object: " msgstr "Ni mogoče odstraniti predmeta koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1951 msgid "Cannot receive calendar objects: " msgstr "Ni mogoče prejeti predmetov koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:1994 msgid "Cannot send calendar objects: " msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati predmetov koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:2046 msgid "Could not retrieve attachment uris: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti naslovov URI prilog: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:2091 msgid "Could not discard reminder: " msgstr "Opomnika ni mogoče zavreči: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:2132 msgid "Could not retrieve calendar time zone: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti časovnega območja koledarja: " #. Translators: This is prefix to a detailed error message #: ../calendar/libedata-cal/e-data-cal.c:2172 msgid "Could not add calendar time zone: " msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati časovnega območja koledarja: " #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:208 #, c-format msgid "Signing is not supported by this cipher" msgstr "Podpisovanje v tem kodirniku ni podprto" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:221 #, c-format msgid "Verifying is not supported by this cipher" msgstr "Preverjanje v tem šifrirniku ni podprto" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:237 #, c-format msgid "Encryption is not supported by this cipher" msgstr "Šifriranje v tem šifrirniku ni podprto" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:251 #, c-format msgid "Decryption is not supported by this cipher" msgstr "Odšifriranje v tem šifrirniku ni podprto" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:264 #, c-format msgid "You may not import keys with this cipher" msgstr "Ključev s to šifro ni mogoče uvoziti" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:278 #, c-format msgid "You may not export keys with this cipher" msgstr "Ključev s to šifro ni mogoče izvoziti" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:819 msgid "Signing message" msgstr "Podpisovanje sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:1060 msgid "Encrypting message" msgstr "Šifriranje sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-cipher-context.c:1187 msgid "Decrypting message" msgstr "Odšifriranje sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-data-cache.c:181 #, c-format msgid "Unable to create cache path" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti poti predpomnilnika" #: ../camel/camel-data-cache.c:442 msgid "Empty cache file" msgstr "Izprazni datoteko predpomnilnika" #: ../camel/camel-data-cache.c:511 #, c-format msgid "Could not remove cache entry: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odstraniti vnosa v predpomnilnik: %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-disco-diary.c:207 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not write log entry: %s\n" "Further operations on this server will not be replayed when you\n" "reconnect to the network." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče zapisati vpisa v dnevnik: %s\n" "Nadaljnja opravila na tem strežniku ne bodo pomnjena, ko se boste\n" "znova povezali v omrežje." #: ../camel/camel-disco-diary.c:279 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not open '%s':\n" "%s\n" "Changes made to this folder will not be resynchronized." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče odpreti `%s':\n" "%s\n" "Spremembe storjene v tej mapi ne bodo ponovno usklajene." #: ../camel/camel-disco-diary.c:326 msgid "Resynchronizing with server" msgstr "Usklajevanje s strežnikom" #: ../camel/camel-disco-folder.c:76 ../camel/camel-offline-folder.c:93 msgid "Downloading new messages for offline mode" msgstr "Prejemanje novih sporočil za delo brez povezave" #: ../camel/camel-disco-folder.c:422 #, c-format msgid "Preparing folder '%s' for offline" msgstr "Pripravljanje mape '%s' na stanje brez povezave" #: ../camel/camel-disco-folder.c:489 ../camel/camel-offline-folder.c:336 msgid "Copy folder content locally for _offline operation" msgstr "Krajevno kopiraj vsebino mape za delo _brez povezave" #: ../camel/camel-disco-store.c:518 ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:618 #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:2242 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:596 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:746 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:987 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:1216 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:291 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:519 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:567 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:659 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:1063 #, c-format msgid "You must be working online to complete this operation" msgstr "Za dokončanje tega opravila je treba biti povezan v omrežje" #: ../camel/camel-file-utils.c:732 #, c-format msgid "Canceled" msgstr "Preklicano" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:916 ../camel/camel-filter-search.c:797 #, c-format msgid "Failed to create child process '%s': %s" msgstr "Ustvarjanje podrejenega opravila '%s' je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:964 #, c-format msgid "Invalid message stream received from %s: %s" msgstr "Neveljaven tok sporočil, sprejet iz %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1171 ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1180 msgid "Syncing folders" msgstr "Usklajevanje mape" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1278 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing filter: %s: %s" msgstr "Napaka med razčlenjevanem filtra: %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1289 #, c-format msgid "Error executing filter: %s: %s" msgstr "Napaka filtriranja: %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1385 #, c-format msgid "Unable to open spool folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče odprti vrstilne mape" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1397 #, c-format msgid "Unable to process spool folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče obdelati vrstilne mape" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1420 #, c-format msgid "Getting message %d (%d%%)" msgstr "Pridobivanje sporočila %d (%d%%)" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1429 ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1451 #, c-format msgid "Failed on message %d" msgstr "Spodletelo opravilo na sporočilu %d" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1470 ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1584 msgid "Syncing folder" msgstr "Usklajevanje mape" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1475 ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1592 msgid "Complete" msgstr "Končano" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1538 #, c-format msgid "Getting message %d of %d" msgstr "Dobivanje sporočila %d od %d" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1556 #, c-format msgid "Failed at message %d of %d" msgstr "Opravilo je spodletelo pri sporočilu %d od %d" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1752 ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1779 #, c-format msgid "Execution of filter '%s' failed: " msgstr "Uveljavljanje filtra '%s' je spodletelo: " #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1769 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing filter '%s': %s: %s" msgstr "Napaka razčlenjevanja filtra '%s': %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-filter-driver.c:1788 #, c-format msgid "Error executing filter '%s': %s: %s" msgstr "Napaka filtriranja '%s': %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-filter-search.c:138 msgid "Failed to retrieve message" msgstr "Pridobivanje poročila je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-filter-search.c:537 msgid "Invalid arguments to (system-flag)" msgstr "Neveljavni argumenti pri (system-flag)" #: ../camel/camel-filter-search.c:555 msgid "Invalid arguments to (user-tag)" msgstr "Neveljavni argumenti pri (user-tag)" #: ../camel/camel-filter-search.c:1046 ../camel/camel-filter-search.c:1055 #, c-format msgid "Error executing filter search: %s: %s" msgstr "Napaka med izvajanjem iskanja s filtrom: %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:311 #, c-format msgid "Learning new spam message in '%s'" msgid_plural "Learning new spam messages in '%s'" msgstr[0] "Preiskovanje novih neželenih sporočil v %s" msgstr[1] "Preiskovanje novih neželenih sporočil v %s" msgstr[2] "Preiskovanje novih neželenih sporočil v %s" msgstr[3] "Preiskovanje novih neželenih sporočil v %s" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:351 #, c-format msgid "Learning new ham message in '%s'" msgid_plural "Learning new ham messages in '%s'" msgstr[0] "Preiskovanje novih želenih sporočil v %s" msgstr[1] "Preiskovanje novih želenih sporočil v %s" msgstr[2] "Preiskovanje novih želenih sporočil v %s" msgstr[3] "Preiskovanje novih želenih sporočil v %s" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:399 #, c-format msgid "Filtering new message in '%s'" msgid_plural "Filtering new messages in '%s'" msgstr[0] "Filtriranje novih sporočil v '%s'" msgstr[1] "Filtriranje novih sporočil v '%s'" msgstr[2] "Filtriranje novih sporočil v '%s'" msgstr[3] "Filtriranje novih sporočil v '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:1009 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:321 msgid "Moving messages" msgstr "Premikanje sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:1012 msgid "Copying messages" msgstr "Kopiranje sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:1332 #, c-format msgid "Quota information not supported for folder '%s'" msgstr "Podatki količinske omejitve za mapo '%s' niso podprti." #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:3578 #, c-format msgid "Expunging folder '%s'" msgstr "Uničevanje mape '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:3810 #, c-format msgid "Retrieving message '%s' in %s" msgstr "Pridobivanje sporočila '%s' v %s" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:3965 #, c-format msgid "Retrieving quota information for '%s'" msgstr "Pridobivanje podatkov količinske omejitve porabe za '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-folder.c:4205 #, c-format msgid "Refreshing folder '%s'" msgstr "Osveževanje mape '%s'" #. Translators: The '%s' is an element type name, part of an expressing language #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:888 ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:931 #, c-format msgid "(%s) requires a single bool result" msgstr "(%s) zahteva enojen logični rezultat" #. Translators: Each '%s' is an element type name, part of an expressing language #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:966 #, c-format msgid "(%s) not allowed inside %s" msgstr "(%s) ni dovoljeno znotraj %s" #. Translators: The '%s' is an element type name, part of an expressing language #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:973 ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:981 #, c-format msgid "(%s) requires a match type string" msgstr "(%s) zahteva ustrezen niz" #. Translators: The '%s' is an element type name, part of an expressing language #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:1009 #, c-format msgid "(%s) expects an array result" msgstr "(%s) kot rezultat pričakuje polje" #. Translators: The '%s' is an element type name, part of an expressing language #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:1019 #, c-format msgid "(%s) requires the folder set" msgstr "(%s) zahteva seznam map" #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:1932 ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:2098 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot parse search expression: %s:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče razčleniti iskalnega izraza %s:\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:1944 ../camel/camel-folder-search.c:2110 #, c-format msgid "" "Error executing search expression: %s:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Napaka med izvajanjem iskalnega izraza %s:\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:730 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:735 #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1398 #, c-format msgid "Failed to execute gpg: %s" msgstr "Izvajanje gpg je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:735 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:914 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "neznano" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:800 #, c-format msgid "" "Unexpected GnuPG status message encountered:\n" "\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Nepričakovano sporočilo o stanju GnuPG:\n" "\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:836 #, c-format msgid "Failed to parse gpg userid hint." msgstr "Razčlenjevanje namiga za userid gpg je spodletelo." #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:861 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:876 #, c-format msgid "Failed to parse gpg passphrase request." msgstr "Razčlenjevanje zahteve za šifrirno geslo gpg je spodletelo." #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:897 #, c-format msgid "" "You need a PIN to unlock the key for your\n" "SmartCard: \"%s\"" msgstr "" "Zahtevana je koda PIN za odklepanje ključa\n" "pametne kartice: \"%s\"" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:901 #, c-format msgid "" "You need a passphrase to unlock the key for\n" "user: \"%s\"" msgstr "" "Za odklepanje ključa uporabnika potrebujete\n" "šifrirno geslo: \"%s\"" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:907 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected request from GnuPG for '%s'" msgstr "Nepričakovana zahteva GnuPG za '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:919 msgid "" "Note the encrypted content doesn't contain information about a recipient, " "thus there will be a password prompt for each of stored private key." msgstr "" "Šifrirana vsebina ne vsebuje podatkov o prejemniku, zato bo sistem zahteval " "geslo za vsak shranjen zasebni ključ." #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:950 ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:524 #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:268 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-summary.c:402 #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:150 #, c-format msgid "Cancelled" msgstr "Preklicano" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:971 #, c-format msgid "Failed to unlock secret key: 3 bad passphrases given." msgstr "" "Odklepanje tajnega ključa je spodletelo: trije napačni vnosi šifrirnega " "gesla." #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:984 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected response from GnuPG: %s" msgstr "Nepričakovan odziv vstavka GnuPG: %s" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1115 #, c-format msgid "Failed to encrypt: No valid recipients specified." msgstr "Šifriranje je spodletelo: ni navedenih veljavnih prejemnikov." #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1665 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:846 msgid "Could not generate signing data: " msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti podatkov za podpis: " #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1715 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1923 #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2033 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2184 #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2284 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2332 msgid "Failed to execute gpg." msgstr "Izvajanje gpg je spodletelo." #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1794 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1802 #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1810 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1830 #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:973 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:987 #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:996 #, c-format msgid "Cannot verify message signature: Incorrect message format" msgstr "Ni mogoče preveriti podpisa sporočila: neveljavna oblika sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1876 msgid "Cannot verify message signature: " msgstr "Ni mogoče preveriti veljavnosti podpisa sporočila: " #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:1999 msgid "Could not generate encrypting data: " msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti podatkov za šifriranje: " #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2052 msgid "This is a digitally encrypted message part" msgstr "To je digitalno podpisan del sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2110 ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2119 #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2142 #, c-format msgid "Cannot decrypt message: Incorrect message format" msgstr "Ni mogoče odšifrirati sporočila: neveljavna oblika sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2130 #, c-format msgid "Failed to decrypt MIME part: protocol error" msgstr "Odšifriranje dela MIME je spodletelo: napaka protokola" #: ../camel/camel-gpg-context.c:2225 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1287 msgid "Encrypted content" msgstr "Šifrirana vsebina" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:643 #, c-format msgid "No quota information available for folder '%s'" msgstr "Podatki količinske omejitve za mapo '%s' niso na voljo." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:727 ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:801 #, c-format msgid "No destination folder specified" msgstr "Ciljna mapa ni določena" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:747 msgid "Unable to move junk messages" msgstr "Ni mogoče premakniti neželenih sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:821 msgid "Unable to move deleted messages" msgstr "Ni mogoče premakniti izbrisanih sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:1008 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:800 msgid "Apply message _filters to this folder" msgstr "Uve_ljavi filtre sporočil v tej mapi" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:1114 #, c-format msgid "Could not create folder summary for %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti povzetka mape za %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-folder.c:1123 #, c-format msgid "Could not create cache for %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti predpomnilnika za %s: " #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:1333 msgid "Server disconnected" msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom je prekinjena" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:1772 msgid "Error writing to cache stream" msgstr "Napaka med pisanjem v predpomnilnik pretoka" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:2457 #, c-format msgid "" "Alert from IMAP server %s:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Opozorilo strežnika IMAP %s:\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:3053 #, c-format msgid "Not authenticated" msgstr "Ni overjeno" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:3131 msgid "Error performing IDLE" msgstr "Napaka med izvajanjem ukaza IDLE" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4030 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to IMAP server %s in secure mode: %s" msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom IMAP %s v varnem načinu je spodletela: %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4031 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:203 msgid "STARTTLS not supported" msgstr "STARTTLS ni podprt" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4072 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to IMAP server %s in secure mode: " msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom IMAP %s v varnem načinu je spodletela: " #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4150 #, c-format msgid "IMAP server %s does not support %s authentication" msgstr "Strežnik IMAP %s ne podpira zahtevanega načina overitve %s." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4161 ../camel/camel-session.c:494 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:303 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:748 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:505 #, c-format msgid "No support for %s authentication" msgstr "Ni podpore za način overitve %s." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4180 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:409 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:595 msgid "Cannot authenticate without a username" msgstr "Brez uporabniškega imena ni mogoče overiti povezave." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4189 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:604 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:669 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:690 msgid "Authentication password not available" msgstr "Geslo za overitev ni na voljo." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4402 msgid "Error fetching message" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4451 ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4458 msgid "Failed to close the tmp stream" msgstr "Zapiranje pretoka tmp je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4487 msgid "Failed to copy the tmp file" msgstr "Kopiranje datoteke tmp je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4612 msgid "Error moving messages" msgstr "Napaka pri premikanju sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4616 msgid "Error copying messages" msgstr "Napaka med kopiranjem sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4783 msgid "Error appending message" msgstr "Napaka med pripenjanjem sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:4980 msgid "Error fetching message headers" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem glave sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5143 msgid "Error retrieving message" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5274 ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5495 #, c-format msgid "Fetching summary information for new messages in '%s'" msgstr "Pridobivanje podatkov povzetka za nova sporočila v '%s'." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5334 #, c-format msgid "Scanning for changed messages in '%s'" msgstr "Preiskovanje spremenjenih sporočil v '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5389 msgid "Error fetching new messages" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem novih sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5601 msgid "Error while fetching messages" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5609 ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5642 #, c-format msgid "Fetching summary information for %d message in '%s'" msgid_plural "Fetching summary information for %d messages in '%s'" msgstr[0] "Pridobivanje podatkov povzetka za %d novih sporočil v '%s'." msgstr[1] "Pridobivanje podatkov povzetka za %d novo sporočilo v '%s'." msgstr[2] "Pridobivanje podatkov povzetka za %d novi sporočili v '%s'." msgstr[3] "Pridobivanje podatkov povzetka za %d nova sporočila v '%s'." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5776 ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5806 msgid "Error refreshing folder" msgstr "Napaka med osveževanjem mape" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:5928 msgid "Error expunging message" msgstr "Napaka med uničevanjem sporočila" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6036 msgid "Error fetching folders" msgstr "Napaka med pridobivanjem map" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6119 msgid "Error subscribing to folder" msgstr "Napaka naročanja na mapo" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6181 msgid "Error creating folder" msgstr "Napaka med ustvarjanjem mape" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6234 msgid "Error deleting folder" msgstr "Napaka med brisanjem mape" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6305 msgid "Error renaming folder" msgstr "Napaka med preimenovanjem mape" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6379 msgid "Error retrieving quota information" msgstr "Napaka pridobivanja podatkov količinske omejitve" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6437 msgid "Search failed" msgstr "Iskanje je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6499 msgid "Error performing NOOP" msgstr "Napaka med izvajanjem ukaza NOOP" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6607 msgid "Error syncing changes" msgstr "Napaka med usklajevanjem sprememb" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:6912 msgid "Lost connection to IMAP server" msgstr "Povezava do strežnika IMAP je prekinjena" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:7359 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get message with message ID %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče dobiti sporočila zID %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:7360 msgid "No such message available." msgstr "Na voljo ni takšnega sporočila." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:7521 ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:7536 msgid "Cannot create spool file: " msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti vrstilne datoteke: " #: ../camel/camel-imapx-server.c:8276 msgid "IMAP server does not support quotas" msgstr "Strežnik IMAP ne podpira količinskih omejitev" #. create a dummy "." parent inbox, use to scan, then put back at the top level #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:203 ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:1143 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:473 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:316 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:752 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:758 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:842 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:395 msgid "Inbox" msgstr "Dohodna pošta" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:487 #, c-format msgid "IMAP server %s" msgstr "Strežnik IMAP %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:490 #, c-format msgid "IMAP service for %s on %s" msgstr "Storitev IMAP za %s na %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:591 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:95 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:83 msgid "Password" msgstr "Geslo" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:593 msgid "" "This option will connect to the IMAP server using a plaintext password." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom IMAP z nešifriranim geslom." #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:687 #, c-format msgid "No such folder %s" msgstr "Mapa %s ne obstaja" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:1413 #, c-format msgid "Retrieving folder list for %s" msgstr "Pridobivanje seznama map za %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:1783 #, c-format msgid "" "The folder name \"%s\" is invalid because it contains the character \"%c\"" msgstr "Ime mape \"%s\" je neveljavno, ker vsebuje znak \"%c\"" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:1794 #, c-format msgid "Unknown parent folder: %s" msgstr "Neznana nadrejena mapa: %s" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-store.c:1804 #, c-format msgid "The parent folder is not allowed to contain subfolders" msgstr "V nadrejeni mapi ni dovoljeno vsebovati podmape" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-stream.c:98 #, c-format msgid "Source stream returned no data" msgstr "Izvorni pretok ne vsebuje podatkov" #: ../camel/camel-imapx-stream.c:107 #, c-format msgid "Source stream unavailable" msgstr "Izvorni pretok ni na voljo" #: ../camel/camel-junk-filter.c:168 msgid "Synchronizing junk database" msgstr "Usklajevanje podatkovne zbirke neželene pošte" #: ../camel/camel-lock.c:106 #, c-format msgid "Could not create lock file for %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti datoteke zaklepa za %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-lock.c:149 #, c-format msgid "Timed out trying to get lock file on %s. Try again later." msgstr "" "Med pridobivanjem datoteke zaklepa na %s je pretekla časovna omejitev. " "Poskusite znova kasneje." #: ../camel/camel-lock.c:211 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get lock using fcntl(2): %s" msgstr "Zaklepanje s pomočjo fcntl(2) je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-lock.c:278 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get lock using flock(2): %s" msgstr "Zaklepanje s pomočjo flock(2) je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-lock-client.c:106 #, c-format msgid "Cannot build locking helper pipe: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti cevi za pomoč pri zaklepanju: %s" #: ../camel/camel-lock-client.c:130 #, c-format msgid "Cannot fork locking helper: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče razvejiti pomočnika za zaklepanje: %s" #: ../camel/camel-lock-client.c:211 ../camel/camel-lock-client.c:239 #, c-format msgid "Could not lock '%s': protocol error with lock-helper" msgstr "Ni mogoče zakleniti '%s': napaka v protokolu s programom lock-helper" #: ../camel/camel-lock-client.c:227 #, c-format msgid "Could not lock '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče zakleniti '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:105 #, c-format msgid "Could not check mail file %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preveriti poštne datoteke %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:119 #, c-format msgid "Could not open mail file %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti poštne datoteke %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:129 #, c-format msgid "Could not open temporary mail file %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti začasne poštne datoteke %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:159 #, c-format msgid "Failed to store mail in temp file %s: %s" msgstr "Shranjevanju pošte v začasno datoteko %s je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:193 #, c-format msgid "Could not create pipe: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti cevi: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:207 #, c-format msgid "Could not fork: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče razvejiti: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:245 #, c-format msgid "Movemail program failed: %s" msgstr "Program movemail je spodletel: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:246 msgid "(Unknown error)" msgstr "(Neznana napaka)" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:273 #, c-format msgid "Error reading mail file: %s" msgstr "Napaka med branjem poštne datoteke: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:286 #, c-format msgid "Error writing mail temp file: %s" msgstr "Napaka med pisanjem začasne poštne datoteke: %s" #: ../camel/camel-movemail.c:493 ../camel/camel-movemail.c:562 #, c-format msgid "Error copying mail temp file: %s" msgstr "Napaka med kopiranjem začasne poštne datoteke: %s" #: ../camel/camel-multipart-signed.c:297 #, c-format msgid "No content available" msgstr "Vsebina ni na voljo" #: ../camel/camel-multipart-signed.c:305 #, c-format msgid "No signature available" msgstr "Podpis ni na voljo" #: ../camel/camel-multipart-signed.c:689 #, c-format msgid "parse error" msgstr "napaka med razčlenjevanjem" #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:704 #, c-format msgid "Resolving: %s" msgstr "Razreševanje: %s" #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:727 msgid "Host lookup failed" msgstr "Iskanje gostitelja je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:733 #, c-format msgid "Host lookup '%s' failed. Check your host name for spelling errors." msgstr "" "Poizvedba gostitelja '%s' je spodletela. Preverite napake v črkovanju imena " "gostitelja." #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:737 #, c-format msgid "Host lookup '%s' failed: %s" msgstr "Iskanje gostitelja '%s' je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:858 msgid "Resolving address" msgstr "Razreševanje naslova" #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:879 msgid "Name lookup failed" msgstr "Iskanje imena je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:886 msgid "Name lookup failed. Check your host name for spelling errors." msgstr "" "Poizvedba imena je spodletela. Preverite napake v črkovanju imena gostitelja." #: ../camel/camel-net-utils.c:890 #, c-format msgid "Name lookup failed: %s" msgstr "Iskanje imena je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/camel-network-service.c:354 #, c-format msgid "Could not connect to '%s:%s': " msgstr "Ni se mogoče povezati z odjemalcem '%s:%s': " #: ../camel/camel-offline-folder.c:212 #, c-format msgid "Syncing messages in folder '%s' to disk" msgstr "Usklajevanje sporočil v mapi '%s' z diskom" #: ../camel/camel-provider.c:58 msgid "Virtual folder email provider" msgstr "Ponudnik navidezne mape elektronske pošte" #: ../camel/camel-provider.c:60 msgid "For reading mail as a query of another set of folders" msgstr "Za branje pošte kot poizvedbe po drugem sklopu map" #: ../camel/camel-provider.c:263 #, c-format msgid "Could not load %s: Module loading not supported on this system." msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti %s: nalaganje modulov na tem sistemu ni podprto." #: ../camel/camel-provider.c:272 #, c-format msgid "Could not load %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-provider.c:281 #, c-format msgid "Could not load %s: No initialization code in module." msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti %s: v modulu ni kode začenjanja." #: ../camel/camel-provider.c:429 ../camel/camel-session.c:406 #, c-format msgid "No provider available for protocol '%s'" msgstr "Na voljo ni nobenega ponudnika za protokol '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-anonymous.c:35 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:85 msgid "Anonymous" msgstr "Anonimno" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-anonymous.c:37 msgid "This option will connect to the server using an anonymous login." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom z uporabo anonimne prijave." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-anonymous.c:70 #, c-format msgid "Authentication failed." msgstr "Overitev je spodletela." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-anonymous.c:81 #, c-format msgid "" "Invalid email address trace information:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Neveljavni podatki o izvoru e-poštnega naslova:\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-anonymous.c:95 #, c-format msgid "" "Invalid opaque trace information:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Neveljavni podatki sledenja:\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-anonymous.c:109 #, c-format msgid "" "Invalid trace information:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Neveljavni podati sledenja:\n" "%s" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-cram-md5.c:46 msgid "CRAM-MD5" msgstr "CRAM-MD5" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-cram-md5.c:48 msgid "" "This option will connect to the server using a secure CRAM-MD5 password, if " "the server supports it." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom z uporabo varnega gesla CRAM-" "MD5, če to podpira strežnik." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:59 msgid "DIGEST-MD5" msgstr "DIGEST-MD5" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:61 msgid "" "This option will connect to the server using a secure DIGEST-MD5 password, " "if the server supports it." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom z uporabo varnega gesla " "DIGEST-MD5, če to podpira strežnik." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:855 #, c-format msgid "Server challenge too long (>2048 octets)" msgstr "Strežnikov izziv predolg (>2048 oktetov)" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:866 #, c-format msgid "Server challenge invalid\n" msgstr "Strežnikov izziv ni veljaven\n" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:874 #, c-format msgid "Server challenge contained invalid \"Quality of Protection\" token" msgstr "" "Strežnikov izziv je vseboval neveljaven žeton \"Quality of Protection\"" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:907 #, c-format msgid "Server response did not contain authorization data" msgstr "Odziv strežnika ni vseboval podatkov o pooblastilih" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:928 #, c-format msgid "Server response contained incomplete authorization data" msgstr "Odziv strežnika je vseboval nepopolne podatke o pooblastilih" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-digest-md5.c:941 #, c-format msgid "Server response does not match" msgstr "Odziv strežnika ne ustreza" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:91 msgid "GSSAPI" msgstr "GSSAPI" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:93 msgid "" "This option will connect to the server using Kerberos 5 authentication." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom z uporabo overitve Kerberos " "4." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:134 msgid "" "The specified mechanism is not supported by the provided credential, or is " "unrecognized by the implementation." msgstr "" "Navedenega načina ne podpirajo ponujene poverilnice ali pa ga izvedba ne " "prepozna." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:139 msgid "The provided target_name parameter was ill-formed." msgstr "Ponujen parameter target_name je napačno oblikovan." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:142 msgid "" "The provided target_name parameter contained an invalid or unsupported type " "of name." msgstr "" "Ponujen parameter target_name je vseboval neveljavno ali nepodprto vrsto " "imena." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:146 msgid "" "The input_token contains different channel bindings to those specified via " "the input_chan_bindings parameter." msgstr "" "Žeton input_token vsebuje drugačne kanalske povezave, kot so navedene v " "parametru input_chan_bindings." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:151 msgid "" "The input_token contains an invalid signature, or a signature that could not " "be verified." msgstr "" "Žeton input_token vsebuje neveljaven podpis ali pa podpis, ki se ga ne da " "overiti." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:155 msgid "" "The supplied credentials were not valid for context initiation, or the " "credential handle did not reference any credentials." msgstr "" "Priskrbljene poverilnice niso veljavne za začenjanje vsebine ali pa se " "ročnik poverilnic ni skliceval na nobeno poverilnico." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:160 msgid "The supplied context handle did not refer to a valid context." msgstr "Ponujen ročnik vsebine se ne sklicuje na veljavno vsebino." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:163 msgid "The consistency checks performed on the input_token failed." msgstr "Preizkus skladnosti na input_token je spodletel." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:166 msgid "The consistency checks performed on the credential failed." msgstr "Preizkus skladnosti poverilnic je spodletel." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:169 msgid "The referenced credentials have expired." msgstr "Sklicane poverilnice so potekle." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:175 ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:340 #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:388 ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:405 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:612 #, c-format msgid "Bad authentication response from server." msgstr "Strežnik ni sprejel odziva podatkov overitve." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-gssapi.c:417 #, c-format msgid "Unsupported security layer." msgstr "Nepodprt varnostni sloj." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-login.c:40 msgid "Login" msgstr "Prijava" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-login.c:42 ../camel/camel-sasl-plain.c:46 msgid "This option will connect to the server using a simple password." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom z uporabo enostavnega gesla." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-login.c:110 #, c-format msgid "Unknown authentication state." msgstr "Neznano stanje overitve." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-ntlm.c:48 msgid "NTLM / SPA" msgstr "NTLM / SPA" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-ntlm.c:50 msgid "" "This option will connect to a Windows-based server using NTLM / Secure " "Password Authentication." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila povezavo s strežnikom Oken z uporabo overitve NTLM " "/ Secure Password Authentication." #: ../camel/camel-sasl-plain.c:44 msgid "PLAIN" msgstr "ČISTO" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-popb4smtp.c:46 msgid "POP before SMTP" msgstr "POP pred SMTP" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-popb4smtp.c:48 msgid "This option will authorise a POP connection before attempting SMTP" msgstr "" "Z možnostjo bo omogočena pooblaščena povezava POP pred poskušanjem SMTP" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-popb4smtp.c:84 msgid "POP Source UID" msgstr "UID vira POP" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-popb4smtp.c:98 #, c-format msgid "POP Before SMTP authentication using an unknown transport" msgstr "Overitev POP pred SMTP z uporabo neznanega prenosa" #: ../camel/camel-sasl-popb4smtp.c:110 ../camel/camel-sasl-popb4smtp.c:119 #, c-format msgid "POP Before SMTP authentication attempted with a %s service" msgstr "Overitev POP pred SMTP z uporabo storitve %s" #: ../camel/camel-search-private.c:116 #, c-format msgid "Regular expression compilation failed: %s: %s" msgstr "Prevajanje logičnega izraza je spodletelo: %s: %s" #: ../camel/camel-session.c:415 #, c-format msgid "Invalid GType registered for protocol '%s'" msgstr "Vpisan je neveljaven predmet GType za protokol '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-session.c:509 #, c-format msgid "%s authentication failed" msgstr "Overitev %s je spodletela." #: ../camel/camel-session.c:645 msgid "Forwarding messages is not supported" msgstr "Posredovanje sporočil ni podprto." #. Translators: The first argument is the account type #. * (e.g. "IMAP"), the second is the user name, and the #. * third is the host name. #: ../camel/camel-session.c:1420 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the %s password for %s on host %s." msgstr "Vnesite %s geslo za %s na gostitelju %s" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:351 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1074 #, c-format msgid "Cannot find certificate for '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti potrdila za '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:379 msgid "Cannot create CMS message" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti sporočila CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:384 msgid "Cannot create CMS signed data" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti podpisanih podatkov CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:390 msgid "Cannot attach CMS signed data" msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti podpisanih podatkov CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:397 msgid "Cannot attach CMS data" msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti podatkov CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:403 msgid "Cannot create CMS Signer information" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti podatkov o podpisniku CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:409 msgid "Cannot find certificate chain" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti verige potrdil" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:415 msgid "Cannot add CMS Signing time" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati časa podpisa CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:439 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:454 #, c-format msgid "Encryption certificate for '%s' does not exist" msgstr "Šifrirno potrdilo za '%s' ne obstaja" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:461 msgid "Cannot add SMIMEEncKeyPrefs attribute" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati atributa SMIMEEncKeyPrefs" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:466 msgid "Cannot add MS SMIMEEncKeyPrefs attribute" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati atributa MS SMIMEEncKeyPrefs" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:471 msgid "Cannot add encryption certificate" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati šifrirnega potrdila" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:477 msgid "Cannot add CMS Signer information" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati podatkov o podpisniku CMS" #. Translators: A fallback message when couldn't verify an SMIME signature #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:510 msgid "Unverified" msgstr "Nepreverjeno" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:512 msgid "Good signature" msgstr "Dober podpis" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:514 msgid "Bad signature" msgstr "Slab podpis" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:516 msgid "Content tampered with or altered in transit" msgstr "Vsebina je bila med potjo spremenjena" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:518 msgid "Signing certificate not found" msgstr "Potrdila za podpisovanje ni mogoče najti" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:520 msgid "Signing certificate not trusted" msgstr "Potrdilu za podpisovanje ni mogoče zaupati" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:522 msgid "Signature algorithm unknown" msgstr "Neznan algoritem podpisa" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:524 msgid "Signature algorithm unsupported" msgstr "Nepodprt algoritem podpisa" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:526 msgid "Malformed signature" msgstr "Nepravilen podpis" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:528 msgid "Processing error" msgstr "Napaka med obdelavo" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:573 msgid "No signed data in signature" msgstr "V podpisu ni podpisanih podatkov" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:578 msgid "Digests missing from enveloped data" msgstr "V ovitih podatkih manjka izvleček" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:591 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:602 msgid "Cannot calculate digests" msgstr "Ni mogoče izračunati izvlečkov" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:609 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:613 msgid "Cannot set message digests" msgstr "Ni mogoče določiti izvlečkov sporočil" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:623 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:628 msgid "Certificate import failed" msgstr "Uvoz potrdila je spodletel" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:638 #, c-format msgid "Certificate is the only message, cannot verify certificates" msgstr "Potrdilo je edino sporočilo, ki pa ga ni mogoče preveriti." #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:641 #, c-format msgid "Certificate is the only message, certificates imported and verified" msgstr "Potrdilo je edino sporočilo, je uvoženo in preverjeno." #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:645 msgid "Cannot find signature digests" msgstr "Izvlečkov sporočil ni mogoče najti" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:662 #, c-format msgid "Signer: %s <%s>: %s\n" msgstr "Podpisnik: %s <%s>: %s\n" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:858 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1148 msgid "Cannot create encoder context" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti vsebine šifrirnika" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:864 msgid "Failed to add data to CMS encoder" msgstr "Dodajanje podatkov v šifrirnik CMS je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:869 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1165 msgid "Failed to encode data" msgstr "Šifriranje podatkov je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1013 ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1262 msgid "Decoder failed" msgstr "Dejanje odšifrirnika je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1082 msgid "Cannot find common bulk encryption algorithm" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti splošnega algoritma za množično šifriranje" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1090 msgid "Cannot allocate slot for encryption bulk key" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti reže za množični šifrirni ključ" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1101 msgid "Cannot create CMS Message" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti sporočila CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1107 msgid "Cannot create CMS Enveloped data" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti podatkov zavitih v CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1113 msgid "Cannot attach CMS Enveloped data" msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti podatkov zavitih v CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1119 msgid "Cannot attach CMS data object" msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti podatkovnega predmeta CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1128 msgid "Cannot create CMS Recipient information" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti podatkov prejemnika za CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1133 msgid "Cannot add CMS Recipient information" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati podatkov prejemnika za CMS" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1159 msgid "Failed to add data to encoder" msgstr "Dodajanje podatkov v šifrirnik je spodletelo" #: ../camel/camel-smime-context.c:1269 msgid "S/MIME Decrypt: No encrypted content found" msgstr "Odšifriranje S/MIME: Šifrirane vsebine ni mogoče najti" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:1999 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create folder '%s': folder exists" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape '%s': mapa že obstaja" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2042 #, c-format msgid "Opening folder '%s'" msgstr "Odpiranje mape '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2231 #, c-format msgid "Scanning folders in '%s'" msgstr "Preiskovanje map v '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2259 ../camel/camel-store.c:2304 #: ../camel/camel-vtrash-folder.c:48 msgid "Trash" msgstr "Smeti" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2273 ../camel/camel-store.c:2321 #: ../camel/camel-vtrash-folder.c:50 msgid "Junk" msgstr "Neželena pošta" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2774 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create folder: %s: folder exists" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape: %s: mapa že obstaja" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2788 #, c-format msgid "Creating folder '%s'" msgstr "Ustvarjanje mape '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:2906 ../camel/camel-vee-store.c:418 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:315 #, c-format msgid "Cannot delete folder: %s: Invalid operation" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati mape: %s: neveljavno dejanje" #: ../camel/camel-store.c:3049 ../camel/camel-vee-store.c:469 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:841 #, c-format msgid "Cannot rename folder: %s: Invalid operation" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati mape %s: neveljavno dejanje" #: ../camel/camel-stream-filter.c:346 msgid "Only reset to beginning is supported with CamelStreamFilter" msgstr "S CamelStreamFilter je podprta le ponastavitev na začetek" #: ../camel/camel-stream-null.c:78 msgid "Only reset to beginning is supported with CamelHttpStream" msgstr "S CamelHttpStream je podprta le ponastavitev na začetek" #: ../camel/camel-stream-process.c:275 #, c-format msgid "Connection cancelled" msgstr "Povezava prekinjena" #: ../camel/camel-stream-process.c:280 #, c-format msgid "Could not connect with command \"%s\": %s" msgstr "Ni se mogoče povezati z ukazom \"%s\": %s" #: ../camel/camel-subscribable.c:395 #, c-format msgid "Subscribing to folder '%s'" msgstr "Naročanje na mapo '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-subscribable.c:527 #, c-format msgid "Unsubscribing from folder '%s'" msgstr "Preklic naročnine na mapo '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:310 #, c-format msgid "NSPR error code %d" msgstr "Koda napake NSPR %d" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:649 ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:662 #, c-format msgid "The proxy host does not support SOCKS4" msgstr "Posredovalni gostitelj ne podpira strežnika SOCKS4" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:675 #, c-format msgid "The proxy host denied our request: code %d" msgstr "Posredniški gostitelj zavrača zahtevo: koda %d" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:773 ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:781 #, c-format msgid "The proxy host does not support SOCKS5" msgstr "Posredovalni gostitelj ne podpira strežnika SOCKS5" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:789 #, c-format msgid "Could not find a suitable authentication type: code 0x%x" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti ustrezne vrste podpore za overitev: koda 0x%x" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:801 msgid "General SOCKS server failure" msgstr "Splošna napaka strežnika SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:802 msgid "SOCKS server's rules do not allow connection" msgstr "Pravila strežnika SOCKS ne dovolijo povezave" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:803 msgid "Network is unreachable from SOCKS server" msgstr "Omrežje ni dosegljiv preko strežnika SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:804 msgid "Host is unreachable from SOCKS server" msgstr "Gostitelj ni dosegljiv preko strežnika SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:805 msgid "Connection refused" msgstr "Povezava je zavrnjena" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:806 msgid "Time-to-live expired" msgstr "Čas ohranjevanja je pretekel" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:807 msgid "Command not supported by SOCKS server" msgstr "Ukaz ni podprt na strežniku SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:808 msgid "Address type not supported by SOCKS server" msgstr "Vrsta naslova ni podprta na strežniku SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:809 msgid "Unknown error from SOCKS server" msgstr "Neznana napaka strežnika SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:842 #, c-format msgid "Got unknown address type from SOCKS server" msgstr "Pridobljena je neznana vrsta naslova preko strežnika SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:860 #, c-format msgid "Incomplete reply from SOCKS server" msgstr "Nepopoln odziv strežnika SOCKS" #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:880 #, c-format msgid "Hostname is too long (maximum is 255 characters)" msgstr "Ime gostitelja je predolgo (največ 255 znakov)" #. SOCKS5 #. reserved - must be 0 #: ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:912 ../camel/camel-tcp-stream-raw.c:922 #, c-format msgid "Invalid reply from proxy server" msgstr "Posredovalni strežnik se je neveljavno odzval" #: ../camel/camel-url.c:331 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse URL '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti naslova URL '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-vee-folder.c:494 #, c-format msgid "Updating folder '%s'" msgstr "Posodabljanje mape '%s'" #: ../camel/camel-vee-folder.c:855 ../camel/camel-vee-folder.c:965 #, c-format msgid "Cannot copy or move messages into a Virtual Folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče kopirati ali premikati sporočil v Navidezno mapo" #: ../camel/camel-vee-folder.c:888 #, c-format msgid "No such message %s in %s" msgstr "Ni takšnega sporočila %s v %s" #: ../camel/camel-vee-folder.c:941 #, c-format msgid "Error storing '%s': " msgstr "Napaka med shranjevanjem '%s': " #: ../camel/camel-vee-folder.c:1171 msgid "Automatically _update on change in source folders" msgstr "Samodejno _posodobi ob vsaki spremembi izvorne mape" #. Translators: 'Unmatched' is a folder name under Search folders where are shown #. * all messages not belonging into any other configured search folder #: ../camel/camel-vee-store.c:42 msgid "Unmatched" msgstr "Brez zadetka" #: ../camel/camel-vee-store.c:444 #, c-format msgid "Cannot delete folder: %s: No such folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati mape: %s: mapa ne obstaja" #: ../camel/camel-vee-store.c:479 #, c-format msgid "Cannot rename folder: %s: No such folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati mape: %s: mapa ne obstaja" #: ../camel/camel-vee-store.c:542 msgid "Enable _Unmatched folder" msgstr "_Omogoči neujemajoče iskalne mape" #: ../camel/camel-vtrash-folder.c:49 msgid "Cannot copy messages to the Trash folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče kopirati sporočil v Koš" #: ../camel/camel-vtrash-folder.c:51 msgid "Cannot copy messages to the Junk folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče kopirati sporočil v mapo neželene pošte" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:38 msgid "Checking for New Mail" msgstr "Preverjanje za novo pošto" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:40 msgid "C_heck for new messages in all folders" msgstr "Preveri za _nova sporočila v vseh mapah" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:42 msgid "Ch_eck for new messages in subscribed folders" msgstr "Preveri _novo pošto v vseh naročenih mapah" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:44 msgid "Use _Quick Resync if the server supports it" msgstr "Uporabi _hitro usklajevanje, če strežnik možnost podpira" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:46 msgid "_Listen for server change notifications" msgstr "_Prisluhni opozorilom sprememb na strežniku" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:49 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:46 msgid "Folders" msgstr "Mape" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:51 msgid "_Show only subscribed folders" msgstr "Pokaži le naročene _mape" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:54 msgid "O_verride server-supplied folder namespace" msgstr "Prepiši _imenski prostor map, ki ga nudi strežnik" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:56 msgid "Namespace:" msgstr "Imenski prostor:" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:59 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:41 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:81 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:101 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:41 msgid "Options" msgstr "Možnosti" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:61 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:43 msgid "Apply _filters to new messages in all folders" msgstr "Uve_ljavi filtre na novih sporočilih v vseh mapah" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:63 msgid "_Apply filters to new messages in Inbox on this server" msgstr "" "Uvelj_avi filtre na novih sporočilih v mapi dohodne pošta na tem strežniku" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:65 msgid "Check new messages for _Junk contents" msgstr "Med novimi sporočili preveri za _neželeno pošto" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:67 msgid "Only check for Junk messages in the IN_BOX folder" msgstr "Neželeno pošto preveri le v mapi _dohodnih sporočil" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:69 msgid "Automatically synchroni_ze remote mail locally" msgstr "Samodejno _uskladi oddaljeno in krajevno pošto" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:75 msgid "Default IMAP port" msgstr "Privzeta vrata IMAP" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:76 msgid "IMAP over SSL" msgstr "IMAP preko SSL" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:83 msgid "IMAP+" msgstr "IMAP+" #: ../camel/providers/imapx/camel-imapx-provider.c:85 msgid "For reading and storing mail on IMAP servers." msgstr "Za branje in hranjenje pošte na strežnikih IMAP." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-folder.c:194 #, c-format msgid "~%s (%s)" msgstr "~%s (%s)" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-folder.c:204 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-folder.c:213 #, c-format msgid "mailbox: %s (%s)" msgstr "poštni predal:%s (%s)" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-folder.c:222 #, c-format msgid "%s (%s)" msgstr "%s (%s)" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-folder.c:499 msgid "_Index message body data" msgstr "_Ustvari kazalo podatkov telesa sporočila" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-folder.c:727 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot get message %s from folder %s\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče pridobiti sporočila %s iz mape %s\n" "%s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:43 msgid "_Use the '.folders' folder summary file (exmh)" msgstr "_Uporabite datoteko z izvlečki map '.folders' (exmh)" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:50 msgid "MH-format mail directories" msgstr "Poštne mape vrste MH" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:51 msgid "For storing local mail in MH-like mail directories." msgstr "Za shranjevanje krajevne pošte v mapah vrste MH." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:68 msgid "Local delivery" msgstr "Krajevna dostava" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:69 msgid "" "For retrieving (moving) local mail from standard mbox-formatted spools into " "folders managed by Evolution." msgstr "" "Za pridobivanje (premikanje) krajevne pošte iz običajnih vrstilnih map vrste " "mbox v mape, ki jih upravlja Evolution." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:83 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:103 msgid "_Apply filters to new messages in Inbox" msgstr "_Uveljavi filtre na novih sporočilih v dohodni mapi" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:90 msgid "Maildir-format mail directories" msgstr "Poštne mape vrste maildir" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:91 msgid "For storing local mail in maildir directories." msgstr "Za shranjevanje krajevne pošte v mapah vrste maildir." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:104 msgid "_Store status headers in Elm/Pine/Mutt format" msgstr "_Shrani glave stanja v obliki Elm/Pine/Mutt" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:111 msgid "Standard Unix mbox spool file" msgstr "Običajna Unix vrstilna datoteka poštnega predala mbox" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:112 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:126 msgid "" "For reading and storing local mail in external standard mbox spool files.\n" "May also be used to read a tree of Elm, Pine, or Mutt style folders." msgstr "" "Za branje in shranjevanje krajevne pošte v običajnih zunanjih vrstilnih " "datotekah mbox.\n" "Uporabno tudi za branje drevesa map v slogu programov Elm, Pine in Mutt." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-provider.c:125 msgid "Standard Unix mbox spool directory" msgstr "Običajna Unix vrstilna mapa poštnega predala mbox" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:98 #, c-format msgid "Could not rename folder %s to %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati mape %s v %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:180 #, c-format msgid "Local mail file %s" msgstr "Krajevna poštna datoteka %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:223 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:383 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:117 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:581 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:89 #, c-format msgid "Store root %s is not an absolute path" msgstr "Korenska mapa shrambe %s ni absolutna pot" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:232 #, c-format msgid "Store root %s is not a regular directory" msgstr "Korenska mapa shrambe %s ni običajna mapa" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:244 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:254 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:396 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:145 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get folder: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti mape: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:291 #, c-format msgid "Local stores do not have an inbox" msgstr "Krajevne shrambe nimajo mape za dohodno pošto" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:456 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:748 #, c-format msgid "Could not delete folder index file '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati datoteke kazala mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:484 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:778 #, c-format msgid "Could not delete folder meta file '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati metadatoteke mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-store.c:596 #, c-format msgid "Could not rename '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-local-summary.c:567 #, c-format msgid "Unable to add message to summary: unknown reason" msgstr "Ni mogoče dodati sporočila k povzetku: razlog neznan." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:100 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:335 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:117 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:329 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-folder.c:159 msgid "No such message" msgstr "Ni takega sporočila" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:225 #, c-format msgid "Cannot append message to maildir folder: %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti sporočila v mapo vrste maildir: %s: " #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:273 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:283 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:390 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-folder.c:171 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-folder.c:181 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get message %s from folder %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti sporočila %s iz mape %s: " #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-folder.c:353 #, c-format msgid "Cannot transfer message to destination folder: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče prenesti sporočila v ciljno mapo: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:125 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:850 #, c-format msgid "Folder %s already exists" msgstr "Mapa %s že obstaja" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:230 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:261 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:403 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:424 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create folder '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:245 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:369 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-store.c:524 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get folder '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:251 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:379 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-store.c:533 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get folder '%s': folder does not exist." msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti mape '%s': mapa ne obstaja." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:278 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get folder '%s': not a maildir directory." msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti mape '%s': ni mapa vrste maildir." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:283 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:442 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-store.c:566 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create folder '%s': folder exists." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape '%s': mapa že obstaja." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:347 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:387 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-store.c:684 #, c-format msgid "Could not delete folder '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:349 msgid "not a maildir directory" msgstr "ni mapa vrste maildir" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:630 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-store.c:1065 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:214 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:233 #, c-format msgid "Could not scan folder '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preiskati mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-summary.c:458 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-summary.c:591 #, c-format msgid "Cannot open maildir directory path: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odprti poštne poti maildir: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-summary.c:582 msgid "Checking folder consistency" msgstr "Preverjanje skladnosti mape" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-summary.c:675 msgid "Checking for new messages" msgstr "Preverjanje za nova sporočila" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-maildir-summary.c:770 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:450 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:683 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:832 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:141 msgid "Storing folder" msgstr "Shranjevanje mape" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:187 #, c-format msgid "Cannot open mailbox: %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti poštnega predala: %s: " #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:253 #, c-format msgid "Cannot append message to mbox file: %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti sporočila k datoteki vrste mbox: %s: " #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:382 msgid "The folder appears to be irrecoverably corrupted." msgstr "Videti je, da je mapa poškodovana in je ni mogoče obnoviti." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-folder.c:439 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-folder.c:69 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create folder lock on %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti zaklepa na mapi: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:391 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:589 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create a folder by this name." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape s tem imenom." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:435 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get folder '%s': not a regular file." msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti mape '%s': ni običajna datoteka." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:605 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create directory '%s': %s." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape '%s': %s." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:617 #, c-format msgid "Cannot create folder: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:619 msgid "Folder already exists" msgstr "Mapa že obstaja" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:659 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:672 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:701 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not delete folder '%s':\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče izbrisati mape '%s':\n" "%s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:682 #, c-format msgid "'%s' is not a regular file." msgstr "'%s' ni običajna datoteka." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:691 #, c-format msgid "Folder '%s' is not empty. Not deleted." msgstr "Mapa '%s' ni prazna, zato ni izbrisana." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:718 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:733 #, c-format msgid "Could not delete folder summary file '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče izbrisati datoteke povzetka mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:815 #, c-format msgid "The new folder name is illegal." msgstr "Novo ime mape ni dovoljeno." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:831 #, c-format msgid "Could not rename '%s': '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati '%s': '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-store.c:915 #, c-format msgid "Could not rename '%s' to %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati '%s' v %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:460 #, c-format msgid "Could not open folder: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odprti mape: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:522 #, c-format msgid "Fatal mail parser error near position %s in folder %s" msgstr "Usodna napaka razčlenjevanja pošte na mestu %s v mapi %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:607 #, c-format msgid "Cannot check folder: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preveriti mape: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:696 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:841 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:148 #, c-format msgid "Could not open file: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti datoteke: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:711 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:163 #, c-format msgid "Cannot open temporary mailbox: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti začasnega poštnega predala: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:728 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:958 #, c-format msgid "Could not close source folder %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče zapreti izvorne mape %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:741 #, c-format msgid "Could not close temporary folder: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče zapreti začasne mape: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:760 #, c-format msgid "Could not rename folder: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati mape: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:855 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1124 #, c-format msgid "Could not store folder: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče shraniti mape: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:894 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1164 #, c-format msgid "" "MBOX file is corrupted, please fix it. (Expected a From line, but didn't get " "it.)" msgstr "" "Datoteka MBOX je pokvarjena, zato jo je treba pred nadaljevanjem popraviti " "(pričakovana je vrstica Od, ki pa ni navedena)." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:904 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1176 #, c-format msgid "Summary and folder mismatch, even after a sync" msgstr "Zaznano je neskladje povzetkov in vsebine map tudi po usklajevanju." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1069 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:356 #, c-format msgid "Unknown error: %s" msgstr "Neznana napaka: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1234 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1264 #, c-format msgid "Writing to temporary mailbox failed: %s" msgstr "Pisanje v začasni poštni predal je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mbox-summary.c:1253 #, c-format msgid "Writing to temporary mailbox failed: %s: %s" msgstr "Pisanje v začasni poštni predal je spodletelo: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-folder.c:118 #, c-format msgid "Cannot append message to mh folder: %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pripeti sporočila v mapo vrste mh: %s: " #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-store.c:543 #, c-format msgid "Could not create folder '%s': %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-store.c:559 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get folder '%s': not a directory." msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti mape '%s': ni prava mapa." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-mh-summary.c:232 #, c-format msgid "Cannot open MH directory path: %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odprti poti mape MH: %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:97 #, c-format msgid "Spool '%s' cannot be opened: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti vrstilne mape '%s': %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:111 #, c-format msgid "Spool '%s' is not a regular file or directory" msgstr "Vrstilna mapa '%s' ni običajna datoteka ali mapa" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:427 #, c-format msgid "Spool mail file %s" msgstr "Vrstilna poštna datoteka %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:431 #, c-format msgid "Spool folder tree %s" msgstr "Drevesna razvrstitev vrstilne mape %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:434 msgid "Invalid spool" msgstr "Neveljaven vrstilni red" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:494 #, c-format msgid "Folder '%s/%s' does not exist." msgstr "Mapa '%s/%s' ne obstaja." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:507 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not open folder '%s':\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče odprti mape '%s':\n" "%s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:513 #, c-format msgid "Folder '%s' does not exist." msgstr "Mapa '%s' ne obstaja." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:521 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not create folder '%s':\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče ustvariti mape '%s':\n" "%s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:534 #, c-format msgid "'%s' is not a mailbox file." msgstr "'%s' ni datoteka poštnega predala." #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:598 #, c-format msgid "Store does not support an INBOX" msgstr "Shramba ne podpira mape INBOX" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:617 #, c-format msgid "Spool folders cannot be deleted" msgstr "Vrstilnih map ni mogoče izbrisati" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-store.c:632 #, c-format msgid "Spool folders cannot be renamed" msgstr "Vrstilnih map ni mogoče preimenovati" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:179 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:191 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:203 #, c-format msgid "Could not synchronize temporary folder %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče uskladiti začasne mape %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:221 #, c-format msgid "Could not synchronize spool folder %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče uskladiti vrstilne mape %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:253 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:272 #: ../camel/providers/local/camel-spool-summary.c:285 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not synchronize spool folder %s: %s\n" "Folder may be corrupt, copy saved in '%s'" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče uskladiti vrstilne mape %s: %s\n" "Mapa je morda pokvarjena. Kopija je shranjena v '%s'." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:287 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:392 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:516 #, c-format msgid "Internal error: UID in invalid format: %s" msgstr "Notranja napaka: UID je neveljavne oblike: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:351 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:356 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:698 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:1173 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get message %s: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti sporočila %s: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:363 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:542 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:623 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:688 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:707 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get message %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti sporočila %s: " #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:531 #, c-format msgid "This message is not currently available" msgstr "To sporočilo trenutno ni na voljo" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:599 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:605 #, c-format msgid "Posting failed: %s" msgstr "Pošiljanje je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:670 msgid "Posting failed: " msgstr "Pošiljanje je spodletelo: " #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:695 #, c-format msgid "You cannot post NNTP messages while working offline!" msgstr "Ni mogoče pošiljati sporočil NNTP v načinu brez povezave!" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-folder.c:715 #, c-format msgid "You cannot copy messages from a NNTP folder!" msgstr "Ni mogoče kopirati sporočil iz mape NNTP!" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:48 msgid "" "_Show folders in short notation (e.g. c.o.linux rather than comp.os.linux)" msgstr "" "_Pokaži mape v skrajšanem zapisu (npr. c.o.linux namesto comp.os.linux)" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:51 msgid "In the subscription _dialog, show relative folder names" msgstr "V _pogovornem oknu naročil prikaži relativna imena map" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:57 msgid "Default NNTP port" msgstr "Privzeta vrata NNTP" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:58 msgid "NNTP over SSL" msgstr "NNTP preko SSL" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:64 msgid "USENET news" msgstr "USENET novice" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:66 msgid "This is a provider for reading from and posting to USENET newsgroups." msgstr "" "To je ponudnik za branje iz in pošiljanje v novičarske skupine USENET." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:87 msgid "" "This option will connect to the NNTP server anonymously, without " "authentication." msgstr "" "Ta možnost bo vzpostavila anonimno povezavo s strežnikom NNTP brez vsakršne " "overitve." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-provider.c:97 msgid "" "This option will authenticate with the NNTP server using a plaintext " "password." msgstr "" "Možnost omogoča overitev na strežniku NNTP z besedilnim, nešifriranim geslom." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:386 #, c-format msgid "Could not read greeting from %s: " msgstr "Ni mogoče prebrati pozdrava iz %s: " #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:394 #, c-format msgid "NNTP server %s returned error code %d: %s" msgstr "Strežnik NNTP %s je vrnil napako %d: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:555 #, c-format msgid "USENET News via %s" msgstr "USNET Novice preko %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:1227 #, c-format msgid "" "Error retrieving newsgroups:\n" "\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Napaka med pridobivanjem novičarskih skupin:\n" "\n" "%s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:1339 #, c-format msgid "You cannot create a folder in a News store: subscribe instead." msgstr "" "V novičarski shrambi ni mogoče ustvariti mape: mogoče se je naročiti na " "storitev." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:1355 #, c-format msgid "You cannot rename a folder in a News store." msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati map v shrambi novic." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:1378 #, c-format msgid "You cannot remove a folder in a News store: unsubscribe instead." msgstr "" "Ni mogoče preimenovati map v shrambi novic: namesto tega prekličite " "naročnino." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:1597 #, c-format msgid "" "You cannot subscribe to this newsgroup:\n" "\n" "No such newsgroup. The selected item is a probably a parent folder." msgstr "" "Na to novičarsko skupino se ni mogoče naročiti:\n" "\n" "novičarska skupina ne obstaja. Izbran predmet je verjetno nadrejena mapa." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:1664 #, c-format msgid "" "You cannot unsubscribe to this newsgroup:\n" "\n" "newsgroup does not exist!" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče preklicati naročnine te novičarske skupine:\n" "\n" "novičarska skupina ne obstaja!" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:2101 msgid "NNTP Command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz NNTP je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:2198 #, c-format msgid "Not connected." msgstr "Brez povezave." #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-store.c:2292 #, c-format msgid "No such folder: %s" msgstr "Ni takšne mape: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-summary.c:200 #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-summary.c:339 #, c-format msgid "%s: Scanning new messages" msgstr "%s: preiskovanje novih sporočil" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-summary.c:222 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected server response from xover: %s" msgstr "Nepričakovan odziv strežnika od xover: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-summary.c:360 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected server response from head: %s" msgstr "Nepričakovan odziv strežnika iz head: %s" #: ../camel/providers/nntp/camel-nntp-summary.c:407 #, c-format msgid "Operation failed: %s" msgstr "Opravilo je spodletelo: %s" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:509 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:588 #, c-format msgid "No message with UID %s" msgstr "Ni sporočil z UID %s" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:604 #, c-format msgid "Retrieving POP message %d" msgstr "Pridobivanje sporočila POP %d" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:699 msgid "Unknown reason" msgstr "Neznan vzrok" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:751 msgid "Retrieving POP summary" msgstr "Pridobivanje povzetka POP" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:812 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:815 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:828 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:841 #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:855 msgid "Cannot get POP summary: " msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti povzetka POP: " #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:966 msgid "Expunging old messages" msgstr "Uničevanje starih sporočil" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-folder.c:992 msgid "Expunging deleted messages" msgstr "Uničevanje izbrisanih sporočil" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:39 #| msgid "Message storage" msgid "Message Storage" msgstr "Shranjevanje sporočil" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:41 msgid "_Leave messages on server" msgstr "_Pusti sporočila na strežniku" #. Translators: '%s' is replaced with a widget, where user can #. * select how many days can be message left on the server. #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:45 #, c-format msgid "_Delete after %s day(s)" msgstr "_Izbriši po %s dneh" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:47 msgid "Delete _expunged from local Inbox" msgstr "Izbriši _uničena sporočila iz krajevne mape prejete pošte" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:49 msgid "Disable _support for all POP3 extensions" msgstr "Onemogoči _podporo za vse razširitve POP3" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:55 msgid "Default POP3 port" msgstr "Privzeta vrata POP3" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:56 msgid "POP3 over SSL" msgstr "POP3 preko SSL" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:63 msgid "POP" msgstr "POP" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:65 msgid "For connecting to and downloading mail from POP servers." msgstr "Za povezovanje in prejemanje pošte s strežnikov POP." #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:85 msgid "" "This option will connect to the POP server using a plaintext password. This " "is the only option supported by many POP servers." msgstr "" "Možnost omogoča vzpostavitev povezave s strežnikom POP z običajnim " "besedilnim geslom. To je edina možnost, ki jo podpira večina strežnikov POP." #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-provider.c:95 msgid "" "This option will connect to the POP server using an encrypted password via " "the APOP protocol. This may not work for all users even on servers that " "claim to support it." msgstr "" "Možnost omogoča vzpostavitev povezave s strežnikom POP z uporabo šifriranega " "gesla preko protokola APOP. Možnost morda ne bo delovala pri vseh " "uporabnikih, niti na strežnikih, ki trdijo, da jo podpirajo." #. Translators: This is the separator between an error and an explanation #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:99 msgid ": " msgstr ": " #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:161 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read a valid greeting from POP server %s" msgstr "Prebiranje veljavnega pozdrava strežnika POP %s je spodletelo" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:176 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to POP server %s in secure mode: %s" msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom POP %s v varnem načinu je spodletela: %s" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:177 msgid "STLS not supported by server" msgstr "Strežnik ne podpira STLS" #. Translators: Last %s is an optional #. * explanation beginning with ": " separator. #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:198 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to POP server %s in secure mode%s" msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom POP %s v varnem načinu%s je spodletela" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:211 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to POP server %s in secure mode: " msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom POP %s v varnem načinu je spodletela: " #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:351 #, c-format msgid "Cannot login to POP server %s: SASL Protocol error" msgstr "Ni se mogoče prijaviti na strežnik POP %s: napaka protokola SASL" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:373 #, c-format msgid "Failed to authenticate on POP server %s: " msgstr "Overitev na strežniku POP %s je spodletela: " #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:481 #, c-format msgid "POP3 server %s" msgstr "Strežnik POP3 %s" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:484 #, c-format msgid "POP3 server for %s on %s" msgstr "Strežnik POP3 za %s na %s" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:704 #, c-format msgid "" "Unable to connect to POP server %s:\tInvalid APOP ID received. Impersonation " "attack suspected. Please contact your admin." msgstr "" "Ni se mogoče povezati s strežnikom POP %s.\n" ":\tSprejet je neveljaven APOP ID. To kaže na domneven poskus uporabe tujih " "osebnih podatkov. Poiščite pomoč pri skrbniku sistema." #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:759 #, c-format msgid "" "Unable to connect to POP server %s.\n" "Error sending password: " msgstr "" "Ni se mogoče povezati s strežnikom POP %s.\n" "Napaka med pošiljanjem gesla: " #. Translators: Last %s is an optional explanation #. * beginning with ": " separator. #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:774 #, c-format msgid "" "Unable to connect to POP server %s.\n" "Error sending username%s" msgstr "" "Ni se mogoče povezati s strežnikom POP %s.\n" "Napaka med pošiljanjem uporabniškega imena %s" #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:856 #, c-format msgid "No such folder '%s'." msgstr "Ni mape '%s'." #: ../camel/providers/pop3/camel-pop3-store.c:873 #, c-format msgid "POP3 stores have no folder hierarchy" msgstr "Shranjevalna mesta POP3 nimajo določene hierarhije map" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-provider.c:36 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/sendmail.source.in.h:1 msgid "Sendmail" msgstr "Sendmail" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-provider.c:38 msgid "" "For delivering mail by passing it to the \"sendmail\" program on the local " "system." msgstr "" "Za dostavljanje pošte preko programa \"sendmail\" na krajevnem sistemu." #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:50 msgid "sendmail" msgstr "sendmail" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:52 msgid "Mail delivery via the sendmail program" msgstr "Dostava pošte preko programa sendmail" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:140 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read From address" msgstr "Napaka pri branju naslova pošiljatelja" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:157 #, c-format msgid "Message send in offline mode is disabled" msgstr "Pošiljanje sporočil v načinu brez povezave, je onemogočeno" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:185 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse recipient list" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti seznama prejemnikov" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:202 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse arguments" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti argumentov" #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:233 #, c-format msgid "Could not create pipe to '%s': %s: mail not sent" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče ustvariti cevi do programa '%s': %s: elektronska pošta ni poslana." #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:258 #, c-format msgid "Could not fork '%s': %s: mail not sent" msgstr "Ni mogoče razvejiti programa '%s': %s: elektronska pošta ni poslana." #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:307 msgid "Could not send message: " msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati sporočila: " #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:337 #, c-format msgid "'%s' exited with signal %s: mail not sent." msgstr "" "program '%s' je zaključen s signalom %s: elektronska pošta ni poslana." #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:347 #, c-format msgid "Could not execute '%s': mail not sent." msgstr "Ni mogoče izvesti '%s': elektronska pošta ni poslana." #: ../camel/providers/sendmail/camel-sendmail-transport.c:352 #, c-format msgid "'%s' exited with status %d: mail not sent." msgstr "" "program '%s' je zaključen s stanjem %d: elektronska pošta ni poslana." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-provider.c:42 msgid "Default SMTP port" msgstr "Privzeta vrata SMTP" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-provider.c:43 msgid "SMTP over SSL" msgstr "SMTP preko SSL" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-provider.c:44 msgid "Message submission port" msgstr "Vrata za pošiljanje sporočil" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-provider.c:50 msgid "SMTP" msgstr "SMTP" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-provider.c:52 msgid "For delivering mail by connecting to a remote mailhub using SMTP." msgstr "" "Za dostavo pošte preko povezave z oddaljenim poštnim razdelilnikom z uporabo " "SMTP." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:158 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:166 msgid "Welcome response error: " msgstr "Napaka odziva na pozdrav: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:202 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to SMTP server %s in secure mode: %s" msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom SMTP %s v varnem načinu je spodletela: %s" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:212 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:226 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:234 msgid "STARTTLS command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz STARTTLS je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:246 #, c-format msgid "Failed to connect to SMTP server %s in secure mode: " msgstr "Povezava s strežnikom SMTP %s v varnem načinu je spodletela: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:338 #, c-format msgid "SMTP server %s" msgstr "Strežnik SMTP %s" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:341 #, c-format msgid "SMTP mail delivery via %s" msgstr "Dostava pošte s SMTP preko %s" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:415 #, c-format msgid "SMTP server %s does not support %s authentication" msgstr "Strežnik SMTP %s ne podpira zahtevane vrste overitve %s." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:496 #, c-format msgid "No SASL mechanism was specified" msgstr "Ni določenega načina SASL" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:526 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:537 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:550 msgid "AUTH command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz AUTH je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:691 #, c-format msgid "Cannot send message: service not connected." msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati sporočila: storitev ni povezana." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:698 #, c-format msgid "Cannot send message: sender address not valid." msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati sporočila: naslov pošiljatelja ni veljaven." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:702 msgid "Sending message" msgstr "Pošiljanje sporočila" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:727 #, c-format msgid "Cannot send message: no recipients defined." msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati sporočila: ni navedenih prejemnikov." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:740 #, c-format msgid "Cannot send message: one or more invalid recipients" msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati sporočila: navedeni so neveljavni prejemniki." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:861 msgid "Syntax error, command unrecognized" msgstr "Napaka skladnje; ukaz ni prepoznan" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:863 msgid "Syntax error in parameters or arguments" msgstr "Napaka skladnje v parametrih ali argumentih" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:865 msgid "Command not implemented" msgstr "Ukaz ni podprt" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:867 msgid "Command parameter not implemented" msgstr "Parameter ukaza ni podprt" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:869 msgid "System status, or system help reply" msgstr "Stanje sistema ali odgovor na pomoč" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:871 msgid "Help message" msgstr "Sporočilo pomoči" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:873 msgid "Service ready" msgstr "Storitev je pripravljena" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:875 msgid "Service closing transmission channel" msgstr "Storitev kanala za prenos se zapira" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:877 msgid "Service not available, closing transmission channel" msgstr "Storitev ni na voljo; kanal za prenos bo zaprt" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:879 msgid "Requested mail action okay, completed" msgstr "Zahtevano dejanje je v redu; opravilo je končano" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:881 msgid "User not local; will forward to " msgstr "" "Uporabnik ni krajeven uporabnik; sporočilo bo posredovano na " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:883 msgid "Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable" msgstr "Zahtevano poštno dejanje ni izvedeno: poštni predal ni na voljo" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:885 msgid "Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable" msgstr "Zahtevano dejanje ni izvedeno: poštni predal ni na voljo" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:887 msgid "Requested action aborted: error in processing" msgstr "Zahtevano dejanje je prekinjeno: napaka v obdelavi." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:889 msgid "User not local; please try " msgstr "" "Uporabnik ni krajeven uporabnik; poskusite posredovati na pot " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:891 msgid "Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage" msgstr "Zahtevano dejanje ni izvedeno: premalo je prostora na disku." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:893 msgid "Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation" msgstr "" "Zahtevano dejanje je prekinjeno: prekoračena je dodelitev shranjevanja." # M! #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:895 msgid "Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed" msgstr "Zahtevano dejanje ni izvedeno: ime poštnega predala ni dovoljeno." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:897 msgid "Start mail input; end with ." msgstr "Začni z vpisom sporočila; končaj z ." #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:899 msgid "Transaction failed" msgstr "Prenos je spodletel" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:903 msgid "A password transition is needed" msgstr "Zahtevan je prenos gesla" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:905 msgid "Authentication mechanism is too weak" msgstr "Način overitve je prešibak" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:907 msgid "Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism" msgstr "Za zahtevan način overitve je obvezno šifriranje" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:909 msgid "Temporary authentication failure" msgstr "Začasna napaka overitve" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1166 msgid "SMTP Greeting" msgstr "Pozdrav SMTP" #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1193 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1207 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1215 msgid "HELO command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz HELO je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1290 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1305 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1315 msgid "MAIL FROM command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz MAIL FROM je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1342 msgid "RCPT TO command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz RCPT TO je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1359 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1369 #, c-format msgid "RCPT TO <%s> failed: " msgstr "Ukaz RCPT TO <%s> je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1412 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1423 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1434 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1493 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1513 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1527 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1536 msgid "DATA command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz DATA je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1561 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1576 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1585 msgid "RSET command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz RSET je spodletel: " #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1610 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1624 #: ../camel/providers/smtp/camel-smtp-transport.c:1631 msgid "QUIT command failed: " msgstr "Ukaz QUIT je spodletel: " #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.addressbook.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Contact UID of a user" msgstr "Vrednost UID stika" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Birthday and anniversary reminder" msgstr "Opomnik rojstnih dni in obletnic" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Whether to set a reminder for birthdays and anniversaries" msgstr "Ali naj se nastavi opomnik za rojstne dneve in obletnice." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Birthday and anniversary reminder value" msgstr "Vrednost opomnika rojstnih dni in obletnic" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Number of units for determining a birthday or anniversary reminder" msgstr "Število enot za določanje opomnika za rojstni dan ali obletnico." #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Birthday and anniversary reminder units" msgstr "Enote opomnika rojstnih dni in obletnic" #: ../data/org.gnome.evolution-data-server.calendar.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Units for a birthday or anniversary reminder, \"minutes\", \"hours\" or " "\"days\"" msgstr "" "Enote opomnika za rojstni dan ali obletnico so \"minute\", \"ure\" ali " "\"dnevi\"." #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:205 #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:216 #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:862 #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:1198 msgid "Bus name vanished (client terminated?)" msgstr "Ime vodila je izginilo (ali je odjemalec nepričakovano končan?)" #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:264 msgid "No response from client" msgstr "Ni odziva odjemalca" #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:334 #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:345 #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:856 #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:1192 msgid "Client cancelled the operation" msgstr "Dejanje je bilo preklicano." #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-mediator.c:416 msgid "Client reports password was rejected" msgstr "Geslo poročila odjemalcev je zavrnjeno" #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-session.c:569 msgid "Add this password to your keyring" msgstr "Dodajanje gesla v zbirko ključev" #: ../libebackend/e-authentication-session.c:674 msgid "Password was incorrect" msgstr "Geslo je napačno." #: ../libebackend/e-backend.c:428 #, c-format msgid "%s does not support authentication" msgstr "Vir %s ne podpira overitve" #: ../libebackend/e-collection-backend.c:800 #, c-format msgid "%s does not support creating remote resources" msgstr "Vir %s ne podpira ustvarjanja oddaljenih virov" #: ../libebackend/e-collection-backend.c:859 #, c-format msgid "%s does not support deleting remote resources" msgstr "Vir %s ne podpira brisanja oddaljenih virov" #: ../libebackend/e-data-factory.c:304 #, c-format msgid "No backend factory for hash key '%s'" msgstr "Ni imena ozadnjega programa v ključu razpršila '%s'" #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:134 #, c-format msgid "Data source is missing a [%s] group" msgstr "Viru podatkov manjka navedba skupine [%s]" #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:1008 #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:1138 #, c-format msgid "Data source '%s' does not support creating remote resources" msgstr "Podatkovni vir '%s' ne podpira ustvarjanja oddaljenih virov" #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:1022 #, c-format msgid "" "Data source '%s' has no collection backend to create the remote resource" msgstr "" "Podatkovni vir '%s' nima določenega ozadnjega zbiranja za ustvarjanje " "oddaljenih virov" #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:1050 #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:1251 #, c-format msgid "Data source '%s' does not support deleting remote resources" msgstr "Podatkovni vir '%s' ne podpira ustvarjanja oddaljenih virov" #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:1064 #, c-format msgid "" "Data source '%s' has no collection backend to delete the remote resource" msgstr "" "Podatkovni vir '%s' nima določenega ozadnjega zbiranja za izbris oddaljenih " "virov" #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:1095 #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:1347 #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/module-ubuntu-online-accounts.c:1028 #, c-format msgid "Data source '%s' does not support OAuth 2.0 authentication" msgstr "Podatkovni vir '%s' ne podpira overitve OAuth 2.0." #: ../libebackend/e-server-side-source.c:1438 #, c-format msgid "File must have a '.source' extension" msgstr "Pripona datoteke mora biti '.source'" #: ../libebackend/e-source-registry-server.c:532 #: ../libedataserver/e-source-registry.c:1876 msgid "The user declined to authenticate" msgstr "Overitev je prekinjena s strani uporabnika" #: ../libebackend/e-source-registry-server.c:801 #, c-format msgid "UID '%s' is already in use" msgstr "UID '%s' je že v uporabi" #: ../libebackend/e-user-prompter-server.c:306 #, c-format msgid "Extension dialog '%s' not found." msgstr "Pogovornega okna razširitve '%s' ni mogoče najti." #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:46 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Anniversary" msgstr "Obletnica" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:47 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Birthday" msgstr "Rojstni dan" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:48 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Business" msgstr "Služba" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:49 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Competition" msgstr "Tekmovanje" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:50 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Favorites" msgstr "Priljubljeno" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:51 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Gifts" msgstr "Darila" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:52 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Goals/Objectives" msgstr "Cilji" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:53 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Holiday" msgstr "Prazniki" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:54 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Holiday Cards" msgstr "Praznične voščilnice" #. important people (e.g. new business partners) #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:56 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Hot Contacts" msgstr "Pomembni stiki" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:57 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Ideas" msgstr "Ideje" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:58 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "International" msgstr "Mednarodno" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:59 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Key Customer" msgstr "Ključna stranka" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:60 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Miscellaneous" msgstr "Razno" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:61 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Personal" msgstr "Osebno" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:62 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Phone Calls" msgstr "Telefonski klici" #. Translators: "Status" is a category name; it can mean anything user wants to #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:64 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Status" msgstr "Stanje" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:65 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Strategies" msgstr "Strategije" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:66 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Suppliers" msgstr "Dobavitelji" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:67 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Time & Expenses" msgstr "Čas in stroški" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:68 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "VIP" msgstr "VIP" #: ../libedataserver/e-categories.c:69 msgctxt "CategoryName" msgid "Waiting" msgstr "Čakanje" #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:133 msgid "Source not loaded" msgstr "Vir ni naložen" #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:135 msgid "Source already loaded" msgstr "Vir je že naložen" #. Translators: This means that the EClient does not #. * support offline mode, or it's not set to by a user, #. * thus it is unavailable while user is not connected. #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:146 msgid "Offline unavailable" msgstr "Delo brez povezave ni na voljo" #: ../libedataserver/e-client.c:168 #| msgctxt "ClientError" #| msgid "D-Bus error" msgid "D-Bus error" msgstr "Napaka vodila D-Bus" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:166 msgid "Address book authentication request" msgstr "Zahteva za overitev uporabe imenika" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:171 msgid "Calendar authentication request" msgstr "Zahteva za overitev uporabe koledarja" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:175 msgid "Mail authentication request" msgstr "Zahteva za overitev uporabe elektronske pošte" #. generic account prompt #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:178 msgid "Authentication request" msgstr "Zahteva za overitev" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:188 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for address book \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za imenik \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:194 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for calendar \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za koledar \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:200 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for mail account \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za elektronski poštni račun \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:206 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for mail transport \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za prenos elektronske pošte \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:212 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for memo list \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za opomnike \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:218 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for task list \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za seznam nalog \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-authenticator.c:224 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the password for account \"%s\"." msgstr "Vnesite geslo za račun \"%s\"." #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:627 #, c-format msgid "Source file is missing a [%s] group" msgstr "Viru podatkov manjka navedba skupine [%s]" #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:949 #, c-format msgid "Data source '%s' is not removable" msgstr "Podatkovnega vira '%s' ni mogoče odstraniti" #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:1041 #, c-format msgid "Data source '%s' is not writable" msgstr "Podatkovni vir '%s' ni zapisliv" #: ../libedataserver/e-source.c:1559 msgid "Unnamed" msgstr "Neimenovano" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-mail-signature.c:487 #, c-format msgid "Signature script must be a local file" msgstr "Datoteka skripta podpisa mora biti krajevna datoteka." #: ../libedataserver/e-source-webdav.c:1553 #, c-format msgid "" "SSL certificate for host '%s', used by address book '%s', is not trusted. Do " "you wish to accept it?" msgstr "" "Potrdilo SSL za gostitelja '%s' za imenik '%s' ni določeno kot varno. Ali ga " "vseeno želite prejeti?" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-webdav.c:1562 #, c-format msgid "" "SSL certificate for host '%s', used by calendar '%s', is not trusted. Do you " "wish to accept it?" msgstr "" "Potrdilo SSL za gostitelja '%s' za koledar '%s' ni določeno kot varno. Ali " "ga vseeno želite prejeti?" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-webdav.c:1571 #, c-format msgid "" "SSL certificate for host '%s', used by memo list '%s', is not trusted. Do " "you wish to accept it?" msgstr "" "Potrdilo SSL za gostitelja '%s' za seznam opomnikov '%s' ni določeno kot " "varno. Ali ga vseeno želite prejeti?" #: ../libedataserver/e-source-webdav.c:1580 #, c-format msgid "" "SSL certificate for host '%s', used by task list '%s', is not trusted. Do " "you wish to accept it?" msgstr "" "Potrdilo SSL za gostitelja '%s' za seznam nalog '%s' ni določeno kot varno. " "Ali ga vseeno želite prejeti?" #. strptime format of a weekday, a date and a time, #. * in 12-hour format. #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 12-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1663 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1962 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %I:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y %I:%M:%S %p" #. strptime format of a weekday, a date and a time, #. * in 24-hour format. #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 24-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1668 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1953 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %H:%M:%S" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y %H:%M:%S" #. strptime format of a weekday, a date and a time, #. * in 12-hour format, without seconds. #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 12-hour format, without seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1673 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1958 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %I:%M %p" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y %I:%M %p" #. strptime format of a weekday, a date and a time, #. * in 24-hour format, without seconds. #. strftime format of a weekday, a date and a #. * time, in 24-hour format, without seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1678 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1949 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %H:%M" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y %H:%M" #. strptime format of a weekday, a date and a time, #. * in 12-hour format, without minutes or seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1683 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %I %p" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y %I %p" #. strptime format of a weekday, a date and a time, #. * in 24-hour format, without minutes or seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1688 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y %H" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y %H" #. strptime format of a weekday and a date. #. strftime format of a weekday and a date. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1691 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1811 #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1944 msgid "%a %m/%d/%Y" msgstr "%a %d/%m/%Y" #. strptime format of a date and a time, in 12-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1698 msgid "%m/%d/%Y %I:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y %I:%M:%S %p" #. strptime format of a date and a time, in 24-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1702 msgid "%m/%d/%Y %H:%M:%S" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y %H:%M:%S" #. strptime format of a date and a time, in 12-hour format, #. * without seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1707 msgid "%m/%d/%Y %I:%M %p" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y %I:%M %p" #. strptime format of a date and a time, in 24-hour format, #. * without seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1712 msgid "%m/%d/%Y %H:%M" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y %H:%M" #. strptime format of a date and a time, in 12-hour format, #. * without minutes or seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1717 msgid "%m/%d/%Y %I %p" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y %I %p" #. strptime format of a date and a time, in 24-hour format, #. * without minutes or seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1722 msgid "%m/%d/%Y %H" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y %H" #. strptime format of a weekday and a date. #. This is the preferred date format for the locale. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1725 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1814 msgid "%m/%d/%Y" msgstr "%d/%m/%Y" #. strptime format for a time of day, in 12-hour format. #. strftime format of a time in 12-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1885 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:2006 msgid "%I:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%I:%M:%S %p" #. strptime format for a time of day, in 24-hour format. #. strftime format of a time in 24-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1889 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1998 msgid "%H:%M:%S" msgstr "%H:%M:%S" #. strptime format for time of day, without seconds, #. * in 12-hour format. #. strftime format of a time in 12-hour format, #. * without seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1894 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:2003 msgid "%I:%M %p" msgstr "%I:%M %p" #. strptime format for time of day, without seconds 24-hour format. #. strftime format of a time in 24-hour format, #. * without seconds. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1898 ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1995 msgid "%H:%M" msgstr "%H:%M" #. strptime format for time of day, without seconds 24-hour format, #. * and no colon. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1902 msgid "%H%M" msgstr "%H%M" #. strptime format for hour and AM/PM, 12-hour format. #: ../libedataserver/e-time-utils.c:1906 msgid "%I %p" msgstr "%I %p" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Proxy type to use" msgstr "Vrsta posredniškega strežnika za uporabo." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "What proxy type to use. \"0\" means system, \"1\" means no proxy, \"2\" " "means manual proxy." msgstr "" "Katera vrsta posredniškega strežnika naj se uporabi. Vrednost \"0\" " "predstavlja sistemsko nastavitev, \"1\" pomeni brez posredovanja in \"2\" " "pomeni ročna nastavitev." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Whether to use http-proxy" msgstr "Ali naj bo uporabljen posredovalni strežnik za http" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Whether to use proxy for HTTP requests." msgstr "Ali naj bo uporabljen posredniški strežnik za zahteve HTTP." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Whether proxy server requires authentication" msgstr "Ali posredovalni strežnik zahteva overitev" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "Whether authentication is required to access proxy server." msgstr "Ali je za dostop do posredovalnega strežnika zahtevana overitev." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Host name for HTTP requests" msgstr "Ime gostitelja za zahteve HTTP" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Host name to use for HTTP requests." msgstr "Ime gostitelja za uporabo pri zahtevah HTTP" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Port number for HTTP requests" msgstr "Številka vrat za zahteve HTTP" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Port number to use for HTTP requests." msgstr "Številka vrat za zahteve HTTP." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Proxy authentication user name" msgstr "Uporabniško ime za overitev pri posredovalnem strežniku" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "User name to use to authenticate against proxy server." msgstr "Uporabniško ime za overitev pri posredovalnem strežniku." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Proxy authentication password" msgstr "Geslo za overitev pri posredovalnem strežniku" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Password to use to authenticate against proxy server." msgstr "Geslo, zahtevano za overitev pri posredovalnem strežniku." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "List of hosts to connect to without proxy" msgstr "Seznam gostiteljev za povezavo brez posredovanja" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "List of hosts for which do not use proxy." msgstr "Seznam gostiteljev za katere ne bo uporabljen posredniški strežnik." #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Host name for HTTPS requests" msgstr "Ime gostitelja za zahteve HTTPS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Host name to use for HTTPS requests." msgstr "Ime gostitelja za uporabo pri zahtevah HTTPS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "Port number for HTTPS requests" msgstr "Številka vrat za uporabo pri zahtevah HTTPS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Port number to use for HTTPS requests." msgstr "Številka vrat za zahteve HTTPS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "Host name for SOCKS requests" msgstr "Ime gostitelja za zahteve SOCKS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:22 msgid "Host name to use for SOCKS requests." msgstr "Ime gostitelja za uporabo pri zahtevah SOCKS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:23 msgid "Port number for SOCKS requests" msgstr "Številka vrat za zahteve SOCKS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "Port number to use for SOCKS requests." msgstr "Številka vrat za uporabo pri zahtevah SOCKS" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Automatic proxy configuration URL" msgstr "Naslov URL za samodejno nastavitev posredniškega strežnika" #: ../libedataserver/org.gnome.evolution.shell.network-config.gschema.xml.in.h:26 msgid "Where to read automatic proxy configuration from." msgstr "Kje naj se preberejo samodejne nastavitve posredniškega strežnika." #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/e-goa-password-based.c:131 #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/e-signon-session-password.c:365 #, c-format msgid "No such data source for UID '%s'" msgstr "Za UID '%s' ni takšnega podatkovnega vira" #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/e-goa-password-based.c:143 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot find a corresponding account in the org.gnome.OnlineAccounts service " "from which to obtain a password for '%s'" msgstr "" "Ni mogoče najti ustreznega računa storitve org.gnome.OnlineAccounts, preko " "katere naj bi pridobili geslo za '%s'." #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/e-goa-password-based.c:219 #, c-format msgid "Invalid password for '%s'" msgstr "Neveljavno geslo za '%s'" #. TODO: more specific #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/goaewsclient.c:222 #, c-format msgid "Code: %u - Unexpected response from server" msgstr "Koda: %u - nepričakovan odziv strežnika" #. TODO: more specific #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/goaewsclient.c:243 #, c-format msgid "Failed to parse autodiscover response XML" msgstr "Razčlenjevanje samodejnega odgovora XML je spodletelo" #. TODO: more specific #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/goaewsclient.c:252 #, c-format msgid "Failed to find Autodiscover element" msgstr "Iskanje predmeta samodejne zaznave je spodletelo" #. TODO: more specific #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/goaewsclient.c:264 #, c-format msgid "Failed to find Response element" msgstr "Iskanje predmeta odziva je spodletelo" #. TODO: more specific #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/goaewsclient.c:276 #, c-format msgid "Failed to find Account element" msgstr "Iskanje predmeta računa je spodletelo" #. TODO: more specific #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/goaewsclient.c:290 #, c-format msgid "Failed to find ASUrl and OABUrl in autodiscover response" msgstr "" "Iskanje predmetov ASUrl in OABUrl v odzivu samodejne zaznave je spodletelo" #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/module-gnome-online-accounts.c:1241 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot find a corresponding account in the org.gnome.OnlineAccounts service " "from which to obtain an access token for '%s'" msgstr "" "Ustreznega računa v storitvi the org.gnome.OnlineAccounts, iz katerega bi " "lahko pridobili žeton dostopa za '%s', ni mogoče najti." #: ../modules/gnome-online-accounts/module-gnome-online-accounts.c:1268 #, c-format msgid "Failed to obtain an access token for '%s': " msgstr "Pridobivanje žetona za dostop do '%s' je spodletelo: " #: ../modules/google-backend/module-google-backend.c:192 #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/calendar.service-type.in.in.h:1 #: ../modules/yahoo-backend/module-yahoo-backend.c:200 msgid "Calendar" msgstr "Koledar" #: ../modules/google-backend/module-google-backend.c:261 #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/contacts.service-type.in.in.h:1 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/contacts-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "Contacts" msgstr "Stiki" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:292 msgid "Not part of certificate" msgstr "Ni del potrdila" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:575 msgid "_Close" msgstr "_Zapri" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:600 msgid "This certificate has been verified for the following uses:" msgstr "Izbrano potrdilo je overjeno za naslednje vrste uporabe:" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:604 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:387 msgid "SSL Client Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo odjemalca SSL" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:609 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:391 msgid "SSL Server Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo strežnika SSL" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:614 msgid "Email Signer Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo podpisnika e-pošte" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:619 msgid "Email Recipient Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo prejemnika e-pošte" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:634 msgid "Issued To" msgstr "Izdano za" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:635 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:641 msgid "Common Name (CN)" msgstr "Splošno ime (CN)" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:636 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:642 msgid "Organization (O)" msgstr "Organizacija (O)" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:637 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:643 msgid "Organizational Unit (OU)" msgstr "Organizacijska enota (OU)" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:638 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:134 msgid "Serial Number" msgstr "Zaporedna številka" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:640 msgid "Issued By" msgstr "Izdajatelj" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:645 msgid "Validity" msgstr "Veljavnost" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:646 msgid "Issued On" msgstr "Izdano dne" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:647 msgid "Expires On" msgstr "Poteče dne" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:649 msgid "Fingerprints" msgstr "Prstni odtisi" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:650 msgid "SHA1 Fingerprint" msgstr "Prstni odtis SHA1" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:651 msgid "MD5 Fingerprint" msgstr "Prstni odtis MD5" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:653 msgid "General" msgstr "Splošno" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:672 msgid "Certificate Hierarchy" msgstr "Hierarhija potrdil" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:676 msgid "Certificate Fields" msgstr "Polja potrdil" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:680 msgid "Field Value" msgstr "Vrednost polja" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/certificate-viewer.c:682 msgid "Details" msgstr "Podrobnosti" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:95 msgid "Version" msgstr "Različica" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:110 msgid "Version 1" msgstr "Različica 1" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:113 msgid "Version 2" msgstr "Različica 2" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:116 msgid "Version 3" msgstr "Različica 3" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:192 msgid "PKCS #1 MD2 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 MD2 z RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:195 msgid "PKCS #1 MD5 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 MD5 z RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:198 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-1 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-1 z RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:201 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-256 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-256 z RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:204 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-384 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-384 z RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:207 msgid "PKCS #1 SHA-512 With RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 SHA-512 z RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:234 msgid "PKCS #1 RSA Encryption" msgstr "Šifriranje PKCS #1 RSA" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:237 msgid "Certificate Key Usage" msgstr "Uporaba ključa potrdila" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:240 msgid "Netscape Certificate Type" msgstr "Vrsta potrdila Netscape" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:243 msgid "Certificate Authority Key Identifier" msgstr "Določevalnik ključa pooblastitelja potrdil" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:255 #, c-format msgid "Object Identifier (%s)" msgstr "Določilo predmeta (%s)" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:306 msgid "Algorithm Identifier" msgstr "Določevalnik algoritma" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:314 msgid "Algorithm Parameters" msgstr "Določila algoritma" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:336 msgid "Subject Public Key Info" msgstr "Podatki o javnem ključu zadeve" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:341 msgid "Subject Public Key Algorithm" msgstr "Algoritem javnega ključa zadeve" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:356 msgid "Subject's Public Key" msgstr "Javni ključ zadeve" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:378 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:428 msgid "Error: Unable to process extension" msgstr "Napaka: ni mogoče obdelati razširitve" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:395 msgid "Email" msgstr "E-pošta" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:399 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:411 msgid "Object Signer" msgstr "Podpisnik predmeta" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:403 msgid "SSL Certificate Authority" msgstr "Pooblastitelj potrdil SSL" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:407 msgid "Email Certificate Authority" msgstr "Pooblastitelj potrdil e-pošte" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:436 msgid "Signing" msgstr "Podpisovanje" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:440 msgid "Non-repudiation" msgstr "Nepreklicno" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:444 msgid "Key Encipherment" msgstr "Šifriranje ključa" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:448 msgid "Data Encipherment" msgstr "Šifriranje podatkov" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:452 msgid "Key Agreement" msgstr "Dogovor o ključu" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:456 msgid "Certificate Signer" msgstr "Podpisnik potrdila" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:460 msgid "CRL Signer" msgstr "Podpisnik CRL" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:509 msgid "Critical" msgstr "Kritično" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:511 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:514 msgid "Not Critical" msgstr "Ni kritično" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:535 msgid "Extensions" msgstr "Razširitve" #. Translators: This string is used in Certificate #. * details for fields like Issuer or Subject, which #. * shows the field name on the left and its respective #. * value on the right, both as stored in the #. * certificate itself. You probably do not need to #. * change this string, unless changing the order of #. * name and value. As a result example: #. * "OU = VeriSign Trust Network" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:615 #, c-format msgid "%s = %s" msgstr "%s = %s" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:658 msgid "Certificate" msgstr "Potrdilo" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:674 #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:812 msgid "Certificate Signature Algorithm" msgstr "Algoritem podpisa potrdila" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:683 msgid "Issuer" msgstr "Izdajatelj" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:714 msgid "Subject" msgstr "Zadeva" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:738 msgid "Issuer Unique ID" msgstr "Edinstven ID izdajatelja" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:757 msgid "Subject Unique ID" msgstr "Edinstven ID zadeve" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/e-asn1-object.c:818 msgid "Certificate Signature Value" msgstr "Vrednost podpisa potrdila" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/module-trust-prompt.c:201 msgid "The signing certificate authority is not known." msgstr "Podpisni pooblastitelj potrdil ni poznan." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/module-trust-prompt.c:203 msgid "" "The certificate does not match the expected identity of the site that it was " "retrieved from." msgstr "" "Potrdilo ni skladno s pričakovano istovetnostjo strani, s katere je bil " "pridobljen." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/module-trust-prompt.c:205 msgid "The certificate's activation time is still in the future." msgstr "Čas dovoljene uporabe potrdila je še v prihodnosti." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/module-trust-prompt.c:207 msgid "The certificate has expired." msgstr "Potrdilo je poteklo." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/module-trust-prompt.c:209 msgid "" "The certificate has been revoked according to the connection's certificate " "revocation list." msgstr "" "Potrdilo je bilo preklicano glede na seznam preklicanih potrdil povezave." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/module-trust-prompt.c:211 msgid "The certificate's algorithm is considered insecure." msgstr "Algoritem potrdila ni dovolj varen." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:162 msgid "Certificate trust..." msgstr "Zaupanje varnosti potrdila ..." #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:163 msgid "_View Certificate" msgstr "_Poglej potrdilo" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:164 msgid "_Reject" msgstr "_Zavrni" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:165 msgid "Accept _Temporarily" msgstr "Sprejmi _začasno" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:166 msgid "_Accept Permanently" msgstr "Sprejmi _trajno" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:203 #, c-format msgid "SSL certificate for '%s' is not trusted. Do you wish to accept it?" msgstr "" "Potrdilo SSL za '%s' ni določeno kot varno. Ali ga vseeno želite prejeti?" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:209 msgid "Detailed information about the certificate:" msgstr "Podrobnosti o potrdilu:" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:223 msgid "Issuer:" msgstr "Izdajatelj:" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:224 msgid "Subject:" msgstr "Zadeva:" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:225 msgid "Fingerprint:" msgstr "Prstni odtis:" #: ../modules/trust-prompt/trust-prompt-gtk.c:226 msgid "Reason:" msgstr "Razlog:" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/calendar.service-type.in.in.h:2 msgid "Integrate your calendars" msgstr "Vgradi vnose koledarjev" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/contacts.service-type.in.in.h:2 msgid "Integrate your contacts" msgstr "Vgradi vnose stikov" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/e-signon-session-password.c:257 msgid "Signon service did not return a secret" msgstr "Storitev prijave ni vrnila skrivnosti" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/evolution-data-server-uoa.desktop.in.in.h:1 msgid "Evolution Data Server" msgstr "Strežnik podatkov Evolution" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/evolution-data-server-uoa.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Required to have EDS appear in UOA" msgstr "Morajo imeti EDS, da se pojavijo v UOA" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/google-calendar.service.in.in.h:1 msgid "Google Calendar" msgstr "Koledar Google" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/google-contacts.service.in.in.h:1 msgid "Google Contacts" msgstr "Stiki Google" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/google-gmail.service.in.in.h:1 msgid "GMail" msgstr "GMail" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/mail.service-type.in.in.h:1 msgid "Mail" msgstr "E-pošta" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/mail.service-type.in.in.h:2 msgid "Integrate your mailboxes" msgstr "Vgradi poštne predale" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/module-ubuntu-online-accounts.c:1009 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot find a corresponding account service in the accounts database from " "which to obtain an access token for '%s'" msgstr "" "Ustrezne storitve računov v zbirki podatkov računov, iz katere bi lahko " "pridobili žeton dostopa za '%s', ni mogoče najti." #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:85 #, c-format msgid "Expected status 200 when requesting guid, instead got status %d (%s)" msgstr "" "Pričakovano je stanje 200 pri zahtevi guid, vrnjeno pa je stanje %d (%s)" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:102 #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:299 msgid "Error parsing response as JSON: " msgstr "Napaka razčlenjevanja odziva kot JSON: " #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:120 msgid "Didn't find email member in JSON data" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti e-poštnega stika med podatki JSON" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:282 #, c-format msgid "" "Expected status 200 when requesting your identity, instead got status %d (%s)" msgstr "" "Pri zahtevanju vaše istovetnosti je pričakovano stanje 200, vrnjeno pa je " "stanje %d (%s)" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:317 msgid "Didn't find 'id' in JSON data" msgstr "V podatkih JSON ni mogoče najti 'id'" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/uoa-utils.c:322 msgid "Didn't find 'emails.account' in JSON data" msgstr "V podatkih JSON ni mogoče najti 'emails.account'" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/windows-live-mail.service.in.in.h:1 msgid "Windows Live Mail" msgstr "Pošrta Windows Live" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/yahoo-calendar.service.in.in.h:1 msgid "Yahoo! Calendar" msgstr "Koledar Yahoo!" #: ../modules/ubuntu-online-accounts/yahoo-mail.service.in.in.h:1 msgid "Yahoo! Mail" msgstr "Pošta Yahoo!" #: ../modules/yahoo-backend/module-yahoo-backend.c:227 msgid "Tasks" msgstr "Naloge" #: ../services/evolution-addressbook-factory/evolution-addressbook-factory.c:47 #: ../services/evolution-calendar-factory/evolution-calendar-factory.c:51 #: ../services/evolution-user-prompter/evolution-user-prompter.c:31 msgid "Keep running after the last client is closed" msgstr "Nadaljuj izvajanje po končanju zadnjega podrejenega okna" #: ../services/evolution-addressbook-factory/evolution-addressbook-factory.c:49 #: ../services/evolution-calendar-factory/evolution-calendar-factory.c:53 msgid "Wait running until at least one client is connected" msgstr "Nadaljuj izvajanje dokler je povezan vsaj en odjemalec" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/birthdays.source.in.h:1 msgid "Birthdays & Anniversaries" msgstr "Rojstni dnevi in obletnice" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/caldav-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "CalDAV" msgstr "CalDAV" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/google-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "Google" msgstr "Google" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/ldap-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "On LDAP Servers" msgstr "Na strežnikih LDAP" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/local.source.in.h:1 #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/local-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "On This Computer" msgstr "Na tem računalniku" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/vfolder.source.in.h:1 msgid "Search Folders" msgstr "Iskalne mape" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/weather-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "Weather" msgstr "Vreme" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/webcal-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "On The Web" msgstr "Na spletu" #: ../services/evolution-source-registry/builtin/webdav-stub.source.in.h:1 msgid "WebDAV" msgstr "WebDAV" #: ../services/evolution-user-prompter/prompt-user-gtk.c:122 msgid "_Dismiss" msgstr "_Opusti" language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/file-roller.po0000644000000000000000000011614312321560614020770 0ustar # Slovenian translations for file-roller. # Copyright (C) 2002-2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the file-roller package. # # Andraž Tori , 2002. # Matjaž Horvat , 2006. # Matic Žgur , 2007. # Matej Urbančič , 2007-2013. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: file-roller master\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=file-" "roller&keywords=I18N+L10N&component=general\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-27 16:23+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-26 17:04+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Matej Urbančič \n" "Language-Team: Slovenian GNOME Translation Team \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%100==1 ? 1 : n%100==2 ? 2 : n%100==3 || " "n%100==4 ? 3 : 0);\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2014-04-10 11:49+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 16976)\n" "Language: sl_SI\n" "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:165 #, c-format msgid "File is not a valid .desktop file" msgstr "Datoteka ni veljavna datoteka .desktop" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:190 #, c-format msgid "Unrecognized desktop file Version '%s'" msgstr "Neznana različica datoteke namizja '%s'" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:973 #, c-format msgid "Starting %s" msgstr "Začenjanje %s" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:1115 #, c-format msgid "Application does not accept documents on command line" msgstr "Program ne sprejme dokumentov preko ukazne vrstice" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:1183 #, c-format msgid "Unrecognized launch option: %d" msgstr "Nepoznana možnost zagona: %d" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:1388 #, c-format msgid "Can't pass documents to this desktop element" msgstr "Ni mogoče poslati dokumenta na ta predmet namizja" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggdesktopfile.c:1409 #, c-format msgid "Not a launchable item" msgstr "Predmet ni izvedljiv" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:226 msgid "Disable connection to session manager" msgstr "Onemogoči povezavo z upravljalnikom seje" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:229 msgid "Specify file containing saved configuration" msgstr "Določite datoteko s shranjenimi nastavitvami" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:229 msgid "FILE" msgstr "DATOTEKA" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:232 msgid "Specify session management ID" msgstr "Določi ID upravljanja seje" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:232 msgid "ID" msgstr "ID" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:253 msgid "Session management options:" msgstr "Možnosti upravljanja seje:" #: ../copy-n-paste/eggsmclient.c:254 msgid "Show session management options" msgstr "Pokaži možnosti upravljanja seje" #: ../data/file-roller.desktop.in.in.h:1 ../src/fr-window.c:2052 #: ../src/fr-window.c:5441 msgid "Archive Manager" msgstr "Upravljalnik arhivov" # G:3 K:7 O:0 #: ../data/file-roller.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Create and modify an archive" msgstr "Ustvari in spremeni arhiv" #: ../data/file-roller.desktop.in.in.h:3 msgid "zip;tar;extract;unpack;" msgstr "zip;tar;ekstrakcija;razširjanje;odpakiranje;pakiranje;arhiv;" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "How to sort files" msgstr "Kako razvrstiti mape" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "What criteria must be used to arrange files. Possible values: name, size, " "type, time, path." msgstr "" "Kakšen kriterij mora biti uporabljen za razvrščanje datotek. Mogoče " "vrednosti so: ime, velikost, vrsta, čas in pot." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Sort type" msgstr "Vrsta razvrščanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "Whether to sort in ascending or descending direction. Possible values: " "ascending, descending." msgstr "" "Možnost določa, kako naj se predmeti razvrstijo. Mogoče vrednosti sta " "padajoče ali naraščajoče." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:5 ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:2 msgid "List Mode" msgstr "Način izpisa seznama" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Use 'all-files' to view all the files in the archive in a single list, use " "'as-folder' to navigate the archive as a folder." msgstr "" "Možnost 'vse-datoteke' omogoča pogled vseh datotek v arhivu v enem seznamu, " "možnost 'kot-mapa' pa omogoča brskanje kot pri mapi." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Display type" msgstr "Prikaži vrsto" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Display the type column in the main window." msgstr "Pokaži stolpec vrste v glavnem oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Display size" msgstr "Pokaži velikost" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Display the size column in the main window." msgstr "Pokaži stolpec velikosti v glavnem oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Display time" msgstr "Pokaži čas" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Display the time column in the main window." msgstr "Pokaži stolpec časa v glavnem oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Display path" msgstr "Pokaži pot" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Display the path column in the main window." msgstr "Pokaži stolpec poti v glavnem oknu." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Name column width" msgstr "Širina stolpca z imenom" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "The default width of the name column in the file list." msgstr "Privzeta širina stolpca imena v seznamu datotek." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Max history length" msgstr "Največja dolžina zgodovine" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Max number of items in the 'Open Recents' submenu." msgstr "Največje število predmetov v podrejenem meniju 'Odpri nedavno'." # G:2 K:0 O:0 #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "View toolbar" msgstr "Pokaži orodno vrstico" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Whether to display the toolbar." msgstr "Ali naj bo prikazana orodna vrstica." # G:4 K:0 O:0 #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "View statusbar" msgstr "Pokaži vrstico stanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:22 msgid "Whether to display the statusbar." msgstr "Ali naj bo prikazana vrstica stanja." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:23 ../src/ui.h:208 msgid "View the folders pane" msgstr "Pokaži pladenj z mapami" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "Whether to display the folders pane." msgstr "Ali naj se prikaže pladenj map" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Editors" msgstr "Urejevalniki" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:26 msgid "" "List of applications entered in the 'Open File' dialog and not associated " "with the file type." msgstr "" "Seznam programov v pogovornem oknu 'Odpri datoteko', ki niso povezani z " "izbrano vrsto datoteke." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:27 msgid "Compression level" msgstr "Raven stiskanja" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:28 msgid "" "Compression level used when adding files to an archive. Possible values: " "very-fast, fast, normal, maximum." msgstr "" "Uporabljena raven stiskanja med dodajanjem datotek v arhiv. Mogoče vrednosti " "so: zelo hitro, hitro, običajno, največja raven." #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:29 msgid "Encrypt the archive header" msgstr "Šifriraj glavo arhiva" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:30 msgid "" "Whether to encrypt the archive header. If the header is encrypted the " "password will be required to list the archive content as well." msgstr "" "Ali naj se šifrira glava arhiva. V kolikor je ta šifriran, bo za izpis " "vsebine arhiva zahtevano geslo." # G:0 K:2 O:0 #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:31 msgid "Do not overwrite newer files" msgstr "Ne prepiši novejših datotek" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:32 msgid "Recreate the folders stored in the archive" msgstr "Ponovno ustvari mape shranjene v arhivu" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:33 msgid "Default volume size" msgstr "Privzeta velikost nosilcev" #: ../data/org.gnome.FileRoller.gschema.xml.in.h:34 msgid "The default size for volumes." msgstr "Privzeta velikost nosilcev" #: ../nautilus/nautilus-fileroller.c:327 msgid "Extract Here" msgstr "Odpakiraj v to mapo" #. Translators: the current position is the current folder #: ../nautilus/nautilus-fileroller.c:329 msgid "Extract the selected archive to the current position" msgstr "Odpakiraj vsebino izbranega arhiva na trenutno mesto" #: ../nautilus/nautilus-fileroller.c:346 msgid "Extract To..." msgstr "Odpakiraj vsebino v ..." #: ../nautilus/nautilus-fileroller.c:347 msgid "Extract the selected archive" msgstr "Odpakiraj vsebino izbranega arhiva" #: ../nautilus/nautilus-fileroller.c:366 msgid "Compress..." msgstr "Stisni ..." #: ../nautilus/nautilus-fileroller.c:367 msgid "Create a compressed archive with the selected objects" msgstr "Iz izbranih predmetov ustvari stisnjen arhiv" # G:10 K:6 O:0 #: ../src/actions.c:112 ../src/fr-window.c:5735 ../src/fr-window.c:6262 msgid "Open" msgstr "Odpri" #: ../src/actions.c:125 ../src/fr-window.c:5291 msgid "All archives" msgstr "Vsi arhivi" #: ../src/actions.c:132 msgid "All files" msgstr "Vse datoteke" #: ../src/actions.c:499 msgid "Copyright © 2001–2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc." msgstr "Avtorske pravice © 2001-2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc." #: ../src/actions.c:500 msgid "An archive manager for GNOME." msgstr "Upravljalnik arhivov za GNOME." #: ../src/actions.c:503 msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "" "Matjaž Horvat \n" "Matic Žgur \n" "Andraž Tori \n" "Matej Urbančič \n" "\n" "Launchpad Contributions:\n" " Andraz Tori https://launchpad.net/~andraz-tori1\n" " Andrej Znidarsic https://launchpad.net/~andrej.znidarsic\n" " Matej Urbančič https://launchpad.net/~mateju\n" " Matic Zgur https://launchpad.net/~mr-zgur\n" " Miha Gašperšič https://launchpad.net/~miha.gaspersic\n" " franc2000 https://launchpad.net/~franc2000" #: ../src/dlg-add.c:116 msgid "Could not add the files to the archive" msgstr "Datotek ni mogoče dodati v arhiv" #: ../src/dlg-add.c:117 #, c-format msgid "You don't have the right permissions to read files from folder \"%s\"" msgstr "Nimate ustreznih dovoljenj za branje datotek iz mape \"%s\"" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/dlg-add.c:182 ../src/ui.h:47 msgid "Add Files" msgstr "Dodaj datoteke" #: ../src/dlg-add.c:193 msgid "_Options" msgstr "_Možnosti" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #. load options #: ../src/dlg-add.c:202 ../src/ui/add-options.ui.h:1 msgid "Load Options" msgstr "Naloži možnosti" #. save options #: ../src/dlg-add.c:209 ../src/dlg-add.c:827 msgid "Save Options" msgstr "Shrani možnosti" #. clear options #: ../src/dlg-add.c:216 msgid "Reset Options" msgstr "Počisti možnosti" #: ../src/dlg-add.c:828 msgid "_Options Name:" msgstr "_Ime možnosti:" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/dlg-ask-password.c:132 #, c-format msgid "Password required for \"%s\"" msgstr "Zahtevano geslo za \"%s\"" #: ../src/dlg-ask-password.c:141 msgid "Wrong password." msgstr "Napačno geslo." #: ../src/dlg-batch-add.c:87 ../src/fr-application.c:329 #: ../src/fr-application.c:683 msgid "Compress" msgstr "Stisni" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/dlg-extract.c:96 ../src/fr-window.c:6820 #, c-format msgid "" "Destination folder \"%s\" does not exist.\n" "\n" "Do you want to create it?" msgstr "" "Ciljna mapa \"%s\" ne obstaja.\n" "\n" "Ali jo želite ustvariti?" #: ../src/dlg-extract.c:105 ../src/fr-window.c:6829 msgid "Create _Folder" msgstr "Ustvari _mapo" #: ../src/dlg-extract.c:124 ../src/dlg-extract.c:142 ../src/dlg-extract.c:169 #: ../src/fr-window.c:4241 ../src/fr-window.c:6724 ../src/fr-window.c:6729 #: ../src/fr-window.c:6850 ../src/fr-window.c:6869 ../src/fr-window.c:6874 msgid "Extraction not performed" msgstr "Razširjanje ni bilo izvedeno" # G:0 K:3 O:0 #: ../src/dlg-extract.c:125 ../src/fr-window.c:6846 #, c-format msgid "Could not create the destination folder: %s." msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti ciljne mape: %s." #: ../src/dlg-extract.c:170 ../src/fr-window.c:4410 ../src/fr-window.c:4494 #, c-format msgid "" "You don't have the right permissions to extract archives in the folder \"%s\"" msgstr "Nimate ustreznih dovoljenj za razširjanje arhivov v mapo \"%s\"" #: ../src/dlg-extract.c:283 ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:1 #: ../src/ui.h:114 msgid "Extract" msgstr "Razširi" #: ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:112 ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:225 msgid "There was an internal error trying to search for applications:" msgstr "Prišlo je do notranje napake med iskanjem programov:" #: ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:294 ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:303 #: ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:331 ../src/fr-archive.c:744 #: ../src/fr-window.c:3970 ../src/fr-window.c:7453 ../src/fr-window.c:7810 #: ../src/fr-window.c:9357 msgid "Archive type not supported." msgstr "Vrsta arhiva ni podprta." #: ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:313 #, c-format msgid "" "There is no command installed for %s files.\n" "Do you want to search for a command to open this file?" msgstr "" "Ni nameščenega ukaza za datoteke %s.\n" "Ali želite poiskati ukaz za to vrsto datotek?" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:318 msgid "Could not open this file type" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti te vrste datoteke" #: ../src/dlg-package-installer.c:321 msgid "_Search Command" msgstr "_Išči ukaz" #: ../src/dlg-password.c:91 #, c-format msgid "Enter a password for \"%s\"" msgstr "Vnesite geslo za \"%s\"" # G:17 K:17 O:0 #: ../src/dlg-prop.c:96 #, c-format msgid "%s Properties" msgstr "Lastnosti %s" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/dlg-update.c:163 #, c-format msgid "Update the file \"%s\" in the archive \"%s\"?" msgstr "Ali naj se posodobi datoteka \"%s\" v arhivu \"%s\"?" #. secondary text #: ../src/dlg-update.c:174 ../src/dlg-update.c:199 ../src/ui/update.ui.h:2 #, c-format msgid "" "The file has been modified with an external application. If you don't update " "the file in the archive, all of your changes will be lost." msgid_plural "" "%d files have been modified with an external application. If you don't " "update the files in the archive, all of your changes will be lost." msgstr[0] "" "Najdenih je bilo %d datotek, ki so bile spremenjenje z zunanjim programom. V " "primeru, da datoteke ne bodo posodobljene v arhivu, bodo izgubljene vse vaše " "spremembe." msgstr[1] "" "Najdena je bila %d datoteka, ki je bila spremenjenja z zunanjim programom. V " "primeru, da datoteka ne bo posodobljena v arhivu, bodo izgubljene vse vaše " "spremembe." msgstr[2] "" "Najdeni sta bili %d datoteki, ki sta bili spremenjeni z zunanjim programom. " "V primeru, da datoteki ne bosta posodobljeni v arhivu, bodo izgubljene vse " "vaše spremembe." msgstr[3] "" "Najdene so bile %d datoteke, ki so bile spremenjene z zunanjim programom. V " "primeru, da datoteke ne bodo posodobljene v arhivu, bodo izgubljene vse vaše " "spremembe." #: ../src/dlg-update.c:189 #, c-format msgid "Update the files in the archive \"%s\"?" msgstr "Ali želite posodobite datoteke v arhivu \"%s\"?" #: ../src/fr-application.c:65 msgid "Add files to the specified archive and quit the program" msgstr "Dodaj datoteke navedenemu arhivu in končaj program" #: ../src/fr-application.c:66 msgid "ARCHIVE" msgstr "ARHIV" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/fr-application.c:69 msgid "Add files asking the name of the archive and quit the program" msgstr "Dodaj datoteke, vprašaj za ime arhiva in končaj program" #: ../src/fr-application.c:73 msgid "Extract archives to the specified folder and quit the program" msgstr "Odpakiraj datoteke v navedeno mapo in končaj program" #: ../src/fr-application.c:74 ../src/fr-application.c:86 msgid "FOLDER" msgstr "MAPA" # G:16 K:3 O:0 #: ../src/fr-application.c:77 msgid "Extract archives asking the destination folder and quit the program" msgstr "Odpakiraj datoteke, vprašaj za ciljno mapo in končaj program" #: ../src/fr-application.c:81 msgid "" "Extract the contents of the archives in the archive folder and quit the " "program" msgstr "Odpakiraj vsebino arhiva v navedeno mapo in končaj program" #: ../src/fr-application.c:85 msgid "Default folder to use for the '--add' and '--extract' commands" msgstr "Privzeta mapa za uporabo z ukazoma '--add' in '--extract'" #: ../src/fr-application.c:89 msgid "Create destination folder without asking confirmation" msgstr "Ustvari ciljno mapo, brez spraševanja za potrditev" #: ../src/fr-application.c:93 msgid "Use the notification system to notify the operation completion" msgstr "Uporabi obvestilni sistem za obveščanje o končanju opravil" #: ../src/fr-application.c:96 msgid "Start as a service" msgstr "Zagon kot storitev" #: ../src/fr-application.c:99 msgid "Show version" msgstr "Pokaži različico" #: ../src/fr-application.c:365 ../src/fr-application.c:401 #: ../src/fr-application.c:427 ../src/fr-application.c:707 #: ../src/fr-window.c:9420 msgid "Extract archive" msgstr "Razširi arhiv" # G:3 K:7 O:0 #: ../src/fr-application.c:565 msgid "- Create and modify an archive" msgstr "- Ustvari in spremeni arhiv" #. manually set name and icon #: ../src/fr-application.c:833 msgid "File Roller" msgstr "File Roller" #: ../src/fr-archive.c:1845 msgid "You don't have the right permissions." msgstr "Nimate ustreznih dovoljenj." #: ../src/fr-archive.c:1845 msgid "This archive type cannot be modified" msgstr "Te vrste arhiva ni mogoče spremeiti." #: ../src/fr-archive.c:1859 msgid "You can't add an archive to itself." msgstr "Arhiva ni mogoče dodati samemu sebi." #. Translators: %s is a filename. #: ../src/fr-command-7z.c:297 ../src/fr-command-rar.c:422 #: ../src/fr-command-tar.c:304 #, c-format msgid "Adding \"%s\"" msgstr "Dodajanje \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename. #: ../src/fr-command-7z.c:447 ../src/fr-command-rar.c:554 #: ../src/fr-command-tar.c:425 #, c-format msgid "Extracting \"%s\"" msgstr "Poteka odpakiranje \"%s\"" #: ../src/fr-command.c:597 #, c-format msgid "Archive not found" msgstr "Arhiva ni mogoče najti" #. Translators: %s is a filename. #: ../src/fr-command-rar.c:503 ../src/fr-command-tar.c:370 #, c-format msgid "Removing \"%s\"" msgstr "Odstranjevanje \"%s\"" #: ../src/fr-command-rar.c:685 #, c-format msgid "Could not find the volume: %s" msgstr "Ni mogoče najti nosilca: %s" #: ../src/fr-command-tar.c:380 msgid "Deleting files from archive" msgstr "Brisanje datotek iz arhiva" #: ../src/fr-command-tar.c:485 msgid "Recompressing archive" msgstr "Ponovno stiskanje arhiva" #: ../src/fr-command-tar.c:744 msgid "Decompressing archive" msgstr "Razširjanje arhiva" #: ../src/fr-file-selector-dialog.c:772 ../src/fr-file-selector-dialog.c:817 msgid "Could not load the location" msgstr "Ni mogoče naložiti mesta" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:344 ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:363 #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:379 ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:427 #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:445 ../src/fr-window.c:2915 msgid "Could not create the archive" msgstr "Ni mogoče ustvariti arhiva" #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:346 ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:365 msgid "You have to specify an archive name." msgstr "Določiti morate ime arhiva." #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:429 msgid "You don't have permission to create an archive in this folder" msgstr "Nimate dovoljenja za ustvarjanje arhiva v tej mapi" #. Translators: the name references to a filename. This message can appear when renaming a file. #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:447 ../src/fr-window.c:8123 msgid "New name is the same as old one, please type other name." msgstr "Novo ime je enako staremu. Vtipkajte drugo ime." #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:466 #, c-format msgid "A file named \"%s\" already exists. Do you want to replace it?" msgstr "Datoteka z imenom \"%s\" že obstaja. Ali jo želite zamenjati?" #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:467 #, c-format msgid "" "The file already exists in \"%s\". Replacing it will overwrite its contents." msgstr "" "Datoteka že obstaja v mapi \"%s\". S prepisom bo izgubljena vsebina ciljne " "datoteke." #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:474 ../src/fr-window.c:6652 msgid "_Replace" msgstr "_Zamenjaj" #: ../src/fr-new-archive-dialog.c:489 msgid "Could not delete the old archive." msgstr "Starega arhiva ni mogoče izbrisati." #: ../src/fr-stock.c:41 msgid "C_reate" msgstr "Ustva_ri" #: ../src/fr-stock.c:42 ../src/fr-stock.c:43 msgid "_Add" msgstr "Dod_aj" #: ../src/fr-stock.c:44 msgid "_Extract" msgstr "_Razširi" #: ../src/fr-window.c:1173 msgid "Operation completed" msgstr "Dejanje je končano." #: ../src/fr-window.c:1290 #, c-format msgid "%d object (%s)" msgid_plural "%d objects (%s)" msgstr[0] "%d predmetov (%s)" msgstr[1] "%d predmet (%s)" msgstr[2] "%d predmeta (%s)" msgstr[3] "%d predmeti (%s)" #: ../src/fr-window.c:1295 #, c-format msgid "%d object selected (%s)" msgid_plural "%d objects selected (%s)" msgstr[0] "%d izbranih predmetov (%s)" msgstr[1] "%d izbran predmet (%s)" msgstr[2] "%d izbrana predmeta (%s)" msgstr[3] "%d izbrani predmeti (%s)" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:1680 msgid "Folder" msgstr "Mapa" # G:5 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:2060 msgid "[read only]" msgstr "[le za branje]" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2179 #, c-format msgid "Could not display the folder \"%s\"" msgstr "Ni mogoče prikazati mape \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2270 ../src/fr-window.c:2308 #, c-format msgid "Creating \"%s\"" msgstr "Ustvarjanje \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2274 #, c-format msgid "Loading \"%s\"" msgstr "Nalaganje \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2278 #, c-format msgid "Reading \"%s\"" msgstr "Branje \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2282 #, c-format msgid "Deleting the files from \"%s\"" msgstr "Brisanje datotek iz \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2286 #, c-format msgid "Testing \"%s\"" msgstr "Preizkušanje \"%s\"" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2289 msgid "Getting the file list" msgstr "Pridobivanje seznama datotek" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2293 #, c-format msgid "Copying the files to add to \"%s\"" msgstr "Kopiranje datotek za dodajanje v \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2297 #, c-format msgid "Adding the files to \"%s\"" msgstr "Dodajanje datotek v \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2301 #, c-format msgid "Extracting the files from \"%s\"" msgstr "Odpakiranje datotek iz \"%s\"" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2304 msgid "Copying the extracted files to the destination" msgstr "Kopiranje odpakiranih datotek na ciljno mesto" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2313 #, c-format msgid "Saving \"%s\"" msgstr "Shranjevanje \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2320 #, c-format msgid "Renaming the files in \"%s\"" msgstr "Preimenovanje datotek v \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2324 #, c-format msgid "Updating the files in \"%s\"" msgstr "Posodabljanje datotek v \"%s\"" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:2499 msgid "_Open the Archive" msgstr "_Odpri arhiv" # G:4 K:6 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:2500 msgid "_Show the Files" msgstr "_Pokaži datoteke" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2617 #, c-format msgid "%d file remaining" msgid_plural "%'d files remaining" msgstr[0] "%'d preostalih datotek" msgstr[1] "%'d preostala datoteka" msgstr[2] "%'d preostali datoteki" msgstr[3] "%'d preostale datoteke" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2621 ../src/fr-window.c:3196 msgid "Please wait…" msgstr "Počakajte ..." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2677 msgid "Extraction completed successfully" msgstr "Odpakiranje je bilo uspešno zaključeno." #. Translators: %s is a filename #: ../src/fr-window.c:2709 ../src/fr-window.c:6248 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" created successfully" msgstr "Datoteka \"%s\" je uspešno ustvarjena" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2799 ../src/fr-window.c:2971 msgid "Command exited abnormally." msgstr "Ukaz se je končal z napako." # G:3 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:2920 msgid "An error occurred while extracting files." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med odpakiranjem datotek." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2926 #, c-format msgid "Could not open \"%s\"" msgstr "Ni mogoče odpreti \"%s\"" #: ../src/fr-window.c:2931 msgid "An error occurred while loading the archive." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med nalaganjem arhiva." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2935 msgid "An error occurred while deleting files from the archive." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med brisanjem datotek iz arhiva." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2941 msgid "An error occurred while adding files to the archive." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med dodajanjem datotek v arhiv." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2945 msgid "An error occurred while testing archive." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med preizkušanjem arhiva." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2950 msgid "An error occurred while saving the archive." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med shranjevanjem arhiva." # G:3 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:2954 msgid "An error occurred while renaming the files." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med preimenovanjem datotek." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2958 msgid "An error occurred while updating the files." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake med posodabljanjem datotek." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2962 msgid "An error occurred." msgstr "Prišlo je do napake." #: ../src/fr-window.c:2968 msgid "Command not found." msgstr "Ukaza ni mogoče najti." #: ../src/fr-window.c:3124 msgid "Test Result" msgstr "Rezultat preizkusa" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4088 ../src/fr-window.c:8803 ../src/fr-window.c:8837 #: ../src/fr-window.c:9116 msgid "Could not perform the operation" msgstr "Opravila ni mogoče izvesti" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4114 msgid "" "Do you want to add this file to the current archive or open it as a new " "archive?" msgstr "" "Ali želite dodati to datoteko trenutnemu arhivu ali jo želite odpreti kot " "nov arhiv?" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4144 msgid "Do you want to create a new archive with these files?" msgstr "Ali želite iz teh datotek ustvariti arhiv?" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4147 msgid "Create _Archive" msgstr "Ustvari _arhiv" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4176 ../src/fr-window.c:7261 msgid "New Archive" msgstr "Nov arhiv" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:4750 msgid "Folders" msgstr "Mape" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4788 ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:7 msgctxt "File" msgid "Size" msgstr "Velikost" # G:26 K:23 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:4789 msgctxt "File" msgid "Type" msgstr "Vrsta" #: ../src/fr-window.c:4790 ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:8 msgctxt "File" msgid "Modified" msgstr "Spremenjena" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:4791 msgctxt "File" msgid "Location" msgstr "Mesto" # G:6 K:8 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:4800 ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:6 msgctxt "File" msgid "Name" msgstr "Ime" #. Translators: this is the label for the "open recent file" sub-menu. #: ../src/fr-window.c:5723 msgid "Open _Recent" msgstr "Odpri _nedavno" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:5724 ../src/fr-window.c:5736 msgid "Open a recently used archive" msgstr "Odpri nedavno uporabljen arhiv" #: ../src/fr-window.c:5752 msgid "_Other Actions" msgstr "_Druga dejanja" #: ../src/fr-window.c:5753 msgid "Other actions" msgstr "Druga dejanja" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #. Translators: after the colon there is a folder name. #: ../src/fr-window.c:5821 ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:4 #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:2 msgid "_Location:" msgstr "_Mesto:" #: ../src/fr-window.c:6640 #, c-format msgid "Replace file \"%s\"?" msgstr "Ali naj se datoteka \"%s\" prepiše?" #: ../src/fr-window.c:6643 #, c-format msgid "Another file with the same name already exists in \"%s\"." msgstr "Druga datoteka z enakim imenom že obstaja v \"%s\"." #: ../src/fr-window.c:6650 msgid "Replace _All" msgstr "Zamenjaj _vse" #: ../src/fr-window.c:6651 msgid "_Skip" msgstr "Pre_skoči" #: ../src/fr-window.c:7445 ../src/fr-window.c:7802 #, c-format msgid "Could not save the archive \"%s\"" msgstr "Arhiva \"%s\" ni mogoče shraniti" #: ../src/fr-window.c:7572 msgid "Save" msgstr "Shrani" #: ../src/fr-window.c:7896 msgid "Last Output" msgstr "Zadnji izpis" #. Translators: the name references to a filename. This message can appear when renaming a file. #: ../src/fr-window.c:8118 msgid "New name is void, please type a name." msgstr "Novo ime je prazno. Vtipkajte ime." #. Translators: the %s references to a filename. This message can appear when renaming a file. #: ../src/fr-window.c:8128 #, c-format msgid "" "Name \"%s\" is not valid because it contains at least one of the following " "characters: %s, please type other name." msgstr "Ime \"%s\" ni veljavno, saj ime ne sme vsebovati znakov: %s." #: ../src/fr-window.c:8164 #, c-format msgid "" "A folder named \"%s\" already exists.\n" "\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Mapa z imenom \"%s\" že obstaja.\n" "\n" "%s" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8164 ../src/fr-window.c:8166 msgid "Please use a different name." msgstr "Uporabite drugačno ime." #: ../src/fr-window.c:8166 #, c-format msgid "" "A file named \"%s\" already exists.\n" "\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Datoteka z imenom \"%s\" že obstaja.\n" "\n" "%s" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8236 msgid "Rename" msgstr "Preimenuj" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8237 msgid "_New folder name:" msgstr "_Novo ime mape:" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8237 msgid "_New file name:" msgstr "_Novo ime datoteke:" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8241 msgid "_Rename" msgstr "P_reimenuj" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8258 ../src/fr-window.c:8277 msgid "Could not rename the folder" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati mape" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:8258 ../src/fr-window.c:8277 msgid "Could not rename the file" msgstr "Ni mogoče preimenovati datoteke" #. Translators: %s are archive filenames #: ../src/fr-window.c:8710 #, c-format msgid "Moving the files from \"%s\" to \"%s\"" msgstr "Premikanje datotek iz \"%s\" v \"%s\"" #. Translators: %s are archive filenames #: ../src/fr-window.c:8713 #, c-format msgid "Copying the files from \"%s\" to \"%s\"" msgstr "Kopiranje datotek iz \"%s\" v \"%s\"" #: ../src/fr-window.c:8764 msgid "Paste Selection" msgstr "Prilepi izbor" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/fr-window.c:8765 msgid "_Destination folder:" msgstr "_Ciljna mapa:" #: ../src/fr-window.c:9375 msgid "Add files to an archive" msgstr "Arhivu dodaj datoteke" #. This is the time format used in the "Date Modified" column and #. * in the Properties dialog. See the man page of strftime for an #. * explanation of the values. #: ../src/glib-utils.c:769 msgid "%d %B %Y, %H:%M" msgstr "%d. %m. %Y, %H:%M" #: ../src/gtk-utils.c:557 msgid "Could not display help" msgstr "Ni mogoče prikazati pomoči" #: ../src/gtk-utils.c:651 msgid "Change password visibility" msgstr "Spremeni vidnost gesla" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:1 msgid "Add" msgstr "Dodaj" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:2 msgid "Include _files:" msgstr "Vključ_i datoteke:" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:3 msgid "E_xclude files:" msgstr "I_zključi datoteke:" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:4 msgid "_Exclude folders:" msgstr "_Izključi mape:" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:5 ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:5 msgid "example: *.o; *.bak" msgstr "na primer: *.o *.bak" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:6 ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:6 msgid "Actions" msgstr "Dejanja" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:7 msgid "Add only if _newer" msgstr "_Dodaj le, če so novejše" #: ../src/ui/add-dialog-options.ui.h:8 msgid "_Follow symbolic links" msgstr "Sledi _simbolnim povezavam" #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:1 msgid "_New Archive" msgstr "_Nov arhiv" #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:3 ../src/ui.h:223 msgid "View All _Files" msgstr "Poglej vse _datoteke" #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:4 ../src/ui.h:226 msgid "View as a F_older" msgstr "Poglej kot _mapo" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:5 ../src/ui.h:207 msgid "_Folders" msgstr "_Mape" #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:6 ../src/ui.h:34 msgid "_Help" msgstr "Pomo_č" #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:7 msgid "_About Archive Manager" msgstr "_O upravljalnikuarhivov" #: ../src/ui/app-menu.ui.h:8 msgid "_Quit" msgstr "_Končaj" # G:0 K:3 O:0 #: ../src/ui/ask-password.ui.h:1 ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:4 msgid "_Password:" msgstr "_Geslo:" #: ../src/ui/delete.ui.h:1 msgid "Delete" msgstr "Izbriši" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui/delete.ui.h:2 ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:4 msgid "_Files:" msgstr "_Datoteke:" #: ../src/ui/delete.ui.h:3 msgid "example: *.txt; *.doc" msgstr "na primer: *.txt; *.doc" #: ../src/ui/delete.ui.h:4 ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:2 msgid "_All files" msgstr "_Vse datoteke" # G:4 K:6 O:0 #: ../src/ui/delete.ui.h:5 ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:3 msgid "_Selected files" msgstr "_Izbrane datoteke" # G:4 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui/error-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "C_ommand Line Output:" msgstr "Izpis ukazne _vrstice:" #: ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:7 msgid "_Keep directory structure" msgstr "_Ohrani zgradbo map" # G:0 K:2 O:0 #: ../src/ui/extract-dialog-options.ui.h:8 msgid "Do not _overwrite newer files" msgstr "Ne prepiši _novejših datotek" #: ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:1 msgid "_Select All" msgstr "_Izberi vse" #: ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:2 ../src/ui.h:102 msgid "Dese_lect All" msgstr "_Odstrani izbiro vsega" #: ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:3 msgid "Show Hidden Files" msgstr "Pokaži skrite datoteke" #: ../src/ui/file-selector.ui.h:5 ../src/ui.h:184 msgid "Go up one level" msgstr "Pojdi raven višje" #: ../src/ui.h:31 msgid "_Archive" msgstr "_Arhiv" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:32 msgid "_Edit" msgstr "_Uredi" # G:18 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:33 msgid "_View" msgstr "Po_gled" #: ../src/ui.h:35 msgid "_Arrange Files" msgstr "_Razporedi datoteke" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:40 msgid "Information about the program" msgstr "Podatki o programu" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:43 msgid "_Add Files…" msgstr "_Dodaj datoteke ..." #: ../src/ui.h:44 ../src/ui.h:48 msgid "Add files to the archive" msgstr "Dodaj datoteke v arhiv" # G:12 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:52 msgid "Close the current archive" msgstr "Zapri trenutni arhiv" # G:4 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:55 msgid "Contents" msgstr "Vsebina" # G:8 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:56 msgid "Display the File Roller Manual" msgstr "Pokaži priročnik programa File Roller" #: ../src/ui.h:61 ../src/ui.h:82 msgid "Copy the selection" msgstr "Kopiraj izbrano" #: ../src/ui.h:65 ../src/ui.h:86 msgid "Cut the selection" msgstr "Izreži izbrano" #: ../src/ui.h:69 ../src/ui.h:90 msgid "Paste the clipboard" msgstr "Prilepi iz odložišča" #: ../src/ui.h:72 ../src/ui.h:93 msgid "_Rename…" msgstr "P_reimenuj ..." #: ../src/ui.h:73 ../src/ui.h:94 msgid "Rename the selection" msgstr "Preimenuje izbor" # G:1 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:77 ../src/ui.h:98 msgid "Delete the selection from the archive" msgstr "Izbriši izbor iz arhiva" #: ../src/ui.h:103 msgid "Deselect all files" msgstr "Odstrani izbor vseh datotek" #: ../src/ui.h:106 ../src/ui.h:110 msgid "_Extract…" msgstr "_Odpakiraj ..." # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:107 ../src/ui.h:111 ../src/ui.h:115 msgid "Extract files from the archive" msgstr "Razširi datoteke iz arhiva" #: ../src/ui.h:118 msgid "New…" msgstr "Novo ..." # G:3 K:7 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:119 msgid "Create a new archive" msgstr "Ustvari nov arhiv" # G:10 K:6 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:122 msgid "Open…" msgstr "Odpri …" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:123 ../src/ui.h:127 msgid "Open archive" msgstr "Odpri arhiv" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:130 msgid "_Open With…" msgstr "_Odpri z ..." # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:131 msgid "Open selected files with an application" msgstr "Izbrane datoteke odpri z izbranim programom" #: ../src/ui.h:134 msgid "Pass_word…" msgstr "_Geslo ..." #: ../src/ui.h:135 msgid "Specify a password for this archive" msgstr "Vnesite geslo arhiva" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:139 msgid "Show archive properties" msgstr "Pokaži lastnosti arhiva" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:143 msgid "Reload current archive" msgstr "Znova naloži trenutni arhiv" #: ../src/ui.h:146 msgid "Save As…" msgstr "Shrani kot …" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:147 msgid "Save the current archive with a different name" msgstr "Shrani trenutni arhiv z drugim imenom" # G:9 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:151 msgid "Select all files" msgstr "Izberi vse datoteke" #: ../src/ui.h:154 msgid "_Test Integrity" msgstr "Preveri celovi_tost" #: ../src/ui.h:155 msgid "Test whether the archive contains errors" msgstr "Preizkus ali arhiv vsebuje napake" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:159 ../src/ui.h:163 msgid "Open the selected file" msgstr "Odpri izbrano datoteko" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui.h:167 ../src/ui.h:171 msgid "Open the selected folder" msgstr "Odpri izbrano mapo" #: ../src/ui.h:176 msgid "Go to the previous visited location" msgstr "Pojdi na predhodno obiskano mesto" #: ../src/ui.h:180 msgid "Go to the next visited location" msgstr "Pojdi na naslednje obiskano mesto" #. Translators: the home location is the home folder. #: ../src/ui.h:189 msgid "Go to the home location" msgstr "Pojdi domov" #: ../src/ui.h:197 msgid "_Toolbar" msgstr "_Orodna vrstica" #: ../src/ui.h:198 msgid "View the main toolbar" msgstr "Pokaže glavno orodno vrstico" #: ../src/ui.h:202 msgid "Stat_usbar" msgstr "Vrstica _stanja" #: ../src/ui.h:203 msgid "View the statusbar" msgstr "Pokaže vrstico stanja" #: ../src/ui.h:212 msgid "Find…" msgstr "Najdi ..." #: ../src/ui.h:213 msgid "Find files by name" msgstr "Najdi datoteke po imenu" # G:0 K:1 O:0 #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:1 msgid "_Filename:" msgstr "_Ime datoteke:" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:3 msgid "Location" msgstr "Mesto" #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:5 msgid "_Encrypt the file list too" msgstr "_Šifriraj tudi seznam datotek" #. this is part of a sentence, for example "split into volumes of 10.0 MB", where MB stands for megabyte. #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:7 msgid "Split into _volumes of" msgstr "Razdeli na _enote po" #. MB means megabytes #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:9 msgid "MB" msgstr "MB" #: ../src/ui/new-archive-dialog.ui.h:10 msgid "_Other Options" msgstr "_Druge možnosti" #: ../src/ui/password.ui.h:1 msgid "Password" msgstr "Geslo" #: ../src/ui/password.ui.h:2 msgid "_Encrypt the file list" msgstr "_Šifriraj tudi seznam datotek" # G:0 K:6 O:0 #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:1 msgctxt "File" msgid "Name:" msgstr "Ime:" #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:2 msgid "Archive size:" msgstr "Velikost arhiva:" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #. after the colon there is a folder name. #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:4 msgid "Location:" msgstr "Mesto:" #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:5 msgid "Compression ratio:" msgstr "Raven stiskanja:" # G:10 K:13 O:0 #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:6 msgid "Last modified:" msgstr "Spremenjeno:" # G:4 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:7 msgid "Content size:" msgstr "Velikost vsebine:" # G:1 K:0 O:0 #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:8 msgid "Number of files:" msgstr "Število datotek:" #. after the colon there is a file type. #: ../src/ui/properties.ui.h:10 msgid "Type:" msgstr "Vrsta:" # G:1 K:2 O:0 #: ../src/ui/update.ui.h:1 msgid "_Update" msgstr "Poso_dobi" #: ../src/ui/update.ui.h:3 msgid "S_elect the files you want to update:" msgstr "_Izberite datoteke za posodobitev:" language-pack-gnome-sl-base/data/sl/LC_MESSAGES/GConf2.po0000644000000000000000000024227312321560615017637 0ustar # Slovenian translations for gconf. # Copyright (C) 2005-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the gconf package. # # # Andraž Tori , 2000. # Matjaž Horvat , 2006. # Matej Urbančič , 2007 - 2010. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: gconf master\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: " "http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gconf&component=general\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-27 18:19+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-12-26 20:49+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Matej Urbančič \n" "Language-Team: Slovenian GNOME Translation Team \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2014-04-10 11:56+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 16976)\n" "X-Poedit-Country: SLOVENIA\n" "Language: \n" "X-Poedit-Language: Slovenian\n" "X-Poedit-SourceCharset: utf-8\n" #: ../backends/evoldap-backend.c:162 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get configuration file path from '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče pridobiti poti nastavitvene datoteke iz '%s'" #: ../backends/evoldap-backend.c:173 #, c-format msgid "Created Evolution/LDAP source using configuration file '%s'" msgstr "Ustvarjen vir Evolution/LDAP z uporabo nastavitvene datoteke '%s'" #: ../backends/evoldap-backend.c:447 #, c-format msgid "Unable to parse XML file '%s'" msgstr "Ni mogoče razčleniti datoteke XML '%s'" #: ../backends/evoldap-backend.c:456 #, c-format msgid "Config file '%s' is empty" msgstr "Nastavitvena datoteka '%s' je prazna" #: ../backends/evoldap-backend.c:467 #, c-format msgid "Root node of '%s' must be , not <%s>" msgstr "Vozlišče korena '%s' mora biti in ne <%s>" #: ../backends/evoldap-backend.c:505 #, c-format msgid "No